Zend Framework 2 Documentation

Release 2.4.9

Zend Technologies Ltd.

November 23, 2015

 Contents

1 Overview 1

2 Installation 3
2.1 Using Composer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2.2 Using Git submodules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2.3 Web Server Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

3 Getting Started with Zend Framework 2 7

3.1 Some assumptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
3.2 The tutorial application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

4 Getting started: A skeleton application 9

4.1 Using the Apache Web Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
4.2 Using the Built-in PHP CLI Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
4.3 Error reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

5 Modules 13
5.1 Setting up the Album module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
5.2 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
5.3 Informing the application about our new module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

6 Routing and controllers 17

7 Create the controller 19

7.1 Initialise the view scripts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

8 Database and models 21

8.1 The database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
8.2 The model files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
8.3 Using ServiceManager to configure the table gateway and inject into the AlbumTable . . . . . . . . . 23
8.4 Back to the controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
8.5 Listing albums . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

9 Styling and Translations 29

10 Forms and actions 31

10.1 Adding new albums . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
10.2 Editing an album . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
10.3 Deleting an album . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

i
 10.4 Ensuring that the home page displays the list of albums . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

11 Conclusion 43

12 Introducing our first Blog Module 45

12.1 Writing a new Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
12.2 Configuring the Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

13 Introducing Services and the ServiceManager 51

13.1 What is a Service? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
13.2 Writing the PostService . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
13.3 Writing the required Model Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
13.4 Bringing Life into our PostService . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
13.5 Bringing the Service into the Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
13.6 Writing a Factory Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
13.7 Registering Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
13.8 Using the Service at our Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
13.9 Accessing View Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
13.10 Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

14 Preparing for different Database-Backends 63

14.1 What is database abstraction? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
14.2 Creating the PostMapperInterface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
14.3 Refactoring the PostService . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
14.4 The PostService has a dependency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
14.5 Conclusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

15 Introducing Zend\Db\Sql and Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator 69

15.1 Preparing the Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
15.2 Quick Facts Zend\Db\Sql . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
15.3 Writing the mapper implementation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
15.4 Refactoring hidden dependencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
15.5 Finishing the mapper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
15.6 Conclusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

16 Understanding the Router 83

16.1 Different route types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
16.2 Different routing concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
16.3 A practical example for our Blog Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

17 Making use of Forms and Fieldsets 93

17.1 Core components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
17.2 Creating your first Fieldset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
17.3 Creating the PostForm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
17.4 Adding a new Post . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
17.5 Displaying the form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
17.6 Controller Logic for basically all Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
17.7 Zend\Form and Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator working together . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
17.8 Conclusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

18 Editing and Deleting Data 111

18.1 Binding Objects to Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
18.2 Adding the edit-route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
18.3 Creating the edit-template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
18.4 Implementing the delete functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

ii
 18.5 Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

19 Reviewing the Blog-application 123

19.1 Do we always need all the layers and interfaces? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
19.2 Having many objects, wont there be much code-duplication? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
19.3 Why are there so many controllers? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
19.4 Do you have more questions? PR them! . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

20 Getting Started with Zend Framework 2 125

20.1 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
20.2 Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

21 A quick tour of the skeleton application 131

21.1 The dispatch cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

22 The MyTaskList application 135

22.1 The Checklist module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
22.2 The Module class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

23 The applications pages 139

23.1 Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
23.2 The TaskController . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
23.3 The model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
23.4 Using Service Manager to configure the database credentials and inject into the controller . . . . . . 144

24 Listing tasks 147

24.1 Redirect the home page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

25 Styling 151

26 Adding new tasks 153

27 Editing a task 159

28 Deleting a task 163

29 Application Diagnostics 165

30 Step-by-step debugging 167

31 Conclusion 169

32 Zend Framework Tool (ZFTool) 171

32.1 Installation using Composer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
32.2 Manual installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
32.3 Without installation, using the PHAR file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
32.4 Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

33 Learning Dependency Injection 175

33.1 Very brief introduction to Di. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
33.2 Simplest usage case (2 classes, one consumes the other) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
33.3 Simplest Usage Case Without Type-hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
33.4 Simplest usage case with Compiled Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
33.5 Creating a precompiled definition for others to use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
33.6 Using Multiple Definitions From Multiple Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
33.7 Generating Service Locators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

iii
34 Unit Testing a Zend Framework 2 application 185
34.1 Setting up phpunit to use composers autoload.php . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
34.2 Setting up the tests directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
34.3 Bootstrapping your tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
34.4 Your first controller test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
34.5 A failing test case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
34.6 Configuring the service manager for the tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
34.7 Testing actions with POST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
34.8 Testing model entities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
34.9 Testing model tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
34.10 Conclusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

35 Using the EventManager 199

35.1 Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
35.2 Getting started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
35.3 Shared managers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

36 Wildcards 203

37 Listener aggregates 205

37.1 Introspecting results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
37.2 Short-circuiting listener execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
37.3 Keeping it in order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
37.4 Custom event objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
37.5 Putting it together: Implementing a simple caching system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
37.6 Conclusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

38 Advanced Configuration Tricks 213

38.1 System configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
38.2 Module Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
38.3 Configuration mapping table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
38.4 Configuration Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
38.5 Manipulating merged configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
38.6 Configuration merging workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

39 Using Zend\Navigation in your Album Module 221

39.1 Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
39.2 Setting Up Zend\Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
39.3 Configuring our Site Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
39.4 Adding the Menu View Helper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
39.5 Adding Breadcrumbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

40 Using Zend\Paginator in your Album Module 225

40.1 Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
40.2 Modifying the AlbumTable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
40.3 Modifying the AlbumController . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
40.4 Updating the View Script . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
40.5 Creating the Pagination Control Partial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

41 Using the PaginationControl View Helper 233

42 Setting up a database adapter 235

42.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
42.2 Basic setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
42.3 Setting a static adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

iv
43 Migration from Zend Framework 1 237

44 Namespacing Old Classes 239

44.1 Namespacing a ZF1 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
44.2 HOWTO Namespace Your Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

45 Running Zend Framework 2 and Zend Framework 1 in parallel 243

45.1 Use ZF2 in a ZF1 project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
45.2 Use ZF1 in a ZF2 project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
45.3 Run ZF1 and ZF2 together . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

46 Introduction to Zend\Authentication 245

46.1 Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
46.2 Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
46.3 Identity Persistence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
46.4 Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

47 Database Table Authentication 253

47.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
47.2 Basic Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
47.3 Advanced Usage: Persisting a DbTable Result Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

48 Digest Authentication 259

48.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
48.2 Specifics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
48.3 Identity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

49 HTTP Authentication Adapter 261

49.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
49.2 Design Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
49.3 Configuration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
49.4 Resolvers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
49.5 Basic Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

50 LDAP Authentication 265

50.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
50.2 Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
50.3 The API . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
50.4 Server Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
50.5 Collecting Debugging Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
50.6 Common Options for Specific Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

51 Authentication Validator 273

51.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
51.2 Basic Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

52 Introduction to Zend\Barcode 275

52.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

53 Barcode creation using Zend\Barcode\Barcode class 277

53.1 Using Zend\Barcode\Barcode::factory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
53.2 Drawing a barcode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
53.3 Rendering a barcode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

54 Zend\Barcode Objects 281

54.1 Common Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

v
 54.2 Common Additional Getters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
54.3 Description of shipped barcodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

55 Zend\Barcode Renderers 291

55.1 Common Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
55.2 Zend\Barcode\Renderer\Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
55.3 Zend\Barcode\Renderer\Pdf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

56 Zend\Cache\Storage\Adapter 293
56.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
56.2 Quick Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
56.3 Basic Configuration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
56.4 The StorageInterface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
56.5 The AvailableSpaceCapableInterface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
56.6 The TotalSpaceCapableInterface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
56.7 The ClearByNamespaceInterface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
56.8 The ClearByPrefixInterface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
56.9 The ClearExpiredInterface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
56.10 The FlushableInterface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
56.11 The IterableInterface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
56.12 The OptimizableInterface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
56.13 The TaggableInterface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
56.14 The Apc Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
56.15 The Dba Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
56.16 The Filesystem Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
56.17 The Memcached Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
56.18 The Redis Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
56.19 The Memory Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
56.20 The MongoDB Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
56.21 The WinCache Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
56.22 The XCache Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
56.23 The ZendServerDisk Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
56.24 The ZendServerShm Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
56.25 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

57 Zend\Cache\Storage\Capabilities 311
57.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
57.2 Available Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
57.3 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

58 Zend\Cache\Storage\Plugin 315
58.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
58.2 Quick Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
58.3 The ClearExpiredByFactor Plugin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
58.4 The ExceptionHandler Plugin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
58.5 The IgnoreUserAbort Plugin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
58.6 The OptimizeByFactor Plugin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
58.7 The Serializer Plugin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
58.8 Available Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
58.9 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317

59 Zend\Cache\Pattern 319
59.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
59.2 Quick Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
59.3 Available Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319

vi
60 Zend\Cache\Pattern\CallbackCache 321
60.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
60.2 Quick Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
60.3 Configuration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
60.4 Available Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
60.5 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322

61 Zend\Cache\Pattern\ClassCache 323
61.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
61.2 Quick Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
61.3 Configuration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
61.4 Available Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
61.5 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324

62 Zend\Cache\Pattern\ObjectCache 327
62.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
62.2 Quick Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
62.3 Configuration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
62.4 Available Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
62.5 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328

63 Zend\Cache\Pattern\OutputCache 331
63.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
63.2 Quick Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
63.3 Configuration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
63.4 Available Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
63.5 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332

64 Zend\Cache\Pattern\CaptureCache 333
64.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
64.2 Quick Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
64.3 Configuration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
64.4 Available Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
64.5 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

65 Introduction to Zend\Captcha 337

65.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337

66 Captcha Operation 339

66.1 The AdapterInterface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
66.2 Basic Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

67 CAPTCHA Adapters 341

67.1 Zend\Captcha\AbstractWord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
67.2 Zend\Captcha\Dumb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
67.3 Zend\Captcha\Figlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
67.4 Zend\Captcha\Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
67.5 Zend\Captcha\ReCaptcha . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343

68 Introduction 345
68.1 Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345

69 Zend\Code\Generator Reference 349

69.1 Abstract Classes and Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
69.2 Concrete CodeGenerator Classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350

vii
70 Zend\Code\Generator Examples 357
70.1 Generating PHP classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
70.2 Generating PHP files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
70.3 Add code to existing PHP files and classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362

71 Introduction to Zend\Config 365

71.1 Using Zend\Config\Config with a Reader Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
71.2 Using Zend\Config\Config with a PHP Configuration File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366

72 Theory of Operation 367

73 Zend\Config\Reader 369
73.1 Zend\Config\Reader\Ini . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
73.2 Zend\Config\Reader\Xml . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
73.3 Zend\Config\Reader\Json . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
73.4 Zend\Config\Reader\Yaml . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
73.5 Zend\Config\Reader\JavaProperties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373

74 Zend\Config\Writer 375
74.1 Zend\Config\Writer\Ini . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
74.2 Zend\Config\Writer\Xml . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
74.3 Zend\Config\Writer\PhpArray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
74.4 Zend\Config\Writer\Json . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
74.5 Zend\Config\Writer\Yaml . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378

75 Zend\Config\Processor 381
75.1 Zend\Config\Processor\Constant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
75.2 Zend\Config\Processor\Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
75.3 Zend\Config\Processor\Queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
75.4 Zend\Config\Processor\Token . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
75.5 Zend\Config\Processor\Translator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383

76 The Factory 385

76.1 Loading configuration file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
76.2 Storing configuration file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385

77 Introduction to Zend\Console 387

77.1 Writing console routes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
77.2 Handling console requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
77.3 Adding console usage info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390

78 Console routes and routing 393

78.1 Router configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
78.2 Basic route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
78.3 Catchall route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
78.4 Console routes cheat-sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399

79 Console-aware modules 401

79.1 Application banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
79.2 Basic usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
79.3 Best practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409

80 Console-aware action controllers 411

80.1 Handling console requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
80.2 Sending output to console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
80.3 Are we in a console? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413

viii
 80.4 Reading values from console parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415

81 Console adapters 419

81.1 Retrieving console adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
81.2 Using console adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420

82 Console prompts 423

82.1 Confirm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
82.2 Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
82.3 Char . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
82.4 Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
82.5 Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427

83 Zend\Console\Getopt 429
83.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429

84 Declaring Getopt Rules 431

84.1 Declaring Options with the Short Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
84.2 Declaring Options with the Long Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431

85 Fetching Options and Arguments 433

85.1 Handling Getopt Exceptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
85.2 Fetching Options by Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
85.3 Reporting Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
85.4 Fetching Non-option Arguments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434

86 Configuring Zend\Console\Getopt 437

86.1 Adding Option Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
86.2 Adding Help Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
86.3 Adding Option Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
86.4 Adding Argument Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
86.5 Adding Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439

87 Introduction to Zend\Crypt 441

88 Encrypt/decrypt using block ciphers 443

89 Encrypt/decrypt a file 445

90 Key derivation function 447

90.1 Pbkdf2 adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
90.2 SaltedS2k adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
90.3 Scrypt adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448

91 Password 451
91.1 Bcrypt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
91.2 Apache . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452

92 Public key cryptography 455

92.1 Diffie-Hellman . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
92.2 RSA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457

93 Zend\Db\Adapter 461
93.1 Creating an Adapter - Quickstart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
93.2 Creating an Adapter Using Dependency Injection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
93.3 Query Preparation Through Zend\Db\Adapter\Adapter::query() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462

ix
 93.4 Query Execution Through Zend\Db\Adapter\Adapter::query() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
93.5 Creating Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
93.6 Using the Driver Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
93.7 Using The Platform Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
93.8 Using The Parameter Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
93.9 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467

94 Zend\Db\ResultSet 469
94.1 Quickstart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
94.2 Zend\Db\ResultSet\ResultSet and Zend\Db\ResultSet\AbstractResultSet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
94.3 Zend\Db\ResultSet\HydratingResultSet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470

95 Zend\Db\Sql 473
95.1 Zend\Db\Sql\Sql (Quickstart) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
95.2 Zend\Db\Sqls Select, Insert, Update and Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
95.3 Zend\Db\Sql\Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
95.4 Zend\Db\Sql\Insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
95.5 Zend\Db\Sql\Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
95.6 Zend\Db\Sql\Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
95.7 Zend\Db\Sql\Where & Zend\Db\Sql\Having . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478

96 Zend\Db\Sql\Ddl 485
96.1 Creating Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
96.2 Altering Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
96.3 Dropping Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
96.4 Executing DDL Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
96.5 Currently Supported Data Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
96.6 Currently Supported Constraint Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487

97 Zend\Db\TableGateway 489
97.1 Basic Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
97.2 TableGateway Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491

98 Zend\Db\RowGateway 493
98.1 Quickstart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
98.2 ActiveRecord Style Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494

99 Zend\Db\Metadata 495
99.1 Basic Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495

100Dumping Variables 499

100.1 Example of dump() method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499

101Introduction to Zend\Di 501

101.1 Dependency Injection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
101.2 Dependency Injection Containers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501

102Zend\Di Quickstart 503

103Zend\Di Definition 507

103.1 DefinitionList . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
103.2 RuntimeDefinition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
103.3 CompilerDefinition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
103.4 ClassDefinition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509

x
104Zend\Di InstanceManager 511
104.1 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
104.2 Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
104.3 Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513

105Zend\Di Configuration 515

106Zend\Di Debugging & Complex Use Cases 517

106.1 Debugging a DiC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
106.2 Complex Use Cases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517

107Introduction to Zend\Dom 521

108Zend\Dom\Query 523
108.1 Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
108.2 Methods Available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524

109Introduction to Zend\Escaper 527

109.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
109.2 What Zend\Escaper is not . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527

110Theory of Operation 529

110.1 The Problem with Inconsistent Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
110.2 Why Contextual Escaping? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530

111Configuring Zend\Escaper 533

112Escaping HTML 535

112.1 Examples of Bad HTML Escaping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
112.2 Examples of Good HTML Escaping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536

113Escaping HTML Attributes 537

113.1 Examples of Bad HTML Attribute Escaping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
113.2 Examples of Good HTML Attribute Escaping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538

114Escaping Javascript 541

114.1 Examples of Bad Javascript Escaping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541
114.2 Examples of Good Javascript Escaping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542

115Escaping Cascading Style Sheets 543

115.1 Examples of Bad CSS Escaping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
115.2 Examples of Good CSS Escaping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543

116Escaping URLs 545

116.1 Examples of Bad URL Escaping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
116.2 Examples of Good URL Escaping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545

117The EventManager 547

117.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547
117.2 Quick Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547
117.3 Configuration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
117.4 Available Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
117.5 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552

118Introduction to Zend\Feed 557

118.1 Reading RSS Feed Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557

xi
119Importing Feeds 559
119.1 Dumping the contents of a feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559

120Retrieving Feeds from Web Pages 561

120.1 Find Feed Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561

121Consuming an RSS Feed 563

121.1 Reading a feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563
121.2 Get properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563

122Consuming an Atom Feed 565

122.1 Basic Use of an Atom Feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565

123Consuming a Single Atom Entry 567

123.1 Reading a Single-Entry Atom Feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567

124Zend\Feed and Security 569

124.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
124.2 Filtering data using HTMLPurifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
124.3 Escaping data using Zend\Escaper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571

125Zend\Feed\Reader\Reader 573
125.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573
125.2 Importing Feeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573
125.3 Retrieving Underlying Feed and Entry Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574
125.4 Cache Support and Intelligent Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575
125.5 Locating Feed URIs from Websites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576
125.6 Attribute Collections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577
125.7 Retrieving Feed Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577
125.8 Retrieving Entry/Item Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580
125.9 Extending Feed and Entry APIs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582

126Zend\Feed\Writer\Writer 587
126.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587
126.2 Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587
126.3 Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588
126.4 Setting Feed Data Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 590
126.5 Setting Entry Data Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592

127Zend\Feed\PubSubHubbub 595
127.1 What is PubSubHubbub? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595
127.2 Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595
127.3 Zend\Feed\PubSubHubbub\Publisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596
127.4 Zend\Feed\PubSubHubbub\Subscriber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597

128Zend\File\ClassFileLocator 603
128.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603
128.2 Available Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603
128.3 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603

129Introduction to Zend\Filter 605

129.1 What is a filter? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605
129.2 Basic usage of filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605
129.3 Using the StaticFilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 606
129.4 Double filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 606

xii
130Standard Filter Classes 609
130.1 Alnum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609
130.2 Alpha . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 610
130.3 BaseName . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 610
130.4 Blacklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611
130.5 Boolean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611
130.6 Callback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614
130.7 Compress and Decompress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615
130.8 Digits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621
130.9 Dir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621
130.10Encrypt and Decrypt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 622
130.11HtmlEntities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627
130.12ToInt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629
130.13ToNull . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629
130.14NumberFormat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631
130.15NumberParse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631
130.16PregReplace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 632
130.17RealPath . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633
130.18StringToLower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634
130.19StringToUpper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635
130.20StringTrim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635
130.21StripNewlines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636
130.22StripTags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636
130.23UriNormalize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638
130.24Whitelist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638

131Word Filters 641

131.1 CamelCaseToDash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641
131.2 CamelCaseToSeparator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641
131.3 CamelCaseToUnderscore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 642
131.4 DashToCamelCase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 642
131.5 DashToSeparator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643
131.6 DashToUnderscore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643
131.7 SeparatorToCamelCase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 644
131.8 SeparatorToDash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 644
131.9 SeparatorToSeparator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645
131.10UnderscoreToCamelCase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 646
131.11UnderscoreToSeparator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 646
131.12UnderscoreToDash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647

132File Filter Classes 649

132.1 Decrypt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649
132.2 Encrypt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649
132.3 Lowercase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649
132.4 Rename . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649
132.5 RenameUpload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651
132.6 Uppercase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 652

133Filter Chains 653

133.1 Setting Filter Chain Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653
133.2 Using the Plugin Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653

134Zend\Filter\Inflector 655
134.1 Transforming MixedCase and camelCaseText to another format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 655
134.2 Static Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657

xiii
 134.3 Filter Inflector Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658
134.4 Setting Many Rules At Once . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658
134.5 Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 660

135Using the StaticFilter 661

136Writing Filters 663

136.1 Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 663

137Introduction 665

138Quick Start 667

138.1 Programmatic Form Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 667
138.2 Creation via Factory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 668
138.3 Factory-backed Form Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 672
138.4 Validating Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 673
138.5 Hinting to the Input Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674
138.6 Binding an object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 676
138.7 Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677
138.8 Validation Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 680
138.9 Using Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681

139Form Collections 685

139.1 Creating Fieldsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 688
139.2 The Form Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 692
139.3 The Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 693
139.4 The View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 693
139.5 Adding New Elements Dynamically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 695
139.6 Validation groups for fieldsets and collection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 697

140File Uploading 701

140.1 Standard Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 701
140.2 File Post-Redirect-Get Plugin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 704
140.3 HTML5 Multi-File Uploads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 706
140.4 Upload Progress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 707
140.5 Additional Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 711

141Advanced use of forms 713

141.1 Short names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 713
141.2 Creating custom elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 713
141.3 Handling dependencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717
141.4 The specific case of initializers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 719

142Form Elements 721

142.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 721
142.2 Element Base Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 721
142.3 Standard Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 723
142.4 HTML5 Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 740

143Form View Helpers 755

143.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 755
143.2 Standard Helpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 755
143.3 HTML5 Helpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 769
143.4 File Upload Progress Helpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 775

xiv
144Zend\Http 777
144.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 777
144.2 Zend\Http Request, Response and Headers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 777

145The Request Class 779

145.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 779
145.2 Quick Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 779
145.3 Configuration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 780
145.4 Available Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 780
145.5 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 783

146The Response Class 785

146.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 785
146.2 Quick Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 785
146.3 Configuration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 786
146.4 Available Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 786
146.5 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 788

147The Headers Class 791

147.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 791
147.2 Quick Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 791
147.3 Configuration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 792
147.4 Available Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 792
147.5 Zend\Http\Header\HeaderInterface Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 794
147.6 Zend\Http\Header\AbstractAccept Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 794
147.7 Zend\Http\Header\AbstractDate Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 795
147.8 Zend\Http\Header\AbstractLocation Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 796
147.9 List of HTTP Header Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 796
147.10Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 801

148HTTP Client 803

148.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803
148.2 Quick Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803
148.3 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 804
148.4 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 805

149HTTP Client - Connection Adapters 809

149.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 809
149.2 The Socket Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 809
149.3 The Proxy Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 812
149.4 The cURL Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 813
149.5 The Test Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 814
149.6 Creating your own connection adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 816

150HTTP Client - Advanced Usage 819

150.1 HTTP Redirections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 819
150.2 Adding Cookies and Using Cookie Persistence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 819
150.3 Setting Custom Request Headers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 820
150.4 File Uploads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 821
150.5 Sending Raw POST Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 822
150.6 HTTP Authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 823
150.7 Sending Multiple Requests With the Same Client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 823
150.8 Data Streaming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 824

151HTTP Client - Static Usage 827

xv
 151.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 827
151.2 Quick Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 827
151.3 Available Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 827

152Translating 829
152.1 Adding translations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 829
152.2 Supported formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 830
152.3 Setting a locale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 830
152.4 Translating messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 830
152.5 Caching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 830

153I18n View Helpers 831

153.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 831
153.2 CurrencyFormat Helper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 831
153.3 DateFormat Helper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 833
153.4 NumberFormat Helper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 834
153.5 Plural Helper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 836
153.6 Translate Helper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 837
153.7 TranslatePlural Helper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 838
153.8 Abstract Translator Helper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 839

154I18n Filters 841

154.1 Alnum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 841
154.2 Alpha . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 842
154.3 NumberFormat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 842
154.4 NumberParse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 843

155I18n Validators 845

156Alnum Validator 847

156.1 Supported Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 847
156.2 Basic usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 847
156.3 Using whitespaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 847
156.4 Using different languages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 848

157Alpha Validator 849

158IsFloat 851
158.1 Migration from 2.0-2.3 to 2.4+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 851
158.2 Supported Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 852
158.3 Simple integer validation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 852
158.4 Localized integer validation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 852
158.5 Migration from 2.0-2.3 to 2.4+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 852

159Introduction 855

160Input filter specifications 859

160.1 Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 859
160.2 Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 859

161File Upload Input 861

161.1 Basic Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 861

162Introduction 863

xvi
163Basic Usage 865
163.1 Pretty-printing JSON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 865

164Advanced Usage 867

164.1 JSON Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 867
164.2 Encoding PHP objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 867
164.3 Internal Encoder/Decoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 868
164.4 JSON Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 868

165XML to JSON conversion 869

165.1 Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 869

166Zend\Json\Server - JSON-RPC server 871

166.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 871
166.2 Basic Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 871
166.3 Advanced Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 873

167Introduction to Zend\Ldap 879

167.1 Theory of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 879

168API overview 883

168.1 Configuration / options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 883
168.2 API Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 884

169Zend\Ldap\Ldap 887
169.1 Zend\Ldap\Collection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 888

170Zend\Ldap\Attribute 889

171Zend\Ldap\Converter\Converter 891

172Zend\Ldap\Dn 893

173Zend\Ldap\Filter 897

174Zend\Ldap\Node 901

175Zend\Ldap\Node\RootDse 903
175.1 OpenLDAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 905
175.2 ActiveDirectory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 905
175.3 eDirectory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 906

176Zend\Ldap\Node\Schema 909
176.1 OpenLDAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 911
176.2 ActiveDirectory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 912

177Zend\Ldap\Ldif\Encoder 913

178Usage Scenarios 915

178.1 Authentication scenarios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 915
178.2 Basic CRUD operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 915
178.3 Extended operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 917

179Tools 919
179.1 Creation and modification of DN strings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 919
179.2 Using the filter API to create search filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 919
179.3 Modify LDAP entries using the Attribute API . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 919

xvii
180Object-oriented access to the LDAP tree using Zend\Ldap\Node 921
180.1 Basic CRUD operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 921
180.2 Extended operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 921
180.3 Tree traversal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 921

181Getting information from the LDAP server 923

181.1 RootDSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 923
181.2 Schema Browsing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 923

182Serializing LDAP data to and from LDIF 925

182.1 Serialize a LDAP entry to LDIF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 925
182.2 Deserialize a LDIF string into a LDAP entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 926

183The AutoloaderFactory 929

183.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 929
183.2 Quick Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 929
183.3 Configuration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 930
183.4 Available Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 930
183.5 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 930

184The StandardAutoloader 931

184.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 931
184.2 Quick Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 932
184.3 Configuration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 933
184.4 Available Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 933
184.5 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 934

185The ClassMapAutoloader 935

185.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 935
185.2 Quick Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 935
185.3 Configuration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 936
185.4 Available Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 936
185.5 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 937

186The ModuleAutoloader 939

186.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 939
186.2 Quickstart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 939
186.3 Configuration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 939
186.4 Available Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 939
186.5 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 940

187The SplAutoloader Interface 941

187.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 941
187.2 Quick Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 941
187.3 Configuration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 942
187.4 Available Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 942
187.5 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 943

188The PluginClassLoader 945

188.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 945
188.2 Quick Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 945
188.3 Configuration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 946
188.4 Available Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 946
188.5 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 947

xviii
189The ShortNameLocator Interface 951
189.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 951
189.2 Quick Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 951
189.3 Configuration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 951
189.4 Available Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 952
189.5 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 952

190The PluginClassLocator interface 953

190.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 953
190.2 Quick Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 953
190.3 Configuration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 953
190.4 Available Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 953
190.5 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 954

191The Class Map Generator utility: bin/classmap_generator.php 955

191.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 955
191.2 Quick Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 955
191.3 Configuration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 955

192Zend\Log 957
192.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 957
192.2 Creating a Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 957
192.3 Logging Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 958
192.4 Destroying a Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 958
192.5 Using Built-in Priorities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 958
192.6 Understanding Log Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 959
192.7 Log PHP Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 959

193Writers 961
193.1 Writing to Streams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 961
193.2 Writing to Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 962
193.3 Writing to FirePHP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 962
193.4 Writing to ChromePHP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 963
193.5 Writing to Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 963
193.6 Writing to MongoDB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 963
193.7 Writing to Syslog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 963
193.8 Writing to Zend Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 963
193.9 Stubbing Out the Writer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 963
193.10Testing with the Mock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 964
193.11Compositing Writers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 964

194Filters 965
194.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 965
194.2 Available filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 965

195Formatters 967
195.1 Simple Formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 967
195.2 Formatting to XML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 967
195.3 Formatting to FirePhp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 968

196Introduction to Zend\Mail 969

196.1 Getting started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 969
196.2 Configuring the default sendmail transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 970

197Zend\Mail\Message 971

xix
 197.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 971
197.2 Quick Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 971
197.3 Configuration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 973
197.4 Available Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 973
197.5 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 976

198Zend\Mail\Transport 977
198.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 977
198.2 Quick Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 977
198.3 Configuration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 979
198.4 Available Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 979
198.5 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 979

199Zend\Mail\Transport\SmtpOptions 981
199.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 981
199.2 Quick Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 981
199.3 Configuration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 983
199.4 Available Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 983
199.5 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 984

200Zend\Mail\Transport\FileOptions 985
200.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 985
200.2 Quick Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 985
200.3 Configuration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 985
200.4 Available Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 985
200.5 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 986

201Introduction to Zend\Math 987

201.1 Random number generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 987
201.2 Big integers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 988

202Overview 991
202.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 991
202.2 Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 992

203Memory Manager 993

203.1 Creating a Memory Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 993
203.2 Managing Memory Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 993
203.3 Memory Manager Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 994

204Memory Objects 997

204.1 Movable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 997
204.2 Locked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 997
204.3 Memory container value property . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 997
204.4 Memory container interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 998

205Zend\Mime 1001
205.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1001
205.2 Static Methods and Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1001
205.3 Instantiating Zend\Mime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1002

206Zend\Mime\Message 1003
206.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1003
206.2 Instantiation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1003
206.3 Adding MIME Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1003

xx
 206.4 Boundary handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1003
206.5 Parsing a string to create a Zend\Mime\Message object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1004
206.6 Available methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1004

207Zend\Mime\Part 1005
207.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1005
207.2 Instantiation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1005
207.3 Methods for rendering the message part to a string . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1005
207.4 Available methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1006

208Introduction to the Module System 1007

208.1 The autoload_*.php Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1008

209The Module Manager 1009

209.1 Module Manager Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1009
209.2 Module Manager Listeners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1010

210The Module Class 1013

210.1 A Minimal Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1013
210.2 A Typical Module Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1013
210.3 The loadModules.post Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1014
210.4 The MVC bootstrap Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1015

211The Module Autoloader 1017

211.1 Module Autoloader Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1017
211.2 Non-Standard / Explicit Module Paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1018
211.3 Packaging Modules with Phar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1019

212Best Practices when Creating Modules 1021

212.1 Keep the init() and onBootstrap() methods lightweight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1021
212.2 Do not perform writes within a module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1021
212.3 Utilize a vendor prefix for module names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1021
212.4 Utilize a module prefix for service names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1022

213Introduction to the MVC Layer 1023

213.1 Basic Application Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1023
213.2 Basic Module Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1024
213.3 Bootstrapping an Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1026
213.4 Bootstrapping a Modular Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1028
213.5 Conclusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1029

214Quick Start 1031

214.1 Install the Zend Skeleton Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1031
214.2 Create a New Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1032
214.3 Update the Module Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1032
214.4 Create a Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1033
214.5 Create a View Script . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1034
214.6 View scripts for module names with subnamespaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1034
214.7 Create a Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1035
214.8 Tell the Application About our Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1036
214.9 Test it Out! . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1037

215Default Services 1039

215.1 Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1039
215.2 ServiceManager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1039

xxi
 215.3 Abstract Factories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1044
215.4 Plugin Managers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1046
215.5 ViewManager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1047
215.6 Application Configuration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1048
215.7 Default Configuration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1049

216Routing 1053
216.1 Router Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1055
216.2 HTTP Route Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1055
216.3 HTTP Routing Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1061
216.4 Console Route Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1064

217The MvcEvent 1065

217.1 Order of events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1066
217.2 MvcEvent::EVENT_BOOTSTRAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1066
217.3 MvcEvent::EVENT_ROUTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1067
217.4 MvcEvent::EVENT_DISPATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1067
217.5 MvcEvent::EVENT_DISPATCH_ERROR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1069
217.6 MvcEvent::EVENT_RENDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1070
217.7 MvcEvent::EVENT_RENDER_ERROR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1071
217.8 MvcEvent::EVENT_FINISH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1072

218The SendResponseEvent 1075

218.1 Listeners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1075
218.2 Triggerers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1075

219Available Controllers 1077

219.1 Common Interfaces Used With Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1077
219.2 The AbstractActionController . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1079
219.3 The AbstractRestfulController . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1080

220Controller Plugins 1083

220.1 AcceptableViewModelSelector Plugin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1083
220.2 FlashMessenger Plugin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1084
220.3 Forward Plugin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1086
220.4 Identity Plugin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1087
220.5 Layout Plugin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1088
220.6 Params Plugin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1088
220.7 Post/Redirect/Get Plugin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1089
220.8 File Post/Redirect/Get Plugin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1089
220.9 Redirect Plugin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1090
220.10Url Plugin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1091

221Examples 1093
221.1 Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1093
221.2 Bootstrapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1094

222Introduction to Zend\Navigation 1095

222.1 Pages and Containers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1095
222.2 View Helpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1095

223Quick Start 1097

223.1 Using multiple navigations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1098

224Pages 1101

xxii
 224.1 Common page features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1101
224.2 Zend\Navigation\Page\Mvc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1103
224.3 Zend\Navigation\Page\Uri . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1106
224.4 Creating custom page types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1107
224.5 Creating pages using the page factory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1108

225Containers 1111
225.1 Creating containers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1111
225.2 Adding pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1117
225.3 Removing pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1118
225.4 Finding pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1119
225.5 Iterating containers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1121
225.6 Other operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1121

226View Helpers 1125

226.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1125
226.2 Translation of labels and titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1126
226.3 Integration with ACL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1126
226.4 Navigation setup used in examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1127

227View Helper - Breadcrumbs 1133

227.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1133
227.2 Basic usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1133
227.3 Specifying indentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1134
227.4 Customize output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1134
227.5 Rendering using a partial view script . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1134

228View Helper - Links 1137

228.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1137
228.2 Basic usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1139

229View Helper - Menu 1141

229.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1141
229.2 Basic usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1142
229.3 Calling renderMenu() directly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1143
229.4 Rendering the deepest active menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1144
229.5 Rendering with maximum depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1144
229.6 Rendering with minimum depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1145
229.7 Rendering only the active branch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1146
229.8 Rendering only the active branch with minimum depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1147
229.9 Rendering only the active branch with maximum depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1147
229.10Rendering only the active branch with maximum depth and no parents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1148
229.11Rendering a custom menu using a partial view script . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1148

230View Helper - Sitemap 1151

230.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1151
230.2 Basic usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1152
230.3 Rendering using no ACL role . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1153
230.4 Rendering using a maximum depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1154

231View Helper - Navigation Proxy 1157

231.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1157
231.2 Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1157

232Introduction to Zend\Paginator 1159

xxiii
233Usage 1161
233.1 Paginating data collections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1161
233.2 The DbSelect adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1162
233.3 Rendering pages with view scripts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1163

234Configuration 1169

235Advanced usage 1171

235.1 Custom data source adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1171
235.2 Custom scrolling styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1171
235.3 Caching features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1172

236Introduction to Zend\Permissions\Acl 1175

236.1 Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1175
236.2 Roles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1176
236.3 Creating the Access Control List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1177
236.4 Registering Roles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1177
236.5 Defining Access Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1178
236.6 Querying an ACL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1179

237Refining Access Controls 1181

237.1 Precise Access Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1181
237.2 Removing Access Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1182

238Advanced Usage 1185

238.1 Storing ACL Data for Persistence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1185
238.2 Writing Conditional ACL Rules with Assertions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1185

239Introduction to Zend\Permissions\Rbac 1187

239.1 Roles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1187
239.2 Permissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1187
239.3 Dynamic Assertions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1187

240Methods 1189

241Examples 1191
241.1 Roles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1191
241.2 Permissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1192
241.3 Dynamic Assertions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1192

242Progress Bars 1195

242.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1195
242.2 Basic Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1195
242.3 Persistent Progress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1195
242.4 Standard Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1196

243File Upload Handlers 1199

243.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1199
243.2 Methods of Reporting Progress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1199
243.3 Standard Handlers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200

244Introduction to Zend\Serializer 1203

244.1 Quick Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1203
244.2 Basic configuration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1204
244.3 Available Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1204

xxiv
245Zend\Serializer\Adapter 1207
245.1 The PhpSerialize Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1207
245.2 The IgBinary Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1207
245.3 The Wddx Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1207
245.4 The Json Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1208
245.5 The PythonPickle Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1208
245.6 The PhpCode Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1209

246Introduction to Zend\Server 1211

247Zend\Server\Reflection 1213
247.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1213
247.2 Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1213

248Zend\ServiceManager 1215
248.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1215
248.2 Additional API . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1215

249Zend\ServiceManager Quick Start 1219

249.1 Using Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1219
249.2 Modules as Service Providers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1220
249.3 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1220

250Delegator service factories 1225

250.1 Delegator factory signature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1225
250.2 A Delegator factory use case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1225

251Lazy Services 1229

251.1 Use cases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1229
251.2 Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1229
251.3 Practical example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1229
251.4 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1231

252Session Config 1233

252.1 Standard Config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1233
252.2 Session Config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1234
252.3 Custom Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1235

253Session Container 1237

253.1 Basic Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1237
253.2 Setting the Default Session Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1237

254Session Manager 1239

254.1 Initializing the Session Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1239
254.2 Session Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1241

255Session Save Handlers 1243

255.1 Cache . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1243
255.2 DbTableGateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1243
255.3 MongoDB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1244
255.4 Custom Save Handlers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1245

256Session Storage 1247

256.1 Array Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1247
256.2 Session Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1247
256.3 Session Array Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1248

xxv
 256.4 Custom Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1248

257Session Validators 1249

257.1 Http User Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1249
257.2 Remote Addr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1249
257.3 Custom Validators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1250

258Zend\Soap\Server 1251
258.1 Zend\Soap\Server constructor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1251
258.2 Methods to define Web Service API . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1252
258.3 Request and response objects handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1253
258.4 Document/Literal WSDL Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1255

259Zend\Soap\Client 1257
259.1 Zend\Soap\Client Constructor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1257
259.2 Performing SOAP Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1258

260WSDL Accessor 1261

260.1 Zend\Soap\Wsdl constructor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1261
260.2 addMessage() method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1261
260.3 addPortType() method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1262
260.4 addPortOperation() method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1262
260.5 addBinding() method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1262
260.6 addBindingOperation() method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1263
260.7 addSoapBinding() method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1263
260.8 addSoapOperation() method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1263
260.9 addService() method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1263
260.10Type mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1264
260.11addDocumentation() method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1265
260.12Get finalized WSDL document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1266

261AutoDiscovery 1267
261.1 AutoDiscovery Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1267
261.2 Class autodiscovering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1268
261.3 Functions autodiscovering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1269
261.4 Autodiscovering Datatypes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1269
261.5 WSDL Binding Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1269

262Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator 1271
262.1 HydratorInterface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1271
262.2 Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1271
262.3 Available Implementations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1272

263Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator\Filter 1273
263.1 Filter implementations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1273
263.2 Remove filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1274
263.3 Add filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1274
263.4 Use the composite for complex filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1275
263.5 Using the provider interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1276

264Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator\Strategy 1279
264.1 Adding strategies to the hydrators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1279
264.2 Available implementations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1280
264.3 Writing custom strategies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1281

xxvi
265AggregateHydrator 1283
265.1 Installation requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1283
265.2 Basic usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1283
265.3 Advanced use cases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1284

266CompositeNamingStrategy 1287
266.1 Basic Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1287

267IdentityNamingStrategy 1289
267.1 Basic Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1289

268MapNamingStrategy 1291
268.1 Basic Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1291

269UnderscoreNamingStrategy 1293
269.1 Basic Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1293

270Introduction to Zend\Tag 1295

271Creating tag clouds with Zend\Tag\Cloud 1297

271.1 Decorators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1299

272Introduction to Zend\Test 1303

273Unit testing with PHPUnit 1305

273.1 Setup your TestCase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1305
273.2 Testing your Controllers and MVC Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1306

274Zend\Text\Figlet 1311
274.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1311
274.2 Basic Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1312

275Zend\Text\Table 1313
275.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1313
275.2 Basic Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1314

276Zend\Uri 1315
276.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1315
276.2 Creating a New URI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1315
276.3 Manipulating an Existing URI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1316
276.4 Common Instance Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1316

277Introduction to Zend\Validator 1321

277.1 What is a validator? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1321
277.2 Basic usage of validators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1321
277.3 Customizing messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1322
277.4 Translating messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1323

278Standard Validation Classes 1325

278.1 Included Validators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1325
278.2 Deprecated Validators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1326

279Alnum Validator 1327

279.1 Supported Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1327
279.2 Basic usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1327
279.3 Using whitespaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1327

xxvii
 279.4 Using different languages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1328

280Alpha Validator 1329

280.1 Supported options for Zend\I18n\Validator\Alpha . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1329
280.2 Basic usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1329
280.3 Using whitespaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1329
280.4 Using different languages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1330

281Barcode Validator 1331

281.1 Supported options for Zend\Validator\Barcode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1333
281.2 Basic usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1334
281.3 Optional checksum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1334
281.4 Writing custom adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1334

282Between Validator 1337

282.1 Supported options for Zend\Validator\Between . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1337
282.2 Default behaviour for Zend\Validator\Between . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1337
282.3 Validation exclusive the border values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1337

283Callback Validator 1339

283.1 Supported options for Zend\Validator\Callback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1339
283.2 Basic usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1339
283.3 Usage with closures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1339
283.4 Usage with class-based callbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1340
283.5 Adding options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1341

284Date Validator 1343

284.1 Supported options for Zend\Validator\Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1343
284.2 Default date validation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1343
284.3 Self defined date validation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1343

285Db\RecordExists and Db\NoRecordExists Validators 1345

285.1 Supported options for Zend\Validator\Db\* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1345
285.2 Basic usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1345
285.3 Excluding records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1346
285.4 Database Schemas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1347
285.5 Using a Select object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1347

286Digits Validator 1349

286.1 Supported options for Zend\Validator\Digits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1349
286.2 Validating digits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1349

287File Validation Classes 1351

287.1 Crc32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1351
287.2 ExcludeExtension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1352
287.3 ExcludeMimeType . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1352
287.4 Exists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1352
287.5 Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1353
287.6 Hash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1354
287.7 ImageSize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1354
287.8 IsCompressed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1355
287.9 IsImage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1356
287.10Md5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1356
287.11MimeType . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1357
287.12NotExists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1358

xxviii
 287.13Sha1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1359
287.14Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1360
287.15UploadFile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1360
287.16WordCount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1361

288Hex Validator 1363

288.1 Supported options for Zend\Validator\Hex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1363

289Hostname Validator 1365

289.1 Supported options for Zend\Validator\Hostname . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1365
289.2 Basic usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1365
289.3 Validating different types of hostnames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1365
289.4 Validating International Domains Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1366
289.5 Validating Top Level Domains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1367

290Iban Validator 1369

290.1 Supported options for Zend\Validator\Iban . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1369
290.2 IBAN validation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1369

291Identical Validator 1371

291.1 Supported options for Zend\Validator\Identical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1371
291.2 Basic usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1371
291.3 Identical objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1371
291.4 Form elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1372
291.5 Strict validation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1374
291.6 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1374

292Ip Validator 1375

292.1 Supported options for Zend\Validator\Ip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1375
292.2 Basic usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1375
292.3 Validate IPv4 or IPV6 alone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1376

293Isbn Validator 1377

293.1 Supported options for Zend\Validator\Isbn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1377
293.2 Basic usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1377
293.3 Setting an explicit ISBN validation type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1377
293.4 Specifying a separator restriction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1378

294IsInstanceOf Validator 1379

294.1 Supported options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1379
294.2 Basic usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1379

295IsFloat 1381
295.1 Supported options for Zend\I18n\Validator\IsFloat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1381
295.2 Simple float validation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1381
295.3 Localized float validation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1381

296IsInt 1383
296.1 Supported Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1383
296.2 Simple integer validation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1383
296.3 Localized integer validation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1383
296.4 Migration from 2.0-2.3 to 2.4+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1384

297Regex Validator 1385

297.1 Supported options for Zend\Validator\Regex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1385
297.2 Validation with Zend\Validator\Regex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1385

xxix
 297.3 Pattern handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1385

298Sitemap Validators 1387

298.1 Sitemap\Changefreq . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1387
298.2 Sitemap\Lastmod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1387
298.3 Sitemap\Loc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1387
298.4 Sitemap\Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1388
298.5 Supported options for Zend\Validator\Sitemap_* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1388

299Step Validator 1389

299.1 Supported options for Zend\Validator\Step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1389
299.2 Basic usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1389
299.3 Using floating-point values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1389

300Timezone Validator 1391

300.1 Supported validation types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1391
300.2 Basic Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1391

301Uri Validator 1393

301.1 Supported options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1393
301.2 Basic usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1393

302Validator Chains 1395

302.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1395
302.2 Setting Validator Chain Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1396

303Writing Validators 1397

303.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1397
303.2 Creating a Simple Validation Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1397
303.3 Writing a Validation Class having Dependent Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1398
303.4 Validation with Independent Conditions, Multiple Reasons for Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1399

304Validation Messages 1401

304.1 Using pre-translated validation messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1401
304.2 Limit the size of a validation message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1402

305Getting the Zend Framework Version 1403

305.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1403
305.2 Example of the compareVersion() Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1403
305.3 Example of the getLatest() Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1403

306Zend\View Quick Start 1405

306.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1405
306.2 Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1405

307The PhpRenderer 1419

307.1 Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1419
307.2 Options and Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1423
307.3 Additional Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1423

308PhpRenderer View Scripts 1425

308.1 Escaping Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1426

309The ViewEvent 1427

309.1 Order of events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1427
309.2 ViewEvent::EVENT_RENDERER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1428

xxx
 309.3 ViewEvent::EVENT_RENDERER_POST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1429
309.4 ViewEvent::EVENT_RESPONSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1429

310View Helpers 1431

310.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1431
310.2 Included Helpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1432

311View Helper - BasePath 1433

311.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1433
311.2 Basic Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1433

312View Helper - Cycle 1435

312.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1435
312.2 Basic Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1435
312.3 Working with two or more cycles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1436

313View Helper - Doctype 1437

313.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1437
313.2 Basic Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1437
313.3 Retrieving the Doctype . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1438
313.4 Choosing a Doctype to Use with the Open Graph Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1438
313.5 Zend MVC View Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1439

314FlashMessenger Helper 1441

314.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1441
314.2 Basic Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1441
314.3 CSS Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1441
314.4 HTML Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1442
314.5 Sample Modification for Twitter Bootstrap 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1442
314.6 Alternative Configuration of the ViewHelper Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1443

315Gravatar Helper 1445

315.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1445
315.2 Basic Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1445
315.3 Custom Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1445

316View Helper - HeadLink 1447

316.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1447
316.2 Basic Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1447

317View Helper - HeadMeta 1449

317.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1449
317.2 Basic Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1450
317.3 Usage with XHTML1_RDFA doctype . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1450

318View Helper - HeadScript 1453

318.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1453
318.2 Basic Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1455
318.3 Capturing Scripts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1455

319View Helper - HeadStyle 1457

319.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1457
319.2 Basic Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1460
319.3 Capturing Style Declarations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1460

xxxi
320View Helper - HeadTitle 1461
320.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1461
320.2 Basic Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1461

321View Helper - HtmlList 1463

321.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1463
321.2 Basic Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1463

322View Helper - HTML Object 1467

322.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1467
322.2 Flash helper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1467
322.3 Customizing the object by passing additional arguments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1467

323View Helper - Identity 1469

323.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1469
323.2 Basic Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1469
323.3 Using with ServiceManager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1469

324View Helper - InlineScript 1471

324.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1471
324.2 Basic Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1471
324.3 Capturing Scripts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1472

325View Helper - JSON 1473

325.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1473
325.2 Basic Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1473

326View Helper - Partial 1475

326.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1475
326.2 Basic Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1475
326.3 Using PartialLoop to Render Iterable Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1476

327View Helper - Placeholder 1479

327.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1479
327.2 Basic Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1479
327.3 Aggregate Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1479
327.4 Capture Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1480
327.5 Concrete Implementations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1481

328View Helper - URL 1483

328.1 Basic Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1483
328.2 Query String Arguments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1484
328.3 Fragments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1485
328.4 Fully Qualified Domain Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1485
328.5 Reusing Matched Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1486

329Advanced usage of helpers 1487

329.1 Registering Helpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1487
329.2 Writing Custom Helpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1488
329.3 Registering Concrete Helpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1490

330Introduction to Zend\XmlRpc 1491

330.1 Quick Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1491

331Zend\XmlRpc\Client 1493
331.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1493

xxxii
 331.2 Method Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1493
331.3 Types and Conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1494
331.4 Server Proxy Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1495
331.5 Error Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1496
331.6 Server Introspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1497
331.7 From Request to Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1498
331.8 HTTP Client and Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1498

332Zend\XmlRpc\Server 1499
332.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1499
332.2 Basic Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1499
332.3 Server Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1499
332.4 Anatomy of a webservice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1500
332.5 Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1500
332.6 Utilizing Namespaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1501
332.7 Custom Request Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1501
332.8 Custom Responses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1502
332.9 Handling Exceptions via Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1502
332.10Caching Server Definitions Between Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1502
332.11Usage Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1503
332.12Performance optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1507

333ZendService\Akismet 1509
333.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1509
333.2 Verify an API key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1509
333.3 Check for spam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1510
333.4 Submitting known spam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1510
333.5 Submitting false positives (ham) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1511
333.6 Zend-specific Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1511

334ZendService\Amazon 1513
334.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1513
334.2 Country Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1514
334.3 Looking up a Specific Amazon Item by ASIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1514
334.4 Performing Amazon Item Searches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1515
334.5 Using the Alternative Query API . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1515
334.6 ZendService\Amazon Classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1516

335ZendService\Amazon\S3 1521
335.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1521
335.2 Registering with Amazon S3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1521
335.3 API Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1521
335.4 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1521
335.5 Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1522
335.6 Bucket operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1522
335.7 Object operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1523
335.8 Data Streaming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1524
335.9 Stream wrapper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1525

336ZendService\Amazon\Sqs 1527
336.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1527
336.2 Registering with Amazon SQS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1527
336.3 API Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1527
336.4 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1527
336.5 Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1528

xxxiii
 336.6 Queue operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1528
336.7 Message operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1529

337ZendService\Amazon\Ec2 1531
337.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1531
337.2 What is Amazon Ec2? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1531
337.3 Static Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1531

338ZendService\Amazon\Ec2: CloudWatch Monitoring 1533

338.1 CloudWatch Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1533

339ZendService\Amazon\Ec2: Elastic Block Storage (EBS) 1535

339.1 Create EBS Volumes and Snapshots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1535
339.2 Describing EBS Volumes and Snapshots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1536
339.3 Attach and Detaching Volumes from Instances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1537
339.4 Deleting EBS Volumes and Snapshots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1537

340ZendService\Amazon\Ec2: Elastic IP Addresses 1539

340.1 Allocating a new Elastic IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1539

341ZendService\Amazon\Ec2: Instances 1541

341.1 Instance Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1541
341.2 Running Amazon EC2 Instances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1542
341.3 Amazon Instance Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1543

342ZendService\Amazon\Ec2: Regions and Availability Zones 1545

342.1 Amazon EC2 Regions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1545
342.2 Amazon EC2 Availability Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1545

343ZendService\Amazon\Ec2: Reserved Instances 1547

343.1 How Reserved Instances are Applied . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1547
343.2 Reserved Instances Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1547

344ZendService\Amazon\Ec2: Security Groups 1549

344.1 Security Group Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1549
344.2 Authorizing Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1550
344.3 Revoking Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1551

345ZendService\Amazon\Ec2: Windows Instances 1553

345.1 Windows Instances Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1554

346ZendService\Apple\Apns 1555
346.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1555
346.2 Quick Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1555
346.3 Feedback Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1557

347ZendService\Audioscrobbler 1559
347.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1559
347.2 Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1559
347.3 Artists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1561
347.4 Tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1561
347.5 Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1562
347.6 Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1562
347.7 Forums . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1562

xxxiv
348ZendService\Delicious 1565
348.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1565
348.2 Retrieving posts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1565
348.3 ZendService\Delicious\PostList . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1566
348.4 Editing posts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1567
348.5 Deleting posts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1567
348.6 Adding new posts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1568
348.7 Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1568
348.8 Bundles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1569
348.9 Public data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1569
348.10HTTP client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1570

349ZendService\DeveloperGarden 1571
349.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1571
349.2 BaseUserService . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1572
349.3 IP Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1573
349.4 Local Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1574
349.5 Send SMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1574
349.6 SMS Validation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1575
349.7 Voice Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1575
349.8 ConferenceCall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1576
349.9 Performance and Caching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1578

350ZendService\Flickr 1579
350.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1579
350.2 Finding Flickr Users Photos and Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1579
350.3 Finding photos From a Group Pool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1580
350.4 Retrieving Flickr Image Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1580
350.5 ZendService\Flickr Result Classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1580

351ZendService\Google\Gcm 1583
351.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1583
351.2 Quick Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1583

352ZendService\LiveDocx 1585
352.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1585
352.2 ZendService\LiveDocx\MailMerge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1587

353ZendService\Rackspace 1605
353.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1605
353.2 Registering with Rackspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1605
353.3 Cloud Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1605
353.4 Cloud Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1606
353.5 Available Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1606

354ZendService\Rackspace\Servers 1609
354.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1609
354.2 Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1609
354.3 Quick Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1610
354.4 Available Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1611
354.5 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1615

355ZendService\Rackspace\Files 1617
355.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1617
355.2 Quick Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1617

xxxv
 355.3 Available Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1619
355.4 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1622

356ZendService\ReCaptcha 1625
356.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1625
356.2 Simplest use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1625
356.3 Hiding email addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1626

357ZendService\SlideShare 1629
357.1 Getting Started with ZendService\SlideShare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1629
357.2 The SlideShow object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1629
357.3 Retrieving a single slide show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1632
357.4 Retrieving Groups of Slide Shows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1632
357.5 ZendService\SlideShare Caching policies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1633
357.6 Changing the behavior of the HTTP Client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1633

358ZendService\StrikeIron 1635
358.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1635
358.2 Registering with StrikeIron . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1636
358.3 Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1636
358.4 Making Your First Query . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1636
358.5 Examining Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1637
358.6 Handling Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1638
358.7 Checking Your Subscription . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1638

359ZendService\StrikeIron: Bundled Services 1641

359.1 ZIP Code Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1641
359.2 U.S. Address Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1642
359.3 Sales & Use Tax Basic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1642

360ZendService\StrikeIron: Advanced Uses 1645

360.1 Using Services by WSDL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1645
360.2 Viewing SOAP Transactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1645

361ZendService\Technorati 1647
361.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1647
361.2 Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1647
361.3 Making Your First Query . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1647
361.4 Consuming Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1648
361.5 Handling Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1650
361.6 Checking Your API Key Daily Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1650
361.7 Available Technorati Queries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1650
361.8 ZendService\Technorati Classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1654

362ZendService\Twitter 1659
362.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1659
362.2 Quick Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1659
362.3 Authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1661
362.4 Account Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1662
362.5 Application Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1662
362.6 Blocking Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1663
362.7 Direct Message Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1663
362.8 Favorites Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1664
362.9 Friendship Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1665
362.10Search Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1665

xxxvi
 362.11Status Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1666
362.12User Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1668

363ZendService\WindowsAzure 1669
363.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1669
363.2 Installing the Windows Azure SDK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1669
363.3 API Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1669
363.4 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1669
363.5 Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1670

364ZendService\WindowsAzure\Storage\Blob 1671
364.1 API Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1671
364.2 Root container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1673
364.3 Blob storage stream wrapper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1673
364.4 Shared Access Signature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1674

365ZendService\WindowsAzure\Storage\Table 1677
365.1 Operations on tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1677
365.2 Operations on entities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1678
365.3 Table storage session handler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1684

366ZendService\WindowsAzure\StorageQueue 1687
366.1 API Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1687

367Copyright Information 1691

368Introduction to Zend Framework 2 1693

369User Guide 1695

370In-depth tutorial for beginners 1697

371Getting Started With Zend Studio 10 & Zend Server 6 1699

372Zend Framework Tool (ZFTool) 1701

373Learning Zend Framework 2 1703

374Migration 1705

375Zend Framework 2 Reference 1707

375.1 Zend\Authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1707
375.2 Zend\Barcode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1707
375.3 Zend\Cache . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1707
375.4 Zend\Captcha . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1708
375.5 Zend\Code\Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1708
375.6 Zend\Config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1708
375.7 Zend\Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1708
375.8 Zend\Console\Getopt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1708
375.9 Zend\Crypt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1709
375.10Zend\Db . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1709
375.11Zend\Debug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1709
375.12Zend\Di . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1709
375.13Zend\Dom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1709
375.14Zend\Escaper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1710
375.15Zend\EventManager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1710

xxxvii
 375.16Zend\Feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1710
375.17Zend\File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1710
375.18Zend\Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1710
375.19Zend\Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1711
375.20Zend\Http . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1711
375.21Zend\I18n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1711
375.22Zend\InputFilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1712
375.23Zend\Json . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1712
375.24Zend\Ldap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1712
375.25Zend\Loader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1712
375.26Zend\Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1713
375.27Zend\Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1713
375.28Zend\Math . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1713
375.29Zend\Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1713
375.30Zend\Mime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1713
375.31Zend\ModuleManager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1713
375.32Zend\Mvc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1714
375.33Zend\Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1714
375.34Zend\Paginator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1714
375.35Zend\Permissions\Acl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1714
375.36Zend\Permissions\Rbac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1715
375.37Zend\ProgressBar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1715
375.38Zend\Serializer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1715
375.39Zend\Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1715
375.40Zend\ServiceManager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1715
375.41Zend\Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1715
375.42Zend\Soap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1716
375.43Zend\Stdlib . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1716
375.44Zend\Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1716
375.45Zend\Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1716
375.46Zend\Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1716
375.47Zend\Uri . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1716
375.48Zend\Validator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1717
375.49Zend\Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1718
375.50Zend\View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1718
375.51Zend\XmlRpc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1719

376Services for Zend Framework 2 Reference 1721

376.1 ZendService\Akismet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1721
376.2 ZendService\Amazon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1721
376.3 ZendService\AppleApns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1721
376.4 ZendService\Audioscrobbler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1721
376.5 ZendService\Delicious . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1722
376.6 ZendService\DeveloperGarden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1722
376.7 ZendService\Flickr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1722
376.8 ZendService\Google\Gcm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1722
376.9 ZendService\LiveDocx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1722
376.10ZendService\Rackspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1722
376.11ZendService\ReCaptcha . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1722
376.12ZendService\SlideShare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1722
376.13ZendService\StrikeIron . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1723
376.14ZendService\Technorati . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1723
376.15ZendService\Twitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1723
376.16ZendService\WindowsAzure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1723

xxxviii
377Copyright 1725

378Indices and tables 1727

Index 1729

xxxix
xl
 CHAPTER 1

Overview

Zend Framework 2 is an open source framework for developing web applications and services using PHP 5.3+. Zend
Framework 2 uses 100% object-oriented code and utilises most of the new features of PHP 5.3, namely namespaces,
late static binding, lambda functions and closures.
Zend Framework 2 evolved from Zend Framework 1, a successful PHP framework with over 15 million downloads.

Note: ZF2 is not backward compatible with ZF1, because of the new features in PHP 5.3+ implemented by the
framework, and due to major rewrites of many components.

The component structure of Zend Framework 2 is unique; each component is designed with few dependencies on
other components. ZF2 follows the SOLID object-oriented design principle. This loosely coupled architecture allows
developers to use whichever components they want. We call this a use-at-will design. We support Pyrus and
Composer as installation and dependency tracking mechanisms for the framework as a whole and for each component,
further enhancing this design.
We use PHPUnit to test our code and Travis CI as a Continuous Integration service.
While they can be used separately, Zend Framework 2 components in the standard library form a powerful and exten-
sible web application framework when combined. Also, it offers a robust, high performance MVC implementation,
a database abstraction that is simple to use, and a forms component that implements HTML5 form rendering, vali-
dation, and filtering so that developers can consolidate all of these operations using one easy-to-use, object oriented
interface. Other components, such as Zend\Authentication and Zend\Permissions\Acl, provide user
authentication and authorization against all common credential stores.
Still others, with the ZendService namespace, implement client libraries to simply access the most popular web
services available. Whatever your application needs are, youre likely to find a Zend Framework 2 component that can
be used to dramatically reduce development time with a thoroughly tested foundation.
The principal sponsor of the project Zend Framework 2 is Zend Technologies, but many companies have contributed
components or significant features to the framework. Companies such as Google, Microsoft, and StrikeIron have
partnered with Zend to provide interfaces to web services and other technologies they wish to make available to Zend
Framework 2 developers.
Zend Framework 2 could not deliver and support all of these features without the help of the vibrant Zend Framework
2 community. Community members, including contributors, make themselves available on mailing lists, IRC channels
and other forums. Whatever question you have about Zend Framework 2, the community is always available to address
it.

1
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

2 Chapter 1. Overview
 CHAPTER 2

Installation

2.1 Using Composer

The recommended way to start a new Zend Framework project is to clone the skeleton application and use composer
to install dependencies using the create-project command:
1 curl -s https://getcomposer.org/installer | php --
2 php composer.phar create-project -sdev --repository-url="https://packages.zendframework.com" zendfram

Alternately, clone the repository and manually invoke composer using the shipped composer.phar:
1 cd my/project/dir
2 git clone git://github.com/zendframework/ZendSkeletonApplication.git
3 cd ZendSkeletonApplication
4 php composer.phar self-update
5 php composer.phar install

(The self-update directive is to ensure you have an up-to-date composer.phar available.)

Another alternative for downloading the project is to grab it via curl, and then pass it to tar:
1 cd my/project/dir
2 curl -#L https://github.com/zendframework/ZendSkeletonApplication/tarball/master | tar xz --strip-com

You would then invoke composer to install dependencies per the previous example.

2.2 Using Git submodules

Alternatively, you can install using native git submodules:

1 git clone git://github.com/zendframework/ZendSkeletonApplication.git --recursive

2.3 Web Server Setup

2.3.1 PHP CLI Server

The simplest way to get started if you are using PHP 5.4 or above is to start the internal PHP cli-server in the root
directory:

3
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1 php -S 0.0.0.0:8080 -t public/ public/index.php

This will start the cli-server on port 8080, and bind it to all network interfaces.

Note: The built-in CLI server is for development only.

2.3.2 Apache Setup

To use Apache, setup a virtual host to point to the public/ directory of the project. It should look something like
below:
1 <VirtualHost *:80>
2 ServerName zf2-tutorial.localhost
3 DocumentRoot /path/to/zf2-tutorial/public
4

5 <Directory /path/to/zf2-tutorial/public>
6 AllowOverride All
7 Order allow,deny
8 Allow from all
9 </Directory>
10 </VirtualHost>

or, if you are using Apache 2.4 or above:

1 <VirtualHost *:80>
2 ServerName zf2-tutorial.localhost
3 DocumentRoot /path/to/zf2-tutorial/public
4

5 <Directory /path/to/zf2-tutorial/public>
6 AllowOverride All
7 Require all granted
8 </Directory>
9 </VirtualHost>

Rewrite Configuration

URL rewriting is a common function of HTTP servers, and allows all HTTP requests to be routed through the
index.php entry point of a Zend Framework Application.
Apache comes bundled with the modulemod_rewrite for URL rewriting. To use it, mod_rewrite must either be
included at compile time or enabled as a Dynamic Shared Object (DSO). Please consult the Apache documentation
for your version for more information.
The Zend Framework Skeleton Application comes with a .htaccess that includes rewrite rules to cover most use
cases:
1 RewriteEngine On
2 # The following rule tells Apache that if the requested filename
3 # exists, simply serve it.
4 RewriteCond %{REQUEST_FILENAME} -s [OR]
5 RewriteCond %{REQUEST_FILENAME} -l [OR]
6 RewriteCond %{REQUEST_FILENAME} -d
7 RewriteRule ^.*$ - [NC,L]
8 # The following rewrites all other queries to index.php. The
9 # condition ensures that if you are using Apache aliases to do
10 # mass virtual hosting, the base path will be prepended to

4 Chapter 2. Installation
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

11 # allow proper resolution of the index.php file; it will work

12 # in non-aliased environments as well, providing a safe, one-size
13 # fits all solution.
14 RewriteCond %{REQUEST_URI}::$1 ^(/.+)(.+)::\2$
15 RewriteRule ^(.*) - [E=BASE:%1]
16 RewriteRule ^(.*)$ %{ENV:BASE}index.php [NC,L]

2.3.3 Microsoft Internet Information Services

As of version 7.0, IIS ships with a standard rewrite engine. You may use the following configuration to create the
appropriate rewrite rules.
1 <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
2 <configuration>
3 <system.webServer>
4 <rewrite>
5 <rules>
6 <rule name="Imported Rule 1" stopProcessing="true">
7 <match url="^.*$" />
8 <conditions logicalGrouping="MatchAny">
9 <add input="{REQUEST_FILENAME}"
10 matchType="IsFile" pattern=""
11 ignoreCase="false" />
12 <add input="{REQUEST_FILENAME}"
13 matchType="IsDirectory"
14 pattern=""
15 ignoreCase="false" />
16 </conditions>
17 <action type="None" />
18 </rule>
19 <rule name="Imported Rule 2" stopProcessing="true">
20 <match url="^.*$" />
21 <action type="Rewrite" url="index.php" />
22 </rule>
23 </rules>
24 </rewrite>
25 </system.webServer>
26 </configuration>

2.3. Web Server Setup 5

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

6 Chapter 2. Installation
 CHAPTER 3

Getting Started with Zend Framework 2

This tutorial is intended to give an introduction to using Zend Framework 2 by creating a simple database driven
application using the Model-View-Controller paradigm. By the end you will have a working ZF2 application and you
can then poke around the code to find out more about how it all works and fits together.

3.1 Some assumptions

This tutorial assumes that you are running at least PHP 5.3.23 with the Apache web server and MySQL, accessible via
the PDO extension. Your Apache installation must have the mod_rewrite extension installed and configured.
You must also ensure that Apache is configured to support .htaccess files. This is usually done by changing the
setting:
1 AllowOverride None

to
1 AllowOverride FileInfo

in your httpd.conf file. Check with your distributions documentation for exact details. You will not be able to
navigate to any page other than the home page in this tutorial if you have not configured mod_rewrite and .htaccess
usage correctly.

Note: Alternatively, if you are using PHP 5.4+ you may use the built-in web server instead of Apache for development.

3.2 The tutorial application

The application that we are going to build is a simple inventory system to display which albums we own. The main
page will list our collection and allow us to add, edit and delete CDs. We are going to need four pages in our website:
Page Description
List of This will display the list of albums and provide links to edit and delete them. Also, a link to enable
albums adding new albums will be provided.
Add new This page will provide a form for adding a new album.
album
Edit album This page will provide a form for editing an album.
Delete This page will confirm that we want to delete an album and then delete it.
album

7
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

We will also need to store our data into a database. We will only need one table with these fields in it:
Field name Type Null? Notes
id integer No Primary key, auto-increment
artist varchar(100) No
title varchar(100) No

8 Chapter 3. Getting Started with Zend Framework 2

 CHAPTER 4

Getting started: A skeleton application

In order to build our application, we will start with the ZendSkeletonApplication available on github. Use Composer
(http://getcomposer.org) to create a new project from scratch with Zend Framework:
1 php composer.phar create-project --stability="dev" zendframework/skeleton-application path/to/instal

Note: Another way to install the ZendSkeletonApplication is to use github. Go to

https://github.com/zendframework/ZendSkeletonApplication and click the Zip button. This will download a
file with a name like ZendSkeletonApplication-master.zip or similar.
Unzip this file into the directory where you keep all your vhosts and rename the resultant directory to
zf2-tutorial.
ZendSkeletonApplication is set up to use Composer (http://getcomposer.org) to resolve its dependencies. In this case,
the dependency is Zend Framework 2 itself.
To install Zend Framework 2 into our application we simply type:
1 php composer.phar self-update
2 php composer.phar install

from the zf2-tutorial folder. This takes a while. You should see an output like:
1 Installing dependencies from lock file
2 - Installing zendframework/zendframework (dev-master)
3 Cloning 18c8e223f070deb07c17543ed938b54542aa0ed8
4

5 Generating autoload files

Note: If you see this message:

1 [RuntimeException]
2 The process timed out.

then your connection was too slow to download the entire package in time, and composer timed out. To avoid this,
instead of running:
1 php composer.phar install

run instead:
1 COMPOSER_PROCESS_TIMEOUT=5000 php composer.phar install

9
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Note: For windows users with wamp:

1. Install composer for windows Check composer is properly installed by running
1 composer

2. Install git for windows. Also need to add git path in windows environment variable Check git is properly
installed by running
1 git

3. Now install zf2 using command

1 composer create-project -s dev zendframework/skeleton-application path/to/install

We can now move on to the web server setup.

4.1 Using the Apache Web Server

You now need to create an Apache virtual host for the application and edit your hosts file so that
http://zf2-tutorial.localhost will serve index.php from the zf2-tutorial/public directory.
Setting up the virtual host is usually done within httpd.conf or extra/httpd-vhosts.conf. If you are using
httpd-vhosts.conf, ensure that this file is included by your main httpd.conf file. Some Linux distributions
(ex: Ubuntu) package Apache so that configuration files are stored in /etc/apache2 and create one file per virtual
host inside folder /etc/apache2/sites-enabled. In this case, you would place the virtual host block below
into the file /etc/apache2/sites-enabled/zf2-tutorial.
Ensure that NameVirtualHost is defined and set to *:80 or similar, and then define a virtual host along these lines:
1 <VirtualHost *:80>
2 ServerName zf2-tutorial.localhost
3 DocumentRoot /path/to/zf2-tutorial/public
4 SetEnv APPLICATION_ENV "development"
5 <Directory /path/to/zf2-tutorial/public>
6 DirectoryIndex index.php
7 AllowOverride All
8 Order allow,deny
9 Allow from all
10 </Directory>
11 </VirtualHost>

or, if you are using Apache 2.4 or above:

1 <VirtualHost *:80>
2 ServerName zf2-tutorial.localhost
3 DocumentRoot /path/to/zf2-tutorial/public
4 SetEnv APPLICATION_ENV "development"
5 <Directory /path/to/zf2-tutorial/public>
6 DirectoryIndex index.php
7 AllowOverride All
8 Require all granted
9 </Directory>
10 </VirtualHost>

Make sure that you update your /etc/hosts or c:\windows\system32\drivers\etc\hosts file so

that zf2-tutorial.localhost is mapped to 127.0.0.1. The website can then be accessed using
http://zf2-tutorial.localhost.

10 Chapter 4. Getting started: A skeleton application

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1 127.0.0.1 zf2-tutorial.localhost localhost

Restart Apache.
If youve done it correctly, it should look something like this:

To test that your .htaccess file is working, navigate to http://zf2-tutorial.localhost/1234 and you
should see this:

If you see a standard Apache 404 error, then you need to fix .htaccess usage before continuing. If youre are using
IIS with the URL Rewrite Module, import the following:
1 RewriteCond %{REQUEST_FILENAME} !-f
2 RewriteRule ^ index.php [NC,L]

You now have a working skeleton application and we can start adding the specifics for our application.

4.1. Using the Apache Web Server 11

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

4.2 Using the Built-in PHP CLI Server

Alternatively if you are using PHP 5.4 or above you can use the built-in CLI server (cli-server). To do this, you just
start the server in the root directory:
1 php -S 0.0.0.0:8080 -t public/ public/index.php

This will make the website available on port 8080 on all network interfaces, using public/index.php to handle
routing. This means the site is accessible via http://localhost:8080 or http://<your-local-IP>:8080.
If youve done it right, you should see the same result as with Apache above.
To test that your routing is working, navigate to http://localhost:8080/1234 and you should see the same error page as
with Apache above.

Note: The built-in CLI server is for development only.

4.3 Error reporting

Optionally, when using Apache, you can use the APPLICATION_ENV setting in your VirtualHost to let PHP
output all its errors to the browser. This can be useful during the development of your application.
Edit index.php from the zf2-tutorial/public/ directory and change it to the following:
1 <?php
2

3 /**
4 * Display all errors when APPLICATION_ENV is development.
5 */
6 if ($_SERVER['APPLICATION_ENV'] == 'development') {
7 error_reporting(E_ALL);
8 ini_set("display_errors", 1);
9 }
10

11 /**
12 * This makes our life easier when dealing with paths. Everything is relative
13 * to the application root now.
14 */
15 chdir(dirname(__DIR__));
16

17 // Decline static file requests back to the PHP built-in webserver

18 if (php_sapi_name() === 'cli-server' && is_file(__DIR__ . parse_url($_SERVER['REQUEST_URI'], PHP_URL
19 return false;
20 }
21

22 // Setup autoloading
23 require 'init_autoloader.php';
24

25 // Run the application!

26 Zend\Mvc\Application::init(require 'config/application.config.php')->run();

12 Chapter 4. Getting started: A skeleton application

 CHAPTER 5

Modules

Zend Framework 2 uses a module system to organise your main application-specific code within each module. The
Application module provided by the skeleton is used to provide bootstrapping, error and routing configuration to the
whole application. It is usually used to provide application level controllers for, say, the home page of an application,
but we are not going to use the default one provided in this tutorial as we want our album list to be the home page,
which will live in our own module.
We are going to put all our code into the Album module which will contain our controllers, models, forms and views,
along with configuration. Well also tweak the Application module as required.
Lets start with the directories required.

5.1 Setting up the Album module

Start by creating a directory called Album under module with the following subdirectories to hold the modules files:
1 zf2-tutorial/
2 /module
3 /Album
4 /config
5 /src
6 /Album
7 /Controller
8 /Form
9 /Model
10 /view
11 /album
12 /album

As you can see the Album module has separate directories for the different types of files we will have. The PHP
files that contain classes within the Album namespace live in the src/Album directory so that we can have multiple
namespaces within our module should we require it. The view directory also has a sub-folder called album for our
modules view scripts.
In order to load and configure a module, Zend Framework 2 has a ModuleManager. This will look
for Module.php in the root of the module directory (module/Album) and expect to find a class called
Album\Module within it. That is, the classes within a given module will have the namespace of the modules
name, which is the directory name of the module.
Create Module.php in the Album module: Create a file called Module.php under
zf2-tutorial/module/Album:

13
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1 namespace Album;
2

3 use Zend\ModuleManager\Feature\AutoloaderProviderInterface;
4 use Zend\ModuleManager\Feature\ConfigProviderInterface;
5

6 class Module implements AutoloaderProviderInterface, ConfigProviderInterface

7 {
8 public function getAutoloaderConfig()
9 {
10 return array(
11 'Zend\Loader\ClassMapAutoloader' => array(
12 __DIR__ . '/autoload_classmap.php',
13 ),
14 'Zend\Loader\StandardAutoloader' => array(
15 'namespaces' => array(
16 __NAMESPACE__ => __DIR__ . '/src/' . __NAMESPACE__,
17 ),
18 ),
19 );
20 }
21

22 public function getConfig()

23 {
24 return include __DIR__ . '/config/module.config.php';
25 }
26 }

The ModuleManager will call getAutoloaderConfig() and getConfig() automatically for us.

5.1.1 Autoloading files

Our getAutoloaderConfig() method returns an array that is compatible with ZF2s AutoloaderFactory.
We configure it so that we add a class map file to the ClassMapAutoloader and also add this modules namespace
to the StandardAutoloader. The standard autoloader requires a namespace and the path where to find the files
for that namespace. It is PSR-0 compliant and so classes map directly to files as per the PSR-0 rules.
As we are in development, we dont need to load files via the classmap, so we provide an empty array for the classmap
autoloader. Create a file called autoload_classmap.php under zf2-tutorial/module/Album:
1 return array();

As this is an empty array, whenever the autoloader looks for a class within the Album namespace, it will fall back to
the to StandardAutoloader for us.

Note: If you are using Composer, you could instead just create an empty getAutoloaderConfig() { } and
add to composer.json:
1 "autoload": {
2 "psr-0": { "Album": "module/Album/src/" }
3 },

If you go this way, then you need to run php composer.phar update to update the composer autoloading files.

14 Chapter 5. Modules
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

5.2 Configuration

Having registered the autoloader, lets have a quick look at the getConfig() method in Album\Module. This
method simply loads the config/module.config.php file.
Create a file called module.config.php under zf2-tutorial/module/Album/config:
1 return array(
2 'controllers' => array(
3 'invokables' => array(
4 'Album\Controller\Album' => 'Album\Controller\AlbumController',
5 ),
6 ),
7 'view_manager' => array(
8 'template_path_stack' => array(
9 'album' => __DIR__ . '/../view',
10 ),
11 ),
12 );

The config information is passed to the relevant components by the ServiceManager. We need two ini-
tial sections: controllers and view_manager. The controllers section provides a list of all the con-
trollers provided by the module. We will need one controller, AlbumController, which well reference as
Album\Controller\Album. The controller key must be unique across all modules, so we prefix it with our
module name.
Within the view_manager section, we add our view directory to the TemplatePathStack configuration. This
will allow it to find the view scripts for the Album module that are stored in our view/ directory.

5.3 Informing the application about our new module

We now need to tell the ModuleManager that this new module exists. This is done in the applications
config/application.config.php file which is provided by the skeleton application. Update this file so
that its modules section contains the Album module as well, so the file now looks like this:
(Changes required are highlighted using comments.)
1 return array(
2 'modules' => array(
3 'Application',
4 'Album', // <-- Add this line
5 ),
6 'module_listener_options' => array(
7 'config_glob_paths' => array(
8 'config/autoload/{{,*.}global,{,*.}local}.php',
9 ),
10 'module_paths' => array(
11 './module',
12 './vendor',
13 ),
14 ),
15 );

As you can see, we have added our Album module into the list of modules after the Application module.
We have now set up the module ready for putting our custom code into it.

5.2. Configuration 15
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

16 Chapter 5. Modules
 CHAPTER 6

Routing and controllers

We will build a very simple inventory system to display our album collection. The home page will list our collection
and allow us to add, edit and delete albums. Hence the following pages are required:
Page Description
Home This will display the list of albums and provide links to edit and delete them. Also, a link to enable
adding new albums will be provided.
Add new This page will provide a form for adding a new album.
album
Edit album This page will provide a form for editing an album.
Delete This page will confirm that we want to delete an album and then delete it.
album
Before we set up our files, its important to understand how the framework expects the pages to be organised. Each page
of the application is known as an action and actions are grouped into controllers within modules. Hence, you would
generally group related actions into a controller; for instance, a news controller might have actions of current,
archived and view.
As we have four pages that all apply to albums, we will group them in a single controller AlbumController within
our Album module as four actions. The four actions will be:
Page Controller Action
Home AlbumController index
Add new album AlbumController add
Edit album AlbumController edit
Delete album AlbumController delete
The mapping of a URL to a particular action is done using routes that are defined in the modules
module.config.php file. We will add a route for our album actions. This is the updated module config file
with the new code highlighted.
1 return array(
2 'controllers' => array(
3 'invokables' => array(
4 'Album\Controller\Album' => 'Album\Controller\AlbumController',
5 ),
6 ),
7

8 // The following section is new and should be added to your file

9 'router' => array(
10 'routes' => array(
11 'album' => array(
12 'type' => 'segment',
13 'options' => array(

17
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

14 'route' => '/album[/:action][/:id]',

15 'constraints' => array(
16 'action' => '[a-zA-Z][a-zA-Z0-9_-]*',
17 'id' => '[0-9]+',
18 ),
19 'defaults' => array(
20 'controller' => 'Album\Controller\Album',
21 'action' => 'index',
22 ),
23 ),
24 ),
25 ),
26 ),
27

28 'view_manager' => array(

29 'template_path_stack' => array(
30 'album' => __DIR__ . '/../view',
31 ),
32 ),
33 );

The name of the route is album and has a type of segment. The segment route allows us to specify placeholders in
the URL pattern (route) that will be mapped to named parameters in the matched route. In this case, the route is
/album[/:action][/:id] which will match any URL that starts with /album. The next segment will be an optional
action name, and then finally the next segment will be mapped to an optional id. The square brackets indicate that a
segment is optional. The constraints section allows us to ensure that the characters within a segment are as expected,
so we have limited actions to starting with a letter and then subsequent characters only being alphanumeric, underscore
or hyphen. We also limit the id to a number.
This route allows us to have the following URLs:
URL Page Action
/album Home (list of albums) index
/album/add Add new album add
/album/edit/2 Edit album with an id of 2 edit
/album/delete/4 Delete album with an id of 4 delete

18 Chapter 6. Routing and controllers

 CHAPTER 7

Create the controller

We are now ready to set up our controller. In Zend Framework 2, the controller is a class that is generally called
{Controller name}Controller. Note that {Controller name} must start with a capital letter. This
class lives in a file called {Controller name}Controller.php within the Controller directory for the
module. In our case that is module/Album/src/Album/Controller. Each action is a public method within
the controller class that is named {action name}Action. In this case {action name} should start with a
lower case letter.

Note: This is by convention. Zend Framework 2 doesnt provide many restrictions on controllers other
than that they must implement the Zend\Stdlib\Dispatchable interface. The framework provides
two abstract classes that do this for us: Zend\Mvc\Controller\AbstractActionController
and Zend\Mvc\Controller\AbstractRestfulController. Well be using the stan-
dard AbstractActionController, but if youre intending to write a RESTful web service,
AbstractRestfulController may be useful.

Lets go ahead and create our controller class AlbumController.php at

zf2-tutorials/module/Album/src/Album/Controller :
1 namespace Album\Controller;
2

3 use Zend\Mvc\Controller\AbstractActionController;
4 use Zend\View\Model\ViewModel;
5

6 class AlbumController extends AbstractActionController

7 {
8 public function indexAction()
9 {
10 }
11

12 public function addAction()

13 {
14 }
15

16 public function editAction()

17 {
18 }
19

20 public function deleteAction()

21 {
22 }
23 }

19
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Note: Make sure to register the new Album module in the modules section of your
config/application.config.php. You also have to provide a Module Class for the Album module
to be recognized by the MVC.

Note: We have already informed the module about our controller in the controller section of
module/Album/config/module.config.php.

We have now set up the four actions that we want to use. They wont work yet until we set up the views. The URLs for
each action are:
URL Method called
http://zf2-tutorial.localhost/album Album\Controller\AlbumController::indexAction
http://zf2-tutorial.localhost/album/add
Album\Controller\AlbumController::addAction
http://zf2-tutorial.localhost/album/edit
Album\Controller\AlbumController::editAction
http://zf2-tutorial.localhost/album/delete
Album\Controller\AlbumController::deleteAction
We now have a working router and the actions are set up for each page of our application.
Its time to build the view and the model layer.

7.1 Initialise the view scripts

To integrate the view into our application all we need to do is create some view script files. These files will be
executed by the DefaultViewStrategy and will be passed any variables or view models that are returned from
the controller action method. These view scripts are stored in our modules views directory within a directory named
after the controller. Create these four empty files now:
module/Album/view/album/album/index.phtml
module/Album/view/album/album/add.phtml
module/Album/view/album/album/edit.phtml
module/Album/view/album/album/delete.phtml
We can now start filling everything in, starting with our database and models.

20 Chapter 7. Create the controller

 CHAPTER 8

Database and models

8.1 The database

Now that we have the Album module set up with controller action methods and view scripts, it is time to look at the
model section of our application. Remember that the model is the part that deals with the applications core purpose
(the so-called business rules) and, in our case, deals with the database. We will make use of the Zend Framework class
Zend\Db\TableGateway\TableGateway which is used to find, insert, update and delete rows from a database
table.
We are going to use MySQL, via PHPs PDO driver, so create a database called zf2tutorial, and run these SQL
statements to create the album table with some data in it.
1 CREATE TABLE album (
2 id int(11) NOT NULL auto_increment,
3 artist varchar(100) NOT NULL,
4 title varchar(100) NOT NULL,
5 PRIMARY KEY (id)
6 );
7 INSERT INTO album (artist, title)
8 VALUES ('The Military Wives', 'In My Dreams');
9 INSERT INTO album (artist, title)
10 VALUES ('Adele', '21');
11 INSERT INTO album (artist, title)
12 VALUES ('Bruce Springsteen', 'Wrecking Ball (Deluxe)');
13 INSERT INTO album (artist, title)
14 VALUES ('Lana Del Rey', 'Born To Die');
15 INSERT INTO album (artist, title)
16 VALUES ('Gotye', 'Making Mirrors');

(The test data chosen happens to be the Bestsellers on Amazon UK at the time of writing!)
We now have some data in a database and can write a very simple model for it.

8.2 The model files

Zend Framework does not provide a Zend\Model component because the model is your business logic and its up
to you to decide how you want it to work. There are many components that you can use for this depending on your
needs. One approach is to have model classes represent each entity in your application and then use mapper objects
that load and save entities to the database. Another is to use an Object-relational mapping (ORM) technology, such as
Doctrine or Propel.

21
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

For this tutorial, we are going to create a very simple model by creating an AlbumTable class that uses the
Zend\Db\TableGateway\TableGateway class in which each album object is an Album object (known as
an entity). This is an implementation of the Table Data Gateway design pattern to allow for interfacing with data
in a database table. Be aware though that the Table Data Gateway pattern can become limiting in larger sys-
tems. There is also a temptation to put database access code into controller action methods as these are exposed
by Zend\Db\TableGateway\AbstractTableGateway. Dont do this!
Lets start by creating a file called Album.php under module/Album/src/Album/Model:
1 namespace Album\Model;
2

3 class Album
4 {
5 public $id;
6 public $artist;
7 public $title;
8

9 public function exchangeArray($data)

10 {
11 $this->id = (!empty($data['id'])) ? $data['id'] : null;
12 $this->artist = (!empty($data['artist'])) ? $data['artist'] : null;
13 $this->title = (!empty($data['title'])) ? $data['title'] : null;
14 }
15 }

Our Album entity object is a simple PHP class. In order to work with Zend\Dbs TableGateway class, we need
to implement the exchangeArray() method. This method simply copies the data from the passed in array to our
entitys properties. We will add an input filter for use with our form later.
Next, we create our AlbumTable.php file in module/Album/src/Album/Model directory like this:
1 namespace Album\Model;
2

3 use Zend\Db\TableGateway\TableGateway;
4

5 class AlbumTable
6 {
7 protected $tableGateway;
8

9 public function __construct(TableGateway $tableGateway)

10 {
11 $this->tableGateway = $tableGateway;
12 }
13

14 public function fetchAll()

15 {
16 $resultSet = $this->tableGateway->select();
17 return $resultSet;
18 }
19

20 public function getAlbum($id)

21 {
22 $id = (int) $id;
23 $rowset = $this->tableGateway->select(array('id' => $id));
24 $row = $rowset->current();
25 if (!$row) {
26 throw new \Exception("Could not find row $id");
27 }
28 return $row;

22 Chapter 8. Database and models

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

29 }
30

31 public function saveAlbum(Album $album)

32 {
33 $data = array(
34 'artist' => $album->artist,
35 'title' => $album->title,
36 );
37

38 $id = (int) $album->id;

39 if ($id == 0) {
40 $this->tableGateway->insert($data);
41 } else {
42 if ($this->getAlbum($id)) {
43 $this->tableGateway->update($data, array('id' => $id));
44 } else {
45 throw new \Exception('Album id does not exist');
46 }
47 }
48 }
49

50 public function deleteAlbum($id)

51 {
52 $this->tableGateway->delete(array('id' => (int) $id));
53 }
54 }

Theres a lot going on here. Firstly, we set the protected property $tableGateway to the TableGateway instance
passed in the constructor. We will use this to perform operations on the database table for our albums.
We then create some helper methods that our application will use to interface with the table gateway. fetchAll() re-
trieves all albums rows from the database as a ResultSet, getAlbum() retrieves a single row as an Album object,
saveAlbum() either creates a new row in the database or updates a row that already exists and deleteAlbum()
removes the row completely. The code for each of these methods is, hopefully, self-explanatory.

8.3 Using ServiceManager to configure the table gateway and inject

into the AlbumTable

In order to always use the same instance of our AlbumTable, we will use the ServiceManager to define how to
create one. This is most easily done in the Module class where we create a method called getServiceConfig()
which is automatically called by the ModuleManager and applied to the ServiceManager. Well then be able to
retrieve it in our controller when we need it.
To configure the ServiceManager, we can either supply the name of the class to be instantiated or a factory
(closure or callback) that instantiates the object when the ServiceManager needs it. We start by implementing
getServiceConfig() to provide a factory that creates an AlbumTable. Add this method to the bottom of the
Module.php file in module/Album.
1 namespace Album;
2

3 // Add these import statements:

4 use Album\Model\Album;
5 use Album\Model\AlbumTable;
6 use Zend\Db\ResultSet\ResultSet;
7 use Zend\Db\TableGateway\TableGateway;
8

8.3. Using ServiceManager to configure the table gateway and inject into the AlbumTable 23
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

9 class Module
10 {
11 // getAutoloaderConfig() and getConfig() methods here
12

13 // Add this method:

14 public function getServiceConfig()
15 {
16 return array(
17 'factories' => array(
18 'Album\Model\AlbumTable' => function($sm) {
19 $tableGateway = $sm->get('AlbumTableGateway');
20 $table = new AlbumTable($tableGateway);
21 return $table;
22 },
23 'AlbumTableGateway' => function ($sm) {
24 $dbAdapter = $sm->get('Zend\Db\Adapter\Adapter');
25 $resultSetPrototype = new ResultSet();
26 $resultSetPrototype->setArrayObjectPrototype(new Album());
27 return new TableGateway('album', $dbAdapter, null, $resultSetPrototype);
28 },
29 ),
30 );
31 }
32 }

This method returns an array of factories that are all merged together by the ModuleManager be-
fore passing them to the ServiceManager. The factory for Album\Model\AlbumTable uses the
ServiceManager to create an AlbumTableGateway to pass to the AlbumTable. We also tell the
ServiceManager that an AlbumTableGateway is created by getting a Zend\Db\Adapter\Adapter (also
from the ServiceManager) and using it to create a TableGateway object. The TableGateway is told to use
an Album object whenever it creates a new result row. The TableGateway classes use the prototype pattern for cre-
ation of result sets and entities. This means that instead of instantiating when required, the system clones a previously
instantiated object. See PHP Constructor Best Practices and the Prototype Pattern for more details.
Finally, we need to configure the ServiceManager so that it knows how to get a Zend\Db\Adapter\Adapter.
This is done using a factory called Zend\Db\Adapter\AdapterServiceFactory which we can configure
within the merged config system. Zend Framework 2s ModuleManager merges all the configuration from each
modules module.config.php file and then merges in the files in config/autoload (*.global.php and
then *.local.php files). Well add our database configuration information to global.php which you should
commit to your version control system. You can use local.php (outside of the VCS) to store the credentials for
your database if you want to. Modify config/autoload/global.php (in the Zend Skeleton root, not inside
the Album module) with following code:
1 return array(
2 'db' => array(
3 'driver' => 'Pdo',
4 'dsn' => 'mysql:dbname=zf2tutorial;host=localhost',
5 'driver_options' => array(
6 PDO::MYSQL_ATTR_INIT_COMMAND => 'SET NAMES \'UTF8\''
7 ),
8 ),
9 'service_manager' => array(
10 'factories' => array(
11 'Zend\Db\Adapter\Adapter'
12 => 'Zend\Db\Adapter\AdapterServiceFactory',
13 ),
14 ),
15 );

24 Chapter 8. Database and models

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

You should put your database credentials in config/autoload/local.php so that they are not in the git repos-
itory (as local.php is ignored):
1 return array(
2 'db' => array(
3 'username' => 'YOUR USERNAME HERE',
4 'password' => 'YOUR PASSWORD HERE',
5 ),
6 );

8.4 Back to the controller

Now that the ServiceManager can create an AlbumTable instance for us, we can add a method to the controller
to retrieve it. Add getAlbumTable() to the AlbumController class:
1 // module/Album/src/Album/Controller/AlbumController.php:
2 public function getAlbumTable()
3 {
4 if (!$this->albumTable) {
5 $sm = $this->getServiceLocator();
6 $this->albumTable = $sm->get('Album\Model\AlbumTable');
7 }
8 return $this->albumTable;
9 }

You should also add:

1 protected $albumTable;

to the top of the class.

We can now call getAlbumTable() from within our controller whenever we need to interact with our model.
If the service locator was configured correctly in Module.php, then we should get an instance of
Album\Model\AlbumTable when calling getAlbumTable().

8.5 Listing albums

In order to list the albums, we need to retrieve them from the model and pass them to the view. To do this, we fill in
indexAction() within AlbumController. Update the AlbumControllers indexAction() like this:
1 // module/Album/src/Album/Controller/AlbumController.php:
2 // ...
3 public function indexAction()
4 {
5 return new ViewModel(array(
6 'albums' => $this->getAlbumTable()->fetchAll(),
7 ));
8 }
9 // ...

With Zend Framework 2, in order to set variables in the view, we return a ViewModel instance where the first
parameter of the constructor is an array from the action containing data we need. These are then automatically passed
to the view script. The ViewModel object also allows us to change the view script that is used, but the default is to
use {controller name}/{action name}. We can now fill in the index.phtml view script:

8.4. Back to the controller 25

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1 <?php
2 // module/Album/view/album/album/index.phtml:
3

4 $title = 'My albums';

5 $this->headTitle($title);
6 ?>
7 <h1><?php echo $this->escapeHtml($title); ?></h1>
8 <p>
9 <a href="<?php echo $this->url('album', array('action'=>'add'));?>">Add new album</a>
10 </p>
11

12 <table class="table">
13 <tr>
14 <th>Title</th>
15 <th>Artist</th>
16 <th>&nbsp;</th>
17 </tr>
18 <?php foreach ($albums as $album) : ?>
19 <tr>
20 <td><?php echo $this->escapeHtml($album->title);?></td>
21 <td><?php echo $this->escapeHtml($album->artist);?></td>
22 <td>
23 <a href="<?php echo $this->url('album',
24 array('action'=>'edit', 'id' => $album->id));?>">Edit</a>
25 <a href="<?php echo $this->url('album',
26 array('action'=>'delete', 'id' => $album->id));?>">Delete</a>
27 </td>
28 </tr>
29 <?php endforeach; ?>
30 </table>

The first thing we do is to set the title for the page (used in the layout) and also set the title for the <head> section
using the headTitle() view helper which will display in the browsers title bar. We then create a link to add a new
album.
The url() view helper is provided by Zend Framework 2 and is used to create the links we need. The first parameter
to url() is the route name we wish to use for construction of the URL, and the second parameter is an array of all
the variables to fit into the placeholders to use. In this case we use our album route which is set up to accept two
placeholder variables: action and id.
We iterate over the $albums that we assigned from the controller action. The Zend Framework 2 view system
automatically ensures that these variables are extracted into the scope of the view script, so that we dont have to worry
about prefixing them with $this-> as we used to have to do with Zend Framework 1; however you can do so if you
wish.
We then create a table to display each albums title and artist, and provide links to allow for editing and deleting the
record. A standard foreach: loop is used to iterate over the list of albums, and we use the alternate form using a
colon and endforeach; as it is easier to scan than to try and match up braces. Again, the url() view helper is
used to create the edit and delete links.

Note: We always use the escapeHtml() view helper to help protect ourselves from Cross Site Scripting (XSS)
vulnerabilities (see http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Cross-site_scripting).

If you open http://zf2-tutorial.localhost/album you should see this:

26 Chapter 8. Database and models

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

8.5. Listing albums 27

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

28 Chapter 8. Database and models

 CHAPTER 9

Styling and Translations

Weve picked up the SkeletonApplications styling, which is fine, but we need to change the title and remove the
copyright message.
The ZendSkeletonApplication is set up to use Zend\I18ns translation functionality for all the text. It uses .po files
that live in module/Application/language, and you need to use poedit to change the text. Start poedit and
open module/Application/language/en_US.po. Click on Skeleton Application in the list of Original
strings and then type in Tutorial as the translation.

Press Save in the toolbar and poedit will create an en_US.mo file for us. If you find that no .mo file is gen-
erated, check Preferences -> Editor -> Behavior and see if the checkbox marked Automatically
compile .mo file on save is checked.
To remove the copyright message, we need to edit the Application modules layout.phtml view script:
1 // module/Application/view/layout/layout.phtml:
2 // Remove this line:
3 <p>&copy; 2005 - 2014 by Zend Technologies Ltd. <?php echo $this->translate('All
4 rights reserved.') ?></p>

The page now looks ever so slightly better now!

29
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

30 Chapter 9. Styling and Translations

 CHAPTER 10

Forms and actions

10.1 Adding new albums

We can now code up the functionality to add new albums. There are two bits to this part:
Display a form for user to provide details
Process the form submission and store to database
We use Zend\Form to do this. The Zend\Form component manages the form and, form validation, we add
a Zend\InputFilter to our Album entity. We start by creating a new class Album\Form\AlbumForm
that extends from Zend\Form\Form to define our form. Create a file called AlbumForm.php in
module/Album/src/Album/Form:
1 namespace Album\Form;
2

3 use Zend\Form\Form;
4

5 class AlbumForm extends Form

6 {
7 public function __construct($name = null)
8 {
9 // we want to ignore the name passed
10 parent::__construct('album');
11

12 $this->add(array(
13 'name' => 'id',
14 'type' => 'Hidden',
15 ));
16 $this->add(array(
17 'name' => 'title',
18 'type' => 'Text',
19 'options' => array(
20 'label' => 'Title',
21 ),
22 ));
23 $this->add(array(
24 'name' => 'artist',
25 'type' => 'Text',
26 'options' => array(
27 'label' => 'Artist',
28 ),
29 ));
30 $this->add(array(

31
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

31 'name' => 'submit',

32 'type' => 'Submit',
33 'attributes' => array(
34 'value' => 'Go',
35 'id' => 'submitbutton',
36 ),
37 ));
38 }
39 }

Within the constructor of AlbumForm we do several things. First, we set the name of the form as we call the parents
constructor. we create four form elements: the id, title, artist, and submit button. For each item we set various attributes
and options, including the label to be displayed.

Note: HTML-Forms can be sent using POST and GET. ZF2s default is POST, therefore you dont have to be explicit
in setting this option. If you want to change it to GET though, all you have to do is set the specific attribute in the
constructor.
$this->setAttribute(method, GET);

We also need to set up validation for this form. In Zend Framework 2 this is done using an input filter, which can either
be standalone or defined within any class that implements the InputFilterAwareInterface interface, such as
a model entity. In our case, we are going to add the input filter to the Album class, which resides in the Album.php
file in module/Album/src/Album/Model:
1 namespace Album\Model;
2

3 // Add these import statements

4 use Zend\InputFilter\InputFilter;
5 use Zend\InputFilter\InputFilterAwareInterface;
6 use Zend\InputFilter\InputFilterInterface;
7

8 class Album implements InputFilterAwareInterface

9 {
10 public $id;
11 public $artist;
12 public $title;
13 protected $inputFilter; // <-- Add this variable
14

15 public function exchangeArray($data)

16 {
17 $this->id = (isset($data['id'])) ? $data['id'] : null;
18 $this->artist = (isset($data['artist'])) ? $data['artist'] : null;
19 $this->title = (isset($data['title'])) ? $data['title'] : null;
20 }
21

22 // Add content to these methods:

23 public function setInputFilter(InputFilterInterface $inputFilter)
24 {
25 throw new \Exception("Not used");
26 }
27

28 public function getInputFilter()

29 {
30 if (!$this->inputFilter) {
31 $inputFilter = new InputFilter();
32

33 $inputFilter->add(array(

32 Chapter 10. Forms and actions

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

34 'name' => 'id',

35 'required' => true,
36 'filters' => array(
37 array('name' => 'Int'),
38 ),
39 ));
40

41 $inputFilter->add(array(
42 'name' => 'artist',
43 'required' => true,
44 'filters' => array(
45 array('name' => 'StripTags'),
46 array('name' => 'StringTrim'),
47 ),
48 'validators' => array(
49 array(
50 'name' => 'StringLength',
51 'options' => array(
52 'encoding' => 'UTF-8',
53 'min' => 1,
54 'max' => 100,
55 ),
56 ),
57 ),
58 ));
59

60 $inputFilter->add(array(
61 'name' => 'title',
62 'required' => true,
63 'filters' => array(
64 array('name' => 'StripTags'),
65 array('name' => 'StringTrim'),
66 ),
67 'validators' => array(
68 array(
69 'name' => 'StringLength',
70 'options' => array(
71 'encoding' => 'UTF-8',
72 'min' => 1,
73 'max' => 100,
74 ),
75 ),
76 ),
77 ));
78

79 $this->inputFilter = $inputFilter;
80 }
81

82 return $this->inputFilter;
83 }
84 }

The InputFilterAwareInterface defines two methods: setInputFilter() and getInputFilter().

We only need to implement getInputFilter() so we simply throw an exception in setInputFilter().
Within getInputFilter(), we instantiate an InputFilter and then add the inputs that we require. We add
one input for each property that we wish to filter or validate. For the id field we add an Int filter as we only need
integers. For the text elements, we add two filters, StripTags and StringTrim, to remove unwanted HTML and

10.1. Adding new albums 33

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

unnecessary white space. We also set them to be required and add a StringLength validator to ensure that the user
doesnt enter more characters than we can store into the database.
We now need to get the form to display and then process it on submission. This is done within the
AlbumControllers addAction():
1 // module/Album/src/Album/Controller/AlbumController.php:
2

3 //...
4 use Zend\Mvc\Controller\AbstractActionController;
5 use Zend\View\Model\ViewModel;
6 use Album\Model\Album; // <-- Add this import
7 use Album\Form\AlbumForm; // <-- Add this import
8 //...
9

10 // Add content to this method:

11 public function addAction()
12 {
13 $form = new AlbumForm();
14 $form->get('submit')->setValue('Add');
15

16 $request = $this->getRequest();
17 if ($request->isPost()) {
18 $album = new Album();
19 $form->setInputFilter($album->getInputFilter());
20 $form->setData($request->getPost());
21

22 if ($form->isValid()) {
23 $album->exchangeArray($form->getData());
24 $this->getAlbumTable()->saveAlbum($album);
25

26 // Redirect to list of albums

27 return $this->redirect()->toRoute('album');
28 }
29 }
30 return array('form' => $form);
31 }
32 //...

After adding the AlbumForm to the use list, we implement addAction(). Lets look at the addAction() code
in a little more detail:
1 $form = new AlbumForm();
2 $form->get('submit')->setValue('Add');

We instantiate AlbumForm and set the label on the submit button to Add. We do this here as well want to re-use the
form when editing an album and will use a different label.
1 $request = $this->getRequest();
2 if ($request->isPost()) {
3 $album = new Album();
4 $form->setInputFilter($album->getInputFilter());
5 $form->setData($request->getPost());
6 if ($form->isValid()) {

If the Request objects isPost() method is true, then the form has been submitted and so we set the forms
input filter from an album instance. We then set the posted data to the form and check to see if it is valid using the
isValid() member function of the form.

34 Chapter 10. Forms and actions

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1 $album->exchangeArray($form->getData());
2 $this->getAlbumTable()->saveAlbum($album);

If the form is valid, then we grab the data from the form and store to the model using saveAlbum().
1 // Redirect to list of albums
2 return $this->redirect()->toRoute('album');

After we have saved the new album row, we redirect back to the list of albums using the Redirect controller plugin.
1 return array('form' => $form);

Finally, we return the variables that we want assigned to the view. In this case, just the form object. Note that Zend
Framework 2 also allows you to simply return an array containing the variables to be assigned to the view and it will
create a ViewModel behind the scenes for you. This saves a little typing.
We now need to render the form in the add.phtml view script:
1 <?php
2 // module/Album/view/album/album/add.phtml:
3

4 $title = 'Add new album';

5 $this->headTitle($title);
6 ?>
7 <h1><?php echo $this->escapeHtml($title); ?></h1>
8 <?php
9 $form->setAttribute('action', $this->url('album', array('action' => 'add')));
10 $form->prepare();
11

12 echo $this->form()->openTag($form);
13 echo $this->formHidden($form->get('id'));
14 echo $this->formRow($form->get('title'));
15 echo $this->formRow($form->get('artist'));
16 echo $this->formSubmit($form->get('submit'));
17 echo $this->form()->closeTag();

Again, we display a title as before and then we render the form. Zend Framework provides some view helpers to make
this a little easier. The form() view helper has an openTag() and closeTag() method which we use to open
and close the form. Then for each element with a label, we can use formRow(), but for the two elements that are
standalone, we use formHidden() and formSubmit().

10.1. Adding new albums 35

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Alternatively, the process of rendering the form can be simplified by using the bundled formCollection view
helper. For example, in the view script above replace all the form-rendering echo statements with:
1 echo $this->formCollection($form);

Note: You still need to call the openTag and closeTag methods of the form. You replace the other echo statements
with the call to formCollection, above.
This will iterate over the form structure, calling the appropriate label, element and error view helpers for each element,
but you still have to wrap formCollection($form) with the open and close form tags. This helps reduce the complexity
of your view script in situations where the default HTML rendering of the form is acceptable.
You should now be able to use the Add new album link on the home page of the application to add a new album record.

10.2 Editing an album

Editing an album is almost identical to adding one, so the code is very similar. This time we use editAction() in
the AlbumController:
1 // module/Album/src/Album/Controller/AlbumController.php:
2 //...
3

4 // Add content to this method:

5 public function editAction()
6 {
7 $id = (int) $this->params()->fromRoute('id', 0);
8 if (!$id) {
9 return $this->redirect()->toRoute('album', array(
10 'action' => 'add'
11 ));
12 }
13

14 // Get the Album with the specified id. An exception is thrown

36 Chapter 10. Forms and actions

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

15 // if it cannot be found, in which case go to the index page.

16 try {
17 $album = $this->getAlbumTable()->getAlbum($id);
18 }
19 catch (\Exception $ex) {
20 return $this->redirect()->toRoute('album', array(
21 'action' => 'index'
22 ));
23 }
24

25 $form = new AlbumForm();

26 $form->bind($album);
27 $form->get('submit')->setAttribute('value', 'Edit');
28

29 $request = $this->getRequest();
30 if ($request->isPost()) {
31 $form->setInputFilter($album->getInputFilter());
32 $form->setData($request->getPost());
33

34 if ($form->isValid()) {
35 $this->getAlbumTable()->saveAlbum($album);
36

37 // Redirect to list of albums

38 return $this->redirect()->toRoute('album');
39 }
40 }
41

42 return array(
43 'id' => $id,
44 'form' => $form,
45 );
46 }
47 //...

This code should look comfortably familiar. Lets look at the differences from adding an album. Firstly, we look for
the id that is in the matched route and use it to load the album to be edited:
1 $id = (int) $this->params()->fromRoute('id', 0);
2 if (!$id) {
3 return $this->redirect()->toRoute('album', array(
4 'action' => 'add'
5 ));
6 }
7

8 // Get the album with the specified id. An exception is thrown

9 // if it cannot be found, in which case go to the index page.
10 try {
11 $album = $this->getAlbumTable()->getAlbum($id);
12 }
13 catch (\Exception $ex) {
14 return $this->redirect()->toRoute('album', array(
15 'action' => 'index'
16 ));
17 }

params is a controller plugin that provides a convenient way to retrieve parameters from the matched route. We use
it to retrieve the id from the route we created in the modules module.config.php. If the id is zero, then we
redirect to the add action, otherwise, we continue by getting the album entity from the database.

10.2. Editing an album 37

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

We have to check to make sure that the Album with the specified id can actually be found. If it cannot, then the data
access method throws an exception. We catch that exception and re-route the user to the index page.
1 $form = new AlbumForm();
2 $form->bind($album);
3 $form->get('submit')->setAttribute('value', 'Edit');

The forms bind() method attaches the model to the form. This is used in two ways:
When displaying the form, the initial values for each element are extracted from the model.
After successful validation in isValid(), the data from the form is put back into the model.
These operations are done using a hydrator object. There are a number of hydrators, but the default one
is Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator\ArraySerializable which expects to find two methods in the model:
getArrayCopy() and exchangeArray(). We have already written exchangeArray() in our Album entity,
so just need to write getArrayCopy():
1 // module/Album/src/Album/Model/Album.php:
2 // ...
3 public function exchangeArray($data)
4 {
5 $this->id = (isset($data['id'])) ? $data['id'] : null;
6 $this->artist = (isset($data['artist'])) ? $data['artist'] : null;
7 $this->title = (isset($data['title'])) ? $data['title'] : null;
8 }
9

10 // Add the following method:

11 public function getArrayCopy()
12 {
13 return get_object_vars($this);
14 }
15 // ...

As a result of using bind() with its hydrator, we do not need to populate the forms data back into the $album as
thats already been done, so we can just call the mappers saveAlbum() to store the changes back to the database.
The view template, edit.phtml, looks very similar to the one for adding an album:
1 <?php
2 // module/Album/view/album/album/edit.phtml:
3

4 $title = 'Edit album';

5 $this->headTitle($title);
6 ?>
7 <h1><?php echo $this->escapeHtml($title); ?></h1>
8

9 <?php
10 $form = $this->form;
11 $form->setAttribute('action', $this->url(
12 'album',
13 array(
14 'action' => 'edit',
15 'id' => $this->id,
16 )
17 ));
18 $form->prepare();
19

20 echo $this->form()->openTag($form);
21 echo $this->formHidden($form->get('id'));

38 Chapter 10. Forms and actions

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

22 echo $this->formRow($form->get('title'));
23 echo $this->formRow($form->get('artist'));
24 echo $this->formSubmit($form->get('submit'));
25 echo $this->form()->closeTag();

The only changes are to use the Edit Album title and set the forms action to the edit action too.
You should now be able to edit albums.

10.3 Deleting an album

To round out our application, we need to add deletion. We have a Delete link next to each album on our list page and
the naive approach would be to do a delete when its clicked. This would be wrong. Remembering our HTTP spec, we
recall that you shouldnt do an irreversible action using GET and should use POST instead.
We shall show a confirmation form when the user clicks delete and if they then click yes, we will do the deletion. As
the form is trivial, well code it directly into our view (Zend\Form is, after all, optional!).
Lets start with the action code in AlbumController::deleteAction():
1 // module/Album/src/Album/Controller/AlbumController.php:
2 //...
3 // Add content to the following method:
4 public function deleteAction()
5 {
6 $id = (int) $this->params()->fromRoute('id', 0);
7 if (!$id) {
8 return $this->redirect()->toRoute('album');
9 }
10

11 $request = $this->getRequest();
12 if ($request->isPost()) {
13 $del = $request->getPost('del', 'No');
14

15 if ($del == 'Yes') {
16 $id = (int) $request->getPost('id');
17 $this->getAlbumTable()->deleteAlbum($id);
18 }
19

20 // Redirect to list of albums

21 return $this->redirect()->toRoute('album');
22 }
23

24 return array(
25 'id' => $id,
26 'album' => $this->getAlbumTable()->getAlbum($id)
27 );
28 }
29 //...

As before, we get the id from the matched route, and check the request objects isPost() to determine whether
to show the confirmation page or to delete the album. We use the table object to delete the row using the
deleteAlbum() method and then redirect back the list of albums. If the request is not a POST, then we retrieve the
correct database record and assign to the view, along with the id.
The view script is a simple form:

10.3. Deleting an album 39

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1 <?php
2 // module/Album/view/album/album/delete.phtml:
3

4 $title = 'Delete album';

5 $this->headTitle($title);
6 ?>
7 <h1><?php echo $this->escapeHtml($title); ?></h1>
8

9 <p>Are you sure that you want to delete

10 '<?php echo $this->escapeHtml($album->title); ?>' by
11 '<?php echo $this->escapeHtml($album->artist); ?>'?
12 </p>
13 <?php
14 $url = $this->url('album', array(
15 'action' => 'delete',
16 'id' => $this->id,
17 ));
18 ?>
19 <form action="<?php echo $url; ?>" method="post">
20 <div>
21 <input type="hidden" name="id" value="<?php echo (int) $album->id; ?>" />
22 <input type="submit" name="del" value="Yes" />
23 <input type="submit" name="del" value="No" />
24 </div>
25 </form>

In this script, we display a confirmation message to the user and then a form with Yes and No buttons. In the
action, we checked specifically for the Yes value when doing the deletion.

10.4 Ensuring that the home page displays the list of albums

One final point. At the moment, the home page, http://zf2-tutorial.localhost/ doesnt display the list
of albums.
This is due to a route set up in the Application modules module.config.php. To change it, open
module/Application/config/module.config.php and find the home route:
1 'home' => array(
2 'type' => 'Zend\Mvc\Router\Http\Literal',
3 'options' => array(
4 'route' => '/',
5 'defaults' => array(
6 'controller' => 'Application\Controller\Index',
7 'action' => 'index',
8 ),
9 ),
10 ),

Change the controller from Application\Controller\Index to Album\Controller\Album:

1 'home' => array(
2 'type' => 'Zend\Mvc\Router\Http\Literal',
3 'options' => array(
4 'route' => '/',
5 'defaults' => array(
6 'controller' => 'Album\Controller\Album', // <-- change here
7 'action' => 'index',

40 Chapter 10. Forms and actions

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

8 ),
9 ),
10 ),

Thats it - you now have a fully working application!

10.4. Ensuring that the home page displays the list of albums 41
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

42 Chapter 10. Forms and actions

 CHAPTER 11

Conclusion

This concludes our brief look at building a simple, but fully functional, MVC application using Zend Framework 2.
In this tutorial we but briefly touched quite a number of different parts of the framework.
The most important part of applications built with Zend Framework 2 are the modules, the building blocks of any MVC
ZF2 application.
To ease the work with dependencies inside our applications, we use the service manager.
To be able to map a request to controllers and their actions, we use routes.
Data persistence, in most cases, includes using Zend\Db to communicate with one of the databases. Input data is
filtered and validated with input filters and together with Zend\Form they provide a strong bridge between the domain
model and the view layer.
Zend\View is responsible for the View in the MVC stack, together with a vast amount of view helpers.

43
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

44 Chapter 11. Conclusion

 CHAPTER 12

Introducing our first Blog Module

Now that we know about the basics of the Zend Framework 2 Skeleton Application, lets continue and create our very
own module. We will create a module named Blog. This module will display a list of database entries that represent
a single blog post. Each post will have three properties: id, text and title. We will create forms to enter new
posts into our database and to edit existing posts. Furthermore we will do so by using best-practices throughout the
whole QuickStart.

12.1 Writing a new Module

Lets start by creating a new folder under the /module directory called Blog.
To be recognized as a module by the ModuleManager all we need to do is create a PHP class named Module under
our modules namespace, which is Blog. Create the file /module/Blog/Module.php
1 <?php
2 // Filename: /module/Blog/Module.php
3 namespace Blog;
4

5 class Module
6 {
7 }

We now have a module that can be detected by ZF2s ModuleManager. Lets add this module to our application.
Although our module doesnt do anything yet, just having the Module.php class allows it to be loaded by ZF2s
ModuleManager. To do this, add an entry for Blog to the modules array inside the main application config file at
/config/application.config.php:
1 <?php
2 // Filename: /config/application.config.php
3 return array(
4 'modules' => array(
5 'Application',
6 'Blog'
7 ),
8

9 // ...
10 );

If you refresh your application you should see no change at all (but also no errors).
At this point its worth taking a step back to discuss what modules are for. In short, a module is an encapsulated set of
features for your application. A module might add features to the application that you can see, like our Blog module;

45
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

or it might provide background functionality for other modules in the application to use, such as interacting with a
third party API.
Organizing your code into modules makes it easier for you to reuse functionality in other application, or to use modules
written by the community.

12.2 Configuring the Module

The next thing were going to do is add a route to our application so that our module can be accessed through the
URL localhost:8080/blog. We do this by adding router configuration to our module, but first we need to let
the ModuleManager know that our module has configuration that it needs to load.
This is done by adding a getConfig() function to the Module class that returns the configuration. (This function
is defined in the ConfigProviderInterface although actually implementing this interface in the module class
is optional.) This function should return either an array or a Traversable object. Continue by editing your
/module/Blog/Module.php:
1 <?php
2 // Filename: /module/Blog/Module.php
3 namespace Blog;
4

5 use Zend\ModuleManager\Feature\ConfigProviderInterface;
6

7 class Module implements ConfigProviderInterface

8 {
9 public function getConfig()
10 {
11 return array();
12 }
13 }

With this our Module is now able to be configured. Configuration files can become quite big though and
keeping everything inside the getConfig() function wont be optimal. To help keep our project or-
ganized were going to put our array configuration in a separate file. Go ahead and create this file at
/module/Blog/config/module.config.php:
1 <?php
2 // Filename: /module/Blog/config/module.config.php
3 return array();

Now we will rewrite the getConfig() function to include this newly created file instead of directly returning the
array.
1 <?php
2 // Filename: /module/Blog/Module.php
3 namespace Blog;
4

5 use Zend\ModuleManager\Feature\ConfigProviderInterface;
6

7 class Module implements ConfigProviderInterface

8 {
9 public function getConfig()
10 {
11 return include __DIR__ . '/config/module.config.php';
12 }
13 }

46 Chapter 12. Introducing our first Blog Module

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Reload your application and youll see that everything remains as it was. Next we add the new route to our configura-
tion file:
1 <?php
2 // Filename: /module/Blog/config/module.config.php
3 return array(
4 // This lines opens the configuration for the RouteManager
5 'router' => array(
6 // Open configuration for all possible routes
7 'routes' => array(
8 // Define a new route called "post"
9 'post' => array(
10 // Define the routes type to be "Zend\Mvc\Router\Http\Literal", which is basically j
11 'type' => 'literal',
12 // Configure the route itself
13 'options' => array(
14 // Listen to "/blog" as uri
15 'route' => '/blog',
16 // Define default controller and action to be called when this route is matched
17 'defaults' => array(
18 'controller' => 'Blog\Controller\List',
19 'action' => 'index',
20 )
21 )
22 )
23 )
24 )
25 );

Weve now created a route called post that listens to the URL localhost:8080/blog. Whenever someone
accesses this route, the indexAction() function of the class Blog\Controller\List will be executed. How-
ever, this controller does not exist yet, so if you reload the page you will see this error message:
1 A 404 error occurred
2 Page not found.
3 The requested controller could not be mapped to an existing controller class.
4

5 Controller:
6 Blog\Controller\List(resolves to invalid controller class or alias: Blog\Controller\List)
7 No Exception available

We now need to tell our module where to find this controller named Blog\Controller\List.
To achieve this we have to add this key to the controllers configuration key inside your
/module/Blog/config/module.config.php.
1 <?php
2 // Filename: /module/Blog/config/module.config.php
3 return array(
4 'controllers' => array(
5 'invokables' => array(
6 'Blog\Controller\List' => 'Blog\Controller\ListController'
7 )
8 ),
9 'router' => array( /** Route Configuration */ )
10 );

This configuration defines Blog\Controller\List as an alias for the ListController under the namespace
Blog\Controller. Reloading the page should then give you:

12.2. Configuring the Module 47

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1 ( ! ) Fatal error: Class 'Blog\Controller\ListController' not found in {libPath}/Zend/ServiceManager

This error tells us that the application knows what class to load, but not where to find it. To fix this, we need to configure
autoloading for our Module. Autoloading is a process to allow PHP to automatically load classes on demand. For our
Module we set this up by adding a getAutoloaderConfig() function to our Module class. (This function is
defined in the AutoloaderProviderInterface, although the presence of the function is enough, actually implementing
the interface is optional.)
1 <?php
2 // Filename: /module/Blog/Module.php
3 namespace Blog;
4

5 use Zend\ModuleManager\Feature\AutoloaderProviderInterface;
6 use Zend\ModuleManager\Feature\ConfigProviderInterface;
7

8 class Module implements

9 AutoloaderProviderInterface,
10 ConfigProviderInterface
11 {
12 /**
13 * Return an array for passing to Zend\Loader\AutoloaderFactory.
14 *
15 * @return array
16 */
17 public function getAutoloaderConfig()
18 {
19 return array(
20 'Zend\Loader\StandardAutoloader' => array(
21 'namespaces' => array(
22 // Autoload all classes from namespace 'Blog' from '/module/Blog/src/Blog'
23 __NAMESPACE__ => __DIR__ . '/src/' . __NAMESPACE__,
24 )
25 )
26 );
27 }
28

29 /**
30 * Returns configuration to merge with application configuration
31 *
32 * @return array|\Traversable
33 */
34 public function getConfig()
35 {
36 return include __DIR__ . '/config/module.config.php';
37 }
38 }

Now this looks like a lot of change but dont be afraid. Weve added an getAutoloaderConfig() function which
provides configuration for the Zend\Loader\StandardAutoloader. This configuration tells the application
that classes in __NAMESPACE__ (Blog) can be found inside __DIR__ . /src/ . __NAMESPACE__
(/module/Blog/src/Blog).
The Zend\Loader\StandardAutoloader uses a PHP community driven standard called PSR-
0 <https://github.com/php-fig/fig-standards/blob/master/accepted/PSR-0.md>_. Amongst other things,
this standard defines a way for PHP to map class names to the file system. So with this config-
ured, the application knows that our Blog\Controller\ListController class should exist at
/module/Blog/src/Blog/Controller/ListController.php.

48 Chapter 12. Introducing our first Blog Module

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

If you refresh the browser now youll see the same error, as even though weve configured the autoloader, we still need
to create the controller class. Lets create this file now:
1 <?php
2 // Filename: /module/Blog/src/Blog/Controller/ListController.php
3 namespace Blog\Controller;
4

5 class ListController
6 {
7 }

Reloading the page now will finally result into a new screen. The new error message looks like this:
1 A 404 error occurred
2 Page not found.
3 The requested controller was not dispatchable.
4

5 Controller:
6 Blog\Controller\List(resolves to invalid controller class or alias: Blog\Controller\List)
7

8 Additional information:
9 Zend\Mvc\Exception\InvalidControllerException
10

11 File:
12 {libraryPath}/Zend/Mvc/Controller/ControllerManager.php:{lineNumber}
13 Message:
14 Controller of type Blog\Controller\ListController is invalid; must implement Zend\Stdlib\Dispatchabl

This happens because our controller must implement ZendStdlibDispatchableInterface in order to be dispatched
(or run) by ZendFrameworks MVC layer. ZendFramework provides some base controller implementation of it with
AbstractActionController, which we are going to use. Lets modify our controller now:
1 <?php
2 // Filename: /module/Blog/src/Blog/Controller/ListController.php
3 namespace Blog\Controller;
4

5 use Zend\Mvc\Controller\AbstractActionController;
6

7 class ListController extends AbstractActionController

8 {
9 }

Its now time for another refresh of the site. You should now see a new error message:
1 An error occurred
2 An error occurred during execution; please try again later.
3

4 Additional information:
5 Zend\View\Exception\RuntimeException
6

7 File:
8 {libraryPath}/library/Zend/View/Renderer/PhpRenderer.php:{lineNumber}
9 Message:
10 Zend\View\Renderer\PhpRenderer::render: Unable to render template "blog/list/index"; resolver could

Now the application tells you that a view template-file can not be rendered, which is to be expected as weve not created
it yet. The application is expecting it to be at /module/Blog/view/blog/list/index.phtml. Create this
file and add some dummy content to it:

12.2. Configuring the Module 49

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1 <!-- Filename: /module/Blog/view/blog/list/index.phtml -->

2 <h1>Blog\ListController::indexAction()</h1>

Before we continue let us quickly take a look at where we placed this file. Note that view files are found
within the /view subdirectory, not /src as they are not PHP class files, but template files for rendering
HTML. The following path however deserves some explanation but its very simple. First we have the lower-
cased namespace. Followed by the lowercased controller name without the appendix controller and lastly comes
the name of the action that we are accessing, again without the appendix action. All in all it looks like this:
/view/{namespace}/{controller}/{action}.phtml. This has become a community standard but can
potentionally be changed by you at any time.
However creating this file alone is not enough and this brings as to the final topic of this part of the QuickStart.
We need to let the application know where to look for view files. We do this within our modules configuration file
module.config.php.
1 <?php
2 // Filename: /module/Blog/config/module.config.php
3 return array(
4 'view_manager' => array(
5 'template_path_stack' => array(
6 __DIR__ . '/../view',
7 ),
8 ),
9 'controllers' => array( /** Controller Configuration */),
10 'router' => array( /** Route Configuration */ )
11 );

The above configuration tells the application that the folder /module/Blog/view has view files in it that match
the above described default scheme. It is important to note that with this you can not only ship view files for your
module but you can also overwrite view files from other modules.
Reload your site now. Finally we are at a point where we see something different than an error being displayed.
Congratulations, not only have you created a simple Hello World style module, you also learned about many error
messages and their causes. If we didnt exhaust you too much, continue with our QuickStart and lets create a module
that actually does something.

50 Chapter 12. Introducing our first Blog Module

 CHAPTER 13

Introducing Services and the ServiceManager

In the previous chapter weve learned how to create a simple Hello World Application in Zend Framework 2. This is a
good start and easy to understand but the application itself doesnt really do anything. In this chapter we will introduce
you into the concept of Services and with this the introduction to Zend\ServiceManager\ServiceManager.

13.1 What is a Service?

A Service is an object that executes complex application logic. Its the part of the application that wires all difficult
stuff together and gives you easy to understand results.
For what were trying to accomplish with our Blog-Module this means that we want to have a Service that will give
us the data that we want. The Service will get its data from some source and when writing the Service we dont really
care about what the source actually is. The Service will be written against an Interface that we define and that
future Data-Providers have to implement.

13.2 Writing the PostService

When writing a Service it is a common best-practice to define an Interface first. Interfaces are a good way
to ensure that other programmers can easily build extensions for our Services using their own implementations. In
other words, they can write Services that have the same function names but internally do completely different things
but have the same specified result.
In our case we want to create a PostService. This means first we are going to define a
PostServiceInterface. The task of our Service is to provide us with data of our blog posts. For now we
are going to focus on the read-only side of things. We will define a function that will give us all posts and we will
define a function that will give us a single post.
Lets start by creating the Interface at /module/Blog/src/Blog/Service/PostServiceInterface.php
1 <?php
2 // Filename: /module/Blog/src/Blog/Service/PostServiceInterface.php
3 namespace Blog\Service;
4

5 use Blog\Model\PostInterface;
6

7 interface PostServiceInterface
8 {
9 /**
10 * Should return a set of all blog posts that we can iterate over. Single entries of the array a
11 * implementing \Blog\Model\PostInterface

51
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

12 *
13 * @return array|PostInterface[]
14 */
15 public function findAllPosts();
16

17 /**
18 * Should return a single blog post
19 *
20 * @param int $id Identifier of the Post that should be returned
21 * @return PostInterface
22 */
23 public function findPost($id);
24 }

As you can see we define two functions. The first being findAllPosts() that is supposed to return all posts and
the second one being findPost($id) that is supposed to return the post matching the given identifier $id. Whats
new in here is the fact that we actually define a return value that doesnt exist yet. We make the assumption that the
return value all in all are of type Blog\Model\PostInterface. We will define this class at a later point and for
now we simply create the PostService first.
Create the class PostService at /module/Blog/src/Blog/Service/PostService.php, be sure to
implement the PostServiceInterface and its required functions (we will fill in these functions later). You
then should have a class that looks like the following:
1 <?php
2 // Filename: /module/Blog/src/Blog/Service/PostService.php
3 namespace Blog\Service;
4

5 class PostService implements PostServiceInterface

6 {
7 /**
8 * {@inheritDoc}
9 */
10 public function findAllPosts()
11 {
12 // TODO: Implement findAllPosts() method.
13 }
14

15 /**
16 * {@inheritDoc}
17 */
18 public function findPost($id)
19 {
20 // TODO: Implement findPost() method.
21 }
22 }

13.3 Writing the required Model Files

Since our PostService will return Models, we should create them, too. Be sure to write an
Interface for the Model first! Lets create /module/Blog/src/Blog/Model/PostInterface.php and
/module/Blog/src/Blog/Model/Post.php. First the PostInterface:
1 <?php
2 // Filename: /module/Blog/src/Blog/Model/PostInterface.php
3 namespace Blog\Model;

52 Chapter 13. Introducing Services and the ServiceManager

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

5 interface PostInterface
6 {
7 /**
8 * Will return the ID of the blog post
9 *
10 * @return int
11 */
12 public function getId();
13

14 /**
15 * Will return the TITLE of the blog post
16 *
17 * @return string
18 */
19 public function getTitle();
20

21 /**
22 * Will return the TEXT of the blog post
23 *
24 * @return string
25 */
26 public function getText();
27 }

Notice that we only created getter-functions here. This is because right now we dont bother how the data gets inside
the Post-class. All we care for is that were able to access the properties through these getter-functions.
And now well create the appropriate Model file associated with the interface. Make sure to set the required class
properties and fill the getter functions defined by our PostInterface with some useful content. Even if our
interface doesnt care about setter functions we will write them as we will fill our class with data through these. You
then should have a class that looks like the following:
1 <?php
2 // Filename: /module/Blog/src/Blog/Model/Post.php
3 namespace Blog\Model;
4

5 class Post implements PostInterface

6 {
7 /**
8 * @var int
9 */
10 protected $id;
11

12 /**
13 * @var string
14 */
15 protected $title;
16

17 /**
18 * @var string
19 */
20 protected $text;
21

22 /**
23 * {@inheritDoc}
24 */
25 public function getId()
26 {

13.3. Writing the required Model Files 53

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

27 return $this->id;
28 }
29

30 /**
31 * @param int $id
32 */
33 public function setId($id)
34 {
35 $this->id = $id;
36 }
37

38 /**
39 * {@inheritDoc}
40 */
41 public function getTitle()
42 {
43 return $this->title;
44 }
45

46 /**
47 * @param string $title
48 */
49 public function setTitle($title)
50 {
51 $this->title = $title;
52 }
53

54 /**
55 * {@inheritDoc}
56 */
57 public function getText()
58 {
59 return $this->text;
60 }
61

62 /**
63 * @param string $text
64 */
65 public function setText($text)
66 {
67 $this->text = $text;
68 }
69 }

13.4 Bringing Life into our PostService

Now that we have our Model files in place we can actually bring life into our PostService class. To keep the
Service-Layer easy to understand for now we will only return some hard-coded content from our PostService
class directly. Create a property inside the PostService called $data and make this an array of our Model type.
Edit PostService like this:
1 <?php
2 // Filename: /module/Blog/src/Blog/Service/PostService.php
3 namespace Blog\Service;
4

5 class PostService implements PostServiceInterface

54 Chapter 13. Introducing Services and the ServiceManager

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

6 {
7 protected $data = array(
8 array(
9 'id' => 1,
10 'title' => 'Hello World #1',
11 'text' => 'This is our first blog post!'
12 ),
13 array(
14 'id' => 2,
15 'title' => 'Hello World #2',
16 'text' => 'This is our second blog post!'
17 ),
18 array(
19 'id' => 3,
20 'title' => 'Hello World #3',
21 'text' => 'This is our third blog post!'
22 ),
23 array(
24 'id' => 4,
25 'title' => 'Hello World #4',
26 'text' => 'This is our fourth blog post!'
27 ),
28 array(
29 'id' => 5,
30 'title' => 'Hello World #5',
31 'text' => 'This is our fifth blog post!'
32 )
33 );
34

35 /**
36 * {@inheritDoc}
37 */
38 public function findAllPosts()
39 {
40 // TODO: Implement findAllPosts() method.
41 }
42

43 /**
44 * {@inheritDoc}
45 */
46 public function findPost($id)
47 {
48 // TODO: Implement findPost() method.
49 }
50 }

After we now have some data, lets modify our find*() functions to return the appropriate model files:
1 <?php
2 // Filename: /module/Blog/src/Blog/Service/PostService.php
3 namespace Blog\Service;
4

5 use Blog\Model\Post;
6

7 class PostService implements PostServiceInterface

8 {
9 protected $data = array(
10 array(
11 'id' => 1,

13.4. Bringing Life into our PostService 55

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

12 'title' => 'Hello World #1',

13 'text' => 'This is our first blog post!'
14 ),
15 array(
16 'id' => 2,
17 'title' => 'Hello World #2',
18 'text' => 'This is our second blog post!'
19 ),
20 array(
21 'id' => 3,
22 'title' => 'Hello World #3',
23 'text' => 'This is our third blog post!'
24 ),
25 array(
26 'id' => 4,
27 'title' => 'Hello World #4',
28 'text' => 'This is our fourth blog post!'
29 ),
30 array(
31 'id' => 5,
32 'title' => 'Hello World #5',
33 'text' => 'This is our fifth blog post!'
34 )
35 );
36

37 /**
38 * {@inheritDoc}
39 */
40 public function findAllPosts()
41 {
42 $allPosts = array();
43

44 foreach ($this->data as $index => $post) {

45 $allPosts[] = $this->findPost($index);
46 }
47

48 return $allPosts;
49 }
50

51 /**
52 * {@inheritDoc}
53 */
54 public function findPost($id)
55 {
56 $postData = $this->data[$id];
57

58 $model = new Post();

59 $model->setId($postData['id']);
60 $model->setTitle($postData['title']);
61 $model->setText($postData['text']);
62

63 return $model;
64 }
65 }

As you can see, both our functions now have appropriate return values. Please note that from a technical point of view
the current implementation is far from perfect. We will improve this Service a lot in the future but for now we have a
working Service that is able to give us some data in a way that is defined by our PostServiceInterface.

56 Chapter 13. Introducing Services and the ServiceManager

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

13.5 Bringing the Service into the Controller

Now that we have our PostService written, we want to get access to this Service in our Controllers. For this task
we will step foot into a new topic called Dependency Injection, short DI.
When were talking about dependency injection were talking about a way to get dependencies into our classes. The
most common form, Constructor Injection, is used for all dependencies that are required by a class at all times.
In our case we want to have our Blog-Modules ListController somehow interact with our PostService. This
means that the class PostService is a dependency of the class ListController. Without the PostService
our ListController will not be able to function properly. To make sure that our ListController will always
get the appropriate dependency, we will first define the dependency inside the ListControllers constructor
function __construct(). Go on and modify the ListController like this:
1 <?php
2 // Filename: /module/Blog/src/Blog/Controller/ListController.php
3 namespace Blog\Controller;
4

5 use Blog\Service\PostServiceInterface;
6 use Zend\Mvc\Controller\AbstractActionController;
7

8 class ListController extends AbstractActionController

9 {
10 /**
11 * @var \Blog\Service\PostServiceInterface
12 */
13 protected $postService;
14

15 public function __construct(PostServiceInterface $postService)

16 {
17 $this->postService = $postService;
18 }
19 }

As you can see our __construct() function now has a required argument. We will not be able to call this class
anymore without passing it an instance of a class that matches our defined PostServiceInterface. If you were
to go back to your browser and reload your project with the url localhost:8080/blog, youd see the following
error message:
1 ( ! ) Catchable fatal error: Argument 1 passed to Blog\Controller\ListController::__construct()
2 must be an instance of Blog\Service\PostServiceInterface, none given,
3 called in {libraryPath}\Zend\ServiceManager\AbstractPluginManager.php on line {lineNumber}
4 and defined in \module\Blog\src\Blog\Controller\ListController.php on line 15

And this error message is expected. It tells you exactly that our ListController expects to be passed an im-
plementation of the PostServiceInterface. So how do we make sure that our ListController will
receive such an implementation? To solve this, we need to tell the application how to create instances of the
Blog\Controller\ListController. If you remember back to when we created the controller, we added
an entry to the invokables array in the module config:
1 <?php
2 // Filename: /module/Blog/config/module.config.php
3 return array(
4 'view_manager' => array( /** ViewManager Config */ ),
5 'controllers' => array(
6 'invokables' => array(
7 'Blog\Controller\List' => 'Blog\Controller\ListController'
8 )

13.5. Bringing the Service into the Controller 57

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

9 ),
10 'router' => array( /** Router Config */ )
11 );

An invokable is a class that can be constructed without any arguments. Since our
Blog\Controller\ListController now has a required argument, we need to change this. The
ControllerManager, which is responsible for instantiating controllers, also support using factories.
A factory is a class that creates instances of another class. Well now create one for our ListController.
Lets modify our configuration like this:
1 <?php
2 // Filename: /module/Blog/config/module.config.php
3 return array(
4 'view_manager' => array( /** ViewManager Config */ ),
5 'controllers' => array(
6 'factories' => array(
7 'Blog\Controller\List' => 'Blog\Factory\ListControllerFactory'
8 )
9 ),
10 'router' => array( /** Router Config */ )
11 );

As you can see we no longer have the key invokables, instead we now have the key factories.
Furthermore the value of our controller name Blog\Controller\List has been changed to not
match the class Blog\Controller\ListController directly but to rather call a class called
Blog\Factory\ListControllerFactory. If you refresh your browser youll see a different error message:
1 An error occurred
2 An error occurred during execution; please try again later.
3

4 Additional information:
5 Zend\ServiceManager\Exception\ServiceNotCreatedException
6

7 File:
8 {libraryPath}\Zend\ServiceManager\AbstractPluginManager.php:{lineNumber}
9

10 Message:
11 While attempting to create blogcontrollerlist(alias: Blog\Controller\List) an invalid factory was re

This message should be quite easy to understand. The Zend\Mvc\Controller\ControllerManager is ac-

cessing Blog\Controller\List, which internally is saved as blogcontrollerlist. While it does so it
notices that a factory class is supposed to be called for this controller name. However, it doesnt find this factory class
so to the Manager it is an invalid factory. Using easy words: the Manager doesnt find the Factory class so thats
probably where our error lies. And of course, we have yet to write the factory, so lets go ahead and do this.

13.6 Writing a Factory Class

Factory classes within Zend Framework 2 always need to implement the

Zend\ServiceManager\FactoryInterface. Implementing this class lets the ServiceManager know
that the function createService() is supposed to be called. And createService() actually expects to be
passed an instance of the ServiceLocatorInterface so the ServiceManager will always inject this using Dependency
Injection as we have learned above. Lets implement our factory class:
1 <?php
2 // Filename: /module/Blog/src/Blog/Factory/ListControllerFactory.php
3 namespace Blog\Factory;

58 Chapter 13. Introducing Services and the ServiceManager

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

5 use Blog\Controller\ListController;
6 use Zend\ServiceManager\FactoryInterface;
7 use Zend\ServiceManager\ServiceLocatorInterface;
8

9 class ListControllerFactory implements FactoryInterface

10 {
11 /**
12 * Create service
13 *
14 * @param ServiceLocatorInterface $serviceLocator
15 *
16 * @return mixed
17 */
18 public function createService(ServiceLocatorInterface $serviceLocator)
19 {
20 $realServiceLocator = $serviceLocator->getServiceLocator();
21 $postService = $realServiceLocator->get('Blog\Service\PostServiceInterface');
22

23 return new ListController($postService);

24 }
25 }

Now this looks complicated! Lets start to look at the $realServiceLocator. When using a Factory-Class
that will be called from the ControllerManager it will actually inject itself as the $serviceLocator.
However, we need the real ServiceManager to get to our Service-Classes. This is why we call the function
getServiceLocator() who will give us the real ServiceManager.
After we have the $realServiceLocator set up we try to get a Service called
Blog\Service\PostServiceInterface. This name that were accessing is supposed to return a Ser-
vice that matches the PostServiceInterface. This Service is then passed along to the ListController
which will directly be returned.
Note though that we have yet to register a Service called Blog\Service\PostServiceInterface. Theres
no magic happening that does this for us just because we give the Service the name of an Interface. Refresh your
browser and you will see this error message:
1 An error occurred
2 An error occurred during execution; please try again later.
3

4 Additional information:
5 Zend\ServiceManager\Exception\ServiceNotFoundException
6

7 File:
8 {libraryPath}\Zend\ServiceManager\ServiceManager.php:{lineNumber}
9

10 Message:
11 Zend\ServiceManager\ServiceManager::get was unable to fetch or create an instance for Blog\Service\P

Exactly what we expected. Somewhere in our application - currently our factory class - a service called
Blog\Service\PostServiceInterface is requested but the ServiceManager doesnt know about this
Service yet. Therefore it isnt able to create an instance for the requested name.

13.7 Registering Services

Registering a Service is as simple as registering a Controller. All we need to do is modify our module.config.php
and add a new key called service_manager that then has invokables and factories, too, the same way

13.7. Registering Services 59

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

like we have it inside our controllers array. Check out the new configuration file:
1 <?php
2 // Filename: /module/Blog/config/module.config.php
3 return array(
4 'service_manager' => array(
5 'invokables' => array(
6 'Blog\Service\PostServiceInterface' => 'Blog\Service\PostService'
7 )
8 ),
9 'view_manager' => array( /** View Manager Config */ ),
10 'controllers' => array( /** Controller Config */ ),
11 'router' => array( /** Router Config */ )
12 );

As you can see we now have added a new Service that listens to the name
Blog\Service\PostServiceInterface and points to our own implementation which is
Blog\Service\PostService. Since our Service has no dependencies we are able to add this Service
under the invokables array. Try refreshing your browser. You should see no more error messages but rather
exactly the page that we have created in the previous chapter of the Tutorial.

13.8 Using the Service at our Controller

Lets now use the PostService within our ListController. For this we will need to overwrite the default
indexAction() and return the values of our PostService into the view. Modify the ListController like
this:
1 <?php
2 // Filename: /module/Blog/src/Blog/Controller/ListController.php
3 namespace Blog\Controller;
4

5 use Blog\Service\PostServiceInterface;
6 use Zend\Mvc\Controller\AbstractActionController;
7 use Zend\View\Model\ViewModel;
8

9 class ListController extends AbstractActionController

10 {
11 /**
12 * @var \Blog\Service\PostServiceInterface
13 */
14 protected $postService;
15

16 public function __construct(PostServiceInterface $postService)

17 {
18 $this->postService = $postService;
19 }
20

21 public function indexAction()

22 {
23 return new ViewModel(array(
24 'posts' => $this->postService->findAllPosts()
25 ));
26 }
27 }

First please note that our controller imported another class. We need to import Zend\View\Model\ViewModel,
which usually is what your Controllers will return. When returning an instance of a ViewModel youre able to always

60 Chapter 13. Introducing Services and the ServiceManager

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

assign so called View-Variables. In this case we have assigned a variable called $posts with the value of whatever
the function findAllPosts() of our PostService returns. In our case it is an array of Blog\Model\Post
classes. Refreshing the browser wont change anything yet because we obviously need to modify our view-file to be
able to display the data we want to.

Note: You do not actually need to return an instance of ViewModel. When you return a normal php array it will
internally be converted into a ViewModel. So in short:
return new ViewModel(array(foo => bar));
equals
return array(foo => bar);

13.9 Accessing View Variables

When pushing variables to the view they are accessible through two ways. Either directly like $this->posts
or implicitly like $posts. Both are the same, however, calling $posts implicitly will result in a little round-trip
through the __call() function.
Lets modify our view to display a table of all blog posts that our PostService returns.
1 <!-- Filename: /module/Blog/view/blog/list/index.phtml -->
2 <h1>Blog</h1>
3

4 <?php foreach ($this->posts as $post): ?>

5 <article>
6 <h1 id="post<?= $post->getId() ?>"><?= $post->getTitle() ?></h1>
7 <p>
8 <?= $post->getText() ?>
9 </p>
10 </article>
11 <?php endforeach ?>

In here we simply run a foreach over the array $this->posts. Since every single entry of our array is of type
Blog\Model\Post we can use the respective getter functions to receive the data we want to get.

13.10 Summary

And with this the current chapter is finished. We now have learned how to interact with the ServiceManager and
we also know what dependency injection is all about. We are now able to pass variables from our services into the
view through a controller and we know how to iterate over arrays inside a view-script.
In the next chapter we will take a first look at the things we should do when we want to get data from a database.

13.9. Accessing View Variables 61

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

62 Chapter 13. Introducing Services and the ServiceManager

 CHAPTER 14

Preparing for different Database-Backends

In the previous chapter we have created a PostService that returns some data from blog posts. While this served
an easy to understand learning purpose it is quite impractical for real world applications. No one would want to modify
the source files each time a new post is added. But luckily we all know about databases. All we need to learn is how
to interact with databases from our ZF2 application.
But there is a catch. There are many database backend systems, namely SQL and NoSQL databases. While in a
real-world you would probably jump right to the solution that fits you the most at the time being, it is a better practice
to create another layer in front of the actual database access that abstracts the database interaction. We call this the
Mapper-Layer.

14.1 What is database abstraction?

The term database abstraction may sound quite confusing but this is actually a very simple thing.
Consider a SQL and a NoSQL database. Both have methods for CRUD (Create, Read, Update,
Delete) operations. For example to query the database against a given row in MySQL youd do a
mysqli_query(SELECT foo FROM bar). But using an ORM for MongoDB for example youd do some-
thing like $mongoODM->getRepository(bar)->find(foo). Both engines would give you the same
result but the execution is different.
So if we start using a SQL database and write those codes directly into our PostService and a year later we decide
to switch to a NoSQL database, we would literally have to delete all previously coded lines and write new ones. And
in a few years later a new thing pops up and we have to delete and re-write codes again. This isnt really the best
approach and thats precisely where database abstraction or the Mapper-Layer comes in handy.
Basically what we do is to create a new Interface. This interface then defines how our database interaction should
function but the actual implementation is left out. But lets stop the theory and go over to code this thing.

14.2 Creating the PostMapperInterface

Lets first think a bit about what possible database interactions we can think of. We need to be able to:
find a single blog post
find all blog posts
insert new blog post
update existing blog posts
delete existing blog posts

63
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Those are the most important ones Id guess for now. Considering insert() and update() both write into the
database itd be nice to have just a single save()-function that calls the proper function internally.
Start by creating a new file inside a new namespace Blog\Mapper called PostMapperInterface.php and
add the following content to it.
1 <?php
2 // Filename: /module/Blog/src/Blog/Mapper/PostMapperInterface.php
3 namespace Blog\Mapper;
4

5 use Blog\Model\PostInterface;
6

7 interface PostMapperInterface
8 {
9 /**
10 * @param int|string $id
11 * @return PostInterface
12 * @throws \InvalidArgumentException
13 */
14 public function find($id);
15

16 /**
17 * @return array|PostInterface[]
18 */
19 public function findAll();
20 }

As you can see we define two different functions. We say that a mapper-implementation is supposed to have one
find()-function that returns a single object implementing the PostInterface. Then we want to have one func-
tion called findAll() that returns an array of objects implementing the PostInterface. Definitions for a
possible save() or delete() functionality will not be added to the interface yet since well only be looking at the
read-only side of things for now. They will be added at a later point though!

14.3 Refactoring the PostService

Now that we have defined how our mapper should act we can make use of it inside our PostService. To start off
the refactoring process lets empty our class and delete all current content. Then implement the functions defined by
the PostServiceInterface and you should have an empty PostService that looks like this:
The first thing we need to keep in mind is that this interface isnt implemented in our PostService but is rather
used as a dependency. A required dependency, therefore we need to create a __construct() that takes any imple-
mentation of this interface as a parameter. Also you should create a protected variable to store the parameter into.
1 <?php
2 // Filename: /module/Blog/src/Blog/Service/PostService.php
3 namespace Blog\Service;
4

5 use Blog\Mapper\PostMapperInterface;
6

7 class PostService implements PostServiceInterface

8 {
9 /**
10 * @var \Blog\Mapper\PostMapperInterface
11 */
12 protected $postMapper;
13

14 /**

64 Chapter 14. Preparing for different Database-Backends

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

15 * @param PostMapperInterface $postMapper

16 */
17 public function __construct(PostMapperInterface $postMapper)
18 {
19 $this->postMapper = $postMapper;
20 }
21

22 /**
23 * {@inheritDoc}
24 */
25 public function findAllPosts()
26 {
27 }
28

29 /**
30 * {@inheritDoc}
31 */
32 public function findPost($id)
33 {
34 }
35 }

With this we now require an implementation of the PostMapperInterface for our PostService to function.
Since none exists yet we can not get our application to work and well be seeing the following PHP error:
1 Catchable fatal error: Argument 1 passed to Blog\Service\PostService::__construct()
2 must implement interface Blog\Mapper\PostMapperInterface, none given,
3 called in {path}\module\Blog\src\Blog\Service\PostServiceFactory.php on line 19
4 and defined in {path}\module\Blog\src\Blog\Service\PostService.php on line 17

But the power of what were doing lies within assumptions that we can make. This PostService will always
have a mapper passed as an argument. So in our find*()-functions we can assume that it is there. Recall that the
PostMapperInterface defines a find($id) and a findAll() function. Lets use those within our Service-
functions:
1 <?php
2 // Filename: /module/Blog/src/Blog/Service/PostService.php
3 namespace Blog\Service;
4

5 use Blog\Mapper\PostMapperInterface;
6

7 class PostService implements PostServiceInterface

8 {
9 /**
10 * @var \Blog\Mapper\PostMapperInterface
11 */
12 protected $postMapper;
13

14 /**
15 * @param PostMapperInterface $postMapper
16 */
17 public function __construct(PostMapperInterface $postMapper)
18 {
19 $this->postMapper = $postMapper;
20 }
21

22 /**
23 * {@inheritDoc}

14.3. Refactoring the PostService 65

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

24 */
25 public function findAllPosts()
26 {
27 return $this->postMapper->findAll();
28 }
29

30 /**
31 * {@inheritDoc}
32 */
33 public function findPost($id)
34 {
35 return $this->postMapper->find($id);
36 }
37 }

Looking at this code youll see that we use the postMapper to get access to the data we want. How this is happening
isnt the business of the PostService anymore. But the PostService does know what data it will receive and
thats the only important thing.

14.4 The PostService has a dependency

Now that we have introduced the PostMapperInterface as a dependency for the PostService we are no
longer able to define this service as an invokable because it has a dependency. So we need to create a factory for
the service. Do this by creating a factory the same way we have done for the ListController. First change the
configuration from an invokables-entry to a factories-entry and assign the proper factory class:
1 <?php
2 // Filename: /module/Blog/config/module.config.php
3 return array(
4 'service_manager' => array(
5 'factories' => array(
6 'Blog\Service\PostServiceInterface' => 'Blog\Factory\PostServiceFactory'
7 )
8 ),
9 'view_manager' => array( /** ViewManager Config */ ),
10 'controllers' => array( /** ControllerManager Config */ ),
11 'router' => array( /** Router Config */ )
12 );

Going by the above configuration we now need to create the class Blog\Factory\PostServiceFactory so
lets go ahead and create it:
1 <?php
2 // Filename: /module/Blog/src/Blog/Factory/PostServiceFactory.php
3 namespace Blog\Factory;
4

5 use Blog\Service\PostService;
6 use Zend\ServiceManager\FactoryInterface;
7 use Zend\ServiceManager\ServiceLocatorInterface;
8

9 class PostServiceFactory implements FactoryInterface

10 {
11 /**
12 * Create service
13 *
14 * @param ServiceLocatorInterface $serviceLocator

66 Chapter 14. Preparing for different Database-Backends

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

15 * @return mixed
16 */
17 public function createService(ServiceLocatorInterface $serviceLocator)
18 {
19 return new PostService(
20 $serviceLocator->get('Blog\Mapper\PostMapperInterface')
21 );
22 }
23 }

With this in place you should now be able to see the ServiceNotFoundException, thrown by the
ServiceManager, saying that the requested service cannot be found.
1 Additional information:
2 Zend\ServiceManager\Exception\ServiceNotFoundException
3 File:
4 {libraryPath}\Zend\ServiceManager\ServiceManager.php:529
5 Message:
6 Zend\ServiceManager\ServiceManager::get was unable to fetch or create an instance for Blog\Mapper\Po

14.5 Conclusion

We finalize this chapter with the fact that we successfully managed to keep the database-logic outside of our service.
Now we are able to implement different database solution depending on our need and change them easily when the
time requires it.
In the next chapter we will create the actual implementation of our PostMapperInterface using Zend\Db\Sql.

14.5. Conclusion 67
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

68 Chapter 14. Preparing for different Database-Backends

 CHAPTER 15

Introducing Zend\Db\Sql and Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator

In the last chapter we have introduced the mapping layer and created the PostMapperInterface. Now it is
time to create an implementation of this interface so that we can make use of our PostService again. As an
introductionary example we will be using the Zend\Db\Sql classes. So lets jump right into it.

15.1 Preparing the Database

Before we can start using a database we should prepare one. In this example well be using a MySQL-Database called
blog which is accessible on the localhost. The database will have one table called posts with three columns
id, title and text with the id being the primary key. For demo purpose, please use this database-dump.
1 CREATE TABLE posts (
2 id int(11) NOT NULL auto_increment,
3 title varchar(100) NOT NULL,
4 text TEXT NOT NULL,
5 PRIMARY KEY (id)
6 );
7

8 INSERT INTO posts (title, text)

9 VALUES ('Blog #1', 'Welcome to my first blog post');
10 INSERT INTO posts (title, text)
11 VALUES ('Blog #2', 'Welcome to my second blog post');
12 INSERT INTO posts (title, text)
13 VALUES ('Blog #3', 'Welcome to my third blog post');
14 INSERT INTO posts (title, text)
15 VALUES ('Blog #4', 'Welcome to my fourth blog post');
16 INSERT INTO posts (title, text)
17 VALUES ('Blog #5', 'Welcome to my fifth blog post');

15.2 Quick Facts Zend\Db\Sql

To create queries against a database using Zend\Db\Sql you need to have a database connection available. This
connection is served through any class implementing the Zend\Db\Adapter\AdapterInterface. The most
handy way to create such a class is through the use of the Zend\Db\Adapter\AdapterServiceFactory
which listens to the config-key db. Lets start by creating the required configuration entries and modify your
module.config.php adding a new top-level key called db:

69
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1 <?php
2 // Filename: /module/Blog/config/module.config.php
3 return array(
4 'db' => array(
5 'driver' => 'Pdo',
6 'username' => 'SECRET_USERNAME', //edit this
7 'password' => 'SECRET_PASSWORD', //edit this
8 'dsn' => 'mysql:dbname=blog;host=localhost',
9 'driver_options' => array(
10 \PDO::MYSQL_ATTR_INIT_COMMAND => 'SET NAMES \'UTF8\''
11 )
12 ),
13 'service_manager' => array( /** ServiceManager Config */ ),
14 'view_manager' => array( /** ViewManager Config */ ),
15 'controllers' => array( /** ControllerManager Config */ ),
16 'router' => array( /** Router Config */ )
17 );

As you can see weve added the db-key and inside we create the parameters required to create a driver instance.

Note: One important thing to note is that in general you do not want to have your credentials inside the normal
configuration file but rather in a local configuration file like /config/autoload/db.local.php, that will not
be pushed to servers using zend-skeletons .gitignore file. Keep this in mind when you share your codes!
Taking this example you would have this file:
1 <?php
2 // Filename: /config/autoload/db.local.php
3 return array(
4 'db' => array(
5 'driver' => 'Pdo',
6 'username' => 'SECRET_USERNAME', //edit this
7 'password' => 'SECRET_PASSWORD', //edit this
8 'dsn' => 'mysql:dbname=blog;host=localhost',
9 'driver_options' => array(
10 \PDO::MYSQL_ATTR_INIT_COMMAND => 'SET NAMES \'UTF8\''
11 )
12 ),
13 );

The next thing we need to do is by making use of the AdapterServiceFactory. This is a ServiceManager
entry that will look like the following:
1 <?php
2 // Filename: /module/Blog/config/module.config.php
3 return array(
4 'db' => array(
5 'driver' => 'Pdo',
6 'username' => 'SECRET_USERNAME', //edit this
7 'password' => 'SECRET_PASSWORD', //edit this
8 'dsn' => 'mysql:dbname=blog;host=localhost',
9 'driver_options' => array(
10 \PDO::MYSQL_ATTR_INIT_COMMAND => 'SET NAMES \'UTF8\''
11 )
12 ),
13 'service_manager' => array(
14 'factories' => array(
15 'Blog\Service\PostServiceInterface' => 'Blog\Factory\PostServiceFactory',

70 Chapter 15. Introducing Zend\Db\Sql and Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

16 'Zend\Db\Adapter\Adapter' => 'Zend\Db\Adapter\AdapterServiceFactory'

17 )
18 ),
19 'view_manager' => array( /** ViewManager Config */ ),
20 'controllers' => array( /** ControllerManager Config */ ),
21 'router' => array( /** Router Config */ )
22 );

Note the new Service that we called Zend\Db\Adapter\Adapter. Calling this Service will now always give
back a running instance of the Zend\Db\Adapter\AdapterInterface depending on what driver we assign.
With the adapter in place were now able to run queries against the database. The construction of queries
is best done through the QueryBuilder features of Zend\Db\Sql which are Zend\Db\Sql\Sql for se-
lect queries, Zend\Db\Sql\Insert for insert queries, Zend\Db\Sql\Update for update queries and
Zend\Db\Sql\Delete for delete queries. The basic workflow of these components is:
1. Build a query using Sql, Insert, Update or Delete
2. Create an Sql-Statement from the Sql object
3. Execute the query
4. Do something with the result
Knowing this we can now write the implementation for the PostMapperInterface.

15.3 Writing the mapper implementation

Our mapper implementation will reside inside the same namespace as its interface. Go ahead and create a class called
ZendDbSqlMapper and implement the PostMapperInterface.
Now recall what we have learned earlier. For Zend\Db\Sql to function we will need a working implementation of
the AdapterInterface. This is a requirement and therefore will be injected using constructor-injection. Create a
__construct() function that accepts an AdapterInterface as parameter and store it within the class.
1 <?php
2 // Filename: /module/Blog/src/Blog/Mapper/ZendDbSqlMapper.php
3 namespace Blog\Mapper;
4

5 use Blog\Model\PostInterface;
6 use Zend\Db\Adapter\AdapterInterface;
7

8 class ZendDbSqlMapper implements PostMapperInterface

9 {
10 /**
11 * @var \Zend\Db\Adapter\AdapterInterface
12 */
13 protected $dbAdapter;
14

15 /**
16 * @param AdapterInterface $dbAdapter
17 */
18 public function __construct(AdapterInterface $dbAdapter)
19 {
20 $this->dbAdapter = $dbAdapter;
21 }
22

23 /**

15.3. Writing the mapper implementation 71

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

24 * @param int|string $id

25 *
26 * @return PostInterface
27 * @throws \InvalidArgumentException
28 */
29 public function find($id)
30 {
31 }
32

33 /**
34 * @return array|PostInterface[]
35 */
36 public function findAll()
37 {
38 }
39 }

As you know from previous chapters, whenever we have a required parameter we need to write a factory for the class.
Go ahead and create a factory for our mapper implementation.
Were now able to register our mapper implementation as a service. If you recall from the previ-
ous chapter, or if you were to look at the current error message, youll note that we call the Service
Blog\Mapper\PostMapperInterface to get a mapper implementation. Modify the configuration so that this
key will call the newly called factory class.
1 <?php
2 // Filename: /module/Blog/config/module.config.php
3 return array(
4 'db' => array( /** Db Config */ ),
5 'service_manager' => array(
6 'factories' => array(
7 'Blog\Mapper\PostMapperInterface' => 'Blog\Factory\ZendDbSqlMapperFactory',
8 'Blog\Service\PostServiceInterface' => 'Blog\Service\Factory\PostServiceFactory',
9 'Zend\Db\Adapter\Adapter' => 'Zend\Db\Adapter\AdapterServiceFactory'
10 )
11 ),
12 'view_manager' => array( /** ViewManager Config */ ),
13 'controllers' => array( /** ControllerManager Config */ ),
14 'router' => array( /** Router Config */ )
15 );

With the adapter in place youre now able to refresh the blog index at localhost:8080/blog and youll notice
that the ServiceNotFoundException is gone and we get the following PHP Warning:
1 Warning: Invalid argument supplied for foreach() in /module/Blog/view/blog/list/index.phtml on line
2 ID Text Title

This is due to the fact that our mapper doesnt return anything yet. Lets modify the findAll() function to return
all blogs from the database table.
1 <?php
2 // Filename: /module/Blog/src/Blog/Mapper/ZendDbSqlMapper.php
3 namespace Blog\Mapper;
4

5 use Zend\Db\Adapter\AdapterInterface;
6

7 class ZendDbSqlMapper implements PostMapperInterface

8 {
9 /**

72 Chapter 15. Introducing Zend\Db\Sql and Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

10 * @var \Zend\Db\Adapter\AdapterInterface
11 */
12 protected $dbAdapter;
13

14 /**
15 * @param AdapterInterface $dbAdapter
16 */
17 public function __construct(AdapterInterface $dbAdapter)
18 {
19 $this->dbAdapter = $dbAdapter;
20 }
21

22 /**
23 * @param int|string $id
24 *
25 * @return \Blog\Entity\PostInterface
26 * @throws \InvalidArgumentException
27 */
28 public function find($id)
29 {
30 }
31

32 /**
33 * @return array|\Blog\Entity\PostInterface[]
34 */
35 public function findAll()
36 {
37 $sql = new Sql($this->dbAdapter);
38 $select = $sql->select('posts');
39

40 $stmt = $sql->prepareStatementForSqlObject($select);
41 $result = $stmt->execute();
42

43 return $result;
44 }
45 }

The above code should look fairly straight forward to you. Sadly, though, a refresh of the application reveals another
error message.
Lets not return the $result variable for now and do a dump of it to see what we get here. Change the findAll()
function and do a data dumping of the $result variable:
1 <?php
2 // Filename: /module/Blog/src/Blog/Mapper/ZendDbSqlMapper.php
3 namespace Blog\Mapper;
4

5 use Blog\Model\PostInterface;
6 use Zend\Db\Adapter\AdapterInterface;
7 use Zend\Db\Sql\Sql;
8

9 class ZendDbSqlMapper implements PostMapperInterface

10 {
11 /**
12 * @var \Zend\Db\Adapter\AdapterInterface
13 */
14 protected $dbAdapter;
15

16 /**

15.3. Writing the mapper implementation 73

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

17 * @param AdapterInterface $dbAdapter

18 */
19 public function __construct(AdapterInterface $dbAdapter)
20 {
21 $this->dbAdapter = $dbAdapter;
22 }
23

24 /**
25 * @param int|string $id
26 *
27 * @return PostInterface
28 * @throws \InvalidArgumentException
29 */
30 public function find($id)
31 {
32 }
33

34 /**
35 * @return array|PostInterface[]
36 */
37 public function findAll()
38 {
39 $sql = new Sql($this->dbAdapter);
40 $select = $sql->select('posts');
41

42 $stmt = $sql->prepareStatementForSqlObject($select);
43 $result = $stmt->execute();
44

45 \Zend\Debug\Debug::dump($result);die();
46 }
47 }

Refreshing the application you should now see the following output:
1 object(Zend\Db\Adapter\Driver\Pdo\Result)#303 (8) {
2 ["statementMode":protected] => string(7) "forward"
3 ["resource":protected] => object(PDOStatement)#296 (1) {
4 ["queryString"] => string(29) "SELECT `posts`.* FROM `posts`"
5 }
6 ["options":protected] => NULL
7 ["currentComplete":protected] => bool(false)
8 ["currentData":protected] => NULL
9 ["position":protected] => int(-1)
10 ["generatedValue":protected] => string(1) "0"
11 ["rowCount":protected] => NULL
12 }

As you can see we do not get any data returned. Instead we are presented with a dump of some Result object that
appears to have no data in it whatsoever. But this is a faulty assumption. This Result object only has information
available for you when you actually try to access it. To make use of the data within the Result object the best
approach would be to pass the Result object over into a ResultSet object, as long as the query was successful.
1 <?php
2 // Filename: /module/Blog/src/Blog/Mapper/ZendDbSqlMapper.php
3 namespace Blog\Mapper;
4

5 use Blog\Model\PostInterface;
6 use Zend\Db\Adapter\AdapterInterface;
7 use Zend\Db\Adapter\Driver\ResultInterface;

74 Chapter 15. Introducing Zend\Db\Sql and Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

8 use Zend\Db\ResultSet\ResultSet;
9 use Zend\Db\Sql\Sql;
10

11 class ZendDbSqlMapper implements PostMapperInterface

12 {
13 /**
14 * @var \Zend\Db\Adapter\AdapterInterface
15 */
16 protected $dbAdapter;
17

18 /**
19 * @param AdapterInterface $dbAdapter
20 */
21 public function __construct(AdapterInterface $dbAdapter)
22 {
23 $this->dbAdapter = $dbAdapter;
24 }
25

26 /**
27 * @param int|string $id
28 *
29 * @return PostInterface
30 * @throws \InvalidArgumentException
31 */
32 public function find($id)
33 {
34 }
35

36 /**
37 * @return array|PostInterface[]
38 */
39 public function findAll()
40 {
41 $sql = new Sql($this->dbAdapter);
42 $select = $sql->select('posts');
43

44 $stmt = $sql->prepareStatementForSqlObject($select);
45 $result = $stmt->execute();
46

47 if ($result instanceof ResultInterface && $result->isQueryResult()) {

48 $resultSet = new ResultSet();
49

50 \Zend\Debug\Debug::dump($resultSet->initialize($result));die();
51 }
52

53 die("no data");
54 }
55 }

Refreshing the page you should now see the dump of a ResultSet object that has a property
["count":protected] => int(5). Meaning we have five rows inside our database.
1 object(Zend\Db\ResultSet\ResultSet)#304 (8) {
2 ["allowedReturnTypes":protected] => array(2) {
3 [0] => string(11) "arrayobject"
4 [1] => string(5) "array"
5 }
6 ["arrayObjectPrototype":protected] => object(ArrayObject)#305 (1) {

15.3. Writing the mapper implementation 75

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

7 ["storage":"ArrayObject":private] => array(0) {

8 }
9 }
10 ["returnType":protected] => string(11) "arrayobject"
11 ["buffer":protected] => NULL
12 ["count":protected] => int(2)
13 ["dataSource":protected] => object(Zend\Db\Adapter\Driver\Pdo\Result)#303 (8) {
14 ["statementMode":protected] => string(7) "forward"
15 ["resource":protected] => object(PDOStatement)#296 (1) {
16 ["queryString"] => string(29) "SELECT `posts`.* FROM `posts`"
17 }
18 ["options":protected] => NULL
19 ["currentComplete":protected] => bool(false)
20 ["currentData":protected] => NULL
21 ["position":protected] => int(-1)
22 ["generatedValue":protected] => string(1) "0"
23 ["rowCount":protected] => int(2)
24 }
25 ["fieldCount":protected] => int(3)
26 ["position":protected] => int(0)
27 }

Another very interesting property is ["returnType":protected] => string(11) "arrayobject".

This tells us that all database entries will be returned as an ArrayObject. And this is a little problem as the
PostMapperInterface requires us to return an array of PostInterface objects. Luckily there is a very sim-
ple option for us available to make this happen. In the examples above we have used the default ResultSet object.
There is also a HydratingResultSet which will hydrate the given data into a provided object.
This means: if we tell the HydratingResultSet to use the database data to create Post objects for us, then it
will do exactly this. Lets modify our code:
1 <?php
2 // Filename: /module/Blog/src/Blog/Mapper/ZendDbSqlMapper.php
3 namespace Blog\Mapper;
4

5 use Blog\Model\PostInterface;
6 use Zend\Db\Adapter\AdapterInterface;
7 use Zend\Db\Adapter\Driver\ResultInterface;
8 use Zend\Db\ResultSet\HydratingResultSet;
9 use Zend\Db\Sql\Sql;
10

11 class ZendDbSqlMapper implements PostMapperInterface

12 {
13 /**
14 * @var \Zend\Db\Adapter\AdapterInterface
15 */
16 protected $dbAdapter;
17

18 /**
19 * @param AdapterInterface $dbAdapter
20 */
21 public function __construct(AdapterInterface $dbAdapter)
22 {
23 $this->dbAdapter = $dbAdapter;
24 }
25

26 /**
27 * @param int|string $id

76 Chapter 15. Introducing Zend\Db\Sql and Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

28 *
29 * @return PostInterface
30 * @throws \InvalidArgumentException
31 */
32 public function find($id)
33 {
34 }
35

36 /**
37 * @return array|PostInterface[]
38 */
39 public function findAll()
40 {
41 $sql = new Sql($this->dbAdapter);
42 $select = $sql->select('posts');
43

44 $stmt = $sql->prepareStatementForSqlObject($select);
45 $result = $stmt->execute();
46

47 if ($result instanceof ResultInterface && $result->isQueryResult()) {

48 $resultSet = new HydratingResultSet(new \Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator\ClassMethods(), new \Blog\
49

50 return $resultSet->initialize($result);
51 }
52

53 return array();
54 }
55 }

We have changed a couple of things here. Firstly instead of a normal ResultSet we are using the
HydratingResultSet. This Object requires two parameters, the second one being the object to hydrate into
and the first one being the hydrator that will be used. A hydrator, in short, is an object that changes any sort
of data from one format to another. The InputFormat that we have is an ArrayObject but we want Post-Models.
The ClassMethods-hydrator will take care of this using the setter- and getter functions of our Post-model.
Instead of dumping the $result variable we now directly return the initialized HydratingResultSet so
well be able to access the data stored within. In case we get something else returned that is not an instance of a
ResultInterface we return an empty array.
Refreshing the page you will now see all your blog posts listed on the page. Great!

15.4 Refactoring hidden dependencies

Theres one little thing that we have done thats not a best-practice. We use both a Hydrator and an Object inside our
ZendDbSqlMapper
1 <?php
2 // Filename: /module/Blog/src/Blog/Mapper/ZendDbSqlMapper.php
3 namespace Blog\Mapper;
4

5 use Blog\Model\PostInterface;
6 use Zend\Db\Adapter\AdapterInterface;
7 use Zend\Db\Adapter\Driver\ResultInterface;
8 use Zend\Db\ResultSet\HydratingResultSet;
9 use Zend\Db\Sql\Sql;
10 use Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator\HydratorInterface;
11

15.4. Refactoring hidden dependencies 77

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

12 class ZendDbSqlMapper implements PostMapperInterface

13 {
14 /**
15 * @var \Zend\Db\Adapter\AdapterInterface
16 */
17 protected $dbAdapter;
18

19 /**
20 * @var \Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator\HydratorInterface
21 */
22 protected $hydrator;
23

24 /**
25 * @var \Blog\Model\PostInterface
26 */
27 protected $postPrototype;
28

29 /**
30 * @param AdapterInterface $dbAdapter
31 * @param HydratorInterface $hydrator
32 * @param PostInterface $postPrototype
33 */
34 public function __construct(
35 AdapterInterface $dbAdapter,
36 HydratorInterface $hydrator,
37 PostInterface $postPrototype
38 ) {
39 $this->dbAdapter = $dbAdapter;
40 $this->hydrator = $hydrator;
41 $this->postPrototype = $postPrototype;
42 }
43

44 /**
45 * @param int|string $id
46 *
47 * @return PostInterface
48 * @throws \InvalidArgumentException
49 */
50 public function find($id)
51 {
52 }
53

54 /**
55 * @return array|PostInterface[]
56 */
57 public function findAll()
58 {
59 $sql = new Sql($this->dbAdapter);
60 $select = $sql->select('posts');
61

62 $stmt = $sql->prepareStatementForSqlObject($select);
63 $result = $stmt->execute();
64

65 if ($result instanceof ResultInterface && $result->isQueryResult()) {

66 $resultSet = new HydratingResultSet($this->hydrator, $this->postPrototype);
67

68 return $resultSet->initialize($result);
69 }

78 Chapter 15. Introducing Zend\Db\Sql and Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

70

71 return array();
72 }
73 }

Now that our mapper requires more parameters we need to update the ZendDbSqlMapperFactory and inject
those parameters.
1 <?php
2 // Filename: /module/Blog/src/Blog/Factory/ZendDbSqlMapperFactory.php
3 namespace Blog\Factory;
4

5 use Blog\Mapper\ZendDbSqlMapper;
6 use Blog\Model\Post;
7 use Zend\ServiceManager\FactoryInterface;
8 use Zend\ServiceManager\ServiceLocatorInterface;
9 use Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator\ClassMethods;
10

11 class ZendDbSqlMapperFactory implements FactoryInterface

12 {
13 /**
14 * Create service
15 *
16 * @param ServiceLocatorInterface $serviceLocator
17 *
18 * @return mixed
19 */
20 public function createService(ServiceLocatorInterface $serviceLocator)
21 {
22 return new ZendDbSqlMapper(
23 $serviceLocator->get('Zend\Db\Adapter\Adapter'),
24 new ClassMethods(false),
25 new Post()
26 );
27 }
28 }

With this in place you can refresh the application again and youll see your blog posts listed once again. Our Mapper
has now a really good architecture and no more hidden dependencies.

15.5 Finishing the mapper

Before we jump into the next chapter lets quickly finish the mapper by writing an implementation for the find()
method.
1 <?php
2 // Filename: /module/Blog/src/Blog/Mapper/ZendDbSqlMapper.php
3 namespace Blog\Mapper;
4

5 use Blog\Model\PostInterface;
6 use Zend\Db\Adapter\AdapterInterface;
7 use Zend\Db\Adapter\Driver\ResultInterface;
8 use Zend\Db\ResultSet\HydratingResultSet;
9 use Zend\Db\Sql\Sql;
10 use Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator\HydratorInterface;
11

12 class ZendDbSqlMapper implements PostMapperInterface

15.5. Finishing the mapper 79

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

13 {
14 /**
15 * @var \Zend\Db\Adapter\AdapterInterface
16 */
17 protected $dbAdapter;
18

19 /**
20 * @var \Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator\HydratorInterface
21 */
22 protected $hydrator;
23

24 /**
25 * @var \Blog\Model\PostInterface
26 */
27 protected $postPrototype;
28

29 /**
30 * @param AdapterInterface $dbAdapter
31 * @param HydratorInterface $hydrator
32 * @param PostInterface $postPrototype
33 */
34 public function __construct(
35 AdapterInterface $dbAdapter,
36 HydratorInterface $hydrator,
37 PostInterface $postPrototype
38 ) {
39 $this->dbAdapter = $dbAdapter;
40 $this->hydrator = $hydrator;
41 $this->postPrototype = $postPrototype;
42 }
43

44 /**
45 * @param int|string $id
46 *
47 * @return PostInterface
48 * @throws \InvalidArgumentException
49 */
50 public function find($id)
51 {
52 $sql = new Sql($this->dbAdapter);
53 $select = $sql->select('posts');
54 $select->where(array('id = ?' => $id));
55

56 $stmt = $sql->prepareStatementForSqlObject($select);
57 $result = $stmt->execute();
58

59 if ($result instanceof ResultInterface && $result->isQueryResult() && $result->getAffectedRo

60 return $this->hydrator->hydrate($result->current(), $this->postPrototype);
61 }
62

63 throw new \InvalidArgumentException("Blog with given ID:{$id} not found.");

64 }
65

66 /**
67 * @return array|PostInterface[]
68 */
69 public function findAll()
70 {

80 Chapter 15. Introducing Zend\Db\Sql and Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

71 $sql = new Sql($this->dbAdapter);

72 $select = $sql->select('posts');
73

74 $stmt = $sql->prepareStatementForSqlObject($select);
75 $result = $stmt->execute();
76

77 if ($result instanceof ResultInterface && $result->isQueryResult()) {

78 $resultSet = new HydratingResultSet($this->hydrator, $this->postPrototype);
79

80 return $resultSet->initialize($result);
81 }
82

83 return array();
84 }
85 }

The find() function looks really similar to the findAll() function. Theres just three simple differences. Firstly
we need to add a condition to the query to only select one row. This is done using the where() function of the Sql
object. Then we also check if the $result has a row in it through getAffectedRows(). The return statement
then will be hydrated using the injected hydrator into the prototype that has also been injected.
This time, when we do not find a row we will throw an \InvalidArgumentException so that the application
will easily be able to handle the scenario.

15.6 Conclusion

Finishing this chapter you now know how to query for data using the Zend\Db\Sql classes. You have also learned
about the Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator-Component which is one of the new key components of ZF2. Furthermore
you have once again proven that you are able to manage proper dependency injection.
In the next chapter well take a closer look at the router so well be able to do some more action within our Module.

15.6. Conclusion 81
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

82 Chapter 15. Introducing Zend\Db\Sql and Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator

 CHAPTER 16

Understanding the Router

Right now we have a pretty solid set up for our module. However, were not really doing all too much yet, to be
precise, all we do is display all Blog entries on one page. In this chapter you will learn everything you need to know
about the Router to create other routes to be able to display only a single blog, to add new blogs to your application
and to edit and delete existing blogs.

16.1 Different route types

Before we go into details on our application, lets take a look at the most important route types that Zend Framework
offers.

16.1.1 Zend\Mvc\Router\Http\Literal

The first common route type is the Literal-Route. As mentioned in a previous chapter a literal route is one that
matches a specific string. Examples for URLs that are usually literal routes are:
http://domain.com/blog
http://domain.com/blog/add
http://domain.com/about-me
http://domain.com/my/very/deep/page
http://domain.com/my/very/deep/page
Configuration for a literal route requires you to set up the route that should be matched and needs you to define some
defaults to be used, for example which controller and which action to call. A simple configuration for a literal route
looks like this:
1 'router' => array(
2 'routes' => array(
3 'about' => array(
4 'type' => 'literal',
5 'options' => array(
6 'route' => '/about-me',
7 'defaults' => array(
8 'controller' => 'AboutMeController',
9 'action' => 'aboutme',
10 ),
11 ),
12 )

83
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

13 )
14 )

16.1.2 Zend\Mvc\Router\Http\Segment

The second most commonly used route type is the Segment-Route. A segmented route is used for whenever your url
is supposed to contain variable parameters. Pretty often those parameters are used to identify certain objects within
your application. Some examples for URLs that contain parameters and are usually segment routes are:
Configuring a Segment-Route takes a little more effort but isnt difficult to understand. The tasks you have to do are
similar at first, you have to define the route-type, just be sure to make it Segment. Then you have to define the route
and add parameters to it. Then as usual you define the defaults to be used, the only thing that differs in this part is that
you can assign defaults for your parameters, too. The new part that is used on routes of the Segment type is to define
so called constraints. They are used to tell the Router what rules are given for parameters. For example, an
id-parameter is only allowed to be of type integer, the year-parameter is only allowed to be of type integer
and may only contain exactly four digits. A sample configuration can look like this:
1 'router' => array(
2 'routes' => array(
3 'archives' => array(
4 'type' => 'segment',
5 'options' => array(
6 'route' => '/news/archive/:year',
7 'defaults' => array(
8 'controller' => 'ArchiveController',
9 'action' => 'byYear',
10 ),
11 'constraints' => array(
12 'year' => '\d{4}'
13 )
14 ),
15 )
16 )
17 )

This configuration defines a route for a URL like domain.com/news/archive/2014. As you can see, our route
now contains the part :year. This is called a route-parameter. Route parameters for Segment-Routes are defined
by a full-colon (:) in front of a string; the string is the parameter name.
Under constraints you see that we have another array. This array contains regular expression rules for each
parameter of your route. In our example case the regex uses two parts, the first one being \d which means a digit, so
any number from 0-9. The second part is {4} which means that the part before this has to match exactly four times.
So in easy words we say four digits.
If now you call the URL domain.com/news/archive/123, the router will not match the URL because we only
support years with four digits.
You may notice that we did not define any defaults for the parameter year. This is because the parameter is
currently set up as a required parameter. If a parameter is supposed to be optional we need to define this inside
the route definition. This is done by adding square brackets around the parameter. Lets modify the above example
route to have the year parameter optional and use the current year as default:
1 'router' => array(
2 'routes' => array(
3 'archives' => array(
4 'type' => 'segment',
5 'options' => array(

84 Chapter 16. Understanding the Router

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

6 'route' => '/news/archive[/:year]',

7 'defaults' => array(
8 'controller' => 'ArchiveController',
9 'action' => 'byYear',
10 'year' => date('Y')
11 ),
12 'constraints' => array(
13 'year' => '\d{4}'
14 )
15 ),
16 )
17 )
18 )

Notice that now we have a part in our route that is optional. Not only the parameter year is optional. The slash that is
separating the year parameter from the URL string archive is optional, too, and may only be there whenever the
year parameter is present.

16.2 Different routing concepts

When thinking about the whole application it becomes clear that there are a lot of routes to be matched. When writing
these routes you have two options. One option is to spend less time writing routes that in turn are a little slow in
matching. Another option is to write very explicit routes that match a little faster but require more work to define.
Lets take a look at both of them.

16.2.1 Generic routes

A generic route is one that matches many URLs. You may remember this concept from Zend Framework 1 where
basically you didnt even bother about routes because we had one god route that was used for everything. You define
the controller, the action, and all parameters within just one single route.
The big advantage of this approach is the immense time you save when developing your application. The downside,
however, is that matching such a route can take a little bit longer due to the fact that so many variables need to be
checked. However, as long as you dont overdo it, this is a viable concept. For this reason the ZendSkeletonApplication
uses a very generic route, too. Lets take a look at a generic route:
1 'router' => array(
2 'routes' => array(
3 'default' => array(
4 'type' => 'segment',
5 'options' => array(
6 'route' => '/[:controller[/:action]]',
7 'defaults' => array(
8 '__NAMESPACE__' => 'Application\Controller',
9 'controller' => 'Index',
10 'action' => 'index',
11 ),
12 'constraints' => [
13 'controller' => '[a-zA-Z][a-zA-Z0-9_-]*',
14 'action' => '[a-zA-Z][a-zA-Z0-9_-]*',
15 ]
16 ),
17 )
18 )
19 )

16.2. Different routing concepts 85

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Lets take a closer look as to what has been defined in this configuration. The route part now contains two optional
parameters, controller and action. The action parameter is optional only when the controller parameter
is present.
Within the defaults-section it looks a little bit different, too. The __NAMESPACE__ will be used to concatenate
with the controller parameter at all times. So for example when the controller parameter is news then
the controller to be called from the Router will be Application\Controller\news, if the parameter is
archive the Router will call the controller Application\Controller\archive.
The defaults-section then is pretty straight forward again. Both parameters, controller and action, only
have to follow the conventions given by PHP-Standards. They have to start with a letter from a-z, upper- or lowercase
and after that first letter there can be an (almost) infinite amount of letters, digits, underscores or dashes.
The big downside to this approach not only is that matching this route is a little slower, it is that there is no error-
checking going on. For example, when you were to call a URL like domain.com/weird/doesntExist then
the controller would be Application\Controller\weird and the action would be doesntExistAction. As you
can guess by the names lets assume neither controller nor action does exist. The route will still match but an
Exception will be thrown because the Router will be unable to find the requested resources and well receive a
404-Response.

16.2.2 Explicit routes using child_routes

Explicit routing is done by defining all possible routes yourself. For this method you actually have two options
available, too.
Without config structure
The probably most easy to understand way to write explicit routes would be to write many top level routes like in the
following configuration:
As you can see with this little example, all routes have an explicit name and theres lots of repetition going on. We
have to redefine the default controller to be used every single time and we dont really have any structure within
the configuration. Lets take a look at how we could bring more structure into a configuration like this.
Using child_routes for more structure
Another option to define explicit routes is to be using child_routes. Child routes inherit all options from their
respective parents. Meaning: when the controller doesnt change, you do not need to redefine it. Lets take a look
at a child routes configuration using the same example as above:
1 'router' => array(
2 'routes' => array(
3 'news' => array(
4 'type' => 'literal',
5 'options' => array(
6 'route' => '/news',
7 'defaults' => array(
8 'controller' => 'NewsController',
9 'action' => 'showAll',
10 ),
11 ),
12 // Defines that "/news" can be matched on its own without a child route being matched
13 'may_terminate' => true,
14 'child_routes' => array(
15 'archive' => array(
16 'type' => 'segment',
17 'options' => array(

86 Chapter 16. Understanding the Router

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

18 'route' => '/archive[/:year]',

19 'defaults' => array(
20 'action' => 'archive',
21 ),
22 'constraints' => array(
23 'year' => '\d{4}'
24 )
25 ),
26 ),
27 'single' => array(
28 'type' => 'segment',
29 'options' => array(
30 'route' => '/:id',
31 'defaults' => array(
32 'action' => 'detail',
33 ),
34 'constraints' => array(
35 'id' => '\d+'
36 )
37 ),
38 ),
39 )
40 ),
41 )
42 )

This routing configuration requires a little more explanation. First of all we have a new configuration entry which
is called may_terminate. This property defines that the parent route can be matched alone, without child routes
needing to be matched, too. In other words all of the following routes are valid:
/news
/news/archive
/news/archive/2014
/news/42
If, however, you were to set may_terminate => false, then the parent route would only be used for global
defaults that all child_routes were to inherit. In other words: only child_routes can be matched, so the only
valid routes would be:
/news/archive
/news/archive/2014
/news/42
The parent route would not be able to be matched on its own.
Next to that we have a new entry called child_routes. In here we define new routes that will be appended to the
parent route. Theres no real difference in configuration from routes you define as a child route to routes that are on
the top level of the configuration. The only thing that may fall away is the re-definition of shared default values.
The big advantage you have with this kind of configuration is the fact that you explicitly define the routes and therefore
you will never run into problems of non-existing controllers like you would with generic routes like described above.
The second advantage would be that this kind of routing is a little bit faster than generic routes and the last advantage
would be that you can easily see all possible URLs that start with /news.
While ultimately this falls into the category of personal preference bare in mind that debugging of explicit routes is
significantly easier than debugging generic routes.

16.2. Different routing concepts 87

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

16.3 A practical example for our Blog Module

Now that we know how to configure new routes, lets first create a route to display only a single Blog from our
Database. We want to be able to identify blog posts by their internal ID. Given that ID is a variable parameter we need
a route of type Segment. Furthermore we want to put this route as a child route to the route of name blog.
1 <?php
2 // FileName: /module/Blog/config/module.config.php
3 return array(
4 'db' => array( /** DB Config */ ),
5 'service_manager' => array( /* ServiceManager Config */ ),
6 'view_manager' => array( /* ViewManager Config */ ),
7 'controllers' => array( /* ControllerManager Config */ ),
8 'router' => array(
9 'routes' => array(
10 'blog' => array(
11 'type' => 'literal',
12 'options' => array(
13 'route' => '/blog',
14 'defaults' => array(
15 'controller' => 'Blog\Controller\List',
16 'action' => 'index',
17 ),
18 ),
19 'may_terminate' => true,
20 'child_routes' => array(
21 'detail' => array(
22 'type' => 'segment',
23 'options' => array(
24 'route' => '/:id',
25 'defaults' => array(
26 'action' => 'detail'
27 ),
28 'constraints' => array(
29 'id' => '[1-9]\d*'
30 )
31 )
32 )
33 )
34 )
35 )
36 )
37 );

With this we have set up a new route that we use to display a single blog entry. We have assigned a parameter called
id that needs to be a positive digit excluding 0. Database entries usually start with a 0 when it comes to primary ID
keys and therefore our regular expression constraints for the id fields looks a little more complicated. Basically
we tell the router that the parameter id has to start with an integer between 1 and 9, thats the [1-9] part, and after
that zero or more digits can follow (thats the \d* part).
The route will call the same controller like the parent route but it will call the detailAction() instead. Go to
your browser and request the URL http://localhost:8080/blog/2. Youll see the following error message:
1 A 404 error occurred
2

3 Page not found.

4 The requested controller was unable to dispatch the request.
5

88 Chapter 16. Understanding the Router

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

6 Controller:
7 Blog\Controller\List
8

9 No Exception available

This is due to the fact that the controller tries to access the detailAction() which does not yet exist. Lets go
ahead and create this action now. Go to your ListController and add the action. Return an empty ViewModel
and then refresh the page.
1 <?php
2 // FileName: /module/Blog/src/Blog/Controller/ListController.php
3 namespace Blog\Controller;
4

5 use Blog\Service\PostServiceInterface;
6 use Zend\Mvc\Controller\AbstractActionController;
7 use Zend\View\Model\ViewModel;
8

9 class ListController extends AbstractActionController

10 {
11 /**
12 * @var \Blog\Service\PostServiceInterface
13 */
14 protected $postService;
15

16 public function __construct(PostServiceInterface $postService)

17 {
18 $this->postService = $postService;
19 }
20

21 public function indexAction()

22 {
23 return new ViewModel(array(
24 'posts' => $this->postService->findAllPosts()
25 ));
26 }
27

28 public function detailAction()

29 {
30 return new ViewModel();
31 }
32 }

Now youll see the all familiar message that a template was unable to be rendered. Lets create this template now and
assume that we will get one Post-Object passed to the template to see the details of our blog. Create a new view file
under /view/blog/list/detail.phtml:
1 <!-- FileName: /module/Blog/view/blog/list/detail.phtml -->
2 <h1>Post Details</h1>
3

4 <dl>
5 <dt>Post Title</dt>
6 <dd><?php echo $this->escapeHtml($this->post->getTitle());?></dd>
7 <dt>Post Text</dt>
8 <dd><?php echo $this->escapeHtml($this->post->getText());?></dd>
9 </dl>

Looking at this template were expecting the variable $this->post to be an instance of our Post-Model. Lets
now modify our ListController so that a Post will be passed.

16.3. A practical example for our Blog Module 89

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1 <?php
2 // FileName: /module/Blog/src/Blog/Controller/ListController.php
3 namespace Blog\Controller;
4

5 use Blog\Service\PostServiceInterface;
6 use Zend\Mvc\Controller\AbstractActionController;
7 use Zend\View\Model\ViewModel;
8

9 class ListController extends AbstractActionController

10 {
11 /**
12 * @var \Blog\Service\PostServiceInterface
13 */
14 protected $postService;
15

16 public function __construct(PostServiceInterface $postService)

17 {
18 $this->postService = $postService;
19 }
20

21 public function indexAction()

22 {
23 return new ViewModel(array(
24 'posts' => $this->postService->findAllPosts()
25 ));
26 }
27

28 public function detailAction()

29 {
30 $id = $this->params()->fromRoute('id');
31

32 return new ViewModel(array(

33 'post' => $this->postService->findPost($id)
34 ));
35 }
36 }

If you refresh your application now youll see the details for our Post to be displayed. However, there
is one little Problem with what we have done. While we do have our Service set up to throw an
\InvalidArgumentException whenever no Post matching a given id is found, we dont make use of this
just yet. Go to your browser and open the URL http://localhost:8080/blog/99. You will see the follow-
ing error message:
1 An error occurred
2 An error occurred during execution; please try again later.
3

4 Additional information:
5 InvalidArgumentException
6

7 File:
8 {rootPath}/module/Blog/src/Blog/Service/PostService.php:40
9

10 Message:
11 Could not find row 99

This is kind of ugly, so our ListController should be prepared to do something whenever an

InvalidArgumentException is thrown by the PostService. Whenever an invalid Post is requested we
want the User to be redirected to the Post-Overview. Lets do this by putting the call against the PostService in a

90 Chapter 16. Understanding the Router

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

try-catch statement.
1 <?php
2 // FileName: /module/Blog/src/Blog/Controller/ListController.php
3 namespace Blog\Controller;
4

5 use Blog\Service\PostServiceInterface;
6 use Zend\Mvc\Controller\AbstractActionController;
7 use Zend\View\Model\ViewModel;
8

9 class ListController extends AbstractActionController

10 {
11 /**
12 * @var \Blog\Service\PostServiceInterface
13 */
14 protected $postService;
15

16 public function __construct(PostServiceInterface $postService)

17 {
18 $this->postService = $postService;
19 }
20

21 public function indexAction()

22 {
23 return new ViewModel(array(
24 'posts' => $this->postService->findAllPosts()
25 ));
26 }
27

28 public function detailAction()

29 {
30 $id = $this->params()->fromRoute('id');
31

32 try {
33 $post = $this->postService->findPost($id);
34 } catch (\InvalidArgumentException $ex) {
35 return $this->redirect()->toRoute('blog');
36 }
37

38 return new ViewModel(array(

39 'post' => $post
40 ));
41 }
42 }

Now whenever you access an invalid id youll be redirected to the route blog which is our list of blog posts, perfect!

16.3. A practical example for our Blog Module 91

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

92 Chapter 16. Understanding the Router

 CHAPTER 17

Making use of Forms and Fieldsets

So far all we did was read data from the database. In a real-life-application this wont get us very far as very often
the least we need to do is to support full Create, Read, Update and Delete operations (CRUD). Most often the
process of getting data into our database is that a user enters the data into a web <form> and the application then uses
the user input and saves it into our backend.

17.1 Core components

We want to be able to do exactly this and Zend Framework provides us with all the tools we need to achieve our goal.
Before we jump into coding, we need to understand the two core components for this task first. So lets take a look at
what these components are and what they are used for.

17.1.1 Zend\Form\Fieldset

The first component that you have to know about is Zend\Form\Fieldset. A Fieldset is a component that
contains a reusable set of elements. You will use the Fieldset to create the frontend-input for your backend-models.
It is considered good practice to have one Fieldset for every Model of your application.
The Fieldset-component, however, is no Form, meaning you will not be able to use a Fieldset without attach-
ing it to the Form-component. The advantage here is that you have one set of elements that you can re-use for as many
Forms as you like without having to re-declare all the inputs for the Model thats represented by the Fieldset.

17.1.2 Zend\Form\Form

The main component youll need and that most probably youve heard about already is Zend\Form\Form. The
Form-component is the main container for all elements of your web <form>. You are able to add single elements or
a set of elements in the form of a Fieldset, too.

17.2 Creating your first Fieldset

Explaining how the Zend\Form component works is best done by giving you real code to work with. So lets jump
right into it and create all the forms we need to finish our Blog module. We start by creating a Fieldset that
contains all the input elements that we need to work with our Blog-data.
You will need one hidden input for the id property, which is only needed for editting and deleting data.
You will need one text input for the text property

93
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

You will need one text input for the title property
Create the file /module/Blog/src/Blog/Form/PostFieldset.php and add the following code:
1 <?php
2 // Filename: /module/Blog/src/Blog/Form/PostFieldset.php
3 namespace Blog\Form;
4

5 use Zend\Form\Fieldset;
6

7 class PostFieldset extends Fieldset

8 {
9 public function __construct()
10 {
11 $this->add(array(
12 'type' => 'hidden',
13 'name' => 'id'
14 ));
15

16 $this->add(array(
17 'type' => 'text',
18 'name' => 'text',
19 'options' => array(
20 'label' => 'The Text'
21 )
22 ));
23

24 $this->add(array(
25 'type' => 'text',
26 'name' => 'title',
27 'options' => array(
28 'label' => 'Blog Title'
29 )
30 ));
31 }
32 }

As you can see this class is pretty handy. All we do is to have our class extend Zend\Form\Fieldset and then
we write a __construct() method and add all the elements we need to the fieldset. This Fieldset can now be
used by as many forms as we want. So lets go ahead and create our first Form.

17.3 Creating the PostForm

Now that we have our PostFieldset in place, we need to use it inside a Form. We then need to add a Submit-
Button to the form so that the user will be able to submit the data and were done. So create the PostForm within
the same directory under /module/Blog/src/Blog/Form/PostForm and add the PostFieldset to it:
1 <?php
2 // Filename: /module/Blog/src/Blog/Form/PostForm.php
3 namespace Blog\Form;
4

5 use Zend\Form\Form;
6

7 class PostForm extends Form

8 {
9 public function __construct()
10 {

94 Chapter 17. Making use of Forms and Fieldsets

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

11 $this->add(array(
12 'name' => 'post-fieldset',
13 'type' => 'Blog\Form\PostFieldset'
14 ));
15

16 $this->add(array(
17 'type' => 'submit',
18 'name' => 'submit',
19 'attributes' => array(
20 'value' => 'Insert new Post'
21 )
22 ));
23 }
24 }

And thats our form. Nothing special here, we add our PostFieldset to the Form, we add a submit button to the
form and nothing more. Lets now make use of the Form.

17.4 Adding a new Post

Now that we have the PostForm written we want to use it. But there are a couple more tasks that you need to do.
The tasks that are standing right in front of you are:
create a new controller WriteController
add PostService as a dependency to the WriteController
add PostForm as a dependency to the WriteController
create a new route blog/add that routes to the WriteController and its addAction()
create a new view that displays the form

17.4.1 Creating the WriteController

As you can see from the task-list we need a new controller and this controller is supposed to have two dependencies.
One dependency being the PostService thats also being used within our ListController and the other de-
pendency being the PostForm which is new. Since the PostForm is a dependency that the ListController
doesnt need to display blog-data, we will create a new controller to keep things properly separated. First, register a
controller-factory within the configuration:
1 <?php
2 // Filename: /module/Blog/config/module.config.php
3 return array(
4 'db' => array( /** DB Config */ ),
5 'service_manager' => array( /** ServiceManager Config */),
6 'view_manager' => array( /** ViewManager Config */ ),
7 'controllers' => array(
8 'factories' => array(
9 'Blog\Controller\List' => 'Blog\Factory\ListControllerFactory',
10 'Blog\Controller\Write' => 'Blog\Factory\WriteControllerFactory'
11 )
12 ),
13 'router' => array( /** Router Config */ )
14 );

17.4. Adding a new Post 95

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Next step would be to write the WriteControllerFactory. Have the factory return the WriteController
and add the required dependencies within the constructor.
1 <?php
2 // Filename: /module/Blog/src/Blog/Factory/WriteControllerFactory.php
3 namespace Blog\Factory;
4

5 use Blog\Controller\WriteController;
6 use Zend\ServiceManager\FactoryInterface;
7 use Zend\ServiceManager\ServiceLocatorInterface;
8

9 class WriteControllerFactory implements FactoryInterface

10 {
11 public function createService(ServiceLocatorInterface $serviceLocator)
12 {
13 $realServiceLocator = $serviceLocator->getServiceLocator();
14 $postService = $realServiceLocator->get('Blog\Service\PostServiceInterface');
15 $postInsertForm = $realServiceLocator->get('FormElementManager')->get('Blog\Form\PostFor
16

17 return new WriteController(

18 $postService,
19 $postInsertForm
20 );
21 }
22 }

In this code-example there are a couple of things to be aware of. First, the WriteController doesnt ex-
ist yet, but we will create this in the next step so were just assuming that it will exist later on. Second, we
access the FormElementManager to get access to our PostForm. All forms should be accessed through
the FormElementManager. Even though we havent registered the PostForm in our config files yet the
FormElementManager automatically knows about forms that act as invokables. As long as you have no
dependencies you dont need to register them explicitly.
Next up is the creation of our controller. Be sure to type hint the dependencies by their interfaces and to add the
addAction()!
1 <?php
2 // Filename: /module/Blog/src/Blog/Controller/WriteController.php
3 namespace Blog\Controller;
4

5 use Blog\Service\PostServiceInterface;
6 use Zend\Form\FormInterface;
7 use Zend\Mvc\Controller\AbstractActionController;
8

9 class WriteController extends AbstractActionController

10 {
11 protected $postService;
12

13 protected $postForm;
14

15 public function __construct(

16 PostServiceInterface $postService,
17 FormInterface $postForm
18 ) {
19 $this->postService = $postService;
20 $this->postForm = $postForm;
21 }
22

23 public function addAction()

96 Chapter 17. Making use of Forms and Fieldsets

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

24 {
25 }
26 }

Right on to creating the new route:

1 <?php
2 // Filename: /module/Blog/config/module.config.php
3 return array(
4 'db' => array( /** Db Config */ ),
5 'service_manager' => array( /** ServiceManager Config */ ),
6 'view_manager' => array( /** ViewManager Config */ ),
7 'controllers' => array( /** Controller Config */ ),
8 'router' => array(
9 'routes' => array(
10 'blog' => array(
11 'type' => 'literal',
12 'options' => array(
13 'route' => '/blog',
14 'defaults' => array(
15 'controller' => 'Blog\Controller\List',
16 'action' => 'index',
17 )
18 ),
19 'may_terminate' => true,
20 'child_routes' => array(
21 'detail' => array(
22 'type' => 'segment',
23 'options' => array(
24 'route' => '/:id',
25 'defaults' => array(
26 'action' => 'detail'
27 ),
28 'constraints' => array(
29 'id' => '\d+'
30 )
31 )
32 ),
33 'add' => array(
34 'type' => 'literal',
35 'options' => array(
36 'route' => '/add',
37 'defaults' => array(
38 'controller' => 'Blog\Controller\Write',
39 'action' => 'add'
40 )
41 )
42 )
43 )
44 )
45 )
46 )
47 );

And lastly lets create a dummy template:

1 <!-- Filename: /module/Blog/view/blog/write/add.phtml -->
2 <h1>WriteController::addAction()</h1>

17.4. Adding a new Post 97

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Checking the current status

If you try to access the new route localhost:8080/blog/add youre supposed to see the following error mes-
sage:
1 Fatal error: Call to a member function insert() on a non-object in
2 {libraryPath}/Zend/Form/Fieldset.php on line {lineNumber}

If this is not the case, be sure to follow the tutorial correctly and carefully check all your files. Assuming you are
getting this error, lets find out what it means and fix it!
The above error message is very common and its solution isnt that intuitive. It appears that there is an error within the
Zend/Form/Fieldset.php but thats not the case. The error message lets you know that something didnt go
right while you were creating your form. In fact, while creating both the PostForm as well as the PostFieldset
we have forgotten something very, very important.

Note: When overwriting a __construct() method within the Zend\Form-component, be sure to always call
parent::__construct()!

Without this, forms and fieldsets will not be able to get initiated correctly. Lets now fix the problem by calling
the parents constructor in both form and fieldset. To have more flexibility we will also include the signature of the
__construct() function which accepts a couple of parameters.
1 <?php
2 // Filename: /module/Blog/src/Blog/Form/PostForm.php
3 namespace Blog\Form;
4

5 use Zend\Form\Form;
6

7 class PostForm extends Form

8 {
9 public function __construct($name = null, $options = array())
10 {
11 parent::__construct($name, $options);
12

13 $this->add(array(
14 'name' => 'post-fieldset',
15 'type' => 'Blog\Form\PostFieldset'
16 ));
17

18 $this->add(array(
19 'type' => 'submit',
20 'name' => 'submit',
21 'attributes' => array(
22 'value' => 'Insert new Post'
23 )
24 ));
25 }
26 }

As you can see our PostForm now accepts two parameters to give our form a name and to set a couple of options.
Both parameters will be passed along to the parent. If you look closely at how we add the PostFieldset to the form
youll notice that we assign a name to the fieldset. Those options will be passed from the FormElementManager
when the PostFieldset is created. But for this to function we need to do the same step inside our fieldset, too:
1 <?php
2 // Filename: /module/Blog/src/Blog/Form/PostFieldset.php
3 namespace Blog\Form;
4

98 Chapter 17. Making use of Forms and Fieldsets

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

5 use Zend\Form\Fieldset;
6

7 class PostFieldset extends Fieldset

8 {
9 public function __construct($name = null, $options = array())
10 {
11 parent::__construct($name, $options);
12

13 $this->add(array(
14 'type' => 'hidden',
15 'name' => 'id'
16 ));
17

18 $this->add(array(
19 'type' => 'text',
20 'name' => 'text',
21 'options' => array(
22 'label' => 'The Text'
23 )
24 ));
25

26 $this->add(array(
27 'type' => 'text',
28 'name' => 'title',
29 'options' => array(
30 'label' => 'Blog Title'
31 )
32 ));
33 }
34 }

Reloading your application now will yield you the desired result.

17.5 Displaying the form

Now that we have our PostForm within our WriteController its time to pass this form to the view and have it
rendered using the provided ViewHelpers from the Zend\Form component. First change your controller so that
the form is passed to the view.
1 <?php
2 // Filename: /module/Blog/src/Blog/Controller/WriteController.php
3 namespace Blog\Controller;
4

5 use Blog\Service\PostServiceInterface;
6 use Zend\Form\FormInterface;
7 use Zend\Mvc\Controller\AbstractActionController;
8 use Zend\View\Model\ViewModel;
9

10 class WriteController extends AbstractActionController

11 {
12 protected $postService;
13

14 protected $postForm;
15

16 public function __construct(

17 PostServiceInterface $postService,

17.5. Displaying the form 99

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

18 FormInterface $postForm
19 ) {
20 $this->postService = $postService;
21 $this->postForm = $postForm;
22 }
23

24 public function addAction()

25 {
26 return new ViewModel(array(
27 'form' => $this->postForm
28 ));
29 }
30 }

And then we need to modify our view to have the form rendered.
1 <!-- Filename: /module/Blog/view/blog/write/add.phtml -->
2 <h1>WriteController::addAction()</h1>
3 <?php
4 $form = $this->form;
5 $form->setAttribute('action', $this->url());
6 $form->prepare();
7

8 echo $this->form()->openTag($form);
9

10 echo $this->formCollection($form);
11

12 echo $this->form()->closeTag();

Firstly, we tell the form that it should send its data to the current URL and then we tell the form to prepare() itself
which triggers a couple of internal things.

Note: HTML-Forms can be sent using POST and GET. ZF2s default is POST, therefore you dont have to be explicit
in setting this option. If you want to change it to GET though, all you have to do is set the specific attribute prior to the
prepare() call.
$form->setAttribute(method, GET);

Next were using a couple of ViewHelpers which take care of rendering the form for us. There are many different
ways to render a form within Zend Framework but using formCollection() is probably the fastest one.
Refreshing the browser you will now see your form properly displayed. However, if were submitting the form all we
see is our form being displayed again. And this is due to the simple fact that we didnt add any logic to the controller
yet.

Note: Keep in mind that this tutorial focuses solely on the OOP aspect of things. Rendering the form like this, without
any stylesheets added doesnt really reflect most designers idea of a beautiful form. Youll find out more about the
rendering of forms in the chapter of Zend\Form\View\Helper.

17.6 Controller Logic for basically all Forms

Writing a Controller that handles a form workflow is pretty simple and its basically identical for each and every form
you have within your application.
1. You want to check if the current request is a POST-Request, meaning if the form has been sent

100 Chapter 17. Making use of Forms and Fieldsets

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

2. If the form has been sent, you want to:

store the POST-Data within the Form
check if the form passes validation
3. If the form passes validation, you want to:
pass the form data to your service to have it stored
redirect the user to either the detail page of the entered data or to some overview page
4. In all other cases, you want the form displayed, sometimes alongside given error messages
And all of this is really not that much code. Modify your WriteController to the following code:
1 <?php
2 // Filename: /module/Blog/src/Blog/Controller/WriteController.php
3 namespace Blog\Controller;
4

5 use Blog\Service\PostServiceInterface;
6 use Zend\Form\FormInterface;
7 use Zend\Mvc\Controller\AbstractActionController;
8 use Zend\View\Model\ViewModel;
9

10 class WriteController extends AbstractActionController

11 {
12 protected $postService;
13

14 protected $postForm;
15

16 public function __construct(

17 PostServiceInterface $postService,
18 FormInterface $postForm
19 ) {
20 $this->postService = $postService;
21 $this->postForm = $postForm;
22 }
23

24 public function addAction()

25 {
26 $request = $this->getRequest();
27

28 if ($request->isPost()) {
29 $this->postForm->setData($request->getPost());
30

31 if ($this->postForm->isValid()) {
32 try {
33 $this->postService->savePost($this->postForm->getData());
34

35 return $this->redirect()->toRoute('blog');
36 } catch (\Exception $e) {
37 // Some DB Error happened, log it and let the user know
38 }
39 }
40 }
41

42 return new ViewModel(array(

43 'form' => $this->postForm
44 ));
45 }

17.6. Controller Logic for basically all Forms 101

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

46 }

This example code should be pretty straight forward. First we save the current request into a local variable. Then we
check if the current request is a POST-Request and if so, we store the requests POST-data into the form. If the form
turns out to be valid we try to save the form data through our service and then redirect the user to the route blog. If
any error occurred at any point we simply display the form again.
Submitting the form right now will return into the following error
1 Fatal error: Call to undefined method Blog\Service\PostService::savePost() in
2 /module/Blog/src/Blog/Controller/WriteController.php on line 33

Lets fix this by extending our PostService. Be sure to also change the signature of the
PostServiceInterface!
1 <?php
2 // Filename: /module/Blog/src/Blog/Service/PostServiceInterface.php
3 namespace Blog\Service;
4

5 use Blog\Model\PostInterface;
6

7 interface PostServiceInterface
8 {
9 /**
10 * Should return a set of all blog posts that we can iterate over. Single entries of the array a
11 * implementing \Blog\Model\PostInterface
12 *
13 * @return array|PostInterface[]
14 */
15 public function findAllPosts();
16

17 /**
18 * Should return a single blog post
19 *
20 * @param int $id Identifier of the Post that should be returned
21 * @return PostInterface
22 */
23 public function findPost($id);
24

25 /**
26 * Should save a given implementation of the PostInterface and return it. If it is an existing P
27 * should be updated, if it's a new Post it should be created.
28 *
29 * @param PostInterface $blog
30 * @return PostInterface
31 */
32 public function savePost(PostInterface $blog);
33 }

As you can see the savePost() function has been added and needs to be implemented within the PostService
now.
1 <?php
2 // Filename: /module/Blog/src/Blog/Service/PostService.php
3 namespace Blog\Service;
4

5 use Blog\Mapper\PostMapperInterface;
6

102 Chapter 17. Making use of Forms and Fieldsets

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

8 class PostService implements PostServiceInterface

9 {
10 /**
11 * @var \Blog\Mapper\PostMapperInterface
12 */
13 protected $postMapper;
14

15 /**
16 * @param PostMapperInterface $postMapper
17 */
18 public function __construct(PostMapperInterface $postMapper)
19 {
20 $this->postMapper = $postMapper;
21 }
22

23 /**
24 * {@inheritDoc}
25 */
26 public function findAllPosts()
27 {
28 return $this->postMapper->findAll();
29 }
30

31 /**
32 * {@inheritDoc}
33 */
34 public function findPost($id)
35 {
36 return $this->postMapper->find($id);
37 }
38

39 /**
40 * {@inheritDoc}
41 */
42 public function savePost(PostInterface $post)
43 {
44 return $this->postMapper->save($post);
45 }
46 }

And now that were making an assumption against our postMapper we need to extend the
PostMapperInterface and its implementation, too. Start by extending the interface:
1 <?php
2 // Filename: /module/Blog/src/Blog/Mapper/PostMapperInterface.php
3 namespace Blog\Mapper;
4

5 use Blog\Model\PostInterface;
6

7 interface PostMapperInterface
8 {
9 /**
10 * @param int|string $id
11 * @return PostInterface
12 * @throws \InvalidArgumentException
13 */
14 public function find($id);
15

17.6. Controller Logic for basically all Forms 103

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

16 /**
17 * @return array|PostInterface[]
18 */
19 public function findAll();
20

21 /**
22 * @param PostInterface $postObject
23 *
24 * @param PostInterface $postObject
25 * @return PostInterface
26 * @throws \Exception
27 */
28 public function save(PostInterface $postObject);
29 }

And now the implementation of the save function.

1 <?php
2 // Filename: /module/Blog/src/Blog/Mapper/ZendDbSqlMapper.php
3 namespace Blog\Mapper;
4

5 use Blog\Model\PostInterface;
6 use Zend\Db\Adapter\AdapterInterface;
7 use Zend\Db\Adapter\Driver\ResultInterface;
8 use Zend\Db\ResultSet\HydratingResultSet;
9 use Zend\Db\Sql\Insert;
10 use Zend\Db\Sql\Sql;
11 use Zend\Db\Sql\Update;
12 use Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator\HydratorInterface;
13

14 class ZendDbSqlMapper implements PostMapperInterface

15 {
16 /**
17 * @var \Zend\Db\Adapter\AdapterInterface
18 */
19 protected $dbAdapter;
20

21 /**
22 * @var \Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator\HydratorInterface
23 */
24 protected $hydrator;
25

26 /**
27 * @var \Blog\Model\PostInterface
28 */
29 protected $postPrototype;
30

31 /**
32 * @param AdapterInterface $dbAdapter
33 * @param HydratorInterface $hydrator
34 * @param PostInterface $postPrototype
35 */
36 public function __construct(
37 AdapterInterface $dbAdapter,
38 HydratorInterface $hydrator,
39 PostInterface $postPrototype
40 ) {
41 $this->dbAdapter = $dbAdapter;
42 $this->hydrator = $hydrator;

104 Chapter 17. Making use of Forms and Fieldsets

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

43 $this->postPrototype = $postPrototype;
44 }
45

46 /**
47 * @param int|string $id
48 *
49 * @return PostInterface
50 * @throws \InvalidArgumentException
51 */
52 public function find($id)
53 {
54 $sql = new Sql($this->dbAdapter);
55 $select = $sql->select('posts');
56 $select->where(array('id = ?' => $id));
57

58 $stmt = $sql->prepareStatementForSqlObject($select);
59 $result = $stmt->execute();
60

61 if ($result instanceof ResultInterface && $result->isQueryResult() && $result->getAffectedRows(

62 return $this->hydrator->hydrate($result->current(), $this->postPrototype);
63 }
64

65 throw new \InvalidArgumentException("Blog with given ID:{$id} not found.");

66 }
67

68 /**
69 * @return array|PostInterface[]
70 */
71 public function findAll()
72 {
73 $sql = new Sql($this->dbAdapter);
74 $select = $sql->select('posts');
75

76 $stmt = $sql->prepareStatementForSqlObject($select);
77 $result = $stmt->execute();
78

79 if ($result instanceof ResultInterface && $result->isQueryResult()) {

80 $resultSet = new HydratingResultSet($this->hydrator, $this->postPrototype);
81

82 return $resultSet->initialize($result);
83 }
84

85 return array();
86 }
87

88 /**
89 * @param PostInterface $postObject
90 *
91 * @return PostInterface
92 * @throws \Exception
93 */
94 public function save(PostInterface $postObject)
95 {
96 $postData = $this->hydrator->extract($postObject);
97 unset($postData['id']); // Neither Insert nor Update needs the ID in the array
98

99 if ($postObject->getId()) {
100 // ID present, it's an Update

17.6. Controller Logic for basically all Forms 105

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

101 $action = new Update('posts');

102 $action->set($postData);
103 $action->where(array('id = ?' => $postObject->getId()));
104 } else {
105 // ID NOT present, it's an Insert
106 $action = new Insert('posts');
107 $action->values($postData);
108 }
109

110 $sql = new Sql($this->dbAdapter);

111 $stmt = $sql->prepareStatementForSqlObject($action);
112 $result = $stmt->execute();
113

114 if ($result instanceof ResultInterface) {

115 if ($newId = $result->getGeneratedValue()) {
116 // When a value has been generated, set it on the object
117 $postObject->setId($newId);
118 }
119

120 return $postObject;

121 }
122

123 throw new \Exception("Database error");

124 }
125 }

The save() function handles two cases. The insert and update routine. Firstly we extract the Post-Object
since we need array data to work with Insert and Update. Then we remove the id from the array since this field
is not wanted. When we do an update of a row, we dont update the id property itself and therefore it isnt needed.
On the insert routine we dont need an id either so we can simply strip it away.
After the id field has been removed we check what action is supposed to be called. If the Post-Object has an id
set we create a new Update-Object and if not we create a new Insert-Object. We set the data for both actions
accordingly and after that the data is passed over to the Sql-Object for the actual query into the database.
At last we check if we receive a valid result and if there has been an id generated. If its the case we call the
setId()-function of our blog and return the object in the end.
Lets submit our form again and see what we get.
1 Catchable fatal error: Argument 1 passed to Blog\Service\PostService::savePost()
2 must implement interface Blog\Model\PostInterface, array given,
3 called in /module/Blog/src/Blog/Controller/InsertController.php on line 33
4 and defined in /module/Blog/src/Blog/Service/PostService.php on line 49

Forms, per default, give you data in an array format. But our PostService expects the format to be an implemen-
tation of the PostInterface. This means we need to find a way to have this array data become object data. If you
recall the previous chapter, this is done through the use of hydrators.

Note: On the Update-Query youll notice that we have assigned a condition to only update the row matching a given
id
$action->where(array(id = ? => $postObject->getId()));
Youll see here that the condition is: id equals ?. With the question-mark being the id of the post-object. In the same
way you could assign a condition to update (or select) rows with all entries higher than a given id:
$action->where(array(id > ? => $postObject->getId()));
This works for all conditions. =, >, <, >= and <=

106 Chapter 17. Making use of Forms and Fieldsets

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

17.7 Zend\Form and Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator working together

Before we go ahead and put the hydrator into the form, lets first do a data-dump of the data coming from the form.
That way we can easily notice all changes that the hydrator does. Modify your WriteController to the following:
1 <?php
2 // Filename: /module/Blog/src/Blog/Controller/WriteController.php
3 namespace Blog\Controller;
4

5 use Blog\Service\PostServiceInterface;
6 use Zend\Form\FormInterface;
7 use Zend\Mvc\Controller\AbstractActionController;
8 use Zend\View\Model\ViewModel;
9

10 class WriteController extends AbstractActionController

11 {
12 protected $postService;
13

14 protected $postForm;
15

16 public function __construct(

17 PostServiceInterface $postService,
18 FormInterface $postForm
19 ) {
20 $this->postService = $postService;
21 $this->postForm = $postForm;
22 }
23

24 public function addAction()

25 {
26 $request = $this->getRequest();
27

28 if ($request->isPost()) {
29 $this->postForm->setData($request->getPost());
30

31 if ($this->postForm->isValid()) {
32 try {
33 \Zend\Debug\Debug::dump($this->postForm->getData());die();
34 $this->postService->savePost($this->postForm->getData());
35

36 return $this->redirect()->toRoute('blog');
37 } catch (\Exception $e) {
38 // Some DB Error happened, log it and let the user know
39 }
40 }
41 }
42

43 return new ViewModel(array(

44 'form' => $this->postForm
45 ));
46 }
47 }

With this set up go ahead and submit the form once again. You should now see a data dump like the following:

17.7. Zend\Form and Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator working together 107

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1 array(2) {
2 ["submit"] => string(16) "Insert new Post"
3 ["post-fieldset"] => array(3) {
4 ["id"] => string(0) ""
5 ["text"] => string(3) "foo"
6 ["title"] => string(3) "bar"
7 }
8 }

Now telling your fieldset to hydrate its data into an Post-object is very simple. All you need to do is to assign the
hydrator and the object prototype like this:
1 <?php
2 // Filename: /module/Blog/src/Blog/Form/PostFieldset.php
3 namespace Blog\Form;
4

5 use Blog\Model\Post;
6 use Zend\Form\Fieldset;
7 use Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator\ClassMethods;
8

9 class PostFieldset extends Fieldset

10 {
11 public function __construct($name = null, $options = array())
12 {
13 parent::__construct($name, $options);
14

15 $this->setHydrator(new ClassMethods(false));
16 $this->setObject(new Post());
17

18 $this->add(array(
19 'type' => 'hidden',
20 'name' => 'id'
21 ));
22

23 $this->add(array(
24 'type' => 'text',
25 'name' => 'text',
26 'options' => array(
27 'label' => 'The Text'
28 )
29 ));
30

31 $this->add(array(
32 'type' => 'text',
33 'name' => 'title',
34 'options' => array(
35 'label' => 'Blog Title'
36 )
37 ));
38 }
39 }

As you can see were doing two things. We tell the fieldset to be using the ClassMethods hydrator and then we tell
the fieldset that the default object to be returned is our Blog-Model. However, when youre re-submitting the form
now youll notice that nothing has changed. Were still only getting array data returned and no object.
This is due to the fact that the form itself doesnt know that it has to return an object. When the form doesnt know that
its supposed to return an object it uses the ArraySeriazable hydrator recursively. To change this, all we need to
do is to make our PostFieldset a so-called base_fieldset.

108 Chapter 17. Making use of Forms and Fieldsets

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

A base_fieldset basically tells the form this form is all about me, dont worry about other data, just worry
about me. And when the form knows that this fieldset is the real deal, then the form will use the hydrator presented
by the fieldset and return the object that we desire. Modify your PostForm and assign the PostFieldset as
base_fieldset:
1 <?php
2 // Filename: /module/Blog/src/Blog/Form/PostForm.php
3 namespace Blog\Form;
4

5 use Zend\Form\Form;
6

7 class PostForm extends Form

8 {
9 public function __construct($name = null, $options = array())
10 {
11 parent::__construct($name, $options);
12

13 $this->add(array(
14 'name' => 'post-fieldset',
15 'type' => 'Blog\Form\PostFieldset',
16 'options' => array(
17 'use_as_base_fieldset' => true
18 )
19 ));
20

21 $this->add(array(
22 'type' => 'submit',
23 'name' => 'submit',
24 'attributes' => array(
25 'value' => 'Insert new Post'
26 )
27 ));
28 }
29 }

Now submit your form again. You should see the following output:
1 object(Blog\Model\Post)#294 (3) {
2 ["id":protected] => string(0) ""
3 ["title":protected] => string(3) "foo"
4 ["text":protected] => string(3) "bar"
5 }

You can now revert back your WriteController to its previous form to have the form-data passed through the
PostService.
1 <?php
2 // Filename: /module/Blog/src/Blog/Controller/WriteController.php
3 namespace Blog\Controller;
4

5 use Blog\Service\PostServiceInterface;
6 use Zend\Form\FormInterface;
7 use Zend\Mvc\Controller\AbstractActionController;
8 use Zend\View\Model\ViewModel;
9

10 class WriteController extends AbstractActionController

11 {
12 protected $postService;
13

17.7. Zend\Form and Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator working together 109

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

14 protected $postForm;
15

16 public function __construct(

17 PostServiceInterface $postService,
18 FormInterface $postForm
19 ) {
20 $this->postService = $postService;
21 $this->postForm = $postForm;
22 }
23

24 public function addAction()

25 {
26 $request = $this->getRequest();
27

28 if ($request->isPost()) {
29 $this->postForm->setData($request->getPost());
30

31 if ($this->postForm->isValid()) {
32 try {
33 $this->postService->savePost($this->postForm->getData());
34

35 return $this->redirect()->toRoute('blog');
36 } catch (\Exception $e) {
37 // Some DB Error happened, log it and let the user know
38 }
39 }
40 }
41

42 return new ViewModel(array(

43 'form' => $this->postForm
44 ));
45 }
46 }

If you send the form now youll now be able to add as many new blogs as you want. Great!

17.8 Conclusion

In this chapter youve learned a great deal about the Zend\Form component. Youve learned that
Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator takes a big part within the Zend\Form component and by making use of both compo-
nents youve been able to create an insert form for the blog module.
In the next chapter we will finalize the CRUD functionality by creating the update and delete routines for the blog
module.

110 Chapter 17. Making use of Forms and Fieldsets

 CHAPTER 18

Editing and Deleting Data

In the previous chapter weve come to learn how we can use the Zend\Form- and Zend\Db-components to create
the functionality of creating new data-sets. This chapter will focus on finalizing the CRUD functionality by introducing
the concepts for editting and deleting data. We start by editting the data.

18.1 Binding Objects to Forms

The one fundamental difference between an insert- and an edit-form is the fact that inside an edit-form there is already
data preset. This means we need to find a way to get data from our database into the form. Luckily Zend\Form
provides us with a very handy way of doing so and its called data-binding.
All you need to do when providing an edit-form is to get the object of interest from your service and bind it to the
form. This is done the following way inside your controller.
1 <?php
2 // Filename: /module/Blog/src/Blog/Controller/WriteController.php
3 namespace Blog\Controller;
4

5 use Blog\Service\PostServiceInterface;
6 use Zend\Form\FormInterface;
7 use Zend\Mvc\Controller\AbstractActionController;
8 use Zend\View\Model\ViewModel;
9

10 class WriteController extends AbstractActionController

11 {
12 protected $postService;
13

14 protected $postForm;
15

16 public function __construct(

17 PostServiceInterface $postService,
18 FormInterface $postForm
19 ) {
20 $this->postService = $postService;
21 $this->postForm = $postForm;
22 }
23

24 public function addAction()

25 {
26 $request = $this->getRequest();
27

28 if ($request->isPost()) {

111
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

29 $this->postForm->setData($request->getPost());
30

31 if ($this->postForm->isValid()) {
32 try {
33 $this->postService->savePost($this->postForm->getData());
34

35 return $this->redirect()->toRoute('blog');
36 } catch (\Exception $e) {
37 die($e->getMessage());
38 // Some DB Error happened, log it and let the user know
39 }
40 }
41 }
42

43 return new ViewModel(array(

44 'form' => $this->postForm
45 ));
46 }
47

48 public function editAction()

49 {
50 $request = $this->getRequest();
51 $post = $this->postService->findPost($this->params('id'));
52

53 $this->postForm->bind($post);
54

55 if ($request->isPost()) {
56 $this->postForm->setData($request->getPost());
57

58 if ($this->postForm->isValid()) {
59 try {
60 $this->postService->savePost($post);
61

62 return $this->redirect()->toRoute('blog');
63 } catch (\Exception $e) {
64 die($e->getMessage());
65 // Some DB Error happened, log it and let the user know
66 }
67 }
68 }
69

70 return new ViewModel(array(

71 'form' => $this->postForm
72 ));
73 }
74 }

Compared to the addAction() the editAction() has only three different lines. The first one is used to simply
get the relevant Post-object from the service identified by the id-parameter of the route (which well be writing
soon).
The second line then shows you how you can bind data to the Zend\Form-Component. Were able to use an object
here because our PostFieldset will use the hydrator to display the data coming from the object.
Lastly instead of actually doing $form->getData() we simply use the previous $post-variable since it will be
updated with the latest data from the form thanks to the data-binding. And thats all there is to it. The only things we
need to add now is the new edit-route and the view for it.

112 Chapter 18. Editing and Deleting Data

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

18.2 Adding the edit-route

The edit route is a normal segment route just like the route blog/detail. Configure your route config to include
the new route:
1 <?php
2 // Filename: /module/Blog/config/module.config.php
3 return array(
4 'db' => array( /** Db Config */ ),
5 'service_manager' => array( /** ServiceManager Config */ ),
6 'view_manager' => array( /** ViewManager Config */ ),
7 'controllers' => array( /** ControllerManager Config* */ ),
8 'router' => array(
9 'routes' => array(
10 'blog' => array(
11 'type' => 'literal',
12 'options' => array(
13 'route' => '/blog',
14 'defaults' => array(
15 'controller' => 'Blog\Controller\List',
16 'action' => 'index',
17 )
18 ),
19 'may_terminate' => true,
20 'child_routes' => array(
21 'detail' => array(
22 'type' => 'segment',
23 'options' => array(
24 'route' => '/:id',
25 'defaults' => array(
26 'action' => 'detail'
27 ),
28 'constraints' => array(
29 'id' => '\d+'
30 )
31 )
32 ),
33 'add' => array(
34 'type' => 'literal',
35 'options' => array(
36 'route' => '/add',
37 'defaults' => array(
38 'controller' => 'Blog\Controller\Write',
39 'action' => 'add'
40 )
41 )
42 ),
43 'edit' => array(
44 'type' => 'segment',
45 'options' => array(
46 'route' => '/edit/:id',
47 'defaults' => array(
48 'controller' => 'Blog\Controller\Write',
49 'action' => 'edit'
50 ),
51 'constraints' => array(
52 'id' => '\d+'
53 )

18.2. Adding the edit-route 113

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

54 )
55 ),
56 )
57 )
58 )
59 )
60 );

18.3 Creating the edit-template

Next in line is the creation of the new template blog/write/edit:

All that is really changing on the view-end is that you need to pass the current id to the url() view helper. To
achieve this you have two options. The first one would be to pass the ID to the parameters array like
1 $this->url('blog/edit', array('id' => $id));

The downside is that $id is not available as we have not assigned it to the view. The Zend\Mvc\Router-component
however provides us with a nice functionality to re-use the currently matched parameters. This is done by setting the
last parameter of the view-helper to true.
1 $this->url('blog/edit', array(), true);

Checking the status

If you go to your browser and open up the edit form at localhost:8080/blog/edit/1 youll see that the form
contains the data from your selected blog. And when you submit the form youll notice that the data has been changed
successfully. However sadly the submit-button still contains the text Insert new Post. This can be changed
inside the view, too.
1 <!-- Filename: /module/Blog/view/blog/write/add.phtml -->
2 <h1>WriteController::editAction()</h1>
3 <?php
4 $form = $this->form;
5 $form->setAttribute('action', $this->url('blog/edit', array(), true));
6 $form->prepare();
7

8 $form->get('submit')->setValue('Update Post');
9

10 echo $this->form()->openTag($form);
11

12 echo $this->formCollection($form);
13

14 echo $this->form()->closeTag();

18.4 Implementing the delete functionality

Last but not least its time to delete some data. We start this process by creating a new route and adding a new
controller:
1 <?php
2 // Filename: /module/Blog/config/module.config.php
3 return array(
4 'db' => array( /** Db Config */ ),

114 Chapter 18. Editing and Deleting Data

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

5 'service_manager' => array( /** ServiceManager Config */ ),

6 'view_manager' => array( /** ViewManager Config */ ),
7 'controllers' => array(
8 'factories' => array(
9 'Blog\Controller\List' => 'Blog\Factory\ListControllerFactory',
10 'Blog\Controller\Write' => 'Blog\Factory\WriteControllerFactory',
11 'Blog\Controller\Delete' => 'Blog\Factory\DeleteControllerFactory'
12 )
13 ),
14 'router' => array(
15 'routes' => array(
16 'post' => array(
17 'type' => 'literal',
18 'options' => array(
19 'route' => '/blog',
20 'defaults' => array(
21 'controller' => 'Blog\Controller\List',
22 'action' => 'index',
23 )
24 ),
25 'may_terminate' => true,
26 'child_routes' => array(
27 'detail' => array(
28 'type' => 'segment',
29 'options' => array(
30 'route' => '/:id',
31 'defaults' => array(
32 'action' => 'detail'
33 ),
34 'constraints' => array(
35 'id' => '\d+'
36 )
37 )
38 ),
39 'add' => array(
40 'type' => 'literal',
41 'options' => array(
42 'route' => '/add',
43 'defaults' => array(
44 'controller' => 'Blog\Controller\Write',
45 'action' => 'add'
46 )
47 )
48 ),
49 'edit' => array(
50 'type' => 'segment',
51 'options' => array(
52 'route' => '/edit/:id',
53 'defaults' => array(
54 'controller' => 'Blog\Controller\Write',
55 'action' => 'edit'
56 ),
57 'constraints' => array(
58 'id' => '\d+'
59 )
60 )
61 ),
62 'delete' => array(

18.4. Implementing the delete functionality 115

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

63 'type' => 'segment',

64 'options' => array(
65 'route' => '/delete/:id',
66 'defaults' => array(
67 'controller' => 'Blog\Controller\Delete',
68 'action' => 'delete'
69 ),
70 'constraints' => array(
71 'id' => '\d+'
72 )
73 )
74 ),
75 )
76 )
77 )
78 )
79 );

Notice here that we have assigned yet another controller Blog\Controller\Delete. This is due to the fact that
this controller will not require the PostForm. A DeleteForm is a perfect example for when you do not even need
to make use of the Zend\Form component. Lets go ahead and create our controller first:
The Factory
1 <?php
2 // Filename: /module/Blog/src/Blog/Factory/DeleteControllerFactory.php
3 namespace Blog\Factory;
4

5 use Blog\Controller\DeleteController;
6 use Zend\ServiceManager\FactoryInterface;
7 use Zend\ServiceManager\ServiceLocatorInterface;
8

9 class DeleteControllerFactory implements FactoryInterface

10 {
11 /**
12 * Create service
13 *
14 * @param ServiceLocatorInterface $serviceLocator
15 *
16 * @return mixed
17 */
18 public function createService(ServiceLocatorInterface $serviceLocator)
19 {
20 $realServiceLocator = $serviceLocator->getServiceLocator();
21 $postService = $realServiceLocator->get('Blog\Service\PostServiceInterface');
22

23 return new DeleteController($postService);

24 }
25 }

The Controller
1 <?php
2 // Filename: /module/Blog/src/Blog/Controller/DeleteController.php
3 namespace Blog\Controller;
4

5 use Blog\Service\PostServiceInterface;
6 use Zend\Mvc\Controller\AbstractActionController;
7 use Zend\View\Model\ViewModel;

116 Chapter 18. Editing and Deleting Data

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

9 class DeleteController extends AbstractActionController

10 {
11 /**
12 * @var \Blog\Service\PostServiceInterface
13 */
14 protected $postService;
15

16 public function __construct(PostServiceInterface $postService)

17 {
18 $this->postService = $postService;
19 }
20

21 public function deleteAction()

22 {
23 try {
24 $post = $this->postService->findPost($this->params('id'));
25 } catch (\InvalidArgumentException $e) {
26 return $this->redirect()->toRoute('blog');
27 }
28

29 $request = $this->getRequest();
30

31 if ($request->isPost()) {
32 $del = $request->getPost('delete_confirmation', 'no');
33

34 if ($del === 'yes') {

35 $this->postService->deletePost($post);
36 }
37

38 return $this->redirect()->toRoute('blog');
39 }
40

41 return new ViewModel(array(

42 'post' => $post
43 ));
44 }
45 }

As you can see this is nothing new. We inject the PostService into the controller and inside the action we first
check if the blog exists. If so we check if its a post request and inside there we check if a certain post parame-
ter called delete_confirmation is present. If the value of that then is yes we delete the blog through the
PostServices deletePost() function.
When youre writing this code youll notice that you dont get typehints for the deletePost() function because we
havent added it to the service / interface yet. Go ahead and add the function to the interface and implement it inside
the service.
The Interface
1 <?php
2 // Filename: /module/Blog/src/Blog/Service/PostServiceInterface.php
3 namespace Blog\Service;
4

5 use Blog\Model\PostInterface;
6

7 interface PostServiceInterface
8 {
9 /**

18.4. Implementing the delete functionality 117

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

10 * Should return a set of all blog posts that we can iterate over. Single entries of the array a
11 * implementing \Blog\Model\PostInterface
12 *
13 * @return array|PostInterface[]
14 */
15 public function findAllPosts();
16

17 /**
18 * Should return a single blog post
19 *
20 * @param int $id Identifier of the Post that should be returned
21 * @return PostInterface
22 */
23 public function findPost($id);
24

25 /**
26 * Should save a given implementation of the PostInterface and return it. If it is an existing P
27 * should be updated, if it's a new Post it should be created.
28 *
29 * @param PostInterface $blog
30 * @return PostInterface
31 */
32 public function savePost(PostInterface $blog);
33

34 /**
35 * Should delete a given implementation of the PostInterface and return true if the deletion has
36 * successful or false if not.
37 *
38 * @param PostInterface $blog
39 * @return bool
40 */
41 public function deletePost(PostInterface $blog);
42 }

The Service
1 <?php
2 // Filename: /module/Blog/src/Blog/Service/PostService.php
3 namespace Blog\Service;
4

5 use Blog\Mapper\PostMapperInterface;
6 use Blog\Model\PostInterface;
7

8 class PostService implements PostServiceInterface

9 {
10 /**
11 * @var \Blog\Mapper\PostMapperInterface
12 */
13 protected $postMapper;
14

15 /**
16 * @param PostMapperInterface $postMapper
17 */
18 public function __construct(PostMapperInterface $postMapper)
19 {
20 $this->postMapper = $postMapper;
21 }
22

23 /**

118 Chapter 18. Editing and Deleting Data

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

24 * {@inheritDoc}
25 */
26 public function findAllPosts()
27 {
28 return $this->postMapper->findAll();
29 }
30

31 /**
32 * {@inheritDoc}
33 */
34 public function findPost($id)
35 {
36 return $this->postMapper->find($id);
37 }
38

39 /**
40 * {@inheritDoc}
41 */
42 public function savePost(PostInterface $post)
43 {
44 return $this->postMapper->save($post);
45 }
46

47 /**
48 * {@inheritDoc}
49 */
50 public function deletePost(PostInterface $post)
51 {
52 return $this->postMapper->delete($post);
53 }
54 }

Now we assume that the PostMapperInterface has a delete()-function. We havent yet implemented this
one so go ahead and add it to the PostMapperInterface.
1 <?php
2 // Filename: /module/Blog/src/Blog/Mapper/PostMapperInterface.php
3 namespace Blog\Mapper;
4

5 use Blog\Model\PostInterface;
6

7 interface PostMapperInterface
8 {
9 /**
10 * @param int|string $id
11 * @return PostInterface
12 * @throws \InvalidArgumentException
13 */
14 public function find($id);
15

16 /**
17 * @return array|PostInterface[]
18 */
19 public function findAll();
20

21 /**
22 * @param PostInterface $postObject
23 *

18.4. Implementing the delete functionality 119

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

24 * @param PostInterface $postObject

25 * @return PostInterface
26 * @throws \Exception
27 */
28 public function save(PostInterface $postObject);
29

30 /**
31 * @param PostInterface $postObject
32 *
33 * @return bool
34 * @throws \Exception
35 */
36 public function delete(PostInterface $postObject);
37 }

Now that we have declared the function inside the interface its time to implement it inside our ZendDbSqlMapper:
1 <?php
2 // Filename: /module/Blog/src/Blog/Mapper/ZendDbSqlMapper.php
3 namespace Blog\Mapper;
4

5 use Blog\Model\PostInterface;
6 use Zend\Db\Adapter\AdapterInterface;
7 use Zend\Db\Adapter\Driver\ResultInterface;
8 use Zend\Db\ResultSet\HydratingResultSet;
9 use Zend\Db\Sql\Delete;
10 use Zend\Db\Sql\Insert;
11 use Zend\Db\Sql\Sql;
12 use Zend\Db\Sql\Update;
13 use Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator\HydratorInterface;
14

15 class ZendDbSqlMapper implements PostMapperInterface

16 {
17 /**
18 * @var \Zend\Db\Adapter\AdapterInterface
19 */
20 protected $dbAdapter;
21

22 protected $hydrator;
23

24 protected $postPrototype;
25

26 /**
27 * @param AdapterInterface $dbAdapter
28 * @param HydratorInterface $hydrator
29 * @param PostInterface $postPrototype
30 */
31 public function __construct(
32 AdapterInterface $dbAdapter,
33 HydratorInterface $hydrator,
34 PostInterface $postPrototype
35 ) {
36 $this->dbAdapter = $dbAdapter;
37 $this->hydrator = $hydrator;
38 $this->postPrototype = $postPrototype;
39 }
40

41 /**

120 Chapter 18. Editing and Deleting Data

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

42 * {@inheritDoc}
43 */
44 public function find($id)
45 {
46 $sql = new Sql($this->dbAdapter);
47 $select = $sql->select('posts');
48 $select->where(array('id = ?' => $id));
49

50 $stmt = $sql->prepareStatementForSqlObject($select);
51 $result = $stmt->execute();
52

53 if ($result instanceof ResultInterface && $result->isQueryResult() && $result->getAffectedRo

54 return $this->hydrator->hydrate($result->current(), $this->postPrototype);
55 }
56

57 throw new \InvalidArgumentException("Blog with given ID:{$id} not found.");

58 }
59

60 /**
61 * {@inheritDoc}
62 */
63 public function findAll()
64 {
65 $sql = new Sql($this->dbAdapter);
66 $select = $sql->select('posts');
67

68 $stmt = $sql->prepareStatementForSqlObject($select);
69 $result = $stmt->execute();
70

71 if ($result instanceof ResultInterface && $result->isQueryResult()) {

72 $resultSet = new HydratingResultSet($this->hydrator, $this->postPrototype);
73

74 return $resultSet->initialize($result);
75 }
76

77 return array();
78 }
79

80 /**
81 * {@inheritDoc}
82 */
83 public function save(PostInterface $postObject)
84 {
85 $postData = $this->hydrator->extract($postObject);
86 unset($postData['id']); // Neither Insert nor Update needs the ID in the array
87

88 if ($postObject->getId()) {
89 // ID present, it's an Update
90 $action = new Update('post');
91 $action->set($postData);
92 $action->where(array('id = ?' => $postObject->getId()));
93 } else {
94 // ID NOT present, it's an Insert
95 $action = new Insert('post');
96 $action->values($postData);
97 }
98

99 $sql = new Sql($this->dbAdapter);

18.4. Implementing the delete functionality 121

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

100 $stmt = $sql->prepareStatementForSqlObject($action);

101 $result = $stmt->execute();
102

103 if ($result instanceof ResultInterface) {

104 if ($newId = $result->getGeneratedValue()) {
105 // When a value has been generated, set it on the object
106 $postObject->setId($newId);
107 }
108

109 return $postObject;

110 }
111

112 throw new \Exception("Database error");

113 }
114

115 /**
116 * {@inheritDoc}
117 */
118 public function delete(PostInterface $postObject)
119 {
120 $action = new Delete('posts');
121 $action->where(array('id = ?' => $postObject->getId()));
122

123 $sql = new Sql($this->dbAdapter);

124 $stmt = $sql->prepareStatementForSqlObject($action);
125 $result = $stmt->execute();
126

127 return (bool)$result->getAffectedRows();

128 }
129 }

The Delete statement should look fairly similar to you as this is basically the same deal as all other queries weve
created so far. With all of this set up now were good to go ahead and write our view file so we can delete blogs.
1 <!-- Filename: /module/Blog/view/blog/delete/delete.phtml -->
2 <h1>DeleteController::deleteAction()</h1>
3 <p>
4 Are you sure that you want to delete
5 '<?php echo $this->escapeHtml($this->post->getTitle()); ?>' by
6 '<?php echo $this->escapeHtml($this->post->getText()); ?>'?
7 </p>
8 <form action="<?php echo $this->url('blog/delete', array(), true) ?>" method="post">
9 <input type="submit" name="delete_confirmation" value="yes">
10 <input type="submit" name="delete_confirmation" value="no">
11 </form>

18.5 Summary

In this chapter weve learned how data binding within the Zend\Form-component works and through it we have
finished our update-routine. Then we have learned how we can use HTML-Forms and checking its data without
relying on Zend\Form, which ultimately lead us to having a full CRUD-Routine for the Blog example.
In the next chapter well recapitulate everything weve done. Well talk about the design-patterns weve used and
were going to cover a couple of questions that highly likely arose during the course of this tutorial.

122 Chapter 18. Editing and Deleting Data

 CHAPTER 19

Reviewing the Blog-application

Throughout the past seven chapters we have created a fully functional CRUD-Application using music-blogs as an
example. While doing so weve made use of several different design-patterns and best-practices. Now its time to
reiterate and take a look at some of the code-samples weve written. This is going to be done in a Q&A fashion.
Do we always need all the layers and interfaces?
Having many objects, wont there be much code-duplication?
Why are there so many controllers?

19.1 Do we always need all the layers and interfaces?

Short answer: no.

Long answer: The importance of interfaces goes up the bigger your application becomes. If you can foresee that your
application will be used by other people or is supposed to be extendable, then you should strongly consider to always
code against interfaces. This is a very common best-practice that is not tied to ZF2 specifically but rather aimed at
strict OOP programming.
The main role of the multiple layers that we have introduced ( Controller -> Service -> Mapper -> Backend ) are to
get a strict separation of concerns for all of our objects. There are many resources who can explain in detail the big
advantages of each layer so please go ahead and read up on them.
For a very simple application, though, youre most likely to strip away the Mapper-layer. In practice all the code from
the mapper layer often resides inside the services directly. And this works for most of the applications but as soon as
you plan to support multiple backends (i.e. open source software) or you want to be prepared for changing backends,
you should always consider including this layer.

19.2 Having many objects, wont there be much code-duplication?

Short answer: yes.

Long answer: there doesnt need to be. Most code-duplication would come from the mapper-layer, too. If you take a
closer look at the class youll notice that theres just two things that are tied to a specific object. First, it is the name of
the database-table. Second, it is the object-prototype thats passed into the mapper.
The prototype is already passed into the class from the __construct() function so thats already interchangeable.
If you want to make the table-name interchangeable, too, all you need to do is to provide the table-name from the
constructor, too, and you have a fully versatile db-mapper-implementation that can be used for pretty much every
object of your application.

123
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

You could then write a factory class that could look like this:
1 <?php
2

3 class NewsMapperFactory implements FactoryInterface

4 {
5 public function createService(ServiceLocatorInterface $serviceLocator)
6 {
7 return new ZendDbSqlMapper(
8 $serviceLocator->get('Zend\Db\Adapter\Adapter'), // DB-Adapter
9 'news', // Table-Name
10 new ClassMethods(false), // Object-Hydrator
11 new News() // Object-Prototype
12 );
13 }
14 }

19.3 Why are there so many controllers?

Looking back at code-examples from a couple of years back youll notice that there was a lot of code inside each
controller. This has become a bad-practice thats known as Fat Controllers or Bloated Controllers.
The major difference about each controller we have created is that there are different dependencies. For example,
the WriteController required the PostForm as well as the PostService while the DeleteController
only required the PostService. In this example it wouldnt make sense to write the deleteAction() into the
WriteController because we then would needlessly create an instance of the PostForm which is not required.
In large scale applications this would create a huge bottleneck that would slow down the application.
Looking at the DeleteController as well as the ListController youll notice that both controllers have the
same dependency. Both require only the PostService so why not merge them into one controller? The reason here
is for semantical reasons. Would you look for a deleteAction() in a ListController? Most of us wouldnt
and therefore we have created a new class for that.
In applications where the InsertForm differs from the UpdateForm youd always want to have two different con-
trollers for each of them instead of one united WriteController like we have in our example. These things heavily
differ from application to application but the general intent always is: keep your controllers slim / lightweight!

19.4 Do you have more questions? PR them!

If theres anything you feel thats missing in this FAQ, please PR your question and we will give you the answer that
you need!

124 Chapter 19. Reviewing the Blog-application

 CHAPTER 20

Getting Started with Zend Framework 2

This tutorial is intended to give an introduction to using Zend Framework 2 by creating a simple database driven
application using the Model-View-Controller paradigm. By the end you will have a working ZF2 application and you
can then poke around the code to find out more about how it all works and fits together.
We will develop this application using Zend Studio 10 and run the application on Zend Server 6.
Zend Server is a PHP application server that includes the PHP runtime. It comes in both free and paid editions, both
of which provide lots of features; however the most interesting ones for developers are the dead-simple environment
setup and the ability to investigate application problems, including profiling performance and memory issues with
code-tracing abilities. Zend Server also ships with Zend Framework 2, which is convenient.
Zend Studio is a PHP-focused IDE based on Eclipse that comes in two flavours: the free Eclipse PDT and Zend
Studio, a paid-for product that provides enhanced features and support options. Usefully, Eclipse PDT provides Zend
Framework 2 support out of the box along with Zend Server integration. You dont get the mobile features though, or
integrated PHP Documenter & PHPUnit features.
In this tutorial were going to build a small, simple database application to manage a list of to-do items. Well need a
list of items along with the ability to add, edit and delete items. Well use a database to store information about each
to-do item.

20.1 Installation

Firstly youll need to install Zend Server and Eclipse PDT. If you have a license for Zend Studio 10, you can use that
too. You can download the latest version of Zend Server. Grab Eclipse PDT or Zend Studio (which comes with a free
30-day trial) and install it. In this tutorial we will use the phrase Zend Studio, but it will all work with Eclipse PDT
too.
On Linux, you can install Zend Server with either Apache or Nginx. This tutorial has assumed that you have installed
the Apache version. The only important difference for this tutorial is the creation of rewrite rules.
Once you have installed Zend Server, enter the administration application, which can usually be found at
http://localhost:10081/. Set the time zone in Configuration -> PHP, and then restart the server (third button from
the right in the top right corner).

125
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

You will also need to install MySQL using your Linux distributions package manager or from mysql.com if you are
on Windows. For OS X users, Zend Server already includes MySQL for you.
On OS X, the document root for the Zend Server installed Apache is at /usr/local/zend/apache2/htdocs.
On Linux, Zend Server uses the web server supplied by the distribution. On Ubuntu 12.04, with Apache, it is
/var/www and with nginx it is at /usr/share/nginx/html. On Windows, it is C:\Program Files
(x86)\Zend\Apache2\htdocs.
Ensure that this folder is writeable by your own user. The easiest way to do this is to change the owner of the html
directory. On a Mac, this would be:
$ sudo chown {your username} /usr/local/zend/apache2/htdocs

20.2 Getting Started

We start by creating a new Local PHP project in Zend Studio. Open Zend Studio and select File -> New -> Local PHP
Project. This will display the New Local PHP Project wizard as shown:

126 Chapter 20. Getting Started with Zend Framework 2

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Enter MyTaskList as the Project Name and set the location to the Zend Server document root. Due to the integration
between Zend Server and Zend Studio, you should find the correct directory as an option in the drop down list. Select
Zend Framework as the Content and you can then select which version of Zend Framework to use. Select the latest
Zend Framework 2 version and press Next.
The next step is the Launch Settings tab. Choose Launch URL and set the host to http://localhost (or
http://localhost:10088 on OS X) and the Base Path to /MyTaskList/:

20.2. Getting Started 127

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Press Finish to create your new project in Zend Studio.

Zend Studio has now created a default Zend Framework project for us:

128 Chapter 20. Getting Started with Zend Framework 2

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

This is a standard Zend Framework 2 Skeleton Application and is a great starting point for a new ZF2 application.
To set up Zend Studio to run this project, select Run -> Run Configurations... and double click on PHP Web Appli-
cation in the left hand list. Enter MyTaskList as the name, Local Zend Server as the PHP Server and then click the
Browse button and select index.php within the public folder of the MyTaskList project. Uncheck Auto Generate in the
URL section and then set the path to /MyTaskList/public and press Apply and then Close:

20.2. Getting Started 129

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

To test that all is working, press the run button in the toolbar (white arrow in a green circle). The ZF2 Skeleton
Application home page will display in a new tab within Zend Studio:

You can also navigate to the same URL (http://localhost:10088/MyTaskList/public/ on a Mac) in any browser.
We have successfully installed both Zend Server and Zend Studio, created a project and tested it. Lets start by looking
at what we have so far in our Zend Framework project.

130 Chapter 20. Getting Started with Zend Framework 2

 CHAPTER 21

A quick tour of the skeleton application

The skeleton application provides a lot of files, so its worth having a quick high-level look at what has been generated
for us. There are a number of high level directories created for us (along with Composer and other support files):
Folder Information stored
config Application-level configuration files.
data Data files generated by the application, such as caches.
module The source files that make up this application are stored within separate modules within this folder.
public The web servers document root. All files served directly by the web server are in here.
vendor Third party libraries.
One of the key features of Zend Framework 2 is its module system. This provides organisation within your application;
all application code lives within a module. The skeleton provides the Application module for bootstrapping, error and
routing configuration. It also provides the application-level controllers for the home page and error display. The
Application module contains these key folders:
Folder Information stored
config Module-specific configuration files.
language Translation files.
PHP files for this module, including controller and model files. The controller for the home
src/Application
page, IndexController.php, is provided.
View scripts for each controller action.
view/application
view/error Error view scripts for 404 and generic errors.
view/layout Layout view scripts. These contain the common HTML shared by a number of pages within the
website. An initial default file, layout.phtml, is provided.
Modules are simply namespaces containing a top level Module class. They are intended to be reusable and no
additional constraints are placed on how they are organised. An application consists of multiple modules, both third
party and application specific, with the list of modules to load stored in config/application.config.php.

21.1 The dispatch cycle

Zend Framework 2 applications use the Front Controller design pattern. This means that all requests are directed to
a single entry point, the public/index.php file. This is done using a .htaccess file containing rewrite rules that
serves all static files (such as CSS & Javascript) and directs all other requests to the index.php. The index.php file
initialises the autoloader and then bootstraps Zend\Mvc\Application before finally running the application. The
process looks like this:

131
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

21.1.1 Starting up

To set up the application for running, a number of things happen. Firstly an instance of Zend\ServiceManager is
created as the master locator for all class instances used by the application. The Module Manager is then used to load
all the applications modules. It does this by reading its configuration file, application.config.php, which is
solely for use by the Module Manager and does not contain the configuration used by the application itself.
The modules are loaded in the order listed in the configuration file and for each module a number of steps takes place:
Configuration of autoloading.
Loading of module configuration.
Registration of event listeners.
Configuration of the Service Manager.
The configuration information from all modules is merged together into one configuration array. This means that con-
figuration information in subsequent modules can override information already set. Finally, the global configuration
files stored in the config/autoload directory are merged (the *.global.php and then the *.local.php
files). This means that any modules configuration can be overridden at the application level and is a key feature that
helps to ensure that the code within a third-party module does not need to be changed.
The Service Manager and Event Manager are two other key features of a Zend Framework 2 application.
Zend\ServiceManager allows for decoupling the instantiation and configuration of a class and its dependencies from
where that class is used. This is known as Dependency Injection and is used extensively in Zend Framework 2.
Zend\EventManager is an implementation of the Observer design pattern which allows decoupling of code. In Zend
Framework 2, every key process in the dispatch cycle is implemented as an event. This means that you can write lis-
teners for these events which can then change the flow of operation or perform additional processes when something

132 Chapter 21. A quick tour of the skeleton application

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

else has happened.

21.1.2 Dispatching

Once all modules have been loaded, the application is run. This is done as a series of events, with the first event,
route, used to determine the controller action that should be run based on the URL requested. Once this is determined,
the dispatch event is triggered which causes the action method within the controller class to be executed. The view
rendering event, render, is then triggered if an HTML view is required. Finally the finish event is triggered which
sends the response back to the users web browser.
While this is a typical dispatch cycle, Zend Framework 2s dispatch system is very flexible and can be configured in
a variety of ways depending on the specific application. Now that weve looked at how Zend Framework works, lets
move on and write the MyTaskList application.

21.1. The dispatch cycle 133

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

134 Chapter 21. A quick tour of the skeleton application

 CHAPTER 22

The MyTaskList application

The application we are going to create is a to-do list manager. The application will allow us to create to-do items and
check them off. Well also need the ability to edit and delete an item. As we are building a simple application, we
need just four pages:
Page Notes
Checklist homepage This will display the list of to-do items.
Add new item This page will provide a form for adding a new item.
Edit item This page will provide a form for editing an item.
Delete item This page will confirm that we want to delete an item and then delete it.
Each page of the application is known as an action, and actions are grouped into controllers within modules. Generally,
related actions are placed into a single controller; for instance, a news controller might have actions of current,
archived and view.
We will store information about our to-do items in a database. A single table will suffice with the following fields:
Field name Type Null? Notes
id integer No Primary key, auto-increment
title varchar(100) No Name of the file on disk
completed tinyint No Zero if not done, one if done
created datetime No Date that the to-do item was created
We are going to use MySQL, via PHPs PDO driver, so create a database called mytasklist using your preferred
MySQL client, and run these SQL statements to create the task_item table and some sample data:
Note that if you have Zend Studio, you can use the built-in Database Connectivity features. This if found in the
Database Development perspective (Window | Open Perspective | Other | Database Development menu item) and
further details are in the Zend Studio manual.

22.1 The Checklist module

We will create all our code within a module called Checklist. The Checklist module will, therefore, contain our
controllers, models, forms and views, along with specific configuration files.
We create our new Checklist module in Zend Studio. In the PHP Explorer on the left, right click on the MyTaskList
project folder and choose New -> Zend Framework Item. Click on Zend Module and press Next. The Source Folder
should already be set to /MyTaskList/module. Enter Checklist as the Module name and Task as the Controller
name and then press Finish:

135
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

The wizard will now go ahead and create a blank module for us and register it with the Module Managers
application.config.php. You can see what it has done in the PHP Explorer view under the module folder:

136 Chapter 22. The MyTaskList application

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

As you can see the Checklist module has separate directories for the different types of files we will have. The config
folder contains configuration files, and the PHP files that contain classes within the Checklist namespace live in
the src/Checklist directory. The view directory also has a sub- folder called checklist for our modules
view scripts, and the tests folder contains PHPUnit test files.

22.1. The Checklist module 137

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

22.2 The Module class

As mentioned earlier, a modules Module class contains methods that are called during the start-up process and is
also used to register listeners that will be triggered during the dispatch process. The Module class created for us
contains three methods: getAutoloaderConfig(), getConfig() and onBootstrap() which are called
by the Module Manager during start-up.

22.2.1 Autoloading files

Our getAutoloaderConfig() method returns an array that is compatible with ZF2s AutoloaderFactory.
It is configured for us with both a classmap file (autoload_classmap.php) and a standard autoloader to load
any files in src/Checklist according to the PSR-0 rules .
Classmap autoloading is faster, but requires adding each new class you create to the array within the au-
toload_classmap.php file, which slows down development. The standard autoloader, however, doesnt have this re-
quirement and will always load a class if its file is named correctly. This allows us to develop quickly by creating new
classes when we need them and then gain a performance boost by using the classmap autoloader in production. Zend
Framework 2 provides bin/classmap_generator.php to create and update the file.

22.2.2 Configuration

The getConfig() method in Checklist\Module is called by the Module Manager to retrieve the configuration
information for this module. By tradition, this method simply loads the config/module.config.php file which
is an associative array. In practice, the Module Manager requires that the returned value from getConfig() be
a Traversable, which means that you can use any configuration format that Zend\Config supports. You will
find, though, that most examples use arrays as they are easy to understand and fast.
The actual configuration information is placed in config/module.config.php. This nested array provides the
key configuration for our module. The controllers sub-array is used to register this modules controller classes
with the Controller Service Manager which is used by the dispatcher to instantiate a controller. The one controller that
we need, TaskController, is already registered for us.
The router sub-array provides the configuration of the routes that are used by this module. A route is the way that a
URL is mapped to a to a particular action method within a controller class. Zend Studios default configuration is set
up so that a URL of /checklist/foo/bar maps to the barAction() method of the FooController within
the Checklist module. We will modify this later.
Finally, the view_manager sub-array within the module.config.php file is used to register the directory
where our view files are with the View sub- system. This means that within the view/checklist sub-folder,
there is a folder for each controller. We have one controller, TaskController, so there is a single sub-folder in
view/checklist called task. Within this folder, there are separate .phtml files which contain the specific
HTML for each action of our module.

22.2.3 Registering events

The onBootstrap() method in the Module class is the easiest place to register listeners for the MVC events that
are triggered by the Event Manager. Note that the default method body provided by Zend Studio is not needed as
the ModuleRouteListener is already registered by the Application module. We do not have to register any
events for this tutorial, so go ahead and delete the entire OnBootstrap() method.

138 Chapter 22. The MyTaskList application

 CHAPTER 23

The applications pages

As we have four pages that all apply to tasks, we will group them in a single controller called TaskController
within our Checklist module as four actions. Each action has a related URL which will result in that action being
dispatched. The four actions and URLs are:
Page URL Action
Homepage /task index
Add new task /task/add add
Edit task /task/edit edit
Delete task /task/delete delete
The mapping of a URL to a particular action is done using routes that are defined in the modules
module.config.php file. As noted earlier, the configuration file, module.config.php created by Zend Stu-
dio has a route called checklist set up for us.

23.1 Routing

The default route provided for us isnt quite what we need. The checklist route is defined like this:
module/Checklist/src/config/module.config.php:
1 'router' => array(
2 'routes' => array(
3 'checklist' => array(
4 'type' => 'Literal',
5 'options' => array(
6 'route' => '/task',
7 'defaults' => array(
8 '__NAMESPACE__' => 'Checklist\Controller',
9 'controller' => 'Task',
10 'action' => 'index',
11 ),
12 ),
13 'may_terminate' => true,
14 'child_routes' => array(
15 'default' => array(
16 'type' => 'Segment',
17 'options' => array(
18 'route' => '/[:controller[/:action]]',
19 ),
20 ),

139
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

21 ),
22 ),

This defines a main route called checklist, which maps the URL /task to the index action of the Task controller
and then there is a child route called default which maps /task/{controller name}/{action name}
to the {action name} action of the {controller name} controller. This means that, by default, the URL to call the add
action of the Task controller would be /task/task/add. This doesnt look very nice and we would like to shorten
it to /task/add.
To fix this, we will rename the route from checklist to task because this route will be solely for the Task
controller. We will then redefine it to be a single Segment type route that can handle actions as well as just route to
the index action
Open module/Checklist/config/module.config.php in Zend Studio and change the entire router sec-
tion of the array to be:
module/Checklist/src/config/module.config.php:
1 'router' => array(
2 'routes' => array(
3 'task' => array(
4 'type' => 'Segment',
5 'options' => array(
6 'route' => '/task[/:action[/:id]]',
7 'defaults' => array(
8 '__NAMESPACE__' => 'Checklist\Controller',
9 'controller' => 'Task',
10 'action' => 'index',
11 ),
12 'constraints' => array(
13 'action' => '(add|edit|delete)',
14 'id' => '[0-9]+',
15 ),
16 ),
17 ),
18 ),
19 ),

We have now renamed the route to task and have set it up as a Segment route with two optional parameters in the
URL: action and id. We have set a default of index for the action, so that if the URL is simply /task, then
we shall use the index action in our controller.
The optional constraints section allow us to specify regular expression patterns that match the characters that we
expect for a given parameter. For this route, we have specified that the action parameter must be either add, edit or
delete and that the id parameter must only contain numbers.
The routing for our Checklist module is now set up, so we can now turn our attention to the controller.

23.2 The TaskController

In Zend Framework 2, the controller is a class that is generally called {Controller name}Controller.
Note that {Controller name} starts with a capital letter. This class lives in a file called {Controller
name}Controller.php within the Controller directory for the module. In our case thats the
module/Checklist/src/Checklist/Controller directory. Each action is a public function within the
controller class that is named {action name}Action. In this case {action name} should start with a lower
case letter.

140 Chapter 23. The applications pages

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Note that this is merely a convention. Zend Framework 2s only restrictions on a controller is that it must implement
the Zend\Stdlib\Dispatchable interface. The framework provides two abstract classes that do this for us:
Zend\Mvc\Controller\ActionController and Zend\Mvc\Controller\RestfulController.
Well be using the AbstractActionController, but if youre intending to write a RESTful web service,
AbstractRestfulController may be useful.
Zend Studios module creation wizard has already created TaskController for us with two action methods in
it: indexAction() and fooAction(). Remove the fooAction() method and the default Copyright Zend
DocBlock comment at the top of the file. Your controller should now look like this:
module/Checklist/src/Checklist/Controller/TaskController.php:
1 namespace Checklist\Controller;
2

3 use Zend\Mvc\Controller\AbstractActionController;
4

5 class TaskController extends AbstractActionController

6 {
7 public function indexAction()
8 {
9 return array();
10 }
11

12 }

This controller now contains the action for the home page which will display our list of to-do items. We now need to
create a model-layer that can retrieve the tasks from the database for display.

23.3 The model

It is time to look at the model section of our application. Remember that the model is the part that deals with the
applications core purpose (the so-called business rules) and, in our case, deals with the database. Zend Framework
does not provide a Zend\Model component because the model is your business logic and its up to you to decide
how you want it to work.
There are many components that you can use for this depending on your needs. One approach is to have model classes
represent each entity in your application and then use mapper objects that load and save entities to the database.
Another is to use an Object-relational mapping (ORM) technology, such as Doctrine or Propel. For this tutorial, we
are going to create a fairly simple model layer using an entity and a mapper that uses the Zend\Db component. In a
larger, more complex, application, you would probably also have a service class that interfaces between the controller
and the mapper.
We already have created the database table and added some sample data, so lets start by creating an entity object. An
entity object is a simple PHP object that represents a thing in the application. In our case, it represents a task to be
completed, so we will call it TaskEntity.
Create a new folder in module/Checklist/src/Checklist called Model and then right click on the new
Model folder and choose New -> PHP File. In the New PHP File dialog, set the File Name to TaskEntity.php
as shown and then press Finish.

23.3. The model 141

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

This will create a blank PHP file. Update it so that it looks like this:
module/Checklist/src/Checklist/Model/TaskEntity.php:
1 <?php
2 namespace Checklist\Model;
3

4 class TaskEntity
5 {
6 protected $id;
7 protected $title;
8 protected $completed = 0;
9 protected $created;
10

11 public function __construct()

12 {
13 $this->created = date('Y-m-d H:i:s');
14 }
15

16 public function getId()

17 {
18 return $this->id;
19 }
20

21 public function setId($Value)

22 {
23 $this->id = $Value;
24 }
25

26 public function getTitle()

27 {
28 return $this->title;
29 }
30

31 public function setTitle($Value)

32 {
33 $this->title = $Value;
34 }

142 Chapter 23. The applications pages

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

35

36 public function getCompleted()

37 {
38 return $this->completed;
39 }
40

41 public function setCompleted($Value)

42 {
43 $this->completed = $Value;
44 }
45

46 public function getCreated()

47 {
48 return $this->created;
49 }
50

51 public function setCreated($Value)

52 {
53 $this->created = $Value;
54 }
55 }

The Task entity is a simple PHP class with four properties with getter and setter methods for each property. We also
have a constructor to fill in the created property. If you are using Zend Studio rather than Eclipse PDT, then you
can generate the getter and setter methods by right clicking in the file and choosing Source -> Generate Getters and
Setters.
We now need a mapper class which is responsible for persisting task entities to the database and populating them
with new data. Again, right click on the Model folder and choose New -> PHP File and create a PHP file called
TaskMapper.php. Update it so that it looks like this:
module/Checklist/src/Checklist/Model/TaskMapper.php:
1 <?php
2 namespace Checklist\Model;
3

4 use Zend\Db\Adapter\Adapter;
5 use Checklist\Model\TaskEntity;
6 use Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator\ClassMethods;
7 use Zend\Db\Sql\Sql;
8 use Zend\Db\Sql\Select;
9 use Zend\Db\ResultSet\HydratingResultSet;
10

11 class TaskMapper
12 {
13 protected $tableName = 'task_item';
14 protected $dbAdapter;
15 protected $sql;
16

17 public function __construct(Adapter $dbAdapter)

18 {
19 $this->dbAdapter = $dbAdapter;
20 $this->sql = new Sql($dbAdapter);
21 $this->sql->setTable($this->tableName);
22 }
23

24 public function fetchAll()

25 {
26 $select = $this->sql->select();

23.3. The model 143

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

27 $select->order(array('completed ASC', 'created ASC'));

28

29 $statement = $this->sql->prepareStatementForSqlObject($select);
30 $results = $statement->execute();
31

32 $entityPrototype = new TaskEntity();

33 $hydrator = new ClassMethods();
34 $resultset = new HydratingResultSet($hydrator, $entityPrototype);
35 $resultset->initialize($results);
36 return $resultset;
37 }
38 }

Within this mapper class we have implemented the fetchAll() method and a constructor. Theres quite a lot
going on here as were dealing with the Zend\Db component, so lets break it down. Firstly we have the construc-
tor which takes a Zend\Db\Adapter\Adapter parameter as we cant do anything without a database adapter.
Zend\Db\Sql is an object that abstracts SQL statements that are compatible with the underlying database adapter
in use. We are going to use this object for all of our interaction with the database, so we create it in the constructor.
The fetchAll() method retrieves data from the database and places it into a HydratingResultSet which is
able to return populated TaskEntity objects when iterating. To do this, we have three distinct things happening.
Firstly we retrieve a Select object from the Sql object and use the order() method to place completed items last.
We then create a Statement object and execute it to retrieve the data from the database. The $results object can
be iterated over, but will return an array for each row retrieved but we want a TaskEntity object. To get this, we
create a HydratingResultSet which requires a hydrator and an entity prototype to work.
The hydrator is an object that knows how to populate an entity. As there are many ways to create an entity object,
there are multiple hydrator objects provided with ZF2 and you can create your own. For our TaskEntity, we use
the ClassMethods hydrator which expects a getter and a setter method for each column in the resultset. Another
useful hydrator is ArraySerializable which will call getArrayCopy() and populate() on the entity
object when transferring data. The HydratingResultSet uses the prototype design pattern when creating the
entities when iterating. This means that instead of instantiating a new instance of the entity class on each iteration,
it clones the provided instantiated object. See http://ralphschindler.com/2012/03/09/php- constructor-best-practices-
and-the-prototype-pattern for more details.
Finally, fetchAll() returns the result set object with the correct data in it.

23.4 Using Service Manager to configure the database credentials

and inject into the controller

In order to always use the same instance of our TaskMapper, we will use the Service Manager to define how to
create the mapper and also to retrieve it when we need it. This is most easily done in the Module class where we
create a method called getServiceConfig() which is automatically called by the Module Manager and applied
to the Service Manager. Well then be able to retrieve it in our controller when we need it.
To configure the Service Manager we can either supply the name of the class to be instantiated or create a factory
(closure or callback) method that instantiates the object when the Service Manager needs it. We start by implementing
getServiceConfig() and write a closure that creates a TaskMapper instance. Add this method to the Module class:
module/Checklist/Module.php:
1 class Module
2 {
3 public function getServiceConfig()
4 {
5 return array(

144 Chapter 23. The applications pages

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

6 'factories' => array(

7 'TaskMapper' => function ($sm) {
8 $dbAdapter = $sm->get('Zend\Db\Adapter\Adapter');
9 $mapper = new TaskMapper($dbAdapter);
10 return $mapper;
11 }
12 ),
13 );
14 }
15 // ...

Dont forget to add use Checklist\Model\TaskMapper; to the list of use statements at the top of the file.
The getServiceConfig() method returns an array of class creation definitions that are all merged together by
the Module Manager before passing to the Service Manager. To create a service within the Service Manager we use
a unique key name, TaskMapper. As this has to be unique, its common (but not a requirement) to use the fully
qualified class name as the Service Manager key name. We then define a closure that the Service Manager will call
when it is asked for an instance of TaskMapper. We can do anything we like in this closure, as long as we return an
instance of the required class. In this case, we retrieve an instance of the database adapter from the Service Manager
and then instantiate a TaskMapper object and return it. This is an example of the Dependency Injection pattern at
work as we have injected the database adapter into the mapper. This also means that Service Manager can be used as
a Dependency Injection Container in addition to a Service Locator.
As we have requested an instance of Zend\Db\Adapter\Adapter from the Service Manager, we also need
to configure the Service Manager so that it knows how to instantiate a Zend\Db\Adapter\Adapter. This is
done using a class provided by Zend Framework called Zend\Db\Adapter\AdapterServiceFactory which
we can configure within the merged configuration system. As we noted earlier, the Module Manager merges all the
configuration from each module and then merges in the files in the config/autoload directory (*.global.php
and then *.local.php files). Well add our database configuration information to global.php which you should
commit to your version control system.You can then use local.php (outside of the VCS) to store the credentials for
your database.
Open config/autoload/global.php and replace the empty array with:
config/autoload/global.php:
1 return array(
2 'service_manager' => array(
3 'factories' => array(
4 'Zend\Db\Adapter\Adapter' =>
5 'Zend\Db\Adapter\AdapterServiceFactory',
6 ),
7 ),
8 'db' => array(
9 'driver' => 'Pdo',
10 'dsn' => 'mysql:dbname=mytasklist;hostname=localhost',
11 'driver_options' => array(
12 PDO::MYSQL_ATTR_INIT_COMMAND => 'SET NAMES \'UTF8\''
13 ),
14 ),
15 );

Firstly, we provide additional Service Manager configuration in the service_manager section, This array works
exactly the same as the one in getServiceConfig(), except that you should not use closures in a con-
fig file as if you do Module Manager will not be able to cache the merged configuration information. As
we already have an implementation for creating a Zend\Db\Adapter\Adapter, we use the factories
sub-array to map the key name of Zend\Db\Adapter\Adapter to the string name of the factory class
(Zend\Db\Adapter\AdapterServiceFactory) and the Service Manager will then use ZendDbAdapter-

23.4. Using Service Manager to configure the database credentials and inject into the controller145
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

AdapterServiceFactory to instantiate a database adapter for us.

The Zend\Db\Adapter\AdapterServiceFactory object looks for a key called db in the configuration array
and uses this to configure the database adapter. Therefore, we create the db key in our global.php file with the
relevant configuration data. The only data that is missing is the username and password required to connect to the
database. We do not want to store this in the version control system, so we store this in the local.php configuration
file, which, by default, is ignored by git.
Open config/autoload/local.php and replace the empty array with:
config/autoload/local.php:
1 return array(
2 'db' => array(
3 'username' => 'YOUR_USERNAME',
4 'password' => 'YOUR_PASSWORD',
5 ),
6 );

Obviously you should replace YOUR_USERNAME and YOUR_PASSWORD with the correct credentials.
Now that the Service Manager can create a TaskMapper instance for us, we can add a method to the controller to
retrieve it. Add getTaskMapper() to the TaskController class:
module/Checklist/src/Checklist/Controller/TaskController.php:
1 public function getTaskMapper()
2 {
3 $sm = $this->getServiceLocator();
4 return $sm->get('TaskMapper');
5 }

We can now call getTaskMapper() from within our controller whenever we need to interact with our model layer.
Lets start with a list of tasks when the index action is called.

146 Chapter 23. The applications pages

 CHAPTER 24

Listing tasks

In order to list the tasks, we need to retrieve them from the model layer and pass them to the view. To do this, we fill
in indexAction() within TaskController. Update the indexAction() like this:
module/Checklist/src/Checklist/Controller/TaskController.php:
1 public function indexAction()
2 {
3 $mapper = $this->getTaskMapper();
4 return new ViewModel(array('tasks' => $mapper->fetchAll()));
5 }

Youll also need to add use Zend\View\Model\ViewModel; to list of use statements at the top of the file.
To provide variables to the view layer, we return a ViewModel instance where the first parameter of the constructor
is an array from the action containing data we need. These are then automatically passed to the view script. The
ViewModel object also allows us to change the view script that is used, but the default is to use {controller
name}/{action name}. You can also return an array from a controller as Zend Framework will construct a
ViewModel behind the scenes for you.
We can now fill in the task/index.phtml view script. Replace the contents with this new code:
module/Checklist/view/checklist/task/index.phtml:
1 <?php
2 $title = 'My task list';
3 $this->headTitle($title);
4 ?>
5 <h1><?php echo $this->escapeHtml($title); ?></h1>
6 <p><a href="<?php echo $this->url('task', array(
7 'action'=>'add'));?>">Add new item</a></p>
8

10 <table class="table">
11 <tr>
12 <th>Task</th>
13 <th>Created</th>
14 <th>Completed?</th>
15 <th>&nbsp;</th>
16 </tr>
17 <?php foreach ($tasks as $task): ?>
18 <tr>
19 <td>
20 <a href="<?php echo $this->url('task',
21 array('action'=>'edit', 'id' => $task->getId()));?>">

147
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

22 <?php echo $this->escapeHtml($task->getTitle()); ?></a>

23 </td>
24 <td><?php echo $this->escapeHtml($task->getCreated()); ?></td>
25 <td><?php echo $task->getCompleted() ? 'Yes' : 'No'; ?></td>
26 <td>
27 <a href="<?php echo $this->url('task',
28 array('action'=>'delete', 'id' => $task->getId()));?>">Delete</a>
29 </td>
30 </tr>
31 <?php endforeach; ?>
32 </table>

The first thing we do is to set the title for the page (used in the layout) and also set the title for the <head> section
using the headTitle() view helper which will display in the browsers title bar. We then create a link to add a new
item using the url() view helper.
The url() view helper is provided by Zend Framework and is used to create the links we need. The first parameter
to url() is the route name that we wish to use for construction of the URL and then the second parameter is an array
of all the variables to fit into the place-holders to use. In this case we use our task route which is set up to accept two
place-holder variables: action and id.
We iterate over the $tasks that we assigned from the controller action within an HTML table. The Zend Framework
view system automatically ensures that these variables are extracted into the scope of the view script. Alternatively,
you can also prefix with $this-> if you would like.
For each row, we display each tasks title, creation date, completion date and provide links to allow for editing and
deleting the record. A standard foreach: loop is used to iterate over the list of tasks, and we use the alternate form
using a colon and endforeach; as it is easier to scan than to try and match up braces. Again, the url() view
helper is used to create the edit and delete links.
Note that we always use the escapeHtml() view helper to help protect ourselves from XSS vulnerabilities.
If you now run the application from within Zend Studio and navigate to http://localhost:10088/MyTaskList/public/task
you should see this:

148 Chapter 24. Listing tasks

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

24.1 Redirect the home page

When you first pressed the Run button, you saw the applications home page which is the skeletons welcome page. It
would be helpful if we could redirect immediately to /tasks to save us having to edit the URL each time.
To do this, go to Navigate -> Open Type... in Zend Studio and type IndexController
in the search box of the Open PHP Type dialog and press return. This will open
module/Application/src/Application/Controller/IndexController.php for you. Change
the indexAction() method so that it reads:
module/Application/src/Application/Controller/IndexController.php:
1 public function indexAction()
2 {
3 return $this->redirect()->toRoute('task');
4 }

We use the redirect controller plugin to redirect the request for the home page to the URL defined by the route
name task which we set up earlier. Now, when you press the green Run button, you will be taken directly to the list
of tasks.

24.1. Redirect the home page 149

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

150 Chapter 24. Listing tasks

 CHAPTER 25

Styling

Weve picked up the skeleton applications layout which is fine for this tutorial, but we need to change the title and
remove the copyright message.
The Zend Skeleton Application is set up to use Zend\I18ns translation functionality for all the text. This allows
you to translate all the text strings in the application into a different language if you need to.
The translation data is stored in separate files in the gettext format which have the extension .po and are
stored in the application/language folder. The title of the application is Skeleton Application and to
change this, you need to use the poedit application (http://www.poedit.net/download.php/). Start poedit and open
application/language/en_US.po. Click on Skeleton Application in the list of original strings and then
type in My Task List as the translation.

Press Save in the toolbar and poedit will create an updated en_US.mo file.
Alternatively, the gted Eclipse plugin allows for editing PO files directly in Zend Studio or PDT. To install gted,
select the Help > Install New Software menu, and press the Add... button. Enter the gted for the Name,
http://gted.sourceforge.net/update as the Location and then press the OK button. You will see the gted name ap-
pear in the list. Click on the checkbox next to gted and work through the install wizard by pressing Next button as
required. At the end of the installation you will be able to create or edit the PO files using the gted plugin:

151
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

It follows that as Zend Studio and PDT are based on Eclipse you can install any other Eclipse plugins that are listed
on http://marketplace.eclipse.org/ using the same process.
The next thing to do is to remove the copyright message, we need to edit the Application modules layout.phtml
view script:
module/Application/view/layout/layout.phtml:
Remove this line:
1 <p>&copy; 2005 - <?php echo date('Y') ?> by Zend Technologies Ltd. <?php echo $this->translate('All

The page looks a little better now!

152 Chapter 25. Styling

 CHAPTER 26

Adding new tasks

We can now write the functionality to add new tasks. There are two things we need to do:
Display a form for user to provide the task information
Process the form submission and store to database
We use Zend\Form to do this. The Zend\Form component manages the form and works in tandem with the
Zend\InputFilter component which will provide validation.
Create a new folder in module/Checklist/src/Checklist called Form and then within the Form folder,
create a new PHP file called TaskForm.php with these contents:
module/Checklist/src/Checklist/Form/TaskForm.php:
1 <?php
2 namespace Checklist\Form;
3

4 use Zend\Form\Form;
5 use Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator\ClassMethods;
6

7 class TaskForm extends Form

8 {
9 public function __construct($name = null, $options = array())
10 {
11 parent::__construct('task');
12

13 $this->setAttribute('method', 'post');
14 $this->setInputFilter(new TaskFilter());
15 $this->setHydrator(new ClassMethods());
16

17 $this->add(array(
18 'name' => 'id',
19 'type' => 'hidden',
20 ));
21

22 $this->add(array(
23 'name' => 'title',
24 'type' => 'text',
25 'options' => array(
26 'label' => 'Title',
27 ),
28 'attributes' => array(
29 'id' => 'title',
30 'maxlength' => 100,
31 )

153
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

32 ));
33

34 $this->add(array(
35 'name' => 'completed',
36 'type' => 'checkbox',
37 'options' => array(
38 'label' => 'Completed?',
39 'label_attributes' => array('class'=>'checkbox'),
40 ),
41 ));
42

43 $this->add(array(
44 'name' => 'submit',
45 'attributes' => array(
46 'type' => 'submit',
47 'value' => 'Go',
48 'class' => 'btn btn-primary',
49 ),
50 ));
51 }
52 }

Within the constructor of TaskForm, we set the name when we call the parents constructor and then set the method
and the input filter that we want to use. We also set the forms hydrator to be ClassMethods, as a form object
uses hydration to transfer data to and from an entity object in exactly the same way as the Zend\Db components do.
Finally, we create the form elements for the id, title, whether the task is complete and the submit button. For each item
we set various attributes and options, including the label to be displayed.
We also need to set up validation for this form. In Zend Framework is this done using an input filter which can either
be standalone or within any class that implements InputFilterAwareInterface, such as a model entity. For
this application we are going to create a separate class for our input filter.
Create a new PHP file called TaskFilter.php in the module/Checklist/src/Checklist/Form folder
with these contents:
module/Checklist/src/Checklist/Form/TaskFilter.php:
1 <?php
2 namespace Checklist\Form;
3

4 use Zend\InputFilter\InputFilter;
5

6 class TaskFilter extends InputFilter

7 {
8 public function __construct()
9 {
10 $this->add(array(
11 'name' => 'id',
12 'required' => true,
13 'filters' => array(
14 array('name' => 'Int'),
15 ),
16 ));
17

18 $this->add(array(
19 'name' => 'title',
20 'required' => true,
21 'filters' => array(
22 array('name' => 'StripTags'),

154 Chapter 26. Adding new tasks

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

23 array('name' => 'StringTrim'),

24 ),
25 'validators' => array(
26 array(
27 'name' => 'StringLength',
28 'options' => array(
29 'encoding' => 'UTF-8',
30 'max' => 100
31 ),
32 ),
33 ),
34 ));
35

36 $this->add(array(
37 'name' => 'completed',
38 'required' => false,
39 ));
40 }
41 }

In the constructor for the TaskFilter, we create inputs for each property that we want to filter. Each input can have
a name, a required property a list of filters and a list of validators. All are optional other than the name property. The
difference between filters and validators is that a filter changes the data passed through it and a validator tests if the
data matches some specific criteria. For the title, we filter the string with StripTags and StringTrim and finally
ensure that the string is no longer than 100 characters with the StringLength validator. For the completed element,
we simply set required to false.
We now need to display the form and process it on submission. This is done within the TaskControllers
addAction(). Open TaskController.php (Navigate -> Open Resource... is a convenient way to do this)
and add a new method called addAction() to the class that looks like this:
module/Checklist/src/Checklist/Controller/TaskController.php:
1 public function addAction()
2 {
3 $form = new TaskForm();
4 $task = new TaskEntity();
5 $form->bind($task);
6

7 $request = $this->getRequest();
8 if ($request->isPost()) {
9 $form->setData($request->getPost());
10 if ($form->isValid()) {
11 $this->getTaskMapper()->saveTask($task);
12

13 // Redirect to list of tasks

14 return $this->redirect()->toRoute('task');
15 }
16 }
17

18 return array('form' => $form);

19 }

Add use Checklist\Model\TaskEntity; and use Checklist\Form\TaskForm; to the list of use

statements at the top of the file.
Lets look at what the addAction() does in detail.

155
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1 $form = new TaskForm();

2 $task = new TaskEntity();
3 $form->bind($task);

We instantiate a new TaskForm object and an empty TaskEntity which we bind to the form for use by the form
later. The forms bind() method attaches the model to the form. This is used in two ways:
1. When displaying the form, the initial values for each element are extracted from the model.
2. After successful validation in isValid(), the data from the form is put back into the model.
When adding a new task, we only need to worry about point 2, however for editing an item, we need data transfer in
both directions.
1 $request = $this->getRequest();
2 if ($request->isPost()) {
3 $form->setData($request->getPost());
4 if ($form->isValid()) {

For a submitted form, we set the posted data to the form and check to see if it is valid using the isValid() member
function of the form. The isValid() method uses the forms input filter to test for validity and if it returns true, it
will then transfer the filtered data values to the entity object that is bound to the form using the registered hydrator.
This means that after isValid() is called, $task now contains the submitted form data.
1 $this->getTaskMapper()->saveTask($task);

As the form is valid, we can save $task to the database using the mappers saveTask() method.
1 // Redirect to list of tasks
2 return $this->redirect()->toRoute('task');

After we have saved the new task, we redirect back to the list of tasks using the Redirect controller plugin.
1 return array('form' => $form);

Finally, if this request is not a POST, we return the variables that we want assigned to the view. In this case, just the
form object.
We also need to add the saveTask() method to the TaskMapper class. Open
module/Checklist/src/Checklist/Model/TaskMapper.php and add this method to the end of
the class:
module/Checklist/src/Checklist/Model/TaskMapper.php:
1 public function saveTask(TaskEntity $task)
2 {
3 $hydrator = new ClassMethods();
4 $data = $hydrator->extract($task);
5

6 if ($task->getId()) {
7 // update action
8 $action = $this->sql->update();
9 $action->set($data);
10 $action->where(array('id' => $task->getId()));
11 } else {
12 // insert action
13 $action = $this->sql->insert();
14 unset($data['id']);
15 $action->values($data);
16 }
17 $statement = $this->sql->prepareStatementForSqlObject($action);

156 Chapter 26. Adding new tasks

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

18 $result = $statement->execute();
19

20 if (!$task->getId()) {
21 $task->setId($result->getGeneratedValue());
22 }
23 return $result;
24

25 }

The saveTask() method handles both inserting a new record if $task doesnt have an id or updating it if it
does. In either case, we need the data from the entity as an array, so we can use the hydrator to do this. If we are
updating, then we use the Sql objects update() method to create an Update object where we can set the data
and a where clause. For inserting, we need an Insert object to which we set the values. Obviously, when inserting,
the database will auto-increment the id, so we do not need the id property in the values list. In either case, we create
a statement object and then execute it. Finally, if we are inserting, we populate the task entitys id with the value of
the auto-generated id.
We now need to render the form in the add.phtml view script. Create a new PHP file called add.phtml in the
module/Checklist/view/checklist/task folder and add this code:
module/Checklist/view/checklist/task/add.phtml:
1 <?php
2 $title = 'Add new task';
3 $this->headTitle($title);
4 ?>
5 <h1><?php echo $this->escapeHtml($title); ?></h1>
6

7 <?php
8 $form = $this->form;
9 $form->setAttribute('action', $this->url('task', array('action' => 'add')));
10 $form->get('submit')->setAttribute('value', 'Add');
11 $form->prepare();
12

13 echo $this->form()->openTag($form);
14 echo $this->formHidden($form->get('id'));
15 echo $this->formRow($form->get('title'));
16 ?>
17 <div>
18 <?php echo $this->formInput($form->get('submit')); ?>
19 </div>
20 <?php
21 echo $this->form()->closeTag($form);

Again, we display a title as before and then we render the form. Zend Framework provides some view helpers to make
this a little easier. The form() view helper has an openTag() and closeTag() method which we use to open
and close the form. Then for the title element, which has a label, we can use formRow() view helper which will
render the HTML for the label, the element and any validator messages that may exist. For the id and submit elements,
we use formHidden() and formInput() respectively as we only need to render the element itself. We also want
the submit button on its own line, so we put it within a div. Note that the formRow view helper is just a convenience -
we could have used formInput(), formLabel() and formElementErrors() separately had we wanted to.
If you now run the application from within Zend Studio and click the Add new item link from the task list page, you
should see:

157
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

You can now add a new task item and see it in the list of tasks.

158 Chapter 26. Adding new tasks

 CHAPTER 27

Editing a task

Editing a task is almost identical to adding one, so the code is very similar. This time we use editAction() in the
TaskController. Open TaskController.php and add this method to it:
module/Checklist/src/Checklist/Controller/TaskController.php:
1 public function editAction()
2 {
3 $id = (int)$this->params('id');
4 if (!$id) {
5 return $this->redirect()->toRoute('task', array('action'=>'add'));
6 }
7 $task = $this->getTaskMapper()->getTask($id);
8

9 $form = new TaskForm();

10 $form->bind($task);
11

12 $request = $this->getRequest();
13 if ($request->isPost()) {
14 $form->setData($request->getPost());
15 if ($form->isValid()) {
16 $this->getTaskMapper()->saveTask($task);
17

18 return $this->redirect()->toRoute('task');
19 }
20 }
21

22 return array(
23 'id' => $id,
24 'form' => $form,
25 );
26 }

This code should look familiar. Lets look at the only difference from adding a task: We look for the id that is in the
matched route and use it to load the task to be edited:
1 $id = (int)$this->params('id');
2 if (!$id) {
3 return $this->redirect()->toRoute('task', array('action'=>'add'));
4 }
5 $task = $this->getTaskMapper()->getTask($id);

The params() method is a controller plugin that provides a convenient way to retrieve parameters from the
matched route. We use it to retrieve the id parameter that we defined in the task route that we created in the

159
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

module.config.php. If the id is zero, then we redirect to the add action, otherwise, we continue by getting
the task entity from the database.
As we use the forms bind() method with its hydrator, we do not need to populate the $tasks data into the form
manually as it will automatically be transferred for us.
We also need to write a getTask() method in the TaskMapper to get a single record from the database, so lets do
that now. Open TaskMapper.php and add this method:
module/Checklist/src/Checklist/Model/TaskMapper.php:
1 public function getTask($id)
2 {
3 $select = $this->sql->select();
4 $select->where(array('id' => $id));
5

6 $statement = $this->sql->prepareStatementForSqlObject($select);
7 $result = $statement->execute()->current();
8 if (!$result) {
9 return null;
10 }
11

12 $hydrator = new ClassMethods();

13 $task = new TaskEntity();
14 $hydrator->hydrate($result, $task);
15

16 return $task;
17 }

This method simply sets a where clause on the Sqls Select object and then executes it. Calling current() on
the result from execute() will return either the array of data for the row or false. If we retrieved data, then we
use the hydrator to populate a new TaskEntity ($task) with $data.
In the same way as with the action methods, the view template, edit.phtml, looks very similar to the one for adding
an task. Create a new PHP file called edit.phtml in in the module/Checklist/view/checklist/task
folder and add this code:
module/Checklist/view/checklist/task/edit.phtml:
1 <?php
2 $title = 'Edit task';
3 $this->headTitle($title);
4 ?>
5 <h1><?php echo $this->escapeHtml($title); ?></h1>
6

7 <?php
8 $form = $this->form;
9 $url = $this->url('task', array('action' => 'edit', 'id' => $id));
10 $form->setAttribute('action', $url);
11 $form->get('submit')->setAttribute('value', 'Edit');
12 $form->prepare();
13

14 echo $this->form()->openTag($form);
15 echo $this->formHidden($form->get('id'));
16 echo $this->formRow($form->get('title'));
17 echo $this->formRow($form->get('completed'));
18 ?>
19 <div>
20 <?php echo $this->formInput($form->get('submit')); ?>
21 </div>

160 Chapter 27. Editing a task

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

22 <?php
23 echo $this->form()->closeTag($form);

Compared to the add view script, we set the title to Edit Task, and update the action URL to the edit action with the
correct id. We also change the label of the button to edit and render the completed form element.
You should now be able to edit tasks.

161
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

162 Chapter 27. Editing a task

 CHAPTER 28

Deleting a task

To round out the core functionality of our application, we need to be able to delete a task. We have a Delete link next
to each task on our list page and the nave approach would be to run the delete action when its clicked. This would be
wrong. Remembering the HTTP specification, we recall that you shouldnt do an irreversible action using GET and
should use POST instead.
We shall therefore show a confirmation form when the user clicks delete and if they then click Yes, we will do the
deletion. As the form is trivial, well code it directly into our view (Zend\Form is, after all, optional!).
Lets start by adding the deleteAction() method to the TaskController. Open TaskController.php
and add this method to it:
module/Checklist/src/Checklist/Controller/TaskController.php:
1 public function deleteAction()
2 {
3 $id = $this->params('id');
4 $task = $this->getTaskMapper()->getTask($id);
5 if (!$task) {
6 return $this->redirect()->toRoute('task');
7 }
8

9 $request = $this->getRequest();
10 if ($request->isPost()) {
11 if ($request->getPost()->get('del') == 'Yes') {
12 $this->getTaskMapper()->deleteTask($id);
13 }
14

15 return $this->redirect()->toRoute('task');
16 }
17

18 return array(
19 'id' => $id,
20 'task' => $task
21 );
22 }

As before, we get the id from the matched route and retrieve the task object. We then check the Request objects
isPost() to determine whether to show the confirmation page or to delete the task. We use the TaskMappers
deleteTask() method to delete the row and then redirect back to the list of tasks. If the request is not a POST,
then we assign the task to the view, along with the id.
We also need to write deleteTask(), so open TaskMapper.php and add this method:
module/Checklist/src/Checklist/Model/TaskMapper.php:

163
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1 public function deleteTask($id)

2 {
3 $delete = $this->sql->delete();
4 $delete->where(array('id' => $id));
5

6 $statement = $this->sql->prepareStatementForSqlObject($delete);
7 return $statement->execute();
8 }

This code should look fairly familiar as we again use a Delete object from Zend\Db\Sql and execute the statement
from it. As we are using a Delete object, we set the where clause to avoid deleting every row in the table.
The view script is a simple HTML form. Create a new PHP file, delete.phtml in the
module/Checklist/view/checklist/task folder with this content:
module/Checklist/view/checklist/task/delete.phtml:
1 <?php
2 $title = 'Delete task';
3 $this->headTitle($title);
4 ?>
5 <h1><?php echo $this->escapeHtml($title); ?></h1>
6

7 <p>Are you sure that you want to delete the

8 '<?php echo $this->escapeHtml($task->getTitle()); ?>' task?
9 </p>
10 <?php
11 $url = $this->url('task', array('action' => 'delete', 'id'=>$id)); ?>
12 <form action="<?php echo $url; ?>" method="post">
13 <div>
14 <input type="submit" name="del" value="Yes" />
15 <input type="submit" name="del" value="No" />
16 </div>
17 </form>

In this view script, we display a confirmation message and then a form with just Yes and No buttons. In the action, we
checked specifically for the Yes value when doing the deletion.
Thats it - you now have a fully working application!

164 Chapter 28. Deleting a task

 CHAPTER 29

Application Diagnostics

One really useful feature of Zend Server is the code trace feature that can show you the method-by-method execution
of any given PHP request. This is especially useful in a Zend Framework 2 application as the use of Events and Service
Manager means that our code base isnt necessarily linear.
Lets consider a contrived example and introduce a delay into our codebase. One of the more common causes of slow
down is related to database calls taking too long due to a complicated query, incorrect indexing or by retrieving too
much data. We have a very simple database table with just 5 rows, so we can simulate this by adding a sleep() call
to our TaskMappers fetchAll() method.
Open Checklist/src/Checklist/Model/TaskMapper.php and add sleep(5); just before the end of
the fetchAll() method:
Checklist/src/Checklist/Model/TaskMapper.php:
1 public function fetchAll()
2 {
3 $select = $this->sql->select();
4 $select->order(array('completed ASC', 'created ASC'));
5

6 $statement = $this->sql->prepareStatementForSqlObject($select);
7 $results = $statement->execute();
8

9 $entityPrototype = new TaskEntity();

10 $hydrator = new ClassMethods();
11 $resultset = new HydratingResultSet($hydrator, $entityPrototype);
12 $resultset->initialize($results);
13

14 sleep(5);
15 return $resultset;
16 }

It will now take 5 seconds (and a little bit) to display the list of tasks.
If you now look at the home page of Zend Servers console, youll see a Slow Request Execution critical event listed.
Click on the show link in the Code Trace column as shown:

165
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

You will then see much more detail about this critical event. The easiest way to use the profile view is to click on the
Statistics per Function tab and then order by Just own total running time.
This will result in the display of the slowest method at the top as shown in the sceenshot.

As you can see, Zend Server has correctly determined that fetchAll() is the cause of the slowdown and so we can
immediately go to the problem source in Zend Studio and fix the problem.
In addition to helping debugging while developing, this is obviously also extremely powerful when Zend Server is
running on the production servers as this profile information is then available for those situations when a given issue
only seems to happen on the live web site.

166 Chapter 29. Application Diagnostics

 CHAPTER 30

Step-by-step debugging

Another useful feature of Zend Studio and Eclipse/PDT is the step-by-step debugger. With the debugger you can set
breakpoints in your code and then run the page in a browser. When the breakpoint is reached, Zend Studio pauses the
page and you can then inspect variables and move forward through your code one line at a time.
To see this in action, lets inspect the value of $task in the checklist modules index.phtml file. Open the mod-
ule/Checklist/view/checklist/task/index.phtml file and double click in the gutter next to the opening <a tag to set a
blue breakpoint marker:

The break point is now set. The easiest way to run to this point is to use the Zend Studio Firefox tool bar. Once in-
stalled, you can navigate to http://localhost:10088/MyTaskList/public/task in Firefox and then press the Debug button
in the toolbar. Zend Studio will then come to the foreground and ask you if you want to use the Debug perspective.
Answer yes, as this view is designed to provide useful information while debugging. Zend Studio will pause the
application on the first line of index.php, so press F8 to continue to the breakpoint that you set.

167
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

You will now see the code we are interested in. The centre pane shows our code with the line that the debugger is
stopped on highlighted. The top left pane shows the stack trace which tells us which methods were used to get to this
line of code. The top right pane shows a list of variables in scope. You can click the arrow next to $task to expand
it and see the properties of the object. Pressing F8 will resume running the application until the next breakpoint. As
our breakpoint is in a loop, it iterates once around the loop and stops again. The data in $task is now the second
database record. Once you have finished inspecting the state of your code, you can press the square red stop button to
stop the debugging mode. Clicking the PHP button in the top right hand corner of Zend Studio takes you back to the
code editing view.

168 Chapter 30. Step-by-step debugging

 CHAPTER 31

Conclusion

This concludes our brief look at building a simple, but fully functional, Zend Framework 2 application using Zend
Studio 10 with the code running on Zend Server 6. It barely scratches the surface of the power and flexibility of Zend
Framework and we recommend reading the manual for more information. Similarly, the combination of Zend Studio
and Zend Server makes for a very powerful system for writing, debugging and deploying PHP applications. The Zend
Studio manual is very helpful for getting the most out of this tool.

169
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

170 Chapter 31. Conclusion

 CHAPTER 32

Zend Framework Tool (ZFTool)

ZFTool is a utility module for maintaining modular Zend Framework 2 applications. It runs from the command line
and can be installed as ZF2 module or as PHAR (see below). This tool gives you the ability to:
create a ZF2 project, installing a skeleton application;
create a new module inside an existing ZF2 application;
get the list of all the modules installed inside an application;
get the configuration file of a ZF2 application;
install the ZF2 library choosing a specific version.
To install the ZFTool you can use one of the following methods or you can just download the PHAR package and use
it.

32.1 Installation using Composer

1. Open console (command prompt)

2. Go to your applications directory
3. Run php composer.phar require zendframework/zftool:dev-master
zf.php (Zend Tool) will be installed in the vendor/bin folder. You may run it with php vendor/bin/zf.php.

32.2 Manual installation

1. Clone using git or download zipball

2. Extract to vendor/ZFTool in your ZF2 application
3. Enter the vendor/ZFTool folder and execute zf.php as reported below.

32.3 Without installation, using the PHAR file

1. You dont need to install ZFTool if you want just use it as a shell command. You can download zftool.phar and
use it.

171
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

32.4 Usage

32.4.1 From Composer or Manual install:

The zf.php should be installed into the vendor/ZFTool directory (relative to your project root) - however, the command
needs to be run from your project root in order for it to work correctly. You can symlink vendor/ZFTool/zf.php to your
project root, or alternatively substitute zf.php for vendor/ZFTool/zf.php in the examples below.

32.4.2 Using the PHAR:

Simply substitute zftool.phar for zf.php in the below examples.

32.4.3 Basic information

> zf.php modules [list] show loaded modules

The modules option gives you the list of all the modules installed in a ZF2 application.
> zf.php version | --version display current Zend Framework version

The version option gives you the version number of ZFTool and, if executed from the root folder of a ZF2 application,
the version number of the Zend Framework library used by the application.

32.4.4 Project creation

> zf.php create project <path>

<path> The path of the project to be created

This command installs the ZendSkeletonApplication in the specified path.

32.4.5 Module creation

> zf.php create module <name> [<path>]

<name> The name of the module to be created

<path> The path to the root folder of the ZF2 application (optional)

This command can be used to create a new module inside an existing ZF2 application. If the path is not provided the
ZFTool try to create a new module in the local directory (only if the local folder contains a ZF2 application).

32.4.6 Classmap generator

> zf.php classmap generate <directory> <classmap file> [--append|-a] [--overwrite|-w]

<directory> The directory to scan for PHP classes (use "." to use current directory)
<classmap file> File name for generated class map file or - for standard output. If not supplied
autoload_classmap.php inside <directory>.
--append | -a Append to classmap file if it exists
--overwrite | -w Whether or not to overwrite existing classmap file

172 Chapter 32. Zend Framework Tool (ZFTool)

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

32.4.7 ZF library installation

> zf.php install zf <path> [<version>]

<path> The directory where to install the ZF2 library

<version> The version to install, if not specified uses the last available

This command install the specified version of the ZF2 library in a path. If the version is omitted it will be used the
last stable available. Using this command you can install all the tag version specified in the ZF2 github repository
(the name used for the version is obtained removing the release- string from the tag name; for instance, the tag
release-2.0.0 is equivalent to the version number 2.0.0).

32.4.8 Compile the PHAR file

You can create a .phar file containing the ZFTool project. In order to compile ZFTool in a .phar file you need to execute
the following command:
> bin/create-phar

This command will create a zftool.phar file in the bin folder. You can use and ship only this file to execute all the
ZFTool functionalities. After the zftool.phar creation, we suggest to add the folder bin of ZFTool in your PATH
environment. In this way you can execute the zftool.phar script wherever you are.

32.4. Usage 173

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

174 Chapter 32. Zend Framework Tool (ZFTool)

 CHAPTER 33

Learning Dependency Injection

33.1 Very brief introduction to Di.

Dependency Injection is a concept that has been talked about in numerous places over the web. For the purposes of
this quickstart, well explain the act of injecting dependencies simply with this below code:
1 $b = new B(new A());

Above, A is a dependency of B, and A was injected into B. If you are not familiar with the concept of dependency
injection, here are a couple of great reads: Matthew Weier OPhinneys Analogy, Ralph Schindlers Learning DI, or
Fabien Potenciers Series on DI.

33.2 Simplest usage case (2 classes, one consumes the other)

In the simplest use case, a developer might have one class (A) that is consumed by another class (B) through the
constructor. By having the dependency injected through the constructor, this requires an object of type A be instantiated
before an object of type B so that A can be injected into B.
1 namespace My {
2

3 class A
4 {
5 /* Some useful functionality */
6 }
7

8 class B
9 {
10 protected $a = null;
11 public function __construct(A $a)
12 {
13 $this->a = $a;
14 }
15 }
16 }

To create B by hand, a developer would follow this work flow, or a similar workflow to this:
1 $b = new B(new A());

If this workflow becomes repeated throughout your application multiple times, this creates an opportunity where one
might want to DRY up the code. While there are several ways to do this, using a dependency injection container is one

175
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

of these solutions. With Zends dependency injection container Zend\Di\Di, the above use case can be taken care
of with no configuration (provided all of your autoloading is already configured properly) with the following usage:
1 $di = new Zend\Di\Di;
2 $b = $di->get('My\B'); // will produce a B object that is consuming an A object

Moreover, by using the Di::get() method, you are ensuring that the same exact object is returned on subsequent
calls. To force new objects to be created on each and every request, one would use the Di::newInstance()
method:
1 $b = $di->newInstance('My\B');

Lets assume for a moment that A requires some configuration before it can be created. Our previous use case is
expanded to this (well throw a 3rd class in for good measure):
1 namespace My {
2

3 class A
4 {
5 protected $username = null;
6 protected $password = null;
7 public function __construct($username, $password)
8 {
9 $this->username = $username;
10 $this->password = $password;
11 }
12 }
13

14 class B
15 {
16 protected $a = null;
17 public function __construct(A $a)
18 {
19 $this->a = $a;
20 }
21 }
22

23 class C
24 {
25 protected $b = null;
26 public function __construct(B $b)
27 {
28 $this->b = $b;
29 }
30 }
31

32 }

With the above, we need to ensure that our Di is capable of setting the A class with a few configuration values (which
are generally scalar in nature). To do this, we need to interact with the InstanceManager:
1 $di = new Zend\Di\Di;
2 $di->getInstanceManager()->setProperty('A', 'username', 'MyUsernameValue');
3 $di->getInstanceManager()->setProperty('A', 'password', 'MyHardToGuessPassword%$#');

Now that our container has values it can use when creating A, and our new goal is to have a C object that consumes B
and in turn consumes A, the usage scenario is still the same:

176 Chapter 33. Learning Dependency Injection

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1 $c = $di->get('My\C');
2 // or
3 $c = $di->newInstance('My\C');

Simple enough, but what if we wanted to pass in these parameters at call time? Assuming a default Di object ($di =
new Zend\Di\Di() without any configuration to the InstanceManager), we could do the following:
1 $parameters = array(
2 'username' => 'MyUsernameValue',
3 'password' => 'MyHardToGuessPassword%$#',
4 );
5

6 $c = $di->get('My\C', $parameters);
7 // or
8 $c = $di->newInstance('My\C', $parameters);

Constructor injection is not the only supported type of injection. The other most popular method of injection is also
supported: setter injection. Setter injection allows one to have a usage scenario that is the same as our previous
example with the exception, for example, of our B class now looking like this:
1 namespace My {
2 class B
3 {
4 protected $a;
5 public function setA(A $a)
6 {
7 $this->a = $a;
8 }
9 }
10 }

Since the method is prefixed with set, and is followed by a capital letter, the Di knows that this method is used for
setter injection, and again, the use case $c = $di->get(C), will once again know how to fill the dependencies
when needed to create an object of type C.
Other methods are being created to determine what the wirings between classes are, such as interface injection and
annotation based injection.

33.3 Simplest Usage Case Without Type-hints

If your code does not have type-hints or you are using 3rd party code that does not have type-hints but does practice
dependency injection, you can still use the Di, but you might find you need to describe your dependencies explicitly.
To do this, you will need to interact with one of the definitions that is capable of letting a developer describe, with
objects, the map between classes. This particular definition is called the BuilderDefinition and can work with,
or in place of, the default RuntimeDefinition.
Definitions are a part of the Di that attempt to describe the relationship between classes so that
Di::newInstance() and Di::get() can know what the dependencies are that need to be filled for a particular
class/object. With no configuration, Di will use the RuntimeDefinition which uses reflection and the type-hints
in your code to determine the dependency map. Without type-hints, it will assume that all dependencies are scalar or
required configuration parameters.
The BuilderDefinition, which can be used in tandem with the RuntimeDefinition (technically, it can
be used in tandem with any definition by way of the AggregateDefinition), allows you to programmatically
describe the mappings with objects. Lets say for example, our above A/B/C usage scenario, were altered such that
class B now looks like this:

33.3. Simplest Usage Case Without Type-hints 177

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1 namespace My {
2 class B
3 {
4 protected $a;
5 public function setA($a)
6 {
7 $this->a = $a;
8 }
9 }
10 }

Youll notice the only change is that setA now does not include any type-hinting information.
1 use Zend\Di\Di;
2 use Zend\Di\Definition;
3 use Zend\Di\Definition\Builder;
4

5 // Describe this class:

6 $builder = new Definition\BuilderDefinition;
7 $builder->addClass(($class = new Builder\PhpClass));
8

9 $class->setName('My\B');
10 $class->addInjectableMethod(($im = new Builder\InjectableMethod));
11

12 $im->setName('setA');
13 $im->addParameter('a', 'My\A');
14

15 // Use both our Builder Definition as well as the default

16 // RuntimeDefinition, builder first
17 $aDef = new Definition\AggregateDefinition;
18 $aDef->addDefinition($builder);
19 $aDef->addDefinition(new Definition\RuntimeDefinition);
20

21 // Now make sure the Di understands it

22 $di = new Di;
23 $di->setDefinition($aDef);
24

25 // and finally, create C

26 $parameters = array(
27 'username' => 'MyUsernameValue',
28 'password' => 'MyHardToGuessPassword%$#',
29 );
30

31 $c = $di->get('My\C', $parameters);

This above usage scenario provides that whatever the code looks like, you can ensure that it works with the dependency
injection container. In an ideal world, all of your code would have the proper type hinting and/or would be using a
mapping strategy that reduces the amount of bootstrapping work that needs to be done in order to have a full definition
that is capable of instantiating all of the objects you might require.

33.4 Simplest usage case with Compiled Definition

Without going into the gritty details, as you might expect, PHP at its core is not DI friendly. Out-of-the-box, the Di
uses a RuntimeDefinition which does all class map resolution via PHPs Reflection extension. Couple that
with the fact that PHP does not have a true application layer capable of storing objects in-memory between requests,
and you get a recipe that is less performant than similar solutions youll find in Java and .Net (where there is an

178 Chapter 33. Learning Dependency Injection

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

application layer with in-memory object storage.)

To mitigate this shortcoming, Zend\Di has several features built in capable of pre-compiling the most expensive
tasks that surround dependency injection. It is worth noting that the RuntimeDefinition, which is used by
default, is the only definition that does lookups on-demand. The rest of the Definition objects are capable of
being aggregated and stored to disk in a very performant way.
Ideally, 3rd party code will ship with a pre-compiled Definition that will describe the various relationships and
parameter/property needs of each class that is to be instantiated. This Definition would have been built as part of
some deployment or packaging task by this 3rd party. When this is not the case, you can create these Definitions
via any of the Definition types provided with the exception of the RuntimeDefinition. Here is a breakdown
of the job of each definition type:
AggregateDefinition- Aggregates multiple definitions of various types. When looking for a class, it
looks it up in the order the definitions were provided to this aggregate.
ArrayDefinition- This definition takes an array of information and exposes it via the interface provided
by Zend\Di\Definition suitable for usage by Di or an AggregateDefinition
BuilderDefinition- Creates a definition based on an object graph consisting of various
Builder\PhpClass objects and Builder\InjectionMethod objects that describe the mapping needs
of the target codebase and
Compiler- This is not actually a definition, but produces an ArrayDefinition based off of a code scanner
(Zend\Code\Scanner\DirectoryScanner or Zend\Code\Scanner\FileScanner).
The following is an example of producing a definition via a DirectoryScanner:
1 $compiler = new Zend\Di\Definition\Compiler();
2 $compiler->addCodeScannerDirectory(
3 new Zend\Code\Scanner\ScannerDirectory('path/to/library/My/')
4 );
5 $definition = $compiler->compile();

This definition can then be directly used by the Di (assuming the above A, B, C scenario was actually a file per
class on disk):
1 $di = new Zend\Di\Di;
2 $di->setDefinition($definition);
3 $di->getInstanceManager()->setProperty('My\A', 'username', 'foo');
4 $di->getInstanceManager()->setProperty('My\A', 'password', 'bar');
5 $c = $di->get('My\C');

One strategy for persisting these compiled definitions would be the following:
1 if (!file_exists(__DIR__ . '/di-definition.php') && $isProduction) {
2 $compiler = new Zend\Di\Definition\Compiler();
3 $compiler->addCodeScannerDirectory(
4 new Zend\Code\Scanner\ScannerDirectory('path/to/library/My/')
5 );
6 $definition = $compiler->compile();
7 file_put_contents(
8 __DIR__ . '/di-definition.php',
9 '<?php return ' . var_export($definition->toArray(), true) . ';'
10 );
11 } else {
12 $definition = new Zend\Di\Definition\ArrayDefinition(
13 include __DIR__ . '/di-definition.php'
14 );
15 }
16

33.4. Simplest usage case with Compiled Definition 179

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

17 // $definition can now be used; in a production system it will be written

18 // to disk.

Since Zend\Code\Scanner does not include files, the classes contained within are not loaded into memory. In-
stead, Zend\Code\Scanner uses tokenization to determine the structure of your files. This makes this suitable to
use this solution during development and within the same request as any one of your applications dispatched actions.

33.5 Creating a precompiled definition for others to use

If you are a 3rd party code developer, it makes sense to produce a Definition file that describes your code so that
others can utilize this Definition without having to Reflect it via the RuntimeDefinition, or create it via
the Compiler. To do this, use the same technique as above. Instead of writing the resulting array to disk, you would
write the information into a definition directly, by way of Zend\Code\Generator:
1 // First, compile the information
2 $compiler = new Zend\Di\Definition\CompilerDefinition();
3 $compiler->addDirectoryScanner(
4 new Zend\Code\Scanner\DirectoryScanner(__DIR__ . '/My/')
5 );
6 $compiler->compile();
7 $definition = $compiler->toArrayDefinition();
8

9 // Now, create a Definition class for this information

10 $codeGenerator = new Zend\Code\Generator\FileGenerator();
11 $codeGenerator->setClass(($class = new Zend\Code\Generator\ClassGenerator()));
12 $class->setNamespaceName('My');
13 $class->setName('DiDefinition');
14 $class->setExtendedClass('\Zend\Di\Definition\ArrayDefinition');
15 $class->addMethod(
16 '__construct',
17 array(),
18 \Zend\Code\Generator\MethodGenerator::FLAG_PUBLIC,
19 'parent::__construct(' . var_export($definition->toArray(), true) . ');'
20 );
21 file_put_contents(__DIR__ . '/My/DiDefinition.php', $codeGenerator->generate());

33.6 Using Multiple Definitions From Multiple Sources

In all actuality, you will be using code from multiple places, some Zend Framework code, some other 3rd party code,
and of course, your own code that makes up your application. Here is a method for consuming definitions from
multiple places:
1 use Zend\Di\Di;
2 use Zend\Di\Definition;
3 use Zend\Di\Definition\Builder;
4

5 $di = new Di;

6 $diDefAggregate = new Definition\Aggregate();
7

8 // first add in provided Definitions, for example

9 $diDefAggregate->addDefinition(new ThirdParty\Dbal\DiDefinition());
10 $diDefAggregate->addDefinition(new Zend\Controller\DiDefinition());
11

180 Chapter 33. Learning Dependency Injection

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

12 // for code that does not have TypeHints

13 $builder = new Definition\BuilderDefinition();
14 $builder->addClass(($class = Builder\PhpClass));
15 $class->addInjectionMethod(
16 ($injectMethod = new Builder\InjectionMethod())
17 );
18 $injectMethod->setName('injectImplementation');
19 $injectMethod->addParameter(
20 'implementation', 'Class\For\Specific\Implementation'
21 );
22

23 // now, your application code

24 $compiler = new Definition\Compiler()
25 $compiler->addCodeScannerDirectory(
26 new Zend\Code\Scanner\DirectoryScanner(__DIR__ . '/App/')
27 );
28 $appDefinition = $compiler->compile();
29 $diDefAggregate->addDefinition($appDefinition);
30

31 // now, pass in properties

32 $im = $di->getInstanceManager();
33

34 // this could come from Zend\Config\Config::toArray

35 $propertiesFromConfig = array(
36 'ThirdParty\Dbal\DbAdapter' => array(
37 'username' => 'someUsername',
38 'password' => 'somePassword'
39 ),
40 'Zend\Controller\Helper\ContentType' => array(
41 'default' => 'xhtml5'
42 ),
43 );
44 $im->setProperties($propertiesFromConfig);

33.7 Generating Service Locators

In production, you want things to be as fast as possible. The Dependency Injection Container, while engineered for
speed, still must do a fair bit of work resolving parameters and dependencies at runtime. What if you could speed
things up and remove those lookups?
The Zend\Di\ServiceLocator\Generator component can do just that. It takes a configured DI instance,
and generates a service locator class for you from it. That class will manage instances for you, as well as provide
hard-coded, lazy-loading instantiation of instances.
The method getCodeGenerator() returns an instance of Zend\CodeGenerator\Php\PhpFile, from
which you can then write a class file with the new Service Locator. Methods on the Generator class allow you
to specify the namespace and class for the generated Service Locator.
As an example, consider the following:
1 use Zend\Di\ServiceLocator\Generator;
2

3 // $di is a fully configured DI instance

4 $generator = new Generator($di);
5

6 $generator->setNamespace('Application')

33.7. Generating Service Locators 181

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

7 ->setContainerClass('Context');
8 $file = $generator->getCodeGenerator();
9 $file->setFilename(__DIR__ . '/../Application/Context.php');
10 $file->write();

The above code will write to ../Application/Context.php, and that file will contain the class
Application\Context. That file might look like the following:
1 <?php
2

3 namespace Application;
4

5 use Zend\Di\ServiceLocator;
6

7 class Context extends ServiceLocator

8 {
9

10 public function get($name, array $params = array())

11 {
12 switch ($name) {
13 case 'composed':
14 case 'My\ComposedClass':
15 return $this->getMyComposedClass();
16

17 case 'struct':
18 case 'My\Struct':
19 return $this->getMyStruct();
20

21 default:
22 return parent::get($name, $params);
23 }
24 }
25

26 public function getComposedClass()

27 {
28 if (isset($this->services['My\ComposedClass'])) {
29 return $this->services['My\ComposedClass'];
30 }
31

32 $object = new \My\ComposedClass();

33 $this->services['My\ComposedClass'] = $object;
34 return $object;
35 }
36 public function getMyStruct()
37 {
38 if (isset($this->services['My\Struct'])) {
39 return $this->services['My\Struct'];
40 }
41

42 $object = new \My\Struct();

43 $this->services['My\Struct'] = $object;
44 return $object;
45 }
46

47 public function getComposed()

48 {
49 return $this->get('My\ComposedClass');
50 }

182 Chapter 33. Learning Dependency Injection

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

51

52 public function getStruct()

53 {
54 return $this->get('My\Struct');
55 }
56 }

To use this class, you simply consume it as you would a DI container:

1 $container = new Application\Context;
2

3 $struct = $container->get('struct'); // My\Struct instance

One note about this functionality in its current incarnation. Configuration is per-environment only at this time. This
means that you will need to generate a container per execution environment. Our recommendation is that you do so,
and then in your environment, specify the container class to use.

33.7. Generating Service Locators 183

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

184 Chapter 33. Learning Dependency Injection

 CHAPTER 34

Unit Testing a Zend Framework 2 application

A solid unit test suite is essential for ongoing development in large projects, especially those with many people in-
volved. Going back and manually testing every individual component of an application after every change is imprac-
tical. Your unit tests will help alleviate that by automatically testing your applications components and alerting you
when something is not working the same way it was when you wrote your tests.
This tutorial is written in the hopes of showing how to test different parts of a Zend Framework 2 MVC application.
As such, this tutorial will use the application written in the getting started user guide. It is in no way a guide to unit
testing in general, but is here only to help overcome the initial hurdles in writing unit tests for ZF2 applications.
It is recommended to have at least a basic understanding of unit tests, assertions and mocks.
As the Zend Framework 2 API uses PHPUnit, so will this tutorial. This tutorial assumes that you already have PHPUnit
installed. The version of PHPUnit used should be 3.7.*

34.1 Setting up phpunit to use composers autoload.php

If you used composer to generate an autoload.php file for you, as seen in the note on using composer to au-
toload module files, then you need to use a phpunit binary installed by composer. You can add this as a development
dependency using composer itself:
$ php composer.phar require --dev phpunit/phpunit

The above command will update your composer.json file and perform an update for you, which will also setup
autoloading rules.

34.2 Setting up the tests directory

As Zend Framework 2 applications are built from modules that should be standalone blocks of an application, we
dont test the application in its entirety, but module by module.
We will show how to set up the minimum requirements to test a module, the Album module we wrote in the user
guide, and which then can be used as a base for testing any other module.
Start by creating a directory called test in zf2-tutorial\module\Album with the following subdirectories:
zf2-tutorial/
/module
/Album
/test

185
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

/AlbumTest
/Controller

The structure of the test directory matches exactly with that of the modules source files, and it will allow you to
keep your tests well-organized and easy to find.

34.3 Bootstrapping your tests

Next, create a file called phpunit.xml under zf2-tutorial/module/Album/test:

1 <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
2

3 <phpunit bootstrap="Bootstrap.php" colors="true">

4 <testsuites>
5 <testsuite name="zf2tutorial">
6 <directory>./AlbumTest</directory>
7 </testsuite>
8 </testsuites>
9 </phpunit>

And a file called Bootstrap.php, also under zf2-tutorial/module/Album/test:

1 <?php
2

3 namespace AlbumTest;
4

5 use Zend\Loader\AutoloaderFactory;
6 use Zend\Mvc\Service\ServiceManagerConfig;
7 use Zend\ServiceManager\ServiceManager;
8 use RuntimeException;
9

10 error_reporting(E_ALL | E_STRICT);
11 chdir(__DIR__);
12

13 /**
14 * Test bootstrap, for setting up autoloading
15 */
16 class Bootstrap
17 {
18 protected static $serviceManager;
19

20 public static function init()

21 {
22 $zf2ModulePaths = array(dirname(dirname(__DIR__)));
23 if (($path = static::findParentPath('vendor'))) {
24 $zf2ModulePaths[] = $path;
25 }
26 if (($path = static::findParentPath('module')) !== $zf2ModulePaths[0]) {
27 $zf2ModulePaths[] = $path;
28 }
29

30 static::initAutoloader();
31

32 // use ModuleManager to load this module and it's dependencies

33 $config = array(
34 'module_listener_options' => array(
35 'module_paths' => $zf2ModulePaths,

186 Chapter 34. Unit Testing a Zend Framework 2 application

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

36 ),
37 'modules' => array(
38 'Album'
39 )
40 );
41

42 $serviceManager = new ServiceManager(new ServiceManagerConfig());

43 $serviceManager->setService('ApplicationConfig', $config);
44 $serviceManager->get('ModuleManager')->loadModules();
45 static::$serviceManager = $serviceManager;
46 }
47

48 public static function chroot()

49 {
50 $rootPath = dirname(static::findParentPath('module'));
51 chdir($rootPath);
52 }
53

54 public static function getServiceManager()

55 {
56 return static::$serviceManager;
57 }
58

59 protected static function initAutoloader()

60 {
61 $vendorPath = static::findParentPath('vendor');
62

63 if (file_exists($vendorPath.'/autoload.php')) {
64 include $vendorPath.'/autoload.php';
65 }
66

67 if (! class_exists('Zend\Loader\AutoloaderFactory')) {
68 throw new RuntimeException(
69 'Unable to load ZF2. Run `php composer.phar install`'
70 );
71 }
72

73 AutoloaderFactory::factory(array(
74 'Zend\Loader\StandardAutoloader' => array(
75 'autoregister_zf' => true,
76 'namespaces' => array(
77 __NAMESPACE__ => __DIR__ . '/' . __NAMESPACE__,
78 ),
79 ),
80 ));
81 }
82

83 protected static function findParentPath($path)

84 {
85 $dir = __DIR__;
86 $previousDir = '.';
87 while (!is_dir($dir . '/' . $path)) {
88 $dir = dirname($dir);
89 if ($previousDir === $dir) {
90 return false;
91 }
92 $previousDir = $dir;
93 }

34.3. Bootstrapping your tests 187

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

94 return $dir . '/' . $path;

95 }
96 }
97

98 Bootstrap::init();
99 Bootstrap::chroot();

The contents of this bootstrap file can be daunting at first sight, but all it really does is ensuring that all the necessary
files are autoloadable for our tests. The most important lines is line 38 on which we say what modules we want to load
for our test. In this case we are only loading the Album module as it has no dependencies against other modules.
Now, if you navigate to the zf2-tutorial/module/Album/test/ directory, and run phpunit, you should
get a similar output to this:
PHPUnit 3.7.13 by Sebastian Bergmann.

Configuration read from /var/www/zf2-tutorial/module/Album/test/phpunit.xml

Time: 0 seconds, Memory: 1.75Mb

No tests executed!

Even though no tests were executed, we at least know that the autoloader found the ZF2 files, otherwise it would throw
a RuntimeException, defined on line 69 of our bootstrap file.

34.4 Your first controller test

Testing controllers is never an easy task, but Zend Framework 2 comes with the Zend\Test component which should
make testing much less cumbersome.
First, create AlbumControllerTest.php under zf2-tutorial/module/Album/test/AlbumTest/Controller
with the following contents:
1 <?php
2

3 namespace AlbumTest\Controller;
4

5 use Zend\Test\PHPUnit\Controller\AbstractHttpControllerTestCase;
6

7 class AlbumControllerTest extends AbstractHttpControllerTestCase

8 {
9 public function setUp()
10 {
11 $this->setApplicationConfig(
12 include '/var/www/zf2-tutorial/config/application.config.php'
13 );
14 parent::setUp();
15 }
16 }

The AbstractHttpControllerTestCase class we extend here helps us setting up the application itself, helps
with dispatching and other tasks that happen during a request, as well offers methods for asserting request params,
response headers, redirects and more. See Zend\Test documentation for more.
One thing that is needed is to set the application config with the setApplicationConfig method.
Now, add the following function to the AlbumControllerTest class:

188 Chapter 34. Unit Testing a Zend Framework 2 application

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1 public function testIndexActionCanBeAccessed()

2 {
3 $this->dispatch('/album');
4 $this->assertResponseStatusCode(200);
5

6 $this->assertModuleName('Album');
7 $this->assertControllerName('Album\Controller\Album');
8 $this->assertControllerClass('AlbumController');
9 $this->assertMatchedRouteName('album');
10 }

This test case dispatches the /album URL, asserts that the response code is 200, and that we ended up in the desired
module and controller.

Note: For asserting the controller name we are using the controller name we defined in our routing configuration for
the Album module. In our example this should be defined on line 19 of the module.config.php file in the Album
module.

34.5 A failing test case

Finally, cd to zf2-tutorial/module/Album/test/ and run phpunit. Uh-oh! The test failed!

PHPUnit 3.7.13 by Sebastian Bergmann.

Configuration read from /var/www/zf2-tutorial/module/Album/test/phpunit.xml

Time: 0 seconds, Memory: 8.50Mb

There was 1 failure:

1) AlbumTest\Controller\AlbumControllerTest::testIndexActionCanBeAccessed
Failed asserting response code "200", actual status code is "500"

/var/www/zf2-tutorial/vendor/ZF2/library/Zend/Test/PHPUnit/Controller/AbstractControllerTestCase.php:
/var/www/zf2-tutorial/module/Album/test/AlbumTest/Controller/AlbumControllerTest.php:22

FAILURES!
Tests: 1, Assertions: 0, Failures: 1.

The failure message doesnt tell us much, apart from that the expected status code is not 200, but 500. To get a bit
more information when something goes wrong in a test case, we set the protected $traceError member to true.
Add the following just above the setUp method in our AlbumControllerTest class:
1 protected $traceError = true;

Running the phpunit command again and we should see some more information about what went wrong in our test.
The main error message we are interested in should read something like:
Zend\ServiceManager\Exception\ServiceNotFoundException: Zend\ServiceManager\ServiceManager::get
was unable to fetch or create an instance for Zend\Db\Adapter\Adapter

From this error message it is clear that not all our dependencies are available in the service manager. Let us take a look
how can we fix this.

34.5. A failing test case 189

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

34.6 Configuring the service manager for the tests

The error says that the service manager can not create an instance of a database adapter for us. The database adapter
is indirectly used by our Album\Model\AlbumTable to fetch the list of albums from the database.
The first thought would be to create an instance of an adapter, pass it to the service manager and let the code run from
there as is. The problem with this approach is that we would end up with our test cases actually doing queries against
the database. To keep our tests fast, and to reduce the number of possible failure points in our tests, this should be
avoided.
The second thought would be then to create a mock of the database adapter, and prevent the actual database calls by
mocking them out. This is a much better approach, but creating the adapter mock is tedious (but no doubt we will have
to create it at one point).
The best thing to do would be to mock out our Album\Model\AlbumTable class which retrieves the list of albums
from the database. Remember, we are now testing our controller, so we can mock out the actual call to fetchAll
and replace the return values with dummy values. At this point, we are not interested in how fetchAll retrieves the
albums, but only that it gets called and that it returns an array of albums, so that is why we can get away with this
mocking. When we will test AlbumTable itself, then we will write the actual tests for the fetchAll method.
Here is how we can accomplish this, by modifying the testIndexActionCanBeAccessed test method as fol-
lows:
1 public function testIndexActionCanBeAccessed()
2 {
3 $albumTableMock = $this->getMockBuilder('Album\Model\AlbumTable')
4 ->disableOriginalConstructor()
5 ->getMock();
6

7 $albumTableMock->expects($this->once())
8 ->method('fetchAll')
9 ->will($this->returnValue(array()));
10

11 $serviceManager = $this->getApplicationServiceLocator();
12 $serviceManager->setAllowOverride(true);
13 $serviceManager->setService('Album\Model\AlbumTable', $albumTableMock);
14

15 $this->dispatch('/album');
16 $this->assertResponseStatusCode(200);
17

18 $this->assertModuleName('Album');
19 $this->assertControllerName('Album\Controller\Album');
20 $this->assertControllerClass('AlbumController');
21 $this->assertMatchedRouteName('album');
22 }

By default, the Service Manager does not allow us to replace existing services. As the Album\Model\AlbumTable
was already set, we are allowing for overrides (line 12), and then replacing the real instance of the AlbumTable with
a mock. The mock is created so that it will return just an empty array when the fetchAll method is called. This
allows us to test for what we care about in this test, and that is that by dispatching to the /album URL we get to the
Album modules AlbumController.
Running the phpunit command at this point, we will get the following output as the tests now pass:
PHPUnit 3.7.13 by Sebastian Bergmann.

Configuration read from /var/www/zf2-tutorial/module/Album/test/phpunit.xml

190 Chapter 34. Unit Testing a Zend Framework 2 application

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Time: 0 seconds, Memory: 9.00Mb

OK (1 test, 6 assertions)

34.7 Testing actions with POST

One of the most common actions happening in controllers is submitting a form with some POST data. Testing this is
surprisingly easy:
1 public function testAddActionRedirectsAfterValidPost()
2 {
3 $albumTableMock = $this->getMockBuilder('Album\Model\AlbumTable')
4 ->disableOriginalConstructor()
5 ->getMock();
6

7 $albumTableMock->expects($this->once())
8 ->method('saveAlbum')
9 ->will($this->returnValue(null));
10

11 $serviceManager = $this->getApplicationServiceLocator();
12 $serviceManager->setAllowOverride(true);
13 $serviceManager->setService('Album\Model\AlbumTable', $albumTableMock);
14

15 $postData = array(
16 'title' => 'Led Zeppelin III',
17 'artist' => 'Led Zeppelin',
18 'id' => '',
19 );
20 $this->dispatch('/album/add', 'POST', $postData);
21 $this->assertResponseStatusCode(302);
22

23 $this->assertRedirectTo('/album/');
24 }

Here we test that when we make a POST request against the /album/add URL, the
Album\Model\AlbumTables saveAlbum will be called and after that we will be redirected back to the
/album URL.
Running phpunit gives us the following output:
PHPUnit 3.7.13 by Sebastian Bergmann.

Configuration read from /home/robert/www/zf2-tutorial/module/Album/test/phpunit.xml

..

Time: 0 seconds, Memory: 10.75Mb

OK (2 tests, 9 assertions)

Testing the editAction and deleteAction methods can be easily done in a manner similar as shown for the
addAction.
When testing the editAction you will also need to mock out the getAlbum method:

34.7. Testing actions with POST 191

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1 $albumTableMock->expects($this->once())
2 ->method('getAlbum')
3 ->will($this->returnValue(new \Album\Model\Album()));

34.8 Testing model entities

Now that we know how to test our controllers, let us move to an other important part of our application - the model
entity.
Here we want to test that the initial state of the entity is what we expect it to be, that we can convert the models
parameters to and from an array, and that it has all the input filters we need.
Create the file AlbumTest.php in module/Album/test/AlbumTest/Model directory with the following
contents:
1 <?php
2 namespace AlbumTest\Model;
3

4 use Album\Model\Album;
5 use PHPUnit_Framework_TestCase;
6

7 class AlbumTest extends PHPUnit_Framework_TestCase

8 {
9 public function testAlbumInitialState()
10 {
11 $album = new Album();
12

13 $this->assertNull(
14 $album->artist,
15 '"artist" should initially be null'
16 );
17 $this->assertNull(
18 $album->id,
19 '"id" should initially be null'
20 );
21 $this->assertNull(
22 $album->title,
23 '"title" should initially be null'
24 );
25 }
26

27 public function testExchangeArraySetsPropertiesCorrectly()

28 {
29 $album = new Album();
30 $data = array('artist' => 'some artist',
31 'id' => 123,
32 'title' => 'some title');
33

34 $album->exchangeArray($data);
35

36 $this->assertSame(
37 $data['artist'],
38 $album->artist,
39 '"artist" was not set correctly'
40 );
41 $this->assertSame(

192 Chapter 34. Unit Testing a Zend Framework 2 application

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

42 $data['id'],
43 $album->id,
44 '"id" was not set correctly'
45 );
46 $this->assertSame(
47 $data['title'],
48 $album->title,
49 '"title" was not set correctly'
50 );
51 }
52

53 public function testExchangeArraySetsPropertiesToNullIfKeysAreNotPresent()

54 {
55 $album = new Album();
56

57 $album->exchangeArray(array('artist' => 'some artist',

58 'id' => 123,
59 'title' => 'some title'));
60 $album->exchangeArray(array());
61

62 $this->assertNull(
63 $album->artist, '"artist" should have defaulted to null'
64 );
65 $this->assertNull(
66 $album->id, '"id" should have defaulted to null'
67 );
68 $this->assertNull(
69 $album->title, '"title" should have defaulted to null'
70 );
71 }
72

73 public function testGetArrayCopyReturnsAnArrayWithPropertyValues()

74 {
75 $album = new Album();
76 $data = array('artist' => 'some artist',
77 'id' => 123,
78 'title' => 'some title');
79

80 $album->exchangeArray($data);
81 $copyArray = $album->getArrayCopy();
82

83 $this->assertSame(
84 $data['artist'],
85 $copyArray['artist'],
86 '"artist" was not set correctly'
87 );
88 $this->assertSame(
89 $data['id'],
90 $copyArray['id'],
91 '"id" was not set correctly'
92 );
93 $this->assertSame(
94 $data['title'],
95 $copyArray['title'],
96 '"title" was not set correctly'
97 );
98 }
99

34.8. Testing model entities 193

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

100 public function testInputFiltersAreSetCorrectly()

101 {
102 $album = new Album();
103

104 $inputFilter = $album->getInputFilter();

105

106 $this->assertSame(3, $inputFilter->count());

107 $this->assertTrue($inputFilter->has('artist'));
108 $this->assertTrue($inputFilter->has('id'));
109 $this->assertTrue($inputFilter->has('title'));
110 }
111 }

We are testing for 5 things:

1. Are all of the Albums properties initially set to NULL?
2. Will the Albums properties be set correctly when we call exchangeArray()?
3. Will a default value of NULL be used for properties whose keys are not present in the $data array?
4. Can we get an array copy of our model?
5. Do all elements have input filters present?
If we run phpunit again, we will get the following output, confirming that our model is indeed correct:
PHPUnit 3.7.13 by Sebastian Bergmann.

Configuration read from /var/www/zf2-tutorial/module/Album/test/phpunit.xml

.......

Time: 0 seconds, Memory: 11.00Mb

OK (7 tests, 25 assertions)

34.9 Testing model tables

The final step in this unit testing tutorial for Zend Framework 2 applications is writing tests for our model tables.
This test assures that we can get a list of albums, or one album by its ID, and that we can save and delete albums from
the database.
To avoid actual interaction with the database itself, we will replace certain parts with mocks.
Create a file AlbumTableTest.php in module/Album/test/AlbumTest/Model with the following con-
tents:
1 <?php
2 namespace AlbumTest\Model;
3

4 use Album\Model\AlbumTable;
5 use Album\Model\Album;
6 use Zend\Db\ResultSet\ResultSet;
7 use PHPUnit_Framework_TestCase;
8

9 class AlbumTableTest extends PHPUnit_Framework_TestCase

10 {

194 Chapter 34. Unit Testing a Zend Framework 2 application

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

11 public function testFetchAllReturnsAllAlbums()

12 {
13 $resultSet = new ResultSet();
14 $mockTableGateway = $this->getMock(
15 'Zend\Db\TableGateway\TableGateway',
16 array('select'),
17 array(),
18 '',
19 false
20 );
21 $mockTableGateway->expects($this->once())
22 ->method('select')
23 ->with()
24 ->will($this->returnValue($resultSet));
25

26 $albumTable = new AlbumTable($mockTableGateway);

27

28 $this->assertSame($resultSet, $albumTable->fetchAll());
29 }
30 }

Since we are testing the AlbumTable here and not the TableGateway class (which has already been tested in
Zend Framework), we just want to make sure that our AlbumTable class is interacting with the TableGateway
class the way that we expect it to. Above, were testing to see if the fetchAll() method of AlbumTable will
call the select() method of the $tableGateway property with no parameters. If it does, it should return a
ResultSet object. Finally, we expect that this same ResultSet object will be returned to the calling method.
This test should run fine, so now we can add the rest of the test methods:
1 public function testCanRetrieveAnAlbumByItsId()
2 {
3 $album = new Album();
4 $album->exchangeArray(array('id' => 123,
5 'artist' => 'The Military Wives',
6 'title' => 'In My Dreams'));
7

8 $resultSet = new ResultSet();

9 $resultSet->setArrayObjectPrototype(new Album());
10 $resultSet->initialize(array($album));
11

12 $mockTableGateway = $this->getMock(
13 'Zend\Db\TableGateway\TableGateway',
14 array('select'),
15 array(),
16 '',
17 false
18 );
19 $mockTableGateway->expects($this->once())
20 ->method('select')
21 ->with(array('id' => 123))
22 ->will($this->returnValue($resultSet));
23

24 $albumTable = new AlbumTable($mockTableGateway);

25

26 $this->assertSame($album, $albumTable->getAlbum(123));
27 }
28

29 public function testCanDeleteAnAlbumByItsId()

30 {

34.9. Testing model tables 195

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

31 $mockTableGateway = $this->getMock(
32 'Zend\Db\TableGateway\TableGateway',
33 array('delete'),
34 array(),
35 '',
36 false
37 );
38 $mockTableGateway->expects($this->once())
39 ->method('delete')
40 ->with(array('id' => 123));
41

42 $albumTable = new AlbumTable($mockTableGateway);

43 $albumTable->deleteAlbum(123);
44 }
45

46 public function testSaveAlbumWillInsertNewAlbumsIfTheyDontAlreadyHaveAnId()

47 {
48 $albumData = array(
49 'artist' => 'The Military Wives',
50 'title' => 'In My Dreams'
51 );
52 $album = new Album();
53 $album->exchangeArray($albumData);
54

55 $mockTableGateway = $this->getMock(
56 'Zend\Db\TableGateway\TableGateway',
57 array('insert'),
58 array(),
59 '',
60 false
61 );
62 $mockTableGateway->expects($this->once())
63 ->method('insert')
64 ->with($albumData);
65

66 $albumTable = new AlbumTable($mockTableGateway);

67 $albumTable->saveAlbum($album);
68 }
69

70 public function testSaveAlbumWillUpdateExistingAlbumsIfTheyAlreadyHaveAnId()

71 {
72 $albumData = array(
73 'id' => 123,
74 'artist' => 'The Military Wives',
75 'title' => 'In My Dreams',
76 );
77 $album = new Album();
78 $album->exchangeArray($albumData);
79

80 $resultSet = new ResultSet();

81 $resultSet->setArrayObjectPrototype(new Album());
82 $resultSet->initialize(array($album));
83

84 $mockTableGateway = $this->getMock(
85 'Zend\Db\TableGateway\TableGateway',
86 array('select', 'update'),
87 array(),
88 '',

196 Chapter 34. Unit Testing a Zend Framework 2 application

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

89 false
90 );
91 $mockTableGateway->expects($this->once())
92 ->method('select')
93 ->with(array('id' => 123))
94 ->will($this->returnValue($resultSet));
95 $mockTableGateway->expects($this->once())
96 ->method('update')
97 ->with(
98 array(
99 'artist' => 'The Military Wives',
100 'title' => 'In My Dreams'
101 ),
102 array('id' => 123)
103 );
104

105 $albumTable = new AlbumTable($mockTableGateway);

106 $albumTable->saveAlbum($album);
107 }
108

109 public function testExceptionIsThrownWhenGettingNonExistentAlbum()

110 {
111 $resultSet = new ResultSet();
112 $resultSet->setArrayObjectPrototype(new Album());
113 $resultSet->initialize(array());
114

115 $mockTableGateway = $this->getMock(

116 'Zend\Db\TableGateway\TableGateway',
117 array('select'),
118 array(),
119 '',
120 false
121 );
122 $mockTableGateway->expects($this->once())
123 ->method('select')
124 ->with(array('id' => 123))
125 ->will($this->returnValue($resultSet));
126

127 $albumTable = new AlbumTable($mockTableGateway);

128

129 try {
130 $albumTable->getAlbum(123);
131 }
132 catch (\Exception $e) {
133 $this->assertSame('Could not find row 123', $e->getMessage());
134 return;
135 }
136

137 $this->fail('Expected exception was not thrown');

138 }

These tests are nothing complicated and they should be self explanatory. In each test we are injecting a mock table
gateway into our AlbumTable and set our expectations accordingly.
We are testing that:
1. We can retrieve an individual album by its ID.
2. We can delete albums.

34.9. Testing model tables 197

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

3. We can save new album.

4. We can update existing albums.
5. We will encounter an exception if were trying to retrieve an album that doesnt exist.
Running phpunit command for one last time, we get the output as follows:
PHPUnit 3.7.13 by Sebastian Bergmann.

Configuration read from /var/www/zf2-tutorial/module/Album/test/phpunit.xml

.............

Time: 0 seconds, Memory: 11.50Mb

OK (13 tests, 34 assertions)

34.10 Conclusion

In this short tutorial we gave a few examples how different parts of a Zend Framework 2 MVC application can be
tested. We covered setting up the environment for testing, how to test controllers and actions, how to approach failing
test cases, how to configure the service manager, as well as how to test model entities and model tables.
This tutorial is by no means a definitive guide to writing unit tests, just a small stepping stone helping you develop
applications of higher quality.

198 Chapter 34. Unit Testing a Zend Framework 2 application

 CHAPTER 35

Using the EventManager

This tutorial explores the various features of Zend\EventManager.

35.1 Terminology

An Event is a named action.

A Listener is any PHP callback that reacts to an event.
An EventManager aggregates listeners for one or more named events, and triggers events.
Typically, an event will be modeled as an object, containing metadata surrounding when and how it was triggered,
including the event name, what object triggered the event (the target), and what parameters were provided. Events
are named, which allows a single listener to branch logic based on the event.

35.2 Getting started

The minimal things necessary to start using events are:

An EventManager instance
One or more listeners on one or more events
A call to trigger() an event
The simplest example looks something like this:
1 use Zend\EventManager\EventManager;
2

3 $events = new EventManager();

4 $events->attach('do', function ($e) {
5 $event = $e->getName();
6 $params = $e->getParams();
7 printf(
8 'Handled event "%s", with parameters %s',
9 $event,
10 json_encode($params)
11 );
12 });
13

14 $params = array('foo' => 'bar', 'baz' => 'bat');

15 $events->trigger('do', null, $params);

199
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

The above will result in the following:

Handled event "do", with parameters {"foo":"bar","baz":"bat"}

Note: Throughout this tutorial, we use closures as listeners. However, any valid PHP callback can be attached as a
listeners: PHP function names, static class methods, object instance methods, functors, or closures. We use closures
within this post simply for illustration and simplicity.

If you were paying attention to the example, you will have noted the null argument. Why is it there?
Typically, you will compose an EventManager within a class, to allow triggering actions within methods. The
middle argument to trigger() is the target, and in the case described, would be the current object instance. This
gives event listeners access to the calling object, which can often be useful.
1 use Zend\EventManager\EventManager;
2 use Zend\EventManager\EventManagerAwareInterface;
3 use Zend\EventManager\EventManagerInterface;
4

5 class Example implements EventManagerAwareInterface

6 {
7 protected $events;
8

9 public function setEventManager(EventManagerInterface $events)

10 {
11 $events->setIdentifiers(array(
12 __CLASS__,
13 get_class($this)
14 ));
15 $this->events = $events;
16 }
17

18 public function getEventManager()

19 {
20 if (!$this->events) {
21 $this->setEventManager(new EventManager());
22 }
23 return $this->events;
24 }
25

26 public function doIt($foo, $baz)

27 {
28 $params = compact('foo', 'baz');
29 $this->getEventManager()->trigger(__FUNCTION__, $this, $params);
30 }
31

32 }
33

34 $example = new Example();

35

36 $example->getEventManager()->attach('doIt', function($e) {
37 $event = $e->getName();
38 $target = get_class($e->getTarget()); // "Example"
39 $params = $e->getParams();
40 printf(
41 'Handled event "%s" on target "%s", with parameters %s',
42 $event,
43 $target,
44 json_encode($params)

200 Chapter 35. Using the EventManager

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

45 );
46 });
47

48 $example->doIt('bar', 'bat');

The above is basically the same as the first example. The main difference is that were now using that middle ar-
gument in order to pass the target, the instance of Example, on to the listeners. Our listener is now retrieving that
($e->getTarget()), and doing something with it.
If youre reading this critically, you should have a new question: What is the call to setIdentifiers() for?

35.3 Shared managers

One aspect that the EventManager implementation provides is an ability to compose a

SharedEventManagerInterface implementation.
Zend\EventManager\SharedEventManagerInterface describes an object that aggregates listeners for
events attached to objects with specific identifiers. It does not trigger events itself. Instead, an EventManager in-
stance that composes a SharedEventManager will query the SharedEventManager for listeners on identifiers
its interested in, and trigger those listeners as well.
How does this work, exactly?
Consider the following:
1 use Zend\EventManager\SharedEventManager;
2

3 $sharedEvents = new SharedEventManager();

4 $sharedEvents->attach('Example', 'do', function ($e) {
5 $event = $e->getName();
6 $target = get_class($e->getTarget()); // "Example"
7 $params = $e->getParams();
8 printf(
9 'Handled event "%s" on target "%s", with parameters %s',
10 $event,
11 $target,
12 json_encode($params)
13 );
14 });

This looks almost identical to the previous example; the key difference is that there is an additional argument at the
start of the list, Example. This code is basically saying, Listen to the do event of the Example target, and,
when notified, execute this callback.
This is where the setIdentifiers() argument of EventManager comes into play. The method allows passing
a string, or an array of strings, defining the name or names of the context or targets the given instance will be interested
in. If an array is given, then any listener on any of the targets given will be notified.
So, getting back to our example, lets assume that the above shared listener is registered, and also that the Example
class is defined as above. We can then execute the following:
1 $example = new Example();
2 $example->getEventManager()->setSharedManager($sharedEvents);
3 $example->do('bar', 'bat');

and expect the following to be echod:

35.3. Shared managers 201

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Handled event "do" on target "Example", with parameters {"foo":"bar","baz":"bat"}

Now, lets say we extended Example as follows:

1 class SubExample extends Example
2 {
3 }

One interesting aspect of our setEventManager() method is that we defined it to listen both on __CLASS__
and get_class($this). This means that calling do() on our SubExample class would also trigger the shared
listener! It also means that, if desired, we could attach to specifically SubExample, and listeners attached to only
the Example target would not be triggered.
Finally, the names used as contexts or targets need not be class names; they can be some name that only has meaning
in your application if desired. As an example, you could have a set of classes that respond to log or cache and
listeners on these would be notified by any of them.

Note: We recommend using class names, interface names, and/or abstract class names for identifiers. This makes
determining what events are available easier, as well as finding which listeners might be attaching to those events.
Interfaces make a particularly good use case, as they allow attaching to a group of related classes a single operation.

At any point, if you do not want to notify shared listeners, pass a null value to setSharedManager():
$events->setSharedManager(null);

and they will be ignored. If at any point, you want to enable them again, pass the SharedEventManager instance:
$events->setSharedManager($sharedEvents);

202 Chapter 35. Using the EventManager

 CHAPTER 36

Wildcards

So far, with both a normal EventManager instance and with the SharedEventManager instance, weve seen
the usage of singular strings representing the event and target names to which we want to attach. What if you want to
attach a listener to multiple events or targets?
The answer is to supply an array of events or targets, or a wildcard, *.
Consider the following examples:
1 // Multiple named events:
2 $events->attach(
3 array('foo', 'bar', 'baz'), // events
4 $listener
5 );
6

7 // All events via wildcard:

8 $events->attach(
9 '*', // all events
10 $listener
11 );
12

13 // Multiple named targets:

14 $sharedEvents->attach(
15 array('Foo', 'Bar', 'Baz'), // targets
16 'doSomething', // named event
17 $listener
18 );
19

20 // All targets via wildcard

21 $sharedEvents->attach(
22 '*', // all targets
23 'doSomething', // named event
24 $listener
25 );
26

27 // Mix and match: multiple named events on multiple named targets:

28 $sharedEvents->attach(
29 array('Foo', 'Bar', 'Baz'), // targets
30 array('foo', 'bar', 'baz'), // events
31 $listener
32 );
33

34 // Mix and match: all events on multiple named targets:

35 $sharedEvents->attach(

203
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

36 array('Foo', 'Bar', 'Baz'), // targets

37 '*', // events
38 $listener
39 );
40

41 // Mix and match: multiple named events on all targets:

42 $sharedEvents->attach(
43 '*', // targets
44 array('foo', 'bar', 'baz'), // events
45 $listener
46 );
47

48 // Mix and match: all events on all targets:

49 $sharedEvents->attach(
50 '*', // targets
51 '*', // events
52 $listener
53 );

The ability to specify multiple targets and/or events when attaching can slim down your code immensely.

204 Chapter 36. Wildcards

 CHAPTER 37

Listener aggregates

Another approach to listening to multiple events is via a concept of listener aggregates, represented by
Zend\EventManager\ListenerAggregateInterface. Via this approach, a single class can listen to mul-
tiple events, attaching one or more instance methods as listeners.
This interface defines two methods, attach(EventManagerInterface $events) and
detach(EventManagerInterface $events). Basically, you pass an EventManager instance to
one and/or the other, and then its up to the implementing class to determine what to do.
As an example:
1 use Zend\EventManager\EventInterface;
2 use Zend\EventManager\EventManagerInterface;
3 use Zend\EventManager\ListenerAggregateInterface;
4 use Zend\Log\Logger;
5

6 class LogEvents implements ListenerAggregateInterface

7 {
8 protected $listeners = array();
9 protected $log;
10

11 public function __construct(Logger $log)

12 {
13 $this->log = $log;
14 }
15

16 public function attach(EventManagerInterface $events)

17 {
18 $this->listeners[] = $events->attach('do', array($this, 'log'));
19 $this->listeners[] = $events->attach('doSomethingElse', array($this, 'log'));
20 }
21

22 public function detach(EventCollection $events)

23 {
24 foreach ($this->listeners as $index => $listener) {
25 if ($events->detach($listener)) {
26 unset($this->listeners[$index]);
27 }
28 }
29 }
30

31 public function log(EventInterface $e)

32 {
33 $event = $e->getName();

205
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

34 $params = $e->getParams();
35 $this->log->info(sprintf('%s: %s', $event, json_encode($params)));
36 }
37 }

You can attach this using either attach() or attachAggregate():

$logListener = new LogEvents($logger);

$events->attachAggregate($logListener); // OR
$events->attach($logListener);

Any events the aggregate attaches to will then be notified when triggered.
Why bother? For a couple of reasons:
Aggregates allow you to have stateful listeners. The above example demonstrates this via the composition of
the logger; another example would be tracking configuration options.
Aggregates make detaching listeners easier. When you call attach() normally, you receive a
Zend\Stdlib\CallbackHandler instance; the only way to detach() a listener is to pass that instance
back which means if you want to detach later, you need to keep that instance somewhere. Aggregates typically
do this for you as you can see in the example above.

37.1 Introspecting results

Sometimes youll want to know what your listeners returned. One thing to remember is that you may have multiple
listeners on the same event; the interface for results must be consistent regardless of the number of listeners.
The EventManager implementation by default returns a Zend\EventManager\ResponseCollection in-
stance. This class extends PHPs SplStack, allowing you to loop through responses in reverse order (since the last
one executed is likely the one youre most interested in). It also implements the following methods:
first() will retrieve the first result received
last() will retrieve the last result received
contains($value) allows you to test all values to see if a given one was received, and returns simply a
boolean true if found, and false if not.
Typically, you should not worry about the return values from events, as the object triggering the event shouldnt really
have much insight into what listeners are attached. However, sometimes you may want to short-circuit execution if
interesting results are obtained.

37.2 Short-circuiting listener execution

You may want to short-ciruit execution if a particular result is obtained, or if a listener determines that something is
wrong, or that it can return something quicker than the target.
As examples, one rationale for adding an EventManager is as a caching mechanism. You can trigger one event
early in the method, returning if a cache is found, and trigger another event late in the method, seeding the cache.
The EventManager component offers two ways to handle this. The first is to pass a callback as the last argument
to trigger(); if that callback returns a boolean true, execution is halted.
Heres an example:

206 Chapter 37. Listener aggregates

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1 public function someExpensiveCall($criteria1, $criteria2)

2 {
3 $params = compact('criteria1', 'criteria2');
4 $results = $this->getEventManager()->trigger(
5 __FUNCTION__,
6 $this,
7 $params,
8 function ($r) {
9 return ($r instanceof SomeResultClass);
10 }
11 );
12 if ($results->stopped()) {
13 return $results->last();
14 }
15

16 // ... do some work ...

17 }

With this paradigm, we know that the likely reason of execution halting is due to the last result meeting the test callback
criteria; as such, we simply return that last result.
The other way to halt execution is within a listener, acting on the Event object it receives. In this case, the listener calls
stopPropagation(true), and the EventManager will then return without notifying any additional listeners.
1 $events->attach('do', function ($e) {
2 $e->stopPropagation();
3 return new SomeResultClass();
4 });

This, of course, raises some ambiguity when using the trigger paradigm, as you can no longer be certain that the last
result meets the criteria its searching on. As such, we recommend that you standardize on one approach or the other.

37.3 Keeping it in order

On occasion, you may be concerned about the order in which listeners execute. As an example, you may want to do
any logging early, to ensure that if short-circuiting occurs, youve logged; or if implementing a cache, you may want
to return early if a cache hit is found, and execute late when saving to a cache.
Each of EventManager::attach() and SharedEventManager::attach() accept one additional argu-
ment, a priority. By default, if this is omitted, listeners get a priority of 1, and are executed in the order in which they
are attached. However, if you provide a priority value, you can influence order of execution.
Higher priority values execute earlier.
Lower (negative) priority values execute later.
To borrow an example from earlier:
1 $priority = 100;
2 $events->attach('Example', 'do', function($e) {
3 $event = $e->getName();
4 $target = get_class($e->getTarget()); // "Example"
5 $params = $e->getParams();
6 printf(
7 'Handled event "%s" on target "%s", with parameters %s',
8 $event,
9 $target,
10 json_encode($params)

37.3. Keeping it in order 207

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

11 );
12 }, $priority);

This would execute with high priority, meaning it would execute early. If we changed $priority to -100, it would
execute with low priority, executing late.
While you cant necessarily know all the listeners attached, chances are you can make adequate guesses when neces-
sary in order to set appropriate priority values. We advise avoiding setting a priority value unless absolutely necessary.

37.4 Custom event objects

Hopefully some of you have been wondering, where and when is the Event object created? In all of the exam-
ples above, its created based on the arguments passed to trigger() the event name, target, and parameters.
Sometimes, however, you may want greater control over the object.
As an example, one thing that looks like a code smell is when you have code like this:
1 $routeMatch = $e->getParam('route-match', false);
2 if (!$routeMatch) {
3 // Oh noes! we cannot do our work! whatever shall we do?!?!?!
4 }

The problems with this are several. First, relying on string keys is going to very quickly run into problems typos
when setting or retrieving the argument can lead to hard to debug situations. Second, we now have a documentation
issue; how do we document expected arguments? how do we document what were shoving into the event? Third, as
a side effect, we cant use IDE or editor hinting support string keys give these tools nothing to work with.
Similarly, consider how you might represent a computational result of a method when triggering an event. As an
example:
1 // in the method:
2 $params['__RESULT'] = $computedResult;
3 $events->trigger(__FUNCTION__ . '.post', $this, $params);
4

5 // in the listener:
6 $result = $e->getParam('__RESULT__');
7 if (!$result) {
8 // Oh noes! we cannot do our work! whatever shall we do?!?!?!
9 }

Sure, that key may be unique, but it suffers from a lot of the same issues.
So, the solution is to create custom events. As an example, we have a custom MvcEvent in the ZF2 MVC layer. This
event composes the application instance, the router, the route match object, request and response objects, the view
model, and also a result. We end up with code like this in our listeners:
1 $response = $e->getResponse();
2 $result = $e->getResult();
3 if (is_string($result)) {
4 $content = $view->render('layout.phtml', array('content' => $result));
5 $response->setContent($content);
6 }

But how do we use this custom event? Simple: trigger() can accept an event object instead of any of the event
name, target, or params arguments.

208 Chapter 37. Listener aggregates

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1 $event = new CustomEvent();

2 $event->setSomeKey($value);
3

4 // Injected with event name and target:

5 $events->trigger('foo', $this, $event);
6

7 // Injected with event name:

8 $event->setTarget($this);
9 $events->trigger('foo', $event);
10

11 // Fully encapsulates all necessary properties:

12 $event->setName('foo');
13 $event->setTarget($this);
14 $events->trigger($event);
15

16 // Passing a callback following the event object works for

17 // short-circuiting, too.
18 $results = $events->trigger('foo', $this, $event, $callback);

This is a really powerful technique for domain-specific event systems, and definitely worth experimenting with.

37.5 Putting it together: Implementing a simple caching system

In previous sections, I indicated that short-circuiting is a way to potentially implement a caching solution. Lets create
a full example.
First, lets define a method that could use caching. Youll note that in most of the examples, Ive used __FUNCTION__
as the event name; this is a good practice, as it makes it simple to create a macro for triggering events, as well as helps
to keep event names unique (as theyre usually within the context of the triggering class). However, in the case of a
caching example, this would lead to identical events being triggered. As such, I recommend postfixing the event name
with semantic names: do.pre, do.post, do.error, etc. Ill use that convention in this example.
Additionally, youll notice that the $params I pass to the event is usually the list of parameters passed to the method.
This is because those are often not stored in the object, and also to ensure the listeners have the exact same context
as the calling method. But it raises an interesting problem in this example: what name do we give the result of the
method? One standard that has emerged is the use of __RESULT__, as double-underscored variables are typically
reserved for the sytem.
Heres what the method will look like:
1 public function someExpensiveCall($criteria1, $criteria2)
2 {
3 $params = compact('criteria1', 'criteria2');
4 $results = $this->getEventManager()->trigger(
5 __FUNCTION__ . '.pre',
6 $this,
7 $params,
8 function ($r) {
9 return ($r instanceof SomeResultClass);
10 }
11 );
12 if ($results->stopped()) {
13 return $results->last();
14 }
15

16 // ... do some work ...

37.5. Putting it together: Implementing a simple caching system 209

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

17

18 $params['__RESULT__'] = $calculatedResult;
19 $this->events()->trigger(__FUNCTION__ . '.post', $this, $params);
20 return $calculatedResult;
21 }

Now, to provide some caching listeners. Well need to attach to each of the someExpensiveCall.pre and someEx-
pensiveCall.post methods. In the former case, if a cache hit is detected, we return it, and move on. In the latter, we
store the value in the cache.
Well assume $cache is defined, and follows the paradigms of Zend\Cache. Well want to return early if a hit
is detected, and execute late when saving a cache (in case the result is modified by another listener). As such, well
set the someExpensiveCall.pre listener to execute with priority 100, and the someExpensiveCall.post listener to
execute with priority -100.
1 $events->attach('someExpensiveCall.pre', function($e) use ($cache) {
2 $params = $e->getParams();
3 $key = md5(json_encode($params));
4 $hit = $cache->load($key);
5 return $hit;
6 }, 100);
7

8 $events->attach('someExpensiveCall.post', function($e) use ($cache) {

9 $params = $e->getParams();
10 $result = $params['__RESULT__'];
11 unset($params['__RESULT__']);
12 $key = md5(json_encode($params));
13 $cache->save($result, $key);
14 }, -100);

Note: The above could have been done within a ListenerAggregate, which would have allowed keeping the
$cache instance as a stateful property, instead of importing it into closures.

Another approach would be to move the body of the method to a listener as well, which would allow using the priority
system in order to implement caching. That would look like this:
1 public function setEventManager(EventManagerInterface $events)
2 {
3 $this->events = $events;
4 $events->setIdentifiers(array(__CLASS__, get_class($this)));
5 $events->attach('someExpensiveCall', array($this, 'doSomeExpensiveCall'));
6 }
7

8 public function someExpensiveCall($criteria1, $criteria2)

9 {
10 $params = compact('criteria1', 'criteria2');
11 $results = $this->getEventManager()->trigger(
12 __FUNCTION__,
13 $this,
14 $params,
15 function ($r) {
16 return ($r instanceof SomeResultClass);
17 }
18 );
19 return $results->last();
20 }
21

22 public function doSomeExpensiveCall($e)

210 Chapter 37. Listener aggregates

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

23 {
24 // ... do some work ...
25 $e->setParam('__RESULT__', $calculatedResult);
26 return $calculatedResult;
27 }

The listeners would then attach to the someExpensiveCall event, with the cache lookup listener listening at high
priority, and the cache storage listener listening at low (negative) priority.
Sure, we could probably simply add caching to the object itself - but this approach allows the same handlers to be
attached to multiple events, or to attach multiple listeners to the same events (e.g. an argument validator, a logger and
a cache manager). The point is that if you design your object with events in mind, you can easily make it more flexible
and extensible, without requiring developers to actually extend it they can simply attach listeners.

37.6 Conclusion

The EventManager is a powerful component. It drives the workflow of the MVC layer, and is used in countless
components to provide hook points for developers to manipulate the workflow. It can be put to any number of uses
inside your own code, and is an important part of your Zend Framework toolbox.

37.6. Conclusion 211

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

212 Chapter 37. Listener aggregates

 CHAPTER 38

Advanced Configuration Tricks

Configuration of Zend Framework 2 applications happens in several steps:

Initial configuration is passed to the Application instance and used to seed the ModuleManager and
ServiceManager. In this tutorial, we will call this configuration system configuration.
The ModuleManagers ConfigListener aggregates configuration and merges it while modules are being
loaded. In this tutorial, we will call this configuration application configuration.
Once configuration is aggregated from all modules, the ConfigListener will also merge application con-
figuration globbed in specified directories (typically config/autoload/).
Finally, immediately prior to the merged application configuration being passed to the ServiceManager, it
is passed to a special EVENT_MERGE_CONFIG event to allow further modification.
In this tutorial, well look at the exact sequence, and how you can tie into it.

38.1 System configuration

To begin module loading, we have to tell the Application instance about the available modules and where
they live, optionally provide some information to the default module listeners (e.g., where application configura-
tion lives, and what files to load; whether to cache merged configuration, and where; etc.), and optionally seed the
ServiceManager. For purposes of this tutorial we will call this the system configuration.
When using the skeleton application, the system configuration is by default in
config/application.config.php. The defaults look like this:
1 <?php
2 return array(
3 // This should be an array of module namespaces used in the application.
4 'modules' => array(
5 'Application',
6 ),
7

8 // These are various options for the listeners attached to the ModuleManager
9 'module_listener_options' => array(
10 // This should be an array of paths in which modules reside.
11 // If a string key is provided, the listener will consider that a module
12 // namespace, the value of that key the specific path to that module's
13 // Module class.
14 'module_paths' => array(
15 './module',
16 './vendor',

213
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

17 ),
18

19 // An array of paths from which to glob configuration files after

20 // modules are loaded. These effectively overide configuration
21 // provided by modules themselves. Paths may use GLOB_BRACE notation.
22 'config_glob_paths' => array(
23 'config/autoload/{{,*.}global,{,*.}local}.php',
24 ),
25

26 // Whether or not to enable a configuration cache.

27 // If enabled, the merged configuration will be cached and used in
28 // subsequent requests.
29 //'config_cache_enabled' => $booleanValue,
30

31 // The key used to create the configuration cache file name.

32 //'config_cache_key' => $stringKey,
33

34 // Whether or not to enable a module class map cache.

35 // If enabled, creates a module class map cache which will be used
36 // by in future requests, to reduce the autoloading process.
37 //'module_map_cache_enabled' => $booleanValue,
38

39 // The key used to create the class map cache file name.
40 //'module_map_cache_key' => $stringKey,
41

42 // The path in which to cache merged configuration.

43 //'cache_dir' => $stringPath,
44

45 // Whether or not to enable modules dependency checking.

46 // Enabled by default, prevents usage of modules that depend on other modules
47 // that weren't loaded.
48 // 'check_dependencies' => true,
49 ),
50

51 // Used to create an own service manager. May contain one or more child arrays.
52 //'service_listener_options' => array(
53 // array(
54 // 'service_manager' => $stringServiceManagerName,
55 // 'config_key' => $stringConfigKey,
56 // 'interface' => $stringOptionalInterface,
57 // 'method' => $stringRequiredMethodName,
58 // ),
59 // )
60

61 // Initial configuration with which to seed the ServiceManager.

62 // Should be compatible with Zend\ServiceManager\Config.
63 // 'service_manager' => array(),
64 );

The system configuration is for the bits and pieces related to the MVC that run before your application is ready. The
configuration is usually brief, and quite minimal.
Also, system configuration is used immediately, and is not merged with any other configuration which means, with
the exception of the values under the service_manager key, it cannot be overridden by a module.
This leads us to our first trick: how do you provide environment-specific system configuration?

214 Chapter 38. Advanced Configuration Tricks

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

38.1.1 Environment-specific system configuration

What happens when you want to change the set of modules you use based on the environment? Or if the configuration
caching should be enabled based on environment?
It is for this reason that the default system configuration we provide in the skeleton application is in PHP; providing it
in PHP means you can programmatically manipulate it.
As an example, lets make the following requirements:
We want to use the ZendDeveloperTools module in development only.
We want to have configuration caching on in production only.
To make this happen, well set an environment variable in our web server configuration, APP_ENV. In Apache, youd
put a directive like the following in either your system-wide apache.conf or httpd.conf, or in the definition
for your virtual host; alternately, it can be placed in an .htaccess file.
SetEnv "APP_ENV" "development"

For other web servers, consult the web server documentation to determine how to set environment variables.
To simplify matters, well assume the environment is production if no environment variable is present.
Well modify the config/application.config.php file to read as follows:
1 <?php
2 $env = getenv('APP_ENV') ?: 'production';
3

4 // Use the $env value to determine which modules to load

5 $modules = array(
6 'Application',
7 );
8 if ($env == 'development') {
9 $modules[] = 'ZendDeveloperTools';
10 }
11

12 return array(
13 'modules' => $modules,
14

15 'module_listener_options' => array(

16 'module_paths' => array(
17 './module',
18 './vendor',
19 ),
20

21 'config_glob_paths' => array(

22 'config/autoload/{{,*.}global,{,*.}local}.php',
23 ),
24

25 // Use the $env value to determine the state of the flag

26 'config_cache_enabled' => ($env == 'production'),
27

28 'config_cache_key' => 'app_config',

29

30 // Use the $env value to determine the state of the flag

31 'module_map_cache_enabled' => ($env == 'production'),
32

33 'module_map_cache_key' => 'module_map',

34

35 'cache_dir' => 'data/config/',

38.1. System configuration 215

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

36

37 // Use the $env value to determine the state of the flag

38 'check_dependencies' => ($env != 'production'),
39 ),
40 );

This approach gives you flexibility to alter system-level settings.

However, how about altering application specific settings (not system configuration) based on the environment?

38.1.2 Environment-specific application configuration

Sometimes you want to change application configuration to load things such as database adapters, log
writers, cache adapters, and more based on the environment. These are typically managed in the ser-
vice manager, and may be defined by modules. You can override them at the application level via
Zend\ModuleManager\Listener\ConfigListener, by specifying a glob path in the system configura-
tion the module_listener_options.config_glob_paths key from the previous examples.
The default value for this is config/autoload/{{,*.}global,{,*.}local}.php. What this means is
that it will look for application configuration files in the config/autoload directory, in the following order:
global.php
*.global.php
local.php
*.local.php
This allows you to define application-level defaults in global configuration files, which you would then commit to
your version control system, and environment-specific overrides in your local configuration files, which you would
omit from version control.
This is a great solution for development, as it allows you to specify alternate configuration thats specific to your devel-
opment environment without worrying about accidently deploying it. However, what if you have more environments
such as a testing or staging environment and they each have their own specific overrides?
Again, the application environment variable comes to play. We can alter the glob path in the system configuration
slightly:
'config_glob_paths' => array(
sprintf('config/autoload/{,*.}{global,%s,local}.php', $env)
),

The above will allow you to define an additional set of application configuration files per environment; furthermore,
these will be loaded only if that environment is detected!
As an example, consider the following tree of configuration files:
config/
autoload/
global.php
local.php
users.development.php
users.testing.php
users.local.php

If $env evaluates to testing, then the following files will be merged, in the following order:

216 Chapter 38. Advanced Configuration Tricks

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

global.php
users.testing.php
local.php
users.local.php

Note that users.development.php is not loaded this is because it will not match the glob pattern!
Also, because of the order in which they are loaded, you can predict which values will overwrite the others, allowing
you to both selectively overwrite as well as debug later.

Note: The files under config/autoload/ are merged after your module configuration, detailed in next section.
We have detailed it here, however, as setting up the application configuration glob path happens within the system
configuration (config/application.config.php).

38.2 Module Configuration

One responsibility of modules is to provide their own configuration to the application. Modules have two general
mechanisms for doing this.
First, modules that either implement Zend\ModuleManager\Feature\ConfigProviderInterface
and/or a getConfig() method can return their configuration. The default, recommended implementation of the
getConfig() method is:
public function getConfig()
{
return include __DIR__ . '/config/module.config.php';
}

where module.config.php returns a PHP array. From that PHP array you can provide general configuration
as well as configuration for all the available Manager classes provided by the ServiceManager. Please refer to the
Configuration mapping table to see which configuration key is used for each specific Manager.
Second, modules can implement a number of interfaces and/or methods related to specific service manager or plugin
manager configuration. You will find an overview of all interfaces and their matching Module Configuration functions
inside the Configuration mapping table.
All interfaces are in the Zend\ModuleManager\Feature namespace, and each is expected to return an array of
configuration for a service manager, as denoted in the section on default service configuration.

38.2. Module Configuration 217

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

38.3 Configuration mapping table

Manager name Interface name Module Method name

Config key
name
ControllerPluginManager
ControllerPluginProviderInterface
getControllerPluginConfig()
controller_plugins
ControllerManager ControllerProviderInterface
getControllerConfig()controllers
FilterManager FilterProviderInterface getFilterConfig() filters
FormElementManager FormElementProviderInterface
getFormElementConfig()
form_elements
HydratorManager HydratorProviderInterfacegetHydratorConfig() hydrators
InputFilterManager InputFilterProviderInterface
getInputFilterConfig()
input_filters
RoutePluginManager RouteProviderInterface getRouteConfig() route_manager
SerializerAdapterManager
SerializerProviderInterface
getSerializerConfig()serializers
ServiceLocator ServiceProviderInterface getServiceConfig() service_manager
ValidatorManager ValidatorProviderInterface
getValidatorConfig() validators
ViewHelperManager ViewHelperProviderInterface
getViewHelperConfig()view_helpers
LogProcessorManagerLogProcessorProviderInterface
getLogProcessorConfiglog_processors
LogWriterManager LogWriterProviderInterface
getLogWriterConfig log_writers

38.4 Configuration Priority

Considering that you may have service configuration in your module configuration file, what has precedence?
The order in which they are merged is:
configuration returned by the various service configuration methods in a module class
configuration returned by getConfig()
In other words, your getConfig() win over the various service configuration methods. Additionally, and of partic-
ular note: the configuration returned from those methods will not be cached.

Note: Use the various service configuration methods when you need to define closures or instance callbacks for
factories, abstract factories, and initializers. This prevents caching problems, and also allows you to write your con-
figuration files in other markup formats.

38.5 Manipulating merged configuration

Occasionally you will want to not just override an application configuration key, but actually remove it. Since merging
will not remove keys, how can you handle this?
Zend\ModuleManager\Listener\ConfigListener triggers a special event,
Zend\ModuleManager\ModuleEvent::EVENT_MERGE_CONFIG, after merging all configuration, but
prior to it being passed to the ServiceManager. By listening to this event, you can inspect the merged
configuration and manipulate it.
The ConfigListener itself listens to the event at priority 1000 (i.e., very high), which is when the configuration
is merged. You can tie into this to modify the merged configuration from your module, via the init() method.
1 namespace Foo;
2

3 use Zend\ModuleManager\ModuleEvent;
4 use Zend\ModuleManager\ModuleManager;

218 Chapter 38. Advanced Configuration Tricks

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

6 class Module
7 {
8 public function init(ModuleManager $moduleManager)
9 {
10 $events = $moduleManager->getEventManager();
11

12 // Registering a listener at default priority, 1, which will trigger

13 // after the ConfigListener merges config.
14 $events->attach(ModuleEvent::EVENT_MERGE_CONFIG, array($this, 'onMergeConfig'));
15 }
16

17 public function onMergeConfig(ModuleEvent $e)

18 {
19 $configListener = $e->getConfigListener();
20 $config = $configListener->getMergedConfig(false);
21

22 // Modify the configuration; here, we'll remove a specific key:

23 if (isset($config['some_key'])) {
24 unset($config['some_key']);
25 }
26

27 // Pass the changed configuration back to the listener:

28 $configListener->setMergedConfig($config);
29 }
30 }

At this point, the merged application configuration will no longer contain the key some_key.

Note: If a cached config is used by the ModuleManager, the EVENT_MERGE_CONFIG event will not be triggered.
However, typically that means that what is cached will be what was originally manipulated by your listener.

38.6 Configuration merging workflow

To cap off the tutorial, lets review how and when configuration is defined and merged.
System configuration
Defined in config/application.config.php
No merging occurs
Allows manipulation programmatically, which allows the ability to:

* Alter flags based on computed values

* Alter the configuration glob path based on computed values
Configuration is passed to the Application instance, and then the ModuleManager in order to ini-
tialize the system.
Application configuration
The ModuleManager loops through each module class in the order defined in the system configuration

* Service configuration defined in Module class methods is aggregated

* Configuration returned by Module::getConfig() is aggregated

38.6. Configuration merging workflow 219

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Files detected from the service configuration config_glob_paths setting are merged, based on the
order they resolve in the glob path.
ConfigListener triggers EVENT_MERGE_CONFIG: - ConfigListener merges configuration -
Any other event listeners manipulate the configuration
Merged configuration is finally passed to the ServiceManager

220 Chapter 38. Advanced Configuration Tricks

 CHAPTER 39

Using Zend\Navigation in your Album Module

In this tutorial we will use the Zend\Navigation component to add a navigation menu to the black bar at the top of the
screen, and add breadcrumbs above the main site content.

39.1 Preparation

In a real world application, the album browser would be only a portion of a working website. Usually the user would
land on a homepage first, and be able to view albums by using a standard navigation menu. So that we have a site
that is more realistic than just the albums feature, lets make the standard skeleton welcome page our homepage, with
the /album route still showing our album module. In order to make this change, we need to undo some work we did
earlier. Currently, navigating to the root of your app (/) routes you to the AlbumControllers default action. Lets
undo this route change so we have two discrete entry points to the app, a home page, and an albums area.
module/Application/config/module.config.php:
1 'home' => array(
2 'type' => 'Zend\Mvc\Router\Http\Literal',
3 'options' => array(
4 'route' => '/',
5 'defaults' => array(
6 'controller' => 'Application\Controller\Index', // <-- change back here
7 'action' => 'index',
8 ),
9 ),
10 ),

This change means that if you go to the home page of your application (http://zf2-tutorial.localhost/),
you see the default skeleton application introduction. Your list of albums is still available at the /album route.

39.2 Setting Up Zend\Navigation

Firstly, we need to tell our application which NavigationFactory to use when using the bundled navigation view
helpers. Thankfully, ZF2 comes with a default factory that will suit our needs just fine. To tell ZF2 to use this default
factory, we simply add a navigation key to the service manager. Its best to do this in the Application module,
because, like the translation data, this is specific to the entire application, and not just to our album pages:
module/Application/config/module.config.php:

221
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1 'service_manager' => array(

2 'factories' => array(
3 'navigation' => 'Zend\Navigation\Service\DefaultNavigationFactory', // <-- add this
4 ),
5 ),

39.3 Configuring our Site Map

Next up, we need Zend\Navigation to understand the hierarchy of our site. Thankfully, if we add a navigation
key to our merged config, the navigation factory will automagically create the container and pages needed to use the
view helpers. Lets do this in the Application module:
module/Application/config/module.config.php:
1 return array(
2 ...
3 'navigation' => array(
4 'default' => array(
5 array(
6 'label' => 'Home',
7 'route' => 'home',
8 ),
9 array(
10 'label' => 'Album',
11 'route' => 'album',
12 'pages' => array(
13 array(
14 'label' => 'Add',
15 'route' => 'album',
16 'action' => 'add',
17 ),
18 array(
19 'label' => 'Edit',
20 'route' => 'album',
21 'action' => 'edit',
22 ),
23 array(
24 'label' => 'Delete',
25 'route' => 'album',
26 'action' => 'delete',
27 ),
28 ),
29 ),
30 ),
31 ),
32 ...
33 );

This configuration maps out the pages weve defined in our controller, with labels linking to the given route names. You
can define highly complex hierarchical sites here with pages and sub-pages linking to route names, controller/action
pairs or external uris. For more information see the docs here.

222 Chapter 39. Using Zend\Navigation in your Album Module

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

39.4 Adding the Menu View Helper

Now that we have the navigation helper configured by our service manager and merged config, we can easily add the
menu to the title bar to our layout by using the menu view helper:
module/Application/view/layout/layout.phtml:
1 ...
2 <div class="collapse navbar-collapse">
3 <?php // <-- Add this !!
4 echo $this->navigation('navigation')->menu();
5 ?>
6 </div>
7 ...

The navigation helper is built in to Zend Framework 2, and uses the service manager configuration weve already
defined to configure itself automatically. Refreshing your application you will see a working menu, with just a few
tweaks however, we can make it look awesome:
module/Application/view/layout/layout.phtml:
1 <div class="collapse navbar-collapse">
2 <?php // <-- Update this !!
3 echo $this->navigation('navigation')
4 ->menu()
5 ->setMinDepth(0)
6 ->setMaxDepth(0)
7 ->setUlClass('nav navbar-nav');
8 ?>
9 </div>

Here we tell the renderer to give the root UL the class of nav so that Twitter Bootstrap styles the menu correctly, and
only render the first level of any given page. If you view your application in your browser, you will now see a nicely
styled menu appear in the title bar. The great thing about Zend\Navigation is that it integrates with ZF2s route
so can tell which page you are currently viewing. Because of this, it sets the active page to have a class of active in
the menu. Twitter Bootstrap uses this to highlight your current page accordingly.

39.5 Adding Breadcrumbs

Adding breadcrumbs is initially just as simple. In our layout.phtml we want to add breadcrumbs above the main
content pane, so our foolish user knows exactly where they are in our complex website. Inside the container div, before
we output the content from the view, lets add a simple breadcrumb by using the breadcrumbs view helper:
module/Application/view/layout/layout.phtml:
1 ...
2 <div class="container">
3 <?php echo $this->navigation('navigation')->breadcrumbs()->setMinDepth(0); // <-- Add this!! ?>
4 <?php echo $this->content; ?>
5 </div>
6 ...

This adds a simple but functional breadcrumb to every page (we simply tell it to render from a depth of 0 so we see
all level of pages) but we can do better than that! Because Bootstrap has a styled breadcrumb as part of its base
CSS, so lets add a partial that outputs the UL in bootstrap happy CSS. Well create it in the view directory of the
Application module (this partial is application wide, rather than album specific):
module/Application/view/partial/breadcrumb.phtml:

39.4. Adding the Menu View Helper 223

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1 <ul class="breadcrumb">
2 <?php
3 // iterate through the pages
4 foreach ($this->pages as $key => $page):
5 ?>
6 <li>
7 <?php
8 // if this isn't the last page, add a link and the separator
9 if ($key < count($this->pages) - 1):
10 ?>
11 <a href="<?php echo $page->getHref(); ?>"><?php echo $page->getLabel(); ?></a>
12 <?php
13 // otherwise, just output the name
14 else:
15 ?>
16 <?php echo $page->getLabel(); ?>
17 <?php endif; ?>
18 </li>
19 <?php endforeach; ?>
20 </ul>

Notice how the partial is passed a Zend\View\Model\ViewModel instance with the pages property set to an
array of pages to render. Now all we have to do is tell the breadcrumb helper to use the partial we have just written:
module/Application/view/layout/layout.phtml:
1 ...
2 <div class="container">
3 <?php
4 echo $this->navigation('navigation') // <-- Update this!!
5 ->breadcrumbs()
6 ->setMinDepth(0)
7 ->setPartial('partial/breadcrumb.phtml');
8 ?>
9 <?php echo $this->content; ?>
10 </div>
11 ...

Refreshing the page now gives us a lovely styled set of breadcrumbs on each page.

224 Chapter 39. Using Zend\Navigation in your Album Module

 CHAPTER 40

Using Zend\Paginator in your Album Module

In this tutorial we will use the Zend\Paginator component to add a handy pagination controller to the bottom of the
album list.
Currently, we only have a handful of albums to display, so showing everything on one page is not a problem. However,
how will the album list look when we have 100 albums or more in our database? The standard solution to this problem
is to split the data up into a number of pages, and allow the user to navigate around these pages using a pagination
control. Just type Zend Framework into Google, and you can see their pagination control at the bottom of the page:

40.1 Preparation

In order for us to have lots of albums in our database, youll need to run the following SQL insert statement to insert
the current 150 top iTunes albums (at the time of writing!):
1 INSERT INTO `album` (`artist`, `title`)
2 VALUES
3 ('David Bowie', 'The Next Day (Deluxe Version)'),
4 ('Bastille', 'Bad Blood'),
5 ('Bruno Mars', 'Unorthodox Jukebox'),
6 ('Emeli Sand', 'Our Version of Events (Special Edition)'),
7 ('Bon Jovi', 'What About Now (Deluxe Version)'),
8 ('Justin Timberlake', 'The 20/20 Experience (Deluxe Version)'),
9 ('Bastille', 'Bad Blood (The Extended Cut)'),
10 ('P!nk', 'The Truth About Love'),
11 ('Sound City - Real to Reel', 'Sound City - Real to Reel'),
12 ('Jake Bugg', 'Jake Bugg'),
13 ('Various Artists', 'The Trevor Nelson Collection'),
14 ('David Bowie', 'The Next Day'),
15 ('Mumford & Sons', 'Babel'),
16 ('The Lumineers', 'The Lumineers'),
17 ('Various Artists', 'Get Ur Freak On - R&B Anthems'),
18 ('The 1975', 'Music For Cars EP'),
19 ('Various Artists', 'Saturday Night Club Classics - Ministry of Sound'),

225
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

20 ('Hurts', 'Exile (Deluxe)'),

21 ('Various Artists', 'Mixmag - The Greatest Dance Tracks of All Time'),
22 ('Ben Howard', 'Every Kingdom'),
23 ('Stereophonics', 'Graffiti On the Train'),
24 ('The Script', '#3'),
25 ('Stornoway', 'Tales from Terra Firma'),
26 ('David Bowie', 'Hunky Dory (Remastered)'),
27 ('Worship Central', 'Let It Be Known (Live)'),
28 ('Ellie Goulding', 'Halcyon'),
29 ('Various Artists', 'Dermot O\'Leary Presents the Saturday Sessions 2013'),
30 ('Stereophonics', 'Graffiti On the Train (Deluxe Version)'),
31 ('Dido', 'Girl Who Got Away (Deluxe)'),
32 ('Hurts', 'Exile'),
33 ('Bruno Mars', 'Doo-Wops & Hooligans'),
34 ('Calvin Harris', '18 Months'),
35 ('Olly Murs', 'Right Place Right Time'),
36 ('Alt-J (?)', 'An Awesome Wave'),
37 ('One Direction', 'Take Me Home'),
38 ('Various Artists', 'Pop Stars'),
39 ('Various Artists', 'Now That\'s What I Call Music! 83'),
40 ('John Grant', 'Pale Green Ghosts'),
41 ('Paloma Faith', 'Fall to Grace'),
42 ('Laura Mvula', 'Sing To the Moon (Deluxe)'),
43 ('Duke Dumont', 'Need U (100%) [feat. A*M*E] - EP'),
44 ('Watsky', 'Cardboard Castles'),
45 ('Blondie', 'Blondie: Greatest Hits'),
46 ('Foals', 'Holy Fire'),
47 ('Maroon 5', 'Overexposed'),
48 ('Bastille', 'Pompeii (Remixes) - EP'),
49 ('Imagine Dragons', 'Hear Me - EP'),
50 ('Various Artists', '100 Hits: 80s Classics'),
51 ('Various Artists', 'Les Misrables (Highlights From the Motion Picture Soundtrack)'),
52 ('Mumford & Sons', 'Sigh No More'),
53 ('Frank Ocean', 'Channel ORANGE'),
54 ('Bon Jovi', 'What About Now'),
55 ('Various Artists', 'BRIT Awards 2013'),
56 ('Taylor Swift', 'Red'),
57 ('Fleetwood Mac', 'Fleetwood Mac: Greatest Hits'),
58 ('David Guetta', 'Nothing But the Beat Ultimate'),
59 ('Various Artists', 'Clubbers Guide 2013 (Mixed By Danny Howard) - Ministry of Sound'),
60 ('David Bowie', 'Best of Bowie'),
61 ('Laura Mvula', 'Sing To the Moon'),
62 ('ADELE', '21'),
63 ('Of Monsters and Men', 'My Head Is an Animal'),
64 ('Rihanna', 'Unapologetic'),
65 ('Various Artists', 'BBC Radio 1\'s Live Lounge - 2012'),
66 ('Avicii & Nicky Romero', 'I Could Be the One (Avicii vs. Nicky Romero)'),
67 ('The Streets', 'A Grand Don\'t Come for Free'),
68 ('Tim McGraw', 'Two Lanes of Freedom'),
69 ('Foo Fighters', 'Foo Fighters: Greatest Hits'),
70 ('Various Artists', 'Now That\'s What I Call Running!'),
71 ('Swedish House Mafia', 'Until Now'),
72 ('The xx', 'Coexist'),
73 ('Five', 'Five: Greatest Hits'),
74 ('Jimi Hendrix', 'People, Hell & Angels'),
75 ('Biffy Clyro', 'Opposites (Deluxe)'),
76 ('The Smiths', 'The Sound of the Smiths'),
77 ('The Saturdays', 'What About Us - EP'),

226 Chapter 40. Using Zend\Paginator in your Album Module

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

78 ('Fleetwood Mac', 'Rumours'),

79 ('Various Artists', 'The Big Reunion'),
80 ('Various Artists', 'Anthems 90s - Ministry of Sound'),
81 ('The Vaccines', 'Come of Age'),
82 ('Nicole Scherzinger', 'Boomerang (Remixes) - EP'),
83 ('Bob Marley', 'Legend (Bonus Track Version)'),
84 ('Josh Groban', 'All That Echoes'),
85 ('Blue', 'Best of Blue'),
86 ('Ed Sheeran', '+'),
87 ('Olly Murs', 'In Case You Didn\'t Know (Deluxe Edition)'),
88 ('Macklemore & Ryan Lewis', 'The Heist (Deluxe Edition)'),
89 ('Various Artists', 'Defected Presents Most Rated Miami 2013'),
90 ('Gorgon City', 'Real EP'),
91 ('Mumford & Sons', 'Babel (Deluxe Version)'),
92 ('Various Artists', 'The Music of Nashville: Season 1, Vol. 1 (Original Soundtrack)'),
93 ('Various Artists', 'The Twilight Saga: Breaking Dawn, Pt. 2 (Original Motion Picture Soundtrack)
94 ('Various Artists', 'Mum - The Ultimate Mothers Day Collection'),
95 ('One Direction', 'Up All Night'),
96 ('Bon Jovi', 'Bon Jovi Greatest Hits'),
97 ('Agnetha Fltskog', 'A'),
98 ('Fun.', 'Some Nights'),
99 ('Justin Bieber', 'Believe Acoustic'),
100 ('Atoms for Peace', 'Amok'),
101 ('Justin Timberlake', 'Justified'),
102 ('Passenger', 'All the Little Lights'),
103 ('Kodaline', 'The High Hopes EP'),
104 ('Lana Del Rey', 'Born to Die'),
105 ('JAY Z & Kanye West', 'Watch the Throne (Deluxe Version)'),
106 ('Biffy Clyro', 'Opposites'),
107 ('Various Artists', 'Return of the 90s'),
108 ('Gabrielle Aplin', 'Please Don\'t Say You Love Me - EP'),
109 ('Various Artists', '100 Hits - Driving Rock'),
110 ('Jimi Hendrix', 'Experience Hendrix - The Best of Jimi Hendrix'),
111 ('Various Artists', 'The Workout Mix 2013'),
112 ('The 1975', 'Sex'),
113 ('Chase & Status', 'No More Idols'),
114 ('Rihanna', 'Unapologetic (Deluxe Version)'),
115 ('The Killers', 'Battle Born'),
116 ('Olly Murs', 'Right Place Right Time (Deluxe Edition)'),
117 ('A$AP Rocky', 'LONG.LIVE.A$AP (Deluxe Version)'),
118 ('Various Artists', 'Cooking Songs'),
119 ('Haim', 'Forever - EP'),
120 ('Lianne La Havas', 'Is Your Love Big Enough?'),
121 ('Michael Bubl', 'To Be Loved'),
122 ('Daughter', 'If You Leave'),
123 ('The xx', 'xx'),
124 ('Eminem', 'Curtain Call'),
125 ('Kendrick Lamar', 'good kid, m.A.A.d city (Deluxe)'),
126 ('Disclosure', 'The Face - EP'),
127 ('Palma Violets', '180'),
128 ('Cody Simpson', 'Paradise'),
129 ('Ed Sheeran', '+ (Deluxe Version)'),
130 ('Michael Bubl', 'Crazy Love (Hollywood Edition)'),
131 ('Bon Jovi', 'Bon Jovi Greatest Hits - The Ultimate Collection'),
132 ('Rita Ora', 'Ora'),
133 ('g33k', 'Spabby'),
134 ('Various Artists', 'Annie Mac Presents 2012'),
135 ('David Bowie', 'The Platinum Collection'),

40.1. Preparation 227

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

136 ('Bridgit Mendler', 'Ready or Not (Remixes) - EP'),

137 ('Dido', 'Girl Who Got Away'),
138 ('Various Artists', 'Now That\'s What I Call Disney'),
139 ('The 1975', 'Facedown - EP'),
140 ('Kodaline', 'The Kodaline - EP'),
141 ('Various Artists', '100 Hits: Super 70s'),
142 ('Fred V & Grafix', 'Goggles - EP'),
143 ('Biffy Clyro', 'Only Revolutions (Deluxe Version)'),
144 ('Train', 'California 37'),
145 ('Ben Howard', 'Every Kingdom (Deluxe Edition)'),
146 ('Various Artists', 'Motown Anthems'),
147 ('Courteeners', 'ANNA'),
148 ('Johnny Marr', 'The Messenger'),
149 ('Rodriguez', 'Searching for Sugar Man'),
150 ('Jessie Ware', 'Devotion'),
151 ('Bruno Mars', 'Unorthodox Jukebox'),
152 ('Various Artists', 'Call the Midwife (Music From the TV Series)'
153 );

This gives us a handy extra 150 rows to play with. If you now visit your album list at /album, youll see a huge long
list of 150+ albums, its ugly.

40.2 Modifying the AlbumTable

In order to let ZF2 handle our database queries automatically for us, we will be using the
Zend\Paginator\Adapter\DbSelect paginator adapter. This will automatically manipulate and run a
Zend\Db\Sql\Select object to include the correct LIMIT and WHERE clauses, so that it returns only the
right amount of data needed to display the given page. Lets modify the fetchAll method of the AlbumTable
model, so that it can optionally return a paginator object:
module/Album/src/Album/Model/AlbumTable.php
1 <?php
2 namespace Album\Model;
3

4 use Zend\Db\ResultSet\ResultSet;
5 use Zend\Db\TableGateway\TableGateway;
6 use Zend\Db\Sql\Select;
7 use Zend\Paginator\Adapter\DbSelect;
8 use Zend\Paginator\Paginator;
9

10 class AlbumTable
11 {
12 ...
13 public function fetchAll($paginated=false)
14 {
15 if ($paginated) {
16 // create a new Select object for the table album
17 $select = new Select('album');
18 // create a new result set based on the Album entity
19 $resultSetPrototype = new ResultSet();
20 $resultSetPrototype->setArrayObjectPrototype(new Album());
21 // create a new pagination adapter object
22 $paginatorAdapter = new DbSelect(
23 // our configured select object
24 $select,

228 Chapter 40. Using Zend\Paginator in your Album Module

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

25 // the adapter to run it against

26 $this->tableGateway->getAdapter(),
27 // the result set to hydrate
28 $resultSetPrototype
29 );
30 $paginator = new Paginator($paginatorAdapter);
31 return $paginator;
32 }
33 $resultSet = $this->tableGateway->select();
34 return $resultSet;
35 }
36 ...

This will return a fully configured Paginator object. Weve already told the DbSelect adapter to use our created
Select object, to use the adapter that the TableGateway object uses, and also how to hydrate the result into a
Album entity in the same fashion as the TableGateway does. This means that our executed and returned paginator
results will return Album objects in exactly the same fashion as the non-paginated results.

40.3 Modifying the AlbumController

Next, we need to tell the album controller to return a Pagination object instead of a ResultSet. Both these
objects can by iterated over to return hydrated Album objects, so we wont need to make many changes to the view
script:
module/Album/src/Album/Controller/AlbumController.php
1 ...
2 public function indexAction()
3 {
4 // grab the paginator from the AlbumTable
5 $paginator = $this->getAlbumTable()->fetchAll(true);
6 // set the current page to what has been passed in query string, or to 1 if none set
7 $paginator->setCurrentPageNumber((int) $this->params()->fromQuery('page', 1));
8 // set the number of items per page to 10
9 $paginator->setItemCountPerPage(10);
10

11 return new ViewModel(array(

12 'paginator' => $paginator
13 ));
14 }
15 ...

Here we are getting the configured Paginator object from the AlbumTable, and then telling it to use the page
that is optionally passed in the querystring page parameter. We are also telling the paginator we want to display 10
objects per page.

40.4 Updating the View Script

Now, lets just tell the view script to iterate over the pagination view variable, rather than the albums variable:
module/Album/view/album/album/index.phtml
1 <table class="table">
2 <tr>
3 <th>Title</th>

40.3. Modifying the AlbumController 229

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

4 <th>Artist</th>
5 <th>&nbsp;</th>
6 </tr>
7 <?php foreach ($this->paginator as $album) : // <-- change here! ?>
8 <tr>
9 <td><?php echo $this->escapeHtml($album->title);?></td>
10 <td><?php echo $this->escapeHtml($album->artist);?></td>
11 <td>
12 <a href="<?php echo $this->url('album',
13 array('action' => 'edit', 'id' => $album->id));?>">Edit</a>
14 <a href="<?php echo $this->url('album',
15 array('action' => 'delete', 'id' => $album->id));?>">Delete</a>
16 </td>
17 </tr>
18 <?php endforeach; ?>
19 </table>

Checking the /album route on your website should now give you a list of just 10 albums, but with no method to
navigate through the pages. Lets correct that now...

40.5 Creating the Pagination Control Partial

Much like we created a custom breadcrumbs partial to render our breadcrumb in the last tutorial, we need to create
a custom pagination control partial to render our pagination control just the way we want it. Again, because we are
using Twitter Bootstrap, this should be as simple as outputting correctly formatted html to get a pretty control. Lets
create the partial in the module/Application/view/partial/ folder, so that we can use the control in all our
modules:
module/Application/view/partial/paginator.phtml
1 <?php if ($this->pageCount): ?>
2 <div>
3 <ul class="pagination">
4 <!-- Previous page link -->
5 <?php if (isset($this->previous)): ?>
6 <li>
7 <a href="<?php echo $this->url($this->route); ?>?page=<?php echo $this->previous
8 <<
9 </a>
10 </li>
11 <?php else: ?>
12 <li class="disabled">
13 <a href="#">
14 <<
15 </a>
16 </li>
17 <?php endif; ?>
18

19 <!-- Numbered page links -->

20 <?php foreach ($this->pagesInRange as $page): ?>
21 <?php if ($page != $this->current): ?>
22 <li>
23 <a href="<?php echo $this->url($this->route);?>?page=<?php echo $page; ?>">
24 <?php echo $page; ?>
25 </a>
26 </li>

230 Chapter 40. Using Zend\Paginator in your Album Module

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

27 <?php else: ?>

28 <li class="active">
29 <a href="#"><?php echo $page; ?></a>
30 </li>
31 <?php endif; ?>
32 <?php endforeach; ?>
33

34 <!-- Next page link -->

35 <?php if (isset($this->next)): ?>
36 <li>
37 <a href="<?php echo $this->url($this->route); ?>?page=<?php echo $this->next; ?>
38 >>
39 </a>
40 </li>
41 <?php else: ?>
42 <li class="disabled">
43 <a href="#">
44 >>
45 </a>
46 </li>
47 <?php endif; ?>
48 </ul>
49 </div>
50 <?php endif; ?>

All this partial does is to create a pagination control with links to the correct pages (if there is more than one page in
the pagination object). It will render a previous page link (and mark it disabled if you are at the first page), then render
a list of intermediate pages (that are passed to the partial based on the rendering style well set in the view helper in
the next step). Finally, it will create a next page link (and disable it if youre at the end). Notice how we pass the page
number via the page querystring parameter which we have already told our controller to use to display the current
page.

40.5. Creating the Pagination Control Partial 231

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

232 Chapter 40. Using Zend\Paginator in your Album Module

 CHAPTER 41

Using the PaginationControl View Helper

The only thing left for us to do so that we can page through the albums is to use the paginationControl view helper to
display our pagination control. This is nicely straightforward as we have already done all the ground work needed to
display the control:
module/Album/view/album/album/index.phtml
1 ...
2 <?php
3 // add at the end of the file after the table
4 echo $this->paginationControl(
5 // the paginator object
6 $this->paginator,
7 // the scrolling style
8 'sliding',
9 // the partial to use to render the control
10 'partial/paginator.phtml',
11 // the route to link to when a user clicks a control link
12 array(
13 'route' => 'album'
14 )
15 );
16 ?>

All we need to do here is to echo the paginationControl helper, and tell it to use our paginator object, sliding scrolling
style, our paginator partial, and which route to use for clicks. Refreshing your application should give you a lovely
bootstrap styled pagination control!

233
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

234 Chapter 41. Using the PaginationControl View Helper

 CHAPTER 42

Setting up a database adapter

42.1 Introduction

In most cases, e.g. in your controllers, your database adapter can be fetched directly from the service manager. Some
classes however, like Zend\Validator\DbRecordExists isnt aware of the service manager, but still needs an
adapter to function.
There are many different ways to provide this functionality to your application. Below are a few examples.

42.2 Basic setup

Normally you will setup your database adapter using a factory in the service manager in your configuration. It might
look something like this:
1 // config/autoload/global.php
2

3 return array(
4 'db' => array(
5 'driver' => 'Pdo',
6 'dsn' => 'mysql:dbname=zf2tutorial;host=localhost',
7 ),
8 'service_manager' => array(
9 'factories' => array(
10 'Zend\Db\Adapter\Adapter' => 'Zend\Db\Adapter\AdapterServiceFactory',
11 ),
12 ),
13 );

The adapter can then be accessed in any ServiceLocatorAware classes.

1 public function getAdapter()
2 {
3 if (!$this->adapter) {
4 $sm = $this->getServiceLocator();
5 $this->adapter = $sm->get('Zend\Db\Adapter\Adapter');
6 }
7 return $this->adapter;
8 }

More information on adapter options can be found in the docs for Zend\Db\Adapter.

235
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

42.3 Setting a static adapter

In order to utilize this adapter in non-ServiceLocatorAware classes, you can use

Zend\Db\TableGateway\Feature\GlobalAdapterFeature::setStaticAdapter() to set a
static adapter:
1 // config/autoload/global.php
2

3 return array(
4 'db' => array(
5 'driver' => 'Pdo',
6 'dsn' => 'mysql:dbname=zf2tutorial;host=localhost',
7 ),
8 'service_manager' => array(
9 'factories' => array(
10 'Zend\Db\Adapter\Adapter' => function ($serviceManager) {
11 $adapterFactory = new Zend\Db\Adapter\AdapterServiceFactory();
12 $adapter = $adapterFactory->createService($serviceManager);
13

14 \Zend\Db\TableGateway\Feature\GlobalAdapterFeature::setStaticAdapter($adapter);
15

16 return $adapter;
17 }
18 ),
19 ),
20 );

The adapter can then later be fetched using Zend\Db\TableGateway\Feature\GlobalAdapterFeature::getStaticAda

for use in e.g. Zend\Validator\DbRecordExists:
1 $validator = new Zend\Validator\Db\RecordExists(
2 array(
3 'table' => 'users',
4 'field' => 'emailaddress',
5 'adapter' => \Zend\Db\TableGateway\Feature\GlobalAdapterFeature::getStaticAdapter()
6 )
7 );

236 Chapter 42. Setting up a database adapter

 CHAPTER 43

Migration from Zend Framework 1

This guide is intended to provide tools and strategies for migrating from Zend Framework 1 to Zend Framework 2.
There is no single solution that will work for every project, nor any tools to automate the process.
In this guide, we will cover the following:
Tools for namespacing your code.
Tools for consuming Zend Framework 2 within your Zend Framework 1 application.
Strategies for running Zend Framework 2 and Zend Framework 1 in parallel.
Strategies for making your code easier to migrate, focussing primarily on clean separation of your domain logic
and the MVC layer.
Strategies for migrating the MVC layer.
Strategies for migrating your domain layer.

237
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

238 Chapter 43. Migration from Zend Framework 1

 CHAPTER 44

Namespacing Old Classes

ZF2s minimal version is PHP 5.3. The most notable feature of PHP 5.3 is the addition of namespaces, which ZF2 fully
embraces. Moreover, new projects built on ZF2 also fully embrace PHP namespaces. The addition of namespaces to
PHP has greatly improved the readability of long class names and has helped better organize code into modules and
components. This transition has also given birth to some naming best practices that help developers organize their
code bases consisting of classes, components, and modules in a consistent and clean fashion.
Converting an older code base that follows the original PEAR/ZF underscore separated class naming convention into
a properly namespaced codebase is one of the easier strategies to employ in both modernizing your code base as well
as getting ready to ZF2-ify your ZF1 application.
Weve created a tool to help in this endeavor, it is located here:
https://github.com/zendframework/Namespacer
This tool will take a wholesale approach to converting older code like the following:
class My_Long_NestedComponent_ClassName
{
// methods that use other classes
}

into:
namespace My\Long\NestedComponent;

use Other\Classes;
use Something\ElseConsumed;

class ClassName
{
// methods with classes converted to short name from use statement.
}

Some IDEs have this capability to some degree. That said, a good approach might be to use the command line
Namespacer to do a full sweep of your codebase, then use the IDE to make more specific naming changes that
might makes more sense to your application.

44.1 Namespacing a ZF1 Application

The above Namespacer is a generalized tool. It does not understand the structure and naming conventions of a ZF1
application. As such, youll need to address the problem of converting your classes according to their role, and which
classes you find you can convert without affecting the way the framework interoperates with your code.

239
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

For example, in ZF1, the naming convention of application and module layer classes does not directly match up
with same well-defined library class/file conventions of the PEAR/ZF namings. For a standard ZF1 application, in
the application/ directory, controller classes are not prefixed, yet model and form classes are prefixed with
Application_. Moreover, they exist inside of lowercased directories, such as models or forms, and their file
to class name segment matching picks up only after the first segment. As an example, you might have this directory
structure with the class names on the right:
application/
-- Bootstrap.php
-- configs
| -- application.ini
| -- application.ini.dist
-- controllers
| -- IndexController.php [class IndexController]
| -- PurchaseOrderController.php [class PurchaseOrderController]
-- forms
| -- PurchaseOrder
| -- Payment.php [class Application_Form_PurchaseOrder_Payment]
-- layouts
| -- scripts
| -- main.phtml
| -- subpage.phtml
-- models
| -- DbTable
| | -- Invoice.php [Application_Model_DbTable_Invoice]
| -- Invoice.php [Application_Model_Invoice]
| -- InvoiceRepository.php [Application_Model_InvoiceRepository]
| -- Payment
| | -- Paypal
| | -- DirectPayment.php [Application_Model_Payment_Paypal_DirectPayment]
| -- PurchaseOrder.php [Application_Model_PurchaseOrder]
-- views
-- scripts
-- error
| -- error.phtml
-- index
| -- index.phtml
-- purchase-order
-- index.phtml
-- purchaser.phtml

It would not be a good strategy to attempt to do a wholesale namespacing of this kind of project for a number of
reasons:
1. ZF1 has special, context-aware autoloaders that will assist loading a class of a particular context from a special
location on disk. For example, ZF1 understands controllers will be located in the controllers directory and
will not be prefixed unless they are inside of a named modules controllers directory.
2. Attempting to apply namespacing to controller classes would generally render a ZF1 application useless. ZF1,
beyond loading files from disk, assumes controllers will have a very specific naming convention so that they can
be invoked by the framework upon routing and dispatching.
3. Beyond dispatching, ZF1 uses the class name to identify and map the proper view script to automatically execute.
By naming the controller something non-standard, views will no longer this this 1:1 mapping of controllers by
name to controller action named view scripts.
A better solution would be to start by namespacing the parts of your ZF1 application that have fewer tie-ins with the
ZF1 architecture. The place to start with this is models and forms.
Since models and forms do not touch controller and view classes (which make heavy use of ZF1 classes by way of

240 Chapter 44. Namespacing Old Classes

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

inheritance), model and form classes might not have the same level of coupling.

44.2 HOWTO Namespace Your Models

First, ensure your classes are under version control. The namespacer tool will make modification to classes in place.
You can then use your version control system as a diffing utility afterwards .
To run the tool, download the phar. Optionally you can place the namespacer.phar into a directory in your PATH.
Namespacing is a 2 part process:
1. Create a map of all the old files, new files, old classes and new classes.
2. Make the transformations according to the map file.
Change into your models/ directory and execute the map function:
namespacer.phar map --mapfile model-map.php --source models/

This will produce a file called model-map.php with entries like this:
1 <?php return array (
2 array (
3 'root_directory' => '/realpath/to/project/application/models',
4 'original_class' => 'Application_Model_Invoice',
5 'original_file' => '/realpath/to/project/application/models/Invoice.php',
6 'new_namespace' => 'Application\\Model',
7 'new_class' => 'Invoice',
8 'new_file' => '/realpath/to/project/application/models/Application/Model/Invoice.php',
9 ),
10 ...
11 );

This gives you an opportunity to manually edit the transformations if you so desire. While you can modify this file,
you also might find it to be easier to go with the default transformations, and do the remaining changes with your
IDEs refactoring utility.
Once you are happy with the map file, run the transformations:
namespacer.phar transform --mapfile model-map.php

At this point, you can use your version control systems status command to see how the directory has transformed.
As an example, in a sample project of mine, git reports the following:
renamed: models/DbTable/Invoice.php -> models/Application/Model/DbTable/Invoice.php
new file: models/Application/Model/DbTable/Transaction.php
renamed: models/Invoice.php -> models/Application/Model/Invoice.php
renamed: models/Payment/Paypal/DirectPayment.php -> models/Application/Model/Payment/Paypal/DirectPa
renamed: models/PurchaseOrder.php -> models/Application/Model/PurchaseOrder.php
renamed: models/PurchaseOrderRepository.php -> models/Application/Model/PurchaseOrderRepository.php
new file: models/Application/Model/PurchaseOrderService.php
renamed: models/Purchaser.php -> models/Application/Model/Purchaser.php
renamed: models/Ticket.php -> models/Application/Model/Ticket.php
renamed: models/Transaction.php -> models/Application/Model/Transaction.php
renamed: models/TransactionRepository.php -> models/Application/Model/TransactionRepository.php
deleted: models/DbTable/Transaction.php
deleted: models/PurchaseOrderService.php

44.2. HOWTO Namespace Your Models 241

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Youll notice that the resulting files have treated the models/ directory as the autoloader root directory. That means
that from this root, class files follow the strict PEAR/ZF2 classfile naming convention. The contents of one of the files
will look like this:
1 namespace Application\Model;
2

3 use Application\Model\PurchaseOrder;
4 use Application\Model\Transaction;
5 use Zend_Filter_Alnum;
6

7 class Invoice
8 {
9

10 protected $tickets;
11 protected $transaction;
12

13 ...
14 }

Things to notice here:

A namespace has been created for this class.
The namespacer has created PHP use statements for classes known in the map file.
Unknown classes are also included (for example, Zend classes) in use statements.
By keeping the old ZF1 classes, your models should continue to work if they consume ZF1 classes. This will allow
you to, at your own pace, transition your codebase to ZF2.
This same procedure can largely be adapted to forms and independent library code as well.

242 Chapter 44. Namespacing Old Classes

 CHAPTER 45

Running Zend Framework 2 and Zend Framework 1 in parallel

From a technical point of view it is absolutely possible to run ZF2 in parallel with ZF1 because there is no conflict
between the classnames due to the fact that ZF2 uses namespaces and ZF1 does not. Running ZF1 and ZF2 in
parallel can be used as a migration strategy in projects where it is not possible, or not convenient, to migrate an entire
application from ZF1 to ZF2. For instance, you could implement any new features of the application using ZF2, while
maintaining original ZF1 features.
Lets examine some scenarios on how to execute ZF1 and ZF2 together.

45.1 Use ZF2 in a ZF1 project

Suppose we have an existing ZF1 application and we want to start using ZF2; how could we do that?
Because ZF2 uses namespaced classes, you can run it in parallel with ZF1 without naming conflicts. In order to do
this, you will need to add some code to autoload ZF2 from within your ZF1 project. Add these lines of code in your
public/index.php, before the instantiation of $application:
1 define('ZF2_PATH', '/path/to/zf2/library');
2 require_once ZF2_PATH . '/Zend/Loader/StandardAutoloader.php';
3 $loader = new Zend\Loader\StandardAutoloader(array(
4 'autoregister_zf' => true,
5 ));
6 $loader->register();

We used the StandardAutoloader class from ZF2. Using this autoloader, classes with the initial namespace
Zend will be loaded using the ZF2_PATH, and any ZF1 classes will continue to be loaded via the mechanisms
present in ZF1.
Of course, this is not a real integration of ZF2 inside ZF1; it only provides the ability to consume ZF2 classes within
your ZF1 application. For instance, you cannot use the MVC architecture of ZF2 because you are using the MVC of
ZF1.
Evan Coury, a member of the ZF community review team, has produced a nice module for ZF1 (zf-2-for-1) that allows
you to use ZF2 features inside an existing ZF1 application. This module offers some basic integrations like the usage
of ZF2 view helpers in the ZF1 view layer (i.e. $this->zf2->get(formRow)).

45.2 Use ZF1 in a ZF2 project

You can add ZF1 to your ZF2 application via Composer by adding the zendframework/zendframework1 package as
a requirement.

243
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

For instance, if you have a ZF2 application and you want to install ZF 1.12, you need to add the following line in the
require section of your composer.json file:
1 "require": {
2 "php": ">=5.3.23",
3 "zendframework/zendframework1": "1.12",
4 ...
5 }

After executing composer.phar update, you can start to use ZF1 classes in your ZF2 project. Since all ZF1
classes exist in the global namespace, you will need to refer to them by their full name; as examples, Zend_Date,
Zend_Feed_Reader, etc.
For other strategies on how to use ZF1 in a ZF2 project, you can check out this blog post by Abdul Malik Ikhsan, Zend
Framework 2 : Using Zend Framework 1 libraries.

45.3 Run ZF1 and ZF2 together

As we mentioned early, one way to migrate a ZF1 application to ZF2 can be to execute in parallel the different
versions of the framework, using ZF2 for the new features, and migrating the ZF1 code step by step. In order to
execute in parallel, we need to map different URLs to the different front controllers for ZF1 and ZF2. This goal can be
accomplished using the rewriting rules of your web server. From a performance point of view, this is the best solution
because it does not involve pre-processing overhead. For each URL we can define a different version of the framework
to be used.
For instance, imagine we have a ZF1 application and we want to use ZF2 only for URLs starting with /album. We
can use the following .htaccess file (this information is related to apache; if you are using another web server, read
the instructions in the note below):
1 SetEnv APPLICATION_ENV development
2 RewriteEngine On
3 RewriteCond %{REQUEST_FILENAME} -s [OR]
4 RewriteCond %{REQUEST_FILENAME} -l [OR]
5 RewriteCond %{REQUEST_FILENAME} -d
6 RewriteRule ^ - [NC,L]
7 RewriteRule ^album(/.*)?$ index_zf2.php [NC,L]
8 RewriteRule ^ index.php [NC,L]

index_zf2.php is a PHP script that includes as the typical public/index.php file of ZF2. Here is the source
code for index_zf2.php:
1 require_once '../path-to-ZF2-app/public/index.php';

We suggest putting the ZF2 application in a separate folder under the same root directory of the ZF1 application. In
this way you can continue to maintain the existing ZF1 code and use ZF2 only for the new features. Moreover, if you
want to migrate the old code you can do that by URL and switch to the new ZF2 code only when you are ready. This
approach can be useful to provide migration guideline without losing development time in a full stack migration.

Note: All web servers support a rewriting mechanism. For instance, if you are using Microsoft IIS 7, you can check
how to configure the rewriting rules from Rob Allens post Zend Framework URL Rewriting in IIS7; if you are using
nginx, you can check out this StackOverflow question: Zend Framework on nginx.

244 Chapter 45. Running Zend Framework 2 and Zend Framework 1 in parallel
 CHAPTER 46

Introduction to Zend\Authentication

The Zend\Authentication component provides an API for authentication and includes concrete authentication
adapters for common use case scenarios.
Zend\Authentication is concerned only with authentication and not with authorization. Authentication is
loosely defined as determining whether an entity actually is what it purports to be (i.e., identification), based on some
set of credentials. Authorization, the process of deciding whether to allow an entity access to, or to perform operations
upon, other entities is outside the scope of Zend\Authentication. For more information about authorization and
access control with Zend Framework, please see the Zend\Permissions\Acl or Zend\Permissions\Rbac component.

Note: There is no Zend\Authentication\Authentication class, instead the class

Zend\Authentication\AuthenticationService is provided. This class uses underlying authenti-
cation adapters and persistent storage backends.

46.1 Adapters

Zend\Authentication adapters are used to authenticate against a particular type of authentication service, such
as LDAP, RDBMS, or file-based storage. Different adapters are likely to have vastly different options and behaviors,
but some basic things are common among authentication adapters. For example, accepting authentication creden-
tials (including a purported identity), performing queries against the authentication service, and returning results are
common to Zend\Authentication adapters.
Each Zend\Authentication adapter class implements Zend\Authentication\Adapter\AdapterInterface.
This interface defines one method, authenticate(), that an adapter class must implement for performing an
authentication query. Each adapter class must be prepared prior to calling authenticate(). Such adapter
preparation includes setting up credentials (e.g., username and password) and defining values for adapter-specific
configuration options, such as database connection settings for a database table adapter.
The following is an example authentication adapter that requires a username and password to be set for authentication.
Other details, such as how the authentication service is queried, have been omitted for brevity:
1 use Zend\Authentication\Adapter\AdapterInterface;
2

3 class My\Auth\Adapter implements AdapterInterface

4 {
5 /**
6 * Sets username and password for authentication
7 *
8 * @return void
9 */

245
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

10 public function __construct($username, $password)

11 {
12 // ...
13 }
14

15 /**
16 * Performs an authentication attempt
17 *
18 * @return \Zend\Authentication\Result
19 * @throws \Zend\Authentication\Adapter\Exception\ExceptionInterface
20 * If authentication cannot be performed
21 */
22 public function authenticate()
23 {
24 // ...
25 }
26 }

As indicated in its docblock, authenticate() must return an instance of Zend\Authentication\Result

(or of a class derived from Zend\Authentication\Result). If for some reason performing
an authentication query is impossible, authenticate() should throw an exception that derives from
Zend\Authentication\Adapter\Exception\ExceptionInterface.

46.2 Results

Zend\Authentication adapters return an instance of Zend\Authentication\Result with

authenticate() in order to represent the results of an authentication attempt. Adapters populate the
Zend\Authentication\Result object upon construction, so that the following four methods provide a basic
set of user-facing operations that are common to the results of Zend\Authentication adapters:
isValid()- returns TRUE if and only if the result represents a successful authentication attempt
getCode()- returns a Zend\Authentication\Result constant identifier for determining the type of
authentication failure or whether success has occurred. This may be used in situations where the developer
wishes to distinguish among several authentication result types. This allows developers to maintain detailed au-
thentication result statistics, for example. Another use of this feature is to provide specific, customized messages
to users for usability reasons, though developers are encouraged to consider the risks of providing such detailed
reasons to users, instead of a general authentication failure message. For more information, see the notes below.
getIdentity()- returns the identity of the authentication attempt
getMessages()- returns an array of messages regarding a failed authentication attempt
A developer may wish to branch based on the type of authentication result in order to perform more specific op-
erations. Some operations developers might find useful are locking accounts after too many unsuccessful password
attempts, flagging an IP address after too many nonexistent identities are attempted, and providing specific, customized
authentication result messages to the user. The following result codes are available:
1 use Zend\Authentication\Result;
2

3 Result::SUCCESS
4 Result::FAILURE
5 Result::FAILURE_IDENTITY_NOT_FOUND
6 Result::FAILURE_IDENTITY_AMBIGUOUS
7 Result::FAILURE_CREDENTIAL_INVALID
8 Result::FAILURE_UNCATEGORIZED

246 Chapter 46. Introduction to Zend\Authentication

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

The following example illustrates how a developer may branch on the result code:
1 // inside of AuthController / loginAction
2 $result = $this->auth->authenticate($adapter);
3

4 switch ($result->getCode()) {
5

6 case Result::FAILURE_IDENTITY_NOT_FOUND:
7 /** do stuff for nonexistent identity **/
8 break;
9

10 case Result::FAILURE_CREDENTIAL_INVALID:
11 /** do stuff for invalid credential **/
12 break;
13

14 case Result::SUCCESS:
15 /** do stuff for successful authentication **/
16 break;
17

18 default:
19 /** do stuff for other failure **/
20 break;
21 }

46.3 Identity Persistence

Authenticating a request that includes authentication credentials is useful per se, but it is also important to support
maintaining the authenticated identity without having to present the authentication credentials with each request.
HTTP is a stateless protocol, however, and techniques such as cookies and sessions have been developed in order to
facilitate maintaining state across multiple requests in server-side web applications.

46.3.1 Default Persistence in the PHP Session

By default, Zend\Authentication provides persistent storage of the identity from a suc-

cessful authentication attempt using the PHP session. Upon a successful authentication at-
tempt, Zend\Authentication\AuthenticationService::authenticate() stores
the identity from the authentication result into persistent storage. Unless specified other-
wise, Zend\Authentication\AuthenticationService uses a storage class named
Zend\Authentication\Storage\Session, which, in turn, uses Zend\Session. A custom class may instead
be used by providing an object that implements Zend\Authentication\Storage\StorageInterface to
Zend\Authentication\AuthenticationService::setStorage().

Note: If automatic persistent storage of the identity is not appropriate for a particular use case, then developers
may forget using the Zend\Authentication\AuthenticationService class altogether, instead using an
adapter class directly.

Modifying the Session Namespace

Zend\Authentication\Storage\Session uses a session namespace of Zend_Auth.

This namespace may be overridden by passing a different value to the constructor of
Zend\Authentication\Storage\Session, and this value is internally passed along to the

46.3. Identity Persistence 247

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

constructor of Zend\Session\Container. This should occur before authentication is attempted, since

Zend\Authentication\AuthenticationService::authenticate() performs the automatic
storage of the identity.
1 use Zend\Authentication\AuthenticationService;
2 use Zend\Authentication\Storage\Session as SessionStorage;
3

4 $auth = new AuthenticationService();

5

6 // Use 'someNamespace' instead of 'Zend_Auth'

7 $auth->setStorage(new SessionStorage('someNamespace'));
8

9 /**
10 * @todo Set up the auth adapter, $authAdapter
11 */
12

13 // Authenticate, saving the result, and persisting the identity on

14 // success
15 $result = $auth->authenticate($authAdapter);

46.3.2 Chain Storage

A website may have multiple storage in place. The Chain Storage can be used to glue these together.
The Chain can for example be configured to first use a Session Storage and then use a OAuth as a secondary
Storage. One could configure this in the following way:
1 $storage = new Chain;
2 $storage->add(new Session);
3 $storage->add(new OAuth); // Note: imaginary storage, not part of ZF2

Now if the Chain Storage is accessed its underlying Storage will get accessed in the order in which they were added
to the chain. Thus first the Session Storage is used. Now either:
The Session Storage is non-empty and the Chain will use its contents.
The Session Storage is empty. Next the OAuth Storage is accessed.
If this one is also empty the Chain will act as empty.
If this one is non-empty the Chain will use its contents. However it will also populate all Storage with
higher priority. Thus the Session Storage will be populated with the contents of the Oauth Storage.
The priority of Storage in the Chain can be made explicit via the Chain::add method.
1 $chain->add(new A, 2);
2 $chain->add(new B, 10); // First use B

46.3.3 Implementing Customized Storage

Sometimes developers may need to use a different identity storage mechanism than that provided
by Zend\Authentication\Storage\Session. For such cases developers may simply imple-
ment Zend\Authentication\Storage\StorageInterface and supply an instance of the class to
Zend\Authentication\AuthenticationService::setStorage().

248 Chapter 46. Introduction to Zend\Authentication

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Using a Custom Storage Class

In order to use an identity persistence storage class other than Zend\Authentication\Storage\Session, a

developer implements Zend\Authentication\Storage\StorageInterface:
1 use Zend\Authentication\Storage\StorageInterface;
2

3 class My\Storage implements StorageInterface

4 {
5 /**
6 * Returns true if and only if storage is empty
7 *
8 * @throws \Zend\Authentication\Exception\ExceptionInterface
9 * If it is impossible to
10 * determine whether storage is empty
11 * @return boolean
12 */
13 public function isEmpty()
14 {
15 /**
16 * @todo implementation
17 */
18 }
19

20 /**
21 * Returns the contents of storage
22 *
23 * Behavior is undefined when storage is empty.
24 *
25 * @throws \Zend\Authentication\Exception\ExceptionInterface
26 * If reading contents from storage is impossible
27 * @return mixed
28 */
29

30 public function read()

31 {
32 /**
33 * @todo implementation
34 */
35 }
36

37 /**
38 * Writes $contents to storage
39 *
40 * @param mixed $contents
41 * @throws \Zend\Authentication\Exception\ExceptionInterface
42 * If writing $contents to storage is impossible
43 * @return void
44 */
45

46 public function write($contents)

47 {
48 /**
49 * @todo implementation
50 */
51 }
52

53 /**

46.3. Identity Persistence 249

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

54 * Clears contents from storage

55 *
56 * @throws \Zend\Authentication\Exception\ExceptionInterface
57 * If clearing contents from storage is impossible
58 * @return void
59 */
60

61 public function clear()

62 {
63 /**
64 * @todo implementation
65 */
66 }
67 }

In order to use this custom storage class, Zend\Authentication\AuthenticationService::setStorage()

is invoked before an authentication query is attempted:
1 use Zend\Authentication\AuthenticationService;
2

3 // Instruct AuthenticationService to use the custom storage class

4 $auth = new AuthenticationService();
5

6 $auth->setStorage(new My\Storage());
7

8 /**
9 * @todo Set up the auth adapter, $authAdapter
10 */
11

12 // Authenticate, saving the result, and persisting the identity on

13 // success
14 $result = $auth->authenticate($authAdapter);

46.4 Usage

There are two provided ways to use Zend\Authentication adapters:

indirectly, through Zend\Authentication\AuthenticationService::authenticate()
directly, through the adapters authenticate() method
The following example illustrates how to use a Zend\Authentication adapter indirectly, through the use of the
Zend\Authentication\AuthenticationService class:
1 use Zend\Authentication\AuthenticationService;
2

3 // instantiate the authentication service

4 $auth = new AuthenticationService();
5

6 // Set up the authentication adapter

7 $authAdapter = new My\Auth\Adapter($username, $password);
8

9 // Attempt authentication, saving the result

10 $result = $auth->authenticate($authAdapter);
11

12 if (!$result->isValid()) {
13 // Authentication failed; print the reasons why

250 Chapter 46. Introduction to Zend\Authentication

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

14 foreach ($result->getMessages() as $message) {

15 echo "$message\n";
16 }
17 } else {
18 // Authentication succeeded; the identity ($username) is stored
19 // in the session
20 // $result->getIdentity() === $auth->getIdentity()
21 // $result->getIdentity() === $username
22 }

Once authentication has been attempted in a request, as in the above example, it is a simple matter to check whether a
successfully authenticated identity exists:
1 use Zend\Authentication\AuthenticationService;
2

3 $auth = new AuthenticationService();

4

5 /**
6 * @todo Set up the auth adapter, $authAdapter
7 */
8

9 if ($auth->hasIdentity()) {
10 // Identity exists; get it
11 $identity = $auth->getIdentity();
12 }

To remove an identity from persistent storage, simply use the clearIdentity() method. This typically would be
used for implementing an application logout operation:
1 $auth->clearIdentity();

When the automatic use of persistent storage is inappropriate for a particular use case, a developer may simply
bypass the use of the Zend\Authentication\AuthenticationService class, using an adapter class di-
rectly. Direct use of an adapter class involves configuring and preparing an adapter object and then calling its
authenticate() method. Adapter-specific details are discussed in the documentation for each adapter. The
following example directly utilizes My\Auth\Adapter:
1 // Set up the authentication adapter
2 $authAdapter = new My\Auth\Adapter($username, $password);
3

4 // Attempt authentication, saving the result

5 $result = $authAdapter->authenticate();
6

7 if (!$result->isValid()) {
8 // Authentication failed; print the reasons why
9 foreach ($result->getMessages() as $message) {
10 echo "$message\n";
11 }
12 } else {
13 // Authentication succeeded
14 // $result->getIdentity() === $username
15 }

46.4. Usage 251

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

252 Chapter 46. Introduction to Zend\Authentication

 CHAPTER 47

Database Table Authentication

Note: Zend\Authentication\Adapter\DbTable has been deprecated, as its responsibili-

ties have been splitted off into Zend\Authentication\Adapter\DbTable\CallbackCheck
and Zend\Authentication\Adapter\DbTable\CredentialTreatmentAdapter. Use
Zend\Authentication\Adapter\DbTable\CredentialTreatmentAdapter instead of
Zend\Authentication\Adapter\DbTable.

47.1 Introduction

Zend\Authentication\Adapter\DbTable provides the ability to authenticate against credentials stored

in a database table. Because Zend\Authentication\Adapter\DbTable requires an instance of
Zend\Db\Adapter\Adapter to be passed to its constructor, each instance is bound to a particular database
connection. Other configuration options may be set through the constructor and through instance methods, one for
each option.
The available configuration options include:
tableName: This is the name of the database table that contains the authentication credentials, and against
which the database authentication query is performed.
identityColumn: This is the name of the database table column used to represent the identity. The identity
column must contain unique values, such as a username or e-mail address.
credentialColumn: This is the name of the database table column used to represent the credential. Under a
simple identity and password authentication scheme, the credential value corresponds to the password. See also
the credentialTreatment option.
credentialTreatment: In many cases, passwords and other sensitive data are encrypted, hashed, encoded, ob-
scured, salted or otherwise treated through some function or algorithm. By specifying a parameterized treatment
string with this method, such as MD5(?) or PASSWORD(?), a developer may apply such arbitrary SQL upon
input credential data. Since these functions are specific to the underlying RDBMS, check the database manual
for the availability of such functions for your database system.

47.2 Basic Usage

As explained in the introduction, the Zend\Authentication\Adapter\DbTable constructor requires an in-

stance of Zend\Db\Adapter\Adapter that serves as the database connection to which the authentication adapter
instance is bound. First, the database connection should be created.

253
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

The following code creates an adapter for an in-memory database, creates a simple table schema, and inserts a row
against which we can perform an authentication query later. This example requires the PDO SQLite extension to be
available:
1 use Zend\Db\Adapter\Adapter as DbAdapter;
2

3 // Create a SQLite database connection

4 $dbAdapter = new DbAdapter(array(
5 'driver' => 'Pdo_Sqlite',
6 'database' => 'path/to/sqlite.db'
7 ));
8

9 // Build a simple table creation query

10 $sqlCreate = 'CREATE TABLE [users] ('
11 . '[id] INTEGER NOT NULL PRIMARY KEY, '
12 . '[username] VARCHAR(50) UNIQUE NOT NULL, '
13 . '[password] VARCHAR(32) NULL, '
14 . '[real_name] VARCHAR(150) NULL)';
15

16 // Create the authentication credentials table

17 $dbAdapter->query($sqlCreate);
18

19 // Build a query to insert a row for which authentication may succeed

20 $sqlInsert = "INSERT INTO users (username, password, real_name) "
21 . "VALUES ('my_username', 'my_password', 'My Real Name')";
22

23 // Insert the data

24 $dbAdapter->query($sqlInsert);

With the database connection and table data available, an instance of

Zend\Authentication\Adapter\DbTable may be created. Configuration option values may be passed to
the constructor or deferred as parameters to setter methods after instantiation:
1 use Zend\Authentication\Adapter\DbTable as AuthAdapter;
2

3 // Configure the instance with constructor parameters...

4 $authAdapter = new AuthAdapter($dbAdapter,
5 'users',
6 'username',
7 'password'
8 );
9

10 // ...or configure the instance with setter methods

11 $authAdapter = new AuthAdapter($dbAdapter);
12

13 $authAdapter
14 ->setTableName('users')
15 ->setIdentityColumn('username')
16 ->setCredentialColumn('password')
17 ;

At this point, the authentication adapter instance is ready to accept authentication queries. In order to formulate an
authentication query, the input credential values are passed to the adapter prior to calling the authenticate()
method:
1 // Set the input credential values (e.g., from a login form)
2 $authAdapter
3 ->setIdentity('my_username')
4 ->setCredential('my_password')

254 Chapter 47. Database Table Authentication

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

5 ;
6

7 // Perform the authentication query, saving the result

In addition to the availability of the getIdentity() method upon the authentication result object,
Zend\Authentication\Adapter\DbTable also supports retrieving the table row upon authentication suc-
cess:
1 // Print the identity
2 echo $result->getIdentity() . "\n\n";
3

4 // Print the result row

5 print_r($authAdapter->getResultRowObject());
6

7 /* Output:
8 my_username
9

10 Array
11 (
12 [id] => 1
13 [username] => my_username
14 [password] => my_password
15 [real_name] => My Real Name
16 )
17 */

Since the table row contains the credential value, it is important to secure the values against unintended access.
When retrieving the result object, we can either specify what columns to return, or what columns to omit:
1 $columnsToReturn = array(
2 'id', 'username', 'real_name'
3 );
4 print_r($authAdapter->getResultRowObject($columnsToReturn));
5

6 /* Output:
7

8 Array
9 (
10 [id] => 1
11 [username] => my_username
12 [real_name] => My Real Name
13 )
14 */
15

16 $columnsToOmit = array('password');
17 print_r($authAdapter->getResultRowObject(null, $columnsToOmit);
18

19 /* Output:
20

21 Array
22 (
23 [id] => 1
24 [username] => my_username
25 [real_name] => My Real Name
26 )
27 */

47.2. Basic Usage 255

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

47.3 Advanced Usage: Persisting a DbTable Result Object

By default, Zend\Authentication\Adapter\DbTable returns the identity supplied back to the auth object
upon successful authentication. Another use case scenario, where developers want to store to the persistent storage
mechanism of Zend\Authentication an identity object containing other useful information, is solved by using
the getResultRowObject() method to return a stdClass object. The following code snippet illustrates its use:
1 // authenticate with Zend\Authentication\Adapter\DbTable
2 $result = $this->_auth->authenticate($adapter);
3

4 if ($result->isValid()) {
5 // store the identity as an object where only the username and
6 // real_name have been returned
7 $storage = $this->_auth->getStorage();
8 $storage->write($adapter->getResultRowObject(array(
9 'username',
10 'real_name',
11 )));
12

13 // store the identity as an object where the password column has

14 // been omitted
15 $storage->write($adapter->getResultRowObject(
16 null,
17 'password'
18 ));
19

20 /* ... */
21

22 } else {
23

24 /* ... */
25

26 }

47.3.1 Advanced Usage By Example

While the primary purpose of the Zend\Authentication component (and consequently

Zend\Authentication\Adapter\DbTable) is primarily authentication and not authorization, there
are a few instances and problems that toe the line between which domain they fit within. Depending on how youve
decided to explain your problem, it sometimes makes sense to solve what could look like an authorization problem
within the authentication adapter.
With that disclaimer out of the way, Zend\Authentication\Adapter\DbTable has some built in mecha-
nisms that can be leveraged for additional checks at authentication time to solve some common user problems.
1 use Zend\Authentication\Adapter\DbTable as AuthAdapter;
2

3 // The status field value of an account is not equal to "compromised"

4 $adapter = new AuthAdapter($db,
5 'users',
6 'username',
7 'password',
8 'MD5(?) AND status != "compromised"'
9 );
10

11 // The active field value of an account is equal to "TRUE"

256 Chapter 47. Database Table Authentication

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

12 $adapter = new AuthAdapter($db,

13 'users',
14 'username',
15 'password',
16 'MD5(?) AND active = "TRUE"'
17 );

Another scenario can be the implementation of a salting mechanism. Salting is a term referring to a technique which
can highly improve your applications security. Its based on the idea that concatenating a random string to every
password makes it impossible to accomplish a successful brute force attack on the database using pre-computed hash
values from a dictionary.
Therefore, we need to modify our table to store our salt string:
1 $sqlAlter = "ALTER TABLE [users] "
2 . "ADD COLUMN [password_salt] "
3 . "AFTER [password]";

Heres a simple way to generate a salt string for every user at registration:
1 $dynamicSalt = '';
2 for ($i = 0; $i < 50; $i++) {
3 $dynamicSalt .= chr(rand(33, 126));
4 }

And now lets build the adapter:

1 $adapter = new AuthAdapter($db,
2 'users',
3 'username',
4 'password',
5 "MD5(CONCAT('staticSalt', ?, password_salt))"
6 );

Note: You can improve security even more by using a static salt value hard coded into your application. In the case
that your database is compromised (e. g. by an SQL injection attack) but your web server is intact your data is still
unusable for the attacker.

Another alternative is to use the getDbSelect() method of the Zend\Authentication\Adapter\DbTable

after the adapter has been constructed. This method will return the Zend\Db\Sql\Select object instance it will
use to complete the authenticate() routine. It is important to note that this method will always return the same
object regardless if authenticate() has been called or not. This object will not have any of the identity or
credential information in it as those values are placed into the select object at authenticate() time.
An example of a situation where one might want to use the getDbSelect() method would check the status of a
user, in other words to see if that users account is enabled.
1 // Continuing with the example from above
2 $adapter = new AuthAdapter($db,
3 'users',
4 'username',
5 'password',
6 'MD5(?)'
7 );
8

9 // get select object (by reference)

10 $select = $adapter->getDbSelect();
11 $select->where('active = "TRUE"');

47.3. Advanced Usage: Persisting a DbTable Result Object 257

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

12

13 // authenticate, this ensures that users.active = TRUE

14 $adapter->authenticate();

258 Chapter 47. Database Table Authentication

 CHAPTER 48

Digest Authentication

48.1 Introduction

Digest authentication is a method of HTTP authentication that improves upon Basic authentication by providing a way
to authenticate without having to transmit the password in clear text across the network.
This adapter allows authentication against text files containing lines having the basic elements of Digest authentication:
username, such as joe.user
realm, such as Administrative Area
MD5 hash of the username, realm, and password, separated by colons
The above elements are separated by colons, as in the following example (in which the password is somePassword):
1 someUser:Some Realm:fde17b91c3a510ecbaf7dbd37f59d4f8

48.2 Specifics

The digest authentication adapter, Zend\Authentication\Adapter\Digest, requires several input parame-

ters:
filename - Filename against which authentication queries are performed
realm - Digest authentication realm
username - Digest authentication user
password - Password for the user of the realm
These parameters must be set prior to calling authenticate().

48.3 Identity

The digest authentication adapter returns a Zend\Authentication\Result object, which has been populated
with the identity as an array having keys of realm and username. The respective array values associated with these
keys correspond to the values set before authenticate() is called.

259
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1 use Zend\Authentication\Adapter\Digest as AuthAdapter;

2

3 $adapter = new AuthAdapter($filename,

4 $realm,
5 $username,
6 $password);
7

8 $result = $adapter->authenticate();
9

10 $identity = $result->getIdentity();
11

12 print_r($identity);
13

14 /*
15 Array
16 (
17 [realm] => Some Realm
18 [username] => someUser
19 )
20 */

260 Chapter 48. Digest Authentication

 CHAPTER 49

HTTP Authentication Adapter

49.1 Introduction

Zend\Authentication\Adapter\Http provides a mostly-compliant implementation of RFC-2617, Basic and

Digest HTTP Authentication. Digest authentication is a method of HTTP authentication that improves upon Basic
authentication by providing a way to authenticate without having to transmit the password in clear text across the
network.
Major Features:
Supports both Basic and Digest authentication.
Issues challenges in all supported schemes, so client can respond with any scheme it supports.
Supports proxy authentication.
Includes support for authenticating against text files and provides an interface for authenticating against other
sources, such as databases.
There are a few notable features of RFC-2617 that are not implemented yet:
Nonce tracking, which would allow for stale support, and increased replay attack protection.
Authentication with integrity checking, or auth-int.
Authentication-Info HTTP header.

49.2 Design Overview

This adapter consists of two sub-components, the HTTP authentication class itself, and the so-called Resolvers.
The HTTP authentication class encapsulates the logic for carrying out both Basic and Digest authentication. It uses
a Resolver to look up a clients identity in some data store (text file by default), and retrieve the credentials from the
data store. The resolved credentials are then compared to the values submitted by the client to determine whether
authentication is successful.

49.3 Configuration Options

The Zend\Authentication\Adapter\Http class requires a configuration array passed to its constructor.

There are several configuration options available, and some are required:

261
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Table 49.1: Configuration Options

Option Required Description
Name
ac- Yes Determines which authentication schemes the adapter will accept from the
cept_schemes client. Must be a space-separated list containing basic and/or digest.
realm Yes Sets the authentication realm; usernames should be unique within a given
realm.
di- Yes, when Space-separated list of URIs for which the same authentication information
gest_domains
accept_schemes is valid. The URIs need not all point to the same server.
contains digest
nonce_timeout
Yes, when Sets the number of seconds for which the nonce is valid. See notes below.
accept_schemes
contains digest
use_opaqueNo Specifies whether to send the opaque value in the header. True by default.
algo- No Specified the algorithm. Defaults to MD5, the only supported option (for
rithm now).
proxy_authNo Disabled by default. Enable to perform Proxy authentication, instead of
normal origin server authentication.
Note: The current implementation of the nonce_timeout has some interesting side effects. This setting is sup-
posed to determine the valid lifetime of a given nonce, or effectively how long a clients authentication information
is accepted. Currently, if its set to 3600 (for example), it will cause the adapter to prompt the client for new cre-
dentials every hour, on the hour. This will be resolved in a future release, once nonce tracking and stale support are
implemented.

49.4 Resolvers

The resolvers job is to take a username and realm, and return some kind of credential value. Basic authentication
expects to receive the Base64 encoded version of the users password. Digest authentication expects to receive a hash
of the users username, the realm, and their password (each separated by colons). Currently, the only supported hash
algorithm is MD5.
Zend\Authentication\Adapter\Http relies on objects implementing
Zend\Authentication\Adapter\Http\ResolverInterface. A text file resolver class is included with
this adapter, but any other kind of resolver can be created simply by implementing the resolver interface.

49.4.1 File Resolver

The file resolver is a very simple class. It has a single property specifying a filename, which can also be passed to the
constructor. Its resolve() method walks through the text file, searching for a line with a matching username and
realm. The text file format similar to Apache htpasswd files:
1 <username>:<realm>:<credentials>\n

Each line consists of three fields - username, realm, and credentials - each separated by a colon. The credentials field
is opaque to the file resolver; it simply returns that value as-is to the caller. Therefore, this same file format serves both
Basic and Digest authentication. In Basic authentication, the credentials field should be written in clear text. In Digest
authentication, it should be the MD5 hash described above.
There are two equally easy ways to create a File resolver:

262 Chapter 49. HTTP Authentication Adapter

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1 use Zend\Authentication\Adapter\Http\FileResolver;
2 $path = 'files/passwd.txt';
3 $resolver = new FileResolver($path);

or
1 $path = 'files/passwd.txt';
2 $resolver = new FileResolver();
3 $resolver->setFile($path);

If the given path is empty or not readable, an exception is thrown.

49.5 Basic Usage

First, set up an array with the required configuration values:

1 $config = array(
2 'accept_schemes' => 'basic digest',
3 'realm' => 'My Web Site',
4 'digest_domains' => '/members_only /my_account',
5 'nonce_timeout' => 3600,
6 );

This array will cause the adapter to accept either Basic or Digest authentication, and will require authenticated access
to all the areas of the site under /members_only and /my_account. The realm value is usually displayed by the
browser in the password dialog box. The nonce_timeout, of course, behaves as described above.
Next, create the Zend\Authentication\Adapter\Http object:
1 $adapter = new Zend\Authentication\Adapter\Http($config);

Since were supporting both Basic and Digest authentication, we need two different resolver objects. Note that this
could just as easily be two different classes:
1 use Zend\Authentication\Adapter\Http\FileResolver;
2

3 $basicResolver = new FileResolver();

4 $basicResolver->setFile('files/basicPasswd.txt');
5

6 $digestResolver = new FileResolver();

7 $digestResolver->setFile('files/digestPasswd.txt');
8

9 $adapter->setBasicResolver($basicResolver);
10 $adapter->setDigestResolver($digestResolver);

Finally, we perform the authentication. The adapter needs a reference to both the Request and Response objects in
order to do its job:
1 assert($request instanceof Zend\Http\Request);
2 assert($response instanceof Zend\Http\Response);
3

4 $adapter->setRequest($request);
5 $adapter->setResponse($response);
6

7 $result = $adapter->authenticate();
8 if (!$result->isValid()) {
9 // Bad username/password, or canceled password prompt
10 }

49.5. Basic Usage 263

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

264 Chapter 49. HTTP Authentication Adapter

 CHAPTER 50

LDAP Authentication

50.1 Introduction

Zend\Authentication\Adapter\Ldap supports web application authentication with LDAP services. Its fea-
tures include username and domain name canonicalization, multi-domain authentication, and failover capabilities. It
has been tested to work with Microsoft Active Directory and OpenLDAP, but it should also work with other LDAP
service providers.
This documentation includes a guide on using Zend\Authentication\Adapter\Ldap, an exploration of its
API, an outline of the various available options, diagnostic information for troubleshooting authentication problems,
and example options for both Active Directory and OpenLDAP servers.

50.2 Usage

To incorporate Zend\Authentication\Adapter\Ldap authentication into your application quickly, even if

youre not using Zend\Mvc, the meat of your code should look something like the following:
1 use Zend\Authentication\AuthenticationService;
2 use Zend\Authentication\Adapter\Ldap as AuthAdapter;
3 use Zend\Config\Reader\Ini as ConfigReader;
4 use Zend\Config\Config;
5 use Zend\Log\Logger;
6 use Zend\Log\Writer\Stream as LogWriter;
7 use Zend\Log\Filter\Priority as LogFilter;
8

9 $username = $this->getRequest()->getPost('username');
10 $password = $this->getRequest()->getPost('password');
11

12

13 $auth = new AuthenticationService();

14

15 $configReader = new ConfigReader();

16 $configData = $configReader->fromFile('./ldap-config.ini');
17 $config = new Config($configData, true);
18

19 $log_path = $config->production->ldap->log_path;
20 $options = $config->production->ldap->toArray();
21 unset($options['log_path']);
22

23 $adapter = new AuthAdapter($options,

265
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

24 $username,
25 $password);
26

27 $result = $auth->authenticate($adapter);
28

29 if ($log_path) {
30 $messages = $result->getMessages();
31

32 $logger = new Logger;

33 $writer = new LogWriter($log_path);
34

35 $logger->addWriter($writer);
36

37 $filter = new LogFilter(Logger::DEBUG);

38 $writer->addFilter($filter);
39

40 foreach ($messages as $i => $message) {

41 if ($i-- > 1) { // $messages[2] and up are log messages
42 $message = str_replace("\n", "\n ", $message);
43 $logger->debug("Ldap: $i: $message");
44 }
45 }
46 }

Of course, the logging code is optional, but it is highly recommended that you use a logger.
Zend\Authentication\Adapter\Ldap will record just about every bit of information anyone could want
in $messages (more below), which is a nice feature in itself for something that has a history of being notoriously
difficult to debug.
The Zend\Config\Reader\Ini code is used above to load the adapter options. It is also optional. A regular array
would work equally well. The following is an example ldap-config.ini file that has options for two separate
servers. With multiple sets of server options the adapter will try each, in order, until the credentials are successfully
authenticated. The names of the servers (e.g., server1 and server2) are largely arbitrary. For details regarding the
options array, see the Server Options section below. Note that Zend\Config\Reader\Ini requires that any
values with equals characters (=) will need to be quoted (like the DNs shown below).
1 [production]
2

3 ldap.log_path = /tmp/ldap.log
4

5 ; Typical options for OpenLDAP

6 ldap.server1.host = s0.foo.net
7 ldap.server1.accountDomainName = foo.net
8 ldap.server1.accountDomainNameShort = FOO
9 ldap.server1.accountCanonicalForm = 3
10 ldap.server1.username = "CN=user1,DC=foo,DC=net"
11 ldap.server1.password = pass1
12 ldap.server1.baseDn = "OU=Sales,DC=foo,DC=net"
13 ldap.server1.bindRequiresDn = true
14

15 ; Typical options for Active Directory

16 ldap.server2.host = dc1.w.net
17 ldap.server2.useStartTls = true
18 ldap.server2.accountDomainName = w.net
19 ldap.server2.accountDomainNameShort = W
20 ldap.server2.accountCanonicalForm = 3
21 ldap.server2.baseDn = "CN=Users,DC=w,DC=net"

266 Chapter 50. LDAP Authentication

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

The above configuration will instruct Zend\Authentication\Adapter\Ldap to attempt to authenticate users

with the OpenLDAP server s0.foo.net first. If the authentication fails for any reason, the AD server dc1.w.net
will be tried.
With servers in different domains, this configuration illustrates multi-domain authentication. You can also have multi-
ple servers in the same domain to provide redundancy.
Note that in this case, even though OpenLDAP has no need for the short NetBIOS style domain name used by Win-
dows, we provide it here for name canonicalization purposes (described in the Username Canonicalization section
below).

50.3 The API

The Zend\Authentication\Adapter\Ldap constructor accepts three parameters.

The $options parameter is required and must be an array containing one or more sets of options. Note that it is an
array of arrays of Zend\Ldap\Ldap options. Even if you will be using only one LDAP server, the options must still
be within another array.
Below is print_r() output of an example options parameter containing two sets of server options for LDAP servers
s0.foo.net and dc1.w.net (the same options as the above INI representation):
1 Array
2 (
3 [server2] => Array
4 (
5 [host] => dc1.w.net
6 [useStartTls] => 1
7 [accountDomainName] => w.net
8 [accountDomainNameShort] => W
9 [accountCanonicalForm] => 3
10 [baseDn] => CN=Users,DC=w,DC=net
11 )
12

13 [server1] => Array

14 (
15 [host] => s0.foo.net
16 [accountDomainName] => foo.net
17 [accountDomainNameShort] => FOO
18 [accountCanonicalForm] => 3
19 [username] => CN=user1,DC=foo,DC=net
20 [password] => pass1
21 [baseDn] => OU=Sales,DC=foo,DC=net
22 [bindRequiresDn] => 1
23 )
24

25 )

The information provided in each set of options above is different mainly because AD does not require a username be
in DN form when binding (see the bindRequiresDn option in the Server Options section below), which means
we can omit a number of options associated with retrieving the DN for a username being authenticated.

Note: What is a Distinguished Name?

A DN or distinguished name is a string that represents the path to an object within the LDAP directory. Each
comma-separated component is an attribute and value representing a node. The components are evaluated in re-
verse. For example, the user account CN=Bob Carter,CN=Users,DC=w,DC=net is located directly within the

50.3. The API 267

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

CN=Users,DC=w,DC=net container. This structure is best explored with an LDAP browser like the ADSI Edit
MMC snap-in for Active Directory or phpLDAPadmin.

The names of servers (e.g. server1 and server2 shown above) are largely arbitrary, but for the sake of using
Zend\Config\Reader\Ini, the identifiers should be present (as opposed to being numeric indexes) and should
not contain any special characters used by the associated file formats (e.g. the .INI property separator, & for XML
entity references, etc).
With multiple sets of server options, the adapter can authenticate users in multiple domains and provide failover so
that if one server is not available, another will be queried.

Note: The Gory Details: What Happens in the Authenticate Method?

When the authenticate() method is called, the adapter iterates over each set of server options, sets them on
the internal Zend\Ldap\Ldap instance, and calls the Zend\Ldap\Ldap::bind() method with the username
and password being authenticated. The Zend\Ldap\Ldap class checks to see if the username is qualified with a
domain (e.g., has a domain component like [email protected] or FOO\alice). If a domain is present, but does
not match either of the servers domain names (foo.net or FOO), a special exception is thrown and caught by
Zend\Authentication\Adapter\Ldap that causes that server to be ignored and the next set of server op-
tions is selected. If a domain does match, or if the user did not supply a qualified username, Zend\Ldap\Ldap
proceeds to try to bind with the supplied credentials. if the bind is not successful, Zend\Ldap\Ldap throws a
Zend\Ldap\Exception\LdapException which is caught by Zend\Authentication\Adapter\Ldap
and the next set of server options is tried. If the bind is successful, the iteration stops, and the adapters
authenticate() method returns a successful result. If all server options have been tried without success, the
authentication fails, and authenticate() returns a failure result with error messages from the last iteration.

The username and password parameters of the Zend\Authentication\Adapter\Ldap constructor represent

the credentials being authenticated (i.e., the credentials supplied by the user through your HTML login form). Alter-
natively, they may also be set with the setUsername() and setPassword() methods.

50.4 Server Options

Each set of server options in the context of Zend\Authentication\Adapter\Ldap consists of the following options,
which are passed, largely unmodified, to Zend\Ldap\Ldap::setOptions():

268 Chapter 50. LDAP Authentication

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Table 50.1: Server Options

Name Description
host The hostname of LDAP server that these options represent. This option is required.
port The port on which the LDAP server is listening. If useSsl is TRUE, the default port value is
636. If useSsl is FALSE, the default port value is 389.
useStartTls Whether or not the LDAP client should use TLS (aka SSLv2) encrypted transport. A value of
TRUE is strongly favored in production environments to prevent passwords from be transmitted
in clear text. The default value is FALSE, as servers frequently require that a certificate be
installed separately after installation. The useSsl and useStartTls options are mutually
exclusive. The useStartTls option should be favored over useSsl but not all servers support this
newer mechanism.
useSsl Whether or not the LDAP client should use SSL encrypted transport. The useSsl and
useStartTls options are mutually exclusive, but useStartTls should be favored if the server and
LDAP client library support it. This value also changes the default port value (see port
description above).
username The DN of the account used to perform account DN lookups. LDAP servers that require the
username to be in DN form when performing the bind require this option. Meaning, if
bindRequiresDn is TRUE, this option is required. This account does not need to be a privileged
account; an account with read-only access to objects under the baseDn is all that is necessary
(and preferred based on the Principle of Least Privilege).
password The password of the account used to perform account DN lookups. If this option is not supplied,
the LDAP client will attempt an anonymous bind when performing account DN lookups.
bindRequiresDn Some LDAP servers require that the username used to bind be in DN form like CN=Alice
Baker,OU=Sales,DC=foo,DC=net (basically all servers except AD). If this option is TRUE, this
instructs Zend\Ldap\Ldap to automatically retrieve the DN corresponding to the username
being authenticated, if it is not already in DN form, and then re-bind with the proper DN. The
default value is FALSE. Currently only Microsoft Active Directory Server (ADS) is known not
to require usernames to be in DN form when binding, and therefore this option may be FALSE
with AD (and it should be, as retrieving the DN requires an extra round trip to the server).
Otherwise, this option must be set to TRUE (e.g. for OpenLDAP). This option also controls the
default accountFilterFormat used when searching for accounts. See the accountFilterFormat
option.
baseDn The DN under which all accounts being authenticated are located. This option is required. if
you are uncertain about the correct baseDn value, it should be sufficient to derive it from the
users DNS domain using DC= components. For example, if the users principal name is
[email protected], a baseDn of DC=foo,DC=net should work. A more precise location (e.g.,
OU=Sales,DC=foo,DC=net) will be more efficient, however.
accountCanon- A value of 2, 3 or 4 indicating the form to which account names should be canonicalized after
icalForm successful authentication. Values are as follows: 2 for traditional username style names (e.g.,
alice), 3 for backslash-style names (e.g., FOO\alice) or 4 for principal style usernames (e.g.,
[email protected]). The default value is 4 (e.g., [email protected]). For example, with a value of 3, the
identity returned by Zend\Authentication\Result::getIdentity() (and
Zend\Authentication\AuthenticationService::getIdentity(), if
Zend\Authentication\AuthenticationService was used) will always be FOO\alice, regardless of
what form Alice supplied, whether it be alice, [email protected], FOO\alice, FoO\aLicE,
foo.net\alice, etc. See the Account Name Canonicalization section in the Zend\Ldap\Ldap
documentation for details. Note that when using multiple sets of server options it is
recommended, but not required, that the same accountCanonicalForm be used with all server
options so that the resulting usernames are always canonicalized to the same form (e.g., if you
canonicalize to EXAMPLE\username with an AD server but to [email protected] with
an OpenLDAP server, that may be awkward for the applications high-level logic).
accountDo- The FQDN domain name for which the target LDAP server is an authority (e.g., example.com).
mainName This option is used to canonicalize names so that the username supplied by the user can be
converted as necessary for binding. It is also used to determine if the server is an authority for
the supplied username (e.g., if accountDomainName is foo.net and the user supplies
50.4. Server Options 269
[email protected], the server will not be queried, and a failure will result). This option is not
required, but if it is not supplied, usernames in principal name form (e.g., [email protected]) are
not supported. It is strongly recommended that you supply this option, as there are many
use-cases that require generating the principal name form.
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Note: If you enable useStartTls = TRUE or useSsl = TRUE you may find that the LDAP client generates an
error claiming that it cannot validate the servers certificate. Assuming the PHP LDAP extension is ultimately linked
to the OpenLDAP client libraries, to resolve this issue you can set TLS_REQCERT never in the OpenLDAP
client ldap.conf (and restart the web server) to indicate to the OpenLDAP client library that you trust the server.
Alternatively, if you are concerned that the server could be spoofed, you can export the LDAP servers root certificate
and put it on the web server so that the OpenLDAP client can validate the servers identity.

50.5 Collecting Debugging Messages

Zend\Authentication\Adapter\Ldap collects debugging information within its authenticate()

method. This information is stored in the Zend\Authentication\Result object as messages. The array re-
turned by Zend\Authentication\Result::getMessages() is described as follows

Table 50.2: Debugging Messages

Messages Description
Array Index
Index 0 A generic, user-friendly message that is suitable for displaying to users (e.g., Invalid
credentials). If the authentication is successful, this string is empty.
Index 1 A more detailed error message that is not suitable to be displayed to users but should be logged
for the benefit of server operators. If the authentication is successful, this string is empty.
Indexes 2 and All log messages in order starting at index 2.
higher
In practice, index 0 should be displayed to the user (e.g., using the FlashMessenger helper), index 1 should be logged
and, if debugging information is being collected, indexes 2 and higher could be logged as well (although the final
message always includes the string from index 1).

50.6 Common Options for Specific Servers

50.6.1 Options for Active Directory

For ADS, the following options are noteworthy:

270 Chapter 50. LDAP Authentication

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Table 50.3: Options for Active Directory

Name Additional Notes
host As with all servers, this option is required.
useStartTls For the sake of security, this should be TRUE if the server has the necessary certificate installed.
useSsl Possibly used as an alternative to useStartTls (see above).
baseDn As with all servers, this option is required. By default AD places all user accounts under the
Users container (e.g., CN=Users,DC=foo,DC=net), but the default is not common in larger
organizations. Ask your AD administrator what the best DN for accounts for your application
would be.
accountCanon- You almost certainly want this to be 3 for backslash style names (e.g., FOO\alice), which are
icalForm most familiar to Windows users. You should not use the unqualified form 2 (e.g., alice), as this
may grant access to your application to users with the same username in other trusted domains
(e.g., BAR\alice and FOO\alice will be treated as the same user). (See also note below.)
accountDo- This is required with AD unless accountCanonicalForm 2 is used, which, again, is discouraged.
mainName
accountDo- The NetBIOS name of the domain that users are in and for which the AD server is an authority.
main- This is required if the backslash style accountCanonicalForm is used.
NameShort
Note: Technically there should be no danger of accidental cross-domain authentication with the current
Zend\Authentication\Adapter\Ldap implementation, since server domains are explicitly checked, but this
may not be true of a future implementation that discovers the domain at runtime, or if an alternative adapter is used
(e.g., Kerberos). In general, account name ambiguity is known to be the source of security issues, so always try to use
qualified account names.

50.6.2 Options for OpenLDAP

For OpenLDAP or a generic LDAP server using a typical posixAccount style schema, the following options are note-
worthy:

50.6. Common Options for Specific Servers 271

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Table 50.4: Options for OpenLDAP

Name Additional Notes
host As with all servers, this option is required.
useStartTls For the sake of security, this should be TRUE if the server has the necessary certificate installed.
useSsl Possibly used as an alternative to useStartTls (see above).
username Required and must be a DN, as OpenLDAP requires that usernames be in DN form when
performing a bind. Try to use an unprivileged account.
password The password corresponding to the username above, but this may be omitted if the LDAP
server permits an anonymous binding to query user accounts.
bindRequiresDn Required and must be TRUE, as OpenLDAP requires that usernames be in DN form when
performing a bind.
baseDn As with all servers, this option is required and indicates the DN under which all accounts being
authenticated are located.
accountCanon- Optional, but the default value is 4 (principal style names like [email protected]), which may not
icalForm be ideal if your users are used to backslash style names (e.g., FOO\alice). For backslash style
names use value 3.
accountDo- Required unless youre using accountCanonicalForm 2, which is not recommended.
mainName
accountDo- If AD is not also being used, this value is not required. Otherwise, if accountCanonicalForm 3
main- is used, this option is required and should be a short name that corresponds adequately to the
NameShort accountDomainName (e.g., if your accountDomainName is foo.net, a good
accountDomainNameShort value might be FOO).

272 Chapter 50. LDAP Authentication

 CHAPTER 51

Authentication Validator

51.1 Introduction

Zend\Authentication\Validator\Authentication provides the ability to utilize a validator for an In-

putFilter in the instance of a Form or for single use where you simply want a true/false value and being able to
introspect the error.
The available configuration options include:
adapter: This is an instance of Zend\Authentication\Adapter.
identity: This is the identity or name of the identity in the passed in context.
credential: This is the credential or the name of the credential in the passed in context.
service: This is an instance of Zend\Authentication\AuthenticationService

51.2 Basic Usage

1 use Zend\Authentication\AuthenticationService;
2 use Zend\Authentication\Validator\Authentication as AuthenticationValidator;
3

4 $service = new AuthenticationService();

5 $adapter = new My\Authentication\Adapter();
6 $validator = new AuthenticationValidator(array(
7 'service' => $service,
8 'adapter' => $adapter,
9 ));
10

11 $validator->setCredential('myCredentialContext');
12 $validator->isValid('myIdentity', array(
13 'myCredentialContext' => 'myCredential',
14 ));

273
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

274 Chapter 51. Authentication Validator

 CHAPTER 52

Introduction to Zend\Barcode

52.1 Overview

Zend\Barcode\Barcode provides a generic way to generate barcodes. The Zend\Barcode component is

divided into two subcomponents: barcode objects and renderers. Objects allow you to create barcodes independently
of the renderer. Renderer allow you to draw barcodes based on the support required.

275
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

276 Chapter 52. Introduction to Zend\Barcode

 CHAPTER 53

Barcode creation using Zend\Barcode\Barcode class

53.1 Using Zend\Barcode\Barcode::factory

Zend\Barcode\Barcode uses a factory method to create an instance of a renderer that extends

Zend\Barcode\Renderer\AbstractRenderer. The factory method accepts five arguments.
The name of the barcode format (e.g., code39) or a Traversable object (required)
The name of the renderer (e.g., image) (required)
Options to pass to the barcode object (an array or a Traversable object) (optional)
Options to pass to the renderer object (an array or a Traversable object) (optional)
Boolean to indicate whether or not to automatically render errors. If an exception occurs, the provided barcode
object will be replaced with an Error representation (optional default TRUE)

Getting a Renderer with Zend\Barcode\Barcode::factory()

Zend\Barcode\Barcode::factory() instantiates barcode classes and renderers and ties them together. In
this first example, we will use the Code39 barcode type together with the Image renderer.
1 use Zend\Barcode\Barcode;
2

3 // Only the text to draw is required

4 $barcodeOptions = array('text' => 'ZEND-FRAMEWORK');
5

6 // No required options
7 $rendererOptions = array();
8 $renderer = Barcode::factory(
9 'code39', 'image', $barcodeOptions, $rendererOptions
10 );

Using Zend\Barcode\Barcode::factory() with Zend\Config\Config objects

You may pass a Zend\Config\Config object to the factory in order to create the necessary objects. The following
example is functionally equivalent to the previous.
1 use Zend\Config\Config;
2 use Zend\Barcode\Barcode;
3

277
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

4 // Using only one Zend\Config\Config object

5 $config = new Config(array(
6 'barcode' => 'code39',
7 'barcodeParams' => array('text' => 'ZEND-FRAMEWORK'),
8 'renderer' => 'image',
9 'rendererParams' => array('imageType' => 'gif'),
10 ));
11

12 $renderer = Barcode::factory($config);

53.2 Drawing a barcode

When you draw the barcode, you retrieve the resource in which the barcode is drawn. To draw a barcode, you can call
the draw() of the renderer, or simply use the proxy method provided by Zend\Barcode\Barcode.

Drawing a barcode with the renderer object

1 use Zend\Barcode\Barcode;
2

3 // Only the text to draw is required

4 $barcodeOptions = array('text' => 'ZEND-FRAMEWORK');
5

6 // No required options
7 $rendererOptions = array();
8

9 // Draw the barcode in a new image,

10 $imageResource = Barcode::factory(
11 'code39', 'image', $barcodeOptions, $rendererOptions
12 )->draw();

Drawing a barcode with Zend\Barcode\Barcode::draw()

1 use Zend\Barcode\Barcode;
2

3 // Only the text to draw is required

4 $barcodeOptions = array('text' => 'ZEND-FRAMEWORK');
5

6 // No required options
7 $rendererOptions = array();
8

9 // Draw the barcode in a new image,

10 $imageResource = Barcode::draw(
11 'code39', 'image', $barcodeOptions, $rendererOptions
12 );

53.3 Rendering a barcode

When you render a barcode, you draw the barcode, you send the headers and you send the resource (e.g. to a browser).
To render a barcode, you can call the render() method of the renderer or simply use the proxy method provided by
Zend\Barcode\Barcode.

278 Chapter 53. Barcode creation using Zend\Barcode\Barcode class

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Rendering a barcode with the renderer object

1 use Zend\Barcode\Barcode;
2

3 // Only the text to draw is required

4 $barcodeOptions = array('text' => 'ZEND-FRAMEWORK');
5

6 // No required options
7 $rendererOptions = array();
8

9 // Draw the barcode in a new image,

10 // send the headers and the image
11 Barcode::factory(
12 'code39', 'image', $barcodeOptions, $rendererOptions
13 )->render();

This will generate this barcode:

Rendering a barcode with Zend\Barcode\Barcode::render()

1 use Zend\Barcode\Barcode;
2

3 // Only the text to draw is required

4 $barcodeOptions = array('text' => 'ZEND-FRAMEWORK');
5

6 // No required options
7 $rendererOptions = array();
8

9 // Draw the barcode in a new image,

10 // send the headers and the image
11 Barcode::render(
12 'code39', 'image', $barcodeOptions, $rendererOptions
13 );

This will generate the same barcode as the previous example.

53.3. Rendering a barcode 279

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

280 Chapter 53. Barcode creation using Zend\Barcode\Barcode class

 CHAPTER 54

Zend\Barcode Objects

Barcode objects allow you to generate barcodes independently of the rendering support. After generation, you can
retrieve the barcode as an array of drawing instructions that you can provide to a renderer.
Objects have a large number of options. Most of them are common to all objects. These options can be set in three
ways:
As an array or a Traversable object passed to the constructor.
As an array passed to the setOptions() method.
Via individual setters for each configuration type.

Different ways to parameterize a barcode object

1 use Zend\Barcode\Object;
2

3 $options = array('text' => 'ZEND-FRAMEWORK', 'barHeight' => 40);

4

5 // Case 1: constructor
6 $barcode = new Object\Code39($options);
7

8 // Case 2: setOptions()
9 $barcode = new Object\Code39();
10 $barcode->setOptions($options);
11

12 // Case 3: individual setters

13 $barcode = new Object\Code39();
14 $barcode->setText('ZEND-FRAMEWORK')
15 ->setBarHeight(40);

54.1 Common Options

In the following list, the values have no units; we will use the term unit. For example, the default value of the
thin bar is 1 unit. The real units depend on the rendering support (see the renderers documentation for more
information). Setters are each named by uppercasing the initial letter of the option and prefixing the name with
set (e.g. barHeight becomes setBarHeight). All options have a corresponding getter prefixed with get (e.g.
getBarHeight). Available options are:

281
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Table 54.1: Common Options

Option Data Type Default Description
Value
barcode- String Zend\Barcode\Object
Namespace of the barcode; for example, if you need to extend
Namespace the embedding objects
barHeight Integer 50 Height of the bars
barThick- Integer 3 Width of the thick bar
Width
barThin- Integer 1 Width of the thin bar
Width
factor Integer, Float, 1 Factor by which to multiply bar widths and font sizes
String or Boolean (barHeight, barThinWidth, barThickWidth and fontSize)
foreColor Integer 0x000000 Color of the bar and the text. Could be provided as an integer
(black) or as a HTML value (e.g. #333333)
back- Integer or String 0xFFFFFF Color of the background. Could be provided as an integer or
ground- (white) as a HTML value (e.g. #333333)
Color
orientation Integer, Float, 0 Orientation of the barcode
String or Boolean
font String or Integer NULL Font path to a TTF font or a number between 1 and 5 if using
image generation with GD (internal fonts)
fontSize Float 10 Size of the font (not applicable with numeric fonts)
withBorder Boolean FALSE Draw a border around the barcode and the quiet zones
withQuiet- Boolean TRUE Leave a quiet zone before and after the barcode
Zones
drawText Boolean TRUE Set if the text is displayed below the barcode
stretchText Boolean FALSE Specify if the text is stretched all along the barcode
withCheck- Boolean FALSE Indicate whether or not the checksum is automatically added
sum to the barcode
withCheck- Boolean FALSE Indicate whether or not the checksum is displayed in the
sumInText textual representation
text String NULL The text to represent as a barcode

54.1.1 Particular case of static setBarcodeFont()

You can set a common font for all your objects by using the static method
Zend\Barcode\Barcode::setBarcodeFont(). This value can be always be overridden for individ-
ual objects by using the setFont() method.
1 use Zend\Barcode\Barcode;
2

3 // In your bootstrap:
4 Barcode::setBarcodeFont('my_font.ttf');
5

6 // Later in your code:

7 Barcode::render(
8 'code39',
9 'pdf',
10 array('text' => 'ZEND-FRAMEWORK')
11 ); // will use 'my_font.ttf'
12

13 // or:
14 Barcode::render(

282 Chapter 54. Zend\Barcode Objects

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

15 'code39',
16 'image',
17 array(
18 'text' => 'ZEND-FRAMEWORK',
19 'font' => 3
20 )
21 ); // will use the 3rd GD internal font

54.2 Common Additional Getters

Table 54.2: Common Getters

Getter Data Description
Type
getType() String Return the name of the barcode class without the namespace (e.g.
Zend\Barcode\Object\Code39 returns simply code39)
getRawText() String Return the original text provided to the object
getTextToDisplay() String Return the text to display, including, if activated, the checksum value
getQuietZone() Integer Return the size of the space needed before and after the barcode without any
drawing
getInstructions() Array Return drawing instructions as an array.
getH- Integer Return the height of the barcode calculated after possible rotation
eight($recalculate =
false)
getWidth($recalculate Integer Return the width of the barcode calculated after possible rotation
= false)
getOffset- Integer Return the position of the top of the barcode calculated after possible rotation
Top($recalculate =
false)
getOff- Integer Return the position of the left of the barcode calculated after possible rotation
setLeft($recalculate =
false)
orphan

54.3 Description of shipped barcodes

You will find below detailed information about all barcode types shipped by default with Zend Framework.

54.3.1 Zend\Barcode\Object\Error

This barcode is a special case. It is internally used to automatically render an exception caught by the Zend\Barcode
component.

54.2. Common Additional Getters 283

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

54.3.2 Zend\Barcode\Object\Code128

Name: Code 128

Allowed characters: the complete ASCII-character set
Checksum: optional (modulo 103)
Length: variable
There are no particular options for this barcode.

54.3.3 Zend\Barcode\Object\Codabar

Name: Codabar (or Code 2 of 7)

Allowed characters:0123456789-$:/.+ with ABCD as start and stop characters
Checksum: none
Length: variable
There are no particular options for this barcode.

54.3.4 Zend\Barcode\Object\Code25

Name: Code 25 (or Code 2 of 5 or Code 25 Industrial)

Allowed characters:0123456789
Checksum: optional (modulo 10)
Length: variable
There are no particular options for this barcode.

284 Chapter 54. Zend\Barcode Objects

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

54.3.5 Zend\Barcode\Object\Code25interleaved

This barcode extends Zend\Barcode\Object\Code25 (Code 2 of 5), and has the same particulars and options,
and adds the following:
Name: Code 2 of 5 Interleaved
Allowed characters:0123456789
Checksum: optional (modulo 10)
Length: variable (always even number of characters)
Available options include:

Table 54.3: Zend\Barcode\Object\Code25interleaved Options

Option Data Type Default Value Description
withBearerBars Boolean FALSE Draw a thick bar at the top and the bottom of the barcode.
Note: If the number of characters is not even, Zend\Barcode\Object\Code25interleaved will automati-
cally prepend the missing zero to the barcode text.

54.3.6 Zend\Barcode\Object\Ean2

This barcode extends Zend\Barcode\Object\Ean5 (EAN 5), and has the same particulars and options, and adds
the following:
Name: EAN-2
Allowed characters:0123456789
Checksum: only use internally but not displayed
Length: 2 characters
There are no particular options for this barcode.

Note: If the number of characters is lower than 2, Zend\Barcode\Object\Ean2 will automatically prepend the
missing zero to the barcode text.

54.3. Description of shipped barcodes 285

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

54.3.7 Zend\Barcode\Object\Ean5

This barcode extends Zend\Barcode\Object\Ean13 (EAN 13), and has the same particulars and options, and
adds the following:
Name: EAN-5
Allowed characters:0123456789
Checksum: only use internally but not displayed
Length: 5 characters
There are no particular options for this barcode.

Note: If the number of characters is lower than 5, Zend\Barcode\Object\Ean5 will automatically prepend the
missing zero to the barcode text.

54.3.8 Zend\Barcode\Object\Ean8

This barcode extends Zend\Barcode\Object\Ean13 (EAN 13), and has the same particulars and options, and
adds the following:
Name: EAN-8
Allowed characters:0123456789
Checksum: mandatory (modulo 10)
Length: 8 characters (including checksum)
There are no particular options for this barcode.

Note: If the number of characters is lower than 8, Zend\Barcode\Object\Ean8 will automatically prepend the
missing zero to the barcode text.

54.3.9 Zend\Barcode\Object\Ean13

286 Chapter 54. Zend\Barcode Objects

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Name: EAN-13
Allowed characters:0123456789
Checksum: mandatory (modulo 10)
Length: 13 characters (including checksum)
There are no particular options for this barcode.

Note: If the number of characters is lower than 13, Zend\Barcode\Object\Ean13 will automatically prepend
the missing zero to the barcode text.
The option withQuietZones has no effect with this barcode.

54.3.10 Zend\Barcode\Object\Code39

Name: Code 39
Allowed characters:0123456789ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ -.$/+%
Checksum: optional (modulo 43)
Length: variable

Note: Zend\Barcode\Object\Code39 will automatically add the start and stop characters (*) for you.

There are no particular options for this barcode.

54.3.11 Zend\Barcode\Object\Identcode

This barcode extends Zend\Barcode\Object\Code25interleaved (Code 2 of 5 Interleaved), and inherits

some of its capabilities; it also has a few particulars of its own.
Name: Identcode (Deutsche Post Identcode)
Allowed characters:0123456789
Checksum: mandatory (modulo 10 different from Code25)
Length: 12 characters (including checksum)
There are no particular options for this barcode.

Note: If the number of characters is lower than 12, Zend\Barcode\Object\Identcode will automatically
prepend missing zeros to the barcode text.

54.3. Description of shipped barcodes 287

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

54.3.12 Zend\Barcode\Object\Itf14

This barcode extends Zend\Barcode\Object\Code25interleaved (Code 2 of 5 Interleaved), and inherits

some of its capabilities; it also has a few particulars of its own.
Name: ITF-14
Allowed characters:0123456789
Checksum: mandatory (modulo 10)
Length: 14 characters (including checksum)
There are no particular options for this barcode.

Note: If the number of characters is lower than 14, Zend\Barcode\Object\Itf14 will automatically prepend
missing zeros to the barcode text.

54.3.13 Zend\Barcode\Object\Leitcode

This barcode extends Zend\Barcode\Object\Identcode (Deutsche Post Identcode), and inherits some of its
capabilities; it also has a few particulars of its own.
Name: Leitcode (Deutsche Post Leitcode)
Allowed characters:0123456789
Checksum: mandatory (modulo 10 different from Code25)
Length: 14 characters (including checksum)
There are no particular options for this barcode.

Note: If the number of characters is lower than 14, Zend\Barcode\Object\Leitcode will automatically
prepend missing zeros to the barcode text.

54.3.14 Zend\Barcode\Object\Planet

Name: Planet (PostaL Alpha Numeric Encoding Technique)

288 Chapter 54. Zend\Barcode Objects

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Allowed characters:0123456789
Checksum: mandatory (modulo 10)
Length: 12 or 14 characters (including checksum)
There are no particular options for this barcode.

54.3.15 Zend\Barcode\Object\Postnet

Name: Postnet (POSTal Numeric Encoding Technique)

Allowed characters:0123456789
Checksum: mandatory (modulo 10)
Length: 6, 7, 10 or 12 characters (including checksum)
There are no particular options for this barcode.

54.3.16 Zend\Barcode\Object\Royalmail

Name: Royal Mail or RM4SCC (Royal Mail 4-State Customer Code)

Allowed characters:0123456789ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
Checksum: mandatory
Length: variable
There are no particular options for this barcode.

54.3.17 Zend\Barcode\Object\Upca

This barcode extends Zend\Barcode\Object\Ean13 (EAN-13), and inherits some of its capabilities; it also has
a few particulars of its own.
Name: UPC-A (Universal Product Code)
Allowed characters:0123456789
Checksum: mandatory (modulo 10)
Length: 12 characters (including checksum)

54.3. Description of shipped barcodes 289

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

There are no particular options for this barcode.

Note: If the number of characters is lower than 12, Zend\Barcode\Object\Upca will automatically prepend
missing zeros to the barcode text.
The option withQuietZones has no effect with this barcode.

54.3.18 Zend\Barcode\Object\Upce

This barcode extends Zend\Barcode\Object\Upca (UPC-A), and inherits some of its capabilities; it also has a
few particulars of its own. The first character of the text to encode is the system (0 or 1).
Name: UPC-E (Universal Product Code)
Allowed characters:0123456789
Checksum: mandatory (modulo 10)
Length: 8 characters (including checksum)
There are no particular options for this barcode.

Note: If the number of characters is lower than 8, Zend\Barcode\Object\Upce will automatically prepend
missing zeros to the barcode text.

Note: If the first character of the text to encode is not 0 or 1, Zend\Barcode\Object\Upce will automatically
replace it by 0.
The option withQuietZones has no effect with this barcode.

290 Chapter 54. Zend\Barcode Objects

 CHAPTER 55

Zend\Barcode Renderers

Renderers have some common options. These options can be set in three ways:
As an array or a Traversable object passed to the constructor.
As an array passed to the setOptions() method.
As discrete values passed to individual setters.

Different ways to parameterize a renderer object

1 use Zend\Barcode\Renderer;
2

3 $options = array('topOffset' => 10);

4

5 // Case 1
6 $renderer = new Renderer\Pdf($options);
7

8 // Case 2
9 $renderer = new Renderer\Pdf();
10 $renderer->setOptions($options);
11

12 // Case 3
13 $renderer = new Renderer\Pdf();
14 $renderer->setTopOffset(10);

55.1 Common Options

In the following list, the values have no unit; we will use the term unit. For example, the default value of the thin
bar is 1 unit. The real units depend on the rendering support. The individual setters are obtained by uppercasing the
initial letter of the option and prefixing the name with set (e.g. barHeight => setBarHeight). All options have a
correspondent getter prefixed with get (e.g. getBarHeight). Available options are:

291
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Table 55.1: Common Options

Option Data Default Description
Type Value
render- String Zend\Barcode\Renderer
Namespace of the renderer; for example, if you need to extend the
erNames- renderers
pace
horizon- String left Can be left, center or right. Can be useful with PDF or if the
talPosi- setWidth() method is used with an image renderer.
tion
vertical- String top Can be top, middle or bottom. Can be useful with PDF or if the
Position setHeight() method is used with an image renderer.
leftOffset Integer 0 Top position of the barcode inside the renderer. If used, this value will
override the horizontalPosition option.
topOffset Integer 0 Top position of the barcode inside the renderer. If used, this value will
override the verticalPosition option.
automati- Boolean FALSE Whether or not to automatically render errors. If an exception occurs, the
cRender- provided barcode object will be replaced with an Error representation.
Error Note that some errors (or exceptions) can not be rendered.
module- Float 1 Size of a rendering module in the support.
Size
barcode Zend\Barcode\Object
NULL The barcode object to render.
An additional getter exists: getType(). It returns the name of the renderer class without the namespace (e.g.
Zend\Barcode\Renderer\Image returns image).

55.2 Zend\Barcode\Renderer\Image

The Image renderer will draw the instruction list of the barcode object in an image resource. The component requires
the GD extension. The default width of a module is 1 pixel.
Available options are:

Table 55.2: Zend\Barcode\Renderer\Image Options

Option Data Default Description
Type Value
height Integer 0 Allow you to specify the height of the result image. If 0, the height will be
calculated by the barcode object.
width Integer 0 Allow you to specify the width of the result image. If 0, the width will be
calculated by the barcode object.
im- String png Specify the image format. Can be png, jpeg, jpg or gif.
ageType

55.3 Zend\Barcode\Renderer\Pdf

The PDF renderer will draw the instruction list of the barcode object in a PDF document. The default width of a
module is 0.5 point.
There are no particular options for this renderer.

292 Chapter 55. Zend\Barcode Renderers

 CHAPTER 56

Zend\Cache\Storage\Adapter

56.1 Overview

Storage adapters are wrappers for real storage resources such as memory and the filesystem, using the
well known adapter pattern.
They come with tons of methods to read, write and modify stored items and to get information about
stored items and the storage.
All adapters implement the interface Zend\Cache\Storage\StorageInterface and most ex-
tend Zend\Cache\Storage\Adapter\AbstractAdapter, which comes with basic logic.
Configuration is handled by either Zend\Cache\Storage\Adapter\AdapterOptions, or an
adapter-specific options class if it exists. You may pass the options instance to the class at instantiation
or via the setOptions() method, or alternately pass an associative array of options in either place
(internally, these are then passed to an options class instance). Alternately, you can pass either the options
instance or associative array to the Zend\Cache\StorageFactory::factory method.

Note: Many methods throw exceptions

Because many caching operations throw an exception on error, you need to catch them manually or you can use the
plug-in Zend\Cache\Storage\Plugin\ExceptionHandler with throw_exceptions set to false to
automatically catch them. You can also define an exception_callback to log exceptions.

56.2 Quick Start

Caching adapters can either be created from the provided Zend\Cache\StorageFactory factory,
or by simply instantiating one of the Zend\Cache\Storage\Adapter\* classes.
To make life easier, the Zend\Cache\StorageFactory comes with a factory method to create
an adapter and create/add all requested plugins at once.
1 use Zend\Cache\StorageFactory;
2

3 // Via factory:
4 $cache = StorageFactory::factory(array(
5 'adapter' => array(
6 'name' => 'apc',
7 'options' => array('ttl' => 3600),
8 ),

293
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

9 'plugins' => array(

10 'exception_handler' => array('throw_exceptions' => false),
11 ),
12 ));
13

14 // Alternately:
15 $cache = StorageFactory::adapterFactory('apc', array('ttl' => 3600));
16 $plugin = StorageFactory::pluginFactory('exception_handler', array(
17 'throw_exceptions' => false,
18 ));
19 $cache->addPlugin($plugin);
20

21 // Or manually:
22 $cache = new Zend\Cache\Storage\Adapter\Apc();
23 $cache->getOptions()->setTtl(3600);
24

25 $plugin = new Zend\Cache\Storage\Plugin\ExceptionHandler();

26 $plugin->getOptions()->setThrowExceptions(false);
27 $cache->addPlugin($plugin);

56.3 Basic Configuration Options

Basic configuration is handled by either Zend\Cache\Storage\Adapter\AdapterOptions, or

an adapter-specific options class if it exists. You may pass the options instance to the class at instantiation
or via the setOptions() method, or alternately pass an associative array of options in either place
(internally, these are then passed to an options class instance). Alternately, you can pass either the options
instance or associative array to the Zend\Cache\StorageFactory::factory method.
The following configuration options are defined by Zend\Cache\Storage\Adapter\AdapterOptions
and are available for every supported adapter. Adapter-specific configuration options are described on
adapter level below.
Option Data Type Default Description
Value
ttl integer 0 Time to live
namespace string zfcache The namespace in which cache items will
live
key_pattern null|string null Pattern against which to validate cache keys
readable boolean true Enable/Disable reading data from cache
writable boolean true Enable/Disable writing data to cache

56.4 The StorageInterface

The Zend\Cache\Storage\StorageInterface is the basic interface implemented by all storage adapters.

getItem(string $key, boolean & $success = null, mixed & $casToken = null)
Load an item with the given $key.
If item exists set parameter $success to true, set parameter $casToken and returns mixed value of item.
If item cant load set parameter $success to false and returns null.
Return type mixed

294 Chapter 56. Zend\Cache\Storage\Adapter

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

getItems(array $keys)
Load all items given by $keys returning key-value pairs.
Return type array
hasItem(string $key)
Test if an item exists.
Return type boolean
hasItems(array $keys)
Test multiple items.
Return type string[]
getMetadata(string $key)
Get metadata of an item.
Return type array|boolean
getMetadatas(array $keys)
Get multiple metadata.
Return type array
setItem(string $key, mixed $value)
Store an item.
Return type boolean
setItems(array $keyValuePairs)
Store multiple items.
Return type boolean
addItem(string $key, mixed $value)
Add an item.
Return type boolean
addItems(array $keyValuePairs)
Add multiple items.
Return type boolean
replaceItem(string $key, mixed $value)
Replace an item.
Return type boolean
replaceItems(array $keyValuePairs)
Replace multiple items.
Return type boolean
checkAndSetItem(mixed $token, string $key, mixed $value)
Set item only if token matches. It uses the token received from getItem() to check if the item has changed
before overwriting it.
Return type boolean
touchItem(string $key)
Reset lifetime of an item.
Return type boolean

56.4. The StorageInterface 295

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

touchItems(array $keys)
Reset lifetime of multiple items.
Return type boolean
removeItem(string $key)
Remove an item.
Return type boolean
removeItems(array $keys)
Remove multiple items.
Return type boolean
incrementItem(string $key, int $value)
Increment an item.
Return type integer|boolean
incrementItems(array $keyValuePairs)
Increment multiple items.
Return type boolean
decrementItem(string $key, int $value)
Decrement an item.
Return type integer|boolean
decrementItems(array $keyValuePairs)
Decrement multiple items.
Return type boolean
getCapabilities()
Capabilities of this storage.
Return type Zend\Cache\Storage\Capabilities

56.5 The AvailableSpaceCapableInterface

The Zend\Cache\Storage\AvailableSpaceCapableInterface implements a method to make it possi-

ble getting the current available space of the storage.
getAvailableSpace()
Get available space in bytes.
Return type integer|float

56.6 The TotalSpaceCapableInterface

The Zend\Cache\Storage\TotalSpaceCapableInterface implements a method to make it possible get-

ting the total space of the storage.
getTotalSpace()
Get total space in bytes.
Return type integer|float

296 Chapter 56. Zend\Cache\Storage\Adapter

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

56.7 The ClearByNamespaceInterface

The Zend\Cache\Storage\ClearByNamespaceInterface implements a method to clear all items of a

given namespace.
clearByNamespace(string $namespace)
Remove items of given namespace.
Return type boolean

56.8 The ClearByPrefixInterface

The Zend\Cache\Storage\ClearByPrefixInterface implements a method to clear all items of a given

prefix (within the current configured namespace).
clearByPrefix(string $prefix)
Remove items matching given prefix.
Return type boolean

56.9 The ClearExpiredInterface

The Zend\Cache\Storage\ClearExpiredInterface implements a method to clear all expired items

(within the current configured namespace).
clearExpired()
Remove expired items.
Return type boolean

56.10 The FlushableInterface

The Zend\Cache\Storage\FlushableInterface implements a method to flush the complete storage.

flush()
Flush the whole storage.
Return type boolean

56.11 The IterableInterface

The Zend\Cache\Storage\IterableInterface implements a method to get an iterator to iterate over items

of the storage. It extends IteratorAggregate so its possible to directly iterate over the storage using foreach.
getIterator()
Get an Iterator.
Return type Zend\Cache\Storage\IteratorInterface

56.7. The ClearByNamespaceInterface 297

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

56.12 The OptimizableInterface

The Zend\Cache\Storage\OptimizableInterface implements a method to run optimization processes on

the storage.
optimize()
Optimize the storage.
Return type boolean

56.13 The TaggableInterface

The Zend\Cache\Storage\TaggableInterface implements methods to mark items with one or more tags
and to clean items matching tags.
setTags(string $key, string[] $tags)
Set tags to an item by given key. (An empty array will remove all tags)
Return type boolean
getTags(string $key)
Get tags of an item by given key.
Return type string[]|false
clearByTags(string[] $tags, boolean $disjunction = false)
Remove items matching given tags.
If $disjunction is true only one of the given tags must match else all given tags must match.
Return type boolean

56.14 The Apc Adapter

The Zend\Cache\Storage\Adapter\Apc adapter stores cache items in shared memory through

the required PHP extension APC (Alternative PHP Cache).
This adapter implements the following interfaces:
Zend\Cache\Storage\StorageInterface
Zend\Cache\Storage\AvailableSpaceCapableInterface
Zend\Cache\Storage\ClearByNamespaceInterface
Zend\Cache\Storage\ClearByPrefixInterface
Zend\Cache\Storage\FlushableInterface
Zend\Cache\Storage\IterableInterface
Zend\Cache\Storage\TotalSpaceCapableInterface

298 Chapter 56. Zend\Cache\Storage\Adapter

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Table 56.1: Capabilities

Capability Value
supportedDatatypes null, boolean, integer, double, string, array (serialized), object
(serialized)
supportedMetadata internal_key, atime, ctime, mtime, rtime, size, hits, ttl
minTtl 1
maxTtl 0
staticTtl true
ttlPrecision 1
useRequestTime <ini value of apc.use_request_time>
expiredRead false
maxKeyLength 5182
namespaceIsPrefix true
namespaceSepara- <Option value of namespace_separator>
tor

Table 56.2: Adapter specific options

Name Data Type Default Value Description
namespace_separator string : A separator for the namespace and prefix

56.15 The Dba Adapter

The Zend\Cache\Storage\Adapter\Dba adapter stores cache items into dbm like databases us-
ing the required PHP extension dba.
This adapter implements the following interfaces:
Zend\Cache\Storage\StorageInterface
Zend\Cache\Storage\AvailableSpaceCapableInterface
Zend\Cache\Storage\ClearByNamespaceInterface
Zend\Cache\Storage\ClearByPrefixInterface
Zend\Cache\Storage\FlushableInterface
Zend\Cache\Storage\IterableInterface
Zend\Cache\Storage\OptimizableInterface
Zend\Cache\Storage\TotalSpaceCapableInterface

56.15. The Dba Adapter 299

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Table 56.3: Capabilities

Capability Value
supported- string, null => string, boolean => string, integer => string, double =>
Datatypes string
supportedMeta- <none>
data
minTtl 0
maxKeyLength 0
namespaceIsPre- true
fix
namespaceSepara- <Option value of namespace_separator>
tor

Table 56.4: Adapter specific options

Name Data Default Description
Type Value
names- string : A separator for the namespace and prefix
pace_separator
pathname string Pathname to the database file
mode string c The mode to open the database Please read dba_open for more
information
handler string flatfile The name of the handler which shall be used for accessing the
database.
Note: This adapter doesnt support automatically expire items
Because of this adapter doesnt support automatically expire items its very important to clean outdated items by self.

56.16 The Filesystem Adapter

The Zend\Cache\Storage\Adapter\Filesystem adapter stores cache items into the filesys-

tem.
This adapter implements the following interfaces:
Zend\Cache\Storage\StorageInterface
Zend\Cache\Storage\AvailableSpaceCapableInterface
Zend\Cache\Storage\ClearByNamespaceInterface
Zend\Cache\Storage\ClearByPrefixInterface
Zend\Cache\Storage\ClearExpiredInterface
Zend\Cache\Storage\FlushableInterface
Zend\Cache\Storage\IterableInterface
Zend\Cache\Storage\OptimizableInterface
Zend\Cache\Storage\TaggableInterface
Zend\Cache\Storage\TotalSpaceCapableInterface

300 Chapter 56. Zend\Cache\Storage\Adapter

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Table 56.5: Capabilities

Capability Value
supported- string, null => string, boolean => string, integer => string, double =>
Datatypes string
supportedMeta- mtime, filespec, atime, ctime
data
minTtl 1
maxTtl 0
staticTtl false
ttlPrecision 1
useRequestTime false
expiredRead true
maxKeyLength 251
namespaceIsPre- true
fix
namespaceSepara- <Option value of namespace_separator>
tor

Table 56.6: Adapter specific options

Name Data Type Default Value Description
names- string : A separator for the namespace and prefix
pace_separator
cache_dir string Directory to store cache files
clear_stat_cache boolean true Call clearstatcache() enabled?
dir_level integer 1 Defines how much sub-directories should be
created
dir_permission integer 0700 Set explicit permission on creating new
false directories
file_locking boolean true Lock files on writing
file_permission integer 0600 Set explicit permission on creating new files
false
key_pattern string /^[a-z0-9_\+\-]*$/DiValidate key against pattern
no_atime boolean true Dont get fileatime as atime on metadata
no_ctime boolean true Dont get filectime as ctime on metadata
umask integer false Use umask to set file and directory
false permissions

56.17 The Memcached Adapter

The Zend\Cache\Storage\Adapter\Memcached adapter stores cache items over the mem-

cached protocol. Its using the required PHP extension memcached which is based on Libmemcached.
This adapter implements the following interfaces:
Zend\Cache\Storage\StorageInterface
Zend\Cache\Storage\AvailableSpaceCapableInterface
Zend\Cache\Storage\FlushableInterface
Zend\Cache\Storage\TotalSpaceCapableInterface

56.17. The Memcached Adapter 301

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Table 56.7: Capabilities

Capability Value
supportedDatatypes null, boolean, integer, double, string, array (serialized), object
(serialized)
supportedMetadata <none>
minTtl 1
maxTtl 0
staticTtl true
ttlPrecision 1
useRequestTime false
expiredRead false
maxKeyLength 255
namespaceIsPrefix true
namespaceSepara- <none>
tor

Table 56.8: Adapter specific options

Name Data De- Description
Type fault
Value
servers array [] List of servers in [] = array(string host, integer port)
lib_options
array [] Associative array of Libmemcached options were the array key is the option name
(without the prefix OPT_) or the constant value. The array value is the option value
Please read this<http://php.net/manual/memcached.setoption.php> for more
information

56.18 The Redis Adapter

The Zend\Cache\Storage\Adapter\Redis adapter stores cache items over the redis protocol.
Its using the required PHP extension redis.
This adapter implements the following interfaces:
Zend\Cache\Storage\FlushableInterface
Zend\Cache\Storage\TotalSpaceCapableInterface

Table 56.9: Capabilities

Capability Value
supportedDatatypes string, array (serialized), object (serialized)
supportedMetadata <none>
minTtl 1
maxTtl 0
staticTtl true
ttlPrecision 1
useRequestTime false
expiredRead false
maxKeyLength 255
namespaceIsPrefix true
namespaceSeparator <none>

302 Chapter 56. Zend\Cache\Storage\Adapter

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Table 56.10: Adapter specific options

Name Data Type Default Value Description
database integer 0 Set database identifier
lib_option array [] Associative array of redis
options were the array key
is the option name
namespace_separator string : A separator for the names-
pace and prefix
password string Set password
persistent_id string Set persistent id (name of
the connection, leave blank
to not use a persistent con-
nection)
resource_manager string Set the redis resource man-
ager to use
server
Server can be described as follows:

URI:
/path/to/sock.sock
Assoc: ar-
ray(host =>
<host>[, port
=> <port>[,
timeout =>
<timeout>]])
List: ar-
ray(<host>[,
<port>, [,
<timeout>]])

56.19 The Memory Adapter

The Zend\Cache\Storage\Adapter\Memory adapter stores cache items into the PHP process
using an array.
This adapter implements the following interfaces:
Zend\Cache\Storage\StorageInterface
Zend\Cache\Storage\AvailableSpaceCapableInterface
Zend\Cache\Storage\ClearByPrefixInterface
Zend\Cache\Storage\ClearExpiredInterface
Zend\Cache\Storage\FlushableInterface
Zend\Cache\Storage\IterableInterface
Zend\Cache\Storage\TaggableInterface
Zend\Cache\Storage\TotalSpaceCapableInterface

56.19. The Memory Adapter 303

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Table 56.11: Capabilities

Capability Value
supportedDatatypes string, null, boolean, integer, double, array, object, resource
supportedMetadata mtime
minTtl 1
maxTtl <Value of PHP_INT_MAX>
staticTtl false
ttlPrecision 0.05
useRequestTime false
expiredRead true
maxKeyLength 0
namespaceIsPrefix false

Table 56.12: Adapter specific options

Name Data Type Default Value Description
memory_limit string integer <50% of ini value Limit of how much memory
memory_limit> can PHP allocate to allow
store items into this adapter
If the used mem-
ory of PHP exceeds
this limit an OutOf-
SpaceException will
be thrown.
A number less or
equal 0 will disable
the memory limit
When a number is
used, the value is
measured in bytes
(Shorthand notation
may also be used)

Note: All stored items will be lost after terminating the script.

56.20 The MongoDB Adapter

The Zend\Cache\Storage\Adapter\MongoDB adapter stores cache items into MongoDB, using

either the PHP extension mongo OR a MongoDB polyfill library, such as Mongofill.
This adapter implements the following interfaces:
Zend\Cache\Storage\FlushableInterface

304 Chapter 56. Zend\Cache\Storage\Adapter

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Table 56.13: Capabilities

Capability Value
supportedDatatypes null, boolean, integer, double, string, array
supportedMetadata _id
minTtl 0
maxTtl 0
staticTtl true
ttlPrecision 1
useRequestTime false
expiredRead false
maxKeyLength 255
namespaceIsPrefix true
namespaceSeparator <Option value of namespace_separator>

56.20. The MongoDB Adapter 305

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Table 56.14: Adapter specific options

Name Data Type Default Value Description
lib_option array
Associative array of options where the

server: The mongodb server

(see the
Mongo-
Client
docs); de-
fault mon-
godb://localhost:27017
database: Name of database
default
zend
collection: Name of collectio
default
cache
connectionOptions: Associa
(see the
Mongo-
Client
docs);
default
[fsync
=>
false,
journal
=>
true]
driverOptions: Associative a
(see the
Mongo-
Client
docs);
default []

namespace_separator string : A separator for the names-

pace and prefix

56.21 The WinCache Adapter

The Zend\Cache\Storage\Adapter\WinCache adapter stores cache items into shared memory

through the required PHP extension WinCache.
This adapter implements the following interfaces:
Zend\Cache\Storage\StorageInterface
Zend\Cache\Storage\AvailableSpaceCapableInterface
Zend\Cache\Storage\FlushableInterface
Zend\Cache\Storage\TotalSpaceCapableInterface

306 Chapter 56. Zend\Cache\Storage\Adapter

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Table 56.15: Capabilities

Capability Value
supportedDatatypes null, boolean, integer, double, string, array (serialized), object
(serialized)
supportedMetadata internal_key, ttl, hits, size
minTtl 1
maxTtl 0
staticTtl true
ttlPrecision 1
useRequestTime <ini value of apc.use_request_time>
expiredRead false
namespaceIsPrefix true
namespaceSepara- <Option value of namespace_separator>
tor

Table 56.16: Adapter specific options

Name Data Type Default Value Description
namespace_separator string : A separator for the namespace and prefix

56.22 The XCache Adapter

The Zend\Cache\Storage\Adapter\XCache adapter stores cache items into shared memory

through the required PHP extension XCache.
This adapter implements the following interfaces:
Zend\Cache\Storage\StorageInterface
Zend\Cache\Storage\AvailableSpaceCapableInterface
Zend\Cache\Storage\ClearByNamespaceInterface
Zend\Cache\Storage\ClearByPrefixInterface
Zend\Cache\Storage\FlushableInterface
Zend\Cache\Storage\IterableInterface
Zend\Cache\Storage\TotalSpaceCapableInterface

Table 56.17: Capabilities

Capability Value
supportedDatatypes boolean, integer, double, string, array (serialized), object (serialized)
supportedMetadata internal_key, size, refcount, hits, ctime, atime, hvalue
minTtl 1
maxTtl <ini value of xcache.var_maxttl>
staticTtl true
ttlPrecision 1
useRequestTime true
expiredRead false
maxKeyLength 5182
namespaceIsPrefix true
namespaceSeparator <Option value of namespace_separator>

56.22. The XCache Adapter 307

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Table 56.18: Adapter specific options

Name Data De- Description
Type fault
Value
names- string: A separator for the namespace and prefix
pace_separator
ad- boolean
false Enable admin authentication by configuration options admin_user and
min_auth admin_pass
This makes XCache administration functions accessible if
xcache.admin.enable_auth is enabled without the need of
HTTP-Authentication.
ad- string The username of xcache.admin.user
min_user
ad- string The password of xcache.admin.pass in plain text
min_pass

56.23 The ZendServerDisk Adapter

This Zend\Cache\Storage\Adapter\ZendServerDisk adapter stores cache items on filesys-

tem through the Zend Server Data Caching API.
This adapter implements the following interfaces:
Zend\Cache\Storage\StorageInterface
Zend\Cache\Storage\AvailableSpaceCapableInterface
Zend\Cache\Storage\ClearByNamespaceInterface
Zend\Cache\Storage\FlushableInterface
Zend\Cache\Storage\TotalSpaceCapableInterface

Table 56.19: Capabilities

Capability Value
supportedDatatypes null, boolean, integer, double, string, array (serialized), object
(serialized)
supportedMetadata <none>
minTtl 1
maxTtl 0
maxKeyLength 0
staticTtl true
ttlPrecision 1
useRequestTime false
expiredRead false
namespaceIsPrefix true
namespaceSepara- ::
tor

308 Chapter 56. Zend\Cache\Storage\Adapter

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

56.24 The ZendServerShm Adapter

The Zend\Cache\Storage\Adapter\ZendServerShm adapter stores cache items in shared

memory through the Zend Server Data Caching API.
This adapter implements the following interfaces:
Zend\Cache\Storage\StorageInterface
Zend\Cache\Storage\ClearByNamespaceInterface
Zend\Cache\Storage\FlushableInterface
Zend\Cache\Storage\TotalSpaceCapableInterface

Table 56.20: Capabilities

Capability Value
supportedDatatypes null, boolean, integer, double, string, array (serialized), object
(serialized)
supportedMetadata <none>
minTtl 1
maxTtl 0
maxKeyLength 0
staticTtl true
ttlPrecision 1
useRequestTime false
expiredRead false
namespaceIsPrefix true
namespaceSepara- ::
tor

56.25 Examples

Basic usage

1 $cache = \Zend\Cache\StorageFactory::factory(array(
2 'adapter' => array(
3 'name' => 'filesystem'
4 ),
5 'plugins' => array(
6 // Don't throw exceptions on cache errors
7 'exception_handler' => array(
8 'throw_exceptions' => false
9 ),
10 )
11 ));
12 $key = 'unique-cache-key';
13 $result = $cache->getItem($key, $success);
14 if (!$success) {
15 $result = doExpensiveStuff();
16 $cache->setItem($key, $result);
17 }

56.24. The ZendServerShm Adapter 309

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Get multiple rows from db

1 // Instantiate the cache instance using a namespace for the same type of items
2 $cache = \Zend\Cache\StorageFactory::factory(array(
3 'adapter' => array(
4 'name' => 'filesystem'
5 // With a namespace we can indicate the same type of items
6 // -> So we can simple use the db id as cache key
7 'options' => array(
8 'namespace' => 'dbtable'
9 ),
10 ),
11 'plugins' => array(
12 // Don't throw exceptions on cache errors
13 'exception_handler' => array(
14 'throw_exceptions' => false
15 ),
16 // We store database rows on filesystem so we need to serialize them
17 'Serializer'
18 )
19 ));
20

21 // Load two rows from cache if possible

22 $ids = array(1, 2);
23 $results = $cache->getItems($ids);
24 if (count($results) < count($ids)) {
25 // Load rows from db if loading from cache failed
26 $missingIds = array_diff($ids, array_keys($results));
27 $missingResults = array();
28 $query = 'SELECT * FROM dbtable WHERE id IN (' . implode(',', $missingIds) . ')';
29 foreach ($pdo->query($query, PDO::FETCH_ASSOC) as $row) {
30 $missingResults[ $row['id'] ] = $row;
31 }
32

33 // Update cache items of the loaded rows from db

34 $cache->setItems($missingResults);
35

36 // merge results from cache and db

37 $results = array_merge($results, $missingResults);
38 }

310 Chapter 56. Zend\Cache\Storage\Adapter

 CHAPTER 57

Zend\Cache\Storage\Capabilities

57.1 Overview

Storage capabilities describes how a storage adapter works and which features it supports.
To get capabilities of a storage adapter, you can use the method getCapabilities() of the storage adapter but
only the storage adapter and its plugins have permissions to change them.
Because capabilities are mutable, for example, by changing some options, you can subscribe to the change event to
get notifications; see the examples for details.
If you are writing your own plugin or adapter, you can also change capabilities because you have access to the marker
object and can create your own marker to instantiate a new object of Zend\Cache\Storage\Capabilities.

57.2 Available Methods

__construct(Zend\Cache\Storage\StorageInterface $storage, stdClass $marker, array $capabilities = ar-

ray(), Zend\Cache\Storage\Capabilities|null $baseCapabilities = null)
Constructor
getSupportedDatatypes()
Get supported datatypes.
Return type array
setSupportedDatatypes(stdClass $marker, array $datatypes)
Set supported datatypes.
Return type Zend\Cache\Storage\Capabilities
getSupportedMetadata()
Get supported metadata.
Return type array
setSupportedMetadata(stdClass $marker, string $metadata)
Set supported metadata.
Return type Zend\Cache\Storage\Capabilities
getMinTtl()
Get minimum supported time-to-live.
(Returning 0 means items never expire)

311
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Return type integer

setMinTtl(stdClass $marker, int $minTtl)
Set minimum supported time-to-live.
Return type Zend\Cache\Storage\Capabilities
getMaxTtl()
Get maximum supported time-to-live.
Return type integer
setMaxTtl(stdClass $marker, int $maxTtl)
Set maximum supported time-to-live.
Return type Zend\Cache\Storage\Capabilities
getStaticTtl()
Is the time-to-live handled static (on write), or dynamic (on read).
Return type boolean
setStaticTtl(stdClass $marker, boolean $flag)
Set if the time-to-live is handled statically (on write) or dynamically (on read).
Return type Zend\Cache\Storage\Capabilities
getTtlPrecision()
Get time-to-live precision.
Return type float
setTtlPrecision(stdClass $marker, float $ttlPrecision)
Set time-to-live precision.
Return type Zend\Cache\Storage\Capabilities
getUseRequestTime()
Get the use request time flag status.
Return type boolean
setUseRequestTime(stdClass $marker, boolean $flag)
Set the use request time flag.
Return type Zend\Cache\Storage\Capabilities
getExpiredRead()
Get flag indicating if expired items are readable.
Return type boolean
setExpiredRead(stdClass $marker, boolean $flag)
Set if expired items are readable.
Return type Zend\Cache\Storage\Capabilities
getMaxKeyLength()
Get maximum key length.
Return type integer
setMaxKeyLength(stdClass $marker, int $maxKeyLength)
Set maximum key length.
Return type Zend\Cache\Storage\Capabilities

312 Chapter 57. Zend\Cache\Storage\Capabilities

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

getNamespaceIsPrefix()
Get if namespace support is implemented as a key prefix.
Return type boolean
setNamespaceIsPrefix(stdClass $marker, boolean $flag)
Set if namespace support is implemented as a key prefix.
Return type Zend\Cache\Storage\Capabilities
getNamespaceSeparator()
Get namespace separator if namespace is implemented as a key prefix.
Return type string
setNamespaceSeparator(stdClass $marker, string $separator)
Set the namespace separator if namespace is implemented as a key prefix.
Return type Zend\Cache\Storage\Capabilities

57.3 Examples

Get storage capabilities and do specific stuff in base of it

1 use Zend\Cache\StorageFactory;
2

3 $cache = StorageFactory::adapterFactory('filesystem');
4 $supportedDatatypes = $cache->getCapabilities()->getSupportedDatatypes();
5

6 // now you can run specific stuff in base of supported feature

7 if ($supportedDatatypes['object']) {
8 $cache->set($key, $object);
9 } else {
10 $cache->set($key, serialize($object));
11 }

Listen to change event

1 use Zend\Cache\StorageFactory;
2

3 $cache = StorageFactory::adapterFactory('filesystem', array(

4 'no_atime' => false,
5 ));
6

7 // Catching capability changes

8 $cache->getEventManager()->attach('capability', function($event) {
9 echo count($event->getParams()) . ' capabilities changed';
10 });
11

12 // change option which changes capabilities

13 $cache->getOptions()->setNoATime(true);

57.3. Examples 313

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

314 Chapter 57. Zend\Cache\Storage\Capabilities

 CHAPTER 58

Zend\Cache\Storage\Plugin

58.1 Overview

Cache storage plugins are objects to add missing functionality or to influence behavior of a storage adapter.
The plugins listen to events the adapter triggers and can change called method arguments (*.post
- events), skipping and directly return a result (using stopPropagation), changing the re-
sult (with setResult of Zend\Cache\Storage\PostEvent) and catching exceptions (with
Zend\Cache\Storage\ExceptionEvent).

58.2 Quick Start

Storage plugins can either be created from Zend\Cache\StorageFactory with the pluginFactory, or by
simply instantiating one of the Zend\Cache\Storage\Plugin\*classes.
To make life easier, the Zend\Cache\StorageFactory comes with the method factory to create an adapter
and all given plugins at once.
1 use Zend\Cache\StorageFactory;
2

3 // Via factory:
4 $cache = StorageFactory::factory(array(
5 'adapter' => 'filesystem',
6 'plugins' => array('serializer'),
7 ));
8

9 // Alternately:
10 $cache = StorageFactory::adapterFactory('filesystem');
11 $plugin = StorageFactory::pluginFactory('serializer');
12 $cache->addPlugin($plugin);
13

14 // Or manually:
15 $cache = new Zend\Cache\Storage\Adapter\Filesystem();
16 $plugin = new Zend\Cache\Storage\Plugin\Serializer();
17 $cache->addPlugin($plugin);

315
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

58.3 The ClearExpiredByFactor Plugin

The Zend\Cache\Storage\Plugin\ClearExpiredByFactor plugin calls the storage method

clearExpired() randomly (by factor) after every call of setItem(), setItems(), addItem()
and addItems().

Table 58.1: Plugin specific options

Name Data Type Default Value Description
clearing_factor integer 0 The automatic clearing factor
Note: The ClearExpiredInterface is required
The storage have to implement the Zend\Cache\Storage\ClearExpiredInterface to work with this plu-
gin.

58.4 The ExceptionHandler Plugin

The Zend\Cache\Storage\Plugin\ExceptionHandler plugin catches all exceptions thrown

on reading or writing to cache and sends the exception to a defined callback function.
Its configurable if the plugin should re-throw the catched exception.

Table 58.2: Plugin specific options

Name Data Type Default Description
Value
excep- callable null Callback will be called on an exception and get the
tion_callback null exception as argument
throw_exceptions boolean true Re-throw catched exceptions

58.5 The IgnoreUserAbort Plugin

The Zend\Cache\Storage\Plugin\IgnoreUserAbort plugin ignores script terminations by

users until write operations to cache finished.

Table 58.3: Plugin specific options

Name Data Type Default Value Description
exit_on_abort boolean true Terminate script execution if user abort the script

58.6 The OptimizeByFactor Plugin

The Zend\Cache\Storage\Plugin\OptimizeByFactor plugin calls the storage method

optimize() randomly (by factor) after removing items from cache.

Table 58.4: Plugin specific options

Name Data Type Default Value Description
optimizing_factor integer 0 The automatic optimization factor
Note: The OptimizableInterface is required

316 Chapter 58. Zend\Cache\Storage\Plugin

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

The storage have to implement the Zend\Cache\Storage\OptimizableInterface to work with this plugin.

58.7 The Serializer Plugin

The Zend\Cache\Storage\Plugin\Serializer plugin will serialize data on writing to cache

and unserialize on reading. So its possible to store different datatypes into cache storages only support
strings.

Table 58.5: Plugin specific options

Name Data Type Default Value Description
serializer null string null The serializer to use
Zend\Serializer\Adapter\AdapterInterface If null use the de-
fault serializer
If string instanti-
ate the serializer with
serializer_options

serializer_options array [] Array of serializer options

used to instantiate the seri-
alizer

58.8 Available Methods

setOptions(Zend\Cache\Storage\Plugin\PluginOptions $options)
Set options.
Return type Zend\Cache\Storage\Plugin\PluginInterface
getOptions()
Get options.
Return type Zend\Cache\Storage\Plugin\PluginOptions
attach(Zend\EventManager\EventManagerInterface $events)
Defined by Zend\EventManager\ListenerAggregateInterface, attach one or more listeners.
Return type void
detach(Zend\EventManager\EventManagerInterface $events)
Defined by Zend\EventManager\ListenerAggregateInterface, detach all previously attached
listeners.
Return type void

58.9 Examples

Basics of writing an own storage plugin

58.7. The Serializer Plugin 317

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1 use Zend\Cache\Storage\Event;
2 use Zend\Cache\Storage\Plugin\AbstractPlugin;
3 use Zend\EventManager\EventManagerInterface;
4

5 class MyPlugin extends AbstractPlugin

6 {
7

8 protected $handles = array();

9

10 // This method have to attach all events required by this plugin

11 public function attach(EventManagerInterface $events)
12 {
13 $this->handles[] = $events->attach('getItem.pre', array($this, 'onGetItemPre'));
14 $this->handles[] = $events->attach('getItem.post', array($this, 'onGetItemPost'));
15 return $this;
16 }
17

18 // This method have to detach all events required by this plugin

19 public function detach(EventManagerInterface $events)
20 {
21 foreach ($this->handles as $handle) {
22 $events->detach($handle);
23 }
24 $this->handles = array();
25 return $this;
26 }
27

28 public function onGetItemPre(Event $event)

29 {
30 $params = $event->getParams();
31 echo sprintf("Method 'getItem' with key '%s' started\n", $params['key']);
32 }
33

34 public function onGetItemPost(Event $event)

35 {
36 $params = $event->getParams();
37 echo sprintf("Method 'getItem' with key '%s' finished\n", $params['key']);
38 }
39 }
40

41 // After defining this basic plugin we can instantiate and add it to an adapter instance
42 $plugin = new MyPlugin();
43 $cache->addPlugin($plugin);
44

45 // Now on calling getItem our basic plugin should print the expected output
46 $cache->getItem('cache-key');
47 // Method 'getItem' with key 'cache-key' started
48 // Method 'getItem' with key 'cache-key' finished

318 Chapter 58. Zend\Cache\Storage\Plugin

 CHAPTER 59

Zend\Cache\Pattern

59.1 Overview

Cache patterns are configurable objects to solve known performance bottlenecks. Each should be used only in the spe-
cific situations they are designed to address. For example you can use one of the CallbackCache, ObjectCache
or ClassCache patterns to cache method and function calls; to cache output generation, the OutputCache pattern
could assist.
All cache patterns implement the same interface, Zend\Cache\Pattern\PatternInterface, and most ex-
tend the abstract class Zend\Cache\Pattern\AbstractPattern to implement basic logic.
Configuration is provided via the Zend\Cache\Pattern\PatternOptions class, which can simply be instan-
tiated with an associative array of options passed to the constructor. To configure a pattern object, you can set an
instance of Zend\Cache\Pattern\PatternOptions with setOptions, or provide your options (either as
an associative array or PatternOptions instance) as the second argument to the factory.
Its also possible to use a single instance of Zend\Cache\Pattern\PatternOptions and pass it to multiple
pattern objects.

59.2 Quick Start

Pattern objects can either be created from the provided Zend\Cache\PatternFactory factory, or, by simply
instantiating one of the Zend\Cache\Pattern\*Cache classes.
1 // Via the factory:
2 $callbackCache = Zend\Cache\PatternFactory::factory('callback', array(
3 'storage' => 'apc',
4 ));

1 // OR, the equivalent manual instantiation:

2 $callbackCache = new Zend\Cache\Pattern\CallbackCache();
3 $callbackCache->setOptions(new Zend\Cache\Pattern\PatternOptions(array(
4 'storage' => 'apc',
5 )));

59.3 Available Methods

The following methods are implemented by Zend\Cache\Pattern\AbstractPattern. Please read docu-

mentation of specific patterns to get more information.

319
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

setOptions(Zend\Cache\Pattern\PatternOptions $options)
Set pattern options.
Return type Zend\Cache\Pattern\PatternInterface
getOptions()
Get all pattern options.
Return type Zend\Cache\Pattern\PatternOptions

320 Chapter 59. Zend\Cache\Pattern

 CHAPTER 60

Zend\Cache\Pattern\CallbackCache

60.1 Overview

The callback cache pattern caches calls of non specific functions and methods given as a callback.

60.2 Quick Start

For instantiation you can use the PatternFactory or do it manual:

1 use Zend\Cache\PatternFactory;
2 use Zend\Cache\Pattern\PatternOptions;
3

4 // Via the factory:

5 $callbackCache = PatternFactory::factory('callback', array(
6 'storage' => 'apc',
7 'cache_output' => true,
8 ));
9

10 // OR, the equivalent manual instantiation:

11 $callbackCache = new \Zend\Cache\Pattern\CallbackCache();
12 $callbackCache->setOptions(new PatternOptions(array(
13 'storage' => 'apc',
14 'cache_output' => true,
15 )));

60.3 Configuration Options

Option Data Type Default Description

Value
storage string array <none> The storage to write/read
Zend\Cache\Storage\StorageInterface cached data
cache_outputboolean true Cache output of callback

321
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

60.4 Available Methods

call(callable $callback, array $args = array())

Call the specified callback or get the result from cache.
Return type mixed
__call(string $function, array $args)
Function call handler.
Return type mixed
generateKey(callable $callback, array $args = array())
Generate a unique key in base of a key representing the callback part and a key representing the arguments part.
Return type string
setOptions(Zend\Cache\Pattern\PatternOptions $options)
Set pattern options.
Return type Zend\Cache\Pattern\CallbackCache
getOptions()
Get all pattern options.
Return type Zend\Cache\Pattern\PatternOptions

60.5 Examples

Instantiating the callback cache pattern

1 use Zend\Cache\PatternFactory;
2

3 $callbackCache = PatternFactory::factory('callback', array(

4 'storage' => 'apc'
5 ));

322 Chapter 60. Zend\Cache\Pattern\CallbackCache

 CHAPTER 61

Zend\Cache\Pattern\ClassCache

61.1 Overview

The ClassCache pattern is an extension to the CallbackCache pattern. It has the same methods but instead it
generates the internally used callback in base of the configured class name and the given method name.

61.2 Quick Start

Instantiating the class cache pattern

1 use Zend\Cache\PatternFactory;
2

3 $classCache = PatternFactory::factory('class', array(

4 'class' => 'MyClass',
5 'storage' => 'apc'
6 ));

61.3 Configuration Options

Option Data Type Default Description

Value
storage string array <none> The storage to write/read cached data
Zend\Cache\Storage\StorageInterface
class string <none> The class name
cache_output boolean true Cache output of callback
cache_by_default boolean true Cache method calls by default
class_cache_methods
array [] List of methods to cache (If
cache_by_default is disabled)
class_non_cache_methods
array [] List of methods to no-cache (If
cache_by_default is enabled)

61.4 Available Methods

call(string $method, array $args = array())

323
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Call the specified method of the configured class.

Return type mixed

__call(string $method, array $args)
Call the specified method of the configured class.

Return type mixed

__set(string $name, mixed $value)
Set a static property of the configured class.

Return type void

__get(string $name)
Get a static property of the configured class.

Return type mixed

__isset(string $name)
Checks if a static property of the configured class exists.

Return type boolean

__unset(string $name)
Unset a static property of the configured class.

Return type void

generateKey(string $method, array $args = array())
Generate a unique key in base of a key representing the callback part and a key representing the arguments part.
Return type string
setOptions(Zend\Cache\Pattern\PatternOptions $options)
Set pattern options.
Return type Zend\Cache\Pattern\ClassCache
getOptions()
Get all pattern options.
Return type Zend\Cache\Pattern\PatternOptions

61.5 Examples

Caching of import feeds

1 $cachedFeedReader = Zend\Cache\PatternFactory::factory('class', array(

2 'class' => 'Zend\Feed\Reader\Reader',
3 'storage' => 'apc',
4

5 // The feed reader doesn't output anything

6 // so the output don't need to be caught and cached
7 'cache_output' => false,

324 Chapter 61. Zend\Cache\Pattern\ClassCache

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

8 ));
9

10 $feed = $cachedFeedReader->call("import", array('http://www.planet-php.net/rdf/'));

11 // OR
12 $feed = $cachedFeedReader->import('http://www.planet-php.net/rdf/');

61.5. Examples 325

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

326 Chapter 61. Zend\Cache\Pattern\ClassCache

 CHAPTER 62

Zend\Cache\Pattern\ObjectCache

62.1 Overview

The ObjectCache pattern is an extension to the CallbackCache pattern. It has the same methods but instead it
generates the internally used callback in base of the configured object and the given method name.

62.2 Quick Start

Instantiating the object cache pattern

1 use Zend\Cache\PatternFactory;
2

3 $object = new stdClass();

4 $objectCache = PatternFactory::factory('object', array(
5 'object' => $object,
6 'storage' => 'apc'
7 ));

62.3 Configuration Options

Option Data Type Default Description

Value
storage string array <none> The storage to write/read cached
Zend\Cache\Storage\StorageInterface data
object object <none> The object to cache methods calls of
object_key null string <Class name A hopefully unique key of the object
of object>
cache_output boolean true Cache output of callback
cache_by_default boolean true Cache method calls by default
ob- array [] List of methods to cache (If
ject_cache_methods cache_by_default is disabled)
ob- array [] List of methods to no-cache (If
ject_non_cache_methods cache_by_default is enabled)
ob- boolean false Cache calls of magic object
ject_cache_magic_properties properties

327
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

62.4 Available Methods

call(string $method, array $args = array())

Call the specified method of the configured object.

Return type mixed

__call(string $method, array $args)
Call the specified method of the configured object.

Return type mixed

__set(string $name, mixed $value)
Set a property of the configured object.

Return type void

__get(string $name)
Get a property of the configured object.

Return type mixed

__isset(string $name)
Checks if static property of the configured object exists.

Return type boolean

__unset(string $name)
Unset a property of the configured object.

Return type void

generateKey(string $method, array $args = array())
Generate a unique key in base of a key representing the callback part and a key representing the arguments part.
Return type string
setOptions(Zend\Cache\Pattern\PatternOptions $options)
Set pattern options.
Return type Zend\Cache\Pattern\ObjectCache
getOptions()
Get all pattern options.
Return type Zend\Cache\Pattern\PatternOptions

62.5 Examples

Caching a filter

328 Chapter 62. Zend\Cache\Pattern\ObjectCache

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1 $filter = new Zend\Filter\RealPath();

2 $cachedFilter = Zend\Cache\PatternFactory::factory('object', array(
3 'object' => $filter,
4 'object_key' => 'RealpathFilter',
5 'storage' => 'apc',
6

7 // The realpath filter doesn't output anything

8 // so the output don't need to be caught and cached
9 'cache_output' => false,
10 ));
11

12 $path = $cachedFilter->call("filter", array('/www/var/path/../../mypath'));

13 // OR
14 $path = $cachedFilter->filter('/www/var/path/../../mypath');

62.5. Examples 329

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

330 Chapter 62. Zend\Cache\Pattern\ObjectCache

 CHAPTER 63

Zend\Cache\Pattern\OutputCache

63.1 Overview

The OutputCache pattern caches output between calls to start() and end().

63.2 Quick Start

Instantiating the output cache pattern

1 use Zend\Cache\PatternFactory;
2

3 $outputCache = PatternFactory::factory('output', array(

4 'storage' => 'apc'
5 ));

63.3 Configuration Options

Op- Data Type Default Description

tion Value
stor- string array <none> The storage to write/read
age Zend\Cache\Storage\StorageInterface cached data

63.4 Available Methods

start(string $key)
If there is a cached item with the given key display its data and return true else start buffering output until
end() is called or the script ends and return false.
Return type boolean
end()
Stops buffering output, write buffered data to cache using the given key on start() and displays the buffer.
Return type boolean
setOptions(Zend\Cache\Pattern\PatternOptions $options)
Set pattern options.

331
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Return type Zend\Cache\Pattern\OutputCache

getOptions()
Get all pattern options.
Return type Zend\Cache\Pattern\PatternOptions

63.5 Examples

Caching simple view scripts

1 $outputCache = Zend\Cache\PatternFactory::factory('output', array(

2 'storage' => 'apc',
3 ));
4

5 $outputCache->start('mySimpleViewScript');
6 include '/path/to/view/script.phtml';
7 $outputCache->end();

332 Chapter 63. Zend\Cache\Pattern\OutputCache

 CHAPTER 64

Zend\Cache\Pattern\CaptureCache

64.1 Overview

The CaptureCache pattern is useful to auto-generate static resources in base of a HTTP request. The Webserver
needs to be configured to run a PHP script generating the requested resource so further requests for the same resource
can be shipped without calling PHP again.
It comes with basic logic to manage generated resources.

64.2 Quick Start

Simplest usage as Apache-404 handler

1 # .htdocs
2 ErrorDocument 404 /index.php

1 // index.php
2 use Zend\Cache\PatternFactory;
3 $capture = Zend\Cache\PatternFactory::factory('capture', array(
4 'public_dir' => __DIR__,
5 ));
6

7 // Start capturing all output excl. headers and write to public directory
8 $capture->start();
9

10 // Don't forget to change HTTP response code

11 header('Status: 200', true, 200);
12

13 // do stuff to dynamically generate output

333
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

64.3 Configuration Options

Option Data Type Default Value Description

public_dir string <none> Location of public directory to write output to
in- string index.html The name of the first file if only a directory was
dex_filename requested
file_locking boolean true Locking output files on writing
file_permissioninteger 0600 (false on Set permissions of generated output files
boolean win)
dir_permission integer 0700 (false on Set permissions of generated output directories
boolean win)
umask integer false Using umask on generating output files / directories
boolean

64.4 Available Methods

start(string|null $pageId = null)

Start capturing output.
Return type void
set(string $content, string|null $pageId = null)
Write content to page identity.
Return type void
get(string|null $pageId = null)
Get content of an already cached page.
Return type string|false
has(string|null $pageId = null)
Check if a page has been created.
Return type boolean
remove(string|null $pageId = null)
Remove a page.
Return type boolean
clearByGlob(string $pattern = **)
Clear pages matching glob pattern.
Return type void
setOptions(Zend\Cache\Pattern\PatternOptions $options)
Set pattern options.
Return type Zend\Cache\Pattern\CaptureCache
getOptions()
Get all pattern options.
Return type Zend\Cache\Pattern\PatternOptions

334 Chapter 64. Zend\Cache\Pattern\CaptureCache

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

64.5 Examples

Scaling images in base of request

1 # .htdocs
2 ErrorDocument 404 /index.php

1 // index.php
2 $captureCache = Zend\Cache\PatternFactory::factory('capture', array(
3 'public_dir' => __DIR__,
4 ));
5

6 // TODO

64.5. Examples 335

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

336 Chapter 64. Zend\Cache\Pattern\CaptureCache

 CHAPTER 65

Introduction to Zend\Captcha

CAPTCHA stands for Completely Automated Public Turing test to tell Computers and Humans Apart; it is used as
a challenge-response to ensure that the individual submitting information is a human and not an automated process.
Typically, a captcha is used with form submissions where authenticated users are not necessary, but you want to prevent
spam submissions.

65.1 Overview

Captchas can take a variety of forms, including asking logic questions, presenting skewed fonts, and presenting multi-
ple images and asking how they relate. The Zend\Captcha component aims to provide a variety of back ends that
may be utilized either standalone or in conjunction with the Zend\Form component.

337
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

338 Chapter 65. Introduction to Zend\Captcha

 CHAPTER 66

Captcha Operation

66.1 The AdapterInterface

All CAPTCHA adapters implement Zend\Captcha\AdapterInterface, which looks like the following:
1 namespace Zend\Captcha;
2

3 use Zend\Validator\ValidatorInterface;
4

5 interface AdapterInterface extends ValidatorInterface

6 {
7 public function generate();
8

9 public function setName($name);

10

11 public function getName();

12

13 // Get helper name used for rendering this captcha type

14 public function getHelperName();
15 }

The name setter and getter are used to specify and retrieve the CAPTCHA identifier. The most interesting methods are
generate() and render(). generate() is used to create the CAPTCHA token. This process typically will
store the token in the session so that you may compare against it in subsequent requests. render() is used to render
the information that represents the CAPTCHA, be it an image, a figlet, a logic problem, or some other CAPTCHA.

66.2 Basic Usage

A simple use case might look like the following:

1 // Originating request:
2 $captcha = new Zend\Captcha\Figlet(array(
3 'name' => 'foo',
4 'wordLen' => 6,
5 'timeout' => 300,
6 ));
7

8 $id = $captcha->generate();
9

10 //this will output a Figlet string

11 echo $captcha->getFiglet()->render($captcha->getWord());

339
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

12

13

14 // On a subsequent request:
15 // Assume a captcha setup as before, with corresponding form fields, the value of $_POST['foo']
16 // would be key/value array: id => captcha ID, input => captcha value
17 if ($captcha->isValid($_POST['foo'], $_POST)) {
18 // Validated!
19 }

Note: Under most circumstances, you probably prefer the use of Zend\Captcha functionality combined with the
power of the Zend\Form component. For an example on how to use Zend\Form\Element\Captcha, have a
look at the Zend\Form Quick Start.

340 Chapter 66. Captcha Operation

 CHAPTER 67

CAPTCHA Adapters

The following adapters are shipped with Zend Framework by default.

67.1 Zend\Captcha\AbstractWord

Zend\Captcha\AbstractWord is an abstract adapter that serves as the base class for most other CAPTCHA
adapters. It provides mutators for specifying word length, session TTL and the session container object to use.
Zend\Captcha\AbstractWord also encapsulates validation logic.
By default, the word length is 8 characters, the session timeout is 5 minutes, and Zend\Session\Container is
used for persistence (using the namespace Zend\Form\Captcha\<captcha ID>).
In addition to the methods required by the Zend\Captcha\AdapterInterface interface,
Zend\Captcha\AbstractWord exposes the following methods:
setWordLen($length) and getWordLen() allow you to specify the length of the generated word in
characters, and to retrieve the current value.
setTimeout($ttl) and getTimeout() allow you to specify the time-to-live of the session token, and to
retrieve the current value. $ttl should be specified in seconds.
setUseNumbers($numbers) and getUseNumbers() allow you to specify if numbers will be consid-
ered as possible characters for the random work or only letters would be used.
setSessionClass($class) and getSessionClass() allow you to specify an alternate
Zend\Session\Container implementation to use to persist the CAPTCHA token and to retrieve
the current value.
getId() allows you to retrieve the current token identifier.
getWord() allows you to retrieve the generated word to use with the CAPTCHA. It will generate the word for
you if none has been generated yet.
setSession(Zend\Session\Container $session) allows you to specify a session object to use
for persisting the CAPTCHA token. getSession() allows you to retrieve the current session object.
All word CAPTCHAs allow you to pass an array of options or Traversable object to the constructor, or, alternately,
pass them to setOptions(). By default, the wordLen, timeout, and sessionClass keys may all be used. Each
concrete implementation may define additional keys or utilize the options in other ways.

Note: Zend\Captcha\AbstractWord is an abstract class and may not be instantiated directly.

341
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

67.2 Zend\Captcha\Dumb

The Zend\Captcha\Dumb adapter is mostly self-descriptive. It provides a random string that must be typed in
reverse to validate. As such, its not a good CAPTCHA solution and should only be used for testing. It extends
Zend\Captcha\AbstractWord.

67.3 Zend\Captcha\Figlet

The Zend\Captcha\Figlet adapter utilizes Zend\Text\Figlet to present a figlet to the user.

Options passed to the constructor will also be passed to the Zend\Text\Figlet object. See the Zend\Text\Figlet docu-
mentation for details on what configuration options are available.

67.4 Zend\Captcha\Image

The Zend\Captcha\Image adapter takes the generated word and renders it as an image, performing various skew-
ing permutations to make it difficult to automatically decipher. It requires the GD extension compiled with TrueType
or Freetype support. Currently, the Zend\Captcha\Image adapter can only generate PNG images.
Zend\Captcha\Image extends Zend\Captcha\AbstractWord, and additionally exposes the following
methods:
setExpiration($expiration) and getExpiration() allow you to specify a maximum lifetime the
CAPTCHA image may reside on the filesystem. This is typically a longer than the session lifetime. Garbage
collection is run periodically each time the CAPTCHA object is invoked, deleting all images that have expired.
Expiration values should be specified in seconds.
setGcFreq($gcFreq) and getGcFreg() allow you to specify how frequently garbage collection should
run. Garbage collection will run every 1/$gcFreq calls. The default is 100.
setFont($font) and getFont() allow you to specify the font you will use. $font should be a fully
qualified path to the font file. This value is required; the CAPTCHA will throw an exception during generation
if the font file has not been specified.
setFontSize($fsize) and getFontSize() allow you to specify the font size in pixels for generating
the CAPTCHA. The default is 24px.
setHeight($height) and getHeight() allow you to specify the height in pixels of the generated
CAPTCHA image. The default is 50px.
setWidth($width) and getWidth() allow you to specify the width in pixels of the generated CAPTCHA
image. The default is 200px.
setImgDir($imgDir) and getImgDir() allow you to specify the directory for storing CAPTCHA im-
ages. The default is ./images/captcha/, relative to the bootstrap script.
setImgUrl($imgUrl) and getImgUrl() allow you to specify the relative path to a CAPTCHA image to
use for HTML markup. The default is /images/captcha/.
setSuffix($suffix) and getSuffix() allow you to specify the filename suffix for the CAPTCHA
image. The default is .png. Note: changing this value will not change the type of the generated image.
setDotNoiseLevel($level) and getDotNoiseLevel(), along with
setLineNoiseLevel($level) and getLineNoiseLevel(), allow you to control how much
noise in the form of random dots and lines the image would contain. Each unit of $level produces one

342 Chapter 67. CAPTCHA Adapters

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

random dot or line. The default is 100 dots and 5 lines. The noise is added twice - before and after the image
distortion transformation.
All of the above options may be passed to the constructor by simply removing the set method prefix and casting the
initial letter to lowercase: suffix, height, imgUrl, etc.

67.5 Zend\Captcha\ReCaptcha

The Zend\Captcha\ReCaptcha adapter uses Zend\Service\ReCaptcha\ReCaptcha to generate and validate

CAPTCHAs. It exposes the following methods:
setPrivKey($key) and getPrivKey() allow you to specify the private key to use for the ReCaptcha
service. This must be specified during construction, although it may be overridden at any point.
setPubKey($key) and getPubKey() allow you to specify the public key to use with the ReCaptcha
service. This must be specified during construction, although it may be overridden at any point.
setService(ZendService\ReCaptcha\ReCaptcha $service) and getService() allow you
to set and get the ReCaptcha service object.

67.5. Zend\Captcha\ReCaptcha 343

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

344 Chapter 67. CAPTCHA Adapters

 CHAPTER 68

Introduction

Zend\Code\Generator provides facilities to generate arbitrary code using an object-oriented interface, both to
create new code as well as to update existing code. While the current implementation is limited to generating PHP
code, you can easily extend the base class in order to provide code generation for other tasks: JavaScript, configuration
files, apache vhosts, etc.

68.1 Theory of Operation

In the most typical use case, you will simply instantiate a code generator class and either pass it the appropriate
configuration or configure it after instantiation. To generate the code, you will simply echo the object or call its
generate() method.
1 // Passing configuration to the constructor:
2 $file = new Zend\Code\Generator\FileGenerator(array(
3 'classes' => array(
4 new Zend\Code\Generator\ClassGenerator(
5 'World', // name
6 null, // namespace
7 null, // flags
8 null, // extends
9 array(), // interfaces
10 array(), // properties
11 array(
12 new Zend\Code\Generator\MethodGenerator(
13 'hello', // name
14 array(), // parameters
15 'public', // visibility
16 'echo \'Hello world!\';' // body
17 ),
18 )
19 ),
20 ),
21 ));
22

23 // Render the generated file

24 echo $file->generate();
25

26 // or write it to a file:
27 file_put_contents('World.php', $file->generate());
28

29 // OR

345
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

30

31 // Configuring after instantiation

32 $method = new Zend\Code\Generator\MethodGenerator();
33 $method->setName('hello')
34 ->setBody('echo \'Hello world!\';');
35

36 $class = new Zend\Code\Generator\ClassGenerator();

37 $class->setName('World')
38 ->addMethodFromGenerator($method);
39

40 $file = new Zend\Code\Generator\FileGenerator();

41 $file->setClass($class);
42

43 // Render the generated file

44 echo $file->generate();
45

46 // or write it to a file:
47 file_put_contents('World.php', $file->generate());

Both of the above samples will render the same result:

1 <?php
2

3 class World
4 {
5

6 public function hello()

7 {
8 echo 'Hello world!';
9 }
10

11 }

Another common use case is to update existing code for instance, to add a method to a class. In such a case, you must
first inspect the existing code using reflection, and then add your new method. Zend\Code\Generator makes this
trivially simple, by leveraging ZendCodeReflection.
As an example, lets say weve saved the above to the file World.php, and have already included it. We could then
do the following:
1 $class = Zend\Code\Generator\ClassGenerator::fromReflection(
2 new Zend\Code\Reflection\ClassReflection('World')
3 );
4

5 $method = new Zend\Code\Generator\MethodGenerator();

6 $method->setName('mrMcFeeley')
7 ->setBody('echo \'Hello, Mr. McFeeley!\';');
8 $class->addMethodFromGenerator($method);
9

10 $file = new Zend\Code\Generator\FileGenerator();

11 $file->setClass($class);
12

13 // Render the generated file

14 echo $file->generate();
15

16 // Or, better yet, write it back to the original file:

17 file_put_contents('World.php', $file->generate());

The resulting class file will now look like this:

346 Chapter 68. Introduction

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1 <?php
2

3 class World
4 {
5

6 public function hello()

7 {
8 echo 'Hello world!';
9 }
10

11 public function mrMcFeeley()

12 {
13 echo 'Hellow Mr. McFeeley!';
14 }
15

16 }

68.1. Theory of Operation 347

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

348 Chapter 68. Introduction

 CHAPTER 69

Zend\Code\Generator Reference

69.1 Abstract Classes and Interfaces

69.1.1 Zend\Code\Generator\GeneratorInterface

The base interface from which all CodeGenerator classes implement provides the minimal functionality necessary. Its
API is as follows:
1 interface Zend\Code\Generator\GeneratorInterface
2 {
3 public function generate();
4 }

69.1.2 Zend\Code\Generator\AbstractGenerator

Zend\Code\Generator\AbstractGenerator implements Zend\Code\Generator\GeneratorInterface,

and adds some properties for tracking whether content has changed as well as the amount of indentation that should
appear before generated content. Its API is as follows:
1 abstract class Zend\Code\Generator\AbstractGenerator
2 implements Zend\Code\Generator\GeneratorInterface
3 {
4 public function __construct(Array|Traversable $options = array())
5 public function setOptions(Array $options)
6 public function setSourceContent($sourceContent)
7 public function getSourceContent()
8 public function setSourceDirty($isSourceDirty = true)
9 public function isSourceDirty()
10 public function setIndentation($indentation)
11 public function getIndentation()
12 }

The constructor passes the $options parameter to setOptions().

Like most classes in Zend Framework, setOptions() compares an option key to existing setters in the class, and
passes the value on to that method if found.
setSourceContent() and getSourceContent() are intended to either set the default content for the code
being generated, or to replace said content once all generation tasks are complete.

349
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

69.1.3 Zend\Code\Generator\AbstractMemberGenerator

Zend\Code\Generator\AbstractMemberGenerator is a base class for generating class members prop-

erties and methods and provides accessors and mutators for establishing visibility; whether or not the member is
abstract, static, or final; and the name of the member. Its API is as follows:
1 abstract class Zend\Code\Generator\AbstractMemberGenerator
2 extends Zend\Code\Generator\AbstractGenerator
3 {
4 public function setAbstract($isAbstract)
5 public function isAbstract()
6 public function setStatic($isStatic)
7 public function isStatic()
8 public function setVisibility($visibility)
9 public function getVisibility()
10 public function setName($name)
11 public function getName()
12 }

69.2 Concrete CodeGenerator Classes

69.2.1 Zend\Code\Generator\BodyGenerator

Zend\Code\Generator\BodyGenerator is intended for generating arbitrary procedural code to include

within a file. As such, you simply set content for the object, and it will return that content when you invoke
generate().
The API of the class is as follows:
1 class Zend\Code\Generator\BodyGenerator extends Zend\Code\Generator\AbstractGenerator
2 {
3 public function setContent($content)
4 public function getContent()
5 public function generate()
6 }

69.2.2 Zend\Code\Generator\ClassGenerator

Zend\Code\Generator\ClassGenerator is intended for generating PHP classes. The basic functionality

just generates the PHP class itself, as well as optionally the related PHP DocBlock. Classes may implement or inherit
from other classes, and may be marked as abstract. Utilizing other code generator classes, you can also attach class
constants, properties, and methods.
The API is as follows:
1 class Zend\Code\Generator\ClassGenerator extends Zend\Code\Generator\AbstractGenerator
2 {
3 public static function fromReflection(
4 Zend\Code\Reflection\ClassReflection $reflectionClass
5 )
6 public function addConstants(Array $properties)
7 public function addConstant($property)
8 public function getConstants()
9 public function getConstant($propertyName)
10 public function setDocblock(Zend\Code\Generator\DocBlockGenerator $docblock)

350 Chapter 69. Zend\Code\Generator Reference

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

11 public function getDocblock()

12 public function setName($name)
13 public function getName()
14 public function setAbstract($isAbstract)
15 public function isAbstract()
16 public function setExtendedClass($extendedClass)
17 public function getExtendedClass()
18 public function setImplementedInterfaces(Array $implementedInterfaces)
19 public function getImplementedInterfaces()
20 public function addProperties(Array $properties)
21 public function addProperty($property)
22 public function getProperties()
23 public function getProperty($propertyName)
24 public function addMethods(Array $methods)
25 public function addMethod($method)
26 public function getMethods()
27 public function getMethod($methodName)
28 public function hasMethod($methodName)
29 public function isSourceDirty()
30 public function generate()
31 }

The addProperty() method accepts an array of information that may be used to gener-
ate a Zend\Code\Generator\PropertyGenerator instance or simply an instance of
Zend\Code\Generator\PropertyGenerator. Likewise, addMethod() accepts either an array of
information for generating a Zend\Code\Generator\MethodGenerator instance or a concrete instance of
that class.
Note that setDocBlock() expects an instance of Zend\Code\Generator\DocBlockGenerator.

69.2.3 Zend\Code\Generator\DocBlockGenerator

Zend\Code\Generator\DocBlockGenerator can be used to generate arbitrary PHP docblocks, including

all the standard docblock features: short and long descriptions and annotation tags.
Annotation tags may be set using the setTag() and setTags() methods; these each take either an array describing
the tag that may be passed to the Zend\Code\Generator\DocBlock\Tag constructor, or an instance of that
class.
The API is as follows:
1 class Zend\Code\Generator\DocBlockGenerator extends Zend\Code\Generator\AbstractGenerator
2 {
3 public static function fromReflection(
4 Zend\Code\Reflection\DocblockReflection $reflectionDocblock
5 )
6 public function setShortDescription($shortDescription)
7 public function getShortDescription()
8 public function setLongDescription($longDescription)
9 public function getLongDescription()
10 public function setTags(Array $tags)
11 public function setTag($tag)
12 public function getTags()
13 public function generate()
14 }

69.2. Concrete CodeGenerator Classes 351

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

69.2.4 Zend\Code\Generator\DocBlock\Tag

Zend\Code\Generator\DocBlock\Tag is intended for creating arbitrary annotation tags for inclusion in PHP
docblocks. Tags are expected to contain a name (the portion immediately following the @ symbol) and a description
(everything following the tag name).
The class API is as follows:
1 class Zend\Code\Generator\DocBlock\Tag
2 extends Zend\Code\Generator\AbstractGenerator
3 {
4 public static function fromReflection(
5 Zend\Code\Reflection\DocBlock\Tag\TagInterface $reflectionTag
6 )
7 public function setName($name)
8 public function getName()
9 public function setDescription($description)
10 public function getDescription()
11 public function generate()
12 }

69.2.5 Zend\Code\Generator\DocBlock\Tag\ParamTag

Zend\Code\Generator\DocBlock\Tag\ParamTag is a specialized version of

Zend\Code\Generator\DocBlock\Tag, and represents a method parameter. The tag name is therefor
known (param), but due to the format of this annotation tag, additional information is required in order to generate
it: the parameter name and data type it represents.
The class API is as follows:
1 class Zend\Code\Generator\DocBlock\Tag\ParamTag
2 extends Zend\Code\Generator\DocBlock\Tag
3 {
4 public static function fromReflection(
5 Zend\Code\Reflection\DocBlock\Tag\TagInterface $reflectionTagParam
6 )
7 public function setDatatype($datatype)
8 public function getDatatype()
9 public function setParamName($paramName)
10 public function getParamName()
11 public function generate()
12 }

69.2.6 Zend\Code\Generator\DocBlock\Tag\ReturnTag

Like the param docblock tag variant, Zend\Code\Generator\DocBlock\Tag\ReturnTag is an annotation

tag variant for representing a method return value. In this case, the annotation tag name is known (return), but
requires a return type.
The class API is as follows:
1 class Zend\Code\Generator\DocBlock\Tag\ParamTag
2 extends Zend\Code\Generator\DocBlock\Tag
3 {
4 public static function fromReflection(
5 Zend\Code\Reflection\DocBlock\Tag\TagInterface $reflectionTagReturn

352 Chapter 69. Zend\Code\Generator Reference

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

6 )
7 public function setDatatype($datatype)
8 public function getDatatype()
9 public function generate()
10 }

69.2.7 Zend\Code\Generator\FileGenerator

Zend\Code\Generator\FileGenerator is used to generate the full contents of a file that will contain PHP
code. The file may contain classes or arbitrary PHP code, as well as a file-level docblock if desired.
When adding classes to the file, you will need to pass either an array of information to pass to the
Zend\Code\Generator\ClassGenerator constructor, or an instance of that class. Similarly, with docblocks,
you will need to pass information for the Zend\Code\Generator\DocBlockGenerator constructor to con-
sume or an instance of the class.
The API of the class is as follows:
1 class Zend\Code\Generator\FileGenerator extends Zend\Code\Generator\AbstractGenerator
2 {
3 public static function fromReflectedFilePath(
4 $filePath,
5 $usePreviousCodeGeneratorIfItExists = true,
6 $includeIfNotAlreadyIncluded = true)
7 public static function fromReflection(Zend\Code\Reflection\FileReflection $reflectionFile)
8 public function setDocblock(Zend\Code\Generator\DocBlockGenerator $docblock)
9 public function getDocblock()
10 public function setRequiredFiles($requiredFiles)
11 public function getRequiredFiles()
12 public function setClasses(Array $classes)
13 public function getClass($name = null)
14 public function setClass($class)
15 public function setFilename($filename)
16 public function getFilename()
17 public function getClasses()
18 public function setBody($body)
19 public function getBody()
20 public function isSourceDirty()
21 public function generate()
22 }

69.2.8 Zend\Code\Generator\Member\ContainerGenerator

Zend\Code\Generator\Member\ContainerGenerator is used internally by

Zend\Code\Generator\ClassGenerator to keep track of class members properties and methods
alike. These are indexed by name, using the concrete instances of the members as values.
The API of the class is as follows:
1 class Zend\Code\Generator\Member\ContainerGenerator extends ArrayObject
2 {
3 public function __construct($type = self::TYPE_PROPERTY)
4 }

69.2. Concrete CodeGenerator Classes 353

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

69.2.9 Zend\Code\Generator\MethodGenerator

Zend\Code\Generator\MethodGenerator describes a class method, and can generate both the code and
the docblock for the method. The visibility and status as static, abstract, or final may be indicated, per its parent
class, Zend\Code\Generator\AbstractMemberGenerator. Finally, the parameters and return value for
the method may be specified.
Parameters may be set using setParameter() or setParameters(). In each case, a parameter should either
be an array of information to pass to the Zend\Code\Generator\ParameterGenerator constructor or an
instance of that class.
The API of the class is as follows:
1 class Zend\Code\Generator\MethodGenerator
2 extends Zend\Code\Generator\AbstractMemberGenerator
3 {
4 public static function fromReflection(
5 Zend\Code\Reflection\MethodReflection $reflectionMethod
6 )
7 public function setDocblock(Zend\Code\Generator\DocBlockGenerator $docblock)
8 public function getDocblock()
9 public function setFinal($isFinal)
10 public function setParameters(Array $parameters)
11 public function setParameter($parameter)
12 public function getParameters()
13 public function setBody($body)
14 public function getBody()
15 public function generate()
16 }

69.2.10 Zend\Code\Generator\ParameterGenerator

Zend\Code\Generator\ParameterGenerator may be used to specify method parameters. Each parameter

may have a position (if unspecified, the order in which they are registered with the method will be used), a default
value, and a data type; a parameter name is required.
The API of the class is as follows:
1 class Zend\Code\Generator\ParameterGenerator extends Zend\Code\Generator\AbstractGenerator
2 {
3 public static function fromReflection(
4 Zend\Code\Reflection\ParameterReflection $reflectionParameter
5 )
6 public function setType($type)
7 public function getType()
8 public function setName($name)
9 public function getName()
10 public function setDefaultValue($defaultValue)
11 public function getDefaultValue()
12 public function setPosition($position)
13 public function getPosition()
14 public function getPassedByReference()
15 public function setPassedByReference($passedByReference)
16 public function generate()
17 }

There are several problems that might occur when trying to set NULL, booleans or arrays as default values. For this
the value holder object Zend\Code\Generator\ParameterDefaultValueGenerator can be used, for

354 Chapter 69. Zend\Code\Generator Reference

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

example:
1 $parameter = new Zend\Code\Generator\ParameterGenerator();
2 $parameter->setDefaultValue(
3 new Zend\Code\Generator\ValueGenerator("null")
4 );
5 $parameter->setDefaultValue(
6 new Zend\Code\Generator\ValueGenerator("array('foo', 'bar')")
7 );

Internally setDefaultValue() also converts the values which cant be expressed in PHP into the value holder.

69.2.11 Zend\Code\Generator\PropertyGenerator

Zend\Code\Generator\PropertyGenerator describes a class property, which may be either a constant or a

variable. In each case, the property may have an optional default value associated with it. Additionally, the visibility of
variable properties may be set, per the parent class, Zend\Code\Generator\AbstractMemberGenerator.
The API of the class is as follows:
1 class Zend\Code\Generator\PropertyGenerator
2 extends Zend\Code\Generator\AbstractMemberGenerator
3 {
4 public static function fromReflection(
5 Zend\Code\Reflection\PropertyReflection $reflectionProperty
6 )
7 public function setConst($const)
8 public function isConst()
9 public function setDefaultValue($defaultValue)
10 public function getDefaultValue()
11 public function generate()
12 }

69.2. Concrete CodeGenerator Classes 355

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

356 Chapter 69. Zend\Code\Generator Reference

 CHAPTER 70

Zend\Code\Generator Examples

70.1 Generating PHP classes

The following example generates an empty class with a class-level DocBlock.

1 use Zend\Code\Generator\ClassGenerator;
2 use Zend\Code\Generator\DocBlockGenerator;
3

4 $foo = new ClassGenerator();

5 $docblock = DocBlockGenerator::fromArray(array(
6 'shortDescription' => 'Sample generated class',
7 'longDescription' => 'This is a class generated with Zend\Code\Generator.',
8 'tags' => array(
9 array(
10 'name' => 'version',
11 'description' => '$Rev:$',
12 ),
13 array(
14 'name' => 'license',
15 'description' => 'New BSD',
16 ),
17 ),
18 ));
19 $foo->setName('Foo')
20 ->setDocblock($docblock);
21 echo $foo->generate();

The above code will result in the following:

1 /**
2 * Sample generated class
3 *
4 * This is a class generated with Zend\Code\Generator.
5 *
6 * @version $Rev:$
7 * @license New BSD
8 *
9 */
10 class Foo
11 {
12

13 }

357
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

70.1.1 Generating PHP classes with class properties

Building on the previous example, we now add properties to our generated class.
1 use Zend\Code\Generator\ClassGenerator;
2 use Zend\Code\Generator\DocBlockGenerator;
3 use Zend\Code\Generator\PropertyGenerator;
4

5 $foo = new ClassGenerator();

6 $docblock = DocBlockGenerator::fromArray(array(
7 'shortDescription' => 'Sample generated class',
8 'longDescription' => 'This is a class generated with Zend\Code\Generator.',
9 'tags' => array(
10 array(
11 'name' => 'version',
12 'description' => '$Rev:$',
13 ),
14 array(
15 'name' => 'license',
16 'description' => 'New BSD',
17 ),
18 ),
19 ));
20 $foo->setName('Foo')
21 ->setDocblock($docblock)
22 ->addProperties(array(
23 array('_bar', 'baz', PropertyGenerator::FLAG_PROTECTED),
24 array('baz', 'bat', PropertyGenerator::FLAG_PUBLIC)
25 ))
26 ->addConstants(array(
27 array('bat', 'foobarbazbat')
28 ));
29 echo $foo->generate();

The above results in the following class definition:

1 /**
2 * Sample generated class
3 *
4 * This is a class generated with Zend\Code\Generator.
5 *
6 * @version $Rev:$
7 * @license New BSD
8 *
9 */
10 class Foo
11 {
12

13 protected $_bar = 'baz';

14

15 public $baz = 'bat';

16

17 const bat = 'foobarbazbat';

18

19 }

358 Chapter 70. Zend\Code\Generator Examples

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

70.1.2 Generating PHP classes with class methods

Zend\Code\Generator\ClassGenerator allows you to attach methods with optional content to your classes.
Methods may be attached as either arrays or concrete Zend\Code\Generator\MethodGenerator instances.
1 use Zend\Code\Generator\ClassGenerator;
2 use Zend\Code\Generator\DocBlockGenerator;
3 use Zend\Code\Generator\DocBlock\Tag;
4 use Zend\Code\Generator\MethodGenerator;
5 use Zend\Code\Generator\PropertyGenerator;
6

7 $foo = new ClassGenerator();

8 $docblock = DocBlockGenerator::fromArray(array(
9 'shortDescription' => 'Sample generated class',
10 'longDescription' => 'This is a class generated with Zend\Code\Generator.',
11 'tags' => array(
12 array(
13 'name' => 'version',
14 'description' => '$Rev:$',
15 ),
16 array(
17 'name' => 'license',
18 'description' => 'New BSD',
19 ),
20 ),
21 ));
22 $foo->setName('Foo')
23 ->setDocblock($docblock)
24 ->addProperties(array(
25 array('_bar', 'baz', PropertyGenerator::FLAG_PROTECTED),
26 array('baz', 'bat', PropertyGenerator::FLAG_PUBLIC)
27 ))
28 ->addConstants(array(
29 array('bat', 'foobarbazbat', PropertyGenerator::FLAG_CONSTANT)
30 ))
31 ->addMethods(array(
32 // Method passed as array
33 MethodGenerator::fromArray(array(
34 'name' => 'setBar',
35 'parameters' => array('bar'),
36 'body' => '$this->_bar = $bar;' . "\n" . 'return $this;',
37 'docblock' => DocBlockGenerator::fromArray(array(
38 'shortDescription' => 'Set the bar property',
39 'longDescription' => null,
40 'tags' => array(
41 new Tag\ParamTag(array(
42 'paramName' => 'bar',
43 'datatype' => 'string'
44 )),
45 new Tag\ReturnTag(array(
46 'datatype' => 'string',
47 )),
48 ),
49 )),
50 )),
51 // Method passed as concrete instance
52 new MethodGenerator(
53 'getBar',
54 array(),

70.1. Generating PHP classes 359

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

55 MethodGenerator::FLAG_PUBLIC,
56 'return $this->_bar;',
57 DocBlockGenerator::fromArray(array(
58 'shortDescription' => 'Retrieve the bar property',
59 'longDescription' => null,
60 'tags' => array(
61 new Tag\ReturnTag(array(
62 'datatype' => 'string|null',
63 )),
64 ),
65 ))
66 ),
67 ));
68

69 echo $foo->generate();

The above generates the following output:

1 /**
2 * Sample generated class
3 *
4 * This is a class generated with Zend\Code\Generator.
5 *
6 * @version $Rev:$
7 * @license New BSD
8 */
9 class Foo
10 {
11

12 protected $_bar = 'baz';

13

14 public $baz = 'bat';

15

16 const bat = 'foobarbazbat';

17

18 /**
19 * Set the bar property
20 *
21 * @param string bar
22 * @return string
23 */
24 public function setBar($bar)
25 {
26 $this->_bar = $bar;
27 return $this;
28 }
29

30 /**
31 * Retrieve the bar property
32 *
33 * @return string|null
34 */
35 public function getBar()
36 {
37 return $this->_bar;
38 }
39

40 }

360 Chapter 70. Zend\Code\Generator Examples

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

70.2 Generating PHP files

Zend\Code\Generator\FileGenerator can be used to generate the contents of a PHP file. You can
include classes as well as arbitrary content body. When attaching classes, you should attach either concrete
Zend\Code\Generator\ClassGenerator instances or an array defining the class.
In the example below, we will assume youve defined $foo per one of the class definitions in a previous example.
1 use Zend\Code\Generator\DocBlockGenerator;
2 use Zend\Code\Generator\FileGenerator;
3

4 $file = FileGenerator::fromArray(array(
5 'classes' => array($foo),
6 'docblock' => DocBlockGenerator::fromArray(array(
7 'shortDescription' => 'Foo class file',
8 'longDescription' => null,
9 'tags' => array(
10 array(
11 'name' => 'license',
12 'description' => 'New BSD',
13 ),
14 ),
15 )),
16 'body' => 'define(\'APPLICATION_ENV\', \'testing\');',
17 ));

Calling generate() will generate the code but not write it to a file. You will need to capture the contents and
write them to a file yourself. As an example:
1 $code = $file->generate();
2 file_put_contents('Foo.php', $code);

The above will generate the following file:

1 <?php
2 /**
3 * Foo class file
4 *
5 * @license New BSD
6 */
7

8 /**
9 * Sample generated class
10 *
11 * This is a class generated with Zend\Code\Generator.
12 *
13 * @version $Rev:$
14 * @license New BSD
15 */
16 class Foo
17 {
18

19 protected $_bar = 'baz';

20

21 public $baz = 'bat';

22

23 const bat = 'foobarbazbat';

24

25 /**

70.2. Generating PHP files 361

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

26 * Set the bar property

27 *
28 * @param string bar
29 * @return string
30 */
31 public function setBar($bar)
32 {
33 $this->_bar = $bar;
34 return $this;
35 }
36

37 /**
38 * Retrieve the bar property
39 *
40 * @return string|null
41 */
42 public function getBar()
43 {
44 return $this->_bar;
45 }
46

47 }
48

49 define('APPLICATION_ENV', 'testing');

70.3 Add code to existing PHP files and classes

70.3.1 Seeding PHP file code generation via reflection

You can add PHP code to an existing PHP file using the code generator. To do so, you need to first do reflection on it.
The static method fromReflectedFileName() allows you to do this.
1 $generator = Zend\Code\Generator\FileGenerator::fromReflectedFileName($path);
2 $generator->setBody("\$foo->bar();");
3 file_put_contents($path, $generator->generate());

70.3.2 Seeding PHP class generation via reflection

You may add code to an existing class. To do so, first use the static fromReflection() method to map the class
into a generator object. From there, you may add additional properties or methods, and then regenerate the class.
1 use Zend\Code\Generator\ClassGenerator;
2 use Zend\Code\Generator\DocBlockGenerator;
3 use Zend\Code\Generator\DocBlock\Tag;
4 use Zend\Code\Generator\MethodGenerator;
5 use Zend\Code\Reflection\ClassReflection;
6

7 $generator = ClassGenerator::fromReflection(
8 new ClassReflection($class)
9 );
10 $generator->addMethod(
11 'setBaz',
12 array('baz'),
13 MethodGenerator::FLAG_PUBLIC,

362 Chapter 70. Zend\Code\Generator Examples

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

14 '$this->_baz = $baz;' . "\n" . 'return $this;',

15 DocBlockGenerator::fromArray(array(
16 'shortDescription' => 'Set the baz property',
17 'longDescription' => null,
18 'tags' => array(
19 new Tag\ParamTag(array(
20 'paramName' => 'baz',
21 'datatype' => 'string'
22 )),
23 new Tag\ReturnTag(array(
24 'datatype' => 'string',
25 )),
26 ),
27 ))
28 );
29 $code = $generator->generate();

70.3. Add code to existing PHP files and classes 363

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

364 Chapter 70. Zend\Code\Generator Examples

 CHAPTER 71

Introduction to Zend\Config

Zend\Config is designed to simplify access to configuration data within applications. It provides a nested object
property-based user interface for accessing this configuration data within application code. The configuration data
may come from a variety of media supporting hierarchical data storage. Currently, Zend\Config provides adapters
that read and write configuration data stored in .ini, JSON, YAML and XML files.

71.1 Using Zend\Config\Config with a Reader Class

Normally, it is expected that users would use one of the reader classes to read a configuration file, but if configuration
data are available in a PHP array, one may simply pass the data to Zend\Config\Configs constructor in order
to utilize a simple object-oriented interface:
1 // An array of configuration data is given
2 $configArray = array(
3 'webhost' => 'www.example.com',
4 'database' => array(
5 'adapter' => 'pdo_mysql',
6 'params' => array(
7 'host' => 'db.example.com',
8 'username' => 'dbuser',
9 'password' => 'secret',
10 'dbname' => 'mydatabase'
11 )
12 )
13 );
14

15 // Create the object-oriented wrapper using the configuration data

16 $config = new Zend\Config\Config($configArray);
17

18 // Print a configuration datum (results in 'www.example.com')

19 echo $config->webhost;

As illustrated in the example above, Zend\Config\Config provides nested object property syntax to access con-
figuration data passed to its constructor.
Along with the object-oriented access to the data values, Zend\Config\Config also has get() method that
returns the supplied value if the data element doesnt exist in the configuration array. For example:
1 $host = $config->database->get('host', 'localhost');

365
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

71.2 Using Zend\Config\Config with a PHP Configuration File

It is often desirable to use a purely PHP-based configuration file. The following code illustrates how easily this can be
accomplished:
1 // config.php
2 return array(
3 'webhost' => 'www.example.com',
4 'database' => array(
5 'adapter' => 'pdo_mysql',
6 'params' => array(
7 'host' => 'db.example.com',
8 'username' => 'dbuser',
9 'password' => 'secret',
10 'dbname' => 'mydatabase'
11 )
12 )
13 );

1 // Consumes the configuration array

2 $config = new Zend\Config\Config(include 'config.php');
3

4 // Print a configuration datum (results in 'www.example.com')

5 echo $config->webhost;

366 Chapter 71. Introduction to Zend\Config

 CHAPTER 72

Theory of Operation

Configuration data are made accessible to Zend\Config\Configs constructor with an associative array, which
may be multi-dimensional, so data can be organized from general to specific. Concrete adapter classes adapt configu-
ration data from storage to produce the associative array for Zend\Config\Configs constructor. If needed, user
scripts may provide such arrays directly to Zend\Config\Configs constructor, without using a reader class.
Each value in the configuration data array becomes a property of the Zend\Config\Config object. The key
is used as the property name. If a value is itself an array, then the resulting object property is created as a new
Zend\Config\Config object, loaded with the array data. This occurs recursively, such that a hierarchy of config-
uration data may be created with any number of levels.
Zend\Config\Config implements the Countable and Iterator interfaces in order to facilitate simple access to
configuration data. Thus, Zend\Config\Config objects support the count() function and PHP constructs such as
foreach.
By default, configuration data made available through Zend\Config\Config are read-only, and an assignment
(e.g. $config->database->host = example.com;) results in a thrown exception. This default behav-
ior may be overridden through the constructor, allowing modification of data values. Also, when modifications are
allowed, Zend\Config\Config supports unsetting of values (i.e. unset($config->database->host)).
The isReadOnly() method can be used to determine if modifications to a given Zend\Config\Config
object are allowed and the setReadOnly() method can be used to stop any further modifications to a
Zend\Config\Config object that was created allowing modifications.

Note: Modifying Config does not save changes

It is important not to confuse such in-memory modifications with saving configuration data out to specific storage
media. Tools for creating and modifying configuration data for various storage media are out of scope with respect
to Zend\Config\Config. Third-party open source solutions are readily available for the purpose of creating and
modifying configuration data for various storage media.

If you have two Zend\Config\Config objects, you can merge them into a single object using the merge() func-
tion. For example, given $config and $localConfig, you can merge data from $localConfig to $config
using $config->merge($localConfig);. The items in $localConfig will override any items with the
same name in $config.

Note: The Zend\Config\Config object that is performing the merge must have been constructed to allow
modifications, by passing TRUE as the second parameter of the constructor. The setReadOnly() method can then
be used to prevent any further modifications after the merge is complete.

367
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

368 Chapter 72. Theory of Operation

 CHAPTER 73

Zend\Config\Reader

Zend\Config\Reader gives you the ability to read a config file. It works with concrete implementations for
different file format. The Zend\Config\Reader is only an interface, that define the two methods fromFile()
and fromString(). The concrete implementations of this interface are:
Zend\Config\Reader\Ini
Zend\Config\Reader\Xml
Zend\Config\Reader\Json
Zend\Config\Reader\Yaml
Zend\Config\Reader\JavaProperties
The fromFile() and fromString() return a PHP array contains the data of the configuration file.

Note: Differences from ZF1

The Zend\Config\Reader component no longer supports the following features:
Inheritance of sections.
Reading of specific sections.

73.1 Zend\Config\Reader\Ini

Zend\Config\Reader\Ini enables developers to store configuration data in a familiar INI format and read them
in the application by using an array syntax.
Zend\Config\Reader\Ini utilizes the parse_ini_file() PHP function. Please review this documentation to be
aware of its specific behaviors, which propagate to Zend\Config\Reader\Ini, such as how the special values
of TRUE, FALSE, yes, no, and NULL are handled.

Note: Key Separator

By default, the key separator character is the period character (.). This can be changed, however, using the
setNestSeparator() method. For example:
1 $reader = new Zend\Config\Reader\Ini();
2 $reader->setNestSeparator('-');

369
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

The following example illustrates a basic use of Zend\Config\Reader\Ini for loading configuration data from
an INI file. In this example there are configuration data for both a production system and for a staging system. Suppose
we have the following INI configuration file:
1 webhost = 'www.example.com'
2 database.adapter = 'pdo_mysql'
3 database.params.host = 'db.example.com'
4 database.params.username = 'dbuser'
5 database.params.password = 'secret'
6 database.params.dbname = 'dbproduction'

We can use the Zend\Config\Reader\Ini to read this INI file:

1 $reader = new Zend\Config\Reader\Ini();
2 $data = $reader->fromFile('/path/to/config.ini');
3

4 echo $data['webhost']; // prints "www.example.com"

5 echo $data['database']['params']['dbname']; // prints "dbproduction"

The Zend\Config\Reader\Ini supports a feature to include the content of a INI file in a specific section of
another INI file. For instance, suppose we have an INI file with the database configuration:
1 database.adapter = 'pdo_mysql'
2 database.params.host = 'db.example.com'
3 database.params.username = 'dbuser'
4 database.params.password = 'secret'
5 database.params.dbname = 'dbproduction'

We can include this configuration in another INI file, for instance:

1 webhost = 'www.example.com'
2 @include = 'database.ini'

If we read this file using the component Zend\Config\Reader\Ini we will obtain the same configuration data
structure of the previous example.
The @include = file-to-include.ini can be used also in a subelement of a value. For instance we can
have an INI file like that:
1 adapter = 'pdo_mysql'
2 params.host = 'db.example.com'
3 params.username = 'dbuser'
4 params.password = 'secret'
5 params.dbname = 'dbproduction'

And assign the @include as subelement of the database value:

1 webhost = 'www.example.com'
2 database.@include = 'database.ini'

73.2 Zend\Config\Reader\Xml

Zend\Config\Reader\Xml enables developers to read configuration data in a familiar XML format and read
them in the application by using an array syntax. The root element of the XML file or string is irrelevant and may be
named arbitrarily.
The following example illustrates a basic use of Zend\Config\Reader\Xml for loading configuration data from
an XML file. Suppose we have the following XML configuration file:

370 Chapter 73. Zend\Config\Reader

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1 <?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>

2 <config>
3 <webhost>www.example.com</webhost>
4 <database>
5 <adapter value="pdo_mysql"/>
6 <params>
7 <host value="db.example.com"/>
8 <username value="dbuser"/>
9 <password value="secret"/>
10 <dbname value="dbproduction"/>
11 </params>
12 </database>
13 </config>

We can use the Zend\Config\Reader\Xml to read this XML file:

1 $reader = new Zend\Config\Reader\Xml();
2 $data = $reader->fromFile('/path/to/config.xml');
3

4 echo $data['webhost']; // prints "www.example.com"

5 echo $data['database']['params']['dbname']['value']; // prints "dbproduction"

Zend\Config\Reader\Xml utilizes the XMLReader PHP class. Please review this documentation to be aware
of its specific behaviors, which propagate to Zend\Config\Reader\Xml.
Using Zend\Config\Reader\Xml we can include the content of XML files in a specific XML element. This
is provided using the standard function XInclude of XML. To use this function you have to add the namespace
xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" to the XML file. Suppose we have an XML files that
contains only the database configuration:
1 <?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
2 <config>
3 <database>
4 <adapter>pdo_mysql</adapter>
5 <params>
6 <host>db.example.com</host>
7 <username>dbuser</username>
8 <password>secret</password>
9 <dbname>dbproduction</dbname>
10 </params>
11 </database>
12 </config>

We can include this configuration in another XML file, for instance:

1 <?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
2 <config xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude">
3 <webhost>www.example.com</webhost>
4 <xi:include href="database.xml"/>
5 </config>

The syntax to include an XML file in a specific element is <xi:include href="file-to-include.xml"/>

73.3 Zend\Config\Reader\Json

Zend\Config\Reader\Json enables developers to read configuration data in a JSON format and read them in
the application by using an array syntax.

73.3. Zend\Config\Reader\Json 371

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

The following example illustrates a basic use of Zend\Config\Reader\Json for loading configuration data from
a JSON file. Suppose we have the following JSON configuration file:
1 {
2 "webhost" : "www.example.com",
3 "database" : {
4 "adapter" : "pdo_mysql",
5 "params" : {
6 "host" : "db.example.com",
7 "username" : "dbuser",
8 "password" : "secret",
9 "dbname" : "dbproduction"
10 }
11 }
12 }

We can use the Zend\Config\Reader\Json to read this JSON file:

1 $reader = new Zend\Config\Reader\Json();
2 $data = $reader->fromFile('/path/to/config.json');
3

4 echo $data['webhost']; // prints "www.example.com"

5 echo $data['database']['params']['dbname']; // prints "dbproduction"

Zend\Config\Reader\Json utilizes the Zend\Json\Json class.

Using Zend\Config\Reader\Json we can include the content of a JSON file in a specific JSON section or
element. This is provided using the special syntax @include. Suppose we have a JSON file that contains only the
database configuration:
1 {
2 "database" : {
3 "adapter" : "pdo_mysql",
4 "params" : {
5 "host" : "db.example.com",
6 "username" : "dbuser",
7 "password" : "secret",
8 "dbname" : "dbproduction"
9 }
10 }
11 }

We can include this configuration in another JSON file, for instance:

1 {
2 "webhost" : "www.example.com",
3 "@include" : "database.json"
4 }

73.4 Zend\Config\Reader\Yaml

Zend\Config\Reader\Yaml enables developers to read configuration data in a YAML format and read them in
the application by using an array syntax. In order to use the YAML reader we need to pass a callback to an external
PHP library or use the Yaml PECL extension.
The following example illustrates a basic use of Zend\Config\Reader\Yaml that use the Yaml PECL extension.
Suppose we have the following YAML configuration file:

372 Chapter 73. Zend\Config\Reader

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1 webhost: www.example.com
2 database:
3 adapter: pdo_mysql
4 params:
5 host: db.example.com
6 username: dbuser
7 password: secret
8 dbname: dbproduction

We can use the Zend\Config\Reader\Yaml to read this YAML file:

1 $reader = new Zend\Config\Reader\Yaml();
2 $data = $reader->fromFile('/path/to/config.yaml');
3

4 echo $data['webhost']; // prints "www.example.com"

5 echo $data['database']['params']['dbname']; // prints "dbproduction"

If you want to use an external YAML reader you have to pass the callback function in the constructor of the class. For
instance, if you want to use the Spyc library:
1 // include the Spyc library
2 require_once ('path/to/spyc.php');
3

4 $reader = new Zend\Config\Reader\Yaml(array('Spyc','YAMLLoadString'));

5 $data = $reader->fromFile('/path/to/config.yaml');
6

7 echo $data['webhost']; // prints "www.example.com"

8 echo $data['database']['params']['dbname']; // prints "dbproduction"

You can also instantiate the Zend\Config\Reader\Yaml without any parameter and specify the YAML reader
in a second moment using the setYamlDecoder() method.
Using Zend\Config\ReaderYaml we can include the content of a YAML file in a specific YAML section or
element. This is provided using the special syntax @include. Suppose we have a YAML file that contains only the
database configuration:
1 database:
2 adapter: pdo_mysql
3 params:
4 host: db.example.com
5 username: dbuser
6 password: secret
7 dbname: dbproduction

We can include this configuration in another YAML file, for instance:

1 webhost: www.example.com
2 @include: database.yaml

73.5 Zend\Config\Reader\JavaProperties

Zend\Config\Reader\JavaProperties enables developers to read configuration data in a familiar

JavaProperties format and read them in the application by using an array syntax.
The following example illustrates a basic use of Zend\Config\Reader\JavaProperties for loading config-
uration data from an JavaProperties file. Suppose we have the following JavaProperties configuration file:

73.5. Zend\Config\Reader\JavaProperties 373

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1 #comment
2 !comment
3 webhost:www.example.com
4 database.adapter:pdo_mysql
5 database.params.host:db.example.com
6 database.params.username:dbuser
7 database.params.password:secret
8 database.params.dbname:dbproduction

We can use the Zend\Config\Reader\JavaProperties to read this JavaProperties file:

1 $reader = new Zend\Config\Reader\JavaProperties();
2 $data = $reader->fromFile('/path/to/config.properties');
3

4 echo $data['webhost']; // prints "www.example.com"

5 echo $data['database.params.dbname']; // prints "dbproduction"

374 Chapter 73. Zend\Config\Reader

 CHAPTER 74

Zend\Config\Writer

Zend\Config\Writer gives you the ability to write config files out of array, Zend\Config\Config and
any Traversable object. The Zend\Config\Writer is an interface that defines two methods: toFile() and
toString(). We have five specific writers that implement this interface:
Zend\Config\Writer\Ini
Zend\Config\Writer\Xml
Zend\Config\Writer\PhpArray
Zend\Config\Writer\Json
Zend\Config\Writer\Yaml

74.1 Zend\Config\Writer\Ini

The INI writer has two modes for rendering with regard to sections. By default the top-level configuration is always
written into section names. By calling $writer->setRenderWithoutSectionsFlags(true); all options
are written into the global namespace of the INI file and no sections are applied.
As an addition Zend\Config\Writer\Ini has an additional option parameter nestSeparator, which de-
fines with which character the single nodes are separated. The default is a single dot, like it is accepted by
Zend\Config\Reader\Ini by default.
When modifying or creating a Zend\Config\Config object, there are some things to know. To create or modify
a value, you simply say set the parameter of the Config object via the parameter accessor (->). To create a section in
the root or to create a branch, you just create a new array ($config->branch = array();).

Using Zend\Config\Writer\Ini

This example illustrates the basic use of Zend\Config\Writer\Ini to create a new config file:
1 // Create the config object
2 $config = new Zend\Config\Config(array(), true);
3 $config->production = array();
4

5 $config->production->webhost = 'www.example.com';
6 $config->production->database = array();
7 $config->production->database->params = array();
8 $config->production->database->params->host = 'localhost';
9 $config->production->database->params->username = 'production';

375
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

10 $config->production->database->params->password = 'secret';
11 $config->production->database->params->dbname = 'dbproduction';
12

13 $writer = new Zend\Config\Writer\Ini();

14 echo $writer->toString($config);

The result of this code is an INI string contains the following values:
1 [production]
2 webhost = "www.example.com"
3 database.params.host = "localhost"
4 database.params.username = "production"
5 database.params.password = "secret"
6 database.params.dbname = "dbproduction"

You can use the method toFile() to store the INI data in a file.

74.2 Zend\Config\Writer\Xml

The Zend\Config\Writer\Xml can be used to generate an XML string or file starting from a
Zend\Config\Config object.

Using Zend\Config\Writer\Xml

This example illustrates the basic use of Zend\Config\Writer\Xml to create a new config file:
1 // Create the config object
2 $config = new Zend\Config\Config(array(), true);
3 $config->production = array();
4

5 $config->production->webhost = 'www.example.com';
6 $config->production->database = array();
7 $config->production->database->params = array();
8 $config->production->database->params->host = 'localhost';
9 $config->production->database->params->username = 'production';
10 $config->production->database->params->password = 'secret';
11 $config->production->database->params->dbname = 'dbproduction';
12

13 $writer = new Zend\Config\Writer\Xml();

14 echo $writer->toString($config);

The result of this code is an XML string contains the following data:
1 <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
2 <zend-config>
3 <production>
4 <webhost>www.example.com</webhost>
5 <database>
6 <params>
7 <host>localhost</host>
8 <username>production</username>
9 <password>secret</password>
10 <dbname>dbproduction</dbname>
11 </params>
12 </database>

376 Chapter 74. Zend\Config\Writer

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

13 </production>
14 </zend-config>

You can use the method toFile() to store the XML data in a file.

74.3 Zend\Config\Writer\PhpArray

The Zend\Config\Writer\PhpArray can be used to generate a PHP code that returns an array representation
of an Zend\Config\Config object.

Using Zend\Config\Writer\PhpArray

This example illustrates the basic use of Zend\Config\Writer\PhpArray to create a new config file:
1 // Create the config object
2 $config = new Zend\Config\Config(array(), true);
3 $config->production = array();
4

5 $config->production->webhost = 'www.example.com';
6 $config->production->database = array();
7 $config->production->database->params = array();
8 $config->production->database->params->host = 'localhost';
9 $config->production->database->params->username = 'production';
10 $config->production->database->params->password = 'secret';
11 $config->production->database->params->dbname = 'dbproduction';
12

13 $writer = new Zend\Config\Writer\PhpArray();

14 echo $writer->toString($config);

The result of this code is a PHP script that returns an array as follow:
1 <?php
2 return array (
3 'production' =>
4 array (
5 'webhost' => 'www.example.com',
6 'database' =>
7 array (
8 'params' =>
9 array (
10 'host' => 'localhost',
11 'username' => 'production',
12 'password' => 'secret',
13 'dbname' => 'dbproduction',
14 ),
15 ),
16 ),
17 );

You can use the method toFile() to store the PHP script in a file.

74.3. Zend\Config\Writer\PhpArray 377

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

74.4 Zend\Config\Writer\Json

The Zend\Config\Writer\Json can be used to generate a PHP code that returns the JSON representation of a
Zend\Config\Config object.

Using Zend\Config\Writer\Json

This example illustrates the basic use of Zend\Config\Writer\Json to create a new config file:
1 // Create the config object
2 $config = new Zend\Config\Config(array(), true);
3 $config->production = array();
4

5 $config->production->webhost = 'www.example.com';
6 $config->production->database = array();
7 $config->production->database->params = array();
8 $config->production->database->params->host = 'localhost';
9 $config->production->database->params->username = 'production';
10 $config->production->database->params->password = 'secret';
11 $config->production->database->params->dbname = 'dbproduction';
12

13 $writer = new Zend\Config\Writer\Json();

14 echo $writer->toString($config);

The result of this code is a JSON string contains the following values:
1 { "webhost" : "www.example.com",
2 "database" : {
3 "params" : {
4 "host" : "localhost",
5 "username" : "production",
6 "password" : "secret",
7 "dbname" : "dbproduction"
8 }
9 }
10 }

You can use the method toFile() to store the JSON data in a file.
The Zend\Config\Writer\Json class uses the Zend\Json\Json component to convert the data in a JSON
format.

74.5 Zend\Config\Writer\Yaml

The Zend\Config\Writer\Yaml can be used to generate a PHP code that returns the YAML representation of
a Zend\Config\Config object. In order to use the YAML writer we need to pass a callback to an external PHP
library or use the Yaml PECL extension.

Using Zend\Config\Writer\Yaml

This example illustrates the basic use of Zend\Config\Writer\Yaml to create a new config file using the Yaml
PECL extension:

378 Chapter 74. Zend\Config\Writer

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1 // Create the config object

2 $config = new Zend\Config\Config(array(), true);
3 $config->production = array();
4

5 $config->production->webhost = 'www.example.com';
6 $config->production->database = array();
7 $config->production->database->params = array();
8 $config->production->database->params->host = 'localhost';
9 $config->production->database->params->username = 'production';
10 $config->production->database->params->password = 'secret';
11 $config->production->database->params->dbname = 'dbproduction';
12

13 $writer = new Zend\Config\Writer\Yaml();

14 echo $writer->toString($config);

The result of this code is a YAML string contains the following values:
1 webhost: www.example.com
2 database:
3 params:
4 host: localhost
5 username: production
6 password: secret
7 dbname: dbproduction

You can use the method toFile() to store the YAML data in a file.
If you want to use an external YAML writer library you have to pass the callback function in the constructor of the
class. For instance, if you want to use the Spyc library:
1 // include the Spyc library
2 require_once ('path/to/spyc.php');
3

4 $writer = new Zend\Config\Writer\Yaml(array('Spyc','YAMLDump'));

5 echo $writer->toString($config);

74.5. Zend\Config\Writer\Yaml 379

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

380 Chapter 74. Zend\Config\Writer

 CHAPTER 75

Zend\Config\Processor

Zend\Config\Processor gives you the ability to perform some operations on a Zend\Config\Config

object. The Zend\Config\Processor is an interface that defines two methods: process() and
processValue(). These operations are provided by the following concrete implementations:
Zend\Config\Processor\Constant: manage PHP constant values;
Zend\Config\Processor\Filter: filter the configuration data using Zend\Filter;
Zend\Config\Processor\Queue: manage a queue of operations to apply to configuration data;
Zend\Config\Processor\Token: find and replace specific tokens;
Zend\Config\Processor\Translator: translate configuration values in other languages using
Zend\I18n\Translator;
Below we reported some examples for each type of processor.

75.1 Zend\Config\Processor\Constant

Using Zend\Config\Processor\Constant

This example illustrates the basic use of Zend\Config\Processor\Constant:

1 define ('TEST_CONST', 'bar');
2 // set true to Zend\Config\Config to allow modifications
3 $config = new Zend\Config\Config(array('foo' => 'TEST_CONST'), true);
4 $processor = new Zend\Config\Processor\Constant();
5

6 echo $config->foo . ',';

7 $processor->process($config);
8 echo $config->foo;

This example returns the output: TEST_CONST, bar..

75.2 Zend\Config\Processor\Filter

Using Zend\Config\Processor\Filter

This example illustrates the basic use of Zend\Config\Processor\Filter:

381
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1 use Zend\Filter\StringToUpper;
2 use Zend\Config\Processor\Filter as FilterProcessor;
3 use Zend\Config\Config;
4

5 $config = new Config(array ('foo' => 'bar'), true);

6 $upper = new StringToUpper();
7

8 $upperProcessor = new FilterProcessor($upper);

9

10 echo $config->foo . ',';

11 $upperProcessor->process($config);
12 echo $config->foo;

This example returns the output: bar,BAR.

75.3 Zend\Config\Processor\Queue

Using Zend\Config\Processor\Queue

This example illustrates the basic use of Zend\Config\Processor\Queue:

1 use Zend\Filter\StringToLower;
2 use Zend\Filter\StringToUpper;
3 use Zend\Config\Processor\Filter as FilterProcessor;
4 use Zend\Config\Processor\Queue;
5 use Zend\Config\Config;
6

7 $config = new Config(array ('foo' => 'bar'), true);

8 $upper = new StringToUpper();
9 $lower = new StringToLower();
10

11 $lowerProcessor = new FilterProcessor($lower);

12 $upperProcessor = new FilterProcessor($upper);
13

14 $queue = new Queue();

15 $queue->insert($upperProcessor);
16 $queue->insert($lowerProcessor);
17 $queue->process($config);
18

19 echo $config->foo;

This example returns the output: bar. The filters in the queue are applied with a FIFO logic (First In, First Out).

75.4 Zend\Config\Processor\Token

Using Zend\Config\Processor\Token

This example illustrates the basic use of Zend\Config\Processor\Token:

1 // set the Config to true to allow modifications
2 $config = new Config(array('foo' => 'Value is TOKEN'), true);
3 $processor = new TokenProcessor();
4

382 Chapter 75. Zend\Config\Processor

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

5 $processor->addToken('TOKEN', 'bar');
6 echo $config->foo . ',';
7 $processor->process($config);
8 echo $config->foo;

This example returns the output: Value is TOKEN,Value is bar.

75.5 Zend\Config\Processor\Translator

Using Zend\Config\Processor\Translator

This example illustrates the basic use of Zend\Config\Processor\Translator:

1 use Zend\Config\Config;
2 use Zend\Config\Processor\Translator as TranslatorProcessor;
3 use Zend\I18n\Translator\Translator;
4

5 $config = new Config(array('animal' => 'dog'), true);

6

7 /*
8 * The following mapping would exist for the translation
9 * loader you provide to the translator instance
10 * $italian = array(
11 * 'dog' => 'cane'
12 * );
13 */
14

15 $translator = new Translator();

16 // ... configure the translator ...
17 $processor = new TranslatorProcessor($translator);
18

19 echo "English: {$config->animal}, ";

20 $processor->process($config);
21 echo "Italian: {$config->animal}";

This example returns the output: English: dog, Italian: cane.

75.5. Zend\Config\Processor\Translator 383

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

384 Chapter 75. Zend\Config\Processor

 CHAPTER 76

The Factory

The factory gives you the ability to load a configuration file to an array or to Zend\Config\Config object. The
factory has two purposes
Loading configuration file(s)
Storing a configuration file

Note: Storing the configuration will be done to one file. The factory is not aware of merging two or more configu-
rations and will not store it into multiple files. If you want to store particular configuration sections to a different file
you should separate it manually.

76.1 Loading configuration file

The next example illustrates how to load a single configuration file

1 //Load a php file as array
2 $config = Zend\Config\Factory::fromFile(__DIR__.'/config/my.config.php');
3

4 //Load a xml file as Config object

5 $config = Zend\Config\Factory::fromFile(__DIR__.'/config/my.config.xml', true);

For merging multiple configuration files

76.2 Storing configuration file

Sometimes you want to store the configuration to a file. Also this is really easy to do

385
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

386 Chapter 76. The Factory

 CHAPTER 77

Introduction to Zend\Console

Zend Framework 2 features built-in console support.

When a Zend\Application is run from a console window (a shell window or Windows command prompt), it will
recognize this fact and prepare Zend\Mvc components to handle the request. Console support is enabled by default,
but to function properly it requires at least one console route and one action controller to handle the request.
Console routing allows you to invoke controllers and action depending on command line parameters provided
by the user.
Module Manager integration allows ZF2 applications and modules to display help and usage information, in
case the command line has not been understood (no route matched).
Console-aware action controllers will receive a console request containing all named parameters and flags. They
are able to send output back to the console window.
Console adapters provide a level of abstraction for interacting with console on different operating systems.
Console prompts can be used to interact with the user by asking him questions and retrieving input.

77.1 Writing console routes

A console route defines required and optional command line parameters. When a route matches, it behaves analogical
to a standard, http route and can point to a MVC controller and an action.
Lets assume that wed like our application to handle the following command line:
> zf user resetpassword [email protected]

When a user runs our application (zf) with these parameters, wed like to call action resetpassword of
Application\Controller\IndexController.

Note: We will use zf to depict the entry point for your application, it can be shell script in application bin folder or
simply an alias for php public/index.php

First we need to create a route definition:

user resetpassword <userEmail>

This simple route definition expects exactly 3 arguments: a literal user, literal resetpassword followed by a pa-
rameter were calling userEmail. Lets assume we also accept one optional parameter, that will turn on verbose
operation:

387
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

user resetpassword [--verbose|-v] <userEmail>

Now our console route expects the same 3 parameters but will also recognise an optional --verbose flag, or its
shorthand version: -v.

Note: The order of flags is ignored by Zend\Console. Flags can appear before positional parameters, after them
or anywhere in between. The order of multiple flags is also irrelevant. This applies both to route definitions and the
order that flags are used on the command line.

Lets use the definition above and configure our console route. Console routes are automatically loaded from the
following location inside config file:
1 array(
2 'router' => array(
3 'routes' => array(
4 // HTTP routes are defined here
5 )
6 ),
7

8 'console' => array(

9 'router' => array(
10 'routes' => array(
11 // Console routes go here
12 )
13 )
14 ),
15 )

Lets create our console route and point it to Application\Controller\IndexController::resetpasswordAction()

1 // we could define routes for Application\Controller\IndexController in Application module config fil
2 // which is usually located at modules/application/config/module.config.php
3 array(
4 'console' => array(
5 'router' => array(
6 'routes' => array(
7 'user-reset-password' => array(
8 'options' => array(
9 'route' => 'user resetpassword [--verbose|-v] <userEmail>',
10 'defaults' => array(
11 'controller' => 'Application\Controller\Index',
12 'action' => 'resetpassword'
13 )
14 )
15 )
16 )
17 )
18 )
19 )

See also:
To learn more about console routes and how to use them, please read this chapter: Console routes and routing

388 Chapter 77. Introduction to Zend\Console

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

77.2 Handling console requests

When a user runs our application from command line and arguments match our console route, a controller class
will be instantiated and an action method will be called, just like it is with http requests.
We will now add resetpassword action to Application\Controller\IndexController:
1 <?php
2 namespace Application\Controller;
3

4 use Zend\Mvc\Controller\AbstractActionController;
5 use Zend\View\Model\ViewModel;
6 use Zend\Console\Request as ConsoleRequest;
7 use Zend\Math\Rand;
8

9 class IndexController extends AbstractActionController

10 {
11 public function indexAction()
12 {
13 return new ViewModel(); // display standard index page
14 }
15

16 public function resetpasswordAction()

17 {
18 $request = $this->getRequest();
19

20 // Make sure that we are running in a console and the user has not tricked our
21 // application into running this action from a public web server.
22 if (!$request instanceof ConsoleRequest){
23 throw new \RuntimeException('You can only use this action from a console!');
24 }
25

26 // Get user email from console and check if the user used --verbose or -v flag
27 $userEmail = $request->getParam('userEmail');
28 $verbose = $request->getParam('verbose') || $request->getParam('v');
29

30 // reset new password

31 $newPassword = Rand::getString(16);
32

33 // Fetch the user and change his password, then email him ...
34 // [...]
35

36 if (!$verbose) {
37 return "Done! $userEmail has received an email with his new password.\n";
38 }else{
39 return "Done! New password for user $userEmail is '$newPassword'. It has also been emaile
40 }
41 }
42 }

We have created resetpasswordAction() than retrieves current request and checks if its really coming from
the console (as a precaution). In this example we do not want our action to be invocable from a web page. Because
we have not defined any http route pointing to it, it should never be possible. However in the future, we might define
a wildcard route or a 3rd party module might erroneously route some requests to our action - that is why we want to
make sure that the request is always coming from a Console environment.
All console arguments supplied by the user are accessible via $request->getParam() method. Flags will be
represented by a booleans, where true means a flag has been used and false otherwise.

77.2. Handling console requests 389

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

When our action has finished working it returns a simple string that will be shown to the user in console window.
See also:
There are different ways you can interact with console from a controller. It has been covered in more detail in the
following chapter: Console-aware action controllers

77.3 Adding console usage info

It is a common practice for console application to display usage information when run for the first time (without any
arguments). This is also handled by Zend\Console together with MVC.
Usage info in ZF2 console applications is provided by loaded modules. In case no console route matches console
arguments, Zend\Console will query all loaded modules and ask for their console usage info.
Lets modify our Application\Module to provide usage info:
1 <?php
2

3 namespace Application;
4

5 use Zend\ModuleManager\Feature\AutoloaderProviderInterface;
6 use Zend\ModuleManager\Feature\ConfigProviderInterface;
7 use Zend\ModuleManager\Feature\ConsoleUsageProviderInterface;
8 use Zend\Console\Adapter\AdapterInterface as Console;
9

10 class Module implements

11 AutoloaderProviderInterface,
12 ConfigProviderInterface,
13 ConsoleUsageProviderInterface // <- our module implement this feature and provides console usag
14 {
15 public function getConfig()
16 {
17 // [...]
18 }
19

20 public function getAutoloaderConfig()

21 {
22 // [...]
23 }
24

25 public function getConsoleUsage(Console $console)

26 {
27 return array(
28 // Describe available commands
29 'user resetpassword [--verbose|-v] EMAIL' => 'Reset password for a user',
30

31 // Describe expected parameters

32 array( 'EMAIL', 'Email of the user for a password reset' ),
33 array( '--verbose|-v', '(optional) turn on verbose mode' ),
34 );
35 }
36 }

Each module that implements ConsoleUsageProviderInterface will be queried for console usage info. On
route mismatch, all info from all modules will be concatenated, formatted to console width and shown to the user.

Note: The order of usage info displayed in the console is the order modules load. If you want your application to

390 Chapter 77. Introduction to Zend\Console

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

display important usage info first, change the order your modules are loaded.

See also:
Modules can also provide an application banner (title). To learn more about the format expected from
getConsoleUsage() and about application banners, please read this chapter: Console-aware modules

77.3. Adding console usage info 391

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

392 Chapter 77. Introduction to Zend\Console

 CHAPTER 78

Console routes and routing

Zend Framework 2 has native MVC integration with console, which means that command line arguments are read
and used to determine the appropriate action controller and action method that will handle the request. Actions can
perform any number of task prior to returning a result, that will be displayed to the user in his console window.
There are several routes you can use with Console. All of them are defined in Zend\Mvc\Router\Console\*
classes.
See also:
Routes are used to handle real commands, but they are not used to create help messages (usage information). When a
zf2 application is run in console for the first time (without arguments) it can display usage information that is provided
by modules. To learn more about providing usage information, please read this chapter: Console-aware modules.

78.1 Router configuration

All Console Routes are automatically read from the following configuration location:
1 // This can sit inside of modules/Application/config/module.config.php or any other module's config.
2 array(
3 'router' => array(
4 'routes' => array(
5 // HTTP routes are here
6 )
7 ),
8

9 'console' => array(

10 'router' => array(
11 'routes' => array(
12 // Console routes go here
13 )
14 )
15 ),
16 )

Console Routes will only be processed when the application is run inside console (terminal) window. They have no
effect in web (http) request and will be ignored. It is possible to define only HTTP routes (only web application) or
only Console routes (which means we want a console-only application which will refuse to run in a browser).
A single route can be described with the following array:
1 // inside config.console.router.routes:
2 // [...]

393
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

3 'my-first-route' => array(

4 'type' => 'simple', // <- simple route is created by default, we can skip that
5 'options' => array(
6 'route' => 'foo bar',
7 'defaults' => array(
8 'controller' => 'Application\Controller\Index',
9 'action' => 'password'
10 )
11 )
12 )

We have created a simple console route with a name my-first-route. It expects two parameters: foo and bar.
If user puts these in a console, Application\Controller\IndexController::passwordAction()
action will be invoked.
See also:
You can read more about how ZF2 routing works in this chapter.

78.2 Basic route

This is the default route type for console. It recognizes the following types of parameters:
Literal parameters (i.e. create object (external|internal))
Literal flags (i.e. --verbose --direct [-d] [-a])
Positional value parameters (i.e. create <modelName> [<destination>])
Value flags (i.e. --name=NAME [--method=METHOD])

78.2.1 Literal parameters

These parameters are expected to appear on the command line exactly the way they are spelled in the route. For
example:
1 'show-users' => array(
2 'options' => array(
3 'route' => 'show users',
4 'defaults' => array(
5 'controller' => 'Application\Controller\Users',
6 'action' => 'show'
7 )
8 )
9 )

This route will only match for the following command line
> zf show users

It expects mandatory literal parameters show users. It will not match if there are any more params, or if one of
the words is missing. The order of words is also enforced.
We can also provide optional literal parameters, for example:
1 'show-users' => array(
2 'options' => array(
3 'route' => 'show [all] users',

394 Chapter 78. Console routes and routing

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

4 'defaults' => array(

5 'controller' => 'Application\Controller\Users',
6 'action' => 'show'
7 )
8 )
9 )

Now this route will match for both of these commands:

> zf show users
> zf show all users

We can also provide parameter alternative:

1 'show-users' => array(
2 'options' => array(
3 'route' => 'show [all|deleted|locked|admin] users',
4 'defaults' => array(
5 'controller' => 'Application\Controller\Users',
6 'action' => 'show'
7 )
8 )
9 )

This route will match both without and with second parameter being one of the words, which enables us to capture
commands such:
> zf show users
> zf show locked users
> zf show admin users
etc.

Note: Whitespaces in route definition are ignored. If you separate your parameters with more spaces, or separate
alternatives and pipe characters with spaces, it wont matter for the parser. The above route definition is equivalent to:
show [ all | deleted | locked | admin ] users

78.2.2 Literal flags

Flags are a common concept for console tools. You can define any number of optional and mandatory flags. The order
of flags is ignored. The can be defined in any order and the user can provide them in any other order.
Lets create a route with optional long flags
1 'check-users' => array(
2 'options' => array(
3 'route' => 'check users [--verbose] [--fast] [--thorough]',
4 'defaults' => array(
5 'controller' => 'Application\Controller\Users',
6 'action' => 'check'
7 )
8 )
9 )

This route will match for commands like:

> zf check users
> zf check users --fast

78.2. Basic route 395

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

> zf check users --verbose --thorough

> zf check users --thorough --fast

We can also define one or more mandatory long flags and group them as an alternative:
1 'check-users' => array(
2 'options' => array(
3 'route' => 'check users (--suspicious|--expired) [--verbose] [--fast] [--thorough]',
4 'defaults' => array(
5 'controller' => 'Application\Controller\Users',
6 'action' => 'check'
7 )
8 )
9 )

This route will only match if we provide either --suspicious or --expired flag, i.e.:
> zf check users --expired
> zf check users --expired --fast
> zf check users --verbose --thorough --suspicious

We can also use short flags in our routes and group them with long flags for convenience, for example:
1 'check-users' => array(
2 'options' => array(
3 'route' => 'check users [--verbose|-v] [--fast|-f] [--thorough|-t]',
4 'defaults' => array(
5 'controller' => 'Application\Controller\Users',
6 'action' => 'check'
7 )
8 )
9 )

Now we can use short versions of our flags:

> zf check users -f
> zf check users -v --thorough
> zf check users -t -f -v

78.2.3 Positional value parameters

Value parameters capture any text-based input and come in two forms - positional and flags.
Positional value parameters are expected to appear in an exact position on the command line. Lets take a look at
the following route definition:
1 'delete-user' => array(
2 'options' => array(
3 'route' => 'delete user <userEmail>',
4 'defaults' => array(
5 'controller' => 'Application\Controller\Users',
6 'action' => 'delete'
7 )
8 )
9 )

This route will match for commands like:

396 Chapter 78. Console routes and routing

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

> zf delete user [email protected]

> zf delete user [email protected]

We can access the email value by calling $this->getRequest()->getParam(userEmail) inside of our

controller action (you can read more about accessing values here)
We can also define optional positional value parameters by adding square brackets:
1 'delete-user' => array(
2 'options' => array(
3 'route' => 'delete user [<userEmail>]',
4 'defaults' => array(
5 'controller' => 'Application\Controller\Users',
6 'action' => 'delete'
7 )
8 )
9 )

In this case, userEmail parameter will not be required for the route to match. If it is not provided, userEmail
parameter will not be set.
We can define any number of positional value parameters, for example:
1 'create-user' => array(
2 'options' => array(
3 'route' => 'create user <firstName> <lastName> <email> <position>',
4 'defaults' => array(
5 'controller' => 'Application\Controller\Users',
6 'action' => 'create'
7 )
8 )
9 )

This allows us to capture commands such as:

> zf create user Johnny Bravo [email protected] Entertainer

Note: Command line arguments on all systems must be properly escaped, otherwise they will not be passed to our
application correctly. For example, to create a user with two names and a complex position description, we could write
something like this:
> zf create user "Johnan Tom" Bravo [email protected] "Head of the Entertainment Department"

78.2.4 Value flag parameters

Positional value parameters are only matched if they appear in the exact order as described in the route. If we do not
want to enforce the order of parameters, we can define value flags.
Value flags can be defined and matched in any order. They can digest text-based values, for example:
1 'find-user' => array(
2 'options' => array(
3 'route' => 'find user [--id=] [--firstName=] [--lastName=] [--email=] [--position=] ',
4 'defaults' => array(
5 'controller' => 'Application\Controller\Users',
6 'action' => 'find'
7 )

78.2. Basic route 397

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

8 )
9 )

This route will match for any of the following routes:

> zf find user
> zf find user --id 29110
> zf find user --id=29110
> zf find user --firstName=Johny --lastName=Bravo
> zf find user --lastName Bravo --firstName Johny
> zf find user --position=Executive --firstName=Bob
> zf find user --position "Head of the Entertainment Department"

Note: The order of flags is irrelevant for the parser.

Note: The parser understands values that are provided after equal symbol (=) and separated by a space. Values
without whitespaces can be provided after = symbol or after a space. Values with one more whitespaces however,
must be properly quoted and written after a space.

In previous example, all value flags are optional. It is also possible to define mandatory value flags:
1 'rename-user' => array(
2 'options' => array(
3 'route' => 'rename user --id= [--firstName=] [--lastName=]',
4 'defaults' => array(
5 'controller' => 'Application\Controller\Users',
6 'action' => 'rename'
7 )
8 )
9 )

The --id parameter is required for this route to match. The following commands will work with this route:
> zf rename user --id 123
> zf rename user --id 123 --firstName Jonathan
> zf rename user --id=123 --lastName=Bravo

78.3 Catchall route

This special route will catch all console requests, regardless of the parameters provided.
1 'default-route' => array(
2 'type' => 'catchall',
3 'options' => array(
4 'route' => '',
5 'defaults' => array(
6 'controller' => 'Application\Controller\Index',
7 'action' => 'consoledefault'
8 )
9 )
10 )

Note: This route type is rarely used. You could use it as a last console route, to display usage information. Before
you do so, read about the preferred way of displaying console usage information. It is the recommended way and will
guarantee proper inter-operation with other modules in your application.

398 Chapter 78. Console routes and routing

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

78.4 Console routes cheat-sheet

Param type Example route definition Explanation

Literal params
Literal foo bar foo followed by bar
Literal alternative foo (bar|baz) foo followed by bar or baz
Literal, optional foo [bar] foo, optional bar
Literal, optional foo [bar|baz] foo, optional bar or baz
alternative
Flags
Flag long foo --bar foo as first parameter, bar flag before or after
Flag long, optional foo [--bar] foo as first parameter, optional bar flag before or
after
Flag long, optional, foo [--bar|--baz] foo as first parameter, optional bar or baz,
alternative before or after
Flag short foo -b foo as first parameter, -b flag before or after
Flag short, optional foo [-b] foo as first parameter, optional -b flag before or after
Flag short, optional, foo [-b|-z] foo as first parameter, optional -b or -z, before or
alternative after
Flag long/short foo [--bar|-b] foo as first parameter, optional bar or -b before
alternative or after
Value parameters
Value positional param foo <bar> foo followed by any text (stored as bar param)
Value positional param, foo [<bar>] foo, optionally followed by any text (stored as bar
optional param)
Value Flag foo --bar= foo as first parameter, bar with a value, before or
after
Value Flag, optional foo [--bar=] foo as first parameter, optionally bar with a value,
before or after
Parameter groups
Literal params group foo foo followed by bar or baz (stored as myParam
(bar|baz):myParam param)
Literal optional params foo foo followed by optional bar or baz (stored as
group [bar|baz]:myParam myParam param)
Long flags group foo foo, bar or baz flag before or after (stored as
(--bar|--baz):myParammyParam param)
Long optional flags foo foo, optional bar or baz flag before or after (as
group [--bar|--baz]:myParammyParam param)
Short flags group foo foo, -b or -z flag before or after (stored as
(-b|-z):myParam myParam param)
Short optional flags foo foo, optional -b or -z flag before or after (stored
group [-b|-z]:myParam as myParam param)

78.4. Console routes cheat-sheet 399

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

400 Chapter 78. Console routes and routing

 CHAPTER 79

Console-aware modules

Zend Framework 2 has native MVC integration with console. The integration also works with modules loaded with
Module Manager.
ZF2 ships with RouteNotFoundStrategy which is responsible of displaying usage information inside Console,
in case the user has not provided any arguments, or arguments could not be understood. The strategy currently supports
two types of information: application banners and usage information.

79.1 Application banner

To run the console ZF 2 component, go to your public folder, and type php index.php. By default, it will simply output
the current ZF 2 version, like this:

Our Application module (and any other module) can provide application banner. In order to do so, our Module class
has to implement Zend\ModuleManager\Feature\ConsoleBannerProviderInterface. Lets do this
now.
1 // modules/Application/Module.php
2 <?php
3 namespace Application;

401
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

5 use Zend\ModuleManager\Feature\ConsoleBannerProviderInterface;
6 use Zend\Console\Adapter\AdapterInterface as Console;
7

8 class Module implements ConsoleBannerProviderInterface

9 {
10 /**
11 * This method is defined in ConsoleBannerProviderInterface
12 */
13 public function getConsoleBanner(Console $console)
14 {
15 return 'MyModule 0.0.1';
16 }
17 }

As you can see, the application banner should be a single line string that returns the modules name and (if available)
its current version.
If several modules define their own banner, they are all shown one after the other (they will be joined together in the
order modules are loaded). This way, it makes it very easy to spot which modules provide console commands.
After running our application, well see our newly created banner.

Lets create and load second module that provides a banner.

1 <?php
2 // config/application.config.php
3 return array(
4 'modules' => array(
5 'Application',
6 'User', // < load user module in modules/User
7 ),

User module will add-on a short info about itself:

1 // modules/User/Module.php
2 <?php
3 namespace User;

402 Chapter 79. Console-aware modules

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

5 use Zend\ModuleManager\Feature\ConsoleBannerProviderInterface;
6 use Zend\Console\Adapter\AdapterInterface as Console;
7

8 class Module implements ConsoleBannerProviderInterface

9 {
10 /**
11 * This method is defined in ConsoleBannerProviderInterface
12 */
13 public function getConsoleBanner(Console $console){
14 return "User Module 0.0.1";
15 }
16 }

Because User module is loaded after Application module, the result will look like this:

Note: Application banner is displayed as-is - no trimming or other adjustments will be performed on the text. As you
can see, banners are also automatically colorized as blue.

79.2 Basic usage

In order to display usage information, our Module class has to implement

Zend\ModuleManager\Feature\ConsoleUsageProviderInterface. Lets modify our example
and add new method:
1 // modules/Application/Module.php
2 <?php
3 namespace Application;
4

5 use Zend\ModuleManager\Feature\ConsoleBannerProviderInterface;
6 use Zend\ModuleManager\Feature\ConsoleUsageProviderInterface;
7 use Zend\Console\Adapter\AdapterInterface as Console;
8

9 class Module implements ConsoleBannerProviderInterface, ConsoleUsageProviderInterface

79.2. Basic usage 403

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

10 {
11 public function getConsoleBanner(Console $console){ // ... }
12

13 /**
14 * This method is defined in ConsoleUsageProviderInterface
15 */
16 public function getConsoleUsage(Console $console)
17 {
18 return array(
19 'show stats' => 'Show application statistics',
20 'run cron' => 'Run automated jobs',
21 '(enable|disable) debug' => 'Enable or disable debug mode for the application.'
22 );
23 }
24 }

This will display the following information:

Similar to application banner multiple modules can provide usage information, which will be joined together and
displayed to the user. The order in which usage information is displayed is the order in which modules are loaded.
As you can see, Console component also prepended each modules usage by the modules name. This helps to visually
separate each modules (this can be useful when you have multiple modules that provide commands). By default, the
component colorizes those in red.

Note: Usage info provided in modules does not connect with console routing. You can describe console usage in any

404 Chapter 79. Console-aware modules

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

form you prefer and it does not affect how MVC handles console commands. In order to handle real console requests
you need to define 1 or more console routes.

79.2.1 Free-form text

In order to output free-form text as usage information, getConsoleUsage() can return a string, or an array of
strings, for example:
1 public function getConsoleUsage(Console $console)
2 {
3 return 'User module expects exactly one argument - user name. It will display information for thi
4 }

Note: The text provided is displayed as-is - no trimming or other adjustments will be performed. If youd like to fit
your usage information inside console window, you could check its width with $console->getWidth().

79.2.2 List of commands

If getConsoleUsage() returns and associative array, it will be automatically aligned in 2 columns. The first
column will be prepended with script name (the entry point for the application). This is useful to display different
ways of running the application.

79.2. Basic usage 405

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1 public function getConsoleUsage(Console $console)

2 {
3 return array(
4 'delete user <userEmail>' => 'Delete user with email <userEmail>',
5 'disable user <userEmail>' => 'Disable user with email <userEmail>',
6 'list [all|disabled] users' => 'Show a list of users',
7 'find user [--email=] [--name=]' => 'Attempt to find a user by email or name',
8 );
9 }

Note: Commands and their descriptions will be aligned in two columns, that fit inside Console window. If the window
is resized, some texts might be wrapped but all content will be aligned accordingly. If you dont like this behavior,
you can always return free-form text that will not be transformed in any way.

79.2.3 List of params and flags

Returning an array of arrays from getConsoleUsage() will produce a listing of parameters. This is useful for
explaining flags, switches, possible values and other information. The output will be aligned in multiple columns for
readability.
Below is an example:
1 public function getConsoleUsage(Console $console)
2 {
3 return array(
4 array( '<userEmail>' , 'email of the user' ),
5 array( '--verbose' , 'Turn on verbose mode' ),
6 array( '--quick' , 'Perform a "quick" operation' ),
7 array( '-v' , 'Same as --verbose' ),

406 Chapter 79. Console-aware modules

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

8 array( '-w' , 'Wide output')

9 );
10 }

Using this method, we can display more than 2 columns of information, for example:
1 public function getConsoleUsage(Console $console)
2 {
3 return array(
4 array( '<userEmail>' , 'user email' , 'Full email address of the user to find.' ),
5 array( '--verbose' , 'verbose mode' , 'Display additional information during processin
6 array( '--quick' , '"quick" operation' , 'Do not check integrity, just make changes and f
7 array( '-v' , 'Same as --verbose' , 'Display additional information during processin
8 array( '-w' , 'wide output' , 'When listing users, use the whole available scr
9 );
10 }

79.2. Basic usage 407

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Note: All info will be aligned in one or more columns that fit inside Console window. If the window is resized, some
texts might be wrapped but all content will be aligned accordingly. In case the number of columns changes (i.e. the
array() contains different number of elements) a new table will be started, with new alignment and different column
widths.
If you dont like this behavior, you can always return free-form text that will not be transformed in any way.

79.2.4 Mixing styles

You can use mix together all of the above styles to provide comprehensive usage information, for example:
1 public function getConsoleUsage(Console $console)
2 {
3 return array(
4 'Finding and listing users',
5 'list [all|disabled] users [-w]' => 'Show a list of users',
6 'find user [--email=] [--name=]' => 'Attempt to find a user by email or name',
7

8 array('[all|disabled]', 'Display all users or only disabled accounts'),

9 array('--email=EMAIL', 'Email of the user to find'),
10 array('--name=NAME', 'Full name of the user to find.'),
11 array('-w', 'Wide output - When listing users use the whole available screen w
12

13 'Manipulation of user database:',

14 'delete user <userEmail> [--verbose|-v] [--quick]' => 'Delete user with email <userEmail>',
15 'disable user <userEmail> [--verbose|-v]' => 'Disable user with email <userEmail>',
16

17 array( '<userEmail>' , 'user email' , 'Full email address of the user to change.' ),
18 array( '--verbose' , 'verbose mode' , 'Display additional information during processin

408 Chapter 79. Console-aware modules

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

19 array( '--quick' , '"quick" operation' , 'Do not check integrity, just make changes and f
20 array( '-v' , 'Same as --verbose' , 'Display additional information during processin
21

22 );
23 }

79.3 Best practices

As a reminder, here are the best practices when providing usage for your commands:
1. Your getConsoleBanner should only return a one-line string containing the modules name and its version
(if available).
2. Your getConsoleUsage should not return modules name; it is prepended automatically for you by Console
component.

79.3. Best practices 409

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

410 Chapter 79. Console-aware modules

 CHAPTER 80

Console-aware action controllers

Zend Framework 2 has built-in MVC integration with the console. When the user runs an application in a console
window, the request will be routed. By matching command line arguments against console routes we have defined in
our application, the MVC will invoke a controller and an action.
In this chapter we will learn how ZF2 Controllers can interact with and return output to console window.
See also:
In order for a controller to be invoked, at least one route must point to it. To learn about creating console routes, please
read the chapter Console routes and routing

80.1 Handling console requests

Console requests are very similar to HTTP requests. In fact, they implement a common interface and are created at the
same time in the MVC workflow. Console routes match against command line arguments and provide a defaults
array, which holds the controller and action keys. These correspond with controller aliases in the Service-
Manager, and method names in the controller class. This is analogous to the way HTTP requests are handled in
ZF2.
See also:
To learn about defining and creating controllers, please read the chapter Routing and controllers
In this example well use the following simple route:
1 // FILE: modules/Application/config/module.config.php
2 array(
3 'router' => array(
4 'routes' => array(
5 // HTTP routes are here
6 )
7 ),
8

9 'console' => array(

10 'router' => array(
11 'routes' => array(
12 'list-users' => array(
13 'options' => array(
14 'route' => 'show [all|disabled|deleted]:mode users [--verbose|-v]',
15 'defaults' => array(
16 'controller' => 'Application\Controller\Index',
17 'action' => 'show-users'

411
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

18 )
19 )
20 )
21 )
22 )
23 ),
24 )

This route will match commands such as:

> php public/index.php show users
> php public/index.php show all users
> php public/index.php show disabled users

This route points to the method Application\Controller\IndexController::showUsersAction().

Lets add it to our controller.
1 <?php
2 namespace Application\Controller;
3

4 use Zend\Mvc\Controller\AbstractActionController;
5 use Zend\View\Model\ViewModel;
6

7 class IndexController extends AbstractActionController

8 {
9 public function indexAction()
10 {
11 return new ViewModel(); // display standard index page
12 }
13

14 public function showUsersAction()

15 {
16 $request = $this->getRequest();
17

18 // Check verbose flag

19 $verbose = $request->getParam('verbose') || $request->getParam('v');
20

21 // Check mode
22 $mode = $request->getParam('mode', 'all'); // defaults to 'all'
23

24 $users = array();
25 switch ($mode) {
26 case 'disabled':
27 $users = $this->getServiceLocator()->get('users')->fetchDisabledUsers();
28 break;
29 case 'deleted':
30 $users = $this->getServiceLocator()->get('users')->fetchDeletedUsers();
31 break;
32 case 'all':
33 default:
34 $users = $this->getServiceLocator()->get('users')->fetchAllUsers();
35 break;
36 }
37 }
38 }

We fetch the console request, read parameters, and load users from our (theoretical) users service. In order to make
this method functional, well have to display the result in the console window.

412 Chapter 80. Console-aware action controllers

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

80.2 Sending output to console

The simplest way for our controller to display data in the console window is to return a string. Lets modify our
example to output a list of users:
1 public function showUsersAction()
2 {
3 $request = $this->getRequest();
4

5 // Check verbose flag

6 $verbose = $request->getParam('verbose') || $request->getParam('v');
7

8 // Check mode
9 $mode = $request->getParam('mode', 'all'); // defaults to 'all'
10

11 $users = array();
12 switch ($mode) {
13 case 'disabled':
14 $users = $this->getServiceLocator()->get('users')->fetchDisabledUsers();
15 break;
16 case 'deleted':
17 $users = $this->getServiceLocator()->get('users')->fetchDeletedUsers();
18 break;
19 case 'all':
20 default:
21 $users = $this->getServiceLocator()->get('users')->fetchAllUsers();
22 break;
23 }
24

25 if (count($users) == 0) {
26 // Show an error message in the console
27 return "There are no users in the database\n";
28 }
29

30 $result = '';
31

32 foreach ($users as $user) {

33 $result .= $user->name . ' ' . $user->email . "\n";
34 }
35

36 return $result; // show it in the console

37 }

On line 27, we are checking if the users service found any users - otherwise we are returning an error message that
will be immediately displayed and the application will end.
If there are 1 or more users, we will loop through them with and prepare a listing. It is then returned from the action
and displayed in the console window.

80.3 Are we in a console?

Sometimes we might need to check if our method is being called from a console or from a web request. This is useful
to block certain methods from running in the console or to change their behavior based on that context.
Here is an example of how to check if we are dealing with a console request:

80.2. Sending output to console 413

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1 namespace Application\Controller;
2

3 use Zend\Mvc\Controller\AbstractActionController;
4 use Zend\View\Model\ViewModel;
5 use Zend\Console\Request as ConsoleRequest;
6 use RuntimeException;
7

8 class IndexController extends AbstractActionController

9 {
10 public function showUsersAction()
11 {
12 $request = $this->getRequest();
13

14 // Make sure that we are running in a console and the user has not tricked our
15 // application into running this action from a public web server.
16 if (!$request instanceof ConsoleRequest) {
17 throw new RuntimeException('You can only use this action from a console!');
18 }
19 // ...
20 }
21 }

Note: You do not need to secure all your controllers and methods from console requests. Controller actions will
only be invoked when at least one console route matches it. HTTP and Console routes are separated and defined in
different places in module (and application) configuration.
There is no way to invoke a console action unless there is at least one route pointing to it. Similarly, there is no way
for an HTTP action to be invoked unless there is at least one HTTP route that points to it.

The example below shows how a single controller method can handle both Console and HTTP requests:
1 namespace Application\Controller;
2

3 use Zend\Mvc\Controller\AbstractActionController;
4 use Zend\View\Model\ViewModel;
5 use Zend\Console\Request as ConsoleRequest;
6 use Zend\Http\Request as HttpRequest;
7 use RuntimeException;
8

9 class IndexController extends AbstractActionController

10 {
11 public function showUsersAction()
12 {
13 $request = $this->getRequest();
14

15 $users = array();
16 // ... fetch users from database ...
17

18 if ($request instanceof HttpRequest) {

19 // display a web page with users list
20 return new ViewModel($result);
21 } elseif ($request instanceof ConsoleRequest) {
22 // ... prepare console output and return it ...
23 return $result;
24 } else {
25 throw new RuntimeException('Cannot handle request of type ' . get_class($request));
26 }
27 }

414 Chapter 80. Console-aware action controllers

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

28 }

80.4 Reading values from console parameters

There are several types of parameters recognized by the Console component - all of them are described in the console
routing chapter. Here, well focus on how to retrieve values from distinct parameters and flags.

80.4.1 Positional parameters

After a route matches, we can access both literal parameters and value parameters from within the $request
container.
Assuming we have the following route:
1 // inside of config.console.router.routes:
2 'show-users' => array(
3 'options' => array(
4 'route' => 'show (all|deleted|locked|admin) [<groupName>]'
5 'defaults' => array(
6 'controller' => 'Application\Controller\Users',
7 'action' => 'showusers'
8 )
9 )
10 )

If this route matches, our action can now query parameters in the following way:
1 // an action inside Application\Controller\UsersController:
2 public function showUsersAction()
3 {
4 $request = $this->getRequest();
5

6 // We can access named value parameters directly by their name:

7 $showUsersFromGroup = $request->getParam('groupName');
8

9 // Literal parameters can be checked with isset() against their exact spelling
10 if (isset($request->getParam('all'))) {
11 // show all users
12 } elseif (isset($request->getParam('deleted'))) {
13 // show deleted users
14 }
15 // ...
16 }

In case of parameter alternatives, it is a good idea to assign a name to the group, which simplifies the branching in
our action controllers. We can do this with the following syntax:
1 // inside of config.console.router.routes:
2 'show-users' => array(
3 'options' => array(
4 'route' => 'show (all|deleted|locked|admin):userTypeFilter [<groupName>]'
5 'defaults' => array(
6 'controller' => 'Application\Controller\Users',
7 'action' => 'showusers'
8 )

80.4. Reading values from console parameters 415

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

9 )
10 )

Now we can use a the group name userTypeFilter to check which option has been selected by the user:
1 public function showUsersAction()
2 {
3 $request = $this->getRequest();
4

5 // We can access named value parameters directly by their name:

6 $showUsersFromGroup = $request->getParam('groupName');
7

8 // The selected option from second parameter is now stored under 'userTypeFilter'
9 $userTypeFilter = $request->getParam('userTypeFilter');
10

11 switch ($userTypeFilter) {
12 case 'all':
13 // all users
14 case 'deleted':
15 // deleted users
16 case 'locked'
17 // ...
18 // ...
19 }
20 }

80.4.2 Flags

Flags are directly accessible by name. Value-capturing flags will contain string values, as provided by the user. Non-
value flags will be equal to true.
Given the following route:
1 'find-user' => array(
2 'options' => array(
3 'route' => 'find user [--fast] [--verbose] [--id=] [--firstName=] [--lastName=] [--email=]
4 'defaults' => array(
5 'controller' => 'Application\Controller\Users',
6 'action' => 'find',
7 )
8 )
9 )

We can easily retrieve values in the following fashion:

1 public function findAction()
2 {
3 $request = $this->getRequest();
4

5 // We can retrieve values from value flags using their name

6 $searchId = $request->getParam('id', null); // default null
7 $searchFirstName = $request->getParam('firstName', null);
8 $searchLastName = $request->getParam('lastName', null);
9 $searchEmail = $request->getParam('email', null);
10

11 // Standard flags that have been matched will be equal to TRUE

12 $isFast = (bool) $request->getParam('fast', false); // default false
13 $isVerbose = (bool) $request->getParam('verbose',false);

416 Chapter 80. Console-aware action controllers

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

14

15 if ($isFast) {
16 // perform a fast query ...
17 } else {
18 // perform standard query ...
19 }
20 }

In case of flag alternatives, we have to check each alternative separately:

1 // Assuming our route now reads:
2 // 'route' => 'find user [--fast|-f] [--verbose|-v] ... ',
3 //
4 public function findAction()
5 {
6 $request = $this->getRequest();
7

8 // Check both alternatives

9 $isFast = $request->getParam('fast',false) || $request->getParam('f',false);
10 $isVerbose = $request->getParam('verbose',false) || $request->getParam('v',false);
11

12 // ...
13 }

80.4. Reading values from console parameters 417

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

418 Chapter 80. Console-aware action controllers

 CHAPTER 81

Console adapters

Zend Framework 2 provides console abstraction layer, which works around various bugs and limitations in operating
systems. It handles displaying of colored text, retrieving console window size, charset and provides basic line drawing
capabilities.
See also:
Console Adapters can be used for a low-level access to the console. If you plan on building functional console
applications you do not normally need to use adapters. Make sure to read about console MVC integration first,
because it provides a convenient way for running modular console applications without directly writing to or reading
from console window.

81.1 Retrieving console adapter

If you are using MVC controllers you can obtain Console adapter instance using Service Manager.
1 namespace Application;
2

3 use Zend\Mvc\Controller\AbstractActionController;
4 use Zend\Console\Adapter\AdapterInterface as Console;
5 use Zend\Console\Exception\RuntimeException;
6

7 class ConsoleController extends AbstractActionController

8 {
9 public function testAction()
10 {
11 $console = $this->getServiceLocator()->get('console');
12 if (!$console instanceof Console) {
13 throw new RuntimeException('Cannot obtain console adapter. Are we running in a console?')
14 }
15 }
16 }

If you are using Zend\Console without MVC, we can get adapter using the following code:
1 use Zend\Console\Console;
2 use Zend\Console\Exception\RuntimeException as ConsoleException;
3

4 try {
5 $console = Console::getInstance();
6 } catch (ConsoleException $e) {

419
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

7 // Could not get console adapter - most likely we are not running inside a console window.
8 }

Note: For practical and security reasons, Console::getInstance() will always throw an exception if you
attempt to get console instance in a non-console environment (i.e. when running on a HTTP server). You can override
this behavior by manually instantiating one of Zend\Console\Adapter\* classes.

81.2 Using console adapter

81.2.1 Window size and title

$console->getWidth() (int) Get real console window width in characters.

$console->getHeight() (int) Get real console window height in characters.
$console->getSize() (array) Get an array( $width, $height) with current console window dimensions.
$console->getTitle() (string) Get console window title.

Note: For UTF-8 enabled consoles (terminals) dimensions represent the number of multibyte characters (real char-
acters).

Note: On consoles with virtual buffers (i.e. MS Windows Command Prompt) width and height represent visible
(real) size, without scrolling the window. For example - if the window scrolling width is 120 chars, but its real, visible
width is 80 chars, getWidth() will return 80.

81.2.2 Character set

$console->isUtf8() (boolean) Is the console UTF-8 compatible (can display unicode strings) ?
$console->getCharset() (Zend\Console\Charset\CharsetInterface) This method will return one of
Console\Charset\* classes that represent the readable charset that can be used for line-drawing. It
is automatically detected by the adapter.

81.2.3 Writing to console

$console->write( string $text, $color = null, $bgColor = null ) Write a $text to the console, optionally us-
ing foreground $color and background $bgColor. Color value is one of the constants in
Zend\Console\ColorInterface.
$console->writeLine( string $text, $color = null, $bgColor = null ) Write a single line of $text to the console.
This method will output a newline character at the end of text moving console cursor to next line.
$console->writeAt( string $text, int $x, int $y, $color = null, $bgColor = null ) Write $text at the specified $x
and $y coordinates of console window. Top left corner of the screen has coordinates of $x = 1; $x = 1.
To retrieve far-right and bottom coordinates, use getWidth() and getHeight() methods.

420 Chapter 81. Console adapters

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

81.2.4 Reading from console

$console->readChar( string $mask = null ) (string) Read a single character from console. Optional (string)
$mask can be provided to force entering only a selected set of characters. For example, to read a single digit,
we can use the following syntax: $digit = $console->readChar(0123456789);
$console->readLine( int $maxLength = 2048 ) (string) Read a single line of input from console. Optional (int)
$maxLength can be used to limit the length of data that will be read. The line will be returned without ending
newline character.

81.2.5 Miscellaneous

$console->hideCursor() Hide blinking cursor from console.

$console->showCursor() Show blinking cursor in console.
$console->clear() Clear the screen.
$console->clearLine() Clear the line that the cursor currently sits at.

81.2. Using console adapter 421

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

422 Chapter 81. Console adapters

 CHAPTER 82

Console prompts

In addition to console abstraction layer Zend Framework 2 provides numerous convenience classes for interacting
with the user in console environment. This chapter describes available Zend\Console\Prompt classes and their
example usage.
All prompts can be instantiated as objects and provide show() method.
1 use Zend\Console\Prompt;
2

3 $confirm = new Prompt\Confirm('Are you sure you want to continue?');

4 $result = $confirm->show();
5 if ($result) {
6 // the user chose to continue
7 }

There is also a shorter method of displaying prompts, using static prompt() method:
1 use Zend\Console\Prompt;
2

3 $result = Prompt\Confirm::prompt('Are you sure you want to continue?');

4 if ($result) {
5 // the user chose to continue
6 }

Both of above examples will display something like this:

See also:
Make sure to read about console MVC integration first, because it provides a convenient way for running modular
console applications without directly writing to or reading from console window.

423
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

82.1 Confirm

This prompt is best used for a yes / no type of choices.

Confirm( string $text, string $yesChar = 'y', string $noChar = 'n' )

$text (string) The text to show with the prompt

$yesChar (string) The char that corresponds with YES choice. Defaults to y.
$noChar (string) The char that corresponds with NO choice. Defaults to n.
Example usage:
use Zend\Console\Prompt\Confirm;

if ( Confirm::prompt('Is this the correct answer? [y/n]', 'y', 'n') ) {

$console->write("You chose YES");
} else {
$console->write("You chose NO");
}

82.2 Line

This prompt asks for a line of text input.

Line(
string $text = 'Please enter value',
bool $allowEmpty = false,
bool $maxLength = 2048
)

$text (string) The text to show with the prompt

$allowEmpty (boolean) Can this prompt be skipped, by pressing [ENTER] ? (default fo false)
$maxLength (integer) Maximum length of the input. Anything above this limit will be truncated.
Example usage:
use Zend\Console\Prompt\Line;

$name = Line::prompt(
'What is your name?',
false,
100

424 Chapter 82. Console prompts

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

);

$console->write("Good day to you $name!");

82.3 Char

This prompt reads a single keystroke and optionally validates it against a list o allowed characters.
Char(
string $text = 'Please hit a key',
string $allowedChars = 'abc',
bool $ignoreCase = true,
bool $allowEmpty = false,
bool $echo = true
)

$text (string) The text to show with the prompt

$allowedChars (string) A list of allowed keys that can be pressed.
$ignoreCase (boolean) Ignore the case of chars pressed (default to true)
$allowEmpty (boolean) Can this prompt be skipped, by pressing [ENTER] ? (default fo false)
$echo (boolean) Should the selection be displayed on the screen ?
Example usage:
use Zend\Console\Prompt\Char;

$answer = Char::prompt(
'What is the correct answer? [a,b,c,d,e]',
'abcde',
true,
false,
true
);

if ($answer == 'b') {
$console->write('Correct. This it the right answer');
} else {
$console->write('Wrong ! Try again.');
}

82.3. Char 425

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

82.4 Select

This prompt displays a number of choices and asks the user to pick one.
Select(
string $text = 'Please select one option',
array $options = array(),
bool $allowEmpty = false,
bool $echo = false
)

$text (string) The text to show with the prompt

$options (array) An associative array with keys strokes (chars) and their displayed values.
$allowEmpty (boolean) Can this prompt be skipped, by pressing [ENTER] ? (default fo false)
$echo (boolean) Should the selection be displayed on the screen ?
Example usage:
$options = array(
'a' => 'Apples',
'o' => 'Oranges',
'p' => 'Pears',
'b' => 'Bananas',
'n' => 'none of the above...'
);

$answer = Select::prompt(
'Which fruit do you like the best?',
$options,
false,
false
);

$console->write("You told me that you like " . $options[$answer]);

426 Chapter 82. Console prompts

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

82.5 Password

This prompt reads in a string, without echoing that string back to the console. Useful for password prompts.
1 Password(
2 string $promptText = 'Password : ',
3 boolean $echo = true
4 )

$promptText (string) The text to show with the prompt

$echo (bool) Display * in place of characters. Can be skipped, defaults to true
Example usage:
1 use Zend\Console\Prompt\Password;
2

3 $password = Password::prompt('Enter the secret', true);

4

5 $console->write("Sh!, the password is $password");

See also:
To learn more about accessing console, writing to and reading from it, make sure to read the following chapter:
Console adapters.

82.5. Password 427

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

428 Chapter 82. Console prompts

 CHAPTER 83

Zend\Console\Getopt

83.1 Introduction

The Zend\Console\Getopt class helps command-line applications to parse their options and arguments.
Users may specify command-line arguments when they execute your application. These arguments have meaning to
the application, to change the behavior in some way, or choose resources, or specify parameters. Many options have
developed customary meaning, for example --verbose enables extra output from many applications. Other options
may have a meaning that is different for each application. For example, -c enables different features in grep, ls,
and tar.
Below are a few definitions of terms. Common usage of the terms varies, but this documentation will use the definitions
below.
argument: a string that occurs on the command-line following the name of the command. Arguments may be
options or else may appear without an option, to name resources on which the command operates.
option: an argument that signifies that the command should change its default behavior in some way.
flag: the first part of an option, identifies the purpose of the option. A flag is preceded conventionally by one
or two dashes (- or --). A single dash precedes a single-character flag or a cluster of single-character flags. A
double-dash precedes a multi-character flag. Long flags cannot be clustered.
parameter: the secondary part of an option; a data value that may accompany a flag, if it is applicable to
the given option. For example, many commands accept a --verbose option, but typically this option has no
parameter. However, an option like --user almost always requires a following parameter.
A parameter may be given as a separate argument following a flag argument, or as part of the same argu-
ment string, separated from the flag by an equals symbol (=). The latter form is supported only by long
flags. For example, -u username, --user username, and --user=username are forms supported
by Zend\Console\Getopt.
cluster: multiple single-character flags combined in a single string argument and preceded by a single dash.
For example, ls -1str uses a cluster of four short flags. This command is equivalent to ls -1 -s -t
-r. Only single-character flags can be clustered. You cannot make a cluster of long flags.
For example, in mysql --user=root mydatabase, mysql is a command, --user=root is an option,
--user is a flag, root is a parameter to the option, and mydatabase is an argument but not an option by our
definition.
Zend\Console\Getopt provides an interface to declare which flags are valid for your application, output an error
and usage message if they use an invalid flag, and report to your application code which flags the user specified.

Note: Getopt is not an Application Framework

429
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Zend\Console\Getopt does not interpret the meaning of flags and parameters, nor does this class implement
application workflow or invoke application code. You must implement those actions in your own application code.
You can use the Zend\Console\Getopt class to parse the command-line and provide object-oriented methods
for querying which options were given by a user, but code to use this information to invoke parts of your application
should be in another PHP class.

The following sections describe usage of Zend\Console\Getopt.

430 Chapter 83. Zend\Console\Getopt

 CHAPTER 84

Declaring Getopt Rules

The constructor for the Zend\Console\Getopt class takes from one to three arguments. The first argument
declares which options are supported by your application. This class supports alternative syntax forms for declaring
the options. See the sections below for the format and usage of these syntax forms.
The constructor takes two more arguments, both of which are optional. The second argument may contain the
command-line arguments. This defaults to $_SERVER[argv].
The third argument of the constructor may contain an configuration options to customize the behavior of
Zend\Console\Getopt. See Adding Configuration for reference on the options available.

84.1 Declaring Options with the Short Syntax

Zend\Console\Getopt supports a compact syntax similar to that used by GNU Getopt (see
http://www.gnu.org/software/libc/manual/html_node/Getopt.html. This syntax supports only single-character
flags. In a single string, you type each of the letters that correspond to flags supported by your application. A letter
followed by a colon character (:) indicates a flag that requires a parameter.

84.1.1 Using the Short Syntax

1 $opts = new Zend\Console\Getopt('abp:');

The example above shows using Zend\Console\Getopt to declare that options may be given as -a, -b, or -p.
The latter flag requires a parameter.
The short syntax is limited to flags of a single character. Aliases, parameter types, and help strings are not supported
in the short syntax.

84.2 Declaring Options with the Long Syntax

A different syntax with more features is also available. This syntax allows you to specify aliases for flags, types of
option parameters, and also help strings to describe usage to the user. Instead of the single string used in the short
syntax to declare the options, the long syntax uses an associative array as the first argument to the constructor.
The key of each element of the associative array is a string with a format that names the flag, with any aliases, separated
by the pipe symbol (|). Following this series of flag aliases, if the option requires a parameter, is an equals symbol
(=) with a letter that stands for the type of the parameter:
=s for a string parameter

431
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

=w for a word parameter (a string containing no whitespace)

=i for an integer parameter
If the parameter is optional, use a dash (-) instead of the equals symbol.
The value of each element in the associative array is a help string to describe to a user how to use your program.

84.2.1 Using the Long Syntax

1 $opts = new Zend\Console\Getopt(

2 array(
3 'apple|a' => 'apple option, with no parameter',
4 'banana|b=i' => 'banana option, with required integer parameter',
5 'pear|p-s' => 'pear option, with optional string parameter'
6 )
7 );

In the example declaration above, there are three options. --apple and -a are aliases for each other, and the option
takes no parameter. --banana and -b are aliases for each other, and the option takes a mandatory integer parameter.
Finally, --pear and -p are aliases for each other, and the option may take an optional string parameter.

432 Chapter 84. Declaring Getopt Rules

 CHAPTER 85

Fetching Options and Arguments

After you have declared the options that the Zend\Console\Getopt object should recognize, and supply argu-
ments from the command-line or an array, you can query the object to find out which options were specified by a
user in a given command-line invocation of your program. The class implements magic methods so you can query for
options by name.
The parsing of the data is deferred until the first query you make against the Zend\Console\Getopt object to find
out if an option was given, the object performs its parsing. This allows you to use several method calls to configure
the options, arguments, help strings, and configuration options before parsing takes place.

85.1 Handling Getopt Exceptions

If the user gave any invalid options on the command-line, the parsing function throws a
Zend\Console\Exception\RuntimeException. You should catch this exception in your application
code. You can use the parse() method to force the object to parse the arguments. This is useful because you can
invoke parse() in a try block. If it passes, you can be sure that the parsing wont throw an exception again. The
exception thrown has a custom method getUsageMessage(), which returns as a string the formatted set of usage
messages for all declared options.

85.1.1 Catching Getopt Exceptions

1 try {
2 $opts = new Zend\Console\Getopt('abp:');
3 $opts->parse();
4 } catch (Zend\Console\Exception\RuntimeException $e) {
5 echo $e->getUsageMessage();
6 exit;
7 }

Cases where parsing throws an exception include:

Option given is not recognized.
Option requires a parameter but none was given.
Option parameter is of the wrong type. E.g. a non-numeric string when an integer was required.

433
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

85.2 Fetching Options by Name

You can use the getOption() method to query the value of an option. If the option had a parameter, this method
returns the value of the parameter. If the option had no parameter but the user did specify it on the command-line, the
method returns TRUE. Otherwise the method returns NULL.

85.2.1 Using getOption()

1 $opts = new Zend\Console\Getopt('abp:');

2 $b = $opts->getOption('b');
3 $p_parameter = $opts->getOption('p');

Alternatively, you can use the magic __get() function to retrieve the value of an option as if it were a class member
variable. The __isset() magic method is also implemented.

85.2.2 Using __get() and __isset() Magic Methods

1 $opts = new Zend\Console\Getopt('abp:');

2 if (isset($opts->b)) {
3 echo "I got the b option.\n";
4 }
5 $p_parameter = $opts->p; // null if not set

If your options are declared with aliases, you may use any of the aliases for an option in the methods above.

85.3 Reporting Options

There are several methods to report the full set of options given by the user on the current command-line.
As a string: use the toString() method. The options are returned as a space-separated string of
flag=value pairs. The value of an option that does not have a parameter is the literal string TRUE.
As an array: use the toArray() method. The options are returned in a simple integer-indexed array of strings,
the flag strings followed by parameter strings, if any.
As a string containing JSON data: use the toJson() method.
As a string containing XML data: use the toXml() method.
In all of the above dumping methods, the flag string is the first string in the corresponding list of aliases. For example,
if the option aliases were declared like verbose|v, then the first string, verbose, is used as the canonical name of
the option. The name of the option flag does not include any preceding dashes.

85.4 Fetching Non-option Arguments

After option arguments and their parameters have been parsed from the command-line, there may be additional argu-
ments remaining. You can query these arguments using the getRemainingArgs() method. This method returns
an array of the strings that were not part of any options.

434 Chapter 85. Fetching Options and Arguments

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

85.4.1 Using getRemainingArgs()

1 $opts = new Zend\Console\Getopt('abp:');

2 $opts->setArguments(array('-p', 'p_parameter', 'filename'));
3 $args = $opts->getRemainingArgs(); // returns array('filename')

Zend\Console\Getopt supports the GNU convention that an argument consisting of a double-dash signifies the
end of options. Any arguments following this signifier must be treated as non-option arguments. This is useful if you
might have a non-option argument that begins with a dash. For example: rm -- -filename-with-dash.

85.4. Fetching Non-option Arguments 435

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

436 Chapter 85. Fetching Options and Arguments

 CHAPTER 86

Configuring Zend\Console\Getopt

86.1 Adding Option Rules

You can add more option rules in addition to those you specified in the Zend\Console\Getopt constructor, using
the addRules() method. The argument to addRules() is the same as the first argument to the class constructor.
It is either a string in the format of the short syntax options specification, or else an associative array in the format of
a long syntax options specification. See Declaring Getopt Rules for details on the syntax for specifying options.

86.1.1 Using addRules()

1 $opts = new Zend\Console\Getopt('abp:');

2 $opts->addRules(
3 array(
4 'verbose|v' => 'Print verbose output'
5 )
6 );

The example above shows adding the --verbose option with an alias of -v to a set of options defined in the call
to the constructor. Notice that you can mix short format options and long format options in the same instance of
Zend\Console\Getopt.

86.2 Adding Help Messages

In addition to specifying the help strings when declaring option rules in the long format, you can associate help strings
with option rules using the setHelp() method. The argument to the setHelp() method is an associative array,
in which the key is a flag, and the value is a corresponding help string.

86.2.1 Using setHelp()

1 $opts = new Zend\Console\Getopt('abp:');

2 $opts->setHelp(
3 array(
4 'a' => 'apple option, with no parameter',
5 'b' => 'banana option, with required integer parameter',
6 'p' => 'pear option, with optional string parameter'
7 )
8 );

437
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

If you declared options with aliases, you can use any of the aliases as the key of the associative array.
The setHelp() method is the only way to define help strings if you declared the options using the short syntax.

86.3 Adding Option Aliases

You can declare aliases for options using the setAliases() method. The argument is an associative array, whose
key is a flag string declared previously, and whose value is a new alias for that flag. These aliases are merged with any
existing aliases. In other words, aliases you declared earlier are still in effect.
An alias may be declared only once. If you try to redefine an alias, a Zend\Console\Getopt\Exception is
thrown.

86.3.1 Using setAliases()

1 $opts = new Zend\Console\Getopt('abp:');

2 $opts->setAliases(
3 array(
4 'a' => 'apple',
5 'a' => 'apfel',
6 'p' => 'pear'
7 )
8 );

In the example above, after declaring these aliases, -a, --apple and --apfel are aliases for each other. Also -p
and --pear are aliases for each other.
The setAliases() method is the only way to define aliases if you declared the options using the short syntax.

86.4 Adding Argument Lists

By default, Zend\Console\Getopt uses $_SERVER[argv] for the array of command-line arguments to

parse. You can alternatively specify the array of arguments as the second constructor argument. Finally, you can
append more arguments to those already used using the addArguments() method, or you can replace the current
array of arguments using the setArguments() method. In both cases, the parameter to these methods is a simple
array of strings. The former method appends the array to the current arguments, and the latter method substitutes the
array for the current arguments.

86.4.1 Using addArguments() and setArguments()

1 // By default, the constructor uses $_SERVER['argv']

2 $opts = new Zend\Console\Getopt('abp:');
3

4 // Append an array to the existing arguments

5 $opts->addArguments(array('-a', '-p', 'p_parameter', 'non_option_arg'));
6

7 // Substitute a new array for the existing arguments

8 $opts->setArguments(array('-a', '-p', 'p_parameter', 'non_option_arg'));

438 Chapter 86. Configuring Zend\Console\Getopt

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

86.5 Adding Configuration

The third parameter to the Zend\Console\Getopt constructor is an array of configuration options that affect
the behavior of the object instance returned. You can also specify configuration options using the setOptions()
method, or you can set an individual option using the setOption() method.

Note: Clarifying the Term option

The term option is used for configuration of the Zend\Console\Getopt class to match terminology used
elsewhere in Zend Framework. These are not the same things as the command-line options that are parsed by the
Zend\Console\Getopt class.

The currently supported options have const definitions in the class. The options, their const identifiers (with literal
values in parentheses) are listed below:
Zend\Console\Getopt::CONFIG_DASHDASH (dashDash), if TRUE, enables the special flag -- to
signify the end of flags. Command-line arguments following the double-dash signifier are not interpreted as
options, even if the arguments start with a dash. This configuration option is TRUE by default.
Zend\Console\Getopt::CONFIG_IGNORECASE (ignoreCase), if TRUE, makes flags aliases of each
other if they differ only in their case. That is, -a and -A will be considered to be synonymous flags. This
configuration option is FALSE by default.
Zend\Console\Getopt::CONFIG_RULEMODE (ruleMode) may have values
Zend\Console\Getopt::MODE_ZEND (zend) and Zend\Console\Getopt::MODE_GNU (gnu).
It should not be necessary to use this option unless you extend the class with additional syntax forms. The two
modes supported in the base Zend\Console\Getopt class are unambiguous. If the specifier is a string, the
class assumes MODE_GNU, otherwise it assumes MODE_ZEND. But if you extend the class and add more syntax
forms, you may need to specify the mode using this option.
More configuration options may be added as future enhancements of this class.
The two arguments to the setOption() method are a configuration option name and an option value.

86.5.1 Using setOption()

1 $opts = new Zend\Console\Getopt('abp:');

2 $opts->setOption('ignoreCase', true);

The argument to the setOptions() method is an associative array. The keys of this array are the configuration
option names, and the values are configuration values. This is also the array format used in the class constructor. The
configuration values you specify are merged with the current configuration; you dont have to list all options.

86.5.2 Using setOptions()

1 $opts = new Zend\Console\Getopt('abp:');

2 $opts->setOptions(
3 array(
4 'ignoreCase' => true,
5 'dashDash' => false
6 )
7 );

86.5. Adding Configuration 439

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

440 Chapter 86. Configuring Zend\Console\Getopt

 CHAPTER 87

Introduction to Zend\Crypt

Zend\Crypt provides support of some cryptographic tools. The available features are:
encrypt-then-authenticate using symmetric ciphers (the authentication step is provided using HMAC);
encrypt/decrypt using symmetric and public key algorithm (e.g. RSA algorithm);
generate digital sign using public key algorithm (e.g. RSA algorithm);
key exchange using the Diffie-Hellman method;
Key derivation function (e.g. using PBKDF2 algorithm);
Secure password hash (e.g. using Bcrypt algorithm);
generate Hash values;
generate HMAC values;
The main scope of this component is to offer an easy and secure way to protect and authenticate sensitive data in PHP.
Because the use of cryptography is not so easy we recommend to use the Zend\Crypt component only if you have
a minimum background on this topic. For an introduction to cryptography we suggest the following references:
Dan Boneh Cryptography course Stanford University, Coursera - free online course
N.Ferguson, B.Schneier, and T.Kohno, Cryptography Engineering, John Wiley & Sons (2010)
B.Schneier Applied Cryptography, John Wiley & Sons (1996)

Note: PHP-CryptLib
Most of the ideas behind the Zend\Crypt component have been inspired by the PHP-CryptLib project of Anthony
Ferrara. PHP-CryptLib is an all-inclusive pure PHP cryptographic library for all cryptographic needs. It is meant to
be easy to install and use, yet extensible and powerful enough for even the most experienced developer.

441
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

442 Chapter 87. Introduction to Zend\Crypt

 CHAPTER 88

Encrypt/decrypt using block ciphers

Zend\Crypt\BlockCipher implements the encrypt-then-authenticate mode using HMAC to provide authentica-

tion.
The symmetric cipher can be chosen with a specific adapter that implements the
Zend\Crypt\Symmetric\SymmetricInterface. We support the standard algorithms of the Mcrypt
extension. The adapter that implements the Mcrypt is Zend\Crypt\Symmetric\Mcrypt.
In the following code we reported an example on how to use the BlockCipher class to encrypt-then-authenticate a string
using the AES block cipher (with a key of 256 bit) and the HMAC algorithm (using the SHA-256 hash function).
1 use Zend\Crypt\BlockCipher;
2

3 $blockCipher = BlockCipher::factory('mcrypt', array('algo' => 'aes'));

4 $blockCipher->setKey('encryption key');
5 $result = $blockCipher->encrypt('this is a secret message');
6 echo "Encrypted text: $result \n";

The BlockCipher is initialized using a factory method with the name of the cipher adapter to use (mcrypt) and the
parameters to pass to the adapter (the AES algorithm). In order to encrypt a string we need to specify an encryption
key and we used the setKey() method for that scope. The encryption is provided by the encrypt() method.
The output of the encryption is a string, encoded in Base64 (default), that contains the HMAC value, the IV vector, and
the encrypted text. The encryption mode used is the CBC (with a random IV by default) and SHA256 as default hash
algorithm of the HMAC. The Mcrypt adapter encrypts using the PKCS#7 padding mechanism by default. You can
specify a different padding method using a special adapter for that (Zend\Crypt\Symmetric\Padding). The encryption
and authentication keys used by the BlockCipher are generated with the PBKDF2 algorithm, used as key derivation
function from the users key specified using the setKey() method.

Note: Key size

BlockCipher try to use always the longest size of the key for the specified cipher. For instance, for the AES algorithm
it uses 256 bits and for the Blowfish algorithm it uses 448 bits.

You can change all the default settings passing the values to the factory parameters. For instance, if you want to use
the Blowfish algorithm, with the CFB mode and the SHA512 hash function for HMAC you have to initialize the class
as follow:
1 use Zend\Crypt\BlockCipher;
2

3 $blockCipher = BlockCipher::factory('mcrypt', array(

4 'algo' => 'blowfish',
5 'mode' => 'cfb',

443
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

6 'hash' => 'sha512'

7 ));

Note: Recommendation
If you are not familiar with symmetric encryption techniques we strongly suggest to use the default values of the
BlockCipher class. The default values are: AES algorithm, CBC mode, HMAC with SHA256, PKCS#7 padding.

To decrypt a string we can use the decrypt() method. In order to successfully decrypt a string we have to configure
the BlockCipher with the same parameters of the encryption.
We can also initialize the BlockCipher manually without use the factory method. We can inject the symmetric cipher
adapter directly to the constructor of the BlockCipher class. For instance, we can rewrite the previous example as
follow:
1 use Zend\Crypt\BlockCipher;
2 use Zend\Crypt\Symmetric\Mcrypt;
3

4 $blockCipher = new BlockCipher(new Mcrypt(array('algo' => 'aes')));

5 $blockCipher->setKey('encryption key');
6 $result = $blockCipher->encrypt('this is a secret message');
7 echo "Encrypted text: $result \n";

444 Chapter 88. Encrypt/decrypt using block ciphers

 CHAPTER 89

Encrypt/decrypt a file

Zend\Crypt\FileCipher implements the encryption of decryption of a file using a symmetric cipher in CBC
mode with the encrypt-then-authenticate approach, using HMAC to provide authentication (the same solution used by
Zend\Crypt\BlockCipher component).
Encrypt and decrypt a file is not an easy task, especially a big file. For instance, in CBC mode you must be sure to
handle the IV correctly for each block. That means, if you are reading a big file you need to use a buffer and be sure
to use the last block of the buffer as new IV for the next encryption step.
The FileCipher uses a symmetric cipher, with the Zend\Crypt\Symmetric\Mcrypt component.
The usage of this component is very simple, you just need to create an instance of FileCipher and specify the key,
and you are ready to encrypt/decrypt any file:
1 use Zend\Crypt\FileCipher;
2

3 $fileCipher = new FileCipher;

4 $fileCipher->setKey('encryption key');
5 // encryption
6 if ($fileCipher->encrypt('path/to/file_to_encrypt', 'path/to/output')) {
7 echo "The file has been encrypted successfully\n";
8 }
9 // decryption
10 if ($fileCipher->decrypt('path/to/file_to_decrypt', 'path/to/output')) {
11 echo "The file has been decrypted successfully\n";
12 }

By default FileCipher uses the AES encryption algorithm (with a key of 256 bit) and the SHA-256 hash algorithm
to authenticate the data using the HMAC function. This component uses the PBKDF2 key derivation algorithm to
generate the encryption key and the authentication key, for the HMAC, based on the key specified using the method
setKey().
If you want to change the encryption algorithm, you can use the setCipherAlgorithm() function, for in-
stance you can specity to use the Blowfish encryption algorihtm using setCipherAlgorithm(blowfish).
You can retrieve the list of all the supported encryption algorithm in your environment using the function
getCipherSupportedAlgorithms(), it will return an array of all the algorithm name.
If you need to customize the cipher algorithm, for instance changing the Padding mode, you can inject your Mcrypt
object in the FileCipher using the setCipher() method. The only parameter of the cipher that you cannot
change is the cipher mode, that will be CBC in any case.

Note: Output format

The output of the encryption file is in binary format. We used this format to do not impact on the output size. If you
encrypt a file using the FileCipher component, you will notice that the output file size is almost the same of the input

445
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

size, just some bytes more to store the HMAC and the IV vector. The format of the output is the concatenation of the
HMAC, the IV and the encrypted file.

446 Chapter 89. Encrypt/decrypt a file

 CHAPTER 90

Key derivation function

In cryptography, a key derivation function (or KDF) derives one or more secret keys from a secret value such as
a master key or other known information such as a password or passphrase using a pseudo-random function. For
instance, a KDF function can be used to generate encryption or authentication keys from a user password. The
Zend\Crypt\Key\Derivation implements a key derivation function using specific adapters.
User passwords are not really suitable to be used as keys in cryptographic algorithms, since users normally choose
keys they can write on keyboard. These passwords use only 6 to 7 bits per character (or less). It is highly recommended
to use always a KDF function to transform a users password in a cryptographic key.
The output of the following key derivation functions is a binary string. If you need to store the value in a database
or a different persistent storage, we suggest to convert it in Base64 format, using base64_encode() function, or in hex
format, using the bin2hex() function.

90.1 Pbkdf2 adapter

Pbkdf2 is a KDF that applies a pseudorandom function, such as a cryptographic hash, to the input password or
passphrase along with a salt value and repeats the process many times to produce a derived key, which can then
be used as a cryptographic key in subsequent operations. The added computational work makes password cracking
much more difficult, and is known as key stretching.
In the example below we show a typical usage of the Pbkdf2 adapter.
1 use Zend\Crypt\Key\Derivation\Pbkdf2;
2 use Zend\Math\Rand;
3

4 $pass = 'password';
5 $salt = Rand::getBytes(32, true);
6 $key = Pbkdf2::calc('sha256', $pass, $salt, 10000, 32);
7

8 printf ("Original password: %s\n", $pass);

9 printf ("Derived key (hex): %s\n", bin2hex($key));

The Pbkdf2 adapter takes the password ($pass) and generate a binary key of 32 bytes. The syntax is
calc($hash, $pass, $salt, $iterations, $length) where $hash is the name of the hash func-
tion to use, $pass is the password, $salt is a pseudo random value, $iterations is the number of iterations
of the algorithm and $length is the size of the key to be generated. We used the Rand::getBytes function of
the Zend\Math\Rand class to generate a random string of 32 bytes for the salt, using a strong generator (the true
value means the usage of a cryptographically strong generator).
The number of iterations is a very important parameter for the security of the algorithm. Bigger values guarantee more
security. There is not a fixed value for that because the number of iterations depends on the CPU power. You should

447
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

always choose a number of iteration that prevent brute force attacks. For instance, a value of 1000000 iterations, that
is equal to 1 sec of elaboration for the PBKDF2 algorithm, is enough secure using an Intel Core i5-2500 CPU at 3.3
Ghz.

90.2 SaltedS2k adapter

The SaltedS2k algorithm uses an hash function and a salt to generate a key based on a users password. This algorithm
doesnt use a parameter that specify the number of iterations and for that reason its considered less secure compared
with Pbkdf2. We suggest to use the SaltedS2k algorithm only if you really need it.
Below is reported a usage example of the SaltedS2k adapter to generate a key of 32 bytes.
1 use Zend\Crypt\Key\Derivation\SaltedS2k;
2 use Zend\Math\Rand;
3

4 $pass = 'password';
5 $salt = Rand::getBytes(32, true);
6 $key = SaltedS2k::calc('sha256', $pass, $salt, 32);
7

8 printf ("Original password: %s\n", $pass);

9 printf ("Derived key (hex): %s\n", bin2hex($key));

90.3 Scrypt adapter

The scrypt algorithm uses the algorithm Salsa20/8 core and Pbkdf2-SHA256 to generate a key based on a users
password. This algorithm has been designed to be more secure against hardware brute-force attacks than alternative
functions such as Pbkdf2 or bcrypt.
The scrypt algorithm is based on the idea of memory-hard algorithms and sequential memory-hard functions. A
memory-hard algorithm is thus an algorithm which asymptotically uses almost as many memory locations as it uses
operations[#f1]_. A natural way to reduce the advantage provided by an attackers ability to construct highly parallel
circuits is to increase the size of a single key derivation circuit if a circuit is twice as large, only half as many copies can
be placed on a given area of silicon while still operating within the resources available to software implementations,
including a powerful CPU and large amounts of RAM.
From a test executed on modern (2009) hardware, if 5 seconds are spent computing a derived key, the
cost of a hardware brute-force attack against scrypt is roughly 4000 times greater than the cost of a similar
attack against bcrypt (to find the same password), and 20000 times greater than a similar attack against
Pbkdf2. Colin Percival (the author of scrypt algorithm)
This algorithm uses 4 parameters to generate a key of 32 bytes:
salt, a random string;
N, the CPU cost;
r, the memory cost;
p, the parallelization cost.
Below is reported a usage example of the Scrypt adapter.
1 use Zend\Crypt\Key\Derivation\Scrypt;
2 use Zend\Math\Rand;
3

4 $pass = 'password';

448 Chapter 90. Key derivation function

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

5 $salt = Rand::getBytes(32, true);

6 $key = Scrypt::calc($pass, $salt, 2048, 2, 1, 32);
7

8 printf ("Original password: %s\n", $pass);

9 printf ("Derived key (hex): %s\n", bin2hex($key));

Note: Performance of the scrypt implementation

The aim of the scrypt algorithm is to generate secure derived key preventing brute force attacks. Just like the other
derivation functions, the more time (and memory) we spent executing the algorithm, the more secure the derived
key will be. Unfortunately a pure PHP implementation of the scrypt algorithm is very slow compared with the C
implementation (this is always true, if you compare execution time of C with PHP). If you want use a faster scrypt
algorithm we suggest to install the scrypt PECL extension. The Scrypt adapter of Zend Framework is able to recognize
if the PECL extension is loaded and use it instead of the pure PHP implementation.

90.3. Scrypt adapter 449

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

450 Chapter 90. Key derivation function

 CHAPTER 91

Password

In the Zend\Crypt\Password namespace you can find all the password formats supported by Zend Framework.
We currently support the following passwords:
bcrypt;
Apache (htpasswd).
If you need to choose a password format to store the users password we suggest to use the bcrypt algorithm that is
considered secure against brute forcing attacks (see the details below).

91.1 Bcrypt

The bcrypt algorithm is an hashing algorithm that is widely used and suggested by the security community to store
users passwords in a secure way.
Classic hashing mechanisms like MD5 or SHA, with or without a salt value, are not considered secure anymore (read
this post to know why).
The security of bcrypt is related to the speed of the algorithm. Bcrypt is very slow, it can request even a second to
generate an hash value. That means a brute force attack is impossible to execute, due to the amount of time that its
need.
Bcrypt uses a cost parameter that specify the number of cycles to use in the algorithm. Increasing this number the
algorithm will spend more time to generate the hash output. The cost parameter is represented by an integer value
between 4 to 31. The default cost value of the Zend\Crypt\Password\Bcrypt component is 10, that means
about 0.07 second using a CPU Intel i5 at 3.3Ghz (the cost parameter is a relative value according to the speed of the
CPU used). We changed the default value of the cost parameter from 14 to 10, starting from Zend Framework 2.3.0,
due to high computational time to prevent potential denial-of-service attacks (you can read this article Aggressive
password stretching for more information).
If you want to change the cost parameter of the bcrypt algorithm you can use the setCost() method. Please note,
if you change the cost parameter, the resulting hash will be different. This will not affect the verification process of
the algorithm, therefore not breaking the password hashes you already have stored. Bcrypt reads the cost parameter
from the hash value, during the password authentication. All of the parts needed to verify the hash are all together,
separated with $s, first the algorithm, then the cost, the salt, and then finally the hash.
The example below shows how to use the bcrypt algorithm to store a users password:
1 use Zend\Crypt\Password\Bcrypt;
2

3 $bcrypt = new Bcrypt();

4 $securePass = $bcrypt->create('user password');

451
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

The output of the create() method is the hash of the password. This value can then be stored in a repository like a
database (the output is a string of 60 bytes).

Note: Bcrypt truncates input > 72 bytes

The input string of the bcrypt algorithm is limited to 72 bytes. If you use a string with a length
more than this limit, bcrypt will consider only the first 72 bytes. If you need to use a longer string,
you should pre-hash it using SHA256 prior to passing it to the bcrypt algorithm: $hashedPassword =
\Zend\Crypt\Hash::compute(sha256, $password);

To verify if a given password is valid against a bcrypt value you can use the verify() method. An example is
reported below:
1 use Zend\Crypt\Password\Bcrypt;
2

3 $bcrypt = new Bcrypt();

4 $securePass = 'the stored bcrypt value';
5 $password = 'the password to check';
6

7 if ($bcrypt->verify($password, $securePass)) {
8 echo "The password is correct! \n";
9 } else {
10 echo "The password is NOT correct.\n";
11 }

In the bcrypt uses also a salt value to improve the randomness of the algorithm. By default, the
Zend\Crypt\Password\Bcrypt component generates a random salt for each hash. If you want to specify a
preselected salt you can use the setSalt() method.
We provide also a getSalt() method to retrieve the salt specified by the user. The salt and the cost parameter can
be also specified during the constructor of the class, below is reported an example:
1 use Zend\Crypt\Password\Bcrypt;
2

3 $bcrypt = new Bcrypt(array(

4 'salt' => 'random value',
5 'cost' => 11
6 ));

Note: Bcrypt with non-ASCII passwords (8-bit characters)

The bcrypt implementation used by PHP < 5.3.7 can contains a security flaw if the password uses 8-bit characters
(heres the security report). The impact of this bug was that most (but not all) passwords containing non-ASCII char-
acters with the 8th bit set were hashed incorrectly, resulting in password hashes incompatible with those of OpenBSDs
original implementation of bcrypt. This security flaw has been fixed starting from PHP 5.3.7 and the prefix used in the
output was changed to $2y$ in order to put evidence on the correctness of the hash value. If you are using PHP <
5.3.7 with 8-bit passwords, the Zend\Crypt\Password\Bcrypt throws an exception suggesting to upgrade to
PHP 5.3.7+ or use only 7-bit passwords.

91.2 Apache

The Zend\Crypt\Password\Apache supports all the password formats used by Apache (htpasswd). These
formats are:
CRYPT, uses the traditional Unix crypt(3) function with a randomly-generated 32-bit salt (only 12 bits used)
and the first 8 characters of the password;

452 Chapter 91. Password

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

SHA1, {SHA} + Base64-encoded SHA-1 digest of the password;

MD5, $apr1$ + the result of an Apache-specific algorithm using an iterated (1,000 times) MD5 digest of
various combinations of a random 32-bit salt and the password.
Digest, the MD5 hash of the string user:realm:password as a 32-character string of hexadecimal digits. realm is
the Authorization Realm argument to the AuthName directive in httpd.conf.
In order to specify the format of the Apaches password you can use the setFormat() method. An example with
all the formats usage is reported below:
1 use Zend\Crypt\Password\Apache;
2

3 $apache = new Apache();

4

5 $apache->setFormat('crypt');
6 printf ("CRYPT output: %s\n", $apache->create('password'));
7

8 $apache->setFormat('sha1');
9 printf ("SHA1 output: %s\n", $apache->create('password'));
10

11 $apache->setFormat('md5');
12 printf ("MD5 output: %s\n", $apache->create('password'));
13

14 $apache->setFormat('digest');
15 $apache->setUserName('enrico');
16 $apache->setAuthName('test');
17 printf ("Digest output: %s\n", $apache->create('password'));

You can also specify the format of the password during the constructor of the class:
1 use Zend\Crypt\Password\Apache;
2

3 $apache = new Apache(array(

4 'format' => 'md5'
5 ));

Other possible parameters to pass in the constructor are username and authname, for the digest format.

91.2. Apache 453

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

454 Chapter 91. Password

 CHAPTER 92

Public key cryptography

Public-key cryptography refers to a cryptographic system requiring two separate keys, one of which is secret and one
of which is public. Although different, the two parts of the key pair are mathematically linked. One key locks or
encrypts the plaintext, and the other unlocks or decrypts the cyphertext. Neither key can perform both functions. One
of these keys is published or public, while the other is kept private.
In Zend Framework we implemented two public key algorithms: Diffie-Hellman key exchange and RSA.

92.1 Diffie-Hellman

The Diffie-Hellman algorithm is a specific method of exchanging cryptographic keys. It is one of the earliest practical
examples of key exchange implemented within the field of cryptography. The DiffieHellman key exchange method
allows two parties that have no prior knowledge of each other to jointly establish a shared secret key over an insecure
communications channel. This key can then be used to encrypt subsequent communications using a symmetric key
cipher.
The diagram of operation of the Diffie-Hellman algorithm can be defined by the following picture (taken by the Diffie-
Hellman Wikipedia page):
The schemas colors represent the parameters of the algorithm. Here is reported an example of usage using the
Zend\Crypt\PublicKey\DiffieHellman class:
1 use Zend\Crypt\PublicKey\DiffieHellman;
2

3 $aliceOptions = array(
4 'prime' => '1551728981814736974712322577637155399157248019669154044797077953140576293785419175
5 '4236981889937278161526466314385615958256881888899512721588426754199503412587065565
6 '1048705376814767265132557470407658574792912915723345106432450947150072296210941943
7 '984760375594985848253359305585439638443',
8 'generator'=> '2',
9 'private' => '9920931406657259523640856959196798855714124956149426748625180803553539633227862014
10 '81312712891672623072630995180324388841681491857745515696789091127409515009250358965
11 '46342049838178521379132153348139908016819196219448310107072632515749339055798122538
12 '04828702523796951800575031871051678091'
13 );
14

15 $bobOptions = array(
16 'prime' => $aliceOptions['prime'],
17 'generator'=> '2',
18 'private' => '3341173579263955862573363571789256361254818065040216115107747831484146370794889978
19 '1232563473041055194677275288017786897281696355182174038670007603421340815392469256
20 '6346473315660054548451083307242700347420706465071483108330449773716038209708335687

455
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

456 Chapter 92. Public key cryptography

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

21 '31616972608703322302585471319261275664'
22 );
23

24 $alice = new DiffieHellman($aliceOptions['prime'], $aliceOptions['generator'], $aliceOptions['private

25 $bob = new DiffieHellman($bobOptions['prime'], $bobOptions['generator'], $bobOptions['private']);
26

27 $alice->generateKeys();
28 $bob->generateKeys();
29

30 $aliceSecretKey = $alice->computeSecretKey($bob->getPublicKey(DiffieHellman::FORMAT_BINARY),
31 DiffieHellman::FORMAT_BINARY,
32 DiffieHellman::FORMAT_BINARY);
33

34 $bobSecretKey = $bob->computeSecretKey($alice->getPublicKey(DiffieHellman::FORMAT_BINARY),
35 DiffieHellman::FORMAT_BINARY,
36 DiffieHellman::FORMAT_BINARY);
37

38 if ($aliceSecretKey !== $bobSecretKey) {

39 echo "ERROR!\n";
40 } else {
41 printf("The secret key is: %s\n", base64_encode($aliceSecretKey));
42 }

The parameters of the Diffie-Hellman class are: a prime number (p), a generator (g) that is a primitive root mod p
and a private integer number. The security of the Diffie-Hellman exchange algorithm is related to the choice of these
parameters. To know how to choose secure numbers you can read the RFC 3526 document.

Note: The Zend\Crypt\PublicKey\DiffieHellman class use by default the OpenSSL extension of PHP to
generate the parameters. If you dont want to use the OpenSSL library you have to set the useOpensslExtension
static method to false.

92.2 RSA

RSA is an algorithm for public-key cryptography that is based on the presumed difficulty of factoring large integers,
the factoring problem. A user of RSA creates and then publishes the product of two large prime numbers, along with
an auxiliary value, as their public key. The prime factors must be kept secret. Anyone can use the public key to encrypt
a message, but with currently published methods, if the public key is large enough, only someone with knowledge of
the prime factors can feasibly decode the message. Whether breaking RSA encryption is as hard as factoring is an
open question known as the RSA problem.
The RSA algorithm can be used to encrypt/decrypt message and also to provide authenticity and integrity generating
a digital signature of a message. Suppose that Alice wants to send an encrypted message to Bob. Alice must use
the public key of Bob to encrypt the message. Bob can decrypt the message using his private key. Because Bob he
is the only one that can access to his private key, he is the only one that can decrypt the message. If Alice wants to
provide authenticity and integrity of a message to Bob she can use her private key to sign the message. Bob can check
the correctness of the digital signature using the public key of Alice. Alice can provide encryption, authenticity and
integrity of a message to Bob using the previous schemas in sequence, applying the encryption first and the digital
signature after.
Below we reported some examples of usage of the Zend\Crypt\PublicKey\Rsa class in order to:
generate a public key and a private key;
encrypt/decrypt a string;
generate a digital signature of a file.

92.2. RSA 457

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

92.2.1 Generate a public key and a private key

In order to generate a public and private key you can use the following code:
1 use Zend\Crypt\PublicKey\RsaOptions;
2

3 $rsaOptions = new RsaOptions(array(

4 'pass_phrase' => 'test'
5 ));
6

7 $rsaOptions->generateKeys(array(
8 'private_key_bits' => 2048,
9 ));
10

11 file_put_contents('private_key.pem', $rsaOptions->getPrivateKey());
12 file_put_contents('public_key.pub', $rsaOptions->getPublicKey());

This example generates a public and private key of 2048 bit storing the keys in two separate files, the
private_key.pem for the private key and the public_key.pub for the public key. You can also generate
the public and private key using OpenSSL from the command line (Unix style syntax):
ssh-keygen -t rsa

92.2.2 Encrypt and decrypt a string

Below is reported an example on how to encrypt and decrypt a string using the RSA algorithm. You can encrypt only
small strings. The maximum size of encryption is given by the length of the public/private key - 88 bits. For instance,
if we use a size of 2048 bit you can encrypt string with a maximum size of 1960 bit (245 characters). This limitation
is related to the OpenSSL implementation for a security reason related to the nature of the RSA algorithm.
The normal application of a public key encryption algorithm is to store a key or a hash of the data you want to
respectively encrypt or sign. A hash is typically 128-256 bits (the PHP sha1() function returns a 160 bit hash). An
AES encryption key is 128 to 256 bits. So either of those will comfortably fit inside a single RSA encryption.
1 use Zend\Crypt\PublicKey\Rsa;
2

3 $rsa = Rsa::factory(array(
4 'public_key' => 'public_key.pub',
5 'private_key' => 'private_key.pem',
6 'pass_phrase' => 'test',
7 'binary_output' => false
8 ));
9

10 $text = 'This is the message to encrypt';

11

12 $encrypt = $rsa->encrypt($text);
13 printf("Encrypted message:\n%s\n", $encrypt);
14

15 $decrypt = $rsa->decrypt($encrypt);
16

17 if ($text !== $decrypt) {

18 echo "ERROR\n";
19 } else {
20 echo "Encryption and decryption performed successfully!\n";
21 }

458 Chapter 92. Public key cryptography

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

92.2.3 Generate a digital signature of a file

Below is reported an example of how to generate a digital signature of a file.

1 use Zend\Crypt\PublicKey\Rsa;
2

3 $rsa = Rsa::factory(array(
4 'private_key' => 'path/to/private_key',
5 'pass_phrase' => 'passphrase of the private key',
6 'binary_output' => false
7 ));
8

9 $file = file_get_contents('path/file/to/sign');
10

11 $signature = $rsa->sign($file, $rsa->getOptions()->getPrivateKey());

12 $verify = $rsa->verify($file, $signature, $rsa->getOptions()->getPublicKey());
13

14 if ($verify) {
15 echo "The signature is OK\n";
16 file_put_contents($filename . '.sig', $signature);
17 echo "Signature save in $filename.sig\n";
18 } else {
19 echo "The signature is not valid!\n";
20 }

In this example we used the Base64 format to encode the digital signature of the file (binary_output is false).

Note: The implementation of Zend\Crypt\PublicKey\Rsa algorithm uses the OpenSSL extension of PHP.

92.2. RSA 459

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

460 Chapter 92. Public key cryptography

 CHAPTER 93

Zend\Db\Adapter

The Adapter object is the most important sub-component of Zend\Db. It is responsible for adapting any code written
in or for Zend\Db to the targeted php extensions and vendor databases. In doing this, it creates an abstraction layer
for the PHP extensions, which is called the Driver portion of the Zend\Db adapter. It also creates a lightweight
abstraction layer, called the Platform portion of the adapter, for the various idiosyncrasies that each vendor-specific
platform might have in its SQL/RDBMS implementation.

93.1 Creating an Adapter - Quickstart

Creating an adapter can simply be done by instantiating the Zend\Db\Adapter\Adapter class. The most com-
mon use case, while not the most explicit, is to pass an array of configuration to the Adapter.
1 $adapter = new Zend\Db\Adapter\Adapter($configArray);

This driver array is an abstraction for the extension level required parameters. Here is a table for the key-value pairs
that should be in configuration array.
Key Is Required? Value
driver required Mysqli, Sqlsrv, Pdo_Sqlite, Pdo_Mysql, Pdo=OtherPdoDriver
database generally required the name of the database (schema)
username generally required the connection username
password generally required the connection password
hostname not generally required the IP address or hostname to connect to
port not generally required the port to connect to (if applicable)
charset not generally required the character set to use
Note: Other names will work as well. Effectively, if the PHP manual uses a particular naming, this naming will be
supported by our Driver. For example, dbname in most cases will also work for database. Another example is that
in the case of Sqlsrv, UID will work in place of username. Which format you chose is up to you, but the above table
represents the official abstraction names.

So, for example, a MySQL connection using ext/mysqli:

1 $adapter = new Zend\Db\Adapter\Adapter(array(
2 'driver' => 'Mysqli',
3 'database' => 'zend_db_example',
4 'username' => 'developer',
5 'password' => 'developer-password'
6 ));

Another example, of a Sqlite connection via PDO:

461
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1 $adapter = new Zend\Db\Adapter\Adapter(array(

2 'driver' => 'Pdo_Sqlite',
3 'database' => 'path/to/sqlite.db'
4 ));

It is important to know that by using this style of adapter creation, the Adapter will attempt to create any depen-
dencies that were not explicitly provided. A Driver object will be created from the configuration array provided in the
constructor. A Platform object will be created based off the type of Driver class that was instantiated. And lastly, a
default ResultSet object is created and utilized. Any of these objects can be injected, to do this, see the next section.
The list of officially supported drivers:
Mysqli: The ext/mysqli driver
Pgsql: The ext/pgsql driver
Sqlsrv: The ext/sqlsrv driver (from Microsoft)
Pdo_Mysql: MySQL through the PDO extension
Pdo_Sqlite: SQLite though the PDO extension
Pdo_Pgsql: PostgreSQL through the PDO extension

93.2 Creating an Adapter Using Dependency Injection

The more expressive and explicit way of creating an adapter is by injecting all your dependencies up front.
Zend\Db\Adapter\Adapter uses constructor injection, and all required dependencies are injected through the
constructor, which has the following signature (in pseudo-code):
1 use Zend\Db\Adapter\Platform\PlatformInterface;
2 use Zend\Db\ResultSet\ResultSet;
3

4 class Zend\Db\Adapter\Adapter {
5 public function __construct($driver, PlatformInterface $platform = null, ResultSet $queryResultSe
6 }

What can be injected:

$driver - an array of connection parameters (see above) or an instance of
Zend\Db\Adapter\Driver\DriverInterface
$platform - (optional) an instance of Zend\Db\Platform\PlatformInterface, the default will be cre-
ated based off the driver implementation
$queryResultSetPrototype - (optional) an instance of Zend\Db\ResultSet\ResultSet, to understand
this objects role, see the section below on querying through the adapter

93.3 Query Preparation Through Zend\Db\Adapter\Adapter::query()

By default, query() prefers that you use preparation as a means for processing SQL statements. This generally means
that you will supply a SQL statement with the values substituted by placeholders, and then the parameters for those
placeholders are supplied separately. An example of this workflow with Zend\Db\Adapter\Adapter is:
1 $adapter->query('SELECT * FROM `artist` WHERE `id` = ?', array(5));

The above example will go through the following steps:

462 Chapter 93. Zend\Db\Adapter

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

create a new Statement object

prepare an array into a ParameterContainer if necessary
inject the ParameterContainer into the Statement object
execute the Statement object, producing a Result object
check the Result object to check if the supplied sql was a query, or a result set producing statement
if it is a result set producing query, clone the ResultSet prototype, inject Result as datasource, return it
else, return the Result

93.4 Query Execution Through Zend\Db\Adapter\Adapter::query()

In some cases, you have to execute statements directly. The primary purpose for needing to execute sql instead of
prepare and execute a sql statement, might be because you are attempting to execute a DDL statement (which in most
extensions and vendor platforms), are un-preparable. An example of executing:
1 $adapter->query('ALTER TABLE ADD INDEX(`foo_index`) ON (`foo_column`)', Adapter::QUERY_MODE_EXECUTE);

The primary difference to notice is that you must provide the Adapter::QUERY_MODE_EXECUTE (execute) as the
second parameter.

93.5 Creating Statements

While query() is highly useful for one-off and quick querying of a database through Adapter, it generally makes more
sense to create a statement and interact with it directly, so that you have greater control over the prepare-then-execute
workflow. To do this, Adapter gives you a routine called createStatement() that allows you to create a Driver specific
Statement to use so you can manage your own prepare-then-execute workflow.
1 // with optional parameters to bind up-front
2 $statement = $adapter->createStatement($sql, $optionalParameters);
3 $result = $statement->execute();

93.6 Using the Driver Object

The Driver object is the primary place where Zend\Db\Adapter\Adapter implements the connection level ab-
straction making it possible to use all of ZendDbs interfaces via the various ext/mysqli, ext/sqlsrv, PDO, and other
PHP level drivers. To make this possible, each driver is composed of 3 objects:
A connection: Zend\Db\Adapter\Driver\ConnectionInterface
A statement: Zend\Db\Adapter\Driver\StatementInterface
A result: Zend\Db\Adapter\Driver\ResultInterface
Each of the built-in drivers practices prototyping as a means of creating objects when new instances are requested.
The workflow looks like this:
An adapter is created with a set of connection parameters
The adapter chooses the proper driver to instantiate, for example Zend\Db\Adapter\Driver\Mysqli
That driver class is instantiated

93.4. Query Execution Through Zend\Db\Adapter\Adapter::query() 463

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

If no connection, statement or result objects are injected, defaults are instantiated

This driver is now ready to be called on when particular workflows are requested. Here is what the Driver API looks
like:
1 namespace Zend\Db\Adapter\Driver;
2

3 interface DriverInterface
4 {
5 const PARAMETERIZATION_POSITIONAL = 'positional';
6 const PARAMETERIZATION_NAMED = 'named';
7 const NAME_FORMAT_CAMELCASE = 'camelCase';
8 const NAME_FORMAT_NATURAL = 'natural';
9 public function getDatabasePlatformName($nameFormat = self::NAME_FORMAT_CAMELCASE);
10 public function checkEnvironment();
11 public function getConnection();
12 public function createStatement($sqlOrResource = null);
13 public function createResult($resource);
14 public function getPrepareType();
15 public function formatParameterName($name, $type = null);
16 public function getLastGeneratedValue();
17 }

From this DriverInterface, you can

Determine the name of the platform this driver supports (useful for choosing the proper platform object)
Check that the environment can support this driver
Return the Connection object
Create a Statement object which is optionally seeded by an SQL statement (this will generally be a clone of a
prototypical statement object)
Create a Result object which is optionally seeded by a statement resource (this will generally be a clone of a
prototypical result object)
Format parameter names, important to distinguish the difference between the various ways parameters are named
between extensions
Retrieve the overall last generated value (such as an auto-increment value)
Statement objects generally look like this:
1 namespace Zend\Db\Adapter\Driver;
2

3 interface StatementInterface extends StatementContainerInterface

4 {
5 public function getResource();
6 public function prepare($sql = null);
7 public function isPrepared();
8 public function execute($parameters = null);
9

10 /** Inherited from StatementContainerInterface */

11 public function setSql($sql);
12 public function getSql();
13 public function setParameterContainer(ParameterContainer $parameterContainer);
14 public function getParameterContainer();
15 }

Result objects generally look like this:

464 Chapter 93. Zend\Db\Adapter

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1 namespace Zend\Db\Adapter\Driver;
2

3 interface ResultInterface extends \Countable, \Iterator

4 {
5 public function buffer();
6 public function isQueryResult();
7 public function getAffectedRows();
8 public function getGeneratedValue();
9 public function getResource();
10 public function getFieldCount();
11 }

93.7 Using The Platform Object

The Platform object provides an API to assist in crafting queries in a way that is specific to the SQL implementation
of a particular vendor. Nuances such as how identifiers or values are quoted, or what the identifier separator character
is are handled by this object. To get an idea of the capabilities, the interface for a platform object looks like this:
1 namespace Zend\Db\Adapter\Platform;
2

3 interface PlatformInterface
4 {
5 public function getName();
6 public function getQuoteIdentifierSymbol();
7 public function quoteIdentifier($identifier);
8 public function quoteIdentifierChain($identiferChain)
9 public function getQuoteValueSymbol();
10 public function quoteValue($value);
11 public function quoteValueList($valueList);
12 public function getIdentifierSeparator();
13 public function quoteIdentifierInFragment($identifier, array $additionalSafeWords = array());
14 }

While one can instantiate your own Platform object, generally speaking, it is easier to get the proper Platform instance
from the configured adapter (by default the Platform type will match the underlying driver implementation):
1 $platform = $adapter->getPlatform();
2 // or
3 $platform = $adapter->platform; // magic property access

The following is a couple of example of Platform usage:

1 /** @var $adapter Zend\Db\Adapter\Adapter */
2 /** @var $platform Zend\Db\Adapter\Platform\Sql92 */
3 $platform = $adapter->getPlatform();
4

5 // "first_name"
6 echo $platform->quoteIdentifier('first_name');
7

8 // "
9 echo $platform->getQuoteIdentifierSymbol();
10

11 // "schema"."mytable"
12 echo $platform->quoteIdentifierChain(array('schema','mytable')));
13

14 // '

93.7. Using The Platform Object 465

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

15 echo $platform->getQuoteValueSymbol();
16

17 // 'myvalue'
18 echo $platform->quoteValue('myvalue');
19

20 // 'value', 'Foo O\\'Bar'

21 echo $platform->quoteValueList(array('value',"Foo O'Bar")));
22

23 // .
24 echo $platform->getIdentifierSeparator();
25

26 // "foo" as "bar"
27 echo $platform->quoteIdentifierInFragment('foo as bar');
28

29 // additionally, with some safe words:

30 // ("foo"."bar" = "boo"."baz")
31 echo $platform->quoteIdentifierInFragment('(foo.bar = boo.baz)', array('(', ')', '='));

93.8 Using The Parameter Container

The ParameterContainer object is a container for the various parameters that need to be passed into a Statement object
to fulfill all the various parameterized parts of the SQL statement. This object implements the ArrayAccess interface.
Below is the ParameterContainer API:
namespace Zend\Db\Adapter;

class ParameterContainer implements \Iterator, \ArrayAccess, \Countable {

public function __construct(array $data = array())

/** methods to interact with values */

public function offsetExists($name)
public function offsetGet($name)
public function offsetSetReference($name, $from)
public function offsetSet($name, $value, $errata = null)
public function offsetUnset($name)

/** set values from array (will reset first) */

public function setFromArray(Array $data)

/** methods to interact with value errata */

public function offsetSetErrata($name, $errata)
public function offsetGetErrata($name)
public function offsetHasErrata($name)
public function offsetUnsetErrata($name)

/** errata only iterator */

public function getErrataIterator()

/** get array with named keys */

public function getNamedArray()

/** get array with int keys, ordered by position */

public function getPositionalArray()

/** iterator: */
public function count()

466 Chapter 93. Zend\Db\Adapter

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

public function current()

public function next()
public function key()
public function valid()
public function rewind()

/** merge existing array of parameters with existing parameters */

public function merge($parameters)
}

In addition to handling parameter names and values, the container will assist in tracking parameter types for PHP type
to SQL type handling. For example, it might be important that:
$container->offsetSet('limit', 5);

be bound as an integer. To achieve this, pass in the ParameterContainer::TYPE_INTEGER constant as the 3rd param-
eter:
$container->offsetSet('limit', 5, $container::TYPE_INTEGER);

This will ensure that if the underlying driver supports typing of bound parameters, that this translated information will
also be passed along to the actual php database driver.

93.9 Examples

Creating a Driver and Vendor portable Query, Preparing and Iterating Result
1 $adapter = new Zend\Db\Adapter\Adapter($driverConfig);
2

3 $qi = function($name) use ($adapter) { return $adapter->platform->quoteIdentifier($name); };

4 $fp = function($name) use ($adapter) { return $adapter->driver->formatParameterName($name); };
5

6 $sql = 'UPDATE ' . $qi('artist')

7 . ' SET ' . $qi('name') . ' = ' . $fp('name')
8 . ' WHERE ' . $qi('id') . ' = ' . $fp('id');
9

10 /** @var $statement Zend\Db\Adapter\Driver\StatementInterface */

11 $statement = $adapter->query($sql);
12

13 $parameters = array(
14 'name' => 'Updated Artist',
15 'id' => 1
16 );
17

18 $statement->execute($parameters);
19

20 // DATA INSERTED, NOW CHECK

21

22 /* @var $statement Zend\Db\Adapter\DriverStatementInterface */

23 $statement = $adapter->query('SELECT * FROM '
24 . $qi('artist')
25 . ' WHERE id = ' . $fp('id'));
26

27 /* @var $results Zend\Db\ResultSet\ResultSet */

28 $results = $statement->execute(array('id' => 1));
29

93.9. Examples 467

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

30 $row = $results->current();
31 $name = $row['name'];

468 Chapter 93. Zend\Db\Adapter

 CHAPTER 94

Zend\Db\ResultSet

Zend\Db\ResultSet is a sub-component of Zend\Db for abstracting the iteration of rowset

producing queries. While data sources for this can be anything that is iterable, generally a
Zend\Db\Adapter\Driver\ResultInterface based object is the primary source for retrieving data.
Zend\Db\ResultSets must implement the Zend\Db\ResultSet\ResultSetInterface and all sub-
components of Zend\Db that return a ResultSet as part of their API will assume an instance of a
ResultSetInterface should be returned. In most casts, the Prototype pattern will be used by consuming object
to clone a prototype of a ResultSet and return a specialized ResultSet with a specific data source injected. The interface
of ResultSetInterface looks like this:
1 interface ResultSetInterface extends \Traversable, \Countable
2 {
3 public function initialize($dataSource);
4 public function getFieldCount();
5 }

94.1 Quickstart

Zend\Db\ResultSet\ResultSet is the most basic form of a ResultSet object that will expose each row
as either an ArrayObject-like object or an array of row data. By default, Zend\Db\Adapter\Adapter
will use a prototypical Zend\Db\ResultSet\ResultSet object for iterating when using the
Zend\Db\Adapter\Adapter::query() method.
The following is an example workflow similar to what one might find inside
Zend\Db\Adapter\Adapter::query():
1 use Zend\Db\Adapter\Driver\ResultInterface;
2 use Zend\Db\ResultSet\ResultSet;
3

4 $stmt = $driver->createStatement('SELECT * FROM users');

5 $stmt->prepare();
6 $result = $stmt->execute($parameters);
7

8 if ($result instanceof ResultInterface && $result->isQueryResult()) {

9 $resultSet = new ResultSet;
10 $resultSet->initialize($result);
11

12 foreach ($resultSet as $row) {

13 echo $row->my_column . PHP_EOL;
14 }
15 }

469
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

94.2 Zend\Db\ResultSet\ResultSet and Zend\Db\ResultSet\AbstractResultSet

For most purposes, either a instance of Zend\Db\ResultSet\ResultSet or a derivative of

Zend\Db\ResultSet\AbstractResultSet will be being used. The implementation of the
AbstractResultSet offers the following core functionality:
1 abstract class AbstractResultSet implements Iterator, ResultSetInterface
2 {
3 public function initialize($dataSource)
4 public function getDataSource()
5 public function getFieldCount()
6

7 /** Iterator */
8 public function next()
9 public function key()
10 public function current()
11 public function valid()
12 public function rewind()
13

14 /** countable */
15 public function count()
16

17 /** get rows as array */

18 public function toArray()
19 }

94.3 Zend\Db\ResultSet\HydratingResultSet

Zend\Db\ResultSet\HydratingResultSet is a more flexible ResultSet object that allows the devel-

oper to choose an appropriate hydration strategy for getting row data into a target object. While iterating over
results, HydratingResultSet will take a prototype of a target object and clone it once for each row. The
HydratingResultSet will then hydrate that clone with the row data.
In the example below, rows from the database will be iterated, and during iteration, HydratingRowSet will use the
Reflection based hydrator to inject the row data directly into the protected members of the cloned UserEntity object:
1 use Zend\Db\Adapter\Driver\ResultInterface;
2 use Zend\Db\ResultSet\HydratingResultSet;
3 use Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator\Reflection as ReflectionHydrator;
4

5 class UserEntity {
6 protected $first_name;
7 protected $last_name;
8 public function getFirstName() { return $this->first_name; }
9 public function getLastName() { return $this->last_name; }
10 public function setFirstName($first_name) { $this->first_name = $first_name; }
11 public function setLastName($last_name) { $this->last_name = $last_name; }
12 }
13

14 $stmt = $driver->createStatement($sql);
15 $stmt->prepare($parameters);
16 $result = $stmt->execute();
17

18 if ($result instanceof ResultInterface && $result->isQueryResult()) {

19 $resultSet = new HydratingResultSet(new ReflectionHydrator, new UserEntity);
20 $resultSet->initialize($result);

470 Chapter 94. Zend\Db\ResultSet

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

21

22 foreach ($resultSet as $user) {

23 echo $user->getFirstName() . ' ' . $user->getLastName() . PHP_EOL;
24 }
25 }

For more information, see the Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator documentation to get a better sense of the different strate-
gies that can be employed in order to populate a target object.

94.3. Zend\Db\ResultSet\HydratingResultSet 471

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

472 Chapter 94. Zend\Db\ResultSet

 CHAPTER 95

Zend\Db\Sql

Zend\Db\Sql is a SQL abstraction layer for building platform specific SQL queries via an object-oriented API.
The end result of an Zend\Db\Sql object will be to either produce a Statement and Parameter container that rep-
resents the target query, or a full string that can be directly executed against the database platform. To achieve this,
Zend\Db\Sql objects require a Zend\Db\Adapter\Adapter object in order to produce the desired results.

95.1 Zend\Db\Sql\Sql (Quickstart)

As there are four primary tasks associated with interacting with a database (from the DML, or Data Manipulation
Language): selecting, inserting, updating and deleting. As such, there are four primary objects that developers can
interact or building queries, Zend\Db\Sql\Select, Insert, Update and Delete.
Since these four tasks are so closely related, and generally used together within the same application,
Zend\Db\Sql\Sql objects help you create them and produce the result you are attempting to achieve.
1 use Zend\Db\Sql\Sql;
2 $sql = new Sql($adapter);
3 $select = $sql->select(); // @return Zend\Db\Sql\Select
4 $insert = $sql->insert(); // @return Zend\Db\Sql\Insert
5 $update = $sql->update(); // @return Zend\Db\Sql\Update
6 $delete = $sql->delete(); // @return Zend\Db\Sql\Delete

As a developer, you can now interact with these objects, as described in the sections below, to specialize each query.
Once they have been populated with values, they are ready to either be prepared or executed.
To prepare (using a Select object):
1 use Zend\Db\Sql\Sql;
2 $sql = new Sql($adapter);
3 $select = $sql->select();
4 $select->from('foo');
5 $select->where(array('id' => 2));
6

7 $statement = $sql->prepareStatementForSqlObject($select);
8 $results = $statement->execute();

To execute (using a Select object)

1 use Zend\Db\Sql\Sql;
2 $sql = new Sql($adapter);
3 $select = $sql->select();
4 $select->from('foo');

473
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

5 $select->where(array('id' => 2));

6

7 $selectString = $sql->buildSqlString($select);
8 $results = $adapter->query($selectString, $adapter::QUERY_MODE_EXECUTE);

Zend\Db\Sql\Sql objects can also be bound to a particular table so that in getting a select, insert, update, or delete
object, they are all primarily seeded with the same table when produced.
1 use Zend\Db\Sql\Sql;
2 $sql = new Sql($adapter, 'foo');
3 $select = $sql->select();
4 $select->where(array('id' => 2)); // $select already has the from('foo') applied

95.2 Zend\Db\Sqls Select, Insert, Update and Delete

Each of these objects implements the following (2) interfaces:

1 interface PreparableSqlInterface {
2 public function prepareStatement(Adapter $adapter, StatementInterface $statement);
3 }
4 interface SqlInterface {
5 public function getSqlString(PlatformInterface $adapterPlatform = null);
6 }

These are the functions you can call to either produce (a) a prepared statement, or (b) a string to be executed.

95.3 Zend\Db\Sql\Select

Zend\Db\Sql\Select is an object whos primary function is to present a unified API for building platform specific
SQL SELECT queries. The class can be instantiated and consumed without Zend\Db\Sql\Sql:
1 use Zend\Db\Sql\Select;
2 $select = new Select();
3 // or, to produce a $select bound to a specific table
4 $select = new Select('foo');

If a table is provided to the Select object, then from() cannot be called later to change the name of the table.
Once you have a valid Select object, the following API can be used to further specify various select statement parts:
1 class Select extends AbstractSql implements SqlInterface, PreparableSqlInterface
2 {
3 const JOIN_INNER = 'inner';
4 const JOIN_OUTER = 'outer';
5 const JOIN_LEFT = 'left';
6 const JOIN_RIGHT = 'right';
7 const SQL_STAR = '*';
8 const ORDER_ASCENDING = 'ASC';
9 const ORDER_DESCENDING = 'DESC';
10

11 public $where; // @param Where $where

12

13 public function __construct($table = null);

14 public function from($table);
15 public function columns(array $columns, $prefixColumnsWithTable = true);

474 Chapter 95. Zend\Db\Sql

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

16 public function join($name, $on, $columns = self::SQL_STAR, $type = self::JOIN_INNER);

17 public function where($predicate, $combination = Predicate\PredicateSet::OP_AND);
18 public function group($group);
19 public function having($predicate, $combination = Predicate\PredicateSet::OP_AND);
20 public function order($order);
21 public function limit($limit);
22 public function offset($offset);
23 }

95.3.1 from():

1 // as a string:
2 $select->from('foo');
3

4 // as an array to specify an alias:

5 // produces SELECT "t".* FROM "table" AS "t"
6

7 $select->from(array('t' => 'table'));

8

9 // using a Sql\TableIdentifier:
10 // same output as above
11

12 $select->from(new TableIdentifier(array('t' => 'table')));

95.3.2 columns():

1 // as array of names
2 $select->columns(array('foo', 'bar'));
3

4 // as an associative array with aliases as the keys:

5 // produces 'bar' AS 'foo', 'bax' AS 'baz'
6

7 $select->columns(array('foo' => 'bar', 'baz' => 'bax'));

95.3.3 join():

1 $select->join(
2 'foo', // table name
3 'id = bar.id', // expression to join on (will be quoted by platform object before insertion),
4 array('bar', 'baz'), // (optional) list of columns, same requirements as columns() above
5 $select::JOIN_OUTER // (optional), one of inner, outer, left, right also represented by constant
6 );
7

8 $select->from(array('f' => 'foo')) // base table

9 ->join(array('b' => 'bar'), // join table with alias
10 'f.foo_id = b.foo_id'); // join expression

95.3.4 where(), having():

The Zend\Db\Sql\Select object provides bit of flexibility as it regards to what kind of parameters are acceptable
when calling where() or having(). The method signature is listed as:

95.3. Zend\Db\Sql\Select 475

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1 /**
2 * Create where clause
3 *
4 * @param Where|\Closure|string|array $predicate
5 * @param string $combination One of the OP_* constants from Predicate\PredicateSet
6 * @return Select
7 */
8 public function where($predicate, $combination = Predicate\PredicateSet::OP_AND);

As you can see, there are a number of different ways to pass criteria to both having() and where().
If you provide a Zend\Db\Sql\Where object to where() or a Zend\Db\Sql\Having object to having(), the
internal objects for Select will be replaced completely. When the where/having() is processed, this object will be
iterated to produce the WHERE or HAVING section of the SELECT statement.
If you provide a Closure to where() or having(), this function will be called with the Selects Where object as the
only parameter. So the following is possible:
1 $spec = function (Where $where) {
2 $where->like('username', 'ralph%');
3 };
4

5 $select->where($spec);

If you provide a string, this string will be used to instantiate a Zend\Db\Sql\Predicate\Expression object
so that its contents will be applied as is. This means that there will be no quoting in the fragment provided.
Consider the following code:
1 // SELECT "foo".* FROM "foo" WHERE x = 5
2 $select->from('foo')->where('x = 5');

If you provide an array whos values are keyed by an integer, the value can either be a string that will be then used to
build a Predicate\Expression or any object that implements Predicate\PredicateInterface. These
objects are pushed onto the Where stack with the $combination provided.
Consider the following code:
1 // SELECT "foo".* FROM "foo" WHERE x = 5 AND y = z
2 $select->from('foo')->where(array('x = 5', 'y = z'));

If you provide an array whos values are keyed with a string, these values will be handled in the following:
PHP value nulls will be made into a Predicate\IsNull object
PHP value array()s will be made into a Predicate\In object
PHP value strings will be made into a Predicate\Operator object such that the string key will be identifier,
and the value will target value.
Consider the following code:
1 // SELECT "foo".* FROM "foo" WHERE "c1" IS NULL AND "c2" IN (?, ?, ?) AND "c3" IS NOT NULL
2 $select->from('foo')->where(array(
3 'c1' => null,
4 'c2' => array(1, 2, 3),
5 new \Zend\Db\Sql\Predicate\IsNotNull('c3')
6 ));

476 Chapter 95. Zend\Db\Sql

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

95.3.5 order():

1 $select = new Select;

2 $select->order('id DESC'); // produces 'id' DESC
3

4 $select = new Select;

5 $select->order('id DESC')
6 ->order('name ASC, age DESC'); // produces 'id' DESC, 'name' ASC, 'age' DESC
7

8 $select = new Select;

9 $select->order(array('name ASC', 'age DESC')); // produces 'name' ASC, 'age' DESC

95.3.6 limit() and offset():

1 $select = new Select;

2 $select->limit(5); // always takes an integer/numeric
3 $select->offset(10); // similarly takes an integer/numeric

95.4 Zend\Db\Sql\Insert

The Insert API:

1 class Insert implements SqlInterface, PreparableSqlInterface
2 {
3 const VALUES_MERGE = 'merge';
4 const VALUES_SET = 'set';
5

6 public function __construct($table = null);

7 public function into($table);
8 public function columns(array $columns);
9 public function values(array $values, $flag = self::VALUES_SET);
10 }

Similarly to Select objects, the table can be set at construction time or via into().

95.4.1 columns():

1 $insert->columns(array('foo', 'bar')); // set the valid columns

95.4.2 values():

1 // default behavior of values is to set the values

2 // successive calls will not preserve values from previous calls
3 $insert->values(array(
4 'col_1' => 'value1',
5 'col_2' => 'value2'
6 ));

1 // merging values with previous calls

2 $insert->values(array('col_2' => 'value2'), $insert::VALUES_MERGE);

95.4. Zend\Db\Sql\Insert 477

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

95.5 Zend\Db\Sql\Update
1 class Update
2 {
3 const VALUES_MERGE = 'merge';
4 const VALUES_SET = 'set';
5

6 public $where; // @param Where $where

7 public function __construct($table = null);
8 public function table($table);
9 public function set(array $values, $flag = self::VALUES_SET);
10 public function where($predicate, $combination = Predicate\PredicateSet::OP_AND);
11 }

95.5.1 set():

1 $update->set(array('foo' => 'bar', 'baz' => 'bax'));

95.5.2 where():

See where section below.

95.6 Zend\Db\Sql\Delete
1 class Delete
2 {
3 public $where; // @param Where $where
4 public function __construct($table = null);
5 public function from($table);
6 public function where($predicate, $combination = Predicate\PredicateSet::OP_AND);
7 }

95.6.1 where():

See where section below.

95.7 Zend\Db\Sql\Where & Zend\Db\Sql\Having

In the following, we will talk about Where, Having is implies as being the same API.
Effectively, Where and Having extend from the same base object, a Predicate (and PredicateSet). All of the parts that
make up a where or having that are anded or ord together are called predicates. The full set of predicates is called
a PredicateSet. This object set generally contains the values (and identifiers) separate from the fragment they belong
to until the last possible moment when the statement is either used to be prepared (parameteritized), or executed. In
parameterization, the parameters will be replaced with their proper placeholder (a named or positional parameter),
and the values stored inside a Adapter\ParameterContainer. When executed, the values will be interpolated into the
fragments they belong to and properly quoted.

478 Chapter 95. Zend\Db\Sql

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

It is important to know that in this API, a distinction is made between what elements are considered identifiers
(TYPE_IDENTIFIER) and which of those is a value (TYPE_VALUE). There is also a special use case type for literal
values (TYPE_LITERAL). These are all exposed via the Zend\Db\Sql\ExpressionInterface interface.

Note: In ZF 2.1, an actual Literal type was added. Zend\Db\Sql now makes the distinction that Literals will not
have any parameters that need interpolating whereas it is expected that Expression objects might have parameters
that need interpolating. In cases where there are parameters in an Expression, Zend\Db\Sql\AbstractSql
will do its best to identify placeholders when the Expression is processed during statement creation. In short, if you
dont have parameters, use Literal objects.

The Zend\Db\Sql\Where (Predicate/PredicateSet) API:

1 // Where & Having:
2 class Predicate extends PredicateSet
3 {
4 public $and;
5 public $or;
6 public $AND;
7 public $OR;
8 public $NEST;
9 public $UNNEST;
10

11 public function nest();

12 public function setUnnest(Predicate $predicate);
13 public function unnest();
14 public function equalTo($left, $right, $leftType = self::TYPE_IDENTIFIER, $rightType = self::TYP
15 public function notEqualTo($left, $right, $leftType = self::TYPE_IDENTIFIER, $rightType = self::
16 public function lessThan($left, $right, $leftType = self::TYPE_IDENTIFIER, $rightType = self::TY
17 public function greaterThan($left, $right, $leftType = self::TYPE_IDENTIFIER, $rightType = self:
18 public function lessThanOrEqualTo($left, $right, $leftType = self::TYPE_IDENTIFIER, $rightType =
19 public function greaterThanOrEqualTo($left, $right, $leftType = self::TYPE_IDENTIFIER, $rightTyp
20 public function like($identifier, $like);
21 public function literal($literal);
22 public function expression($expression, $parameter);
23 public function isNull($identifier);
24 public function isNotNull($identifier);
25 public function in($identifier, array $valueSet = array());
26 public function between($identifier, $minValue, $maxValue);
27

28

29 // Inherited From PredicateSet

30

31 public function addPredicate(PredicateInterface $predicate, $combination = null);

32 public function getPredicates();
33 public function orPredicate(PredicateInterface $predicate);
34 public function andPredicate(PredicateInterface $predicate);
35 public function getExpressionData();
36 public function count();
37 }

Each method in the Where API will produce a corresponding Predicate object of a similarly named type, described
below, with the full API of the object:

95.7. Zend\Db\Sql\Where & Zend\Db\Sql\Having 479

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

95.7.1 equalTo(), lessThan(), greaterThan(), lessThanOrEqualTo(), greaterThanOrE-

qualTo():

1 $where->equalTo('id', 5);
2

3 // same as the following workflow

4 $where->addPredicate(
5 new Predicate\Operator($left, Operator::OPERATOR_EQUAL_TO, $right, $leftType, $rightType)
6 );
7

8 class Operator implements PredicateInterface

9 {
10 const OPERATOR_EQUAL_TO = '=';
11 const OP_EQ = '=';
12 const OPERATOR_NOT_EQUAL_TO = '!=';
13 const OP_NE = '!=';
14 const OPERATOR_LESS_THAN = '<';
15 const OP_LT = '<';
16 const OPERATOR_LESS_THAN_OR_EQUAL_TO = '<=';
17 const OP_LTE = '<=';
18 const OPERATOR_GREATER_THAN = '>';
19 const OP_GT = '>';
20 const OPERATOR_GREATER_THAN_OR_EQUAL_TO = '>=';
21 const OP_GTE = '>=';
22

23 public function __construct($left = null, $operator = self::OPERATOR_EQUAL_TO, $right = null, $le

24 public function setLeft($left);
25 public function getLeft();
26 public function setLeftType($type);
27 public function getLeftType();
28 public function setOperator($operator);
29 public function getOperator();
30 public function setRight($value);
31 public function getRight();
32 public function setRightType($type);
33 public function getRightType();
34 public function getExpressionData();
35 }

95.7.2 like($identifier, $like):

1 $where->like($identifier, $like):
2

3 // same as
4 $where->addPredicate(
5 new Predicate\Like($identifier, $like)
6 );
7

8 // full API
9

10 class Like implements PredicateInterface

11 {
12 public function __construct($identifier = null, $like = null);
13 public function setIdentifier($identifier);
14 public function getIdentifier();
15 public function setLike($like);

480 Chapter 95. Zend\Db\Sql

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

16 public function getLike();

17 }

95.7.3 literal($literal);

1 $where->literal($literal);
2

3 // same as
4 $where->addPredicate(
5 new Predicate\Literal($literal)
6 );
7

8 // full API
9 class Literal implements ExpressionInterface, PredicateInterface
10 {
11 const PLACEHOLDER = '?';
12 public function __construct($literal = '');
13 public function setLiteral($literal);
14 public function getLiteral();
15 }

95.7.4 expression($expression, $parameter);

1 $where->expression($expression, $parameter);
2

3 // same as
4 $where->addPredicate(
5 new Predicate\Expression($expression, $parameter)
6 );
7

8 // full API
9 class Expression implements ExpressionInterface, PredicateInterface
10 {
11 const PLACEHOLDER = '?';
12 public function __construct($expression = null, $valueParameter = null /*[, $valueParameter, ...
13 public function setExpression($expression);
14 public function getExpression();
15 public function setParameters($parameters);
16 public function getParameters();
17 public function setTypes(array $types);
18 public function getTypes();
19 }

95.7.5 isNull($identifier);

1 $where->isNull($identifier);
2

3 // same as
4 $where->addPredicate(
5 new Predicate\IsNull($identifier)
6 );
7

8 // full API

95.7. Zend\Db\Sql\Where & Zend\Db\Sql\Having 481

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

9 class IsNull implements PredicateInterface

10 {
11 public function __construct($identifier = null);
12 public function setIdentifier($identifier);
13 public function getIdentifier();
14 }

95.7.6 isNotNull($identifier);

1 $where->isNotNull($identifier);
2

3 // same as
4 $where->addPredicate(
5 new Predicate\IsNotNull($identifier)
6 );
7

8 // full API
9 class IsNotNull implements PredicateInterface
10 {
11 public function __construct($identifier = null);
12 public function setIdentifier($identifier);
13 public function getIdentifier();
14 }

95.7.7 in($identifier, array $valueSet = array());

1 $where->in($identifier, array $valueSet = array());

2

3 // same as
4 $where->addPredicate(
5 new Predicate\In($identifier, $valueSet)
6 );
7

8 // full API
9 class In implements PredicateInterface
10 {
11 public function __construct($identifier = null, array $valueSet = array());
12 public function setIdentifier($identifier);
13 public function getIdentifier();
14 public function setValueSet(array $valueSet);
15 public function getValueSet();
16 }

95.7.8 between($identifier, $minValue, $maxValue);

1 $where->between($identifier, $minValue, $maxValue);

2

3 // same as
4 $where->addPredicate(
5 new Predicate\Between($identifier, $minValue, $maxValue)
6 );
7

8 // full API

482 Chapter 95. Zend\Db\Sql

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

9 class Between implements PredicateInterface

10 {
11 public function __construct($identifier = null, $minValue = null, $maxValue = null);
12 public function setIdentifier($identifier);
13 public function getIdentifier();
14 public function setMinValue($minValue);
15 public function getMinValue();
16 public function setMaxValue($maxValue);
17 public function getMaxValue();
18 public function setSpecification($specification);
19 }

95.7. Zend\Db\Sql\Where & Zend\Db\Sql\Having 483

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

484 Chapter 95. Zend\Db\Sql

 CHAPTER 96

Zend\Db\Sql\Ddl

Zend\Db\Sql\Ddl is a sub-component of Zend\Db\Sql that allows consumers to create statement objects

that will produce DDL (Data Definition Language) SQL statements. When combined with a platform specific
Zend\Db\Sql\Sql object, these DDL objects are capable of producing platform-specific CREATE TABLE state-
ments, with specialized data types, constraints, and indexes for a database/schema.
The following platforms have platform specializations for DDL:
MySQL
All databases compatible with ANSI SQL92

96.1 Creating Tables

Like Zend\Db\Sql objects, each statement type is represented by a class. For example, CREATE TABLE is mod-
eled by a CreateTable object; this is likewise the same for ALTER TABLE (as AlterTable), and DROP TABLE
(as DropTable). These classes exist in the Zend\Db\Sql\Ddl namespace. To initiate the building of a DDL
statement, such as CreateTable, one needs to instantiate the object. There are a couple of valid patterns for this:
1 use Zend\Db\Sql\Ddl;
2

3 $table = new Ddl\CreateTable();

4

5 // or with table
6 $table = new Ddl\CreateTable('bar');
7

8 // optionally, as a temporary table

9 $table = new Ddl\CreateTable('bar', true);

You can also set the table after instantiation:

1 $table->setTable('bar');

Currently, columns are added by creating a column object, described in the data type table in the data type section
below:
1 use Zend\Db\Sql\Ddl\Column;
2 $table->addColumn(new Column\Integer('id'));
3 $table->addColumn(new Column\Varchar('name', 255));

Beyond adding columns to a table, constraints can also be added:

485
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1 use Zend\Db\Sql\Ddl\Constraint;
2 $table->addConstraint(new Constraint\PrimaryKey('id'));
3 $table->addConstraint(
4 new Constraint\UniqueKey(['name', 'foo'], 'my_unique_key')
5 );

96.2 Altering Tables

Similarly to CreateTable, you may also instantiate AlterTable:

1 use Zend\Db\Sql\Ddl;
2

3 $table = new Ddl\AlterTable();

4

5 // or with table
6 $table = new Ddl\AlterTable('bar');
7

8 // optionally, as a temporary table

9 $table = new Ddl\AlterTable('bar', true);

The primary difference between a CreateTable and AlterTable is that the AlterTable takes into account
that the table and its assets already exist. Therefore, while you still have addColumn() and addConstraint(),
you will also see the ability to change existing columns:
1 use Zend\Db\Sql\Ddl\Column;
2 $table->changeColumn('name', Column\Varchar('new_name', 50));

You may also drop existing columns or constraints:

1 $table->dropColumn('foo');
2 $table->dropConstraint('my_index');

96.3 Dropping Tables

To drop a table, create a DropTable statement object:

1 $drop = new Ddl\DropTable('bar');

96.4 Executing DDL Statements

After a DDL statement object has been created and configured, at some point you will want to execute the statement.
To do this, you will need two other objects: an Adapter instance, and a properly seeded Sql instance.
The workflow looks something like this, with $ddl being a CreateTable, AlterTable, or DropTable in-
stance:
1 use Zend\Db\Sql\Sql;
2

3 // existence of $adapter is assumed

4 $sql = new Sql($adapter);
5

6 $adapter->query(

486 Chapter 96. Zend\Db\Sql\Ddl

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

7 $sql->getSqlStringForSqlObject($ddl),
8 $adapter::QUERY_MODE_EXECUTE
9 );

By passing the $ddl object through the $sql objects getSqlStringForSqlObject() method, we ensure that
any platform specific specializations/modifications are utilized to create a platform specific SQL statement.
Next, using the constant Zend\Db\Adapter\Adapter::QUERY_MODE_EXECUTE ensures that the SQL state-
ment is not prepared, as many DDL statements on a variety of platforms cannot be prepared, only executed.

96.5 Currently Supported Data Types

These types exist in the Zend\Db\Sql\Ddl\Column namespace. Data types must implement
Zend\Db\Sql\Ddl\Column\ColumnInterface.
In alphabetical order:
Type Arguments For Construction
BigInteger $name, $nullable = false, $default = null, array $options =
array()
Blob $name, $length, $nullable = false, $default = null, array
$options = array()
Boolean $name
Char $name, $length
Column $name = null
(generic)
Date $name
Decimal $name, $precision, $scale = null
Float $name, $digits, $decimal (Note: this class is deprecated as of 2.4.0; use Floating
instead
Floating $name, $digits, $decimal
Integer $name, $nullable = false, $default = null, array $options =
array()
Time $name
Varchar $name, $length
Each of the above types can be utilized in any place that accepts a Column\ColumnInterface instance.
Currently, this is primarily in CreateTable::addColumn() and AlterTables addColumn() and
changeColumn() methods.

96.6 Currently Supported Constraint Types

These types exist in the Zend\Db\Sql\Ddl\Constraint namespace. Data types must implement
Zend\Db\Sql\Ddl\Constraint\ConstraintInterface.
In alphabetical order:

96.5. Currently Supported Data Types 487

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Type Arguments For Construction

Check $expression, $name
For- $name, $column, $referenceTable, $referenceColumn, $onDeleteRule =
eignKey null, $onUpdateRule = null
Prima- $columns
ryKey
UniqueKey $column, $name = null
Each of the above types can be utilized in any place that accepts a Column\ConstraintInterface instance.
Currently, this is primarily in CreateTable::addConstraint() and AlterTable::addConstraint().

488 Chapter 96. Zend\Db\Sql\Ddl

 CHAPTER 97

Zend\Db\TableGateway

The Table Gateway object is intended to provide an object that represents a table in a database, and the methods of
this object mirror the most common operations on a database table. In code, the interface for such an object looks like
this:
1 interface Zend\Db\TableGateway\TableGatewayInterface
2 {
3 public function getTable();
4 public function select($where = null);
5 public function insert($set);
6 public function update($set, $where = null);
7 public function delete($where);
8 }

There are two primary implementations of the TableGatewayInterface that are of the most useful:
AbstractTableGateway and TableGateway. The AbstractTableGateway is an abstract basic imple-
mentation that provides functionality for select(), insert(), update(), delete(), as well as an addi-
tional API for doing these same kinds of tasks with explicit SQL objects. These methods are selectWith(),
insertWith(), updateWith() and deleteWith(). In addition, AbstractTableGateway also implements a
Feature API, that allows for expanding the behaviors of the base TableGateway implementation without having
to extend the class with this new functionality. The TableGateway concrete implementation simply adds a sensible
constructor to the AbstractTableGateway class so that out-of-the-box, TableGateway does not need to be
extended in order to be consumed and utilized to its fullest.

97.1 Basic Usage

The quickest way to get up and running with Zend\Db\TableGateway is to configure and utilize the concrete imple-
mentation of the TableGateway. The API of the concrete TableGateway is:
1 class TableGateway extends AbstractTableGateway
2 {
3 public $lastInsertValue;
4 public $table;
5 public $adapter;
6

7 public function __construct($table, Adapter $adapter, $features = null, ResultSet $resultSetProt

8

9 /** Inherited from AbstractTableGateway */

10

11 public function isInitialized();

12 public function initialize();

489
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

13 public function getTable();

14 public function getAdapter();
15 public function getColumns();
16 public function getFeatureSet();
17 public function getResultSetPrototype();
18 public function getSql();
19 public function select($where = null);
20 public function selectWith(Select $select);
21 public function insert($set);
22 public function insertWith(Insert $insert);
23 public function update($set, $where = null);
24 public function updateWith(Update $update);
25 public function delete($where);
26 public function deleteWith(Delete $delete);
27 public function getLastInsertValue();
28 }

The concrete TableGateway object practices constructor injection for getting dependencies and options into the
instance. The table name and an instance of an Adapter are all that is needed to setup a working TableGateway
object.
Out of the box, this implementation makes no assumptions about table structure or metadata, and when select()
is executed, a simple ResultSet object with the populated Adapters Result (the datasource) will be returned and ready
for iteration.
1 use Zend\Db\TableGateway\TableGateway;
2 $projectTable = new TableGateway('project', $adapter);
3 $rowset = $projectTable->select(array('type' => 'PHP'));
4

5 echo 'Projects of type PHP: ';

6 foreach ($rowset as $projectRow) {
7 echo $projectRow['name'] . PHP_EOL;
8 }
9

10 // or, when expecting a single row:

11 $artistTable = new TableGateway('artist', $adapter);
12 $rowset = $artistTable->select(array('id' => 2));
13 $artistRow = $rowset->current();
14

15 var_dump($artistRow);

The select() method takes the same arguments as Zend\Db\Sql\Select::where() with the addition of
also being able to accept a closure, which in turn, will be passed the current Select object that is being used to build
the SELECT query. The following usage is possible:
1 use Zend\Db\TableGateway\TableGateway;
2 use Zend\Db\Sql\Select;
3 $artistTable = new TableGateway('artist', $adapter);
4

5 // search for at most 2 artists who's name starts with Brit, ascending
6 $rowset = $artistTable->select(function (Select $select) {
7 $select->where->like('name', 'Brit%');
8 $select->order('name ASC')->limit(2);
9 });

490 Chapter 97. Zend\Db\TableGateway

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

97.2 TableGateway Features

The Features API allows for extending the functionality of the base TableGateway object without having to poly-
morphically extend the base class. This allows for a wider array of possible mixing and matching of features to
achieve a particular behavior that needs to be attained to make the base implementation of TableGateway useful
for a particular problem.
With the TableGateway object, features should be injected though the constructor. The constructor can take Fea-
tures in 3 different forms: as a single feature object, as a FeatureSet object, or as an array of Feature objects.
There are a number of features built-in and shipped with Zend\Db:
GlobalAdapterFeature: the ability to use a global/static adapter without needing to inject it into a
TableGateway instance. This is more useful when you are extending the AbstractTableGateway im-
plementation:
1 use Zend\Db\TableGateway\AbstractTableGateway;
2 use Zend\Db\TableGateway\Feature;
3

4 class MyTableGateway extends AbstractTableGateway

5 {
6 public function __construct()
7 {
8 $this->table = 'my_table';
9 $this->featureSet = new Feature\FeatureSet();
10 $this->featureSet->addFeature(new Feature\GlobalAdapterFeature());
11 $this->initialize();
12 }
13 }
14

15 // elsewhere in code, in a bootstrap

16 Zend\Db\TableGateway\Feature\GlobalAdapterFeature::setStaticAdapter($adapter);
17

18 // in a controller, or model somewhere

19 $table = new MyTableGateway(); // adapter is statically loaded

MasterSlaveFeature: the ability to use a master adapter for insert(), update(), and delete() while using a slave
adapter for all select() operations.
1 $table = new TableGateway('artist', $adapter, new Feature\MasterSlaveFeature($slaveAdapter));

MetadataFeature: the ability populate TableGateway with column information from a Metadata object. It
will also store the primary key information in case RowGatewayFeature needs to consume this information.
1 $table = new TableGateway('artist', $adapter, new Feature\MetadataFeature());

EventFeature: the ability utilize a TableGateway object with Zend\EventManager and to be able to subscribe
to various events in a TableGateway lifecycle.
1 $table = new TableGateway('artist', $adapter, new Feature\EventFeature($eventManagerInstance));

RowGatewayFeature: the ability for select() to return a ResultSet object that upon iteration will return a
RowGateway object for each row.
1 $table = new TableGateway('artist', $adapter, new Feature\RowGatewayFeature('id'));
2 $results = $table->select(array('id' => 2));
3

4 $artistRow = $results->current();

97.2. TableGateway Features 491

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

5 $artistRow->name = 'New Name';

6 $artistRow->save();

492 Chapter 97. Zend\Db\TableGateway

 CHAPTER 98

Zend\Db\RowGateway

Zend\Db\RowGateway is a sub-component of Zend\Db that implements the Row Gateway pattern from PoEAA.
This effectively means that Row Gateway objects primarily model a row in a database, and have methods such as
save() and delete() that will help persist this row-as-an-object in the database itself. Likewise, after a row from the
database is retrieved, it can then be manipulated and save()d back to the database in the same position (row), or it can
be delete()d from the table.
The interface for a Row Gateway object simply adds save() and delete() and this is the interface that should be assumed
when a component has a dependency that is expected to be an instance of a RowGateway object:
1 interface RowGatewayInterface
2 {
3 public function save();
4 public function delete();
5 }

98.1 Quickstart

While most of the time, RowGateway will be used in conjunction with other Zend\Db\ResultSet producing objects, it
is possible to use it standalone. To use it standalone, you simply need an Adapter and a set of data to work with. The
following use case demonstrates Zend\Db\RowGateway\RowGateway usage in its simplest form:
1 use Zend\Db\RowGateway\RowGateway;
2

3 // query the database

4 $resultSet = $adapter->query('SELECT * FROM `user` WHERE `id` = ?', array(2));
5

6 // get array of data

7 $rowData = $resultSet->current()->getArrayCopy();
8

9 // row gateway
10 $rowGateway = new RowGateway('id', 'my_table', $adapter);
11 $rowGateway->populate($rowData, true);
12

13 $rowGateway->first_name = 'New Name';

14 $rowGateway->save();
15

16 // or delete this row:

17 $rowGateway->delete();

The workflow described above is greatly simplified when RowGateway is used in conjunction with the TableGateway
feature. What this achieves is a Table Gateway object that when select()ing from a table, will produce a ResultSet

493
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

that is then capable of producing valid Row Gateway objects. Its usage looks like this:
1 use Zend\Db\TableGateway\Feature\RowGatewayFeature;
2 use Zend\Db\TableGateway\TableGateway;
3

4 $table = new TableGateway('artist', $adapter, new RowGatewayFeature('id'));

5 $results = $table->select(array('id' => 2));
6

7 $artistRow = $results->current();
8 $artistRow->name = 'New Name';
9 $artistRow->save();

98.2 ActiveRecord Style Objects

If you wish to have custom behaviour for your RowGateway objects (essentially making them behave simi-
larly to the ActiveRecord pattern), pass a prototype object implementing the RowGatewayInterface to the
RowGatewayFeature constructor instead of a primary key:
1 use Zend\Db\TableGateway\Feature\RowGatewayFeature;
2 use Zend\Db\TableGateway\TableGateway;
3 use Zend\Db\RowGateway\RowGatewayInterface;
4

5 class Artist implements RowGatewayInterface

6 {
7 protected $adapter;
8

9 public function __construct($adapter)

10 {
11 $this->adapter = $adapter;
12 }
13

14 // ... save() and delete() implementations

15 }
16

17 $table = new TableGateway('artist', $adapter, new RowGatewayFeature(new Artist($adapter)));

494 Chapter 98. Zend\Db\RowGateway

 CHAPTER 99

Zend\Db\Metadata

Zend\Db\Metadata is as sub-component of Zend\Db that makes it possible to get metadata information about
tables, columns, constraints, triggers, and other information from a database in a standardized way. The primary
interface for the Metadata objects is:
1 interface MetadataInterface
2 {
3 public function getSchemas();
4

5 public function getTableNames($schema = null, $includeViews = false);

6 public function getTables($schema = null, $includeViews = false);
7 public function getTable($tableName, $schema = null);
8

9 public function getViewNames($schema = null);

10 public function getViews($schema = null);
11 public function getView($viewName, $schema = null);
12

13 public function getColumnNames($table, $schema = null);

14 public function getColumns($table, $schema = null);
15 public function getColumn($columnName, $table, $schema = null);
16

17 public function getConstraints($table, $schema = null);

18 public function getConstraint($constraintName, $table, $schema = null);
19 public function getConstraintKeys($constraint, $table, $schema = null);
20

21 public function getTriggerNames($schema = null);

22 public function getTriggers($schema = null);
23 public function getTrigger($triggerName, $schema = null);
24 }

99.1 Basic Usage

Usage of Zend\Db\Metadata is very straight forward. The top level class Zend\Db\Metadata\Metadata will, given
an adapter, choose the best strategy (based on the database platform being used) for retrieving metadata. In most
cases, information will come from querying the INFORMATION_SCHEMA tables generally accessible to all database
connections about the currently accessible schema.
Metadata::get*Names() methods will return an array of strings, while the other methods will return specific value
objects with the containing information. This is best demonstrated by the script below.

495
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1 $metadata = new Zend\Db\Metadata\Metadata($adapter);

2

3 // get the table names

4 $tableNames = $metadata->getTableNames();
5

6 foreach ($tableNames as $tableName) {

7 echo 'In Table ' . $tableName . PHP_EOL;
8

9 $table = $metadata->getTable($tableName);
10

11

12 echo ' With columns: ' . PHP_EOL;

13 foreach ($table->getColumns() as $column) {
14 echo ' ' . $column->getName()
15 . ' -> ' . $column->getDataType()
16 . PHP_EOL;
17 }
18

19 echo PHP_EOL;
20 echo ' With constraints: ' . PHP_EOL;
21

22 foreach ($metadata->getConstraints($tableName) as $constraint) {

23 /** @var $constraint Zend\Db\Metadata\Object\ConstraintObject */
24 echo ' ' . $constraint->getName()
25 . ' -> ' . $constraint->getType()
26 . PHP_EOL;
27 if (!$constraint->hasColumns()) {
28 continue;
29 }
30 echo ' column: ' . implode(', ', $constraint->getColumns());
31 if ($constraint->isForeignKey()) {
32 $fkCols = array();
33 foreach ($constraint->getReferencedColumns() as $refColumn) {
34 $fkCols[] = $constraint->getReferencedTableName() . '.' . $refColumn;
35 }
36 echo ' => ' . implode(', ', $fkCols);
37 }
38 echo PHP_EOL;
39

40 }
41

42 echo '----' . PHP_EOL;

43 }

Metadata returns value objects that provide an interface to help developers better explore the metadata. Below is the
API for the various value objects:
The TableObject:
1 class Zend\Db\Metadata\Object\TableObject
2 {
3 public function __construct($name);
4 public function setColumns(array $columns);
5 public function getColumns();
6 public function setConstraints($constraints);
7 public function getConstraints();
8 public function setName($name);
9 public function getName();
10 }

496 Chapter 99. Zend\Db\Metadata

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

The ColumnObject:
1 class Zend\Db\Metadata\Object\ColumnObject {
2 public function __construct($name, $tableName, $schemaName = null);
3 public function setName($name);
4 public function getName();
5 public function getTableName();
6 public function setTableName($tableName);
7 public function setSchemaName($schemaName);
8 public function getSchemaName();
9 public function getOrdinalPosition();
10 public function setOrdinalPosition($ordinalPosition);
11 public function getColumnDefault();
12 public function setColumnDefault($columnDefault);
13 public function getIsNullable();
14 public function setIsNullable($isNullable);
15 public function isNullable();
16 public function getDataType();
17 public function setDataType($dataType);
18 public function getCharacterMaximumLength();
19 public function setCharacterMaximumLength($characterMaximumLength);
20 public function getCharacterOctetLength();
21 public function setCharacterOctetLength($characterOctetLength);
22 public function getNumericPrecision();
23 public function setNumericPrecision($numericPrecision);
24 public function getNumericScale();
25 public function setNumericScale($numericScale);
26 public function getNumericUnsigned();
27 public function setNumericUnsigned($numericUnsigned);
28 public function isNumericUnsigned();
29 public function getErratas();
30 public function setErratas(array $erratas);
31 public function getErrata($errataName);
32 public function setErrata($errataName, $errataValue);
33 }

The ConstraintObject:
1 class Zend\Db\Metadata\Object\ConstraintObject
2 {
3 public function __construct($name, $tableName, $schemaName = null);
4 public function setName($name);
5 public function getName();
6 public function setSchemaName($schemaName);
7 public function getSchemaName();
8 public function getTableName();
9 public function setTableName($tableName);
10 public function setType($type);
11 public function getType();
12 public function hasColumns();
13 public function getColumns();
14 public function setColumns(array $columns);
15 public function getReferencedTableSchema();
16 public function setReferencedTableSchema($referencedTableSchema);
17 public function getReferencedTableName();
18 public function setReferencedTableName($referencedTableName);
19 public function getReferencedColumns();
20 public function setReferencedColumns(array $referencedColumns);
21 public function getMatchOption();

99.1. Basic Usage 497

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

22 public function setMatchOption($matchOption);

23 public function getUpdateRule();
24 public function setUpdateRule($updateRule);
25 public function getDeleteRule();
26 public function setDeleteRule($deleteRule);
27 public function getCheckClause();
28 public function setCheckClause($checkClause);
29 public function isPrimaryKey();
30 public function isUnique();
31 public function isForeignKey();
32 public function isCheck();
33

34 }

The TriggerObject:
1 class Zend\Db\Metadata\Object\TriggerObject
2 {
3 public function getName();
4 public function setName($name);
5 public function getEventManipulation();
6 public function setEventManipulation($eventManipulation);
7 public function getEventObjectCatalog();
8 public function setEventObjectCatalog($eventObjectCatalog);
9 public function getEventObjectSchema();
10 public function setEventObjectSchema($eventObjectSchema);
11 public function getEventObjectTable();
12 public function setEventObjectTable($eventObjectTable);
13 public function getActionOrder();
14 public function setActionOrder($actionOrder);
15 public function getActionCondition();
16 public function setActionCondition($actionCondition);
17 public function getActionStatement();
18 public function setActionStatement($actionStatement);
19 public function getActionOrientation();
20 public function setActionOrientation($actionOrientation);
21 public function getActionTiming();
22 public function setActionTiming($actionTiming);
23 public function getActionReferenceOldTable();
24 public function setActionReferenceOldTable($actionReferenceOldTable);
25 public function getActionReferenceNewTable();
26 public function setActionReferenceNewTable($actionReferenceNewTable);
27 public function getActionReferenceOldRow();
28 public function setActionReferenceOldRow($actionReferenceOldRow);
29 public function getActionReferenceNewRow();
30 public function setActionReferenceNewRow($actionReferenceNewRow);
31 public function getCreated();
32 public function setCreated($created);
33 }

498 Chapter 99. Zend\Db\Metadata

 CHAPTER 100

Dumping Variables

The static method Zend\Debug\Debug::dump() prints or returns information about an expression. This simple
technique of debugging is common because it is easy to use in an ad hoc fashion and requires no initialization, special
tools, or debugging environment.

100.1 Example of dump() method

1 Zend\Debug\Debug::dump($var, $label = null, $echo = true);

The $var argument specifies the expression or variable about which the Zend\Debug\Debug::dump() method
outputs information.
The $label argument is a string to be prepended to the output of Zend\Debug\Debug::dump(). It may be
useful, for example, to use labels if you are dumping information about multiple variables on a given screen.
The boolean $echo argument specifies whether the output of Zend\Debug\Debug::dump() is echoed or not. If
TRUE, the output is echoed. Regardless of the value of the $echo argument, the return value of this method contains
the output.
It may be helpful to understand that Zend\Debug\Debug::dump() method wraps the PHP function var_dump().
If the output stream is detected as a web presentation, the output of var_dump() is escaped using htmlspecialchars()
and wrapped with (X)HTML <pre> tags.

Tip: Debugging with ZendLog

Using Zend\Debug\Debug::dump() is best for ad hoc debugging during software development. You can add
code to dump a variable and then remove the code very quickly.
Also consider the ZendLog component when writing more permanent debugging code. For example, you can use the
DEBUG log level and the stream log writer to output the string returned by Zend\Debug\Debug::dump().

499
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

500 Chapter 100. Dumping Variables

 CHAPTER 101

Introduction to Zend\Di

101.1 Dependency Injection

Dependency Injection (here-in called DI) is a concept that has been talked about in numerous places over the web.
Simply put, well explain the act of injecting dependencies simply with this below code:
1 $b = new MovieLister(new MovieFinder());

Above, MovieFinder is a dependency of MovieLister, and MovieFinder was injected into MovieLister. If you are
not familiar with the concept of DI, here are a couple of great reads: Matthew Weier OPhinneys Analogy, Ralph
Schindlers Learning DI, or Fabien Potenciers Series on DI.

Note: Zend\Di is an example of an Inversion of Control (IoC) container. IoC containers are widely used to create
object instances that have all dependencies resolved and injected. Dependency Injection containers are one form of
IoC but not the only form.
Zend Framework 2 ships with another form of IoC as well, ZendServiceManager. Unlike Zend\Di, The Service-
Manager is code-driven, meaning that you typically tell it what class to instantiate, or provide a factory for the given
class. This approach offers several benefits:
Easier to debug (error stacks take you into your factories, not the dependency injection container).
Easier to setup (write code to instantiate objects, instead of configuration).
Faster (Zend\Di has known performance issues due to the approaches used).
Unless you have specific needs for a dependency injection container versus more general Inversion of Control, we
recommend using Zend\ServiceManager for the above reasons.

101.2 Dependency Injection Containers

When your code is written in such a way that all your dependencies are injected into consuming objects, you might
find that the simple act of wiring an object has gotten more complex. When this becomes the case, and you find that
this wiring is creating more boilerplate code, this makes for an excellent opportunity to utilize a Dependency Injection
Container.
In its simplest form, a Dependency Injection Container (here-in called a DiC for brevity), is an object that is capable of
creating objects on request and managing the wiring, or the injection of required dependencies, for those requested
objects. Since the patterns that developers employ in writing DI capable code vary, DiCs are generally either in the
form of smallish objects that suit a very specific pattern, or larger DiC frameworks.

501
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Zend\Di is a DiC framework. While for the simplest code there is no configuration needed, and the use cases are quite
simple; for more complex code, Zend\Di is capable of being configured to wire these complex use cases

502 Chapter 101. Introduction to Zend\Di

 CHAPTER 102

Zend\Di Quickstart

This QuickStart is intended to get developers familiar with the concepts of the Zend\Di DiC. Generally speaking, code
is never as simple as it is inside this example, so working knowledge of the other sections of the manual is suggested.
Assume for a moment, you have the following code as part of your application that you feel is a good candidate for
being managed by a DiC, after all, you are already injecting all your dependencies:
1 namespace MyLibrary
2 {
3 class DbAdapter
4 {
5 protected $username = null;
6 protected $password = null;
7 public function __construct($username, $password)
8 {
9 $this->username = $username;
10 $this->password = $password;
11 }
12 }
13 }
14

15 namespace MyMovieApp
16 {
17 class MovieFinder
18 {
19 protected $dbAdapter = null;
20 public function __construct(\MyLibrary\DbAdapter $dbAdapter)
21 {
22 $this->dbAdapter = $dbAdapter;
23 }
24 }
25

26 class MovieLister
27 {
28 protected $movieFinder = null;
29 public function __construct(MovieFinder $movieFinder)
30 {
31 $this->movieFinder = $movieFinder;
32 }
33 }
34 }

With the above code, you find yourself writing the following to wire and utilize this code:

503
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1 // $config object is assumed

2

3 $dbAdapter = new MyLibrary\DbAdapter($config->username, $config->password);

4 $movieFinder = new MyMovieApp\MovieFinder($dbAdapter);
5 $movieLister = new MyMovieApp\MovieLister($movieFinder);
6 foreach ($movieLister as $movie) {
7 // iterate and display $movie
8 }

If you are doing this above wiring in each controller or view that wants to list movies, not only can this become
repetitive and boring to write, but also unmaintainable if for example you want to swap out one of these dependencies
on a wholesale scale.
Since this example of code already practices good dependency injection, with constructor injection, it is a great candi-
date for using Zend\Di. The usage is as simple as:
1 // inside a bootstrap somewhere
2 $di = new Zend\Di\Di();
3 $di->instanceManager()->setParameters('MyLibrary\DbAdapter', array(
4 'username' => $config->username,
5 'password' => $config->password
6 ));
7

8 // inside each controller

9 $movieLister = $di->get('MyMovieApp\MovieLister');
10 foreach ($movieLister as $movie) {
11 // iterate and display $movie
12 }

In the above example, we are obtaining a default instance of Zend\Di\Di. By default, we mean that Zend\Di\Di is
constructed with a DefinitionList seeded with a RuntimeDefinition (uses Reflection) and an empty instance manager
and no configuration. Here is the Zend\Di\Di constructor:
1 public function __construct(DefinitionList $definitions = null, InstanceManager $instanceManager
2 {
3 $this->definitions = ($definitions) ?: new DefinitionList(new Definition\RuntimeDefinition())
4 $this->instanceManager = ($instanceManager) ?: new InstanceManager();
5

6 if ($config) {
7 $this->configure($config);
8 }
9 }

This means that when $di->get() is called, it will be consulting the RuntimeDefinition, which uses reflection to un-
derstand the structure of the code. Once it knows the structure of the code, it can then know how the dependencies
fit together and how to go about wiring your objects for you. Zend\Di\Definition\RuntimeDefinition will utilize the
names of the parameters in the methods as the class parameter names. This is how both username and password key
are mapped to the first and second parameter, respectively, of the constructor consuming these named parameters.
If you were to want to pass in the username and password at call time, this is achieved by passing them as the second
argument of get():
1 // inside each controller
2 $di = new Zend\Di\Di();
3 $movieLister = $di->get('MyMovieApp\MovieLister', array(
4 'username' => $config->username,
5 'password' => $config->password
6 ));
7 foreach ($movieLister as $movie) {

504 Chapter 102. Zend\Di Quickstart

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

8 // iterate and display $movie

9 }

It is important to note that when using call time parameters, these parameter names will be applied to any class that
accepts a parameter of such name.
By calling $di->get(), this instance of MovieLister will be automatically shared. This means subsequent calls to get()
will return the same instance as previous calls. If you wish to have completely new instances of MovieLister, you can
utilize $di->newInstance().

505
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

506 Chapter 102. Zend\Di Quickstart

 CHAPTER 103

Zend\Di Definition

Definitions are the place where Zend\Di attempts to understand the structure of the code it is attempting to wire. This
means that if youve written non-ambiguous, clear and concise code; Zend\Di has a very good chance of understanding
how to wire things up without much added complexity.

103.1 DefinitionList

Definitions are introduced to the Zend\Di\Di object through a definition list implemented as Zend\Di\DefinitionList
(SplDoublyLinkedList). Order is important. Definitions in the front of the list will be consulted on a class before
definitions at the end of the list.

Note: Regardless of what kind of Definition strategy you decide to use, it is important that your autoloaders are
already setup and ready to use.

103.2 RuntimeDefinition

The default DefinitionList instantiated by Zend\Di\Di, when no other DefinitionList is provided, has as Defini-
tion\RuntimeDefinition baked-in. The RuntimeDefinition will respond to querys about classes by using Reflection.
This Runtime definitions uses any available information inside methods: their signature, the names of parameters, the
type-hints of the parameters, and the default values to determine if something is optional or required when making a
call to that method. The more explicit you can be in your method naming and method signatures, the easier of a time
Zend\Di\Definition\RuntimeDefinition will have determining the structure of your code.
This is what the constructor of a RuntimeDefinition looks like:
1 public function __construct(IntrospectionStrategy $introspectionStrategy = null, array $explicitClass
2 {
3 $this->introspectionStrategy = ($introspectionStrategy) ?: new IntrospectionStrategy();
4 if ($explicitClasses) {
5 $this->setExplicitClasses($explicitClasses);
6 }
7 }

The IntrospectionStrategy object is an object that determines the rules, or guidelines, for how the RuntimeDefinition
will introspect information about your classes. Here are the things it knows how to do:
Whether or not to use Annotations (Annotations are expensive and off by default, read more about these in the
Annotations section)

507
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Which method names to include in the introspection, by default, the pattern /^set[A-Z]{1}\w*/ is registered by
default, this is a list of patterns.
Which interface names represent the interface injection pattern. By default, the pattern /\w*Aware\w*/ is regis-
tered, this is a list of patterns.
The constructor for the IntrospectionStrategy looks like this:
1 public function __construct(AnnotationManager $annotationManager = null)
2 {
3 $this->annotationManager = ($annotationManager) ?: $this->createDefaultAnnotationManager();
4 }

This goes to say that an AnnotationManager is not required, but if you wish to create a special AnnotationManager
with your own annotations, and also wish to extend the RuntimeDefinition to look for these special Annotations, this
is the place to do it.
The RuntimeDefinition also can be used to look up either all classes (implicitly, which is default), or explicitly look up
for particular pre-defined classes. This is useful when your strategy for inspecting one set of classes might differ from
those of another strategy for another set of classes. This can be achieved by using the setExplicitClasses() method or
by passing a list of classes as a second argument to the constructor of the RuntimeDefinition.

103.3 CompilerDefinition

The CompilerDefinition is very much similar in nature to the RuntimeDefinition with the exception that it can be
seeded with more information for the purposes of compiling a definition. This is useful when you do not want to be
making all those (sometimes expensive) calls to reflection and the annotation scanning system during the request of
your application. By using the compiler, a definition can be created and written to disk to be used during a request, as
opposed to the task of scanning the actual code.
For example, lets assume we want to create a script that will create definitions for some of our library code:
1 // in "package name" format
2 $components = array(
3 'My_MovieApp',
4 'My_OtherClasses',
5 );
6

7 foreach ($components as $component) {

8 $diCompiler = new Zend\Di\Definition\CompilerDefinition;
9 $diCompiler->addDirectory('/path/to/classes/' . str_replace('_', '/', $component));
10

11 $diCompiler->compile();
12 file_put_contents(
13 __DIR__ . '/../data/di/' . $component . '-definition.php',
14 '<?php return ' . var_export($diCompiler->toArrayDefinition()->toArray(), true) . ';'
15 );
16 }

This will create a couple of files that will return an array of the definition for that class. To utilize this in an application,
the following code will suffice:
1 protected function setupDi(Application $app)
2 {
3 $definitionList = new DefinitionList(array(
4 new Definition\ArrayDefinition(include __DIR__ . '/path/to/data/di/My_MovieApp-definition.php
5 new Definition\ArrayDefinition(include __DIR__ . '/path/to/data/di/My_OtherClasses-definition
6 $runtime = new Definition\RuntimeDefinition(),

508 Chapter 103. Zend\Di Definition

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

7 ));
8 $di = new Di($definitionList, null, new Config($this->config->di));
9 $di->instanceManager()->addTypePreference('Zend\Di\LocatorInterface', $di);
10 $app->setLocator($di);
11 }

The above code would more than likely go inside your applications or modules bootstrap file. This represents the
simplest and most performant way of configuring your DiC for usage.

103.4 ClassDefinition

The idea behind using a ClassDefinition is two-fold. First, you may want to override some information inside of a
RuntimeDefinition. Secondly, you might want to simply define your complete classs definition with an xml, ini, or
php file describing the structure. This class definition can be fed in via Configuration or by directly instantiating and
registering the Definition with the DefinitionList.
Todo - example

103.4. ClassDefinition 509

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

510 Chapter 103. Zend\Di Definition

 CHAPTER 104

Zend\Di InstanceManager

The InstanceManager is responsible for any runtime information associated with the Zend\Di\Di DiC. This means that
the information that goes into the instance manager is specific to both how the particular consuming Applications
needs and even more specifically to the environment in which the application is running.

104.1 Parameters

Parameters are simply entry points for either dependencies or instance configuration values. A class consists of a set
of parameters, each uniquely named. When writing your classes, you should attempt to not use the same parameter
name twice in the same class when you expect that that parameters is used for either instance configuration or an object
dependency. This leads to an ambiguous parameter, and is a situation best avoided.
Our movie finder example can be further used to explain these concepts:
1 namespace MyLibrary
2 {
3 class DbAdapter
4 {
5 protected $username = null;
6 protected $password = null;
7 public function __construct($username, $password)
8 {
9 $this->username = $username;
10 $this->password = $password;
11 }
12 }
13 }
14

15 namespace MyMovieApp
16 {
17 class MovieFinder
18 {
19 protected $dbAdapter = null;
20 public function __construct(\MyLibrary\DbAdapter $dbAdapter)
21 {
22 $this->dbAdapter = $dbAdapter;
23 }
24 }
25

26 class MovieLister
27 {
28 protected $movieFinder = null;

511
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

29 public function __construct(MovieFinder $movieFinder)

30 {
31 $this->movieFinder = $movieFinder;
32 }
33 }
34 }

In the above example, the class DbAdapter has 2 parameters: username and password; MovieFinder has one parameter:
dbAdapter, and MovieLister has one parameter: movieFinder. Any of these can be utilized for injection of either
dependencies or scalar values during instance configuration or during call time.
When looking at the above code, since the dbAdapter parameter and the movieFinder parameter are both type-hinted
with concrete types, the DiC can assume that it can fulfill these object tendencies by itself. On the other hand, username
and password do not have type-hints and are, more than likely, scalar in nature. Since the DiC cannot reasonably know
this information, it must be provided to the instance manager in the form of parameters. Not doing so will force
$di->get(MyMovieApp\MovieLister) to throw an exception.
The following ways of using parameters are available:
1 // setting instance configuration into the instance manager
2 $di->instanceManager()->setParameters('MyLibrary\DbAdapter', array(
3 'username' => 'myusername',
4 'password' => 'mypassword'
5 ));
6

7 // forcing a particular dependency to be used by the instance manager

8 $di->instanceManager()->setParameters('MyMovieApp\MovieFinder', array(
9 'dbAdapter' => new MyLibrary\DbAdapter('myusername', 'mypassword')
10 ));
11

12 // passing instance parameters at call time

13 $movieLister = $di->get('MyMovieApp\MovieLister', array(
14 'username' => $config->username,
15 'password' => $config->password
16 ));
17

18 // passing a specific instance at call time

19 $movieLister = $di->get('MyMovieApp\MovieLister', array(
20 'dbAdapter' => new MyLibrary\DbAdapter('myusername', 'mypassword')
21 ));

104.2 Preferences

In some cases, you might be using interfaces as type hints as opposed to concrete types. Lets assume the movie
example was modified in the following way:
1 namespace MyMovieApp
2 {
3 interface MovieFinderInterface
4 {
5 // methods required for this type
6 }
7

8 class GenericMovieFinder implements MovieFinderInterface

9 {
10 protected $dbAdapter = null;

512 Chapter 104. Zend\Di InstanceManager

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

11 public function __construct(\MyLibrary\DbAdapter $dbAdapter)

12 {
13 $this->dbAdapter = $dbAdapter;
14 }
15 }
16

17 class MovieLister
18 {
19 protected $movieFinder = null;
20 public function __construct(MovieFinderInterface $movieFinder)
21 {
22 $this->movieFinder = $movieFinder;
23 }
24 }
25 }

What youll notice above is that now the MovieLister type minimally expects that the dependency injected implements
the MovieFinderInterface. This allows multiple implementations of this base interface to be used as a dependency,
if that is what the consumer decides they want to do. As you can imagine, Zend\Di, by itself would not be able to
determine what kind of concrete object to use fulfill this dependency, so this type of preference needs to be made
known to the instance manager.
To give this information to the instance manager, see the following code example:
1 $di->instanceManager()->addTypePreference('MyMovieApp\MovieFinderInterface', 'MyMovieApp\GenericMovie
2 // assuming all instance config for username, password is setup
3 $di->get('MyMovieApp\MovieLister');

104.3 Aliases

In some situations, youll find that you need to alias an instance. There are two main reasons to do this. First, it creates
a simpler, alternative name to use when using the DiC, as opposed to using the full class name. Second, you might
find that you need to have the same object type in two separate contexts. This means that when you alias a particular
class, you can then attach a specific instance configuration to that alias; as opposed to attaching that configuration to
the class name.
To demonstrate both of these points, well look at a use case where well have two separate DbAdapters, one will be
for read-only operations, the other will be for read-write operations:

Note: Aliases can also have parameters registered at alias time

1 // assume the MovieLister example of code from the QuickStart

2

3 $im = $di->instanceManager();
4

5 // add alias for short naming

6 $im->addAlias('movielister', 'MyMovieApp\MovieLister');
7

8 // add aliases for specific instances

9 $im->addAlias('dbadapter-readonly', 'MyLibrary\DbAdapter', array(
10 'username' => $config->db->readAdapter->username,
11 'password' => $config->db->readAdapter->password,
12 ));
13 $im->addAlias('dbadapter-readwrite', 'MyLibrary\DbAdapter', array(
14 'username' => $config->db->readWriteAdapter->username,

104.3. Aliases 513

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

15 'password' => $config->db->readWriteAdapter->password,

16 ));
17

18 // set a default type to use, pointing to an alias

19 $im->addTypePreference('MyLibrary\DbAdapter', 'dbadapter-readonly');
20

21 $movieListerRead = $di->get('MyMovieApp\MovieLister');
22 $movieListerReadWrite = $di->get('MyMovieApp\MovieLister', array('dbAdapter' => 'dbadapter-readwrite'

514 Chapter 104. Zend\Di InstanceManager

 CHAPTER 105

Zend\Di Configuration

Most of the configuration for both the setup of Definitions as well as the setup of the Instance Manager can be attained
by a configuration file. This file will produce an array (typically) and have a particular iterable structure.
The top two keys are definition and instance, each specifying values for respectively, definition setup and instance
manager setup.
The definition section expects the following information expressed as a PHP array:
1 $config = array(
2 'definition' => array(
3 'compiler' => array(/* @todo compiler information */),
4 'runtime' => array(/* @todo runtime information */),
5 'class' => array(
6 'instantiator' => '', // the name of the instantiator, by default this is __construct
7 'supertypes' => array(), // an array of supertypes the class implements
8 'methods' => array(
9 'setSomeParameter' => array( // a method name
10 'parameterName' => array(
11 'name', // string parameter name
12 'type', // type or null
13 'is-required' // bool
14 )
15 )
16

17 )
18 )
19 )
20 );

515
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

516 Chapter 105. Zend\Di Configuration

 CHAPTER 106

Zend\Di Debugging & Complex Use Cases

106.1 Debugging a DiC

It is possible to dump the information contained within both the Definition and InstanceManager for a Di instance.
The easiest way is to do the following:
1 Zend\Di\Display\Console::export($di);

If you are using a RuntimeDefinition where upon you expect a particular definition to be resolve at the first-call, you
can see that information to the console display to force it to read that class:
1 Zend\Di\Display\Console::export($di, array('A\ClassIWantTo\GetTheDefinitionFor'));

106.2 Complex Use Cases

106.2.1 Interface Injection

1 namespace Foo\Bar {
2 class Baz implements BamAwareInterface
3 {
4 public $bam;
5

6 public function setBam(Bam $bam)

7 {
8 $this->bam = $bam;
9 }
10 }
11 class Bam
12 {
13 }
14 interface BamAwareInterface
15 {
16 public function setBam(Bam $bam);
17 }
18 }
19

20 namespace {
21 include 'zf2bootstrap.php';
22 $di = new Zend\Di\Di;

517
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

23 $baz = $di->get('Foo\Bar\Baz');
24 }

106.2.2 Setter Injection with Class Definition

1 namespace Foo\Bar {
2 class Baz
3 {
4 public $bam;
5

6 public function setBam(Bam $bam)

7 {
8 $this->bam = $bam;
9 }
10 }
11 class Bam {
12 }
13 }
14

15 namespace {
16 $di = new Zend\Di\Di;
17 $di->configure(new Zend\Di\Config(array(
18 'definition' => array(
19 'class' => array(
20 'Foo\Bar\Baz' => array(
21 'setBam' => array('required' => true)
22 )
23 )
24 )
25 )));
26 $baz = $di->get('Foo\Bar\Baz');
27 }

106.2.3 Multiple Injections To A Single Injection Point

1 namespace Application {
2 class Page
3 {
4 public $blocks;
5

6 public function addBlock(Block $block)

7 {
8 $this->blocks[] = $block;
9 }
10 }
11 interface Block
12 {
13 }
14 }
15

16 namespace MyModule {
17 class BlockOne implements \Application\Block {}
18 class BlockTwo implements \Application\Block {}
19 }
20

518 Chapter 106. Zend\Di Debugging & Complex Use Cases

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

21 namespace {
22 include 'zf2bootstrap.php';
23 $di = new Zend\Di\Di;
24 $di->configure(new Zend\Di\Config(array(
25 'definition' => array(
26 'class' => array(
27 'Application\Page' => array(
28 'addBlock' => array(
29 'block' => array('type' => 'Application\Block', 'required' => true)
30 )
31 )
32 )
33 ),
34 'instance' => array(
35 'Application\Page' => array(
36 'injections' => array(
37 'MyModule\BlockOne',
38 'MyModule\BlockTwo'
39 )
40 )
41 )
42 )));
43 $page = $di->get('Application\Page');
44 }

106.2. Complex Use Cases 519

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

520 Chapter 106. Zend\Di Debugging & Complex Use Cases

 CHAPTER 107

Introduction to Zend\Dom

The Zend\Dom component provides tools for working with DOM documents and structures. Currently, we offer
Zend\Dom\Query, which provides a unified interface for querying DOM documents utilizing both XPath and CSS
selectors.

521
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

522 Chapter 107. Introduction to Zend\Dom

 CHAPTER 108

Zend\Dom\Query

Zend\Dom\Query provides mechanisms for querying XML and (X) HTML documents utilizing either XPath or
CSS selectors. It was developed to aid with functional testing of MVC applications, but could also be used for rapid
development of screen scrapers.
CSS selector notation is provided as a simpler and more familiar notation for web developers to utilize when querying
documents with XML structures. The notation should be familiar to anybody who has developed Cascading Style
Sheets or who utilizes Javascript toolkits that provide functionality for selecting nodes utilizing CSS selectors (Proto-
types $$() and Dojos dojo.query were both inspirations for the component).

108.1 Theory of Operation

To use Zend\Dom\Query, you instantiate a Zend\Dom\Query object, optionally passing a document to query (a
string). Once you have a document, you can use either the execute() or queryXpath() methods; each method
will return a Zend\Dom\NodeList object with any matching nodes.
The primary difference between Zend\Dom\Query and using DOMDocument + DOMXPath is the ability to select
against CSS selectors. You can utilize any of the following, in any combination:
element types: provide an element type to match: div, a, span, h2, etc.
style attributes: CSS style attributes to match: .error, div.error, label.required, etc. If an
element defines more than one style, this will match as long as the named style is present anywhere in the style
declaration.
id attributes: element ID attributes to match: #content, div#nav, etc.
arbitrary attributes: arbitrary element attributes to match. Three different types of matching are provided:
exact match: the attribute exactly matches the string: div[bar=baz] would match a div element with a
bar attribute that exactly matches the value baz.
word match: the attribute contains a word matching the string: div[bar~=baz] would match a div
element with a bar attribute that contains the word baz. <div bar=foo baz> would match, but <div
bar=foo bazbat> would not.
substring match: the attribute contains the string: div[bar*=baz] would match a div element with a
bar attribute that contains the string baz anywhere within it.
direct descendents: utilize > between selectors to denote direct descendents. div > span would select only
span elements that are direct descendents of a div. Can also be used with any of the selectors above.
descendents: string together multiple selectors to indicate a hierarchy along which to search. div .foo
span #one would select an element of id one that is a descendent of arbitrary depth beneath a span

523
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

element, which is in turn a descendent of arbitrary depth beneath an element with a class of foo, that is an
descendent of arbitrary depth beneath a div element. For example, it would match the link to the word One
in the listing below:
1 <div>
2 <table>
3 <tr>
4 <td class="foo">
5 <div>
6 Lorem ipsum <span class="bar">
7 <a href="/foo/bar" id="one">One</a>
8 <a href="/foo/baz" id="two">Two</a>
9 <a href="/foo/bat" id="three">Three</a>
10 <a href="/foo/bla" id="four">Four</a>
11 </span>
12 </div>
13 </td>
14 </tr>
15 </table>
16 </div>

Once youve performed your query, you can then work with the result object to determine information about the nodes,
as well as to pull them and/or their content directly for examination and manipulation. Zend\Dom\NodeList
implements Countable and Iterator, and stores the results internally as a DOMDocument and DOMNodeList.
As an example, consider the following call, that selects against the HTML above:
1 use Zend\Dom\Query;
2

3 $dom = new Query($html);

4 $results = $dom->execute('.foo .bar a');
5

6 $count = count($results); // get number of matches: 4

7 foreach ($results as $result) {
8 // $result is a DOMElement
9 }

Zend\Dom\Query also allows straight XPath queries utilizing the queryXpath() method; you can pass any valid
XPath query to this method, and it will return a Zend\Dom\NodeList object.

108.2 Methods Available

The Zend\Dom\Query family of classes have the following methods available.

108.2.1 Zend\Dom\Query

The following methods are available to Zend\Dom\Query:

setDocumentXml($document, $encoding = null): specify an XML string to query against.
setDocumentXhtml($document, $encoding = null): specify an XHTML string to query against.
setDocumentHtml($document, $encoding = null): specify an HTML string to query against.
setDocument($document, $encoding = null): specify a string to query against;
Zend\Dom\Query will then attempt to autodetect the document type.

524 Chapter 108. Zend\Dom\Query

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

setEncoding($encoding): specify an encoding string to use. This encoding will be passed to DOMDoc-
uments constructor if specified.
getDocument(): retrieve the original document string provided to the object.
getDocumentType(): retrieve the document type of the document provided to the object; will be one of the
DOC_XML, DOC_XHTML, or DOC_HTML class constants.
getEncoding(): retrieves the specified encoding.
execute($query): query the document using CSS selector notation.
queryXpath($xPathQuery): query the document using XPath notation.

108.2.2 Zend\Dom\NodeList

As mentioned previously, Zend\Dom\NodeList implements both Iterator and Countable, and as such can
be used in a foreach() loop as well as with the count() function. Additionally, it exposes the following methods:
getCssQuery(): return the CSS selector query used to produce the result (if any).
getXpathQuery(): return the XPath query used to produce the result. Internally, Zend\Dom\Query
converts CSS selector queries to XPath, so this value will always be populated.
getDocument(): retrieve the DOMDocument the selection was made against.

108.2. Methods Available 525

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

526 Chapter 108. Zend\Dom\Query

 CHAPTER 109

Introduction to Zend\Escaper

The OWASP Top 10 web security risks study lists Cross-Site Scripting (XSS) in second place. PHPs sole functionality
against XSS is limited to two functions of which one is commonly misapplied. Thus, the Zend\Escaper component
was written. It offers developers a way to escape output and defend from XSS and related vulnerabilities by introducing
contextual escaping based on peer-reviewed rules.
Zend\Escaper was written with ease of use in mind, so it can be used completely stand-alone from the rest of the
framework, and as such can be installed with Composer using zendframework/zend-escaper.
For easier use of the Escaper component within the framework itself, especially with the Zend\View component, a
set of view helpers is provided.

Warning: The Zend\Escaper is a security related component. As such, if you believe you found an issue
with this component, we ask that you follow our Security Policy and report security issues accordingly. The Zend
Framework team and the contributors thanks you in advance.

109.1 Overview

The Zend\Escaper component provides one class, Zend\Escaper\Escaper which in turn, provides five meth-
ods for escaping output. Which method to use when, depends on the context in which the outputted data is used. It is
up to the developer to use the right methods in the right context.
Zend\Escaper\Escaper has the following escaping methods available for each context:
escapeHtml: escape a string for the HTML Body context.
escapeHtmlAttr: escape a string for the HTML Attribute context.
escapeJs: escape a string for the Javascript context.
escapeCss: escape a string for the CSS context.
escapeUrl: escape a string for the URI or Parameter contexts.
Usage of each method will be discussed in detail in later chapters.

109.2 What Zend\Escaper is not

Zend\Escaper is meant to be used only for escaping data that is to be output, and as such should not be misused
for filtering input data. For such tasks, the Zend\Filter component, HTMLPurifier or PHPs Filter component should
be used.

527
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

528 Chapter 109. Introduction to Zend\Escaper

 CHAPTER 110

Theory of Operation

Zend\Escaper provides methods for escaping output data, dependent on the context in which the data will be used.
Each method is based on peer-reviewed rules and is in compliance with the current OWASP recommendations.
The escaping follows a well known and fixed set of encoding rules for each key HTML context, which are defined by
OWASP. These rules cannot be impacted or negated by browser quirks or edge-case HTML parsing unless the browser
suffers a catastrophic bug in its HTML parser or Javascript interpreter - both of these are unlikely.
The contexts in which Zend\Escaper should be used are HTML Body, HTML Attribute, Javascript, CSS and
URL/URI contexts.
Every escaper method will take the data to be escaped, make sure it is utf-8 encoded data, or try to convert it to utf-8,
do the context-based escaping, encode the escaped data back to its original encoding and return the data to the caller.
The actual escaping of the data differs between each method, they all have their own set of rules according to which
the escaping is done. An example will allow us to clearly demonstrate the difference, and how the same characters are
being escaped differently between contexts:
1 $escaper = new Zend\Escaper\Escaper('utf-8');
2

3 // &lt;script&gt;alert(&quot;zf2&quot;)&lt;/script&gt;
4 echo $escaper->escapeHtml('<script>alert("zf2")</script>');
5 // &lt;script&gt;alert&#x28;&quot;zf2&quot;&#x29;&lt;&#x2F;script&gt;
6 echo $escaper->escapeHtmlAttr('<script>alert("zf2")</script>');
7 // \x3Cscript\x3Ealert\x28\x22zf2\x22\x29\x3C\x2Fscript\x3E
8 echo $escaper->escapeJs('<script>alert("zf2")</script>');
9 // \3C script\3E alert\28 \22 zf2\22 \29 \3C \2F script\3E
10 echo $escaper->escapeCss('<script>alert("zf2")</script>');
11 // %3Cscript%3Ealert%28%22zf2%22%29%3C%2Fscript%3E
12 echo $escaper->escapeUrl('<script>alert("zf2")</script>');

More detailed examples will be given in later chapters.

110.1 The Problem with Inconsistent Functionality

At present, programmers orient towards the following PHP functions for each common HTML context:
HTML Body: htmlspecialchars() or htmlentities()
HTML Attribute: htmlspecialchars() or htmlentities()
Javascript: addslashes() or json_encode()
CSS: n/a

529
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

URL/URI: rawurlencode() or urlencode()

In practice, these decisions appear to depend more on what PHP offers, and if it can be interpreted as offering sufficient
escaping safety, than it does on what is recommended in reality to defend against XSS. While these functions can
prevent some forms of XSS, they do not cover all use cases or risks and are therefore insufficient defenses.
Using htmlspecialchars() in a perfectly valid HTML5 unquoted attribute value, for example, is completely useless
since the value can be terminated by a space (among other things) which is never escaped. Thus, in this instance, we
have a conflict between a widely used HTML escaper and a modern HTML specification, with no specific function
available to cover this use case. While its tempting to blame users, or the HTML specification authors, escaping just
needs to deal with whatever HTML and browsers allow.
Using addslashes(), custom backslash escaping or json_encode() will typically ignore HTML special characters such
as ampersands which may be used to inject entities into Javascript. Under the right circumstances, browser will convert
these entities into their literal equivalents before interpreting Javascript thus allowing attackers to inject arbitrary code.
Inconsistencies with valid HTML, insecure default parameters, lack of character encoding awareness, and misrepre-
sentations of what functions are capable of by some programmers - these all make escaping in PHP an unnecessarily
convoluted quest.
To circumvent the lack of escaping methods in PHP, Zend\Escaper addresses the need to apply context-specific
escaping in web applications. It implements methods that specifically target XSS and offers programmers a tool to
secure their applications without misusing other inadequate methods, or using, most likely incomplete, home-grown
solutions.

110.2 Why Contextual Escaping?

To understand why multiple standardised escaping methods are needed, heres a couple of quick points (by no means
a complete set!):

110.2.1 HTML escaping of unquoted HTML attribute values still allows XSS

This is probably the best known way to defeat htmlspecialchars() when used on attribute values since any space (or
character interpreted as a space - there are a lot) lets you inject new attributes whose content cant be neutralised by
HTML escaping. The solution (where this is possible) is additional escaping as defined by the OWASP ESAPI codecs.
The point here can be extended further - escaping only works if a programmer or designer know what theyre doing. In
many contexts, there are additional practices and gotchas that need to be carefully monitored since escaping sometimes
needs a little extra help to protect against XSS - even if that means ensuring all attribute values are properly double
quoted despite this not being required for valid HTML.

110.2.2 HTML escaping of CSS, Javascript or URIs is often reversed when passed
to non-HTML interpreters by the browser

HTML escaping is just that - its designed to escape a string for HTML (i.e. prevent tag or attribute insertion) but
not alter the underlying meaning of the content whether it be Text, Javascript, CSS or URIs. For that purpose a fully
HTML escaped version of any other context may still have its unescaped form extracted before its interpreted or
executed. For this reason we need separate escapers for Javascript, CSS and URIs and those writing templates must
know which escaper to apply to which context. Of course this means you need to be able to identify the correct context
before selecting the right escaper!

530 Chapter 110. Theory of Operation

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

110.2.3 DOM based XSS requires a defence using at least two levels of different
escaping in many cases

DOM based XSS has become increasingly common as Javascript has taken off in popularity for large scale client side
coding. A simple example is Javascript defined in a template which inserts a new piece of HTML text into the DOM.
If the string is only HTML escaped, it may still contain Javascript that will execute in that context. If the string is
only Javascript escaped, it may contain HTML markup (new tags and attributes) which will be injected into the DOM
and parsed once the inserting Javascript executes. Damned either way? The solution is to escape twice - first escape
the string for HTML (make it safe for DOM insertion), and then for Javascript (make it safe for the current Javascript
context). Nested contexts are a common means of bypassing naive escaping habits (e.g. you can inject Javascript into
a CSS expression within a HTML Attribute).

110.2.4 PHP has no known anti-XSS escape functions (only those kidnapped from
their original purposes)

A simple example, widely used, is when you see json_encode() used to escape Javascript, or worse, some kind
of mutant addslashes() implementation. These were never designed to eliminate XSS yet PHP programmers use
them as such. For example, json_encode() does not escape the ampersand or semi-colon characters by default.
That means you can easily inject HTML entities which could then be decoded before the Javascript is evaluated in a
HTML document. This lets you break out of strings, add new JS statements, close tags, etc. In other words, using
json_encode() is insufficient and naive. The same, arguably, could be said for htmlspecialchars() which
has its own well known limitations that make a singular reliance on it a questionable practice.

110.2. Why Contextual Escaping? 531

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

532 Chapter 110. Theory of Operation

 CHAPTER 111

Configuring Zend\Escaper

Zend\Escaper\Escaper has only one configuration option available, and that is the encoding to be used by the
Escaper object.
The default encoding is utf-8. Other supported encodings are:
iso-8859-1
iso-8859-5
iso-8859-15
cp866, ibm866, 866
cp1251, windows-1251
cp1252, windows-1252
koi8-r, koi8-ru
big5, big5-hkscs, 950, gb2312, 936
shift_jis, sjis, sjis-win, cp932
eucjp, eucjp-win
macroman
If an unsupported encoding is passed to Zend\Escaper\Escaper, a
Zend\Escaper\Exception\InvalidArgumentException will be thrown.

533
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

534 Chapter 111. Configuring Zend\Escaper

 CHAPTER 112

Escaping HTML

Probably the most common escaping happens in the HTML Body context. There are very few characters with special
meaning in this context, yet it is quite common to escape data incorrectly, namely by setting the wrong flags and
character encoding.
For escaping data in the HTML Body context, use Zend\Escaper\Escapers escapeHtml method. Internally
it uses PHPs htmlspecialchars, and additionally correctly sets the flags and encoding.
1 // outputting this without escaping would be a bad idea!
2 $input = '<script>alert("zf2")</script>';
3

4 $escaper = new Zend\Escaper\Escaper('utf-8');

5

6 // somewhere in an HTML template

7 <div class="user-provided-input">
8 <?php
9 echo $escaper->escapeHtml($input); // all safe!
10 ?>
11 </div>

One thing a developer needs to pay special attention too, is that the encoding in which the document is served to the
client, as it must be the same as the encoding used for escaping!

112.1 Examples of Bad HTML Escaping

An example of incorrect usage:

1 <?php
2 $input = '<script>alert("zf2")</script>';
3 $escaper = new Zend\Escaper\Escaper('utf-8');
4 ?>
5 <?php header('Content-Type: text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1'); ?>
6 <!DOCTYPE html>
7 <html>
8 <head>
9 <title>Encodings set incorrectly!</title>
10 <meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1">
11 </head>
12 <body>
13 <?php
14 // Bad! The escaper's and the document's encodings are different!
15 echo $escaper->escapeHtml($input);

535
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

16 ?>
17 </body>

112.2 Examples of Good HTML Escaping

An example of correct usage:

1 <?php
2 $input = '<script>alert("zf2")</script>';
3 $escaper = new Zend\Escaper\Escaper('utf-8');
4 ?>
5 <?php header('Content-Type: text/html; charset=UTF-8'); ?>
6 <!DOCTYPE html>
7 <html>
8 <head>
9 <title>Encodings set correctly!</title>
10 <meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=UTF-8">
11 </head>
12 <body>
13 <?php
14 // Good! The escaper's and the document's encodings are same!
15 echo $escaper->escapeHtml($input);
16 ?>
17 </body>

536 Chapter 112. Escaping HTML

 CHAPTER 113

Escaping HTML Attributes

Escaping data in the HTML Attribute context is most often done incorrectly, if not overlooked completely by de-
velopers. Regular HTML escaping can be used for escaping HTML attributes, but only if the attribute value can
be guaranteed as being properly quoted! To avoid confusion, we recommend always using the HTML Attribute
escaper method in the HTML Attribute context.
To escape data in the HTML Attribute, use Zend\Escaper\Escapers escapeHtmlAttr method. Internally
it will convert the data to UTF-8, check for its validity, and use an extended set of characters to escape that are not
covered by htmlspecialchars to cover the cases where an attribute might be unquoted or quoted illegally.

113.1 Examples of Bad HTML Attribute Escaping

An example of incorrect HTML attribute escaping:

1 <?php header('Content-Type: text/html; charset=UTF-8'); ?>
2 <!DOCTYPE html>
3 <?php
4 $input = <<<INPUT
5 ' onmouseover='alert(/ZF2!/);
6 INPUT;
7 /**
8 * NOTE: This is equivalent to using htmlspecialchars($input, ENT_COMPAT)
9 */
10 $output = htmlspecialchars($input);
11 ?>
12 <html>
13 <head>
14 <title>Single Quoted Attribute</title>
15 <meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=UTF-8">
16 </head>
17 <body>
18 <div>
19 <?php
20 // the span tag will look like:
21 // <span title='' onmouseover='alert(/ZF2!/);'>
22 ?>
23 <span title='<?php echo $output ?>'>
24 What framework are you using?
25 </span>
26 </div>
27 </body>
28 </html>

537
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

In the above example, the default ENT_COMPAT flag is being used, which does not escape single quotes, thus resulting
in an alert box popping up when the onmouseover event happens on the span element.
Another example of incorrect HTML attribute escaping can happen when unquoted attributes are used, which is, by
the way, perfectly valid HTML5:
1 <?php header('Content-Type: text/html; charset=UTF-8'); ?>
2 <!DOCTYPE html>
3 <?php
4 $input = <<<INPUT
5 faketitle onmouseover=alert(/ZF2!/);
6 INPUT;
7 // Tough luck using proper flags when the title attribute is unquoted!
8 $output = htmlspecialchars($input,ENT_QUOTES);
9 ?>
10 <html>
11 <head>
12 <title>Quoteless Attribute</title>
13 <meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=UTF-8">
14 </head>
15 <body>
16 <div>
17 <?php
18 // the span tag will look like:
19 // <span title=faketitle onmouseover=alert(/ZF2!/);>
20 ?>
21 <span title=<?php echo $output ?>>
22 What framework are you using?
23 </span>
24 </div>
25 </body>
26 </html>

The above example shows how it is easy to break out from unquoted attributes in HTML5.

113.2 Examples of Good HTML Attribute Escaping

Both of the previous examples can be avoided by simply using the escapeHtmlAttr method:
1 <?php header('Content-Type: text/html; charset=UTF-8'); ?>
2 <!DOCTYPE html>
3 <?php
4 $input = <<<INPUT
5 faketitle onmouseover=alert(/ZF2!/);
6 INPUT;
7 $escaper = new Zend\Escaper\Escaper('utf-8');
8 $output = $escaper->escapeHtmlAttr($input);
9 ?>
10 <html>
11 <head>
12 <title>Quoteless Attribute</title>
13 <meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=UTF-8">
14 </head>
15 <body>
16 <div>
17 <?php
18 // the span tag will look like:

538 Chapter 113. Escaping HTML Attributes

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

19 // <span title=faketitle&#x20;onmouseover&#x3D;alert&#x28;&#x2F;ZF2&#x21;&#x2F;&#x29;&#x3B;>
20 ?>
21 <span title=<?php echo $output ?>>
22 What framework are you using?
23 </span>
24 </div>
25 </body>
26 </html>

In the above example, the malicious input from the attacker becomes completely harmless as we used proper HTML
attribute escaping!

113.2. Examples of Good HTML Attribute Escaping 539

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

540 Chapter 113. Escaping HTML Attributes

 CHAPTER 114

Escaping Javascript

Javascript string literals in HTML are subject to significant restrictions particularly due to the potential for unquoted
attributes and any uncertainty as to whether Javascript will be viewed as being CDATA or PCDATA by the browser.
To eliminate any possible XSS vulnerabilities, Javascript escaping for HTML extends the escaping rules of both
ECMAScript and JSON to include any potentially dangerous character. Very similar to HTML attribute value escaping,
this means escaping everything except basic alphanumeric characters and the comma, period and underscore characters
as hexadecimal or unicode escapes.
Javascript escaping applies to all literal strings and digits. It is not possible to safely escape other Javascript markup.
To escape data in the Javascript context, use Zend\Escaper\Escapers escapeJs method. An extended
set of characters are escaped beyond ECMAScripts rules for Javascript literal string escaping in order to prevent
misinterpretation of Javascript as HTML leading to the injection of special characters and entities.

114.1 Examples of Bad Javascript Escaping

An example of incorrect Javascript escaping:

1 <?php header('Content-Type: application/xhtml+xml; charset=UTF-8'); ?>
2 <!DOCTYPE html>
3 <?php
4 $input = <<<INPUT
5 bar&quot;; alert(&quot;Meow!&quot;); var xss=&quot;true
6 INPUT;
7 $output = json_encode($input);
8 ?>
9 <html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml">
10 <head>
11 <title>Unescaped Entities</title>
12 <meta charset="UTF-8"/>
13 <script type="text/javascript">
14 <?php
15 // this will result in
16 // var foo = "bar&quot;; alert(&quot;Meow!&quot;); var xss=&quot;true";
17 ?>
18 var foo = <?php echo $output ?>;
19 </script>
20 </head>
21 <body>
22 <p>json_encode() is not good for escaping javascript!</p>
23 </body>
24 </html>

541
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

The above example will show an alert popup box as soon as the page is loaded, because the data is not properly escaped
for the Javascript context.

114.2 Examples of Good Javascript Escaping

By using the escapeJs method in the Javascript context, such attacks can be prevented:
1 <?php header('Content-Type: text/html; charset=UTF-8'); ?>
2 <!DOCTYPE html>
3 <?php
4 $input = <<<INPUT
5 bar&quot;; alert(&quot;Meow!&quot;); var xss=&quot;true
6 INPUT;
7 $escaper = new Zend\Escaper\Escaper('utf-8');
8 $output = $escaper->escapeJs($input);
9 ?>
10 <html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml">
11 <head>
12 <title>Escaped Entities</title>
13 <meta charset="UTF-8"/>
14 <script type="text/javascript">
15 <?php
16 // this will look like
17 // var foo = bar\x26quot\x3B\x3B\x20alert\x28\x26quot\x3BMeow\x21\x26quot\x3B\x29\x3B\x20var\
18 ?>
19 var foo = <?php echo $output ?>;
20 </script>
21 </head>
22 <body>
23 <p>Zend\Escaper\Escaper::escapeJs() is good for escaping javascript!</p>
24 </body>
25 </html>

In the above example, the Javascript parser will most likely report a SyntaxError, but at least the targeted applica-
tion remains safe from such attacks.

542 Chapter 114. Escaping Javascript

 CHAPTER 115

Escaping Cascading Style Sheets

CSS is similar to Javascript for the same reasons. CSS escaping excludes only basic alphanumeric characters and
escapes all other characters into valid CSS hexadecimal escapes.

115.1 Examples of Bad CSS Escaping

In most cases developers forget to escape CSS completely:

1 <?php header('Content-Type: application/xhtml+xml; charset=UTF-8'); ?>
2 <!DOCTYPE html>
3 <?php
4 $input = <<<INPUT
5 body {
6 background-image: url('http://example.com/foo.jpg?</style><script>alert(1)</script>');
7 }
8 INPUT;
9 ?>
10 <html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml">
11 <head>
12 <title>Unescaped CSS</title>
13 <meta charset="UTF-8"/>
14 <style>
15 <?php echo $input; ?>
16 </style>
17 </head>
18 <body>
19 <p>User controlled CSS needs to be properly escaped!</p>
20 </body>
21 </html>

In the above example, by failing to escape the user provided CSS, an attacker can execute an XSS attack fairly easily.

115.2 Examples of Good CSS Escaping

By using escapeCss method in the CSS context, such attacks can be prevented:
1 <?php header('Content-Type: application/xhtml+xml; charset=UTF-8'); ?>
2 <!DOCTYPE html>
3 <?php
4 $input = <<<INPUT

543
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

5 body {
6 background-image: url('http://example.com/foo.jpg?</style><script>alert(1)</script>');
7 }
8 INPUT;
9 $escaper = new Zend\Escaper\Escaper('utf-8');
10 $output = $escaper->escapeCss($input);
11 ?>
12 <html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml">
13 <head>
14 <title>Escaped CSS</title>
15 <meta charset="UTF-8"/>
16 <style>
17 <?php
18 // output will look something like
19 // body\20 \7B \A \20 \20 \20 \20 background\2D image\3A \20 url\28 ...
20 echo $output;
21 ?>
22 </style>
23 </head>
24 <body>
25 <p>User controlled CSS needs to be properly escaped!</p>
26 </body>
27 </html>

By properly escaping user controlled CSS, we can prevent XSS attacks in our web applications.

544 Chapter 115. Escaping Cascading Style Sheets

 CHAPTER 116

Escaping URLs

This method is basically an alias for PHPs rawurlencode() which has applied RFC 3986 since PHP 5.3. It is
included primarily for consistency.
URL escaping applies to data being inserted into a URL and not to the whole URL itself.

116.1 Examples of Bad URL Escaping

XSS attacks are easy if data inserted into URLs is not escaped properly:
1 <?php header('Content-Type: application/xhtml+xml; charset=UTF-8'); ?>
2 <!DOCTYPE html>
3 <?php
4 $input = <<<INPUT
5 " onmouseover="alert('zf2')
6 INPUT;
7 ?>
8 <html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml">
9 <head>
10 <title>Unescaped URL data</title>
11 <meta charset="UTF-8"/>
12 </head>
13 <body>
14 <a href="http://example.com/?name=<?php echo $input; ?>">Click here!</a>
15 </body>
16 </html>

116.2 Examples of Good URL Escaping

By properly escaping data in URLs by using escapeUrl, we can prevent XSS attacks:
1 <?php header('Content-Type: application/xhtml+xml; charset=UTF-8'); ?>
2 <!DOCTYPE html>
3 <?php
4 $input = <<<INPUT
5 " onmouseover="alert('zf2')
6 INPUT;
7 $escaper = new Zend\Escaper\Escaper('utf-8');
8 $output = $escaper->escapeUrl($input);
9 ?>

545
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

10 <html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml">
11 <head>
12 <title>Unescaped URL data</title>
13 <meta charset="UTF-8"/>
14 </head>
15 <body>
16 <a href="http://example.com/?name=<?php echo $output; ?>">Click here!</a>
17 </body>
18 </html>

546 Chapter 116. Escaping URLs

 CHAPTER 117

The EventManager

117.1 Overview

The EventManager is a component designed for the following use cases:

Implementing simple subject/observer patterns.
Implementing Aspect-Oriented designs.
Implementing event-driven architectures.
The basic architecture allows you to attach and detach listeners to named events, both on a per-instance basis as well
as via shared collections; trigger events; and interrupt execution of listeners.

117.2 Quick Start

Typically, you will compose an EventManager instance in a class.

1 use Zend\EventManager\EventManagerInterface;
2 use Zend\EventManager\EventManager;
3 use Zend\EventManager\EventManagerAwareInterface;
4

5 class Foo implements EventManagerAwareInterface

6 {
7 protected $events;
8

9 public function setEventManager(EventManagerInterface $events)

10 {
11 $events->setIdentifiers(array(
12 __CLASS__,
13 get_called_class(),
14 ));
15 $this->events = $events;
16 return $this;
17 }
18

19 public function getEventManager()

20 {
21 if (null === $this->events) {
22 $this->setEventManager(new EventManager());
23 }
24 return $this->events;

547
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

25 }
26 }

The above allows users to access the EventManager instance, or reset it with a new instance; if one does not exist,
it will be lazily instantiated on-demand.
The instance property events is a convention within Zend Framework 2 to refer to the EventManager instance.
An EventManager is really only interesting if it triggers some events.
Basic triggering takes three arguments: - The event name, which is usually the current function/method name; - The
target, which is usually the current object instance; - The arguments, which are usually the arguments provided
to the current function/method.
An optional fourth argument; a callback may also be supplied.
1 class Foo
2 {
3 // ... assume events definition from above
4

5 public function bar($baz, $bat = null)

6 {
7 $params = compact('baz', 'bat');
8 $this->getEventManager()->trigger(__FUNCTION__, $this, $params);
9 }
10 }

In turn, triggering events is only interesting if something is listening for the event.
Listeners attach to the EventManager, specifying a named event and the callback to notify. The callback receives
an Event object, which has accessors for retrieving the event name, target, and parameters. Lets add a listener, and
trigger the event.
1 use Zend\Log\Factory as LogFactory;
2

3 $log = LogFactory($someConfig);
4 $foo = new Foo();
5 $foo->getEventManager()->attach('bar', function ($e) use ($log) {
6 $event = $e->getName();
7 $target = get_class($e->getTarget());
8 $params = json_encode($e->getParams());
9

10 $log->info(sprintf(
11 '%s called on %s, using params %s',
12 $event,
13 $target,
14 $params
15 ));
16 });
17

18 // Results in log message:

19 $foo->bar('baz', 'bat');
20 // reading: bar called on Foo, using params {"baz" : "baz", "bat" : "bat"}"

Note that the second argument to attach() is any valid callback; an anonymous function is shown in the example
in order to keep the example self-contained.
However, you could also utilize a valid function name, a functor, a string referencing a static method, or an array
callback with a named static method or instance method. Again, any PHP callback is valid.

548 Chapter 117. The EventManager

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Sometimes you may want to specify listeners without yet having an object instance of the class composing an
EventManager. Zend Framework enables this through the concept of a SharedEventManager.
Simply put, you can inject individual EventManager instances with a well-known SharedEventManager, and
the EventManager instance will query it for additional listeners.
Listeners attach to a SharedEventManager in roughly the same way they do to normal event managers; the call to
attach is identical to the EventManager, but expects an additional parameter at the beginning: a named instance.
Remember the example of composing an EventManager, how we passed it __CLASS__? That value, or any strings
you provide in an array to the constructor, may be used to identify an instance when using a SharedEventManager.
As an example, assuming we have a SharedEventManager instance that we know has been injected in our
EventManager instances (for instance, via dependency injection), we could change the above example to attach
via the shared collection:
1 use Zend\Log\Factory as LogFactory;
2

3 // Assume $events is a Zend\EventManager\SharedEventManager instance

4

5 $log = LogFactory($someConfig);
6 $events->attach('Foo', 'bar', function ($e) use ($log) {
7 $event = $e->getName();
8 $target = get_class($e->getTarget());
9 $params = json_encode($e->getParams());
10

11 $log->info(sprintf(
12 '%s called on %s, using params %s',
13 $event,
14 $target,
15 $params
16 ));
17 });
18

19 // Later, instantiate Foo:

20 $foo = new Foo();
21 $foo->getEventManager()->setSharedManager($events);
22

23 // And we can still trigger the above event:

24 $foo->bar('baz', 'bat');
25 // results in log message:
26 // bar called on Foo, using params {"baz" : "baz", "bat" : "bat"}"

Note: StaticEventManager
As of 2.0.0beta3, you can use the StaticEventManager singleton as a SharedEventCollection. As such,
you do not need to worry about where and how to get access to the SharedEventCollection; its globally
available by simply calling StaticEventManager::getInstance().
Be aware, however, that its usage is deprecated within the framework, and starting with 2.0.0beta4, you will
instead configure a SharedEventManager instance that will be injected by the framework into individual
EventManager instances.

The EventManager also provides the ability to detach listeners, short-circuit execution of an event either from
within a listener or by testing return values of listeners, test and loop through the results returned by listeners, prioritize
listeners, and more. Many of these features are detailed in the examples.

117.2. Quick Start 549

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

117.2.1 Wildcard Listeners

Sometimes youll want to attach the same listener to many events or to all events of a given instance or potentially,
with a shared event collection, many contexts, and many events. The EventManager component allows for this.

Attaching to many events at once

1 $events = new EventManager();

2 $events->attach(array('these', 'are', 'event', 'names'), $callback);

Note that if you specify a priority, that priority will be used for all events specified.

Attaching using the wildcard

1 $events = new EventManager();

2 $events->attach('*', $callback);

Note that if you specify a priority, that priority will be used for this listener for any event triggered.
What the above specifies is that any event triggered will result in notification of this particular listener.

Attaching to many events at once via a SharedEventManager

1 $events = new SharedEventManager();

2 // Attach to many events on the context "foo"
3 $events->attach('foo', array('these', 'are', 'event', 'names'), $callback);
4

5 // Attach to many events on the contexts "foo" and "bar"

6 $events->attach(array('foo', 'bar'), array('these', 'are', 'event', 'names'), $callback);

Note that if you specify a priority, that priority will be used for all events specified.

Attaching using the wildcard via a SharedEventManager

1 $events = new SharedEventManager();

2 // Attach to all events on the context "foo"
3 $events->attach('foo', '*', $callback);
4

5 // Attach to all events on the contexts "foo" and "bar"

6 $events->attach(array('foo', 'bar'), '*', $callback);

Note that if you specify a priority, that priority will be used for all events specified.
The above is specifying that for the contexts foo and bar, the specified listener should be notified for any event
they trigger.

550 Chapter 117. The EventManager

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

117.3 Configuration Options

EventManager Options

identifier A string or array of strings to which the given EventManager instance can answer when accessed via a
SharedEventManager.
event_class The name of an alternate Event class to use for representing events passed to listeners.
shared_collections An instance of a SharedEventCollection instance to use when triggering events.

117.4 Available Methods

__construct __construct(null|string|int|array|Traversable $identifiers)

Constructs a new EventManager instance, using the given identifiers, if provided, for purposes of use with a
SharedEventManager instance.
setEventClass setEventClass(string $class)
Provide the name of an alternate Event class to use when creating events to pass to triggered listeners.
setSharedManager setSharedManager(SharedEventManagerInterface
$sharedEventManager)
Accepts an instance of SharedEventManagerInterface and sets the sharedManager property.
unsetSharedManager unsetSharedManager()
Removes the SharedEventManager currently attached to the EventManager instance.
getSharedManager getSharedManager()
Returns the static SharedEventManager is one has been assigned or will return false.
getIdentifiers getIdentifiers()
Returns the identifiers that have been set for this EventManager instance
setIdentifiers setIdentifiers(string|int|array|Traversable $identifiers)
Sets the identifiers for this EventManager instance. This method will clear any existing identifiers that
have been previously added to the instance.
addIdentifiers addIdentifiers(string|int|array|Traversable $identifiers)
Add identifiers to the EventManager instance. This method will merge the identifiers with any that
have previously been added to the instance.
trigger trigger(string $event, mixed $target = null, mixed $argv, callback
$callback = null)
Triggers all listeners to a named event. The recommendation is to use the current function/method name for
$event, appending it with values such as .pre, .post, etc. as needed. $target should be the current
object instance, or the name of the function if not triggering within an object. $argv should typically be an as-
sociative array or ArrayAccess instance; we recommend using the parameters passed to the function/method
(compact() is often useful here). This method can also take a callback and behave in the same way as
triggerUntil().
The method returns an instance of ResponseCollection, which may be used to introspect return values of
the various listeners, test for short-circuiting, and more.

117.3. Configuration Options 551

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

triggerUntil triggerUntil(string $event, mixed $target, mixed $argv = null,

callback $callback = null)
Triggers all listeners to a named event, just like trigger(), with the addition that it passes the return value
from each listener to $callback; if $callback returns a boolean true value, execution of the listeners is
interrupted. You can test for this using $result->stopped().
attach attach(string $event, callback $callback, int $priority)
Attaches $callback to the EventManager instance, listening for the event $event. If a $priority is
provided, the listener will be inserted into the internal listener stack using that priority; higher values execute
earliest. (Default priority is 1, and negative priorities are allowed.)
The method returns an instance of Zend\Stdlib\CallbackHandler; this value can later be passed to
detach() if desired.
attachAggregate attachAggregate(string|ListenerAggregate $aggregate)
If a string is passed for $aggregate, instantiates that class. The $aggregate is then passed the
EventManager instance to its attach() method so that it may register listeners.
The ListenerAggregate instance is returned.
detach detach(CallbackHandler|ListenerAggregateInterface $listener)
Scans all listeners, and detaches any that match $listener so that they will no longer be triggered.
Returns a boolean true if any listeners have been identified and unsubscribed, and a boolean false otherwise.
detachAggregate detachAggregate(ListenerAggregateInterface $aggregate)
Loops through all listeners of all events to identify listeners that are represented by the aggregate; for all matches,
the listeners will be removed.
Returns a boolean true if any listeners have been identified and unsubscribed, and a boolean false otherwise.
getEvents getEvents()
Returns an array of all event names that have listeners attached.
getListeners getListeners(string $event)
Returns a Zend\Stdlib\PriorityQueue instance of all listeners attached to $event.
clearListeners clearListeners(string $event)
Removes all listeners attached to $event.
prepareArgs prepareArgs(array $args)
Creates an ArrayObject from the provided $args. This can be useful if you want yours listeners to be able
to modify arguments such that later listeners or the triggering method can see the changes.

117.5 Examples

Modifying Arguments

Occasionally it can be useful to allow listeners to modify the arguments they receive so that later listeners or the calling
method will receive those changed values.
As an example, you might want to pre-filter a date that you know will arrive as a string and convert it to a DateTime
argument.

552 Chapter 117. The EventManager

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

To do this, you can pass your arguments to prepareArgs(), and pass this new object when triggering an event.
You will then pull that value back into your method.
1 class ValueObject
2 {
3 // assume a composed event manager
4

5 function inject(array $values)

6 {
7 $argv = compact('values');
8 $argv = $this->getEventManager()->prepareArgs($argv);
9 $this->getEventManager()->trigger(__FUNCTION__, $this, $argv);
10 $date = isset($argv['values']['date']) ? $argv['values']['date'] : new DateTime('now');
11

12 // ...
13 }
14 }
15

16 $v = new ValueObject();
17

18 $v->getEventManager()->attach('inject', function($e) {
19 $values = $e->getParam('values');
20 if (!$values) {
21 return;
22 }
23

24 if (!isset($values['date'])) {
25 $values['date'] = new \DateTime('now');
26 } else {
27 $values['date'] = new \Datetime($values['date']);
28 }
29

30 $e->setParam('values', $values);
31 });
32

33 $v->inject(array(
34 'date' => '2011-08-10 15:30:29',
35 ));

Short Circuiting

One common use case for events is to trigger listeners until either one indicates no further processing should be done,
or until a return value meets specific criteria. As examples, if an event creates a Response object, it may want execution
to stop.
1 $listener = function($e) {
2 // do some work
3

4 // Stop propagation and return a response

5 $e->stopPropagation(true);
6 return $response;
7 };

Alternately, we could do the check from the method triggering the event.
1 class Foo implements DispatchableInterface
2 {
3 // assume composed event manager

117.5. Examples 553

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

5 public function dispatch(Request $request, Response $response = null)

6 {
7 $argv = compact('request', 'response');
8 $results = $this->getEventManager()->triggerUntil(__FUNCTION__, $this, $argv, function($v) {
9 return ($v instanceof Response);
10 });
11 }
12 }

Typically, you may want to return a value that stopped execution, or use it some way. Both trigger() and
triggerUntil() return a ResponseCollection instance; call its stopped() method to test if execution
was stopped, and last() method to retrieve the return value from the last executed listener:
1 class Foo implements DispatchableInterface
2 {
3 // assume composed event manager
4

5 public function dispatch(Request $request, Response $response = null)

6 {
7 $argv = compact('request', 'response');
8 $results = $this->getEventManager()->triggerUntil(__FUNCTION__, $this, $argv, function($v) {
9 return ($v instanceof Response);
10 });
11

12 // Test if execution was halted, and return last result:

13 if ($results->stopped()) {
14 return $results->last();
15 }
16

17 // continue...
18 }
19 }

Assigning Priority to Listeners

One use case for the EventManager is for implementing caching systems. As such, you often want to check the
cache early, and save to it late.
The third argument to attach() is a priority value. The higher this number, the earlier that listener will execute; the
lower it is, the later it executes. The value defaults to 1, and values will trigger in the order registered within a given
priority.
So, to implement a caching system, our method will need to trigger an event at method start as well as at method end.
At method start, we want an event that will trigger early; at method end, an event should trigger late.
Here is the class in which we want caching:
1 class SomeValueObject
2 {
3 // assume it composes an event manager
4

5 public function get($id)

6 {
7 $params = compact('id');
8 $results = $this->getEventManager()->trigger('get.pre', $this, $params);
9

10 // If an event stopped propagation, return the value

554 Chapter 117. The EventManager

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

11 if ($results->stopped()) {
12 return $results->last();
13 }
14

15 // do some work...
16

17 $params['__RESULT__'] = $someComputedContent;
18 $this->getEventManager()->trigger('get.post', $this, $params);
19 }
20 }

Now, lets create a ListenerAggregateInterface that can handle caching for us:
1 use Zend\Cache\Cache;
2 use Zend\EventManager\EventManagerInterface;
3 use Zend\EventManager\ListenerAggregateInterface;
4 use Zend\EventManager\EventInterface;
5

6 class CacheListener implements ListenerAggregateInterface

7 {
8 protected $cache;
9

10 protected $listeners = array();

11

12 public function __construct(Cache $cache)

13 {
14 $this->cache = $cache;
15 }
16

17 public function attach(EventManagerInterface $events)

18 {
19 $this->listeners[] = $events->attach('get.pre', array($this, 'load'), 100);
20 $this->listeners[] = $events->attach('get.post', array($this, 'save'), -100);
21 }
22

23 public function detach(EventManagerInterface $events)

24 {
25 foreach ($this->listeners as $index => $listener) {
26 if ($events->detach($listener)) {
27 unset($this->listeners[$index]);
28 }
29 }
30 }
31

32 public function load(EventInterface $e)

33 {
34 $id = get_class($e->getTarget()) . '-' . json_encode($e->getParams());
35 if (false !== ($content = $this->cache->load($id))) {
36 $e->stopPropagation(true);
37 return $content;
38 }
39 }
40

41 public function save(EventInterface $e)

42 {
43 $params = $e->getParams();
44 $content = $params['__RESULT__'];
45 unset($params['__RESULT__']);

117.5. Examples 555

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

46

47 $id = get_class($e->getTarget()) . '-' . json_encode($params);

48 $this->cache->save($content, $id);
49 }
50 }

We can then attach the aggregate to an instance.

1 $value = new SomeValueObject();
2 $cacheListener = new CacheListener($cache);
3 $value->getEventManager()->attachAggregate($cacheListener);

Now, as we call get(), if we have a cached entry, it will be returned immediately; if not, a computed entry will be
cached when we complete the method.

556 Chapter 117. The EventManager

 CHAPTER 118

Introduction to Zend\Feed

Zend\Feed provides functionality for consuming RSS and Atom feeds. It provides a natural syntax for accessing
elements of feeds, feed attributes, and entry attributes. Zend\Feed also has extensive support for modifying feed
and entry structure with the same natural syntax, and turning the result back into XML. In the future, this modification
support could provide support for the Atom Publishing Protocol.
Zend\Feed consists of Zend\Feed\Reader for reading RSS and Atom feeds, Zend\Feed\Writer for writ-
ing RSS and Atom feeds, and Zend\Feed\PubSubHubbub for working with Hub servers. Furthermore, both
Zend\Feed\Reader and Zend\Feed\Writer support extensions which allows for working with additional
data in feeds, not covered in the core API but used in conjunction with RSS and Atom feeds.
In the example below, we demonstrate a simple use case of retrieving an RSS feed and saving relevant portions of the
feed data to a simple PHP array, which could then be used for printing the data, storing to a database, etc.

Note: Be aware
Many RSS feeds have different channel and item properties available. The RSS specification provides for many optional
properties, so be aware of this when writing code to work with RSS data. Zend\Feed supports all optional properties
of the core RSS and Atom specifications.

118.1 Reading RSS Feed Data

1 // Fetch the latest Slashdot headlines
2 try {
3 $slashdotRss =
4 Zend\Feed\Reader\Reader::import('http://rss.slashdot.org/Slashdot/slashdot');
5 } catch (Zend\Feed\Reader\Exception\RuntimeException $e) {
6 // feed import failed
7 echo "Exception caught importing feed: {$e->getMessage()}\n";
8 exit;
9 }
10

11 // Initialize the channel/feed data array

12 $channel = array(
13 'title' => $slashdotRss->getTitle(),
14 'link' => $slashdotRss->getLink(),
15 'description' => $slashdotRss->getDescription(),
16 'items' => array()
17 );
18

19 // Loop over each channel item/entry and store relevant data for each

557
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

20 foreach ($slashdotRss as $item) {

21 $channel['items'][] = array(
22 'title' => $item->getTitle(),
23 'link' => $item->getLink(),
24 'description' => $item->getDescription()
25 );
26 }

Your $channel array now contains the basic meta-information for the RSS channel and all items that it contained.
The process is identical for Atom feeds since Zend\Feed features a common denominator API, i.e. all getters and
setters are the same regardless of feed format.

558 Chapter 118. Introduction to Zend\Feed

 CHAPTER 119

Importing Feeds

Zend\Feed enables developers to retrieve feeds very easily, by using Zend\Feader\Reader. If you know the
URI of a feed, simply use the Zend\Feed\Reader\Reader::import() method:
1 $feed = Zend\Feed\Reader\Reader::import('http://feeds.example.com/feedName');

You can also use Zend\Feed\Reader\Reader to fetch the contents of a feed from a file or the contents of a PHP
string variable:
1 // importing a feed from a text file
2 $feedFromFile = Zend\Feed\Reader\Reader::importFile('feed.xml');
3

4 // importing a feed from a PHP string variable

5 $feedFromPHP = Zend\Feed\Reader\Reader::importString($feedString);

In each of the examples above, an object of a class that extends Zend\Feed\Reader\Feed\AbstractFeed

is returned upon success, depending on the type of the feed. If an RSS feed were retrieved via one of the import
methods above, then a Zend\Feed\Reader\Feed\Rss object would be returned. On the other hand, if an Atom
feed were imported, then a Zend\Feed\Reader\Feed\Atom object is returned. The import methods will also
throw a Zend\Feed\Exception\Reader\RuntimeException object upon failure, such as an unreadable or
malformed feed.

119.1 Dumping the contents of a feed

To dump the contents of a Zend\Feed\Reader\Feed\AbstractFeed instance, you may use the saveXml()
method.
1 assert($feed instanceof Zend\Feed\Reader\Feed\AbstractFeed);
2

3 // dump the feed to standard output

4 print $feed->saveXml();

559
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

560 Chapter 119. Importing Feeds

 CHAPTER 120

Retrieving Feeds from Web Pages

120.1 Find Feed Links

Web pages often contain <link> tags that refer to feeds with content relevant to the particular page.
Zend\Feed\Reader\Reader enables you to retrieve all feeds referenced by a web page with one simple method
call:
1 $feedLinks = Zend\Feed\Reader\Reader::findFeedLinks('http://www.example.com/news.html');

Here the findFeedLinks() method returns a Zend\Feed\Reader\FeedSet object, that

is in turn, a collection of other Zend\Feed\Reader\FeedSet objects, that are referenced
by <link> tags on the news.html web page. Zend\Feed\Reader\Reader will throw a
Zend\Feed\Reader\Exception\RuntimeException upon failure, such as an HTTP 404 response
code or a malformed feed.
You can examine all feed links located by iterating across the collection:
1 $rssFeed = null;
2 $feedLinks = Zend\Feed\Reader\Reader::findFeedLinks('http://www.example.com/news.html');
3 foreach ($feedLinks as $link) {
4 if (stripos($link['type'], 'application/rss+xml') !== false) {
5 $rssFeed = $link['href'];
6 break;
7 }

Each Zend\Feed\Reader\FeedSet object will expose the rel, href, type and title properties of detected links for
all RSS, Atom or RDF feeds. You can always select the first encountered link of each type by using a shortcut:
1 $rssFeed = null;
2 $feedLinks = Zend\Feed\Reader\Reader::findFeedLinks('http://www.example.com/news.html');
3 $firstAtomFeed = $feedLinks->atom;

561
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

562 Chapter 120. Retrieving Feeds from Web Pages

 CHAPTER 121

Consuming an RSS Feed

121.1 Reading a feed

Reading an RSS feed is as simple as passing the URL of the feed to Zend\Feed\Reader\Readers import
method.
1 $channel = Zend\Feed\Reader\Reader::import('http://rss.example.com/channelName');

If any errors occur fetching the feed, a Zend\Feed\Reader\Exception\RuntimeException will be

thrown.

121.2 Get properties

Once you have a feed object, you can access any of the standard RSS channel properties directly on the object:
1 echo $channel->getTitle();

Properties of the channel can be accessed via getter methods, such as getTitle, getAuthor ...
If channel properties have attributes, the getter method will return a key/value pair, where the key is the attribute name,
and the value is the attribute value.
1 $author = $channel->getAuthor();
2 echo $author['name'];

Most commonly youll want to loop through the feed and do something with its entries.
Zend\Feed\Reader\Feed\Rss internally converts all entries to a Zend\Feed\Reader\Entry\Rss.
Entry properties, similarly to channel properties, can be accessed via getter methods, such as getTitle,
getDescription ...
An example of printing all titles of articles in a channel is:
1 foreach ($channel as $item) {
2 echo $item->getTitle() . "\n";
3 }

If you are not familiar with RSS, here are the standard elements you can expect to be available in an RSS channel and
in individual RSS items (entries).
Required channel elements:
title- The name of the channel

563
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

link- The URL of the web site corresponding to the channel

description- A sentence or several describing the channel
Common optional channel elements:
pubDate- The publication date of this set of content, in RFC 822 date format
language- The language the channel is written in
category- One or more (specified by multiple tags) categories the channel belongs to
RSS <item> elements do not have any strictly required elements. However, either title or description must be
present.
Common item elements:
title- The title of the item
link- The URL of the item
description- A synopsis of the item
author- The authors email address
category- One more categories that the item belongs to
comments-URL of comments relating to this item
pubDate- The date the item was published, in RFC 822 date format
In your code you can always test to see if an element is non-empty with:
1 if ($item->getPropname()) {
2 // ... proceed.
3 }

Where relevant, Zend\Feed supports a number of common RSS extensions including Dublin Core, Atom (inside
RSS) and the Content, Slash, Syndication, Syndication/Thread and several other extensions or modules.
Please see the official RSS 2.0 specification for further information.

564 Chapter 121. Consuming an RSS Feed

 CHAPTER 122

Consuming an Atom Feed

Zend\Feed\Reader\Feed\Atom is used in much the same way as Zend\Feed\Reader\Feed\Rss. It

provides the same access to feed-level properties and iteration over entries in the feed. The main difference is in the
structure of the Atom protocol itself. Atom is a successor to RSS; it is a more generalized protocol and it is designed
to deal more easily with feeds that provide their full content inside the feed, splitting RSS description tag into
two elements, summary and content, for that purpose.

122.1 Basic Use of an Atom Feed

Read an Atom feed and print the title and summary of each entry:
1 $feed = Zend\Feed\Reader\Reader::import('http://atom.example.com/feed/');
2 echo 'The feed contains ' . $feed->count() . ' entries.' . "\n\n";
3 foreach ($feed as $entry) {
4 echo 'Title: ' . $entry->getTitle() . "\n";
5 echo 'Description: ' . $entry->getDescription() . "\n";
6 echo 'URL: ' . $entry->getLink() . "\n\n";
7 }

In an Atom feed you can expect to find the following feed properties:
title- The feeds title, same as RSSs channel title
id- Every feed and entry in Atom has a unique identifier
link- Feeds can have multiple links, which are distinguished by a type attribute
The equivalent to RSSs channel link would be type="text/html". if the link is to an alternate version of
the same content thats in the feed, it would have a rel="alternate" attribute.
subtitle- The feeds description, equivalent to RSS channel description
author- The feeds author, with name and email sub-tags
Atom entries commonly have the following properties:
id- The entrys unique identifier
title- The entrys title, same as RSS item titles
link- A link to another format or an alternate view of this entry
The link property of an atom entry typically has an href attribute.
summary- A summary of this entrys content

565
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

content- The full content of the entry; can be skipped if the feed just contains summaries
author- with name and email sub-tags like feeds have
published- the date the entry was published, in RFC 3339 format
updated- the date the entry was last updated, in RFC 3339 format
Where relevant, Zend\Feed supports a number of common RSS extensions including Dublin Core and the Content,
Slash, Syndication, Syndication/Thread and several other extensions in common use on blogs.
For more information on Atom and plenty of resources, see http://www.atomenabled.org/.

566 Chapter 122. Consuming an Atom Feed

 CHAPTER 123

Consuming a Single Atom Entry

Single Atom <entry> elements are also valid by themselves. Usually the URL for an entry is the feeds URL followed
by /<entryId>, such as http://atom.example.com/feed/1, using the example URL we used above. This
pattern may exist for some web services which use Atom as a container syntax.
If you read a single entry, you will have a Zend\Feed\Reader\Entry\Atom object.

123.1 Reading a Single-Entry Atom Feed

1 $entry = Zend\Feed\Reader\Reader::import('http://atom.example.com/feed/1');
2 echo 'Entry title: ' . $entry->getTitle();

567
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

568 Chapter 123. Consuming a Single Atom Entry

 CHAPTER 124

Zend\Feed and Security

124.1 Introduction

As with any data coming from a source that is beyond the developers control, special attention needs to be given to
securing, validating and filtering that data. Similar to data input to our application by users, data coming from RSS
and Atom feeds should also be considered unsafe and potentially dangerous, as it allows the delivery of HTML and
xHTML 1 . Because data validation and filtration is out of Zend\Feeds scope, this task is left for implementation by
the developer, by using libraries such as Zend\Escaper for escaping and HTMLPurifier for validating and filtering
feed data.
Escaping and filtering of potentially insecure data is highly recommended before outputting it anywhere in our appli-
cation or before storing that data in some storage engine (be it a simple file, a database...).

124.2 Filtering data using HTMLPurifier

Currently the best available library for filtering and validating (x)HTML data in PHP is HTMLPurifier and, as such, is
the recommended tool for this task. HTMLPurifier works by filtering out all (x)HTML from the data, except for the
tags and attributes specifically allowed in a whitelist, and by checking and fixing nesting of tags, ensuring a standards-
compliant output.
The following examples will show a basic usage of HTMLPurifier, but developers are urged to go through and read
HTMLPurifiers documentation.
1 // Setting HTMLPurifier's options
2 $options = array(
3 // Allow only paragraph tags
4 // and anchor tags wit the href attribute
5 array(
6 'HTML.Allowed',
7 'p,a[href]'
8 ),
9 // Format end output with Tidy
10 array(
11 'Output.TidyFormat',
12 true
13 ),
14 // Assume XHTML 1.0 Strict Doctype
15 array(
16 'HTML.Doctype',
1 http://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc4287#section-8.1

569
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

17 'XHTML 1.0 Strict'

18 ),
19 // Disable cache, but see note after the example
20 array(
21 'Cache.DefinitionImpl',
22 null
23 )
24 );
25

26 // Configuring HTMLPurifier
27 $config = HTMLPurifier_Config::createDefault();
28 foreach ($options as $option) {
29 $config->set($option[0], $option[1]);
30 }
31

32 // Creating a HTMLPurifier with it's config

33 $purifier = new HTMLPurifier($config);
34

35 // Fetch the RSS

36 try {
37 $rss = Zend\Feed\Reader\Reader::import('http://www.planet-php.net/rss/');
38 } catch (Zend\Feed\Exception\Reader\RuntimeException $e) {
39 // feed import failed
40 echo "Exception caught importing feed: {$e->getMessage()}\n";
41 exit;
42 }
43

44 // Initialize the channel data array

45 // See that we're cleaning the description with HTMLPurifier
46 $channel = array(
47 'title' => $rss->getTitle(),
48 'link' => $rss->getLink(),
49 'description' => $purifier->purify($rss->getDescription()),
50 'items' => array()
51 );
52

53 // Loop over each channel item and store relevant data

54 // See that we're cleaning the descriptions with HTMLPurifier
55 foreach ($rss as $item) {
56 $channel['items'][] = array(
57 'title' => $item->getTitle(),
58 'link' => $item->getLink(),
59 'description' => $purifier->purify($item->getDescription())
60 );
61 }

Note: HTMLPurifier is using the PHP Tidy extension to clean and repair the final output. If this extension is not
available, it will silently fail but its availability has no impact on the librarys security.

Note: For the sake of this example, the HTMLPurifiers cache is disabled, but it is recommended to configure caching
and use its standalone include file as it can improve the performance of HTMLPurifier substantially.

570 Chapter 124. Zend\Feed and Security

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

124.3 Escaping data using Zend\Escaper

To help prevent XSS attacks, Zend Framework has a new component Zend\Escaper, which complies to the current
OWASP recommendations, and as such, is the recommended tool for escaping HTML tags and attributes, Javascript,
CSS and URLs before outputing any potentially insecure data to the users.
1 try {
2 $rss = Zend\Feed\Reader\Reader::import('http://www.planet-php.net/rss/');
3 } catch (Zend\Feed\Exception\Reader\RuntimeException $e) {
4 // feed import failed
5 echo "Exception caught importing feed: {$e->getMessage()}\n";
6 exit;
7 }
8

9 // Validate all URIs

10 $linkValidator = new Zend\Validator\Uri;
11 $link = null;
12 if ($linkValidator->isValid($rss->getLink())) {
13 $link = $rss->getLink();
14 }
15

16 // Escaper used for escaping data

17 $escaper = new Zend\Escaper\Escaper('utf-8');
18

19 // Initialize the channel data array

20 $channel = array(
21 'title' => $escaper->escapeHtml($rss->getTitle()),
22 'link' => $escaper->escapeHtml($link),
23 'description' => $escaper->escapeHtml($rss->getDescription()),
24 'items' => array()
25 );
26

27 // Loop over each channel item and store relevant data

28 foreach ($rss as $item) {
29 $link = null;
30 if ($linkValidator->isValid($rss->getLink())) {
31 $link = $item->getLink();
32 }
33 $channel['items'][] = array(
34 'title' => $escaper->escapeHtml($item->getTitle()),
35 'link' => $escaper->escapeHtml($link),
36 'description' => $escaper->escapeHtml($item->getDescription())
37 );
38 }

The feed data is now safe for output to HTML templates. You can, of course, skip escaping when simply storing the
data persistently but remember to escape it on output later!
Of course, these are just basic examples, and cannot cover all possible scenarios that you, as a developer, can, and
most likely will, encounter. Your responsibility is to learn what libraries and tools are at your disposal, and when and
how to use them to secure your web applications.

124.3. Escaping data using Zend\Escaper 571

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

572 Chapter 124. Zend\Feed and Security

 CHAPTER 125

Zend\Feed\Reader\Reader

125.1 Introduction

Zend\Feed\Reader\Reader is a component used to consume RSS and Atom feeds of any version, includ-
ing RDF/RSS 1.0, RSS 2.0, Atom 0.3 and Atom 1.0. The API for retrieving feed data is deliberately simple since
Zend\Feed\Reader is capable of searching any feed of any type for the information requested through the API. If
the typical elements containing this information are not present, it will adapt and fall back on a variety of alternative
elements instead. This ability to choose from alternatives removes the need for users to create their own abstraction
layer on top of the component to make it useful or have any in-depth knowledge of the underlying standards, current
alternatives, and namespaced extensions.
Internally, Zend\Feed\Reader\Reader works almost entirely on the basis of making XPath queries against the
feed XMLs Document Object Model. This singular approach to parsing is consistent and the component offers a
plugin system to add to the Feed and Entry level API by writing Extensions on a similar basis.
Performance is assisted in three ways. First of all, Zend\Feed\Reader\Reader supports caching using
Zend\Cache to maintain a copy of the original feed XML. This allows you to skip network requests for a feed
URI if the cache is valid. Second, the Feed and Entry level API is backed by an internal cache (non-persistent) so
repeat API calls for the same feed will avoid additional DOM or XPath use. Thirdly, importing feeds from a URI
can take advantage of HTTP Conditional GET requests which allow servers to issue an empty 304 response when the
requested feed has not changed since the last time you requested it. In the final case, an instance of Zend\Cache
will hold the last received feed along with the ETag and Last-Modified header values sent in the HTTP response.
Zend\Feed\Reader\Reader is not capable of constructing feeds and delegates this responsibility to
Zend\Feed\Writer\Writer.

125.2 Importing Feeds

Feeds can be imported from a string, file or an URI. Importing from a URI can additionally utilise a
HTTP Conditional GET request. If importing fails, an exception will be raised. The end result will be
an object of type Zend\Feed\Reader\Feed\AbstractFeed, the core implementations of which are
Zend\Feed\Reader\Feed\Rss and Zend\Feed\Reader\Feed\Atom. Both objects support multiple (all
existing) versions of these broad feed types.
In the following example, we import an RDF/RSS 1.0 feed and extract some basic information that can be saved to a
database or elsewhere.
1 $feed = Zend\Feed\Reader\Reader::import('http://www.planet-php.net/rdf/');
2 $data = array(
3 'title' => $feed->getTitle(),

573
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

4 'link' => $feed->getLink(),

5 'dateModified' => $feed->getDateModified(),
6 'description' => $feed->getDescription(),
7 'language' => $feed->getLanguage(),
8 'entries' => array(),
9 );
10

11 foreach ($feed as $entry) {

12 $edata = array(
13 'title' => $entry->getTitle(),
14 'description' => $entry->getDescription(),
15 'dateModified' => $entry->getDateModified(),
16 'authors' => $entry->getAuthors(),
17 'link' => $entry->getLink(),
18 'content' => $entry->getContent()
19 );
20 $data['entries'][] = $edata;
21 }

The example above demonstrates Zend\Feed\Reader\Readers API, and it also demonstrates some of its inter-
nal operation. In reality, the RDF feed selected does not have any native date or author elements, however it does utilise
the Dublin Core 1.1 module which offers namespaced creator and date elements. Zend\Feed\Reader\Reader
falls back on these and similar options if no relevant native elements exist. If it absolutely cannot find an alternative it
will return NULL, indicating the information could not be found in the feed. You should note that classes implementing
Zend\Feed\Reader\Feed\AbstractFeed also implement the SPL Iterator and Countable interfaces.
Feeds can also be imported from strings or files.
1 // from a URI
2 $feed = Zend\Feed\Reader\Reader::import('http://www.planet-php.net/rdf/');
3

4 // from a String
5 $feed = Zend\Feed\Reader\Reader::importString($feedXmlString);
6

7 // from a file
8 $feed = Zend\Feed\Reader\Reader::importFile('./feed.xml');

125.3 Retrieving Underlying Feed and Entry Sources

Zend\Feed\Reader\Reader does its best not to stick you in a narrow confine. If you need to work on a feed
outside of Zend\Feed\Reader\Reader, you can extract the base DOMDocument or DOMElement objects from
any class, or even an XML string containing these. Also provided are methods to extract the current DOMXPath object
(with all core and Extension namespaces registered) and the correct prefix used in all XPath queries for the current
Feed or Entry. The basic methods to use (on any object) are saveXml(), getDomDocument(), getElement(),
getXpath() and getXpathPrefix(). These will let you break free of Zend\Feed\Reader and do whatever
else you want.
saveXml() returns an XML string containing only the element representing the current object.
getDomDocument() returns the DOMDocument object representing the entire feed (even if called from an
Entry object).
getElement() returns the DOMElement of the current object (i.e. the Feed or current Entry).
getXpath() returns the DOMXPath object for the current feed (even if called from an Entry object) with the
namespaces of the current feed type and all loaded Extensions pre-registered.

574 Chapter 125. Zend\Feed\Reader\Reader

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

getXpathPrefix() returns the query prefix for the current object (i.e. the Feed or current Entry) which
includes the correct XPath query path for that specific Feed or Entry.
Heres an example where a feed might include an RSS Extension not supported by Zend\Feed\Reader\Reader
out of the box. Notably, you could write and register an Extension (covered later) to do this, but thats not always
warranted for a quick check. You must register any new namespaces on the DOMXPath object before use unless they
are registered by Zend\Feed\Reader or an Extension beforehand.
1 $feed = Zend\Feed\Reader\Reader::import('http://www.planet-php.net/rdf/');
2 $xpathPrefix = $feed->getXpathPrefix();
3 $xpath = $feed->getXpath();
4 $xpath->registerNamespace('admin', 'http://webns.net/mvcb/');
5 $reportErrorsTo = $xpath->evaluate('string('
6 . $xpathPrefix
7 . '/admin:errorReportsTo)');

Warning: If you register an already registered namespace with a different prefix name to that used internally by
Zend\Feed\Reader\Reader, it will break the internal operation of this component.

125.4 Cache Support and Intelligent Requests

125.4.1 Adding Cache Support to Zend\Feed\Reader\Reader

Zend\Feed\Reader\Reader supports using an instance of Zend\Cache to cache feeds (as XML) to avoid
unnecessary network requests. Adding a cache is as simple here as it is for other Zend Framework components,
create and configure your cache and then tell Zend\Feed\Reader\Reader to use it! The cache key used is
Zend\Feed\Reader\ followed by the MD5 hash of the feeds URI.
1 $cache = Zend\Cache\StorageFactory::adapterFactory('Memory');
2

3 Zend\Feed\Reader\Reader::setCache($cache);

125.4.2 HTTP Conditional GET Support

The big question often asked when importing a feed frequently, is if it has even changed. With a cache enabled, you
can add HTTP Conditional GET support to your arsenal to answer that question.
Using this method, you can request feeds from URIs and include their last known ETag and Last-Modified response
header values with the request (using the If-None-Match and If-Modified-Since headers). If the feed on the server
remains unchanged, you should receive a 304 response which tells Zend\Feed\Reader\Reader to use the
cached version. If a full feed is sent in a response with a status code of 200, this means the feed has changed and
Zend\Feed\Reader\Reader will parse the new version and save it to the cache. It will also cache the new ETag
and Last-Modified header values for future use.
These conditional requests are not guaranteed to be supported by the server you request a URI of, but can be
attempted regardless. Most common feed sources like blogs should however have this supported. To enable conditional
requests, you will need to provide a cache to Zend\Feed\Reader\Reader.
1 $cache = Zend\Cache\StorageFactory::adapterFactory('Memory');
2

3 Zend\Feed\Reader\Reader::setCache($cache);
4 Zend\Feed\Reader\Reader::useHttpConditionalGet();
5

6 $feed = Zend\Feed\Reader\Reader::import('http://www.planet-php.net/rdf/');

125.4. Cache Support and Intelligent Requests 575

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

In the example above, with HTTP Conditional GET requests enabled, the response header values for ETag and Last-
Modified will be cached along with the feed. For the the caches lifetime, feeds will only be updated on the cache if a
non-304 response is received containing a valid RSS or Atom XML document.
If you intend on managing request headers from outside Zend\Feed\Reader\Reader, you can set the relevant
If-None-Matches and If-Modified-Since request headers via the URI import method.
1 $lastEtagReceived = '5e6cefe7df5a7e95c8b1ba1a2ccaff3d';
2 $lastModifiedDateReceived = 'Wed, 08 Jul 2009 13:37:22 GMT';
3 $feed = Zend\Feed\Reader\Reader::import(
4 $uri, $lastEtagReceived, $lastModifiedDateReceived
5 );

125.5 Locating Feed URIs from Websites

These days, many websites are aware that the location of their XML feeds is not always obvious. A small RDF, RSS or
Atom graphic helps when the user is reading the page, but what about when a machine visits trying to identify where
your feeds are located? To assist in this, websites may point to their feeds using <link> tags in the <head> section of
their HTML. To take advantage of this, you can use Zend\Feed\Reader\Reader to locate these feeds using the
static findFeedLinks() method.
This method calls any URI and searches for the location of RSS, RDF and Atom feeds assuming the websites HTML
contains the relevant links. It then returns a value object where you can check for the existence of a RSS, RDF or Atom
feed URI.
The returned object is an ArrayObject subclass called Zend\Feed\Reader\FeedSet so you can cast it to an
array, or iterate over it, to access all the detected links. However, as a simple shortcut, you can just grab the first RSS,
RDF or Atom link using its public properties as in the example below. Otherwise, each element of the ArrayObject
is a simple array with the keys type and uri where the type is one of rdf, rss or atom.
1 $links = Zend\Feed\Reader\Reader::findFeedLinks('http://www.planet-php.net');
2

3 if (isset($links->rdf)) {
4 echo $links->rdf, "\n"; // http://www.planet-php.org/rdf/
5 }
6 if (isset($links->rss)) {
7 echo $links->rss, "\n"; // http://www.planet-php.org/rss/
8 }
9 if (isset($links->atom)) {
10 echo $links->atom, "\n"; // http://www.planet-php.org/atom/
11 }

Based on these links, you can then import from whichever source you wish in the usual manner.
This quick method only gives you one link for each feed type, but websites may indicate many links of any type.
Perhaps its a news site with a RSS feed for each news category. You can iterate over all links using the ArrayObjects
iterator.
1 $links = Zend\Feed\Reader::findFeedLinks('http://www.planet-php.net');
2

3 foreach ($links as $link) {

4 echo $link['href'], "\n";
5 }

576 Chapter 125. Zend\Feed\Reader\Reader

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

125.6 Attribute Collections

In an attempt to simplify return types, return types from the various feed and entry level methods may include an
object of type Zend\Feed\Reader\Collection\AbstractCollection. Despite the special class name
which Ill explain below, this is just a simple subclass of SPLs ArrayObject.
The main purpose here is to allow the presentation of as much data as possible from the requested elements, while still
allowing access to the most relevant data as a simple array. This also enforces a standard approach to returning such
data which previously may have wandered between arrays and objects.
The new class type acts identically to ArrayObject with the sole addition being a new method getValues()
which returns a simple flat array containing the most relevant information.
A simple example of this is Zend\Feed\Reader\Reader\FeedInterface::getCategories(). When
used with any RSS or Atom feed, this method will return category data as a container object called
Zend\Feed\Reader\Collection\Category. The container object will contain, per category, three fields
of data: term, scheme and label. The term is the basic category name, often machine readable (i.e. plays nice with
URIs). The scheme represents a categorisation scheme (usually a URI identifier) also known as a domain in RSS 2.0.
The label is a human readable category name which supports HTML entities. In RSS 2.0, there is no label attribute
so it is always set to the same value as the term for convenience.
To access category labels by themselves in a simple value array, you might commit to something like:
1 $feed = Zend\Feed\Reader\Reader::import('http://www.example.com/atom.xml');
2 $categories = $feed->getCategories();
3 $labels = array();
4 foreach ($categories as $cat) {
5 $labels[] = $cat['label']
6 }

Its a contrived example, but the point is that the labels are tied up with other information.
However, the container class allows you to access the most relevant data as a simple array using the getValues()
method. The concept of most relevant is obviously a judgement call. For categories it means the category labels
(not the terms or schemes) while for authors it would be the authors names (not their email addresses or URIs). The
simple array is flat (just values) and passed through array_unique() to remove duplication.
1 $feed = Zend\Feed\Reader\Reader::import('http://www.example.com/atom.xml');
2 $categories = $feed->getCategories();
3 $labels = $categories->getValues();

The above example shows how to extract only labels and nothing else thus giving simple access to the category labels
without any additional work to extract that data by itself.

125.7 Retrieving Feed Information

Retrieving information from a feed (well cover entries and items in the next section though they follow identical
principals) uses a clearly defined API which is exactly the same regardless of whether the feed in question is RSS, RDF
or Atom. The same goes for sub-versions of these standards and weve tested every single RSS and Atom version.
While the underlying feed XML can differ substantially in terms of the tags and elements they present, they nonetheless
are all trying to convey similar information and to reflect this all the differences and wrangling over alternative tags are
handled internally by Zend\Feed\Reader\Reader presenting you with an identical interface for each. Ideally,
you should not have to care whether a feed is RSS or Atom so long as you can extract the information you want.

Note: While determining common ground between feed types is itself complex, it should be noted that RSS in
particular is a constantly disputed specification. This has its roots in the original RSS 2.0 document which contains

125.6. Attribute Collections 577

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

ambiguities and does not detail the correct treatment of all elements. As a result, this component rigorously applies the
RSS 2.0.11 Specification published by the RSS Advisory Board and its accompanying RSS Best Practices Profile. No
other interpretation of RSS 2.0 will be supported though exceptions may be allowed where it does not directly prevent
the application of the two documents mentioned above.

Of course, we dont live in an ideal world so there may be times the API just does not cover what youre looking
for. To assist you, Zend\Feed\Reader\Reader offers a plugin system which allows you to write Extensions to
expand the core API and cover any additional data you are trying to extract from feeds. If writing another Extension
is too much trouble, you can simply grab the underlying DOM or XPath objects and do it by hand in your application.
Of course, we really do encourage writing an Extension simply to make it more portable and reusable, and useful
Extensions may be proposed to the Framework for formal addition.
Heres a summary of the Core API for Feeds. You should note it comprises not only the basic RSS and Atom standards,
but also accounts for a number of included Extensions bundled with Zend\Feed\Reader\Reader. The naming
of these Extension sourced methods remain fairly generic - all Extension methods operate at the same level as the Core
API though we do allow you to retrieve any specific Extension object separately if required.

578 Chapter 125. Zend\Feed\Reader\Reader

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Table 125.1: Feed Level API Methods

getId() Returns a unique ID associated with this feed
getTitle() Returns the title of the feed
getDescription() Returns the text description of the feed.
getLink() Returns a URI to the HTML website containing the same or similar information as this feed
(i.e. if the feed is from a blog, it should provide the blogs URI where the HTML version of
the entries can be read).
getFeedLink() Returns the URI of this feed, which may be the same as the URI used to import the feed.
There are important cases where the feed link may differ because the source URI is being
updated and is intended to be removed in the future.
getAuthors() Returns an object of type ZendFeedReaderCollectionAuthor which is an ArrayObject whose
elements are each simple arrays containing any combination of the keys name, email and
uri. Where irrelevant to the source data, some of these keys may be omitted.
getAu- Returns either the first author known, or with the optional $index parameter any specific index
thor(integer on the array of Authors as described above (returning NULL if an invalid index).
$index = 0)
getDateCre- Returns the date on which this feed was created. Generally only applicable to Atom where it
ated() represents the date the resource described by an Atom 1.0 document was created. The
returned date will be a DateTime object.
getDateModi- Returns the date on which this feed was last modified. The returned date will be a DateTime
fied() object.
getLastBuild- Returns the date on which this feed was last built. The returned date will be a DateTime
Date() object. This is only supported by RSS - Atom feeds will always return NULL.
getLanguage() Returns the language of the feed (if defined) or simply the language noted in the XML
document.
getGenerator() Returns the generator of the feed, e.g. the software which generated it. This may differ
between RSS and Atom since Atom defines a different notation.
getCopyright() Returns any copyright notice associated with the feed.
getHubs() Returns an array of all Hub Server URI endpoints which are advertised by the feed for use
with the Pubsubhubbub Protocol, allowing subscriptions to the feed for real-time updates.
getCategories() Returns a ZendFeedReaderCollectionCategory object containing the details of any categories
associated with the overall feed. The supported fields include term (the machine readable
category name), scheme (the categorisation scheme and domain for this category), and
label (a HTML decoded human readable category name). Where any of the three fields are
absent from the field, they are either set to the closest available alternative or, in the case of
scheme, set to NULL.
getImage() Returns an array containing data relating to any feed image or logo, or NULL if no image
found. The resulting array may contain the following keys: uri, link, title, description, height,
and width. Atom logos only contain a URI so the remaining metadata is drawn from RSS
feeds only.
Given the variety of feeds in the wild, some of these methods will undoubtedly return NULL indicating the relevant
information couldnt be located. Where possible, Zend\Feed\Reader\Reader will fall back on alternative ele-
ments during its search. For example, searching an RSS feed for a modification date is more complicated than it looks.
RSS 2.0 feeds should include a <lastBuildDate> tag and (or) a <pubDate> element. But what if it doesnt,
maybe this is an RSS 1.0 feed? Perhaps it instead has an <atom:updated> element with identical information
(Atom may be used to supplement RSSs syntax)? Failing that, we could simply look at the entries, pick the most re-
cent, and use its <pubDate> element. Assuming it exists... Many feeds also use Dublin Core 1.0 or 1.1 <dc:date>
elements for feeds and entries. Or we could find Atom lurking again.
The point is, Zend\Feed\Reader\Reader was designed to know this. When you ask for the modification date
(or anything else), it will run off and search for all these alternatives until it either gives up and returns NULL, or finds
an alternative that should have the right answer.

125.7. Retrieving Feed Information 579

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

In addition to the above methods, all Feed objects implement methods for retrieving the DOM and XPath objects for
the current feeds as described earlier. Feed objects also implement the SPL Iterator and Countable interfaces. The
extended API is summarised below.

Table 125.2: Extended Feed Level API Methods

getDomDocu- Returns the parent DOMDocument object for the entire source XML document
ment()
getElement() Returns the current feed level DOMElement object
saveXml() Returns a string containing an XML document of the entire feed element (this is not the
original document but a rebuilt version)
getXpath() Returns the DOMXPath object used internally to run queries on the DOMDocument object
(this includes core and Extension namespaces pre-registered)
getXpathPre- Returns the valid DOM path prefix prepended to all XPath queries matching the feed being
fix() queried
getEncoding() Returns the encoding of the source XML document (note: this cannot account for errors such
as the server sending documents in a different encoding). Where not defined, the default UTF-8
encoding of Unicode is applied.
count() Returns a count of the entries or items this feed contains (implements SPLCountable interface)
current() Returns either the current entry (using the current index from key())
key() Returns the current entry index
next() Increments the entry index value by one
rewind() Resets the entry index to 0
valid() Checks that the current entry index is valid, i.e. it does fall below 0 and does not exceed the
number of entries existing.
getExten- Returns an array of all Extension objects loaded for the current feed (note: both feed-level and
sions() entry-level Extensions exist, and only feed-level Extensions are returned here). The array keys
are of the form {ExtensionName}_Feed.
getExten- Returns an Extension object for the feed registered under the provided name. This allows more
sion(string fine-grained access to Extensions which may otherwise be hidden within the implementation of
$name) the standard API methods.
getType() Returns a static class constant (e.g. ZendFeedReaderReader::TYPE_ATOM_03, i.e. Atom 0.3)
indicating exactly what kind of feed is being consumed.

125.8 Retrieving Entry/Item Information

Retrieving information for specific entries or items (depending on whether you speak Atom or RSS) is identical to feed
level data. Accessing entries is simply a matter of iterating over a Feed object or using the SPL Iterator interface
Feed objects implement and calling the appropriate method on each.

580 Chapter 125. Zend\Feed\Reader\Reader

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Table 125.3: Entry Level API Methods

getId() Returns a unique ID for the current entry.
getTitle() Returns the title of the current entry.
getDescription() Returns a description of the current entry.
getLink() Returns a URI to the HTML version of the current entry.
getPermaLink() Returns the permanent link to the current entry. In most cases, this is the same as
using getLink().
getAuthors() Returns an object of type ZendFeedReaderCollectionAuthor which is an
ArrayObject whose elements are each simple arrays containing any combination of
the keys name, email and uri. Where irrelevant to the source data, some of
these keys may be omitted.
getAuthor(integer $index Returns either the first author known, or with the optional $index parameter any
= 0) specific index on the array of Authors as described above (returning NULL if an
invalid index).
getDateCreated() Returns the date on which the current entry was created. Generally only applicable
to Atom where it represents the date the resource described by an Atom 1.0
document was created.
getDateModified() Returns the date on which the current entry was last modified
getContent() Returns the content of the current entry (this has any entities reversed if possible
assuming the content type is HTML). The description is returned if a separate
content element does not exist.
getEnclosure() Returns an array containing the value of all attributes from a multi-media
<enclosure> element including as array keys: url, length, type. In accordance with
the RSS Best Practices Profile of the RSS Advisory Board, no support is offers for
multiple enclosures since such support forms no part of the RSS specification.
getCommentCount() Returns the number of comments made on this entry at the time the feed was last
generated
getCommentLink() Returns a URI pointing to the HTML page where comments can be made on this
entry
getComment- Returns a URI pointing to a feed of the provided type containing all comments for
FeedLink([string $type = this entry (type defaults to Atom/RSS depending on current feed type).
atom|rss])
getCategories() Returns a ZendFeedReaderCollectionCategory object containing the details of any
categories associated with the entry. The supported fields include term (the
machine readable category name), scheme (the categorisation scheme and domain
for this category), and label (a HTML decoded human readable category name).
Where any of the three fields are absent from the field, they are either set to the
closest available alternative or, in the case of scheme, set to NULL.
The extended API for entries is identical to that for feeds with the exception of the Iterator methods which are not
needed here.

125.8. Retrieving Entry/Item Information 581

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Caution: There is often confusion over the concepts of modified and created dates. In Atom, these are two clearly
defined concepts (so knock yourself out) but in RSS they are vague. RSS 2.0 defines a single <pubDate> element
which typically refers to the date this entry was published, i.e. a creation date of sorts. This is not always the case,
and it may change with updates or not. As a result, if you really want to check whether an entry has changed, dont
rely on the results of getDateModified(). Instead, consider tracking the MD5 hash of three other elements
concatenated, e.g. using getTitle(), getDescription() and getContent(). If the entry was truly
updated, this hash computation will give a different result than previously saved hashes for the same entry. This is
obviously content oriented, and will not assist in detecting changes to other relevant elements. Atom feeds should
not require such steps.
Further muddying the waters, dates in feeds may follow different standards. Atom and Dublin Core dates should
follow ISO 8601, and RSS dates should follow RFC 822 or RFC 2822 which is also common. Date methods
will throw an exception if DateTime cannot load the date string using one of the above standards, or the PHP
recognised possibilities for RSS dates.

Warning: The values returned from these methods are not validated. This means users must perform validation
on all retrieved data including the filtering of any HTML such as from getContent() before it is output from
your application. Remember that most feeds come from external sources, and therefore the default assumption
should be that they cannot be trusted.

Table 125.4: Extended Entry Level API Methods

getDomDocu- Returns the parent DOMDocument object for the entire feed (not just the current entry)
ment()
getElement() Returns the current entry level DOMElement object
getXpath() Returns the DOMXPath object used internally to run queries on the DOMDocument object
(this includes core and Extension namespaces pre-registered)
getXpathPre- Returns the valid DOM path prefix prepended to all XPath queries matching the entry being
fix() queried
getEncoding() Returns the encoding of the source XML document (note: this cannot account for errors such
as the server sending documents in a different encoding). The default encoding applied in the
absence of any other is the UTF-8 encoding of Unicode.
getExten- Returns an array of all Extension objects loaded for the current entry (note: both feed-level and
sions() entry-level Extensions exist, and only entry-level Extensions are returned here). The array keys
are in the form {ExtensionName}Entry.
getExten- Returns an Extension object for the entry registered under the provided name. This allows more
sion(string fine-grained access to Extensions which may otherwise be hidden within the implementation of
$name) the standard API methods.
getType() Returns a static class constant (e.g. ZendFeedReaderReader::TYPE_ATOM_03, i.e. Atom 0.3)
indicating exactly what kind of feed is being consumed.

125.9 Extending Feed and Entry APIs

Extending Zend\Feed\Reader\Reader allows you to add methods at both the feed and entry level which cover
the retrieval of information not already supported by Zend\Feed\Reader\Reader. Given the number of RSS
and Atom extensions that exist, this is a good thing since Zend\Feed\Reader\Reader couldnt possibly add
everything.
There are two types of Extensions possible, those which retrieve information from elements which are
immediate children of the root element (e.g. <channel> for RSS or <feed> for Atom) and those
who retrieve information from child elements of an entry (e.g. <item> for RSS or <entry> for
Atom). On the filesystem these are grouped as classes within a namespace based on the extension stan-

582 Chapter 125. Zend\Feed\Reader\Reader

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

dards name. For example, internally we have Zend\Feed\Reader\Extension\DublinCore\Feed and

Zend\Feed\Reader\Extension\DublinCore\Entry classes which are two Extensions implementing
Dublin Core 1.0 and 1.1 support.
Extensions are loaded into Zend\Feed\Reader\Reader using a Zend\ServiceManager\AbstractPluginManager
implementation, Zend\Feed\Reader\ExtensionManager, so its operation will be familiar from other Zend
Framework components. Zend\Feed\Reader\Reader already bundles a number of these Extensions, however
those which are not used internally and registered by default (so called Core Extensions) must be registered to
Zend\Feed\Reader\Reader before they are used. The bundled Extensions include:

Table 125.5: Core Extensions (pre-registered)

DublinCore (Feed and Entry) Implements support for Dublin Core Metadata Element Set 1.0 and 1.1
Content (Entry only) Implements support for Content 1.0
Atom (Feed and Entry) Implements support for Atom 0.3 and Atom 1.0
Slash Implements support for the Slash RSS 1.0 module
WellFormedWeb Implements support for the Well Formed Web CommentAPI 1.0
Thread Implements support for Atom Threading Extensions as described in RFC 4685
Podcast Implements support for the Podcast 1.0 DTD from Apple
The Core Extensions are somewhat special since they are extremely common and multi-faceted. For example, we have
a Core Extension for Atom. Atom is implemented as an Extension (not just a base class) because it doubles as a valid
RSS module - you can insert Atom elements into RSS feeds. Ive even seen RDF feeds which use a lot of Atom in
place of more common Extensions like Dublin Core.

Table 125.6: Non-Core Extensions (must register manually)

Syndication Implements Syndication 1.0 support for RSS feeds
CreativeCom- A RSS module that adds an element at the <channel> or <item> level that specifies which
mons Creative Commons license applies.
The additional non-Core Extensions are offered but not registered to Zend\Feed\Reader\Reader by default. If
you want to use them, youll need to tell Zend\Feed\Reader\Reader to load them in advance of importing a
feed. Additional non-Core Extensions will be included in future iterations of the component.
Registering an Extension with Zend\Feed\Reader\Reader, so it is loaded and its API is available to Feed and
Entry objects, is a simple affair using the Zend\Feed\Reader\ExtensionManager. Here we register the
optional Syndication Extension, and discover that it can be directly called from the Entry level API without any effort.
Note that Extension names are case sensitive and use camel casing for multiple terms.
1 Zend\Feed\Reader\Reader::registerExtension('Syndication');
2 $feed = Zend\Feed\Reader\Reader::import('http://rss.slashdot.org/Slashdot/slashdot');
3 $updatePeriod = $feed->getUpdatePeriod();

In the simple example above, we checked how frequently a feed is being updated using the getUpdatePeriod()
method. Since its not part of Zend\Feed\Reader\Readers core API, it could only be a method supported by
the newly registered Syndication Extension.
As you can also notice, the new methods from Extensions are accessible from the main API using PHPs magic
methods. As an alternative, you can also directly access any Extension object for a similar result as seen below.
1 Zend\Feed\Reader\Reader::registerExtension('Syndication');
2 $feed = Zend\Feed\Reader\Reader::import('http://rss.slashdot.org/Slashdot/slashdot');
3 $syndication = $feed->getExtension('Syndication');
4 $updatePeriod = $syndication->getUpdatePeriod();

125.9. Extending Feed and Entry APIs 583

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

125.9.1 Writing Zend\Feed\Reader\Reader Extensions

Inevitably, there will be times when the Zend\Feed\Reader\Reader API is just not capable of getting something
you need from a feed or entry. You can use the underlying source objects, like DOMDocument, to get these by hand
however there is a more reusable method available by writing Extensions supporting these new queries.
As an example, lets take the case of a purely fictitious corporation named Jungle Books. Jungle Books have been
publishing a lot of reviews on books they sell (from external sources and customers), which are distributed as an RSS
2.0 feed. Their marketing department realises that web applications using this feed cannot currently figure out exactly
what book is being reviewed. To make life easier for everyone, they determine that the geek department needs to
extend RSS 2.0 to include a new element per entry supplying the ISBN-10 or ISBN-13 number of the publication the
entry concerns. They define the new <isbn> element quite simply with a standard name and namespace URI:
1 JungleBooks 1.0:
2 http://example.com/junglebooks/rss/module/1.0/

A snippet of RSS containing this extension in practice could be something similar to:
1 <?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8" ?>
2 <rss version="2.0"
3 xmlns:content="http://purl.org/rss/1.0/modules/content/"
4 xmlns:jungle="http://example.com/junglebooks/rss/module/1.0/">
5 <channel>
6 <title>Jungle Books Customer Reviews</title>
7 <link>http://example.com/junglebooks</link>
8 <description>Many book reviews!</description>
9 <pubDate>Fri, 26 Jun 2009 19:15:10 GMT</pubDate>
10 <jungle:dayPopular>
11 http://example.com/junglebooks/book/938
12 </jungle:dayPopular>
13 <item>
14 <title>Review Of Flatland: A Romance of Many Dimensions</title>
15 <link>http://example.com/junglebooks/review/987</link>
16 <author>Confused Physics Student</author>
17 <content:encoded>
18 A romantic square?!
19 </content:encoded>
20 <pubDate>Thu, 25 Jun 2009 20:03:28 -0700</pubDate>
21 <jungle:isbn>048627263X</jungle:isbn>
22 </item>
23 </channel>
24 </rss>

Implementing this new ISBN element as a simple entry level extension would require the following class (using your
own class namespace outside of Zend).
1 class My\FeedReader\Extension\JungleBooks\Entry
2 extends Zend\Feed\Reader\Extension\AbstractEntry
3 {
4 public function getIsbn()
5 {
6 if (isset($this->data['isbn'])) {
7 return $this->data['isbn'];
8 }
9 $isbn = $this->xpath->evaluate(
10 'string(' . $this->getXpathPrefix() . '/jungle:isbn)'
11 );
12 if (!$isbn) {
13 $isbn = null;

584 Chapter 125. Zend\Feed\Reader\Reader

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

14 }
15 $this->data['isbn'] = $isbn;
16 return $this->data['isbn'];
17 }
18

19 protected function registerNamespaces()

20 {
21 $this->xpath->registerNamespace(
22 'jungle', 'http://example.com/junglebooks/rss/module/1.0/'
23 );
24 }
25 }

This extension is easy enough to follow. It creates a new method getIsbn() which runs an XPath query on the
current entry to extract the ISBN number enclosed by the <jungle:isbn> element. It can optionally store this to
the internal non-persistent cache (no need to keep querying the DOM if its called again on the same entry). The value
is returned to the caller. At the end we have a protected method (its abstract so it must exist) which registers the Jungle
Books namespace for their custom RSS module. While we call this an RSS module, theres nothing to prevent the same
element being used in Atom feeds - and all Extensions which use the prefix provided by getXpathPrefix() are
actually neutral and work on RSS or Atom feeds with no extra code.
Since this Extension is stored outside of Zend Framework, youll need to register the path prefix for your Extensions
so Zend\Loader\PluginLoader can find them. After that, its merely a matter of registering the Extension, if
its not already loaded, and using it in practice.
1 if (!Zend\Feed\Reader\Reader::isRegistered('JungleBooks')) {
2 $extensions = Zend\Feed\Reader\Reader::getExtensionManager();
3 $extensions->setInvokableClass('JungleBooksEntry', 'My\FeedReader\Extension\JungleBooks\Entry');
4 Zend\Feed\Reader\Reader::registerExtension('JungleBooks');
5 }
6 $feed = Zend\Feed\Reader\Reader::import('http://example.com/junglebooks/rss');
7

8 // ISBN for whatever book the first entry in the feed was concerned with
9 $firstIsbn = $feed->current()->getIsbn();

Writing a feed level Extension is not much different. The example feed from earlier included an unmentioned
<jungle:dayPopular> element which Jungle Books have added to their standard to include a link to the days
most popular book (in terms of visitor traffic). Heres an Extension which adds a getDaysPopularBookLink()
method to the feel level API.
1 class My\FeedReader\Extension\JungleBooks\Feed
2 extends Zend\Feed\Reader\Extension\AbstractFeed
3 {
4 public function getDaysPopularBookLink()
5 {
6 if (isset($this->data['dayPopular'])) {
7 return $this->data['dayPopular'];
8 }
9 $dayPopular = $this->xpath->evaluate(
10 'string(' . $this->getXpathPrefix() . '/jungle:dayPopular)'
11 );
12 if (!$dayPopular) {
13 $dayPopular = null;
14 }
15 $this->data['dayPopular'] = $dayPopular;
16 return $this->data['dayPopular'];
17 }
18

125.9. Extending Feed and Entry APIs 585

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

19 protected function registerNamespaces()

20 {
21 $this->xpath->registerNamespace(
22 'jungle', 'http://example.com/junglebooks/rss/module/1.0/'
23 );
24 }
25 }

Lets repeat the last example using a custom Extension to show the method being used.
1 if (!Zend\Feed\Reader\Reader::isRegistered('JungleBooks')) {
2 $extensions = Zend\Feed\Reader\Reader::getExtensionManager();
3 $extensions->setInvokableClass('JungleBooksFeed', 'My\FeedReader\Extension\JungleBooks\Feed');
4 Zend\Feed\Reader\Reader::registerExtension('JungleBooks');
5 }
6 $feed = Zend\Feed\Reader\Reader::import('http://example.com/junglebooks/rss');
7

8 // URI to the information page of the day's most popular book with visitors
9 $daysPopularBookLink = $feed->getDaysPopularBookLink();

Going through these examples, youll note that we dont register feed and entry Extensions separately. Extensions
within the same standard may or may not include both a feed and entry class, so Zend\Feed\Reader\Reader
only requires you to register the overall parent name, e.g. JungleBooks, DublinCore, Slash. Internally, it can check
at what level Extensions exist and load them up if found. In our case, we have a full set of Extensions now:
JungleBooks\Feed and JungleBooks\Entry.

586 Chapter 125. Zend\Feed\Reader\Reader

 CHAPTER 126

Zend\Feed\Writer\Writer

126.1 Introduction

Zend\Feed\Writer\Writer is the sibling component to Zend\Feed\Reader\Reader responsible for gen-

erating feeds for output. It supports the Atom 1.0 specification (RFC 4287) and RSS 2.0 as specified by the RSS
Advisory Board (RSS 2.0.11). It does not deviate from these standards. It does, however, offer a simple Extension
system which allows for any extension and module for either of these two specifications to be implemented if they are
not provided out of the box.
In many ways, Zend\Feed\Writer\Writer is the inverse of Zend\Feed\Reader\Reader. Where
Zend\Feed\Reader\Reader focuses on providing an easy to use architecture fronted by getter methods,
Zend\Feed\Writer\Writer is fronted by similarly named setters or mutators. This ensures the API wont
pose a learning curve to anyone familiar with Zend\Feed\Reader\Reader.
As a result of this design, the rest may even be obvious. Behind the scenes, data set on any
Zend\Feed\Writer\Writer Data Container object is translated at render time onto a DOMDocument object
using the necessary feed elements. For each supported feed type there is both an Atom 1.0 and RSS 2.0 renderer.
Using a DOMDocument class rather than a templating solution has numerous advantages, the most obvious being
the ability to export the DOMDocument for additional processing and relying on PHP DOM for correct and valid
rendering.

126.2 Architecture

The architecture of Zend\Feed\Writer\Writer is very simple. It has two core sets of classes: data containers
and renderers.
The containers include the Zend\Feed\Writer\Feed and Zend\Feed\Writer\Entry classes. The Entry
classes can be attached to any Feed class. The sole purpose of these containers is to collect data about the feed to
generate using a simple interface of setter methods. These methods perform some data validity testing. For example,
it will validate any passed URIs, dates, etc. These checks are not tied to any of the feed standards definitions. The
container objects also contain methods to allow for fast rendering and export of the final feed, and these can be reused
at will.
In addition to the main data container classes, there are two additional Atom 2.0 specific classes.
Zend\Feed\Writer\Source and Zend\Feed\Writer\Deleted. The former implements Atom 2.0 source
elements which carry source feed metadata for a specific entry within an aggregate feed (i.e. the current feed is not
the entrys original source). The latter implements the Atom Tombstones RFC allowing feeds to carry references to
entries which have been deleted.

587
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

While there are two main data container types, there are four renderers - two matching container renderers per sup-
ported feed type. Each renderer accepts a container, and based on its content attempts to generate valid feed markup.
If the renderer is unable to generate valid feed markup, perhaps due to the container missing an obligatory data point,
it will report this by throwing an Exception. While it is possible to ignore Exceptions, this removes the default
safeguard of ensuring you have sufficient data set to render a wholly valid feed.
To explain this more clearly, you may construct a set of data containers for a feed where there is a Feed container, into
which has been added some Entry containers and a Deleted container. This forms a data hierarchy resembling a normal
feed. When rendering is performed, this hierarchy has its pieces passed to relevant renderers and the partial feeds (all
DOMDocuments) are then pieced together to create a complete feed. In the case of Source or Deleted (Tomestone)
containers, these are rendered only for Atom 2.0 and ignored for RSS.
Due to the system being divided between data containers and renderers, it can make Extensions somewhat interesting.
A typical Extension offering namespaced feed and entry level elements, must itself reflect the exact same architecture,
i.e. offer feed and entry level data containers, and matching renderers. There is, fortunately, no complex integration
work required since all Extension classes are simply registered and automatically used by the core classes. Well meet
Extensions in more detail at the end of this section.

126.3 Getting Started

Using Zend\Feed\Writer\Writer is as simple as setting data and triggering the renderer. Here is an example
to generate a minimal Atom 1.0 feed. As this demonstrates, each feed or entry uses a separate data container.
1 /**
2 * Create the parent feed
3 */
4 $feed = new Zend\Feed\Writer\Feed;
5 $feed->setTitle('Paddy\'s Blog');
6 $feed->setLink('http://www.example.com');
7 $feed->setFeedLink('http://www.example.com/atom', 'atom');
8 $feed->addAuthor(array(
9 'name' => 'Paddy',
10 'email' => '[email protected]',
11 'uri' => 'http://www.example.com',
12 ));
13 $feed->setDateModified(time());
14 $feed->addHub('http://pubsubhubbub.appspot.com/');
15

16 /**
17 * Add one or more entries. Note that entries must
18 * be manually added once created.
19 */
20 $entry = $feed->createEntry();
21 $entry->setTitle('All Your Base Are Belong To Us');
22 $entry->setLink('http://www.example.com/all-your-base-are-belong-to-us');
23 $entry->addAuthor(array(
24 'name' => 'Paddy',
25 'email' => '[email protected]',
26 'uri' => 'http://www.example.com',
27 ));
28 $entry->setDateModified(time());
29 $entry->setDateCreated(time());
30 $entry->setDescription('Exposing the difficultly of porting games to English.');
31 $entry->setContent(
32 'I am not writing the article. The example is long enough as is ;).'
33 );

588 Chapter 126. Zend\Feed\Writer\Writer

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

34 $feed->addEntry($entry);
35

36 /**
37 * Render the resulting feed to Atom 1.0 and assign to $out.
38 * You can substitute "atom" with "rss" to generate an RSS 2.0 feed.
39 */
40 $out = $feed->export('atom');

The output rendered should be as follows:

1 <?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
2 <feed xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom">
3 <title type="text">Paddy's Blog</title>
4 <subtitle type="text">Writing about PC Games since 176 BC.</subtitle>
5 <updated>2009-12-14T20:28:18+00:00</updated>
6 <generator uri="http://framework.zend.com" version="1.10.0alpha">
7 Zend\Feed\Writer
8 </generator>
9 <link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://www.example.com"/>
10 <link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml"
11 href="http://www.example.com/atom"/>
12 <id>http://www.example.com</id>
13 <author>
14 <name>Paddy</name>
15 <email>[email protected]</email>
16 <uri>http://www.example.com</uri>
17 </author>
18 <link rel="hub" href="http://pubsubhubbub.appspot.com/"/>
19 <entry>
20 <title type="html"><![CDATA[All Your Base Are Belong To
21 Us]]></title>
22 <summary type="html">
23 <![CDATA[Exposing the difficultly of porting games to
24 English.]]>
25 </summary>
26 <published>2009-12-14T20:28:18+00:00</published>
27 <updated>2009-12-14T20:28:18+00:00</updated>
28 <link rel="alternate" type="text/html"
29 href="http://www.example.com/all-your-base-are-belong-to-us"/>
30 <id>http://www.example.com/all-your-base-are-belong-to-us</id>
31 <author>
32 <name>Paddy</name>
33 <email>[email protected]</email>
34 <uri>http://www.example.com</uri>
35 </author>
36 <content type="html">
37 <![CDATA[I am not writing the article.
38 The example is long enough as is ;).]]>
39 </content>
40 </entry>
41 </feed>

This is a perfectly valid Atom 1.0 example. It should be noted that omitting an obligatory point of data, such as a title,
will trigger an Exception when rendering as Atom 1.0. This will differ for RSS 2.0 since a title may be omitted so
long as a description is present. This gives rise to Exceptions that differ between the two standards depending on the
renderer in use. By design, Zend\Feed\Writer\Writer will not render an invalid feed for either standard unless
the end-user deliberately elects to ignore all Exceptions. This built in safeguard was added to ensure users without
in-depth knowledge of the relevant specifications have a bit less to worry about.

126.3. Getting Started 589

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

126.4 Setting Feed Data Points

Before you can render a feed, you must first setup the data necessary for the feed being rendered. This utilises a
simple setter style API which doubles as an initial method for validating the data being set. By design, the API closely
matches that for Zend\Feed\Reader\Reader to avoid undue confusion and uncertainty.

Note: Users have commented that the lack of a simple array based notation for input data gives rise to lengthy tracts
of code. This will be addressed in a future release.

Zend\Feed\Writer\Writer offers this API via its data container classes Zend\Feed\Writer\Feed and
Zend\Feed\Writer\Entry (not to mention the Atom 2.0 specific and Extension classes). These classes merely
store all feed data in a type-agnostic manner, meaning you may reuse any data container with any renderer without
requiring additional work. Both classes are also amenable to Extensions, meaning that an Extension may define its
own container classes which are registered to the base container classes as extensions, and are checked when any
method call triggers the base containers __call() method.
Heres a summary of the Core API for Feeds. You should note it comprises not only the basic RSS and Atom standards,
but also accounts for a number of included Extensions bundled with Zend\Feed\Writer\Writer. The naming
of these Extension sourced methods remain fairly generic - all Extension methods operate at the same level as the Core
API though we do allow you to retrieve any specific Extension object separately if required.
The Feed Level API for data is contained in Zend\Feed\Writer\Feed. In addition to the API detailed below,
the class also implements the Countable and Iterator interfaces.

590 Chapter 126. Zend\Feed\Writer\Writer

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Table 126.1: Feed Level API Methods

setId() Set a unique ID associated with this feed. For Atom 1.0 this is an atom:id element, whereas for RSS
2.0 it is added as a guid element. These are optional so long as a link is added, i.e. the link is set as
the ID.
setTitle() Set the title of the feed.
setDe- Set the text description of the feed.
scription()
setLink() Set a URI to the HTML website containing the same or similar information as this feed (i.e. if the
feed is from a blog, it should provide the blogs URI where the HTML version of the entries can be
read).
set- Add a link to an XML feed, whether the feed being generated or an alternate URI pointing to the
FeedLinks() same feed but in a different format. At a minimum, it is recommended to include a link to the feed
being generated so it has an identifiable final URI allowing a client to track its location changes
without necessitating constant redirects. The parameter is an array of arrays, where each sub-array
contains the keys type and uri. The type should be one of atom, rss, or rdf.
addAu- Sets the data for authors. The parameter is an array of arrays where each sub-array may contain the
thors() keys name, email and uri. The uri value is only applicable for Atom feeds since RSS
contains no facility to show it. For RSS 2.0, rendering will create two elements - an author element
containing the email reference with the name in brackets, and a Dublin Core creator element only
containing the name.
addAu- Sets the data for a single author following the same array format as described above for a single
thor() sub-array.
setDate- Sets the date on which this feed was created. Generally only applicable to Atom where it represents
Created() the date the resource described by an Atom 1.0 document was created. The expected parameter may
be a UNIX timestamp or a DateTime object.
setDate- Sets the date on which this feed was last modified. The expected parameter may be a UNIX
Modified() timestamp or a DateTime object.
setLast- Sets the date on which this feed was last build. The expected parameter may be a UNIX timestamp
Build- or a DateTime object. This will only be rendered for RSS 2.0 feeds and is automatically rendered as
Date() the current date by default when not explicitly set.
set- Sets the language of the feed. This will be omitted unless set.
Language()
setGenera- Allows the setting of a generator. The parameter should be an array containing the keys name,
tor() version and uri. If omitted a default generator will be added referencing ZendFeedWriter, the
current Zend Framework version and the Frameworks URI.
setCopy- Sets a copyright notice associated with the feed.
right()
addHubs() Accepts an array of Pubsubhubbub Hub Endpoints to be rendered in the feed as Atom links so that
PuSH Subscribers may subscribe to your feed. Note that you must implement a Pubsubhubbub
Publisher in order for real-time updates to be enabled. A Publisher may be implemented using
ZendFeedPubsubhubbubPublisher. The method addHub() allows adding a single hub at a time.
addCate- Accepts an array of categories for rendering, where each element is itself an array whose possible
gories() keys include term, label and scheme. The term is a typically a category name suitable for
inclusion in a URI. The label may be a human readable category name supporting special
characters (it is HTML encoded during rendering) and is a required key. The scheme (called the
domain in RSS) is optional but must be a valid URI. The method addCategory() allows adding a
single category at a time.
setImage() Accepts an array of image metadata for an RSS image or Atom logo. Atom 1.0 only requires a URI.
RSS 2.0 requires a URI, HTML link, and an image title. RSS 2.0 optionally may send a width,
height and image description. The array parameter may contain these using the keys: uri, link, title,
description, height and width. The RSS 2.0 HTML link should point to the feed sources HTML
page.
createEn- Returns a new instance of ZendFeedWriterEntry. This is the Entry level data container. New entries
try() are not automatically assigned to the current feed, so you must explicitly call addEntry() to add the
126.4. Settingentry
Feed forData
rendering.
Points 591
addEntry() Adds an instance of ZendFeedWriterEntry to the current feed container for rendering.
create- Returns a new instance of ZendFeedWriterDeleted. This is the Atom 2.0 Tombstone level data
Tomb- container. New entries are not automatically assigned to the current feed, so you must explicitly call
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Note: In addition to these setters, there are also matching getters to retrieve data from the Entry data container. For
example, setImage() is matched with a getImage() method.

126.5 Setting Entry Data Points

Heres a summary of the Core API for Entries and Items. You should note it comprises not only the basic RSS and Atom
standards, but also accounts for a number of included Extensions bundled with Zend\Feed\Writer\Writer. The
naming of these Extension sourced methods remain fairly generic - all Extension methods operate at the same level as
the Core API though we do allow you to retrieve any specific Extension object separately if required.
The Entry Level API for data is contained in Zend\Feed\Writer\Entry.

592 Chapter 126. Zend\Feed\Writer\Writer

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Table 126.2: Entry Level API Methods

setId() Set a unique ID associated with this entry. For Atom 1.0 this is an atom:id element, whereas for
RSS 2.0 it is added as a guid element. These are optional so long as a link is added, i.e. the link
is set as the ID.
setTitle() Set the title of the entry.
setDescrip- Set the text description of the entry.
tion()
setContent() Set the content of the entry.
setLink() Set a URI to the HTML website containing the same or similar information as this entry (i.e. if
the feed is from a blog, it should provide the blog articles URI where the HTML version of the
entry can be read).
set- Add a link to an XML feed, whether the feed being generated or an alternate URI pointing to the
FeedLinks() same feed but in a different format. At a minimum, it is recommended to include a link to the
feed being generated so it has an identifiable final URI allowing a client to track its location
changes without necessitating constant redirects. The parameter is an array of arrays, where each
sub-array contains the keys type and uri. The type should be one of atom, rss, or rdf.
If a type is omitted, it defaults to the type used when rendering the feed.
addAuthors() Sets the data for authors. The parameter is an array of arrays where each sub-array may contain
the keys name, email and uri. The uri value is only applicable for Atom feeds since RSS
contains no facility to show it. For RSS 2.0, rendering will create two elements - an author
element containing the email reference with the name in brackets, and a Dublin Core creator
element only containing the name.
addAuthor() Sets the data for a single author following the same format as described above for a single
sub-array.
setDateCre- Sets the date on which this feed was created. Generally only applicable to Atom where it
ated() represents the date the resource described by an Atom 1.0 document was created. The expected
parameter may be a UNIX timestamp or a DateTime object. If omitted, the date used will be the
current date and time.
setDateModi- Sets the date on which this feed was last modified. The expected parameter may be a UNIX
fied() timestamp or a DateTime object. If omitted, the date used will be the current date and time.
setCopy- Sets a copyright notice associated with the feed.
right()
addCate- Accepts an array of categories for rendering, where each element is itself an array whose
gories() possible keys include term, label and scheme. The term is a typically a category name
suitable for inclusion in a URI. The label may be a human readable category name supporting
special characters (it is encoded during rendering) and is a required key. The scheme (called
the domain in RSS) is optional but must be a valid URI.
addCate- Sets the data for a single category following the same format as described above for a single
gory() sub-array.
setComment- Sets the number of comments associated with this entry. Rendering differs between RSS and
Count() Atom 2.0 depending on the element or attribute needed.
setCom- Seta a link to a HTML page containing comments associated with this entry.
mentLink()
setComment- Sets a link to a XML feed containing comments associated with this entry. The parameter is an
FeedLink() array containing the keys uri and type, where the type is one of rdf, rss or atom.
setComment- Same as setCommentFeedLink() except it accepts an array of arrays, where each subarray
FeedLinks() contains the expected parameters of setCommentFeedLink().
setEncoding() Sets the encoding of entry text. This will default to UTF-8 which is the preferred encoding.
Note: In addition to these setters, there are also matching getters to retrieve data from the Entry data container.

126.5. Setting Entry Data Points 593

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

594 Chapter 126. Zend\Feed\Writer\Writer

 CHAPTER 127

Zend\Feed\PubSubHubbub

Zend\Feed\PubSubHubbub is an implementation of the PubSubHubbub Core 0.2 Specification (Working Draft).

It offers implementations of a Pubsubhubbub Publisher and Subscriber suited to Zend Framework and other PHP
applications.

127.1 What is PubSubHubbub?

Pubsubhubbub is an open, simple web-scale pubsub protocol. A common use case to enable blogs (Publishers) to
push updates from their RSS or Atom feeds (Topics) to end Subscribers. These Subscribers will have subscribed to
the blogs RSS or Atom feed via a Hub, a central server which is notified of any updates by the Publisher and which
then distributes these updates to all Subscribers. Any feed may advertise that it supports one or more Hubs using an
Atom namespaced link element with a rel attribute of hub.
Pubsubhubbub has garnered attention because it is a pubsub protocol which is easy to implement and which operates
over HTTP. Its philosophy is to replace the traditional model where blog feeds have been polled at regular intervals to
detect and retrieve updates. Depending on the frequency of polling, this can take a lot of time to propagate updates to
interested parties from planet aggregators to desktop readers. With a pubsub system in place, updates are not simply
polled by Subscribers, they are pushed to Subscribers, eliminating any delay. For this reason, Pubsubhubbub forms
part of what has been dubbed the real-time web.
The protocol does not exist in isolation. Pubsub systems have been around for a while, such as the familiar Jabber
Publish-Subscribe protocol, XEP-0060, or the less well known rssCloud (described in 2001). However these have
not achieved widespread adoption typically due to either their complexity, poor timing or lack of suitability for web
applications. rssCloud, which was recently revived as a response to the appearance of Pubsubhubbub, has also seen its
usage increase significantly though it lacks a formal specification and currently does not support Atom 1.0 feeds.
Perhaps surprisingly given its relative early age, Pubsubhubbub is already in use including in Google Reader, Feed-
burner, and there are plugins available for Wordpress blogs.

127.2 Architecture

Zend\Feed\PubSubHubbub implements two sides of the Pubsubhubbub 0.2 Specification: a Publisher and a
Subscriber. It does not currently implement a Hub Server though this is in progress for a future Zend Framework
release.
A Publisher is responsible for notifying all supported Hubs (many can be supported to add redundancy to the system)
of any updates to its feeds, whether they be Atom or RSS based. This is achieved by pinging the supported Hub Servers
with the URL of the updated feed. In Pubsubhubbub terminology, any updatable resource capable of being subscribed

595
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

to is referred to as a Topic. Once a ping is received, the Hub will request the updated feed, process it for updated items,
and forward all updates to all Subscribers subscribed to that feed.
A Subscriber is any party or application which subscribes to one or more Hubs to receive updates from a Topic hosted
by a Publisher. The Subscriber never directly communicates with the Publisher since the Hub acts as an intermediary,
accepting subscriptions and sending updates to subscribed Subscribers. The Subscriber therefore communicates only
with the Hub, either to subscribe or unsubscribe to Topics, or when it receives updates from the Hub. This communi-
cation design (Fat Pings) effectively removes the possibility of a Thundering Herd issue. This occurs in a pubsub
system where the Hub merely informs Subscribers that an update is available, prompting all Subscribers to immedi-
ately retrieve the feed from the Publisher giving rise to a traffic spike. In Pubsubhubbub, the Hub distributes the actual
update in a Fat Ping so the Publisher is not subjected to any traffic spike.
Zend\Feed\PubSubHubbub implements Pubsubhubbub Publishers and Subscribers with the classes
Zend\Feed\PubSubHubbub\Publisher and Zend\Feed\PubSubHubbub\Subscriber. In addi-
tion, the Subscriber implementation may handle any feed updates forwarded from a Hub by using
Zend\Feed\PubSubHubbub\Subscriber\Callback. These classes, their use cases, and APIs are covered
in subsequent sections.

127.3 Zend\Feed\PubSubHubbub\Publisher

In Pubsubhubbub, the Publisher is the party who publishes a live feed and frequently updates it with new content.
This may be a blog, an aggregator, or even a web service with a public feed based API. In order for these updates
to be pushed to Subscribers, the Publisher must notify all of its supported Hubs that an update has occurred using a
simple HTTP POST request containing the URI or the updated Topic (i.e the updated RSS or Atom feed). The Hub
will confirm receipt of the notification, fetch the updated feed, and forward any updates to any Subscribers who have
subscribed to that Hub for updates from the relevant feed.
By design, this means the Publisher has very little to do except send these Hub pings whenever its feeds change. As
a result, the Publisher implementation is extremely simple to use and requires very little work to setup and use when
feeds are updated.
Zend\Feed\PubSubHubbub\Publisher implements a full Pubsubhubbub Publisher. Its setup for use is also
simple, requiring mainly that it is configured with the URI endpoint for all Hubs to be notified of updates, and the
URIs of all Topics to be included in the notifications.
The following example shows a Publisher notifying a collection of Hubs about updates to a pair of local RSS and Atom
feeds. The class retains a collection of errors which include the Hub URLs, so the notification can be re-attempted later
and/or logged if any notifications happen to fail. Each resulting error array also includes a response key containing
the related HTTP response object. In the event of any errors, it is strongly recommended to attempt the operation for
failed Hub Endpoints at least once more at a future time. This may require the use of either a scheduled task for this
purpose or a job queue though such extra steps are optional.
1 $publisher = new Zend\Feed\PubSubHubbub\Publisher;
2 $publisher->addHubUrls(array(
3 'http://pubsubhubbub.appspot.com/',
4 'http://hubbub.example.com',
5 ));
6 $publisher->addUpdatedTopicUrls(array(
7 'http://www.example.net/rss',
8 'http://www.example.net/atom',
9 ));
10 $publisher->notifyAll();
11

12 if (!$publisher->isSuccess()) {
13 // check for errors
14 $errors = $publisher->getErrors();

596 Chapter 127. Zend\Feed\PubSubHubbub

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

15 $failedHubs = array();
16 foreach ($errors as $error) {
17 $failedHubs[] = $error['hubUrl'];
18 }
19 }
20

21 // reschedule notifications for the failed Hubs in $failedHubs

If you prefer having more concrete control over the Publisher, the methods addHubUrls()
and addUpdatedTopicUrls() pass each array value to the singular addHubUrl() and
addUpdatedTopicUrl() public methods. There are also matching removeUpdatedTopicUrl() and
removeHubUrl() methods.
You can also skip setting Hub URIs, and notify each in turn using the notifyHub() method which accepts the URI
of a Hub endpoint as its only argument.
There are no other tasks to cover. The Publisher implementation is very simple since most of the feed processing and
distribution is handled by the selected Hubs. It is however important to detect errors and reschedule notifications as
soon as possible (with a reasonable maximum number of retries) to ensure notifications reach all Subscribers. In many
cases as a final alternative, Hubs may frequently poll your feeds to offer some additional tolerance for failures both in
terms of their own temporary downtime or Publisher errors or downtime.

127.4 Zend\Feed\PubSubHubbub\Subscriber

In Pubsubhubbub, the Subscriber is the party who wishes to receive updates to any Topic (RSS or Atom feed). They
achieve this by subscribing to one or more of the Hubs advertised by that Topic, usually as a set of one or more Atom
1.0 links with a rel attribute of hub. The Hub from that point forward will send an Atom or RSS feed containing all
updates to that Subscribers Callback URL when it receives an update notification from the Publisher. In this way, the
Subscriber need never actually visit the original feed (though its still recommended at some level to ensure updates
are retrieved if ever a Hub goes offline). All subscription requests must contain the URI of the Topic being subscribed
and a Callback URL which the Hub will use to confirm the subscription and to forward updates.
The Subscriber therefore has two roles. To create and manage subscriptions, including subscribing for new Topics with
a Hub, unsubscribing (if necessary), and periodically renewing subscriptions since they may have a limited validity as
set by the Hub. This is handled by Zend\Feed\PubSubHubbub\Subscriber.
The second role is to accept updates sent by a Hub to the Subscribers Callback URL, i.e. the URI the
Subscriber has assigned to handle updates. The Callback URL also handles events where the Hub contacts
the Subscriber to confirm all subscriptions and unsubscriptions. This is handled by using an instance of
Zend\Feed\PubSubHubbub\Subscriber\Callback when the Callback URL is accessed.

Important: Zend\Feed\PubSubHubbub\Subscriber implements the Pubsubhubbub 0.2 Specification. As

this is a new specification version not all Hubs currently implement it. The new specification allows the Callback URL
to include a query string which is used by this class, but not supported by all Hubs. In the interests of maximising
compatibility it is therefore recommended that the query string component of the Subscriber Callback URI be presented
as a path element, i.e. recognised as a parameter in the route associated with the Callback URI and used by the
applications Router.

127.4.1 Subscribing and Unsubscribing

Zend\Feed\PubSubHubbub\Subscriber implements a full Pubsubhubbub Subscriber capable of subscrib-

ing to, or unsubscribing from, any Topic via any Hub advertised by that Topic. It operates in conjunction with

127.4. Zend\Feed\PubSubHubbub\Subscriber 597

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Zend\Feed\PubSubHubbub\Subscriber\Callback which accepts requests from a Hub to confirm all sub-

scription or unsubscription attempts (to prevent third-party misuse).
Any subscription (or unsubscription) requires the relevant information before proceeding, i.e. the URI of the Topic
(Atom or RSS feed) to be subscribed to for updates, and the URI of the endpoint for the Hub which will handle
the subscription and forwarding of the updates. The lifetime of a subscription may be determined by the Hub but
most Hubs should support automatic subscription refreshes by checking with the Subscriber. This is supported by
Zend\Feed\PubSubHubbub\Subscriber\Callback and requires no other work on your part. It is still
strongly recommended that you use the Hub sourced subscription time to live (ttl) to schedule the creation of new
subscriptions (the process is identical to that for any new subscription) to refresh it with the Hub. While it should not
be necessary per se, it covers cases where a Hub may not support automatic subscription refreshing and rules out Hub
errors for additional redundancy.
With the relevant information to hand, a subscription can be attempted as demonstrated below:
1 $storage = new Zend\Feed\PubSubHubbub\Model\Subscription;
2

3 $subscriber = new Zend\Feed\PubSubHubbub\Subscriber;

4 $subscriber->setStorage($storage);
5 $subscriber->addHubUrl('http://hubbub.example.com');
6 $subscriber->setTopicUrl('http://www.example.net/rss.xml');
7 $subscriber->setCallbackUrl('http://www.mydomain.com/hubbub/callback');
8 $subscriber->subscribeAll();

In order to store subscriptions and offer access to this data for general use, the component requires a database (a
schema is provided later in this section). By default, it is assumed the table name is subscription and it utilises
Zend\Db\Table\Abstract in the background meaning it will use the default adapter you have set for your ap-
plication. You may also pass a specific custom Zend\Db\Table\Abstract instance into the associated model
Zend\Feed\PubSubHubbub\Model\Subscription. This custom adapter may be as simple in intent as
changing the table name to use or as complex as you deem necessary.
While this Model is offered as a default ready-to-roll solution, you may create your own Model using any
other backend or database layer (e.g. Doctrine) so long as the resulting class implements the interface
Zend\Feed\PubSubHubbub\Model\SubscriptionInterface.
An example schema (MySQL) for a subscription table accessible by the provided model may look similar to:
1 CREATE TABLE IF NOT EXISTS `subscription` (
2 `id` varchar(32) COLLATE utf8_unicode_ci NOT NULL DEFAULT '',
3 `topic_url` varchar(255) COLLATE utf8_unicode_ci DEFAULT NULL,
4 `hub_url` varchar(255) COLLATE utf8_unicode_ci DEFAULT NULL,
5 `created_time` datetime DEFAULT NULL,
6 `lease_seconds` bigint(20) DEFAULT NULL,
7 `verify_token` varchar(255) COLLATE utf8_unicode_ci DEFAULT NULL,
8 `secret` varchar(255) COLLATE utf8_unicode_ci DEFAULT NULL,
9 `expiration_time` datetime DEFAULT NULL,
10 `subscription_state` varchar(12) COLLATE utf8_unicode_ci DEFAULT NULL,
11 PRIMARY KEY (`id`)
12 ) ENGINE=InnoDB DEFAULT CHARSET=utf8 COLLATE=utf8_unicode_ci;

Behind the scenes, the Subscriber above will send a request to the Hub endpoint containing the following parameters
(based on the previous example):

598 Chapter 127. Zend\Feed\PubSubHubbub

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Table 127.1: Subscription request parameters

Pa- Value Explanation
ram-
eter
hub.callback The URI used by a Hub to contact the Subscriber and
http://www.mydomain.com/hubbub/callback?xhub.subscription=5536df06b5dcb966edab3a4c4d
either request confirmation of a (un)subscription
request or send updates from subscribed feeds. The
appended query string contains a custom parameter
(hence the xhub designation). It is a query string
parameter preserved by the Hub and resent with all
Subscriber requests. Its purpose is to allow the
Subscriber to identify and look up the subscription
associated with any Hub request in a backend storage
medium. This is a non=standard parameter used by
this component in preference to encoding a
subscription key in the URI path which is more
difficult to implement in a Zend Framework
application. Nevertheless, since not all Hubs support
query string parameters, we still strongly recommend
adding the subscription key as a path component in the
form
http://www.mydomain.com/hubbub/callback/5536df06b5
To accomplish this, it requires defining a route capable
of parsing out the final value of the key and then
retrieving the value and passing it to the Subscriber
Callback object. The value would be passed into the
method ZendPubSubHubbubSubscriberCall-
back::setSubscriptionKey(). A detailed example is
offered later.
hub.lease_seconds
2592000 The number of seconds for which the Subscriber
would like a new subscription to remain valid for (i.e.
a TTL). Hubs may enforce their own maximum
subscription period. All subscriptions should be
renewed by simply re-subscribing before the
subscription period ends to ensure continuity of
updates. Hubs should additionally attempt to
automatically refresh subscriptions before they expire
by contacting Subscribers (handled automatically by
the Callback class).
hub.modesubscribe Simple value indicating this is a subscription request.
Unsubscription requests would use the unsubscribe
value.
hub.topichttp://www.example.net/rss.xml The URI of the topic (i.e. Atom or RSS feed) which
the Subscriber wishes to subscribe to for updates.
hub.verifysync Indicates to the Hub the preferred mode of verifying
subscriptions or unsubscriptions. It is repeated twice
in order of preference. Technically this component
does not distinguish between the two modes and treats
both equally.
hub.verifyasync Indicates to the Hub the preferred mode of verifying
subscriptions or unsubscriptions. It is repeated twice
in order of preference. Technically this component
does not distinguish between the two modes and treats
both equally.
hub.verify_token
3065919804ab- A verification token returned to the Subscriber by the
127.4. Zend\Feed\PubSubHubbub\Subscriber
caa7212ae89.879827871253878386 Hub when it is confirming a subscription or 599
unsubscription. Offers a measure of reliance that the
confirmation request originates from the correct Hub
to prevent misuse.
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

You can modify several of these parameters to indicate a different prefer-

ence. For example, you can set a different lease seconds value using
Zend\Feed\PubSubHubbub\Subscriber::setLeaseSeconds() or show a preference for the async ver-
ify mode by using setPreferredVerificationMode(Zend\Feed\PubSubHubbub\PubSubHubbub::VERIFICATION_
However the Hubs retain the capability to enforce their own preferences and for this reason the component is deliber-
ately designed to work across almost any set of options with minimum end-user configuration required. Conventions
are great when they work!

Note: While Hubs may require the use of a specific verification mode (both are sup-
ported by Zend\Feed\PubSubHubbub), you may indicate a specific preference using the
setPreferredVerificationMode() method. In sync (synchronous) mode, the Hub attempts to con-
firm a subscription as soon as it is received, and before responding to the subscription request. In async
(asynchronous) mode, the Hub will return a response to the subscription request immediately, and its verification
request may occur at a later time. Since Zend\Feed\PubSubHubbub implements the Subscriber verification role
as a separate callback class and requires the use of a backend storage medium, it actually supports both transparently
though in terms of end-user performance, asynchronous verification is very much preferred to eliminate the impact of
a poorly performing Hub tying up end-user server resources and connections for too long.

Unsubscribing from a Topic follows the exact same pattern as the previous example, with the exception that we should
call unsubscribeAll() instead. The parameters included are identical to a subscription request with the exception
that hub.mode is set to unsubscribe.
By default, a new instance of Zend\PubSubHubbub\Subscriber will attempt to use a database backed storage
medium which defaults to using the default Zend\Db adapter with a table name of subscription. It is recommended
to set a custom storage solution where these defaults are not apt either by passing in a new Model supporting the
required interface or by passing a new instance of Zend\Db\Table\Abstract to the default Models constructor
to change the used table name.

127.4.2 Handling Subscriber Callbacks

Whenever a subscription or unsubscription request is made, the Hub must verify the request by forwarding a new
verification request to the Callback URL set in the subscription or unsubscription parameters. To handle these Hub
requests, which will include all future communications containing Topic (feed) updates, the Callback URL should
trigger the execution of an instance of Zend\Feed\PubSubHubbub\Subscriber\Callback to handle the
request.
The Callback class should be configured to use the same storage medium as the Subscriber class. Using it is quite
simple since most of its work is performed internally.
1 $storage = new Zend\Feed\PubSubHubbub\Model\Subscription;
2 $callback = new Zend\Feed\PubSubHubbub\Subscriber\Callback;
3 $callback->setStorage($storage);
4 $callback->handle();
5 $callback->sendResponse();
6

7 /**
8 * Check if the callback resulting in the receipt of a feed update.
9 * Otherwise it was either a (un)sub verification request or invalid request.
10 * Typically we need do nothing other than add feed update handling - the rest
11 * is handled internally by the class.
12 */
13 if ($callback->hasFeedUpdate()) {
14 $feedString = $callback->getFeedUpdate();
15 /**
16 * Process the feed update asynchronously to avoid a Hub timeout.

600 Chapter 127. Zend\Feed\PubSubHubbub

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

17 */
18 }

Note: It should be noted that Zend\Feed\PubSubHubbub\Subscriber\Callback may independently

parse any incoming query string and other parameters. This is necessary since PHP alters the structure and keys of a
query string when it is parsed into the $_GET or $_POST superglobals. For example, all duplicate keys are ignored
and periods are converted to underscores. Pubsubhubbub features both of these in the query strings it generates.

Important: It is essential that developers recognise that Hubs are only concerned with sending requests and receiving
a response which verifies its receipt. If a feed update is received, it should never be processed on the spot since this
leaves the Hub waiting for a response. Rather, any processing should be offloaded to another process or deferred until
after a response has been returned to the Hub. One symptom of a failure to promptly complete Hub requests is that
a Hub may continue to attempt delivery of the update or verification request leading to duplicated update attempts
being processed by the Subscriber. This appears problematic - but in reality a Hub may apply a timeout of just a few
seconds, and if no response is received within that time it may disconnect (assuming a delivery failure) and retry later.
Note that Hubs are expected to distribute vast volumes of updates so their resources are stretched - please do process
feeds asynchronously (e.g. in a separate process or a job queue or even a cron scheduled task) as much as possible.

127.4.3 Setting Up And Using A Callback URL Route

As noted earlier, the Zend\Feed\PubSubHubbub\Subscriber\Callback class receives the combined key

associated with any subscription from the Hub via one of two methods. The technically preferred method is to add
this key to the Callback URL employed by the Hub in all future requests using a query string parameter with the key
xhub.subscription. However, for historical reasons, primarily that this was not supported in Pubsubhubbub 0.1 (it
was recently added in 0.2 only), it is strongly recommended to use the most compatible means of adding this key to
the Callback URL by appending it to the URLs path.
Thus the URL http://www.example.com/callback?xhub.subscription=key would become
http://www.example.com/callback/key.
Since the query string method is the default in anticipation of a greater level of future support for the full 0.2 specifi-
cation, this requires some additional work to implement.
The first step to make the Zend\Feed\PubSubHubbub\Subscriber\Callback class aware
of the path contained subscription key. Its manually injected therefore since it also requires
manually defining a route for this purpose. This is achieved simply by called the method
Zend\Feed\PubSubHubbub\Subscriber\Callback::setSubscriptionKey() with the param-
eter being the key value available from the Router. The example below demonstrates this using a Zend Framework
controller.
1 use Zend\Mvc\Controller\AbstractActionController;
2

3 class CallbackController extends AbstractActionController

4 {
5

6 public function indexAction()

7 {
8 $storage = new Zend\Feed\PubSubHubbub\Model\Subscription;
9 $callback = new Zend\Feed\PubSubHubbub\Subscriber\Callback;
10 $callback->setStorage($storage);
11 /**
12 * Inject subscription key parsing from URL path using
13 * a parameter from Router.
14 */

127.4. Zend\Feed\PubSubHubbub\Subscriber 601

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

15 $subscriptionKey = $this->params()->fromRoute('subkey');
16 $callback->setSubscriptionKey($subscriptionKey);
17 $callback->handle();
18 $callback->sendResponse();
19

20 /**
21 * Check if the callback resulting in the receipt of a feed update.
22 * Otherwise it was either a (un)sub verification request or invalid
23 * request. Typically we need do nothing other than add feed update
24 * handling - the rest is handled internally by the class.
25 */
26 if ($callback->hasFeedUpdate()) {
27 $feedString = $callback->getFeedUpdate();
28 /**
29 * Process the feed update asynchronously to avoid a Hub timeout.
30 */
31 }
32 }
33

34 }

Actually adding the route which would map the path-appended key to a parameter for retrieval from a controller can
be accomplished using a Route like in the example below.
1 // Callback Route to enable appending a PuSH Subscription's lookup key
2 $route = Zend\Mvc\Router\Http\Segment::factory(array(
3 'route' => '/callback/:subkey',
4 'constraints' => array(
5 'subkey' => '[a-z0-9]+'
6 ),
7 'defaults' => array(
8 'controller' => 'application-index',
9 'action' => 'index'
10 )
11 ));

602 Chapter 127. Zend\Feed\PubSubHubbub

 CHAPTER 128

Zend\File\ClassFileLocator

128.1 Overview

TODO

128.2 Available Methods

TODO

128.3 Examples

TODO

603
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

604 Chapter 128. Zend\File\ClassFileLocator

 CHAPTER 129

Introduction to Zend\Filter

The Zend\Filter component provides a set of commonly needed data filters. It also provides a simple filter
chaining mechanism by which multiple filters may be applied to a single datum in a user-defined order.

129.1 What is a filter?

In the physical world, a filter is typically used for removing unwanted portions of input, and the desired portion of the
input passes through as filter output (e.g., coffee). In such scenarios, a filter is an operator that produces a subset of the
input. This type of filtering is useful for web applications - removing illegal input, trimming unnecessary white space,
etc.
This basic definition of a filter may be extended to include generalized transformations upon input. A common trans-
formation applied in web applications is the escaping of HTML entities. For example, if a form field is automatically
populated with untrusted input (e.g., from a web browser), this value should either be free of HTML entities or con-
tain only escaped HTML entities, in order to prevent undesired behavior and security vulnerabilities. To meet this
requirement, HTML entities that appear in the input must either be removed or escaped. Of course, which approach
is more appropriate depends on the situation. A filter that removes the HTML entities operates within the scope of
the first definition of filter - an operator that produces a subset of the input. A filter that escapes the HTML entities,
however, transforms the input (e.g., & is transformed to &amp;). Supporting such use cases for web developers is
important, and to filter, in the context of using Zend\Filter, means to perform some transformations upon input
data.

129.2 Basic usage of filters

Having this filter definition established provides the foundation for Zend\Filter\FilterInterface, which
requires a single method named filter() to be implemented by a filter class.
Following is a basic example of using a filter upon two input data, the ampersand (&) and double quote () characters:
1 $htmlEntities = new Zend\Filter\HtmlEntities();
2

3 echo $htmlEntities->filter('&'); // &amp;

4 echo $htmlEntities->filter('"'); // &quot;

Also, if a Filter inherits from Zend\Filter\AbstractFilter (just like all out-of-the-box Filters) you can also
use them as such:

605
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1 $strtolower = new Zend\Filter\StringToLower;

2

3 echo $strtolower('I LOVE ZF2!'); // i love zf2!

4 $zf2love = $strtolower('I LOVE ZF2!');

129.3 Using the StaticFilter

If it is inconvenient to load a given filter class and create an instance of the filter, you can use StaticFilter with
its method execute() as an alternative invocation style. The first argument of this method is a data input value,
that you would pass to the filter() method. The second argument is a string, which corresponds to the basename
of the filter class, relative to the Zend\Filter namespace. The execute() method automatically loads the class,
creates an instance, and applies the filter() method to the data input.
1 echo StaticFilter::execute('&', 'HtmlEntities');

You can also pass an array of constructor arguments, if they are needed for the filter class.
1 echo StaticFilter::execute('"',
2 'HtmlEntities',
3 array('quotestyle' => ENT_QUOTES));

The static usage can be convenient for invoking a filter ad hoc, but if you have the need to run a filter for multiple
inputs, its more efficient to follow the first example above, creating an instance of the filter object and calling its
filter() method.
Also, the FilterChain class allows you to instantiate and run multiple filter and validator classes on demand to
process sets of input data. See FilterChain.
You can set and receive the FilterPluginManager for the StaticFilter to amend the standard filter classes.
1 $pluginManager = StaticFilter::getPluginManager()->setInvokableClass(
2 'myNewFilter', 'MyCustom\Filter\MyNewFilter'
3 );
4

5 StaticFilter::setPluginManager(new MyFilterPluginManager());

This is useful when adding custom filters to be used by the StaticFilter.

129.4 Double filtering

When using two filters after each other you have to keep in mind that it is often not possible to get the original output
by using the opposite filter. Take the following example:
1 $original = "my_original_content";
2

3 // Attach a filter
4 $filter = new Zend\Filter\Word\UnderscoreToCamelCase();
5 $filtered = $filter->filter($original);
6

7 // Use it's opposite

8 $filter2 = new Zend\Filter\Word\CamelCaseToUnderscore();
9 $filtered = $filter2->filter($filtered)

606 Chapter 129. Introduction to Zend\Filter

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

The above code example could lead to the impression that you will get the original output after the second filter has
been applied. But thinking logically this is not the case. After applying the first filter my_original_content will be
changed to MyOriginalContent. But after applying the second filter the result is My_Original_Content.
As you can see it is not always possible to get the original output by using a filter which seems to be the opposite. It
depends on the filter and also on the given input.

129.4. Double filtering 607

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

608 Chapter 129. Introduction to Zend\Filter

 CHAPTER 130

Standard Filter Classes

Zend Framework comes with a standard set of filters, which are ready for you to use.

130.1 Alnum

The Alnum filter can be used to return only alphabetic characters and digits in the unicode letter and number
categories, respectively. All other characters are suppressed.

130.1.1 Supported Options

The following options are supported for Alnum:

Alnum([ boolean $allowWhiteSpace [, string $locale ]])
$allowWhiteSpace: If set to true then whitespace characters are allowed. Otherwise they are suppressed.
Default is false (whitespace is not allowed).
Methods for getting/setting the allowWhiteSpace option are also available: getAllowWhiteSpace() and
setAllowWhiteSpace()
$locale: The locale string used in identifying the characters to filter (locale name, e.g. en_US). If unset, it
will use the default locale (Locale::getDefault()).
Methods for getting/setting the locale are also available: getLocale() and setLocale()

130.1.2 Basic Usage

1 // Default settings, deny whitespace

2 $filter = new \Zend\I18n\Filter\Alnum();
3 echo $filter->filter("This is (my) content: 123");
4 // Returns "Thisismycontent123"
5

6 // First param in constructor is $allowWhiteSpace

7 $filter = new \Zend\I18n\Filter\Alnum(true);
8 echo $filter->filter("This is (my) content: 123");
9 // Returns "This is my content 123"

Note: Alnum works on almost all languages, except: Chinese, Japanese and Korean. Within these languages the
english alphabet is used instead of the characters from these languages. The language itself is detected using the
Locale.

609
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

130.2 Alpha

The Alpha filter can be used to return only alphabetic characters in the unicode letter category. All other characters
are suppressed.

130.2.1 Supported Options

The following options are supported for Alpha:

Alpha([ boolean $allowWhiteSpace [, string $locale ]])
$allowWhiteSpace: If set to true then whitespace characters are allowed. Otherwise they are suppressed.
Default is false (whitespace is not allowed).
Methods for getting/setting the allowWhiteSpace option are also available: getAllowWhiteSpace() and
setAllowWhiteSpace()
$locale: The locale string used in identifying the characters to filter (locale name, e.g. en_US). If unset, it
will use the default locale (Locale::getDefault()).
Methods for getting/setting the locale are also available: getLocale() and setLocale()

130.2.2 Basic Usage

1 // Default settings, deny whitespace

2 $filter = new \Zend\I18n\Filter\Alpha();
3 echo $filter->filter("This is (my) content: 123");
4 // Returns "Thisismycontent"
5

6 // Allow whitespace
7 $filter = new \Zend\I18n\Filter\Alpha(true);
8 echo $filter->filter("This is (my) content: 123");
9 // Returns "This is my content "

Note: Alpha works on almost all languages, except: Chinese, Japanese and Korean. Within these languages the
english alphabet is used instead of the characters from these languages. The language itself is detected using the
Locale.

130.3 BaseName

Zend\Filter\BaseName allows you to filter a string which contains the path to a file and it will return the base
name of this file.

130.3.1 Supported Options

There are no additional options for Zend\Filter\BaseName.

610 Chapter 130. Standard Filter Classes

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

130.3.2 Basic Usage

A basic example of usage is below:

1 $filter = new Zend\Filter\BaseName();
2

3 print $filter->filter('/vol/tmp/filename');

This will return filename.

1 $filter = new Zend\Filter\BaseName();
2

3 print $filter->filter('/vol/tmp/filename.txt');

This will return filename.txt.

130.4 Blacklist

This filter will return null if the value being filtered is present in the filters list of values. If the value is not present,
it will return that value.
For the opposite functionality see the Whitelist filter.

130.4.1 Supported Options

The following options are supported for Zend\Filter\Blacklist:

strict: Uses strict mode when comparing: passed through to in_arrays third argument.
list: An array of forbidden values.

130.4.2 Basic Usage

This is a basic example:

1 $blacklist = new \Zend\Filter\Blacklist(array(
2 'list' => array('forbidden-1', 'forbidden-2')
3 ));
4 echo $blacklist->filter('forbidden-1'); // => null
5 echo $blacklist->filter('allowed'); // => 'allowed'

130.5 Boolean

This filter changes a given input to be a BOOLEAN value. This is often useful when working with databases or when
processing form values.

130.5.1 Supported Options

The following options are supported for Zend\Filter\Boolean:

casting: When this option is set to TRUE then any given input will be casted to boolean. This option defaults to
TRUE.

130.4. Blacklist 611

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

translations: This option sets the translations which will be used to detect localized input.
type: The type option sets the boolean type which should be used. Read the following for details.

130.5.2 Default Behavior

By default, this filter works by casting the input to a BOOLEAN value; in other words, it operates in a similar fashion
to calling (boolean) $value.
1 $filter = new Zend\Filter\Boolean();
2 $value = '';
3 $result = $filter->filter($value);
4 // returns false

This means that without providing any configuration, Zend\Filter\Boolean accepts all input types and returns
a BOOLEAN just as you would get by type casting to BOOLEAN.

130.5.3 Changing the Default Behavior

Sometimes casting with (boolean) will not suffice. Zend\Filter\Boolean allows you to configure specific
types to convert, as well as which to omit.
The following types can be handled:
boolean: Returns a boolean value as is.
integer: Converts an integer 0 value to FALSE.
float: Converts a float 0.0 value to FALSE.
string: Converts an empty string to FALSE.
zero: Converts a string containing the single character zero (0) to FALSE.
empty_array: Converts an empty array to FALSE.
null: Converts a NULL value to FALSE.
php: Converts values according to PHP when casting them to BOOLEAN.
false_string: Converts a string containing the word false to a boolean FALSE.
yes: Converts a localized string which contains the word no to FALSE.
all: Converts all above types to BOOLEAN.
All other given values will return TRUE by default.
There are several ways to select which of the above types are filtered. You can give one or multiple types and add
them, you can give an array, you can use constants, or you can give a textual string. See the following examples:
1 // converts 0 to false
2 $filter = new Zend\Filter\Boolean(Zend\Filter\Boolean::TYPE_INTEGER);
3

4 // converts 0 and '0' to false

5 $filter = new Zend\Filter\Boolean(
6 Zend\Filter\Boolean::TYPE_INTEGER + Zend\Filter\Boolean::TYPE_ZERO_STRING
7 );
8

9 // converts 0 and '0' to false

10 $filter = new Zend\Filter\Boolean(array(
11 'type' => array(

612 Chapter 130. Standard Filter Classes

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

12 Zend\Filter\Boolean::TYPE_INTEGER,
13 Zend\Filter\Boolean::TYPE_ZERO_STRING,
14 ),
15 ));
16

17 // converts 0 and '0' to false

18 $filter = new Zend\Filter\Boolean(array(
19 'type' => array(
20 'integer',
21 'zero',
22 ),
23 ));

You can also give an instance of Zend\Config\Config to set the desired types. To set types after instantiation,
use the setType() method.

130.5.4 Localized Booleans

As mentioned previously, Zend\Filter\Boolean can also recognise localized yes and no strings. This means
that you can ask your customer in a form for yes or no within his native language and Zend\Filter\Boolean
will convert the response to the appropriate boolean value.
To set the translation and the corresponding value, you can use the translations option or the method
setTranslations.
1 $filter = new Zend\Filter\Boolean(array(
2 'type' => Zend\Filter\Boolean::TYPE_LOCALIZED,
3 'translations' => array(
4 'ja' => true,
5 'nein' => false,
6 'yes' => true,
7 'no' => false,
8 ),
9 ));
10

11 // returns false
12 $result = $filter->filter('nein');
13

14 // returns true
15 $result = $filter->filter('yes');

130.5.5 Disable Casting

Sometimes it is necessary to recognise only TRUE or FALSE and return all other values without changes.
Zend\Filter\Boolean allows you to do this by setting the casting option to FALSE.
In this case Zend\Filter\Boolean will work as described in the following table, which shows which values
return TRUE or FALSE. All other given values are returned without change when casting is set to FALSE

130.5. Boolean 613

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Table 130.1: Usage without casting

Type True False
Zend\Filter\Boolean::TYPE_BOOLEAN TRUE FALSE
Zend\Filter\Boolean::TYPE_EMPTY_ARRAY array()
Zend\Filter\Boolean::TYPE_FALSE_STRINGfalse (case independently) true (case independently)
Zend\Filter\Boolean::TYPE_FLOAT 0.0 1.0
Zend\Filter\Boolean::TYPE_INTEGER 0 1
Zend\Filter\Boolean::TYPE_LOCALIZED localized yes (case localized no (case
independently) independently)
Zend\Filter\Boolean::TYPE_NULL NULL
Zend\Filter\Boolean::TYPE_STRING
Zend\Filter\Boolean::TYPE_ZERO_STRING0 1
The following example shows the behaviour when changing the casting option:
1 $filter = new Zend\Filter\Boolean(array(
2 'type' => Zend\Filter\Boolean::TYPE_ALL,
3 'casting' => false,
4 ));
5

6 // returns false
7 $result = $filter->filter(0);
8

9 // returns true
10 $result = $filter->filter(1);
11

12 // returns the value

13 $result = $filter->filter(2);

130.6 Callback

This filter allows you to use own methods in conjunction with Zend\Filter. You dont have to create a new filter
when you already have a method which does the job.

130.6.1 Supported Options

The following options are supported for Zend\Filter\Callback:

callback: This sets the callback which should be used.
callback_params: This property sets the options which are used when the callback is processed.

130.6.2 Basic Usage

The usage of this filter is quite simple. Lets expect we want to create a filter which reverses a string.
1 $filter = new Zend\Filter\Callback('strrev');
2

3 print $filter->filter('Hello!');
4 // returns "!olleH"

As you can see its really simple to use a callback to define a own filter. It is also possible to use a method, which is
defined within a class, by giving an array as callback.

614 Chapter 130. Standard Filter Classes

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1 // Our classdefinition
2 class MyClass
3 {
4 public function Reverse($param);
5 }
6

7 // The filter definition

8 $filter = new Zend\Filter\Callback(array('MyClass', 'Reverse'));
9 print $filter->filter('Hello!');

To get the actual set callback use getCallback() and to set another callback use setCallback().

Note: Possible exceptions

You should note that defining a callback method which can not be called will raise an exception.

130.6.3 Default Parameters Within a Callback

It is also possible to define default parameters, which are given to the called method as array when the filter is executed.
This array will be concatenated with the value which will be filtered.
1 $filter = new Zend\Filter\Callback(
2 array(
3 'callback' => 'MyMethod',
4 'options' => array('key' => 'param1', 'key2' => 'param2')
5 )
6 );
7 $filter->filter(array('value' => 'Hello'));

When you would call the above method definition manually it would look like this:
1 $value = MyMethod('Hello', 'param1', 'param2');

130.7 Compress and Decompress

These two filters are capable of compressing and decompressing strings, files, and directories.

130.7.1 Supported Options

The following options are supported for Zend\Filter\Compress and Zend\Filter\Decompress:

adapter: The compression adapter which should be used. It defaults to Gz.
options: Additional options which are given to the adapter at initiation. Each adapter supports its own options.

130.7.2 Supported Compression Adapters

The following compression formats are supported by their own adapter:

Bz2
Gz
Lzf

130.7. Compress and Decompress 615

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Rar
Tar
Zip
Each compression format has different capabilities as described below. All compression filters may be used in ap-
proximately the same ways, and differ primarily in the options available and the type of compression they offer (both
algorithmically as well as string vs. file vs. directory)

130.7.3 Generic Handling

To create a compression filter you need to select the compression format you want to use. The following description
takes the Bz2 adapter. Details for all other adapters are described after this section.
The two filters are basically identical, in that they utilize the same backends. Zend\Filter\Compress should
be used when you wish to compress items, and Zend\Filter\Decompress should be used when you wish to
decompress items.
For instance, if we want to compress a string, we have to initiate Zend\Filter\Compress and indicate the desired
adapter.
1 $filter = new Zend\Filter\Compress('Bz2');

To use a different adapter, you simply specify it to the constructor.

You may also provide an array of options or a Traversable object. If you do, provide minimally the key adapter, and
then either the key options or adapterOptions (which should be an array of options to provide to the adapter on
instantiation).
1 $filter = new Zend\Filter\Compress(array(
2 'adapter' => 'Bz2',
3 'options' => array(
4 'blocksize' => 8,
5 ),
6 ));

Note: Default compression Adapter

When no compression adapter is given, then the Gz adapter will be used.

Almost the same usage is we want to decompress a string. We just have to use the decompression filter in this case.
1 $filter = new Zend\Filter\Decompress('Bz2');

To get the compressed string, we have to give the original string. The filtered value is the compressed version of the
original string.
1 $filter = new Zend\Filter\Compress('Bz2');
2 $compressed = $filter->filter('Uncompressed string');
3 // Returns the compressed string

Decompression works the same way.

1 $filter = new Zend\Filter\Decompress('Bz2');
2 $compressed = $filter->filter('Compressed string');
3 // Returns the uncompressed string

Note: Note on string compression

616 Chapter 130. Standard Filter Classes

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Not all adapters support string compression. Compression formats like Rar can only handle files and directories. For
details, consult the section for the adapter you wish to use.

130.7.4 Creating an Archive

Creating an archive file works almost the same as compressing a string. However, in this case we need an additional
parameter which holds the name of the archive we want to create.
1 $filter = new Zend\Filter\Compress(array(
2 'adapter' => 'Bz2',
3 'options' => array(
4 'archive' => 'filename.bz2',
5 ),
6 ));
7 $compressed = $filter->filter('Uncompressed string');
8 // Returns true on success and creates the archive file

In the above example the uncompressed string is compressed, and is then written into the given archive file.

Note: Existing archives will be overwritten

The content of any existing file will be overwritten when the given filename of the archive already exists.

When you want to compress a file, then you must give the name of the file with its path.
1 $filter = new Zend\Filter\Compress(array(
2 'adapter' => 'Bz2',
3 'options' => array(
4 'archive' => 'filename.bz2'
5 ),
6 ));
7 $compressed = $filter->filter('C:\temp\compressme.txt');
8 // Returns true on success and creates the archive file

You may also specify a directory instead of a filename. In this case the whole directory with all its files and subdirec-
tories will be compressed into the archive.
1 $filter = new Zend\Filter\Compress(array(
2 'adapter' => 'Bz2',
3 'options' => array(
4 'archive' => 'filename.bz2'
5 ),
6 ));
7 $compressed = $filter->filter('C:\temp\somedir');
8 // Returns true on success and creates the archive file

Note: Do not compress large or base directories

You should never compress large or base directories like a complete partition. Compressing a complete partition is a
very time consuming task which can lead to massive problems on your server when there is not enough space or your
script takes too much time.

130.7. Compress and Decompress 617

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

130.7.5 Decompressing an Archive

Decompressing an archive file works almost like compressing it. You must specify either the archive parameter, or
give the filename of the archive when you decompress the file.
1 $filter = new Zend\Filter\Decompress('Bz2');
2 $decompressed = $filter->filter('filename.bz2');
3 // Returns true on success and decompresses the archive file

Some adapters support decompressing the archive into another subdirectory. In this case you can set the target
parameter.
1 $filter = new Zend\Filter\Decompress(array(
2 'adapter' => 'Zip',
3 'options' => array(
4 'target' => 'C:\temp',
5 )
6 ));
7 $decompressed = $filter->filter('filename.zip');
8 // Returns true on success and decompresses the archive file
9 // into the given target directory

Note: Directories to extract to must exist

When you want to decompress an archive into a directory, then that directory must exist.

130.7.6 Bz2 Adapter

The Bz2 Adapter can compress and decompress:

Strings
Files
Directories
This adapter makes use of PHPs Bz2 extension.
To customize compression, this adapter supports the following options:
Archive: This parameter sets the archive file which should be used or created.
Blocksize: This parameter sets the blocksize to use. It can be from 0 to 9. The default value is 4.
All options can be set at instantiation or by using a related method. For example, the related methods for Blocksize
are getBlocksize() and setBlocksize(). You can also use the setOptions() method which accepts all
options as array.

130.7.7 Gz Adapter

The Gz Adapter can compress and decompress:

Strings
Files
Directories

618 Chapter 130. Standard Filter Classes

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

This adapter makes use of PHPs Zlib extension.

To customize the compression this adapter supports the following options:
Archive: This parameter sets the archive file which should be used or created.
Level: This compression level to use. It can be from 0 to 9. The default value is 9.
Mode: There are two supported modes. compress and deflate. The default value is compress.
All options can be set at initiation or by using a related method. For example, the related methods for Level are
getLevel() and setLevel(). You can also use the setOptions() method which accepts all options as array.

130.7.8 Lzf Adapter

The Lzf Adapter can compress and decompress:

Strings

Note: Lzf supports only strings

The Lzf adapter can not handle files and directories.

This adapter makes use of PHPs Lzf extension.

There are no options available to customize this adapter.

130.7.9 Rar Adapter

The Rar Adapter can compress and decompress:

Files
Directories

Note: Rar does not support strings

The Rar Adapter can not handle strings.

This adapter makes use of PHPs Rar extension.

Note: Rar compression not supported

Due to restrictions with the Rar compression format, there is no compression available for free. When you want to
compress files into a new Rar archive, you must provide a callback to the adapter that can invoke a Rar compression
program.

To customize the compression this adapter supports the following options:

Archive: This parameter sets the archive file which should be used or created.
Callback: A callback which provides compression support to this adapter.
Password: The password which has to be used for decompression.
Target: The target where the decompressed files will be written to.
All options can be set at instantiation or by using a related method. For example, the related methods for Target are
getTarget() and setTarget(). You can also use the setOptions() method which accepts all options as
array.

130.7. Compress and Decompress 619

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

130.7.10 Tar Adapter

The Tar Adapter can compress and decompress:

Files
Directories

Note: Tar does not support strings

The Tar Adapter can not handle strings.

This adapter makes use of PEARs Archive_Tar component.

To customize the compression this adapter supports the following options:
Archive: This parameter sets the archive file which should be used or created.
Mode: A mode to use for compression. Supported are either NULL which means no compression at all, Gz
which makes use of PHPs Zlib extension and Bz2 which makes use of PHPs Bz2 extension. The default
value is NULL.
Target: The target where the decompressed files will be written to.
All options can be set at instantiation or by using a related method. For example, the related methods for Target are
getTarget() and setTarget(). You can also use the setOptions() method which accepts all options as
array.

Note: Directory usage

When compressing directories with Tar then the complete file path is used. This means that created Tar files will not
only have the subdirectory but the complete path for the compressed file.

130.7.11 Zip Adapter

The Zip Adapter can compress and decompress:

Strings
Files
Directories

Note: Zip does not support string decompression

The Zip Adapter can not handle decompression to a string; decompression will always be written to a file.

This adapter makes use of PHPs Zip extension.

To customize the compression this adapter supports the following options:
Archive: This parameter sets the archive file which should be used or created.
Target: The target where the decompressed files will be written to.
All options can be set at instantiation or by using a related method. For example, the related methods for Target are
getTarget() and setTarget(). You can also use the setOptions() method which accepts all options as
array.

620 Chapter 130. Standard Filter Classes

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

130.8 Digits

Returns the string $value, removing all but digits.

130.8.1 Supported Options

There are no additional options for Zend\Filter\Digits.

130.8.2 Basic Usage

A basic example of usage is below:

1 $filter = new Zend\Filter\Digits();
2

3 print $filter->filter('October 2012');

This returns 2012.

1 $filter = new Zend\Filter\Digits();
2

3 print $filter->filter('HTML 5 for Dummies');

This returns 5.

130.9 Dir

Given a string containing a path to a file, this function will return the name of the directory.

130.9.1 Supported Options

There are no additional options for Zend\Filter\Dir.

130.9.2 Basic Usage

A basic example of usage is below:

1 $filter = new Zend\Filter\Dir();
2

3 print $filter->filter('/etc/passwd');

This returns /etc.

1 $filter = new Zend\Filter\Dir();
2

3 print $filter->filter('C:/Temp/x');

This returns C:/Temp.

130.8. Digits 621

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

130.10 Encrypt and Decrypt

These filters allow to encrypt and decrypt any given string. Therefor they make use of Adapters. Actually there are
adapters for the Zend\Crypt\BlockCipher class and the OpenSSL extension of PHP.

130.10.1 Supported Options

The following options are supported for Zend\Filter\Encrypt and Zend\Filter\Decrypt:

adapter: This sets the encryption adapter which should be used
algorithm: Only BlockCipher. The algorithm which has to be used by the adapter
Zend\Crypt\Symmetric\Mcrypt. It should be one of the algorithm ciphers supported by
Zend\Crypt\Symmetric\Mcrypt (see the getSupportedAlgorithms() method). If not set
it defaults to aes, the Advanced Encryption Standard (see Zend\Crypt\BlockCipher for more details).
compression: If the encrypted value should be compressed. Default is no compression.
envelope: Only OpenSSL. The encrypted envelope key from the user who encrypted the content. You can
either provide the path and filename of the key file, or just the content of the key file itself. When the package
option has been set, then you can omit this parameter.
key: Only BlockCipher. The encryption key with which the input will be encrypted. You need the same key
for decryption.
mode: Only BlockCipher. The encryption mode which has to be used. It should be one of the modes which
can be found under PHPs mcrypt modes. If not set it defaults to cbc.
mode_directory: Only BlockCipher. The directory where the mode can be found. If not set it defaults to
the path set within the Mcrypt extension.
package: Only OpenSSL. If the envelope key should be packed with the encrypted value. Default is FALSE.
private: Only OpenSSL. Your private key which will be used for encrypting the content. You can either provide
the path and filename of the key file, or just the content of the key file itself.
public: Only OpenSSL. The public key of the user whom you want to provide the encrypted content. You can
either provide the path and filename of the key file, or just the content of the key file itself.
vector: Only BlockCipher. The initialization vector which shall be used. If not set it will be a random
vector.

130.10.2 Adapter Usage

As these two encryption methodologies work completely different, also the usage of the adapters differ. You have to
select the adapter you want to use when initiating the filter.
1 // Use the BlockCipher adapter
2 $filter1 = new Zend\Filter\Encrypt(array('adapter' => 'BlockCipher'));
3

4 // Use the OpenSSL adapter

5 $filter2 = new Zend\Filter\Encrypt(array('adapter' => 'openssl'));

To set another adapter you can also use setAdapter(), and the getAdapter() method to receive the actual set
adapter.

622 Chapter 130. Standard Filter Classes

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1 // Use the OpenSSL adapter

2 $filter = new Zend\Filter\Encrypt();
3 $filter->setAdapter('openssl');

Note: When you do not supply the adapter option or do not use setAdapter(), then the BlockCipher
adapter will be used per default.

130.10.3 Encryption with BlockCipher

To encrypt a string using the BlockCipher you have to specify the encryption key using the setKey() method or
passing it during the constructor.
1 // Use the default AES encryption algorithm
2 $filter = new Zend\Filter\Encrypt(array('adapter' => 'BlockCipher'));
3 $filter->setKey('encryption key');
4

5 // or
6 // $filter = new Zend\Filter\Encrypt(array(
7 // 'adapter' => 'BlockCipher',
8 // 'key' => 'encryption key'
9 // ));
10

11 $encrypted = $filter->filter('text to be encrypted');

12 printf ("Encrypted text: %s\n", $encrypted);

You can get and set the encryption values also afterwards with the getEncryption() and setEncryption()
methods.
1 // Use the default AES encryption algorithm
2 $filter = new Zend\Filter\Encrypt(array('adapter' => 'BlockCipher'));
3 $filter->setKey('encryption key');
4 var_dump($filter->getEncryption());
5

6 // Will print:
7 //array(4) {
8 // ["key_iteration"]=>
9 // int(5000)
10 // ["algorithm"]=>
11 // string(3) "aes"
12 // ["hash"]=>
13 // string(6) "sha256"
14 // ["key"]=>
15 // string(14) "encryption key"
16 //}

Note: The BlockCipher adapter uses the Mcrypt PHP extension by default. That means you will need to install
the Mcrypt module in your PHP environment.

If you dont specify an initialization Vector (salt or iv), the BlockCipher will generate a random value during each
encryption. If you try to execute the following code the output will be always different (note that even if the output is
always different you can decrypt it using the same key).
1 $key = 'encryption key';
2 $text = 'message to encrypt';
3

130.10. Encrypt and Decrypt 623

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

4 // use the default adapter that is BlockCipher

5 $filter = new \Zend\Filter\Encrypt();
6 $filter->setKey('encryption key');
7 for ($i=0; $i < 10; $i++) {
8 printf("%d) %s\n", $i, $filter->filter($text));
9 }

If you want to obtain the same output you need to specify a fixed Vector, using the setVector() method. This script will
produce always the same encryption output.
1 // use the default adapter that is BlockCipher
2 $filter = new \Zend\Filter\Encrypt();
3 $filter->setKey('encryption key');
4 $filter->setVector('12345678901234567890');
5 printf("%s\n", $filter->filter('message'));
6

7 // output:
8 // 04636a6cb8276fad0787a2e187803b6557f77825d5ca6ed4392be702b9754bb3MTIzNDU2Nzg5MDEyMzQ1NgZ+zPwTGpV6gQ

Note: For a security reason its always better to use a different Vector on each encryption. We suggest to use the
setVector() method only if you really need it.

130.10.4 Decryption with BlockCipher

For decrypting content which was previously encrypted with BlockCipher you need to have the options with which
the encryption has been called.
If you used only the encryption key, you can just use it to decrypt the content. As soon as you have provided all options
decryption is as simple as encryption.
1 $content = '04636a6cb8276fad0787a2e187803b6557f77825d5ca6ed4392be702b9754bb3MTIzNDU2Nzg5MDEyMzQ1NgZ+z
2 // use the default adapter that is BlockCipher
3 $filter = new Zend\Filter\Decrypt();
4 $filter->setKey('encryption key');
5 printf("Decrypt: %s\n", $filter->filter($content));
6

7 // output:
8 // Decrypt: message

Note that even if we did not specify the same Vector, the BlockCipher is able to decrypt the message because the
Vector is stored in the encryption string itself (note that the Vector can be stored in plaintext, it is not a secret, the
Vector is only used to improve the randomness of the encryption algorithm).

Note: You should also note that all settings which be checked when you create the instance or when you call
setEncryption().

130.10.5 Encryption with OpenSSL

When you have installed the OpenSSL extension you can use the OpenSSL adapter. You can get or set the public
key also afterwards with the getPublicKey() and setPublicKey() methods. The private key can also be get
and set with the related getPrivateKey() and setPrivateKey() methods.
1 // Use openssl and provide a private key
2 $filter = new Zend\Filter\Encrypt(array(

624 Chapter 130. Standard Filter Classes

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

3 'adapter' => 'openssl',

4 'private' => '/path/to/mykey/private.pem'
5 ));
6

7 // of course you can also give the public keys at initiation

8 $filter->setPublicKey('/public/key/path/public.pem');

Note: Note that the OpenSSL adapter will not work when you do not provide valid keys.

When you want to decode content which was encoded with a passphrase you will not only need the public key, but
also the passphrase to decode the encrypted key.
1 // Use openssl and provide a private key
2 $filter = new Zend\Filter\Encrypt(array(
3 'adapter' => 'openssl',
4 'passphrase' => 'enter here the passphrase for the private key',
5 'private' => '/path/to/mykey/private.pem',
6 'public' => '/public/key/path/public.pem'
7 ));

At last, when you use OpenSSL you need to give the receiver the encrypted content, the passphrase when have provided
one, and the envelope keys for decryption.
This means for you, that you have to get the envelope keys after the encryption with the getEnvelopeKey()
method.
So our complete example for encrypting content with OpenSSL look like this.
1 // Use openssl and provide a private key
2 $filter = new Zend\Filter\Encrypt(array(
3 'adapter' => 'openssl',
4 'passphrase' => 'enter here the passphrase for the private key',
5 'private' => '/path/to/mykey/private.pem',
6 'public' => '/public/key/path/public.pem'
7 ));
8

9 $encrypted = $filter->filter('text_to_be_encoded');
10 $envelope = $filter->getEnvelopeKey();
11 print $encrypted;
12

13 // For decryption look at the Decrypt filter

130.10.6 Simplified usage with OpenSSL

As seen before, you need to get the envelope key to be able to decrypt the previous encrypted value. This can be very
annoying when you work with multiple values.
To have a simplified usage you can set the package option to TRUE. The default value is FALSE.
1 // Use openssl and provide a private key
2 $filter = new Zend\Filter\Encrypt(array(
3 'adapter' => 'openssl',
4 'private' => '/path/to/mykey/private.pem',
5 'public' => '/public/key/path/public.pem',
6 'package' => true
7 ));
8

130.10. Encrypt and Decrypt 625

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

9 $encrypted = $filter->filter('text_to_be_encoded');
10 print $encrypted;
11

12 // For decryption look at the Decrypt filter

Now the returned value contains the encrypted value and the envelope. You dont need to get them after the com-
pression. But, and this is the negative aspect of this feature, the encrypted value can now only be decrypted by using
Zend\Filter\Encrypt.

130.10.7 Compressing Content

Based on the original value, the encrypted value can be a very large string. To reduce the value
Zend\Filter\Encrypt allows the usage of compression.
The compression option can either be set to the name of a compression adapter, or to an array which sets all wished
options for the compression adapter.
1 // Use basic compression adapter
2 $filter1 = new Zend\Filter\Encrypt(array(
3 'adapter' => 'openssl',
4 'private' => '/path/to/mykey/private.pem',
5 'public' => '/public/key/path/public.pem',
6 'package' => true,
7 'compression' => 'bz2'
8 ));
9

10 // Use basic compression adapter

11 $filter2 = new Zend\Filter\Encrypt(array(
12 'adapter' => 'openssl',
13 'private' => '/path/to/mykey/private.pem',
14 'public' => '/public/key/path/public.pem',
15 'package' => true,
16 'compression' => array('adapter' => 'zip', 'target' => '\usr\tmp\tmp.zip')
17 ));

Note: Decryption with same settings

When you want to decrypt a value which is additionally compressed, then you need to set the same compression
settings for decryption as for encryption. Otherwise the decryption will fail.

130.10.8 Decryption with OpenSSL

Decryption with OpenSSL is as simple as encryption. But you need to have all data from the person who encrypted
the content. See the following example:
1 // Use openssl and provide a private key
2 $filter = new Zend\Filter\Decrypt(array(
3 'adapter' => 'openssl',
4 'private' => '/path/to/mykey/private.pem'
5 ));
6

7 // of course you can also give the envelope keys at initiation

8 $filter->setEnvelopeKey('/key/from/encoder/envelope_key.pem');

Note: Note that the OpenSSL adapter will not work when you do not provide valid keys.

626 Chapter 130. Standard Filter Classes

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Optionally it could be necessary to provide the passphrase for decrypting the keys themself passing the passphrase
option.
1 // Use openssl and provide a private key
2 $filter = new Zend\Filter\Decrypt(array(
3 'adapter' => 'openssl',
4 'passphrase' => 'enter here the passphrase for the private key',
5 'private' => '/path/to/mykey/private.pem'
6 ));
7

8 // of course you can also give the envelope keys at initiation

9 $filter->setEnvelopeKey('/key/from/encoder/envelope_key.pem');

At last, decode the content. Our complete example for decrypting the previously encrypted content looks like this.
1 // Use openssl and provide a private key
2 $filter = new Zend\Filter\Decrypt(array(
3 'adapter' => 'openssl',
4 'passphrase' => 'enter here the passphrase for the private key',
5 'private' => '/path/to/mykey/private.pem'
6 ));
7

8 // of course you can also give the envelope keys at initiation

9 $filter->setEnvelopeKey('/key/from/encoder/envelope_key.pem');
10

11 $decrypted = $filter->filter('encoded_text_normally_unreadable');
12 print $decrypted;

130.11 HtmlEntities

Returns the string $value, converting characters to their corresponding HTML entity equivalents where they exist.

130.11.1 Supported Options

The following options are supported for Zend\Filter\HtmlEntities:

quotestyle: Equivalent to the PHP htmlentities native function parameter quote_style. This allows you to define
what will be done with single and double quotes. The following constants are accepted: ENT_COMPAT,
ENT_QUOTES ENT_NOQUOTES with the default being ENT_COMPAT.
charset: Equivalent to the PHP htmlentities native function parameter charset. This defines the character set to
be used in filtering. Unlike the PHP native function the default is UTF-8. See http://php.net/htmlentities for
a list of supported character sets.

Note: This option can also be set via the $options parameter as a Traversable object or array. The option
key will be accepted as either charset or encoding.

doublequote: Equivalent to the PHP htmlentities native function parameter double_encode. If set to false
existing html entities will not be encoded. The default is to convert everything (true).

Note: This option must be set via the $options parameter or the setDoubleEncode() method.

130.11. HtmlEntities 627

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

130.11.2 Basic Usage

See the following example for the default behavior of this filter.
1 $filter = new Zend\Filter\HtmlEntities();
2

3 print $filter->filter('<');

130.11.3 Quote Style

Zend\Filter\HtmlEntities allows changing the quote style used. This can be useful when you want to leave
double, single, or both types of quotes un-filtered. See the following example:
1 $filter = new Zend\Filter\HtmlEntities(array('quotestyle' => ENT_QUOTES));
2

3 $input = "A 'single' and " . '"double"';

4 print $filter->filter($input);

The above example returns A &#039;single&#039; and &quot;double&quot;. Notice that single
as well as "double" quotes are filtered.
1 $filter = new Zend\Filter\HtmlEntities(array('quotestyle' => ENT_COMPAT));
2

3 $input = "A 'single' and " . '"double"';

4 print $filter->filter($input);

The above example returns A single and &quot;double&quot;. Notice that "double" quotes are fil-
tered while single quotes are not altered.
1 $filter = new Zend\Filter\HtmlEntities(array('quotestyle' => ENT_NOQUOTES));
2

3 $input = "A 'single' and " . '"double"';

4 print $filter->filter($input);

The above example returns A single and "double". Notice that neither "double" or single quotes
are altered.

130.11.4 Helper Methods

To change or retrieve the quotestyle after instantiation, the two methods setQuoteStyle() and
getQuoteStyle() may be used respectively. setQuoteStyle() accepts one parameter $quoteStyle. The
following constants are accepted: ENT_COMPAT, ENT_QUOTES, ENT_NOQUOTES
1 $filter = new Zend\Filter\HtmlEntities();
2

3 $filter->setQuoteStyle(ENT_QUOTES);
4 print $filter->getQuoteStyle(ENT_QUOTES);

To change or retrieve the charset after instantiation, the two methods setCharSet() and getCharSet() may
be used respectively. setCharSet() accepts one parameter $charSet. See http://php.net/htmlentities for a list
of supported character sets.
1 $filter = new Zend\Filter\HtmlEntities();
2

3 $filter->setQuoteStyle(ENT_QUOTES);
4 print $filter->getQuoteStyle(ENT_QUOTES);

628 Chapter 130. Standard Filter Classes

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

To change or retrieve the doublequote option after instantiation, the two methods setDoubleQuote()
and getDoubleQuote() may be used respectively. setDoubleQuote() accepts one boolean parameter
$doubleQuote.
1 $filter = new Zend\Filter\HtmlEntities();
2

3 $filter->setQuoteStyle(ENT_QUOTES);
4 print $filter->getQuoteStyle(ENT_QUOTES);

130.12 ToInt

Zend\Filter\ToInt allows you to transform a scalar value which contains into an integer.

130.12.1 Supported Options

There are no additional options for Zend\Filter\ToInt.

130.12.2 Basic Usage

A basic example of usage is below:

1 $filter = new Zend\Filter\ToInt();
2

3 print $filter->filter('-4 is less than 0');

This will return -4.

130.12.3 Migration from 2.0-2.3 to 2.4+

Version 2.4 adds support for PHP 7. In PHP 7, int is a reserved keyword, which required renaming the Int filter.
If you were using the Int filter directly previously, you will now receive an E_USER_DEPRECATED notice on
instantiation. Please update your code to refer to the ToInt class instead.
Users pulling their Int filter instance from the filter plugin manager receive a ToInt instance instead starting in
2.4.0.

130.13 ToNull

This filter will change the given input to be NULL if it meets specific criteria. This is often necessary when you work
with databases and want to have a NULL value instead of a boolean or any other type.

130.13.1 Supported Options

The following options are supported for Zend\Filter\ToNull:

type: The variable type which should be supported.

130.12. ToInt 629

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

130.13.2 Default Behavior

Per default this filter works like PHPs empty() method; in other words, if empty() returns a boolean TRUE, then
a NULL value will be returned.
1 $filter = new Zend\Filter\ToNull();
2 $value = '';
3 $result = $filter->filter($value);
4 // returns null instead of the empty string

This means that without providing any configuration, Zend\Filter\ToNull will accept all input types and return
NULL in the same cases as empty().
Any other value will be returned as is, without any changes.

130.13.3 Changing the Default Behavior

Sometimes its not enough to filter based on empty(). Therefor Zend\Filter\ToNull allows you to configure
which type will be converted and which not.
The following types can be handled:
boolean: Converts a boolean FALSE value to NULL.
integer: Converts an integer 0 value to NULL.
empty_array: Converts an empty array to NULL.
float: Converts an float 0.0 value to NULL.
string: Converts an empty string to NULL.
zero: Converts a string containing the single character zero (0) to NULL.
all: Converts all above types to NULL. (This is the default behavior.)
There are several ways to select which of the above types are filtered. You can give one or multiple types and add
them, you can give an array, you can use constants, or you can give a textual string. See the following examples:
1 // converts false to null
2 $filter = new Zend\Filter\ToNull(Zend\Filter\ToNull::BOOLEAN);
3

4 // converts false and 0 to null

5 $filter = new Zend\Filter\ToNull(
6 Zend\Filter\ToNull::BOOLEAN + Zend\Filter\ToNull::INTEGER
7 );
8

9 // converts false and 0 to null

10 $filter = new Zend\Filter\ToNull( array(
11 Zend\Filter\ToNull::BOOLEAN,
12 Zend\Filter\ToNull::INTEGER
13 ));
14

15 // converts false and 0 to null

16 $filter = new Zend\Filter\ToNull(array(
17 'boolean',
18 'integer',
19 ));

You can also give a Traversable or an array to set the wished types. To set types afterwards use setType().

630 Chapter 130. Standard Filter Classes

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

130.13.4 Migration from 2.0-2.3 to 2.4+

Version 2.4 adds support for PHP 7. In PHP 7, null is a reserved keyword, which required renaming the Null filter.
If you were using the Null filter directly previously, you will now receive an E_USER_DEPRECATED notice on
instantiation. Please update your code to refer to the ToNull class instead.
Users pulling their Null filter instance from the filter plugin manager receive a ToNull instance instead starting in
2.4.0.

130.14 NumberFormat

The NumberFormat filter can be used to return locale-specific number and percentage strings. It extends the
NumberParse filter, which acts as wrapper for the NumberFormatter class within the Internationalization ex-
tension (Intl).

130.14.1 Supported Options

The following options are supported for NumberFormat:

NumberFormat([ string $locale [, int $style [, int $type ]]])
$locale: (Optional) Locale in which the number would be formatted (locale name, e.g. en_US). If unset, it
will use the default locale (Locale::getDefault())
Methods for getting/setting the locale are also available: getLocale() and setLocale()
$style: (Optional) Style of the formatting, one of the format style constants. If unset, it will use
NumberFormatter::DEFAULT_STYLE as the default style.
Methods for getting/setting the format style are also available: getStyle() and setStyle()
$type: (Optional) The formatting type to use. If unset, it will use NumberFormatter::TYPE_DOUBLE
as the default type.
Methods for getting/setting the format type are also available: getType() and setType()

130.14.2 Basic Usage

1 $filter = new \Zend\I18n\Filter\NumberFormat("de_DE");

2 echo $filter->filter(1234567.8912346);
3 // Returns "1.234.567,891"
4

5 $filter = new \Zend\I18n\Filter\NumberFormat("en_US", NumberFormatter::PERCENT);

6 echo $filter->filter(0.80);
7 // Returns "80%"
8

9 $filter = new \Zend\I18n\Filter\NumberFormat("fr_FR", NumberFormatter::SCIENTIFIC);

10 echo $filter->filter(0.00123456789);
11 // Returns "1,23456789E-3"

130.15 NumberParse

The NumberParse filter can be used to parse a number from a string. It acts as a wrapper for the
NumberFormatter class within the Internationalization extension (Intl).

130.14. NumberFormat 631

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

130.15.1 Supported Options

The following options are supported for NumberParse:

NumberParse([ string $locale [, int $style [, int $type ]]])
$locale: (Optional) Locale in which the number would be parsed (locale name, e.g. en_US). If unset, it will
use the default locale (Locale::getDefault())
Methods for getting/setting the locale are also available: getLocale() and setLocale()
$style: (Optional) Style of the parsing, one of the format style constants. If unset, it will use
NumberFormatter::DEFAULT_STYLE as the default style.
Methods for getting/setting the parse style are also available: getStyle() and setStyle()
$type: (Optional) The parsing type to use. If unset, it will use NumberFormatter::TYPE_DOUBLE as
the default type.
Methods for getting/setting the parse type are also available: getType() and setType()

130.15.2 Basic Usage

1 $filter = new \Zend\I18n\Filter\NumberParse("de_DE");

2 echo $filter->filter("1.234.567,891");
3 // Returns 1234567.8912346
4

5 $filter = new \Zend\I18n\Filter\NumberParse("en_US", NumberFormatter::PERCENT);

6 echo $filter->filter("80%");
7 // Returns 0.80
8

9 $filter = new \Zend\I18n\Filter\NumberParse("fr_FR", NumberFormatter::SCIENTIFIC);

10 echo $filter->filter("1,23456789E-3");
11 // Returns 0.00123456789

130.16 PregReplace

Zend\Filter\PregReplace performs a search using regular expressions and replaces all found elements.

130.16.1 Supported Options

The following options are supported for Zend\Filter\PregReplace:

pattern: The pattern which will be searched for.
replacement: The string which is used as replacement for the matches.

130.16.2 Basic Usage

To use this filter properly you must give two options:

The option pattern has to be given to set the pattern which will be searched for. It can be a string for a single
pattern, or an array of strings for multiple pattern.
To set the pattern which will be used as replacement the option replacement has to be used. It can be a string for
a single pattern, or an array of strings for multiple pattern.

632 Chapter 130. Standard Filter Classes

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1 $filter = new Zend\Filter\PregReplace(array(

2 'pattern' => '/bob/',
3 'replacement' => 'john',
4 ));
5 $input = 'Hi bob!';
6

7 $filter->filter($input);
8 // returns 'Hi john!'

You can use getPattern() and setPattern() to set the matching pattern afterwards. To set the replacement
pattern you can use getReplacement() and setReplacement().
1 $filter = new Zend\Filter\PregReplace();
2 $filter->setMatchPattern(array('bob', 'Hi'))
3 ->setReplacement(array('john', 'Bye'));
4 $input = 'Hi bob!';
5

6 $filter->filter($input);
7 // returns 'Bye john!'

For a more complex usage take a look into PHPs PCRE Pattern Chapter.

130.17 RealPath

This filter will resolve given links and pathnames and returns canonicalized absolute pathnames.

130.17.1 Supported Options

The following options are supported for Zend\Filter\RealPath:

exists: This option defaults to TRUE which checks if the given path really exists.

130.17.2 Basic Usage

For any given link of pathname its absolute path will be returned. References to /./, /../ and extra / characters
in the input path will be stripped. The resulting path will not have any symbolic link, /./ or /../ character.
Zend\Filter\RealPath will return FALSE on failure, e.g. if the file does not exist. On BSD systems
Zend\Filter\RealPath doesnt fail if only the last path component doesnt exist, while other systems will
return FALSE.
1 $filter = new Zend\Filter\RealPath();
2 $path = '/www/var/path/../../mypath';
3 $filtered = $filter->filter($path);
4

5 // returns '/www/mypath'

130.17.3 Non-Existing Paths

Sometimes it is useful to get also paths when they dont exist, f.e. when you want to get the real path for a path which
you want to create. You can then either give a FALSE at initiation, or use setExists() to set it.

130.17. RealPath 633

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1 $filter = new Zend\Filter\RealPath(false);

2 $path = '/www/var/path/../../non/existing/path';
3 $filtered = $filter->filter($path);
4

5 // returns '/www/non/existing/path'
6 // even when file_exists or realpath would return false

130.18 StringToLower

This filter converts any input to be lowercased.

130.18.1 Supported Options

The following options are supported for Zend\Filter\StringToLower:

encoding: This option can be used to set an encoding which has to be used.

130.18.2 Basic Usage

This is a basic example:

1 $filter = new Zend\Filter\StringToLower();
2

3 print $filter->filter('SAMPLE');
4 // returns "sample"

130.18.3 Different Encoded Strings

Per default it will only handle characters from the actual locale of your server. Characters from other charsets would
be ignored. Still, its possible to also lowercase them when the mbstring extension is available in your environment.
Simply set the wished encoding when initiating the StringToLower filter. Or use the setEncoding() method
to change the encoding afterwards.
1 // using UTF-8
2 $filter = new Zend\Filter\StringToLower('UTF-8');
3

4 // or give an array which can be useful when using a configuration

5 $filter = new Zend\Filter\StringToLower(array('encoding' => 'UTF-8'));
6

7 // or do this afterwards
8 $filter->setEncoding('ISO-8859-1');

Note: Setting wrong encodings

Be aware that you will get an exception when you want to set an encoding and the mbstring extension is not available
in your environment.
Also when you are trying to set an encoding which is not supported by your mbstring extension you will get an
exception.

634 Chapter 130. Standard Filter Classes

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

130.19 StringToUpper

This filter converts any input to be uppercased.

130.19.1 Supported Options

The following options are supported for Zend\Filter\StringToUpper:

encoding: This option can be used to set an encoding which has to be used.

130.19.2 Basic Usage

This is a basic example for using the StringToUpper filter:

1 $filter = new Zend\Filter\StringToUpper();
2

3 print $filter->filter('Sample');
4 // returns "SAMPLE"

130.19.3 Different Encoded Strings

Like the StringToLower filter, this filter handles only characters from the actual locale of your server. Using
different character sets works the same as with StringToLower.
1 $filter = new Zend\Filter\StringToUpper(array('encoding' => 'UTF-8'));
2

3 // or do this afterwards
4 $filter->setEncoding('ISO-8859-1');

130.20 StringTrim

This filter modifies a given string such that certain characters are removed from the beginning and end.

130.20.1 Supported Options

The following options are supported for Zend\Filter\StringTrim:

charlist: List of characters to remove from the beginning and end of the string. If this is not set or is null, the
default behavior will be invoked, which is to remove only whitespace from the beginning and end of the string.

130.20.2 Basic Usage

A basic example of usage is below:

1 $filter = new Zend\Filter\StringTrim();
2

3 print $filter->filter(' This is (my) content: ');

The above example returns This is (my) content:. Notice that the whitespace characters have been removed.

130.19. StringToUpper 635

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

130.20.3 Default Behavior

1 $filter = new Zend\Filter\StringTrim(':');

2 // or new Zend\Filter\StringTrim(array('charlist' => ':'));
3

4 print $filter->filter(' This is (my) content:');

The above example returns This is (my) content. Notice that the whitespace characters and colon are removed. You
can also provide a Traversable or an array with a charlist key. To set the desired character list after instantiation, use
the setCharList() method. The getCharList() return the values set for charlist.

130.21 StripNewlines

This filter modifies a given string and removes all new line characters within that string.

130.21.1 Supported Options

There are no additional options for Zend\Filter\StripNewlines:

130.21.2 Basic Usage

A basic example of usage is below:

1 $filter = new Zend\Filter\StripNewlines();
2

3 print $filter->filter(' This is (my)``\n\r``content: ');

The above example returns This is (my) content:. Notice that all newline characters have been removed.

130.22 StripTags

This filter can strip XML and HTML tags from given content.

Warning: Zend\Filter\StripTags is potentially unsecure

Be warned that Zend\Filter\StripTags should only be used to strip all available tags.
Using Zend\Filter\StripTags to make your site secure by stripping some unwanted tags will lead to unsecure and
dangerous code.
Zend\Filter\StripTags must not be used to prevent XSS attacks. This filter is no replacement for using Tidy or
HtmlPurifier.

130.22.1 Supported Options

The following options are supported for Zend\Filter\StripTags:

allowAttribs: This option sets the attributes which are accepted. All other attributes are stripped from the given
content.
allowTags: This option sets the tags which are accepted. All other tags will be stripped from the given content.

636 Chapter 130. Standard Filter Classes

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

130.22.2 Basic Usage

See the following example for the default behaviour of this filter:
1 $filter = new Zend\Filter\StripTags();
2

3 print $filter->filter('<B>My content</B>');

As result you will get the stripped content My content.

When the content contains broken or partial tags then the complete following content will be erased. See the following
example:
1 $filter = new Zend\Filter\StripTags();
2

3 print $filter->filter('This contains <a href="http://example.com">no ending tag');

The above will return This contains with the rest being stripped.

130.22.3 Allowing Defined Tags

Zend\Filter\StripTags allows stripping of all but defined tags. This can be used for example to strip all tags
but links from a text.
1 $filter = new Zend\Filter\StripTags(array('allowTags' => 'a'));
2

3 $input = "A text with <br/> a <a href='link.com'>link</a>";

4 print $filter->filter($input);

The above will return A text with a <a href=link.com>link</a> as result. It strips all tags but the link. By providing
an array you can set multiple tags at once.

Warning: Do not use this feature to get a probably secure content. This component does not replace the use of a
proper configured html filter.

130.22.4 Allowing Defined Attributes

It is also possible to strip all but allowed attributes from a tag.

1 $filter = new Zend\Filter\StripTags(array('allowTags' => 'img', 'allowAttribs' => 'src'));
2

3 $input = "A text with <br/> a <img src='picture.com' width='100'>picture</img>";

4 print $filter->filter($input);

The above will return A text with a <img src=picture.com>picture</img> as result. It strips all tags but img.
Additionally from the img tag all attributes but src will be stripped. By providing an array you can set multiple
attributes at once.

130.22.5 Allowing Advanced Defined Tags with Attributes

You can pass the allowed tags with their attributes in a single array to the constructor.

130.22. StripTags 637

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1 $allowedElements = array(
2 'img' => array(
3 'src',
4 'width'
5 ),
6 'a' => array(
7 'href'
8 )
9 );
10 $filter = new Zend\Filter\StripTags($allowedElements);
11

12 $input = "A text with <br/> a <img src='picture.com' width='100'>picture</img> click " .
13 "<a href='http://picture.com/zend' id='hereId'>here</a>!";
14 print $filter->filter($input);

The above will return A text with a <img src=picture.com width=100>picture</img> click <a
href=http://picture.com/zend>here</a>! as result.

130.23 UriNormalize

This filter can set a scheme on an URI, if a scheme is not present. If a scheme is present, that scheme will not be
affected, even if a different scheme is enforced.

130.23.1 Supported Options

The following options are supported for Zend\Filter\UriNormalize:

defaultScheme: This option can be used to set the default scheme to use when parsing scheme-less URIs.
enforcedScheme: Set a URI scheme to enforce on schemeless URIs.

130.23.2 Basic Usage

See the following example for the default behaviour of this filter:
1 $filter = new Zend\Filter\UriNormalize(array(
2 'enforcedScheme' => 'https'
3 ));
4

5 echo $filter->filter('www.example.com');

As the result the string https://www.example.com will be output.

130.24 Whitelist

This filter will return null if the value being filtered is not present the filters allowed list of values. If the value is
present, it will return that value.
For the opposite functionality see the Blacklist filter.

638 Chapter 130. Standard Filter Classes

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

130.24.1 Supported Options

The following options are supported for Zend\Filter\Whitelist:

strict: Uses strict mode when comparing: passed through to in_arrays third argument.
list: An array of allowed values.

130.24.2 Basic Usage

This is a basic example:

1 $whitelist = new \Zend\Filter\Whitelist(array(
2 'list' => array('allowed-1', 'allowed-2')
3 ));
4 echo $whitelist->filter('allowed-2'); // => 'allowed-2'
5 echo $whitelist->filter('not-allowed'); // => null

130.24. Whitelist 639

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

640 Chapter 130. Standard Filter Classes

 CHAPTER 131

Word Filters

In addition to the standard set of filters, there are several classes specific to filtering word strings.

131.1 CamelCaseToDash

This filter modifies a given string such that CamelCaseWords are converted to Camel-Case-Words.

131.1.1 Supported Options

There are no additional options for Zend\Filter\Word\CamelCaseToDash:

131.1.2 Basic Usage

A basic example of usage is below:

1 $filter = new Zend\Filter\Word\CamelCaseToDash();
2

3 print $filter->filter('ThisIsMyContent');

The above example returns This-Is-My-Content.

131.2 CamelCaseToSeparator

This filter modifies a given string such that CamelCaseWords are converted to Camel Case Words.

131.2.1 Supported Options

The following options are supported for Zend\Filter\Word\CamelCaseToSeparator:

separator: A separator char. If this is not set the separator will be a space character.

641
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

131.2.2 Basic Usage

A basic example of usage is below:

1 $filter = new Zend\Filter\Word\CamelCaseToSeparator(':');
2 // or new Zend\Filter\Word\CamelCaseToSeparator(array('separator' => ':'));
3

4 print $filter->filter('ThisIsMyContent');

The above example returns This:Is:My:Content.

131.2.3 Default Behavior

1 $filter = new Zend\Filter\Word\CamelCaseToSeparator();

2

3 print $filter->filter('ThisIsMyContent');

The above example returns This Is My Content.

131.3 CamelCaseToUnderscore

This filter modifies a given string such that CamelCaseWords are converted to Camel_Case_Words.

131.3.1 Supported Options

There are no additional options for Zend\Filter\Word\CamelCaseToUnderscore:

131.3.2 Basic usage

A basic example of usage is below:

1 $filter = new Zend\Filter\Word\CamelCaseToUnderscore();
2

3 print $filter->filter('ThisIsMyContent');

The above example returns This_Is_My_Content.

131.4 DashToCamelCase

This filter modifies a given string such that words-with-dashes are converted to WordsWithDashes.

131.4.1 Supported Options

There are no additional options for Zend\Filter\Word\DashToCamelCase:

642 Chapter 131. Word Filters

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

131.4.2 Basic Usage

A basic example of usage is below:

1 $filter = new Zend\Filter\Word\DashToCamelCase();
2

3 print $filter->filter('this-is-my-content');

The above example returns ThisIsMyContent.

131.5 DashToSeparator

This filter modifies a given string such that words-with-dashes are converted to words with dashes.

131.5.1 Supported Options

The following options are supported for Zend\Filter\Word\DashToSeparator:

separator: A separator char. If this is not set the separator will be a space character.

131.5.2 Basic Usage

A basic example of usage is below:

1 $filter = new Zend\Filter\Word\DashToSeparator('+');
2 // or new Zend\Filter\Word\CamelCaseToSeparator(array('separator' => '+'));
3

4 print $filter->filter('this-is-my-content');

The above example returns this+is+my+content.

131.5.3 Default Behavior

1 $filter = new Zend\Filter\Word\DashToSeparator();

2

3 print $filter->filter('this-is-my-content');

The above example returns this is my content.

131.6 DashToUnderscore

This filter modifies a given string such that words-with-dashes are converted to words_with_dashes.

131.6.1 Supported Options

There are no additional options for Zend\Filter\Word\DashToUnderscore:

131.5. DashToSeparator 643

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

131.6.2 Basic Usage

A basic example of usage is below:

1 $filter = new Zend\Filter\Word\DashToUnderscore();
2

3 print $filter->filter('this-is-my-content');

The above example returns this_is_my_content.

131.7 SeparatorToCamelCase

This filter modifies a given string such that words with separators are converted to WordsWithSeparators.

131.7.1 Supported Options

The following options are supported for Zend\Filter\Word\SeparatorToCamelCase:

separator: A separator char. If this is not set the separator will be a space character.

131.7.2 Basic Usage

A basic example of usage is below:

1 $filter = new Zend\Filter\Word\SeparatorToCamelCase(':');
2 // or new Zend\Filter\Word\SeparatorToCamelCase(array('separator' => ':'));
3

4 print $filter->filter('this:is:my:content');

The above example returns ThisIsMyContent.

131.7.3 Default Behavior

1 $filter = new Zend\Filter\Word\SeparatorToCamelCase();

2

3 print $filter->filter('this is my content');

The above example returns ThisIsMyContent.

131.8 SeparatorToDash

This filter modifies a given string such that words with separators are converted to words-with-separators.

131.8.1 Supported Options

The following options are supported for Zend\Filter\Word\SeparatorToDash:

separator: A separator char. If this is not set the separator will be a space character.

644 Chapter 131. Word Filters

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

131.8.2 Basic Usage

A basic example of usage is below:

1 $filter = new Zend\Filter\Word\SeparatorToDash(':');
2 // or new Zend\Filter\Word\SeparatorToDash(array('separator' => ':'));
3

4 print $filter->filter('this:is:my:content');

The above example returns this-is-my-content.

131.8.3 Default Behavior

1 $filter = new Zend\Filter\Word\SeparatorToDash();

2

3 print $filter->filter('this is my content');

The above example returns this-is-my-content.

131.9 SeparatorToSeparator

This filter modifies a given string such that words with separators are converted to words-with-separators.

131.9.1 Supported Options

The following options are supported for Zend\Filter\Word\SeparatorToSeparator:

searchSeparator: The search separator char. If this is not set the separator will be a space character.
replaceSeparator: The replace separator char. If this is not set the separator will be a dash.

131.9.2 Basic Usage

A basic example of usage is below:

1 $filter = new Zend\Filter\Word\SeparatorToSeparator(':', '+');
2

3 print $filter->filter('this:is:my:content');

The above example returns this+is+my+content.

131.9.3 Default Behaviour

1 $filter = new Zend\Filter\Word\SeparatorToSeparator();

2

3 print $filter->filter('this is my content');

The above example returns this-is-my-content.

131.9. SeparatorToSeparator 645

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

131.10 UnderscoreToCamelCase

This filter modifies a given string such that words_with_underscores are converted to WordsWithUnderscores.

131.10.1 Supported Options

There are no additional options for Zend\Filter\Word\UnderscoreToCamelCase:

131.10.2 Basic Usage

A basic example of usage is below:

1 $filter = new Zend\Filter\Word\UnderscoreToCamelCase();
2

3 print $filter->filter('this_is_my_content');

The above example returns ThisIsMyContent.

131.11 UnderscoreToSeparator

This filter modifies a given string such that words_with_underscores are converted to words with underscores.

131.11.1 Supported Options

The following options are supported for Zend\Filter\Word\UnderscoreToSeparator:

separator: A separator char. If this is not set the separator will be a space character.

131.11.2 Basic usage

A basic example of usage is below:

1 $filter = new Zend\Filter\Word\UnderscoreToSeparator('+');
2 // or new Zend\Filter\Word\CamelCaseToSeparator(array('separator' => '+'));
3

4 print $filter->filter('this_is_my_content');

The above example returns this+is+my+content.

131.11.3 Default Behavior

1 $filter = new Zend\Filter\Word\UnderscoreToSeparator();

2

3 print $filter->filter('this_is_my_content');

The above example returns this is my content.

646 Chapter 131. Word Filters

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

131.12 UnderscoreToDash

This filter modifies a given string such that words_with_underscores are converted to words-with-underscores.

131.12.1 Supported Options

There are no additional options for Zend\Filter\Word\UnderscoreToDash:

131.12.2 Basic usage

A basic example of usage is below:

1 $filter = new Zend\Filter\Word\UnderscoreToDash();
2

3 print $filter->filter('this_is_my_content');

The above example returns this-is-my-content.

131.12. UnderscoreToDash 647

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

648 Chapter 131. Word Filters

 CHAPTER 132

File Filter Classes

Zend Framework comes with a set of classes for filtering file contents as well as performing other actions, such as file
renaming.

Note: All of the File Filter Classes filter() methods support both a file path string or a $_FILES array as the
supplied argument. When a $_FILES array is passed in, the tmp_name is used for the file path.

132.1 Decrypt

TODO

132.2 Encrypt

TODO

132.3 Lowercase

TODO

132.4 Rename

Zend\Filter\File\Rename can be used to rename a file and/or move a file to a new path.

132.4.1 Supported Options

The following set of options are supported:

target (string) default: "*" Target filename or directory, the new name of the source file.
source (string) default: "*" Source filename or directory which will be renamed.
Used to match the filtered file with an options set.

649
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

overwrite (boolean) default: false Shall existing files be overwritten?

If the file is unable to be moved into the target path, a
Zend\Filter\Exception\RuntimeException will be thrown.
randomize (boolean) default: false Shall target files have a random postfix attached? The ran-
dom postfix will be a uniqid(_) after the file name and before the extension.
For example, "file.txt" will be randomized to "file_4b3403665fea6.txt"
An array of option sets is also supported, where a single Rename filter instance can filter several files using different
options. The options used for the filtered file will be matched from the source option in the options set.

132.4.2 Usage Examples

Move all filtered files to a different directory:

1 // 'target' option is assumed if param is a string
2 $filter = new \Zend\Filter\File\Rename("/tmp/");
3 echo $filter->filter("./myfile.txt");
4 // File has been moved to "/tmp/myfile.txt"

Rename all filtered files to a new name:

1 $filter = new \Zend\Filter\File\Rename("/tmp/newfile.txt");
2 echo $filter->filter("./myfile.txt");
3 // File has been renamed to "/tmp/newfile.txt"

Move to a new path and randomize file names:

1 $filter = new \Zend\Filter\File\Rename(array(
2 "target" => "/tmp/newfile.txt",
3 "randomize" => true,
4 ));
5 echo $filter->filter("./myfile.txt");
6 // File has been renamed to "/tmp/newfile_4b3403665fea6.txt"

Configure different options for several possible source files:

1 $filter = new \Zend\Filter\File\Rename(array(
2 array(
3 "source" => "fileA.txt"
4 "target" => "/dest1/newfileA.txt",
5 "overwrite" => true,
6 ),
7 array(
8 "source" => "fileB.txt"
9 "target" => "/dest2/newfileB.txt",
10 "randomize" => true,
11 ),
12 ));
13 echo $filter->filter("fileA.txt");
14 // File has been renamed to "/dest1/newfileA.txt"
15 echo $filter->filter("fileB.txt");
16 // File has been renamed to "/dest2/newfileB_4b3403665fea6.txt"

650 Chapter 132. File Filter Classes

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

132.4.3 Public Methods

The specific public methods for the Rename filter, besides the common filter() method, are as follows:
getFile()
Returns the files to rename and their new name and location
Return type array
setFile(string|array $options)
Sets the file options for renaming. Removes any previously set file options.
Parameters $options See Supported Options section for more information.
addFile(string|array $options)
Adds file options for renaming to the current list of file options.
Parameters $options See Supported Options section for more information.

132.5 RenameUpload

Zend\Filter\File\RenameUpload can be used to rename or move an uploaded file to a new path.

132.5.1 Supported Options

The following set of options are supported:

target (string) default: "*" Target directory or full filename path.
overwrite (boolean) default: false Shall existing files be overwritten?
If the file is unable to be moved into the target path, a
Zend\Filter\Exception\RuntimeException will be thrown.
randomize (boolean) default: false Shall target files have a random postfix attached? The ran-
dom postfix will be a uniqid(_) after the file name and before the extension.
For example, "file.txt" will be randomized to "file_4b3403665fea6.txt"
use_upload_name (boolean) default: false When true, this filter will use the $_FILES[name]
as the target filename. Otherwise, the default target rules and the $_FILES[tmp_name] will be
used.
use_upload_extension (boolean) default: false When true, the uploaded file will maintains its
original extension if not specified.
For example, if the uploaded file is "file.txt" and the target is something like "mynewfile", the
upload will be renamed to "mynewfile.txt".

Warning: Be very careful when using the use_upload_name option. For instance, extremely bad things could
happen if you were to allow uploaded .php files (or other CGI files) to be moved into the DocumentRoot.
It is generally a better idea to supply an internal filename to avoid security risks.

RenameUpload does not support an array of options like theRename filter. When filtering HTML5 file uploads
with the multiple attribute set, all files will be filtered with the same option settings.

132.5. RenameUpload 651

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

132.5.2 Usage Examples

Move all filtered files to a different directory:

1 use Zend\Http\PhpEnvironment\Request;
2

3 $request = new Request();

4 $files = $request->getFiles();
5 // i.e. $files['my-upload']['tmp_name'] === '/tmp/php5Wx0aJ'
6 // i.e. $files['my-upload']['name'] === 'myfile.txt'
7

8 // 'target' option is assumed if param is a string

9 $filter = new \Zend\Filter\File\RenameUpload("./data/uploads/");
10 echo $filter->filter($files['my-upload']);
11 // File has been moved to "./data/uploads/php5Wx0aJ"
12

13 // ... or retain the uploaded file name

14 $filter->setUseUploadName(true);
15 echo $filter->filter($files['my-upload']);
16 // File has been moved to "./data/uploads/myfile.txt"

Rename all filtered files to a new name:

1 use Zend\Http\PhpEnvironment\Request;
2

3 $request = new Request();

4 $files = $request->getFiles();
5 // i.e. $files['my-upload']['tmp_name'] === '/tmp/php5Wx0aJ'
6

7 $filter = new \Zend\Filter\File\Rename("./data/uploads/newfile.txt");

8 echo $filter->filter($files['my-upload']);
9 // File has been renamed to "./data/uploads/newfile.txt"

Move to a new path and randomize file names:

1 use Zend\Http\PhpEnvironment\Request;
2

3 $request = new Request();

4 $files = $request->getFiles();
5 // i.e. $files['my-upload']['tmp_name'] === '/tmp/php5Wx0aJ'
6

7 $filter = new \Zend\Filter\File\Rename(array(

8 "target" => "./data/uploads/newfile.txt",
9 "randomize" => true,
10 ));
11 echo $filter->filter($files['my-upload']);
12 // File has been renamed to "./data/uploads/newfile_4b3403665fea6.txt"

132.6 Uppercase

TODO

652 Chapter 132. File Filter Classes

 CHAPTER 133

Filter Chains

Often multiple filters should be applied to some value in a particular order. For example, a login form accepts a
username that should be only lowercase, alphabetic characters. Zend\Filter\FilterChain provides a simple
method by which filters may be chained together. The following code illustrates how to chain together two filters for
the submitted username:
1 // Create a filter chain and add filters to the chain
2 $filterChain = new Zend\Filter\FilterChain();
3 $filterChain->attach(new Zend\I18n\Filter\Alpha())
4 ->attach(new Zend\Filter\StringToLower());
5

6 // Filter the username

7 $username = $filterChain->filter($_POST['username']);

Filters are run in the order they were added to Zend\Filter\FilterChain. In the above example, the username
is first removed of any non-alphabetic characters, and then any uppercase characters are converted to lowercase.
Any object that implements Zend\Filter\FilterInterface may be used in a filter chain.

133.1 Setting Filter Chain Order

For each filter added to the FilterChain you can set a priority to define the chain order. The default value is 1000.
In the following example, any uppercase characters are converted to lowercase before any non-alphabetic characters
are removed.
1 // Create a filter chain and add filters to the chain
2 $filterChain = new Zend\Filter\FilterChain();
3 $filterChain->attach(new Zend\I18n\Filter\Alpha())
4 ->attach(new Zend\Filter\StringToLower(), 500);

133.2 Using the Plugin Manager

To every FilterChain object an instance of the FilterPluginManager is attached. Every filter that is used
in a FilterChain must be known by this FilterPluginManager. To add a filter that is known by the
FilterPluginManager you can use the attachByName() method. The first parameter is the name of the
filter within the FilterPluginManager. The second parameter takes any options for creating the filter instance.
The third parameter is the priority.

653
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1 // Create a filter chain and add filters to the chain

2 $filterChain = new Zend\Filter\FilterChain();
3 $filterChain->attachByName('alpha')
4 ->attachByName('stringtolower', array('encoding' => 'utf-8'), 500);

The following example shows how to add a custom filter to the FilterPluginManager and the FilterChain.
1 $filterChain = new Zend\Filter\FilterChain();
2 $filterChain->getPluginManager()->setInvokableClass(
3 'myNewFilter', 'MyCustom\Filter\MyNewFilter'
4 );
5 $filterChain->attachByName('alpha')
6 ->attachByName('myNewFilter');

You can also add your own FilterPluginManager implementation.

1 $filterChain = new Zend\Filter\FilterChain();
2 $filterChain->setPluginManager(new MyFilterPluginManager());
3 $filterChain->attach(new Zend\I18n\Filter\Alpha())
4 ->attach(new MyCustom\Filter\MyNewFilter());

654 Chapter 133. Filter Chains

 CHAPTER 134

Zend\Filter\Inflector

Zend\Filter\Inflector is a general purpose tool for rules-based inflection of strings to a given target.
As an example, you may find you need to transform MixedCase or camelCasedWords into a path; for readability, OS
policies, or other reasons, you also need to lower case this, and you want to separate the words using a dash (-). An
inflector can do this for you.
Zend\Filter\Inflector implements Zend\Filter\FilterInterface; you perform inflection by call-
ing filter() on the object instance.

134.1 Transforming MixedCase and camelCaseText to another format

1 $inflector = new Zend\Filter\Inflector('pages/:page.:suffix');
2 $inflector->setRules(array(
3 ':page' => array('Word\CamelCaseToDash', 'StringToLower'),
4 'suffix' => 'html',
5 ));
6

7 $string = 'camelCasedWords';
8 $filtered = $inflector->filter(array('page' => $string));
9 // pages/camel-cased-words.html
10

11 $string = 'this_is_not_camel_cased';
12 $filtered = $inflector->filter(array('page' => $string));
13 // pages/this_is_not_camel_cased.html

134.1.1 Operation

An inflector requires a target and one or more rules. A target is basically a string that defines placeholders for
variables you wish to substitute. These are specified by prefixing with a :: :script.
When calling filter(), you then pass in an array of key and value pairs corresponding to the variables in the target.
Each variable in the target can have zero or more rules associated with them. Rules may be either static or refer to a
Zend\Filter class. Static rules will replace with the text provided. Otherwise, a class matching the rule provided
will be used to inflect the text. Classes are typically specified using a short name indicating the filter name stripped of
any common prefix.
As an example, you can use any Zend\Filter concrete implementations; however, instead of referring to
them as Zend\I18n\Filter\Alpha or Zend\Filter\StringToLower, youd specify only Alpha
or StringToLower.

655
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

134.1.2 Using Custom Filters

Zend\Filter\Inflector uses Zend\Filter\FilterPluginManager to manage loading filters to use

with inflection. By default, filters registered with Zend\Filter\FilterPluginManager are available. To
access filters with that prefix but which occur deeper in the hierarchy, such as the various Word filters, simply strip off
the Zend\Filter prefix:
1 // use Zend\Filter\Word\CamelCaseToDash as a rule
2 $inflector->addRules(array('script' => 'Word\CamelCaseToDash'));

To use custom filters, you have two choices: reference them by fully qualified class name (e.g.,
My\Custom\Filter\Mungify), or manipulate the composed FilterPluginManager instance.
1 $filters = $inflector->getPluginManager();
2 $filters->addInvokableClass('mungify', 'My\Custom\Filter\Mungify');

134.1.3 Setting the Inflector Target

The inflector target is a string with some placeholders for variables. Placeholders take the form of an identifier, a colon
(:) by default, followed by a variable name: :script, :path, etc. The filter() method looks for the identifier
followed by the variable name being replaced.
You can change the identifier using the setTargetReplacementIdentifier() method, or passing it as the
fourth argument to the constructor:
1 // Via constructor:
2 $inflector = new Zend\Filter\Inflector('#foo/#bar.#sfx', array(), null, '#');
3

4 // Via accessor:
5 $inflector->setTargetReplacementIdentifier('#');

Typically, you will set the target via the constructor. However, you may want to re-set the target later. setTarget()
can be used for this purpose:
1 $inflector->setTarget('layouts/:script.phtml');

Additionally, you may wish to have a class member for your class that you can use to keep the inflector target updated
without needing to directly update the target each time (thus saving on method calls). setTargetReference()
allows you to do this:
1 class Foo
2 {
3 /**
4 * @var string Inflector target
5 */
6 protected $_target = 'foo/:bar/:baz.:suffix';
7

8 /**
9 * Constructor
10 * @return void
11 */
12 public function __construct()
13 {
14 $this->_inflector = new Zend\Filter\Inflector();
15 $this->_inflector->setTargetReference($this->_target);
16 }
17

18 /**

656 Chapter 134. Zend\Filter\Inflector

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

19 * Set target; updates target in inflector

20 *
21 * @param string $target
22 * @return Foo
23 */
24 public function setTarget($target)
25 {
26 $this->_target = $target;
27 return $this;
28 }
29 }

134.1.4 Inflection Rules

As mentioned in the introduction, there are two types of rules: static and filter-based.

Note: It is important to note that regardless of the method in which you add rules to the inflector, either one-by-
one, or all-at-once; the order is very important. More specific names, or names that might contain other rule names,
must be added before least specific names. For example, assuming the two rule names moduleDir and module,
the moduleDir rule should appear before module since module is contained within moduleDir. If module were
added before moduleDir, module will match part of moduleDir and process it leaving Dir inside of the target
uninflected.

134.2 Static Rules

Static rules do simple string substitution; use them when you have a segment in the target that will typically be static,
but which you want to allow the developer to modify. Use the setStaticRule() method to set or modify the rule:
1 $inflector = new Zend\Filter\Inflector(':script.:suffix');
2 $inflector->setStaticRule('suffix', 'phtml');
3

4 // change it later:
5 $inflector->setStaticRule('suffix', 'php');

Much like the target itself, you can also bind a static rule to a reference, allowing you to update a single variable
instead of require a method call; this is often useful when your class uses an inflector internally, and you dont want
your users to need to fetch the inflector in order to update it. The setStaticRuleReference() method is used
to accomplish this:
1 class Foo
2 {
3 /**
4 * @var string Suffix
5 */
6 protected $_suffix = 'phtml';
7

8 /**
9 * Constructor
10 * @return void
11 */
12 public function __construct()
13 {
14 $this->_inflector = new Zend\Filter\Inflector(':script.:suffix');

134.2. Static Rules 657

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

15 $this->_inflector->setStaticRuleReference('suffix', $this->_suffix);
16 }
17

18 /**
19 * Set suffix; updates suffix static rule in inflector
20 *
21 * @param string $suffix
22 * @return Foo
23 */
24 public function setSuffix($suffix)
25 {
26 $this->_suffix = $suffix;
27 return $this;
28 }
29 }

134.3 Filter Inflector Rules

Zend\Filter filters may be used as inflector rules as well. Just like static rules, these are bound to a target variable;
unlike static rules, you may define multiple filters to use when inflecting. These filters are processed in order, so be
careful to register them in an order that makes sense for the data you receive.
Rules may be added using setFilterRule() (which overwrites any previous rules for that variable) or
addFilterRule() (which appends the new rule to any existing rule for that variable). Filters are specified in
one of the following ways:
String. The string may be a filter class name, or a class name segment minus any prefix set in the inflectors
plugin loader (by default, minus the Zend\Filter prefix).
Filter object. Any object instance implementing Zend\Filter\FilterInterface may be passed as a
filter.
Array. An array of one or more strings or filter objects as defined above.
1 $inflector = new Zend\Filter\Inflector(':script.:suffix');
2

3 // Set rule to use Zend\Filter\Word\CamelCaseToDash filter

4 $inflector->setFilterRule('script', 'Word\CamelCaseToDash');
5

6 // Add rule to lowercase string

7 $inflector->addFilterRule('script', new Zend\Filter\StringToLower());
8

9 // Set rules en-masse

10 $inflector->setFilterRule('script', array(
11 'Word\CamelCaseToDash',
12 new Zend\Filter\StringToLower()
13 ));

134.4 Setting Many Rules At Once

Typically, its easier to set many rules at once than to configure a single variable and its inflection rules at a time.
Zend\Filter\Inflectors addRules() and setRules() method allow this.
Each method takes an array of variable and rule pairs, where the rule may be whatever the type of rule accepts (string,
filter object, or array). Variable names accept a special notation to allow setting static rules and filter rules, according

658 Chapter 134. Zend\Filter\Inflector

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

to the following notation:

: prefix: filter rules.
No prefix: static rule.

Setting Multiple Rules at Once

1 // Could also use setRules() with this notation:

2 $inflector->addRules(array(
3 // filter rules:
4 ':controller' => array('Word\CamelCaseToUnderscore','StringToLower'),
5 ':action' => array('Word\CamelCaseToUnderscore','StringToLower'),
6

7 // Static rule:
8 'suffix' => 'phtml'
9 ));

134.4.1 Utility Methods

Zend\Filter\Inflector has a number of utility methods for retrieving and setting the plugin loader, manipu-
lating and retrieving rules, and controlling if and when exceptions are thrown.
setPluginManager() can be used when you have configured your own
Zend\Filter\FilterPluginManager instance and wish to use it with Zend\Filter\Inflector;
getPluginManager() retrieves the currently set one.
setThrowTargetExceptionsOn() can be used to control whether or not filter() throws an excep-
tion when a given replacement identifier passed to it is not found in the target. By default, no exceptions are
thrown. isThrowTargetExceptionsOn() will tell you what the current value is.
getRules($spec = null) can be used to retrieve all registered rules for all variables, or just the rules for
a single variable.
getRule($spec, $index) fetches a single rule for a given variable; this can be useful for fetching a
specific filter rule for a variable that has a filter chain. $index must be passed.
clearRules() will clear all currently registered rules.

134.4.2 Using a Traversable or an array

You can use a Traversable or an array to set rules and other object state in your inflectors, either by passing a
Traversable object or an array to the constructor or setOptions(). The following settings may be specified:
target specifies the inflection target.
pluginManager specifies the Zend\Filter\FilterPluginManager instance or extension to
use for obtaining plugins; alternately, you may specify a class name of a class that extends the
FilterPluginManager.
throwTargetExceptionsOn should be a boolean indicating whether or not to throw exceptions when a
replacement identifier is still present after inflection.
targetReplacementIdentifier specifies the character to use when identifying replacement variables
in the target string.
rules specifies an array of inflection rules; it should consist of keys that specify either values or arrays of
values, consistent with addRules().

134.4. Setting Many Rules At Once 659

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

134.5 Example
1 // With the constructor:
2 $options; // implements Traversable
3 $inflector = new Zend\Filter\Inflector($options);
4

5 // Or with setOptions():
6 $inflector = new Zend\Filter\Inflector();
7 $inflector->setOptions($options);

660 Chapter 134. Zend\Filter\Inflector

 CHAPTER 135

Using the StaticFilter

If it is inconvenient to load a given filter class and create an instance of the filter, you can use StaticFilter with
its method execute() as an alternative invocation style. The first argument of this method is a data input value,
that you would pass to the filter() method. The second argument is a string, which corresponds to the basename
of the filter class, relative to the Zend\Filter namespace. The execute() method automatically loads the class,
creates an instance, and applies the filter() method to the data input.
1 echo StaticFilter::execute('&', 'HtmlEntities');

You can also pass an array of constructor arguments, if they are needed for the filter class.
1 echo StaticFilter::execute('"',
2 'HtmlEntities',
3 array('quotestyle' => ENT_QUOTES));

The static usage can be convenient for invoking a filter ad hoc, but if you have the need to run a filter for multiple
inputs, its more efficient to follow the first example above, creating an instance of the filter object and calling its
filter() method.
Also, the FilterChain class allows you to instantiate and run multiple filter and validator classes on demand to
process sets of input data. See FilterChain.
You can set and receive the FilterPluginManager for the StaticFilter to amend the standard filter classes.
1 $pluginManager = StaticFilter::getPluginManager()->setInvokableClass(
2 'myNewFilter', 'MyCustom\Filter\MyNewFilter'
3 );
4

5 StaticFilter::setPluginManager(new MyFilterPluginManager());

This is useful when adding custom filters to be used by the StaticFilter.

661
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

662 Chapter 135. Using the StaticFilter

 CHAPTER 136

Writing Filters

Zend\Filter supplies a set of commonly needed filters, but developers will often need to write cus-
tom filters for their particular use cases. The task of writing a custom filter is facilitated by implementing
Zend\Filter\FilterInterface.
Zend\Filter\FilterInterface defines a single method, filter(), that may be implemented by user
classes.

136.1 Example

The following example demonstrates how to write a custom filter:

1 namespace Application\Filter;
2

3 use Zend\Filter\FilterInterface;
4

5 class MyFilter implements FilterInterface

6 {
7 public function filter($value)
8 {
9 // perform some transformation upon $value to arrive on $valueFiltered
10

11 return $valueFiltered;
12 }
13 }

To attach an instance of the filter defined above to a filter chain:

1 $filterChain = new Zend\Filter\FilterChain();
2 $filterChain->attach(new Application\Filter\MyFilter());

663
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

664 Chapter 136. Writing Filters

 CHAPTER 137

Introduction

Zend\Form is intended primarily as a bridge between your domain models and the View Layer. It composes a thin
layer of objects representing form elements, an InputFilter, and a small number of methods for binding data to and
from the form and attached objects.
The Zend\Form component consists of the following objects:
Elements, which simply consist of a name and attributes.
Fieldsets, which extend from Elements, but allow composing other fieldsets and elements.
Forms, which extend from Fieldsets (and thus Elements). They provide data and object binding, and
compose InputFilters. Data binding is done via Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator.
To facilitate usage with the view layer, the Zend\Form component also aggregates a number of form-specific view
helpers. These accept elements, fieldsets, and/or forms, and use the attributes they compose to render markup.
A small number of specialized elements are provided for accomplishing application-centric tasks. These include the
Csrf element, used to prevent Cross Site Request Forgery attacks, and the Captcha element, used to display and
validate CAPTCHAs.
A Factory is provided to facilitate creation of elements, fieldsets, forms, and the related input filter. The default
Form implementation is backed by a factory to facilitate extension and ease the process of form creation.
The code related to forms can often spread between a variety of concerns: a form definition, an input filter def-
inition, a domain model class, and one or more hydrator implementations. As such, finding the various bits of
code and how they relate can become tedious. To simplify the situation, you can also annotate your domain
model class, detailing the various input filter definitions, attributes, and hydrators that should all be used together.
Zend\Form\Annotation\AnnotationBuilder can then be used to build the various objects you need.

665
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

666 Chapter 137. Introduction

 CHAPTER 138

Quick Start

Forms are relatively easy to create. At the bare minimum, each element or fieldset requires a name; typically, youll
also provide some attributes to hint to the view layer how it might render the item. The form itself will also typically
compose an InputFilter which you can also conveniently create directly in the form via a factory. Individual
elements can hint as to what defaults to use when generating a related input for the input filter.
Form validation is as easy as providing an array of data to the setData() method. If you want to simplify your
work even more, you can bind an object to the form; on successful validation, it will be populated from the validated
values.

138.1 Programmatic Form Creation

If nothing else, you can simply start creating elements, fieldsets, and forms and wiring them together.
1 use Zend\Captcha;
2 use Zend\Form\Element;
3 use Zend\Form\Fieldset;
4 use Zend\Form\Form;
5 use Zend\InputFilter\Input;
6 use Zend\InputFilter\InputFilter;
7

8 $name = new Element('name');

9 $name->setLabel('Your name');
10 $name->setAttributes(array(
11 'type' => 'text'
12 ));
13

14 $email = new Element\Email('email');

15 $email->setLabel('Your email address');
16

17 $subject = new Element('subject');

18 $subject->setLabel('Subject');
19 $subject->setAttributes(array(
20 'type' => 'text'
21 ));
22

23 $message = new Element\Textarea('message');

24 $message->setLabel('Message');
25

26 $captcha = new Element\Captcha('captcha');

27 $captcha->setCaptcha(new Captcha\Dumb());
28 $captcha->setLabel('Please verify you are human');

667
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

29

30 $csrf = new Element\Csrf('security');

31

32 $send = new Element('send');

33 $send->setValue('Submit');
34 $send->setAttributes(array(
35 'type' => 'submit'
36 ));
37

38

39 $form = new Form('contact');

40 $form->add($name);
41 $form->add($email);
42 $form->add($subject);
43 $form->add($message);
44 $form->add($captcha);
45 $form->add($csrf);
46 $form->add($send);
47

48 $nameInput = new Input('name');

49 // configure input... and all others
50 $inputFilter = new InputFilter();
51 // attach all inputs
52

53 $form->setInputFilter($inputFilter);

As a demonstration of fieldsets, lets alter the above slightly. Well create two fieldsets, one for the sender information,
and another for the message details.
1 $sender = new Fieldset('sender');
2 $sender->add($name);
3 $sender->add($email);
4

5 $details = new Fieldset('details');

6 $details->add($subject);
7 $details->add($message);
8

9 $form = new Form('contact');

10 $form->add($sender);
11 $form->add($details);
12 $form->add($captcha);
13 $form->add($csrf);
14 $form->add($send);

Regardless of approach, as you can see, this can be tedious.

138.2 Creation via Factory

You can create the entire form, and input filter, using the Factory. This is particularly nice if you want to store your
forms as pure configuration; you can simply pass the configuration to the factory and be done.
1 use Zend\Form\Factory;
2

3 $factory = new Factory();

4 $form = $factory->createForm(array(
5 'hydrator' => 'Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator\ArraySerializable',
6 'elements' => array(

668 Chapter 138. Quick Start

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

7 array(
8 'spec' => array(
9 'name' => 'name',
10 'options' => array(
11 'label' => 'Your name',
12 ),
13 'type' => 'Text',
14 )
15 ),
16 array(
17 'spec' => array(
18 'type' => 'Zend\Form\Element\Email',
19 'name' => 'email',
20 'options' => array(
21 'label' => 'Your email address',
22 )
23 ),
24 ),
25 array(
26 'spec' => array(
27 'name' => 'subject',
28 'options' => array(
29 'label' => 'Subject',
30 ),
31 'type' => 'Text',
32 ),
33 ),
34 array(
35 'spec' => array(
36 'type' => 'Zend\Form\Element\Textarea',
37 'name' => 'message',
38 'options' => array(
39 'label' => 'Message',
40 )
41 ),
42 ),
43 array(
44 'spec' => array(
45 'type' => 'Zend\Form\Element\Captcha',
46 'name' => 'captcha',
47 'options' => array(
48 'label' => 'Please verify you are human.',
49 'captcha' => array(
50 'class' => 'Dumb',
51 ),
52 ),
53 ),
54 ),
55 array(
56 'spec' => array(
57 'type' => 'Zend\Form\Element\Csrf',
58 'name' => 'security',
59 ),
60 ),
61 array(
62 'spec' => array(
63 'name' => 'send',
64 'type' => 'Submit',

138.2. Creation via Factory 669

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

65 'attributes' => array(

66 'value' => 'Submit',
67 ),
68 ),
69 ),
70 ),
71 /* If we had fieldsets, they'd go here; fieldsets contain
72 * "elements" and "fieldsets" keys, and potentially a "type"
73 * key indicating the specific FieldsetInterface
74 * implementation to use.
75 'fieldsets' => array(
76 ),
77 */
78

79 // Configuration to pass on to
80 // Zend\InputFilter\Factory::createInputFilter()
81 'input_filter' => array(
82 /* ... */
83 ),
84 ));

If we wanted to use fieldsets, as we demonstrated in the previous example, we could do the following:
1 use Zend\Form\Factory;
2

3 $factory = new Factory();

4 $form = $factory->createForm(array(
5 'hydrator' => 'Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator\ArraySerializable',
6 'fieldsets' => array(
7 array(
8 'spec' => array(
9 'name' => 'sender',
10 'elements' => array(
11 array(
12 'spec' => array(
13 'name' => 'name',
14 'options' => array(
15 'label' => 'Your name',
16 ),
17 'type' => 'Text'
18 ),
19 ),
20 array(
21 'spec' => array(
22 'type' => 'Zend\Form\Element\Email',
23 'name' => 'email',
24 'options' => array(
25 'label' => 'Your email address',
26 ),
27 ),
28 ),
29 ),
30 ),
31 ),
32 array(
33 'spec' => array(
34 'name' => 'details',
35 'elements' => array(
36 array(

670 Chapter 138. Quick Start

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

37 'spec' => array(

38 'name' => 'subject',
39 'options' => array(
40 'label' => 'Subject',
41 ),
42 'type' => 'Text',
43 ),
44 ),
45 array(
46 'spec' => array(
47 'name' => 'message',
48 'type' => 'Zend\Form\Element\Textarea',
49 'options' => array(
50 'label' => 'Message',
51 ),
52 ),
53 ),
54 ),
55 ),
56 ),
57 ),
58 'elements' => array(
59 array(
60 'spec' => array(
61 'type' => 'Zend\Form\Element\Captcha',
62 'name' => 'captcha',
63 'options' => array(
64 'label' => 'Please verify you are human. ',
65 'captcha' => array(
66 'class' => 'Dumb',
67 ),
68 ),
69 ),
70 ),
71 array(
72 'spec' => array(
73 'type' => 'Zend\Form\Element\Csrf',
74 'name' => 'security',
75 ),
76 ),
77 array(
78 'spec' => array(
79 'name' => 'send',
80 'type' => 'Submit',
81 'attributes' => array(
82 'value' => 'Submit',
83 ),
84 ),
85 ),
86 ),
87 // Configuration to pass on to
88 // Zend\InputFilter\Factory::createInputFilter()
89 'input_filter' => array(
90 /* ... */
91 ),
92 ));

Note that the chief difference is nesting; otherwise, the information is basically the same.

138.2. Creation via Factory 671

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

The chief benefits to using the Factory are allowing you to store definitions in configuration, and usage of significant
whitespace.

138.3 Factory-backed Form Extension

The default Form implementation is backed by the Factory. This allows you to extend it, and define your form
internally. This has the benefit of allowing a mixture of programmatic and factory-backed creation, as well as defining
a form for re-use in your application.
1 namespace Contact;
2

3 use Zend\Captcha\AdapterInterface as CaptchaAdapter;

4 use Zend\Form\Element;
5 use Zend\Form\Form;
6

7 class ContactForm extends Form

8 {
9 protected $captcha;
10

11 public function __construct(CaptchaAdapter $captcha)

12 {
13

14 parent::__construct();
15

16 $this->captcha = $captcha;
17

18 // add() can take either an Element/Fieldset instance,

19 // or a specification, from which the appropriate object
20 // will be built.
21

22 $this->add(array(
23 'name' => 'name',
24 'options' => array(
25 'label' => 'Your name',
26 ),
27 'type' => 'Text',
28 ));
29 $this->add(array(
30 'type' => 'Zend\Form\Element\Email',
31 'name' => 'email',
32 'options' => array(
33 'label' => 'Your email address',
34 ),
35 ));
36 $this->add(array(
37 'name' => 'subject',
38 'options' => array(
39 'label' => 'Subject',
40 ),
41 'type' => 'Text',
42 ));
43 $this->add(array(
44 'type' => 'Zend\Form\Element\Textarea',
45 'name' => 'message',
46 'options' => array(
47 'label' => 'Message',

672 Chapter 138. Quick Start

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

48 ),
49 ));
50 $this->add(array(
51 'type' => 'Zend\Form\Element\Captcha',
52 'name' => 'captcha',
53 'options' => array(
54 'label' => 'Please verify you are human.',
55 'captcha' => $this->captcha,
56 ),
57 ));
58 $this->add(new Element\Csrf('security'));
59 $this->add(array(
60 'name' => 'send',
61 'type' => 'Submit',
62 'attributes' => array(
63 'value' => 'Submit',
64 ),
65 ));
66

67 // We could also define the input filter here, or

68 // lazy-create it in the getInputFilter() method.
69 }
70 }

Youll note that this example, the elements are added in the constructor. This is done to allow altering and/or config-
uring either the form or input filter factory instances, which could then have bearing on how elements, inputs, etc. are
created. In this case, it also allows injection of the CAPTCHA adapter, allowing us to configure it elsewhere in our
application and inject it into the form.

138.4 Validating Forms

Validating forms requires three steps. First, the form must have an input filter attached. Second, you must inject the
data to validate into the form. Third, you validate the form. If invalid, you can retrieve the error messages, if any.
1 // assuming $captcha is an instance of some Zend\Captcha\AdapterInterface
2 $form = new Contact\ContactForm($captcha);
3

4 // If the form doesn't define an input filter by default, inject one.

5 $form->setInputFilter(new Contact\ContactFilter());
6

7 // Get the data. In an MVC application, you might try:

8 $data = $request->getPost(); // for POST data
9 $data = $request->getQuery(); // for GET (or query string) data
10

11 $form->setData($data);
12

13 // Validate the form

14 if ($form->isValid()) {
15 $validatedData = $form->getData();
16 } else {
17 $messages = $form->getMessages();
18 }

You can get the raw data if you want, by accessing the composed input filter.

138.4. Validating Forms 673

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1 $filter = $form->getInputFilter();
2

3 $rawValues = $filter->getRawValues();
4 $nameRawValue = $filter->getRawValue('name');

138.5 Hinting to the Input Filter

Often, youll create elements that you expect to behave in the same way on each usage, and for which youll want
specific filters or validation as well. Since the input filter is a separate object, how can you achieve these latter points?
Because the default form implementation composes a factory, and the default factory composes an input filter factory,
you can have your elements and/or fieldsets hint to the input filter. If no input or input filter is provided in the input
filter for that element, these hints will be retrieved and used to create them.
To do so, one of the following must occur. For elements, they must implement
Zend\InputFilter\InputProviderInterface, which defines a getInputSpecification()
method; for fieldsets, they must implement Zend\InputFilter\InputFilterProviderInterface,
which defines a getInputFilterSpecification() method.
In the case of an element, the getInputSpecification() method should return data to be used by the input
filter factory to create an input. Every HTML5 (email, url, color) elements have a built-in element that use this logic.
For instance, here is how the Zend\Form\Element\Color element is defined:
1 namespace Zend\Form\Element;
2

3 use Zend\Form\Element;
4 use Zend\InputFilter\InputProviderInterface;
5 use Zend\Validator\Regex as RegexValidator;
6 use Zend\Validator\ValidatorInterface;
7

8 class Color extends Element implements InputProviderInterface

9 {
10 /**
11 * Seed attributes
12 *
13 * @var array
14 */
15 protected $attributes = array(
16 'type' => 'color',
17 );
18

19 /**
20 * @var ValidatorInterface
21 */
22 protected $validator;
23

24 /**
25 * Get validator
26 *
27 * @return ValidatorInterface
28 */
29 protected function getValidator()
30 {
31 if (null === $this->validator) {
32 $this->validator = new RegexValidator('/^#[0-9a-fA-F]{6}$/');
33 }

674 Chapter 138. Quick Start

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

34 return $this->validator;
35 }
36

37 /**
38 * Provide default input rules for this element
39 *
40 * Attaches an email validator.
41 *
42 * @return array
43 */
44 public function getInputSpecification()
45 {
46 return array(
47 'name' => $this->getName(),
48 'required' => true,
49 'filters' => array(
50 array('name' => 'Zend\Filter\StringTrim'),
51 array('name' => 'Zend\Filter\StringToLower'),
52 ),
53 'validators' => array(
54 $this->getValidator(),
55 ),
56 );
57 }
58 }

The above would hint to the input filter to create and attach an input named after the element, marking it as required,
and giving it a StringTrim and StringToLower filters and a Regex validator. Note that you can either rely on
the input filter to create filters and validators, or directly instantiate them.
For fieldsets, you do very similarly; the difference is that getInputFilterSpecification() must return
configuration for an input filter.
1 namespace Contact\Form;
2

3 use Zend\Form\Fieldset;
4 use Zend\InputFilter\InputFilterProviderInterface;
5 use Zend\Validator;
6

7 class SenderFieldset extends Fieldset implements InputFilterProviderInterface

8 {
9 public function getInputFilterSpecification()
10 {
11 return array(
12 'name' => array(
13 'required' => true,
14 'filters' => array(
15 array('name' => 'Zend\Filter\StringTrim'),
16 ),
17 'validators' => array(
18 array(
19 'name' => 'Zend\Validator\StringLength',
20 'options' => array(
21 'min' => 3,
22 'max' => 256
23 ),
24 ),
25 ),
26 ),

138.5. Hinting to the Input Filter 675

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

27 'email' => array(

28 'required' => true,
29 'filters' => array(
30 array('name' => 'Zend\Filter\StringTrim'),
31 ),
32 'validators' => array(
33 new Validator\EmailAddress(),
34 ),
35 ),
36 );
37 }
38 }

Specifications are a great way to make forms, fieldsets, and elements re-usable trivially in your applications. In fact,
the Captcha and Csrf elements define specifications in order to ensure they can work without additional user
configuration!

Note: If you set custom input filter specification either in getInputSpecification() or in

getInputFilterSpecification(), the Zend\InputFilter\InputInterface set for that specific
field is reset to the default Zend\InputFilter\Input.
Some form elements may need a particular input filter, like Zend\Form\Element\File: in this case its manda-
tory to specify the type key in your custom specification to match the original one (in ex. for the file element its
Zend\InputFilter\FileInput).

138.6 Binding an object

As noted in the intro, forms in Zend Framework bridge the domain model and the view layer. Lets see that in action.
When you bind() an object to the form, the following happens:
The composed Hydrator calls extract() on the object, and uses the values returned, if any, to populate
the value attributes of all elements. If a form contains a fieldset that itself contains another fieldset, the form
will recursively extract the values.
When isValid() is called, if setData() has not been previously set, the form uses the composed
Hydrator to extract values from the object, and uses those during validation.
If isValid() is successful (and the bindOnValidate flag is enabled, which is true by default), then the
Hydrator will be passed the validated values to use to hydrate the bound object. (If you do not want this
behavior, call setBindOnValidate(FormInterface::BIND_MANUAL)).
If the object implements Zend\InputFilter\InputFilterAwareInterface, the input filter it com-
poses will be used instead of the one composed on the form.
This is easier to understand in practice.
1 $contact = new ArrayObject;
2 $contact['subject'] = '[Contact Form] ';
3 $contact['message'] = 'Type your message here';
4

5 $form = new Contact\ContactForm;

6

7 $form->bind($contact); // form now has default values for

8 // 'subject' and 'message'
9

10 $data = array(

676 Chapter 138. Quick Start

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

11 'name' => 'John Doe',

12 'email' => '[email protected]',
13 'subject' => '[Contact Form] \'sup?',
14 );
15 $form->setData($data);
16

17 if ($form->isValid()) {
18 // $contact now looks like:
19 // array(
20 // 'name' => 'John Doe',
21 // 'email' => '[email protected]',
22 // 'subject' => '[Contact Form] \'sup?',
23 // 'message' => 'Type your message here',
24 // )
25 // only as an ArrayObject
26 }

When an object is bound to the form, calling getData() will return that object by default. If you want to return an
associative array instead, you can pass the FormInterface::VALUES_AS_ARRAY flag to the method.
1 use Zend\Form\FormInterface;
2 $data = $form->getData(FormInterface::VALUES_AS_ARRAY);

Zend Framework ships several standard hydrators, and implementation is as simple as implementing
Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator\HydratorInterface, which looks like this:
1 namespace Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator;
2

3 interface HydratorInterface
4 {
5 /** @return array */
6 public function extract($object);
7 public function hydrate(array $data, $object);
8 }

138.7 Rendering

As noted previously, forms are meant to bridge the domain model and view layer. Weve discussed the domain model
binding, but what about the view?
The form component ships a set of form-specific view helpers. These accept the various form objects, and introspect
them in order to generate markup. Typically, they will inspect the attributes, but in special cases, they may look at
other properties and composed objects.
When preparing to render, you will likely want to call prepare(). This method ensures that certain injections are
done, and will likely in the future munge names to allow for scoped[array][notation].
The simplest view helpers available are Form, FormElement, FormLabel, and FormElementErrors. Lets
use them to display the contact form.
1 <?php
2 // within a view script
3 $form = $this->form;
4 $form->prepare();
5

6 // Assuming the "contact/process" route exists...

7 $form->setAttribute('action', $this->url('contact/process'));

138.7. Rendering 677

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

9 // Set the method attribute for the form

10 $form->setAttribute('method', 'post');
11

12 // Get the form label plugin

13 $formLabel = $this->plugin('formLabel');
14

15 // Render the opening tag

16 echo $this->form()->openTag($form);
17 ?>
18 <div class="form_element">
19 <?php
20 $name = $form->get('name');
21 echo $formLabel->openTag() . $name->getOption('label');
22 echo $this->formInput($name);
23 echo $this->formElementErrors($name);
24 echo $formLabel->closeTag();
25 ?></div>
26

27 <div class="form_element">
28 <?php
29 $subject = $form->get('subject');
30 echo $formLabel->openTag() . $subject->getOption('label');
31 echo $this->formInput($subject);
32 echo $this->formElementErrors($subject);
33 echo $formLabel->closeTag();
34 ?></div>
35

36 <div class="form_element">
37 <?php
38 $message = $form->get('message');
39 echo $formLabel->openTag() . $message->getOption('label');
40 echo $this->formTextarea($message);
41 echo $this->formElementErrors($message);
42 echo $formLabel->closeTag();
43 ?></div>
44

45 <div class="form_element">
46 <?php
47 $captcha = $form->get('captcha');
48 echo $formLabel->openTag() . $captcha->getOption('label');
49 echo $this->formCaptcha($captcha);
50 echo $this->formElementErrors($captcha);
51 echo $formLabel->closeTag();
52 ?></div>
53

54 <?php echo $this->formElement($form->get('security')) ?>

55 <?php echo $this->formElement($form->get('send')) ?>
56

57 <?php echo $this->form()->closeTag() ?>

There are a few things to note about this. First, to prevent confusion in IDEs and editors when syntax highlighting,
we use helpers to both open and close the form and label tags. Second, theres a lot of repetition happening here; we
could easily create a partial view script or a composite helper to reduce boilerplate. Third, note that not all elements
are created equal the CSRF and submit elements dont need labels or error messages necessarily. Finally, note that
the FormElement helper tries to do the right thing it delegates actual markup generation to other view helpers;
however, it can only guess what specific form helper to delegate to based on the list it has. If you introduce new form
view helpers, youll need to extend the FormElement helper, or create your own.

678 Chapter 138. Quick Start

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

However, your view files can quickly become long and repetitive to write. While we do not currently provide a single-
line form view helper (as this reduces the form customization), the simplest and most recommended way to render your
form is by using the FormRow view helper. This view helper automatically renders a label (if present), the element
itself using the FormElement helper, as well as any errors that could arise. Here is the previous form, rewritten to
take advantage of this helper :
1 <?php
2 // within a view script
3 $form = $this->form;
4 $form->prepare();
5

6 // Assuming the "contact/process" route exists...

7 $form->setAttribute('action', $this->url('contact/process'));
8

9 // Set the method attribute for the form

10 $form->setAttribute('method', 'post');
11

12 // Render the opening tag

13 echo $this->form()->openTag($form);
14 ?>
15 <div class="form_element">
16 <?php
17 $name = $form->get('name');
18 echo $this->formRow($name);
19 ?></div>
20

21 <div class="form_element">
22 <?php
23 $subject = $form->get('subject');
24 echo $this->formRow($subject);
25 ?></div>
26

27 <div class="form_element">
28 <?php
29 $message = $form->get('message');
30 echo $this->formRow($message);
31 ?></div>
32

33 <div class="form_element">
34 <?php
35 $captcha = $form->get('captcha');
36 echo $this->formRow($captcha);
37 ?></div>
38

39 <?php echo $this->formElement($form->get('security')) ?>

40 <?php echo $this->formElement($form->get('send')) ?>
41

42 <?php echo $this->form()->closeTag() ?>

Note that FormRow helper automatically prepends the label. If you want it to be rendered after the element itself, you
can pass an optional parameter to the FormRow view helper :
1 <div class="form_element">
2 <?php
3 $name = $form->get('name');
4 echo $this->formRow($name, 'append');
5 ?></div>

138.7. Rendering 679

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

138.7.1 Taking advantage of HTML5 input attributes

HTML5 brings a lot of exciting features, one of them being a simplified client form validations. Adding HTML5
attributes is simple as you just need to add specify the attributes. However, please note that adding those attributes
does not automatically add Zend validators to the forms input filter. You still need to manually add them.
1 $form->add(array(
2 'name' => 'phoneNumber',
3 'options' => array(
4 'label' => 'Your phone number'
5 ),
6 'attributes' => array(
7 'type' => 'tel'
8 'required' => 'required',
9 'pattern' => '^0[1-68]([-. ]?[0-9]{2}){4}$'
10 )
11 ));

View helpers will automatically render those attributes, and hence allowing modern browsers to perform automatic
validation.

Note: Although client validation is nice from a user experience point of view, it has to be used in addition with server
validation, as client validation can be easily fooled.

138.8 Validation Groups

Sometimes you want to validate only a subset of form elements. As an example, lets say were re-using our contact
form over a web service; in this case, the Csrf, Captcha, and submit button elements are not of interest, and
shouldnt be validated.
Zend\Form provides a proxy method to the underlying InputFilters setValidationGroup() method,
allowing us to perform this operation.
1 $form->setValidationGroup('name', 'email', 'subject', 'message');
2 $form->setData($data);
3 if ($form->isValid()) {
4 // Contains only the "name", "email", "subject", and "message" values
5 $data = $form->getData();
6 }

If you later want to reset the form to validate all, simply pass the FormInterface::VALIDATE_ALL flag to the
setValidationGroup() method.
1 use Zend\Form\FormInterface;
2 $form->setValidationGroup(FormInterface::VALIDATE_ALL);

When your form contains nested fieldsets, you can use an array notation to validate only a subset of the fieldsets :
1 $form->setValidationGroup(array(
2 'profile' => array(
3 'firstname',
4 'lastname'
5 )
6 ));
7 $form->setData($data);
8 if ($form->isValid()) {

680 Chapter 138. Quick Start

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

9 // Contains only the "firstname" and "lastname" values from the

10 // "profile" fieldset
11 $data = $form->getData();
12 }

138.9 Using Annotations

Creating a complete forms solution can often be tedious: youll create some domain model object, an input filter
for validating it, a form object for providing a representation for it, and potentially a hydrator for mapping the form
elements and fieldsets to the domain model. Wouldnt it be nice to have a central place to define all of these?
Annotations allow us to solve this problem. You can define the following behaviors with the shipped annotations in
Zend\Form:
AllowEmpty: mark an input as allowing an empty value. This annotation does not require a value.
Attributes: specify the form, fieldset, or element attributes. This annotation requires an associative array of
values, in a JSON object format: @Attributes({"class":"zend_form","type":"text"}).
ComposedObject: specify another object with annotations to parse. Typically, this is used
if a property references another object, which will then be added to your form as an ad-
ditional fieldset. Expects a string value indicating the class for the object being composed
@ComposedObject("Namespace\Model\ComposedObject") or an array to compose a collection:
@ComposedObject({ "target_object":"Namespace\Model\ComposedCollection",
"is_collection":"true", "options":{"count":2}}) target_object is the element to
compose, is_collection flags this as a collection and options can take an array of options to pass into
the collection.
ErrorMessage: specify the error message to return for an element in the case of a failed validation. Expects a
string value.
Exclude: mark a property to exclude from the form or fieldset. This annotation does not require a value.
Filter: provide a specification for a filter to use on a given element. Expects an associative array of values, with a
name key pointing to a string filter name, and an options key pointing to an associative array of filter options
for the constructor: @Filter({"name": "Boolean", "options": {"casting":true}}).
This annotation may be specified multiple times.
Flags: flags to pass to the fieldset or form composing an element or fieldset; these are usually used to specify
the name or priority. The annotation expects an associative array: @Flags({"priority": 100}).
Hydrator: specify the hydrator class to use for this given form or fieldset. A string value is expected.
InputFilter: specify the input filter class to use for this given form or fieldset. A string value is expected.
Input: specify the input class to use for this given element. A string value is expected.
Instance: specify an object class instance to bind to the form or fieldset.
Name: specify the name of the current element, fieldset, or form. A string value is expected.
Object: specify an object class instance to bind to the form or fieldset. (Note: this is deprecated in 2.4.0; use
Instance instead.)
Options: options to pass to the fieldset or form that are used to inform behavior things that are not attributes;
e.g. labels, CAPTCHA adapters, etc. The annotation expects an associative array: @Options({"label":
"Username:"}).
Required: indicate whether an element is required. A boolean value is expected. By default, all elements are
required, so this annotation is mainly present to allow disabling a requirement.

138.9. Using Annotations 681

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Type: indicate the class to use for the current element, fieldset, or form. A string value is expected.
Validator: provide a specification for a validator to use on a given element. Expects an associative array of val-
ues, with a name key pointing to a string validator name, and an options key pointing to an associative array
of validator options for the constructor: @Validator({"name": "StringLength", "options":
{"min":3, "max": 25}}). This annotation may be specified multiple times.
To use annotations, you simply include them in your class and/or property docblocks. Annotation names will be
resolved according to the import statements in your class; as such, you can make them as long or as short as you want
depending on what you import.

Note: Form annotations require Doctrine\Common, which contains an annotation parsering engine. The simplest
way to install Doctrine\Common is if you are using Composer; simply update your composer.json and add
the following line to the require section:
1 "doctrine/common": ">=2.1",

Then run php composer.phar update to install the dependency.

If youre not using Composer, visit the Doctrine project website for more details on installation.

Heres a simple example.

1 use Zend\Form\Annotation;
2

3 /**
4 * @Annotation\Name("user")
5 * @Annotation\Hydrator("Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator\ObjectProperty")
6 */
7 class User
8 {
9 /**
10 * @Annotation\Exclude()
11 */
12 public $id;
13

14 /**
15 * @Annotation\Filter({"name":"StringTrim"})
16 * @Annotation\Validator({"name":"StringLength", "options":{"min":1, "max":25}})
17 * @Annotation\Validator({"name":"Regex", "options":{"pattern":"/^[a-zA-Z][a-zA-Z0-9_-]{0,24}$/"}
18 * @Annotation\Attributes({"type":"text"})
19 * @Annotation\Options({"label":"Username:"})
20 */
21 public $username;
22

23 /**
24 * @Annotation\Type("Zend\Form\Element\Email")
25 * @Annotation\Options({"label":"Your email address:"})
26 */
27 public $email;
28 }

The above will hint to the annotation build to create a form with name user, which uses the hydrator
Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator\ObjectProperty. That form will have two elements, username and email.
The username element will have an associated input that has a StringTrim filter, and two validators: a
StringLength validator indicating the username is between 1 and 25 characters, and a Regex validator assert-
ing it follows a specific accepted pattern. The form element itself will have an attribute type with value text (a text
element), and a label Username:. The email element will be of type Zend\Form\Element\Email, and have
the label Your email address:.

682 Chapter 138. Quick Start

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

To use the above, we need Zend\Form\Annotation\AnnotationBuilder:

1 use Zend\Form\Annotation\AnnotationBuilder;
2

3 $builder = new AnnotationBuilder();

4 $form = $builder->createForm('User');

At this point, you have a form with the appropriate hydrator attached, an input filter with the appropriate inputs, and
all elements.

Note: Youre not done

In all likelihood, youll need to add some more elements to the form you construct. For example, youll want a submit
button, and likely a CSRF-protection element. We recommend creating a fieldset with common elements such as these
that you can then attach to the form you build via annotations.

138.9. Using Annotations 683

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

684 Chapter 138. Quick Start

 CHAPTER 139

Form Collections

Often, fieldsets or elements in your forms will correspond to other domain objects. In some cases, they may correspond
to collections of domain objects. In this latter case, in terms of user interfaces, you may want to add items dynamically
in the user interface a great example is adding tasks to a task list.
This document is intended to demonstrate these features. To do so, we first need to define some domain objects that
well be using.
1 namespace Application\Entity;
2

3 class Product
4 {
5 /**
6 * @var string
7 */
8 protected $name;
9

10 /**
11 * @var int
12 */
13 protected $price;
14

15 /**
16 * @var Brand
17 */
18 protected $brand;
19

20 /**
21 * @var array
22 */
23 protected $categories;
24

25 /**
26 * @param string $name
27 * @return Product
28 */
29 public function setName($name)
30 {
31 $this->name = $name;
32 return $this;
33 }
34

35 /**
36 * @return string

685
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

37 */
38 public function getName()
39 {
40 return $this->name;
41 }
42

43 /**
44 * @param int $price
45 * @return Product
46 */
47 public function setPrice($price)
48 {
49 $this->price = $price;
50 return $this;
51 }
52

53 /**
54 * @return int
55 */
56 public function getPrice()
57 {
58 return $this->price;
59 }
60

61 /**
62 * @param Brand $brand
63 * @return Product
64 */
65 public function setBrand(Brand $brand)
66 {
67 $this->brand = $brand;
68 return $this;
69 }
70

71 /**
72 * @return Brand
73 */
74 public function getBrand()
75 {
76 return $this->brand;
77 }
78

79 /**
80 * @param array $categories
81 * @return Product
82 */
83 public function setCategories(array $categories)
84 {
85 $this->categories = $categories;
86 return $this;
87 }
88

89 /**
90 * @return array
91 */
92 public function getCategories()
93 {
94 return $this->categories;

686 Chapter 139. Form Collections

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

95 }
96 }
97

98 class Brand
99 {
100 /**
101 * @var string
102 */
103 protected $name;
104

105 /**
106 * @var string
107 */
108 protected $url;
109

110 /**
111 * @param string $name
112 * @return Brand
113 */
114 public function setName($name)
115 {
116 $this->name = $name;
117 return $this;
118 }
119

120 /**
121 * @return string
122 */
123 public function getName()
124 {
125 return $this->name;
126 }
127

128 /**
129 * @param string $url
130 * @return Brand
131 */
132 public function setUrl($url)
133 {
134 $this->url = $url;
135 return $this;
136 }
137

138 /**
139 * @return string
140 */
141 public function getUrl()
142 {
143 return $this->url;
144 }
145 }
146

147 class Category

148 {
149 /**
150 * @var string
151 */
152 protected $name;

687
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

153

154 /**
155 * @param string $name
156 * @return Category
157 */
158 public function setName($name)
159 {
160 $this->name = $name;
161 return $this;
162 }
163

164 /**
165 * @return string
166 */
167 public function getName()
168 {
169 return $this->name;
170 }
171 }

As you can see, this is really simple code. A Product has two scalar properties (name and price), a OneToOne
relationship (one product has one brand), and a OneToMany relationship (one product has many categories).

139.1 Creating Fieldsets

The first step is to create three fieldsets. Each fieldset will contain all the fields and relationships for a specific entity.
Here is the Brand fieldset:
1 namespace Application\Form;
2

3 use Application\Entity\Brand;
4 use Zend\Form\Fieldset;
5 use Zend\InputFilter\InputFilterProviderInterface;
6 use Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator\ClassMethods as ClassMethodsHydrator;
7

8 class BrandFieldset extends Fieldset implements InputFilterProviderInterface

9 {
10 public function __construct()
11 {
12 parent::__construct('brand');
13

14 $this
15 ->setHydrator(new ClassMethodsHydrator(false))
16 ->setObject(new Brand())
17 ;
18

19 $this->add(array(
20 'name' => 'name',
21 'options' => array(
22 'label' => 'Name of the brand',
23 ),
24 'attributes' => array(
25 'required' => 'required',
26 ),
27 ));
28

688 Chapter 139. Form Collections

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

29 $this->add(array(
30 'name' => 'url',
31 'type' => 'Zend\Form\Element\Url',
32 'options' => array(
33 'label' => 'Website of the brand',
34 ),
35 'attributes' => array(
36 'required' => 'required',
37 ),
38 ));
39 }
40

41 /**
42 * @return array
43 */
44 public function getInputFilterSpecification()
45 {
46 return array(
47 'name' => array(
48 'required' => true,
49 ),
50 );
51 }
52 }

We can discover some new things here. As you can see, the fieldset calls the method setHydrator(), giving it a
ClassMethods hydrator, and the setObject() method, giving it an empty instance of a concrete Brand object.
When the data will be validated, the Form will automatically iterate through all the field sets it contains, and automat-
ically populate the sub-objects, in order to return a complete entity.
Also notice that the Url element has a type of Zend\Form\Element\Url. This information will be used to
validate the input field. You dont need to manually add filters or validators for this input as that element provides a
reasonable input specification.
Finally, getInputFilterSpecification() gives the specification for the remaining input (name), indicat-
ing that this input is required. Note that required in the array attributes (when elements are added) is only meant to
add the required attribute to the form markup (and therefore has semantic meaning only).
Here is the Category fieldset:
1 namespace Application\Form;
2

3 use Application\Entity\Category;
4 use Zend\Form\Fieldset;
5 use Zend\InputFilter\InputFilterProviderInterface;
6 use Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator\ClassMethods as ClassMethodsHydrator;
7

8 class CategoryFieldset extends Fieldset implements InputFilterProviderInterface

9 {
10 public function __construct()
11 {
12 parent::__construct('category');
13

14 $this
15 ->setHydrator(new ClassMethodsHydrator(false))
16 ->setObject(new Category())
17 ;
18

139.1. Creating Fieldsets 689

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

19 $this->setLabel('Category');
20

21 $this->add(array(
22 'name' => 'name',
23 'options' => array(
24 'label' => 'Name of the category',
25 ),
26 'attributes' => array(
27 'required' => 'required',
28 ),
29 ));
30 }
31

32 /**
33 * @return array
34 */
35 public function getInputFilterSpecification()
36 {
37 return array(
38 'name' => array(
39 'required' => true,
40 ),
41 );
42 }
43 }

Nothing new here.

And finally the Product fieldset:
1 namespace Application\Form;
2

3 use Application\Entity\Product;
4 use Zend\Form\Fieldset;
5 use Zend\InputFilter\InputFilterProviderInterface;
6 use Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator\ClassMethods as ClassMethodsHydrator;
7

8 class ProductFieldset extends Fieldset implements InputFilterProviderInterface

9 {
10 public function __construct()
11 {
12 parent::__construct('product');
13

14 $this
15 ->setHydrator(new ClassMethodsHydrator(false))
16 ->setObject(new Product())
17 ;
18

19 $this->add(array(
20 'name' => 'name',
21 'options' => array(
22 'label' => 'Name of the product',
23 ),
24 'attributes' => array(
25 'required' => 'required',
26 ),
27 ));
28

29 $this->add(array(

690 Chapter 139. Form Collections

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

30 'name' => 'price',

31 'options' => array(
32 'label' => 'Price of the product',
33 ),
34 'attributes' => array(
35 'required' => 'required',
36 ),
37 ));
38

39 $this->add(array(
40 'type' => 'Application\Form\BrandFieldset',
41 'name' => 'brand',
42 'options' => array(
43 'label' => 'Brand of the product',
44 ),
45 ));
46

47 $this->add(array(
48 'type' => 'Zend\Form\Element\Collection',
49 'name' => 'categories',
50 'options' => array(
51 'label' => 'Please choose categories for this product',
52 'count' => 2,
53 'should_create_template' => true,
54 'allow_add' => true,
55 'target_element' => array(
56 'type' => 'Application\Form\CategoryFieldset',
57 ),
58 ),
59 ));
60 }
61

62 /**
63 * Should return an array specification compatible with
64 * {@link Zend\InputFilter\Factory::createInputFilter()}.
65 *
66 * @return array
67 */
68 public function getInputFilterSpecification()
69 {
70 return array(
71 'name' => array(
72 'required' => true,
73 ),
74 'price' => array(
75 'required' => true,
76 'validators' => array(
77 array(
78 'name' => 'Float',
79 ),
80 ),
81 ),
82 );
83 }
84 }

We have a lot of new things here!

First, notice how the brand element is added: we specify it to be of type Application\Form\BrandFieldset.

139.1. Creating Fieldsets 691

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

This is how you handle a OneToOne relationship. When the form is validated, the BrandFieldset will first be
populated, and will return a Brand entity (as we have specified a ClassMethods hydrator, and bound the fieldset
to a Brand entity using the setObject() method). This Brand entity will then be used to populate the Product
entity by calling the setBrand() method.
The next element shows you how to handle OneToMany relationship. The type is
Zend\Form\Element\Collection, which is a specialized element to handle such cases. As you can
see, the name of the element (categories) perfectly matches the name of the property in the Product entity.
This element has a few interesting options:
count: this is how many times the element (in this case a category) has to be rendered. Weve set it to two in
this examples.
should_create_template: if set to true, it will generate a template markup in a <span> element, in
order to simplify adding new element on the fly (we will speak about this one later).
allow_add: if set to true (which is the default), dynamically added elements will be retrieved and validated;
otherwise, they will be completely ignored. This, of course, depends on what you want to do.
target_element: this is either an element or, as this is the case in this example, an array that describes the
element or fieldset that will be used in the collection. In this case, the target_element is a Category
fieldset.

139.2 The Form Element

So far, so good. We now have our field sets in place. But those are field sets, not forms. And only Form instances can
be validated. So here is the form :
1 namespace Application\Form;
2

3 use Zend\Form\Form;
4 use Zend\InputFilter\InputFilter;
5 use Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator\ClassMethods as ClassMethodsHydrator;
6

7 class CreateProduct extends Form

8 {
9 public function __construct()
10 {
11 parent::__construct('create_product');
12

13 $this
14 ->setAttribute('method', 'post')
15 ->setHydrator(new ClassMethodsHydrator(false))
16 ->setInputFilter(new InputFilter())
17 ;
18

19 $this->add(array(
20 'type' => 'Application\Form\ProductFieldset',
21 'options' => array(
22 'use_as_base_fieldset' => true,
23 ),
24 ));
25

26 $this->add(array(
27 'type' => 'Zend\Form\Element\Csrf',
28 'name' => 'csrf',
29 ));

692 Chapter 139. Form Collections

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

30

31 $this->add(array(
32 'name' => 'submit',
33 'attributes' => array(
34 'type' => 'submit',
35 'value' => 'Send',
36 ),
37 ));
38 }
39 }

CreateProduct is quite simple, as it only defines a Product fieldset, as well as some other useful fields (CSRF
for security, and a Submit button).
Notice the use_as_base_fieldset option. This option is here to say to the form: hey, the object I bind to you
is, in fact, bound to the fieldset that is the base fieldset. This will be to true most of the times.
Whats cool with this approach is that each entity can have its own Fieldset and can be reused. You describe the
elements, the filters, and validators for each entity only once, and the concrete Form instance will only compose those
fieldsets. You no longer have to add the username input to every form that deals with users!

139.3 The Controller

Now, lets create the action in the controller:

1 /**
2 * @return array
3 */
4 public function indexAction()
5 {
6 $form = new CreateProduct();
7 $product = new Product();
8 $form->bind($product);
9

10 $request = $this->getRequest();
11 if ($request->isPost()) {
12 $form->setData($request->getPost());
13

14 if ($form->isValid()) {
15 var_dump($product);
16 }
17 }
18

19 return array(
20 'form' => $form,
21 );
22 }

This is super easy. Nothing to do in the controllers. All the magic is done behind the scene.

139.4 The View

And finally, the view:

139.3. The Controller 693

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1 <?php
2 $form->setAttribute('action', $this->url('home'))
3 ->prepare();
4

5 echo $this->form()->openTag($form);
6

7 $product = $form->get('product');
8

9 echo $this->formRow($product->get('name'));
10 echo $this->formRow($product->get('price'));
11 echo $this->formCollection($product->get('categories'));
12

13 $brand = $product->get('brand');
14

15 echo $this->formRow($brand->get('name'));
16 echo $this->formRow($brand->get('url'));
17

18 echo $this->formHidden($form->get('csrf'));
19 echo $this->formElement($form->get('submit'));
20

21 echo $this->form()->closeTag();

A few new things here :

the prepare() method. You must call it prior to rendering anything in the view (this function is only meant
to be called in views, not in controllers).
the FormRow helper renders a label (if present), the input itself, and errors.
the FormCollection helper will iterate through every element in the collection, and render every element
with the FormRow helper (you may specify an alternate helper if desired, using the setElementHelper()
method on that FormCollection helper instance). If you need more control about the way you render your
forms, you can iterate through the elements in the collection, and render them manually one by one.
Here is the result:

As you can see, collections are wrapped inside a fieldset, and every item in the collection is itself wrapped in the field-
set. In fact, the Collection element uses label for each item in the collection, while the label of the Collection
element itself is used as the legend of the fieldset. You must have a label on every element in order to use this feature.
If you dont want the fieldset created, but just the elements within it, simply add a boolean false as the second
parameter of the FormCollection view helper.
If you validate, all elements will show errors (this is normal, as weve marked them as required). As soon as the form
is valid, this is what we get :

694 Chapter 139. Form Collections

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

As you can see, the bound object is completely filled, not with arrays, but with objects!
But thats not all.

139.5 Adding New Elements Dynamically

Remember the should_create_template? We are going to use it now.

Often, forms are not completely static. In our case, lets say that we dont want only two categories, but we want the
user to be able to add other ones at runtime. Zend\Form has this capability. First, lets see what it generates when
we ask it to create a template:

As you can see, the collection generates two fieldsets (the two categories) plus a span with a data-template at-
tribute that contains the full HTML code to copy to create a new element in the collection. Of course __index__ (this
is the placeholder generated) has to be changed to a valid value. Currently, we have 2 elements (categories[0]
and categories[1], so __index__ has to be changed to 2.
If you want, this placeholder (__index__ is the default) can be changed using the template_placeholder
option key:
1 $this->add(array(
2 'type' => 'Zend\Form\Element\Collection',
3 'name' => 'categories',
4 'options' => array(
5 'label' => 'Please choose categories for this product',
6 'count' => 2,
7 'should_create_template' => true,
8 'template_placeholder' => '__placeholder__',
9 'target_element' => array(
10 'type' => 'Application\Form\CategoryFieldset',
11 ),
12 ),
13 ));

139.5. Adding New Elements Dynamically 695

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

First, lets add a small button Add new category anywhere in the form:
1 <button onclick="return add_category()">Add a new category</button>

The add_category function is fairly simple:

1. First, count the number of elements we already have.
2. Get the template from the spans data-template attribute.
3. Change the placeholder to a valid index.
4. Add the element to the DOM.
Here is the code:
1 <script>
2 function add_category() {
3 var currentCount = $('form > fieldset > fieldset').length;
4 var template = $('form > fieldset > span').data('template');
5 template = template.replace(/__index__/g, currentCount);
6

7 $('form > fieldset').append(template);

8

9 return false;
10 }
11 </script>

(Note: the above example assumes $() is defined, and equivalent to jQuerys $() function, Dojos dojo.query,
etc.)
One small remark about the template.replace: the example uses currentCount and not currentCount
+ 1, as the indices are zero-based (so, if we have two elements in the collection, the third one will have the index 2).
Now, if we validate the form, it will automatically take into account this new element by validating it, filtering it and
retrieving it:

Of course, if you dont want to allow adding elements in a collection, you must set the option allow_add to false.
This way, even if new elements are added, they wont be validated and hence, not added to the entity. Also, if we dont
want elements to be added, we dont need the data template, either. Heres how you do it:

696 Chapter 139. Form Collections

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1 $this->add(array(
2 'type' => 'Zend\Form\Element\Collection',
3 'name' => 'categories',
4 'options' => array(
5 'label' => 'Please choose categories for this product',
6 'count' => 2,
7 'should_create_template' => false,
8 'allow_add' => false,
9 'target_element' => array(
10 'type' => 'Application\Form\CategoryFieldset',
11 ),
12 ),
13 ));

There are some limitations to this capability:

Although you can add new elements and remove them, you CANNOT remove more elements in a collection
than the initial count (for instance, if your code specifies count == 2, you will be able to add a third one
and remove it, but you wont be able to remove any others. If the initial count is 2, you must have at least two
elements.
Dynamically added elements have to be added at the end of the collection. They can be added anywhere (these
elements will still be validated and inserted into the entity), but if the validation fails, this newly added element
will be automatically be replaced at the end of the collection.

139.6 Validation groups for fieldsets and collection

Validation groups allow you to validate a subset of fields.

As an example, although the Brand entity has a URL property, we dont want the user to specify it in the creation
form (but may wish to later in the Edit Product form, for instance). Lets update the view to remove the URL input:
1 <?php
2

3 $form
4 ->setAttribute('action', $this->url('home'))
5 ->prepare()
6 ;
7

8 echo $this->form()->openTag($form);
9

10 $product = $form->get('product');
11

12 echo $this->formRow($product->get('name'));
13 echo $this->formRow($product->get('price'));
14 echo $this->formCollection($product->get('categories'));
15

16 $brand = $product->get('brand');
17

18 echo $this->formRow($brand->get('name'));
19

20 echo $this->formHidden($form->get('csrf'));
21 echo $this->formElement($form->get('submit'));
22

23 echo $this->form()->closeTag();

This is what we get:

139.6. Validation groups for fieldsets and collection 697

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

The URL input has disappeared, but even if we fill every input, the form wont validate. In fact, this is normal. We
specified in the input filter that the URL is a required field, so if the form does not have it, it wont validate, even
though we didnt add it to the view!
Of course, you could create a BrandFieldsetWithoutURL fieldset, but of course this is not recommended, as a
lot of code will be duplicated.
The solution: validation groups. A validation group is specified in a Form object (hence, in our case, in the
CreateProduct form) by giving an array of all the elements we want to validate. Our CreateProduct now
looks like this:
1 namespace Application\Form;
2

3 use Zend\Form\Form;
4 use Zend\InputFilter\InputFilter;
5 use Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator\ClassMethods as ClassMethodsHydrator;
6

7 class CreateProduct extends Form

8 {
9 public function __construct()
10 {
11 parent::__construct('create_product');
12

13 $this
14 ->setAttribute('method', 'post')
15 ->setHydrator(new ClassMethodsHydrator())
16 ->setInputFilter(new InputFilter())
17 ;
18

19 $this->add(array(
20 'type' => 'Application\Form\ProductFieldset',
21 'options' => array(
22 'use_as_base_fieldset' => true,
23 ),

698 Chapter 139. Form Collections

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

24 ));
25

26 $this->add(array(
27 'type' => 'Zend\Form\Element\Csrf',
28 'name' => 'csrf',
29 ));
30

31 $this->add(array(
32 'name' => 'submit',
33 'attributes' => array(
34 'type' => 'submit',
35 'value' => 'Send',
36 ),
37 ));
38

39 $this->setValidationGroup(array(
40 'csrf',
41 'product' => array(
42 'name',
43 'price',
44 'brand' => array(
45 'name',
46 ),
47 'categories' => array(
48 'name',
49 ),
50 ),
51 ));
52 }
53 }

Of course, dont forget to add the CSRF element, as we want it to be validated too (but notice that I didnt write the
submit element, as we dont care about it). You can recursively select the elements you want.
There is one simple limitation currently: validation groups for collections are set on a per-collection basis, not per-
element in a collection basis. This means you cannot say, validate the name input for the first element of the categories
collection, but dont validate it for the second one. But, honestly, this is really an edge-case.
Now, the form validates (and the URL is set to null as we didnt specify it).

139.6. Validation groups for fieldsets and collection 699

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

700 Chapter 139. Form Collections

 CHAPTER 140

File Uploading

Zend Framework provides support for file uploading by using features in Zend\Form, Zend\InputFilter,
Zend\Validator, Zend\Filter, and Zend\ProgressBar. These reusable framework components provide
a convenient and secure way for handling file uploads in your projects.

Note: If the reader has experience with file uploading in Zend Framework v1.x, he/she will notice some major
differences. Zend_File\Transfer has been deprecated in favor of using the standard ZF2 Zend\Form and
Zend\InputFilter features.

Note: The file upload features described here are specifically for forms using the POST method. Zend Framework
itself does not currently provide specific support for handling uploads via the PUT method, but it is possible with PHP.
See the PUT Method Support in the PHP documentation for more information.

140.1 Standard Example

Handling file uploads is essentially the same as how you would use Zend\Form for form processing, but with some
slight caveats that will be described below.
In this example we will:
Define a Form for backend validation and filtering.
Create a view template with a <form> containing a file input.
Process the form within a Controller action.

140.1.1 The Form and InputFilter

Here we define a Zend\Form\Element\File input in a Form class named UploadForm.

1 // File: UploadForm.php
2

3 use Zend\Form\Element;
4 use Zend\Form\Form;
5

6 class UploadForm extends Form

7 {
8 public function __construct($name = null, $options = array())
9 {

701
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

10 parent::__construct($name, $options);
11 $this->addElements();
12 }
13

14 public function addElements()

15 {
16 // File Input
17 $file = new Element\File('image-file');
18 $file->setLabel('Avatar Image Upload')
19 ->setAttribute('id', 'image-file');
20 $this->add($file);
21 }
22 }

The File element provides some automatic features that happen behind the scenes:
The forms enctype will automatically be set to multipart/form-data when the form prepare()
method is called.
The file elements default input specification will create the correct Input type: Zend\InputFilter\FileInput.
The FileInput will automatically prepend an UploadFile Validator, to securely validate that the file is actu-
ally an uploaded file, and to report other types of upload errors to the user.

140.1.2 The View Template

In the view template we render the <form>, a file input (with label and errors), and a submit button.
1 // File: upload-form.phtml
2 <?php $form->prepare(); // The correct enctype is set here ?>
3 <?php echo $this->form()->openTag($form); ?>
4

5 <div class="form-element">
6 <?php $fileElement = $form->get('image-file'); ?>
7 <?php echo $this->formLabel($fileElement); ?>
8 <?php echo $this->formFile($fileElement); ?>
9 <?php echo $this->formElementErrors($fileElement); ?>
10 </div>
11

12 <button>Submit</button>
13

14 <?php echo $this->form()->closeTag(); ?>

When rendered, the HTML should look similar to:

1 <form name="upload-form" id="upload-form" method="post" enctype="multipart/form-data">
2 <div class="form-element">
3 <label for="image-file">Avatar Image Upload</label>
4 <input type="file" name="image-file" id="image-file">
5 </div>
6

7 <button>Submit</button>
8 </form>

140.1.3 The Controller Action

For the final step, we will instantiate the UploadForm and process any postbacks in a Controller action.

702 Chapter 140. File Uploading

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

The form processing in the controller action will be similar to normal forms, except that you must merge the $_FILES
information in the request with the other post data.
1 // File: MyController.php
2

3 public function uploadFormAction()

4 {
5 $form = new UploadForm('upload-form');
6

7 $request = $this->getRequest();
8 if ($request->isPost()) {
9 // Make certain to merge the files info!
10 $post = array_merge_recursive(
11 $request->getPost()->toArray(),
12 $request->getFiles()->toArray()
13 );
14

15 $form->setData($post);
16 if ($form->isValid()) {
17 $data = $form->getData();
18 // Form is valid, save the form!
19 return $this->redirect()->toRoute('upload-form/success');
20 }
21 }
22

23 return array('form' => $form);

24 }

Upon a successful file upload, $form->getData() would return:

1 array(1) {
2 ["image-file"] => array(5) {
3 ["name"] => string(11) "myimage.png"
4 ["type"] => string(9) "image/png"
5 ["tmp_name"] => string(22) "/private/tmp/phpgRXd58"
6 ["error"] => int(0)
7 ["size"] => int(14908679)
8 }
9 }

Note: It is suggested that you always use the Zend\Http\PhpEnvironment\Request object to retrieve and
merge the $_FILES information with the form, instead of using $_FILES directly.
This is due to how the file information is mapped in the $_FILES array:
1 // A $_FILES array with single input and multiple files:
2 array(1) {
3 ["image-file"]=>array(2) {
4 ["name"]=>array(2) {
5 [0]=>string(9)"file0.txt"
6 [1]=>string(9)"file1.txt"
7 }
8 ["type"]=>array(2) {
9 [0]=>string(10)"text/plain"
10 [1]=>string(10)"text/html"
11 }
12 }
13 }
14

140.1. Standard Example 703

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

15 // How Zend\Http\PhpEnvironment\Request remaps the $_FILES array:

16 array(1) {
17 ["image-file"]=>array(2) {
18 [0]=>array(2) {
19 ["name"]=>string(9)"file0.txt"
20 ["type"]=>string(10)"text/plain"
21 },
22 [1]=>array(2) {
23 ["name"]=>string(9)"file1.txt"
24 ["type"]=>string(10)"text/html"
25 }
26 }
27 }

Zend\InputFilter\FileInput expects the file data be in this re-mapped array format.

140.2 File Post-Redirect-Get Plugin

When using other standard form inputs (i.e. text, checkbox, select, etc.) along with file inputs in a Form, you
can encounter a situation where some inputs may become invalid and the user must re-select the file and re-upload.
PHP will delete uploaded files from the temporary directory at the end of the request if it has not been moved away or
renamed. Re-uploading a valid file each time another form input is invalid is inefficient and annoying to users.
One strategy to get around this is to split the form into multiple forms. One form for the file upload inputs and another
for the other standard inputs.
When you cannot separate the forms, the File Post-Redirect-Get Controller Plugin can be used to manage the file
inputs and save off valid uploads until the entire form is valid.
Changing our earlier example to use the fileprg plugin will require two changes.
1. Adding a RenameUpload filter to our forms file input, with details on where the valid files should be stored:
1 // File: UploadForm.php
2

3 use Zend\InputFilter;
4 use Zend\Form\Element;
5 use Zend\Form\Form;
6

7 class UploadForm extends Form

8 {
9 public function __construct($name = null, $options = array())
10 {
11 parent::__construct($name, $options);
12 $this->addElements();
13 $this->addInputFilter();
14 }
15

16 public function addElements()

17 {
18 // File Input
19 $file = new Element\File('image-file');
20 $file->setLabel('Avatar Image Upload')
21 ->setAttribute('id', 'image-file');
22 $this->add($file);
23 }

704 Chapter 140. File Uploading

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

24

25 public function addInputFilter()

26 {
27 $inputFilter = new InputFilter\InputFilter();
28

29 // File Input
30 $fileInput = new InputFilter\FileInput('image-file');
31 $fileInput->setRequired(true);
32 $fileInput->getFilterChain()->attachByName(
33 'filerenameupload',
34 array(
35 'target' => './data/tmpuploads/avatar.png',
36 'randomize' => true,
37 )
38 );
39 $inputFilter->add($fileInput);
40

41 $this->setInputFilter($inputFilter);
42 }
43 }

The filerenameupload options above would cause an uploaded file to be renamed and moved to:
./data/tmpuploads/avatar_4b3403665fea6.png.
See the RenameUpload filter documentation for more information on its supported options.
2. And, changing the Controller action to use the fileprg plugin:
1 // File: MyController.php
2

3 public function uploadFormAction()

4 {
5 $form = new UploadForm('upload-form');
6 $tempFile = null;
7

8 $prg = $this->fileprg($form);
9 if ($prg instanceof \Zend\Http\PhpEnvironment\Response) {
10 return $prg; // Return PRG redirect response
11 } elseif (is_array($prg)) {
12 if ($form->isValid()) {
13 $data = $form->getData();
14 // Form is valid, save the form!
15 return $this->redirect()->toRoute('upload-form/success');
16 } else {
17 // Form not valid, but file uploads might be valid...
18 // Get the temporary file information to show the user in the view
19 $fileErrors = $form->get('image-file')->getMessages();
20 if (empty($fileErrors)) {
21 $tempFile = $form->get('image-file')->getValue();
22 }
23 }
24 }
25

26 return array(
27 'form' => $form,
28 'tempFile' => $tempFile,
29 );
30 }

Behind the scenes, the FilePRG plugin will:

140.2. File Post-Redirect-Get Plugin 705

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Run the Forms filters, namely the RenameUpload filter, to move the files out of temporary storage.
Store the valid POST data in the session across requests.
Change the required flag of any file inputs that had valid uploads to false. This is so that form re-
submissions without uploads will not cause validation errors.

Note: In the case of a partially valid form, it is up to the developer whether to notify the user that files have been
uploaded or not. For example, you may wish to hide the form input and/or display the file information. These things
would be implementation details in the view or in a custom view helper. Just note that neither the FilePRG plugin
nor the formFile view helper will do any automatic notifications or view changes when files have been successfully
uploaded.

140.3 HTML5 Multi-File Uploads

With HTML5 we are able to select multiple files from a single file input using the multiple attribute. Not all
browsers support multiple file uploads, but the file input will safely remain a single file upload for those browsers that
do not support the feature.
To enable multiple file uploads in Zend Framework, just set the file elements multiple attribute to true:
1 // File: UploadForm.php
2

3 use Zend\InputFilter;
4 use Zend\Form\Element;
5 use Zend\Form\Form;
6

7 class UploadForm extends Form

8 {
9 public function __construct($name = null, $options = array())
10 {
11 parent::__construct($name, $options);
12 $this->addElements();
13 $this->addInputFilter();
14 }
15

16 public function addElements()

17 {
18 // File Input
19 $file = new Element\File('image-file');
20 $file->setLabel('Avatar Image Upload')
21 ->setAttribute('id', 'image-file')
22 ->setAttribute('multiple', true); // That's it
23 $this->add($file);
24 }
25

26 public function addInputFilter()

27 {
28 $inputFilter = new InputFilter\InputFilter();
29

30 // File Input
31 $fileInput = new InputFilter\FileInput('image-file');
32 $fileInput->setRequired(true);
33

34 // You only need to define validators and filters

35 // as if only one file was being uploaded. All files

706 Chapter 140. File Uploading

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

36 // will be run through the same validators and filters

37 // automatically.
38 $fileInput->getValidatorChain()
39 ->attachByName('filesize', array('max' => 204800))
40 ->attachByName('filemimetype', array('mimeType' => 'image/png,image/x-png'))
41 ->attachByName('fileimagesize', array('maxWidth' => 100, 'maxHeight' => 100));
42

43 // All files will be renamed, i.e.:

44 // ./data/tmpuploads/avatar_4b3403665fea6.png,
45 // ./data/tmpuploads/avatar_5c45147660fb7.png
46 $fileInput->getFilterChain()->attachByName(
47 'filerenameupload',
48 array(
49 'target' => './data/tmpuploads/avatar.png',
50 'randomize' => true,
51 )
52 );
53 $inputFilter->add($fileInput);
54

55 $this->setInputFilter($inputFilter);
56 }
57 }

You do not need to do anything special with the validators and filters to support multiple file uploads. All of the
files that are uploaded will have the same validators and filters run against them automatically (from logic within
FileInput). You only need to define them as if one file was being uploaded.

140.4 Upload Progress

While pure client-based upload progress meters are starting to become available with HTML5s Progress Events, not
all browsers have XMLHttpRequest level 2 support. For upload progress to work in a greater number of browsers (IE9
and below), you must use a server-side progress solution.
Zend\ProgressBar\Upload provides handlers that can give you the actual state of a file upload in progress.
To use this feature you need to choose one of the Upload Progress Handlers (APC, uploadprogress, or Session) and
ensure that your server setup has the appropriate extension or feature enabled.

Note: For this example we will use PHP 5.4s Session progress handler
PHP 5.4 is required and you may need to verify these php.ini settings for it to work:
file_uploads = On
post_max_size = 50M
upload_max_filesize = 50M
session.upload_progress.enabled = On
session.upload_progress.freq = "1%"
session.upload_progress.min_freq = "1"
; Also make certain 'upload_tmp_dir' is writable

When uploading a file with a form POST, you must also include the progress identifier in a hidden input. The File
Upload Progress View Helpers provide a convenient way to add the hidden input based on your handler type.
1 // File: upload-form.phtml
2 <?php $form->prepare(); ?>
3 <?php echo $this->form()->openTag($form); ?>
4 <?php echo $this->formFileSessionProgress(); // Must come before the file input! ?>

140.4. Upload Progress 707

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

6 <div class="form-element">
7 <?php $fileElement = $form->get('image-file'); ?>
8 <?php echo $this->formLabel($fileElement); ?>
9 <?php echo $this->formFile($fileElement); ?>
10 <?php echo $this->formElementErrors($fileElement); ?>
11 </div>
12

13 <button>Submit</button>
14

15 <?php echo $this->form()->closeTag(); ?>

When rendered, the HTML should look similar to:

1 <form name="upload-form" id="upload-form" method="post" enctype="multipart/form-data">
2 <input type="hidden" id="progress_key" name="PHP_SESSION_UPLOAD_PROGRESS" value="12345abcde">
3

4 <div class="form-element">
5 <label for="image-file">Avatar Image Upload</label>
6 <input type="file" name="image-file" id="image-file">
7 </div>
8

9 <button>Submit</button>
10 </form>

There are a few different methods for getting progress information to the browser (long vs. short polling). Here we
will use short polling since it is simpler and less taxing on server resources, though keep in mind it is not as responsive
as long polling.
When our form is submitted via AJAX, the browser will continuously poll the server for upload progress.
The following is an example Controller action which provides the progress information:
1 // File: MyController.php
2

3 public function uploadProgressAction()

4 {
5 $id = $this->params()->fromQuery('id', null);
6 $progress = new \Zend\ProgressBar\Upload\SessionProgress();
7 return new \Zend\View\Model\JsonModel($progress->getProgress($id));
8 }
9

10 // Returns JSON
11 //{
12 // "total" : 204800,
13 // "current" : 10240,
14 // "rate" : 1024,
15 // "message" : "10kB / 200kB",
16 // "done" : false
17 //}

Warning: This is not the most efficient way of providing upload progress, since each polling request must go
through the Zend Framework bootstrap process. A better example would be to use a standalone php file in the
public folder that bypasses the MVC bootstrapping and only uses the essential Zend\ProgressBar adapters.

Back in our view template, we will add the JavaScript to perform the AJAX POST of the form data, and to start a
timeout interval for the progress polling. To keep the example code relatively short, we are using the jQuery Form
plugin to do the AJAX form POST. If your project uses a different JavaScript framework (or none at all), this will
hopefully at least illustrate the necessary high-level logic that would need to be performed.

708 Chapter 140. File Uploading

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1 // File: upload-form.phtml
2 // ...after the form...
3

4 <!-- Twitter Bootstrap progress bar styles:

5 http://twitter.github.com/bootstrap/components.html#progress -->
6 <div id="progress" class="help-block">
7 <div class="progress progress-info progress-striped">
8 <div class="bar"></div>
9 </div>
10 <p></p>
11 </div>
12

13 <script src="https://ajax.googleapis.com/ajax/libs/jquery/1.8.3/jquery.min.js"></script>
14 <script src="/js/jquery.form.js"></script>
15 <script>
16 var progressInterval;
17

18 function getProgress() {
19 // Poll our controller action with the progress id
20 var url = '/upload-form/upload-progress?id=' + $('#progress_key').val();
21 $.getJSON(url, function(data) {
22 if (data.status && !data.status.done) {
23 var value = Math.floor((data.status.current / data.status.total) * 100);
24 showProgress(value, 'Uploading...');
25 } else {
26 showProgress(100, 'Complete!');
27 clearInterval(progressInterval);
28 }
29 });
30 }
31

32 function startProgress() {
33 showProgress(0, 'Starting upload...');
34 progressInterval = setInterval(getProgress, 900);
35 }
36

37 function showProgress(amount, message) {

38 $('#progress').show();
39 $('#progress .bar').width(amount + '%');
40 $('#progress > p').html(message);
41 if (amount < 100) {
42 $('#progress .progress')
43 .addClass('progress-info active')
44 .removeClass('progress-success');
45 } else {
46 $('#progress .progress')
47 .removeClass('progress-info active')
48 .addClass('progress-success');
49 }
50 }
51

52 $(function() {
53 // Register a 'submit' event listener on the form to perform the AJAX POST
54 $('#upload-form').on('submit', function(e) {
55 e.preventDefault();
56

57 if ($('#image-file').val() == '') {
58 // No files selected, abort

140.4. Upload Progress 709

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

59 return;
60 }
61

62 // Perform the submit

63 //$.fn.ajaxSubmit.debug = true;
64 $(this).ajaxSubmit({
65 beforeSubmit: function(arr, $form, options) {
66 // Notify backend that submit is via ajax
67 arr.push({ name: "isAjax", value: "1" });
68 },
69 success: function (response, statusText, xhr, $form) {
70 clearInterval(progressInterval);
71 showProgress(100, 'Complete!');
72

73 // TODO: You'll need to do some custom logic here to handle a successful

74 // form post, and when the form is invalid with validation errors.
75 if (response.status) {
76 // TODO: Do something with a successful form post, like redirect
77 // window.location.replace(response.redirect);
78 } else {
79 // Clear the file input, otherwise the same file gets re-uploaded
80 // http://stackoverflow.com/a/1043969
81 var fileInput = $('#image-file');
82 fileInput.replaceWith( fileInput.val('').clone( true ) );
83

84 // TODO: Do something with these errors

85 // showErrors(response.formErrors);
86 }
87 },
88 error: function(a, b, c) {
89 // NOTE: This callback is *not* called when the form is invalid.
90 // It is called when the browser is unable to initiate or complete the ajax submit.
91 // You will need to handle validation errors in the 'success' callback.
92 console.log(a, b, c);
93 }
94 });
95 // Start the progress polling
96 startProgress();
97 });
98 });
99 </script>

And finally, our Controller action can be modified to return form status and validation messages in JSON format if we
see the isAjax post parameter (which was set in the JavaScript just before submit):
1 // File: MyController.php
2

3 public function uploadFormAction()

4 {
5 $form = new UploadForm('upload-form');
6

7 $request = $this->getRequest();
8 if ($request->isPost()) {
9 // Make certain to merge the files info!
10 $post = array_merge_recursive(
11 $request->getPost()->toArray(),
12 $request->getFiles()->toArray()
13 );

710 Chapter 140. File Uploading

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

14

15 $form->setData($post);
16 if ($form->isValid()) {
17 $data = $form->getData();
18 // Form is valid, save the form!
19 if (!empty($post['isAjax'])) {
20 return new JsonModel(array(
21 'status' => true,
22 'redirect' => $this->url()->fromRoute('upload-form/success'),
23 'formData' => $data,
24 ));
25 } else {
26 // Fallback for non-JS clients
27 return $this->redirect()->toRoute('upload-form/success');
28 }
29 } else {
30 if (!empty($post['isAjax'])) {
31 // Send back failure information via JSON
32 return new JsonModel(array(
33 'status' => false,
34 'formErrors' => $form->getMessages(),
35 'formData' => $form->getData(),
36 ));
37 }
38 }
39 }
40

41 return array('form' => $form);

42 }

140.5 Additional Info

Related documentation:
Form File Element
Form File View Helper
List of File Validators
List of File Filters
File Post-Redirect-Get Controller Plugin
Zend\InputFilter\FileInput
Upload Progress Handlers
Upload Progress View Helpers
External resources and blog posts from the community:
ZF2FileUploadExamples : A ZF2 module with several file upload examples.

140.5. Additional Info 711

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

712 Chapter 140. File Uploading

 CHAPTER 141

Advanced use of forms

Beginning with Zend Framework 2.1, forms elements can be registered using a designated plugin manager of
Zend\ServiceManager. This is similar to how view helpers, controller plugins, and filters are registered. This
new feature has a number of benefits, especially when you need to handle complex dependencies in forms/fieldsets.
This section describes all the benefits of this new architecture in ZF 2.1.

141.1 Short names

The first advantage of pulling form elements from the service manager is that now you can use short names to create
new elements through the factory. Therefore, this code:
1 $form->add(array(
2 'type' => 'Zend\Form\Element\Email',
3 'name' => 'email'
4 ));

can now be replaced by:

1 $form->add(array(
2 'type' => 'Email',
3 'name' => 'email'
4 ));

Each element provided out-of-the-box by Zend Framework 2 support this natively, so you can now make your initial-
ization code more compact.

141.2 Creating custom elements

Zend\Form also supports custom form elements.

To create a custom form element, make it extend the Zend\Form\Element class, or if you need a more specific
one, extend one of the Zend\Form\Element classes.
In the following we will show how to create a custom Phone element for entering phone numbers. It will extend
Zend\Form\Element class and provide some default input rules.
Our custom phone element could look something like this:
1 namespace Application\Form\Element;
2

3 use Zend\Form\Element;

713
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

4 use Zend\InputFilter\InputProviderInterface;
5 use Zend\Validator\Regex as RegexValidator;
6

7 class Phone extends Element implements InputProviderInterface

8 {
9 /**
10 * @var ValidatorInterface
11 */
12 protected $validator;
13

14 /**
15 * Get a validator if none has been set.
16 *
17 * @return ValidatorInterface
18 */
19 public function getValidator()
20 {
21 if (null === $this->validator) {
22 $validator = new RegexValidator('/^\+?\d{11,12}$/');
23 $validator->setMessage('Please enter 11 or 12 digits only!',
24 RegexValidator::NOT_MATCH);
25

26 $this->validator = $validator;
27 }
28

29 return $this->validator;
30 }
31

32 /**
33 * Sets the validator to use for this element
34 *
35 * @param ValidatorInterface $validator
36 * @return Application\Form\Element\Phone
37 */
38 public function setValidator(ValidatorInterface $validator)
39 {
40 $this->validator = $validator;
41 return $this;
42 }
43

44 /**
45 * Provide default input rules for this element
46 *
47 * Attaches a phone number validator.
48 *
49 * @return array
50 */
51 public function getInputSpecification()
52 {
53 return array(
54 'name' => $this->getName(),
55 'required' => true,
56 'filters' => array(
57 array('name' => 'Zend\Filter\StringTrim'),
58 ),
59 'validators' => array(
60 $this->getValidator(),
61 ),

714 Chapter 141. Advanced use of forms

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

62 );
63 }
64 }

By implementing the Zend\InputFilter\InputProviderInterface interface, we are hinting to our form

object that this element provides some default input rules for filtering and/or validating values. In this example the
default input specification provides a Zend\Filter\StringTrim filter and a Zend\Validator\Regex val-
idator that validates that the value optionally has a + sign at the beginning and is followed by 11 or 12 digits.
The easiest way of start using your new custom element in your forms is to use the custom elements FQCN:
1 $form = new Zend\Form\Form();
2 $form->add(array(
3 'name' => 'phone',
4 'type' => 'Application\Form\Element\Phone',
5 ));

Or, if you are extending Zend\Form\Form:

1 namespace Application\Form;
2

3 use Zend\Form\Form;
4

5 class MyForm extends Form

6 {
7 public function __construct($name = null)
8 {
9 parent::__construct($name);
10

11 $this->add(array(
12 'name' => 'phone',
13 'type' => 'Application\Form\Element\Phone',
14 ))
15 }
16 }

If you dont want to use the custom elements FQCN, but rather a short name, as of Zend Framework 2.1
you can do so by adding them to the Zend\Form\FormElementManager plugin manager by utilising the
getFormElementConfig function.

Warning: To use custom elements with the FormElementManager needs a bit more work and most likely a change
in how you write and use your forms.

First, add the custom element to the plugin manager, in your Module.php class:
1 namespace Application;
2

3 use Zend\ModuleManager\Feature\FormElementProviderInterface;
4

5 class Module implements FormElementProviderInterface

6 {
7 public function getFormElementConfig()
8 {
9 return array(
10 'invokables' => array(
11 'phone' => 'Application\Form\Element\Phone'
12 )
13 );

141.2. Creating custom elements 715

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

14 }
15 }

Or, you can do the same in your module.config.php file:

1 return array(
2 'form_elements' => array(
3 'invokables' => array(
4 'phone' => 'Application\Form\Element\Phone'
5 )
6 )
7 );

You can use a factory instead of an invokable in order to handle dependencies in your elements/fieldsets/forms.
And now comes the first catch.
If you are creating your form class by extending Zend\Form\Form, you must not add the custom element in the
__construct-or (as we have done in the previous example where we used the custom elements FQCN), but rather
in the init() method:
1 namespace Application\Form;
2

3 use Zend\Form\Form;
4

5 class MyForm extends Form

6 {
7 public function init()
8 {
9 $this->add(array(
10 'name' => 'phone',
11 'type' => 'Phone',
12 ));
13 }
14 }

The second catch is that you must not directly instantiate your form class, but rather get an instance of it through the
Zend\Form\FormElementManager:
1 namespace Application\Controller;
2

3 use Zend\Mvc\Controller\AbstractActionController;
4

5 class IndexController extends AbstractActionController

6 {
7 public function indexAction()
8 {
9 $sl = $this->getServiceLocator();
10 $form = $sl->get('FormElementManager')->get('\Application\Form\MyForm');
11 return array('form' => $form);
12 }
13 }

The biggest gain of this is that you can easily override any built-in Zend Framework form elements if they do not fit
your needs. For instance, if you want to create your own Email element instead of the standard one, you can simply
create your element and add it to the form element config with the same key as the element you want to replace:
1 namespace Application;
2

3 use Zend\ModuleManager\Feature\FormElementProviderInterface;

716 Chapter 141. Advanced use of forms

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

5 class Module implements FormElementProviderInterface

6 {
7 public function getFormElementConfig()
8 {
9 return array(
10 'invokables' => array(
11 'Email' => 'Application\Form\Element\MyEmail'
12 )
13 );
14 }
15 }

Now, whenever youll create an element whose type is Email, it will create the custom Email element instead of
the built-in one.

Note: if you want to be able to use both the built-in one and your own one, you can still provide the FQCN of the
element, i.e. Zend\Form\Element\Email.

As you can see here, we first get the form manager (that we modified in our Module.php class), and create
the form by specifying the fully qualified class name of the form. Please note that you dont need to add
Application\Form\MyForm to the invokables array. If it is not specified, the form manager will just instan-
tiate it directly.
In short, to create your own form elements (or even reusable fieldsets !) and be able to use them in your form using
the short-name notation, you need to:
1. Create your element (like you did before).
2. Add it to the form element manager by defining the getFormElementConfig, exactly like using
getServiceConfig() and getControllerConfig.
3. Make sure the custom form element is not added in the forms __construct-or, but rather in its init()
method, or after getting an instance of the form.
4. Create your form through the form element manager instead of directly instantiating it.

141.3 Handling dependencies

One of the most complex issues in Zend\Form 2.0 was dependency management. For instance, a very frequent use
case is a form that creates a fieldset, that itself need access to the database to populate a Select element. Previously
in such a situation, you would either rely on the Registry using the Singleton pattern, or either you would transfer
the dependency from controller to form, and from form to fieldset (and even from fieldset to another fieldset if you
have a complex form). This was ugly and not easy to use. Hopefully, Zend\ServiceManager solves this use case
in an elegant manner.
For instance, lets say that a form create a fieldset called AlbumFieldset:
1 namespace Application\Form;
2

3 use Zend\Form\Form;
4

5 class CreateAlbum extends Form

6 {
7 public function init()
8 {
9 $this->add(array(

141.3. Handling dependencies 717

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

10 'name' => 'album',

11 'type' => 'AlbumFieldset'
12 ));
13 }
14 }

Lets now create the AlbumFieldset that depends on an AlbumTable object that allows you to fetch albums
from the database.
1 namespace Application\Form;
2

3 use Album\Model\AlbumTable;
4 use Zend\Form\Fieldset;
5

6 class AlbumFieldset extends Fieldset

7 {
8 public function __construct(AlbumTable $albumTable)
9 {
10 // Add any elements that need to fetch data from database
11 // using the album table !
12 }
13 }

For this to work, you need to add a line to the form element manager by adding an element to your Module.php class:
1 namespace Application;
2

3 use Application\Form\AlbumFieldset;
4 use Zend\ModuleManager\Feature\FormElementProviderInterface;
5

6 class Module implements FormElementProviderInterface

7 {
8 public function getFormElementConfig()
9 {
10 return array(
11 'factories' => array(
12 'AlbumFieldset' => function($sm) {
13 // I assume here that the Album\Model\AlbumTable
14 // dependency have been defined too
15

16 $serviceLocator = $sm->getServiceLocator();
17 $albumTable = $serviceLocator->get('Album\Model\AlbumTable');
18 $fieldset = new AlbumFieldset($albumTable);
19 return $fieldset;
20 }
21 )
22 );
23 }
24 }

Create your form using the form element manager instead of directly instantiating it:
1 public function testAction()
2 {
3 $formManager = $this->serviceLocator->get('FormElementManager');
4 $form = $formManager->get('Application\Form\CreateAlbum');
5 }

Finally, to use your fieldset in a view you need to use the formCollection function.

718 Chapter 141. Advanced use of forms

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1 echo $this->form()->openTag($form);
2 echo $this->formCollection($form->get('album'));
3 echo $this->form()->closeTag();

Et voil! The dependency will be automatically handled by the form element manager, and you dont need to create the
AlbumTable in your controller, transfer it to the form, which itself passes it over to the fieldset.

141.4 The specific case of initializers

In the previous example, we explicitly defined the dependency in the constructor of the
AlbumFieldset class. However, in some cases, you may want to use an initializer (like
Zend\ServiceManager\ServiceLocatorAwareInterface) to inject a specific object to all your
forms/fieldsets/elements.
The problem with initializers is that they are injected AFTER the construction of the object, which means that if you
need this dependency when you create elements, it wont be available yet. For instance, this example wont work:
1 namespace Application\Form;
2

3 use Album\Model;
4 use Zend\Form\Fieldset;
5 use Zend\ServiceManager\ServiceLocatorAwareInterface;
6 use Zend\ServiceManager\ServiceLocatorInterface;
7

8 class AlbumFieldset extends Fieldset implements ServiceLocatorAwareInterface

9 {
10 protected $serviceLocator;
11

12 public function __construct()

13 {
14 // Here, $this->serviceLocator is null because it has not been
15 // injected yet, as initializers are run after __construct
16 }
17

18 public function setServiceLocator(ServiceLocatorInterface $sl)

19 {
20 $this->serviceLocator = $sl;
21 }
22

23 public function getServiceLocator()

24 {
25 return $this->serviceLocator;
26 }
27 }

Thankfully, there is an easy workaround: every form element now implements the new interface
Zend\Stdlib\InitializableInterface, that defines a single init() function. In the context of form
elements, this init() function is automatically called once all the dependencies (including all initializers) are re-
solved. Therefore, the previous example can be rewritten as such:
1 namespace Application\Form;
2

3 use Album\Model;
4 use Zend\Form\Fieldset;
5 use Zend\ServiceManager\ServiceLocatorAwareInterface;
6 use Zend\ServiceManager\ServiceLocatorInterface;

141.4. The specific case of initializers 719

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

8 class AlbumFieldset extends Fieldset implements ServiceLocatorAwareInterface

9 {
10 protected $serviceLocator;
11

12 public function init()

13 {
14 // Here, we have $this->serviceLocator !!
15 }
16

17 public function setServiceLocator(ServiceLocatorInterface $sl)

18 {
19 $this->serviceLocator = $sl;
20 }
21

22 public function getServiceLocator()

23 {
24 return $this->serviceLocator;
25 }
26 }

720 Chapter 141. Advanced use of forms

 CHAPTER 142

Form Elements

142.1 Introduction

A set of specialized elements are provided for accomplishing application-centric tasks. These include several HTML5
input elements with matching server-side validators, the Csrf element (to prevent Cross Site Request Forgery attacks),
and the Captcha element (to display and validate CAPTCHAs).
A Factory is provided to facilitate creation of elements, fieldsets, forms, and the related input filter. See the
Zend\Form Quick Start for more information.
orphan

142.2 Element Base Class

Zend\Form\Element is a base class for all specialized elements and Zend\Form\Fieldset.

Basic Usage

At the bare minimum, each element or fieldset requires a name. You will also typically provide some attributes to hint
to the view layer how it might render the item.
1 use Zend\Form\Element;
2 use Zend\Form\Form;
3

4 $username = new Element\Text('username');

5 $username
6 ->setLabel('Username')
7 ->setAttributes(array(
8 'class' => 'username',
9 'size' => '30',
10 ));
11

12 $password = new Element\Password('password');

13 $password
14 ->setLabel('Password')
15 ->setAttributes(array(
16 'size' => '30',
17 ));
18

19 $form = new Form('my-form');

721
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

20 $form
21 ->add($username)
22 ->add($password);

Public Methods

setName(string $name)
Set the name for this element.
getName()
Return the name for this element.
Return type string
setValue(string $value)
Set the value for this element.
getValue()
Return the value for this element.
Return type string
setLabel(string $label)
Set the label content for this element.
getLabel()
Return the label content for this element.
Return type string
setLabelAttributes(array $labelAttributes)
Set the attributes to use with the label.
getLabelAttributes()
Return the attributes to use with the label.
Return type array
setLabelOptions(array $labelOptions)
Set label specific options.
getLabelOptions()
Return the label specific options.
Return type array
setOptions(array $options)
Set options for an element. Accepted options are: label, label_attributes", label_options,
which call setLabel, setLabelAttributes and setLabelOptions, respectively.
getOptions()
Get defined options for an element
Return type array
getOption(string $option)
Return the specified option, if defined. If its not defined, returns null.
Return type null|mixed
setAttribute(string $key, mixed $value)
Set a single element attribute.

722 Chapter 142. Form Elements

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

getAttribute(string $key)
Retrieve a single element attribute.
Return type mixed
removeAttribute(string $key)
Remove a single attribute
hasAttribute(string $key)
Check if a specific attribute exists for this element.
Return type boolean
setAttributes(array|Traversable $arrayOrTraversable)
Set many attributes at once. Implementation will decide if this will overwrite or merge.
getAttributes()
Retrieve all attributes at once.
Return type array|Traversable
removeAttributes(array $keys)
Remove many attributes at once
clearAttributes()
Clear all attributes for this element.
setMessages(array|Traversable $messages)
Set a list of messages to report when validation fails.
getMessages()
Returns a list of validation failure messages, if any.
Return type array|Traversable

142.3 Standard Elements

orphan

142.3.1 Button

Zend\Form\Element\Button represents a button form input. It can be used with the

Zend\Form\View\Helper\FormButton view helper.
Zend\Form\Element\Button extends from ZendFormElement.

Basic Usage

This element automatically adds a type attribute of value button.

1 use Zend\Form\Element;
2 use Zend\Form\Form;
3

4 $button = new Element\Button('my-button');

5 $button->setLabel('My Button')
6 ->setValue('foo');
7

142.3. Standard Elements 723

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

8 $form = new Form('my-form');

9 $form->add($button);

orphan

142.3.2 Captcha

Zend\Form\Element\Captcha can be used with forms where authenticated users are not necessary, but you
want to prevent spam submissions. It is paired with one of the Zend\Form\View\Helper\Captcha\* view
helpers that matches the type of CAPTCHA adapter in use.

Basic Usage

A CAPTCHA adapter must be attached in order for validation to be included in the elements input filter specification.
See the section on Zend CAPTCHA Adapters for more information on what adapters are available.
1 use Zend\Captcha;
2 use Zend\Form\Element;
3 use Zend\Form\Form;
4

5 $captcha = new Element\Captcha('captcha');

6 $captcha
7 ->setCaptcha(new Captcha\Dumb())
8 ->setLabel('Please verify you are human');
9

10 $form = new Form('my-form');

11 $form->add($captcha);

Here is with the array notation:

1 use Zend\Captcha;
2 use Zend\Form\Form;
3

4 $form = new Form('my-form');

5 $form->add(array(
6 'type' => 'Zend\Form\Element\Captcha',
7 'name' => 'captcha',
8 'options' => array(
9 'label' => 'Please verify you are human',
10 'captcha' => new Captcha\Dumb(),
11 ),
12 ));

Public Methods

The following methods are in addition to the inherited methods of Zend\Form\Element.

setCaptcha(array|Zend\Captcha\AdapterInterface $captcha)
Set the CAPTCHA adapter for this element. If $captcha is an array,
Zend\Captcha\Factory::factory() will be run to create the adapter from the array configura-
tion.
getCaptcha()
Return the CAPTCHA adapter for this element.

724 Chapter 142. Form Elements

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Return type Zend\Captcha\AdapterInterface

getInputSpecification()
Returns a input filter specification, which includes a Zend\Filter\StringTrim filter, and a CAPTCHA
validator.
Return type array
orphan

142.3.3 Checkbox

Zend\Form\Element\Checkbox is meant to be paired with the Zend\Form\View\Helper\FormCheckbox

for HTML inputs with type checkbox. This element adds an InArray validator to its input filter specification in
order to validate on the server if the checkbox contains either the checked value or the unchecked value.

Basic Usage

This element automatically adds a "type" attribute of value "checkbox".

1 use Zend\Form\Element;
2 use Zend\Form\Form;
3

4 $checkbox = new Element\Checkbox('checkbox');

5 $checkbox->setLabel('A checkbox');
6 $checkbox->setUseHiddenElement(true);
7 $checkbox->setCheckedValue("good");
8 $checkbox->setUncheckedValue("bad");
9

10 $form = new Form('my-form');

11 $form->add($checkbox);

Using the array notation:

1 use Zend\Form\Form;
2

3 $form = new Form('my-form');

4 $form->add(array(
5 'type' => 'Zend\Form\Element\Checkbox',
6 'name' => 'checkbox',
7 'options' => array(
8 'label' => 'A checkbox',
9 'use_hidden_element' => true,
10 'checked_value' => 'good',
11 'unchecked_value' => 'bad'
12 )
13 ));

When creating a checkbox element, setting an attribute of checked will result in the checkbox always being checked
regardless of any data object which might subsequently be bound to the form. The correct way to set the default value
of a checkbox is to set the value attribute as for any other element. To have a checkbox checked by default make the
value equal to the checked_value eg:
1 use Zend\Form\Form;
2

3 $form = new Form('my-form');

4 $form->add(array(

142.3. Standard Elements 725

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

5 'type' => 'Zend\Form\Element\Checkbox',

6 'name' => 'checkbox',
7 'options' => array(
8 'label' => 'A checkbox',
9 'use_hidden_element' => true,
10 'checked_value' => 'yes',
11 'unchecked_value' => 'no'
12 ),
13 'attributes' => array(
14 'value' => 'yes'
15 )
16 ));

Public Methods

The following methods are in addition to the inherited methods of Zend\Form\Element .

setOptions(array $options)
Set options for an element of type Checkbox. Accepted options, in addition to the inherited options of
Zend\Form\Element , are: "use_hidden_element", "checked_value" and "unchecked_value"
, which call setUseHiddenElement, setCheckedValue and setUncheckedValue , respectively.
setUseHiddenElement(boolean $useHiddenElement)
If set to true (which is default), the view helper will generate a hidden element that contains the unchecked
value. Therefore, when using custom unchecked value, this option have to be set to true.
useHiddenElement()
Return if a hidden element is generated.
Return type boolean
setCheckedValue(string $checkedValue)
Set the value to use when the checkbox is checked.
getCheckedValue()
Return the value used when the checkbox is checked.
Return type string
setUncheckedValue(string $uncheckedValue)
Set the value to use when the checkbox is unchecked. For this to work, you must make sure that
use_hidden_element is set to true.
getUncheckedValue()
Return the value used when the checkbox is unchecked.
Return type string
getInputSpecification()
Returns a input filter specification, which includes a Zend\Validator\InArray to validate if the value is
either checked value or unchecked value.
Return type array
isChecked()
Checks if the checkbox is checked.
Return type boolean
setChecked(bool $value)
Checks or unchecks the checkbox.

726 Chapter 142. Form Elements

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

orphan

142.3.4 Collection

Sometimes, you may want to add input (or a set of inputs) multiple times, either because you dont want to duplicate
code, or because you do not know in advance how many elements you will need (in the case of elements dynamically
added to a form using JavaScript, for instance). For more information about Collection, please refer to the Form
Collections tutorial.
Zend\Form\Element\Collection is meant to be paired with the Zend\Form\View\Helper\FormCollection.

Basic Usage

1 use Zend\Form\Element;
2 use Zend\Form\Form;
3

4 $colors = new Element\Collection('collection');

5 $colors->setLabel('Colors');
6 $colors->setCount(2);
7 $colors->setTargetElement(new Element\Color());
8 $colors->setShouldCreateTemplate(true);
9

10 $form = new Form('my-form');

11 $form->add($colors);

Using the array notation:

1 use Zend\Form\Element;
2 use Zend\Form\Form;
3

4 $form = new Form('my-form');

5 $form->add(array(
6 'type' => 'Zend\Form\Element\Collection',
7 'options' => array(
8 'label' => 'Colors',
9 'count' => 2,
10 'should_create_template' => true,
11 'target_element' => new Element\Color()
12 )
13 ));

Public Methods

The following methods are in addition to the inherited methods of Zend\Form\Element .

setOptions(array $options)
Set options for an element of type Collection. Accepted options, in addition to the in-
herited options of Zend\Form\Element , are: "target_element", "count", "allow_add",
"allow_remove", "should_create_template" and "template_placeholder". Those op-
tion keys respectively call call setTargetElement, setCount, setAllowAdd, setAllowRemove,
setShouldCreateTemplate and setTemplatePlaceholder.
allowObjectBinding(object $object)
Checks if the object can be set in this fieldset.

142.3. Standard Elements 727

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Return type bool

setObject(array|Traversable $object)
Set the object used by the hydrator. In this case the object is a collection of objects.
populateValues(array|Traversable $data)
Populate values
allowValueBinding()
Checks if this fieldset can bind data
Return type bool
setCount($count)
Defines how many times the target element will be initially rendered by the
Zend\Form\View\Helper\FormCollection view helper.
getCount()
Return the number of times the target element will be initially rendered by the
Zend\Form\View\Helper\FormCollection view helper.
Return type integer
setTargetElement($elementOrFieldset)
This function either takes an Zend\Form\ElementInterface, Zend\Form\FieldsetInterface
instance or an array to pass to the form factory. When the Collection element will be validated, the input filter
will be retrieved from this target element and be used to validate each element in the collection.
getTargetElement()
Return the target element used by the collection.
Return type ElementInterface | null
setAllowAdd($allowAdd)
If allowAdd is set to true (which is the default), new elements added dynamically in the form (using JavaScript,
for instance) will also be validated and retrieved.
allowAdd()
Return if new elements can be dynamically added in the collection.
Return type boolean
setAllowRemove($allowRemove)
If allowRemove is set to true (which is the default), new elements added dynamically in the form (using
JavaScript, for instance) will be allowed to be removed.
allowRemove()
Return if new elements can be dynamically removed from the collection.
Return type boolean
setShouldCreateTemplate($shouldCreateTemplate)
If shouldCreateTemplate is set to true (defaults to false), a <span> element will be generated by the
Zend\Form\View\Helper\FormCollection view helper. This non-semantic span element contains
a single data-template HTML5 attribute whose value is the whole HTML to copy to create a new element in the
form. The template is indexed using the templatePlaceholder value.
shouldCreateTemplate()
Return if a template should be created.
Return type boolean
setTemplatePlaceholder($templatePlaceholder)
Set the template placeholder (defaults to __index__) used to index element in the template.

728 Chapter 142. Form Elements

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

getTemplatePlaceholder()
Returns the template placeholder used to index element in the template.
Return type string
getTemplateElement()
Get a template element used for rendering purposes only
Return type null|ElementInterface|FieldsetInterface
prepareElement()
Prepare the collection by adding a dummy template element if the user want one
prepareFieldset()
If both count and targetElement are set, add them to the fieldset
orphan

142.3.5 Csrf

Zend\Form\Element\Csrf pairs with the Zend\Form\View\Helper\FormHidden to provide protection

from CSRF attacks on forms, ensuring the data is submitted by the user session that generated the form and not by a
rogue script. Protection is achieved by adding a hash element to a form and verifying it when the form is submitted.

Basic Usage

This element automatically adds a "type" attribute of value "hidden".

1 use Zend\Form\Element;
2 use Zend\Form\Form;
3

4 $csrf = new Element\Csrf('csrf');

5

6 $form = new Form('my-form');

7 $form->add($csrf);

You can change the options of the CSRF validator using the setCsrfValidatorOptions function, or by using
the "csrf_options" key. Here is an example using the array notation:
1 use Zend\Form\Form;
2

3 $form = new Form('my-form');

4 $form->add(array(
5 'type' => 'Zend\Form\Element\Csrf',
6 'name' => 'csrf',
7 'options' => array(
8 'csrf_options' => array(
9 'timeout' => 600
10 )
11 )
12 ));

Note: If you are using more than one form on a page, and each contains its own CSRF element, you will need to
make sure that each form uniquely names its element; if you do not, its possible for the value of one to override the
other within the server-side session storage, leading to the inability to validate one or more of the forms on your page.
We suggest prefixing the element name with the forms name or function: login_csrf, registration_csrf, etc.

142.3. Standard Elements 729

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Public Methods

The following methods are in addition to the inherited methods of Zend\Form\Element.

getInputSpecification()
Returns a input filter specification, which includes a Zend\Filter\StringTrim filter and a
Zend\Validator\Csrf to validate the CSRF value.
Return type array
setCsrfValidatorOptions(array $options)
Set the options that are used by the CSRF validator.
getCsrfValidatorOptions()
Get the options that are used by the CSRF validator.
Return type array
setCsrfValidator(ZendValidatorCsrf $validator)
Override the default CSRF validator by setting another one.
getCsrfValidator()
Get the CSRF validator.
Return type ZendValidatorCsrf
orphan

142.3.6 File

Zend\Form\Element\File represents a form file input and provides a default input specification with
a type of FileInput (important for handling validators and filters correctly). It can be used with the
Zend\Form\View\Helper\FormFile view helper.
Zend\Form\Element\File extends from Zend\Form\Element.

Basic Usage

This element automatically adds a "type" attribute of value "file". It will also set the forms enctype to
multipart/form-data during $form->prepare().
1 use Zend\Form\Element;
2 use Zend\Form\Form;
3

4 // Single file upload

5 $file = new Element\File('file');
6 $file->setLabel('Single file input');
7

8 // HTML5 multiple file upload

9 $multiFile = new Element\File('multi-file');
10 $multiFile->setLabel('Multi file input')
11 ->setAttribute('multiple', true);
12

13 $form = new Form('my-file');

14 $form->add($file)
15 ->add($multiFile);

orphan

730 Chapter 142. Form Elements

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

142.3.7 Hidden

Zend\Form\Element\Hidden represents a hidden form input. It can be used with the

Zend\Form\View\Helper\FormHidden view helper.
Zend\Form\Element\Hidden extends from Zend\Form\Element.

Basic Usage

This element automatically adds a "type" attribute of value "hidden".

1 use Zend\Form\Element;
2 use Zend\Form\Form;
3

4 $hidden = new Element\Hidden('my-hidden');

5 $hidden->setValue('foo');
6

7 $form = new Form('my-form');

8 $form->add($hidden);

Here is with the array notation:

1 use Zend\Form\Form;
2

3 $form = new Form('my-form');

4 $form->add(array(
5 'type' => 'Zend\Form\Element\Hidden',
6 'name' => 'my-hidden',
7 'attributes' => array(
8 'value' => 'foo'
9 )
10 ));

orphan

142.3.8 Image

Zend\Form\Element\Image represents a image button form input. It can be used with the
Zend\Form\View\Helper\FormImage view helper.
Zend\Form\Element\Image extends from Zend\Form\Element.

Basic Usage

This element automatically adds a "type" attribute of value "image".

1 use Zend\Form\Element;
2 use Zend\Form\Form;
3

4 $image = new Element\Image('my-image');

5 $image->setAttribute('src', 'http://my.image.url'); // Src attribute is required
6

7 $form = new Form('my-form');

8 $form->add($image);

orphan

142.3. Standard Elements 731

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

142.3.9 Month Select

Zend\Form\Element\MonthSelect is meant to be paired with the

Zend\Form\View\Helper\FormMonthSelect. This element creates two select elements, where the
first one is populated with months and the second is populated with years. By default, it sets 100 years in the past for
the year element, starting with the current year.

Basic Usage

1 use Zend\Form\Element;
2 use Zend\Form\Form;
3

4 $monthYear = new Element\MonthSelect('monthyear');

5 $monthYear->setLabel('Select a month and a year');
6 $monthYear->setMinYear(1986);
7

8 $form = new Form('dateselect');

9 $form->add($monthYear);

Using the array notation:

1 use Zend\Form\Form;
2

3 $form = new Form('dateselect');

4 $form->add(array(
5 'type' => 'Zend\Form\Element\MonthSelect',
6 'name' => 'monthyear',
7 'options' => array(
8 'label' => 'Select a month and a year',
9 'min_year' => 1986,
10 )
11 ));

Public Methods

The following methods are in addition to the inherited methods of Zend\Form\Element.

getMonthElement()
Returns the Select element that is used for the months part.
Return type Zend\Form\Element\Select
getYearElement()
Returns the Select element that is used for the years part.
Return type Zend\Form\Element\Select
setMonthAttributes(array $monthAttributes)
Set attributes on the Select element that is used for the months part.
getMonthAttributes()
Get attributes on the Select element that is used for the months part.
Return type array
setYearAttributes(array $yearAttributes)
Set attributes on the Select element that is used for the years part.

732 Chapter 142. Form Elements

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

getYearAttributes()
Get attributes on the Select element that is used for the years part.
Return type array
setMinYear(int $minYear)
Set the minimum year.
getMinYear()
Get the minimum year.
setMaxYear(int $maxYear)
Set the maximum year.
getMaxYear()
Get the maximum year.
setValue(mixed $value)
Set the value for the MonthSelect element.
If the value is an instance of \DateTime, it will use the month and year values from that date. Otherwise, the
value should be an associative array with the month key for the month value, and with the year key for the
year value.
orphan

142.3.10 MultiCheckbox

Zend\Form\Element\MultiCheckbox is meant to be paired with the

Zend\Form\View\Helper\FormMultiCheckbox for HTML inputs with type checkbox. This element
adds an InArray validator to its input filter specification in order to validate on the server if the checkbox contains
values from the multiple checkboxes.

Basic Usage

This element automatically adds a "type" attribute of value "checkbox" for every checkboxes.
1 use Zend\Form\Element;
2 use Zend\Form\Form;
3

4 $multiCheckbox = new Element\MultiCheckbox('multi-checkbox');

5 $multiCheckbox->setLabel('What do you like ?');
6 $multiCheckbox->setValueOptions(array(
7 '0' => 'Apple',
8 '1' => 'Orange',
9 '2' => 'Lemon'
10 ));
11

12 $form = new Form('my-form');

13 $form->add($multiCheckbox);

Using the array notation:

1 use Zend\Form\Form;
2

3 $form = new Form('my-form');

4 $form->add(array(
5 'type' => 'Zend\Form\Element\MultiCheckbox',

142.3. Standard Elements 733

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

6 'name' => 'multi-checkbox',

7 'options' => array(
8 'label' => 'What do you like ?',
9 'value_options' => array(
10 '0' => 'Apple',
11 '1' => 'Orange',
12 '2' => 'Lemon',
13 ),
14 )
15 ));

Advanced Usage

In order to set attributes or customize the option elements, an array can be used instead of a string. The following keys
are supported:
"label" - The string displayed for the option.
"value" - The form value associated with the option.
"selected" - Boolean that sets whether the option is marked as selected.
"disabled" - Boolean that sets whether the option will be disabled
"attributes" - Array of html attributes that will be set on this option. Merged with the attributes set on the
element.
"label_attributes" - Array of html attributes that will be set on the label. Merged with the attributes set
on the elements label.
1 $form = new Form('my-form');
2 $form->add(array(
3 'type' => 'Zend\Form\Element\MultiCheckbox',
4 'name' => 'multi-checkbox',
5 'options' => array(
6 'label' => 'What do you like ?',
7 'value_options' => array(
8 array(
9 'value' => '0',
10 'label' => 'Apple',
11 'selected' => false,
12 'disabled' => false,
13 'attributes' => array(
14 'id' => 'apple_option',
15 'data-fruit' => 'apple',
16 ),
17 'label_attributes' => array(
18 'id' => 'apple_label',
19 ),
20 ),
21 array(
22 'value' => '1',
23 'label' => 'Orange',
24 'selected' => true,
25 ),
26 array(
27 'value' => '2',
28 'label' => 'Lemon',
29 ),

734 Chapter 142. Form Elements

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

30 ),
31 ),
32 ));

Public Methods

The following methods are in addition to the inherited methods of Zend\Form\Element\Checkbox .

setOptions(array $options)
Set options for an element of type Checkbox. Accepted options, in addition to the inherited options of
Zend\Form\Element\Checkbox, are: "value_options", which call setValueOptions.
setValueOptions(array $options)
Set the value options for every checkbox of the multi-checkbox. The array must contain a key => value for
every checkbox.
getValueOptions()
Return the value options.
Return type array
unsetValueOption($key)
Unset the value option from the multi-checkbox.
orphan

142.3.11 Password

Zend\Form\Element\Password represents a password form input. It can be used with the

Zend\Form\View\Helper\FormPassword view helper.
Zend\Form\Element\Password extends from Zend\Form\Element.

Basic Usage

This element automatically adds a "type" attribute of value "password".

1 use Zend\Form\Element;
2 use Zend\Form\Form;
3

4 $password = new Element\Password('my-password');

5 $password->setLabel('Enter your password');
6

7 $form = new Form('my-form');

8 $form->add($password);

orphan

142.3.12 Radio

Zend\Form\Element\Radio is meant to be paired with the Zend\Form\View\Helper\FormRadio for

HTML inputs with type radio. This element adds an InArray validator to its input filter specification in order to
validate on the server if the value is contains within the radio value elements.

142.3. Standard Elements 735

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Basic Usage

This element automatically adds a "type" attribute of value "radio" for every radio.
1 use Zend\Form\Element;
2 use Zend\Form\Form;
3

4 $radio = new Element\Radio('gender');

5 $radio->setLabel('What is your gender ?');
6 $radio->setValueOptions(array(
7 '0' => 'Female',
8 '1' => 'Male',
9 ));
10

11 $form = new Form('my-form');

12 $form->add($radio);

Using the array notation:

1 use Zend\Form\Form;
2

3 $form = new Form('my-form');

4 $form->add(array(
5 'type' => 'Zend\Form\Element\Radio',
6 'name' => 'gender',
7 'options' => array(
8 'label' => 'What is your gender ?',
9 'value_options' => array(
10 '0' => 'Female',
11 '1' => 'Male',
12 ),
13 ),
14 ));

Advanced Usage

See MultiCheckbox for examples of how to apply attributes and options to each radio button.

Public Methods

All the methods from the inherited methods of Zend\Form\Element\MultiCheckbox are also available for this element.
orphan

142.3.13 Select

Zend\Form\Element\Select is meant to be paired with the Zend\Form\View\Helper\FormSelect for

HTML inputs with type select. This element adds an InArray validator to its input filter specification in order to
validate on the server if the selected value belongs to the values. This element can be used as a multi-select element
by adding the multiple HTML attribute to the element.

Basic Usage

This element automatically adds a "type" attribute of value "select".

736 Chapter 142. Form Elements

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1 use Zend\Form\Element;
2 use Zend\Form\Form;
3

4 $select = new Element\Select('language');

5 $select->setLabel('Which is your mother tongue?');
6 $select->setValueOptions(array(
7 '0' => 'French',
8 '1' => 'English',
9 '2' => 'Japanese',
10 '3' => 'Chinese',
11 ));
12

13 $form = new Form('language');

14 $form->add($select);

Using the array notation:

1 use Zend\Form\Form;
2

3 $form = new Form('my-form');

4 $form->add(array(
5 'type' => 'Zend\Form\Element\Select',
6 'name' => 'language',
7 'options' => array(
8 'label' => 'Which is your mother tongue?',
9 'value_options' => array(
10 '0' => 'French',
11 '1' => 'English',
12 '2' => 'Japanese',
13 '3' => 'Chinese',
14 ),
15 )
16 ));

You can add an empty option (option with no value) using the "empty_option" option:
1 use Zend\Form\Form;
2

3 $form = new Form('my-form');

4 $form->add(array(
5 'type' => 'Zend\Form\Element\Select',
6 'name' => 'language',
7 'options' => array(
8 'label' => 'Which is your mother tongue?',
9 'empty_option' => 'Please choose your language',
10 'value_options' => array(
11 '0' => 'French',
12 '1' => 'English',
13 '2' => 'Japanese',
14 '3' => 'Chinese',
15 ),
16 )
17 ));

Option groups are also supported. You just need to add an options key to the value options.
1 use Zend\Form\Element;
2 use Zend\Form\Form;
3

142.3. Standard Elements 737

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

4 $select = new Element\Select('language');

5 $select->setLabel('Which is your mother tongue?');
6 $select->setValueOptions(array(
7 'european' => array(
8 'label' => 'European languages',
9 'options' => array(
10 '0' => 'French',
11 '1' => 'Italian',
12 ),
13 ),
14 'asian' => array(
15 'label' => 'Asian languages',
16 'options' => array(
17 '2' => 'Japanese',
18 '3' => 'Chinese',
19 ),
20 ),
21 ));
22

23 $form = new Form('language');

24 $form->add($select);

Public Methods

The following methods are in addition to the inherited methods of Zend\Form\Element .

setOptions(array $options)
Set options for an element. Accepted options, in addition to the inherited options of Zend\Form\Element,
are: "value_options", "empty_option" and "disable_inarray_validator", which call
setValueOptions, setEmptyOption and setDisableInArrayValidator, respectively.
setValueOptions(array $options)
Set the value options for the select element. The array must contain key => value pairs.
getValueOptions()
Return the value options.
Return type array
unsetValueOption($key)
Unset the value option from the select element.
setEmptyOption($emptyOption)
Optionally set a label for an empty option (option with no value). It is set to null by default, which means that
no empty option will be rendered.
getEmptyOption()
Get the label for the empty option (null if none).
Return type string|null
orphan

142.3.14 Submit

Zend\Form\Element\Submit represents a submit button form input. It can be used with the
Zend\Form\View\Helper\FormSubmit view helper.

738 Chapter 142. Form Elements

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Zend\Form\Element\Submit extends from Zend\Form\Element.

Basic Usage

This element automatically adds a "type" attribute of value "submit".

1 use Zend\Form\Element;
2 use Zend\Form\Form;
3

4 $submit = new Element\Submit('my-submit');

5 $submit->setValue('Submit Form');
6

7 $form = new Form('my-form');

8 $form->add($submit);

orphan

142.3.15 Text

Zend\Form\Element\Text represents a text form input. It can be used with the

Zend\Form\View\Helper\FormText view helper.
Zend\Form\Element\Text extends from Zend\Form\Element.

Basic Usage

This element automatically adds a "type" attribute of value "text".

1 use Zend\Form\Element;
2 use Zend\Form\Form;
3

4 $text = new Element\Text('my-text');

5 $text->setLabel('Enter your name');
6

7 $form = new Form('my-form');

8 $form->add($text);

orphan

142.3.16 Textarea

Zend\Form\Element\Textarea represents a textarea form input. It can be used with the

Zend\Form\View\Helper\FormTextarea view helper.
Zend\Form\Element\Textarea extends from Zend\Form\Element.

Basic Usage

This element automatically adds a "type" attribute of value "textarea".

142.3. Standard Elements 739

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1 use Zend\Form\Element;
2 use Zend\Form\Form;
3

4 $textarea = new Element\Textarea('my-textarea');

5 $textarea->setLabel('Enter a description');
6

7 $form = new Form('my-form');

8 $form->add($textarea);

142.4 HTML5 Elements

orphan

142.4.1 Color

Zend\Form\Element\Color is meant to be paired with the Zend\Form\View\Helper\FormColor for

HTML5 inputs with type color. This element adds filters and a Regex validator to its input filter specification in
order to validate a HTML5 valid simple color value on the server.

Basic Usage

This element automatically adds a "type" attribute of value "color".

1 use Zend\Form\Element;
2 use Zend\Form\Form;
3

4 $color = new Element\Color('color');

5 $color->setLabel('Background color');
6

7 $form = new Form('my-form');

8 $form->add($color);

Here is the same example using the array notation:

1 use Zend\Form\Form;
2

3 $form = new Form('my-form');

4 $form->add(array(
5 'type' => 'Zend\Form\Element\Color',
6 'name' => 'color',
7 'options' => array(
8 'label' => 'Background color'
9 )
10 ));

Public Methods

The following methods are in addition to the inherited methods of Zend\Form\Element.

getInputSpecification()
Returns a input filter specification, which includes Zend\Filter\StringTrim and

740 Chapter 142. Form Elements

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Zend\Filter\StringToLower filters, and a Zend\Validator\Regex to validate the RGB

hex format.
Return type array
orphan

142.4.2 Date

Zend\Form\Element\Date is meant to be paired with the Zend\Form\View\Helper\FormDate for

HTML5 inputs with type date. This element adds filters and validators to its input filter specification in order to
validate HTML5 date input values on the server.

Basic Usage

This element automatically adds a "type" attribute of value "date".

1 use Zend\Form\Element;
2 use Zend\Form\Form;
3

4 $date = new Element\Date('appointment-date');

5 $date
6 ->setLabel('Appointment Date')
7 ->setAttributes(array(
8 'min' => '2012-01-01',
9 'max' => '2020-01-01',
10 'step' => '1', // days; default step interval is 1 day
11 ))
12 ->setOptions(array(
13 'format' => 'Y-m-d'
14 ));
15

16 $form = new Form('my-form');

17 $form->add($date);

Here is with the array notation:

1 use Zend\Form\Form;
2

3 $form = new Form('my-form');

4 $form->add(array(
5 'type' => 'Zend\Form\Element\Date',
6 'name' => 'appointment-date',
7 'options' => array(
8 'label' => 'Appointment Date',
9 'format' => 'Y-m-d'
10 ),
11 'attributes' => array(
12 'min' => '2012-01-01',
13 'max' => '2020-01-01',
14 'step' => '1', // days; default step interval is 1 day
15 )
16 ));

Note: Note: the min, max, and step attributes should be set prior to calling Zend\Form::prepare(). Otherwise, the
default input specification for the element may not contain the correct validation rules.

142.4. HTML5 Elements 741

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Public Methods

The following methods are in addition to the inherited methods of Zend\Form\Element\DateTime.

getInputSpecification()
Returns a input filter specification, which includes Zend\Filter\StringTrim and will add the appropriate
validators based on the values from the min, max, and step attributes and format option. See getInputSpec-
ification in Zend\Form\Element\DateTime for more information.
One difference from Zend\Form\Element\DateTime is that the Zend\Validator\DateStep val-
idator will expect the step attribute to use an interval of days (default is 1 day).
Return type array
orphan

142.4.3 DateTime

Zend\Form\Element\DateTime is meant to be paired with the Zend\Form\View\Helper\FormDateTime

for HTML5 inputs with type datetime. This element adds filters and validators to its input filter specification in order
to validate HTML5 datetime input values on the server.

Basic Usage

This element automatically adds a "type" attribute of value "datetime".

1 use Zend\Form\Element;
2 use Zend\Form\Form;
3

4 $dateTime = new Element\DateTime('appointment-date-time');

5 $dateTime
6 ->setLabel('Appointment Date/Time')
7 ->setAttributes(array(
8 'min' => '2010-01-01T00:00:00Z',
9 'max' => '2020-01-01T00:00:00Z',
10 'step' => '1', // minutes; default step interval is 1 min
11 ))
12 ->setOptions(array(
13 'format' => 'Y-m-d\TH:iP'
14 ));
15

16 $form = new Form('my-form');

17 $form->add($dateTime);

Here is with the array notation:

1 use Zend\Form\Form;
2

3 $form = new Form('my-form');

4 $form->add(array(
5 'type' => 'Zend\Form\Element\DateTime',
6 'name' => 'appointment-date-time',
7 'options' => array(
8 'label' => 'Appointment Date/Time',
9 'format' => 'Y-m-d\TH:iP'
10 ),
11 'attributes' => array(

742 Chapter 142. Form Elements

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

12 'min' => '2010-01-01T00:00:00Z',

13 'max' => '2020-01-01T00:00:00Z',
14 'step' => '1', // minutes; default step interval is 1 min
15 )
16 ));

Note: Note: the min, max, and step attributes should be set prior to calling Zend\Form::prepare(). Otherwise, the
default input specification for the element may not contain the correct validation rules.

Public Methods

The following methods are in addition to the inherited methods of Zend\Form\Element.

getInputSpecification()
Returns a input filter specification, which includes Zend\Filter\StringTrim and will add the appropriate
validators based on the values from the min, max, and step attributes and format option.
If the min attribute is set, a Zend\Validator\GreaterThan validator will be added to ensure the date
value is greater than the minimum value.
If the max attribute is set, a Zend\Validator\LessThanValidator validator will be added to ensure
the date value is less than the maximum value.
If the step attribute is set to any, step validations will be skipped. Otherwise, a
Zend\Validator\DateStep validator will be added to ensure the date value is within a certain
interval of minutes (default is 1 minute).
The input filter specification also includes a Zend\Validator\Date validator to ensure the format of the
value. If the format option is set, that format will be used. Otherwise the default format will be used.
Return type array
setOptions(array $options)
Set options for an element of type DateTime. The accepted option, in addition to the inherited options of
Zend\Form\Element , is: "format", which calls setFormat.
setFormat(string $format)
Sets the format used to validate the value. Accepts a \DateTime compatible string.
getFormat()
Return the DateTime format used to validate the value.
Return type String
orphan

142.4.4 DateTimeLocal

Zend\Form\Element\DateTimeLocal is meant to be paired with the

Zend\Form\View\Helper\FormDateTimeLocal for HTML5 inputs with type datetime-local. This el-
ement adds filters and validators to its input filter specification in order to validate HTML5 a local datetime input
values on the server.

Basic Usage

This element automatically adds a "type" attribute of value "datetime-local".

142.4. HTML5 Elements 743

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1 use Zend\Form\Element;
2 use Zend\Form\Form;
3

4 $dateTimeLocal = new Element\DateTimeLocal('appointment-date-time');

5 $dateTimeLocal
6 ->setLabel('Appointment Date')
7 ->setAttributes(array(
8 'min' => '2010-01-01T00:00:00',
9 'max' => '2020-01-01T00:00:00',
10 'step' => '1', // minutes; default step interval is 1 min
11 ))
12 ->setOptions(array(
13 'format' => 'Y-m-d\TH:i'
14 ));
15

16 $form = new Form('my-form');

17 $form->add($dateTimeLocal);

Here is with the array notation:

1 use Zend\Form\Form;
2

3 $form = new Form('my-form');

4 $form->add(array(
5 'type' => 'Zend\Form\Element\DateTimeLocal',
6 'name' => 'appointment-date-time',
7 'options' => array(
8 'label' => 'Appointment Date',
9 'format' => 'Y-m-d\TH:i'
10 ),
11 'attributes' => array(
12 'min' => '2010-01-01T00:00:00',
13 'max' => '2020-01-01T00:00:00',
14 'step' => '1', // minutes; default step interval is 1 min
15 )
16 ));

Note: Note: the min, max, and step attributes should be set prior to calling Zend\Form::prepare(). Otherwise, the
default input specification for the element may not contain the correct validation rules.

Public Methods

The following methods are in addition to the inherited methods of Zend\Form\Element\DateTime.

getInputSpecification()
Returns a input filter specification, which includes Zend\Filter\StringTrim and will add the appropriate
validators based on the values from the min, max, and step attributes and format option. See getInputSpec-
ification in Zend\Form\Element\DateTime for more information.
Return type array
orphan

744 Chapter 142. Form Elements

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

142.4.5 Email

Zend\Form\Element\Email is meant to be paired with the Zend\Form\View\Helper\FormEmail for

HTML5 inputs with type email. This element adds filters and validators to its input filter specification in order to
validate HTML5 valid email address on the server.

Basic Usage

This element automatically adds a "type" attribute of value "email".

1 use Zend\Form\Element;
2 use Zend\Form\Form;
3

4 $form = new Form('my-form');

5

6 // Single email address

7 $email = new Element\Email('email');
8 $email->setLabel('Email Address')
9 $form->add($email);
10

11 // Comma separated list of emails

12 $emails = new Element\Email('emails');
13 $emails
14 ->setLabel('Email Addresses')
15 ->setAttribute('multiple', true);
16 $form->add($emails);

Here is with the array notation:

1 use Zend\Form\Form;
2

3 $form = new Form('my-form');

4 $form->add(array(
5 'type' => 'Zend\Form\Element\Email',
6 'name' => 'email',
7 'options' => array(
8 'label' => 'Email Address'
9 ),
10 ));
11

12 $form->add(array(
13 'type' => 'Zend\Form\Element\Email',
14 'name' => 'emails',
15 'options' => array(
16 'label' => 'Email Addresses'
17 ),
18 'attributes' => array(
19 'multiple' => true
20 )
21 ));

Note: Note: the multiple attribute should be set prior to calling Zend\Form::prepare(). Otherwise, the default
input specification for the element may not contain the correct validation rules.

142.4. HTML5 Elements 745

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Public Methods

The following methods are in addition to the inherited methods of Zend\Form\Element.

getInputSpecification()
Returns a input filter specification, which includes a Zend\Filter\StringTrim filter, and a validator
based on the multiple attribute.
If the multiple attribute is unset or false, a Zend\Validator\Regex validator will be added to validate
a single email address.
If the multiple attribute is true, a Zend\Validator\Explode validator will be added to ensure the input
string value is split by commas before validating each email address with Zend\Validator\Regex.
Return type array
setValidator(ValidatorInterface $validator)
Sets the primary validator to use for this element
getValidator()
Get the primary validator
Return type ValidatorInterface
setEmailValidator(ValidatorInterface $validator)
Sets the email validator to use for multiple or single email addresses.
getEmailValidator()
Get the email validator to use for multiple or single email addresses.
The default Regex validator in use is to match that of the browser validation, but you are free to set a different
(more strict) email validator such as Zend\Validator\Email if you wish.
orphan

142.4.6 Month

Zend\Form\Element\Month is meant to be paired with the Zend\Form\View\Helper\FormMonth for

HTML5 inputs with type month. This element adds filters and validators to its input filter specification in order to
validate HTML5 month input values on the server.

Basic Usage

This element automatically adds a "type" attribute of value "month".

1 use Zend\Form\Element;
2 use Zend\Form\Form;
3

4 $month = new Element\Month('month');

5 $month
6 ->setLabel('Month')
7 ->setAttributes(array(
8 'min' => '2012-01',
9 'max' => '2020-01',
10 'step' => '1', // months; default step interval is 1 month
11 ));
12

13 $form = new Form('my-form');

14 $form->add($month);

746 Chapter 142. Form Elements

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Here is with the array notation:

1 use Zend\Form\Form;
2

3 $form = new Form('my-form');

4 $form->add(array(
5 'type' => 'Zend\Form\Element\Month',
6 'name' => 'month',
7 'options' => array(
8 'label' => 'Month'
9 ),
10 'attributes' => array(
11 'min' => '2012-12',
12 'max' => '2020-01',
13 'step' => '1', // months; default step interval is 1 month
14 )
15 ));

Note: Note: the min, max, and step attributes should be set prior to calling Zend\Form::prepare(). Otherwise, the
default input specification for the element may not contain the correct validation rules.

Public Methods

The following methods are in addition to the inherited methods of Zend\Form\Element\DateTime.

getInputSpecification()
Returns a input filter specification, which includes Zend\Filter\StringTrim and will add the appro-
priate validators based on the values from the min, max, and step attributes. See getInputSpecification in
Zend\Form\Element\DateTime for more information.
One difference from Zend\Form\Element\DateTime is that the Zend\Validator\DateStep val-
idator will expect the step attribute to use an interval of months (default is 1 month).
Return type array
orphan

142.4.7 Number

Zend\Form\Element\Number is meant to be paired with the Zend\Form\View\Helper\FormNumber for

HTML5 inputs with type number. This element adds filters and validators to its input filter specification in order to
validate HTML5 number input values on the server.

Basic Usage

This element automatically adds a "type" attribute of value "number".

1 use Zend\Form\Element;
2 use Zend\Form\Form;
3

4 $number = new Element\Number('quantity');

5 $number
6 ->setLabel('Quantity')
7 ->setAttributes(array(
8 'min' => '0',

142.4. HTML5 Elements 747

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

9 'max' => '10',

10 'step' => '1', // default step interval is 1
11 ));
12

13 $form = new Form('my-form');

14 $form->add($number);

Here is with the array notation:

1 use Zend\Form\Form;
2

3 $form = new Form('my-form');

4 $form->add(array(
5 'type' => 'Zend\Form\Element\Number',
6 'name' => 'quantity',
7 'options' => array(
8 'label' => 'Quantity'
9 ),
10 'attributes' => array(
11 'min' => '0',
12 'max' => '10',
13 'step' => '1', // default step interval is 1
14 )
15 ));

Note: Note: the min, max, and step attributes should be set prior to calling Zend\Form::prepare(). Otherwise, the
default input specification for the element may not contain the correct validation rules.

Public Methods

The following methods are in addition to the inherited methods of Zend\Form\Element.

getInputSpecification()
Returns a input filter specification, which includes Zend\Filter\StringTrim and will add the appropriate
validators based on the values from the min, max, and step attributes.
If the min attribute is set, a Zend\Validator\GreaterThan validator will be added to ensure the number
value is greater than the minimum value. The min value should be a valid floating point number.
If the max attribute is set, a Zend\Validator\LessThan validator will be added to ensure the number
value is less than the maximum value. The max value should be a valid floating point number.
If the step attribute is set to any, step validations will be skipped. Otherwise, a Zend\Validator\Step
validator will be added to ensure the number value is within a certain interval (default is 1). The step value
should be either any or a valid floating point number.
Return type array
orphan

142.4.8 Range

Zend\Form\Element\Range is meant to be paired with the Zend\Form\View\Helper\FormRange for

HTML5 inputs with type range. This element adds filters and validators to its input filter specification in order to
validate HTML5 range values on the server.

748 Chapter 142. Form Elements

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Basic Usage

This element automatically adds a "type" attribute of value "range".

1 use Zend\Form\Element;
2 use Zend\Form\Form;
3

4 $range = new Element\Range('range');

5 $range
6 ->setLabel('Minimum and Maximum Amount')
7 ->setAttributes(array(
8 'min' => '0', // default minimum is 0
9 'max' => '100', // default maximum is 100
10 'step' => '1', // default interval is 1
11 ));
12

13 $form = new Form('my-form');

14 $form->add($range);

Here is with the array notation:

1 use Zend\Form\Form;
2

3 $form = new Form('my-form');

4 $form->add(array(
5 'type' => 'Zend\Form\Element\Range',
6 'name' => 'range',
7 'options' => array(
8 'label' => 'Minimum and Maximum Amount'
9 ),
10 'attributes' => array(
11 'min' => 0, // default minimum is 0
12 'max' => 100, // default maximum is 100
13 'step' => 1 // default interval is 1
14 )
15 ));

Note: Note: the min, max, and step attributes should be set prior to calling Zend\Form::prepare(). Otherwise, the
default input specification for the element may not contain the correct validation rules.

Public Methods

The following methods are in addition to the inherited methods of Zend\Form\Element\Number.

getInputSpecification()
Returns a input filter specification, which includes Zend\Filter\StringTrim and will add the appro-
priate validators based on the values from the min, max, and step attributes. See getInputSpecification in
Zend\Form\Element\Number for more information.
The Range element differs from Zend\Form\Element\Number in that the
Zend\Validator\GreaterThan and Zend\Validator\LessThan validators will always be
present. The default minimum is 1, and the default maximum is 100.
Return type array
orphan

142.4. HTML5 Elements 749

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

142.4.9 Time

Zend\Form\Element\Time is meant to be paired with the Zend\Form\View\Helper\FormTime for

HTML5 inputs with type time. This element adds filters and validators to its input filter specification in order to
validate HTML5 time input values on the server.

Basic Usage

This element automatically adds a "type" attribute of value "time".

1 use Zend\Form\Element;
2 use Zend\Form\Form;
3

4 $time = new Element\Time('time');

5 $time
6 ->setLabel('Time')
7 ->setAttributes(array(
8 'min' => '00:00:00',
9 'max' => '23:59:59',
10 'step' => '60', // seconds; default step interval is 60 seconds
11 ))
12 ->setOptions(array(
13 'format' => 'H:i:s'
14 ));
15

16 $form = new Form('my-form');

17 $form->add($time);

Here is the same example using the array notation:

1 use Zend\Form\Form;
2

3 $form = new Form('my-form');

4 $form->add(array(
5 'type' => 'Zend\Form\Element\Time',
6 'name' => 'time',
7 'options'=> array(
8 'label' => 'Time',
9 'format' => 'H:i:s'
10 ),
11 'attributes' => array(
12 'min' => '00:00:00',
13 'max' => '23:59:59',
14 'step' => '60', // seconds; default step interval is 60 seconds
15 )
16 ));

Note: The min, max, and step attributes should be set prior to calling Zend\Form::prepare(). Otherwise, the default
input specification for the element may not contain the correct validation rules.

Note: The default date format for the validator is H:i:s. A valid time string is however not required to have a
seconds part. In fact some user agent UIs such as Google Chrome and Opera submits a value on the H:i format (i.e.
without a second part). You might therefore want to set the date format accordingly.

750 Chapter 142. Form Elements

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Public Methods

The following methods are in addition to the inherited methods of Zend\Form\Element\DateTime.

getInputSpecification()
Returns a input filter specification, which includes Zend\Filter\StringTrim and will add the appropriate
validators based on the values from the min, max, and step attributes and format option. See getInputSpec-
ification in Zend\Form\Element\DateTime for more information.
One difference from Zend\Form\Element\DateTime is that the Zend\Validator\DateStep val-
idator will expect the step attribute to use an interval of seconds (default is 60 seconds).
Return type array
orphan

142.4.10 Url

Zend\Form\Element\Url is meant to be paired with the Zend\Form\View\Helper\FormUrl for HTML5

inputs with type url. This element adds filters and a Zend\Validator\Uri validator to its input filter specification
for validating HTML5 URL input values on the server.

Basic Usage

This element automatically adds a "type" attribute of value "url".

1 use Zend\Form\Element;
2 use Zend\Form\Form;
3

4 $url = new Element\Url('webpage-url');

5 $url->setLabel('Webpage URL');
6

7 $form = new Form('my-form');

8 $form->add($url);

Here is the same example using the array notation:

1 use Zend\Form\Form;
2

3 $form = new Form('my-form');

4 $form->add(array(
5 'type' => 'Zend\Form\Element\Url',
6 'name' => 'webpage-url',
7 'options' => array(
8 'label' => 'Webpage URL'
9 )
10 ));

Public Methods

The following methods are in addition to the inherited methods of Zend\Form\Element.

getInputSpecification()
Returns a input filter specification, which includes a Zend\Filter\StringTrim filter, and a
Zend\Validator\Uri to validate the URI string.

142.4. HTML5 Elements 751

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Return type array

orphan

142.4.11 Week

Zend\Form\Element\Week is meant to be paired with the Zend\Form\View\Helper\FormWeek for

HTML5 inputs with type week. This element adds filters and validators to its input filter specification in order to
validate HTML5 week input values on the server.

Basic Usage

This element automatically adds a "type" attribute of value "week".

1 use Zend\Form\Element;
2 use Zend\Form\Form;
3

4 $week = new Element\Week('week');

5 $week
6 ->setLabel('Week')
7 ->setAttributes(array(
8 'min' => '2012-W01',
9 'max' => '2020-W01',
10 'step' => '1', // weeks; default step interval is 1 week
11 ));
12

13 $form = new Form('my-form');

14 $form->add($week);

Here is the same example using the array notation:

1 use Zend\Form\Form;
2

3 $form = new Form('my-form');

4 $form->add(array(
5 'type' => 'Zend\Form\Element\Week',
6 'name' => 'week',
7 'options' => array(
8 'label' => 'Week'
9 ),
10 'attributes' => array(
11 'min' => '2012-W01',
12 'max' => '2020-W01',
13 'step' => '1', // weeks; default step interval is 1 week
14 )
15 ));

Note: Note: the min, max, and step attributes should be set prior to calling Zend\Form::prepare(). Otherwise, the
default input specification for the element may not contain the correct validation rules.

Public Methods

The following methods are in addition to the inherited methods of Zend\Form\Element\DateTime.

752 Chapter 142. Form Elements

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

getInputSpecification()
Returns a input filter specification, which includes Zend\Filter\StringTrim and will add the appro-
priate validators based on the values from the min, max, and step attributes. See getInputSpecification in
Zend\Form\Element\DateTime for more information.
One difference from Zend\Form\Element\DateTime is that the Zend\Validator\DateStep val-
idator will expect the step attribute to use an interval of weeks (default is 1 week).
Return type array

142.4. HTML5 Elements 753

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

754 Chapter 142. Form Elements

 CHAPTER 143

Form View Helpers

143.1 Introduction

Zend Framework comes with an initial set of helper classes related to Forms: e.g., rendering a text input, selection
box, or form labels. You can use helper, or plugin, classes to perform these behaviors for you.
See the section on view helpers for more information.

143.2 Standard Helpers

orphan

143.2.1 Form

The Form view helper is used to render a <form> HTML element and its attributes.
It iterates through all its elements and relies on the FormCollection and FormRow view helpers to render them
appropriately.
You can also use Zend\Form\View\Helper\FormRow in conjunction with Form::openTag() and
Form::closeTag() to have a more fine grained control over the output.
Basic usage:
1 /**
2 * inside view template
3 *
4 * @var \Zend\View\Renderer\PhpRenderer $this
5 * @var \Zend\Form\Form $form
6 */
7

8 echo $this->form($form);
9 // i.e.
10 // <form action="" method="POST">
11 // <label>
12 // <span>Some Label</span>
13 // <input type="text" name="some_element" value="">
14 // </label>
15 // </form>

The following public methods are in addition to those inherited from Zend\Form\View\Helper\AbstractHelper.

755
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

__invoke(FormInterface $form = null)

Prepares and renders the whole form.
Parameters $form A Form object.
Return type string
openTag(FormInterface $form = null)
Renders the <form> open tag for the $form instance.
Return type string
closeTag()
Renders a </form> closing tag.
Return type string
orphan

143.2.2 FormButton

The FormButton view helper is used to render a <button> HTML element and its attributes.
Basic usage:
1 use Zend\Form\Element;
2

3 $element = new Element\Button('my-button');

4 $element->setLabel("Reset");
5

6 // Within your view...

7

8 /**
9 * Example #1: Render entire button in one shot...
10 */
11 echo $this->formButton($element);
12 // <button name="my-button" type="button">Reset</button>
13

14 /**
15 * Example #2: Render button in 3 steps
16 */
17 // Render the opening tag
18 echo $this->formButton()->openTag($element);
19 // <button name="my-button" type="button">
20

21 echo '<span class="inner">' . $element->getLabel() . '</span>';

22

23 // Render the closing tag

24 echo $this->formButton()->closeTag();
25 // </button>
26

27 /**
28 * Example #3: Override the element label
29 */
30 echo $this->formButton()->render($element, 'My Content');
31 // <button name="my-button" type="button">My Content</button>

The following public methods are in addition to those inherited from Zend\Form\View\Helper\FormInput.
openTag($element = null)
Renders the <button> open tag for the $element instance.

756 Chapter 143. Form View Helpers

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Return type string

closeTag()
Renders a </button> closing tag.
Return type string
render(ElementInterface $element[, $buttonContent = null ])
Renders a buttons opening tag, inner content, and closing tag.
Parameters
$element The button element.
$buttonContent (optional) The inner content to render. If null, will default to the
$elements label.
Return type string
orphan

143.2.3 FormCaptcha

TODO Basic usage:

1 use Zend\Captcha;
2 use Zend\Form\Element;
3

4 $captcha = new Element\Captcha('captcha');

5 $captcha
6 ->setCaptcha(new Captcha\Dumb())
7 ->setLabel('Please verify you are human');
8

9 // Within your view...

10

11 echo $this->formCaptcha($captcha);
12

13 // TODO

orphan

143.2.4 FormCheckbox

The FormCheckbox view helper can be used to render a <input type="checkbox"> HTML form input. It
is meant to work with the Zend\Form\Element\Checkbox element, which provides a default input specification for
validating the checkbox values.
FormCheckbox extends from Zend\Form\View\Helper\FormInput. Basic usage:
1 use Zend\Form\Element;
2

3 $element = new Element\Checkbox('my-checkbox');

4

5 // Within your view...

6

7 /**
8 * Example #1: Default options
9 */
10 echo $this->formCheckbox($element);

143.2. Standard Helpers 757

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

11 // <input type="hidden" name="my-checkbox" value="0">

12 // <input type="checkbox" name="my-checkbox" value="1">
13

14 /**
15 * Example #2: Disable hidden element
16 */
17 $element->setUseHiddenElement(false);
18 echo $this->formCheckbox($element);
19 // <input type="checkbox" name="my-checkbox" value="1">
20

21 /**
22 * Example #3: Change checked/unchecked values
23 */
24 $element->setUseHiddenElement(true)
25 ->setUncheckedValue('no')
26 ->setCheckedValue('yes');
27 echo $this->formCheckbox($element);
28 // <input type="hidden" name="my-checkbox" value="no">
29 // <input type="checkbox" name="my-checkbox" value="yes">

orphan

143.2.5 FormCollection

TODO Basic usage:

TODO
orphan

143.2.6 FormElement

The FormElement view helper proxies the rendering to specific form view helpers depending on the type of
the Zend\Form\Element that is passed in. For instance, if the passed in element had a type of text, the
FormElement helper will retrieve and use the FormText helper to render the element.
Basic usage:
1 use Zend\Form\Form;
2 use Zend\Form\Element;
3

4 // Within your view...

5

6 /**
7 * Example #1: Render different types of form elements
8 */
9 $textElement = new Element\Text('my-text');
10 $checkboxElement = new Element\Checkbox('my-checkbox');
11

12 echo $this->formElement($textElement);
13 // <input type="text" name="my-text" value="">
14

15 echo $this->formElement($checkboxElement);
16 // <input type="hidden" name="my-checkbox" value="0">
17 // <input type="checkbox" name="my-checkbox" value="1">
18

19 /**

758 Chapter 143. Form View Helpers

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

20 * Example #2: Loop through form elements and render them

21 */
22 $form = new Form();
23 // ...add elements and input filter to form...
24 $form->prepare();
25

26 // Render the opening tag

27 echo $this->form()->openTag($form);
28

29 // ...loop through and render the form elements...

30 foreach ($form as $element) {
31 echo $this->formElement($element); // <-- Magic!
32 echo $this->formElementErrors($element);
33 }
34

35 // Render the closing tag

36 echo $this->form()->closeTag();

orphan

143.2.7 FormElementErrors

The FormElementErrors view helper is used to render the validation error messages of an element.
Basic usage:
1 use Zend\Form\Form;
2 use Zend\Form\Element;
3 use Zend\InputFilter\InputFilter;
4 use Zend\InputFilter\Input;
5

6 // Create a form
7 $form = new Form();
8 $element = new Element\Text('my-text');
9 $form->add($element);
10

11 // Create a input
12 $input = new Input('my-text');
13 $input->setRequired(true);
14

15 $inputFilter = new InputFilter();

16 $inputFilter->add($input);
17 $form->setInputFilter($inputFilter);
18

19 // Force a failure
20 $form->setData(array()); // Empty data
21 $form->isValid(); // Not valid
22

23 // Within your view...

24

25 /**
26 * Example #1: Default options
27 */
28 echo $this->formElementErrors($element);
29 // <ul><li>Value is required and can&#039;t be empty</li></ul>
30

31 /**
32 * Example #2: Add attributes to open format

143.2. Standard Helpers 759

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

33 */
34 echo $this->formElementErrors($element, array('class' => 'help-inline'));
35 // <ul class="help-inline"><li>Value is required and can&#039;t be empty</li></ul>
36

37 /**
38 * Example #3: Custom format
39 */
40 echo $this->formElementErrors()
41 ->setMessageOpenFormat('<div class="help-inline">')
42 ->setMessageSeparatorString('</div><div class="help-inline">')
43 ->setMessageCloseString('</div>')
44 ->render($element);
45 // <div class="help-inline">Value is required and can&#039;t be empty</div>

The following public methods are in addition to those inherited from Zend\Form\View\Helper\AbstractHelper.
setMessageOpenFormat(string $messageOpenFormat)
Set the formatted string used to open message representation.
Parameters $messageOpenFormat The formatted string to use to open the messages. Uses
<ul%s><li> by default. Attributes are inserted here.
getMessageOpenFormat()
Returns the formatted string used to open message representation.
Return type string
setMessageSeparatorString(string $messageSeparatorString)
Sets the string used to separate messages.
Parameters $messageSeparatorString The string to use to separate the messages. Uses
</li><li> by default.
getMessageSeparatorString()
Returns the string used to separate messages.
Return type string
setMessageCloseString(string $messageCloseString)
Sets the string used to close message representation.
Parameters $messageCloseString The string to use to close the messages. Uses
</li></ul> by default.
getMessageCloseString()
Returns the string used to close message representation.
Return type string
setAttributes(array $attributes)
Set the attributes that will go on the message open format.
Parameters $attributes Key value pairs of attributes.
getAttributes()
Returns the attributes that will go on the message open format.
Return type array
render(ElementInterface $element[, array $attributes = array() ])
Renders validation errors for the provided $element.
Parameters

760 Chapter 143. Form View Helpers

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

$element The element.

$attributes Additional attributes that will go on the message open format. These are
merged with those set via setAttributes().
Return type string
orphan

143.2.8 FormFile

The FormFile view helper can be used to render a <input type="file"> form input. It is meant to work with
the Zend\Form\Element\File element.
FormFile extends from Zend\Form\View\Helper\FormInput. Basic usage:
1 use Zend\Form\Element;
2

3 $element = new Element\File('my-file');

4

5 // Within your view...

6

7 echo $this->formFile($element);
8 // <input type="file" name="my-file">

For HTML5 multiple file uploads, the multiple attribute can be used. Browsers that do not support HTML5 will
default to a single upload input.
1 use Zend\Form\Element;
2

3 $element = new Element\File('my-file');

4 $element->setAttribute('multiple', true);
5

6 // Within your view...

7

8 echo $this->formFile($element);
9 // <input type="file" name="my-file" multiple="multiple">

orphan

143.2.9 FormHidden

The FormHidden view helper can be used to render a <input type="hidden"> HTML form input. It is meant
to work with the Zend\Form\Element\Hidden element.
FormHidden extends from Zend\Form\View\Helper\FormInput. Basic usage:
1 use Zend\Form\Element;
2

3 $element = new Element\Hidden('my-hidden');

4 $element->setValue('foo');
5

6 // Within your view...

7

8 echo $this->formHidden($element);
9 // <input type="hidden" name="my-hidden" value="foo">

orphan

143.2. Standard Helpers 761

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

143.2.10 FormImage

The FormImage view helper can be used to render a <input type="image"> HTML form input. It is meant to
work with the Zend\Form\Element\Image element.
FormImage extends from Zend\Form\View\Helper\FormInput. Basic usage:
1 use Zend\Form\Element;
2

3 $element = new Element\Image('my-image');

4 $element->setAttribute('src', '/img/my-pic.png');
5

6 // Within your view...

7

8 echo $this->formImage($element);
9 // <input type="image" name="my-image" src="/img/my-pic.png">

orphan

143.2.11 FormInput

The FormInput view helper is used to render a <input> HTML form input tag. It acts as a base class for all of the
specifically typed form input helpers (FormText, FormCheckbox, FormSubmit, etc.), and is not suggested for direct
use.
It contains a general map of valid tag attributes and types for attribute filtering. Each subclass of FormInput imple-
ments its own specific map of valid tag attributes. The following public methods are in addition to those inherited
from Zend\Form\View\Helper\AbstractHelper.
render(ElementInterface $element)
Renders the <input> tag for the $element.
Return type string
orphan

143.2.12 FormLabel

The FormLabel view helper is used to render a <label> HTML element and its attributes. If you have a
Zend\I18n\Translator\Translator attached, FormLabel will translate the label contents during its ren-
dering.
Basic usage:
1 use Zend\Form\Element;
2

3 $element = new Element\Text('my-text');

4 $element->setLabel('Label')
5 ->setAttribute('id', 'text-id')
6 ->setLabelAttributes(array('class' => 'control-label'));
7

8 // Within your view...

9

10 /**
11 * Example #1: Render label in one shot
12 */
13 echo $this->formLabel($element);
14 // <label class="control-label" for="text-id">Label</label>

762 Chapter 143. Form View Helpers

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

15

16 echo $this->formLabel($element, $this->formText($element));

17 // <label class="control-label" for="text-id">Label<input type="text" name="my-text"></label>
18

19 echo $this->formLabel($element, $this->formText($element), 'append');

20 // <label class="control-label" for="text-id"><input type="text" name="my-text">Label</label>
21

22 /**
23 * Example #2: Render label in separate steps
24 */
25 // Render the opening tag
26 echo $this->formLabel()->openTag($element);
27 // <label class="control-label" for="text-id">
28

29 // Render the closing tag

30 echo $this->formLabel()->closeTag();
31 // </label>
32

33 /**
34 * Example #3: Render html label after toggling off escape
35 */
36 $element->setLabel('<abbr title="Completely Automated Public Turing test to tell Computers and Humans
37 $element->setLabelOptions(array('disable_html_escape' => true));
38 echo $this->formLabel($element);
39 // <label class="control-label" for="text-id">
40 // <abbr title="Completely Automated Public Turing test to tell Computers and Humans Apart">CAPTC
41 // </label>

Note: HTML escape only applies to the Element::$label property, not to the helper $labelContent param-
eter.

Attaching a translator and setting a text domain:

1 // Setting a translator
2 $this->formLabel()->setTranslator($translator);
3

4 // Setting a text domain

5 $this->formLabel()->setTranslatorTextDomain('my-text-domain');
6

7 // Setting both
8 $this->formLabel()->setTranslator($translator, 'my-text-domain');

Note: If you have a translator in the Service Manager under the key, translator, the view
helper plugin manager will automatically attach the translator to the FormLabel view helper. See
Zend\View\HelperPluginManager::injectTranslator() for more information.

The following public methods are in addition to those inherited from Zend\Form\View\Helper\AbstractHelper.
__invoke(ElementInterface $element = null, string $labelContent = null, string $position = null)
Render a form label, optionally with content.
Always generates a for statement, as we cannot assume the form input will be provided in the
$labelContent.
Parameters
$element A form element.
$labelContent If null, will attempt to use the elements label value.

143.2. Standard Helpers 763

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

$position Append or prepend the elements label value to the $labelContent. One of
FormLabel::APPEND or FormLabel::PREPEND (default)
Return type string
openTag(array|ElementInterface $attributesOrElement = null)
Renders the <label> open tag and attributes.
Parameters $attributesOrElement An array of key value attributes or a ElementInterface
instance.
Return type string
closeTag()
Renders a </label> closing tag.
Return type string
orphan

143.2.13 FormMultiCheckbox

The FormMultiCheckbox view helper can be used to render a group <input type="checkbox"> HTML
form inputs. It is meant to work with the Zend\Form\Element\MultiCheckbox element, which provides a default input
specification for validating a multi checkbox.
FormMultiCheckbox extends from Zend\Form\View\Helper\FormInput. Basic usage:
1 use Zend\Form\Element;
2

3 $element = new Element\MultiCheckbox('my-multicheckbox');

4 $element->setValueOptions(array(
5 '0' => 'Apple',
6 '1' => 'Orange',
7 '2' => 'Lemon',
8 ));
9

10 // Within your view...

11

12 /**
13 * Example #1: using the default label placement
14 */
15 echo $this->formMultiCheckbox($element);
16 // <label><input type="checkbox" name="my-multicheckbox[]" value="0">Apple</label>
17 // <label><input type="checkbox" name="my-multicheckbox[]" value="1">Orange</label>
18 // <label><input type="checkbox" name="my-multicheckbox[]" value="2">Lemon</label>
19

20 /**
21 * Example #2: using the prepend label placement
22 */
23 echo $this->formMultiCheckbox($element, 'prepend');
24 // <label>Apple<input type="checkbox" name="my-multicheckbox[]" value="0"></label>
25 // <label>Orange<input type="checkbox" name="my-multicheckbox[]" value="1"></label>
26 // <label>Lemon<input type="checkbox" name="my-multicheckbox[]" value="2"></label>

orphan

764 Chapter 143. Form View Helpers

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

143.2.14 FormPassword

The FormPassword view helper can be used to render a <input type="password"> HTML form input. It is
meant to work with the Zend\Form\Element\Password element.
FormPassword extends from Zend\Form\View\Helper\FormInput. Basic usage:
1 use Zend\Form\Element;
2

3 $element = new Element\Password('my-password');

4

5 // Within your view...

6 echo $this->formPassword($element);

Output:
1 <input type="password" name="my-password" value="">

orphan

143.2.15 FormRadio

The FormRadio view helper can be used to render a group <input type="radio"> HTML form inputs. It is
meant to work with the Zend\Form\Element\Radio element, which provides a default input specification for validating
a radio.
FormRadio extends from Zend\Form\View\Helper\FormMultiCheckbox. Basic usage:
1 use Zend\Form\Element;
2

3 $element = new Element\Radio('gender');

4 $element->setValueOptions(array(
5 '0' => 'Male',
6 '1' => 'Female',
7 ));
8

9 // Within your view...

10

11 /**
12 * Example #1: using the default label placement
13 */
14 echo $this->formRadio($element);
15 // <label><input type="radio" name="gender[]" value="0">Male</label>
16 // <label><input type="radio" name="gender[]" value="1">Female</label>
17

18 /**
19 * Example #2: using the prepend label placement
20 */
21 echo $this->formRadio($element, 'prepend');
22 // <label>Male<input type="checkbox" name="gender[]" value="0"></label>
23 // <label>Female<input type="checkbox" name="gender[]" value="1"></label>

orphan

143.2.16 FormReset

The FormReset view helper can be used to render a <input type="reset"> HTML form input.

143.2. Standard Helpers 765

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

FormText extends from Zend\Form\View\Helper\FormInput. Basic usage:

1 use Zend\Form\Element;
2

3 $element = new Element('my-reset');

4 $element->setAttribute('value', 'Reset');
5

6 // Within your view...

7 echo $this->formReset($element);

Output:
1 <input type="reset" name="my-reset" value="Reset">

orphan

143.2.17 FormRow

The FormRow view helper is in turn used by Form view helper to render each row of a form, nevertheless it can be
use stand-alone. A form row usually consists of the output produced by the helper specific to an input, plus its label
and errors, if any.
FormRow handles different rendering options, having elements wrapped by the <label> HTML block by default, but
also allowing to render them in separate blocks when the element has an id attribute specified, thus preserving browser
usability features in any case.
Other options involve label positioning, escaping, toggling errors and using custom partial templates. Please check out
Zend\Form\View\Helper\FormRow method API for more details. Usage:
1 /**
2 * inside view template
3 *
4 * @var \Zend\View\Renderer\PhpRenderer $this
5 * @var \Zend\Form\Form $form
6 */
7

8 // Prepare the form

9 $form->prepare();
10

11 // Render the opening tag

12 echo $this->form()->openTag($form);
13

14 /** @var \Zend\Form\Element\Text $element */

15 $element = $form->get('some_element');
16 $element->setLabel('Some Label');
17

18 // Render 'some_element' label, input, and errors if any

19 echo $this->formRow($element);
20 // i.e. <label><span>Some Label</span><input type="text" name="some_element" value=""></label>
21

22 // Altering label position

23 echo $this->formRow($element, 'append');
24 // i.e. <label><input type="text" name="some_element" value=""><span>Some Label</span></label>
25

26 // Setting the 'id' attribute will result in a separated label rather than a wrapping one
27 $element->setAttribute('id', 'element_id');
28 echo $this->formRow($element);
29 // i.e. <label for="element_id">Some Label</label><input type="text" name="some_element" id="element_

766 Chapter 143. Form View Helpers

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

30

31 // Turn off escaping for HTML labels

32 $element->setLabel('<abbr title="Completely Automated Public Turing test to tell Computers and Humans
33 $element->setLabelOptions(array('disable_html_escape' => true));
34 // i.e.
35 // <label>
36 // <span>
37 // <abbr title="Completely Automated Public Turing test to tell Computers and Humans Apart">CAP
38 // </span>
39 // <input type="text" name="some_element" value="">
40 // </label>
41

42 // Render the closing tag

43 echo $this->form()->closeTag();

Note: Label content is escaped by default

orphan

143.2.18 FormSelect

The FormSelect view helper can be used to render a group <input type="select"> HTML form input. It is
meant to work with the Zend\Form\Element\Select element, which provides a default input specification for validating
a select.
FormSelect extends from Zend\Form\View\Helper\FormInput. Basic usage:
1 use Zend\Form\Element;
2

3 $element = new Element\Select('language');

4 $element->setValueOptions(array(
5 '0' => 'French',
6 '1' => 'English',
7 '2' => 'Japanese',
8 '3' => 'Chinese'
9 ));
10

11 // Within your view...

12

13 /**
14 * Example
15 */
16 echo $this->formSelect($element);

orphan

143.2.19 FormSubmit

The FormSubmit view helper can be used to render a <input type="submit"> HTML form input. It is meant
to work with the Zend\Form\Element\Submit element.
FormSubmit extends from Zend\Form\View\Helper\FormInput. Basic usage:
1 use Zend\Form\Element;
2

3 $element = new Element\Submit('my-submit');

143.2. Standard Helpers 767

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

5 // Within your view...

6 echo $this->formSubmit($element);

Output:
1 <input type="submit" name="my-submit" value="">

orphan

143.2.20 FormText

The FormText view helper can be used to render a <input type="text"> HTML form input. It is meant to
work with the Zend\Form\Element\Text element.
FormText extends from Zend\Form\View\Helper\FormInput. Basic usage:
1 use Zend\Form\Element;
2

3 $element = new Element\Text('my-text');

4

5 // Within your view...

6 echo $this->formText($element);

Output:
1 <input type="text" name="my-text" value="">

orphan

143.2.21 FormTextarea

The FormTextarea view helper can be used to render a <textarea></textarea> HTML form input. It is
meant to work with the Zend\Form\Element\Textarea element. Basic usage:
1 use Zend\Form\Element;
2

3 $element = new Element\Textarea('my-textarea');

4

5 // Within your view...

6 echo $this->formTextarea($element);

Output:
1 <textarea name="my-textarea"></textarea>

orphan

143.2.22 AbstractHelper

The AbstractHelper is used as a base abstract class for Form view helpers, providing methods for vali-
dating form HTML attributes, as well as controlling the doctype and character encoding. AbstractHelper
also extends from Zend\I18n\View\Helper\AbstractTranslatorHelper which provides an imple-
mentation for the Zend\I18n\Translator\TranslatorAwareInterface that allows setting a trans-
lator and text domain. The following public methods are in addition to the inherited methods of
Zend\I18n\View\Helper\AbstractTranslatorHelper.

768 Chapter 143. Form View Helpers

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

setDoctype(string $doctype)
Sets a doctype to use in the helper.
getDoctype()
Returns the doctype used in the helper.
Return type string
setEncoding(string $encoding)
Set the translation text domain to use in helper when translating.
getEncoding()
Returns the character encoding used in the helper.
Return type string
getId()
Returns the element id. If no ID attribute present, attempts to use the name attribute. If name attribute is also
not present, returns null.
Return type string or null

143.3 HTML5 Helpers

orphan

143.3.1 FormColor

The FormColor view helper can be used to render a <input type="color"> HTML5 form input. It is meant
to work with the Zend\Form\Element\Color element.
FormColor extends from Zend\Form\View\Helper\FormInput. Basic usage:
1 use Zend\Form\Element;
2

3 $element = new Element\Color('my-color');

4

5 // Within your view...

6 echo $this->formColor($element);

Output:
1 <input type="color" name="my-color" value="">

orphan

143.3.2 FormDate

The FormDate view helper can be used to render a <input type="date"> HTML5 form input. It is meant to
work with the Zend\Form\Element\Date element, which provides a default input specification for validating HTML5
date values.
FormDate extends from Zend\Form\View\Helper\FormDateTime. Basic usage:

143.3. HTML5 Helpers 769

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1 use Zend\Form\Element;
2

3 $element = new Element\Date('my-date');

4

5 // Within your view...

6

7 echo $this->formDate($element);
8 // <input type="date" name="my-date" value="">

orphan

143.3.3 FormDateTime

The FormDateTime view helper can be used to render a <input type="datetime"> HTML5 form input.
It is meant to work with the Zend\Form\Element\DateTime element, which provides a default input specification for
validating HTML5 datetime values.
FormDateTime extends from Zend\Form\View\Helper\FormInput. Basic usage:
1 use Zend\Form\Element;
2

3 $element = new Element\DateTime('my-datetime');

4

5 // Within your view...

6

7 echo $this->formDateTime($element);
8 // <input type="datetime" name="my-datetime" value="">

orphan

143.3.4 FormDateTimeLocal

The FormDateTimeLocal view helper can be used to render a <input type="datetime-local"> HTML5
form input. It is meant to work with the Zend\Form\Element\DateTimeLocal element, which provides a default input
specification for validating HTML5 datetime values.
FormDateTimeLocal extends from Zend\Form\View\Helper\FormDateTime. Basic usage:
1 use Zend\Form\Element;
2

3 $element = new Element\DateTimeLocal('my-datetime');

4

5 // Within your view...

6

7 echo $this->formDateTimeLocal($element);
8 // <input type="datetime-local" name="my-datetime" value="">

orphan

143.3.5 FormEmail

The FormEmail view helper can be used to render a <input type="email"> HTML5 form input. It is meant to
work with the Zend\Form\Element\Email element, which provides a default input specification with an email validator.
FormEmail extends from Zend\Form\View\Helper\FormInput. Basic usage:

770 Chapter 143. Form View Helpers

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1 use Zend\Form\Element;
2

3 $element = new Element\Email('my-email');

4

5 // Within your view...

6

7 echo $this->formEmail($element);
8 // <input type="email" name="my-email" value="">

orphan

143.3.6 FormMonth

The FormMonth view helper can be used to render a <input type="month"> HTML5 form input. It is meant to
work with the Zend\Form\Element\Month element, which provides a default input specification for validating HTML5
date values.
FormMonth extends from Zend\Form\View\Helper\FormDateTime. Basic usage:
1 use Zend\Form\Element;
2

3 $element = new Element\Month('my-month');

4

5 // Within your view...

6

7 echo $this->formMonth($element);
8 // <input type="month" name="my-month" value="">

orphan

143.3.7 FormNumber

The FormNumber view helper can be used to render a <input type="number"> HTML form input. It is meant
to work with the Zend\Form\Element\Number element, which provides a default input specification for validating
numerical values.
FormNumber extends from Zend\Form\View\Helper\FormInput. Basic usage:
1 use Zend\Form\Element;
2

3 $element = new Element\Number('my-number');

4

5 // Within your view...

6 echo $this->formNumber($element);

Output:
1 <input type="number" name="my-number" value="">

Usage of min, max and step attributes:

1 use Zend\Form\Element;
2

3 $element = new Element\Number('my-number');

4 $element->setAttributes(
5 array(
6 'min' => 5,

143.3. HTML5 Helpers 771

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

7 'max' => 20,

8 'step' => 0.5,
9 )
10 );
11 $element->setValue(12);
12

13 // Within your view...

14 echo $this->formNumber($element);

Output:
1 <input type="number" name="my-number" min="5" max="20" step="0.5" value="12">

orphan

143.3.8 FormRange

The FormRange view helper can be used to render a <input type="range"> HTML form input. It is meant to
work with the Zend\Form\Element\Range element, which provides a default input specification for validating numeri-
cal values.
FormRange extends from Zend\Form\View\Helper\FormInput. Basic usage:
1 use Zend\Form\Element;
2

3 $element = new Element\Range('my-range');

4

5 // Within your view...

6 echo $this->formRange($element);

Output:
1 <input type="range" name="my-range" value="">

Usage of min, max and step attributes:

1 use Zend\Form\Element;
2

3 $element = new Element\Range('my-range');

4 $element->setAttributes(
5 array(
6 'min' => 0,
7 'max' => 100,
8 'step' => 5,
9 )
10 );
11 $element->setValue(20);
12

13 // Within your view...

14 echo $this->formRange($element);

Output:
1 <input type="range" name="my-range" min="0" max="100" step="5" value="20">

orphan

772 Chapter 143. Form View Helpers

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

143.3.9 FormSearch

The FormSearch view helper can be used to render a <input type="search"> HTML5 form input.
FormSearch extends from Zend\Form\View\Helper\FormText. Basic usage:
1 use Zend\Form\Element;
2

3 $element = new Element('my-search');

4

5 // Within your view...

6 echo $this->formSearch($element);

Output:
1 <input type="search" name="my-search" value="">

orphan

143.3.10 FormTel

The FormTel view helper can be used to render a <input type="tel"> HTML5 form input.
FormTel extends from Zend\Form\View\Helper\FormInput. Basic usage:
1 use Zend\Form\Element;
2

3 $element = new Element('my-tel');

4

5 // Within your view...

6 echo $this->formTel($element);

Output:
1 <input type="tel" name="my-tel" value="">

orphan

143.3.11 FormTime

The FormTime view helper can be used to render a <input type="time"> HTML5 form input. It is meant to
work with the Zend\Form\Element\Time element, which provides a default input specification for validating HTML5
time values.
FormTime extends from Zend\Form\View\Helper\FormDateTime. Basic usage:
1 use Zend\Form\Element;
2

3 $element = new Element\Time('my-time');

4

5 // Within your view...

6

7 echo $this->formTime($element);
8 // <input type="time" name="my-time" value="">

orphan

143.3. HTML5 Helpers 773

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

143.3.12 FormUrl

The FormUrl view helper can be used to render a <input type="url"> HTML form input. It is meant to work
with the Zend\Form\Element\Url element, which provides a default input specification with an URL validator.
FormUrl extends from Zend\Form\View\Helper\FormInput. Basic usage:
1 use Zend\Form\Element;
2

3 $element = new Element\Url('my-url');

4

5 // Within your view...

6 echo $this->formUrl($element);

Output:
1 <input type="url" name="my-url" value="">

Usage of custom regular expression pattern:

1 use Zend\Form\Element;
2

3 $element = new Element\Url('my-url');

4 $element->setAttribute('pattern', 'https?://.+');
5

6 // Within your view...

7 echo $this->formUrl($element);

Output:
1 <input type="url" name="my-url" pattern="https?://.+" value="">

orphan

143.3.13 FormWeek

The FormWeek view helper can be used to render a <input type="week"> HTML5 form input. It is meant to
work with the Zend\Form\Element\Week element, which provides a default input specification for validating HTML5
week values.
FormWeek extends from Zend\Form\View\Helper\FormDateTime. Basic usage:
1 use Zend\Form\Element;
2

3 $element = new Element\Week('my-week');

4

5 // Within your view...

6 echo $this->formWeek($element);

Output:
1 <input type="week" name="my-week" value="">

Usage of min, max and step attributes:

1 use Zend\Form\Element;
2

3 $element = new Element\Week('my-week');

4 $element->setAttributes(
5 array(

774 Chapter 143. Form View Helpers

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

6 'min' => '2012-W01',

7 'max' => '2020-W01',
8 'step' => 2, // weeks; default step interval is 1 week
9 )
10 );
11 $element->setValue('2014-W10');
12

13 // Within your view...

14 echo $this->formWeek($element);

Output:
1 <input type="week" name="my-week" min="2012-W01" max="2020-W01" step="2" value="2014-W10">

143.4 File Upload Progress Helpers

orphan

143.4.1 FormFileApcProgress

The FormFileApcProgress view helper can be used to render a <input type="hidden" ...> with a
progress ID value used by the APC File Upload Progress feature. The APC php module is required for this view
helper to work. Unlike other Form view helpers, the FormFileSessionProgress helper does not accept a Form
Element as a parameter.
An id attribute with a value of "progress_key" will automatically be added.

Warning: The view helper must be rendered before the file input in the form, or upload progress will not work
correctly.

Best used with the Zend\ProgressBar\Upload\ApcProgress handler.

See the apc.rfc1867 ini setting in the APC Configuration documentation for more information.
FormFileApcProgress extends from Zend\Form\View\Helper\FormInput. Basic usage:
1 // Within your view...
2

3 echo $this->formFileApcProgress();
4 // <input type="hidden" id="progress_key" name="APC_UPLOAD_PROGRESS" value="12345abcde">

orphan

143.4.2 FormFileSessionProgress

The FormFileSessionProgress view helper can be used to render a <input type="hidden" ...>
which can be used by the PHP 5.4 File Upload Session Progress feature. PHP 5.4 is required for this view helper
to work. Unlike other Form view helpers, the FormFileSessionProgress helper does not accept a Form Ele-
ment as a parameter.
An id attribute with a value of "progress_key" will automatically be added.

143.4. File Upload Progress Helpers 775

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Warning: The view helper must be rendered before the file input in the form, or upload progress will not work
correctly.

Best used with the Zend\ProgressBar\Upload\SessionProgress handler.

See the Session Upload Progress in the PHP documentation for more information.
FormFileSessionProgress extends from Zend\Form\View\Helper\FormInput. Basic usage:
1 // Within your view...
2

3 echo $this->formFileSessionProgress();
4 // <input type="hidden" id="progress_key" name="PHP_SESSION_UPLOAD_PROGRESS" value="12345abcde">

orphan

143.4.3 FormFileUploadProgress

The FormFileUploadProgress view helper can be used to render a <input type="hidden" ...>
which can be used by the PECL uploadprogress extension. Unlike other Form view helpers, the
FormFileUploadProgress helper does not accept a Form Element as a parameter.
An id attribute with a value of "progress_key" will automatically be added.

Warning: The view helper must be rendered before the file input in the form, or upload progress will not work
correctly.

Best used with the Zend\ProgressBar\Upload\UploadProgress handler.

See the PECL uploadprogress extension for more information.
FormFileUploadProgress extends from Zend\Form\View\Helper\FormInput. Basic usage:
1 // Within your view...
2

3 echo $this->formFileSessionProgress();
4 // <input type="hidden" id="progress_key" name="UPLOAD_IDENTIFIER" value="12345abcde">

776 Chapter 143. Form View Helpers

 CHAPTER 144

Zend\Http

144.1 Overview

Zend\Http is a primary foundational component of Zend Framework. Since much of what PHP does is web-based,
specifically HTTP, it makes sense to have a performant, extensible, concise and consistent API to do all things HTTP.
In nutshell, there are several parts of Zend\Http:
Context-less Request and Response classes that expose a fluent API for introspecting several aspects of
HTTP messages:
Request line information and response status information
Parameters, such as those found in POST and GET
Message Body
Headers
A Client implementation with various adapters that allow for sending requests and introspecting responses.

144.2 Zend\Http Request, Response and Headers

The Request, Response and Headers portion of the Zend\Http component provides a fluent, object-oriented inter-
face for introspecting information from all the various parts of an HTTP request or HTTP response. The two main
objects are Zend\Http\Request and Zend\Http\Response. These two classes are context-less, meaning
that they model a request or response in the same way whether it is presented by a client (to send a request and receive
a response) or by a server (to receive a request and send a response). In other words, regardless of the context, the API
remains the same for introspecting their various respective parts. Each attempts to fully model a request or response
so that a developer can create these objects from a factory, or create and populate them manually.

777
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

778 Chapter 144. Zend\Http

 CHAPTER 145

The Request Class

145.1 Overview

The Zend\Http\Request object is responsible for providing a fluent API that allows a developer to interact with
all the various parts of an HTTP request.
A typical HTTP request looks like this:
--------------------------
| METHOD | URI | VERSION |
--------------------------
| HEADERS |
--------------------------
| BODY |
--------------------------

In simplified terms, the request consists of a method, URI and HTTP version number which together make up the
Request Line. Next come the HTTP headers, of which there can be 0 or more. After that is the request body, which
is typically used when a client wishes to send data to the server in the form of an encoded file, or include a set of
POST parameters, for example. More information on the structure and specification of a HTTP request can be found
in RFC-2616 on the W3.org site.

145.2 Quick Start

Request objects can either be created from the provided fromString() factory, or, if you wish to have a completely
empty object to start with, by simply instantiating the Zend\Http\Request class.
1 use Zend\Http\Request;
2

3 $request = Request::fromString(<<<EOS
4 POST /foo HTTP/1.1
5 \r\n
6 HeaderField1: header-field-value1
7 HeaderField2: header-field-value2
8 \r\n\r\n
9 foo=bar&
10 EOS
11 );
12

13 // OR, the completely equivalent

14

779
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

15 $request = new Request();

16 $request->setMethod(Request::METHOD_POST);
17 $request->setUri('/foo');
18 $request->getHeaders()->addHeaders(array(
19 'HeaderField1' => 'header-field-value1',
20 'HeaderField2' => 'header-field-value2',
21 ));
22 $request->getPost()->set('foo', 'bar');

145.3 Configuration Options

No configuration options are available.

145.4 Available Methods

Request::fromString Request::fromString(string $string)

A factory that produces a Request object from a well-formed HTTP Request string.
Returns Zend\Http\Request
setMethod setMethod(string $method)
Set the method for this request.
Returns Zend\Http\Request
getMethod getMethod()
Return the method for this request.
Returns string
setUri setUri(string|Zend\Uri\Http $uri)
Set the URI/URL for this request; this can be a string or an instance of Zend\Uri\Http.
Returns Zend\Http\Request
getUri getUri()
Return the URI for this request object.
Returns Zend\Uri\Http
getUriString getUriString()
Return the URI for this request object as a string.
Returns string
setVersion setVersion(string $version)
Set the HTTP version for this object, one of 1.0 or 1.1 (Request::VERSION_10,
Request::VERSION_11).
Returns Zend\Http\Request

780 Chapter 145. The Request Class

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

getVersion getVersion()
Return the HTTP version for this request.
Returns string
setQuery setQuery(Zend\Stdlib\ParametersInterface $query)
Provide an alternate Parameter Container implementation for query parameters in this object. (This is NOT the
primary API for value setting; for that, see getQuery()).
Returns Zend\Http\Request
getQuery getQuery(string|null $name, mixed|null $default)
Return the parameter container responsible for query parameters or a single query parameter.
Returns string, Zend\Stdlib\ParametersInterface, or null depending on value of $name ar-
gument.
setPost setPost(Zend\Stdlib\ParametersInterface $post)
Provide an alternate Parameter Container implementation for POST parameters in this object. (This is NOT the
primary API for value setting; for that, see getPost()).
Returns Zend\Http\Request
getPost getPost(string|null $name, mixed|null $default)
Return the parameter container responsible for POST parameters or a single POST parameter.
Returns string, Zend\Stdlib\ParametersInterface, or null depending on value of $name ar-
gument.
getCookie getCookie()
Return the Cookie header, this is the same as calling $request->getHeaders()->get(Cookie);.
Returns Zend\Http\Header\Cookie
setFiles setFiles(Zend\Stdlib\ParametersInterface $files)
Provide an alternate Parameter Container implementation for file parameters in this object, (This is NOT the
primary API for value setting; for that, see getFiles()).
Returns Zend\Http\Request
getFiles getFiles(string|null $name, mixed|null $default)
Return the parameter container responsible for file parameters or a single file parameter.
Returns string, Zend\Stdlib\ParametersInterface, or null depending on value of $name ar-
gument.
setHeaders setHeaders(Zend\Http\Headers $headers)
Provide an alternate Parameter Container implementation for headers in this object, (this is NOT the primary
API for value setting, for that see getHeaders()).
Returns Zend\Http\Request
getHeaders getHeaders(string|null $name, mixed|null $default)
Return the container responsible for storing HTTP headers. This container exposes the primary API for manip-
ulating headers set in the HTTP request. See the section on Zend\Http\Headers for more information.
Returns Zend\Http\Headers if $name is null. Returns Zend\Http\Header\HeaderInterface
or ArrayIterator if $name matches one or more stored headers, respectively.

145.4. Available Methods 781

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

setMetadata setMetadata(string|int|array|Traversable $spec, mixed $value)

Set message metadata.
Non-destructive setting of message metadata; always adds to the metadata, never overwrites the entire metadata
container.
Returns Zend\Http\Request
getMetadata getMetadata(null|string|int $key, null|mixed $default)
Retrieve all metadata or a single metadatum as specified by key.
Returns mixed
setContent setContent(mixed $value)
Set request body (content).
Returns Zend\Http\Request
getContent getContent()
Get request body (content).
Returns mixed
isOptions isOptions()
Is this an OPTIONS method request?
Returns bool
isGet isGet()
Is this a GET method request?
Returns bool
isHead isHead()
Is this a HEAD method request?
Returns bool
isPost isPost()
Is this a POST method request?
Returns bool
isPut isPut()
Is this a PUT method request?
Returns bool
isDelete isDelete()
Is this a DELETE method request?
Returns bool
isTrace isTrace()
Is this a TRACE method request?
Returns bool

782 Chapter 145. The Request Class

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

isConnect isConnect()
Is this a CONNECT method request?
Returns bool
isPatch isPatch()
Is this a PATCH method request?
Returns bool
isXmlHttpRequest isXmlHttpRequest()
Is this a Javascript XMLHttpRequest?
Returns bool
isFlashRequest isFlashRequest()
Is this a Flash request?
Returns bool
renderRequestLine renderRequestLine()
Return the formatted request line (first line) for this HTTP request.
Returns string
toString toString()
Returns string
__toString __toString()
Allow PHP casting of this object.
Returns string

145.5 Examples

Generating a Request object from a string

1 use Zend\Http\Request;
2

3 $string = "GET /foo HTTP/1.1\r\n\r\nSome Content";

4 $request = Request::fromString($string);
5

6 $request->getMethod(); // returns Request::METHOD_GET

7 $request->getUri(); // returns Zend\Uri\Http object
8 $request->getUriString(); // returns '/foo'
9 $request->getVersion(); // returns Request::VERSION_11 or '1.1'
10 $request->getContent(); // returns 'Some Content'

Retrieving and setting headers

1 use Zend\Http\Request;
2 use Zend\Http\Header\Cookie;
3

4 $request = new Request();

145.5. Examples 783

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

5 $request->getHeaders()->get('Content-Type'); // return content type

6 $request->getHeaders()->addHeader(new Cookie(array('foo' => 'bar')));
7 foreach ($request->getHeaders() as $header) {
8 echo $header->getFieldName() . ' with value ' . $header->getFieldValue();
9 }

Retrieving and setting GET and POST values

1 use Zend\Http\Request;
2

3 $request = new Request();

4

5 // getPost() and getQuery() both return, by default, a Parameters object, which extends ArrayObject
6 $request->getPost()->foo = 'Foo value';
7 $request->getQuery()->bar = 'Bar value';
8 $request->getPost('foo'); // returns 'Foo value'
9 $request->getQuery()->offsetGet('bar'); // returns 'Bar value'

Generating a formatted HTTP Request from a Request object

1 use Zend\Http\Request;
2

3 $request = new Request();

4 $request->setMethod(Request::METHOD_POST);
5 $request->setUri('/foo');
6 $request->getHeaders()->addHeaders(array(
7 'HeaderField1' => 'header-field-value1',
8 'HeaderField2' => 'header-field-value2',
9 ));
10 $request->getPost()->set('foo', 'bar');
11 $request->setContent($request->getPost()->toString());
12 echo $request->toString();
13

14 /** Will produce:

15 POST /foo HTTP/1.1
16 HeaderField1: header-field-value1
17 HeaderField2: header-field-value2
18

19 foo=bar
20 */

784 Chapter 145. The Request Class

 CHAPTER 146

The Response Class

146.1 Overview

The Zend\Http\Response class is responsible for providing a fluent API that allows a developer to interact with
all the various parts of an HTTP response.
A typical HTTP Response looks like this:
---------------------------
| VERSION | CODE | REASON |
---------------------------
| HEADERS |
---------------------------
| BODY |
---------------------------

The first line of the response consists of the HTTP version, status code, and the reason string for the provided status
code; this is called the Response Line. Next is a set of headers; there can be 0 or an unlimited number of headers.
The remainder of the response is the response body, which is typically a string of HTML that will render on the
clients browser, but which can also be a place for request/response payload data typical of an AJAX request. More
information on the structure and specification of an HTTP response can be found in RFC-2616 on the W3.org site.

146.2 Quick Start

Response objects can either be created from the provided fromString() factory, or, if you wish to have a com-
pletely empty object to start with, by simply instantiating the Zend\Http\Response class.
1 use Zend\Http\Response;
2 $response = Response::fromString(<<<EOS
3 HTTP/1.0 200 OK
4 HeaderField1: header-field-value
5 HeaderField2: header-field-value2
6

7 <html>
8 <body>
9 Hello World
10 </body>
11 </html>
12 EOS);
13

14 // OR

785
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

15

16 $response = new Response();

17 $response->setStatusCode(Response::STATUS_CODE_200);
18 $response->getHeaders()->addHeaders(array(
19 'HeaderField1' => 'header-field-value',
20 'HeaderField2' => 'header-field-value2',
21 ));
22 $response->setContent(<<<EOS
23 <html>
24 <body>
25 Hello World
26 </body>
27 </html>
28 EOS
29 );

146.3 Configuration Options

No configuration options are available.

146.4 Available Methods

Response::fromString Response::fromString(string $string)

Populate object from string
Returns Zend\Http\Response
renderStatusLine renderStatusLine()
Render the status line header
Returns string
setHeaders setHeaders(Zend\Http\Headers $headers)
Provide an alternate Parameter Container implementation for headers in this object. (This is NOT the primary
API for value setting; for that, see getHeaders().)
Returns Zend\Http\Request
getHeaders getHeaders()
Return the container responsible for storing HTTP headers. This container exposes the primary API for manip-
ulating headers set in the HTTP response. See the section on Zend\Http\Headers for more information.
Returns Zend\Http\Headers
setVersion setVersion(string $version)
Set the HTTP version for this object, one of 1.0 or 1.1 (Request::VERSION_10,
Request::VERSION_11).
Returns Zend\Http\Request.
getVersion getVersion()
Return the HTTP version for this request
Returns string

786 Chapter 146. The Response Class

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

setStatusCode setStatusCode(numeric $code)

Set HTTP status code
Returns Zend\Http\Response
getStatusCode getStatusCode()
Retrieve HTTP status code
Returns int
setReasonPhrase setReasonPhrase(string $reasonPhrase)
Set custom HTTP status message
Returns Zend\Http\Response
getReasonPhrase getReasonPhrase()
Get HTTP status message
Returns string
isClientError isClientError()
Does the status code indicate a client error?
Returns bool
isForbidden isForbidden()
Is the request forbidden due to ACLs?
Returns bool
isInformational isInformational()
Is the current status informational?
Returns bool
isNotFound isNotFound()
Does the status code indicate the resource is not found?
Returns bool
isOk isOk()
Do we have a normal, OK response?
Returns bool
isServerError isServerError()
Does the status code reflect a server error?
Returns bool
isRedirect isRedirect()
Do we have a redirect?
Returns bool
isSuccess isSuccess()
Was the response successful?
Returns bool

146.4. Available Methods 787

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

decodeChunkedBody decodeChunkedBody(string $body)

Decode a chunked transfer-encoded body and return the decoded text
Returns string
decodeGzip decodeGzip(string $body)
Decode a gzip encoded message (when Content-encoding = gzip)
Currently requires PHP with zlib support
Returns string
decodeDeflate decodeDeflate(string $body)
Decode a zlib deflated message (when Content-encoding = deflate)
Currently requires PHP with zlib support
Returns string
setMetadata setMetadata(string|int|array|Traversable $spec, mixed $value)
Set message metadata
Non-destructive setting of message metadata; always adds to the metadata, never overwrites the entire metadata
container.
Returns Zend\Stdlib\Message
getMetadata getMetadata(null|string|int $key, null|mixed $default)
Retrieve all metadata or a single metadatum as specified by key
Returns mixed
setContent setContent(mixed $value)
Set message content
Returns Zend\Stdlib\Message
getContent getContent()
Get raw message content
Returns mixed
getBody getBody()
Get decoded message content
Returns mixed
toString toString()
Returns string

146.5 Examples

Generating a Response object from a string

788 Chapter 146. The Response Class

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1 use Zend\Http\Response;
2 $request = Response::fromString(<<<EOS
3 HTTP/1.0 200 OK
4 HeaderField1: header-field-value
5 HeaderField2: header-field-value2
6

7 <html>
8 <body>
9 Hello World
10 </body>
11 </html>
12 EOS);

Generating a formatted HTTP Response from a Response object

1 use Zend\Http\Response;
2 $response = new Response();
3 $response->setStatusCode(Response::STATUS_CODE_200);
4 $response->getHeaders()->addHeaders(array(
5 'HeaderField1' => 'header-field-value',
6 'HeaderField2' => 'header-field-value2',
7 ));
8 $response->setContent(<<<EOS
9 <html>
10 <body>
11 Hello World
12 </body>
13 </html>
14 EOS);

146.5. Examples 789

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

790 Chapter 146. The Response Class

 CHAPTER 147

The Headers Class

147.1 Overview

The Zend\Http\Headers class is a container for HTTP headers. It is typically accessed as part of a
Zend\Http\Request or Zend\Http\Response getHeaders() call. The Headers container will lazily
load actual Header objects as to reduce the overhead of header specific parsing.
The Zend\Http\Header\* classes are the domain specific implementations for the various types of Headers
that one might encounter during the typical HTTP request. If a header of unknown type is encountered, it will be
implemented as a Zend\Http\Header\GenericHeader instance. See the below table for a list of the various
HTTP headers and the API that is specific to each header type.

147.2 Quick Start

The quickest way to get started interacting with header objects is by getting an already populated Headers container
from a request or response object.
1 // $client is an instance of Zend\Http\Client
2

3 // You can retrieve the request headers by first retrieving

4 // the Request object and then calling getHeaders on it
5 $requestHeaders = $client->getRequest()->getHeaders();
6

7 // The same method also works for retrieving Response headers

8 $responseHeaders = $client->getResponse()->getHeaders();

Zend\Http\Headers can also extract headers from a string:

1 $headerString = <<<EOB
2 Host: www.example.com
3 Content-Type: text/html
4 Content-Length: 1337
5 EOB;
6

7 $headers = Zend\Http\Headers::fromString($headerString);
8 // $headers is now populated with three objects
9 // (1) Zend\Http\Header\Host
10 // (2) Zend\Http\Header\ContentType
11 // (3) Zend\Http\Header\ContentLength

791
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Now that you have an instance of Zend\Http\Headers you can manipulate the individual headers it contains
using the provided public API methods outlined in the Available Methods section.

147.3 Configuration Options

No configuration options are available.

147.4 Available Methods

Headers::fromString Headers::fromString(string $string)

Populates headers from string representation
Parses a string for headers, and aggregates them, in order, in the current instance, primarily as strings until they
are needed (they will be lazy loaded).
Returns Zend\Http\Headers
setPluginClassLoader setPluginClassLoader(Zend\Loader\PluginClassLocator
$pluginClassLoader)
Set an alternate implementation for the plugin class loader
Returns Zend\Http\Headers
getPluginClassLoader getPluginClassLoader()
Return an instance of a Zend\Loader\PluginClassLocator, lazyload and inject map if necessary.
Returns Zend\Loader\PluginClassLocator
addHeaders addHeaders(array|Traversable $headers)
Add many headers at once
Expects an array (or Traversable object) of type/value pairs.
Returns Zend\Http\Headers
addHeaderLine addHeaderLine(string $headerFieldNameOrLine, string $fieldValue)
Add a raw header line, either in name => value, or as a single string name: value
This method allows for lazy-loading in that the parsing and instantiation of Header object will be delayed until
they are retrieved by either get() or current().
Returns Zend\Http\Headers
addHeader addHeader(Zend\Http\Header\HeaderInterface $header)
Add a Header to this container, for raw values see addHeaderLine() and addHeaders().
Returns Zend\Http\Headers
removeHeader removeHeader(Zend\Http\Header\HeaderInterface $header)
Remove a Header from the container
Returns bool

792 Chapter 147. The Headers Class

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

clearHeaders clearHeaders()
Clear all headers
Removes all headers from queue
Returns Zend\Http\Headers
get get(string $name)
Get all headers of a certain name/type
Returns false| Zend\Http\Header\HeaderInterface| ArrayIterator
has has(string $name)
Test for existence of a type of header
Returns bool
next next()
Advance the pointer for this object as an iterator
Returns void
key key()
Return the current key for this object as an iterator
Returns mixed
valid valid()
Is this iterator still valid?
Returns bool
rewind rewind()
Reset the internal pointer for this object as an iterator
Returns void
current current()
Return the current value for this iterator, lazy loading it if need be
Returns Zend\Http\Header\HeaderInterface
count count()
Return the number of headers in this container. If all headers have not been parsed, actual count could increase
if MultipleHeader objects exist in the Request/Response. If you need an exact count, iterate.
Returns int
toString toString()
Render all headers at once
This method handles the normal iteration of headers; it is up to the concrete classes to prepend with the appro-
priate status/request line.
Returns string
toArray toArray()
Return the headers container as an array
Returns array

147.4. Available Methods 793

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

forceLoading forceLoading()
By calling this, it will force parsing and loading of all headers, after this count() will be accurate
Returns bool

147.5 Zend\Http\Header\HeaderInterface Methods

fromString fromString(string $headerLine)

Factory to generate a header object from a string
Returns Zend\Http\Header\GenericHeader
getFieldName getFieldName()
Retrieve header field name
Returns string
getFieldValue getFieldValue()
Retrieve header field value
Returns string
toString toString()
Cast to string as a well formed HTTP header line
Returns in form of NAME: VALUE
Returns string

147.6 Zend\Http\Header\AbstractAccept Methods

parseHeaderLine parseHeaderLine(string $headerLine)

Parse the given header line and add the values
Returns void
getFieldValuePartsFromHeaderLine getFieldValuePartsFromHeaderLine(string
$headerLine)
Parse the Field Value Parts represented by a header line
Throws Zend\Http\Header\Exception\InvalidArgumentException if the header is invalid
Returns array
getFieldValue getFieldValue(array|null $values = null)
Get field value
Returns string
match match(array|string $matchAgainst)
Match a media string against this header. Returns the matched value or false
Returns Accept\FieldValuePart\AcceptFieldValuePart or bool

794 Chapter 147. The Headers Class

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

getPrioritized getPrioritized()
Returns all the keys, values and parameters this header represents
Returns array

147.7 Zend\Http\Header\AbstractDate Methods

setDateFormat static setDateFormat(int $format)

Set date output format.
Returns void
getDateFormat static getDateFormat()
Return current date output format
Returns string
setDate setDate(string|DateTime $date)
Set the date for this header, this can be a string or an instance of DateTime
Throws Zend\Http\Header\Exception\InvalidArgumentException if the date is neither a
valid string nor an instance of \DateTime.
Returns self
getDate getDate()
Return date for this header
Returns self
compareTo compareTo(string|DateTime $date)
Compare provided date to date for this header. Returns < 0 if date in header is less than $date; > 0 if its
greater, and 0 if they are equal. See strcmp.
Returns int
date date()
Return date for this header as an instance of \DateTime
Returns \DateTime
fromTimestamp fromTimestamp(int $time)
Create date-based header from Unix timestamp
Returns self
fromTimeString fromTimeString(string $time)
Create date-based header from strtotime()-compatible string
Returns self

147.7. Zend\Http\Header\AbstractDate Methods 795

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

147.8 Zend\Http\Header\AbstractLocation Methods

setUri setUri(string|Zend\Uri\UriInterface $uri)

Set the URI/URL for this header, this can be a string or an instance of Zend\Uri\Http
Throws Zend\Http\Header\Exception\InvalidArgumentException if $uri is neither a valid
URL nor an instance of Zend\Uri\UriInterface.
Returns self
getUri getUri()
Return the URI for this header
Returns string
uri uri()
Return the URI for this header as an instance of Zend\Uri\Http
Returns Zend\Uri\UriInterface

147.9 List of HTTP Header Types

Some header classes expose methods for manipulating their value. The following list contains all of the classes
available in the Zend\Http\Header\* namespace, as well as any specific methods they contain. All these classes
implement Zend\Http\Header\HeaderInterface and its methods.
Accept See Zend\Http\Header\AbstractAccept methods.
addMediaType(string $type, int|float $priority = 1) Add a media type, with the given
priority
Returns self
hasMediaType(string $type) Does the header have the requested media type?
Returns bool
AcceptCharset See Zend\Http\Header\AbstractAccept methods.
addCharset(string $type, int|float $priority = 1) Add a charset, with the given prior-
ity
Returns self
hasCharset(string $type) Does the header have the requested charset?
Returns bool
AcceptEncoding See Zend\Http\Header\AbstractAccept methods.
addEncoding(string $type, int|float $priority = 1) Add an encoding, with the given
priority
Returns self
hasEncoding(string $type) Does the header have the requested encoding?
Returns bool
AcceptLanguage See Zend\Http\Header\AbstractAccept methods.

796 Chapter 147. The Headers Class

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

addLanguage(string $type, int|float $priority = 1) Add a language, with the given pri-
ority
Returns self
hasLanguage(string $type) Does the header have the requested language?
Returns bool
AcceptRanges getRangeUnit()
setRangeUnit($rangeUnit)
Age
getDeltaSeconds() Get number of seconds
Returns int
setDeltaSeconds() Set number of seconds
Returns self
Allow
getAllMethods() Get list of all defined methods
Returns array
getAllowedMethods() Get list of allowed methods
Returns array
allowMethods(array|string $allowedMethods) Allow methods or list of methods
Returns self
disallowMethods(array|string $allowedMethods) Disallow methods or list of methods
Returns self
denyMethods(array|string $allowedMethods) Convenience alias for disallowMethods()
Returns self
isAllowedMethod(string $method) Check whether method is allowed
Returns bool
AuthenticationInfo No additional methods
Authorization No additional methods
CacheControl
isEmpty() Checks if the internal directives array is empty
Returns bool
addDirective(string $key, string|bool $value) Add a directive
For directives like max-age=60, $value = 60
For directives like private, use the default $value = true
Returns self
hasDirective(string $key) Check the internal directives array for a directive
Returns bool

147.9. List of HTTP Header Types 797

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

getDirective(string $key) Fetch the value of a directive from the internal directive array
Returns string|null
removeDirective(string $key) Remove a directive
Returns self
Connection
setValue($value) Set arbitrary header value
RFC allows any token as value, close and keep-alive are commonly used
Returns self
isPersistent() Whether the connection is persistent
Returns bool
setPersistent(bool $flag) Set Connection header to define persistent connection
Returns self
ContentDisposition No additional methods
ContentEncoding No additional methods
ContentLanguage No additional methods
ContentLength No additional methods
ContentLocation See Zend\Http\Header\AbstractLocation methods.
ContentMD5 No additional methods
ContentRange No additional methods
ContentSecurityPolicy
getDirectives() Retrieve the defined directives for the policy
Returns an array
setDirective(string $name, array $sources) Set the directive with the given name to include
the sources
As an example: an auction site wishes to load images from any URI, plugin content from a list of trusted
media providers (including a content distribution network), and scripts only from a server under its control
hosting sanitized ECMAScript:
// http://www.w3.org/TR/2012/CR-CSP-20121115/#sample-policy-definitions
// Example #2
$csp = new ContentSecurityPolicy();
$csp->setDirective('default-src', array()) // No sources
->setDirective('img-src', array('*'))
->setDirective('object-src' array('media1.example.com', 'media2.example.com', '*.cdn.exa
->setDirective('script-src', array('trustedscripts.example.com'));

Returns self
ContentTransferEncoding No additional methods
ContentType
match(array|string $matchAgainst) Determine if the mediatype value in this header matches the
provided criteria
Returns bool|string

798 Chapter 147. The Headers Class

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

getMediaType() Get the media type

Returns string
setMediaType(string $mediaType) Set the media type
Returns self
getParameters() Get any additional content-type parameters currently set
Returns array
setParameters(array $parameters) Set additional content-type parameters
Returns self
getCharset() Get the content-type character set encoding, if any
Returns string|null
setCharset(string $charset) Set the content-type character set encoding
Returns self
Cookie Extends ArrayObject
static fromSetCookieArray(array $setCookies)
setEncodeValue()
getEncodeValue()
Date See Zend\Http\Header\AbstractDate methods.
Etag No additional methods
Expect No additional methods
Expires See Zend\Http\Header\AbstractDate methods.
From No additional methods
Host No additional methods
IfMatch No additional methods
IfModifiedSince See Zend\Http\Header\AbstractDate methods.
IfNoneMatch No additional methods
IfRange No additional methods
IfUnmodifiedSince See Zend\Http\Header\AbstractDate methods.
KeepAlive No additional methods
LastModified See Zend\Http\Header\AbstractDate methods.
Location See Zend\Http\Header\AbstractLocation methods.
MaxForwards No additional methods
Origin No additional methods
Pragma No additional methods
ProxyAuthenticate toStringMultipleHeaders(array $headers)
ProxyAuthorization No additional methods
Range No additional methods

147.9. List of HTTP Header Types 799

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Referer See Zend\Http\Header\AbstractLocation methods.

Refresh No additional methods
RetryAfter See Zend\Http\Header\AbstractDate methods.
setDeltaSeconds(int $delta) Set number of seconds
Returns self
getDeltaSeconds() Get number of seconds
Returns int
Server No additional methods
SetCookie
getName() / setName(string $name) The cookie name
getValue() / setValue(string $value) The cookie value
getExpires() / setExpires(int|string $expires) The time frame the cookie is valid for, null
is a session cookie
getPath() / setPath(string $path) The URI path the cookie is bound to
getDomain() / setDomain(string $domain) The domain the cookie applies to
getMaxAge() / setMaxAge(int $maxAge) The maximum age of the cookie
getVersion() / setVersion(int $version) The cookie version
isSecure() Whether the cookies contains the Secure flag
Returns bool
setSecure(bool $secure) Set whether the cookies contains the Secure flag
Returns self
isHttponly() Whether the cookies can be accessed via HTTP only
Returns bool
setHttponly(bool $httponly) Set whether the cookies can be accessed via HTTP only
Returns self
isExpired() Whether the cookie is expired
Returns bool
isSessionCookie() Whether the cookie is a session cookie
Returns bool
setQuoteFieldValue(bool $quotedValue) Set whether the value for this cookie should be quoted
Returns self
hasQuoteFieldValue() Check whether the value for this cookie should be quoted
Returns bool
isValidForRequest() Whether the cookie is valid for a given request domain, path and isSecure
Returns bool

800 Chapter 147. The Headers Class

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

match(string $uri, bool $matchSessionCookies, int $now) Checks whether the cookie
should be sent or not in a specific scenario
Returns bool
static matchCookieDomain(string $cookieDomain, string $host) Check if a cookies do-
main matches a host name.
Returns bool
static matchCookiePath(string $cookiePath, string $path) Check if a cookies path
matches a URL path
Returns bool
toStringMultipleHeaders(array $headers) Returns string
TE No additional methods
Trailer No additional methods
TransferEncoding No additional methods
Upgrade No additional methods
UserAgent No additional methods
Vary No additional methods
Via No additional methods
Warning No additional methods
WWWAuthenticate toStringMultipleHeaders(array $headers)

147.10 Examples

Retrieving headers from a Zend\Http\Headers object

1 // $client is an instance of Zend\Http\Client

2 $response = $client->send();
3 $headers = $response->getHeaders();
4

5 // We can check if the Request contains a specific header by

6 // using the ``has`` method. Returns boolean ``TRUE`` if at least
7 // one matching header found, and ``FALSE`` otherwise
8 $headers->has('Content-Type');
9

10 // We can retrieve all instances of a specific header by using

11 // the ``get`` method:
12 $contentTypeHeaders = $headers->get('Content-Type');

There are three possibilities for the return value of the above call to the get method:
If no Content-Type header was set in the Request, get will return false.
If only one Content-Type header was set in the Request, get will return an instance of
Zend\Http\Header\ContentType.
If more than one Content-Type header was set in the Request, get will return an ArrayIterator containing one
Zend\Http\Header\ContentType instance per header.

147.10. Examples 801

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Adding headers to a Zend\Http\Headers object

1 $headers = new Zend\Http\Headers();

2

3 // We can directly add any object that implements Zend\Http\Header\HeaderInterface

4 $typeHeader = Zend\Http\Header\ContentType::fromString('Content-Type: text/html');
5 $headers->addHeader($typeHeader);
6

7 // We can add headers using the raw string representation, either

8 // passing the header name and value as separate arguments...
9 $headers->addHeaderLine('Content-Type', 'text/html');
10

11 // .. or we can pass the entire header as the only argument

12 $headers->addHeaderLine('Content-Type: text/html');
13

14 // We can also add headers in bulk using addHeaders, which accepts

15 // an array of individual header definitions that can be in any of
16 // the accepted formats outlined below:
17 $headers->addHeaders(array(
18

19 // An object implementing Zend\Http\Header\HeaderInterface

20 Zend\Http\Header\ContentType::fromString('Content-Type: text/html'),
21

22 // A raw header string

23 'Content-Type: text/html',
24

25 // We can also pass the header name as the array key and the
26 // header content as that array key's value
27 'Content-Type' => 'text/html');
28

29 ));

Removing headers from a Zend\Http\Headers object

We can remove all headers of a specific type using the removeHeader method, which accepts a single object
implementing Zend\Http\Header\HeaderInterface
1 // $headers is a pre-configured instance of Zend\Http\Headers
2

3 // We can also delete individual headers or groups of headers

4 $matches = $headers->get('Content-Type');
5

6 // If more than one header was found, iterate over the collection
7 // and remove each one individually
8 if ($matches instanceof ArrayIterator) {
9 foreach ($headers as $header) {
10 $headers->removeHeader($header);
11 }
12 // If only a single header was found, remove it directly
13 } elseif ($matches instanceof Zend\Http\Header\HeaderInterface) {
14 $headers->removeHeader($header);
15 }
16

17 // In addition to this, we can clear all the headers currently stored in

18 // the container by calling the clearHeaders() method
19 $matches->clearHeaders();

802 Chapter 147. The Headers Class

 CHAPTER 148

HTTP Client

148.1 Overview

Zend\Http\Client provides an easy interface for performing Hyper-Text Transfer Protocol (HTTP) requests.
Zend\Http\Client supports the most simple features expected from an HTTP client, as well as some more com-
plex features such as HTTP authentication and file uploads. Successful requests (and most unsuccessful ones too)
return a Zend\Http\Response object, which provides access to the responses headers and body (see this sec-
tion).

148.2 Quick Start

The class constructor optionally accepts a URL as its first parameter (can be either a string or a Zend\Uri\Http
object), and an array or Zend\Config\Config object containing configuration options. The send() method is
used to submit the request to the remote server, and a Zend\Http\Response object is returned:
1 use Zend\Http\Client;
2

3 $client = new Client('http://example.org', array(

4 'maxredirects' => 0,
5 'timeout' => 30
6 ));
7 $response = $client->send();

Both constructor parameters can be left out, and set later using the setUri() and setConfig() methods:
1 use Zend\Http\Client;
2

3 $client = new Client();

4 $client->setUri('http://example.org');
5 $client->setOptions(array(
6 'maxredirects' => 0,
7 'timeout' => 30
8 ));
9 $response = $client->send();

Zend\Http\Client can also dispatch requests using a separately configured request object (see the
Zend\Http\Request manual page for full details of the methods available):
1 use Zend\Http\Client;
2 use Zend\Http\Request;

803
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

4 $request = new Request();

5 $request->setUri('http://example.org');
6

7 $client = new Client();

8

9 $response = $client->send($request);

Note: Zend\Http\Client uses Zend\Uri\Http to validate URLs. See the Zend\Uri manual page for more
information on the validation process.

148.3 Configuration

The constructor and setOptions() method accepts an associative array of configuration parameters, or a
Zend\Config\Config object. Setting these parameters is optional, as they all have default values.

Table 148.1: Zend\Http\Client configuration parameters

Pa- Description Ex- Default
ram- pected Value
eter Values
maxredi-Maximum number of redirections to follow (0 = none) integer 5
rects
stric- Whether to strictly follow the RFC when redirecting (see this boolean FALSE
tredi- section)
rects
user- User agent identifier string (sent in request headers) string Zend\Http\Client
agent
time- Connection timeout (seconds) integer 10
out
httpver- HTTP protocol version (usually 1.1 or 1.0) string 1.1
sion
adapter Connection adapter class to use (see this section) mixed Zend\Http\Client\Adapter\Socket
keepaliveWhether to enable keep-alive connections with the server. Useful boolean FALSE
and might improve performance if several consecutive requests to
the same server are performed.
stor- Whether to store last response for later retrieval with boolean TRUE
ere- getLastResponse(). If set to FALSE, getLastResponse() will
sponse return NULL.
en- Whether to pass the cookie value through urlencode/urldecode. boolean TRUE
code- Enabling this breaks support with some web servers. Disabling
cook- this limits the range of values the cookies can contain.
ies
out- Destination for streaming of received data (options: string boolean FALSE
put- (filename), true for temp file, false/null to disable streaming)
stream
rfc3986strict
Whether to strictly adhere to RFC 3986 (in practice, this means boolean FALSE
replacing + with %20)
The options are also passed to the adapter class upon instantiation, so the same array or Zend\Config\Config
object) can be used for adapter configuration. See the Zend Http Client adapter section for more information on the
adapter-specific options available.

804 Chapter 148. HTTP Client

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

148.4 Examples

148.4.1 Performing a Simple GET Request

Performing simple HTTP requests is very easily done:

1 use Zend\Http\Client;
2

3 $client = new Client('http://example.org');

4 $response = $client->send();

148.4.2 Using Request Methods Other Than GET

The request method can be set using setMethod(). If no method is specified, the method set by the last
setMethod() call is used. If setMethod() was never called, the default request method is GET.
1 use Zend\Http\Client;
2

3 $client = new Client('http://example.org');

4

5 // Performing a POST request

6 $client->setMethod('POST');
7 $response = $client->send();

For convenience, Zend\Http\Request defines all the request methods as class constants,
Zend\Http\Request::METHOD_GET, Zend\Http\Request::METHOD_POST and so on:
1 use Zend\Http\Client;
2 use Zend\Http\Request;
3

4 $client = new Client('http://example.org');

5

6 // Performing a POST request

7 $client->setMethod(Request::METHOD_POST);
8 $response = $client->send();

148.4.3 Setting GET parameters

Adding GET parameters to an HTTP request is quite simple, and can be done either by specifying them as part of the
URL, or by using the setParameterGet() method. This method takes the GET parameters as an associative array
of name => value GET variables.
1 use Zend\Http\Client;
2 $client = new Client();
3

4 // This is equivalent to setting a URL in the Client's constructor:

5 $client->setUri('http://example.com/index.php?knight=lancelot');
6

7 // Adding several parameters with one call

8 $client->setParameterGet(array(
9 'first_name' => 'Bender',
10 'middle_name' => 'Bending',
11 'last_name' => 'Rodrguez',
12 'made_in' => 'Mexico',
13 ));

148.4. Examples 805

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

148.4.4 Setting POST Parameters

While GET parameters can be sent with every request method, POST parameters are only sent in the body of POST
requests. Adding POST parameters to a request is very similar to adding GET parameters, and can be done with the
setParameterPost() method, which is identical to the setParameterGet() method in structure.
1 use Zend\Http\Client;
2

3 $client = new Client();

4

5 // Setting several POST parameters, one of them with several values

6 $client->setParameterPost(array(
7 'language' => 'es',
8 'country' => 'ar',
9 'selection' => array(45, 32, 80)
10 ));

Note that when sending POST requests, you can set both GET and POST parameters. On the other hand, setting POST
parameters on a non-POST request will not trigger an error, rendering it useless. Unless the request is a POST request,
POST parameters are simply ignored.

148.4.5 Connecting to SSL URLs

If you are trying to connect to an SSL (https) URL and are using the default
(Zend\Http\Client\Adapter\Socket) adapter, you may need to set the sslcapath configuration
option in order to allow PHP to validate the SSL certificate:
1 use Zend\Http\Client;
2

3 $client = new Client('https://example.org', array(

4 'sslcapath' => '/etc/ssl/certs'
5 ));
6 $response = $client->send();

The exact path to use will vary depending on your Operating System. Without this youll get the exception Unable
to enable crypto on TCP connection when trying to connect.
Alternatively, you could switch to the curl adapter, which negotiates SSL connections more transparently:
1 use Zend\Http\Client;
2

3 $client = new Client('https://example.org', array(

4 'adapter' => 'Zend\Http\Client\Adapter\Curl'
5 ));
6 $response = $client->send();

148.4.6 A Complete Example

1 use Zend\Http\Client;
2

3 $client = new Client();

4 $client->setUri('http://www.example.com');
5 $client->setMethod('POST');
6 $client->setParameterPost(array(
7 'foo' => 'bar'
8 ));

806 Chapter 148. HTTP Client

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

10 $response = $client->send();
11

12 if ($response->isSuccess()) {
13 // the POST was successful
14 }

or the same thing, using a request object:

1 use Zend\Http\Client;
2 use Zend\Http\Request;
3

4 $request = new Request();

5 $request->setUri('http://www.example.com');
6 $request->setMethod('POST');
7 $request->getPost()->set('foo', 'bar');
8

9 $client = new Client();

10 $response = $client->send($request);
11

12 if ($response->isSuccess()) {
13 // the POST was successful
14 }

148.4. Examples 807

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

808 Chapter 148. HTTP Client

 CHAPTER 149

HTTP Client - Connection Adapters

149.1 Overview

Zend\Http\Client is based on a connection adapter design. The connection adapter is the object in charge of
performing the actual connection to the server, as well as writing requests and reading responses. This connection
adapter can be replaced, and you can create and extend the default connection adapters to suite your special needs,
without the need to extend or replace the entire HTTP client class, and with the same interface.
Currently, the Zend\Http\Client class provides four built-in connection adapters:
Zend\Http\Client\Adapter\Socket (default)
Zend\Http\Client\Adapter\Proxy
Zend\Http\Client\Adapter\Curl
Zend\Http\Client\Adapter\Test
The Zend\Http\Client objects adapter connection adapter is set using the adapter configuration op-
tion. When instantiating the client object, you can set the adapter configuration option to a string con-
taining the adapters name (eg. Zend\Http\Client\Adapter\Socket) or to a variable holding an adapter ob-
ject (eg. new Zend\Http\Client\Adapter\Socket). You can also set the adapter later, using the
Zend\Http\Client->setAdapter() method.

149.2 The Socket Adapter

The default connection adapter is the Zend\Http\Client\Adapter\Socket adapter - this adapter will be used
unless you explicitly set the connection adapter. The Socket adapter is based on PHPs built-in fsockopen() function,
and does not require any special extensions or compilation flags.
The Socket adapter allows several extra configuration options that can be set using
Zend\Http\Client->setOptions() or passed to the client constructor.

809
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Table 149.1: Zend\Http\Client\Adapter\Socket configuration parameters

Parame- Description Ex- Default
ter pected Value
Type
persistent Whether to use persistent TCP connections boolean FALSE
ssltrans- SSL transport layer (eg. sslv2, tls) string ssl
port
sslcert Path to a PEM encoded SSL certificate string NULL
sslpassphrase Passphrase for the SSL certificate file string NULL
sslveri- Whether to verify the SSL peer string TRUE
fypeer
sslcapath Path to SSL certificate directory string NULL
sslallow- Whether to allow self-signed certificates string FALSE
selfsigned
sslusecon- Enables proxied connections to use SSL even if the boolean FALSE
text proxy connection itself does not.
Note: Persistent TCP Connections
Using persistent TCP connections can potentially speed up HTTP requests - but in most use cases, will
have little positive effect and might overload the HTTP server you are connecting to.
It is recommended to use persistent TCP connections only if you connect to the same server very fre-
quently, and are sure that the server is capable of handling a large number of concurrent connections. In
any case you are encouraged to benchmark the effect of persistent connections on both the client speed
and server load before using this option.
Additionally, when using persistent connections it is recommended to enable Keep-Alive HTTP requests
as described in the configuration section- otherwise persistent connections might have little or no effect.

Note: HTTPS SSL Stream Parameters

ssltransport, sslcert and sslpassphrase are only relevant when connecting using HTTPS.
While the default SSL settings should work for most applications, you might need to change them if the
server you are connecting to requires special client setup. If so, you should read the sections about SSL
transport layers and options here.

Changing the HTTPS transport layer

1 // Set the configuration parameters

2 $config = array(
3 'adapter' => 'Zend\Http\Client\Adapter\Socket',
4 'ssltransport' => 'tls'
5 );
6

7 // Instantiate a client object

8 $client = new Zend\Http\Client('https://www.example.com', $config);
9

10 // The following request will be sent over a TLS secure connection.

11 $response = $client->send();

The result of the example above will be similar to opening a TCP connection using the following PHP command:
fsockopen(tls://www.example.com, 443)

810 Chapter 149. HTTP Client - Connection Adapters

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

149.2.1 Customizing and accessing the Socket adapter stream context

Zend\Http\Client\Adapter\Socket provides direct access to the underlying stream context used to connect
to the remote server. This allows the user to pass specific options and parameters to the TCP stream, and to the SSL
wrapper in case of HTTPS connections.
You can access the stream context using the following methods of Zend\Http\Client\Adapter\Socket:
setStreamContext($context) Sets the stream context to be used by the adapter. Can accept either a stream
context resource created using the stream_context_create() PHP function, or an array of stream context options,
in the same format provided to this function. Providing an array will create a new stream context using these
options, and set it.
getStreamContext() Get the stream context of the adapter. If no stream context was set, will create a default
stream context and return it. You can then set or get the value of different context options using regular PHP
stream context functions.

Setting stream context options for the Socket adapter

1 // Array of options
2 $options = array(
3 'socket' => array(
4 // Bind local socket side to a specific interface
5 'bindto' => '10.1.2.3:50505'
6 ),
7 'ssl' => array(
8 // Verify server side certificate,
9 // do not accept invalid or self-signed SSL certificates
10 'verify_peer' => true,
11 'allow_self_signed' => false,
12

13 // Capture the peer's certificate

14 'capture_peer_cert' => true
15 )
16 );
17

18 // Create an adapter object and attach it to the HTTP client

19 $adapter = new Zend\Http\Client\Adapter\Socket();
20 $client = new Zend\Http\Client();
21 $client->setAdapter($adapter);
22

23 // Method 1: pass the options array to setStreamContext()

24 $adapter->setStreamContext($options);
25

26 // Method 2: create a stream context and pass it to setStreamContext()

27 $context = stream_context_create($options);
28 $adapter->setStreamContext($context);
29

30 // Method 3: get the default stream context and set the options on it
31 $context = $adapter->getStreamContext();
32 stream_context_set_option($context, $options);
33

34 // Now, perform the request

35 $response = $client->send();
36

37 // If everything went well, you can now access the context again
38 $opts = stream_context_get_options($adapter->getStreamContext());

149.2. The Socket Adapter 811

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

39 echo $opts['ssl']['peer_certificate'];

Note: Note that you must set any stream context options before using the adapter to perform actual requests. If no
context is set before performing HTTP requests with the Socket adapter, a default stream context will be created. This
context resource could be accessed after performing any requests using the getStreamContext() method.

149.3 The Proxy Adapter

The Zend\Http\Client\Adapter\Proxy adapter is similar to the default Socket adapter - only the connection
is made through an HTTP proxy server instead of a direct connection to the target server. This allows usage of
Zend\Http\Client behind proxy servers - which is sometimes needed for security or performance reasons.
Using the Proxy adapter requires several additional configuration parameters to be set, in addition to the default
adapter option:

Table 149.2: Zend\Http\Client configuration parameters

Parame- Description Expected Example Value
ter Type
proxy_host Proxy server address string proxy.myhost.com or 10.1.2.3
proxy_port Proxy server TCP port integer 8080 (default) or 81
proxy_user Proxy user name, if required string shahar or for none (default)
proxy_pass Proxy password, if required string secret or for none (default)
proxy_auth Proxy HTTP authentication string Zend\Http\Client::AUTH_BASIC
type (default)
proxy_host should always be set - if it is not set, the client will fall back to a direct connection using
Zend\Http\Client\Adapter\Socket. proxy_port defaults to 8080 - if your proxy listens on a different
port you must set this one as well.
proxy_user and proxy_pass are only required if your proxy server requires you to authenticate. Providing these
will add a Proxy-Authentication header to the request. If your proxy does not require authentication, you can leave
these two options out.
proxy_auth sets the proxy authentication type, if your proxy server requires authentication. Possibly values are
similar to the ones accepted by the Zend\Http\Client::setAuth() method. Currently, only basic authentica-
tion (Zend\Http\Client::AUTH_BASIC) is supported.

Using Zend\Http\Client behind a proxy server

1 // Set the configuration parameters

2 $config = array(
3 'adapter' => 'Zend\Http\Client\Adapter\Proxy',
4 'proxy_host' => 'proxy.int.zend.com',
5 'proxy_port' => 8000,
6 'proxy_user' => 'shahar.e',
7 'proxy_pass' => 'bananashaped'
8 );
9

10 // Instantiate a client object

11 $client = new Zend\Http\Client('http://www.example.com', $config);
12

13 // Continue working...

812 Chapter 149. HTTP Client - Connection Adapters

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

As mentioned, if proxy_host is not set or is set to a blank string, the connection will fall back to a regular direct
connection. This allows you to easily write your application in a way that allows a proxy to be used optionally,
according to a configuration parameter.

Note: Since the proxy adapter inherits from Zend\Http\Client\Adapter\Socket, you can use the stream
context access method (see this section) to set stream context options on Proxy connections as demonstrated above.

149.4 The cURL Adapter

cURL is a standard HTTP client library that is distributed with many operating systems and can be used in PHP via
the cURL extension. It offers functionality for many special cases which can occur for a HTTP client and make it a
perfect choice for a HTTP adapter. It supports secure connections, proxy, all sorts of authentication mechanisms and
shines in applications that move large files around between servers.

Setting cURL options

1 $config = array(
2 'adapter' => 'Zend\Http\Client\Adapter\Curl',
3 'curloptions' => array(CURLOPT_FOLLOWLOCATION => true),
4 );
5 $client = new Zend\Http\Client($uri, $config);

By default the cURL adapter is configured to behave exactly like the Socket Adapter and it also accepts the same
configuration parameters as the Socket and Proxy adapters. You can also change the cURL options by either specifying
the curloptions key in the constructor of the adapter or by calling setCurlOption($name, $value). The
$name key corresponds to the CURL_* constants of the cURL extension. You can get access to the Curl handle by
calling $adapter->getHandle();

Transfering Files by Handle

You can use cURL to transfer very large files over HTTP by filehandle.
1 $putFileSize = filesize("filepath");
2 $putFileHandle = fopen("filepath", "r");
3

4 $adapter = new Zend\Http\Client\Adapter\Curl();

5 $client = new Zend\Http\Client();
6 $client->setAdapter($adapter);
7 $client->setMethod('PUT');
8 $adapter->setOptions(array(
9 'curloptions' => array(
10 CURLOPT_INFILE => $putFileHandle,
11 CURLOPT_INFILESIZE => $putFileSize
12 )
13 ));
14 $client->send();

149.4. The cURL Adapter 813

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

149.5 The Test Adapter

Sometimes, it is very hard to test code that relies on HTTP connections. For example, testing an application that pulls
an RSS feed from a remote server will require a network connection, which is not always available.
For this reason, the Zend\Http\Client\Adapter\Test adapter is provided. You can write your application
to use Zend\Http\Client, and just for testing purposes, for example in your unit testing suite, you can replace
the default adapter with a Test adapter (a mock object), allowing you to run tests without actually performing server
connections.
The Zend\Http\Client\Adapter\Test adapter provides an additional method, setResponse(). This
method takes one parameter, which represents an HTTP response as either text or a Zend\Http\Response object.
Once set, your Test adapter will always return this response, without even performing an actual HTTP request.

Testing Against a Single HTTP Response Stub

1 // Instantiate a new adapter and client

2 $adapter = new Zend\Http\Client\Adapter\Test();
3 $client = new Zend\Http\Client('http://www.example.com', array(
4 'adapter' => $adapter
5 ));
6

7 // Set the expected response

8 $adapter->setResponse(
9 "HTTP/1.1 200 OK" . "\r\n" .
10 "Content-type: text/xml" . "\r\n" .
11 "\r\n" .
12 '<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>' .
13 '<rss version="2.0" ' .
14 ' xmlns:content="http://purl.org/rss/1.0/modules/content/"' .
15 ' xmlns:wfw="http://wellformedweb.org/CommentAPI/"' .
16 ' xmlns:dc="http://purl.org/dc/elements/1.1/">' .
17 ' <channel>' .
18 ' <title>Premature Optimization</title>' .
19 // and so on...
20 '</rss>');
21

22 $response = $client->send();
23 // .. continue parsing $response..

The above example shows how you can preset your HTTP client to return the response you need. Then, you can
continue testing your own code, without being dependent on a network connection, the servers response, etc. In this
case, the test would continue to check how the application parses the XML in the response body.
Sometimes, a single method call to an object can result in that object performing multiple HTTP transactions. In
this case, its not possible to use setResponse() alone because theres no opportunity to set the next response(s) your
program might need before returning to the caller.

Testing Against Multiple HTTP Response Stubs

1 // Instantiate a new adapter and client

2 $adapter = new Zend\Http\Client\Adapter\Test();
3 $client = new Zend\Http\Client('http://www.example.com', array(
4 'adapter' => $adapter
5 ));

814 Chapter 149. HTTP Client - Connection Adapters

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

7 // Set the first expected response

8 $adapter->setResponse(
9 "HTTP/1.1 302 Found" . "\r\n" .
10 "Location: /" . "\r\n" .
11 "Content-Type: text/html" . "\r\n" .
12 "\r\n" .
13 '<html>' .
14 ' <head><title>Moved</title></head>' .
15 ' <body><p>This page has moved.</p></body>' .
16 '</html>');
17

18 // Set the next successive response

19 $adapter->addResponse(
20 "HTTP/1.1 200 OK" . "\r\n" .
21 "Content-Type: text/html" . "\r\n" .
22 "\r\n" .
23 '<html>' .
24 ' <head><title>My Pet Store Home Page</title></head>' .
25 ' <body><p>...</p></body>' .
26 '</html>');
27

28 // inject the http client object ($client) into your object

29 // being tested and then test your object's behavior below

The setResponse() method clears any responses in the Zend\Http\Client\Adapter\Tests buffer and
sets the first response that will be returned. The addResponse() method will add successive responses.
The responses will be replayed in the order that they were added. If more requests are made than the number of
responses stored, the responses will cycle again in order.
In the example above, the adapter is configured to test your objects behavior when it encounters a 302 redirect.
Depending on your application, following a redirect may or may not be desired behavior. In our example, we expect
that the redirect will be followed and we configure the test adapter to help us test this. The initial 302 response is set
up with the setResponse() method and the 200 response to be returned next is added with the addResponse()
method. After configuring the test adapter, inject the HTTP client containing the adapter into your object under test
and test its behavior.
If you need the adapter to fail on demand you can use setNextRequestWillFail($flag). The method will
cause the next call to connect() to throw an Zend\Http\Client\Adapter\Exception\RuntimeException
exception. This can be useful when our application caches content from an external site (in case the site goes down)
and you want to test this feature.

Forcing the adapter to fail

1 // Instantiate a new adapter and client

2 $adapter = new Zend\Http\Client\Adapter\Test();
3 $client = new Zend\Http\Client('http://www.example.com', array(
4 'adapter' => $adapter
5 ));
6

7 // Force the next request to fail with an exception

8 $adapter->setNextRequestWillFail(true);
9

10 try {
11 // This call will result in a Zend\Http\Client\Adapter\Exception\RuntimeException
12 $client->send();

149.5. The Test Adapter 815

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

13 } catch (Zend\Http\Client\Adapter\Exception\RuntimeException $e) {

14 // ...
15 }
16

17 // Further requests will work as expected until

18 // you call setNextRequestWillFail(true) again

149.6 Creating your own connection adapters

Zend\Http\Client has been designed so that you can create and use your own connection adapters. You could,
for example, create a connection adapter that uses persistent sockets, or a connection adapter with caching abilities,
and use them as needed in your application.
In order to do so, you must create your own adapter class that implements the
Zend\Http\Client\Adapter\AdapterInterface interface. The following example shows the skeleton of
a user-implemented adapter class. All the public functions defined in this example must be defined in your adapter as
well:

Creating your own connection adapter

1 class MyApp\Http\Client\Adapter\BananaProtocol
2 implements Zend\Http\Client\Adapter\AdapterInterface
3 {
4 /**
5 * Set Adapter Options
6 *
7 * @param array $config
8 */
9 public function setOptions($config = array())
10 {
11 // This rarely changes - you should usually copy the
12 // implementation in Zend\Http\Client\Adapter\Socket.
13 }
14

15 /**
16 * Connect to the remote server
17 *
18 * @param string $host
19 * @param int $port
20 * @param boolean $secure
21 */
22 public function connect($host, $port = 80, $secure = false)
23 {
24 // Set up the connection to the remote server
25 }
26

27 /**
28 * Send request to the remote server
29 *
30 * @param string $method
31 * @param Zend\Uri\Http $url
32 * @param string $http_ver
33 * @param array $headers
34 * @param string $body

816 Chapter 149. HTTP Client - Connection Adapters

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

35 * @return string Request as text

36 */
37 public function write($method,
38 $url,
39 $http_ver = '1.1',
40 $headers = array(),
41 $body = '')
42 {
43 // Send request to the remote server.
44 // This function is expected to return the full request
45 // (headers and body) as a string
46 }
47

48 /**
49 * Read response from server
50 *
51 * @return string
52 */
53 public function read()
54 {
55 // Read response from remote server and return it as a string
56 }
57

58 /**
59 * Close the connection to the server
60 *
61 */
62 public function close()
63 {
64 // Close the connection to the remote server - called last.
65 }
66 }
67

68 // Then, you could use this adapter:

69 $client = new Zend\Http\Client(array(
70 'adapter' => 'MyApp\Http\Client\Adapter\BananaProtocol'
71 ));

149.6. Creating your own connection adapters 817

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

818 Chapter 149. HTTP Client - Connection Adapters

 CHAPTER 150

HTTP Client - Advanced Usage

150.1 HTTP Redirections

Zend\Http\Client automatically handles HTTP redirections, and by default will follow up to 5 redirections. This
can be changed by setting the maxredirects configuration parameter.
According to the HTTP/1.1 RFC, HTTP 301 and 302 responses should be treated by the client by resending the same
request to the specified location - using the same request method. However, most clients to not implement this and
always use a GET request when redirecting. By default, Zend\Http\Client does the same - when redirecting on
a 301 or 302 response, all GET and POST parameters are reset, and a GET request is sent to the new location. This
behavior can be changed by setting the strictredirects configuration parameter to boolean TRUE:

Forcing RFC 2616 Strict Redirections on 301 and 302 Responses

1 // Strict Redirections
2 $client->setOptions(array('strictredirects' => true));
3

4 // Non-strict Redirections
5 $client->setOptions(array('strictredirects' => false));

You can always get the number of redirections done after sending a request using the getRedirectionsCount()
method.

150.2 Adding Cookies and Using Cookie Persistence

Zend\Http\Client provides an easy interface for adding cookies to your request, so that no direct header modi-
fication is required. Cookies can be added using either the addCookie() or setCookies method. The addCookie
method has a number of operating modes:

Setting Cookies Using addCookie()

1 // Easy and simple: by providing a cookie name and cookie value

2 $client->addCookie('flavor', 'chocolate chips');
3

4 // By providing a Zend\Http\Header\SetCookie object

5 $cookie = Zend\Http\Header\SetCookie::fromString('Set-Cookie: flavor=chocolate%20chips');
6 $client->addCookie($cookie);

819
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

8 // Multiple cookies can be set at once by providing an

9 // array of Zend\Http\Header\SetCookie objects
10 $cookies = array(
11 Zend\Http\Header\SetCookie::fromString('Set-Cookie: flavorOne=chocolate%20chips'),
12 Zend\Http\Header\SetCookie::fromString('Set-Cookie: flavorTwo=vanilla'),
13 );
14 $client->addCookie($cookies);

The setCookies() method works in a similar manner, except that it requires an array of cookie values as its only
argument and also clears the cookie container before adding the new cookies:

Setting Cookies Using setCookies()

1 // setCookies accepts an array of cookie values as $name => $value

2 $client->setCookies(array(
3 'flavor' => 'chocolate chips',
4 'amount' => 10,
5 ));

For more information about Zend\Http\Header\SetCookie objects, see this section.

Zend\Http\Client also provides a means for simplifying cookie stickiness - that is having the client internally
store all sent and received cookies, and resend them on subsequent requests: Zend\Http\Cookies. This is useful,
for example when you need to log in to a remote site first and receive and authentication or session ID cookie before
sending further requests.

Enabling Cookie Stickiness

1 $headers = $client->getRequest()->getHeaders();
2 $cookies = new Zend\Http\Cookies($headers);
3

4 // First request: log in and start a session

5 $client->setUri('http://example.com/login.php');
6 $client->setParameterPost(array('user' => 'h4x0r', 'password' => 'l33t'));
7 $client->setMethod('POST');
8

9 $response = $client->getResponse();
10 $cookies->addCookiesFromResponse($response, $client->getUri());
11

12 // Now we can send our next request

13 $client->setUri('http://example.com/read_member_news.php');
14 $client->setCookies($cookies->getMatchingCookies($client->getUri()));
15 $client->setMethod('GET');

For more information about the Zend\Http\Cookies class, see this section.

150.3 Setting Custom Request Headers

Setting custom headers is performed by first fetching the header container from the clients Zend\Http\Request
object. This method is quite diverse and can be used in several ways, as the following example shows:

820 Chapter 150. HTTP Client - Advanced Usage

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Setting A Single Custom Request Header

1 // Fetch the container

2 $headers = $client->getRequest()->getHeaders();
3

4 // Setting a single header. Will not overwrite any

5 // previously-added headers of the same name.
6 $headers->addHeaderLine('Host', 'www.example.com');
7

8 // Another way of doing the exact same thing

9 $headers->addHeaderLine('Host: www.example.com');
10

11 // Another way of doing the exact same thing using

12 // the provided Zend\Http\Header class
13 $headers->addHeader(Zend\Http\Header\Host::fromString('Host: www.example.com'));
14

15 // You can also add multiple headers at once by passing an

16 // array to addHeaders using any of the formats below:
17 $headers->addHeaders(array(
18 // Zend\Http\Header\* object
19 Zend\Http\Header\Host::fromString('Host: www.example.com'),
20

21 // Header name as array key, header value as array key value

22 'Cookie' => 'PHPSESSID=1234567890abcdef1234567890abcdef',
23

24 // Raw header string

25 'Cookie: language=he',
26 ));

Zend\Http\Client also provides a convenience method for setting request headers, setHeaders. This method
will create a new header container, add the specified headers and then store the new header container in its
Zend\Http\Request object. As a consequence, any pre-existing headers will be erased.

Setting Multiple Custom Request Headers

1 // Setting multiple headers. Will remove all existing

2 // headers and add new ones to the Request header container
3 $client->setHeaders(array(
4 Zend\Http\Header\Host::fromString('Host: www.example.com'),
5 'Accept-Encoding' => 'gzip,deflate',
6 'X-Powered-By: Zend Framework',
7 ));

150.4 File Uploads

You can upload files through HTTP using the setFileUpload method. This method takes a file name as the first
parameter, a form name as the second parameter, and data as a third optional parameter. If the third data parameter is
NULL, the first file name parameter is considered to be a real file on disk, and Zend\Http\Client will try to read
this file and upload it. If the data parameter is not NULL, the first file name parameter will be sent as the file name,
but no actual file needs to exist on the disk. The second form name parameter is always required, and is equivalent
to the name attribute of an <input> tag, if the file was to be uploaded through an HTML form. A fourth optional
parameter provides the files content-type. If not specified, and Zend\Http\Client reads the file from the disk,
the mime_content_type function will be used to guess the files content type, if it is available. In any case, the
default MIME type will be application/octet-stream.

150.4. File Uploads 821

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Using setFileUpload to Upload Files

1 // Uploading arbitrary data as a file

2 $text = 'this is some plain text';
3 $client->setFileUpload('some_text.txt', 'upload', $text, 'text/plain');
4

5 // Uploading an existing file

6 $client->setFileUpload('/tmp/Backup.tar.gz', 'bufile');
7

8 // Send the files

9 $client->setMethod('POST');
10 $client->send();

In the first example, the $text variable is uploaded and will be available as $_FILES[upload] on the server
side. In the second example, the existing file /tmp/Backup.tar.gz is uploaded to the server and will be available
as $_FILES[bufile]. The content type will be guessed automatically if possible - and if not, the content type
will be set to application/octet-stream.

Note: Uploading files

When uploading files, the HTTP request content-type is automatically set to multipart/form-data. Keep in mind that
you must send a POST or PUT request in order to upload files. Most servers will ignore the request body on other
request methods.

150.5 Sending Raw POST Data

You can use a Zend\Http\Client to send raw POST data using the setRawBody() method. This method takes
one parameter: the data to send in the request body. When sending raw POST data, it is advisable to also set the
encoding type using setEncType().

Sending Raw POST Data

1 $xml = '<book>' .
2 ' <title>Islands in the Stream</title>' .
3 ' <author>Ernest Hemingway</author>' .
4 ' <year>1970</year>' .
5 '</book>';
6 $client->setMethod('POST');
7 $client->setRawBody($xml);
8 $client->setEncType('text/xml');
9 $client->send();

The data should be available on the server side through PHPs $HTTP_RAW_POST_DATA variable or through the
php://input stream.

Note: Using raw POST data

Setting raw POST data for a request will override any POST parameters or file uploads. You should not try to use both
on the same request. Keep in mind that most servers will ignore the request body unless you send a POST request.

822 Chapter 150. HTTP Client - Advanced Usage

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

150.6 HTTP Authentication

Currently, Zend\Http\Client only supports basic HTTP authentication. This feature is utilized using the
setAuth() method, or by specifying a username and a password in the URI. The setAuth() method takes 3
parameters: The user name, the password and an optional authentication type parameter. As mentioned, currently only
basic authentication is supported (digest authentication support is planned).

Setting HTTP Authentication User and Password

1 // Using basic authentication

2 $client->setAuth('shahar', 'myPassword!', Zend\Http\Client::AUTH_BASIC);
3

4 // Since basic auth is default, you can just do this:

5 $client->setAuth('shahar', 'myPassword!');
6

7 // You can also specify username and password in the URI

8 $client->setUri('http://christer:[email protected]');

150.7 Sending Multiple Requests With the Same Client

Zend\Http\Client was also designed specifically to handle several consecutive requests with the same object.
This is useful in cases where a script requires data to be fetched from several places, or when accessing a specific
HTTP resource requires logging in and obtaining a session cookie, for example.
When performing several requests to the same host, it is highly recommended to enable the keepalive configuration
flag. This way, if the server supports keep-alive connections, the connection to the server will only be closed once
all requests are done and the Client object is destroyed. This prevents the overhead of opening and closing TCP
connections to the server.
When you perform several requests with the same client, but want to make sure all the request-specific parameters are
cleared, you should use the resetParameters() method. This ensures that GET and POST parameters, request
body and headers are reset and are not reused in the next request.

Note: Resetting parameters

Note that cookies are not reset by default when the resetParameters() method is used. To clean all cookies as
well, use resetParameters(true), or call clearCookies() after calling resetParameters().

Another feature designed specifically for consecutive requests is the Zend\Http\Cookies object. This Cookie
Jar allow you to save cookies set by the server in a request, and send them back on consecutive requests transparently.
This allows, for example, going through an authentication request before sending the actual data-fetching request.
If your application requires one authentication request per user, and consecutive requests might be performed in more
than one script in your application, it might be a good idea to store the Cookies object in the users session. This way,
you will only need to authenticate the user once every session.

Performing consecutive requests with one client

1 // First, instantiate the client

2 $client = new Zend\Http\Client('http://www.example.com/fetchdata.php', array(
3 'keepalive' => true
4 ));

150.6. HTTP Authentication 823

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

6 // Do we have the cookies stored in our session?

7 if (isset($_SESSION['cookiejar']) &&
8 $_SESSION['cookiejar'] instanceof Zend\Http\Cookies) {
9

10 $cookieJar = $_SESSION['cookiejar'];
11 } else {
12 // If we don't, authenticate and store cookies
13 $client->setUri('http://www.example.com/login.php');
14 $client->setParameterPost(array(
15 'user' => 'shahar',
16 'pass' => 'somesecret'
17 ));
18 $response = $client->setMethod('POST')->send();
19 $cookieJar = Zend\Http\Cookies::fromResponse($response);
20

21 // Now, clear parameters and set the URI to the original one
22 // (note that the cookies that were set by the server are now
23 // stored in the jar)
24 $client->resetParameters();
25 $client->setUri('http://www.example.com/fetchdata.php');
26 }
27

28 // Add the cookies to the new request

29 $client->setCookies($cookieJar->getMatchingCookies($client->getUri()));
30 $response = $client->setMethod('GET')->send();
31

32 // Store cookies in session, for next page

33 $_SESSION['cookiejar'] = $cookieJar;

150.8 Data Streaming

By default, Zend\Http\Client accepts and returns data as PHP strings. However, in many cases there are
big files to be received, thus keeping them in memory might be unnecessary or too expensive. For these cases,
Zend\Http\Client supports writing data to files (streams).
In order to receive data from the server as stream, use setStream(). Optional argument specifies the filename
where the data will be stored. If the argument is just TRUE (default), temporary file will be used and will be deleted
once response object is destroyed. Setting argument to FALSE disables the streaming functionality.
When using streaming, send() method will return object of class Zend\Http\Response\Stream, which
has two useful methods: getStreamName() will return the name of the file where the response is stored, and
getStream() will return stream from which the response could be read.
You can either write the response to pre-defined file, or use temporary file for storing it and send it out or write it to
another file using regular stream functions.

Receiving file from HTTP server with streaming

1 $client->setStream(); // will use temp file

2 $response = $client->send();
3 // copy file
4 copy($response->getStreamName(), "my/downloads/file");
5 // use stream
6 $fp = fopen("my/downloads/file2", "w");

824 Chapter 150. HTTP Client - Advanced Usage

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

7 stream_copy_to_stream($response->getStream(), $fp);
8 // Also can write to known file
9 $client->setStream("my/downloads/myfile")->send();

150.8. Data Streaming 825

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

826 Chapter 150. HTTP Client - Advanced Usage

 CHAPTER 151

HTTP Client - Static Usage

151.1 Overview

The Zend\Http component also provides Zend\Http\ClientStatic, a static HTTP client which exposes a
simplified API for quickly performing GET and POST operations:

151.2 Quick Start

1 use Zend\Http\ClientStatic;
2

3 // Simple GET request

4 $response = ClientStatic::get('http://example.org');
5

6 // More complex GET request, specifying query string 'foo=bar' and adding a
7 // custom header to request JSON data be returned (Accept: application/json)
8 $response = ClientStatic::get(
9 'http://example.org',
10 array('foo' => 'bar'),
11 array('Accept' => 'application/json')
12 );
13

14 // We can also do a POST request using the same format. Here we POST
15 // login credentials (username/password) to a login page:
16 $response = ClientStatic::post('https://example.org/login.php', array(
17 'username' => 'foo',
18 'password' => 'bar',
19 ));

151.3 Available Methods

get get(string $url, array $query = array(), array $headers = array(), mixed
$body = null, $clientOptions = null)
Perform an HTTP GET request using the provided URL, query string variables, headers and request body. The
fifth parameter can be used to pass configuration options to the HTTP Client instance.
Returns Zend\Http\Response

827
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

post post(string $url, array $params, array $headers = array(), mixed $body =
null, $clientOptions = null)
Perform an HTTP POST request using the provided URL, parameters, headers and request body. The fifth
parameter can be used to pass configuration options to the HTTP Client instance.
Returns Zend\Http\Response

828 Chapter 151. HTTP Client - Static Usage

 CHAPTER 152

Translating

ZendI18n comes with a complete translation suite which supports all major formats and includes popular features like
plural translations and text domains. The Translator component is mostly dependency free, except for the fallback to
a default locale, where it relies on the Intl PHP extension.
The translator itself is initialized without any parameters, as any configuration to it is optional. A translator without
any translations will actually do nothing but just return the given message IDs.

152.1 Adding translations

To add translations to the translator, there are two options. You can either add every translation file individually, which
is the best way if you use translation formats which store multiple locales in the same file, or you can add translations
via a pattern, which works best for formats which contain one locale per file.
To add a single file to the translator, use the addTranslationFile() method:
1 use Zend\I18n\Translator\Translator;
2

3 $translator = new Translator();

4 $translator->addTranslationFile($type, $filename, $textDomain, $locale);

The type given there is a name of one of the format loaders listed in the next section. Filename points to the file
containing the translations, and the text domain specifies a category name for the translations. If the text domain is
omitted, it will default to the default value. The locale specifies which language the translated strings are from and
is only required for formats which contain translations for a single locale.

Note: For each text domain and locale combination, there can only be one file loaded. Every successive file would
override the translations which were loaded prior.

When storing one locale per file, you should specify those files via a pattern. This allows you to add new translations
to the file system, without touching your code. Patterns are added with the addTranslationFilePattern()
method:
1 use Zend\I18n\Translator\Translator;
2

3 $translator = new Translator();

4 $translator->addTranslationFilePattern($type, $baseDir, $pattern, $textDomain);

The parameters for adding patterns is pretty similar to adding individual files, except that you dont specify a locale
and give the file location as a sprintf pattern. The locale is passed to the sprintf call, so you can either use %s or %1$s

829
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

where it should be substituted. So when your translation files are located in /var/messages/LOCALE/messages.mo,
you would specify your pattern as /var/messages/%s/messages.mo.

152.2 Supported formats

The translator supports the following major translation formats:

PHP arrays
Gettext
INI

152.3 Setting a locale

By default, the translator will get the locale to use from the Intl extensions Locale class. If you want to set an
alternative locale explicitly, you can do so by passing it to the setLocale() method.
When there is no translation for a specific message ID in a locale, the message ID itself will be returned by default.
Alternatively you can set a fallback locale which is used to retrieve a fallback translation. To do so, pass it to the
setFallbackLocale() method.

152.4 Translating messages

Translating messages can accomplished by calling the translate() method of the translator:
1 $translator->translate($message, $textDomain, $locale);

The message is the ID of your message to translate. If it does not exist in the loader translations or is empty, the
original message ID will be returned. The text domain parameter is the one you specified when adding translations.
If omitted, the default text domain will be used. The locale parameter will usually not be used in this context, as by
default the locale is taken from the locale set in the translator.
To translate plural messages, you can use the translatePlural() method. It works similar to translate(),
but instead of a single message it takes a singular and a plural value and an additional integer number on which the
returned plural form is based on:
1 $translator->translatePlural($singular, $plural, $number, $textDomain, $locale);

Plural translations are only available if the underlying format supports the transport of plural messages and plural rule
definitions.

152.5 Caching

In production it makes sense to cache your translations. This not only saves you from loading and parsing the in-
dividual formats each time, but also guarantees an optimized loading procedure. To enable caching, simply pass a
Zend\Cache\Storage\Adapter to the setCache() method. To disable the cache, you can just pass a null
value to it.

830 Chapter 152. Translating

 CHAPTER 153

I18n View Helpers

153.1 Introduction

Zend Framework comes with an initial set of helper classes related to Internationalization: e.g., formatting a date,
formatting currency, or displaying translated content. You can use helper, or plugin, classes to perform these behaviors
for you.
See the section on view helpers for more information.
orphan

153.2 CurrencyFormat Helper

The CurrencyFormat view helper can be used to simplify rendering of localized currency values. It acts as a
wrapper for the NumberFormatter class within the Internationalization extension (Intl).

153.2.1 Basic Usage

1 // Within your view

2

3 echo $this->currencyFormat(1234.56, 'USD', null, 'en_US');

4 // This returns: "$1,234.56"
5

6 echo $this->currencyFormat(1234.56, 'EUR', null, 'de_DE');

7 // This returns: "1.234,56 C"
8

9 echo $this->currencyFormat(1234.56, 'USD', true, 'en_US');

10 // This returns: "$1,234.56"
11

12 echo $this->currencyFormat(1234.56, 'USD', false, 'en_US');

13 // This returns: "$1,235"
14

15 echo $this->currencyFormat(12345678.90, 'EUR', true, 'de_DE', '#0.# kg');

16 // This returns: "12345678,90 kg"
17

18 echo $this->currencyFormat(12345678.90, 'EUR', false, 'de_DE', '#0.# kg');

19 // This returns: "12345679 kg"

831
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

currencyFormat(float $number[, string $currencyCode = null[, bool $showDecimals = null[, string $lo-
cale = null[, string $pattern = null ]]]])
Format a number
Parameters
$number The numeric currency value.
$currencyCode (Optional) The 3-letter ISO 4217 currency code indicating the currency
to use. If unset, it will use the default value null (getCurrencyCode()).
$showDecimals (Optional) Boolean false as third argument shows no decimals. If unset,
it will use the default value true (shouldShowDecimals()).
$locale (Optional) Locale in which the currency would be formatted (locale name, e.g.
en_US). If unset, it will use the default locale (Locale::getDefault()).
$pattern (Optional) Pattern string that is used by the formatter. If unset, it will use the
default value null (getCurrencyPattern()).
Return type string

153.2.2 Available Methods

Set the currency code and the locale

The $currencyCode and $locale options can be set prior to formatting and will be applied each time the helper
is used:
1 // Within your view
2

3 $this->plugin('currencyformat')->setCurrencyCode('USD')->setLocale('en_US');
4

5 echo $this->currencyFormat(1234.56);
6 // This returns: "$1,234.56"
7

8 echo $this->currencyFormat(5678.90);
9 // This returns: "$5,678.90"

setCurrencyCode(string $currencyCode)
The 3-letter ISO 4217 currency code indicating the currency to use
Parameters $currencyCode The 3-letter ISO 4217 currency code.
Return type Zend\I18n\View\Helper\CurrencyFormat
setLocale(string $locale)
Set locale to use instead of the default
Parameters $locale Locale in which the number would be formatted.
Return type Zend\I18n\View\Helper\CurrencyFormat

Show decimals

1 // Within your view

2

3 $this->plugin('currencyformat')->setShouldShowDecimals(false);
4

832 Chapter 153. I18n View Helpers

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

5 echo $this->currencyFormat(1234.56, 'USD', null, 'en_US');

6 // This returns: "$1,235"

setShouldShowDecimals(bool $showDecimals)
Set if the view helper should show two decimals
Parameters $showDecimals Whether or not to show the decimals.
Return type Zend\I18n\View\Helper\CurrencyFormat

Set currency pattern

1 // Within your view

2

3 $this->plugin('currencyformat')->setCurrencyPattern('#0.# kg');
4

5 echo $this->currencyFormat(12345678.90, 'EUR', null, 'de_DE');

6 // This returns: "12345678,90 kg"

setCurrencyPattern(string $currencyPattern)
Set the currency pattern used by the formatter. (See the NumberFormatter::setPattern PHP method for more
information.)
Parameters $currencyPattern Pattern in syntax described in ICU DecimalFormat documentation
Return type Zend\I18n\View\Helper\CurrencyFormat
orphan

153.3 DateFormat Helper

The DateFormat view helper can be used to simplify rendering of localized date/time values. It acts as a wrapper
for the IntlDateFormatter class within the Internationalization extension (Intl).

153.3.1 Basic Usage

1 // Within your view

2

3 // Date and Time

4 echo $this->dateFormat(
5 new DateTime(),
6 IntlDateFormatter::MEDIUM, // date
7 IntlDateFormatter::MEDIUM, // time
8 "en_US"
9 );
10 // This returns: "Jul 2, 2012 6:44:03 PM"
11

12 // Date Only
13 echo $this->dateFormat(
14 new DateTime(),
15 IntlDateFormatter::LONG, // date
16 IntlDateFormatter::NONE, // time
17 "en_US"
18 );
19 // This returns: "July 2, 2012"

153.3. DateFormat Helper 833

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

20

21 // Time Only
22 echo $this->dateFormat(
23 new DateTime(),
24 IntlDateFormatter::NONE, // date
25 IntlDateFormatter::SHORT, // time
26 "en_US"
27 );
28 // This returns: "6:44 PM"

dateFormat(mixed $date[, int $dateType[, int $timeType[, string $locale ]]])

Parameters
$date The value to format. This may be a DateTime object, an integer representing a
Unix timestamp value or an array in the format output by localtime().
$dateType (Optional) Date type to use (none, short, medium, long, full). This is one of
the IntlDateFormatter constants. Defaults to IntlDateFormatter::NONE.
$timeType (Optional) Time type to use (none, short, medium, long, full). This is one of
the IntlDateFormatter constants. Defaults to IntlDateFormatter::NONE.
$locale (Optional) Locale in which the date would be formatted (locale name, e.g. en_US).
If unset, it will use the default locale (Locale::getDefault())

153.3.2 Public Methods

The $locale option can be set prior to formatting with the setLocale() method and will be applied each time
the helper is used.
By default, the systems default timezone will be used when formatting. This overrides any timezone that may be set
inside a DateTime object. To change the timezone when formatting, use the setTimezone method.
1 // Within your view
2 $this->plugin("dateFormat")->setTimezone("America/New_York")->setLocale("en_US");
3

4 echo $this->dateFormat(new DateTime(), IntlDateFormatter::MEDIUM); // "Jul 2, 2012"

5 echo $this->dateFormat(new DateTime(), IntlDateFormatter::SHORT); // "7/2/12"

orphan

153.4 NumberFormat Helper

The NumberFormat view helper can be used to simplify rendering of locale-specific number and percentage strings.
It acts as a wrapper for the NumberFormatter class within the Internationalization extension (Intl).

153.4.1 Basic Usage

1 // Within your view

2

3 // Example of Decimal formatting:

4 echo $this->numberFormat(
5 1234567.891234567890000,
6 NumberFormatter::DECIMAL,

834 Chapter 153. I18n View Helpers

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

7 NumberFormatter::TYPE_DEFAULT,
8 "de_DE"
9 );
10 // This returns: "1.234.567,891"
11

12 // Example of Percent formatting:

13 echo $this->numberFormat(
14 0.80,
15 NumberFormatter::PERCENT,
16 NumberFormatter::TYPE_DEFAULT,
17 "en_US"
18 );
19 // This returns: "80%"
20

21 // Example of Scientific notation formatting:

22 echo $this->numberFormat(
23 0.00123456789,
24 NumberFormatter::SCIENTIFIC,
25 NumberFormatter::TYPE_DEFAULT,
26 "fr_FR"
27 );
28 // This returns: "1,23456789E-3"

numberFormat(number $number[, int $formatStyle[, int $formatType[, string $locale ]]])

Parameters
$number The numeric value.
$formatStyle (Optional) Style of the formatting, one of the format style constants. If
unset, it will use NumberFormatter::DECIMAL as the default style.
$formatType (Optional) The formatting type to use. If unset, it will use
NumberFormatter::TYPE_DEFAULT as the default type.
$locale (Optional) Locale in which the number would be formatted (locale name, e.g.
en_US). If unset, it will use the default locale (Locale::getDefault())

153.4.2 Public Methods

The $formatStyle, $formatType, and $locale options can be set prior to formatting and will be applied each
time the helper is used.
1 // Within your view
2 $this->plugin("numberformat")
3 ->setFormatStyle(NumberFormatter::PERCENT)
4 ->setFormatType(NumberFormatter::TYPE_DOUBLE)
5 ->setLocale("en_US");
6

7 echo $this->numberFormat(0.56); // "56%"

8 echo $this->numberFormat(0.90); // "90%"

orphan

153.4. NumberFormat Helper 835

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

153.5 Plural Helper

Most languages have specific rules for handling plurals. For instance, in English, we say 0 cars and 2 cars (plural)
while we say 1 car (singular). On the other hand, French uses the singular form for 0 and 1 (0 voiture and 1
voiture) and uses the plural form otherwise (3 voitures).
Therefore, we often need to handle those plural cases even without using translation (mono-lingual application). The
Plural helper was created for this. Please remember that, if you need to both handle translation and plural, you must
use the TranslatePlural helper for that. Plural does not deal with translation.
Internally, the Plural helper uses the Zend\I18n\Translator\Plural\Rule class to handle rules.

153.5.1 Setup

In Zend Framework 1, there was a similar helper. However, this helper hardcoded rules for mostly every languages.
The problem with this approach is that languages are alive and can evolve over time. Therefore, we would need to
change the rules and hence break current applications that may (or may not) want those new rules.
Thats why defining rules is now up to the developer. To help you with this process, here are some links with up-to-date
plural rules for tons of languages:
http://unicode.org/repos/cldr-tmp/trunk/diff/supplemental/language_plural_rules.html
https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Localization_and_Plurals

153.5.2 Basic Usage

The first thing to do is to defining rule. You may want to add this in your Module.php file, for example:
1 // Get the ViewHelperPlugin Manager from Service manager, so we can fetch the ``Plural``
2 // helper and add the plural rule for the application's language
3 $viewHelperManager = $serviceManager->get('ViewHelperManager');
4 $pluralHelper = $viewHelperManager->get('Plural');
5

6 // Here is the rule for French

7 $pluralHelper->setPluralRule('nplurals=2; plural=(n==0 || n==1 ? 0 : 1)');

The string reads like that:

1. First, we specify how many plurals forms we have. For French, only two (singular/plural).
2. Then, we specify the rule. Here, if the count is 0 or 1, this is rule n0 (singular) while its rule n1 otherwise.
As we said earlier, English consider 1 as singular, and 0/other as plural. Here is such a rule:
1 // Here is the rule for English
2 $pluralHelper->setPluralRule('nplurals=2; plural=(n==1 ? 0 : 1)');

Now that we have defined the rule, we can use it in our views:
1 <?php
2 // If the rule defined in Module.php is the English one:
3

4 echo $this->plural(array('car', 'cars'), 0); // prints "cars"

5 echo $this->plural(array('car', 'cars'), 1); // prints "car"
6

7 // If the rule defined in Module.php is the French one:

8 echo $this->plural(array('voiture', 'voitures'), 0); // prints "voiture"

836 Chapter 153. I18n View Helpers

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

9 echo $this->plural(array('voiture', 'voitures'), 1); // prints "voiture"

10 echo $this->plural(array('voiture', 'voitures'), 2); // prints "voitures"
11 ?>

orphan

153.6 Translate Helper

The Translate view helper can be used to translate content. It acts as a wrapper for the
Zend\I18n\Translator\Translator class.

153.6.1 Setup

Before using the Translate view helper, you must have first created a Translator object and have attached it to
the view helper. If you use the Zend\View\HelperPluginManager to invoke the view helper, this will be done
automatically for you.

153.6.2 Basic Usage

1 // Within your view

2

3 echo $this->translate("Some translated text.");

4

5 echo $this->translate("Translated text from a custom text domain.", "customDomain");

6

7 echo sprintf($this->translate("The current time is %s."), $currentTime);

8

9 echo $this->translate("Translate in a specific locale", "default", "de_DE");

translate(string $message[, string $textDomain[, string $locale ]])

Parameters
$message The message to be translated.
$textDomain (Optional) The text domain where this translation lives. Defaults to the
value default.
$locale (Optional) Locale in which the message would be translated (locale name, e.g.
en_US). If unset, it will use the default locale (Locale::getDefault())

153.6.3 Gettext

The xgettext utility can be used to compile *.po files from PHP source files containing the translate view helper.
xgettext --language=php --add-location --keyword=translate my-view-file.phtml

See the Gettext Wikipedia page for more information.

153.6. Translate Helper 837

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

153.6.4 Public Methods

Public methods for setting a Zend\I18n\Translator\Translator and a default text domain are inherited from
Zend\I18n\View\Helper\AbstractTranslatorHelper.
orphan

153.7 TranslatePlural Helper

The TranslatePlural view helper can be used to translate words which take into account numeric meanings.
English, for example, has a singular definition of car, for one car. And has the plural definition, cars, meaning
zero cars or more than one car. Other languages like Russian or Polish have more plurals with different rules.
The viewhelper acts as a wrapper for the Zend\I18n\Translator\Translator class.

153.7.1 Setup

Before using the TranslatePlural view helper, you must have first created a Translator object and have
attached it to the view helper. If you use the Zend\View\HelperPluginManager to invoke the view helper, this
will be done automatically for you.

153.7.2 Basic Usage

1 // Within your view

2 echo $this->translatePlural("car", "cars", $num);
3

4 // Use a custom domain

5 echo $this->translatePlural("monitor", "monitors", $num, "customDomain");
6

7 // Change locale
8 echo $this->translatePlural("locale", "locales", $num, "default", "de_DE");

translatePlural(string $singular, string $plural, int $number[, string $textDomain[, string $locale ]])
Parameters
$singular The singular message to be translated.
$plural The plural message to be translated.
$number The number to evaluate and determine which message to use.
$textDomain (Optional) The text domain where this translation lives. Defaults to the
value default.
$locale (Optional) Locale in which the message would be translated (locale name, e.g.
en_US). If unset, it will use the default locale (Locale::getDefault())

153.7.3 Public Methods

Public methods for setting a Zend\I18n\Translator\Translator and a default text domain are inherited from
Zend\I18n\View\Helper\AbstractTranslatorHelper.
orphan

838 Chapter 153. I18n View Helpers

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

153.8 Abstract Translator Helper

The AbstractTranslatorHelper view helper is used as a base abstract class for any helpers that need to trans-
late content. It provides an implementation for the Zend\I18n\Translator\TranslatorAwareInterface
which allows injecting a translator and setting a text domain.

153.8.1 Public Methods

setTranslator(Translator $translator[, string $textDomain = null ])

Sets Zend\I18n\Translator\Translator to use in helper. The $textDomain argument is optional.
It is provided as a convenience for setting both the translator and textDomain at the same time.
getTranslator()
Returns the Zend\I18n\Translator\Translator used in the helper.
Return type Zend\I18n\Translator\Translator
hasTranslator()
Returns true if a Zend\I18n\Translator\Translator is set in the helper, and false if otherwise.
Return type boolean
setTranslatorEnabled(boolean $enabled)
Sets whether translations should be enabled or disabled.
isTranslatorEnabled()
Returns true if translations are enabled, and false if disabled.
Return type boolean
setTranslatorTextDomain(string $textDomain)
Set the translation text domain to use in helper when translating.
getTranslatorTextDomain()
Returns the translation text domain used in the helper.
Return type string

153.8. Abstract Translator Helper 839

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

840 Chapter 153. I18n View Helpers

 CHAPTER 154

I18n Filters

Zend Framework comes with a set of filters related to Internationalization.

154.1 Alnum

The Alnum filter can be used to return only alphabetic characters and digits in the unicode letter and number
categories, respectively. All other characters are suppressed.

154.1.1 Supported Options

The following options are supported for Alnum:

Alnum([ boolean $allowWhiteSpace [, string $locale ]])
$allowWhiteSpace: If set to true then whitespace characters are allowed. Otherwise they are suppressed.
Default is false (whitespace is not allowed).
Methods for getting/setting the allowWhiteSpace option are also available: getAllowWhiteSpace() and
setAllowWhiteSpace()
$locale: The locale string used in identifying the characters to filter (locale name, e.g. en_US). If unset, it
will use the default locale (Locale::getDefault()).
Methods for getting/setting the locale are also available: getLocale() and setLocale()

154.1.2 Basic Usage

1 // Default settings, deny whitespace

2 $filter = new \Zend\I18n\Filter\Alnum();
3 echo $filter->filter("This is (my) content: 123");
4 // Returns "Thisismycontent123"
5

6 // First param in constructor is $allowWhiteSpace

7 $filter = new \Zend\I18n\Filter\Alnum(true);
8 echo $filter->filter("This is (my) content: 123");
9 // Returns "This is my content 123"

Note: Alnum works on almost all languages, except: Chinese, Japanese and Korean. Within these languages the
english alphabet is used instead of the characters from these languages. The language itself is detected using the
Locale.

841
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

154.2 Alpha

The Alpha filter can be used to return only alphabetic characters in the unicode letter category. All other characters
are suppressed.

154.2.1 Supported Options

The following options are supported for Alpha:

Alpha([ boolean $allowWhiteSpace [, string $locale ]])
$allowWhiteSpace: If set to true then whitespace characters are allowed. Otherwise they are suppressed.
Default is false (whitespace is not allowed).
Methods for getting/setting the allowWhiteSpace option are also available: getAllowWhiteSpace() and
setAllowWhiteSpace()
$locale: The locale string used in identifying the characters to filter (locale name, e.g. en_US). If unset, it
will use the default locale (Locale::getDefault()).
Methods for getting/setting the locale are also available: getLocale() and setLocale()

154.2.2 Basic Usage

1 // Default settings, deny whitespace

2 $filter = new \Zend\I18n\Filter\Alpha();
3 echo $filter->filter("This is (my) content: 123");
4 // Returns "Thisismycontent"
5

6 // Allow whitespace
7 $filter = new \Zend\I18n\Filter\Alpha(true);
8 echo $filter->filter("This is (my) content: 123");
9 // Returns "This is my content "

Note: Alpha works on almost all languages, except: Chinese, Japanese and Korean. Within these languages the
english alphabet is used instead of the characters from these languages. The language itself is detected using the
Locale.

154.3 NumberFormat

The NumberFormat filter can be used to return locale-specific number and percentage strings. It extends the
NumberParse filter, which acts as wrapper for the NumberFormatter class within the Internationalization ex-
tension (Intl).

154.3.1 Supported Options

The following options are supported for NumberFormat:

NumberFormat([ string $locale [, int $style [, int $type ]]])

842 Chapter 154. I18n Filters

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

$locale: (Optional) Locale in which the number would be formatted (locale name, e.g. en_US). If unset, it
will use the default locale (Locale::getDefault())
Methods for getting/setting the locale are also available: getLocale() and setLocale()
$style: (Optional) Style of the formatting, one of the format style constants. If unset, it will use
NumberFormatter::DEFAULT_STYLE as the default style.
Methods for getting/setting the format style are also available: getStyle() and setStyle()
$type: (Optional) The formatting type to use. If unset, it will use NumberFormatter::TYPE_DOUBLE
as the default type.
Methods for getting/setting the format type are also available: getType() and setType()

154.3.2 Basic Usage

1 $filter = new \Zend\I18n\Filter\NumberFormat("de_DE");

2 echo $filter->filter(1234567.8912346);
3 // Returns "1.234.567,891"
4

5 $filter = new \Zend\I18n\Filter\NumberFormat("en_US", NumberFormatter::PERCENT);

6 echo $filter->filter(0.80);
7 // Returns "80%"
8

9 $filter = new \Zend\I18n\Filter\NumberFormat("fr_FR", NumberFormatter::SCIENTIFIC);

10 echo $filter->filter(0.00123456789);
11 // Returns "1,23456789E-3"

154.4 NumberParse

The NumberParse filter can be used to parse a number from a string. It acts as a wrapper for the
NumberFormatter class within the Internationalization extension (Intl).

154.4.1 Supported Options

The following options are supported for NumberParse:

NumberParse([ string $locale [, int $style [, int $type ]]])
$locale: (Optional) Locale in which the number would be parsed (locale name, e.g. en_US). If unset, it will
use the default locale (Locale::getDefault())
Methods for getting/setting the locale are also available: getLocale() and setLocale()
$style: (Optional) Style of the parsing, one of the format style constants. If unset, it will use
NumberFormatter::DEFAULT_STYLE as the default style.
Methods for getting/setting the parse style are also available: getStyle() and setStyle()
$type: (Optional) The parsing type to use. If unset, it will use NumberFormatter::TYPE_DOUBLE as
the default type.
Methods for getting/setting the parse type are also available: getType() and setType()

154.4. NumberParse 843

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

154.4.2 Basic Usage

1 $filter = new \Zend\I18n\Filter\NumberParse("de_DE");

2 echo $filter->filter("1.234.567,891");
3 // Returns 1234567.8912346
4

5 $filter = new \Zend\I18n\Filter\NumberParse("en_US", NumberFormatter::PERCENT);

6 echo $filter->filter("80%");
7 // Returns 0.80
8

9 $filter = new \Zend\I18n\Filter\NumberParse("fr_FR", NumberFormatter::SCIENTIFIC);

10 echo $filter->filter("1,23456789E-3");
11 // Returns 0.00123456789

844 Chapter 154. I18n Filters

 CHAPTER 155

I18n Validators

Zend Framework comes with a set of validators related to Internationalization.

845
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

846 Chapter 155. I18n Validators

 CHAPTER 156

Alnum Validator

Zend\I18n\Validator\Alnum allows you to validate if a given value contains only alphabetical characters and
digits. There is no length limitation for the input you want to validate.

156.1 Supported Options

The following options are supported for Zend\I18n\Validator\Alnum:

allowWhiteSpace: If whitespace characters are allowed. This option defaults to FALSE

156.2 Basic usage

A basic example is the following one:

1 $validator = new Zend\I18n\Validator\Alnum();
2 if ($validator->isValid('Abcd12')) {
3 // value contains only allowed chars
4 } else {
5 // false
6 }

156.3 Using whitespaces

Per default whitespaces are not accepted because they are not part of the alphabet. Still, there is a way to accept them
as input. This allows to validate complete sentences or phrases.
To allow the usage of whitespaces you need to give the allowWhiteSpace option. This can be done while creating
an instance of the validator, or afterwards by using setAllowWhiteSpace(). To get the actual state you can use
getAllowWhiteSpace().
1 $validator = new Zend\I18n\Validator\Alnum(array('allowWhiteSpace' => true));
2 if ($validator->isValid('Abcd and 12')) {
3 // value contains only allowed chars
4 } else {
5 // false
6 }

847
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

156.4 Using different languages

There are actually 3 languages which are not accepted in their own script. These languages are korean, japanese and
chinese because this languages are using an alphabet where a single character is build by using multiple characters.
In the case you are using these languages, the input will only be validated by using the english alphabet.

848 Chapter 156. Alnum Validator

 CHAPTER 157

Alpha Validator

Zend\I18n\Validator\Alpha allows you to validate if a given value contains only alphabetical char-
acters. There is no length limitation for the input you want to validate. This validator is related to the
Zend\I18n\Validator\Alnum validator with the exception that it does not accept digits. The following options
are supported for Zend\I18n\Validator\Alpha:
allowWhiteSpace: If whitespace characters are allowed. This option defaults to FALSE
A basic example is the following one:
1 $validator = new Zend\I18n\Validator\Alpha();
2 if ($validator->isValid('Abcd')) {
3 // value contains only allowed chars
4 } else {
5 // false
6 }

Per default whitespaces are not accepted because they are not part of the alphabet. Still, there is a way to accept them
as input. This allows to validate complete sentences or phrases.
To allow the usage of whitespaces you need to give the allowWhiteSpace option. This can be done while creating
an instance of the validator, or afterwards by using setAllowWhiteSpace(). To get the actual state you can use
getAllowWhiteSpace().
1 $validator = new Zend\I18n\Validator\Alpha(array('allowWhiteSpace' => true));
2 if ($validator->isValid('Abcd and efg')) {
3 // value contains only allowed chars
4 } else {
5 // false
6 }

When using Zend\I18n\Validator\Alpha then the language which the user sets within his browser will be
used to set the allowed characters. This means when your user sets de for german then he can also enter characters
like , and additionally to the characters from the english alphabet.
Which characters are allowed depends completely on the used language as every language defines its own set of
characters.
There are actually 3 languages which are not accepted in their own script. These languages are korean, japanese and
chinese because this languages are using an alphabet where a single character is build by using multiple characters.
In the case you are using these languages, the input will only be validated by using the english alphabet.

849
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

850 Chapter 157. Alpha Validator

 CHAPTER 158

IsFloat

Zend\I18n\Validator\IsFloat allows you to validate if a given value contains a floating-point

value. This validator validates also localized input. The following options are supported for
Zend\I18n\Validator\IsFloat:
locale: Sets the locale which will be used to validate localized float values.
The simplest way to validate a float is by using the system settings. When no option is used, the environment locale is
used for validation:
1 $validator = new Zend\I18n\Validator\IsFloat();
2

3 $validator->isValid(1234.5); // returns true

4 $validator->isValid('10a01'); // returns false
5 $validator->isValid('1,234.5'); // returns true

In the above example we expected that our environment is set to en as locale. Often its useful to be able to validate
also localized values. Float values are often written different in other countries. For example using english you will
write 1.5. In german you may write 1,5 and in other languages you may use grouping.
Zend\I18n\Validator\IsFloat is able to validate such notations. However,it is limited to the locale you set.
See the following code:
1 $validator = new Zend\I18n\Validator\IsFloat(array('locale' => 'de'));
2

3 $validator->isValid(1234.5); // returns true

4 $validator->isValid("1 234,5"); // returns false
5 $validator->isValid("1.234"); // returns true

As you can see, by using a locale, your input is validated localized. Using a different notation you get a FALSE when
the locale forces a different notation.
The locale can also be set afterwards by using setLocale() and retrieved by using getLocale().

158.1 Migration from 2.0-2.3 to 2.4+

Version 2.4 adds support for PHP 7. In PHP 7, float is a reserved keyword, which required renaming the Float
validator. If you were using the Float validator directly previously, you will now receive an E_USER_DEPRECATED
notice on instantiation. Please update your code to refer to the IsFloat class instead.
Users pulling their Float validator instance from the validator plugin manager receive an IsFloat instance instead
starting in 2.4.0.

851
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

158.1.1 IsInt

Zend\I18n\Validator\IsInt validates if a given value is an integer. Also localized integer values are recog-
nised and can be validated.

158.2 Supported Options

The following options are supported for Zend\I18n\Validator\IsInt:

locale: Sets the locale which will be used to validate localized integers.

158.3 Simple integer validation

The simplest way to validate an integer is by using the system settings. When no option is used, the environment
locale is used for validation:
1 $validator = new Zend\I18n\Validator\IsInt();
2

3 $validator->isValid(1234); // returns true

4 $validator->isValid(1234.5); // returns false
5 $validator->isValid('1,234'); // returns true

In the above example we expected that our environment is set to en as locale. As you can see in the third example
also grouping is recognised.

158.4 Localized integer validation

Often its useful to be able to validate also localized values. Integer values are often written different in other countries.
For example using english you can write 1234 or 1,234. Both are integer values but the grouping is optional. In
german for example you may write 1.234 and in french 1 234.
Zend\I18n\Validator\IsInt is able to validate such notations. But it is limited to the locale you set. This
means that it not simply strips off the separator, it validates if the correct separator is used. See the following code:
1 $validator = new Zend\I18n\Validator\IsInt(array('locale' => 'de'));
2

3 $validator->isValid(1234); // returns true

4 $validator->isValid("1,234"); // returns false
5 $validator->isValid("1.234"); // returns true

As you can see, by using a locale, your input is validated localized. Using the english notation you get a FALSE when
the locale forces a different notation.
The locale can also be set afterwards by using setLocale() and retrieved by using getLocale().

158.5 Migration from 2.0-2.3 to 2.4+

Version 2.4 adds support for PHP 7. In PHP 7, int is a reserved keyword, which required renaming the Int validator.
If you were using the Int validator directly previously, you will now receive an E_USER_DEPRECATED notice on
instantiation. Please update your code to refer to the IsInt class instead.

852 Chapter 158. IsFloat

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Users pulling their Int validator instance from the validator plugin manager receive an IsInt instance instead
starting in 2.4.0.

158.5. Migration from 2.0-2.3 to 2.4+ 853

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

854 Chapter 158. IsFloat

 CHAPTER 159

Introduction

The Zend\InputFilter component can be used to filter and validate generic sets of input data. For instance, you
could use it to filter $_GET or $_POST values, CLI arguments, etc.
To pass input data to the InputFilter, you can use the setData() method. The data must be specified using an
associative array. Below is an example on how to validate the data coming from a form using the POST method.
1 use Zend\InputFilter\InputFilter;
2 use Zend\InputFilter\Input;
3 use Zend\Validator;
4

5 $email = new Input('email');

6 $email->getValidatorChain()
7 ->attach(new Validator\EmailAddress());
8

9 $password = new Input('password');

10 $password->getValidatorChain()
11 ->attach(new Validator\StringLength(8));
12

13 $inputFilter = new InputFilter();

14 $inputFilter->add($email)
15 ->add($password)
16 ->setData($_POST);
17

18 if ($inputFilter->isValid()) {
19 echo "The form is valid\n";
20 } else {
21 echo "The form is not valid\n";
22 foreach ($inputFilter->getInvalidInput() as $error) {
23 print_r($error->getMessages());
24 }
25 }

In this example we validated the email and password values. The email must be a valid address and the password
must be composed with at least 8 characters. If the input data are not valid, we report the list of invalid input using the
getInvalidInput() method.
You can add one or more validators to each input using the attach() method for each validator. It is also
possible to specify a validation group, a subset of the data to be validated; this may be done using the
setValidationGroup() method. You can specify the list of the input names as an array or as individual pa-
rameters.
1 // As individual parameters
2 $inputFilter->setValidationGroup('email', 'password');

855
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

4 // or as an array of names
5 $inputFilter->setValidationGroup(array('email', 'password'));

You can validate and/or filter the data using the InputFilter. To filter data, use the getFilterChain() method
of individual Input instances, and attach filters to the returned filter chain. Below is an example that uses filtering
without validation.
1 use Zend\InputFilter\Input;
2 use Zend\InputFilter\InputFilter;
3

4 $input = new Input('foo');

5 $input->getFilterChain()
6 ->attachByName('stringtrim')
7 ->attachByName('alpha');
8

9 $inputFilter = new InputFilter();

10 $inputFilter->add($input)
11 ->setData(array(
12 'foo' => ' Bar3 ',
13 ));
14

15 echo "Before:\n";
16 echo $inputFilter->getRawValue('foo') . "\n"; // the output is ' Bar3 '
17 echo "After:\n";
18 echo $inputFilter->getValue('foo') . "\n"; // the output is 'Bar'

The getValue() method returns the filtered value of the foo input, while getRawValue() returns the original
value of the input.
We provide also Zend\InputFilter\Factory, to allow initialization of the InputFilter based on a config-
uration array (or Traversable object). Below is an example where we create a password input value with the same
constraints proposed before (a string with at least 8 characters):
1 use Zend\InputFilter\Factory;
2

3 $factory = new Factory();

4 $inputFilter = $factory->createInputFilter(array(
5 'password' => array(
6 'name' => 'password',
7 'required' => true,
8 'validators' => array(
9 array(
10 'name' => 'not_empty',
11 ),
12 array(
13 'name' => 'string_length',
14 'options' => array(
15 'min' => 8
16 ),
17 ),
18 ),
19 ),
20 ));
21

22 $inputFilter->setData($_POST);
23 echo $inputFilter->isValid() ? "Valid form" : "Invalid form";

The factory may be used to create not only Input instances, but also nested InputFilters, allowing you to create

856 Chapter 159. Introduction

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

validation and filtering rules for hierarchical data sets.

Finally, the default InputFilter implementation is backed by a Factory. This means that when calling add(),
you can provide a specification that the Factory would understand, and it will create the appropriate object. You
may create either Input or InputFilter objects in this fashion.
1 use Zend\InputFilter\InputFilter;
2

3 $filter = new InputFilter();

4

5 // Adding a single input

6 $filter->add(array(
7 'name' => 'username',
8 'required' => true,
9 'validators' => array(
10 array(
11 'name' => 'not_empty',
12 ),
13 array(
14 'name' => 'string_length',
15 'options' => array(
16 'min' => 5
17 ),
18 ),
19 ),
20 ));
21

22 // Adding another input filter what also contains a single input. Merging both.
23 $filter->add(array(
24 'type' => 'Zend\InputFilter\InputFilter',
25 'password' => array(
26 'name' => 'password',
27 'required' => true,
28 'validators' => array(
29 array(
30 'name' => 'not_empty',
31 ),
32 array(
33 'name' => 'string_length',
34 'options' => array(
35 'min' => 8
36 ),
37 ),
38 ),
39 ),
40 ));

The merge() method may be used on an InputFilterInterface in order to add two or more filters to each
other, effectively allowing you to create chains of filters. This is especially useful in object hierarchies whereby we
may define a generic set of validation rules on the base object and build these up to more specific rules along the way.
In the example below an InputFilter is built up for the name property as well as for the email property allowing
them to be re-used elsewhere. When the isValid() method is called on the object, all of the merged filters are run
against the calling object in order to validate the internal properties based on our compound set of filters.
1 use Zend\InputFilter\InputFilter;
2

3 /**
4 * Filter to ensure a name property is set and > 8 characters

857
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

5 */
6 class NameInputFilter extends InputFilter
7 {
8 /** Filter body goes here **/
9 }
10

11 /**
12 * Filter to ensure an email property is set and > 8 characters and is valid
13 */
14 class EmailInputFilter extends InputFilter
15 {
16 /** Filter body goes here **/
17 }
18

19 class SimplePerson
20 {
21 /** Member variables ommitted for berevity **/
22

23 /** @var InputFilter */

24 protected $inputFilter;
25

26 /**
27 * Retrieve input filter
28 *
29 * @return InputFilter
30 */
31 public function getInputFilter()
32 {
33 if (!$this->inputFilter) {
34 // Create a new input filter
35 $this->inputFilter = new InputFilter();
36 // Merge our inputFilter in for the email property
37 $this->inputFilter->merge(new EmailInputFilter());
38 // Merge our inputFilter in for the name property
39 $this->inputFilter->merge(new NameInputFilter());
40 }
41 return $this->inputFilter;
42 }
43

44 /**
45 * Set input filter
46 *
47 * @param InputFilterInterface $inputFilter
48 * @return SimplePerson
49 */
50 public function setInputFilter(InputFilterInterface $inputFilter)
51 {
52 $this->inputFilter = $inputFilter;
53

54 return $this;
55 }
56 }

Also see
Zend\Filter
Zend\Validator

858 Chapter 159. Introduction

 CHAPTER 160

Input filter specifications

Zend\InputFilter allows configuration-driven creation of input filters via

Zend\InputFilter\InputFilterAbstractServiceFactory. This abstract factory is responsible
for creating and returning an appropriate input filter given named configuration under the top-level configuration key
input_filter_specs.
It is registered with Zend\InputFilter\InputFilterPluginManager, allowing you to pull the input filter
via that plugin manager. A side effect is that forms pulled from Zend\Form\FormElementManager can use
these named input filters.

160.1 Setup

This functionality is disabled by default.

To enable it, you must add the Zend\InputFilter\InputFilterAbstractServiceFactory ab-
stract factory to the Zend\InputFilter\InputFilterPluginManager configuration, which is unser the
input_filters configuration key.
1 return array(
2 'input_filters' => array(
3 'abstract_factories' => array(
4 'Zend\InputFilter\InputFilterAbstractServiceFactory'
5 ),
6 ),
7 );

160.2 Example

In the following code, we define configuration for an input filter named foobar:
1 return array(
2 'input_filter_specs' => array(
3 'foobar' => array(
4 0 => array(
5 'name' => 'name',
6 'required' => true,
7 'filters' => array(
8 0 => array(
9 'name' => 'Zend\Filter\StringTrim',
10 'options' => array(),

859
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

11 ),
12 ),
13 'validators' => array(),
14 'description' => 'Hello to name',
15 'allow_empty' => false,
16 'continue_if_empty' => false,
17 ),
18 ),
19 );

When creating a controller, we might then pull the InputFilterManager, and retrieve the foobar input filter
weve defined in order to inject it:
1 use Zend\ServiceManager\FactoryInterface;
2 use Zend\ServiceManager\ServiceLocatorInterface;
3

4 class MyValidatingControllerFactory implements FactoryInterface

5 {
6 public function createService(ServiceLocatorInterface $controllers)
7 {
8 // Retrieve the application service manager
9 $services = $controllers->getServiceLocator();
10

11 // Retrieve the InputFilterManager

12 $filters = $services->get('InputFilterManager');
13

14 // Instantiate the controller and pass it the foobar input filter

15 return new MyValidatingController($filters->get('foobar'));
16 }
17 }

And you can use it, as you already did with other input filters:
1 $inputFilter->setData(array(
2 'name' => 'test',
3 ));
4

5 if (! $inputFilter->isValid()) {
6 echo 'Data invalid';
7 }

860 Chapter 160. Input filter specifications

 CHAPTER 161

File Upload Input

The Zend\InputFilter\FileInput class is a special Input type for uploaded files found in the $_FILES
array.
While FileInput uses the same interface as Input, it differs in a few ways:
1. It expects the raw value to be in the $_FILES array format.
2. The validators are run before the filters (which is the opposite behavior of Input). This is so that any
is_uploaded_file() validation can be run prior to any filters that may rename/move/modify the file.
3. Instead of adding a NotEmpty validator, it will (by default) automatically add a
Zend\Validator\File\UploadFile validator.
The biggest thing to be concerned about is that if you are using a <input type="file"> element in your form,
you will need to use the FileInput instead of Input or else you will encounter issues.

161.1 Basic Usage

Usage of FileInput is essentially the same as Input:

1 use Zend\Http\PhpEnvironment\Request;
2 use Zend\Filter;
3 use Zend\InputFilter\InputFilter;
4 use Zend\InputFilter\Input;
5 use Zend\InputFilter\FileInput;
6 use Zend\Validator;
7

8 // Description text input

9 $description = new Input('description'); // Standard Input type
10 $description->getFilterChain() // Filters are run first w/ Input
11 ->attach(new Filter\StringTrim());
12 $description->getValidatorChain() // Validators are run second w/ Input
13 ->attach(new Validator\StringLength(array('max' => 140)));
14

15 // File upload input

16 $file = new FileInput('file'); // Special File Input type
17 $file->getValidatorChain() // Validators are run first w/ FileInput
18 ->attach(new Validator\File\UploadFile());
19 $file->getFilterChain() // Filters are run second w/ FileInput
20 ->attach(new Filter\File\RenameUpload(array(
21 'target' => './data/tmpuploads/file',
22 'randomize' => true,

861
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

23 )));
24

25 // Merge $_POST and $_FILES data together

26 $request = new Request();
27 $postData = array_merge_recursive($request->getPost()->toArray(), $request->getFiles()->toArray());
28

29 $inputFilter = new InputFilter();

30 $inputFilter->add($description)
31 ->add($file)
32 ->setData($postData);
33

34 if ($inputFilter->isValid()) { // FileInput validators are run, but not the filters...

35 echo "The form is valid\n";
36 $data = $inputFilter->getValues(); // This is when the FileInput filters are run.
37 } else {
38 echo "The form is not valid\n";
39 foreach ($inputFilter->getInvalidInput() as $error) {
40 print_r ($error->getMessages());
41 }
42 }

Also see
File filter classes
File validator classes

862 Chapter 161. File Upload Input

 CHAPTER 162

Introduction

Zend\Json provides convenience methods for serializing native PHP to JSON and decoding JSON to native PHP.
For more information on JSON, visit the JSON project site.
JSON, JavaScript Object Notation, can be used for data interchange between JavaScript and other languages. Since
JSON can be directly evaluated by JavaScript, it is a more efficient and lightweight format than XML for exchanging
data with JavaScript clients.
In addition, Zend\Json provides a useful way to convert any arbitrary XML formatted string into a JSON formatted
string. This built-in feature will enable PHP developers to transform the enterprise data encoded in XML format into
JSON format before sending it to browser-based Ajax client applications. It provides an easy way to do dynamic data
conversion on the server-side code thereby avoiding unnecessary XML parsing in the browser-side applications. It
offers a nice utility function that results in easier application-specific data processing techniques.

863
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

864 Chapter 162. Introduction

 CHAPTER 163

Basic Usage

Usage of Zend\Json involves using the two public static methods available: Zend\Json\Json::encode()
and Zend\Json\Json::decode().
1 // Retrieve a value:
2 $phpNative = Zend\Json\Json::decode($encodedValue);
3

4 // Encode it to return to the client:

5 $json = Zend\Json\Json::encode($phpNative);

163.1 Pretty-printing JSON

Sometimes, it may be hard to explore JSON data generated by Zend\Json\Json::encode(), since it has no
spacing or indentation. In order to make it easier, Zend\Json\Json allows you to pretty-print JSON data in the
human-readable format with Zend\Json\Json::prettyPrint().
1 // Encode it to return to the client:
2 $json = Zend\Json\Json::encode($phpNative);
3 if ($debug) {
4 echo Zend\Json\Json::prettyPrint($json, array("indent" => " "));
5 }

Second optional argument of Zend\Json\Json::prettyPrint() is an option array. Option indent allows

to set indentation string - by default its a single tab character.

865
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

866 Chapter 163. Basic Usage

 CHAPTER 164

Advanced Usage

164.1 JSON Objects

When encoding PHP objects as JSON, all public properties of that object will be encoded in a JSON object.
JSON does not allow object references, so care should be taken not to encode objects with recursive references. If you
have issues with recursion, Zend\Json\Json::encode() and Zend\Json\Encoder::encode() allow an
optional second parameter to check for recursion; if an object is serialized twice, an exception will be thrown.
Decoding JSON objects poses an additional difficulty, however, since JavaScript objects correspond most closely to
PHPs associative array. Some suggest that a class identifier should be passed, and an object instance of that class
should be created and populated with the key/value pairs of the JSON object; others feel this could pose a substantial
security risk.
By default, Zend\Json\Json will decode JSON objects as stdClass objects. However, if you desire an associa-
tive array returned, you can specify this:
1 // Decode JSON objects as PHP array
2 $phpNative = Zend\Json\Json::decode($encodedValue, Zend\Json\Json::TYPE_ARRAY);

Any objects thus decoded are returned as associative arrays with keys and values corresponding to the key/value pairs
in the JSON notation.
The recommendation of Zend Framework is that the individual developer should decide how to decode JSON objects.
If an object of a specified type should be created, it can be created in the developer code and populated with the values
decoded using Zend\Json.

164.2 Encoding PHP objects

If you are encoding PHP objects by default the encoding mechanism can only access public properties of these objects.
When a method toJson() is implemented on an object to encode, Zend\Json\Json calls this method and expects
the object to return a JSON representation of its internal state.
Zend\Json\Json can encode PHP objects recursively but does not do so by default. This can be enabled by passing
true as a second argument to Zend\Json\Json::encode().
1 // Encode PHP object recursively
2 $jsonObject = Zend\Json\Json::encode($data, true);

When doing recursive encoding of objects, as JSON does not support cycles, an
Zend\Json\Exception\RecursionException will be thrown. If you wish, you can silence these
exceptions by passing the silenceCyclicalExceptions option:

867
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1 $jsonObject = Zend\Json\Json::encode(
2 $data,
3 true,
4 array('silenceCyclicalExceptions' => true)
5 );

164.3 Internal Encoder/Decoder

Zend\Json has two different modes depending if ext/json is enabled in your PHP installation or not. If ext/json is
installed by default json_encode() and json_decode() functions are used for encoding and decoding JSON. If
ext/json is not installed a Zend Framework implementation in PHP code is used for en-/decoding. This is considerably
slower than using the PHP extension, but behaves exactly the same.
Still sometimes you might want to use the internal encoder/decoder even if you have ext/json installed. You can
achieve this by calling:
1 Zend\Json\Json::$useBuiltinEncoderDecoder = true;

164.4 JSON Expressions

JavaScript makes heavy use of anonymous function callbacks, which can be saved within JSON object variables.
Still they only work if not returned inside double quotes, which Zend\Json naturally does. With the Expression
support for Zend\Json support you can encode JSON objects with valid JavaScript callbacks. This works for both
json_encode() or the internal encoder.
A JavaScript callback is represented using the Zend\Json\Expr object. It implements the value object
pattern and is immutable. You can set the JavaScript expression as the first constructor argument. By
default Zend\Json\Json::encode does not encode JavaScript callbacks, you have to pass the option
enableJsonExprFinder and set it to TRUE into the encode function. If enabled the expression support works
for all nested expressions in large object structures. A usage example would look like:
1 $data = array(
2 'onClick' => new Zend\Json\Expr('function() {'
3 . 'alert("I am a valid JavaScript callback '
4 . 'created by Zend\Json"); }'),
5 'other' => 'no expression',
6 );
7 $jsonObjectWithExpression = Zend\Json\Json::encode(
8 $data,
9 false,
10 array('enableJsonExprFinder' => true)
11 );

868 Chapter 164. Advanced Usage

 CHAPTER 165

XML to JSON conversion

Zend\Json provides a convenience method for transforming XML formatted data into JSON format. This feature
was inspired from an IBM developerWorks article.
Zend\Json includes a static function called Zend\Json\Json::fromXml(). This function will generate JSON
from a given XML input. This function takes any arbitrary XML string as an input parameter. It also takes an optional
boolean input parameter to instruct the conversion logic to ignore or not ignore the XML attributes during the conver-
sion process. If this optional input parameter is not given, then the default behavior is to ignore the XML attributes.
This function call is made as shown below:
1 // fromXml function simply takes a String containing XML contents
2 // as input.
3 $jsonContents = Zend\Json\Json::fromXml($xmlStringContents, true);

Zend\Json\Json::fromXml() function does the conversion of the XML formatted string input parameter and
returns the equivalent JSON formatted string output. In case of any XML input format error or conversion logic error,
this function will throw an exception. The conversion logic also uses recursive techniques to traverse the XML tree.
It supports recursion upto 25 levels deep. Beyond that depth, it will throw a Zend\Json\Exception. There are
several XML files with varying degree of complexity provided in the tests directory of Zend Framework. They can be
used to test the functionality of the xml2json feature.

165.1 Example

The following is a simple example that shows both the XML input string passed to and the JSON output string returned
as a result from the Zend\Json\Json::fromXml() function. This example used the optional function parameter
as not to ignore the XML attributes during the conversion. Hence, you can notice that the resulting JSON string includes
a representation of the XML attributes present in the XML input string.
XML input string passed to Zend\Json\Json::fromXml() function:
1 <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
2 <books>
3 <book id="1">
4 <title>Code Generation in Action</title>
5 <author><first>Jack</first><last>Herrington</last></author>
6 <publisher>Manning</publisher>
7 </book>
8

9 <book id="2">
10 <title>PHP Hacks</title>
11 <author><first>Jack</first><last>Herrington</last></author>
12 <publisher>O'Reilly</publisher>

869
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

13 </book>
14

15 <book id="3">
16 <title>Podcasting Hacks</title>
17 <author><first>Jack</first><last>Herrington</last></author>
18 <publisher>O'Reilly</publisher>
19 </book>
20 </books>

JSON output string returned from Zend\Json\Json::fromXml() function:

1 {
2 "books" : {
3 "book" : [ {
4 "@attributes" : {
5 "id" : "1"
6 },
7 "title" : "Code Generation in Action",
8 "author" : {
9 "first" : "Jack", "last" : "Herrington"
10 },
11 "publisher" : "Manning"
12 }, {
13 "@attributes" : {
14 "id" : "2"
15 },
16 "title" : "PHP Hacks", "author" : {
17 "first" : "Jack", "last" : "Herrington"
18 },
19 "publisher" : "O'Reilly"
20 }, {
21 "@attributes" : {
22 "id" : "3"
23 },
24 "title" : "Podcasting Hacks", "author" : {
25 "first" : "Jack", "last" : "Herrington"
26 },
27 "publisher" : "O'Reilly"
28 }
29 ]}
30 }

More details about this xml2json feature can be found in the original proposal itself. Take a look at the Zend_xml2json
proposal.

870 Chapter 165. XML to JSON conversion

 CHAPTER 166

Zend\Json\Server - JSON-RPC server

166.1 Introduction

Zend\Json\Server is a JSON-RPC server implementation. It supports both the JSON-RPC version 1 specifica-
tion as well as the version 2 specification; additionally, it provides a PHP implementation of the Service Mapping
Description (SMD) specification for providing service metadata to service consumers.
JSON-RPC is a lightweight Remote Procedure Call protocol that utilizes JSON for its messaging envelopes. This
JSON-RPC implementation follows PHPs SoapServer API. This means, in a typical situation, you will simply:
Instantiate the server object
Attach one or more functions and/or classes/objects to the server object
handle() the request
Zend\Json\Server utilizes Zend\Server\Reflection to perform reflection on any attached classes or functions, and
uses that information to build both the SMD and enforce method call signatures. As such, it is imperative that any
attached functions and/or class methods have full PHP docblocks documenting, minimally:
All parameters and their expected variable types
The return value variable type
Zend\Json\Server listens for POST requests only at this time; fortunately, most JSON-RPC client implementa-
tions in the wild at the time of this writing will only POST requests as it is. This makes it simple to utilize the same
server end point to both handle requests as well as to deliver the service SMD, as is shown in the next example.

166.2 Basic Usage

First, lets define a class we wish to expose via the JSON-RPC server. Well call the class Calculator, and define
methods for add, subtract, multiply, and divide:
1 /**
2 * Calculator - sample class to expose via JSON-RPC
3 */
4 class Calculator
5 {
6 /**
7 * Return sum of two variables
8 *
9 * @param int $x
10 * @param int $y

871
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

11 * @return int
12 */
13 public function add($x, $y)
14 {
15 return $x + $y;
16 }
17

18 /**
19 * Return difference of two variables
20 *
21 * @param int $x
22 * @param int $y
23 * @return int
24 */
25 public function subtract($x, $y)
26 {
27 return $x - $y;
28 }
29

30 /**
31 * Return product of two variables
32 *
33 * @param int $x
34 * @param int $y
35 * @return int
36 */
37 public function multiply($x, $y)
38 {
39 return $x * $y;
40 }
41

42 /**
43 * Return the division of two variables
44 *
45 * @param int $x
46 * @param int $y
47 * @return float
48 */
49 public function divide($x, $y)
50 {
51 return $x / $y;
52 }
53 }

Note that each method has a docblock with entries indicating each parameter and its type, as well as an entry for the
return value. This is absolutely critical when utilizing Zend\Json\Server or any other server component in Zend
Framework, for that matter.
Now well create a script to handle the requests:
1 $server = new Zend\Json\Server\Server();
2

3 // Indicate what functionality is available:

4 $server->setClass('Calculator');
5

6 // Handle the request:

7 $server->handle();

However, this will not address the issue of returning an SMD so that the JSON-RPC client can autodiscover methods.

872 Chapter 166. Zend\Json\Server - JSON-RPC server

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

That can be accomplished by determining the HTTP request method, and then specifying some server metadata:
1 $server = new Zend\Json\Server\Server();
2 $server->setClass('Calculator');
3

4 if ('GET' == $_SERVER['REQUEST_METHOD']) {
5 // Indicate the URL endpoint, and the JSON-RPC version used:
6 $server->setTarget('/json-rpc.php')
7 ->setEnvelope(Zend\Json\Server\Smd::ENV_JSONRPC_2);
8

9 // Grab the SMD

10 $smd = $server->getServiceMap();
11

12 // Return the SMD to the client

13 header('Content-Type: application/json');
14 echo $smd;
15 return;
16 }
17

18 $server->handle();

If utilizing the JSON-RPC server with Dojo toolkit, you will also need to set a special compatibility flag to ensure that
the two interoperate properly:
1 $server = new Zend\Json\Server\Server();
2 $server->setClass('Calculator');
3

4 if ('GET' == $_SERVER['REQUEST_METHOD']) {
5 $server->setTarget('/json-rpc.php')
6 ->setEnvelope(Zend\Json\Server\Smd::ENV_JSONRPC_2);
7 $smd = $server->getServiceMap();
8

9 // Set Dojo compatibility:

10 $smd->setDojoCompatible(true);
11

12 header('Content-Type: application/json');
13 echo $smd;
14 return;
15 }
16

17 $server->handle();

166.3 Advanced Details

While most functionality for Zend\Json\Server is spelled out in this section, more advanced functionality is
available.

166.3.1 Zend\Json\Server\Server

Zend\Json\Server\Server is the core class in the JSON-RPC offering; it handles all requests and returns the
response payload. It has the following methods:
addFunction($function): Specify a userland function to attach to the server.
setClass($class): Specify a class or object to attach to the server; all public methods of that item will be
exposed as JSON-RPC methods.

166.3. Advanced Details 873

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

fault($fault = null, $code = 404, $data = null): Create and return a

Zend\Json\Server\Error object.
handle($request = false): Handle a JSON-RPC request; optionally, pass a
Zend\Json\Server\Request object to utilize (creates one by default).
getFunctions(): Return a list of all attached methods.
setRequest(Zend\Json\Server\Request $request): Specify a request object for the server to
utilize.
getRequest(): Retrieve the request object used by the server.
setResponse(Zend\Json\Server\Response $response): Set the response object for the server
to utilize.
getResponse(): Retrieve the response object used by the server.
setAutoEmitResponse($flag): Indicate whether the server should automatically emit the response and
all headers; by default, this is TRUE.
autoEmitResponse(): Determine if auto-emission of the response is enabled.
getServiceMap(): Retrieve the service map description in the form of a Zend\Json\Server\Smd
object

166.3.2 Zend\Json\Server\Request

The JSON-RPC request environment is encapsulated in the Zend\Json\Server\Request object. This object
allows you to set necessary portions of the JSON-RPC request, including the request ID, parameters, and JSON-RPC
specification version. It has the ability to load itself via JSON or a set of options, and can render itself as JSON via the
toJson() method.
The request object has the following methods available:
setOptions(array $options): Specify object configuration. $options may contain keys matching
any set method: setParams(), setMethod(), setId(), and setVersion().
addParam($value, $key = null): Add a parameter to use with the method call. Parameters can be
just the values, or can optionally include the parameter name.
addParams(array $params): Add multiple parameters at once; proxies to addParam()
setParams(array $params): Set all parameters at once; overwrites any existing parameters.
getParam($index): Retrieve a parameter by position or name.
getParams(): Retrieve all parameters at once.
setMethod($name): Set the method to call.
getMethod(): Retrieve the method that will be called.
isMethodError(): Determine whether or not the request is malformed and would result in an error.
setId($name): Set the request identifier (used by the client to match requests to responses).
getId(): Retrieve the request identifier.
setVersion($version): Set the JSON-RPC specification version the request conforms to. May be either
1.0 or 2.0.
getVersion(): Retrieve the JSON-RPC specification version used by the request.
loadJson($json): Load the request object from a JSON string.

874 Chapter 166. Zend\Json\Server - JSON-RPC server

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

toJson(): Render the request as a JSON string.

An HTTP specific version is available via Zend\Json\Server\Request\Http. This class will retrieve the
request via php://input, and allows access to the raw JSON via the getRawJson() method.

166.3.3 Zend\Json\Server\Response

The JSON-RPC response payload is encapsulated in the Zend\Json\Server\Response object. This object
allows you to set the return value of the request, whether or not the response is an error, the request identifier, the
JSON-RPC specification version the response conforms to, and optionally the service map.
The response object has the following methods available:
setResult($value): Set the response result.
getResult(): Retrieve the response result.
setError(Zend\Json\Server\Error $error): Set an error object. If set, this will be used as the
response when serializing to JSON.
getError(): Retrieve the error object, if any.
isError(): Whether or not the response is an error response.
setId($name): Set the request identifier (so the client may match the response with the original request).
getId(): Retrieve the request identifier.
setVersion($version): Set the JSON-RPC version the response conforms to.
getVersion(): Retrieve the JSON-RPC version the response conforms to.
toJson(): Serialize the response to JSON. If the response is an error response, serializes the error object.
setServiceMap($serviceMap): Set the service map object for the response.
getServiceMap(): Retrieve the service map object, if any.
An HTTP specific version is available via Zend\Json\Server\Response\Http. This class will send the ap-
propriate HTTP headers as well as serialize the response as JSON.

166.3.4 Zend\Json\Server\Error

JSON-RPC has a special format for reporting error conditions. All errors need to provide, minimally, an error message
and error code; optionally, they can provide additional data, such as a backtrace.
Error codes are derived from those recommended by the XML-RPC EPI project. Zend\Json\Server appropri-
ately assigns the code based on the error condition. For application exceptions, the code -32000 is used.
Zend\Json\Server\Error exposes the following methods:
setCode($code): Set the error code; if the code is not in the accepted XML-RPC error code range, -32000
will be assigned.
getCode(): Retrieve the current error code.
setMessage($message): Set the error message.
getMessage(): Retrieve the current error message.
setData($data): Set auxiliary data further qualifying the error, such as a backtrace.
getData(): Retrieve any current auxiliary error data.

166.3. Advanced Details 875

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

toArray(): Cast the error to an array. The array will contain the keys code, message, and data.
toJson(): Cast the error to a JSON-RPC error representation.

166.3.5 Zend\Json\Server\Smd

SMD stands for Service Mapping Description, a JSON schema that defines how a client can interact with a particular
web service. At the time of this writing, the specification has not yet been formally ratified, but it is in use already
within Dojo toolkit as well as other JSON-RPC consumer clients.
At its most basic, a Service Mapping Description indicates the method of transport (POST, GET, TCP/IP, etc), the
request envelope type (usually based on the protocol of the server), the target URL of the service provider, and a map
of services available. In the case of JSON-RPC, the service map is a list of available methods, which each method
documenting the available parameters and their types, as well as the expected return value type.
Zend\Json\Server\Smd provides an object-oriented way to build service maps. At its most basic, you pass it
metadata describing the service using mutators, and specify services (methods and functions).
The service descriptions themselves are typically instances of Zend\Json\Server\Smd\Service; you can also
pass all information as an array to the various service mutators in Zend\Json\Server\Smd, and it will instantiate
a service for you. The service objects contain information such as the name of the service (typically the function or
method name), the parameters (names, types, and position), and the return value type. Optionally, each service can
have its own target and envelope, though this functionality is rarely used.
Zend\Json\Server\Server actually does all of this behind the scenes for you, by using reflection on the at-
tached classes and functions; you should create your own service maps only if you need to provide custom functionality
that class and function introspection cannot offer.
Methods available in Zend\Json\Server\Smd include:
setOptions(array $options): Setup an SMD object from an array of options. All mutators (methods
beginning with set) can be used as keys.
setTransport($transport): Set the transport used to access the service; only POST is currently sup-
ported.
getTransport(): Get the current service transport.
setEnvelope($envelopeType): Set the request envelope that should be used to access the
service. Currently, supports the constants Zend\Json\Server\Smd::ENV_JSONRPC_1 and
Zend\Json\Server\Smd::ENV_JSONRPC_2.
getEnvelope(): Get the current request envelope.
setContentType($type): Set the content type requests should use (by default, this is application/json).
getContentType(): Get the current content type for requests to the service.
setTarget($target): Set the URL endpoint for the service.
getTarget(): Get the URL endpoint for the service.
setId($id): Typically, this is the URL endpoint of the service (same as the target).
getId(): Retrieve the service ID (typically the URL endpoint of the service).
setDescription($description): Set a service description (typically narrative information describing
the purpose of the service).
getDescription(): Get the service description.

876 Chapter 166. Zend\Json\Server - JSON-RPC server

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

setDojoCompatible($flag): Set a flag indicating whether or not the SMD is compatible with Dojo
toolkit. When TRUE, the generated JSON SMD will be formatted to comply with the format that Dojos JSON-
RPC client expects.
isDojoCompatible(): Returns the value of the Dojo compatibility flag (FALSE, by default).
addService($service): Add a service to the map. May be an array of information to pass to the con-
structor of Zend\Json\Server\Smd\Service, or an instance of that class.
addServices(array $services): Add multiple services at once.
setServices(array $services): Add multiple services at once, overwriting any previously set ser-
vices.
getService($name): Get a service by its name.
getServices(): Get all attached services.
removeService($name): Remove a service from the map.
toArray(): Cast the service map to an array.
toDojoArray(): Cast the service map to an array compatible with Dojo Toolkit.
toJson(): Cast the service map to a JSON representation.
Zend\Json\Server\Smd\Service has the following methods:
setOptions(array $options): Set object state from an array. Any mutator (methods beginning with
set) may be used as a key and set via this method.
setName($name): Set the service name (typically, the function or method name).
getName(): Retrieve the service name.
setTransport($transport): Set the service transport (currently, only transports supported by
Zend\Json\Server\Smd are allowed).
getTransport(): Retrieve the current transport.
setTarget($target): Set the URL endpoint of the service (typically, this will be the same as the overall
SMD to which the service is attached).
getTarget(): Get the URL endpoint of the service.
setEnvelope($envelopeType): Set the service envelope (currently, only envelopes supported by
Zend\Json\Server\Smd are allowed).
getEnvelope(): Retrieve the service envelope type.
addParam($type, array $options = array(), $order = null): Add a parameter to the
service. By default, only the parameter type is necessary. However, you may also specify the order, as well
as options such as:
name: the parameter name
optional: whether or not the parameter is optional
default: a default value for the parameter
description: text describing the parameter
addParams(array $params): Add several parameters at once; each param should be an assoc array
containing minimally the key type describing the parameter type, and optionally the key order; any other
keys will be passed as $options to addOption().
setParams(array $params): Set many parameters at once, overwriting any existing parameters.

166.3. Advanced Details 877

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

getParams(): Retrieve all currently set parameters.

setReturn($type): Set the return value type of the service.
getReturn(): Get the return value type of the service.
toArray(): Cast the service to an array.
toJson(): Cast the service to a JSON representation.

878 Chapter 166. Zend\Json\Server - JSON-RPC server

 CHAPTER 167

Introduction to Zend\Ldap

Zend\Ldap\Ldap is a class for performing LDAP operations including but not limited to binding, searching and
modifying entries in an LDAP directory.

167.1 Theory of operation

This component currently consists of the main Zend\Ldap\Ldap class, that conceptually represents a binding to
a single LDAP server and allows for executing operations against a LDAP server such as OpenLDAP or ActiveDi-
rectory (AD) servers. The parameters for binding may be provided explicitly or in the form of an options array.
Zend\Ldap\Node provides an object-oriented interface for single LDAP nodes and can be used to form a basis for
an active-record-like interface for a LDAP-based domain model.
The component provides several helper classes to perform operations on LDAP entries (Zend\Ldap\Attribute)
such as setting and retrieving attributes (date values, passwords, boolean values, ...), to create and modify LDAP filter
strings (Zend\Ldap\Filter) and to manipulate LDAP distinguished names (DN) (Zend\Ldap\Dn).
Additionally the component abstracts LDAP schema browsing for OpenLDAP and ActiveDirectory servers
Zend\Ldap\Node\Schema and server information retrieval for OpenLDAP-, ActiveDirectory- and Novell eDi-
rectory servers (Zend\Ldap\Node\RootDse).
Using the Zend\Ldap\Ldap class depends on the type of LDAP server and is best summarized with some simple
examples.
If you are using OpenLDAP, a simple example looks like the following (note that the bindRequiresDn option is
important if you are not using AD):
1 $options = array(
2 'host' => 's0.foo.net',
3 'username' => 'CN=user1,DC=foo,DC=net',
4 'password' => 'pass1',
5 'bindRequiresDn' => true,
6 'accountDomainName' => 'foo.net',
7 'baseDn' => 'OU=Sales,DC=foo,DC=net',
8 );
9 $ldap = new Zend\Ldap\Ldap($options);
10 $acctname = $ldap->getCanonicalAccountName('abaker',
11 Zend\Ldap\Ldap::ACCTNAME_FORM_DN);
12 echo "$acctname\n";

If you are using Microsoft AD a simple example is:

879
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1 $options = array(
2 'host' => 'dc1.w.net',
3 'useStartTls' => true,
4 'username' => '[email protected]',
5 'password' => 'pass1',
6 'accountDomainName' => 'w.net',
7 'accountDomainNameShort' => 'W',
8 'baseDn' => 'CN=Users,DC=w,DC=net',
9 );
10 $ldap = new Zend\Ldap\Ldap($options);
11 $acctname = $ldap->getCanonicalAccountName('bcarter',
12 Zend\Ldap\Ldap::ACCTNAME_FORM_DN);
13 echo "$acctname\n";

Note that we use the getCanonicalAccountName() method to retrieve the account DN here only because that
is what exercises the most of what little code is currently present in this class.

167.1.1 Automatic Username Canonicalization When Binding

If bind() is called with a non-DN username but bindRequiresDN is TRUE and no username in DN form was
supplied as an option, the bind will fail. However, if a username in DN form is supplied in the options array,
Zend\Ldap\Ldap will first bind with that username, retrieve the account DN for the username supplied to bind()
and then re-bind with that DN.
This behavior is critical to Zend\Authentication\Adapter\Ldap, which passes the username supplied by the user directly
to bind().
The following example illustrates how the non-DN username abaker can be used with bind():
1 $options = array(
2 'host' => 's0.foo.net',
3 'username' => 'CN=user1,DC=foo,DC=net',
4 'password' => 'pass1',
5 'bindRequiresDn' => true,
6 'accountDomainName' => 'foo.net',
7 'baseDn' => 'OU=Sales,DC=foo,DC=net',
8 );
9 $ldap = new Zend\Ldap\Ldap($options);
10 $ldap->bind('abaker', 'moonbike55');
11 $acctname = $ldap->getCanonicalAccountName('abaker',
12 Zend\Ldap\Ldap::ACCTNAME_FORM_DN);
13 echo "$acctname\n";

The bind() call in this example sees that the username abaker is not in DN form, finds bindRequiresDn is TRUE,
uses CN=user1,DC=foo,DC=net and pass1 to bind, retrieves the DN for abaker, unbinds and then rebinds
with the newly discovered CN=Alice Baker,OU=Sales,DC=foo,DC=net.

167.1.2 Account Name Canonicalization

The accountDomainName and accountDomainNameShort options are used for two purposes: (1) they facilitate
multi-domain authentication and failover capability, and (2) they are also used to canonicalize usernames. Specifically,
names are canonicalized to the form specified by the accountCanonicalForm option. This option may one of the
following values:

880 Chapter 167. Introduction to Zend\Ldap

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Table 167.1: Options for accountCanonicalForm

Name Value Example
ACCTNAME_FORM_DN 1 CN=Alice Baker,CN=Users,DC=example,DC=com
ACCTNAME_FORM_USERNAME 2 abaker
ACCTNAME_FORM_BACKSLASH 3 EXAMPLE\abaker
ACCTNAME_FORM_PRINCIPAL 4 [email protected]
The default canonicalization depends on what account domain name options were supplied. If accountDomain-
NameShort was supplied, the default accountCanonicalForm value is ACCTNAME_FORM_BACKSLASH. Other-
wise, if accountDomainName was supplied, the default is ACCTNAME_FORM_PRINCIPAL.
Account name canonicalization ensures that the string used to identify an account is consistent regardless of what was
supplied to bind(). For example, if the user supplies an account name of [email protected] or just abaker
and the accountCanonicalForm is set to 3, the resulting canonicalized name would be EXAMPLE\abaker.

167.1.3 Multi-domain Authentication and Failover

The Zend\Ldap\Ldap component by itself makes no attempt to authenticate with multiple servers. However,
Zend\Ldap\Ldap is specifically designed to handle this scenario gracefully. The required technique is to simply
iterate over an array of arrays of serve options and attempt to bind with each server. As described above bind() will
automatically canonicalize each name, so it does not matter if the user passes [email protected] or Wbcarter or
cdavis- the bind() method will only succeed if the credentials were successfully used in the bind.
Consider the following example that illustrates the technique required to implement multi-domain authentication and
failover:
1 $acctname = 'W\\user2';
2 $password = 'pass2';
3

4 $multiOptions = array(
5 'server1' => array(
6 'host' => 's0.foo.net',
7 'username' => 'CN=user1,DC=foo,DC=net',
8 'password' => 'pass1',
9 'bindRequiresDn' => true,
10 'accountDomainName' => 'foo.net',
11 'accountDomainNameShort' => 'FOO',
12 'accountCanonicalForm' => 4, // ACCT_FORM_PRINCIPAL
13 'baseDn' => 'OU=Sales,DC=foo,DC=net',
14 ),
15 'server2' => array(
16 'host' => 'dc1.w.net',
17 'useSsl' => true,
18 'username' => '[email protected]',
19 'password' => 'pass1',
20 'accountDomainName' => 'w.net',
21 'accountDomainNameShort' => 'W',
22 'accountCanonicalForm' => 4, // ACCT_FORM_PRINCIPAL
23 'baseDn' => 'CN=Users,DC=w,DC=net',
24 ),
25 );
26

27 $ldap = new Zend\Ldap\Ldap();

28

29 foreach ($multiOptions as $name => $options) {

30

167.1. Theory of operation 881

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

31 echo "Trying to bind using server options for '$name'\n";

32

33 $ldap->setOptions($options);
34 try {
35 $ldap->bind($acctname, $password);
36 $acctname = $ldap->getCanonicalAccountName($acctname);
37 echo "SUCCESS: authenticated $acctname\n";
38 return;
39 } catch (Zend\Ldap\Exception\LdapException $zle) {
40 echo ' ' . $zle->getMessage() . "\n";
41 if ($zle->getCode() === Zend\Ldap\Exception\LdapException::LDAP_X_DOMAIN_MISMATCH) {
42 continue;
43 }
44 }
45 }

If the bind fails for any reason, the next set of server options is tried.
The getCanonicalAccountName() call gets the canonical account name that the application would presumably
use to associate data with such as preferences. The accountCanonicalForm = 4 in all server options ensures that the
canonical form is consistent regardless of which server was ultimately used.
The special LDAP_X_DOMAIN_MISMATCH exception occurs when an account name with a domain component was
supplied (e.g., [email protected] or FOO\abaker and not just abaker) but the domain component did not match
either domain in the currently selected server options. This exception indicates that the server is not an authority for
the account. In this case, the bind will not be performed, thereby eliminating unnecessary communication with the
server. Note that the continue instruction has no effect in this example, but in practice for error handling and debugging
purposes, you will probably want to check for LDAP_X_DOMAIN_MISMATCH as well as LDAP_NO_SUCH_OBJECT
and LDAP_INVALID_CREDENTIALS.
The above code is very similar to code used within Zend\Authentication\Adapter\Ldap. In fact, we recommend that
you simply use that authentication adapter for multi-domain + failover LDAP based authentication (or copy the code).

882 Chapter 167. Introduction to Zend\Ldap

 CHAPTER 168

API overview

168.1 Configuration / options

The Zend\Ldap\Ldap component accepts an array of options either supplied to the constructor or through the
setOptions() method. The permitted options are as follows:

883
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Table 168.1: Zend\Ldap\Ldap Options

Name Description
host The default hostname of LDAP server if not supplied to connect() (also may be used when
trying to canonicalize usernames in bind()).
port Default port of LDAP server if not supplied to connect().
useStartTls Whether or not the LDAP client should use TLS (aka SSLv2) encrypted transport. A value of
TRUE is strongly favored in production environments to prevent passwords from be transmitted
in clear text. The default value is FALSE, as servers frequently require that a certificate be
installed separately after installation. The useSsl and useStartTls options are mutually
exclusive. The useStartTls option should be favored over useSsl but not all servers support this
newer mechanism.
useSsl Whether or not the LDAP client should use SSL encrypted transport. The useSsl and
useStartTls options are mutually exclusive.
username The default credentials username. Some servers require that this be in DN form. This must be
given in DN form if the LDAP server requires a DN to bind and binding should be possible
with simple usernames.
password The default credentials password (used only with username above).
bindRequiresDn If TRUE, this instructs Zend\Ldap\Ldap to retrieve the DN for the account used to bind if the
username is not already in DN form. The default value is FALSE.
baseDn The default base DN used for searching (e.g., for accounts). This option is required for most
account related operations and should indicate the DN under which accounts are located.
accountCanon- A small integer indicating the form to which account names should be canonicalized. See the
icalForm Account Name Canonicalization section below.
accountDo- The FQDN domain for which the target LDAP server is an authority (e.g., example.com).
mainName
accountDo- The short domain for which the target LDAP server is an authority. This is usually used to
main- specify the NetBIOS domain name for Windows networks but may also be used by non-AD
NameShort servers.
accountFilter- The LDAP search filter used to search for accounts. This string is a sprintf() style expression
Format that must contain one %s to accommodate the username. The default value is
(&(objectClass=user)(sAMAccountName=%s)) unless bindRequiresDn is set to TRUE, in
which case the default is (&(objectClass=posixAccount)(uid=%s)). Users of custom schemas
may need to change this option.
allowEmpty- Some LDAP servers can be configured to accept an empty string password as an anonymous
Password bind. This behavior is almost always undesirable. For this reason, empty passwords are
explicitly disallowed. Set this value to TRUE to allow an empty string password to be
submitted during the bind.
optReferrals If set to TRUE, this option indicates to the LDAP client that referrals should be followed. The
default value is FALSE.
tryUsernameS- If set to FALSE, this option indicates that the given username should not be split at the first @
plit or \ character to separate the username from the domain during the binding-procedure. This
allows the user to use usernames that contain an @ or \ character that do not inherit some
domain-information, e.g. using email-addresses for binding. The default value is TRUE.
networkTime- Number of seconds to wait for LDAP connection before fail. If not set the default value is the
out system value.

168.2 API Reference

Note: Method names in italics are static methods.

884 Chapter 168. API overview

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

orphan

168.2. API Reference 885

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

886 Chapter 168. API overview

 CHAPTER 169

Zend\Ldap\Ldap

Zend\Ldap\Ldap is the base interface into a LDAP server. It provides connection and binding methods as well as
methods to operate on the LDAP tree.

Method
__construct($options)
resource getResource()
integer getLastErrorCode()
string getLastError(integer &$errorCode, array &$errorMessages)
Zend\Ldap\Ldap setOptions($options)
array getOptions()
string getBaseDn()
string getCanonicalAccountName(string $acctname, integer $form)
Zend\Ldap\Ldap disconnect()
Zend\Ldap\Ldap connect(string $host, integer $port, boolean $useSsl, boolean $useStartTls, integer $networkTimeout)
Zend\Ldap\Ldap bind(string $username, string $password)
Zend\Ldap\Collection search(string|Zend\Ldap\Filter\AbstractFilter $filter, string|Zend\Ldap\Dn $basedn, integer $scope, array $attrib
integer count(string|Zend\Ldap\Filter\AbstractFilter $filter, string|Zend\Ldap\Dn $basedn, integer $scope)
integer countChildren(string|Zend\Ldap\Dn $dn)
boolean exists(string|Zend\Ldap\Dn $dn)
array searchEntries(string|Zend\Ldap\Filter\AbstractFilter $filter, string|Zend\Ldap\Dn $basedn, integer $scope, array $attributes, strin
array getEntry(string|Zend\Ldap\Dn $dn, array $attributes, boolean $throwOnNotFound)
void prepareLdapEntryArray(array &$entry)
Zend\Ldap\Ldap add(string|Zend\Ldap\Dn $dn, array $entry)
Zend\Ldap\Ldap update(string|Zend\Ldap\Dn $dn, array $entry)
Zend\Ldap\Ldap save(string|Zend\Ldap\Dn $dn, array $entry)
Zend\Ldap\Ldap delete(string|Zend\Ldap\Dn $dn, boolean $recursively)
Zend\Ldap\Ldap moveToSubtree(string|Zend\Ldap\Dn $from, string|Zend\Ldap\Dn $to, boolean $recursively, boolean $alwaysEmula
Zend\Ldap\Ldap move(string|Zend\Ldap\Dn $from, string|Zend\Ldap\Dn $to, boolean $recursively, boolean $alwaysEmulate)
Zend\Ldap\Ldap rename(string|Zend\Ldap\Dn $from, string|Zend\Ldap\Dn $to, boolean $recursively, boolean $alwaysEmulate)
Zend\Ldap\Ldap copyToSubtree(string|Zend\Ldap\Dn $from, string|Zend\Ldap\Dn $to, boolean $recursively)
Zend\Ldap\Ldap copy(string|Zend\Ldap\Dn $from, string|Zend\Ldap\Dn $to, boolean $recursively)
Zend\Ldap\Node getNode(string|Zend\Ldap\Dn $dn)
Zend\Ldap\Node getBaseNode()
Zend\Ldap\Node\RootDse getRootDse()
Zend\Ldap\Node\Schema getSchema()

887
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

169.1 Zend\Ldap\Collection

Zend\Ldap\Collection implements Iterator to allow for item traversal using foreach() and Countable to be
able to respond to count(). With its protected createEntry() method it provides a simple extension point for
developers needing custom result objects.

Table 169.2: Zend\Ldap\Collection API

Method Description
__con- Constructor. The constructor must be provided by a
struct(Zend\Ldap\Collection\Iterator\Interface
Zend\Ldap\Collection\Iterator\Interface which does the real result iteration.
$iterator) Zend\Ldap\Collection\Iterator\Default is the default implementation for iterating
ext/ldap results.
boolean close() Closes the internal iterator. This is also called in the destructor.
array toArray() Returns all entries as an array.
array getFirst() Returns the first entry in the collection or NULL if the collection is empty.
orphan

888 Chapter 169. Zend\Ldap\Ldap

 CHAPTER 170

Zend\Ldap\Attribute

Zend\Ldap\Attribute is a helper class providing only static methods to manipulate arrays suitable to the struc-
ture used in Zend\Ldap\Ldap data modification methods and to the data format required by the LDAP server. PHP
data types are converted using Zend\Ldap\Converter\Converter methods.

889
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Table 170.1: Zend\Ldap\Attribute API

Method Description
void setAttribute(array &$data, string Sets the attribute $attribName in $data to the value $value. If
$attribName, mixed $value, boolean $append is TRUE (FALSE by default) $value will be appended to
$append) the attribute. $value can be a scalar value or an array of scalar
values. Conversion will take place.
array|mixed getAttribute(array $data, string Returns the attribute $attribName from $data. If $index is NULL
$attribName, integer|null $index) (default) an array will be returned containing all the values for the
given attribute. An empty array will be returned if the attribute
does not exist in the given array. If an integer index is specified
the corresponding value at the given index will be returned. If the
index is out of bounds, NULL will be returned. Conversion will
take place.
boolean attributeHasValue(array &$data, Checks if the attribute $attribName in $data has the value(s) given
string $attribName, mixed|array $value) in $value. The method returns TRUE only if all values in $value
are present in the attribute. Comparison is done strictly
(respecting the data type).
void removeDuplicatesFromAttribute(array Removes all duplicates from the attribute $attribName in $data.
&$data, string $attribName)
void removeFromAttribute(array &$data, Removes the value(s) given in $value from the attribute
string $attribName, mixed|array $value) $attribName in $data.
void setPassword(array &$data, string Sets a LDAP password for the attribute $attribName in $data.
$password, string $hashType, string $attribName defaults to userPassword which is the standard
$attribName) password attribute. The password hash can be specified with
$hashType. The default value here is
Zend\Ldap\Attribute::PASSWORD_HASH_MD5 with
Zend\Ldap\Attribute::PASSWORD_HASH_SHA as the other
possibility.
string createPassword(string $password, Creates a LDAP password. The password hash can be specified
string $hashType) with $hashType. The default value here is
Zend\Ldap\Attribute::PASSWORD_HASH_MD5 with
Zend\Ldap\Attribute::PASSWORD_HASH_SHA as the other
possibility.
void setDateTimeAttribute(array &$data, Sets the attribute $attribName in $data to the date/time value
string $attribName, integer|array $value, $value. if $append is TRUE (FALSE by default) $value will be
boolean $utc, boolean $append) appended to the attribute. $value can be an integer value or an
array of integers. Date-time-conversion according to
Zend\Ldap\Converter\Converter::toLdapDateTime() will take
place.
array|integer getDateTimeAttribute(array Returns the date/time attribute $attribName from $data. If $index
$data, string $attribName, integer|null is NULL (default) an array will be returned containing all the
$index) date/time values for the given attribute. An empty array will be
returned if the attribute does not exist in the given array. If an
integer index is specified the corresponding date/time value at the
given index will be returned. If the index is out of bounds, NULL
will be returned. Date-time-conversion according to
Zend\Ldap\Converter\Converter::fromLdapDateTime() will take
place.
orphan

890 Chapter 170. Zend\Ldap\Attribute

 CHAPTER 171

Zend\Ldap\Converter\Converter

Zend\Ldap\Converter\Converter is a helper class providing only static methods to manipulate arrays suit-
able to the data format required by the LDAP server. PHP data types are converted the following way:
string No conversion will be done.
integer and float The value will be converted to a string.
boolean TRUE will be converted to TRUE and FALSE to FALSE
object and array The value will be converted to a string by using serialize().
Date/Time The value will be converted to a string with the following date() format YmdHisO, UTC timezone
(+0000) will be replaced with a Z. For example 01-30-2011 01:17:32 PM GMT-6 will be 20113001131732-
0600 and 30-01-2012 15:17:32 UTC will be 20120130151732Z
resource If a stream resource is given, the data will be fetched by calling stream_get_contents().
others All other data types (namely non-stream resources) will be omitted.
On reading values the following conversion will take place:
TRUE Converted to TRUE.
FALSE Converted to FALSE.
others All other strings wont be automatically converted and are passed as they are.

891
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Table 171.1: Zend\Ldap\Converter\Converter API

Method Description
string ascToHex32(string $string) Convert all Ascii characters with decimal value less than 32 to hexadecimal
value.
string hex32ToAsc(string $string) Convert all hexadecimal characters by his Ascii value.
string|null toLdap(mixed $value, Converts a PHP data type into its LDAP representation. $type argument is
int $type) used to set the conversion method by default Converter::STANDARD where
the function will try to guess the conversion method to use, others
possibilities are Converter::BOOLEAN and
Converter::GENERALIZED_TIME See introduction for details.
mixed fromLdap(string $value, int Converts an LDAP value into its PHP data type. See introduction and
$type, boolean $dateTimeAsUtc) toLdap() and toLdapDateTime() for details.
string|null toLdapDate- Converts a timestamp, a DateTime Object, a string that is parseable by
Time(integer|string|DateTime strtotime() or a DateTime into its LDAP date/time representation. If $asUtc
$date, boolean $asUtc) is TRUE ( FALSE by default) the resulting LDAP date/time string will be
inUTC, otherwise a local date/time string will be returned.
DateTime Converts LDAP date/time representation into a PHP DateTime object.
fromLdapDateTime(string $date,
boolean $asUtc)
string toLdap- Converts a PHP data type into its LDAP boolean representation. By default
Boolean(boolean|integer|string always return FALSE except if the value is true , true or 1
$value)
boolean fromLdapBoolean(string Converts LDAP boolean representation into a PHP boolean data type.
$value)
string toLdapSerialize(mixed The value will be converted to a string by using serialize().
$value)
mixed The value will be converted from a string by using unserialize().
fromLdapUnserialize(string
$value)
orphan

892 Chapter 171. Zend\Ldap\Converter\Converter

 CHAPTER 172

Zend\Ldap\Dn

Zend\Ldap\Dn provides an object-oriented interface to manipulating LDAP distinguished names (DN). The param-
eter $caseFold that is used in several methods determines the way DN attributes are handled regarding their case.
Allowed values for this parameter are:
ZendLdapDn::ATTR_CASEFOLD_NONE No case-folding will be done.
ZendLdapDn::ATTR_CASEFOLD_UPPER All attributes will be converted to upper-case.
ZendLdapDn::ATTR_CASEFOLD_LOWER All attributes will be converted to lower-case.
The default case-folding is Zend\Ldap\Dn::ATTR_CASEFOLD_NONE and can be set with
Zend\Ldap\Dn::setDefaultCaseFold(). Each instance of Zend\Ldap\Dn can have its own case-
folding-setting. If the $caseFold parameter is omitted in method-calls it defaults to the instances case-folding
setting.
The class implements ArrayAccess to allow indexer-access to the different parts of the DN.
The ArrayAccess-methods proxy to Zend\Ldap\Dn::get($offset, 1, null) for offset-
Get(integer $offset), to Zend\Ldap\Dn::set($offset, $value) for offsetSet() and to
Zend\Ldap\Dn::remove($offset, 1) for offsetUnset(). offsetExists() simply checks if
the index is within the bounds.

893
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Table 172.1: Zend\Ldap\Dn API

Method Description
Zend\Ldap\Dn factory(string|array Creates a Zend\Ldap\Dn instance from an array or a string. The array
$dn, string|null $caseFold) must conform to the array structure detailed under
Zend\Ldap\Dn::implodeDn().
Zend\Ldap\Dn fromString(string Creates a Zend\Ldap\Dn instance from a string.
$dn, string|null $caseFold)
Zend\Ldap\Dn fromArray(array Creates a Zend\Ldap\Dn instance from an array. The array must conform
$dn, string|null $caseFold) to the array structure detailed under Zend\Ldap\Dn::implodeDn().
array getRdn(string|null $caseFold) Gets the RDN of the current DN. The return value is an array with the
RDN attribute names its keys and the RDN attribute values.
string getRdnString(string|null Gets the RDN of the current DN. The return value is a string.
$caseFold)
Zend\Ldap\Dn getParentDn(integer Gets the DN of the current DNs ancestor $levelUp levels up the tree.
$levelUp) $levelUp defaults to 1.
array get(integer $index, integer Returns a slice of the current DN determined by $index and $length.
$length, string|null $caseFold) $index starts with 0 on the DN part from the left.
Zend\Ldap\Dn set(integer $index, Replaces a DN part in the current DN. This operation manipulates the
array $value) current instance.
Zend\Ldap\Dn remove(integer Removes a DN part from the current DN. This operation manipulates the
$index, integer $length) current instance. $length defaults to 1
Zend\Ldap\Dn append(array $value) Appends a DN part to the current DN. This operation manipulates the
current instance.
Zend\Ldap\Dn prepend(array Prepends a DN part to the current DN. This operation manipulates the
$value) current instance.
Zend\Ldap\Dn insert(integer $index, Inserts a DN part after the index $index to the current DN. This operation
array $value) manipulates the current instance.
void setCaseFold(string|null Sets the case-folding option to the current DN instance. If $caseFold is
$caseFold) NULL the default case-folding setting
(Zend\Ldap\Dn::ATTR_CASEFOLD_NONE by default or set via
Zend\Ldap\Dn::setDefaultCaseFold() will be set for the current instance.
string toString(string|null $caseFold) Returns DN as a string.
array toArray(string|null $caseFold) Returns DN as an array.
string __toString() Returns DN as a string - proxies to Zend\Ldap\Dn::toString(null).
void setDefaultCaseFold(string Sets the default case-folding option used by all instances on creation by
$caseFold) default. Already existing instances are not affected by this setting.
array escapeValue(string|array Escapes a DN value according to RFC 2253.
$values)
array unescapeValue(string|array Undoes the conversion done by Zend\Ldap\Dn::escapeValue().
$values)
array explodeDn(string $dn, array Explodes the DN $dn into an array containing all parts of the given DN.
&$keys, array &$vals, string|null $keys optionally receive DN keys (e.g. CN, OU, DC, ...). $vals optionally
$caseFold) receive DN values. The resulting array will be of type array( array(cn
=> name1, uid => user), array(cn => name2), array(dc =>
example), array(dc => org) ) for a DN of
cn=name1+uid=user,cn=name2,dc=example,dc=org.
boolean checkDn(string $dn, array Checks if a given DN $dn is malformed. If $keys or $keys and $vals are
&$keys, array &$vals, string|null given, these arrays will be filled with the appropriate DN keys and values.
$caseFold)
string implodeRdn(array $part, Returns a DN part in the form $attribute=$value
string|null $caseFold)
string implodeDn(array $dnArray, Implodes an array in the form delivered by Zend\Ldap\Dn::explodeDn()
string|null $caseFold, string to a DN string. $separator defaults to , but some LDAP servers also
$separator) understand ;. $dnArray must of type array( array(cn => name1,
894 uid => user), array(cn => name2),Chapter
array(dc => example),
172. Zend\Ldap\Dn
array(dc => org) )
boolean Checks if given $childDn is beneath $parentDn subtree.
isChildOf(string|Zend\Ldap\Dn
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

orphan

895
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

896 Chapter 172. Zend\Ldap\Dn

897
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

CHAPTER 173

Zend\Ldap\Filter

Table 173.1: Zend\Ldap\Filter API

Method Description
Zend\Ldap\Filter equals(string $attr, Creates an equals filter: (attr=value).
string $value)
Zend\Ldap\Filter begins(string $attr, Creates an begins with filter: (attr=value*).
string $value)
Zend\Ldap\Filter ends(string $attr, Creates an ends with filter: (attr=*value).
string $value)
Zend\Ldap\Filter contains(string $attr, Creates an contains filter: (attr=*value*).
string $value)
Zend\Ldap\Filter greater(string $attr, Creates an greater filter: (attr>value).
string $value)
Zend\Ldap\Filter greaterOrEqual(string Creates an greater or equal filter: (attr>=value).
$attr, string $value)
Zend\Ldap\Filter less(string $attr, string Creates an less filter: (attr<value).
$value)
Zend\Ldap\Filter lessOrEqual(string Creates an less or equal filter: (attr<=value).
$attr, string $value)
Zend\Ldap\Filter approx(string $attr, Creates an approx filter: (attr~=value).
string $value)
Zend\Ldap\Filter any(string $attr) Creates an any filter: (attr=*).
Zend\Ldap\Filter string(string $filter) Creates a simple custom string filter. The user is responsible for all
value-escaping as the filter is used as is.
Zend\Ldap\Filter mask(string $mask, Creates a filter from a string mask. All $value parameters will be
string $value,...) escaped and substituted into $mask by using sprintf()
Zend\Ldap\Filter andFil- Creates an and filter from all arguments given.
ter(Zend\Ldap\Filter\AbstractFilter
$filter,...)
Zend\Ldap\Filter Creates an or filter from all arguments given.
orFilter(Zend\Ldap\Filter\AbstractFilter
$filter,...)
__construct(string $attr, string $value, Constructor. Creates an arbitrary filter according to the parameters
string $filtertype, string|null $prepend, supplied. The resulting filter will be a concatenation $attr . $filtertype
string|null $append) . $prepend . $value . $append. Normally this constructor is not needed
as all filters can be created by using the appropriate factory methods.
string toString() Returns a string representation of the filter.
string __toString() Returns a string representation of the filter. Proxies to
Zend\Ldap\Filter::toString().
Zend\Ldap\Filter\AbstractFilter negate() Negates the current filter.
Zend\Ldap\Filter\AbstractFilter Creates an and filter from the current filter and all filters passed in as
898
addAnd(Zend\Ldap\Filter\AbstractFilter the arguments. Chapter 173. Zend\Ldap\Filter
$filter,...)
Zend\Ldap\Filter\AbstractFilter Creates an or filter from the current filter and all filters passed in as
addOr(Zend\Ldap\Filter\AbstractFilter the arguments.
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

orphan

899
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

900 Chapter 173. Zend\Ldap\Filter

 CHAPTER 174

Zend\Ldap\Node

Zend\Ldap\Node includes the magic property accessors __set(), __get(), __unset() and
__isset() to access the attributes by their name. They proxy to Zend\Ldap\Node::setAttribute(),
Zend\Ldap\Node::getAttribute(), Zend\Ldap\Node::deleteAttribute() and
Zend\Ldap\Node::existsAttribute() respectively. Furthermore the class implements ArrayAccess
for array-style-access to the attributes. Zend\Ldap\Node also implements Iterator and RecursiveIterator to allow
for recursive tree-traversal.

Method Description
Zend\Ldap\Ldap getLdap() Returns the cu
Zend\Ldap\Node attachLdap(Zend\Ldap\Ldap $ldap) Attach the cur
Zend\Ldap\Node detachLdap() Detach node f
boolean isAttached() Checks if the
Zend\Ldap\Node create(string|array|Zend\Ldap\Dn $dn, array $objectClass) Factory metho
Zend\Ldap\Node fromLdap(string|array|Zend\Ldap\Dn $dn, Zend\Ldap\Ldap $ldap) Factory metho
Zend\Ldap\Node fromArray((array $data, boolean $fromDataSource) Factory metho
boolean isNew() Tells if the no
boolean willBeDeleted() Tells if this no
Zend\Ldap\Node delete() Marks this no
boolean willBeMoved() Tells if this no
Zend\Ldap\Node update(Zend\Ldap\Ldap $ldap) Sends all pend
Zend\Ldap\Dn getCurrentDn() Gets the curre
Zend\Ldap\Dn getDn() Gets the origin
string getDnString(string $caseFold) Gets the origin
array getDnArray(string $caseFold) Gets the origin
string getRdnString(string $caseFold) Gets the RDN
array getRdnArray(string $caseFold) Gets the RDN
Zend\Ldap\Node setDn(Zend\Ldap\Dn|string|array $newDn) Sets the new D
Zend\Ldap\Node move(Zend\Ldap\Dn|string|array $newDn) This is an alia
Zend\Ldap\Node rename(Zend\Ldap\Dn|string|array $newDn) This is an alia
array getObjectClass() Returns the ob
Zend\Ldap\Node setObjectClass(array|string $value) Sets the objec
Zend\Ldap\Node appendObjectClass(array|string $value) Appends to th
string toLdif(array $options) Returns a LDI
array getChangedData() Gets changed
array getChanges() Returns all ch
string toString() Returns the D

901
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Method Description
string __toString() Casts to string
array toArray(boolean $includeSystemAttributes) Returns an arr
string toJson(boolean $includeSystemAttributes) Returns a JSO
array getData(boolean $includeSystemAttributes) Returns the no
boolean existsAttribute(string $name, boolean $emptyExists) Checks wheth
boolean attributeHasValue(string $name, mixed|array $value) Checks if the
integer count() Returns the nu
mixed getAttribute(string $name, integer|null $index) Gets a LDAP
array getAttributes(boolean $includeSystemAttributes) Gets all attribu
Zend\Ldap\Node setAttribute(string $name, mixed $value) Sets a LDAP a
Zend\Ldap\Node appendToAttribute(string $name, mixed $value) Appends to a
array|integer getDateTimeAttribute(string $name, integer|null $index) Gets a LDAP
Zend\Ldap\Node setDateTimeAttribute(string $name, integer|array $value, boolean $utc) Sets a LDAP d
Zend\Ldap\Node appendToDateTimeAttribute(string $name, integer|array $value, boolean $utc) Appends to a
Zend\Ldap\Node setPasswordAttribute(string $password, string $hashType, string $attribName) Sets a LDAP p
Zend\Ldap\Node deleteAttribute(string $name) Deletes a LDA
void removeDuplicatesFromAttribute(string$name) Removes dupl
void removeFromAttribute(string $attribName, mixed|array $value) Removes the g
boolean exists(Zend\Ldap\Ldap $ldap) Checks if the
Zend\Ldap\Node reload(Zend\Ldap\Ldap $ldap) Reloads the cu
Zend\Ldap\Node\Collection searchSubtree(string|Zend\Ldap\Filter\AbstractFilter $filter, integer $scope, string $sort) Searches the n
integer countSubtree(string|Zend\Ldap\Filter\AbstractFilter $filter, integer $scope) Count the nod
integer countChildren() Count the nod
Zend\Ldap\Node\Collection searchChildren(string|Zend\Ldap\Filter\AbstractFilter $filter, string $sort) Searches the n
boolean hasChildren() Returns wheth
Zend\Ldap\Node\ChildrenIterator getChildren() Returns all ch
Zend\Ldap\Node getParent(Zend\Ldap\Ldap $ldap) Returns the pa

orphan

902 Chapter 174. Zend\Ldap\Node

 CHAPTER 175

Zend\Ldap\Node\RootDse

The following methods are available on all vendor-specific subclasses.

Zend\Ldap\Node\RootDse includes the magic property accessors __get() and __isset() to ac-
cess the attributes by their name. They proxy to Zend\Ldap\Node\RootDse::getAttribute() and
Zend\Ldap\Node\RootDse::existsAttribute() respectively. __set() and __unset() are also
implemented but they throw a BadMethodCallException as modifications are not allowed on RootDSE nodes.
Furthermore the class implements ArrayAccess for array-style-access to the attributes. offsetSet() and
offsetUnset() also throw a BadMethodCallException due ro obvious reasons.

903
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Table 175.1: Zend\Ldap\Node\RootDse API

Method Description
Zend\Ldap\Dn getDn() Gets the DN of the current node as a Zend\Ldap\Dn.
string getDnString(string Gets the DN of the current node as a string.
$caseFold)
array getDnArray(string Gets the DN of the current node as an array.
$caseFold)
string getRdnString(string Gets the RDN of the current node as a string.
$caseFold)
array getRdnArray(string Gets the RDN of the current node as an array.
$caseFold)
array getObjectClass() Returns the objectClass of the node.
string toString() Returns the DN of the current node - proxies to Zend\Ldap\Dn::getDnString().
string __toString() Casts to string representation - proxies to Zend\Ldap\Dn::toString().
array toArray(boolean Returns an array representation of the current node. If
$includeSystemAttributes) $includeSystemAttributes is FALSE (defaults to TRUE) the system specific
attributes are stripped from the array. Unlike
Zend\Ldap\Node\RootDse::getAttributes() the resulting array contains the DN
with key dn.
string toJson(boolean Returns a JSON representation of the current node using
$includeSystemAttributes) Zend\Ldap\Node\RootDse::toArray().
array getData(boolean Returns the nodes attributes. The array contains all attributes in its internal
$includeSystemAttributes) format (no conversion).
boolean existsAttribute(string Checks whether a given attribute exists. If $emptyExists is FALSE, empty
$name, boolean $emptyExists) attributes (containing only array()) are treated as non-existent returning
FALSE. If $emptyExists is TRUE, empty attributes are treated as existent
returning TRUE. In this case the method returns FALSE only if the attribute
name is missing in the key-collection.
boolean Checks if the given value(s) exist in the attribute. The method returns TRUE
attributeHasValue(string $name, only if all values in $value are present in the attribute. Comparison is done
mixed|array $value) strictly (respecting the data type).
integer count() Returns the number of attributes in the node. Implements Countable.
mixed getAttribute(string Gets a LDAP attribute. Data conversion is applied using
$name, integer|null $index) Zend\Ldap\Attribute::getAttribute().
array getAttributes(boolean Gets all attributes of node. If $includeSystemAttributes is FALSE (defaults to
$includeSystemAttributes) TRUE) the system specific attributes are stripped from the array.
array|integer Gets a LDAP date/time attribute. Data conversion is applied using
getDateTimeAttribute(string Zend\Ldap\Attribute::getDateTimeAttribute().
$name, integer|null $index)
Zend\Ldap\Node\RootDse Reloads the current nodes attributes from the given LDAP server.
reload(Zend\Ldap\Ldap $ldap)
Zend\Ldap\Node\RootDse Factory method to create the RootDSE.
create(Zend\Ldap\Ldap $ldap)
array getNamingContexts() Gets the namingContexts.
string|null Gets the subschemaSubentry.
getSubschemaSubentry()
boolean Determines if the LDAP version is supported.
supportsVersion(string|int|array
$versions)
boolean supportsSaslMecha- Determines if the sasl mechanism is supported.
nism(string|array
$mechlist)
integer getServerType() Gets the server type. Returns
Zend\Ldap\Node\RootDse::SERVER_TYPE_GENERICfor unknown LDAP
904 serversZend\Ldap\Node\RootDse::SERVER_TYPE_OPENLDAPfor
Chapter 175. Zend\Ldap\Node\RootDse
OpenLDAP server-
sZend\Ldap\Node\RootDse::SERVER_TYPE_ACTIVEDIRECTORYfor
Microsoft ActiveDirectory
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

175.1 OpenLDAP

Additionally the common methods above apply to instances of Zend\Ldap\Node\RootDse\OpenLdap.

Note: Refer to LDAP Operational Attributes and Objects for information on the attributes of OpenLDAP RootDSE.

Table 175.2: Zend\Ldap\Node\RootDse\OpenLdap API

Method Description
integer getServerType() Gets the server type. Returns
Zend\Ldap\Node\RootDse::SERVER_TYPE_OPENLDAP
string|null getConfigContext() Gets the configContext.
string|null getMonitorContext() Gets the monitorContext.
boolean supportsControl(string|array Determines if the control is supported.
$oids)
boolean Determines if the extension is supported.
supportsExtension(string|array $oids)
boolean supportsFeature(string|array Determines if the feature is supported.
$oids)

175.2 ActiveDirectory

Additionally the common methods above apply to instances of Zend\Ldap\Node\RootDse\ActiveDirectory.

Note: Refer to RootDSE for information on the attributes of Microsoft ActiveDirectory RootDSE.

175.1. OpenLDAP 905

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Table 175.3: Zend\Ldap\Node\RootDse\ActiveDirectory API

Method Description
integer getServerType() Gets the server type. Returns
Zend\Ldap\Node\RootDse::SERVER_TYPE_ACTIVEDIRECTORY
string|null Gets the configurationNamingContext.
getConfigurationNamingContext()
string|null getCurrentTime() Gets the currentTime.
string|null Gets the defaultNamingContext.
getDefaultNamingContext()
string|null getDnsHostName() Gets the dnsHostName.
string|null getDomainController- Gets the domainControllerFunctionality.
Functionality()
string|null Gets the domainFunctionality.
getDomainFunctionality()
string|null getDsServiceName() Gets the dsServiceName.
string|null getForestFunctionality() Gets the forestFunctionality.
string|null Gets the highestCommittedUSN.
getHighestCommittedUSN()
string|null Gets the isGlobalCatalogReady.
getIsGlobalCatalogReady()
string|null getIsSynchronized() Gets the isSynchronized.
string|null getLdapServiceName() Gets the ldapServiceName.
string|null Gets the rootDomainNamingContext.
getRootDomainNamingContext()
string|null Gets the schemaNamingContext.
getSchemaNamingContext()
string|null getServerName() Gets the serverName.
boolean Determines if the capability is supported.
supportsCapability(string|array
$oids)
boolean Determines if the control is supported.
supportsControl(string|array $oids)
boolean supportsPolicy(string|array Determines if the version is supported.
$policies)

175.3 eDirectory

Additionally the common methods above apply to instances of ZendLdapNodeRootDseeDirectory.

Note: Refer to Getting Information about the LDAP Server for information on the attributes of Novell eDirectory
RootDSE.

906 Chapter 175. Zend\Ldap\Node\RootDse

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Table 175.4: Zend\Ldap\Node\RootDse\eDirectory API

Method Description
integer getServerType() Gets the server type. Returns
Zend\Ldap\Node\RootDse::SERVER_TYPE_EDIRECTORY
boolean supportsExtension(string|array Determines if the extension is supported.
$oids)
string|null getVendorName() Gets the vendorName.
string|null getVendorVersion() Gets the vendorVersion.
string|null getDsaName() Gets the dsaName.
string|null getStatisticsErrors() Gets the server statistics errors.
string|null getStatisticsSecurityErrors() Gets the server statistics securityErrors.
string|null getStatisticsChainings() Gets the server statistics chainings.
string|null Gets the server statistics referralsReturned.
getStatisticsReferralsReturned()
string|null getStatisticsExtendedOps() Gets the server statistics extendedOps.
string|null getStatisticsAbandonOps() Gets the server statistics abandonOps.
string|null Gets the server statistics wholeSubtreeSearchOps.
getStatisticsWholeSubtreeSearchOps()
orphan

175.3. eDirectory 907

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

908 Chapter 175. Zend\Ldap\Node\RootDse

 CHAPTER 176

Zend\Ldap\Node\Schema

The following methods are available on all vendor-specific subclasses.

ZendLdapNodeSchema includes the magic property accessors __get() and __isset() to access the attributes by their
name. They proxy to ZendLdapNodeSchema::getAttribute() and ZendLdapNodeSchema::existsAttribute() respec-
tively. __set() and __unset() are also implemented, but they throw a BadMethodCallException as modifications are not
allowed on RootDSE nodes. Furthermore the class implements ArrayAccess for array-style-access to the attributes.
offsetSet() and offsetUnset() also throw a BadMethodCallException due to obvious reasons.

909
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Table 176.1: Zend\Ldap\Node\Schema API

Method Description
Zend\Ldap\Dn getDn() Gets the DN of the current node as a Zend\Ldap\Dn.
string getDnString(string Gets the DN of the current node as a string.
$caseFold)
array getDnArray(string Gets the DN of the current node as an array.
$caseFold)
string getRdnString(string Gets the RDN of the current node as a string.
$caseFold)
array getRdnArray(string Gets the RDN of the current node as an array.
$caseFold)
array getObjectClass() Returns the objectClass of the node.
string toString() Returns the DN of the current node - proxies to Zend\Ldap\Dn::getDnString().
string __toString() Casts to string representation - proxies to Zend\Ldap\Dn::toString().
array toArray(boolean Returns an array representation of the current node. If
$includeSystemAttributes) $includeSystemAttributes is FALSE (defaults to TRUE), the system specific
attributes are stripped from the array. Unlike
Zend\Ldap\Node\Schema::getAttributes(), the resulting array contains the DN
with key dn.
string toJson(boolean Returns a JSON representation of the current node using
$includeSystemAttributes) Zend\Ldap\Node\Schema::toArray().
array getData(boolean Returns the nodes attributes. The array contains all attributes in its internal
$includeSystemAttributes) format (no conversion).
boolean existsAttribute(string Checks whether a given attribute exists. If $emptyExists is FALSE, empty
$name, boolean $emptyExists) attributes (containing only array()) are treated as non-existent returning
FALSE. If $emptyExists is TRUE, empty attributes are treated as existent
returning TRUE. In this case the method returns FALSE only if the attribute
name is missing in the key-collection.
boolean Checks if the given value(s) exist in the attribute. The method returns TRUE
attributeHasValue(string $name, only if all values in $value are present in the attribute. Comparison is done
mixed|array $value) strictly (respecting the data type).
integer count() Returns the number of attributes in the node. Implements Countable.
mixed getAttribute(string Gets a LDAP attribute. Data conversion is applied using
$name, integer|null $index) Zend\Ldap\Attribute::getAttribute().
array getAttributes(boolean Gets all attributes of node. If $includeSystemAttributes is FALSE (defaults to
$includeSystemAttributes) TRUE) the system specific attributes are stripped from the array.
array|integer Gets a LDAP date/time attribute. Data conversion is applied using
getDateTimeAttribute(string Zend\Ldap\Attribute::getDateTimeAttribute().
$name, integer|null $index)
Zend\Ldap\Node\Schema Reloads the current nodes attributes from the given LDAP server.
reload(Zend\Ldap\Ldap $ldap)
Zend\Ldap\Node\Schema Factory method to create the Schema node.
create(Zend\Ldap\Ldap $ldap)
array getAttributeTypes() Gets the attribute types as an array of .
array getObjectClasses() Gets the object classes as an array of
Zend\Ldap\Node\Schema\ObjectClass\Interface.

910 Chapter 176. Zend\Ldap\Node\Schema

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Table 176.2: Zend\Ldap\Node\Schema\AttributeType\Interface API

Method Description
string getName() Gets the attribute name.
string getOid() Gets the attribute OID.
string getSyntax() Gets the attribute syntax.
int|null getMaxLength() Gets the attribute maximum length.
boolean isSingleValued() Returns if the attribute is single-valued.
string getDescription() Gets the attribute description
Table 176.3: Zend\Ldap\Node\Schema\ObjectClass\Interface API
Method Description
string Returns the objectClass name.
getName()
string Returns the objectClass OID.
getOid()
array Returns the attributes that this objectClass must contain.
getMustCon-
tain()
array Returns the attributes that this objectClass may contain.
getMayCon-
tain()
string getDe- Returns the attribute description
scription()
integer Returns the objectClass type. The method returns one of the following values:
getType() Zend\Ldap\Node\Schema::OBJECTCLASS_TYPE_UNKNOWNfor unknown class
typesZend\Ldap\Node\Schema::OBJECTCLASS_TYPE_STRUCTURALfor structural
classesZend\Ldap\Node\Schema::OBJECTCLASS_TYPE_ABSTRACTfor abstract
classesZend\Ldap\Node\Schema::OBJECTCLASS_TYPE_AUXILIARYfor auxiliary classes
array getPar- Returns the parent objectClasses of this class. This includes structural, abstract and auxiliary
entClasses() objectClasses.
Classes representing attribute types and object classes extend ZendLdapNodeSchemaAbstractItem which provides
some core methods to access arbitrary attributes on the underlying LDAP node. ZendLdapNodeSchemaAbstractItem
includes the magic property accessors __get() and __isset() to access the attributes by their name. Furthermore the
class implements ArrayAccess for array-style-access to the attributes. offsetSet() and offsetUnset() throw a BadMethod-
CallException as modifications are not allowed on schema information nodes.

Table 176.4: Zend\Ldap\Node\Schema\AbstractItem API

Method Description
array getData() Gets all the underlying data from the schema information node.
integer count() Returns the number of attributes in this schema information node. Implements Countable.

176.1 OpenLDAP

Additionally the common methods above apply to instances of ZendLdapNodeSchemaOpenLDAP.

176.1. OpenLDAP 911

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Table 176.5: Zend\Ldap\Node\Schema\OpenLDAP API

Method Description
array getLdapSyntaxes() Gets the LDAP syntaxes.
array getMatchingRules() Gets the matching rules.
array getMatchingRuleUse() Gets the matching rule use.
Table 176.6: Zend\Ldap\Node\Schema\AttributeType\OpenLDAP API
Method Description
Zend\Ldap\Node\Schema\AttributeType\OpenLdap|null Returns the parent attribute type in the inheritance tree
getParent() if one exists.
Table 176.7: Zend\Ldap\Node\Schema\ObjectClass\OpenLDAP API
Method Description
array get- Returns the parent object classes in the inheritance tree if one exists. The returned array is an array
Parents() of Zend\Ldap\Node\Schema\ObjectClass\OpenLdap.

176.2 ActiveDirectory

Note: Schema browsing on ActiveDirectory servers

Due to restrictions on Microsoft ActiveDirectory servers regarding the number of entries returned by generic search
routines and due to the structure of the ActiveDirectory schema repository, schema browsing is currently not available
for Microsoft ActiveDirectory servers.

ZendLdapNodeSchemaActiveDirectory does not provide any additional methods.

Table 176.8: Zend\Ldap\Node\Schema\AttributeType\ActiveDirectory API

Zend\Ldap\Node\Schema\AttributeType\ActiveDirectory does not provide any additional methods.
Table 176.9: Zend\Ldap\Node\Schema\ObjectClass\ActiveDirectory API
Zend\Ldap\Node\Schema\ObjectClass\ActiveDirectory does not provide any additional methods.
orphan

912 Chapter 176. Zend\Ldap\Node\Schema

 CHAPTER 177

Zend\Ldap\Ldif\Encoder

Table 177.1: Zend\Ldap\Ldif\Encoder API

Method Description
array decode(string $string) Decodes the string $string into an array of LDIF items.
string en- Encode $value into a LDIF representation. $options is an array that may
code(scalar|array|Zend\Ldap\Nodecontain the following keys: sort Sort the given attributes with dn following
$value, array $options) objectClass and following all other attributes sorted alphabetically. TRUE by
default. version The LDIF format version. 1 by default. wrap The
line-length. 78 by default to conform to the LDIF specification.

913
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

914 Chapter 177. Zend\Ldap\Ldif\Encoder

 CHAPTER 178

Usage Scenarios

178.1 Authentication scenarios

178.1.1 OpenLDAP

178.1.2 ActiveDirectory

178.2 Basic CRUD operations

178.2.1 Retrieving data from the LDAP

Getting an entry by its DN

1 $options = array(/* ... */);

2 $ldap = new Zend\Ldap\Ldap($options);
3 $ldap->bind();
4 $hm = $ldap->getEntry('cn=Hugo Mller,ou=People,dc=my,dc=local');
5 /*
6 $hm is an array of the following structure
7 array(
8 'dn' => 'cn=Hugo Mller,ou=People,dc=my,dc=local',
9 'cn' => array('Hugo Mller'),
10 'sn' => array('Mller'),
11 'objectclass' => array('inetOrgPerson', 'top'),
12 ...
13 )
14 */

Check for the existence of a given DN

1 $options = array(/* ... */);

2 $ldap = new Zend\Ldap\Ldap($options);
3 $ldap->bind();
4 $isThere = $ldap->exists('cn=Hugo Mller,ou=People,dc=my,dc=local');

915
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Count children of a given DN

1 $options = array(/* ... */);

2 $ldap = new Zend\Ldap\Ldap($options);
3 $ldap->bind();
4 $childrenCount = $ldap->countChildren(
5 'cn=Hugo Mller,ou=People,dc=my,dc=local');

Searching the LDAP tree

1 $options = array(/* ... */);

2 $ldap = new Zend\Ldap\Ldap($options);
3 $ldap->bind();
4 $result = $ldap->search('(objectclass=*)',
5 'ou=People,dc=my,dc=local',
6 Zend\Ldap\Ldap::SEARCH_SCOPE_ONE);
7 foreach ($result as $item) {
8 echo $item["dn"] . ': ' . $item['cn'][0] . PHP_EOL;
9 }

178.2.2 Adding data to the LDAP

Add a new entry to the LDAP

1 $options = array(/* ... */);

2 $ldap = new Zend\Ldap\Ldap($options);
3 $ldap->bind();
4 $entry = array();
5 Zend\Ldap\Attribute::setAttribute($entry, 'cn', 'Hans Meier');
6 Zend\Ldap\Attribute::setAttribute($entry, 'sn', 'Meier');
7 Zend\Ldap\Attribute::setAttribute($entry, 'objectClass', 'inetOrgPerson');
8 $ldap->add('cn=Hans Meier,ou=People,dc=my,dc=local', $entry);

178.2.3 Deleting from the LDAP

Delete an existing entry from the LDAP

1 $options = array(/* ... */);

2 $ldap = new Zend\Ldap\Ldap($options);
3 $ldap->bind();
4 $ldap->delete('cn=Hans Meier,ou=People,dc=my,dc=local');

178.2.4 Updating the LDAP

Update an existing entry on the LDAP

1 $options = array(/* ... */);

2 $ldap = new Zend\Ldap\Ldap($options);
3 $ldap->bind();

916 Chapter 178. Usage Scenarios

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

4 $hm = $ldap->getEntry('cn=Hugo Mller,ou=People,dc=my,dc=local');

5 Zend\Ldap\Attribute::setAttribute($hm, 'mail', '[email protected]');
6 Zend\Ldap\Attribute::setPassword($hm,
7 'newPa$$w0rd',
8 Zend\Ldap\Attribute::PASSWORD_HASH_SHA1);
9 $ldap->update('cn=Hugo Mller,ou=People,dc=my,dc=local', $hm);

178.3 Extended operations

178.3.1 Copy and move entries in the LDAP

Copy a LDAP entry recursively with all its descendants

1 $options = array(/* ... */);

2 $ldap = new Zend\Ldap\Ldap($options);
3 $ldap->bind();
4 $ldap->copy('cn=Hugo Mller,ou=People,dc=my,dc=local',
5 'cn=Hans Meier,ou=People,dc=my,dc=local',
6 true);

Move a LDAP entry recursively with all its descendants to a different subtree

1 $options = array(/* ... */);

2 $ldap = new Zend\Ldap\Ldap($options);
3 $ldap->bind();
4 $ldap->moveToSubtree('cn=Hugo Mller,ou=People,dc=my,dc=local',
5 'ou=Dismissed,dc=my,dc=local',
6 true);

178.3. Extended operations 917

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

918 Chapter 178. Usage Scenarios

 CHAPTER 179

Tools

179.1 Creation and modification of DN strings

179.2 Using the filter API to create search filters

Create simple LDAP filters

1 $f1 = Zend\Ldap\Filter::equals('name', 'value'); // (name=value)

2 $f2 = Zend\Ldap\Filter::begins('name', 'value'); // (name=value*)
3 $f3 = Zend\Ldap\Filter::ends('name', 'value'); // (name=*value)
4 $f4 = Zend\Ldap\Filter::contains('name', 'value'); // (name=*value*)
5 $f5 = Zend\Ldap\Filter::greater('name', 'value'); // (name>value)
6 $f6 = Zend\Ldap\Filter::greaterOrEqual('name', 'value'); // (name>=value)
7 $f7 = Zend\Ldap\Filter::less('name', 'value'); // (name<value)
8 $f8 = Zend\Ldap\Filter::lessOrEqual('name', 'value'); // (name<=value)
9 $f9 = Zend\Ldap\Filter::approx('name', 'value'); // (name~=value)
10 $f10 = Zend\Ldap\Filter::any('name'); // (name=*)

Create more complex LDAP filters

1 $f1 = Zend\Ldap\Filter::ends('name', 'value')->negate(); // (!(name=*value))

2

3 $f2 = Zend\Ldap\Filter::equals('name', 'value');

4 $f3 = Zend\Ldap\Filter::begins('name', 'value');
5 $f4 = Zend\Ldap\Filter::ends('name', 'value');
6

7 // (&(name=value)(name=value*)(name=*value))
8 $f5 = Zend\Ldap\Filter::andFilter($f2, $f3, $f4);
9

10 // (|(name=value)(name=value*)(name=*value))
11 $f6 = Zend\Ldap\Filter::orFilter($f2, $f3, $f4);

179.3 Modify LDAP entries using the Attribute API

919
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

920 Chapter 179. Tools

 CHAPTER 180

Object-oriented access to the LDAP tree using Zend\Ldap\Node

180.1 Basic CRUD operations

180.1.1 Retrieving data from the LDAP

180.1.2 Getting a node by its DN

180.1.3 Searching a nodes subtree

180.1.4 Adding a new node to the LDAP

180.1.5 Deleting a node from the LDAP

180.1.6 Updating a node on the LDAP

180.2 Extended operations

180.2.1 Copy and move nodes in the LDAP

180.3 Tree traversal

Traverse LDAP tree recursively

1 $options = array(/* ... */);

2 $ldap = new Zend\Ldap\Ldap($options);
3 $ldap->bind();
4 $ri = new RecursiveIteratorIterator($ldap->getBaseNode(),
5 RecursiveIteratorIterator::SELF_FIRST);
6 foreach ($ri as $rdn => $n) {
7 var_dump($n);
8 }

921
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

922 Chapter 180. Object-oriented access to the LDAP tree using Zend\Ldap\Node
 CHAPTER 181

Getting information from the LDAP server

181.1 RootDSE

See the following documents for more information on the attributes contained within the RootDSE for a given LDAP
server.
OpenLDAP
Microsoft ActiveDirectory
Novell eDirectory

Getting hands on the RootDSE

1 $options = array(/* ... */);

2 $ldap = new Zend\Ldap\Ldap($options);
3 $rootdse = $ldap->getRootDse();
4 $serverType = $rootdse->getServerType();

181.2 Schema Browsing

Getting hands on the server schema

1 $options = array(/* ... */);

2 $ldap = new Zend\Ldap\Ldap($options);
3 $schema = $ldap->getSchema();
4 $classes = $schema->getObjectClasses();

181.2.1 OpenLDAP

181.2.2 ActiveDirectory

Note: Schema browsing on ActiveDirectory servers

Due to restrictions on Microsoft ActiveDirectory servers regarding the number of entries returned by generic search
routines and due to the structure of the ActiveDirectory schema repository, schema browsing is currently not available
for Microsoft ActiveDirectory servers.

923
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

924 Chapter 181. Getting information from the LDAP server

 CHAPTER 182

Serializing LDAP data to and from LDIF

182.1 Serialize a LDAP entry to LDIF

1 $data = array(
2 'dn' => 'uid=rogasawara,ou=,o=Airius',
3 'objectclass' => array('top',
4 'person',
5 'organizationalPerson',
6 'inetOrgPerson'),
7 'uid' => array('rogasawara'),
8 'mail' => array('[email protected]'),
9 'givenname;lang-ja' => array(''),
10 'sn;lang-ja' => array(''),
11 'cn;lang-ja' => array(' '),
12 'title;lang-ja' => array(' '),
13 'preferredlanguage' => array('ja'),
14 'givenname' => array(''),
15 'sn' => array(''),
16 'cn' => array(' '),
17 'title' => array(' '),
18 'givenname;lang-ja;phonetic' => array(''),
19 'sn;lang-ja;phonetic' => array(''),
20 'cn;lang-ja;phonetic' => array(' '),
21 'title;lang-ja;phonetic' => array(' '),
22 'givenname;lang-en' => array('Rodney'),
23 'sn;lang-en' => array('Ogasawara'),
24 'cn;lang-en' => array('Rodney Ogasawara'),
25 'title;lang-en' => array('Sales, Director'),
26 );
27 $ldif = Zend\Ldap\Ldif\Encoder::encode($data, array('sort' => false,
28 'version' => null));
29 /*
30 $ldif contains:
31 dn:: dWlkPXJvZ2FzYXdhcmEsb3U95Za25qWt6YOoLG89QWlyaXVz
32 objectclass: top
33 objectclass: person
34 objectclass: organizationalPerson
35 objectclass: inetOrgPerson
36 uid: rogasawara
37 mail: [email protected]
38 givenname;lang-ja:: 44Ot44OJ44OL44O8
39 sn;lang-ja:: 5bCP56yg5Y6f

925
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

40 cn;lang-ja:: 5bCP56yg5Y6fIOODreODieODi+ODvA==
41 title;lang-ja:: 5Za25qWt6YOoIOmDqOmVtw==
42 preferredlanguage: ja
43 givenname:: 44Ot44OJ44OL44O8
44 sn:: 5bCP56yg5Y6f
45 cn:: 5bCP56yg5Y6fIOODreODieODi+ODvA==
46 title:: 5Za25qWt6YOoIOmDqOmVtw==
47 givenname;lang-ja;phonetic:: 44KN44Gp44Gr44O8
48 sn;lang-ja;phonetic:: 44GK44GM44GV44KP44KJ
49 cn;lang-ja;phonetic:: 44GK44GM44GV44KP44KJIOOCjeOBqeOBq+ODvA==
50 title;lang-ja;phonetic:: 44GI44GE44GO44KH44GG44G2IOOBtuOBoeOCh+OBhg==
51 givenname;lang-en: Rodney
52 sn;lang-en: Ogasawara
53 cn;lang-en: Rodney Ogasawara
54 title;lang-en: Sales, Director
55 */

182.2 Deserialize a LDIF string into a LDAP entry

1 $ldif = "dn:: dWlkPXJvZ2FzYXdhcmEsb3U95Za25qWt6YOoLG89QWlyaXVz
2 objectclass: top
3 objectclass: person
4 objectclass: organizationalPerson
5 objectclass: inetOrgPerson
6 uid: rogasawara
7 mail: [email protected]
8 givenname;lang-ja:: 44Ot44OJ44OL44O8
9 sn;lang-ja:: 5bCP56yg5Y6f
10 cn;lang-ja:: 5bCP56yg5Y6fIOODreODieODi+ODvA==
11 title;lang-ja:: 5Za25qWt6YOoIOmDqOmVtw==
12 preferredlanguage: ja
13 givenname:: 44Ot44OJ44OL44O8
14 sn:: 5bCP56yg5Y6f
15 cn:: 5bCP56yg5Y6fIOODreODieODi+ODvA==
16 title:: 5Za25qWt6YOoIOmDqOmVtw==
17 givenname;lang-ja;phonetic:: 44KN44Gp44Gr44O8
18 sn;lang-ja;phonetic:: 44GK44GM44GV44KP44KJ
19 cn;lang-ja;phonetic:: 44GK44GM44GV44KP44KJIOOCjeOBqeOBq+ODvA==
20 title;lang-ja;phonetic:: 44GI44GE44GO44KH44GG44G2IOOBtuOBoeOCh+OBhg==
21 givenname;lang-en: Rodney
22 sn;lang-en: Ogasawara
23 cn;lang-en: Rodney Ogasawara
24 title;lang-en: Sales, Director";
25 $data = Zend\Ldap\Ldif\Encoder::decode($ldif);
26 /*
27 $data = array(
28 'dn' => 'uid=rogasawara,ou=,o=Airius',
29 'objectclass' => array('top',
30 'person',
31 'organizationalPerson',
32 'inetOrgPerson'),
33 'uid' => array('rogasawara'),
34 'mail' => array('[email protected]'),
35 'givenname;lang-ja' => array(''),
36 'sn;lang-ja' => array(''),
37 'cn;lang-ja' => array(' '),

926 Chapter 182. Serializing LDAP data to and from LDIF

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

38 'title;lang-ja' => array(' '),

39 'preferredlanguage' => array('ja'),
40 'givenname' => array(''),
41 'sn' => array(''),
42 'cn' => array(' '),
43 'title' => array(' '),
44 'givenname;lang-ja;phonetic' => array(''),
45 'sn;lang-ja;phonetic' => array(''),
46 'cn;lang-ja;phonetic' => array(' '),
47 'title;lang-ja;phonetic' => array(' '),
48 'givenname;lang-en' => array('Rodney'),
49 'sn;lang-en' => array('Ogasawara'),
50 'cn;lang-en' => array('Rodney Ogasawara'),
51 'title;lang-en' => array('Sales, Director'),
52 );
53 */

182.2. Deserialize a LDIF string into a LDAP entry 927

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

928 Chapter 182. Serializing LDAP data to and from LDIF

 CHAPTER 183

The AutoloaderFactory

183.1 Overview

Starting with version 2.0, Zend Framework now offers multiple autoloader strategies. Often, it will be useful to employ
multiple autoloading strategies; as an example, you may have a class map for your most used classes, but want to use
a PSR-0 style autoloader for 3rd party libraries.
While you could potentially manually configure these, it may be more useful to define the autoloader configuration
somewhere and cache it. For these cases, the AutoloaderFactory will be useful.

183.2 Quick Start

Configuration may be stored as a PHP array, or in some form of configuration file. As an example, consider the
following PHP array:
1 $config = array(
2 'Zend\Loader\ClassMapAutoloader' => array(
3 'application' => APPLICATION_PATH . '/.classmap.php',
4 'zf' => APPLICATION_PATH . '/../library/Zend/.classmap.php',
5 ),
6 'Zend\Loader\StandardAutoloader' => array(
7 'namespaces' => array(
8 'Phly\Mustache' => APPLICATION_PATH . '/../library/Phly/Mustache',
9 'Doctrine' => APPLICATION_PATH . '/../library/Doctrine',
10 ),
11 ),
12 );

An equivalent INI-style configuration might look like the following:

1 Zend\Loader\ClassMapAutoloader.application = APPLICATION_PATH "/.classmap.php"
2 Zend\Loader\ClassMapAutoloader.zf = APPLICATION_PATH "/../library/Zend/.classmap.php"
3 Zend\Loader\StandardAutoloader.namespaces.Phly\Mustache = APPLICATION_PATH "/../library/Phly/Mustache
4 Zend\Loader\StandardAutoloader.namespaces.Doctrine = APPLICATION_PATH "/../library/Doctrine"

Once you have your configuration in a PHP array, you simply pass it to the AutoloaderFactory.
1 // This example assumes ZF is on your include_path.
2 // You could also load the factory class from a path relative to the
3 // current script, or via an absolute path.

929
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

4 require_once 'Zend/Loader/AutoloaderFactory.php';
5 Zend\Loader\AutoloaderFactory::factory($config);

The AutoloaderFactory will instantiate each autoloader with the given options, and also call its register()
method to register it with the SPL autoloader.

183.3 Configuration Options

$options The AutoloaderFactory expects an associative array or Traversable object. Keys should be valid
autoloader class names, and the values should be the options that should be passed to the class constructor.
Internally, the AutoloaderFactory checks to see if the autoloader class referenced exists. If not, it will
use the StandardAutoloader to attempt to load the class via the include_path (or, in the case of Zend-
namespaced classes, using the Zend Framework library path). If the class is not found, or does not implement
the SplAutoloader interface, an exception will be raised.

183.4 Available Methods

factory Instantiate and register autoloaders factory($options)

factory() This method is static, and is used to instantiate autoloaders and register them with the SPL autoloader.
It expects either an array or Traversable object as denoted in the Options section.
getRegisteredAutoloaders Retrieve a list of all autoloaders registered using the factory
getRegisteredAutoloaders()
getRegisteredAutoloaders() This method is static, and may be used to retrieve a list of all autoloaders registered
via the factory() method. It returns simply an array of autoloader instances.
getRegisteredAutoloader Retrieve an autoloader by class name getRegisteredAutoloader($class)
getRegisteredAutoloader() This method is static, and is used to retrieve a specific autoloader. It expects a
string with the autoloader class name. If the autoloader is not registered, an exception will be thrown.
unregisterAutoloaders Unregister all autoloaders registered via the factory. unregisterAutoloaders()
unregisterAutoloaders() This method is static, and can be used to unregister all autoloaders that were registered
via the factory. Note that this will not unregister autoloaders that were registered outside of the factory.
unregisterAutoloader Unregister an autoloader registered via the factory. unregisterAutoloader($class)
unregisterAutoloader() This method is static, and can be used to unregister an autoloader that was registered
via the factory. Note that this will not unregister autoloaders that were registered outside of the factory. If the
autoloader is registered via the factory, after unregistering it will return TRUE, otherwise FALSE.

183.5 Examples

Please see the Quick Start for a detailed example.

930 Chapter 183. The AutoloaderFactory

 CHAPTER 184

The StandardAutoloader

184.1 Overview

Zend\Loader\StandardAutoloader is designed as a PSR-0-compliant autoloader. It assumes a 1:1 map-

ping of the namespace+classname to the filesystem, wherein namespace separators and underscores are translated to
directory separators. A simple statement that illustrates how resolution works is as follows:
1 $filename = str_replace(array('_', '\\'), DIRECTORY_SEPARATOR, $classname)
2 . '.php';

Previous incarnations of PSR-0-compliant autoloaders in Zend Framework have relied upon the include_path for
file lookups. This has led to a number of issues:
Due to the use of include, if the file is not found, a warning is raised even if another autoloader is capable
of resolving the class later.
Documenting how to setup the include_path has proven to be a difficult concept to convey.
If multiple Zend Framework installations exist on the include_path, the first one on the path wins even if
that was not the one the developer intended.
To solve these problems, the StandardAutoloader by default requires that you explicitly register namespace/path
pairs (or vendor prefix/path pairs), and will only load a file if it exists within the given path. Multiple pairs may be
provided.
As a measure of last resort, you may also use the StandardAutoloader as a fallback autoloader one that
will look for classes of any namespace or vendor prefix on the include_path. This practice is not recommended,
however, due to performance implications.
Finally, as with all autoloaders in Zend Framework, the StandardAutoloader is capable of registering itself with
PHPs SPL autoloader registry.

Note: Vocabulary: Namespaces vs. Vendor Prefixes

In terms of autoloading, a namespace corresponds to PHPs own definition of namespaces in PHP versions 5.3 and
above.
A vendor prefix refers to the practice, popularized in PHP versions prior to 5.3, of providing a pseudo-namespace
in the form of underscore-separated words in class names. As an example, the class Phly_Couch_Document uses
a vendor prefix of Phly, and a component prefix of Phly_Couch but it is a class sitting in the global namespace
within PHP 5.3.
The StandardAutoloader is capable of loading either namespaced or vendor prefixed class names, but treats
them separately when attempting to match them to an appropriate path.

931
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

184.2 Quick Start

Basic use of the StandardAutoloader requires simply registering namespace/path pairs. This can either be done
at instantiation, or via explicit method calls after the object has been initialized. Calling register() will register
the autoloader with the SPL autoloader registry.
If the option key autoregister_zf is set to true then the class will register the Zend namespace to the directory above
where its own classfile is located on the filesystem.

184.2.1 Manual Configuration

1 // This example assumes ZF is on your include_path.

2 // You could also load the autoloader class from a path relative to the
3 // current script, or via an absolute path.
4 require_once 'Zend/Loader/StandardAutoloader.php';
5 $loader = new Zend\Loader\StandardAutoloader(array('autoregister_zf' => true));
6

7 // Register the "Phly" namespace:

8 $loader->registerNamespace('Phly', APPLICATION_PATH . '/../library/Phly');
9

10 // Register the "Scapi" vendor prefix:

11 $loader->registerPrefix('Scapi', APPLICATION_PATH . '/../library/Scapi');
12

13 // Optionally, specify the autoloader as a "fallback" autoloader;

14 // this is not recommended.
15 $loader->setFallbackAutoloader(true);
16

17 // Register with spl_autoload:

18 $loader->register();

184.2.2 Configuration at Instantiation

The StandardAutoloader may also be configured at instantiation. Please note:

The argument passed may be either an array or a Traversable object.
The argument passed is also a valid argument for passing to the setOptions() method.
The following is equivalent to the previous example.
1 require_once 'Zend/Loader/StandardAutoloader.php';
2 $loader = new Zend\Loader\StandardAutoloader(array(
3 'autoregister_zf' => true,
4 'namespaces' => array(
5 'Phly' => APPLICATION_PATH . '/../library/Phly',
6 ),
7 'prefixes' => array(
8 'Scapi' => APPLICATION_PATH . '/../library/Scapi',
9 ),
10 'fallback_autoloader' => true,
11 ));
12

13 // Register with spl_autoload:

14 $loader->register();

932 Chapter 184. The StandardAutoloader

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

184.3 Configuration Options

The StandardAutoloader defines the following options.

namespaces An associative array of namespace/path pairs. The path should be an absolute path or path relative to the
calling script, and contain only classes that live in that namespace (or its subnamespaces). By default, the Zend
namespace is registered, pointing to the parent directory of the file defining the StandardAutoloader.
prefixes An associative array of vendor prefix/path pairs. The path should be an absolute path or path relative to the
calling script, and contain only classes that begin with the provided vendor prefix.
fallback_autoloader A boolean value indicating whether or not this instance should act as a fallback autoloader
(i.e., look for classes of any namespace or vendor prefix on the include_path). By default, false.
autoregister_zf An boolean value indicating that the class should register the Zend namespace to the directory
above where its own classfile is located on the filesystem.

184.4 Available Methods

__construct Initialize a new instance of the object __construct($options = null)

Constructor Takes an optional $options argument. This argument may be an associative array or
Traversable object. If not null, the argument is passed to setOptions().
setOptions Set object state based on provided options. setOptions($options)
setOptions() Takes an argument of either an associative array or Traversable object. Recognized keys are
detailed under Configuration options, with the following behaviors:
The namespaces value will be passed to registerNamespaces().
The prefixes value will be passed to registerPrefixes().
The fallback_autoloader value will be passed to setFallbackAutoloader().
setFallbackAutoloader Enable/disable fallback autoloader status setFallbackAutoloader($flag)
setFallbackAutoloader() Takes a boolean flag indicating whether or not to act as a fallback autoloader when
registered with the SPL autoloader.
isFallbackAutoloader Query fallback autoloader status isFallbackAutoloader()
isFallbackAutoloader() Indicates whether or not this instance is flagged as a fallback autoloader.
registerNamespace Register a namespace with the autoloader registerNamespace($namespace,
$directory)
registerNamespace() Register a namespace with the autoloader, pointing it to a specific directory on the filesys-
tem for class resolution. For classes matching that initial namespace, the autoloader will then perform lookups
within that directory.
registerNamespaces Register multiple namespaces with the autoloader registerNamespaces($namespaces)
registerNamespaces() Accepts either an array or Traversable object. It will then iterate through the argu-
ment, and pass each item to registerNamespace().
registerPrefix Register a vendor prefix with the autoloader. registerPrefix($prefix, $directory)
registerPrefix() Register a vendor prefix with the autoloader, pointing it to a specific directory on the filesystem
for class resolution. For classes matching that initial vendor prefix, the autoloader will then perform lookups
within that directory.

184.3. Configuration Options 933

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

registerPrefixes Register many vendor prefixes with the autoloader registerPrefixes($prefixes)

registerPrefixes() Accepts either an array or Traversable object. It will then iterate through the argument,
and pass each item to registerPrefix().
autoload Attempt to load a class. autoload($class)
autoload() Attempts to load the class specified. Returns a boolean false on failure, or a string indicating the
class loaded on success.
register Register with spl_autoload. register()
register() Registers the autoload() method of the current instance with spl_autoload_register().

184.5 Examples

Please review the examples in the quick start for usage.

934 Chapter 184. The StandardAutoloader

 CHAPTER 185

The ClassMapAutoloader

185.1 Overview

The ClassMapAutoloader is designed with performance in mind. The idea behind it is simple: when asked to
load a class, see if its in the map, and, if so, load the file associated with the class in the map. This avoids unnecessary
filesystem operations, and can also ensure the autoloader plays nice with opcode caches and PHPs realpath cache.
Zend Framework provides a tool for generating these class maps; you can find it in
bin/classmap_generator.php of the distribution. Full documentation of this is provided in the Class
Map generator section.

185.2 Quick Start

The first step is to generate a class map file. You may run this over any directory containing source code anywhere
underneath it.
1 php classmap_generator.php Some/Directory/

This will create a file named Some/Directory/autoload_classmap.php, which is a PHP file returning an
associative array that represents the class map.
Within your code, you will now instantiate the ClassMapAutoloader, and provide it the location of the map.
1 // This example assumes ZF is on your include_path.
2 // You could also load the autoloader class from a path relative to the
3 // current script, or via an absolute path.
4 require_once 'Zend/Loader/ClassMapAutoloader.php';
5 $loader = new Zend\Loader\ClassMapAutoloader();
6

7 // Register the class map:

8 $loader->registerAutoloadMap('Some/Directory/autoload_classmap.php');
9

10 // Register with spl_autoload:

11 $loader->register();

At this point, you may now use any classes referenced in your class map.

935
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

185.3 Configuration Options

The ClassMapAutoloader defines the following options.

$options The ClassMapAutoloader expects an array of options, where each option is either a filename referenc-
ing a class map, or an associative array of class name/filename pairs.
As an example:
1 // Configuration defining both a file-based class map, and an array map
2 $config = array(
3 __DIR__ . '/library/autoloader_classmap.php', // file-based class map
4 array( // array class map
5 'Application\Bootstrap' => __DIR__ . '/application/Bootstrap.php',
6 'Test\Bootstrap' => __DIR__ . '/tests/Bootstrap.php',
7 ),
8 );

185.4 Available Methods

__construct Initialize and configure the object __construct($options = null)

Constructor Used during instantiation of the object. Optionally, pass options, which may be either an array or
Traversable object; this argument will be passed to setOptions().
setOptions Configure the autoloader setOptions($options)
setOptions() Configures the state of the autoloader, including registering class maps. Expects an array or
Traversable object; the argument will be passed to registerAutoloadMaps().
registerAutoloadMap Register a class map registerAutoloadMap($map)
registerAutoloadMap() Registers a class map with the autoloader. $map may be either a string referencing a
PHP script that returns a class map, or an array defining a class map.
More than one class map may be registered; each will be merged with the previous, meaning its possible for a
later class map to overwrite entries from a previously registered map.
registerAutoloadMaps Register multiple class maps at once registerAutoloadMaps($maps)
registerAutoloadMaps() Register multiple class maps with the autoloader. Expects either an array or
Traversable object; it then iterates over the argument and passes each value to registerAutoloadMap().
getAutoloadMap Retrieve the current class map getAutoloadMap()
getAutoloadMap() Retrieves the state of the current class map; the return value is simply an array.
autoload Attempt to load a class. autoload($class)
autoload() Attempts to load the class specified. Returns a boolean false on failure, or a string indicating the
class loaded on success.
register Register with spl_autoload. register()
register() Registers the autoload() method of the current instance with spl_autoload_register().

936 Chapter 185. The ClassMapAutoloader

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

185.5 Examples

185.5.1 Using configuration to seed ClassMapAutoloader

Often, you will want to configure your ClassMapAutoloader. These values may come from a configuration file,
a cache (such as ShMem or memcached), or a simple PHP array. The following is an example of a PHP array that
could be used to configure the autoloader:
1 // Configuration defining both a file-based class map, and an array map
2 $config = array(
3 APPLICATION_PATH . '/../library/autoloader_classmap.php', // file-based class map
4 array( // array class map
5 'Application\Bootstrap' => APPLICATION_PATH . '/Bootstrap.php',
6 'Test\Bootstrap' => APPLICATION_PATH . '/../tests/Bootstrap.php',
7 ),
8 );

An equivalent INI style configuration might look like this:

1 classmap.library = APPLICATION_PATH "/../library/autoloader_classmap.php"
2 classmap.resources.Application\Bootstrap = APPLICATION_PATH "/Bootstrap.php"
3 classmap.resources.Test\Bootstrap = APPLICATION_PATH "/../tests/Bootstrap.php"

Once you have your configuration, you can pass it either to the constructor of the ClassMapAutoloader, to its
setOptions() method, or to registerAutoloadMaps().
1 /* The following are all equivalent */
2

3 // To the constructor:
4 $loader = new Zend\Loader\ClassMapAutoloader($config);
5

6 // To setOptions():
7 $loader = new Zend\Loader\ClassMapAutoloader();
8 $loader->setOptions($config);
9

10 // To registerAutoloadMaps():
11 $loader = new Zend\Loader\ClassMapAutoloader();
12 $loader->registerAutoloadMaps($config);

185.5. Examples 937

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

938 Chapter 185. The ClassMapAutoloader

 CHAPTER 186

The ModuleAutoloader

186.1 Overview

Zend\Loader\ModuleAutoloader is a special implementation of the Zend\Loader\SplAutoloader interface,

used by Zend\ModuleManager to autoload Module classes from different sources.
Apart from being able to autoload modules from directories, the ModuleAutoloader can also autoload modules
packaged as Phar archives, which allows for packaging your modules in a single file for easier distribution. Sup-
ported archive formats are: .phar, .phar.gz, .phar.bz2, .phar.tar, .phar.tar.gz, .phar.tar.bz2,
.phar.zip, .tar, tar.gz, .tar.bz2 and .zip. It is, however, recommended to avoid compressing your pack-
ages (be it either gz, bz2 or zip compression), as it introduces additional CPU overhead to every request.

186.2 Quickstart

As the ModuleAutoloader is meant to be used with the ModuleManager, for examples of its usage and how
to configure it, please see the Module Autoloader Usage section of the ModuleManager documentation.

186.3 Configuration Options

The ModuleAutoloader defines the following options.

$options The ModuleAutoloader expects an array of options, where each option is either a path to scan for
modules, or a key/value pair of explicit module paths. In the case of explicit module paths, the key is the
modules name, and the value is the path to that module.
1 $options = array(
2 '/path/to/modules',
3 '/path/to/other/modules',
4 'MyModule' => '/explicit/path/mymodule-v1.2'
5 );

186.4 Available Methods

__construct Initialize and configure the object __construct($options = null)

Constructor Used during instantiation of the object. Optionally, pass options, which may be either an array or
Traversable object; this argument will be passed to setOptions().

939
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

setOptions Configure the module autoloader setOptions($options)

setOptions() Configures the state of the autoloader, registering paths to modules. Expects an array or
Traversable object; the argument will be passed to registerPaths().
autoload Attempt to load a Module class. autoload($class)
autoload() Attempts to load the specified Module class. Returns a boolean false on failure, or a string
indicating the class loaded on success.
register Register with spl_autoload. register()
register() Registers the autoload() method of the current instance with spl_autoload_register().
unregister Unregister with spl_autoload. unregister()
unregister() Unregisters the autoload() method of the current instance with
spl_autoload_unregister().
registerPaths Register multiple paths with the autoloader. registerPaths($paths)
registerPaths() Register a paths to modules. Expects an array or Traversable object. For an example array,
please see the Configuration options section.
registerPath Register a single path with the autoloader. registerPath($path, $moduleName=false)
registerPath() Register a single path with the autoloader. The first parameter, $path, is expected to be a
string. The second parameter, $moduleName, is expected to be a module name, which allows for registering
an explicit path to that module.
getPaths Get all paths registered with the autoloader. getPaths()
getPaths() Returns an array of all the paths registered with the current instance of the autoloader.

186.5 Examples

Please review the examples in the quick start for usage.

940 Chapter 186. The ModuleAutoloader

 CHAPTER 187

The SplAutoloader Interface

187.1 Overview

While any valid PHP callback may be registered with spl_autoload_register(), Zend Framework autoloaders
often provide more flexibility by being stateful and allowing configuration. To provide a common interface, Zend
Framework provides the SplAutoloader interface.
Objects implementing this interface provide a standard mechanism for configuration, a method that may be invoked to
attempt to load a class, and a method for registering with the SPL autoloading mechanism.

187.2 Quick Start

To create your own autoloading mechanism, simply create a class implementing the SplAutoloader interface (you
may review the methods defined in the Methods section). As a simple example, consider the following autoloader,
which will look for a class file named after the class within a list of registered directories.
1 namespace Custom;
2

3 use Zend\Loader\SplAutoloader;
4

5 class ModifiedIncludePathAutoloader implements SplAutoloader

6 {
7 protected $paths = array();
8

9 public function __construct($options = null)

10 {
11 if (null !== $options) {
12 $this->setOptions($options);
13 }
14 }
15

16 public function setOptions($options)

17 {
18 if (!is_array($options) && !($options instanceof \Traversable)) {
19 throw new \InvalidArgumentException();
20 }
21

22 foreach ($options as $path) {

23 if (!in_array($path, $this->paths)) {
24 $this->paths[] = $path;

941
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

25 }
26 }
27 return $this;
28 }
29

30 public function autoload($classname)

31 {
32 $filename = $classname . '.php';
33 foreach ($this->paths as $path) {
34 $test = $path . DIRECTORY_SEPARATOR . $filename;
35 if (file_exists($test)) {
36 return include($test);
37 }
38 }
39 return false;
40 }
41

42 public function register()

43 {
44 spl_autoload_register(array($this, 'autoload'));
45 }
46 }

To use this ModifiedIncludePathAutoloader from the previous example:

1 $options = array(
2 '/path/one',
3 '/path/two'
4 );
5 $autoloader = new Custom\ModifiedIncludePathAutoloader($options);
6 $autoloader->register();

187.3 Configuration Options

This component defines no configuration options, as it is an interface.

187.4 Available Methods

__construct Initialize and configure an autoloader __construct($options = null)

Constructor Autoloader constructors should optionally receive configuration options. Typically, if received,
these will be passed to the setOptions() method to process.
setOptions Configure the autoloader state setOptions($options)
setOptions() Used to configure the autoloader. Typically, it should expect either an array or a Traversable
object, though validation of the options is left to implementation. Additionally, it is recommended that the
method return the autoloader instance in order to implement a fluent interface.
autoload Attempt to resolve a class name to the file defining it autoload($classname)
autoload() This method should be used to resolve a class name to the file defining it. When a positive match is
found, return the class name; otherwise, return a boolean false.
register Register the autoloader with the SPL autoloader register()

942 Chapter 187. The SplAutoloader Interface

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

register() Should be used to register the autoloader instance with spl_autoload_register(). Invariably,
the method should look like the following:
1 public function register()
2 {
3 spl_autoload_register(array($this, 'autoload'));
4 }

187.5 Examples

Please see the Quick Start for a complete example.

187.5. Examples 943

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

944 Chapter 187. The SplAutoloader Interface

 CHAPTER 188

The PluginClassLoader

188.1 Overview

Resolving plugin names to class names is a common requirement within Zend Framework applica-
tions. The PluginClassLoader implements the interfaces PluginClassLocator, ShortNameLocator, and
IteratorAggregate, providing a simple mechanism for aliasing plugin names to classnames for later retrieval.
While it can act as a standalone class, it is intended that developers will extend the class to provide a per-component
plugin map. This allows seeding the map with the most often-used plugins, while simultaneously allowing the end-user
to overwrite existing or register new plugins.
Additionally, PluginClassLoader provides the ability to statically seed all new instances of a given
PluginClassLoader or one of its extensions (via Late Static Binding). If your application will always call
for defining or overriding particular plugin maps on given PluginClassLoader extensions, this is a powerful
capability.

188.2 Quick Start

Typical use cases involve simply instantiating a PluginClassLoader, seeding it with one or more plugin/class
name associations, and then using it to retrieve the class name associated with a given plugin name.
1 use Zend\Http\HeaderLoader;
2

3 // Provide a global map, or override defaults:

4 HeaderLoader::addStaticMap(array(
5 'xrequestedfor' => 'My\Http\Header\XRequestedFor',
6 ));
7

8 // Instantiate the loader:

9 $loader = new Zend\Http\HeaderLoader();
10

11 // Register a new plugin:

12 $loader->registerPlugin('xForwardedFor', 'My\Http\Header\XForwardedFor');
13

14 // Load/retrieve the associated plugin class:

15 $class = $loader->load('xrequestedfor'); // 'My\Http\Header\XRequestedFor'

Note: Case Sensitivity

The PluginClassLoader is designed to do case-insensitive plugin name lookups. While the above example
defines a xForwardedFor plugin name, internally, this will be stored as simply xforwardedfor. If another plugin is

945
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

registered with simply a different word case, it will overwrite this entry.

188.3 Configuration Options

$map The constructor may take a single option, an array or Traversable object of key/value pairs corresponding
to a plugin name and class name, respectively.

188.4 Available Methods

__construct Instantiate and initialize the loader __construct($map = null)

__construct() The constructor is used to instantiate and initialize the plugin class loader. If passed a string, an
array, or a Traversable object, it will pass this to the registerPlugins() method in order to seed (or overwrite)
the plugin class map.
addStaticMap Statically seed the plugin loader map addStaticMap($map)
addStaticMap() Static method for globally pre-seeding the loader with a class map. It accepts either an array
or Traversable object of plugin name/class name pairs.
When using this method, be certain you understand the precedence in which maps will be merged; in decreasing
order of preference:
Manually registered plugin/class name pairs (e.g., via registerPlugin() or registerPlugins()).
A map passed to the constructor .
The static map.
The map defined within the class itself.
Also, please note that calling the method will not affect any instances already created.
registerPlugin Register a plugin/class association registerPlugin($shortName, $className)
registerPlugin() Defined by the PluginClassLocator interface. Expects two string arguments, the plugin
$shortName, and the class $className which it represents.
registerPlugins Register many plugin/class associations at once registerPlugins($map)
registerPlugins() Expects a string, an array or Traversable object of plugin name/class name pairs repre-
senting a plugin class map.
If a string argument is provided, registerPlugins() assumes this is a class name. If the class does not
exist, an exception will be thrown. If it does, it then instantiates the class and checks to see whether or not it
implements Traversable.
unregisterPlugin Remove a plugin/class association from the map unregisterPlugin($shortName)
unregisterPlugin() Defined by the PluginClassLocator interface; remove a plugin/class association from
the plugin class map.
getRegisteredPlugins Return the complete plugin class map getRegisteredPlugins()
getRegisteredPlugins() Defined by the PluginClassLocator interface; return the entire plugin class map
as an array.

946 Chapter 188. The PluginClassLoader

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

isLoaded Determine if a given plugin name resolves isLoaded($name)

isLoaded() Defined by the ShortNameLocator interface; determine if the given plugin has been resolved to
a class name.
getClassName Return the class name to which a plugin resolves getClassName($name)
getClassName() Defined by the ShortNameLocator interface; return the class name to which a plugin name
resolves.
load Resolve a plugin name load($name)
load() Defined by the ShortNameLocator interface; attempt to resolve a plugin name to a class name. If
successful, returns the class name; otherwise, returns a boolean false.
getIterator Return iterator capable of looping over plugin class map getIterator()
getIterator() Defined by the IteratorAggregate interface; allows iteration over the plugin class map. This
can come in useful for using PluginClassLoader instances to other PluginClassLoader instances in
order to merge maps.

188.5 Examples

188.5.1 Using Static Maps

Its often convenient to provide global overrides or additions to the maps in a PluginClassLoader instance. This
can be done using the addStaticMap() method:
1 use Zend\Loader\PluginClassLoader;
2

3 PluginClassLoader::addStaticMap(array(
4 'xrequestedfor' => 'My\Http\Header\XRequestedFor',
5 ));

Any later instances created will now have this map defined, allowing you to load that plugin.
1 use Zend\Loader\PluginClassLoader;
2

3 $loader = new PluginClassLoader();

4 $class = $loader->load('xrequestedfor'); // My\Http\Header\XRequestedFor

188.5.2 Creating a pre-loaded map

In many cases, you know exactly which plugins you may be drawing upon on a regular basis, and which classes they
will refer to. In this case, simply extend the PluginClassLoader and define the map within the extending class.
1 namespace My\Plugins;
2

3 use Zend\Loader\PluginClassLoader;
4

5 class PluginLoader extends PluginClassLoader

6 {
7 /**
8 * @var array Plugin map
9 */
10 protected $plugins = array(
11 'foo' => 'My\Plugins\Foo',

188.5. Examples 947

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

12 'bar' => 'My\Plugins\Bar',

13 'foobar' => 'My\Plugins\FooBar',
14 );
15 }

At this point, you can simply instantiate the map and use it.
1 $loader = new My\Plugins\PluginLoader();
2 $class = $loader->load('foobar'); // My\Plugins\FooBar

PluginClassLoader makes use of late static binding, allowing per-class static maps. If you want to allow defining
a static map specific to this extending class, simply declare a protected static $staticMap property:
1 namespace My\Plugins;
2

3 use Zend\Loader\PluginClassLoader;
4

5 class PluginLoader extends PluginClassLoader

6 {
7 protected static $staticMap = array();
8

9 // ...
10 }

To inject the static map, use the extending class name to call the static addStaticMap() method.
1 PluginLoader::addStaticMap(array(
2 'baz' => 'My\Plugins\Baz',
3 ));

188.5.3 Extending a plugin map using another plugin map

In some cases, a general map class may already exist; as an example, most components in Zend Framework that
utilize a plugin broker have an associated PluginClassLoader extension defining the plugins available for that
component within the framework. What if you want to define some additions to these? Where should that code go?
One possibility is to define the map in a configuration file, and then inject the configuration into an instance of the
plugin loader. This is certainly trivial to implement, but removes the code defining the plugin map from the library.
An alternate solution is to define a new plugin map class. The class name or an instance of the class may then be
passed to the constructor or registerPlugins().
1 namespace My\Plugins;
2

3 use Zend\Loader\PluginClassLoader;
4 use Zend\Http\HeaderLoader;
5

6 class PluginLoader extends PluginClassLoader

7 {
8 /**
9 * @var array Plugin map
10 */
11 protected $plugins = array(
12 'foo' => 'My\Plugins\Foo',
13 'bar' => 'My\Plugins\Bar',
14 'foobar' => 'My\Plugins\FooBar',
15 );
16 }

948 Chapter 188. The PluginClassLoader

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

17

18 // Inject in constructor:
19 $loader = new HeaderLoader('My\Plugins\PluginLoader');
20 $loader = new HeaderLoader(new PluginLoader());
21

22 // Or via registerPlugins():
23 $loader->registerPlugins('My\Plugins\PluginLoader');
24 $loader->registerPlugins(new PluginLoader());

188.5. Examples 949

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

950 Chapter 188. The PluginClassLoader

 CHAPTER 189

The ShortNameLocator Interface

189.1 Overview

Within Zend Framework applications, its often expedient to provide a mechanism for using class aliases instead of
full class names to load adapters and plugins, or to allow using aliases for the purposes of slipstreaming alternate
implementations into the framework.
In the first case, consider the adapter pattern. Its often unwieldy to utilize a full class name (e.g.,
Zend\Cloud\DocumentService\Adapter\SimpleDb); using the short name of the adapter, SimpleDb,
would be much simpler.
In the second case, consider the case of helpers. Let us assume we have a url helper; you may find that while the
shipped helper does 90% of what you need, youd like to extend it or provide an alternate implementation. At the same
time, you dont want to change your code to reflect the new helper. In this case, a short name allows you to alias an
alternate class to utilize.
Classes implementing the ShortNameLocator interface provide a mechanism for resolving a short name to a
fully qualified class name; how they do so is left to the implementers, and may combine strategies defined by other
interfaces, such as PluginClassLocator.

189.2 Quick Start

Implementing a ShortNameLocator is trivial, and requires only three methods, as shown below.
1 namespace Zend\Loader;
2

3 interface ShortNameLocator
4 {
5 public function isLoaded($name);
6 public function getClassName($name);
7 public function load($name);
8 }

189.3 Configuration Options

This component defines no configuration options, as it is an interface.

951
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

189.4 Available Methods

isLoaded Is the requested plugin loaded? isLoaded($name)

isLoaded() Implement this method to return a boolean indicating whether or not the class has been able to
resolve the plugin name to a class.
getClassName Get the class name associated with a plugin name getClassName($name)
getClassName() Implement this method to return the class name associated with a plugin name.
load Resolve a plugin to a class name load($name)
load() This method should resolve a plugin name to a class name.

189.5 Examples

Please see the Quick Start for the interface specification.

952 Chapter 189. The ShortNameLocator Interface

 CHAPTER 190

The PluginClassLocator interface

190.1 Overview

The PluginClassLocator interface describes a component capable of maintaining an internal map of plugin
names to actual class names. Classes implementing this interface can register and unregister plugin/class associations,
and return the entire map.

190.2 Quick Start

Classes implementing the PluginClassLocator need to implement only three methods, as illustrated below.
1 namespace Zend\Loader;
2

3 interface PluginClassLocator
4 {
5 public function registerPlugin($shortName, $className);
6 public function unregisterPlugin($shortName);
7 public function getRegisteredPlugins();
8 }

190.3 Configuration Options

This component defines no configuration options, as it is an interface.

190.4 Available Methods

registerPlugin Register a mapping of plugin name to class name registerPlugin($shortName,

$className)
registerPlugin() Implement this method to add or overwrite plugin name/class name associations in the internal
plugin map. $shortName will be aliased to $className.
unregisterPlugin Remove a plugin/class name association unregisterPlugin($shortName)
unregisterPlugin() Implement this to allow removing an existing plugin mapping corresponding to
$shortName.

953
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

getRegisteredPlugins Retrieve the map of plugin name/class name associations getRegisteredPlugins()

getRegisteredPlugins() Implement this to allow returning the plugin name/class name map.

190.5 Examples

Please see the Quick Start for the interface specification.

954 Chapter 190. The PluginClassLocator interface

 CHAPTER 191

The Class Map Generator utility: bin/classmap_generator.php

191.1 Overview

The script bin/classmap_generator.php can be used to generate class map files for use with the ClassMa-
pAutoloader.
Internally, it consumes both Zend\Console\Getopt (for parsing command-line options) and Zend\File\ClassFileLocator
for recursively finding all PHP class files in a given tree.

191.2 Quick Start

You may run the script over any directory containing source code. By default, it will look in the current directory, and
will write the script to autoloader_classmap.php in the directory you specify.
1 php classmap_generator.php Some/Directory/

191.3 Configuration Options

help or -h Returns the usage message. If any other options are provided, they will be ignored.
library or -l Expects a single argument, a string specifying the library directory to parse. If this option is not
specified, it will assume the current working directory.
output or -o Where to write the autoload class map file. If not provided, assumes autoload_classmap.php in the
library directory.
append or -a Append to autoload file if it exists.
overwrite or -w If an autoload class map file already exists with the name as specified via the --output option,
you can overwrite it by specifying this flag. Otherwise, the script will not write the class map and return a
warning.

955
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

956 Chapter 191. The Class Map Generator utility: bin/classmap_generator.php

 CHAPTER 192

Zend\Log

192.1 Overview

Zend\Log\Logger is a component for general purpose logging. It supports multiple log backends, formatting
messages sent to the log, and filtering messages from being logged. These functions are divided into the following
objects:
A Logger (instance of Zend\Log\Logger) is the object that your application uses the most. You can have
as many Logger objects as you like; they do not interact. A Logger object must contain at least one Writer, and
can optionally contain one or more Filters.
A Writer (inherits from Zend\Log\Writer\AbstractWriter) is responsible for saving data to storage.
A Filter (implements Zend\Log\Filter\FilterInterface) blocks log data from being saved. A filter
is applied to an individual writer. Filters can be chained.
A Formatter (implements Zend\Log\Formatter\FormatterInterface) can format the log data be-
fore it is written by a Writer. Each Writer has exactly one Formatter.

192.2 Creating a Log

To get started logging, instantiate a Writer and then pass it to a Logger instance:
1 $logger = new Zend\Log\Logger;
2 $writer = new Zend\Log\Writer\Stream('php://output');
3

4 $logger->addWriter($writer);

It is important to note that the Logger must have at least one Writer. You can add any number of Writers using the
Logs addWriter() method.
You can also add a priority to each writer. The priority is specified as number and passed as second argument in the
addWriter() method.
Another way to add a writer to a Logger is to use the name of the writer as follow:
1 $logger = new Zend\Log\Logger;
2

3 $logger->addWriter('stream', null, array('stream' => 'php://output'));

In this example we passed the stream php://output as parameter (as array).

957
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

192.3 Logging Messages

To log a message, call the log() method of a Log instance and pass it the message with a corresponding priority:
1 $logger->log(Zend\Log\Logger::INFO, 'Informational message');

The first parameter of the log() method is an integer priority and the second parameter is a string message.
The priority must be one of the priorities recognized by the Logger instance. This is explained in the next section.
There is also an optional third parameter used to pass extra informations to the writers log.
A shortcut is also available. Instead of calling the log() method, you can call a method by the same name as the
priority:
1 $logger->log(Zend\Log\Logger::INFO, 'Informational message');
2 $logger->info('Informational message');
3

4 $logger->log(Zend\Log\Logger::EMERG, 'Emergency message');

5 $logger->emerg('Emergency message');

192.4 Destroying a Log

If the Logger object is no longer needed, set the variable containing it to NULL to destroy it. This will automatically
call the shutdown() instance method of each attached Writer before the Log object is destroyed:
1 $logger = null;

Explicitly destroying the log in this way is optional and is performed automatically at PHP shutdown.

192.5 Using Built-in Priorities

The Zend\Log\Logger class defines the following priorities:

1 EMERG = 0; // Emergency: system is unusable
2 ALERT = 1; // Alert: action must be taken immediately
3 CRIT = 2; // Critical: critical conditions
4 ERR = 3; // Error: error conditions
5 WARN = 4; // Warning: warning conditions
6 NOTICE = 5; // Notice: normal but significant condition
7 INFO = 6; // Informational: informational messages
8 DEBUG = 7; // Debug: debug messages

These priorities are always available, and a convenience method of the same name is available for each one.
The priorities are not arbitrary. They come from the BSD syslog protocol, which is described in RFC-3164. The
names and corresponding priority numbers are also compatible with another PHP logging system, PEAR Log, which
perhaps promotes interoperability between it and Zend\Log\Logger.
Priority numbers descend in order of importance. EMERG (0) is the most important priority. DEBUG (7) is the least
important priority of the built-in priorities. You may define priorities of lower importance than DEBUG. When selecting
the priority for your log message, be aware of this priority hierarchy and choose appropriately.

958 Chapter 192. Zend\Log

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

192.6 Understanding Log Events

When you call the log() method or one of its shortcuts, a log event is created. This is simply an associative array
with data describing the event that is passed to the writers. The following keys are always created in this array:
timestamp, message, priority, and priorityName.
The creation of the event array is completely transparent.

192.7 Log PHP Errors

Zend\Log\Logger can also be used to log PHP errors and intercept Exceptions. Calling the static method
registerErrorHandler($logger) will add the $logger object before the current PHP error handler, and will
pass the error along as well.
1 $logger = new Zend\Log\Logger;
2 $writer = new Zend\Log\Writer\Stream('php://output');
3

4 $logger->addWriter($writer);
5

6 Zend\Log\Logger::registerErrorHandler($logger);

If you want to unregister the error handler you can use the unregisterErrorHandler() static method.

Table 192.1: Zend\Log\Logger events from PHP errors fields matching handler ( int $errno , string $errstr [, string
$errfile [, int $errline [, array $errcontext ]]] ) from set_error_handler
Name Error Description
Handler
Parameter
mes- errstr Contains the error message, as a string.
sage
er- errno Contains the level of the error raised, as an integer.
rno
file errfile Contains the filename that the error was raised in, as a string.
line errline Contains the line number the error was raised at, as an integer.
con- errcontext (optional) An array that points to the active symbol table at the point the error occurred.
text In other words, errcontext will contain an array of every variable that existed in the scope
the error was triggered in. User error handler must not modify error context.
You can also configure a Logger to intercept Exceptions using the static method
registerExceptionHandler($logger).

192.6. Understanding Log Events 959

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

960 Chapter 192. Zend\Log

 CHAPTER 193

Writers

A Writer is an object that inherits from Zend\Log\Writer\AbstractWriter. A Writers responsibility is to

record log data to a storage backend.

193.1 Writing to Streams

Zend\Log\Writer\Stream sends log data to a PHP stream.

To write log data to the PHP output buffer, use the URL php://output. Alternatively, you can send log data
directly to a stream like STDERR (php://stderr).
1 $writer = new Zend\Log\Writer\Stream('php://output');
2 $logger = new Zend\Log\Logger();
3 $logger->addWriter($writer);
4

5 $logger->info('Informational message');

To write data to a file, use one of the Filesystem URLs:

1 $writer = new Zend\Log\Writer\Stream('/path/to/logfile');
2 $logger = new Zend\Log\Logger();
3 $logger->addWriter($writer);
4

5 $logger->info('Informational message');

By default, the stream opens in the append mode (a). To open it with a different mode, the
Zend\Log\Writer\Stream constructor accepts an optional second parameter for the mode.
The constructor of Zend\Log\Writer\Stream also accepts an existing stream resource:
1 $stream = @fopen('/path/to/logfile', 'a', false);
2 if (! $stream) {
3 throw new Exception('Failed to open stream');
4 }
5

6 $writer = new Zend\Log\Writer\Stream($stream);

7 $logger = new Zend\Log\Logger();
8 $logger->addWriter($writer);
9

10 $logger->info('Informational message');

You cannot specify the mode for existing stream resources. Doing so causes a Zend\Log\Exception to be thrown.

961
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

193.2 Writing to Databases

Zend\Log\Writer\Db writes log information to a database table using Zend\Db\Adapter\Adapter. The

constructor of Zend\Log\Writer\Db receives a Zend\Db\Adapter\Adapter instance, a table name, an op-
tional mapping of event data to database columns, and an optional string contains the character separator for the log
array:
1 $dbconfig = array(
2 // Sqlite Configuration
3 'driver' => 'Pdo',
4 'dsn' => 'sqlite:' . __DIR__ . '/tmp/sqlite.db',
5 );
6 $db = new Zend\Db\Adapter\Adapter($dbconfig);
7

8 $writer = new Zend\Log\Writer\Db($db, 'log_table_name');

9 $logger = new Zend\Log\Logger();
10 $logger->addWriter($writer);
11

12 $logger->info('Informational message');

The example above writes a single row of log data to the database table named log_table_name table. The database
column will be created according to the event array generated by the Zend\Log\Logger instance.
If we specify the mapping of the events with the database columns the log will store in the database only the selected
fields.
1 $dbconfig = array(
2 // Sqlite Configuration
3 'driver' => 'Pdo',
4 'dsn' => 'sqlite:' . __DIR__ . '/tmp/sqlite.db',
5 );
6 $db = new Zend\Db\Adapter\Adapter($dbconfig);
7

8 $mapping = array(
9 'timestamp' => 'date',
10 'priority' => 'type',
11 'message' => 'event'
12 );
13 $writer = new Zend\Log\Writer\Db($db, 'log_table_name', $mapping);
14 $logger = new Zend\Log\Logger();
15 $logger->addWriter($writer);
16

17 $logger->info('Informational message');

The previous example will store only the log information timestamp, priority and message in the database fields date,
type and event.
The Zend\Log\Writer\Db has a fourth optional parameter in the constructor. This parameter is the character
separator for the log events managed by an array. For instance, if we have a log that contains an array extra fields, this
will be translated in extra-field, where - is the character separator (default) and field is the subname of the specific
extra field.

193.3 Writing to FirePHP

Zend\Log\Writer\FirePHP writes log information to the FirePHP Firefox extension. In order to use this you
have to install the FirePHPCore Server Library and the FirePHP browser extension.

962 Chapter 193. Writers

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

To install the FirePHPCore Library you can use composer. Add the repository and the required line to your topmost
composer.json:
1 {
2 [ .. ]
3

5 "repositories": [{
6 "type" : "pear",
7 "url" : "pear.firephp.org",
8 "vendor-alias" : "firephp"
9 }],
10 "minimum-stability": "dev",
11 "require" : {
12 [ ... ]
13 "firephp/FirePHPCore" : "*"
14 }
15 }

193.4 Writing to ChromePHP

Zend\Log\Writer\ChromePHP sends log data to the ChromePHP Chrome extension.

To use the ChromePHP writer, you will also need to include the ChromePHP Library library in your application
include path. The easiest way to do this is to include the library in your composer.json file.

193.5 Writing to Mail

193.6 Writing to MongoDB

193.7 Writing to Syslog

193.8 Writing to Zend Monitor

193.9 Stubbing Out the Writer

The Zend\Log\Writer\Noop is a stub that does not write log data to anything. It is useful for disabling logging
or stubbing out logging during tests:
1 $writer = new Zend\Log\Writer\Noop;
2 $logger = new Zend\Log\Logger();
3 $logger->addWriter($writer);
4

5 // goes nowhere
6 $logger->info('Informational message');

193.4. Writing to ChromePHP 963

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

193.9.1 Migration from 2.0-2.3 to 2.4+

Version 2.4 adds support for PHP 7. In PHP 7, null is a reserved keyword, which required renaming the Null log
writer. If you were using the Null writer directly previously, you will now receive an E_USER_DEPRECATED notice
on instantiation. Please update your code to refer to the Noop class instead.
Users pulling their Null writer instance from the writer plugin manager receive a Noop instance instead starting in
2.4.0.

193.10 Testing with the Mock

The Zend\Log\Writer\Mock is a very simple writer that records the raw data it receives in an array exposed as a
public property.
1 $mock = new Zend\Log\Writer\Mock;
2 $logger = new Zend\Log\Logger();
3 $logger->addWriter($mock);
4

5 $logger->info('Informational message');
6

7 var_dump($mock->events[0]);
8

9 // Array
10 // (
11 // [timestamp] => 2007-04-06T07:16:37-07:00
12 // [message] => Informational message
13 // [priority] => 6
14 // [priorityName] => INFO
15 // )

To clear the events logged by the mock, simply set $mock->events = array().

193.11 Compositing Writers

There is no composite Writer object. However, a Log instance can write to any number of Writers. To do this, use the
addWriter() method:
1 $writer1 = new Zend\Log\Writer\Stream('/path/to/first/logfile');
2 $writer2 = new Zend\Log\Writer\Stream('/path/to/second/logfile');
3

4 $logger = new Zend\Log\Logger();

5 $logger->addWriter($writer1);
6 $logger->addWriter($writer2);
7

8 // goes to both writers

9 $logger->info('Informational message');

You can also specify the priority number for each writer to change the order of writing. The priority number is an
integer number (greater or equal to 1) passed as second parameter in the addWriter() method.

964 Chapter 193. Writers

 CHAPTER 194

Filters

194.1 Overview

A Filter object blocks a message from being written to the log.

You can add a filter to a specific Writer using addFilter() method of that Writer:
1 use Zend\Log\Logger;
2

3 $logger = new Logger();

4

5 $writer1 = new Zend\Log\Writer\Stream('/path/to/first/logfile');

6 $logger->addWriter($writer1);
7

8 $writer2 = new Zend\Log\Writer\Stream('/path/to/second/logfile');

9 $logger->addWriter($writer2);
10

11 // add a filter only to writer2

12 $filter = new Zend\Log\Filter\Priority(Logger::CRIT);
13 $writer2->addFilter($filter);
14

15 // logged to writer1, blocked from writer2

16 $logger->info('Informational message');
17

18 // logged by both writers

19 $logger->emerg('Emergency message');

194.2 Available filters

The Zend\Log\Filter available are:

Priority, filter logging by $priority. By default, it will accept any log event whose priority value is less than or
equal to $priority.
Regex, filter out any log messages not matching the regex pattern. This filter use the preg_match() function of
PHP.
Timestamp, filters log events based on the time when they were triggered. It can be configured by specifying
either idate()-compliant format character along with the desired value, or a full DateTime instance. Appropriate
comparison operator must also be supplied in either cases.

965
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

SuppressFilter, this is a simple boolean filter. Call suppress(true) to suppress all log events. Call suppress(false)
to accept all log events.
Validator, filter out any log messages not matching the Zend\Validator\Validator object passed to the filter.

966 Chapter 194. Filters

 CHAPTER 195

Formatters

A Formatter is an object that is responsible for taking an event array describing a log event and outputting a string
with a formatted log line.
Some Writers are not line-oriented and cannot use a Formatter. An example is the Database Writer, which inserts the
event items directly into database columns. For Writers that cannot support a Formatter, an exception is thrown if you
attempt to set a Formatter.

195.1 Simple Formatting

Zend\Log\Formatter\Simple is the default formatter. It is configured automatically when you specify no

formatter. The default configuration is equivalent to the following:
1 $format = '%timestamp% %priorityName% (%priority%): %message%' . PHP_EOL;
2 $formatter = new Zend\Log\Formatter\Simple($format);

A formatter is set on an individual Writer object using the Writers setFormatter() method:
1 $writer = new Zend\Log\Writer\Stream('php://output');
2 $formatter = new Zend\Log\Formatter\Simple('hello %message%' . PHP_EOL);
3 $writer->setFormatter($formatter);
4

5 $logger = new Zend\Log\Logger();

6 $logger->addWriter($writer);
7

8 $logger->info('there');
9

10 // outputs "hello there"

The constructor of Zend\Log\Formatter\Simple accepts a single parameter: the format string. This
string contains keys surrounded by percent signs (e.g. %message%). The format string may contain any key
from the event data array. You can retrieve the default keys by using the DEFAULT_FORMAT constant from
Zend\Log\Formatter\Simple.

195.2 Formatting to XML

Zend\Log\Formatter\Xml formats log data into XML strings. By default, it automatically logs all items in the
event data array:

967
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1 $writer = new Zend\Log\Writer\Stream('php://output');

2 $formatter = new Zend\Log\Formatter\Xml();
3 $writer->setFormatter($formatter);
4

5 $logger = new Zend\Log\Logger();

6 $logger->addWriter($writer);
7

8 $logger->info('informational message');

The code above outputs the following XML (space added for clarity):
1 <logEntry>
2 <timestamp>2007-04-06T07:24:37-07:00</timestamp>
3 <message>informational message</message>
4 <priority>6</priority>
5 <priorityName>INFO</priorityName>
6 </logEntry>

Its possible to customize the root element as well as specify a mapping of XML elements to the items in the event data
array. The constructor of Zend\Log\Formatter\Xml accepts a string with the name of the root element as the
first parameter and an associative array with the element mapping as the second parameter:
1 $writer = new Zend\Log\Writer\Stream('php://output');
2 $formatter = new Zend\Log\Formatter\Xml('log',
3 array('msg' => 'message',
4 'level' => 'priorityName')
5 );
6 $writer->setFormatter($formatter);
7

8 $logger = new Zend\Log\Logger();

9 $logger->addWriter($writer);
10

11 $logger->info('informational message');

The code above changes the root element from its default of logEntry to log. It also maps the element msg to the
event data item message. This results in the following output:
1 <log>
2 <msg>informational message</msg>
3 <level>INFO</level>
4 </log>

195.3 Formatting to FirePhp

Zend\Log\Formatter\FirePhp formats log data for the Firebug extension for Firefox.

968 Chapter 195. Formatters

 CHAPTER 196

Introduction to Zend\Mail

196.1 Getting started

Zend\Mail provides generalized functionality to compose and send both text and MIME-compliant multipart email
messages. Mail can be sent with Zend\Mail via the Mail\Transport\Sendmail, Mail\Transport\Smtp
or the Mail\Transport\File transport. Of course, you can also implement your own transport by implementing
the Mail\Transport\TransportInterface.

196.1.1 Simple email with Zend\Mail

A simple email consists of one or more recipients, a subject, a body and a sender. To send such a mail using
Zend\Mail\Transport\Sendmail, do the following:
1 use Zend\Mail;
2

3 $mail = new Mail\Message();

4 $mail->setBody('This is the text of the email.');
5 $mail->setFrom('[email protected]', 'Sender\'s name');
6 $mail->addTo('[email protected]', 'Name of recipient');
7 $mail->setSubject('TestSubject');
8

9 $transport = new Mail\Transport\Sendmail();

10 $transport->send($mail);

Note: Minimum definitions

In order to send an email using Zend\Mail you have to specify at least one recipient as well as a message body.
Please note that each Transport may require additional parameters to be set.

For most mail attributes there are get methods to read the information stored in the message object. for further
details, please refer to the API documentation.
You also can use most methods of the Mail\Message object with a convenient fluent interface.
1 use Zend\Mail;
2

3 $mail = new Mail\Message();

4 $mail->setBody('This is the text of the mail.')
5 ->setFrom('[email protected]', 'Some Sender')
6 ->addTo('[email protected]', 'Some Recipient')
7 ->setSubject('TestSubject');

969
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

196.2 Configuring the default sendmail transport

The most simple to use transport is the Mail\Transport\Sendmail transport class. It is essentially a wrapper
to the PHP mail() function. If you wish to pass additional parameters to the mail() function, simply create a new
transport instance and pass your parameters to the constructor.

196.2.1 Passing additional parameters

This example shows how to change the Return-Path of the mail() function.
1 use Zend\Mail;
2

3 $mail = new Mail\Message();

4 $mail->setBody('This is the text of the email.');
5 $mail->setFrom('[email protected]', 'Dolf');
6 $mail->addTo('[email protected]', 'Matthew');
7 $mail->setSubject('TestSubject');
8

9 $transport = new Mail\Transport\Sendmail('[email protected]');

10 $transport->send($mail);

Note: Safe mode restrictions

Supplying additional parameters to the transport will cause the mail() function to fail if PHP is running in safe mode.

Note: Choosing your transport wisely

Although the sendmail transport is the transport that requires only minimal configuration, it may not be suitable for
your production environment. This is because emails sent using the sendmail transport will be more often delivered
to SPAM-boxes. This can partly be remedied by using the SMTP Transport combined with an SMTP server that has
an overall good reputation. Additionally, techniques such as SPF and DKIM may be employed to ensure even more
email messages are delivered as should.

Warning: Sendmail Transport and Windows

As the PHP manual states the mail() function has different behaviour on Windows and on *nix based systems.
Using the Sendmail Transport on Windows will not work in combination with addBcc(). The mail() function
will sent to the BCC recipient such that all the other recipients can see him as recipient!
Therefore if you want to use BCC on a windows server, use the SMTP transport for sending!

970 Chapter 196. Introduction to Zend\Mail

 CHAPTER 197

Zend\Mail\Message

197.1 Overview

The Message class encapsulates a single email message as described in RFCs 822 and 2822. It acts basically as a
value object for setting mail headers and content.
If desired, multi-part email messages may also be created. This is as trivial as creating the message body using the
Zend\Mime component, assigning it to the mail message body.
The Message class is simply a value object. It is not capable of sending or storing itself; for those purposes, you will
need to use, respectively, a Transport adapter or Storage adapter.

197.2 Quick Start

Creating a Message is simple: simply instantiate it.

1 use Zend\Mail\Message;
2

3 $message = new Message();

Once you have your Message instance, you can start adding content or headers. Lets set who the mail is from, who
its addressed to, a subject, and some content:
1 $message->addFrom("[email protected]", "Matthew Weier O'Phinney")
2 ->addTo("[email protected]")
3 ->setSubject("Sending an email from Zend\Mail!");
4 $message->setBody("This is the message body.");

You can also add recipients to carbon-copy (Cc:) or blind carbon-copy (Bcc:).
1 $message->addCc("[email protected]")
2 ->addBcc("[email protected]");

If you want to specify an alternate address to which replies may be sent, that can be done, too.
1 $message->addReplyTo("[email protected]", "Matthew");

Interestingly, RFC822 allows for multiple From: addresses. When you do this, the first one will be used as the
sender, unless you specify a Sender: header. The Message class allows for this.

971
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1 /*
2 * Mail headers created:
3 * From: Ralph Schindler <[email protected]>, Enrico Zimuel <[email protected]>
4 * Sender: Matthew Weier O'Phinney <[email protected]></matthew>
5 */
6 $message->addFrom("[email protected]", "Ralph Schindler")
7 ->addFrom("[email protected]", "Enrico Zimuel")
8 ->setSender("[email protected]", "Matthew Weier O'Phinney");

By default, the Message class assumes ASCII encoding for your email. If you wish to use another encoding, you can
do so; setting this will ensure all headers and body content are properly encoded using quoted-printable encoding.
1 $message->setEncoding("UTF-8");

If you wish to set other headers, you can do that as well.

1 /*
2 * Mail headers created:
3 * X-API-Key: FOO-BAR-BAZ-BAT
4 */
5 $message->getHeaders()->addHeaderLine('X-API-Key', 'FOO-BAR-BAZ-BAT');

Sometimes you may want to provide HTML content, or multi-part content. To do that, youll first create a MIME
message object, and then set it as the body of your mail message object. When you do so, the Message class will
automatically set a MIME-Version header, as well as an appropriate Content-Type header.
In addition you can check how to add attachment to your message E-mail Attachments.
1 use Zend\Mail\Message;
2 use Zend\Mime\Message as MimeMessage;
3 use Zend\Mime\Part as MimePart;
4

5 $text = new MimePart($textContent);

6 $text->type = "text/plain";
7

8 $html = new MimePart($htmlMarkup);

9 $html->type = "text/html";
10

11 $image = new MimePart(fopen($pathToImage, 'r'));

12 $image->type = "image/jpeg";
13

14 $body = new MimeMessage();

15 $body->setParts(array($text, $html, $image));
16

17 $message = new Message();

18 $message->setBody($body);

If you want a string representation of your email, you can get that:
1 echo $message->toString();

Finally, you can fully introspect the message including getting all addresses of recipients and senders, all headers,
and the message body.
1 // Headers
2 // Note: this will also grab all headers for which accessors/mutators exist in
3 // the Message object itself.
4 foreach ($message->getHeaders() as $header) {
5 echo $header->toString();
6 // or grab values: $header->getFieldName(), $header->getFieldValue()

972 Chapter 197. Zend\Mail\Message

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

7 }
8

9 // The logic below also works for the methods cc(), bcc(), to(), and replyTo()
10 foreach ($message->getFrom() as $address) {
11 printf("%s: %s\n", $address->getEmail(), $address->getName());
12 }
13

14 // Sender
15 $address = $message->getSender();
16 if(!is_null($address)) {
17 printf("%s: %s\n", $address->getEmail(), $address->getName());
18 }
19

20 // Subject
21 echo "Subject: ", $message->getSubject(), "\n";
22

23 // Encoding
24 echo "Encoding: ", $message->getEncoding(), "\n";
25

26 // Message body:
27 echo $message->getBody(); // raw body, or MIME object
28 echo $message->getBodyText(); // body as it will be sent

Once your message is shaped to your liking, pass it to a mail transport in order to send it!
1 $transport->send($message);

197.3 Configuration Options

The Message class has no configuration options, and is instead a value object.

197.4 Available Methods

isValid isValid()
Is the message valid?
If we dont have any From addresses, were invalid, according to RFC2822.
Returns bool
setEncoding setEncoding(string $encoding)
Set the message encoding.
Implements a fluent interface.
getEncoding getEncoding()
Get the message encoding.
Returns string.
setHeaders setHeaders(Zend\Mail\Headers $headers)
Compose headers.
Implements a fluent interface.

197.3. Configuration Options 973

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

getHeaders getHeaders()
Access headers collection.
Lazy-loads a Zend\Mail\Headers instance if none is already attached.
Returns a Zend\Mail\Headers instance.
setFrom setFrom(string|AddressDescription|array|Zend\Mail\AddressList|Traversable
$emailOrAddressList, string|null $name)
Set (overwrite) From addresses.
Implements a fluent interface.
addFrom addFrom(string|Zend\Mail\Address|array|Zend\Mail\AddressList|Traversable
$emailOrAddressOrList, string|null $name)
Add a From address.
Implements a fluent interface.
getFrom From()
Retrieve list of From senders
Returns Zend\Mail\AddressList instance.
setTo setTo(string|AddressDescription|array|Zend\Mail\AddressList|Traversable
$emailOrAddressList, null|string $name)
Overwrite the address list in the To recipients.
Implements a fluent interface.
addTo addTo(string|AddressDescription|array|Zend\Mail\AddressList|Traversable
$emailOrAddressOrList, null|string $name)
Add one or more addresses to the To recipients.
Appends to the list.
Implements a fluent interface.
to to()
Access the address list of the To header.
Lazy-loads a Zend\Mail\AddressList and populates the To header if not previously done.
Returns a Zend\Mail\AddressList instance.
setCc setCc(string|AddressDescription|array|Zend\Mail\AddressList|Traversable
$emailOrAddressList, string|null $name)
Set (overwrite) CC addresses.
Implements a fluent interface.
addCc addCc(string|Zend\Mail\Address|array|Zend\Mail\AddressList|Traversable
$emailOrAddressOrList, string|null $name)
Add a Cc address.
Implements a fluent interface.

974 Chapter 197. Zend\Mail\Message

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

cc cc()
Retrieve list of CC recipients
Lazy-loads a Zend\Mail\AddressList and populates the Cc header if not previously done.
Returns a Zend\Mail\AddressList instance.
setBcc setBcc(string|AddressDescription|array|Zend\Mail\AddressList|Traversable
$emailOrAddressList, string|null $name)
Set (overwrite) BCC addresses.
Implements a fluent interface.
addBcc addBcc(string|Zend\Mail\Address|array|Zend\Mail\AddressList|Traversable
$emailOrAddressOrList, string|null $name)
Add a Bcc address.
Implements a fluent interface.
bcc bcc()
Retrieve list of BCC recipients.
Lazy-loads a Zend\Mail\AddressList and populates the Bcc header if not previously done.
Returns a Zend\Mail\AddressList instance.
setReplyTo setReplyTo(string|AddressDescription|array|Zend\Mail\AddressList|Traversable
$emailOrAddressList, null|string $name)
Overwrite the address list in the Reply-To recipients.
Implements a fluent interface.
addReplyTo addReplyTo(string|AddressDescription|array|Zend\Mail\AddressList|Traversable
$emailOrAddressOrList, null|string $name)
Add one or more addresses to the Reply-To recipients.
Implements a fluent interface.
replyTo replyTo()
Access the address list of the Reply-To header
Lazy-loads a Zend\Mail\AddressList and populates the Reply-To header if not previously done.
Returns a Zend\Mail\AddressList instance.
setSender setSender(mixed $emailOrAddress, mixed $name)
Set the message envelope Sender header.
Implements a fluent interface.
getSender getSender()
Retrieve the sender address, if any.
Returns null or a Zend\Mail\AddressDescription instance.
setSubject setSubject(string $subject)
Set the message subject header value.
Implements a fluent interface.

197.4. Available Methods 975

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

getSubject getSubject()
Get the message subject header value.
Returns null or a string.
setBody setBody(null|string|Zend\Mime\Message|object $body)
Set the message body.
Implements a fluent interface.
getBody getBody()
Return the currently set message body.
Returns null, a string, or an object.
getBodyText getBodyText()
Get the string-serialized message body text.
Returns null or a string.
toString toString()
Serialize to string.
Returns string.

197.5 Examples

Please see the Quick Start section.

976 Chapter 197. Zend\Mail\Message

 CHAPTER 198

Zend\Mail\Transport

198.1 Overview

Transports take care of the actual delivery of mail. Typically, you only need to worry about two possibilities: using
PHPs native mail() functionality, which uses system resources to deliver mail, or using the SMTP protocol for
delivering mail via a remote server. Zend Framework also includes a File transport, which creates a mail file for
each message sent; these can later be introspected as logs or consumed for the purposes of sending via an alternate
transport mechanism later.
The Zend\Mail\Transport interface defines exactly one method, send(). This method accepts a
Zend\Mail\Message instance, which it then introspects and serializes in order to send.

198.2 Quick Start

Using a mail transport is typically as simple as instantiating it, optionally configuring it, and then passing a message
to it.

198.2.1 Sendmail Transport Usage

1 use Zend\Mail\Message;
2 use Zend\Mail\Transport\Sendmail as SendmailTransport;
3

4 $message = new Message();

5 $message->addTo('[email protected]')
6 ->addFrom('[email protected]')
7 ->setSubject('Greetings and Salutations!')
8 ->setBody("Sorry, I'm going to be late today!");
9

10 $transport = new SendmailTransport();

11 $transport->send($message);

198.2.2 SMTP Transport Usage

1 use Zend\Mail\Message;
2 use Zend\Mail\Transport\Smtp as SmtpTransport;
3 use Zend\Mail\Transport\SmtpOptions;
4

977
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

5 $message = new Message();

6 $message->addTo('[email protected]')
7 ->addFrom('[email protected]')
8 ->setSubject('Greetings and Salutations!')
9 ->setBody("Sorry, I'm going to be late today!");
10

11 // Setup SMTP transport using LOGIN authentication

12 $transport = new SmtpTransport();
13 $options = new SmtpOptions(array(
14 'name' => 'localhost.localdomain',
15 'host' => '127.0.0.1',
16 'connection_class' => 'login',
17 'connection_config' => array(
18 'username' => 'user',
19 'password' => 'pass',
20 ),
21 ));
22 $transport->setOptions($options);
23 $transport->send($message);

198.2.3 File Transport Usage

1 use Zend\Mail\Message;
2 use Zend\Mail\Transport\File as FileTransport;
3 use Zend\Mail\Transport\FileOptions;
4

5 $message = new Message();

6 $message->addTo('[email protected]')
7 ->addFrom('[email protected]')
8 ->setSubject('Greetings and Salutations!')
9 ->setBody("Sorry, I'm going to be late today!");
10

11 // Setup File transport

12 $transport = new FileTransport();
13 $options = new FileOptions(array(
14 'path' => 'data/mail/',
15 'callback' => function (FileTransport $transport) {
16 return 'Message_' . microtime(true) . '_' . mt_rand() . '.txt';
17 },
18 ));
19 $transport->setOptions($options);
20 $transport->send($message);

198.2.4 InMemory Transport Usage

1 use Zend\Mail\Message;
2 use Zend\Mail\Transport\InMemory as InMemoryTransport;
3

4 $message = new Message();

5 $message->addTo('[email protected]')
6 ->addFrom('[email protected]')
7 ->setSubject('Greetings and Salutations!')
8 ->setBody("Sorry, I'm going to be late today!");
9

10 // Setup InMemory transport

978 Chapter 198. Zend\Mail\Transport

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

11 $transport = new InMemoryTransport();

12 $transport->send($message);
13

14 // Verify the message:

15 $received = $transport->getLastMessage();

The InMemory transport is primarily of interest when in development or when testing.

198.2.5 Migration from 2.0-2.3 to 2.4+

Version 2.4 adds support for PHP 7. In PHP 7, null is a reserved keyword, which required renaming the Null
transport. If you were using the Null transport directly previously, you will now receive an E_USER_DEPRECATED
notice on instantiation. Please update your code to refer to the InMemory class instead.
Users pulling their Null transport instance from the transport factory (Zend\Mail\Transport\Factory) re-
ceive an InMemory instance instead starting in 2.4.0.

198.3 Configuration Options

Configuration options are per transport. Please follow the links below for transport-specific options.
SMTP Transport Options
File Transport Options

198.4 Available Methods

send send(Zend\Mail\Message $message)

Send a mail message.
Returns void

198.5 Examples

Please see the Quick Start section for examples.

198.3. Configuration Options 979

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

980 Chapter 198. Zend\Mail\Transport

 CHAPTER 199

Zend\Mail\Transport\SmtpOptions

199.1 Overview

This document details the various options available to the Zend\Mail\Transport\Smtp mail transport.

199.2 Quick Start

199.2.1 Basic SMTP Transport Usage

1 use Zend\Mail\Transport\Smtp as SmtpTransport;

2 use Zend\Mail\Transport\SmtpOptions;
3

4 // Setup SMTP transport

5 $transport = new SmtpTransport();
6 $options = new SmtpOptions(array(
7 'name' => 'localhost.localdomain',
8 'host' => '127.0.0.1',
9 'port' => 25,
10 ));
11 $transport->setOptions($options);

199.2.2 SMTP Transport Usage with PLAIN AUTH

1 use Zend\Mail\Transport\Smtp as SmtpTransport;

2 use Zend\Mail\Transport\SmtpOptions;
3

4 // Setup SMTP transport using PLAIN authentication

5 $transport = new SmtpTransport();
6 $options = new SmtpOptions(array(
7 'name' => 'localhost.localdomain',
8 'host' => '127.0.0.1',
9 'connection_class' => 'plain',
10 'connection_config' => array(
11 'username' => 'user',
12 'password' => 'pass',
13 ),
14 ));
15 $transport->setOptions($options);

981
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

199.2.3 SMTP Transport Usage with LOGIN AUTH

1 use Zend\Mail\Transport\Smtp as SmtpTransport;

2 use Zend\Mail\Transport\SmtpOptions;
3

4 // Setup SMTP transport using LOGIN authentication

5 $transport = new SmtpTransport();
6 $options = new SmtpOptions(array(
7 'name' => 'localhost.localdomain',
8 'host' => '127.0.0.1',
9 'connection_class' => 'login',
10 'connection_config' => array(
11 'username' => 'user',
12 'password' => 'pass',
13 ),
14 ));
15 $transport->setOptions($options);

199.2.4 SMTP Transport Usage with CRAM-MD5 AUTH

1 use Zend\Mail\Transport\Smtp as SmtpTransport;

2 use Zend\Mail\Transport\SmtpOptions;
3

4 // Setup SMTP transport using CRAM-MD5 authentication

5 $transport = new SmtpTransport();
6 $options = new SmtpOptions(array(
7 'name' => 'localhost.localdomain',
8 'host' => '127.0.0.1',
9 'connection_class' => 'crammd5',
10 'connection_config' => array(
11 'username' => 'user',
12 'password' => 'pass',
13 ),
14 ));
15 $transport->setOptions($options);

199.2.5 SMTP Transport Usage with PLAIN AUTH over TLS

1 use Zend\Mail\Transport\Smtp as SmtpTransport;

2 use Zend\Mail\Transport\SmtpOptions;
3

4 // Setup SMTP transport using PLAIN authentication over TLS

5 $transport = new SmtpTransport();
6 $options = new SmtpOptions(array(
7 'name' => 'example.com',
8 'host' => '127.0.0.1',
9 'port' => 587, // Notice port change for TLS is 587
10 'connection_class' => 'plain',
11 'connection_config' => array(
12 'username' => 'user',
13 'password' => 'pass',
14 'ssl' => 'tls',
15 ),
16 ));
17 $transport->setOptions($options);

982 Chapter 199. Zend\Mail\Transport\SmtpOptions

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

199.3 Configuration Options

name Name of the SMTP host; defaults to localhost.

host Remote hostname or IP address; defaults to 127.0.0.1.
port Port on which the remote host is listening; defaults to 25.
connection_class Fully-qualified classname or short name resolvable via Zend\Mail\Protocol\SmtpLoader.
Typically, this will be one of smtp, plain, login, or crammd5, and defaults to smtp.
Typically, the connection class should extend the Zend\Mail\Protocol\AbstractProtocol class, and
specifically the SMTP variant.
connection_config Optional associative array of parameters to pass to the connection class in order to configure it.
By default this is empty. For connection classes other than the default, you will typically need to define the
username and password options. For secure connections you will use the ssl => tls and port 587 for
TLS or ssl => ssl and port 465 for SSL.

199.4 Available Methods

getName getName()
Returns the string name of the local client hostname.
setName setName(string $name)
Set the string name of the local client hostname.
Implements a fluent interface.
getConnectionClass getConnectionClass()
Returns a string indicating the connection class name to use.
setConnectionClass setConnectionClass(string $connectionClass)
Set the connection class to use.
Implements a fluent interface.
getConnectionConfig getConnectionConfig()
Get configuration for the connection class.
Returns array.
setConnectionConfig setConnectionConfig(array $config)
Set configuration for the connection class. Typically, if using anything other than the default connection class,
this will be an associative array with the keys username and password.
Implements a fluent interface.
getHost getHost()
Returns a string indicating the IP address or host name of the SMTP server via which to send messages.
setHost setHost(string $host)
Set the SMTP host name or IP address.
Implements a fluent interface.

199.3. Configuration Options 983

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

getPort getPort()
Retrieve the integer port on which the SMTP host is listening.
setPort setPort(int $port)
Set the port on which the SMTP host is listening.
Implements a fluent interface.
__construct __construct(null|array|Traversable $config)
Instantiate the class, and optionally configure it with values provided.

199.5 Examples

Please see the Quick Start for examples.

984 Chapter 199. Zend\Mail\Transport\SmtpOptions

 CHAPTER 200

Zend\Mail\Transport\FileOptions

200.1 Overview

This document details the various options available to the Zend\Mail\Transport\File mail transport.

200.2 Quick Start

1 use Zend\Mail\Transport\File as FileTransport;
2 use Zend\Mail\Transport\FileOptions;
3

4 // Setup File transport

5 $transport = new FileTransport();
6 $options = new FileOptions(array(
7 'path' => 'data/mail/',
8 'callback' => function (FileTransport $transport) {
9 return 'Message_' . microtime(true) . '_' . mt_rand() . '.txt';
10 },
11 ));
12 $transport->setOptions($options);

200.3 Configuration Options

path The path under which mail files will be written.

callback A PHP callable to be invoked in order to generate a unique name for a message file. By default, the following
is used:
1 function (Zend\Mail\FileTransport $transport) {
2 return 'ZendMail_' . time() . '_' . mt_rand() . '.tmp';
3 }

200.4 Available Methods

Zend\Mail\Transport\FileOptions extends Zend\Stdlib\AbstractOptions, and inherits all func-

tionality from that class; this includes property overloading. Additionally, the following explicit setters and getters are
provided.

985
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

setPath setPath(string $path)

Set the path under which mail files will be written.
Implements fluent interface.
getPath getPath()
Get the path under which mail files will be written.
Returns string
setCallback setCallback(Callable $callback)
Set the callback used to generate unique filenames for messages.
Implements fluent interface.
getCallback getCallback()
Get the callback used to generate unique filenames for messages.
Returns PHP callable argument.
__construct __construct(null|array|Traversable $config)
Initialize the object. Allows passing a PHP array or Traversable object with which to populate the instance.

200.5 Examples

Please see the Quick Start for examples.

986 Chapter 200. Zend\Mail\Transport\FileOptions

 CHAPTER 201

Introduction to Zend\Math

Zend\Math namespace provides general mathematical functions. So far the supported functionalities are:
Zend\Math\Rand, a random number generator;
Zend\Math\BigInteger, a library to manage big integers.
We expect to add more functionalities in the future.

201.1 Random number generator

Zend\Math\Rand implements a random number generator that is able to generate random numbers for general
purpose usage and for cryptographic scopes. To generate good random numbers this component uses the OpenSSL and
the Mcrypt extension of PHP. If you dont have the OpenSSL or the Mcrypt extension installed in your environment the
component will use the mt_rand function of PHP as fallback. The mt_rand is not considered secure for cryptographic
purpose, that means if you will try to use it to generate secure random number the class will throw an exception.
In particular, the algorithm that generates random bytes in Zend\Math\Rand tries to call the
openssl_random_pseudo_bytes function of the OpenSSL extension if installed. If the OpenSSL extension is
not present in the system the algorithm tries to use the the mcrypt_create_iv function of the Mcrypt extension (using
the MCRYPT_DEV_URANDOM parameter). Finally, if the OpenSSL and Mcrypt are not installed the generator uses
the mt_rand function of PHP.
The Zend\Math\Rand class offers the following methods to generate random values:
getBytes($length, $strong = false) to generate a random set of $length bytes;
getBoolean($strong = false) to generate a random boolean value (true or false);
getInteger($min, $max, $strong = false) to generate a random integer between $min and
$max;
getFloat($strong = false) to generate a random float number between 0 and 1;
getString($length, $charlist = null, $strong = false) to generate a random string of
$length characters using the alphabet $charlist (if not provided the default alphabet is the Base64).
In all these methods the parameter $strong specify the usage of a strong random number generator. We suggest to
set the $strong to true if you need to generate random number for cryptographic and security implementation.
If $strong is set to true and you try to generate random values in a PHP environment without the OpenSSL and the
Mcrypt extensions the component will throw an Exception.
Below we reported an example on how to generate random data using Zend\Math\Rand.

987
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1 use Zend\Math\Rand;
2

3 $bytes = Rand::getBytes(32, true);

4 printf("Random bytes (in Base64): %s\n", base64_encode($bytes));
5

6 $boolean = Rand::getBoolean();
7 printf("Random boolean: %s\n", $boolean ? 'true' : 'false');
8

9 $integer = Rand::getInteger(0,1000);
10 printf("Random integer in [0-1000]: %d\n", $integer);
11

12 $float = Rand::getFloat();
13 printf("Random float in [0-1): %f\n", $float);
14

15 $string = Rand::getString(32, 'abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz', true);

16 printf("Random string in latin alphabet: %s\n", $string);

201.2 Big integers

Zend\Math\BigInteger\BigInteger offers a class to manage arbitrary length integer. PHP supports integer
numbers with a maximum value of PHP_INT_MAX. If you need to manage integers bigger than PHP_INT_MAX you
have to use external libraries or PHP extensions like GMP or BC Math.
Zend\Math\BigInteger\BigInteger is able to manage big integers using the GMP or the BC Math exten-
sions as adapters.
The mathematical functions implemented in Zend\Math\BigInteger\BigInteger are:
add($leftOperand, $rightOperand), add two big integers;
sub($leftOperand, $rightOperand), subtract two big integers;
mul($leftOperand, $rightOperand), multiply two big integers;
div($leftOperand, $rightOperand), divide two big integers (this method returns only integer part
of result);
pow($operand, $exp), raise a big integers to another;
sqrt($operand), get the square root of a big integer;
abs($operand), get the absolute value of a big integer;
mod($leftOperand, $modulus), get modulus of a big integer;
powmod($leftOperand, $rightOperand, $modulus), raise a big integer to another, reduced by a
specified modulus;
comp($leftOperand, $rightOperand), compare two big integers, returns < 0 if leftOperand is less
than rightOperand; > 0 if leftOperand is greater than rightOperand, and 0 if they are equal;
intToBin($int, $twoc = false), convert big integer into its binary number representation;
binToInt($bytes, $twoc = false), convert binary number into big integer;
baseConvert($operand, $fromBase, $toBase = 10), convert a number between arbitrary
bases;
Below is reported an example using the BC Math adapter to calculate the sum of two integer random numbers with
100 digits.

988 Chapter 201. Introduction to Zend\Math

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1 use Zend\Math\BigInteger\BigInteger;
2 use Zend\Math\Rand;
3

4 $bigInt = BigInteger::factory('bcmath');
5

6 $x = Rand::getString(100,'0123456789');
7 $y = Rand::getString(100,'0123456789');
8

9 $sum = $bigInt->add($x, $y);

10 $len = strlen($sum);
11

12 printf("%{$len}s +\n%{$len}s =\n%s\n%s\n", $x, $y, str_repeat('-', $len), $sum);

As you can see in the code the big integers are managed using strings. Even the result of the sum is represented as a
string.
Below is reported another example using the BC Math adapter to generate the binary representation of a negative big
integer of 100 digits.
1 use Zend\Math\BigInteger\BigInteger;
2 use Zend\Math\Rand;
3

4 $bigInt = BigInteger::factory('bcmath');
5

6 $digit = 100;
7 $x = '-' . Rand::getString($digit,'0123456789');
8

9 $byte = $bigInt->intToBin($x);
10

11 printf("The binary representation of the big integer with $digit digit:\n%s\nis (in Base64 format): %
12 $x, base64_encode($byte));
13 printf("Length in bytes: %d\n", strlen($byte));
14

15 $byte = $bigInt->intToBin($x, true);

16

17 printf("The two's complement binary representation of the big integer with $digit digit:\n%s\nis (in
18 $x, base64_encode($byte));
19 printf("Length in bytes: %d\n", strlen($byte));

We generated the binary representation of the big integer number using the default binary format and the twos com-
plement representation (specified with the true parameter in the intToBin function).

201.2. Big integers 989

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

990 Chapter 201. Introduction to Zend\Math

 CHAPTER 202

Overview

202.1 Introduction

The Zend\Memory component is intended to manage data in an environment with limited memory.
Memory objects (memory containers) are generated by memory manager by request and transparently swapped/loaded
when its necessary.
For example, if creating or loading a managed object would cause the total memory usage to exceed the limit you
specify, some managed objects are copied to cache storage outside of memory. In this way, the total memory used by
managed objects does not exceed the limit you need to enforce.
The memory manager uses ZendCache backends as storage providers.

Using ZendMemory component

Zend\Memory\Memory::factory() instantiates the memory manager class with specified backend options.
1 $backendOptions = array(
2 'cache_dir' => './tmp/' // Directory where to put the swapped memory blocks
3 );
4

5 $memoryManager = Zend\Memory\Memory::factory('File', $backendOptions);

6

7 $loadedFiles = array();
8

9 for ($count = 0; $count < 10000; $count++) {

10 $f = fopen($fileNames[$count], 'rb');
11 $data = fread($f, filesize($fileNames[$count]));
12 $fclose($f);
13

14 $loadedFiles[] = $memoryManager->create($data);
15 }
16

17 echo $loadedFiles[$index1]->value;
18

19 $loadedFiles[$index2]->value = $newValue;
20

21 $loadedFiles[$index3]->value[$charIndex] = '_';

991
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

202.2 Theory of Operation

Zend\Memory component operates with the following concepts:

Memory manager
Memory container
Locked memory object
Movable memory object

202.2.1 Memory manager

The memory manager generates memory objects (locked or movable) by request of user application and returns them
wrapped into a memory container object.

202.2.2 Memory container

The memory container has a virtual or actual value attribute of string type. This attribute contains the data value
specified at memory object creation time.
You can operate with this value attribute as an object property:
1 $memObject = $memoryManager->create($data);
2

3 echo $memObject->value;
4

5 $memObject->value = $newValue;
6

7 $memObject->value[$index] = '_';
8

9 echo ord($memObject->value[$index1]);
10

11 $memObject->value = substr($memObject->value, $start, $length);

Note: If you are using a PHP version earlier than 5.2, use the getRef() method instead of accessing the value property
directly.

202.2.3 Locked memory

Locked memory objects are always stored in memory. Data stored in locked memory are never swapped to the cache
backend.

202.2.4 Movable memory

Movable memory objects are transparently swapped and loaded to/from the cache backend by Zend\Memory when
its necessary.
The memory manager doesnt swap objects with size less than the specified minimum, due to performance considera-
tions. See this section for more details.

992 Chapter 202. Overview

 CHAPTER 203

Memory Manager

203.1 Creating a Memory Manager

You can create new a memory manager (Zend\Memory\MemoryManager object) using its construc-
tor: Zend\Memory\MemoryManager::__construct(Zend\Cache\Storage\StorageInterface
$cache = null).
1 $cache = Zend\Cache\StorageFactory::factory(array(
2 'adapter' => array(
3 'name' => 'Filesystem',
4 'options' => array(
5 'cache_dir' => './tmp/', // Directory where to put the swapped memory blocks
6 ),
7 ),
8 ));
9

10 $memoryManager = new Zend\Memory\MemoryManager($cache);

Zend\Memory\MemoryManager uses ZendCache storage adapters to cache memory blocks; if no cache instance
is provided the system temporary directory is used.
1 $memoryManager = new Zend\Memory\MemoryManager();

This is useful if you know that memory is not limited or the overall size of objects never reaches the memory limit.

203.2 Managing Memory Objects

This section describes creating and destroying objects in the managed memory, and settings to control memory man-
ager behavior.

203.2.1 Creating Movable Objects

Create movable objects (objects, which may be swapped) using the Zend\Memory\MemoryManager::create([$data])
method:
1 $memObject = $memoryManager->create($data);

The $data argument is optional and used to initialize the object value. If the $data argument is omitted, the value
is an empty string.

993
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

203.2.2 Creating Locked Objects

Create locked objects (objects, which are not swapped) using the Zend\Memory\MemoryManager::createLocked([$data])
method:
1 $memObject = $memoryManager->createLocked($data);

The $data argument is optional and used to initialize the object value. If the $data argument is omitted, the value
is an empty string.

203.2.3 Destroying Objects

Memory objects are automatically destroyed and removed from memory when they go out of scope:
1 function foo()
2 {
3 global $memoryManager, $memList;
4

5 ...
6

7 $memObject1 = $memoryManager->create($data1);
8 $memObject2 = $memoryManager->create($data2);
9 $memObject3 = $memoryManager->create($data3);
10

11 ...
12

13 $memList[] = $memObject3;
14

15 ...
16

17 unset($memObject2); // $memObject2 is destroyed here

18

19 ...
20 // $memObject1 is destroyed here
21 // but $memObject3 object is still referenced by $memList
22 // and is not destroyed
23 }

This applies to both movable and locked objects.

203.3 Memory Manager Settings

203.3.1 Memory Limit

Memory limit is a number of bytes allowed to be used by loaded movable objects.

If loading or creation of an object causes memory usage to exceed of this limit, then the memory manager swaps some
other objects.
You can retrieve or set the memory limit setting using the getMemoryLimit() and
setMemoryLimit($newLimit) methods:
1 $oldLimit = $memoryManager->getMemoryLimit(); // Get memory limit in bytes
2 $memoryManager->setMemoryLimit($newLimit); // Set memory limit in bytes

994 Chapter 203. Memory Manager

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

A negative value for memory limit means no limit.

The default value is two-thirds of the value of memory_limit in php.ini or no limit (-1) if memory_limit is not set
in php.ini.

203.3.2 MinSize

MinSize is a minimal size of memory objects, which may be swapped by memory manager. The memory manager
does not swap objects that are smaller than this value. This reduces the number of swap/load operations.
You can retrieve or set the minimum size using the getMinSize() and setMinSize($newSize) methods:
1 $oldMinSize = $memoryManager->getMinSize(); // Get MinSize in bytes
2 $memoryManager->setMinSize($newSize); // Set MinSize limit in bytes

The default minimum size value is 16KB (16384 bytes).

203.3. Memory Manager Settings 995

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

996 Chapter 203. Memory Manager

 CHAPTER 204

Memory Objects

204.1 Movable

Create movable memory objects using the create([$data]) method of the memory manager:
1 $memObject = $memoryManager->create($data);

Movable means that such objects may be swapped and unloaded from memory and then loaded when application
code accesses the object.

204.2 Locked

Create locked memory objects using the createLocked([$data]) method of the memory manager:
1 $memObject = $memoryManager->createLocked($data);

Locked means that such objects are never swapped and unloaded from memory.
Locked objects provides the same interface as movable objects (Zend\Memory\Container\Interface). So
locked object can be used in any place instead of movable objects.
Its useful if an application or developer can decide, that some objects should never be swapped, based on performance
considerations.
Access to locked objects is faster, because the memory manager doesnt need to track changes for these objects.
The locked objects class (Zend\Memory\Container\Locked) guarantees virtually the same performance as
working with a string variable. The overhead is a single dereference to get the class property.

204.3 Memory container value property

Use the memory container (movable or locked) value property to operate with memory object data:
1 $memObject = $memoryManager->create($data);
2

3 echo $memObject->value;
4

5 $memObject->value = $newValue;
6

7 $memObject->value[$index] = '_';

997
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

9 echo ord($memObject->value[$index1]);
10

11 $memObject->value = substr($memObject->value, $start, $length);

An alternative way to access memory object data is to use the getRef() method. This method must be used for PHP
versions before 5.2. It also may have to be used in some other cases for performance reasons.

204.4 Memory container interface

Memory container provides the following methods:

204.4.1 getRef() method

1 public function &getRef();

The getRef() method returns reference to the object value.

Movable objects are loaded from the cache at this moment if the object is not already in memory. If the object is
loaded from the cache, this might cause swapping of other objects if the memory limit would be exceeded by having
all the managed objects in memory.
The getRef() method must be used to access memory object data for PHP versions before 5.2.
Tracking changes to data needs additional resources. The getRef() method returns reference to string, which is
changed directly by user application. So, its a good idea to use the getRef() method for value data processing:
1 $memObject = $memoryManager->create($data);
2

3 $value = &$memObject->getRef();
4

5 for ($count = 0; $count < strlen($value); $count++) {

6 $char = $value[$count];
7 ...
8 }

204.4.2 touch() method

1 public function touch();

The touch() method should be used in common with getRef(). It signals that object value has been changed:
1 $memObject = $memoryManager->create($data);
2 ...
3

4 $value = &$memObject->getRef();
5

6 for ($count = 0; $count < strlen($value); $count++) {

7 ...
8 if ($condition) {
9 $value[$count] = $char;
10 }
11 ...
12 }

998 Chapter 204. Memory Objects

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

13

14 $memObject->touch();

204.4.3 lock() method

1 public function lock();

The lock() methods locks object in memory. It should be used to prevent swapping of some objects you choose.
Normally, this is not necessary, because the memory manager uses an intelligent algorithm to choose candidates for
swapping. But if you exactly know, that at this part of code some objects should not be swapped, you may lock them.
Locking objects in memory also guarantees that reference returned by the getRef() method is valid until you unlock
the object:
1 $memObject1 = $memoryManager->create($data1);
2 $memObject2 = $memoryManager->create($data2);
3 ...
4

5 $memObject1->lock();
6 $memObject2->lock();
7

8 $value1 = &$memObject1->getRef();
9 $value2 = &$memObject2->getRef();
10

11 for ($count = 0; $count < strlen($value2); $count++) {

12 $value1 .= $value2[$count];
13 }
14

15 $memObject1->touch();
16 $memObject1->unlock();
17 $memObject2->unlock();

204.4.4 unlock() method

1 public function unlock();

unlock() method unlocks object when its no longer necessary to be locked. See the example above.

204.4.5 isLocked() method

1 public function isLocked();

The isLocked() method can be used to check if object is locked. It returns TRUE if the object is locked, or FALSE
if it is not locked. This is always TRUE for locked objects, and may be either TRUE or FALSE for movable
objects.

204.4. Memory container interface 999

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1000 Chapter 204. Memory Objects

 CHAPTER 205

Zend\Mime

205.1 Introduction

Zend\Mime\Mime is a support class for handling multipart MIME messages. It is used by Zend\Mail and
Zend\Mime\Message and may be used by applications requiring MIME support.

205.2 Static Methods and Constants

Zend\Mime\Mime provides a simple set of static helper methods to work with MIME:
Zend\Mime\Mime::isPrintable(): Returns TRUE if the given string contains no unprintable charac-
ters, FALSE otherwise.
Zend\Mime\Mime::encode(): Encodes a string with specified encoding.
Zend\Mime\Mime::encodeBase64(): Encodes a string into base64 encoding.
Zend\Mime\Mime::encodeQuotedPrintable(): Encodes a string with the quoted-printable mecha-
nism.
Zend\Mime\Mime::encodeBase64Header(): Encodes a string into base64 encoding for Mail Headers.
Zend\Mime\Mime::encodeQuotedPrintableHeader(): Encodes a string with the quoted-printable
mechanism for Mail Headers.
Zend\Mime\Mime defines a set of constants commonly used with MIME messages:
Zend\Mime\Mime::TYPE_OCTETSTREAM: application/octet-stream
Zend\Mime\Mime::TYPE_TEXT: text/plain
Zend\Mime\Mime::TYPE_HTML: text/html
Zend\Mime\Mime::ENCODING_7BIT: 7bit
Zend\Mime\Mime::ENCODING_8BIT: 8bit
Zend\Mime\Mime::ENCODING_QUOTEDPRINTABLE: quoted-printable
Zend\Mime\Mime::ENCODING_BASE64: base64
Zend\Mime\Mime::DISPOSITION_ATTACHMENT: attachment
Zend\Mime\Mime::DISPOSITION_INLINE: inline
Zend\Mime\Mime::MULTIPART_ALTERNATIVE: multipart/alternative

1001
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Zend\Mime\Mime::MULTIPART_MIXED: multipart/mixed
Zend\Mime\Mime::MULTIPART_RELATED: multipart/related

205.3 Instantiating Zend\Mime

When instantiating a Zend\Mime\Mime object, a MIME boundary is stored that is used for all subsequent non-static
method calls on that object. If the constructor is called with a string parameter, this value is used as a MIME boundary.
If not, a random MIME boundary is generated during construction time.
A Zend\Mime\Mime object has the following methods:
boundary(): Returns the MIME boundary string.
boundaryLine(): Returns the complete MIME boundary line.
mimeEnd(): Returns the complete MIME end boundary line.

1002 Chapter 205. Zend\Mime

 CHAPTER 206

Zend\Mime\Message

206.1 Introduction

Zend\Mime\Message represents a MIME compliant message that can contain one or more separate Parts (Rep-
resented as Zend\Mime\Part objects). With Zend\Mime\Message, MIME compliant multipart messages can be
generated from Zend\Mime\Part objects. Encoding and Boundary handling are handled transparently by the
class. Zend\Mime\Message objects can also be reconstructed from given strings. Used by Zend\Mail.

206.2 Instantiation

There is no explicit constructor for Zend\Mime\Message.

206.3 Adding MIME Parts

Zend\Mime\Part Objects can be added to a given Zend\Mime\Message object by calling ->addPart($part)

An array with all Zend\Mime\Part objects in the Zend\Mime\Message is returned from the method getParts().
The Zend\Mime\Part objects can then be changed since they are stored in the array as references. If parts are
added to the array or the sequence is changed, the array needs to be given back to the Zend\Mime\Part object by
calling setParts($partsArray).
The function isMultiPart() will return TRUE if more than one part is registered with the
Zend\Mime\Message object and thus the object would generate a Multipart-Mime-Message when generat-
ing the actual output.

206.4 Boundary handling

Zend\Mime\Message usually creates and uses its own Zend\Mime\Mime Object to generate a boundary.
If you need to define the boundary or want to change the behaviour of the Zend\Mime\Mime object used
by Zend\Mime\Message, you can instantiate the Zend\Mime\Mime class yourself and then register it to
Zend\Mime\Message. Usually you will not need to do this. setMime(Zend\Mime\Mime $mime) sets a
special instance of Zend\Mime\Mime to be used by this Zend\Mime\Message.
getMime() returns the instance of Zend\Mime\Mime that will be used to render the message when
generateMessage() is called.
generateMessage() renders the Zend\Mime\Message content to a string.

1003
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

206.5 Parsing a string to create a Zend\Mime\Message object

A given MIME compliant message in string form can be used to reconstruct a Zend\Mime\Message object from
it. Zend\Mime\Message has a static factory Method to parse this String and return a Zend\Mime\Message
object.
Zend\Mime\Message::createFromMessage($str, $boundary) decodes the given string and returns a
Zend\Mime\Message object that can then be examined using getParts()

206.6 Available methods

A Zend\Mime\Message object has the following methods:

getParts: Get the all Zend\Mime\Parts in the message.
setParts($parts): Set the array of Zend\Mime\Parts for the message.
addPart(Zend\Mime\Part $part): Append a new Zend\Mime\Part to the message.
isMultiPart: Check if the message needs to be sent as a multipart MIME message.
setMime(Zend\Mime\Mime $mime): Set a custom Zend\Mime\Mime object for the message.
getMime: Get the Zend\Mime\Mime object for the message.
generateMessage($EOL=Zend\Mime\Mime::LINEEND): Generate a MIME-compliant message
from the current configuration.
getPartHeadersArray($partnum): Get the headers of a given part as an array.
getPartHeaders($partnum,$EOL=Zend\Mime\Mime::LINEEND): Get the headers of a given part
as a string.
getPartContent($partnum,$EOL=Zend\Mime\Mime::LINEEND): Get the encoded content of a
given part as a string.

1004 Chapter 206. Zend\Mime\Message

 CHAPTER 207

Zend\Mime\Part

207.1 Introduction

This class represents a single part of a MIME message. It contains the actual content of the message part plus informa-
tion about its encoding, content type and original filename. It provides a method for generating a string from the stored
data. Zend\Mime\Part objects can be added to Zend\Mime\Message to assemble a complete multipart message.

207.2 Instantiation

Zend\Mime\Part is instantiated with a string that represents the content of the new part. The type is assumed to
be OCTET-STREAM, encoding is 8Bit. After instantiating a Zend\Mime\Part, meta information can be set by
accessing its attributes directly:
1 public $type = Zend\Mime\Mime::TYPE_OCTETSTREAM;
2 public $encoding = Zend\Mime\Mime::ENCODING_8BIT;
3 public $id;
4 public $disposition;
5 public $filename;
6 public $description;
7 public $charset;
8 public $boundary;
9 public $location;
10 public $language;

207.3 Methods for rendering the message part to a string

getContent() returns the encoded content of the Zend\Mime\Part as a string using the encoding specified
in the attribute $encoding. Valid values are ZendMimeMime::ENCODING_*. Characterset conversions are not
performed.
getHeaders() returns the Mime-Headers for the Zend\Mime\Part as generated from the information in the
publicly accessible attributes. The attributes of the object need to be set correctly before this method is called.
$charset has to be set to the actual charset of the content if it is a text type (Text or HTML).
$id may be set to identify a content-id for inline images in a HTML mail.
$filename contains the name the file will get when downloading it.

1005
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

$disposition defines if the file should be treated as an attachment or if it is used inside the (HTML-) mail
(inline).
$description is only used for informational purposes.
$boundary defines string as boundary.
$location can be used as resource URI that has relation to the content.
$language defines languages in the content.

207.4 Available methods

A Zend\Mime\Part object has the following methods:

isStream: Check if this Zend\Mime\Part can be read as a stream.
getEncodedStream: If this Zend\Mime\Part was created with a stream, return a filtered stream for
reading the content. Useful for large file attachments.
getContent($EOL=Zend\Mime\Mime::LINEEND): Get the content of the current
Zend\Mime\Part in the given encoding.
getRawContent: Get the raw, unencoded for the current Zend\Mime\Part.
getHeadersArray($EOL=Zend\Mime\Mime::LINEEND): Create and return the array of headers for
the current Zend\Mime\Part.
getHeaders($EOL=Zend\Mime\Mime::LINEEND): Return the headers for the current
Zend\Mime\Part as a string.

1006 Chapter 207. Zend\Mime\Part

 CHAPTER 208

Introduction to the Module System

Zend Framework 2.0 introduces a new and powerful approach to modules. This new module system is designed with
flexibility, simplicity, and re-usability in mind. A module may contain just about anything: PHP code, including MVC
functionality; library code; view scripts; and/or public assets such as images, CSS, and JavaScript. The possibilities
are endless.

Note: The module system in ZF2 has been designed to be a generic and powerful foundation from which developers
and other projects can build their own module or plugin systems.
For a better understanding of the event-driven concepts behind the ZF2 module system, it may be helpful to read the
EventManager documentation.

The module system is made up of the following:

The Module Autoloader - Zend\Loader\ModuleAutoloader is a specialized autoloader that is responsi-
ble for the locating and loading of modules Module classes from a variety of sources.
The Module Manager - Zend\ModuleManager\ModuleManager simply takes an array of module names
and fires a sequence of events for each one, allowing the behavior of the module system to be defined entirely
by the listeners which are attached to the module manager.
ModuleManager Listeners - Event listeners can be attached to the module managers various events. These
listeners can do everything from resolving and loading modules to performing complex initialization tasks and
introspection into each returned module object.

Note: The name of a module in a typical Zend Framework 2 application is simply a PHP namespace and must follow
all of the same rules for naming.

The recommended structure of a typical MVC-oriented ZF2 module is as follows:

module_root/
Module.php
autoload_classmap.php
autoload_function.php
autoload_register.php
config/
module.config.php
public/
images/
css/
js/
src/
<module_namespace>/

1007
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

<code files>
test/
phpunit.xml
bootstrap.php
<module_namespace>/
<test code files>
view/
<dir-named-after-module-namespace>/
<dir-named-after-a-controller>/
<.phtml files>

208.1 The autoload_*.php Files

The three autoload_*.php files are not required, but recommended. They provide the following:
autoload_classmap.php should return an array classmap of class name/filename pairs (with the filenames
resolved via the __DIR__ magic constant).
autoload_function.php should return a PHP callback that can be passed to
spl_autoload_register(). Typically, this callback should utilize the map returned by
autoload_classmap.php.
autoload_register.php should register a PHP callback (typically that returned by
autoload_function.php with spl_autoload_register().
The purpose of these three files is to provide reasonable default mechanisms for autoloading the classes contained in
the module, thus providing a trivial way to consume the module without requiring Zend\ModuleManager (e.g.,
for use outside a ZF2 application).

1008 Chapter 208. Introduction to the Module System

 CHAPTER 209

The Module Manager

The module manager, Zend\ModuleManager\ModuleManager, is a very simple class which is responsible for
iterating over an array of module names and triggering a sequence of events for each. Instantiation of module classes,
initialization tasks, and configuration are all performed by attached event listeners.

209.1 Module Manager Events

The Module Manager events are defined in Zend\ModuleManager\ModuleEvent.

Events triggered by Zend\ModuleManager\ModuleManager

loadModules (ModuleEvent::EVENT_LOAD_MODULES) This event is primarily used internally to help encap-

sulate the work of loading modules in event listeners, and allow the loadModules.post event to be more user-
friendly. Internal listeners will attach to this event with a negative priority instead of loadModules.post so that
users can safely assume things like config merging have been done once loadModules.post is triggered, without
having to worry about priorities at all.
loadModule.resolve (ModuleEvent::EVENT_LOAD_MODULE_RESOLVE) Triggered for each module that is
to be loaded. The listener(s) to this event are responsible for taking a module name and resolving it
to an instance of some class. The default module resolver shipped with ZF2 simply looks for the class
{modulename}\Module, instantiating and returning it if it exists.
The name of the module may be retrieved by listeners using the getModuleName() method of the Event
object; a listener should then take that name and resolve it to an object instance representing the given module.
Multiple listeners can be attached to this event, and the module manager will trigger them in order of their
priority until one returns an object. This allows you to attach additional listeners which have alternative methods
of resolving modules from a given module name.
loadModule (ModuleEvent::EVENT_LOAD_MODULE) Once a module resolver listener has resolved the module
name to an object, the module manager then triggers this event, passing the newly created object to all listeners.
mergeConfig (ModuleEvent::EVENT_MERGE_CONFIG) After all modules have been loaded, the
mergeConfig event is triggered. By default, Zend\ModuleManager\Listener\ConfigLister
listens on this event at priority 1000, and merges all configuration. You may attach additional listeners to this
event in order to manipulate the merged configuration. See the tutorial on manipulating merged configuration
for more information.
loadModules.post (ModuleEvent::EVENT_LOAD_MODULES_POST) This event is triggered by the module
manager to allow any listeners to perform work after every module has finished loading. For example, the default
configuration listener, Zend\ModuleManager\Listener\ConfigListener (covered later), attaches

1009
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

to this event to merge additional user-supplied configuration which is meant to override the default supplied
configurations of installed modules.

209.2 Module Manager Listeners

By default, Zend Framework provides several useful module manager listeners.

Provided Module Manager Listeners

Zend\ModuleManager\Listener\DefaultListenerAggregate To help simplify the most common use case of the

module manager, ZF2 provides this default aggregate listener. In most cases, this will be the only listener you
will need to attach to use the module manager, as it will take care of properly attaching the requisite listeners
(those listed below) for the module system to function properly.
Zend\ModuleManager\Listener\AutoloaderListener This listener checks each module to see if it has imple-
mented Zend\ModuleManager\Feature\AutoloaderProviderInterface or simply defined the
getAutoloaderConfig() method. If so, it calls the getAutoloaderConfig() method on the module
class and passes the returned array to Zend\Loader\AutoloaderFactory.
Zend\ModuleManager\Listener\ModuleDependencyCheckerListener This listener checks each module to
verify if all the modules it depends on were loaded. When a module class implements
Zend\ModuleManager\Feature\DependencyIndicatorInterface or simply has a defined
getModuleDependencies() method, the listener will call getModuleDependencies(). Each of
the values returned by the method is checked against the loaded modules list: if one of the values is not in that
list, a Zend\ModuleManager\Exception\MissingDependencyModuleException is be thrown.
Zend\ModuleManager\Listener\ConfigListener If a module class has a getConfig() method, or implements
Zend\ModuleManager\Feature\ConfigProviderInterface, this listener will call it and merge
the returned array (or Traversable object) into the main application configuration.
Zend\ModuleManager\Listener\InitTrigger If a module class either implements
Zend\ModuleManager\Feature\InitProviderInterface, or simply defines an init() method,
this listener will call init() and pass the current instance of Zend\ModuleManager\ModuleManager
as the sole parameter.
Like the OnBootstrapListener, the init() method is called for every module implementing this fea-
ture, on every page request and should only be used for performing lightweight tasks such as registering event
listeners.
Zend\ModuleManager\Listener\LocatorRegistrationListener If a module class implements
Zend\ModuleManager\Feature\LocatorRegisteredInterface, this listener will inject
the module class instance into the ServiceManager using the module class name as the service name. This
allows you to later retrieve the module class from the ServiceManager.
Zend\ModuleManager\Listener\ModuleResolverListener This is the default module resolver. It attaches to the
loadModule.resolve event and simply returns an instance of {moduleName}\Module.
Zend\ModuleManager\Listener\OnBootstrapListener If a module class implements
Zend\ModuleManager\Feature\BootstrapListenerInterface, or simply defines an
onBootstrap() method, this listener will register the onBootstrap() method with the
Zend\Mvc\Application bootstrap event. This method will then be triggered during the bootstrap
event (and passed an MvcEvent instance).
Like the InitTrigger, the onBootstrap() method is called for every module implementing this feature,
on every page request, and should only be used for performing lightweight tasks such as registering event
listeners.

1010 Chapter 209. The Module Manager

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Zend\ModuleManager\Listener\ServiceListener If a module class implements

Zend\ModuleManager\Feature\ServiceProviderInterface, or simply defines an
getServiceConfig() method, this listener will call that method and aggregate the return values for
use in configuring the ServiceManager.
The getServiceConfig() method may return either an array of configuration compatible with
Zend\ServiceManager\Config, an instance of that class, or the string name of a class that ex-
tends it. Values are merged and aggregated on completion, and then merged with any configuration
from the ConfigListener falling under the service_manager key. For more information, see the
ServiceManager documentation.
Unlike the other listeners, this listener is not managed by the DefaultListenerAggregate; instead, it is
created and instantiated within the Zend\Mvc\Service\ModuleManagerFactory, where it is injected
with the current ServiceManager instance before being registered with the ModuleManager events.
Additionally, this listener manages a variety of plugin managers, including view helpers, controllers, and con-
troller plugins. In each case, you may either specify configuration to define plugins, or provide configuration
via a Module class. Configuration follows the same format as for the ServiceManager. The following
table outlines the plugin managers that may be configured this way (including the ServiceManager), the
configuration key to use, the ModuleManager feature interface to optionally implement (all interfaces speci-
fied live in the Zend\ModuleManager\Feature namespace) , and the module method to optionally define
to provide configuration.
Plugin Manager Config Key Interface Module Method
Zend\Mvc\Controller\ControllerManager
controllers ControllerProviderInterface
getControllerConfig
Zend\Mvc\Controller\PluginManager
controller_plugins
ControllerPluginProviderInterface
getControllerPluginConfig
Zend\Filter\FilterPluginManager
filters FilterProviderInterface
getFilterConfig
Zend\Form\FormElementManager
form_elements
FormElementProviderInterface
getFormElementConfig
Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator\HydratorPluginManager
hydrators HydratorProviderInterface
getHydratorConfig
Zend\InputFilter\InputFilterPluginManager
input_filters
InputFilterProviderInterface
getInputFilterConfig
Zend\Mvc\Router\RoutePluginManager
route_manager
RouteProviderInterface
getRouteConfig
Zend\Serializer\AdapterPluginManager
serializers SerializerProviderInterface
getSerializerConfig
Zend\ServiceManager\ServiceManager
service_manager
ServiceProviderInterface
getServiceConfig
Zend\Validator\ValidatorPluginManager
validators ValidatorProviderInterface
getValidatorConfig
Zend\View\HelperPluginManager
view_helpersViewHelperProviderInterface
getViewHelperConfig
Zend\Log\ProcessorPluginManager
log_processors
LogProcessorProviderInterface
getLogProcessorConfig
Zend\Log\WriterPluginManager
log_writers LogWriterProviderInterface
getLogWriterConfig
Configuration follows the examples in the ServiceManager configuration section. As a brief recap, the following
configuration keys and values are allowed:
Config Key Allowed values
services service name/instance pairs (these should likely be defined only in Module classes)
invokables service name/class name pairs of classes that may be invoked without constructor
arguments
factories service names pointing to factories. Factories may be any PHP callable, or a string class
name of a class implementing Zend\ServiceManager\FactoryInterface, or of
a class implementing the __invoke method (if a callable is used, it should be defined
only in Module classes)
array of either concrete instances of
abstract_factories
Zend\ServiceManager\AbstractFactoryInterface, or string class names
of classes implementing that interface (if an instance is used, it should be defined only in
Module classes)
initializersarray of PHP callables or string class names of classes implementing
Zend\ServiceManager\InitializerInterface (if a callable is used, it should
be defined only in Module classes)

209.2. Module Manager Listeners 1011

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

When working with plugin managers, you will be passed the plugin manager instance to factories, abstract facto-
ries, and initializers. If you need access to the application services, you can use the getServiceLocator()
method, as in the following example:
1 public function getViewHelperConfig()
2 {
3 return array('factories' => array(
4 'foo' => function ($helpers) {
5 $services = $helpers->getServiceLocator();
6 $someService = $services->get('SomeService');
7 $helper = new Helper\Foo($someService);
8

9 return $helper;
10 },
11 ));
12 }

This is a powerful technique, as it allows your various plugins to remain agnostic with regards to where and how
dependencies are injected, and thus allows you to use Inversion of Control principals even with plugins.

1012 Chapter 209. The Module Manager

 CHAPTER 210

The Module Class

By default, the Zend Framework 2 module system simply expects each module name
to be capable of resolving to an object instance. The default module resolver,
Zend\ModuleManager\Listener\ModuleResolverListener, simply instantiates an instance of
{moduleName}\Module for each enabled module.

210.1 A Minimal Module

As an example, provided the module name MyModule, Zend\ModuleManager\Listener\ModuleResolverListener

will simply expect the class MyModule\Module to be available. It relies on a registered autoloader (typically
Zend\Loader\ModuleAutoloader) to find and include the MyModule\Module class if it isnt already
available.
The directory structure of a module named MyModule might start out looking something like this:
MyModule/
Module.php

Within Module.php, you define your MyModule\Module class:

1 namespace MyModule;
2

3 class Module
4 {
5 }

Though it will not serve any purpose at this point, this MyModule module now has everything required to be
considered a valid module and to be loaded by the module system!
This Module class serves as the single entry point for ModuleManager listeners to interact with a module. From
within this simple - yet powerful - class, modules can override or provide additional application configuration, perform
initialization tasks such as registering autoloader(s), services and event listeners, declaring dependencies, and much
more.

210.2 A Typical Module Class

The following example shows a more typical usage of the Module class:

1013
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1 namespace MyModule;
2

3 class Module
4 {
5 public function getAutoloaderConfig()
6 {
7 return array(
8 'Zend\Loader\ClassMapAutoloader' => array(
9 __DIR__ . '/autoload_classmap.php',
10 ),
11 'Zend\Loader\StandardAutoloader' => array(
12 'namespaces' => array(
13 __NAMESPACE__ => __DIR__ . '/src/' . __NAMESPACE__,
14 ),
15 ),
16 );
17 }
18

19 public function getConfig()

20 {
21 return include __DIR__ . '/config/module.config.php';
22 }
23 }

For a list of the provided module manager listeners and the interfaces and methods that Module classes may imple-
ment in order to interact with the module manager and application, see the module manager listeners and the module
mananger events documentations.

210.3 The loadModules.post Event

It is not safe for a module to assume that any other modules have already been loaded at the time init() method is
called. If your module needs to perform any actions after all other modules have been loaded, the module managers
loadModules.post event makes this easy.

Note: For more information on methods like init() and getConfig(), refer to the module manager listeners
documentation.

210.3.1 Sample Usage of loadModules.post Event

1 use Zend\EventManager\EventInterface as Event;

2 use Zend\ModuleManager\ModuleManager;
3

4 class Module
5 {
6 public function init(ModuleManager $moduleManager)
7 {
8 // Remember to keep the init() method as lightweight as possible
9 $events = $moduleManager->getEventManager();
10 $events->attach('loadModules.post', array($this, 'modulesLoaded'));
11 }
12

13 public function modulesLoaded(Event $e)

14 {

1014 Chapter 210. The Module Class

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

15 // This method is called once all modules are loaded.

16 $moduleManager = $e->getTarget();
17 $loadedModules = $moduleManager->getLoadedModules();
18 // To get the configuration from another module named 'FooModule'
19 $config = $moduleManager->getModule('FooModule')->getConfig();
20 }
21 }

Note: The init() method is called for every module implementing this feature, on every page request, and should
only be used for performing lightweight tasks such as registering event listeners.

210.4 The MVC bootstrap Event

If you are writing an MVC-oriented module for Zend Framework 2, you may need access to additional parts
of the application in your Module class such as the instance of Zend\Mvc\Application or its registered
ServiceManager instance. For this, you may utilize the MVC bootstrap event. The bootstrap event is trig-
gered after the loadModule.post event, once $application->bootstrap() is called.

210.4.1 Sample Usage of the MVC bootstrap Event

1 use Zend\EventManager\EventInterface as Event;

2

3 class Module
4 {
5 public function onBootstrap(Event $e)
6 {
7 // This method is called once the MVC bootstrapping is complete
8 $application = $e->getApplication();
9 $services = $application->getServiceManager();
10 }
11 }

Note: The onBootstrap() method is called for every module implementing this feature, on every page request,
and should only be used for performing lightweight tasks such as registering event listeners.

210.4. The MVC bootstrap Event 1015

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1016 Chapter 210. The Module Class

 CHAPTER 211

The Module Autoloader

Zend Framework 2 ships with the default module autoloader Zend\Loader\ModuleAutoloader. It is a spe-
cialized autoloader responsible for locating and on-demand loading of, the Module classes from a variety of sources.

211.1 Module Autoloader Usage

By default, the provided Zend\ModuleManager\Listener\DefaultListenerAggregate sets up the

ModuleAutoloader; as a developer, you need only provide an array of module paths, either absolute
or relative to the applications root, for the ModuleAutoloader to check when loading modules. The
DefaultListenerAggregate will take care of instantiating and registering the ModuleAutoloader for you.

Note: In order for paths relative to your application directory to work, you must have the directive
chdir(dirname(__DIR__)); in your public/index.php file.

Registering module paths with the DefaultListenerAggregate

The following example will search for modules in three different module_paths. Two are local directories of this
application and the third is a system-wide shared directory.
1 // public/index.php
2 use Zend\ModuleManager\Listener;
3 use Zend\ModuleManager\ModuleManager;
4

5 chdir(dirname(__DIR__));
6

7 // Instantiate and configure the default listener aggregate

8 $listenerOptions = new Listener\ListenerOptions(array(
9 'module_paths' => array(
10 './module',
11 './vendor',
12 '/usr/share/zfmodules',
13 )
14 ));
15 $defaultListeners = new Listener\DefaultListenerAggregate($listenerOptions);
16

17 // Instantiate the module manager

18 $moduleManager = new ModuleManager(array(
19 'Application',
20 'FooModule',

1017
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

21 'BarModule',
22 ));
23

24 // Attach the default listener aggregate and load the modules

25 $moduleManager->getEventManager()->attachAggregate($defaultListeners);
26 $moduleManager->loadModules();

Note: Module paths behave very similar to PHPs include_path and are searched in the order they are defined.
If you have modules with the same name in more than one registered module path, the module autoloader will return
the first one it finds.

211.2 Non-Standard / Explicit Module Paths

Sometimes you may want to specify exactly where a module is instead of having
Zend\Loader\ModuleAutoloader try to find it in the registered paths.

Registering a Non-Standard / Explicit Module Path

In this example, the autoloader will first check for MyModule\Module in

/path/to/mymoduledir-v1.2/Module.php. If its not found, then it will fall back to searching any
other registered module paths.
1 // ./public/index.php
2 use Zend\Loader\ModuleAutoloader;
3 use Zend\ModuleManager\Listener;
4 use Zend\ModuleManager\ModuleManager;
5

6 chdir(dirname(__DIR__));
7

8 // Instantiate and configure the default listener aggregate

9 $listenerOptions = new Listener\ListenerOptions(array(
10 'module_paths' => array(
11 './module',
12 './vendor',
13 '/usr/share/zfmodules',
14 'MyModule' => '/path/to/mymoduledir-v1.2',
15 )
16 ));
17 $defaultListeners = new Listener\DefaultListenerAggregate($listenerOptions);
18

19 /**
20 * Without DefaultListenerAggregate:
21 *
22 * $moduleAutoloader = new ModuleAutoloader(array(
23 * './module',
24 * './vendor',
25 * '/usr/share/zfmodules',
26 * 'MyModule' => '/path/to/mymoduledir-v1.2',
27 * ));
28 * $moduleAutoloader->register();
29 *
30 */
31

1018 Chapter 211. The Module Autoloader

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

32 // Instantiate the module manager

33 $moduleManager = new ModuleManager(array(
34 'MyModule',
35 'FooModule',
36 'BarModule',
37 ));
38

39 // Attach the default listener aggregate and load the modules

40 $moduleManager->getEventManager()->attachAggregate($defaultListeners);
41 $moduleManager->loadModules();

This same method works if you provide the path to a phar archive.

211.3 Packaging Modules with Phar

If you prefer, you may easily package your module as a phar archive. The module autoloader is able to autoload
modules in the following archive formats: .phar, .phar.gz, .phar.bz2, .phar.tar, .phar.tar.gz, .phar.tar.bz2, .phar.zip, .tar,
.tar.gz, .tar.bz2, and .zip.
The easiest way to package your module is to simply tar the module directory. You can then replace the MyModule/
directory with MyModule.tar, and it should still be autoloaded without any additional changes!

Note: If possible, avoid using any type of compression (bz2, gz, zip) on your phar archives, as it introduces unneces-
sary CPU overhead to each request.

211.3. Packaging Modules with Phar 1019

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1020 Chapter 211. The Module Autoloader

 CHAPTER 212

Best Practices when Creating Modules

When creating a ZF2 module, there are some best practices you should keep in mind.

212.1 Keep the init() and onBootstrap() methods lightweight

Be conservative with the actions you perform in the init() and onBootstrap() methods of your Module class.
These methods are run for every page request, and should not perform anything heavy. As a rule of thumb, registering
event listeners is an appropriate task to perform in these methods. Such lightweight tasks will generally not have a
measurable impact on the performance of your application, even with many modules enabled. It is considered bad
practice to utilize these methods for setting up or configuring instances of application resources such as a database
connection, application logger, or mailer. Tasks such as these are better served through the ServiceManager
capabilities of Zend Framework 2.

212.2 Do not perform writes within a module

You should never code your module to perform or expect any writes within the modules directory. Once installed,
the files within a modules directory should always match the distribution verbatim. Any user-provided configuration
should be performed via overrides in the Application module or via application-level configuration files. Any other
required filesystem writes should be performed in some writeable path that is outside of the modules directory.
There are two primary advantages to following this rule. First, any modules which attempt to write within themselves
will not be compatible with phar packaging. Second, by keeping the module in sync with the upstream distribution,
updates via mechanisms such as Git will be simple and trouble-free. Of course, the Application module is a special
exception to this rule, as there is typically no upstream distribution for this module, and its unlikely you would want
to run this package from within a phar archive.

212.3 Utilize a vendor prefix for module names

To avoid module naming conflicts, you are encouraged to prefix your module namespace with a vendor prefix. As
an example, the (incomplete) developer tools module distributed by Zend is named ZendDeveloperTools instead of
simply DeveloperTools.

1021
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

212.4 Utilize a module prefix for service names

If you define services in the top-level Service Manager, you are encouraged to prefix these services with the name of
your module to avoid conflicts with other modules services. For example, the database adapter used by MyModule
should be called MyModuleDbAdapter rather than simply DbAdapter. If you need to share a service with other
modules, remember that the Service Manager alias feature can be used in a merged configuration to override factories
defined by individual modules. Ideally, modules should define their own service dependencies, but aliases can be
configured at the application level to ensure that common services in individual modules all refer to the same instance.

1022 Chapter 212. Best Practices when Creating Modules

 CHAPTER 213

Introduction to the MVC Layer

Zend\Mvc is a brand new MVC implementation designed from the ground up for Zend Framework 2, focusing on
performance and flexibility.
The MVC layer is built on top of the following components:
Zend\ServiceManager - Zend Framework provides a set of default service definitions set up at
Zend\Mvc\Service. The ServiceManager creates and configures your application instance and work-
flow.
Zend\EventManager - The MVC is event driven. This component is used everywhere from initial boot-
strapping of the application, through returning response and request calls, to setting and retrieving routes and
matched routes, as well as render views.
Zend\Http - specifically the request and response objects, used within:
Zend\Stdlib\DispatchableInterface. All controllers are simply dispatchable objects.
Within the MVC layer, several sub-components are exposed:
Zend\Mvc\Router contains classes pertaining to routing a request. In other words, it matches the request to
its respective controller (or dispatchable).
Zend\Http\PhpEnvironment provides a set of decorators for the HTTP Request and Response ob-
jects that ensure the request is injected with the current environment (including query parameters, POST param-
eters, HTTP headers, etc.)
Zend\Mvc\Controller, a set of abstract controller classes with basic responsibilities such as event
wiring, action dispatching, etc.
Zend\Mvc\Service provides a set of ServiceManager factories and definitions for the default applica-
tion workflow.
Zend\Mvc\View provides default wiring for renderer selection, view script resolution, helper registration,
and more; additionally, it provides a number of listeners that tie into the MVC workflow, providing features
such as automated template name resolution, automated view model creation and injection, and more.
The gateway to the MVC is the Zend\Mvc\Application object (referred to as Application henceforth). Its primary
responsibilities are to bootstrap resources, route the request, and to retrieve and dispatch the controller matched
during routing. Once accomplished, it will render the view, and finish the request, returning and sending the response.

213.1 Basic Application Structure

The basic application structure follows:

1023
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

application_root/
config/
application.config.php
autoload/
global.php
local.php
// etc.
data/
module/
vendor/
public/
.htaccess
index.php
init_autoloader.php

The public/index.php marshalls all user requests to your website, retrieving an array of configuration located
in config/application.config.php. On return, it run()s the Application, processing the request and
returning a response to the user.
The config directory as described above contains configuration used by the Zend\ModuleManager to load
modules and merge configuration (e.g., database configuration and credentials); we will detail this more later.
The vendor sub-directory should contain any third-party modules or libraries on which your application depends.
This might include Zend Framework, custom libraries from your organization, or other third-party libraries from other
projects. Libraries and modules placed in the vendor sub-directory should not be modified from their original,
distributed state.
Finally, the module directory will contain one or more modules delivering your applications functionality.
Lets now turn to modules, as they are the basic units of a web application.

213.2 Basic Module Structure

A module may contain anything: PHP code, including MVC functionality; library code; view scripts; and/or or public
assets such as images, CSS, and JavaScript. The only requirement and even this is optional is that a module acts as
a PHP namespace and that it contains a Module.php class under that namespace. This class is eventually consumed
by Zend\ModuleManager to perform a number of tasks.
The recommended module structure follows:
module_root<named-after-module-namespace>/
Module.php
autoload_classmap.php
autoload_function.php
autoload_register.php
config/
module.config.php
public/
images/
css/
js/
src/
<module_namespace>/
<code files>
test/
phpunit.xml
bootstrap.php

1024 Chapter 213. Introduction to the MVC Layer

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

<module_namespace>/
<test code files>
view/
<dir-named-after-module-namespace>/
<dir-named-after-a-controller>/
<.phtml files>

Since a module acts as a namespace, the module root directory should be that namespace. This namespace could also
include a vendor prefix of sorts. As an example a module centered around User functionality delivered by Zend
might be named ZendUser, and this is also what the module root directory will be named.
The Module.php file directly under the module root directory will be in the module namespace shown below.
1 namespace ZendUser;
2

3 class Module
4 {
5 }

When an init() method is defined, this method will be triggered by a Zend\ModuleManager listener when it
loads the module class, and passed an instance of the manager by default. This allows you to perform tasks such as
setting up module-specific event listeners. But be cautious, the init() method is called for every module on every
page request and should only be used for performing lightweight tasks such as registering event listeners. Similarly,
an onBootstrap() method (which accepts an MvcEvent instance) may be defined; it is also triggered for every
page request, and should be used for lightweight tasks as well.
The three autoload_*.php files are not required, but recommended. They provide the following:

Table 213.1: autoload_*.php Files

File Description
Should return an array classmap of class name/filename pairs (with the filenames resolved via
autoload_classmap.php
the __DIR__ magic constant).
Should return a PHP callback that can be passed to spl_autoload_register().
autoload_function.php
Typically, this callback should utilize the map returned by autoload_classmap.php.
should register a PHP callback (is typically returned by autoload_function.php with
autoload_register.php
spl_autoload_register().
The point of these three files is to provide reasonable default mechanisms for autoloading the classes contained in the
module, thus providing a trivial way to consume the module without requiring Zend\ModuleManager (e.g., for
use outside a ZF2 application).
The config directory should contain any module-specific configuration. These files may be in any format
Zend\Config supports. We recommend naming the main configuration module.format, and for PHP-based con-
figuration, module.config.php. Typically, you will create configuration for the router as well as for the dependency
injector.
The src directory should be a PSR-0 compliant directory structure with your modules source code. Typically, you
should at least have one sub-directory named after your module namespace; however, you can ship code from multiple
namespaces if desired.
The test directory should contain your unit tests. Typically, these are written using PHPUnit, and contain artifacts
related to its configuration (e.g., phpunit.xml, bootstrap.php).
The public directory can be used for assets that you may want to expose in your applications document root. These
might include images, CSS files, JavaScript files, etc. How these are exposed is left to the developer.
The view directory contains view scripts related to your controllers.

213.2. Basic Module Structure 1025

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

213.3 Bootstrapping an Application

The Application has six basic dependencies.

configuration, usually an array or object implementing Traversable.
ServiceManager instance.
EventManager instance, which, by default, is pulled from the ServiceManager, by the service name
EventManager.
ModuleManager instance, which, by default, is pulled from the ServiceManager, by the service name
ModuleManager.
Request instance, which, by default, is pulled from the ServiceManager, by the service name Request.
Response instance, which, by default, is pulled from the ServiceManager, by the service name Response.
These may be satisfied at instantiation:
1 use Zend\EventManager\EventManager;
2 use Zend\Http\PhpEnvironment;
3 use Zend\ModuleManager\ModuleManager;
4 use Zend\Mvc\Application;
5 use Zend\ServiceManager\ServiceManager;
6

7 $config = include 'config/application.config.php';

8

9 $serviceManager = new ServiceManager();

10 $serviceManager->setService('EventManager', new EventManager());
11 $serviceManager->setService('ModuleManager', new ModuleManager($config));
12 $serviceManager->setService('Request', new PhpEnvironment\Request());
13 $serviceManager->setService('Response', new PhpEnvironment\Response());
14

15 $application = new Application($config, $serviceManager);

Once youve done this, there are two additional actions you can take. The first is to bootstrap the application. In the
default implementation, this does the following:
Attaches the default route listener (Zend\Mvc\RouteListener).
Attaches the default dispatch listener (Zend\Mvc\DispatchListener).
Attaches the ViewManager listener (Zend\Mvc\View\ViewManager).
Creates the MvcEvent, and injects it with the application, request, and response; it also retrieves the router
(Zend\Mvc\Router\Http\TreeRouteStack) at this time and attaches it to the event.
Triggers the bootstrap event.
If you do not want these actions, or want to provide alternatives, you can do so by extending the Application class
and/or simply coding what actions you want to occur.
The second action you can take with the configured Application is to run() it. Calling this method simply
does the following: it triggers the route event, followed by the dispatch event, and, depending on execution, the
render event; when done, it triggers the finish event, and then returns the response instance. If an error occurs
during either the route or dispatch event, a dispatch.error event is triggered as well.
This is a lot to remember in order to bootstrap the application; in fact, we havent covered all the services available by
default yet. You can greatly simplify things by using the default ServiceManager configuration shipped with the
MVC.

1026 Chapter 213. Introduction to the MVC Layer

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1 use Zend\Loader\AutoloaderFactory;
2 use Zend\Mvc\Service\ServiceManagerConfig;
3 use Zend\ServiceManager\ServiceManager;
4

5 // setup autoloader
6 AutoloaderFactory::factory();
7

8 // get application stack configuration

9 $configuration = include 'config/application.config.php';
10

11 // setup service manager

12 $serviceManager = new ServiceManager(new ServiceManagerConfig());
13 $serviceManager->setService('ApplicationConfig', $configuration);
14

15 // load modules -- which will provide services, configuration, and more

16 $serviceManager->get('ModuleManager')->loadModules();
17

18 // bootstrap and run application

19 $application = $serviceManager->get('Application');
20 $application->bootstrap();
21 $application->run();

You can make this even simpler by using the init() method of the Application. This is a static method for
quick and easy initialization of the Application.
1 use Zend\Loader\AutoloaderFactory;
2 use Zend\Mvc\Application;
3 use Zend\Mvc\Service\ServiceManagerConfig;
4 use Zend\ServiceManager\ServiceManager;
5

6 // setup autoloader
7 AutoloaderFactory::factory();
8

9 // get application stack configuration

10 $configuration = include 'config/application.config.php';
11

12 // The init() method does something very similar with the previous example.
13 Application::init($configuration)->run();

The init() method will basically do the following:

Grabs the application configuration and pulls from the service_manager key, creating a ServiceManager
instance with it and with the default services shipped with Zend\Mvc;
Create a service named ApplicationConfig with the application configuration array;
Grabs the ModuleManager service and load the modules;
bootstrap()s the Application and returns its instance;

Note: If you use the init() method, you cannot specify a service with the name of ApplicationConfig in your
service manager config. This name is reserved to hold the array from application.config.php.
The following services can only be overridden from application.config.php:
ModuleManager
SharedEventManager
EventManager & Zend\EventManager\EventManagerInterface
All other services are configured after module loading, thus can be overridden by modules.

213.3. Bootstrapping an Application 1027

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Youll note that you have a great amount of control over the workflow. Using the ServiceManager, you have
fine-grained control over what services are available, how they are instantiated, and what dependencies are injected
into them. Using the EventManagers priority system, you can intercept any of the application events (bootstrap,
route, dispatch, dispatch.error, render, and finish) anywhere during execution, allowing you to craft your
own application workflows as needed.

213.4 Bootstrapping a Modular Application

While the previous approach largely works, where does the configuration come from? When we create a modular
application, the assumption will be that its from the modules themselves. How do we get that information and
aggregate it, then?
The answer is via Zend\ModuleManager\ModuleManager. This component allows you to specify where mod-
ules exist. Then, it will locate each module and initialize it. Module classes can tie into various listeners on the
ModuleManager in order to provide configuration, services, listeners, and more to the application. Sounds compli-
cated? Its not.

213.4.1 Configuring the Module Manager

The first step is configuring the module manager. Simply inform the module manager which modules to load, and
potentially provide configuration for the module listeners.
Remember the application.config.php from earlier? Were going to provide some configuration.
1 <?php
2 // config/application.config.php
3 return array(
4 'modules' => array(
5 /* ... */
6 ),
7 'module_listener_options' => array(
8 'module_paths' => array(
9 './module',
10 './vendor',
11 ),
12 ),
13 );

As we add modules to the system, well add items to the modules array.
Each Module class that has configuration it wants the Application to know about should define a getConfig()
method. That method should return an array or Traversable object such as Zend\Config\Config. As an
example:
1 namespace ZendUser;
2

3 class Module
4 {
5 public function getConfig()
6 {
7 return include __DIR__ . '/config/module.config.php'
8 }
9 }

1028 Chapter 213. Introduction to the MVC Layer

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

There are a number of other methods you can define for tasks ranging from providing autoloader configuration, to
providing services to the ServiceManager, to listening to the bootstrap event. The ModuleManager documentation
goes into more detail on these.

213.5 Conclusion

The ZF2 MVC layer is incredibly flexible, offering an opt-in, easy to create modular infrastructure, as well as the ability
to craft your own application workflows via the ServiceManager and EventManager. The ModuleManager
is a lightweight and simple approach to enforcing a modular architecture that encourages clean separation of concerns
and code re-use.

213.5. Conclusion 1029

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1030 Chapter 213. Introduction to the MVC Layer

 CHAPTER 214

Quick Start

Now that you have basic knowledge of applications, modules, and how they are each structured, well show you the
easy way to get started.

214.1 Install the Zend Skeleton Application

The easiest way to get started is to grab the sample application and module repositories. This can be done in the
following ways.

214.1.1 Using Composer

Simply clone the ZendSkeletonApplication repository:

1 prompt> git clone git://github.com/zendframework/ZendSkeletonApplication.git my-application

Then run Composers install command to install the ZF library and any other configured dependencies:
1 prompt> php ./composer.phar install

214.1.2 Using Git

Simply clone the ZendSkeletonApplication repository, using the --recursive option, which will also grab
ZF.
1 prompt> git clone --recursive git://github.com/zendframework/ZendSkeletonApplication.git my-applicati

214.1.3 Manual Installation

Download a tarball of the ZendSkeletonApplication repository:

Zip: https://github.com/zendframework/ZendSkeletonApplication/zipball/master
Tarball: https://github.com/zendframework/ZendSkeletonApplication/tarball/master
Deflate the archive you selected and rename the parent directory according to your project needs; we use my-
application throughout this document.
Install Zend Framework, and either have its library on your PHP include_path, symlink the library into
your projects library, or install it directly into your application using Pyrus.

1031
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

214.2 Create a New Module

By default, one module is provided with the ZendSkeletonApplication, named Application. It simply pro-
vides a controller to handle the home page of the application, the layout template, and templates for 404 and error
pages.
Typically, you will not need to touch this other than to provide an alternate entry page for your site and/or alternate
error page.
Additional functionality will be provided by creating new modules.
To get you started with modules, we recommend using the ZendSkeletonModule as a base. Download it from
here:
Zip: https://github.com/zendframework/ZendSkeletonModule/zipball/master
Tarball: https://github.com/zendframework/ZendSkeletonModule/tarball/master
Deflate the package, and rename the directory ZendSkeletonModule to reflect the name of the new module you want
to create; when done, move the module into your new projects module/ directory.
At this point, its time to create some functionality.

214.3 Update the Module Class

Lets update the module class. Well want to make sure the namespace is correct, configuration is enabled and returned,
and that we setup autoloading on initialization. Since were actively working on this module, the class list will be
in flux, we probably want to be pretty lenient in our autoloading approach, so lets keep it flexible by using the
StandardAutoloader. Lets begin.
First, lets have autoload_classmap.php return an empty array:
1 <?php
2 // autoload_classmap.php
3 return array();

Well also edit our config/module.config.php file to read as follows:

1 return array(
2 'view_manager' => array(
3 'template_path_stack' => array(
4 '<module-name>' => __DIR__ . '/../view'
5 ),
6 ),
7 );

Fill in module-name with a lowercased, dash-separated version of your module name e.g., ZendUser would
become zend-user.
Next, edit the Module.php file to read as follows:
1 namespace <your module name here>;
2

3 use Zend\ModuleManager\Feature\AutoloaderProviderInterface;
4 use Zend\ModuleManager\Feature\ConfigProviderInterface;
5

6 class Module implements AutoloaderProviderInterface, ConfigProviderInterface

7 {
8 public function getAutoloaderConfig()

1032 Chapter 214. Quick Start

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

9 {
10 return array(
11 'Zend\Loader\ClassMapAutoloader' => array(
12 __DIR__ . '/autoload_classmap.php',
13 ),
14 'Zend\Loader\StandardAutoloader' => array(
15 'namespaces' => array(
16 __NAMESPACE__ => __DIR__ . '/src/' . __NAMESPACE__,
17 ),
18 ),
19 );
20 }
21

22 public function getConfig()

23 {
24 return include __DIR__ . '/config/module.config.php';
25 }
26 }

At this point, you now have your module configured properly. Lets create a controller!

214.4 Create a Controller

Controllers are simply objects that implement Zend\Stdlib\DispatchableInterface. This means they
need to implement a dispatch() method that takes minimally a Request object as an argument.
In practice, though, this would mean writing logic to branch based on matched routing within every controller. As
such, weve created two base controller classes for you to start with:
Zend\Mvc\Controller\AbstractActionController allows routes to match an action. When
matched, a method named after the action will be called by the controller. As an example, if you had a route
that returned foo for the action key, the fooAction method would be invoked.
Zend\Mvc\Controller\AbstractRestfulController introspects the Request to determine
what HTTP method was used, and calls a method according to that.
GET will call either the getList() method, or, if an id was matched during routing, the get()
method (with that identifer value).
POST will call the create() method, passing in the $_POST values.
PUT expects an id to be matched during routing, and will call the update() method, passing in the
identifier, and any data found in the raw post body.
DELETE expects an id to be matched during routing, and will call the delete() method.
To get started, well simply create a hello world-style controller, with a single action. First, create the directory
src/<module name>/Controller, and then create the file HelloController.php inside it. Edit it in
your favorite text editor or IDE, and insert the following contents:
1 <?php
2 namespace <module name>\Controller;
3

4 use Zend\Mvc\Controller\AbstractActionController;
5 use Zend\View\Model\ViewModel;
6

7 class HelloController extends AbstractActionController

8 {

214.4. Create a Controller 1033

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

9 public function worldAction()

10 {
11 $message = $this->params()->fromQuery('message', 'foo');
12 return new ViewModel(array('message' => $message));
13 }
14 }

So, what are we doing here?

Were creating an action controller.
Were defining an action, world.
Were pulling a message from the query parameters (yes, this is a superbly bad idea in production! Always
sanitize your inputs!).
Were returning a ViewModel with an array of values to be processed later.
We return a ViewModel. The view layer will use this when rendering the view, pulling variables and the template
name from it. By default, you can omit the template name, and it will resolve to lowercase-controller-name/lowercase-
action-name. However, you can override this to specify something different by calling setTemplate() on the
ViewModel instance. Typically, templates will resolve to files with a .phtml suffix in your modules view direc-
tory.
So, with that in mind, lets create a view script.

214.5 Create a View Script

Create the directory view/<module-name>/hello. Inside that directory, create a file named world.phtml.
Inside that, paste in the following:
1 <h1>Greetings!</h1>
2

3 <p>You said "<?php echo $this->escapeHtml($message) ?>".</p>

Thats it. Save the file.

Note: What is the method escapeHtml()? Its actually a view helper, and its designed to help mitigate XSS
attacks. Never trust user input; if you are at all uncertain about the source of a given variable in your view script,
escape it using one of the provided escape view helper depending on the type of data you have.

214.6 View scripts for module names with subnamespaces

As per PSR-0, module should be named following this rule: \<Vendor Name>\(<Namespace>\)* Default
controller class to template mapping does not work very well with those: it will remove subnamespace.
To address that issue new mapping was introduced since 2.3.0. To maintain backwards compatibility that mapping is
not enabled by default. To enable it, you need to add your module namespace to whitelist in your module config:
1 'view_manager' => array(
2 // Controller namespace to template map
3 // or whitelisting for controller FQCN to template mapping
4 'controller_map' => array(
5 '<Module\Name>' => true,

1034 Chapter 214. Quick Start

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

6 ),
7 ),

Now, create the directory view/<module>/<name>/hello. Inside that directory, create a file named
world.phtml. Inside that, paste in the following:
1 <h1>Greetings!</h1>
2

3 <p>You said "<?php echo $this->escapeHtml($message) ?>".</p>

214.7 Create a Route

Now that we have a controller and a view script, we need to create a route to it.

Note: ZendSkeletonApplication ships with a default route that will likely get you to this action. That
route basically expects /{module}/{controller}/{action}, which allows you to specify this: /zend-user/hello/world.
Were going to create a route here mainly for illustration purposes, as creating explicit routes is a recommended
practice. The application will look for a Zend\Mvc\Router\RouteStack instance to setup routing. The default
generated router is a Zend\Mvc\Router\Http\TreeRouteStack.
To use the default route functionality, you will need to have the following route definition in your module. Replace
<module-name> with the name of your module.
1 // module.config.php
2 return array(
3 '<module-name>' => array(
4 'type' => 'Literal',
5 'options' => array(
6 'route' => '/<module-name>',
7 'defaults' => array(
8 'controller' => '<module-namespace>\Controller\Index',
9 'action' => 'index',
10 ),
11 ),
12 'may_terminate' => true,
13 'child_routes' => array(
14 'default' => array(
15 'type' => 'Segment',
16 'options' => array(
17 'route' => '/[:controller[/:action]]',
18 'constraints' => array(
19 'controller' => '[a-zA-Z][a-zA-Z0-9_-]*',
20 'action' => '[a-zA-Z][a-zA-Z0-9_-]*',
21 ),
22 'defaults' => array(
23 ),
24 ),
25 ),
26 ),
27 ),
28 // ... other configuration ...
29 );

Additionally, we need to tell the application we have a controller:

214.7. Create a Route 1035

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1 // module.config.php
2 return array(
3 'controllers' => array(
4 'invokables' => array(
5 '<module-namespace>\Controller\Index' => '<module-namespace>\Controller\IndexControl
6 // Do similar for each other controller in your module
7 ),
8 ),
9 // ... other configuration ...
10 );

Note: We inform the application about controllers we expect to have in the application. This is to prevent somebody
requesting any service the ServiceManager knows about in an attempt to break the application. The dispatcher
uses a special, scoped container that will only pull controllers that are specifically registered with it, either as invokable
classes or via factories.

Open your config/module.config.php file, and modify it to add to the routes and controller parameters
so it reads as follows:
1 return array(
2 'router' => array(
3 'routes' => array(
4 '<module name>-hello-world' => array(
5 'type' => 'Literal',
6 'options' => array(
7 'route' => '/hello/world',
8 'defaults' => array(
9 'controller' => '<module name>\Controller\Hello',
10 'action' => 'world',
11 ),
12 ),
13 ),
14 ),
15 ),
16 'controllers' => array(
17 'invokables' => array(
18 '<module namespace>\Controller\Hello' => '<module namespace>\Controller\HelloController',
19 ),
20 ),
21 // ... other configuration ...
22 );

214.8 Tell the Application About our Module

One problem: we havent told our application about our new module!
By default, modules are not parsed unless we tell the module manager about them. As such, we need to notify the
application about them.
Remember the config/application.config.php file? Lets modify it to add our new module. Once done, it
should read as follows:
1 <?php
2 return array(
3 'modules' => array(
4 'Application',

1036 Chapter 214. Quick Start

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

5 '<module namespace>',
6 ),
7 'module_listener_options' => array(
8 'module_paths' => array(
9 './module',
10 './vendor',
11 ),
12 ),
13 );

Replace <module namespace> with the namespace of your module.

214.9 Test it Out!

Now we can test things out! Create a new vhost pointing its document root to the public directory of your applica-
tion, and fire it up in a browser. You should see the default homepage template of ZendSkeletonApplication.
Now alter the location in your URL to append the path /hello/world, and load the page. You should now get the
following content:
1 <h1>Greetings!</h1>
2

3 <p>You said "foo".</p>

Now alter the location to append ?message=bar and load the page. You should now get:
1 <h1>Greetings!</h1>
2

3 <p>You said "bar".</p>

Congratulations! Youve created your first ZF2 MVC module!

214.9. Test it Out! 1037

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1038 Chapter 214. Quick Start

 CHAPTER 215

Default Services

The default and recommended way to write Zend Framework applications uses a set of services defined in the
Zend\Mvc\Service namespace. This chapter details what each of those services are, the classes they represent,
and the configuration options available.
Many of the services are provided by other components, and the factories and abstract factories themselves are defined
in the individual components. We will cover those factories in this chapter, however, as usage is generally the same
between each.

215.1 Theory of Operation

To allow easy configuration of all the different parts of the MVC system, a somewhat complex set of services and their
factories has been created. Well try to give a simplified explanation of the process.
When a Zend\Mvc\Application is created, a Zend\ServiceManager\ServiceManager object is cre-
ated and configured via Zend\Mvc\Service\ServiceManagerConfig. The ServiceManagerConfig
gets the configuration from application.config.php (or some other application configuration you passed to
the Application when creating it). From all the service and factories provided in the Zend\Mvc\Service
namespace, ServiceManagerConfig is responsible of configuring only three: SharedEventManager,
EventManager, and ModuleManager.
After this, the Application calls for the ModuleManager. At this point, the
ModuleManager further configures the ServiceManager with services and factories provided in
Zend\Mvc\Service\ServiceListenerFactory. This approach allows us to keep the main applica-
tion configuration concise, and to give the developer the power to configure different parts of the MVC system from
within the modules, overriding any default configuration in these MVC services.

215.2 ServiceManager

As a quick review, the following service types may be configured:

Invokable services, which map a service name to a class that has no constructor or a constructor that accepts
no arguments.
Factories, which map a service name to a factory which will create and return an object. A factory receives
the service manager as an argument, and may be any PHP callable, or a class or object that implements
Zend\ServiceManager\FactoryInterface.
Abstract factories, which are factories that can create any number of named services that share the same
instantiation pattern; examples include database adapters, cache adapters, loggers, etc. The factory receives the

1039
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

service manager as an argument, the resolved service name, and the requested service name; it must be a class
or object implementing Zend\ServiceManager\AbstractFactoryInterface. See the section on
abstract factories for configuration information.
Aliases, which alias one service name to another. Aliases can also reference other aliases.
Initializers, which receive the newly created instance and the service manager, and which can be used to per-
form additional initialization tasks. The most common use case is to test the instance against specific Aware
interfaces, and, if matching, inject them with the appropriate service.
Plugin managers, which are specialized service managers used to manage objects that are of a related type,
such as view helpers, controller plugins, controllers, etc. Plugin managers accept configuration just like service
managers, and as such can compose invokable services, factories, abstract factories, aliases, and initializers.
They are also ServiceLocatorAware, and will be injected with the application service manager instance,
giving factories and abstract factories access to application-level services when needed. See the heading Plugin
managers for a list of available plugin managers.
The application service manager is referenced directly during bootstrapping, and has the following services configured
out of the box.
Invokable services
DispatchListener, mapping to Zend\Mvc\DispatchListener.
RouteListener, mapping to Zend\Mvc\RouteListener.
SendResponseListener, mapping to Zend\Mvc\SendResponseListener.
SharedEventManager, mapping to Zend\EventManager\SharedEventManager.
Factories
Application, mapping to Zend\Mvc\Service\ApplicationFactory.
Config, mapping to Zend\Mvc\Service\ConfigFactory. Internally, this pulls the
ModuleManager service, and calls its loadModules() method, and retrieves the merged configu-
ration from the module event. As such, this service contains the entire, merged application configuration.
ControllerManager, mapping to Zend\Mvc\Service\ControllerLoaderFactory. This
creates an instance of Zend\Mvc\Controller\ControllerManager, passing the service man-
ager instance.
Additionally, it uses the DiStrictAbstractServiceFactory service effectively allowing you
to fall back to DI in order to retrieve your controllers. If you want to use Zend\Di to retrieve your
controllers, you must white-list them in your DI configuration under the allowed_controllers key
(otherwise, they will just be ignored).
The ControllerManager will add an initializer that will do the following:

* If the controller implements the Zend\ServiceManager\ServiceLocatorAwareInterface

interface, an instance of the ServiceManager will be injected into it.

* If the controller implements the Zend\EventManager\EventManagerAwareInterface in-

terface, an instance of the EventManager will be injected into it.

* Finally, an initializer will inject it with the ControllerPluginManager service, as long as the
setPluginManager method is implemented.
ControllerPluginManager, mapping to Zend\Mvc\Service\ControllerPluginManagerFactory.
This instantiates the Zend\Mvc\Controller\PluginManager instance, passing it the service
manager instance. It also uses the DiAbstractServiceFactory service effectively allowing you
to fall back to DI in order to retrieve your controller plugins.

1040 Chapter 215. Default Services

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

It registers a set of default controller plugins, and contains an initializer for injecting plugins with the
current controller.
ConsoleAdapter, mapping to Zend\Mvc\Service\ConsoleAdapterFactory. This grabs
the Config service, pulls from the console key, and do the following:

* If the adapter subkey is present, it is used to get the adapter instance, otherwise,
Zend\Console\Console::detectBestAdapter() will be called to configure an adapter
instance.

* If the charset subkey is present, the is used to set the adapter charset.
ConsoleRouter, mapping to Zend\Mvc\Service\RouterFactory. This grabs the
Config service, and pulls from the console key and router subkey, configuring a
Zend\Mvc\Router\Console\SimpleRouteStack instance.
ConsoleViewManager, mapping to Zend\Mvc\Service\ConsoleViewManagerFactory.
This creates and returns an instance of Zend\Mvc\View\Console\ViewManager, which in turn
registers and initializes a number of console-specific view services.
DependencyInjector, mapping to Zend\Mvc\Service\DiFactory. This pulls the Config
service, and looks for a di key; if found, that value is used to configure a new Zend\Di\Di instance.
DiAbstractServiceFactory, mapping to Zend\Mvc\Service\DiAbstractServiceFactoryFactory.
This creates an instance of Zend\ServiceManager\Di\DiAbstractServiceFactory inject-
ing the Di service instance. That instance is attached to the service manager as an abstract factory
effectively enabling DI as a fallback for providing services.
DiServiceInitializer, mapping to Zend\Mvc\Service\DiServiceInitializerFactory.
This creates an instance of Zend\ServiceManager\Di\DiServiceInitializer injecting the
Di service and the service manager itself.
DiStrictAbstractServiceFactory, mapping to Zend\Mvc\Service\DiStrictAbstractServiceFact
This creates an instance of Zend\Mvc\Service\DiStrictAbstractServiceFactoryFactory
injecting the Di service instance.
EventManager, mapping to Zend\Mvc\Service\EventManagerFactory. This factory re-
turns a new instance of Zend\EventManager\EventManager on each request. This service is
not shared by default, allowing the ability to have an EventManager per service, with a shared
SharedEventManager injected in each.
FilterManager, mapping to Zend\Mvc\Service\FilterManagerFactory. This instantiates
the Zend\Filter\FilterPluginManager instance, passing it the service manager instance this
is used to manage filters for the filter chains. It also uses the DiAbstractServiceFactory service
effectively allowing you to fall back to DI in order to retrieve filters.
FormElementManager, mapping to Zend\Mvc\Service\FormElementManagerFactory.
This instantiates the Zend\Form\FormElementManager instance, passing it the service manager
instance this is used to manage form elements. It also uses the DiAbstractServiceFactory ser-
vice effectively allowing you to fall back to DI in order to retrieve form elements.
HttpRouter, mapping to Zend\Mvc\Service\RouterFactory. This grabs the Config ser-
vice, and pulls from the router key, configuring a Zend\Mvc\Router\Http\TreeRouteStack
instance.
HttpViewManager, mapping to Zend\Mvc\Service\HttpViewManagerFactory. This cre-
ates and returns an instance of Zend\Mvc\View\Http\ViewManager, which in turn registers and
initializes a number of HTTP-specific view services.
HydratorManager, mapping to Zend\Mvc\Service\HydratorManagerFactory. This cre-
ates and returns an instance of Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator\HydratorPluginManager, which can

215.2. ServiceManager 1041

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

be used to manage and persist hydrator instances.

InputFilterManager, mapping to Zend\Mvc\Service\InputFilterManagerFactory.
This creates and returns an instance of Zend\InputFilter\InputFilterPluginManager,
which can be used to manage and persist input filter instances.
ModuleManager, mapping to Zend\Mvc\Service\ModuleManagerFactory.
This is perhaps the most complex factory in the MVC stack. It expects that an ApplicationConfig
service has been injected, with keys for module_listener_options and modules; see the quick
start for samples.
It instantiates an instance of Zend\ModuleManager\Listener\DefaultListenerAggregate,
using the module_listener_options retrieved. Checks if a service with the name
ServiceListener exists, otherwise it sets a factory with that name mapping to
Zend\Mvc\Service\ServiceListenerFactory. A bunch of service listeners will be added to
the ServiceListener, like listeners for the getServiceConfig, getControllerConfig,
getControllerPluginConfig, getViewHelperConfig module methods.
Next, it retrieves the EventManager service, and attaches the above listeners.
It instantiates a Zend\ModuleManager\ModuleEvent instance, setting the ServiceManager pa-
rameter to the service manager object.
Finally, it instantiates a Zend\ModuleManager\ModuleManager instance, and injects the
EventManager and ModuleEvent.
MvcTranslator, mapping to Zend\Mvc\Service\TranslatorServiceFactory,
and returning an instance of Zend\Mvc\I18n\Translator, which
extends Zend\I18n\Translator\Translator and implements
Zend\Validator\Translator\TranslatorInterface, allowing the instance to be used
anywhere a translator may be required in the framework.
PaginatorPluginManager, mapping to Zend\Mvc\Service\PaginatorPluginManagerFactory.
This instantiates the Zend\Paginator\AdapterPluginManager instance, passing it
the service manager instance this is used to manage paginator adapters. It also uses the
DiAbstractServiceFactory service effectively allowing you to fall back to DI in order to
retrieve paginator adapters.
Request, mapping to Zend\Mvc\Service\RequestFactory. The factory is used to create and
return a request instance, according to the current environment. If the current environment is cli, it will
create a Zend\Console\Request, or a Zend\Http\PhpEnvironment\Request if the current
environment is HTTP.
Response, mapping to Zend\Mvc\Service\ResponseFactory. The factory is used to create
and return a response instance, according to the current environment. If the current environment is cli, it
will create a Zend\Console\Response, or a Zend\Http\PhpEnvironment\Response if the
current environment is HTTP.
Router, mapping to Zend\Mvc\Service\RouterFactory. If in a console enviroment, this
will behave the same way as the ConsoleRouter service, if not, it will behave the same way as
HttpRouter service.
RoutePluginManager, mapping to Zend\Mvc\Service\RoutePluginManagerFactory.
This instantiates the Zend\Mvc\Router\RoutePluginManager instance, passing it the service
manager instance this is used to manage route types. It also uses the DiAbstractServiceFactory
service effectively allowing you to fall back to DI in order to retrieve route types.
SerializerAdapterManager, mapping to Zend\Mvc\Service\SerializerAdapterPluginManagerFac
which returns an instance of Zend\Serializer\AdapterPluginManager. This is a plugin man-
ager for managing serializer adapter instances.

1042 Chapter 215. Default Services

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

ServiceListener, mapping to Zend\Mvc\Service\ServiceListenerFactory. The fac-

tory is used to instantiate the ServiceListener, while allowing easy extending. It checks
if a service with the name ServiceListenerInterface exists, which must implement
Zend\ModuleManager\Listener\ServiceListenerInterface, before instantiating the de-
fault ServiceListener.
In addition to this, it retrieves the ApplicationConfig and looks for the
service_listener_options key. This allows you to register own listeners for module methods
and configuration keys to create an own service manager; see the application configuration options for
samples.
ValidatorManager, mapping to Zend\Mvc\Service\ValidatorManagerFactory. This
instantiates the Zend\Validator\ValidatorPluginManager instance, passing it the service
manager instance this is used to manage validators. It also uses the DiAbstractServiceFactory
service effectively allowing you to fall back to DI in order to retrieve validators.
ViewFeedRenderer, mapping to Zend\Mvc\Service\ViewFeedRendererFactory, which
returns an instance of Zend\View\Renderer\FeedRenderer, used to render feeds.
ViewFeedStrategy, mapping to Zend\Mvc\Service\ViewFeedStrategyFactory,
which returns an instance of Zend\View\Strategy\FeedStrategy, used to select the
ViewFeedRenderer given the appropriate criteria.
ViewHelperManager, mapping to Zend\Mvc\Service\ViewHelperManagerFactory,
which returns an instance of Zend\View\HelperManager. This is a plugin manager for managing
view helper instances.
ViewJsonRenderer, mapping to Zend\Mvc\Service\ViewJsonRendererFactory, which
returns an instance of Zend\View\Renderer\JsonRenderer, used to render JSON structures.
ViewJsonStrategy, mapping to Zend\Mvc\Service\ViewJsonStrategyFactory,
which returns an instance of Zend\View\Strategy\JsonStrategy, used to select the
ViewJsonRenderer given the appropriate criteria.
ViewManager, mapping to Zend\Mvc\Service\ViewManagerFactory. The factory is
used to create and return a view manager, according to the current environment. If the cur-
rent environment is cli, it will create a Zend\Mvc\View\Console\ViewManager, or a
Zend\Mvc\View\Http\ViewManager if the current environment is HTTP.
ViewResolver, mapping to Zend\Mvc\Service\ViewResolverFactory, which creates and
returns the aggregate view resolver. It also attaches the ViewTemplateMapResolver and
ViewTemplatePathStack services to it.
ViewTemplateMapResolver, mapping to Zend\Mvc\Service\ViewTemplateMapResolverFactory
which creates, configures and returns the Zend\View\Resolver\TemplateMapResolver.
ViewTemplatePathStack, mapping to Zend\Mvc\Service\ViewTemplatePathStackFactory
which creates, configures and returns the Zend\View\Resolver\TemplatePathStack.
Abstract factories
Zend\Cache\Service\StorageCacheAbstractServiceFactory (opt-in; registered by de-
fault in the skeleton application).
Zend\Db\Adapter\AdapterAbstractServiceFactory (opt-in).
Zend\Form\FormAbstractServiceFactory is registered by default.
Zend\Log\LoggerAbstractServiceFactory (opt-in; registered by default in the skeleton appli-
cation).
Aliases

215.2. ServiceManager 1043

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Configuration, mapping to the Config service.

Console, mapping to the ConsoleAdapter service.
Di, mapping to the DependencyInjector service.
Zend\Di\LocatorInterface, mapping to the DependencyInjector service.
Zend\EventManager\EventManagerInterface, mapping to the EventManager service.
This is mainly to ensure that when falling through to DI, classes are still injected via the
ServiceManager.
Zend\Mvc\Controller\PluginManager, mapping to the ControllerPluginManager ser-
vice. This is mainly to ensure that when falling through to DI, classes are still injected via the
ServiceManager.
Zend\View\Resolver\TemplateMapResolver, mapping to the
ViewTemplateMapResolver service.
Zend\View\Resolver\TemplatePathStack, mapping to the ViewTemplatePathStack
service.
Zend\View\Resolver\AggregateResolver, mapping to the ViewResolver service.
Zend\View\Resolver\ResolverInterface, mapping to the ViewResolver service.
Initializers
For objects that implement Zend\EventManager\EventManagerAwareInterface, the
EventManager service will be retrieved and injected. This service is not shared, though each instance
it creates is injected with a shared instance of SharedEventManager.
For objects that implement Zend\ServiceManager\ServiceLocatorAwareInterface, the
ServiceManager will inject itself into the object.
The ServiceManager registers itself as the ServiceManager service, and aliases it-
self to the class names Zend\ServiceManager\ServiceLocatorInterface and
Zend\ServiceManager\ServiceManager.

215.3 Abstract Factories

As noted in the previous section, Zend Framework provides a number of abstract service factories by default. Each is
noted below, along with sample configuration.
In each instance, the abstract factory looks for a top-level configuration key, consisting of key/value pairs where the
key is the service name, and the value is the configuration to use to create the given service.

215.3.1 Zend\Cache\Service\StorageCacheAbstractServiceFactory

This abstract factory is opt-in, but registered by default in the skeleton application. It uses the top-level configuration
key caches.
1 return array(
2 'caches' => array(
3 'Cache\Transient' => array(
4 'adapter' => 'redis',
5 'ttl' => 60,
6 'plugins' => array(
7 'exception_handler' => array(

1044 Chapter 215. Default Services

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

8 'throw_exceptions' => false,

9 ),
10 ),
11 ),
12 'Cache\Persistence' => array(
13 'adapter' => 'filesystem',
14 'ttl' => 86400,
15 ),
16 ),
17 );

See the cache documentation for more configuration options.

215.3.2 Zend\Db\Adapter\AdapterAbstractServiceFactory

This abstract factory is opt-in. It uses the top-level configuration key db, with a subkey adapters.
1 return array(
2 'db' => array('adapters' => array(
3 'Db\ReadOnly' => array(
4 'driver' => 'Pdo_Sqlite',
5 'database' => 'data/db/users.db',
6 ),
7 'Db\Writeable' => array(
8 'driver' => 'Mysqli',
9 'database' => 'users',
10 'username' => 'developer',
11 'password' => 'developer_password',
12 ),
13 )),
14 );

See the DB adapter documentation for more configuration options.

215.3.3 Zend\Form\FormAbstractServiceFactory

This abstract factory is registered by default. It uses the top-level configuration key forms. It makes
use of the FilterManager, FormElementManager, HydratorManager, InputFilterManager, and
ValidatorManager plugin managers in order to allow instantiation and creation of form objects and all related
objects in the form hierarchy.
1 return array(
2 'forms' => array(
3 'Form\Foo' => array(
4 'hydrator' => 'ObjectProperty',
5 'type' => 'Zend\Form\Form',
6 'elements' => array(
7 array(
8 'spec' => array(
9 'type' => 'Zend\Form\Element\Email',
10 'name' => 'email',
11 'options' => array(
12 'label' => 'Your email address',
13 ),
14 ),
15 ),

215.3. Abstract Factories 1045

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

16 ),
17 ),
18 ),
19 );

Form configuration follows the same configuration you would use with a form factory; the primary difference is that
all plugin managers have already been injected for you, allowing you the possibility of custom objects or substitutions.
See the form factory documentation for more configuration options.

215.3.4 Zend\Log\LoggerAbstractServiceFactory

This abstract factory is opt-in, but registered by default in the skeleton application. It uses the top-level configuration
key log.
1 return array(
2 'log' => array(
3 'Log\App' => array(
4 'writers' => array(
5 array(
6 'name' => 'stream',
7 'priority' => 1000,
8 'options' => array(
9 'stream' => 'data/logs/app.log',
10 ),
11 ),
12 ),
13 ),
14 ),
15 );

See the log documentation for more configuration options.

215.4 Plugin Managers

The following plugin managers are configured by default:

ControllerManager, corresponding to Zend\Mvc\Controller\ControllerManager, and used to
manage controller instances.
ControllerPluginManager, corresponding to Zend\Mvc\Controller\PluginManager, and used to
manage controller plugin instances.
FilterManager, corresponding to Zend\Filter\FilterPluginManager, and used to manage filter in-
stances.
FormElementManager, corresponding to Zend\Form\FormElementManager, and used to manage in-
stances of form elements and fieldsets.
HydratorManager, corresponding to Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator\HydratorPluginManager, and used
to manage hydrator instances.
InputFilterManager, corresponding to Zend\InputFilter\InputFilterPluginManager, and
used to manage input filter instances.
RoutePluginManager, corresponding to Zend\Mvc\Router\RoutePluginManager, and used to man-
age route instances.

1046 Chapter 215. Default Services

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

SerializerAdapterManager, corresponding to Zend\Serializer\AdapterPluginManager, and used

to manage serializer instances.
ValidatorManager, corresponding to Zend\Validator\ValidatorPluginManager, and used to
manage validator instances.
ViewHelperManager, corresponding to Zend\View\HelperPluginManager, and used to manage view
helper instances.
As noted in the previous section, all plugin managers share the same configuration and service types as the standard
service manager; they are simply scoped, and only allow instances of certain types to be created or registered. Default
types available are listed in the documentation for each component.

215.5 ViewManager

The View layer within Zend\Mvc consists of a large number of collaborators and event listeners. As such,
Zend\Mvc\View\ViewManager was created to handle creation of the various objects, as well as wiring them
together and establishing event listeners.
The ViewManager itself is an event listener on the bootstrap event. It retrieves the ServiceManager from
the Application object, as well as its composed EventManager.
Configuration for all members of the ViewManager fall under the view_manager configuration key, and expect
values as noted below. The following services are created and managed by the ViewManager:
ViewHelperManager, representing and aliased to Zend\View\HelperPluginManager. It is seeded
with the ServiceManager. Created via the Zend\Mvc\Service\ViewHelperManagerFactory.
The Router service is retrieved, and injected into the Url helper.
If the base_path key is present, it is used to inject the BasePath view helper; otherwise, the Request
service is retrieved, and the value of its getBasePath() method is used.
If the base_path_console key is present, it is used to inject the BasePath view helper for console
requests; otherwise, the Request service is retrieved, and the value of its getBasePath() method is
used. This can be useful for sending urls in emails via a cronjob.
If the doctype key is present, it will be used to set the value of the Doctype view helper.
ViewTemplateMapResolver, representing and aliased to Zend\View\Resolver\TemplateMapResolver.
If a template_map key is present, it will be used to seed the template map.
ViewTemplatePathStack, representing and aliased to Zend\View\Resolver\TemplatePathStack.
If a template_path_stack key is present, it will be used to seed the stack.
If a default_template_suffix key is present, it will be used as the default suffix for template
scripts resolving.
ViewResolver, representing and aliased to Zend\View\Resolver\AggregateResolver and
Zend\View\Resolver\ResolverInterface. It is seeded with the ViewTemplateMapResolver
and ViewTemplatePathStack services as resolvers.
ViewRenderer, representing and aliased to Zend\View\Renderer\PhpRenderer and
Zend\View\Renderer\RendererInterface. It is seeded with the ViewResolver and
ViewHelperManager services. Additionally, the ViewModel helper gets seeded with the ViewModel as
its root (layout) model.
ViewPhpRendererStrategy, representing and aliased to Zend\View\Strategy\PhpRendererStrategy.
It gets seeded with the ViewRenderer service.

215.5. ViewManager 1047

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

View, representing and aliased to Zend\View\View. It gets seeded with the EventManager service, and
attaches the ViewPhpRendererStrategy as an aggregate listener.
DefaultRenderingStrategy, representing and aliased to Zend\Mvc\View\DefaultRenderingStrategy.
If the layout key is present, it is used to seed the strategys layout template. It is seeded with the View
service.
ExceptionStrategy, representing and aliased to Zend\Mvc\View\ExceptionStrategy. If the
display_exceptions or exception_template keys are present, they are used to configure the strat-
egy.
RouteNotFoundStrategy, representing and aliased to Zend\Mvc\View\RouteNotFoundStrategy
and 404Strategy. If the display_not_found_reason or not_found_template keys are present,
they are used to configure the strategy.
ViewModel. In this case, no service is registered; the ViewModel is simply retrieved from the MvcEvent
and injected with the layout template name.
The ViewManager also creates several other listeners, but does not expose them as services; these in-
clude Zend\Mvc\View\CreateViewModelListener, Zend\Mvc\View\InjectTemplateListener,
and Zend\Mvc\View\InjectViewModelListener. These, along with RouteNotFoundStrategy,
ExceptionStrategy, and DefaultRenderingStrategy are attached as listeners either to the application
EventManager instance or the SharedEventManager instance.
Finally, if you have a strategies key in your configuration, the ViewManager will loop over these and at-
tach them in order to the View service as listeners, at a priority of 100 (allowing them to execute before the
DefaultRenderingStrategy).

215.6 Application Configuration Options

The following options may be used to provide initial configuration for the ServiceManager, ModuleManager,
and Application instances, allowing them to then find and aggregate the configuration used for the Config
service, which is intended for configuring all other objects in the system. These configuration directives go to the
config/application.config.php file.
1 <?php
2 return array(
3 // This should be an array of module namespaces used in the application.
4 'modules' => array(
5 ),
6

7 // These are various options for the listeners attached to the ModuleManager
8 'module_listener_options' => array(
9 // This should be an array of paths in which modules reside.
10 // If a string key is provided, the listener will consider that a module
11 // namespace, the value of that key the specific path to that module's
12 // Module class.
13 'module_paths' => array(
14 ),
15

16 // An array of paths from which to glob configuration files after

17 // modules are loaded. These effectively override configuration
18 // provided by modules themselves. Paths may use GLOB_BRACE notation.
19 'config_glob_paths' => array(
20 ),
21

22 // Whether or not to enable a configuration cache.

1048 Chapter 215. Default Services

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

23 // If enabled, the merged configuration will be cached and used in

24 // subsequent requests.
25 'config_cache_enabled' => $booleanValue,
26

27 // The key used to create the configuration cache file name.

28 'config_cache_key' => $stringKey,
29

30 // Whether or not to enable a module class map cache.

31 // If enabled, creates a module class map cache which will be used
32 // by in future requests, to reduce the autoloading process.
33 'module_map_cache_enabled' => $booleanValue,
34

35 // The key used to create the class map cache file name.
36 'module_map_cache_key' => $stringKey,
37

38 // The path in which to cache merged configuration.

39 'cache_dir' => $stringPath,
40

41 // Whether or not to enable modules dependency checking.

42 // Enabled by default, prevents usage of modules that depend on other modules
43 // that weren't loaded.
44 'check_dependencies' => $booleanValue,
45 ),
46

47 // Used to create an own service manager. May contain one or more child arrays.
48 'service_listener_options' => array(
49 array(
50 'service_manager' => $stringServiceManagerName,
51 'config_key' => $stringConfigKey,
52 'interface' => $stringOptionalInterface,
53 'method' => $stringRequiredMethodName,
54 ),
55 )
56

57 // Initial configuration with which to seed the ServiceManager.

58 // Should be compatible with Zend\ServiceManager\Config.
59 'service_manager' => array(
60 ),
61 );

For an example, see the ZendSkeletonApplication configuration file.

215.7 Default Configuration Options

The following options are available when using the default services configured by the ServiceManagerConfig
and ViewManager.
These configuration directives can go to the config/autoload/{{,*.}global,{,*.}local}.php files,
or in the module/<module name>/config/module.config.php configuration files. The merging of these
configuration files is done by the ModuleManager. It first merges each modules module.config.php file, and
then the files in config/autoload (first the *.global.php and then the *.local.php files). The order of the
merge is relevant so you can override a modules configuration with your application configuration. If you have both
a config/autoload/my.global.config.php and config/autoload/my.local.config.php, the
local configuration file overrides the global configuration.

215.7. Default Configuration Options 1049

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Warning: Local configuration files are intended to keep sensitive information, such as database creden-
tials, and as such, it is highly recommended to keep these local configuration files out of your VCS. The
ZendSkeletonApplications config/autoload/.gitignore file ignores *.local.php files by
default.

1 <?php
2 return array(
3 // The following are used to configure controller loader
4 // Should be compatible with Zend\ServiceManager\Config.
5 'controllers' => array(
6 // Map of controller "name" to class
7 // This should be used if you do not need to inject any dependencies
8 // in your controller
9 'invokables' => array(
10 ),
11

12 // Map of controller "name" to factory for creating controller instance

13 // You may provide either the class name of a factory, or a PHP callback.
14 'factories' => array(
15 ),
16 ),
17

18 // The following are used to configure controller plugin loader

19 // Should be compatible with Zend\ServiceManager\Config.
20 'controller_plugins' => array(
21 ),
22

23 // The following are used to configure view helper manager

24 // Should be compatible with Zend\ServiceManager\Config.
25 'view_helpers' => array(
26 ),
27

28 // The following is used to configure a Zend\Di\Di instance.

29 // The array should be in a format that Zend\Di\Config can understand.
30 'di' => array(
31 ),
32

33 // Configuration for the Router service

34 // Can contain any router configuration, but typically will always define
35 // the routes for the application. See the router documentation for details
36 // on route configuration.
37 'router' => array(
38 'routes' => array(
39 ),
40 ),
41

42 // ViewManager configuration
43 'view_manager' => array(
44 // Base URL path to the application
45 'base_path' => $stringBasePath,
46

47 // Doctype with which to seed the Doctype helper

48 'doctype' => $doctypeHelperConstantString, // e.g. HTML5, XHTML1
49

50 // TemplateMapResolver configuration
51 // template/path pairs
52 'template_map' => array(

1050 Chapter 215. Default Services

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

53 ),
54

55 // TemplatePathStack configuration
56 // module/view script path pairs
57 'template_path_stack' => array(
58 ),
59 // Default suffix to use when resolving template scripts, if none, 'phtml' is used
60 'default_template_suffix' => $templateSuffix, // e.g. 'php'
61

62 // Controller namespace to template map

63 // or whitelisting for controller FQCN to template mapping
64 'controller_map' => array(
65 ),
66

67 // Layout template name

68 'layout' => $layoutTemplateName, // e.g. 'layout/layout'
69

70 // ExceptionStrategy configuration
71 'display_exceptions' => $bool, // display exceptions in template
72 'exception_template' => $stringTemplateName, // e.g. 'error'
73

74 // RouteNotFoundStrategy configuration
75 'display_not_found_reason' => $bool, // display 404 reason in template
76 'not_found_template' => $stringTemplateName, // e.g. '404'
77

78 // Additional strategies to attach

79 // These should be class names or service names of View strategy classes
80 // that act as ListenerAggregates. They will be attached at priority 100,
81 // in the order registered.
82 'strategies' => array(
83 'ViewJsonStrategy', // register JSON renderer strategy
84 'ViewFeedStrategy', // register Feed renderer strategy
85 ),
86 ),
87 );

For an example, see the Application module configuration file in the ZendSkeletonApplication.

215.7. Default Configuration Options 1051

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1052 Chapter 215. Default Services

 CHAPTER 216

Routing

Routing is the act of matching a request to a given controller.

Typically, routing will examine the request URI, and attempt to match the URI path segment against provided con-
straints. If the constraints match, a set of matches are returned, one of which should be the controller name to
execute. Routing can utilize other portions of the request URI or environment as well for example, the host or
scheme, query parameters, headers, request method, and more.
Routing has been written from the ground up for Zend Framework 2.0. Execution is quite similar, but the internal
workings are more consistent, performant, and often simpler.

Note: If you are a developer with knowledge of the routing system in Zend Framework 1.x, you should know that
some of the old terminology does not apply in Zend Framework 2.x. In the new routing system we dont have a router
as such, as every route can match and assemble URIs by themselves, which makes them routers, too.
That said, in most cases the developer does not need to worry about this, because Zend Framework 2.x will take care
of this under the hood. The work of the router will be done by Zend\Mvc\Router\SimpleRouteStack or
Zend\Mvc\Router\Http\TreeRouteStack.

The base unit of routing is a Route:

1 namespace Zend\Mvc\Router;
2

3 use Zend\Stdlib\RequestInterface as Request;

4

5 interface RouteInterface
6 {
7 public static function factory(array $options = array());
8 public function match(Request $request);
9 public function assemble(array $params = array(), array $options = array());
10 }

A Route accepts a Request, and determines if it matches. If so, it returns a RouteMatch object:
1 namespace Zend\Mvc\Router;
2

3 class RouteMatch
4 {
5 public function __construct(array $params);
6 public function setMatchedRouteName($name);
7 public function getMatchedRouteName();
8 public function setParam($name, $value);
9 public function getParams();

1053
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

10 public function getParam($name, $default = null);

11 }

Typically, when a Route matches, it will define one or more parameters. These are passed into the RouteMatch,
and objects may query the RouteMatch for their values.
1 $id = $routeMatch->getParam('id', false);
2 if (!$id) {
3 throw new Exception('Required identifier is missing!');
4 }
5 $entity = $resource->get($id);

Usually you will have multiple routes you wish to test against. In order to facilitate this, you will use a route aggregate,
usually implementing RouteStack:
1 namespace Zend\Mvc\Router;
2

3 interface RouteStackInterface extends RouteInterface

4 {
5 public function addRoute($name, $route, $priority = null);
6 public function addRoutes(array $routes);
7 public function removeRoute($name);
8 public function setRoutes(array $routes);
9 }

Typically, routes should be queried in a LIFO order, and hence the reason behind the name RouteStack. Zend
Framework provides two implementations of this interface, SimpleRouteStack and TreeRouteStack. In
each, you register routes either one at a time using addRoute(), or in bulk using addRoutes().
1 // One at a time:
2 $route = Literal::factory(array(
3 'route' => '/foo',
4 'defaults' => array(
5 'controller' => 'foo-index',
6 'action' => 'index',
7 ),
8 ));
9 $router->addRoute('foo', $route);
10

11 // In bulk:
12 $router->addRoutes(array(
13 // using already instantiated routes:
14 'foo' => $route,
15

16 // providing configuration to allow lazy-loading routes:

17 'bar' => array(
18 'type' => 'literal',
19 'options' => array(
20 'route' => '/bar',
21 'defaults' => array(
22 'controller' => 'bar-index',
23 'action' => 'index',
24 ),
25 ),
26 ),
27 ));

1054 Chapter 216. Routing

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

216.1 Router Types

Two routers are provided, the SimpleRouteStack and TreeRouteStack. Each works with the above interface,
but utilize slightly different options and execution paths. By default, the Zend\Mvc uses the TreeRouteStack as
the router.

216.1.1 SimpleRouteStack

This router simply takes individual routes that provide their full matching logic in one go, and loops through them
in LIFO order until a match is found. As such, routes that will match most often should be registered last, and least
common routes first. Additionally, you will need to ensure that routes that potentially overlap are registered such
that the most specific match will match first (i.e., register later). Alternatively, you can set priorities by giving the
priority as third parameter to the addRoute() method, specifying the priority in the route specifications or setting
the priority property within a route instance before adding it to the route stack.

216.1.2 TreeRouteStack

Zend\Mvc\Router\Http\TreeRouteStack provides the ability to register trees of routes, and will use a B-
tree algorithm to match routes. As such, you register a single route with many children.
A TreeRouteStack will consist of the following configuration:
A base route, which describes the base match needed, the root of the tree.
An optional route_plugins, which is a configured Zend\Mvc\Router\RoutePluginManager that can
lazy-load routes.
The option may_terminate, which hints to the router that no other segments will follow it.
An optional child_routes array, which contains additional routes that stem from the base route (i.e., build
from it). Each child route can itself be a TreeRouteStack if desired; in fact, the Part route works exactly
this way.
When a route matches against a TreeRouteStack, the matched parameters from each segment of the tree will be
returned.
A TreeRouteStack can be your sole route for your application, or describe particular path segments of the appli-
cation.
An example of a TreeRouteStack is provided in the documentation of the Part route.

216.2 HTTP Route Types

Zend Framework 2.0 ships with the following HTTP route types.

216.2.1 Zend\Mvc\Router\Http\Hostname

The Hostname route attempts to match the hostname registered in the request against specific criteria. Typically, this
will be in one of the following forms:
subdomain.domain.tld
:subdomain.domain.tld

216.1. Router Types 1055

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

In the above, the second route would return a subdomain key as part of the route match.
For any given hostname segment, you may also provide a constraint. As an example, if the subdomain segment
needed to match only if it started with fw and contained exactly 2 digits following, the following route would be
needed:
1 $route = Hostname::factory(array(
2 'route' => ':subdomain.domain.tld',
3 'constraints' => array(
4 'subdomain' => 'fw\d{2}',
5 ),
6 ));

In the above example, only a subdomain key will be returned in the RouteMatch. If you wanted to also provide
other information based on matching, or a default value to return for the subdomain, you need to also provide defaults.
1 $route = Hostname::factory(array(
2 'route' => ':subdomain.domain.tld',
3 'constraints' => array(
4 'subdomain' => 'fw\d{2}',
5 ),
6 'defaults' => array(
7 'type' => 'json',
8 ),
9 ));

When matched, the above will return two keys in the RouteMatch, subdomain and type.

216.2.2 Zend\Mvc\Router\Http\Literal

The Literal route is for doing exact matching of the URI path. Configuration therefore is solely the path you want
to match, and the defaults, or parameters you want returned on a match.
1 $route = Literal::factory(array(
2 'route' => '/foo',
3 'defaults' => array(
4 'controller' => 'Application\Controller\IndexController',
5 'action' => 'foo',
6 ),
7 ));

The above route would match a path /foo, and return the key action in the RouteMatch, with the value foo.

216.2.3 Zend\Mvc\Router\Http\Method

The Method route is used to match the http method or verb specified in the request (See RFC 2616 Sec. 5.1.1).
It can optionally be configured to match against multiple methods by providing a comma-separated list of method
tokens.
1 $route = Method::factory(array(
2 'verb' => 'post,put',
3 'defaults' => array(
4 'controller' => 'Application\Controller\IndexController',
5 'action' => 'form-submit',
6 ),
7 ));

1056 Chapter 216. Routing

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

The above route would match an http POST or PUT request and return a RouteMatch object containing a key
action with a value of form-submit.

216.2.4 Zend\Mvc\Router\Http\Part

A Part route allows crafting a tree of possible routes based on segments of the URI path. It actually extends the
TreeRouteStack.
Part routes are difficult to describe, so well simply provide a sample one here.
1 $route = Part::factory(array(
2 'route' => array(
3 'type' => 'literal',
4 'options' => array(
5 'route' => '/',
6 'defaults' => array(
7 'controller' => 'Application\Controller\IndexController',
8 'action' => 'index',
9 ),
10 ),
11 ),
12 'route_plugins' => $routePlugins,
13 'may_terminate' => true,
14 'child_routes' => array(
15 'blog' => array(
16 'type' => 'literal',
17 'options' => array(
18 'route' => '/blog',
19 'defaults' => array(
20 'controller' => 'Application\Controller\BlogController',
21 'action' => 'index',
22 ),
23 ),
24 'may_terminate' => true,
25 'child_routes' => array(
26 'rss' => array(
27 'type' => 'literal',
28 'options' => array(
29 'route' => '/rss',
30 'defaults' => array(
31 'action' => 'rss',
32 )
33 ),
34 'may_terminate' => true,
35 'child_routes' => array(
36 'subrss' => array(
37 'type' => 'literal',
38 'options' => array(
39 'route' => '/sub',
40 'defaults' => array(
41 'action' => 'subrss',
42 ),
43 ),
44 ),
45 ),
46 ),
47 ),
48 ),

216.2. HTTP Route Types 1057

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

49 'forum' => array(

50 'type' => 'literal',
51 'options' => array(
52 'route' => 'forum',
53 'defaults' => array(
54 'controller' => 'Application\Controller\ForumController',
55 'action' => 'index',
56 ),
57 ),
58 ),
59 ),
60 ));

The above would match the following:

/ would load the Index controller, index action.
/blog would load the Blog controller, index action.
/blog/rss would load the Blog controller, rss action.
/blog/rss/sub would load the Blog controller, subrss action.
/forum would load the Forum controller, index action.
You may use any route type as a child route of a Part route.

Note: Part routes are not meant to be used directly. When you add definitions for child_routes to any route
type, that route will become a Part route. As already said, describing Part routes with words is difficult, so
hopefully the additional examples at the end will provide further insight.

Note: In the above example, the $routePlugins is an instance of

Zend\Mvc\Router\RoutePluginManager.
1 $routePlugins = new Zend\Mvc\Router\RoutePluginManager();
2 $plugins = array(
3 'hostname' => 'Zend\Mvc\Router\Http\Hostname',
4 'literal' => 'Zend\Mvc\Router\Http\Literal',
5 'part' => 'Zend\Mvc\Router\Http\Part',
6 'regex' => 'Zend\Mvc\Router\Http\Regex',
7 'scheme' => 'Zend\Mvc\Router\Http\Scheme',
8 'segment' => 'Zend\Mvc\Router\Http\Segment',
9 'wildcard' => 'Zend\Mvc\Router\Http\Wildcard',
10 'query' => 'Zend\Mvc\Router\Http\Query',
11 'method' => 'Zend\Mvc\Router\Http\Method',
12 );
13 foreach ($plugins as $name => $class) {
14 $routePlugins->setInvokableClass($name, $class);
15 }

When using Zend\Mvc\Router\Http\TreeRouteStack, the RoutePluginManager is set up by default,

and the developer does not need to worry about the autoloading of standard HTTP routes.

216.2.5 Zend\Mvc\Router\Http\Regex

A Regex route utilizes a regular expression to match against the URI path. Any valid regular expression is allowed;
our recommendation is to use named captures for any values you want to return in the RouteMatch.

1058 Chapter 216. Routing

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Since regular expression routes are often complex, you must specify a spec or specification to use when assembling
URLs from regex routes. The spec is simply a string; replacements are identified using %keyname% within the
string, with the keys coming from either the captured values or named parameters passed to the assemble() method.
Just like other routes, the Regex route can accept defaults, parameters to include in the RouteMatch when
successfully matched.
1 $route = Regex::factory(array(
2 'regex' => '/blog/(?<id>[a-zA-Z0-9_-]+)(\.(?<format>(json|html|xml|rss)))?',
3 'defaults' => array(
4 'controller' => 'Application\Controller\BlogController',
5 'action' => 'view',
6 'format' => 'html',
7 ),
8 'spec' => '/blog/%id%.%format%',
9 ));

The above would match /blog/001-some-blog_slug-here.html, and return four items in the RouteMatch, an id,
the controller, the action, and the format. When assembling a URL from this route, the id and format values
would be used to fill the specification.

216.2.6 Zend\Mvc\Router\Http\Scheme

The Scheme route matches the URI scheme only, and must be an exact match. As such, this route, like the Literal
route, simply takes what you want to match and the defaults, parameters to return on a match.
1 $route = Scheme::factory(array(
2 'scheme' => 'https',
3 'defaults' => array(
4 'https' => true,
5 ),
6 ));

The above route would match the https scheme, and return the key https in the RouteMatch with a boolean
true value.

216.2.7 Zend\Mvc\Router\Http\Segment

A Segment route allows matching any segment of a URI path. Segments are denoted using a colon, followed by
alphanumeric characters; if a segment is optional, it should be surrounded by brackets. As an example, /:foo[/:bar]
would match a / followed by text and assign it to the key foo; if any additional / characters are found, any text
following the last one will be assigned to the key bar.
The separation between literal and named segments can be anything. For example, the above could be done as /:foo{-
}[-:bar] as well. The {-} after the :foo parameter indicates a set of one or more delimiters, after which matching of the
parameter itself ends.
Each segment may have constraints associated with it. Each constraint should simply be a regular expression express-
ing the conditions under which that segment should match.
Also, as you can in other routes, you may provide defaults to use; these are particularly useful when using optional
segments.
As a complex example:
1 $route = Segment::factory(array(
2 'route' => '/:controller[/:action]',

216.2. HTTP Route Types 1059

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

3 'constraints' => array(

4 'controller' => '[a-zA-Z][a-zA-Z0-9_-]+',
5 'action' => '[a-zA-Z][a-zA-Z0-9_-]+',
6 ),
7 'defaults' => array(
8 'controller' => 'Application\Controller\IndexController',
9 'action' => 'index',
10 ),
11 ));

216.2.8 Zend\Mvc\Router\Http\Query (Deprecated)

Warning: Potential security issue

A misuse of this route part can lead to a potential security issue.

Note: Deprecated
This route part is deprecated since you can now add query parameters without a query route.

The Query route part allows you to specify and capture query string parameters for a given route.
The intention of the Query part is that you do not instantiate it in its own right but to use it as a child of another route
part.
An example of its usage would be
1 $route = Part::factory(array(
2 'route' => array(
3 'type' => 'literal',
4 'options' => array(
5 'route' => 'page',
6 'defaults' => array(
7 ),
8 ),
9 ),
10 'may_terminate' => true,
11 'route_plugins' => $routePlugins,
12 'child_routes' => array(
13 'query' => array(
14 'type' => 'Query',
15 'options' => array(
16 'defaults' => array(
17 'foo' => 'bar',
18 ),
19 ),
20 ),
21 ),
22 ));

As you can see, its pretty straight forward to specify the query part. This then allows you to create query strings using
the url view helper.
1 $this->url(
2 'page/query',
3 array(
4 'name' => 'my-test-page',

1060 Chapter 216. Routing

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

5 'format' => 'rss',

6 'limit' => 10,
7 )
8 );

As you can see above, you must add /query to your route name in order to append a query string. If you do not
specify /query in the route name then no query string will be appended.
Our example page route has only one defined parameter of name (/page[/:name]), meaning that the remaining
parameters of format and limit will then be appended as a query string.
The output from our example should then be /page/my-test-page?format=rss&limit=10

216.2.9 Zend\Mvc\Router\Http\Wildcard (Deprecated)

Warning: Potential security issue

A misuse of this route type can lead to a potential security issue.

Note: Deprecated
This route type is deprecated. Use the Segment route type.

The Wildcard route type matches all segments of a URI path, like in version 1 of Zend Framework.

216.3 HTTP Routing Examples

Most of the routing definitions will be done in module configuration files, so the following examples will show how to
set up routes in config files.

Simple example with two literal routes

1 return array(
2 'router' => array(
3 'routes' => array(
4 // Literal route named "home"
5 'home' => array(
6 'type' => 'literal',
7 'options' => array(
8 'route' => '/',
9 'defaults' => array(
10 'controller' => 'Application\Controller\IndexController',
11 'action' => 'index',
12 ),
13 ),
14 ),
15 // Literal route named "contact"
16 'contact' => array(
17 'type' => 'literal',
18 'options' => array(
19 'route' => 'contact',
20 'defaults' => array(
21 'controller' => 'Application\Controller\ContactController',

216.3. HTTP Routing Examples 1061

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

22 'action' => 'form',

23 ),
24 ),
25 ),
26 ),
27 ),
28 );

A complex example with child routes

1 return array(
2 'router' => array(
3 'routes' => array(
4 // Literal route named "home"
5 'home' => array(
6 'type' => 'literal',
7 'options' => array(
8 'route' => '/',
9 'defaults' => array(
10 'controller' => 'Application\Controller\IndexController',
11 'action' => 'index',
12 ),
13 ),
14 ),
15 // Literal route named "blog", with child routes
16 'blog' => array(
17 'type' => 'literal',
18 'options' => array(
19 'route' => '/blog',
20 'defaults' => array(
21 'controller' => 'Application\Controller\BlogController',
22 'action' => 'index',
23 ),
24 ),
25 'may_terminate' => true,
26 'child_routes' => array(
27 // Segment route for viewing one blog post
28 'post' => array(
29 'type' => 'segment',
30 'options' => array(
31 'route' => '/[:slug]',
32 'constraints' => array(
33 'slug' => '[a-zA-Z0-9_-]+',
34 ),
35 'defaults' => array(
36 'action' => 'view',
37 ),
38 ),
39 ),
40 // Literal route for viewing blog RSS feed
41 'rss' => array(
42 'type' => 'literal',
43 'options' => array(
44 'route' => '/rss',
45 'defaults' => array(
46 'action' => 'rss',

1062 Chapter 216. Routing

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

47 ),
48 ),
49 ),
50 ),
51 ),
52 ),
53 ),
54 );

When using child routes, naming of the routes follows the parent/child pattern, so to use the child routes from
the above example:
1 echo $this->url('blog'); // gives "/blog"
2 echo $this->url('blog/post', array('slug' => 'my-post')); // gives "/blog/my-post"
3 echo $this->url('blog/rss'); // gives "/blog/rss"

An example with multiple Hostnames and subdomains within a single application

1 return array(
2 'router' => array(
3 'routes' => array(
4 'modules.zendframework.com' => array(
5 'type' => 'Zend\Mvc\Router\Http\Hostname',
6 'options' => array(
7 'route' => ':4th.[:3rd.]:2nd.:1st', // domain levels from right to left
8 'contraints' => array(
9 '4th' => 'modules',
10 '3rd' => '.*?', // optional 3rd level domain such as .ci, .dev or .test
11 '2nd' => 'zendframework',
12 '1st' => 'com',
13 ),
14 // Purposely omit default controller and action
15 // to let the child routes control the route match
16 ),
17 // child route controllers may span multiple modules as desired
18 'child_routes' => array(
19 'index' => array(
20 'type' => 'Zend\Mvc\Router\Http\Literal',
21 'options' => array(
22 'route' => '/',
23 'defaults' => array(
24 'controller' => 'Module\Controller\Index',
25 'action' = > 'index',
26 ),
27 ),
28 'may_terminate' => true,
29 ),
30 ),
31 ),
32 'packages.zendframework.com' => array(
33 'type' => 'Zend\Mvc\Router\Http\Hostname',
34 'options' => array(
35 'route' => ':4th.[:3rd.]:2nd.:1st', // domain levels from right to left
36 'contraints' => array(
37 '4th' => 'packages',
38 '3rd' => '.*?', // optional 3rd level domain such as .ci, .dev or .test
39 '2nd' => 'zendframework',

216.3. HTTP Routing Examples 1063

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

40 '1st' => 'com',

41 ),
42 // Purposely omit default controller and action
43 // to let the child routes control the route match
44 ),
45 // child route controllers may span multiple modules as desired
46 'child_routes' => array(
47 'index' => array(
48 'type' => 'Zend\Mvc\Router\Http\Literal',
49 'options' => array(
50 'route' => '/',
51 'defaults' => array(
52 'controller' => 'Package\Controller\Index',
53 'action' = > 'index',
54 ),
55 ),
56 'may_terminate' => true,
57 ),
58 ),
59 ),
60 ),
61 ),
62 );

The above would match the following:

modules.zendframework.com would dispatch the Index controllers index action of the Module
module.
modules.ci.zendframework.com would dispatch the Index controllers index action of the Module
module.
packages.zendframework.com would dispatch the Index controllers index action of the Package
module.
packages.dev.zendframework.com would dispatch the Index controllers index action of the
Package module.
The Url controller plugin or view helper may be used to generate URLs following the above example:
1 // reuse the route matched parameters to generate URLs
2 echo $this->url('modules.zendframework.com/index', array(), array(), true);
3 echo $this->url('packages.zendframework.com/index', array(), array(), true);

Warning: When defining child routes pay attention that the may_terminate and child_routes definitions
are in same level as the options and type definitions. A common pitfall is to have those two definitions nested
in options, which will not result in the desired routes.

216.4 Console Route Types

Zend Framework 2.0 also comes with routes for writing Console based applications, which is explained in the Console
routes and routing section.

1064 Chapter 216. Routing

 CHAPTER 217

The MvcEvent

The MVC layer of Zend Framework 2 incorporates and utilizes a custom Zend\EventManager\Event imple-
mentation - Zend\Mvc\MvcEvent. This event is created during Zend\Mvc\Application::bootstrap()
and is passed directly to all the events that method triggers. Additionally, if your controllers implement the
Zend\Mvc\InjectApplicationEventInterface, MvcEvent will be injected into those controllers.
The MvcEvent adds accessors and mutators for the following:
Application object.
Request object.
Response object.
Router object.
RouteMatch object.
Result - usually the result of dispatching a controller.
ViewModel object, typically representing the layout view model.
The methods it defines are:
setApplication($application)
getApplication()
setRequest($request)
getRequest()
setResponse($response)
getResponse()
setRouter($router)
getRouter()
setRouteMatch($routeMatch)
getRouteMatch()
setResult($result)
getResult()
setViewModel($viewModel)
getViewModel()

1065
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

isError()
setError()
getError()
getController()
setController($name)
getControllerClass()
setControllerClass($class)
The Application, Request, Response, Router, and ViewModel are all injected during the bootstrap
event. Following the route event, it will be injected also with the RouteMatch object encapsulating the results of
routing.
Since this object is passed around throughout the MVC, it is a common location for retrieving the results of routing,
the router, and the request and response objects. Additionally, we encourage setting the results of execution in the
event, to allow event listeners to introspect them and utilize them within their execution. As an example, the results
could be passed into a view renderer.

217.1 Order of events

The following events are triggered, in the following order:

Table 217.1: MvcEvent Events

Name Constant Description
bootstrap Bootstrap the application by creating the ViewManager.
MvcEvent::EVENT_BOOTSTRAP
route MvcEvent::EVENT_ROUTE Perform all the route work (matching...).
dispatch MvcEvent::EVENT_DISPATCHDispatch the matched route to a controller/action.
dispatch.error Event triggered in case of a problem during dispatch process
MvcEvent::EVENT_DISPATCH_ERROR
(unknown controller...).
render MvcEvent::EVENT_RENDER Prepare the data and delegate the rendering to the view layer.
Event triggered in case of a problem during the render
render.errorMvcEvent::EVENT_RENDER_ERROR
process (no renderer found...).
finish MvcEvent::EVENT_FINISH Perform any task once everything is done.
Those events are extensively describe in the following sections.

217.2 MvcEvent::EVENT_BOOTSTRAP

217.2.1 Listeners

The following classes are listening to this event (they are sorted from higher priority to lower priority):

Table 217.2: MvcEvent::EVENT_BOOTSTRAP Listeners

Class Pri- Method Itself Description
ority Called Triggers
10000 onBootstrap
Zend\Mvc\View\Http\ViewManager none Prepares the view layer (instantiate a
Zend\Mvc\View\Http\ViewManager).

1066 Chapter 217. The MvcEvent

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

217.2.2 Triggerers

This event is triggered by the following classes:

Table 217.3: MvcEvent::EVENT_BOOTSTRAP

Triggerers
Class In Method
Zend\Mvc\Application bootstrap

217.3 MvcEvent::EVENT_ROUTE

217.3.1 Listeners

The following classes are listening to this event (they are sorted from higher priority to lower priority):

Table 217.4: MvcEvent::EVENT_ROUTE Listeners

Class Pri- Method Itself Triggers Description
or- Called
ity
1 none
Zend\Mvc\ModuleRouteListener
onRoute This listener determines if the module namespace
should be prepended to the controller name. This is the
case if the route match contains a parameter key
matching the MODULE_NAMESPACE constant.
1
Zend\Mvc\RouteListener
onRoute Tries to match the request to the router and return a
MvcEvent::EVENT_DISPATCH_ERROR
(if no route is RouteMatch object.
matched)

217.3.2 Triggerers

This event is triggered by the following classes:

Table 217.5: MvcEvent::EVENT_ROUTE Triggerers

Class In Description
Method
Zend\Mvc\Application
run It also has a short circuit callback that allows to stop the propagation of the
event if an error is raised during the routing.

217.4 MvcEvent::EVENT_DISPATCH

217.4.1 Listeners

The following classes are listening to this event (they are sorted from higher priority to lower priority):

Console context only

Those listeners are only attached in a Console context:

217.3. MvcEvent::EVENT_ROUTE 1067

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Table 217.6: MvcEvent::EVENT_DISPATCH Listeners for Console context only

Class Pri- Method Description
or- Called
ity
1000 injectNamedParams
Merge all the params (route matched params and params in
Zend\Mvc\View\Console\InjectNamedConsoleParamsListener
the command) and add them to the Request object.
- If the controller action returned an associative array, it casts
Zend\Mvc\View\Console\CreateViewModelListener
createViewModelFromArray
80 it to a ConsoleModel object.
- If the controller action returned a string, it casts it to a
Zend\Mvc\View\Console\CreateViewModelListener
createViewModelFromString
80 ConsoleModel object.
- If the controller action returned null, it casts it to a
Zend\Mvc\View\Console\CreateViewModelListener
createViewModelFromNull
80 ConsoleModel object.
- Inserts the ViewModel (in this case, a ConsoleModel)
Zend\Mvc\View\Console\InjectViewModelListener
injectViewModel
100 and adds it to the MvcEvent object. It either (a) adds it as a
child to the default, composed view model, or (b) replaces it
if the result is marked as terminable.

Http context only

Those listeners are only attached in a Http context:

Table 217.7: MvcEvent::EVENT_DISPATCH Listeners for Http context only

Class Pri- Method Description
or- Called
ity
- If the controller action returned an associative array, it casts it to
Zend\Mvc\View\Http\CreateViewModelListener
createViewModelFromArray
80 a ViewModel object.
- If the controller action returned null, it casts it to a
Zend\Mvc\View\Http\CreateViewModelListener
createViewModelFromNull
80 ViewModel object.
- It creates and return a 404 ViewModel.
Zend\Mvc\View\Http\RouteNotFoundStrategy
prepareNotFoundViewModel
90
- Inject a template into the view model, if none present. Template
Zend\Mvc\View\Http\InjectTemplateListener
injectTemplate
90 is derived from the controller found in the route match, and,
optionally, the action, if present.
- Inserts the ViewModel (in this case, a ViewModel) and adds
Zend\Mvc\View\Http\InjectViewModelListener
injectViewModel
100 it to the MvcEvent object. It either (a) adds it as a child to the
default, composed view model, or (b) replaces it if the result is
marked as terminable.

All contexts

Those listeners are attached for both contexts:

1068 Chapter 217. The MvcEvent

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Table 217.8: MvcEvent::EVENT_DISPATCH Listeners for both contexts

Class Pri- MethodItself Triggers Description
or- Called
ity
1
Zend\Mvc\DispatchListener
onDispatch Try to load the matched controller from the service
MvcEvent::EVENT_DISPATCH_ERROR
(if an exception is raised manager (and throws various exceptions if it does
during dispatch processes) not).
1 none
Zend\Mvc\AbstractController
onDispatch The onDispatch method of the
AbstractController is an abstract method.
In AbstractActionController for instance,
it simply calls the action method.

217.4.2 Triggerers

This event is triggered by the following classes:

Table 217.9: MvcEvent::EVENT_DISPATCH Triggerers

Class In Description
Method
Zend\Mvc\Applicationrun It also has a short circuit callback that allows to stop the propagation of the
event if an error is raised during the routing.
If a listener returns a Response object, it stops propagation. Note: every
Zend\Mvc\Controller\AbstractController
dispatch
AbstractController listen to this event and execute the
onDispatch method when it is triggered.

217.5 MvcEvent::EVENT_DISPATCH_ERROR

217.5.1 Listeners

The following classes are listening to this event (they are sorted from higher priority to lower priority):

Console context only

Table 217.10: MvcEvent::EVENT_DISPATCH_ERROR Listeners for Console context only

Class Pri- Method Description
or- Called
ity
1 Detect if an error is a route not found condition. If a
Zend\Mvc\View\Console\RouteNotFoundStrategy
handleRouteNotFoundError
controller not found or invalid controller error type is
encountered, sets the response status code to 404.
1 Create an exception view model and set the status code to 404.
Zend\Mvc\View\Console\ExceptionStrategy
prepareExceptionViewModel
- Inserts the ViewModel (in this case, a ConsoleModel)
Zend\Mvc\View\Console\InjectViewModelListener
injectViewModel
100 and adds it to the MvcEvent object. It either (a) adds it as a
child to the default, composed view model, or (b) replaces it if
the result is marked as terminable.

217.5. MvcEvent::EVENT_DISPATCH_ERROR 1069

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Http context only

Those listeners are only attached in a Http context:

Table 217.11: MvcEvent::EVENT_DISPATCH_ERROR Listeners for Http context only

Class Pri- Method Description
or- Called
ity
1 Detect if an error is a 404 condition. If a controller not found
Zend\Mvc\View\Http\RouteNotFoundStrategy
detectNotFoundError
or invalid controller error type is encountered, sets the
response status code to 404.
1 Create and return a 404 view model.
Zend\Mvc\View\Http\RouteNotFoundStrategy
prepareNotFoundViewModel
1 Create an exception view model and set the status code to 404
Zend\Mvc\View\Http\ExceptionStrategy
prepareExceptionViewModel
- Inserts the ViewModel (in this case, a ViewModel) and adds
Zend\Mvc\View\Http\InjectViewModelListener
injectViewModel
100 it to the MvcEvent object. It either (a) adds it as a child to the
default, composed view model, or (b) replaces it if the result is
marked as terminable.

All contexts

Those listeners are attached for both contexts:

Table 217.12: MvcEvent::EVENT_DISPATCH_ERROR Listeners for both contexts

Class Prior- Method Called Description
ity
1
Zend\Mvc\DispatchListener reportMonitorEventUsed to monitoring when Zend Server is
used.

217.5.2 Triggerers

Table 217.13: MvcEvent::EVENT_DISPATCH_ERROR Triggerers

Class In Method
Zend\Mvc\DispatchListener onDispatch
Zend\Mvc\DispatchListener marshallControllerNotFoundEvent
Zend\Mvc\DispatchListener marshallBadControllerEvent

217.6 MvcEvent::EVENT_RENDER

217.6.1 Listeners

The following classes are listening to this event (they are sorted from higher priority to lower priority):

Console context only

Those listeners are only attached in a Console context:

1070 Chapter 217. The MvcEvent

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Table 217.14: MvcEvent::EVENT_RENDER Listeners for Console context only

Class Priority Method Description
Called
Zend\Mvc\View\Console\DefaultRenderingStrategy-10000 render Render the
view.

Http context only

Those listeners are only attached in a Http context:

Table 217.15: MvcEvent::EVENT_RENDER Listeners for Http context only

Class Priority Method Called Description
Zend\Mvc\View\Http\DefaultRenderingStrategy -10000 render Render the
view.

217.6.2 Triggerers

This event is triggered by the following classes:

Table 217.16: MvcEvent::EVENT_RENDER Triggerers

Class In Method Description
Zend\Mvc\Application completeRequest This event is triggered just before the MvcEvent::FINISH
event.

217.7 MvcEvent::EVENT_RENDER_ERROR

217.7.1 Listeners

The following classes are listening to this event (they are sorted from higher priority to lower priority):

Console context only

Those listeners are only attached in a Console context:

Table 217.17: MvcEvent::EVENT_RENDER_ERROR Listeners for Console context only

Class Pri- Method Description
or- Called
ity
1 Create an exception view model and set the status code to 404.
Zend\Mvc\View\Console\ExceptionStrategy
prepareExceptionViewModel
- Inserts the ViewModel (in this case, a ConsoleModel)
Zend\Mvc\View\Console\InjectViewModelListener
injectViewModel
100 and adds it to the MvcEvent object. It either (a) adds it as a
child to the default, composed view model, or (b) replaces it if
the result is marked as terminable.

217.7. MvcEvent::EVENT_RENDER_ERROR 1071

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Http context only

Those listeners are only attached in a Http context:

Table 217.18: MvcEvent::EVENT_RENDER_ERROR Listeners for Http context only

Class Pri- Method Description
or- Called
ity
1 Create an exception view model and set the status code to 404.
Zend\Mvc\View\Console\ExceptionStrategy
prepareExceptionViewModel
- Inserts the ViewModel (in this case, a ViewModel) and
Zend\Mvc\View\Console\InjectViewModelListener
injectViewModel
100 adds it to the MvcEvent object. It either (a) adds it as a child to
the default, composed view model, or (b) replaces it if the
result is marked as terminable.

217.7.2 Triggerers

This event is triggered by the following classes:

Table 217.19: MvcEvent::EVENT_RENDER_ERROR Triggerers

Class In Description
Method
render This event is triggered if an exception is raised
Zend\Mvc\View\Http\DefaultRenderingStrategy
during rendering.

217.8 MvcEvent::EVENT_FINISH

217.8.1 Listeners

The following classes are listening to this event (they are sorted from higher priority to lower priority):

Table 217.20: MvcEvent::EVENT_FINISH Listeners

Class Pri- Method Description
or- Called
ity
-
Zend\Mvc\SendResponseListener It triggers the SendResponseEvent in order to prepare the
sendResponse
10000 response (see the next page for more information about
SendResponseEvent).

217.8.2 Triggerers

This event is triggered by the following classes:

1072 Chapter 217. The MvcEvent

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Table 217.21: MvcEvent::EVENT_FINISH Triggerers

Class In Method Description
Zend\Mvc\Application
run This event is triggered once the MvcEvent::ROUTE event returns a
correct ResponseInterface.
Zend\Mvc\Application
run This event is triggered once the MvcEvent::DISPATCH event returns a
correct ResponseInterface.
Zend\Mvc\Application This event is triggered after the MvcEvent::RENDER (this means that, at
completeRequest
this point, the view is already rendered).

217.8. MvcEvent::EVENT_FINISH 1073

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1074 Chapter 217. The MvcEvent

 CHAPTER 218

The SendResponseEvent

The MVC layer of Zend Framework 2 also incorporates and utilizes a custom Zend\EventManager\Event
implementation located at Zend\Mvc\ResponseSender\SendResponseEvent. This event allows listeners
to update the response object, by setting headers and content.
The methods it defines are:
setResponse($response)
getResponse()
setContentSent()
contentSent()
setHeadersSent()
headersSent()

218.1 Listeners

Currently, three listeners are listening to this event at different priorities based on which listener is used most.

Table 218.1: SendResponseEvent Listeners

Class Pri- Method Description
ority Called
- __invoke This is used in context of HTTP
Zend\Mvc\SendResponseListener\PhpEnvironmentResponseSender
1000 (this is the most often used).
- __invoke This is used in context of Console.
Zend\Mvc\SendResponseListener\ConsoleResponseSender
2000
-
Zend\Mvc\SendResponseListener\SimpleStreamResponseSender
__invoke
3000
Because all these listeners have negative priorities, adding your own logic to modify Response object is easy: just
add a new listener without any priority (it will default to 1) and it will always be executed first.

218.2 Triggerers

This event is executed when MvcEvent::FINISH event is triggered, with a priority of -10000.

1075
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1076 Chapter 218. The SendResponseEvent

 CHAPTER 219

Available Controllers

Controllers in the MVC layer simply need to be objects implementing

Zend\Stdlib\DispatchableInterface. That interface describes a single method:
1 use Zend\Stdlib\DispatchableInterface;
2 use Zend\Stdlib\RequestInterface as Request;
3 use Zend\Stdlib\ResponseInterface as Response;
4

5 class Foo implements DispatchableInterface

6 {
7 public function dispatch(Request $request, Response $response = null)
8 {
9 // ... do something, and preferably return a Response ...
10 }
11 }

While this pattern is simple enough, chances are you dont want to implement custom dispatch logic for every con-
troller (particularly as its not unusual or uncommon for a single controller to handle several related types of requests).
The MVC also defines several interfaces that, when implemented, can provide controllers with additional capabilities.

219.1 Common Interfaces Used With Controllers

219.1.1 InjectApplicationEvent

The Zend\Mvc\InjectApplicationEventInterface hints to the Application instance that it should

inject its MvcEvent into the controller itself. Why would this be useful?
Recall that the MvcEvent composes a number of objects: the Request and Response, naturally, but also the
router, the route matches (a RouteMatch instance), and potentially the result of dispatching.
A controller that has the MvcEvent injected, then, can retrieve or inject these. As an example:
1 $matches = $this->getEvent()->getRouteMatch();
2 $id = $matches->getParam('id', false);
3 if (!$id) {
4 $response = $this->getResponse();
5 $response->setStatusCode(500);
6 $this->getEvent()->setResult('Invalid identifier; cannot complete request');
7 return;
8 }

1077
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

The InjectApplicationEventInterface defines simply two methods:

1 public function setEvent(Zend\EventManager\EventInterface $event);
2 public function getEvent();

219.1.2 ServiceLocatorAware

In most cases, you should define your controllers such that dependencies are injected by the applications
ServiceManager, via either constructor arguments or setter methods.
However, occasionally you may have objects you wish to use in your controller that are only valid for certain code
paths. Examples include forms, paginators, navigation, etc. In these cases, you may decide that it doesnt make sense
to inject those objects every time the controller is used.
The ServiceLocatorAwareInterface interface hints to the ServiceManager that it should inject itself
into the controller. It defines two simple methods:
1 use Zend\ServiceManager\ServiceLocatorInterface;
2 use Zend\ServiceManager\ServiceLocatorAwareInterface;
3

4 public function setServiceLocator(ServiceLocatorInterface $serviceLocator);

5 public function getServiceLocator();

219.1.3 EventManagerAware

Typically, its nice to be able to tie into a controllers workflow without needing to extend it or hardcode behavior into
it. The solution for this at the framework level is to use the EventManager.
You can hint to the ServiceManager that you want an EventManager injected by implementing the interface
EventManagerAwareInterface, which tells the ServiceManager to inject an EventManager.
You define two methods. The first, a setter, should also set any EventManager identifiers you want to listen on, and
the second, a getter, should simply return the composed EventManager instance.
1 use Zend\EventManager\EventManagerAwareInterface;
2 use Zend\EventManager\EventManagerInterface;
3

4 public function setEventManager(EventManagerInterface $events);

5 public function getEventManager();

219.1.4 Controller Plugins

Code re-use is a common goal for developers. Another common goal is convenience. However, this is often difficult
to achieve cleanly in abstract, general systems.
Within your controllers, youll often find yourself repeating tasks from one controller to another. Some common
examples:
Generating URLs
Redirecting
Setting and retrieving flash messages (self-expiring session messages)
Invoking and dispatching additional controllers

1078 Chapter 219. Available Controllers

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

To facilitate these actions while also making them available to alternate controller implementations, weve created a
PluginManager implementation for the controller layer, Zend\Mvc\Controller\PluginManager, build-
ing on the Zend\ServiceManager\AbstractPluginManager functionality. To utilize it, you simply need
to implement the setPluginManager(PluginManager $plugins) method, and set up your code to use the
controller-specific implementation by default:
1 use Zend\Mvc\Controller\PluginManager;
2

3 public function setPluginManager(PluginManager $plugins)

4 {
5 $this->plugins = $plugins;
6 $this->plugins->setController($this);
7

8 return $this;
9 }
10

11 public function getPluginManager()

12 {
13 if (!$this->plugins) {
14 $this->setPluginManager(new PluginManager());
15 }
16

17 return $this->plugins;
18 }
19

20 public function plugin($name, array $options = null)

21 {
22 return $this->getPluginManager()->get($name, $options);
23 }

219.2 The AbstractActionController

Implementing each of the above interfaces is a lesson in redundancy; you wont often want to do it. As such, weve
developed two abstract, base controllers you can extend to get started.
The first is Zend\Mvc\Controller\AbstractActionController. This controller implements each of the
above interfaces, and uses the following assumptions:
An action parameter is expected in the RouteMatch object composed in the attached MvcEvent. If none
is found, a notFoundAction() is invoked.
The action parameter is converted to a camelCased format and appended with the word Action to create a
method name. As examples: foo maps to fooAction, foo-bar or foo.bar or foo_bar to fooBarAction.
The controller then checks to see if that method exists. If not, the notFoundAction() method is invoked;
otherwise, the discovered method is called.
The results of executing the given action method are injected into the MvcEvents result property (via
setResult(), and accessible via getResult()).
Essentially, a route mapping to an AbstractActionController needs to return both controller and action
keys in its matches.
Creation of action controllers is then reasonably trivial:
1 namespace Foo\Controller;
2

3 use Zend\Mvc\Controller\AbstractActionController;
4

219.2. The AbstractActionController 1079

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

5 class BarController extends AbstractActionController

6 {
7 public function bazAction()
8 {
9 return array('title' => __METHOD__);
10 }
11

12 public function batAction()

13 {
14 return array('title' => __METHOD__);
15 }
16 }

219.2.1 Interfaces and Collaborators

AbstractActionController implements each of the following interfaces:

Zend\Stdlib\DispatchableInterface
Zend\Mvc\InjectApplicationEventInterface
Zend\ServiceManager\ServiceLocatorAwareInterface
Zend\EventManager\EventManagerAwareInterface
The composed EventManager will be configured to listen on the following contexts:
Zend\Stdlib\DispatchableInterface
Zend\Mvc\Controller\AbstractActionController
Zend\Mvc\Controller\AbstractController
Additionally, if you extend the class, it will listen on the extending classs name.

219.3 The AbstractRestfulController

The second abstract controller ZF2 provides is Zend\Mvc\Controller\AbstractRestfulController.

This controller provides a native RESTful implementation that simply maps HTTP request methods to controller
methods, using the following matrix:
GET maps to either get() or getList(), depending on whether or not an id parameter is found in the
route matches. If one is, it is passed as an argument to get(); if not, getList() is invoked. In the former
case, you should provide a representation of the given entity with that identification; in the latter, you should
provide a list of entities.
POST maps to create(). That method expects a $data argument, usually the $_POST superglobal array.
The data should be used to create a new entity, and the response should typically be an HTTP 201 response
with the Location header indicating the URI of the newly created entity and the response body providing the
representation.
PUT maps to update(), and requires that an id parameter exists in the route matches; that value is passed
as an argument to the method. It should attempt to update the given entity, and, if successful, return either a 200
or 202 response status, as well as the representation of the entity.
DELETE maps to delete(), and requires that an id parameter exists in the route matches; that value is
passed as an argument to the method. It should attempt to delete the given entity, and, if successful, return either
a 200 or 204 response status.

1080 Chapter 219. Available Controllers

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Additionally, you can map action methods to the AbstractRestfulController, just as you would in the
AbstractActionController; these methods will be suffixed with Action, differentiating them from the
RESTful methods listed above. This allows you to perform such actions as providing forms used to submit to the
various RESTful methods, or to add RPC methods to your RESTful API.

219.3.1 Interfaces and Collaborators

AbstractRestfulController implements each of the following interfaces:

Zend\Stdlib\DispatchableInterface
Zend\Mvc\InjectApplicationEventInterface
Zend\ServiceManager\ServiceLocatorAwareInterface
Zend\EventManager\EventManagerAwareInterface
The composed EventManager will be configured to listen on the following contexts:
Zend\Stdlib\DispatchableInterface
Zend\Mvc\Controller\AbstractRestfulController
Zend\Mvc\Controller\AbstractController
Additionally, if you extend the class, it will listen on the extending classs name.

219.3. The AbstractRestfulController 1081

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1082 Chapter 219. Available Controllers

 CHAPTER 220

Controller Plugins

When using the AbstractActionController or AbstractRestfulController, or if you implement

the setPluginManager method in your custom controllers, you have access to a number of pre-built plugins.
Additionally, you can register your own custom plugins with the manager.
The built-in plugins are:
Zend\Mvc\Controller\Plugin\AcceptableViewModelSelector
Zend\Mvc\Controller\Plugin\FlashMessenger
Zend\Mvc\Controller\Plugin\Forward
Zend\Mvc\Controller\Plugin\Identity
Zend\Mvc\Controller\Plugin\Layout
Zend\Mvc\Controller\Plugin\Params
Zend\Mvc\Controller\Plugin\PostRedirectGet
Zend\Mvc\Controller\Plugin\Redirect
Zend\Mvc\Controller\Plugin\Url
If your controller implements the setPluginManager, getPluginManager and plugin methods, you can
access these using their shortname via the plugin() method:
1 $plugin = $this->plugin('url');

For an extra layer of convenience, both AbstractActionController and AbstractRestfulController

have __call() implementations that allow you to retrieve plugins via method calls:
1 $plugin = $this->url();

220.1 AcceptableViewModelSelector Plugin

The AcceptableViewModelSelector is a helper that can be used to select an appropriate view model based on
user defined criteria will be tested against the Accept header in the request.
As an example:
1 use Zend\Mvc\Controller\AbstractActionController;
2 use Zend\View\Model\JsonModel;
3

4 class SomeController extends AbstractActionController

1083
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

5 {
6 protected $acceptCriteria = array(
7 'Zend\View\Model\JsonModel' => array(
8 'application/json',
9 ),
10 'Zend\View\Model\FeedModel' => array(
11 'application/rss+xml',
12 ),
13 );
14

15 public function apiAction()

16 {
17 $viewModel = $this->acceptableViewModelSelector($this->acceptCriteria);
18

19 // Potentially vary execution based on model returned

20 if ($viewModel instanceof JsonModel) {
21 // ...
22 }
23 }
24 }

The above would return a standard Zend\View\Model\ViewModel instance if the criteria is not met, and the
specified view model types if the specific criteria is met. Rules are matched in order, with the first match winning.

220.2 FlashMessenger Plugin

The FlashMessenger is a plugin designed to create and retrieve self-expiring, session-based messages. It exposes
a number of methods:
setSessionManager(Zend\Session\ManagerInterface $manager)
Allows you to specify an alternate session manager, if desired.
Return type Zend\Mvc\Controller\Plugin\FlashMessenger
getSessionManager()
Allows you to retrieve the session manager registered.
Return type Zend\Session\ManagerInterface
getContainer()
Returns the Zend\Session\Container instance in which the flash messages are stored.
Return type Zend\Session\Container
setNamespace(string $namespace = default)
Allows you to specify a specific namespace in the container in which to store or from which to retrieve flash
messages.
Return type Zend\Mvc\Controller\Plugin\FlashMessenger
getNamespace() retrieves the name of the flash message namespace.
getNamespace()
Retrieves the name of the flash message namespace.
Return type string
addMessage(string $message)
Allows you to add a message to the current namespace of the session container.

1084 Chapter 220. Controller Plugins

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Return type Zend\Mvc\Controller\Plugin\FlashMessenger

hasMessages()
Lets you determine if there are any flash messages from the current namespace in the session container.
Return type boolean
getMessages()
Retrieves the flash messages from the current namespace of the session container
Return type array
clearMessages()
Clears all flash messages in current namespace of the session container. Returns true if messages were cleared,
false if none existed.
Return type boolean
hasCurrentMessages()
Indicates whether any messages were added during the current request.
Return type boolean
getCurrentMessages()
Retrieves any messages added during the current request.
Return type array
clearCurrentMessages()
Removes any messages added during the current request. Returns true if current messages were cleared,
false if none existed.
Return type boolean
clearMessagesFromContainer()
Clear all messages from the container. Returns true if any messages were cleared, false if none existed.
Return type boolean
This plugin also provides four meaningful namespaces, namely: INFO, ERROR, WARNING, SUCCESS. The follow-
ing functions are related to these namespaces:
addInfoMessage()
Add a message to info namespace

Return type Zend\Mvc\Controller\Plugin\FlashMessenger

hasCurrentInfoMessages()
Check to see if messages have been added to info namespace within this request

Return type boolean

addWarningMessage()
Add a message to warning namespace

Return type Zend\Mvc\Controller\Plugin\FlashMessenger

hasCurrentWarningMessages()
Check to see if messages have been added to warning namespace within this request

Return type boolean

220.2. FlashMessenger Plugin 1085

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

addErrorMessage()
Add a message to error namespace

Return type Zend\Mvc\Controller\Plugin\FlashMessenger

hasCurrentErrorMessages()
Check to see if messages have been added to error namespace within this request

Return type boolean

addSuccessMessage()
Add a message to success namespace

Return type Zend\Mvc\Controller\Plugin\FlashMessenger

hasCurrentSuccessMessages()
Check to see if messages have been added to success namespace within this request

Return type boolean

Additionally, the FlashMessenger implements both IteratorAggregate and Countable, allowing you to
iterate over and count the flash messages in the current namespace within the session container.

Examples

1 public function processAction()

2 {
3 // ... do some work ...
4 $this->flashMessenger()->addMessage('You are now logged in.');
5 return $this->redirect()->toRoute('user-success');
6 }
7

8 public function successAction()

9 {
10 $return = array('success' => true);
11 $flashMessenger = $this->flashMessenger();
12 if ($flashMessenger->hasMessages()) {
13 $return['messages'] = $flashMessenger->getMessages();
14 }
15 return $return;
16 }

220.3 Forward Plugin

Occasionally, you may want to dispatch additional controllers from within the matched controller for instance, you
might use this approach to build up widgetized content. The Forward plugin helps enable this.
For the Forward plugin to work, the controller calling it must be ServiceLocatorAware; otherwise, the plugin
will be unable to retrieve a configured and injected instance of the requested controller.
The plugin exposes a single method, dispatch(), which takes two arguments:

1086 Chapter 220. Controller Plugins

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

$name, the name of the controller to invoke. This may be either the fully qualified class name, or an alias
defined and recognized by the ServiceManager instance attached to the invoking controller.
$params is an optional array of parameters with which to seed a RouteMatch object for purposes of this
specific request. Meaning the parameters will be matched by their key to the routing identifiers in the config
(otherwise non-matching keys are ignored)
Forward returns the results of dispatching the requested controller; it is up to the developer to determine what, if
anything, to do with those results. One recommendation is to aggregate them in any return value from the invoking
controller.
As an example:
1 $foo = $this->forward()->dispatch('foo', array('action' => 'process'));
2 return array(
3 'somekey' => $somevalue,
4 'foo' => $foo,
5 );

220.4 Identity Plugin

The Identity plugin allows for getting the identity from the AuthenticationService.
For the Identity plugin to work, a Zend\Authentication\AuthenticationService name or alias must
be defined and recognized by the ServiceManager.
Identity returns the identity in the AuthenticationService or null if no identity is available.
As an example:
1 public function testAction()
2 {
3 if ($user = $this->identity()) {
4 // someone is logged !
5 } else {
6 // not logged in
7 }
8 }

When invoked, the Identity plugin will look for a service by the name or alias
Zend\Authentication\AuthenticationService in the ServiceManager. You can provide this
service to the ServiceManager in a configuration file:
1 // In a configuration file...
2 return array(
3 'service_manager' => array(
4 'aliases' => array(
5 'Zend\Authentication\AuthenticationService' => 'my_auth_service',
6 ),
7 'invokables' => array(
8 'my_auth_service' => 'Zend\Authentication\AuthenticationService',
9 ),
10 ),
11 );

The Identity plugin exposes two methods:

setAuthenticationService(Zend\Authentication\AuthenticationService $authenticationService)
Sets the authentication service instance to be used by the plugin.

220.4. Identity Plugin 1087

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Return type void

getAuthenticationService()
Retrieves the current authentication service instance if any is attached.
Return type Zend\Authentication\AuthenticationService

220.5 Layout Plugin

The Layout plugin allows for changing layout templates from within controller actions.
It exposes a single method, setTemplate(), which takes one argument:
$template, the name of the template to set.
As an example:
1 $this->layout()->setTemplate('layout/newlayout');

It also implements the __invoke magic method, which allows for even easier setting of the template:
1 $this->layout('layout/newlayout');

220.6 Params Plugin

The Params plugin allows for accessing parameters in actions from different sources.
It exposes several methods, one for each parameter source:
fromFiles(string $name = null, mixed $default = null)
For retrieving all or one single file. If $name is null, all files will be returned.
Return type array|ArrayAccess|null
fromHeader(string $header = null, mixed $default = null)
For retrieving all or one single header parameter. If $header is null, all header parameters will be returned.
Return type null|Zend\Http\Header\HeaderInterface
fromPost(string $param = null, mixed $default = null)
For retrieving all or one single post parameter. If $param is null, all post parameters will be returned.
Return type mixed
fromQuery(string $param = null, mixed $default = null)
For retrieving all or one single query parameter. If $param is null, all query parameters will be returned.
Return type mixed
fromRoute(string $param = null, mixed $default = null)
For retrieving all or one single route parameter. If $param is null, all route parameters will be returned.
Return type mixed
It also implements the __invoke magic method, which allows for short circuiting to the fromRoute method:
1 $this->params()->fromRoute('param', $default);
2 // or
3 $this->params('param', $default);

1088 Chapter 220. Controller Plugins

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

220.7 Post/Redirect/Get Plugin

When a user sends a POST request (e.g. after submitting a form), their browser will try to protect them from sending
the POST again, breaking the back button, causing browser warnings and pop-ups, and sometimes reposting the form.
Instead, when receiving a POST, we should store the data in a session container and redirect the user to a GET request.
This plugin can be invoked with two arguments:
$redirect, a string containing the redirect location which can either be a named route or a URL, based on
the contents of the second parameter.
$redirectToUrl, a boolean that when set to TRUE, causes the first parameter to be treated as a URL instead
of a route name (this is required when redirecting to a URL instead of a route). This argument defaults to false.
When no arguments are provided, the current matched route is used.

Example Usage

1 // Pass in the route/url you want to redirect to after the POST

2 $prg = $this->prg('/user/register', true);
3

4 if ($prg instanceof \Zend\Http\PhpEnvironment\Response) {

5 // returned a response to redirect us
6 return $prg;
7 } elseif ($prg === false) {
8 // this wasn't a POST request, but there were no params in the flash messenger
9 // probably this is the first time the form was loaded
10 return array('form' => $myForm);
11 }
12

13 // $prg is an array containing the POST params from the previous request
14 $form->setData($prg);
15

16 // ... your form processing code here

220.8 File Post/Redirect/Get Plugin

While similar to the standard Post/Redirect/Get Plugin, the File PRG Plugin will work for forms with file inputs. The
difference is in the behavior: The File PRG Plugin will interact directly with your form instance and the file inputs,
rather than only returning the POST params from the previous request.
By interacting directly with the form, the File PRG Plugin will turn off any file inputs required flags for already
uploaded files (for a partially valid form state), as well as run the file input filters to move the uploaded files into a new
location (configured by the user).

Warning: You must attach a Filter for moving the uploaded files to a new location, such as the RenameUpload
Filter, or else your files will be removed upon the redirect.

This plugin can be invoked with three arguments:

$form: the form instance.
$redirect: (Optional) a string containing the redirect location which can either be a named route or a URL,
based on the contents of the third parameter. If this argument is not provided, it will default to the current
matched route.

220.7. Post/Redirect/Get Plugin 1089

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

$redirectToUrl: (Optional) a boolean that when set to TRUE, causes the second parameter to be treated
as a URL instead of a route name (this is required when redirecting to a URL instead of a route). This argument
defaults to false.

Example Usage

1 $myForm = new Zend\Form\Form('my-form');

2 $myForm->add(array(
3 'type' => 'Zend\Form\Element\File',
4 'name' => 'file',
5 ));
6 // NOTE: Without a filter to move the file,
7 // our files will disappear between the requests
8 $myForm->getInputFilter()->getFilterChain()->attach(
9 new Zend\Filter\File\RenameUpload(array(
10 'target' => './data/tmpuploads/file',
11 'randomize' => true,
12 ))
13 );
14

15 // Pass in the form and optional the route/url you want to redirect to after the POST
16 $prg = $this->fileprg($myForm, '/user/profile-pic', true);
17

18 if ($prg instanceof \Zend\Http\PhpEnvironment\Response) {

19 // Returned a response to redirect us
20 return $prg;
21 } elseif ($prg === false) {
22 // First time the form was loaded
23 return array('form' => $myForm);
24 }
25

26 // Form was submitted.

27 // $prg is now an array containing the POST params from the previous request,
28 // but we don't have to apply it to the form since that has already been done.
29

30 // Process the form

31 if ($form->isValid()) {
32 // ...Save the form...
33 return $this->redirect()->toRoute('/user/profile-pic/success');
34 } else {
35 // Form not valid, but file uploads might be valid and uploaded
36 $fileErrors = $form->get('file')->getMessages();
37 if (empty($fileErrors)) {
38 $tempFile = $form->get('file')->getValue();
39 }
40 }

220.9 Redirect Plugin

Redirections are quite common operations within applications. If done manually, you will need to do the following
steps:
Assemble a url using the router
Create and inject a Location header into the Response object, pointing to the assembled URL

1090 Chapter 220. Controller Plugins

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Set the status code of the Response object to one of the 3xx HTTP statuses.
The Redirect plugin does this work for you. It offers three methods:
toRoute(string $route = null, array $params = array(), array $options = array(), boolean $reuseMatched-
Params = false)
Redirects to a named route, using the provided $params and $options to assembled the URL.
Return type Zend\Http\Response
toUrl(string $url)
Simply redirects to the given URL.
Return type Zend\Http\Response
refresh()
Refresh to current route
Return type Zend\Http\Response
In each case, the Response object is returned. If you return this immediately, you can effectively short-circuit
execution of the request.

Note: This plugin requires that the controller invoking it implements InjectApplicationEventInterface,
and thus has an MvcEvent composed, as it retrieves the router from the event object.

As an example:
1 return $this->redirect()->toRoute('login-success');

220.10 Url Plugin

Often you may want to generate URLs from route definitions within your controllers in order to seed the view, gen-
erate headers, etc. While the MvcEvent object composes the router, doing so manually would require this workflow:
1 $router = $this->getEvent()->getRouter();
2 $url = $router->assemble($params, array('name' => 'route-name'));

The Url helper makes this slightly more convenient:

1 $url = $this->url()->fromRoute('route-name', $params);

The fromRoute() method is the only public method defined, and has the following signature:
fromRoute(string $route = null, array $params = array(), array $options = array(), boolean $reuse-
MatchedParams = false)
Generate url string from given parameters:
Parameters
$name (string) The name of the route you want to output
$params (array) An array of parameters that is defined within the respective route con-
figuration
$options (array) An array of options that will be used to create the URL (e.g.,
force_canonical, query)
$reuseMatchedParams (boolean) A flag indicating if the currently matched route param-
eters should be used when generating the new URL

220.10. Url Plugin 1091

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Return type string

Note: This plugin requires that the controller invoking it implements InjectApplicationEventInterface,
and thus has an MvcEvent composed, as it retrieves the router from the event object.

1092 Chapter 220. Controller Plugins

 CHAPTER 221

Examples

221.1 Controllers

221.1.1 Accessing the Request and Response

When using AbstractActionController or AbstractRestfulController, the request and response

object are composed directly into the controller as soon as dispatch() is called. You may access them in the
following ways:
1 // Using explicit accessor methods
2 $request = $this->getRequest();
3 $response = $this->getResponse();
4

5 // Using direct property access

6 $request = $this->request;
7 $response = $this->response;

Additionally, if your controller implements InjectApplicationEventInterface (as both

AbstractActionController and AbstractRestfulController do), you can access these objects
from the attached MvcEvent:
1 $event = $this->getEvent();
2 $request = $event->getRequest();
3 $response = $event->getResponse();

The above can be useful when composing event listeners into your controller.

221.1.2 Accessing routing parameters

The parameters returned when routing completes are wrapped in a Zend\Mvc\Router\RouteMatch object. This
object is detailed in the section on Routing.
Within your controller, if you implement InjectApplicationEventInterface (as both
AbstractActionController and AbstractRestfulController do), you can access this object
from the attached MvcEvent:
1 $event = $this->getEvent();
2 $matches = $event->getRouteMatch();

Once you have the RouteMatch object, you can pull parameters from it.
The same can be done using the Params plugin.

1093
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

221.1.3 Returning early

You can effectively short-circuit execution of the application at any point by returning a Response from your con-
troller or any event. When such a value is discovered, it halts further execution of the event manager, bubbling up to
the Application instance, where it is immediately returned.
As an example, the Redirect plugin returns a Response, which can be returned immediately so as to complete
the request as quickly as possible. Other use cases might be for returning JSON or XML results from web service
endpoints, returning 401 Unauthorized results, etc.

221.2 Bootstrapping

221.2.1 Registering module-specific listeners

Often you may want module-specific listeners. As an example, this would be a simple and effective way to introduce
authorization, logging, or caching into your application.
Each Module class can have an optional onBootstrap() method. Typically, youll do module-specific configura-
tion here, or setup event listeners for you module here. The onBootstrap() method is called for every module on
every page request and should only be used for performing lightweight tasks such as registering event listeners.
The base Application class shipped with the framework has an EventManager associated with it, and once the
modules are initialized, it triggers the bootstrap event, with a getApplication() method on the event.
So, one way to accomplish module-specific listeners is to listen to that event, and register listeners at that time. As an
example:
1 namespace SomeCustomModule;
2

3 class Module
4 {
5 /**
6 * @param \Zend\Mvc\MvcEvent $e The MvcEvent instance
7 * @return void
8 */
9 public function onBootstrap($e)
10 {
11 $application = $e->getApplication();
12 $config = $application->getConfig();
13 $view = $application->getServiceManager()->get('ViewHelperManager');
14 // You must have these keys in you application config
15 $view->headTitle($config['view']['base_title']);
16

17 // This is your custom listener

18 $listener = new Listeners\ViewListener();
19 $listener->setView($view);
20 $application->getEventManager()->attachAggregate($listener);
21 }
22 }

The above demonstrates several things. First, it demonstrates a listener on the applications bootstrap event (the
onBootstrap() method). Second, it demonstrates that listener, and how it can be used to register listeners with
the application. It grabs the Application instance; from the Application, it is able to grab the attached service
manager and configuration. These are then used to retrieve the view, configure some helpers, and then register a
listener aggregate with the application event manager.

1094 Chapter 221. Examples

 CHAPTER 222

Introduction to Zend\Navigation

Zend\Navigation is a component for managing trees of pointers to web pages. Simply put: It can be used for
creating menus, breadcrumbs, links, and sitemaps, or serve as a model for other navigation related purposes.

222.1 Pages and Containers

There are two main concepts in Zend\Navigation:

222.1.1 Pages

A page (Zend\Navigation\AbstractPage) in Zend\Navigation in its most basic form is an object that

holds a pointer to a web page. In addition to the pointer itself, the page object contains a number of other properties
that are typically relevant for navigation, such as label, title, etc.
Read more about pages in the pages section.

222.1.2 Containers

A navigation container (Zend\Navigation\AbstractContainer) is a container class for pages. It has meth-

ods for adding, retrieving, deleting and iterating pages. It implements the SPL interfaces RecursiveIterator
and Countable, and can thus be iterated with SPL iterators such as RecursiveIteratorIterator.
Read more about containers in the containers section.

Note: Zend\Navigation\AbstractPage extends Zend\Navigation\AbstractContainer, which

means that a page can have sub pages.

222.2 View Helpers

222.2.1 Separation of data (model) and rendering (view)

Classes in the Zend\Navigation namespace do not deal with rendering of navigational elements. Rendering is
done with navigational view helpers. However, pages contain information that is used by view helpers when rendering,
such as; label, class (CSS), title, lastmod and priority properties for sitemaps, etc.
Read more about rendering navigational elements in the view helpers section.

1095
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1096 Chapter 222. Introduction to Zend\Navigation

 CHAPTER 223

Quick Start

The fastest way to get up and running with Zend\Navigation is by the navigation key in your service manager
configuration and the navigation factory will handle the rest for you. After setting up the configuration simply use the
key name with the Zend\Navigation view helper to output the container.
1 <?php
2 // your configuration file, e.g. config/autoload/global.php
3 return array(
4 // ...
5

6 'navigation' => array(

7 'default' => array(
8 array(
9 'label' => 'Home',
10 'route' => 'home',
11 ),
12 array(
13 'label' => 'Page #1',
14 'route' => 'page-1',
15 'pages' => array(
16 array(
17 'label' => 'Child #1',
18 'route' => 'page-1-child',
19 ),
20 ),
21 ),
22 array(
23 'label' => 'Page #2',
24 'route' => 'page-2',
25 ),
26 ),
27 ),
28 'service_manager' => array(
29 'factories' => array(
30 'navigation' => 'Zend\Navigation\Service\DefaultNavigationFactory',
31 ),
32 ),
33 // ...
34 );

1 <!-- in your layout -->

2 <!-- ... -->
3

4 <body>

1097
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

5 <?php echo $this->navigation('navigation')->menu(); ?>

6 </body>
7 <!-- ... -->

223.1 Using multiple navigations

If you want to use more than one navigation, you can register the abstract factory
\Zend\Navigation\Service\NavigationAbstractServiceFactory in the service manager.
Once the service factory is registered, you can create as many navigation definitions as you wish, and the factory will
create navigation containers automatically. This factory can also be used for the default container.
1 <?php
2 // your configuration file, e.g. config/autoload/global.php
3 return array(
4 // ...
5

6 'navigation' => array(

7

8 // navigation with name default

9 'default' => array(
10 array(
11 'label' => 'Home',
12 'route' => 'home',
13 ),
14 array(
15 'label' => 'Page #1',
16 'route' => 'page-1',
17 'pages' => array(
18 array(
19 'label' => 'Child #1',
20 'route' => 'page-1-child',
21 ),
22 ),
23 ),
24 array(
25 'label' => 'Page #2',
26 'route' => 'page-2',
27 ),
28 ),
29

30 // navigation with name special

31 'special' => array(
32 array(
33 'label' => 'Special',
34 'route' => 'special',
35 ),
36 array(
37 'label' => 'Special Page #2',
38 'route' => 'special-2',
39 ),
40 ),
41

42 // navigation with name sitemap

43 'sitemap' => array(
44 array(

1098 Chapter 223. Quick Start

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

45 'label' => 'Sitemap',

46 'route' => 'sitemap',
47 ),
48 array(
49 'label' => 'Sitemap Page #2',
50 'route' => 'sitemap-2',
51 ),
52 ),
53 ),
54 'service_manager' => array(
55 'abstract_factories' => array(
56 'Zend\Navigation\Service\NavigationAbstractServiceFactory'
57 ),
58 ),
59 // ...
60 );

Note: There is one important point if you use the NavigationAbstractServiceFactory: The name of the
service in your view must start with Zend\Navigation\ followed by the name of the configuration key. This helps
ensure that no naming collisions occur with other services.

The following example demonstrates rendering the navigation menus for the named default, special and
sitemap containers.
1 <!-- in your layout -->
2 <!-- ... -->
3

4 <body>
5 <?php echo $this->navigation('Zend\Navigation\Default')->menu(); ?>
6

7 <?php echo $this->navigation('Zend\Navigation\Special')->menu(); ?>

8

9 <?php echo $this->navigation('Zend\Navigation\Sitemap')->menu(); ?>

10 </body>
11 <!-- ... -->

223.1. Using multiple navigations 1099

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1100 Chapter 223. Quick Start

 CHAPTER 224

Pages

Zend\Navigation ships with two page types:

MVC pages using the class Zend\Navigation\Page\Mvc
URI pages using the class Zend\Navigation\Page\Uri
MVC pages are link to on-site web pages, and are defined using MVC parameters (action, controller, route, params).
URI pages are defined by a single property uri, which give you the full flexibility to link off-site pages or do other
things with the generated links (e.g. an URI that turns into <a href="#">foo<a>).
orphan

224.1 Common page features

All page classes must extend Zend\Navigation\Page\AbstractPage, and will thus share a common set of
features and properties. Most notably they share the options in the table below and the same initialization process.
Option keys are mapped to set methods. This means that the option order maps to the method setOrder(), and
reset_params maps to the method setResetParams(). If there is no setter method for the option, it will be set as
a custom property of the page.
Read more on extending Zend\Navigation\Page\AbstractPage in Creating custom page types.

1101
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Table 224.1: Common page options

Key Type De- Description
fault
la- String NULLA page label, such as Home or Blog.
bel
frag- String | NULL NULLA fragment identifier (anchor identifier) pointing to an anchor
ment within a resource that is subordinate to another, primary
resource. The fragment identifier introduced by a hash mark #.
Example: http://www.example.org/foo.html#bar
(bar is the fragment identifier)
id String | Integer NULLAn id tag/attribute that may be used when rendering the page,
typically in an anchor element.
class String NULLA CSS class that may be used when rendering the page, typically
in an anchor element.
ti- String NULLA short page description, typically for using as the title attribute
tle in an anchor.
tar- String NULLSpecifies a target that may be used for the page, typically in an
get anchor element.
rel Array ar- Specifies forward relations for the page. Each element in the
ray() array is a key-value pair, where the key designates the
relation/link type, and the value is a pointer to the linked page.
An example of a key-value pair is alternate =>
format/plain.html. To allow full flexibility, there are
no restrictions on relation values. The value does not have to be
a string. Read more about rel and rev in the section on the
Links helper.
rev Array ar- Specifies reverse relations for the page. Works exactly like rel.
ray()
or- String | Integer | NULL NULLWorks like order for elements in Zend\Form. If specified, the
der page will be iterated in a specific order, meaning you can force a
page to be iterated before others by setting the order attribute to
a low number, e.g. -100. If a String is given, it must parse to a
valid int. If NULL is given, it will be reset, meaning the order in
which the page was added to the container will be used.
re- String | NULLACL resource to associate with the page. Read more in the
sourceZend\Permissions\Acl\Resource\ResourceInterface
section on ACL integration in view helpers.
| NULL
priv- String | NULL NULLACL privilege to associate with the page. Read more in the
i- section on ACL integration in view helpers.
lege
ac- Boolean FALSEWhether the page should be considered active for the current
tive request. If active is FALSE or not given, MVC pages will check
its properties against the request object upon calling
$page->isActive().
vis- Boolean TRUEWhether page should be visible for the user, or just be a part of
i- the structure. Invisible pages are skipped by view helpers.
ble
pages Array | Zend\Config | NULL NULLChild pages of the page. This could be an Array or
Zend\Config object containing either page options that can
be passed to the factory() method, or actual
Zend\Navigation\Page\AbstractPage instances, or a
mixture of both.

1102 Chapter 224. Pages

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Note: Custom properties

All pages support setting and getting of custom properties by use of the magic methods __set($name, $value),
__get($name), __isset($name) and __unset($name). Custom properties may have any value, and
will be included in the array that is returned from $page->toArray(), which means that pages can be serial-
ized/deserialized successfully even if the pages contains properties that are not native in the page class.
Both native and custom properties can be set using $page->set($name, $value) and retrieved using
$page->get($name), or by using magic methods.

224.1.1 Custom page properties

This example shows how custom properties can be used.

1 $page = new Zend\Navigation\Page\Mvc();
2 $page->foo = 'bar';
3 $page->meaning = 42;
4

5 echo $page->foo;
6

7 if ($page->meaning != 42) {
8 // action should be taken
9 }

orphan

224.2 Zend\Navigation\Page\Mvc

MVC pages are defined using MVC parameters known from the Zend\Mvc component. An MVC page will use
Zend\Mvc\Router\RouteStackInterface internally in the getHref() method to generate hrefs, and the
isActive() method will compare the Zend\Mvc\Router\RouteMatch params with the pages params to
determine if the page is active.

Note: Starting in version 2.2.0, if you want to re-use any matched route parameters when generating a link, you can
do so via the useRouteMatch flag. This is particularly useful when creating segment routes that include the currently
selected language or locale as an initial segment, as it ensures the links generated all include the matched value.

224.2. Zend\Navigation\Page\Mvc 1103

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Table 224.2: MVC page options

Key Type De- Description
fault
action String NULL Action name to use when generating href to the page.
controller String NULL Controller name to use when generating href to the
page.
params Array ar- User params to use when generating href to the page.
ray()
route String NULL Route name to use when generating href to the page.
routeM- NULL RouteInterface matches used for routing parameters
Zend\Mvc\Router\RouteMatch
atch and testing validity.
useRouteM- Boolean FALSE If true, then getHref method will use the routeMatch
atch parameters to assemble the URI
router NULL Router for assembling URLs
Zend\Mvc\Router\RouteStackInterface
query Array ar- User query params to use when generating href to page
ray()
Note: The URI returned is relative to the baseUrl in Zend\Mvc\Router\Http\TreeRouteStack. In the
examples, the baseUrl is / for simplicity.

224.2.1 getHref() generates the page URI

This example show that MVC pages use Zend\Mvc\Router\RouteStackInterface internally to generate
URIs when calling $page->getHref().
1 // Create route
2 $route = Zend\Mvc\Router\Http\Segment::factory(array(
3 'route' => '/[:controller[/:action][/:id]]',
4 'constraints' => array(
5 'controller' => '[a-zA-Z][a-zA-Z0-9_-]+',
6 'action' => '[a-zA-Z][a-zA-Z0-9_-]+',
7 'id' => '[0-9]+',
8 ),
9 array(
10 'controller' => 'Album\Controller\Album',
11 'action' => 'index',
12 )
13 ));
14 $router = new Zend\Mvc\Router\Http\TreeRouteStack();
15 $router->addRoute('default', $route);
16

17 // getHref() returns /album/add

18 $page = new Zend\Navigation\Page\Mvc(array(
19 'action' => 'add',
20 'controller' => 'album',
21 ));
22

23 // getHref() returns /album/edit/1337

24 $page = new Zend\Navigation\Page\Mvc(array(
25 'action' => 'edit',
26 'controller' => 'album',
27 'params' => array('id' => 1337),
28 ));
29

1104 Chapter 224. Pages

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

30 // getHref() returns /album/1337?format=json

31 $page = new Zend\Navigation\Page\Mvc(array(
32 'action' => 'edit',
33 'controller' => 'album',
34 'params' => array('id' => 1337),
35 'query' => array('format' => 'json'),
36 ));

224.2.2 isActive() determines if page is active

This example show that MVC pages determine whether they are active by using the params found in the route match
object.
1 /**
2 * Dispatched request:
3 * - controller: album
4 * - action: index
5 */
6 $page1 = new Zend\Navigation\Page\Mvc(array(
7 'action' => 'index',
8 'controller' => 'album',
9 ));
10

11 $page2 = new Zend\Navigation\Page\Mvc(array(

12 'action' => 'edit',
13 'controller' => 'album',
14 ));
15

16 $page1->isActive(); // returns true

17 $page2->isActive(); // returns false
18

19 /**
20 * Dispatched request:
21 * - controller: album
22 * - action: edit
23 * - id: 1337
24 */
25 $page = new Zend\Navigation\Page\Mvc(array(
26 'action' => 'edit',
27 'controller' => 'album',
28 'params' => array('id' => 1337),
29 ));
30

31 // returns true, because request has the same controller and action
32 $page->isActive();
33

34 /**
35 * Dispatched request:
36 * - controller: album
37 * - action: edit
38 */
39 $page = new Zend\Navigation\Page\Mvc(array(
40 'action' => 'edit',
41 'controller' => 'album',
42 'params' => array('id' => null),
43 ));
44

224.2. Zend\Navigation\Page\Mvc 1105

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

45 // returns false, because page requires the id param to be set in the request
46 $page->isActive(); // returns false

224.2.3 Using routes

Routes can be used with MVC pages. If a page has a route, this route will be used in getHref() to generate the URL
for the page.

Note: Note that when using the route property in a page, you do not need to specify the default params that the route
defines (controller, action, etc.).

1 // the following route is added to the ZF router

2 $route = Zend\Mvc\Router\Http\Segment::factory(array(
3 'route' => '/a/:id',
4 'constraints' => array(
5 'id' => '[0-9]+',
6 ),
7 array(
8 'controller' => 'Album\Controller\Album',
9 'action' => 'show',
10 )
11 ));
12 $router = new Zend\Mvc\Router\Http\TreeRouteStack();
13 $router->addRoute('albumShow', $route);
14

15 // a page is created with a 'route' option

16 $page = new Zend\Navigation\Page\Mvc(array(
17 'label' => 'Show album',
18 'route' => 'albumShow',
19 'params' => array('id' => 42)
20 ));
21

22 // returns: /a/42
23 $page->getHref();

orphan

224.3 Zend\Navigation\Page\Uri

Pages of type Zend\Navigation\Page\Uri can be used to link to pages on other domains or sites, or to imple-
ment custom logic for the page. URI pages are simple; in addition to the common page options, a URI page takes only
one option uri. The uri will be returned when calling $page->getHref(), and may be a String or NULL.

Note: Zend\Navigation\Page\Uri will not try to determine whether it should be active when calling
$page->isActive(). It merely returns what currently is set, so to make a URI page active you have to man-
ually call $page->setActive() or specifying active as a page option when constructing.

Table 224.3: URI page options

Key Type Default Description
uri String NULL URI to page. This can be any string or NULL.
orphan

1106 Chapter 224. Pages

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

224.4 Creating custom page types

When extending Zend\Navigation\Page\AbstractPage, there is usually no need to override the constructor

or the methods setOptions() or setConfig(). The page constructor takes a single parameter, an Array or
a Zend\Config object, which is passed to setOptions() or setConfig() respectively. Those methods will
in turn call set() method, which will map options to native or custom properties. If the option internal_id is
given, the method will first look for a method named setInternalId(), and pass the option to this method if it
exists. If the method does not exist, the option will be set as a custom property of the page, and be accessible via
$internalId = $page->internal_id; or $internalId = $page->get(internal_id);.

224.4.1 The most simple custom page

The only thing a custom page class needs to implement is the getHref() method.
1 class My\Simple\Page extends Zend\Navigation\Page\AbstractPage
2 {
3 public function getHref()
4 {
5 return 'something-completely-different';
6 }
7 }

224.4.2 A custom page with properties

When adding properties to an extended page, there is no need to override/modify setOptions() or

setConfig().
1 class My\Navigation\Page extends Zend\Navigation\Page\AbstractPage
2 {
3 protected $foo;
4 protected $fooBar;
5

6 public function setFoo($foo)

7 {
8 $this->foo = $foo;
9 }
10

11 public function getFoo()

12 {
13 return $this->foo;
14 }
15

16 public function setFooBar($fooBar)

17 {
18 $this->fooBar = $fooBar;
19 }
20

21 public function getFooBar()

22 {
23 return $this->fooBar;
24 }
25

26 public function getHref()

27 {
28 return $this->foo . '/' . $this->fooBar;

224.4. Creating custom page types 1107

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

29 }
30 }
31

32 // can now construct using

33 $page = new My\Navigation\Page(array(
34 'label' => 'Property names are mapped to setters',
35 'foo' => 'bar',
36 'foo_bar' => 'baz'
37 ));
38

39 // ...or
40 $page = Zend\Navigation\Page\AbstractPage::factory(array(
41 'type' => 'My\Navigation\Page',
42 'label' => 'Property names are mapped to setters',
43 'foo' => 'bar',
44 'foo_bar' => 'baz'
45 ));

orphan

224.5 Creating pages using the page factory

All pages (also custom classes), can be created using the page factory,
Zend\Navigation\Page\AbstractPage::factory(). The factory can take an array with options,
or a Zend\Config object. Each key in the array/config corresponds to a page option, as seen in the section on
Pages. If the option uri is given and no MVC options are given (action, controller, route), an URI page will be created.
If any of the MVC options are given, an MVC page will be created.
If type is given, the factory will assume the value to be the name of the class that should be created. If the value is mvc
or uri and MVC/URI page will be created.

224.5.1 Creating an MVC page using the page factory

1 $page = Zend\Navigation\Page\AbstractPage::factory(array(
2 'label' => 'My MVC page',
3 'action' => 'index',
4 ));
5

6 $page = Zend\Navigation\Page\AbstractPage::factory(array(
7 'label' => 'Search blog',
8 'action' => 'index',
9 'controller' => 'search',
10 ));
11

12 $page = Zend\Navigation\Page\AbstractPage::factory(array(
13 'label' => 'Home',
14 'route' => 'home',
15 ));
16

17 $page = Zend\Navigation\Page\AbstractPage::factory(array(
18 'type' => 'mvc',
19 'label' => 'My MVC page',
20 ));

1108 Chapter 224. Pages

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

224.5.2 Creating a URI page using the page factory

1 $page = Zend\Navigation\Page\AbstractPage::factory(array(
2 'label' => 'My URI page',
3 'uri' => 'http://www.example.com/',
4 ));
5

6 $page = Zend\Navigation\Page\AbstractPage::factory(array(
7 'label' => 'Search',
8 'uri' => 'http://www.example.com/search',
9 'active' => true,
10 ));
11

12 $page = Zend\Navigation\Page\AbstractPage::factory(array(
13 'label' => 'My URI page',
14 'uri' => '#',
15 ));
16

17 $page = Zend\Navigation\Page\AbstractPage::factory(array(
18 'type' => 'uri',
19 'label' => 'My URI page',
20 ));

224.5.3 Creating a custom page type using the page factory

To create a custom page type using the factory, use the option type to specify a class name to instantiate.
1 class My\Navigation\Page extends Zend\Navigation\Page\AbstractPage
2 {
3 protected $_fooBar = 'ok';
4

5 public function setFooBar($fooBar)

6 {
7 $this->_fooBar = $fooBar;
8 }
9 }
10

11 $page = Zend\Navigation\Page\AbstractPage::factory(array(
12 'type' => 'My\Navigation\Page',
13 'label' => 'My custom page',
14 'foo_bar' => 'foo bar',
15 ));

224.5. Creating pages using the page factory 1109

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1110 Chapter 224. Pages

 CHAPTER 225

Containers

Containers have methods for adding, retrieving, deleting and iterating pages. Containers implement the SPL
interfaces RecursiveIterator and Countable, meaning that a container can be iterated using the SPL
RecursiveIteratorIterator class.

225.1 Creating containers

Zend\Navigation\AbstractContainer can not be instantiated directly. Use

Zend\Navigation\Navigation if you want to instantiate a container.
Zend\Navigation\Navigation can be constructed entirely empty, or take an array or a
Zend\Config\Config object with pages to put in the container. Each page in the given array/config will
eventually be passed to the addPage() method of the container class, which means that each element in the
array/config can be an array, a config object or a Zend\Navigation\Page\AbstractPage instance.

225.1.1 Creating a container using an array

1 /*
2 * Create a container from an array
3 *
4 * Each element in the array will be passed to
5 * Zend\Navigation\Page\AbstractPage::factory() when constructing.
6 */
7 $container = new Zend\Navigation\Navigation(array(
8 array(
9 'label' => 'Page 1',
10 'id' => 'home-link',
11 'uri' => '/',
12 ),
13 array(
14 'label' => 'Zend',
15 'uri' => 'http://www.zend-project.com/',
16 'order' => 100,
17 ),
18 array(
19 'label' => 'Page 2',
20 'controller' => 'page2',
21 'pages' => array(
22 array(
23 'label' => 'Page 2.1',

1111
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

24 'action' => 'page2_1',

25 'controller' => 'page2',
26 'class' => 'special-one',
27 'title' => 'This element has a special class',
28 'active' => true,
29 ),
30 array(
31 'label' => 'Page 2.2',
32 'action' => 'page2_2',
33 'controller' => 'page2',
34 'class' => 'special-two',
35 'title' => 'This element has a special class too',
36 ),
37 ),
38 ),
39 array(
40 'label' => 'Page 2 with params',
41 'action' => 'index',
42 'controller' => 'page2',
43 // specify a param or two,
44 'params' => array(
45 'format' => 'json',
46 'foo' => 'bar',
47 )
48 ),
49 array(
50 'label' => 'Page 2 with params and a route',
51 'action' => 'index',
52 'controller' => 'page2',
53 // specify a route name and a param for the route
54 'route' => 'nav-route-example',
55 'params' => array(
56 'format' => 'json',
57 ),
58 ),
59 array(
60 'label' => 'Page 3',
61 'action' => 'index',
62 'controller' => 'index',
63 'module' => 'mymodule',
64 'reset_params' => false,
65 ),
66 array(
67 'label' => 'Page 4',
68 'uri' => '#',
69 'pages' => array(
70 array(
71 'label' => 'Page 4.1',
72 'uri' => '/page4',
73 'title' => 'Page 4 using uri',
74 'pages' => array(
75 array(
76 'label' => 'Page 4.1.1',
77 'title' => 'Page 4 using mvc params',
78 'action' => 'index',
79 'controller' => 'page4',
80 // let's say this page is active
81 'active' => '1',

1112 Chapter 225. Containers

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

82 )
83 ),
84 ),
85 ),
86 ),
87 array(
88 'label' => 'Page 0?',
89 'uri' => '/setting/the/order/option',
90 // setting order to -1 should make it appear first
91 'order' => -1,
92 ),
93 array(
94 'label' => 'Page 5',
95 'uri' => '/',
96 // this page should not be visible
97 'visible' => false,
98 'pages' => array(
99 array(
100 'label' => 'Page 5.1',
101 'uri' => '#',
102 'pages' => array(
103 array(
104 'label' => 'Page 5.1.1',
105 'uri' => '#',
106 'pages' => array(
107 array(
108 'label' => 'Page 5.1.2',
109 'uri' => '#',
110 // let's say this page is active
111 'active' => true,
112 ),
113 ),
114 ),
115 ),
116 ),
117 ),
118 ),
119 array(
120 'label' => 'ACL page 1 (guest)',
121 'uri' => '#acl-guest',
122 'resource' => 'nav-guest',
123 'pages' => array(
124 array(
125 'label' => 'ACL page 1.1 (foo)',
126 'uri' => '#acl-foo',
127 'resource' => 'nav-foo',
128 ),
129 array(
130 'label' => 'ACL page 1.2 (bar)',
131 'uri' => '#acl-bar',
132 'resource' => 'nav-bar',
133 ),
134 array(
135 'label' => 'ACL page 1.3 (baz)',
136 'uri' => '#acl-baz',
137 'resource' => 'nav-baz',
138 ),
139 array(

225.1. Creating containers 1113

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

140 'label' => 'ACL page 1.4 (bat)',

141 'uri' => '#acl-bat',
142 'resource' => 'nav-bat',
143 ),
144 ),
145 ),
146 array(
147 'label' => 'ACL page 2 (member)',
148 'uri' => '#acl-member',
149 'resource' => 'nav-member',
150 ),
151 array(
152 'label' => 'ACL page 3 (admin',
153 'uri' => '#acl-admin',
154 'resource' => 'nav-admin',
155 'pages' => array(
156 array(
157 'label' => 'ACL page 3.1 (nothing)',
158 'uri' => '#acl-nada',
159 ),
160 ),
161 ),
162 array(
163 'label' => 'Zend Framework',
164 'route' => 'zf-route',
165 ),
166 ));

225.1.2 Creating a container using a config object

1 /* CONTENTS OF /path/to/navigation.xml:
2 <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
3 <nav>
4

5 <zend>
6 <label>Zend</label>
7 <uri>http://www.zend-project.com/</uri>
8 <order>100</order>
9 </zend>
10

11 <page1>
12 <label>Page 1</label>
13 <uri>page1</uri>
14 <pages>
15

16 <page1_1>
17 <label>Page 1.1</label>
18 <uri>page1/page1_1</uri>
19 </page1_1>
20

21 </pages>
22 </page1>
23

24 <page2>
25 <label>Page 2</label>
26 <uri>page2</uri>
27 <pages>

1114 Chapter 225. Containers

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

28

29 <page2_1>
30 <label>Page 2.1</label>
31 <uri>page2/page2_1</uri>
32 </page2_1>
33

34 <page2_2>
35 <label>Page 2.2</label>
36 <uri>page2/page2_2</uri>
37 <pages>
38

39 <page2_2_1>
40 <label>Page 2.2.1</label>
41 <uri>page2/page2_2/page2_2_1</uri>
42 </page2_2_1>
43

44 <page2_2_2>
45 <label>Page 2.2.2</label>
46 <uri>page2/page2_2/page2_2_2</uri>
47 <active>1</active>
48 </page2_2_2>
49

50 </pages>
51 </page2_2>
52

53 <page2_3>
54 <label>Page 2.3</label>
55 <uri>page2/page2_3</uri>
56 <pages>
57

58 <page2_3_1>
59 <label>Page 2.3.1</label>
60 <uri>page2/page2_3/page2_3_1</uri>
61 </page2_3_1>
62

63 <page2_3_2>
64 <label>Page 2.3.2</label>
65 <uri>page2/page2_3/page2_3_2</uri>
66 <visible>0</visible>
67 <pages>
68

69 <page2_3_2_1>
70 <label>Page 2.3.2.1</label>
71 <uri>page2/page2_3/page2_3_2/1</uri>
72 <active>1</active>
73 </page2_3_2_1>
74

75 <page2_3_2_2>
76 <label>Page 2.3.2.2</label>
77 <uri>page2/page2_3/page2_3_2/2</uri>
78 <active>1</active>
79

80 <pages>
81 <page_2_3_2_2_1>
82 <label>Ignore</label>
83 <uri>#</uri>
84 <active>1</active>
85 </page_2_3_2_2_1>

225.1. Creating containers 1115

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

86 </pages>
87 </page2_3_2_2>
88

89 </pages>
90 </page2_3_2>
91

92 <page2_3_3>
93 <label>Page 2.3.3</label>
94 <uri>page2/page2_3/page2_3_3</uri>
95 <resource>admin</resource>
96 <pages>
97

98 <page2_3_3_1>
99 <label>Page 2.3.3.1</label>
100 <uri>page2/page2_3/page2_3_3/1</uri>
101 <active>1</active>
102 </page2_3_3_1>
103

104 <page2_3_3_2>
105 <label>Page 2.3.3.2</label>
106 <uri>page2/page2_3/page2_3_3/2</uri>
107 <resource>guest</resource>
108 <active>1</active>
109 </page2_3_3_2>
110

111 </pages>
112 </page2_3_3>
113

114 </pages>
115 </page2_3>
116

117 </pages>
118 </page2>
119

120 <page3>
121 <label>Page 3</label>
122 <uri>page3</uri>
123 <pages>
124

125 <page3_1>
126 <label>Page 3.1</label>
127 <uri>page3/page3_1</uri>
128 <resource>guest</resource>
129 </page3_1>
130

131 <page3_2>
132 <label>Page 3.2</label>
133 <uri>page3/page3_2</uri>
134 <resource>member</resource>
135 <pages>
136

137 <page3_2_1>
138 <label>Page 3.2.1</label>
139 <uri>page3/page3_2/page3_2_1</uri>
140 </page3_2_1>
141

142 <page3_2_2>
143 <label>Page 3.2.2</label>

1116 Chapter 225. Containers

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

144 <uri>page3/page3_2/page3_2_2</uri>
145 <resource>admin</resource>
146 </page3_2_2>
147

148 </pages>
149 </page3_2>
150

151 <page3_3>
152 <label>Page 3.3</label>
153 <uri>page3/page3_3</uri>
154 <resource>special</resource>
155 <pages>
156

157 <page3_3_1>
158 <label>Page 3.3.1</label>
159 <uri>page3/page3_3/page3_3_1</uri>
160 <visible>0</visible>
161 </page3_3_1>
162

163 <page3_3_2>
164 <label>Page 3.3.2</label>
165 <uri>page3/page3_3/page3_3_2</uri>
166 <resource>admin</resource>
167 </page3_3_2>
168

169 </pages>
170 </page3_3>
171

172 </pages>
173 </page3>
174

175 <home>
176 <label>Home</label>
177 <order>-100</order>
178 <module>default</module>
179 <controller>index</controller>
180 <action>index</action>
181 </home>
182

183 </nav>
184 */
185

186 $reader = new Zend\Config\Reader\Xml();

187 $config = $reader->fromFile('/path/to/navigation.xml');
188 $container = new Zend\Navigation\Navigation($config);

225.2 Adding pages

Adding pages to a container can be done with the methods addPage(), addPages(), or setPages(). See
examples below for explanation.
1 // create container
2 $container = new Zend\Navigation\Navigation();
3

4 // add page by giving a page instance

5 $container->addPage(

225.2. Adding pages 1117

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

6 Zend\Navigation\Page\AbstractPage::factory(
7 array(
8 'uri' => 'http://www.example.com/',
9 )
10 )
11 );
12

13 // add page by giving an array

14 $container->addPage(
15 array(
16 'uri' => 'http://www.example.com/',
17 )
18 );
19

20 // add page by giving a config object

21 $container->addPage(
22 new Zend\Config\Config(
23 array(
24 'uri' => 'http://www.example.com/',
25 )
26 )
27 );
28

29 $pages = array(
30 array(
31 'label' => 'Save',
32 'action' => 'save',
33 ),
34 array(
35 'label' => 'Delete',
36 'action' => 'delete',
37 )
38 );
39

40 // add two pages

41 $container->addPages($pages);
42

43 // remove existing pages and add the given pages

44 $container->setPages($pages);

225.3 Removing pages

Removing pages can be done with removePage() or removePages(). The first method accepts a an instance of
a page, or an integer. The integer corresponds to the order a page has. The latter method will remove all pages in
the container.
1 $container = new Zend\Navigation\Navigation(array(
2 array(
3 'label' => 'Page 1',
4 'action' => 'page1',
5 ),
6 array(
7 'label' => 'Page 2',
8 'action' => 'page2',
9 'order' => 200,
10 ),

1118 Chapter 225. Containers

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

11 array(
12 'label' => 'Page 3',
13 'action' => 'page3',
14 )
15 ));
16

17 // remove page by implicit page order

18 $container->removePage(0); // removes Page 1
19

20 // remove page by instance

21 $page3 = $container->findOneByAction('page3');
22 $container->removePage($page3); // removes Page 3
23

24 // remove page by explicit page order

25 $container->removePage(200); // removes Page 2
26

27 // remove all pages

28 $container->removePages(); // removes all pages

225.4 Finding pages

Containers have finder methods for retrieving pages. They are findOneBy($property, $value),
findAllBy($property, $value), and findBy($property, $value, $all = false). Those
methods will recursively search the container for pages matching the given $page->$property == $value.
The first method, findOneBy(), will return a single page matching the property with the given value, or NULL if it
cannot be found. The second method will return all pages with a property matching the given value. The third method
will call one of the two former methods depending on the $all flag.
The finder methods can also be used magically by appending the property name to findBy, findOneBy, or
findAllBy, e.g. findOneByLabel(Home) to return the first matching page with label Home. Other com-
binations are findByLabel(...), findOneByTitle(...), findAllByController(...), etc. Finder
methods also work on custom properties, such as findByFoo(bar).
1 $container = new Zend\Navigation\Navigation(array(
2 array(
3 'label' => 'Page 1',
4 'uri' => 'page-1',
5 'foo' => 'bar',
6 'pages' => array(
7 array(
8 'label' => 'Page 1.1',
9 'uri' => 'page-1.1',
10 'foo' => 'bar',
11 ),
12 array(
13 'label' => 'Page 1.2',
14 'uri' => 'page-1.2',
15 'class' => 'my-class',
16 ),
17 array(
18 'type' => 'uri',
19 'label' => 'Page 1.3',
20 'uri' => 'page-1.3',
21 'action' => 'about',
22 )
23 )

225.4. Finding pages 1119

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

24 ),
25 array(
26 'label' => 'Page 2',
27 'id' => 'page_2_and_3',
28 'class' => 'my-class',
29 'module' => 'page2',
30 'controller' => 'index',
31 'action' => 'page1',
32 ),
33 array(
34 'label' => 'Page 3',
35 'id' => 'page_2_and_3',
36 'module' => 'page3',
37 'controller' => 'index',
38 ),
39 ));
40

41 // The 'id' is not required to be unique, but be aware that

42 // having two pages with the same id will render the same id attribute
43 // in menus and breadcrumbs.
44 $found = $container->findBy('id',
45 'page_2_and_3'); // returns Page 2
46 $found = $container->findOneBy('id',
47 'page_2_and_3'); // returns Page 2
48 $found = $container->findBy('id',
49 'page_2_and_3',
50 true); // returns Page 2 and Page 3
51 $found = $container->findById('page_2_and_3'); // returns Page 2
52 $found = $container->findOneById('page_2_and_3'); // returns Page 2
53 $found = $container->findAllById('page_2_and_3'); // returns Page 2 and Page 3
54

55 // Find all matching CSS class my-class

56 $found = $container->findAllBy('class',
57 'my-class'); // returns Page 1.2 and Page 2
58 $found = $container->findAllByClass('my-class'); // returns Page 1.2 and Page 2
59

60 // Find first matching CSS class my-class

61 $found = $container->findOneByClass('my-class'); // returns Page 1.2
62

63 // Find all matching CSS class non-existent

64 $found = $container->findAllByClass('non-existent'); // returns array()
65

66 // Find first matching CSS class non-existent

67 $found = $container->findOneByClass('non-existent'); // returns null
68

69 // Find all pages with custom property 'foo' = 'bar'

70 $found = $container->findAllBy('foo', 'bar'); // returns Page 1 and Page 1.1
71

72 // To achieve the same magically, 'foo' must be in lowercase.

73 // This is because 'foo' is a custom property, and thus the
74 // property name is not normalized to 'Foo'
75 $found = $container->findAllByfoo('bar');
76

77 // Find all with controller = 'index'

78 $found = $container->findAllByController('index'); // returns Page 2 and Page 3

1120 Chapter 225. Containers

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

225.5 Iterating containers

Zend\Navigation\AbstractContainer implements RecursiveIterator, and can be iterated using any

Iterator class. To iterate a container recursively, use the RecursiveIteratorIterator class.
1 /*
2 * Create a container from an array
3 */
4 $container = new Zend\Navigation\Navigation(array(
5 array(
6 'label' => 'Page 1',
7 'uri' => '#',
8 ),
9 array(
10 'label' => 'Page 2',
11 'uri' => '#',
12 'pages' => array(
13 array(
14 'label' => 'Page 2.1',
15 'uri' => '#',
16 ),
17 array(
18 'label' => 'Page 2.2',
19 'uri' => '#',
20 )
21 )
22 )
23 array(
24 'label' => 'Page 3',
25 'uri' => '#',
26 ),
27 ));
28

29 // Iterate flat using regular foreach:

30 // Output: Page 1, Page 2, Page 3
31 foreach ($container as $page) {
32 echo $page->label;
33 }
34

35 // Iterate recursively using RecursiveIteratorIterator

36 $it = new RecursiveIteratorIterator(
37 $container, RecursiveIteratorIterator::SELF_FIRST);
38

39 // Output: Page 1, Page 2, Page 2.1, Page 2.2, Page 3

40 foreach ($it as $page) {
41 echo $page->label;
42 }

225.6 Other operations

The method hasPage(Zend\Navigation\Page\AbstractPage $page) checks if the container has the

given page. The method hasPages() checks if there are any pages in the container, and is equivalent to
count($container) > 0.
The toArray() method converts the container and the pages in it to an array. This can be useful for serializing and
debugging.

225.5. Iterating containers 1121

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

225.6.1 Converting a container to an array

1 $container = new Zend\Navigation\Navigation(array(

2 array(
3 'label' => 'Page 1',
4 'uri' => '#',
5 ),
6 array(
7 'label' => 'Page 2',
8 'uri' => '#',
9 'pages' => array(
10 array(
11 'label' => 'Page 2.1',
12 'uri' => '#',
13 ),
14 array(
15 'label' => 'Page 2.2',
16 'uri' => '#',
17 ),
18 ),
19 ),
20 ));
21

22 var_dump($container->toArray());
23

24 /* Output:
25 array(2) {
26 [0]=> array(15) {
27 ["label"]=> string(6) "Page 1"
28 ["id"]=> NULL
29 ["class"]=> NULL
30 ["title"]=> NULL
31 ["target"]=> NULL
32 ["rel"]=> array(0) {
33 }
34 ["rev"]=> array(0) {
35 }
36 ["order"]=> NULL
37 ["resource"]=> NULL
38 ["privilege"]=> NULL
39 ["active"]=> bool(false)
40 ["visible"]=> bool(true)
41 ["type"]=> string(23) "Zend\Navigation\Page\Uri"
42 ["pages"]=> array(0) {
43 }
44 ["uri"]=> string(1) "#"
45 }
46 [1]=> array(15) {
47 ["label"]=> string(6) "Page 2"
48 ["id"]=> NULL
49 ["class"]=> NULL
50 ["title"]=> NULL
51 ["target"]=> NULL
52 ["rel"]=> array(0) {
53 }
54 ["rev"]=> array(0) {
55 }
56 ["order"]=> NULL

1122 Chapter 225. Containers

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

57 ["resource"]=> NULL
58 ["privilege"]=> NULL
59 ["active"]=> bool(false)
60 ["visible"]=> bool(true)
61 ["type"]=> string(23) "Zend\Navigation\Page\Uri"
62 ["pages"]=> array(2) {
63 [0]=> array(15) {
64 ["label"]=> string(8) "Page 2.1"
65 ["id"]=> NULL
66 ["class"]=> NULL
67 ["title"]=> NULL
68 ["target"]=> NULL
69 ["rel"]=> array(0) {
70 }
71 ["rev"]=> array(0) {
72 }
73 ["order"]=> NULL
74 ["resource"]=> NULL
75 ["privilege"]=> NULL
76 ["active"]=> bool(false)
77 ["visible"]=> bool(true)
78 ["type"]=> string(23) "Zend\Navigation\Page\Uri"
79 ["pages"]=> array(0) {
80 }
81 ["uri"]=> string(1) "#"
82 }
83 [1]=>
84 array(15) {
85 ["label"]=> string(8) "Page 2.2"
86 ["id"]=> NULL
87 ["class"]=> NULL
88 ["title"]=> NULL
89 ["target"]=> NULL
90 ["rel"]=> array(0) {
91 }
92 ["rev"]=> array(0) {
93 }
94 ["order"]=> NULL
95 ["resource"]=> NULL
96 ["privilege"]=> NULL
97 ["active"]=> bool(false)
98 ["visible"]=> bool(true)
99 ["type"]=> string(23) "Zend\Navigation\Page\Uri"
100 ["pages"]=> array(0) {
101 }
102 ["uri"]=> string(1) "#"
103 }
104 }
105 ["uri"]=> string(1) "#"
106 }
107 }
108 */

225.6. Other operations 1123

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1124 Chapter 225. Containers

 CHAPTER 226

View Helpers

226.1 Introduction

The navigation helpers are used for rendering navigational elements from Zend\Navigation\Navigation instances.
There are 5 built-in helpers:
Breadcrumbs, used for rendering the path to the currently active page.
Links, used for rendering navigational head links (e.g. <link rel="next" href="..." />)
Menu, used for rendering menus.
Sitemap, used for rendering sitemaps conforming to the Sitemaps XML format.
Navigation, used for proxying calls to other navigational helpers.
All built-in helpers extend Zend\View\Helper\Navigation\AbstractHelper, which
adds integration with ACL and translation. The abstract class implements the interface
Zend\View\Helper\Navigation\HelperInterface, which defines the following methods:
getContainer() and setContainer() gets and sets the navigation container the helper should operate
on by default, and hasContainer() checks if the helper has container registered.
getTranslator() and setTranslator() gets and sets the translator used for translating labels and
titles. isTranslatorEnabled() and setTranslatorEnabled() controls whether the translator
should be enabled. The method hasTranslator() checks if the helper has a translator registered.
getAcl(), setAcl(), getRole() and setRole(), gets and sets ACL
(Zend\Permissions\Acl\AclInterface) instance and role (String or
Zend\Permissions\Acl\Role\RoleInterface) used for filtering out pages when rendering.
getUseAcl() and setUseAcl() controls whether ACL should be enabled. The methods hasAcl() and
hasRole() checks if the helper has an ACL instance or a role registered.
__toString(), magic method to ensure that helpers can be rendered by echoing the helper instance directly.
render(), must be implemented by concrete helpers to do the actual rendering.
In addition to the method stubs from the interface, the abstract class also implements the following methods:
getIndent() and setIndent() gets and sets indentation. The setter accepts a String or an
Integer. In the case of an Integer, the helper will use the given number of spaces for indentation. I.e.,
setIndent(4) means 4 initial spaces of indentation. Indentation can be specified for all helpers except the
Sitemap helper.
getMinDepth() and setMinDepth() gets and sets the minimum depth a page must have to be included
by the helper. Setting NULL means no minimum depth.

1125
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

getMaxDepth() and setMaxDepth() gets and sets the maximum depth a page can have to be included by
the helper. Setting NULL means no maximum depth.
getRenderInvisible() and setRenderInvisible() gets and sets whether to render items that have
been marked as invisible or not.
__call() is used for proxying calls to the container registered in the helper, which means you can call methods
on a helper as if it was a container. See example below.
findActive($container, $minDepth, $maxDepth) is used for finding the deepest active page in
the given container. If depths are not given, the method will use the values retrieved from getMinDepth()
and getMaxDepth(). The deepest active page must be between $minDepth and $maxDepth inclusively.
Returns an array containing a reference to the found page instance and the depth at which the page was found.
htmlify() renders an a HTML element from a Zend\Navigation\Page\AbstractPage instance.
accept() is used for determining if a page should be accepted when iterating containers. This method checks
for page visibility and verifies that the helpers role is allowed access to the pages resource and privilege.
The static method setDefaultAcl() is used for setting a default ACL object that will be used by helpers.
The static method setDefaultRole() is used for setting a default Role that will be used by helpers
If a container is not explicitly set, the helper will create an empty Zend\Navigation\Navigation container
when calling $helper->getContainer().

226.1.1 Proxying calls to the navigation container

Navigation view helpers use the magic method __call() to proxy method calls to the navigation container that is
registered in the view helper.
1 $this->navigation()->addPage(array(
2 'type' => 'uri',
3 'label' => 'New page'));

The call above will add a page to the container in the Navigation helper.

226.2 Translation of labels and titles

The navigation helpers support translation of page labels and titles. You can set a translator of type
Zend\I18n\Translator in the helper using $helper->setTranslator($translator).
If you want to disable translation, use $helper->setTranslatorEnabled(false).
The proxy helper will inject its own translator to the helper it proxies to if the proxied helper doesnt already have a
translator.

Note: There is no translation in the sitemap helper, since there are no page labels or titles involved in an XML sitemap.

226.3 Integration with ACL

All navigational view helpers support ACL inherently from the class Zend\View\Helper\Navigation\AbstractHelper.
An object implementing Zend\Permissions\Acl\AclInterface can be assigned to a helper in-
stance with $helper->setAcl($acl), and role with $helper->setRole(member) or $helper->setRole(new
Zend\Permissions\Acl\Role\GenericRole(member)). If ACL is used in the helper, the role in the helper must

1126 Chapter 226. View Helpers

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

be allowed by the ACL to access a pages resource and/or have the pages privilege for the page to be included when
rendering.
If a page is not accepted by ACL, any descendant page will also be excluded from rendering.
The proxy helper will inject its own ACL and role to the helper it proxies to if the proxied helper doesnt already have
any.
The examples below all show how ACL affects rendering.

226.4 Navigation setup used in examples

This example shows the setup of a navigation container for a fictional software company.
Notes on the setup:
The domain for the site is www.example.com.
Interesting page properties are marked with a comment.
Unless otherwise is stated in other examples, the user is requesting the URL
http://www.example.com/products/server/faq/, which translates to the page labeled FAQ under Foo Server.
The assumed ACL and router setup is shown below the container setup.
1 /*
2 * Navigation container (config/array)
3

4 * Each element in the array will be passed to

5 * Zend\Navigation\Page\AbstractPage::factory() when constructing
6 * the navigation container below.
7 */
8 $pages = array(
9 array(
10 'label' => 'Home',
11 'title' => 'Go Home',
12 'module' => 'default',
13 'controller' => 'index',
14 'action' => 'index',
15 'order' => -100 // make sure home is the first page
16 ),
17 array(
18 'label' => 'Special offer this week only!',
19 'module' => 'store',
20 'controller' => 'offer',
21 'action' => 'amazing',
22 'visible' => false // not visible
23 ),
24 array(
25 'label' => 'Products',
26 'module' => 'products',
27 'controller' => 'index',
28 'action' => 'index',
29 'pages' => array(
30 array(
31 'label' => 'Foo Server',
32 'module' => 'products',
33 'controller' => 'server',
34 'action' => 'index',

226.4. Navigation setup used in examples 1127

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

35 'pages' => array(

36 array(
37 'label' => 'FAQ',
38 'module' => 'products',
39 'controller' => 'server',
40 'action' => 'faq',
41 'rel' => array(
42 'canonical' => 'http://www.example.com/?page=faq',
43 'alternate' => array(
44 'module' => 'products',
45 'controller' => 'server',
46 'action' => 'faq',
47 'params' => array('format' => 'xml')
48 )
49 )
50 ),
51 array(
52 'label' => 'Editions',
53 'module' => 'products',
54 'controller' => 'server',
55 'action' => 'editions'
56 ),
57 array(
58 'label' => 'System Requirements',
59 'module' => 'products',
60 'controller' => 'server',
61 'action' => 'requirements'
62 )
63 )
64 ),
65 array(
66 'label' => 'Foo Studio',
67 'module' => 'products',
68 'controller' => 'studio',
69 'action' => 'index',
70 'pages' => array(
71 array(
72 'label' => 'Customer Stories',
73 'module' => 'products',
74 'controller' => 'studio',
75 'action' => 'customers'
76 ),
77 array(
78 'label' => 'Support',
79 'module' => 'products',
80 'controller' => 'studio',
81 'action' => 'support'
82 )
83 )
84 )
85 )
86 ),
87 array(
88 'label' => 'Company',
89 'title' => 'About us',
90 'module' => 'company',
91 'controller' => 'about',
92 'action' => 'index',

1128 Chapter 226. View Helpers

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

93 'pages' => array(

94 array(
95 'label' => 'Investor Relations',
96 'module' => 'company',
97 'controller' => 'about',
98 'action' => 'investors'
99 ),
100 array(
101 'label' => 'News',
102 'class' => 'rss', // class
103 'module' => 'company',
104 'controller' => 'news',
105 'action' => 'index',
106 'pages' => array(
107 array(
108 'label' => 'Press Releases',
109 'module' => 'company',
110 'controller' => 'news',
111 'action' => 'press'
112 ),
113 array(
114 'label' => 'Archive',
115 'route' => 'archive', // route
116 'module' => 'company',
117 'controller' => 'news',
118 'action' => 'archive'
119 )
120 )
121 )
122 )
123 ),
124 array(
125 'label' => 'Community',
126 'module' => 'community',
127 'controller' => 'index',
128 'action' => 'index',
129 'pages' => array(
130 array(
131 'label' => 'My Account',
132 'module' => 'community',
133 'controller' => 'account',
134 'action' => 'index',
135 'resource' => 'mvc:community.account' // resource
136 ),
137 array(
138 'label' => 'Forums',
139 'uri' => 'http://forums.example.com/',
140 'class' => 'external' // class
141 )
142 )
143 ),
144 array(
145 'label' => 'Administration',
146 'module' => 'admin',
147 'controller' => 'index',
148 'action' => 'index',
149 'resource' => 'mvc:admin', // resource
150 'pages' => array(

226.4. Navigation setup used in examples 1129

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

151 array(
152 'label' => 'Write new article',
153 'module' => 'admin',
154 'controller' => 'post',
155 'action' => 'write'
156 )
157 )
158 )
159 );
160

161 // Create container from array

162 $container = new Zend\Navigation\Navigation($pages);
163

164 // Store the container in the proxy helper:

165 $view->plugin('navigation')->setContainer($container);
166

167 // ...or simply:

168 $view->navigation($container);

In addition to the container above, the following setup is assumed:

1 <?php
2 // module/MyModule/config/module.config.php
3

4 return array(
5 /* ... */
6 'router' array(
7 'routes' => array(
8 'archive' => array(
9 'type' => 'Segment',
10 'options' => array(
11 'route' => '/archive/:year',
12 'defaults' => array(
13 'module' => 'company',
14 'controller' => 'news',
15 'action' => 'archive',
16 'year' => (int) date('Y') - 1,
17 ),
18 'constraints' => array(
19 'year' => '\d+',
20 ),
21 ),
22 ),
23 /* You can have other routes here... */
24 ),
25 ),
26 /* ... */
27 );

1 <?php
2 // module/MyModule/Module.php
3

4 namespace MyModule;
5

6 use Zend\View\HelperPluginManager;
7 use Zend\Permissions\Acl\Acl;
8 use Zend\Permissions\Acl\Role\GenericRole;
9 use Zend\Permissions\Acl\Resource\GenericResource;

1130 Chapter 226. View Helpers

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

10

11 class Module
12 {
13 /* ... */
14 public function getViewHelperConfig()
15 {
16 return array(
17 'factories' => array(
18 // This will overwrite the native navigation helper
19 'navigation' => function(HelperPluginManager $pm) {
20 // Setup ACL:
21 $acl = new Acl();
22 $acl->addRole(new GenericRole('member'));
23 $acl->addRole(new GenericRole('admin'));
24 $acl->addResource(new GenericResource('mvc:admin'));
25 $acl->addResource(new GenericResource('mvc:community.account'));
26 $acl->allow('member', 'mvc:community.account');
27 $acl->allow('admin', null);
28

29 // Get an instance of the proxy helper

30 $navigation = $pm->get('Zend\View\Helper\Navigation');
31

32 // Store ACL and role in the proxy helper:

33 $navigation->setAcl($acl)
34 ->setRole('member');
35

36 // Return the new navigation helper instance

37 return $navigation;
38 }
39 )
40 );
41 }
42 /* ... */
43 }

226.4. Navigation setup used in examples 1131

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1132 Chapter 226. View Helpers

 CHAPTER 227

View Helper - Breadcrumbs

227.1 Introduction

Breadcrumbs are used for indicating where in a sitemap a user is currently browsing, and are typically rendered like
this: You are here: Home > Products > FantasticProduct 1.0. The breadcrumbs helper follows the guidelines from
Breadcrumbs Pattern - Yahoo! Design Pattern Library, and allows simple customization (minimum/maximum depth,
indentation, separator, and whether the last element should be linked), or rendering using a partial view script.
The Breadcrumbs helper works like this; it finds the deepest active page in a navigation container, and renders an
upwards path to the root. For MVC pages, the activeness of a page is determined by inspecting the request object,
as stated in the section on Zend\Navigation\Page\Mvc.
The helper sets the minDepth property to 1 by default, meaning breadcrumbs will not be rendered if the deepest active
page is a root page. If maxDepth is specified, the helper will stop rendering when at the specified depth (e.g. stop at
level 2 even if the deepest active page is on level 3).
Methods in the breadcrumbs helper:
{get|set}Separator() gets/sets separator string that is used between breadcrumbs. Default is &gt; .
{get|set}LinkLast() gets/sets whether the last breadcrumb should be rendered as an anchor or not. Default is
FALSE.
{get|set}Partial() gets/sets a partial view script that should be used for rendering breadcrumbs. If a partial view
script is set, the helpers render() method will use the renderPartial() method. If no partial is set,
the renderStraight() method is used. The helper expects the partial to be a String or an Array with
two elements. If the partial is a String, it denotes the name of the partial script to use. If it is an Array, the
first element will be used as the name of the partial view script, and the second element is the module where the
script is found.
renderStraight() is the default render method.
renderPartial() is used for rendering using a partial view script.

227.2 Basic usage

This example shows how to render breadcrumbs with default settings.

In a view script or layout:
1 <?php echo $this->navigation()->breadcrumbs(); ?>

1133
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

The two calls above take advantage of the magic __toString() method, and are equivalent to:
1 <?php echo $this->navigation()->breadcrumbs()->render(); ?>

Output:
1 <a href="/products">Products</a> &gt; <a href="/products/server">Foo Server</a> &gt; FAQ

227.3 Specifying indentation

This example shows how to render breadcrumbs with initial indentation.

Rendering with 8 spaces indentation:
1 <?php echo $this->navigation()->breadcrumbs()->setIndent(8);?>

Output:
1 <a href="/products">Products</a> &gt; <a href="/products/server">Foo Server</a> &gt; FAQ

227.4 Customize output

This example shows how to customize breadcrumbs output by specifying various options.
In a view script or layout:
1 <?php
2 echo $this->navigation()
3 ->breadcrumbs()
4 ->setLinkLast(true) // link last page
5 ->setMaxDepth(1) // stop at level 1
6 ->setSeparator(' ' . PHP_EOL); // cool separator with newline
7 ?>

Output:
1 <a href="/products">Products</a>
2 <a href="/products/server">Foo Server</a>

Setting minimum depth required to render breadcrumbs:

1 <?php
2 $this->navigation()->breadcrumbs()->setMinDepth(10);
3 echo $this->navigation()->breadcrumbs();
4 ?>

Output:
Nothing, because the deepest active page is not at level 10 or deeper.

227.5 Rendering using a partial view script

This example shows how to render customized breadcrumbs using a partial vew script. By calling setPartial(),
you can specify a partial view script that will be used when calling render(). When a partial is specified, the

1134 Chapter 227. View Helper - Breadcrumbs

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

renderPartial() method will be called. This method will find the deepest active page and pass an array of pages
that leads to the active page to the partial view script.
In a layout:
1 echo $this->navigation()->breadcrumbs()
2 ->setPartial('my-module/partials/breadcrumbs');

Contents of module/MyModule/view/my-module/partials/breadcrumbs.phtml:
1 echo implode(', ', array_map(
2 function ($a) { return $a->getLabel(); },
3 $this->pages));

Output:
1 Products, Foo Server, FAQ

227.5. Rendering using a partial view script 1135

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1136 Chapter 227. View Helper - Breadcrumbs

 CHAPTER 228

View Helper - Links

228.1 Introduction

The links helper is used for rendering HTML LINK elements. Links are used for describing document relationships
of the currently active page. Read more about links and link types at Document relationships: the LINK element
(HTML4 W3C Rec.) and Link types (HTML4 W3C Rec.) in the HTML4 W3C Recommendation.
There are two types of relations; forward and reverse, indicated by the kewyords rel and rev. Most methods in the
helper will take a $rel param, which must be either rel or rev. Most methods also take a $type param, which is
used for specifying the link type (e.g. alternate, start, next, prev, chapter, etc).
Relationships can be added to page objects manually, or found by traversing the container registered in the helper.
The method findRelation($page, $rel, $type) will first try to find the given $rel of $type from the
$page by calling $page->findRel($type) or $page->findRel($type). If the $page has a relation that can be converted
to a page instance, that relation will be used. If the $page instance doesnt have the specified $type, the helper will
look for a method in the helper named search$rel$type (e.g. searchRelNext() or searchRevAlternate()).
If such a method exists, it will be used for determining the $pages relation by traversing the container.
Not all relations can be determined by traversing the container. These are the relations that will be found by searching:
searchRelStart(), forward start relation: the first page in the container.
searchRelNext(), forward next relation; finds the next page in the container, i.e. the page after the active
page.
searchRelPrev(), forward prev relation; finds the previous page, i.e. the page before the active page.
searchRelChapter(), forward chapter relations; finds all pages on level 0 except the start relation or
the active page if its on level 0.
searchRelSection(), forward section relations; finds all child pages of the active page if the active page
is on level 0 (a chapter).
searchRelSubsection(), forward subsection relations; finds all child pages of the active page if the
active pages is on level 1 (a section).
searchRevSection(), reverse section relation; finds the parent of the active page if the active page is on
level 1 (a section).
searchRevSubsection(), reverse subsection relation; finds the parent of the active page if the active
page is on level 2 (a subsection).

Note: When looking for relations in the page instance ($page->getRel($type) or $page->getRev($type)), the helper
accepts the values of type String, Array, Zend\Config, or Zend\Navigation\Page\AbstractPage.
If a string is found, it will be converted to a Zend\Navigation\Page\Uri. If an array or a config is found, it

1137
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

will be converted to one or several page instances. If the first key of the array/config is numeric, it will be considered
to contain several pages, and each element will be passed to the page factory. If the first key is not numeric, the
array/config will be passed to the page factory directly, and a single page will be returned.

The helper also supports magic methods for finding relations. E.g. to find forward alternate relations, call $helper-
>findRelAlternate($page), and to find reverse section relations, call $helper->findRevSection($page). Those calls
correspond to $helper->findRelation($page, rel, alternate); and $helper->findRelation($page, rev, section);
respectively.
To customize which relations should be rendered, the helper uses a render flag. The render flag is an integer value,
and will be used in a bitwise and (&) operation against the helpers render constants to determine if the relation that
belongs to the render constant should be rendered.
See the example below for more information.
Zend\View\Helper\Navigation\Links::RENDER_ALTERNATE
Zend\View\Helper\Navigation\Links::RENDER_STYLESHEET
Zend\View\Helper\Navigation\Links::RENDER_START
Zend\View\Helper\Navigation\Links::RENDER_NEXT
Zend\View\Helper\Navigation\Links::RENDER_PREV
Zend\View\Helper\Navigation\Links::RENDER_CONTENTS
Zend\View\Helper\Navigation\Links::RENDER_INDEX
Zend\View\Helper\Navigation\Links::RENDER_GLOSSARY
Zend\View\Helper\Navigation\Links::RENDER_COPYRIGHT
Zend\View\Helper\Navigation\Links::RENDER_CHAPTER
Zend\View\Helper\Navigation\Links::RENDER_SECTION
Zend\View\Helper\Navigation\Links::RENDER_SUBSECTION
Zend\View\Helper\Navigation\Links::RENDER_APPENDIX
Zend\View\Helper\Navigation\Links::RENDER_HELP
Zend\View\Helper\Navigation\Links::RENDER_BOOKMARK
Zend\View\Helper\Navigation\Links::RENDER_CUSTOM
Zend\View\Helper\Navigation\Links::RENDER_ALL
The constants from RENDER_ALTERNATE to RENDER_BOOKMARK denote standard HTML link types.
RENDER_CUSTOM denotes non-standard relations that specified in pages. RENDER_ALL denotes standard and non-
standard relations.
Methods in the links helper:
{get|set}RenderFlag() gets/sets the render flag. Default is RENDER_ALL. See examples below on how to set
the render flag.
findAllRelations() finds all relations of all types for a given page.
findRelation() finds all relations of a given type from a given page.
searchRel{Start|Next|Prev|Chapter|Section|Subsection}() traverses a container to find forward relations to the
start page, the next page, the previous page, chapters, sections, and subsections.
searchRev{Section|Subsection}() traverses a container to find reverse relations to sections or subsections.

1138 Chapter 228. View Helper - Links

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

renderLink() renders a single link element.

228.2 Basic usage

228.2.1 Specify relations in pages

This example shows how to specify relations in pages.

1 $container = new Zend\Navigation\Navigation(array(
2 array(
3 'label' => 'Relations using strings',
4 'rel' => array(
5 'alternate' => 'http://www.example.org/'
6 ),
7 'rev' => array(
8 'alternate' => 'http://www.example.net/'
9 )
10 ),
11 array(
12 'label' => 'Relations using arrays',
13 'rel' => array(
14 'alternate' => array(
15 'label' => 'Example.org',
16 'uri' => 'http://www.example.org/'
17 )
18 )
19 ),
20 array(
21 'label' => 'Relations using configs',
22 'rel' => array(
23 'alternate' => new Zend\Config\Config(array(
24 'label' => 'Example.org',
25 'uri' => 'http://www.example.org/'
26 ))
27 )
28 ),
29 array(
30 'label' => 'Relations using pages instance',
31 'rel' => array(
32 'alternate' => Zend\Navigation\Page\AbstractPage::factory(array(
33 'label' => 'Example.org',
34 'uri' => 'http://www.example.org/'
35 ))
36 )
37 )
38 ));

228.2.2 Default rendering of links

This example shows how to render a menu from a container registered/found in the view helper.
In a view script or layout:
1 <?php echo $this->view->navigation()->links(); ?>

228.2. Basic usage 1139

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Output:
1 <link rel="alternate" href="/products/server/faq/format/xml">
2 <link rel="start" href="/" title="Home">
3 <link rel="next" href="/products/server/editions" title="Editions">
4 <link rel="prev" href="/products/server" title="Foo Server">
5 <link rel="chapter" href="/products" title="Products">
6 <link rel="chapter" href="/company/about" title="Company">
7 <link rel="chapter" href="/community" title="Community">
8 <link rel="canonical" href="http://www.example.com/?page=server-faq">
9 <link rev="subsection" href="/products/server" title="Foo Server">

228.2.3 Specify which relations to render

This example shows how to specify which relations to find and render.
Render only start, next, and prev:
1 $helper->setRenderFlag(Zend\View\Helper\Navigation\Links::RENDER_START |
2 Zend\View\Helper\Navigation\Links::RENDER_NEXT |
3 Zend\View\Helper\Navigation\Links::RENDER_PREV);

Output:
1 <link rel="start" href="/" title="Home">
2 <link rel="next" href="/products/server/editions" title="Editions">
3 <link rel="prev" href="/products/server" title="Foo Server">

Render only native link types:

1 $helper->setRenderFlag(Zend\View\Helper\Navigation\Links::RENDER_ALL ^
2 Zend\View\Helper\Navigation\Links::RENDER_CUSTOM);

Output:
1 <link rel="alternate" href="/products/server/faq/format/xml">
2 <link rel="start" href="/" title="Home">
3 <link rel="next" href="/products/server/editions" title="Editions">
4 <link rel="prev" href="/products/server" title="Foo Server">
5 <link rel="chapter" href="/products" title="Products">
6 <link rel="chapter" href="/company/about" title="Company">
7 <link rel="chapter" href="/community" title="Community">
8 <link rev="subsection" href="/products/server" title="Foo Server">

Render all but chapter:

1 $helper->setRenderFlag(Zend\View\Helper\Navigation\Links::RENDER_ALL ^
2 Zend\View\Helper\Navigation\Links::RENDER_CHAPTER);

Output:
1 <link rel="alternate" href="/products/server/faq/format/xml">
2 <link rel="start" href="/" title="Home">
3 <link rel="next" href="/products/server/editions" title="Editions">
4 <link rel="prev" href="/products/server" title="Foo Server">
5 <link rel="canonical" href="http://www.example.com/?page=server-faq">
6 <link rev="subsection" href="/products/server" title="Foo Server">

1140 Chapter 228. View Helper - Links

 CHAPTER 229

View Helper - Menu

229.1 Introduction

The Menu helper is used for rendering menus from navigation containers. By default, the menu will be rendered using
HTML UL and LI tags, but the helper also allows using a partial view script.
Methods in the Menu helper:
{get|set}UlClass() gets/sets the CSS class used in renderMenu().
{get|set}OnlyActiveBranch() gets/sets a flag specifying whether only the active branch of a container should be
rendered.
{get|set}RenderParents() gets/sets a flag specifying whether parents should be rendered when only rendering
active branch of a container. If set to FALSE, only the deepest active menu will be rendered.
{get|set}Partial() gets/sets a partial view script that should be used for rendering menu. If a partial view script
is set, the helpers render() method will use the renderPartial() method. If no partial is set, the
renderMenu() method is used. The helper expects the partial to be a String or an Array with two
elements. If the partial is a String, it denotes the name of the partial script to use. If it is an Array, the first
element will be used as the name of the partial view script, and the second element is the module where the
script is found.
htmlify() overrides the method from the abstract class to return span elements if the page has no href.
renderMenu($container = null, $options = array()) is the default render method, and will
render a container as a HTML UL list.
If $container is not given, the container registered in the helper will be rendered.
$options is used for overriding options specified temporarily without resetting the values in the helper in-
stance. It is an associative array where each key corresponds to an option in the helper.
Recognized options:
indent; indentation. Expects a String or an int value.
minDepth; minimum depth. Expects an int or NULL (no minimum depth).
maxDepth; maximum depth. Expects an int or NULL (no maximum depth).
ulClass; CSS class for ul element. Expects a String.
onlyActiveBranch; whether only active branch should be rendered. Expects a Boolean value.
renderParents; whether parents should be rendered if only rendering active branch. Expects a Boolean
value.

1141
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

If an option is not given, the value set in the helper will be used.
renderPartial() is used for rendering the menu using a partial view script.
renderSubMenu() renders the deepest menu level of a containers active branch.

229.2 Basic usage

This example shows how to render a menu from a container registered/found in the view helper. Notice how pages are
filtered out based on visibility and ACL.
In a view script or layout:
1 <?php echo $this->navigation()->menu()->render() ?>
2

3 Or simply:
4 <?php echo $this->navigation()->menu() ?>

Output:
1 <ul class="navigation">
2 <li>
3 <a title="Go Home" href="/">Home</a>
4 </li>
5 <li class="active">
6 <a href="/products">Products</a>
7 <ul>
8 <li class="active">
9 <a href="/products/server">Foo Server</a>
10 <ul>
11 <li class="active">
12 <a href="/products/server/faq">FAQ</a>
13 </li>
14 <li>
15 <a href="/products/server/editions">Editions</a>
16 </li>
17 <li>
18 <a href="/products/server/requirements">System Requirements</a>
19 </li>
20 </ul>
21 </li>
22 <li>
23 <a href="/products/studio">Foo Studio</a>
24 <ul>
25 <li>
26 <a href="/products/studio/customers">Customer Stories</a>
27 </li>
28 <li>
29 <a href="/products/studio/support">Support</a>
30 </li>
31 </ul>
32 </li>
33 </ul>
34 </li>
35 <li>
36 <a title="About us" href="/company/about">Company</a>
37 <ul>
38 <li>

1142 Chapter 229. View Helper - Menu

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

39 <a href="/company/about/investors">Investor Relations</a>

40 </li>
41 <li>
42 <a class="rss" href="/company/news">News</a>
43 <ul>
44 <li>
45 <a href="/company/news/press">Press Releases</a>
46 </li>
47 <li>
48 <a href="/archive">Archive</a>
49 </li>
50 </ul>
51 </li>
52 </ul>
53 </li>
54 <li>
55 <a href="/community">Community</a>
56 <ul>
57 <li>
58 <a href="/community/account">My Account</a>
59 </li>
60 <li>
61 <a class="external" href="http://forums.example.com/">Forums</a>
62 </li>
63 </ul>
64 </li>
65 </ul>

229.3 Calling renderMenu() directly

This example shows how to render a menu that is not registered in the view helper by calling the renderMenu()
directly and specifying a few options.
1 <?php
2 // render only the 'Community' menu
3 $community = $this->navigation()->findOneByLabel('Community');
4 $options = array(
5 'indent' => 16,
6 'ulClass' => 'community'
7 );
8 echo $this->navigation()
9 ->menu()
10 ->renderMenu($community, $options);
11 ?>

Output:
1 <ul class="community">
2 <li>
3 <a href="/community/account">My Account</a>
4 </li>
5 <li>
6 <a class="external" href="http://forums.example.com/">Forums</a>
7 </li>
8 </ul>

229.3. Calling renderMenu() directly 1143

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

229.4 Rendering the deepest active menu

This example shows how the renderSubMenu() will render the deepest sub menu of the active branch.
Calling renderSubMenu($container, $ulClass, $indent) is equivalent to calling
renderMenu($container, $options) with the following options:
1 array(
2 'ulClass' => $ulClass,
3 'indent' => $indent,
4 'minDepth' => null,
5 'maxDepth' => null,
6 'onlyActiveBranch' => true,
7 'renderParents' => false
8 );

1 <?php
2 echo $this->navigation()
3 ->menu()
4 ->renderSubMenu(null, 'sidebar', 4);
5 ?>

The output will be the same if FAQ or Foo Server is active:

1 <ul class="sidebar">
2 <li class="active">
3 <a href="/products/server/faq">FAQ</a>
4 </li>
5 <li>
6 <a href="/products/server/editions">Editions</a>
7 </li>
8 <li>
9 <a href="/products/server/requirements">System Requirements</a>
10 </li>
11 </ul>

229.5 Rendering with maximum depth

1 <?php
2 echo $this->navigation()
3 ->menu()
4 ->setMaxDepth(1);
5 ?>

Output:
1 <ul class="navigation">
2 <li>
3 <a title="Go Home" href="/">Home</a>
4 </li>
5 <li class="active">
6 <a href="/products">Products</a>
7 <ul>
8 <li class="active">
9 <a href="/products/server">Foo Server</a>
10 </li>
11 <li>

1144 Chapter 229. View Helper - Menu

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

12 <a href="/products/studio">Foo Studio</a>

13 </li>
14 </ul>
15 </li>
16 <li>
17 <a title="About us" href="/company/about">Company</a>
18 <ul>
19 <li>
20 <a href="/company/about/investors">Investor Relations</a>
21 </li>
22 <li>
23 <a class="rss" href="/company/news">News</a>
24 </li>
25 </ul>
26 </li>
27 <li>
28 <a href="/community">Community</a>
29 <ul>
30 <li>
31 <a href="/community/account">My Account</a>
32 </li>
33 <li>
34 <a class="external" href="http://forums.example.com/">Forums</a>
35 </li>
36 </ul>
37 </li>
38 </ul>

229.6 Rendering with minimum depth

1 <?php
2 echo $this->navigation()
3 ->menu()
4 ->setMinDepth(1);
5 ?>

Output:
1 <ul class="navigation">
2 <li class="active">
3 <a href="/products/server">Foo Server</a>
4 <ul>
5 <li class="active">
6 <a href="/products/server/faq">FAQ</a>
7 </li>
8 <li>
9 <a href="/products/server/editions">Editions</a>
10 </li>
11 <li>
12 <a href="/products/server/requirements">System Requirements</a>
13 </li>
14 </ul>
15 </li>
16 <li>
17 <a href="/products/studio">Foo Studio</a>
18 <ul>

229.6. Rendering with minimum depth 1145

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

19 <li>
20 <a href="/products/studio/customers">Customer Stories</a>
21 </li>
22 <li>
23 <a href="/products/studio/support">Support</a>
24 </li>
25 </ul>
26 </li>
27 <li>
28 <a href="/company/about/investors">Investor Relations</a>
29 </li>
30 <li>
31 <a class="rss" href="/company/news">News</a>
32 <ul>
33 <li>
34 <a href="/company/news/press">Press Releases</a>
35 </li>
36 <li>
37 <a href="/archive">Archive</a>
38 </li>
39 </ul>
40 </li>
41 <li>
42 <a href="/community/account">My Account</a>
43 </li>
44 <li>
45 <a class="external" href="http://forums.example.com/">Forums</a>
46 </li>
47 </ul>

229.7 Rendering only the active branch

1 <?php
2 echo $this->navigation()
3 ->menu()
4 ->setOnlyActiveBranch(true);
5 ?>

Output:
1 <ul class="navigation">
2 <li class="active">
3 <a href="/products">Products</a>
4 <ul>
5 <li class="active">
6 <a href="/products/server">Foo Server</a>
7 <ul>
8 <li class="active">
9 <a href="/products/server/faq">FAQ</a>
10 </li>
11 <li>
12 <a href="/products/server/editions">Editions</a>
13 </li>
14 <li>
15 <a href="/products/server/requirements">System Requirements</a>
16 </li>

1146 Chapter 229. View Helper - Menu

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

17 </ul>
18 </li>
19 </ul>
20 </li>
21 </ul>

229.8 Rendering only the active branch with minimum depth

1 <?php
2 echo $this->navigation()
3 ->menu()
4 ->setOnlyActiveBranch(true)
5 ->setMinDepth(1);
6 ?>

Output:
1 <ul class="navigation">
2 <li class="active">
3 <a href="/products/server">Foo Server</a>
4 <ul>
5 <li class="active">
6 <a href="/products/server/faq">FAQ</a>
7 </li>
8 <li>
9 <a href="/products/server/editions">Editions</a>
10 </li>
11 <li>
12 <a href="/products/server/requirements">System Requirements</a>
13 </li>
14 </ul>
15 </li>
16 </ul>

229.9 Rendering only the active branch with maximum depth

1 <?php
2 echo $this->navigation()
3 ->menu()
4 ->setOnlyActiveBranch(true)
5 ->setMaxDepth(1);
6 ?>

Output:
1 <ul class="navigation">
2 <li class="active">
3 <a href="/products">Products</a>
4 <ul>
5 <li class="active">
6 <a href="/products/server">Foo Server</a>
7 </li>
8 <li>
9 <a href="/products/studio">Foo Studio</a>

229.8. Rendering only the active branch with minimum depth 1147
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

10 </li>
11 </ul>
12 </li>
13 </ul>

229.10 Rendering only the active branch with maximum depth and no
parents
1 <?php
2 echo $this->navigation()
3 ->menu()
4 ->setOnlyActiveBranch(true)
5 ->setRenderParents(false)
6 ->setMaxDepth(1);
7 ?>

Output:
1 <ul class="navigation">
2 <li class="active">
3 <a href="/products/server">Foo Server</a>
4 </li>
5 <li>
6 <a href="/products/studio">Foo Studio</a>
7 </li>
8 </ul>

229.11 Rendering a custom menu using a partial view script

This example shows how to render a custom menu using a partial view script. By calling setPartial(), you
can specify a partial view script that will be used when calling render(). When a partial is specified, the
renderPartial() method will be called. This method will assign the container to the view with the key con-
tainer.
In a layout:
1 $this->navigation()->menu()->setPartial('my-module/partials/menu');
2 echo $this->navigation()->menu()->render();

In module/MyModule/view/my-module/partials/menu.phtml:
1 foreach ($this->container as $page) {
2 echo $this->navigation()->menu()->htmlify($page) . PHP_EOL;
3 }

Output:
1 <a title="Go Home" href="/">Home</a>
2 <a href="/products">Products</a>
3 <a title="About us" href="/company/about">Company</a>
4 <a href="/community">Community</a>

1148 Chapter 229. View Helper - Menu

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

229.11.1 Using menu options in partial view script

In a layout:
1 // Set options
2 $this->navigation()->menu()->setUlClass('my-nav')
3 ->setPartial('my-module/partials/menu');
4

5 // Output menu
6 echo $this->navigation()->menu()->render();

In module/MyModule/view/my-module/partials/menu.phtml:
1 <div class"<?php echo $this->navigation()->menu()->getUlClass(); ?>">
2 <?php
3 foreach ($this->container as $page) {
4 echo $this->navigation()->menu()->htmlify($page) . PHP_EOL;
5 }
6 ?>
7 </div>

Output:
1 <div class="my-nav">
2 <a title="Go Home" href="/">Home</a>
3 <a href="/products">Products</a>
4 <a title="About us" href="/company/about">Company</a>
5 <a href="/community">Community</a>
6 </div>

229.11.2 Using ACL in partial view script

If you want to use ACL within your partial view script, then you will have to check the access to a page manually.
In module/MyModule/view/my-module/partials/menu.phtml:
1 foreach ($this->container as $page) {
2 if ($this->navigation()->accept($page)) {
3 echo $this->navigation()->menu()->htmlify($page) . PHP_EOL;
4 }
5 }

229.11. Rendering a custom menu using a partial view script 1149

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1150 Chapter 229. View Helper - Menu

 CHAPTER 230

View Helper - Sitemap

230.1 Introduction

The Sitemap helper is used for generating XML sitemaps, as defined by the Sitemaps XML format. Read more about
Sitemaps on Wikipedia.
By default, the sitemap helper uses sitemap validators to validate each element that is rendered. This can be disabled
by calling $helper->setUseSitemapValidators(false).

Note: If you disable sitemap validators, the custom properties (see table) are not validated at all.

The sitemap helper also supports Sitemap XSD Schema validation of the generated sitemap. This is disabled by de-
fault, since it will require a request to the Schema file. It can be enabled with $helper->setUseSchemaValidation(true).

Table 230.1: Sitemap XML elements

Ele- Description
ment
loc Absolute URL to page. An absolute URL will be generated by the helper.
last- The date of last modification of the file, in W3C Datetime format. This time portion can be omitted if
mod desired, and only use YYYY-MM-DD. The helper will try to retrieve the lastmod value from the pages
custom property lastmod if it is set in the page. If the value is not a valid date, it is ignored.
change- How frequently the page is likely to change. This value provides general information to search engines
freq and may not correlate exactly to how often they crawl the page. Valid values are:
alwayshourlydailyweeklymonthlyyearlynever The helper will try to retrieve the changefreq value from
the pages custom property changefreq if it is set in the page. If the value is not valid, it is ignored.
prior- The priority of this URL relative to other URLs on your site. Valid values range from 0.0 to 1.0. The
ity helper will try to retrieve the priority value from the pages custom property priority if it is set in the
page. If the value is not valid, it is ignored.
Methods in the sitemap helper:
{get|set}FormatOutput() gets/sets a flag indicating whether XML output should be formatted. This corresponds
to the formatOutput property of the native DOMDocument class. Read more at PHP: DOMDocument - Manual.
Default is FALSE.
{get|set}UseXmlDeclaration() gets/sets a flag indicating whether the XML declaration should be included when
rendering. Default is TRUE.
{get|set}UseSitemapValidators() gets/sets a flag indicating whether sitemap validators should be used when
generating the DOM sitemap. Default is TRUE.

1151
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

{get|set}UseSchemaValidation() gets/sets a flag indicating whether the helper should use XML Schema valida-
tion when generating the DOM sitemap. Default is FALSE. If TRUE.
{get|set}ServerUrl() gets/sets server URL that will be prepended to non-absolute URLs in the url() method.
If no server URL is specified, it will be determined by the helper.
url() is used to generate absolute URLs to pages.
getDomSitemap() generates a DOMDocument from a given container.

230.2 Basic usage

This example shows how to render an XML sitemap based on the setup we did further up.
1 // In a view script or layout:
2

3 // format output
4 $this->navigation()
5 ->sitemap()
6 ->setFormatOutput(true); // default is false
7

8 // other possible methods:

9 // ->setUseXmlDeclaration(false); // default is true
10 // ->setServerUrl('http://my.otherhost.com');
11 // default is to detect automatically
12

13 // print sitemap
14 echo $this->navigation()->sitemap();

Notice how pages that are invisible or pages with ACL roles incompatible with the view helper are filtered out:
1 <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
2 <urlset xmlns="http://www.sitemaps.org/schemas/sitemap/0.9">
3 <url>
4 <loc>http://www.example.com/</loc>
5 </url>
6 <url>
7 <loc>http://www.example.com/products</loc>
8 </url>
9 <url>
10 <loc>http://www.example.com/products/server</loc>
11 </url>
12 <url>
13 <loc>http://www.example.com/products/server/faq</loc>
14 </url>
15 <url>
16 <loc>http://www.example.com/products/server/editions</loc>
17 </url>
18 <url>
19 <loc>http://www.example.com/products/server/requirements</loc>
20 </url>
21 <url>
22 <loc>http://www.example.com/products/studio</loc>
23 </url>
24 <url>
25 <loc>http://www.example.com/products/studio/customers</loc>
26 </url>
27 <url>

1152 Chapter 230. View Helper - Sitemap

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

28 <loc>http://www.example.com/products/studio/support</loc>
29 </url>
30 <url>
31 <loc>http://www.example.com/company/about</loc>
32 </url>
33 <url>
34 <loc>http://www.example.com/company/about/investors</loc>
35 </url>
36 <url>
37 <loc>http://www.example.com/company/news</loc>
38 </url>
39 <url>
40 <loc>http://www.example.com/company/news/press</loc>
41 </url>
42 <url>
43 <loc>http://www.example.com/archive</loc>
44 </url>
45 <url>
46 <loc>http://www.example.com/community</loc>
47 </url>
48 <url>
49 <loc>http://www.example.com/community/account</loc>
50 </url>
51 <url>
52 <loc>http://forums.example.com/</loc>
53 </url>
54 </urlset>

230.3 Rendering using no ACL role

Render the sitemap using no ACL role (should filter out /community/account):
1 echo $this->navigation()
2 ->sitemap()
3 ->setFormatOutput(true)
4 ->setRole();

1 <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>

2 <urlset xmlns="http://www.sitemaps.org/schemas/sitemap/0.9">
3 <url>
4 <loc>http://www.example.com/</loc>
5 </url>
6 <url>
7 <loc>http://www.example.com/products</loc>
8 </url>
9 <url>
10 <loc>http://www.example.com/products/server</loc>
11 </url>
12 <url>
13 <loc>http://www.example.com/products/server/faq</loc>
14 </url>
15 <url>
16 <loc>http://www.example.com/products/server/editions</loc>
17 </url>
18 <url>
19 <loc>http://www.example.com/products/server/requirements</loc>

230.3. Rendering using no ACL role 1153

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

20 </url>
21 <url>
22 <loc>http://www.example.com/products/studio</loc>
23 </url>
24 <url>
25 <loc>http://www.example.com/products/studio/customers</loc>
26 </url>
27 <url>
28 <loc>http://www.example.com/products/studio/support</loc>
29 </url>
30 <url>
31 <loc>http://www.example.com/company/about</loc>
32 </url>
33 <url>
34 <loc>http://www.example.com/company/about/investors</loc>
35 </url>
36 <url>
37 <loc>http://www.example.com/company/news</loc>
38 </url>
39 <url>
40 <loc>http://www.example.com/company/news/press</loc>
41 </url>
42 <url>
43 <loc>http://www.example.com/archive</loc>
44 </url>
45 <url>
46 <loc>http://www.example.com/community</loc>
47 </url>
48 <url>
49 <loc>http://forums.example.com/</loc>
50 </url>
51 </urlset>

230.4 Rendering using a maximum depth

Render the sitemap using a maximum depth of 1.

1 echo $this->navigation()
2 ->sitemap()
3 ->setFormatOutput(true)
4 ->setMaxDepth(1);

1 <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>

2 <urlset xmlns="http://www.sitemaps.org/schemas/sitemap/0.9">
3 <url>
4 <loc>http://www.example.com/</loc>
5 </url>
6 <url>
7 <loc>http://www.example.com/products</loc>
8 </url>
9 <url>
10 <loc>http://www.example.com/products/server</loc>
11 </url>
12 <url>
13 <loc>http://www.example.com/products/studio</loc>
14 </url>

1154 Chapter 230. View Helper - Sitemap

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

15 <url>
16 <loc>http://www.example.com/company/about</loc>
17 </url>
18 <url>
19 <loc>http://www.example.com/company/about/investors</loc>
20 </url>
21 <url>
22 <loc>http://www.example.com/company/news</loc>
23 </url>
24 <url>
25 <loc>http://www.example.com/community</loc>
26 </url>
27 <url>
28 <loc>http://www.example.com/community/account</loc>
29 </url>
30 <url>
31 <loc>http://forums.example.com/</loc>
32 </url>
33 </urlset>

Note: UTF-8 encoding used by default

By default, Zend Framework uses UTF-8 as its default encoding, and, specific to this case, Zend\View does as well.
So if you want to use another encoding with Sitemap, you will have do three things:
1. Create a custom renderer and implement a getEncoding() method;
2. Create a custom rendering strategy that will return an instance of your custom renderer;
3. Attach the custom strategy in the ViewEvent;
See the example from HeadStyle documentation to see how you can achieve this.

230.4. Rendering using a maximum depth 1155

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1156 Chapter 230. View Helper - Sitemap

 CHAPTER 231

View Helper - Navigation Proxy

231.1 Introduction

The Navigation helper is a proxy helper that relays calls to other navigational helpers. It can be considered an
entry point to all navigation-related view tasks. The aforementioned navigational helpers are in the namespace
Zend\View\Helper\Navigation, and would thus require the path Zend/View/Helper/Navigation to be added
as a helper path to the view. With the proxy helper residing in the Zend\View\Helper namespace, it will always
be available, without the need to add any helper paths to the view.
The Navigation helper finds other helpers that implement the Zend\View\Helper\Navigation\HelperInterface,
which means custom view helpers can also be proxied. This would, however, require that the custom helper path is
added to the view.
When proxying to other helpers, the Navigation helper can inject its container, ACL/role, and translator. This means
that you wont have to explicitly set all three in all navigational helpers, nor resort to injecting by means of static
methods.

231.2 Methods

findHelper() finds the given helper, verifies that it is a navigational helper, and injects container, ACL/role
and translator.
{get|set}InjectContainer() gets/sets a flag indicating whether the container should be injected to proxied helpers.
Default is TRUE.
{get|set}InjectAcl() gets/sets a flag indicating whether the ACL/role should be injected to proxied helpers. De-
fault is TRUE.
{get|set}InjectTranslator() gets/sets a flag indicating whether the translator should be injected to proxied helpers.
Default is TRUE.
{get|set}DefaultProxy() gets/sets the default proxy. Default is menu.
render() proxies to the render method of the default proxy.

1157
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1158 Chapter 231. View Helper - Navigation Proxy

 CHAPTER 232

Introduction to Zend\Paginator

Zend\Paginator is a flexible component for paginating collections of data and presenting that data to users.
The primary design goals of Zend\Paginator are as follows:
Paginate arbitrary data, not just relational databases
Fetch only the results that need to be displayed
Do not force users to adhere to only one way of displaying data or rendering pagination controls
Loosely couple Zend\Paginator to other Zend Framework components so that users who wish to use it
independently of Zend\View, Zend\Db, etc. can do so

1159
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1160 Chapter 232. Introduction to Zend\Paginator

 CHAPTER 233

Usage

233.1 Paginating data collections

In order to paginate items into pages, Zend\Paginator must have a generic way of accessing that data. For that
reason, all data access takes place through data source adapters. Several adapters ship with Zend Framework by
default:

Table 233.1: Adapters for Zend\Paginator

Adapter Description
Ar- Accepts a PHP array
rayAdapter
DbSelect Accepts a Zend\Db\Sql\Select plus either a Zend\Db\Adapter\Adapter or Zend\Db\Sql\Sql to
paginate rows from a database
Iterator Accepts an Iterator instance
NullFill Does not use Zend\Paginator to manage data pagination. You can still take advantage of the
pagination control feature.
Note: Instead of selecting every matching row of a given query, the DbSelect adapter retrieves only the smallest
amount of data necessary for displaying the current page. Because of this, a second query is dynamically generated to
determine the total number of matching rows.

To create an instance of Zend\Paginator, you must supply an adapter to the constructor:

1 $paginator = new \Zend\Paginator\Paginator(new \Zend\Paginator\Adapter\ArrayAdapter($array));

In the case of the NullFill adapter, in lieu of a data collection you must supply an item count to its constructor.
Although the instance is technically usable in this state, in your controller action youll need to tell the paginator what
page number the user requested. This allows advancing through the paginated data.
1 $paginator->setCurrentPageNumber($page);

The simplest way to keep track of this value is through a URL parameter. The following is an example route you might
use in an Array configuration file:
1 return array(
2 'routes' => array(
3 'paginator' => array(
4 'type' => 'segment',
5 'options' => array(
6 'route' => '/list/[page/:page]',
7 'defaults' => array(

1161
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

8 'page' => 1,
9 ),
10 ),
11 ),
12 ),
13 );

With the above route (and using Zend Framework MVC components), you might set the current page number in your
controller action like so:
1 $paginator->setCurrentPageNumber($this->params()->fromRoute('page'));

There are other options available; see Configuration for more on them.
Finally, youll need to assign the paginator instance to your view. If youre using Zend Framework MVC component,
you can assign the paginator object to your view model:
1 $vm = new ViewModel();
2 $vm->setVariable('paginator', $paginator);
3 return $vm;

233.2 The DbSelect adapter

The usage of most adapters is pretty straight-forward. However, the DbSelect adapter requires a more detailed expla-
nation regarding the retrieval and count of the data from the database.
To use the DbSelect adapter you dont have to retrieve the data upfront from the database. The adapter will do
the retrieval for you, as well as the counting of the total pages. If additional work has to be done on the database
results which cannot be expressed via the provided Zend\Db\Sql\Select object you must extend the adapter and
override the getItems() method.
Additionally this adapter does not fetch all records from the database in order to count them. Instead, the adapter
manipulates the original query to produce a corresponding COUNT query. Paginator then executes that COUNT
query to get the number of rows. This does require an extra round-trip to the database, but this is many times faster
than fetching an entire result set and using count(), especially with large collections of data.
The database adapter will try and build the most efficient query that will execute on pretty much any modern database.
However, depending on your database or even your own schema setup, there might be more efficient ways to get a
rowcount. For this scenario, you can extend the provided DbSelect adapter and implement a custom count method.
For example, if you keep track of the count of blog posts in a separate table, you could achieve a faster count query
with the following setup:
1 class MyDbSelect extends Zend\Paginator\Adapter\DbSelect
2 {
3 public function count()
4 {
5 $select = new Zend\Db\Sql\Select();
6 $select->from('item_counts')->columns(array('c'=>'post_count'));
7

8 $statement = $this->sql->prepareStatementForSqlObject($select);
9 $result = $statement->execute();
10 $row = $result->current();
11 $this->rowCount = $row['c'];
12

13 return $this->rowCount;
14 }
15 }

1162 Chapter 233. Usage

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

16

17 $adapter = new MyDbSelect($query, $adapter);

18 $paginator = new Zend\Paginator\Paginator($adapter);

This approach will probably not give you a huge performance gain on small collections and/or simple select queries.
However, with complex queries and large collections, a similar approach could give you a significant performance
boost.
The DbSelect adapter also supports returning of fetched records using the Zend\Db\ResultSet compo-
nent of Zend\Db. You can override the concrete RowSet implementation by passing an object implementing
Zend\Db\ResultSet\ResultSetInterface as the third constructor argument to the DbSelect adapter:
1 // $objectPrototype is an instance of our custom entity
2 // $hydrator is a custom hydrator for our entity (implementing Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator\HydratorInterface
3 $resultSet = new Zend\Db\ResultSet\HydratingResultSet($hydrator, $objectPrototype);
4

5 $adapter = new Zend\Paginator\Adapter\DbSelect($query, $dbAdapter, $resultSet)

6 $paginator = new Zend\Paginator\Paginator($adapter);

Now when we iterate over $paginator we will get instances of our custom entity instead of key-value-pair arrays.

233.3 Rendering pages with view scripts

The view script is used to render the page items (if youre using Zend\Paginator to do so) and display the
pagination control.
Because Zend\Paginator implements the SPL interface IteratorAggregate, looping over your items and displaying
them is simple.
1 <html>
2 <body>
3 <h1>Example</h1>
4 <?php if (count($this->paginator)): ?>
5 <ul>
6 <?php foreach ($this->paginator as $item): ?>
7 <li><?php echo $item; ?></li>
8 <?php endforeach; ?>
9 </ul>
10 <?php endif; ?>
11

12 <?php echo $this->paginationControl($this->paginator,

13 'Sliding',
14 'my_pagination_control', array('route' => 'application/paginator'
15 </body>
16 </html>

Notice the view helper call near the end. PaginationControl accepts up to four parameters: the paginator instance, a
scrolling style, a view script name, and an array of additional parameters.
The second and third parameters are very important. Whereas the view script name is used to determine how the
pagination control should look, the scrolling style is used to control how it should behave. Say the view script is in
the style of a search pagination control, like the one below:

233.3. Rendering pages with view scripts 1163

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

What happens when the user clicks the next link a few times? Well, any number of things could happen. The current
page number could stay in the middle as you click through (as it does on Yahoo!), or it could advance to the end of
the page range and then appear again on the left when the user clicks next one more time. The page numbers might
even expand and contract as the user advances (or scrolls) through them (as they do on Google).
There are four scrolling styles packaged with Zend Framework:

Table 233.2: Scrolling styles for Zend\Paginator

Scrolling Description
style
All Returns every page. This is useful for dropdown menu pagination controls with relatively few pages.
In these cases, you want all pages available to the user at once.
Elastic A Google-like scrolling style that expands and contracts as a user scrolls through the pages.
Jumping As users scroll through, the page number advances to the end of a given range, then starts again at the
beginning of the new range.
Sliding A Yahoo!-like scrolling style that positions the current page number in the center of the page range,
or as close as possible. This is the default style.
The fourth and final parameter is reserved for an optional associative array of additional variables that you want
available in your view (available via $this). For instance, these values could include extra URL parameters for
pagination links.
By setting the default view script name, default scrolling style, and view instance, you can eliminate the calls to
PaginationControl completely:
1 Zend\Paginator\Paginator::setDefaultScrollingStyle('Sliding');
2 Zend\View\Helper\PaginationControl::setDefaultViewPartial(
3 'my_pagination_control'
4 );

When all of these values are set, you can render the pagination control inside your view script with a simple echo
statement:
1 <?php echo $this->paginator; ?>

Note: Of course, its possible to use Zend\Paginator with other template engines. For example, with Smarty
you might do the following:
1 $smarty->assign('pages', $paginator->getPages());

You could then access paginator values from a template like so:
1 {$pages->pageCount}

233.3.1 Example pagination controls

The following example pagination controls will hopefully help you get started:
Search pagination:
1 <!--
2 See http://developer.yahoo.com/ypatterns/pattern.php?pattern=searchpagination
3 -->
4

5 <?php if ($this->pageCount): ?>

6 <div class="paginationControl">

1164 Chapter 233. Usage

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

7 <!-- Previous page link -->

8 <?php if (isset($this->previous)): ?>
9 <a href="<?php echo $this->url($this->route, array('page' => $this->previous)); ?>">
10 &lt; Previous
11 </a> |
12 <?php else: ?>
13 <span class="disabled">&lt; Previous</span> |
14 <?php endif; ?>
15

16 <!-- Numbered page links -->

17 <?php foreach ($this->pagesInRange as $page): ?>
18 <?php if ($page != $this->current): ?>
19 <a href="<?php echo $this->url($this->route, array('page' => $page)); ?>">
20 <?php echo $page; ?>
21 </a> |
22 <?php else: ?>
23 <?php echo $page; ?> |
24 <?php endif; ?>
25 <?php endforeach; ?>
26

27 <!-- Next page link -->

28 <?php if (isset($this->next)): ?>
29 <a href="<?php echo $this->url($this->route, array('page' => $this->next)); ?>">
30 Next &gt;
31 </a>
32 <?php else: ?>
33 <span class="disabled">Next &gt;</span>
34 <?php endif; ?>
35 </div>
36 <?php endif; ?>

Item pagination:
1 <!--
2 See http://developer.yahoo.com/ypatterns/pattern.php?pattern=itempagination
3 -->
4

5 <?php if ($this->pageCount): ?>

6 <div class="paginationControl">
7 <?php echo $this->firstItemNumber; ?> - <?php echo $this->lastItemNumber; ?>
8 of <?php echo $this->totalItemCount; ?>
9

10 <!-- First page link -->

11 <?php if (isset($this->previous)): ?>
12 <a href="<?php echo $this->url($this->route, array('page' => $this->first)); ?>">
13 First
14 </a> |
15 <?php else: ?>
16 <span class="disabled">First</span> |
17 <?php endif; ?>
18

19 <!-- Previous page link -->

20 <?php if (isset($this->previous)): ?>
21 <a href="<?php echo $this->url($this->route, array('page' => $this->previous)); ?>">
22 &lt; Previous
23 </a> |
24 <?php else: ?>
25 <span class="disabled">&lt; Previous</span> |
26 <?php endif; ?>

233.3. Rendering pages with view scripts 1165

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

27

28 <!-- Next page link -->

29 <?php if (isset($this->next)): ?>
30 <a href="<?php echo $this->url($this->route, array('page' => $this->next)); ?>">
31 Next &gt;
32 </a> |
33 <?php else: ?>
34 <span class="disabled">Next &gt;</span> |
35 <?php endif; ?>
36

37 <!-- Last page link -->

38 <?php if (isset($this->next)): ?>
39 <a href="<?php echo $this->url($this->route, array('page' => $this->last)); ?>">
40 Last
41 </a>
42 <?php else: ?>
43 <span class="disabled">Last</span>
44 <?php endif; ?>
45

46 </div>
47 <?php endif; ?>

Dropdown pagination:
1 <?php if ($this->pageCount): ?>
2 <select id="paginationControl" size="1">
3 <?php foreach ($this->pagesInRange as $page): ?>
4 <?php $selected = ($page == $this->current) ? ' selected="selected"' : ''; ?>
5 <option value="<?php
6 echo $this->url($this->route, array('page' => $page));?>"<?php echo $selected ?>>
7 <?php echo $page; ?>
8 </option>
9 <?php endforeach; ?>
10 </select>
11 <?php endif; ?>
12

13 <script type="text/javascript"
14 src="http://ajax.googleapis.com/ajax/libs/prototype/1.6.0.2/prototype.js">
15 </script>
16 <script type="text/javascript">
17 $('paginationControl').observe('change', function() {
18 window.location = this.options[this.selectedIndex].value;
19 })
20 </script>

233.3.2 Listing of properties

The following options are available to pagination control view scripts:

1166 Chapter 233. Usage

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Table 233.3: Properties available to view partials

Property Type Description
first integer First page number (i.e., 1)
firstItemNumber integer Absolute number of the first item on this page
firstPageInRange integer First page in the range returned by the scrolling style
current integer Current page number
currentItemCount integer Number of items on this page
itemCountPerPage integer Maximum number of items available to each page
last integer Last page number
lastItemNumber integer Absolute number of the last item on this page
lastPageInRange integer Last page in the range returned by the scrolling style
next integer Next page number
pageCount integer Number of pages
pagesInRange array Array of pages returned by the scrolling style
previous integer Previous page number
totalItemCount integer Total number of items

233.3. Rendering pages with view scripts 1167

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1168 Chapter 233. Usage

 CHAPTER 234

Configuration

Zend\Paginator has several configuration methods that can be called:

Table 234.1: Configuration methods for Zend\Paginator\Paginator

Method Description
setCurrent- Sets the current page number (default 1).
PageNumber
setItem- Sets the maximum number of items to display on a page (default 10).
CountPer-
Page
set- Sets the number of items to display in the pagination control (default 10). Note: Most of the time
PageRange this number will be adhered to exactly, but scrolling styles do have the option of only using it as a
guideline or starting value (e.g., Elastic).
setView Sets the view instance, for rendering convenience.

1169
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1170 Chapter 234. Configuration

 CHAPTER 235

Advanced usage

235.1 Custom data source adapters

At some point you may run across a data type that is not covered by the packaged adapters. In this case, you will need
to write your own.
To do so, you must implement Zend\Paginator\Adapter\AdapterInterface. There are two methods
required to do this:
count()
getItems($offset, $itemCountPerPage)
Additionally, youll want to implement a constructor that takes your data source as a parameter and stores it as a
protected or private property. How you wish to go about doing this specifically is up to you.
If youve ever used the SPL interface Countable, youre familiar with count(). As used with Zend\Paginator,
this is the total number of items in the data collection. Additionally, the Zend\Paginator\Paginator instance
provides a method countAllItems() that proxies to the adapter count() method.
The getItems() method is only slightly more complicated. For this, your adapter is supplied with an offset and the
number of items to display per page. You must return the appropriate slice of data. For an array, that would be:
1 return array_slice($this->_array, $offset, $itemCountPerPage);

Take a look at the packaged adapters (all of which implement the Zend\Paginator\Adapter\AdapterInterface)
for ideas of how you might go about implementing your own.

235.2 Custom scrolling styles

Creating your own scrolling style requires that you implement Zend\Paginator\ScrollingStyle\ScrollingStyleInterf
which defines a single method, getPages(). Specifically,
1 public function getPages(Zend\Paginator\Paginator $paginator, $pageRange = null);

This method should calculate a lower and upper bound for page numbers within the range of so-called local pages
(that is, pages that are nearby the current page).
Unless it extends another scrolling style (see Zend\Paginator\ScrollingStyle\Elastic for an example),
your custom scrolling style will inevitably end with something similar to the following line of code:
1 return $paginator->getPagesInRange($lowerBound, $upperBound);

1171
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Theres nothing special about this call; its merely a convenience method to check the validity of the lower and upper
bound and return an array of the range to the paginator.
When youre ready to use your new scrolling style, youll need to tell Zend\Paginator\Paginator what direc-
tory to look in. To do that, do the following:
1 $manager = Zend\Paginator\Paginator::getScrollingStyleManager();
2 $manager->setInvokableClass('my-style', 'My\Paginator\ScrollingStyle');

235.3 Caching features

Zend\Paginator\Paginator can be told to cache the data it has already passed on, preventing
the adapter from fetching them each time they are used. To tell paginator to automatically cache the
adapters data, just pass to its setCache() method a pre-configured cache object implementing the
Zend\Cache\Storage\StorageInterface interface.
1 $cache = StorageFactory::adapterFactory('filesystem', array(
2 'cache_dir' => '/tmp',
3 'ttl' => 3600,
4 'plugins' => array( 'serializer' ),
5 ));
6 Zend\Paginator\Paginator::setCache($cache);

As long as Zend\Paginator\Paginator has been seeded with a cache storage object the data it generates will
be cached. Sometimes you would like not to cache data even if you already passed a cache instance. You should then
use setCacheEnable() for that.
1 // $cache is a Zend\Cache\Storage\StorageInterface instance
2 Zend\Paginator\Paginator::setCache($cache);
3 // ... later on the script
4 $paginator->setCacheEnable(false);
5 // cache is now disabled

When a cache is set, data are automatically stored in it and pulled out from it. It then can be useful to empty the
cache manually. You can get this done by calling clearPageItemCache($pageNumber). If you dont pass
any parameter, the whole cache will be empty. You can optionally pass a parameter representing the page number to
empty in the cache:
1 // $cache is a Zend\Cache\Storage\StorageInterface instance
2 Zend\Paginator\Paginator::setCache($cache);
3 // $paginator is a fully configured Zend\Paginator\Paginator instance
4 $items = $paginator->getCurrentItems();
5 // page 1 is now in cache
6 $page3Items = $paginator->getItemsByPage(3);
7 // page 3 is now in cache
8

9 // clear the cache of the results for page 3

10 $paginator->clearPageItemCache(3);
11

12 // clear all the cache data

13 $paginator->clearPageItemCache();

Changing the item count per page will empty the whole cache as it would have become invalid:
1 // $cache is a Zend\Cache\Storage\StorageInterface instance
2 Zend\Paginator\Paginator::setCache($cache);
3 // fetch some items

1172 Chapter 235. Advanced usage

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

4 // $paginator is a fully configured Zend\Paginator\Paginator instance

5 $items = $paginator->getCurrentItems();
6

7 // all the cache data will be flushed:

8 $paginator->setItemCountPerPage(2);

It is also possible to see the data in cache and ask for them directly. getPageItemCache() can be used for that:
1 // $cache is a Zend\Cache\Storage\StorageInterface instance
2 Zend\Paginator\Paginator::setCache($cache);
3 // $paginator is a fully configured Zend\Paginator\Paginator instance
4 $paginator->setItemCountPerPage(3);
5 // fetch some items
6 $items = $paginator->getCurrentItems();
7 $otherItems = $paginator->getItemsPerPage(4);
8

9 // see the cached items as a two-dimension array:

10 var_dump($paginator->getPageItemCache());

235.3. Caching features 1173

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1174 Chapter 235. Advanced usage

 CHAPTER 236

Introduction to Zend\Permissions\Acl

The Zend\Permissions\Acl component provides a lightweight and flexible access control list (ACL) imple-
mentation for privileges management. In general, an application may utilize such ACLs to control access to certain
protected objects by other requesting objects.
For the purposes of this documentation:
a resource is an object to which access is controlled.
a role is an object that may request access to a Resource.
Put simply, roles request access to resources. For example, if a parking attendant requests access to a car, then the
parking attendant is the requesting role, and the car is the resource, since access to the car may not be granted to
everyone.
Through the specification and use of an ACL, an application may control how roles are granted access to resources.

236.1 Resources

Creating a resource using Zend\Permissions\Acl\Acl is very simple. A resource interface

Zend\Permissions\Acl\Resource\ResourceInterface is provided to facilitate creating resources
in an application. A class need only implement this interface, which consists of a single method,
getResourceId(), for Zend\Permissions\Acl\Acl to recognize the object as a resource. Additionally,
Zend\Permissions\Acl\Resource\GenericResource is provided as a basic resource implementation
for developers to extend as needed.
Zend\Permissions\Acl\Acl provides a tree structure to which multiple resources can be added. Since re-
sources are stored in such a tree structure, they can be organized from the general (toward the tree root) to the
specific (toward the tree leaves). Queries on a specific resource will automatically search the resources hierarchy
for rules assigned to ancestor resources, allowing for simple inheritance of rules. For example, if a default rule is
to be applied to each building in a city, one would simply assign the rule to the city, instead of assigning the same
rule to each building. Some buildings may require exceptions to such a rule, however, and this can be achieved in
Zend\Permissions\Acl\Acl by assigning such exception rules to each building that requires such an excep-
tion. A resource may inherit from only one parent resource, though this parent resource can have its own parent
resource, etc.
Zend\Permissions\Acl\Acl also supports privileges on resources (e.g., create, read, update, delete),
so the developer can assign rules that affect all privileges or specific privileges on one or more resources.

1175
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

236.2 Roles

As with resources, creating a role is also very simple. All roles must implement
Zend\Permissions\Acl\Role\RoleInterface. This interface consists of a single method,
getRoleId(), Additionally, Zend\Permissions\Acl\Role\GenericRole is provided by the
Zend\Permissions\Acl component as a basic role implementation for developers to extend as needed.
In Zend\Permissions\Acl\Acl, a role may inherit from one or more roles. This is to support inheritance of
rules among roles. For example, a user role, such as sally, may belong to one or more parent roles, such as editor
and administrator. The developer can assign rules to editor and administrator separately, and sally would
inherit such rules from both, without having to assign rules directly to sally.
Though the ability to inherit from multiple roles is very useful, multiple inheritance also introduces some degree of
complexity. The following example illustrates the ambiguity condition and how Zend\Permissions\Acl\Acl
solves it.

Multiple Inheritance among Roles

The following code defines three base roles - guest, member, and admin - from which other roles may inherit.
Then, a role identified by someUser is established and inherits from the three other roles. The order in which these
roles appear in the $parents array is important. When necessary, Zend\Permissions\Acl\Acl searches for
access rules defined not only for the queried role (herein, someUser), but also upon the roles from which the queried
role inherits (herein, guest, member, and admin):
1 use Zend\Permissions\Acl\Acl;
2 use Zend\Permissions\Acl\Role\GenericRole as Role;
3 use Zend\Permissions\Acl\Resource\GenericResource as Resource;
4

5 $acl = new Acl();

6

7 $acl->addRole(new Role('guest'))
8 ->addRole(new Role('member'))
9 ->addRole(new Role('admin'));
10

11 $parents = array('guest', 'member', 'admin');

12 $acl->addRole(new Role('someUser'), $parents);
13

14 $acl->addResource(new Resource('someResource'));
15

16 $acl->deny('guest', 'someResource');
17 $acl->allow('member', 'someResource');
18

19 echo $acl->isAllowed('someUser', 'someResource') ? 'allowed' : 'denied';

Since there is no rule specifically defined for the someUser role and someResource,
Zend\Permissions\Acl\Acl must search for rules that may be defined for roles that someUser inher-
its. First, the admin role is visited, and there is no access rule defined for it. Next, the member role is visited,
and Zend\Permissions\Acl\Acl finds that there is a rule specifying that member is allowed access to
someResource.
If Zend\Permissions\Acl\Acl were to continue examining the rules defined for other parent roles, however,
it would find that guest is denied access to someResource. This fact introduces an ambiguity because now
someUser is both denied and allowed access to someResource, by reason of having inherited conflicting rules
from different parent roles.
Zend\Permissions\Acl\Acl resolves this ambiguity by completing a query when it finds the first rule that is

1176 Chapter 236. Introduction to Zend\Permissions\Acl

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

directly applicable to the query. In this case, since the member role is examined before the guest role, the example
code would print allowed.

Note: When specifying multiple parents for a role, keep in mind that the last parent listed is the first one searched for
rules applicable to an authorization query.

236.3 Creating the Access Control List

An Access Control List (ACL) can represent any set of physical or virtual objects that you wish. For the purposes of
demonstration, however, we will create a basic Content Management System (CMS) ACL that maintains several tiers
of groups over a wide variety of areas. To create a new ACL object, we instantiate the ACL with no parameters:
1 use Zend\Permissions\Acl\Acl;
2 $acl = new Acl();

Note: Until a developer specifies an allow rule, Zend\Permissions\Acl\Acl denies access to every privilege
upon every resource by every role.

236.4 Registering Roles

CMSs will nearly always require a hierarchy of permissions to determine the authoring capabilities of its users. There
may be a Guest group to allow limited access for demonstrations, a Staff group for the majority of CMS users who
perform most of the day-to-day operations, an Editor group for those responsible for publishing, reviewing, archiving
and deleting content, and finally an Administrator group whose tasks may include all of those of the other groups as
well as maintenance of sensitive information, user management, back-end configuration data, backup and export. This
set of permissions can be represented in a role registry, allowing each group to inherit privileges from parent groups,
as well as providing distinct privileges for their unique group only. The permissions may be expressed as follows:

Table 236.1: Access Controls for an Example CMS

Name Unique Permissions Inherit Permissions From
Guest View N/A
Staff Edit, Submit, Revise Guest
Editor Publish, Archive, Delete Staff
Administrator (Granted all access) N/A
For this example, Zend\Permissions\Acl\Role\GenericRole is used, but any object that implements
Zend\Permissions\Acl\Role\RoleInterface is acceptable. These groups can be added to the role reg-
istry as follows:
1 use Zend\Permissions\Acl\Acl;
2 use Zend\Permissions\Acl\Role\GenericRole as Role;
3

4 $acl = new Acl();

5

6 // Add groups to the Role registry using Zend\Permissions\Acl\Role\GenericRole

7 // Guest does not inherit access controls
8 $roleGuest = new Role('guest');
9 $acl->addRole($roleGuest);
10

11 // Staff inherits from guest

12 $acl->addRole(new Role('staff'), $roleGuest);

236.3. Creating the Access Control List 1177

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

13

14 /*
15 Alternatively, the above could be written:
16 $acl->addRole(new Role('staff'), 'guest');
17 */
18

19 // Editor inherits from staff

20 $acl->addRole(new Role('editor'), 'staff');
21

22 // Administrator does not inherit access controls

23 $acl->addRole(new Role('administrator'));

236.5 Defining Access Controls

Now that the ACL contains the relevant roles, rules can be established that define how resources may be accessed
by roles. You may have noticed that we have not defined any particular resources for this example, which is simpli-
fied to illustrate that the rules apply to all resources. Zend\Permissions\Acl\Acl provides an implementation
whereby rules need only be assigned from general to specific, minimizing the number of rules needed, because re-
sources and roles inherit rules that are defined upon their ancestors.

Note: In general, Zend\Permissions\Acl\Acl obeys a given rule if and only if a more specific rule does not
apply.

Consequently, we can define a reasonably complex set of rules with a minimum amount of code. To apply the base
permissions as defined above:
1 use Zend\Permissions\Acl\Acl;
2 use Zend\Permissions\Acl\Role\GenericRole as Role;
3

4 $acl = new Acl();

5

6 $roleGuest = new Role('guest');

7 $acl->addRole($roleGuest);
8 $acl->addRole(new Role('staff'), $roleGuest);
9 $acl->addRole(new Role('editor'), 'staff');
10 $acl->addRole(new Role('administrator'));
11

12 // Guest may only view content

13 $acl->allow($roleGuest, null, 'view');
14

15 /*
16 Alternatively, the above could be written:
17 $acl->allow('guest', null, 'view');
18 //*/
19

20 // Staff inherits view privilege from guest, but also needs additional
21 // privileges
22 $acl->allow('staff', null, array('edit', 'submit', 'revise'));
23

24 // Editor inherits view, edit, submit, and revise privileges from

25 // staff, but also needs additional privileges
26 $acl->allow('editor', null, array('publish', 'archive', 'delete'));
27

28 // Administrator inherits nothing, but is allowed all privileges

29 $acl->allow('administrator');

1178 Chapter 236. Introduction to Zend\Permissions\Acl

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

The NULL values in the above allow() calls are used to indicate that the allow rules apply to all resources.

236.6 Querying an ACL

We now have a flexible ACL that can be used to determine whether requesters have permission to perform functions
throughout the web application. Performing queries is quite simple using the isAllowed() method:
1 echo $acl->isAllowed('guest', null, 'view') ?
2 "allowed" : "denied";
3 // allowed
4

5 echo $acl->isAllowed('staff', null, 'publish') ?

6 "allowed" : "denied";
7 // denied
8

9 echo $acl->isAllowed('staff', null, 'revise') ?

10 "allowed" : "denied";
11 // allowed
12

13 echo $acl->isAllowed('editor', null, 'view') ?

14 "allowed" : "denied";
15 // allowed because of inheritance from guest
16

17 echo $acl->isAllowed('editor', null, 'update') ?

18 "allowed" : "denied";
19 // denied because no allow rule for 'update'
20

21 echo $acl->isAllowed('administrator', null, 'view') ?

22 "allowed" : "denied";
23 // allowed because administrator is allowed all privileges
24

25 echo $acl->isAllowed('administrator') ?
26 "allowed" : "denied";
27 // allowed because administrator is allowed all privileges
28

29 echo $acl->isAllowed('administrator', null, 'update') ?

30 "allowed" : "denied";
31 // allowed because administrator is allowed all privileges

236.6. Querying an ACL 1179

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1180 Chapter 236. Introduction to Zend\Permissions\Acl

 CHAPTER 237

Refining Access Controls

237.1 Precise Access Controls

The basic ACL as defined in the previous section shows how various privileges may be allowed upon the entire ACL
(all resources). In practice, however, access controls tend to have exceptions and varying degrees of complexity.
Zend\Permissions\Acl\Acl allows to you accomplish these refinements in a straightforward and flexible man-
ner.
For the example CMS, it has been determined that whilst the staff group covers the needs of the vast majority of
users, there is a need for a new marketing group that requires access to the newsletter and latest news in the CMS.
The group is fairly self-sufficient and will have the ability to publish and archive both newsletters and the latest news.
In addition, it has also been requested that the staff group be allowed to view news stories but not to revise the
latest news. Finally, it should be impossible for anyone (administrators included) to archive any announcement news
stories since they only have a lifespan of 1-2 days.
First we revise the role registry to reflect these changes. We have determined that the marketing group has the same
basic permissions as staff, so we define marketing in such a way that it inherits permissions from staff:
1 // The new marketing group inherits permissions from staff
2 use Zend\Permissions\Acl\Acl;
3 use Zend\Permissions\Acl\Role\GenericRole as Role;
4 use Zend\Permissions\Acl\Resource\GenericResource as Resource;
5

6 $acl = new Acl();

7

8 $acl->addRole(new Role('marketing'), 'staff');

Next, note that the above access controls refer to specific resources (e.g., newsletter, latest news, announcement
news). Now we add these resources:
1 // Create Resources for the rules
2

3 // newsletter
4 $acl->addResource(new Resource('newsletter'));
5

6 // news
7 $acl->addResource(new Resource('news'));
8

9 // latest news
10 $acl->addResource(new Resource('latest'), 'news');
11

1181
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

12 // announcement news
13 $acl->addResource(new Resource('announcement'), 'news');

Then it is simply a matter of defining these more specific rules on the target areas of the ACL:
1 // Marketing must be able to publish and archive newsletters and the
2 // latest news
3 $acl->allow('marketing',
4 array('newsletter', 'latest'),
5 array('publish', 'archive'));
6

7 // Staff (and marketing, by inheritance), are denied permission to

8 // revise the latest news
9 $acl->deny('staff', 'latest', 'revise');
10

11 // Everyone (including administrators) are denied permission to

12 // archive news announcements
13 $acl->deny(null, 'announcement', 'archive');

We can now query the ACL with respect to the latest changes:
1 echo $acl->isAllowed('staff', 'newsletter', 'publish') ?
2 "allowed" : "denied";
3 // denied
4

5 echo $acl->isAllowed('marketing', 'newsletter', 'publish') ?

6 "allowed" : "denied";
7 // allowed
8

9 echo $acl->isAllowed('staff', 'latest', 'publish') ?

10 "allowed" : "denied";
11 // denied
12

13 echo $acl->isAllowed('marketing', 'latest', 'publish') ?

14 "allowed" : "denied";
15 // allowed
16

17 echo $acl->isAllowed('marketing', 'latest', 'archive') ?

18 "allowed" : "denied";
19 // allowed
20

21 echo $acl->isAllowed('marketing', 'latest', 'revise') ?

22 "allowed" : "denied";
23 // denied
24

25 echo $acl->isAllowed('editor', 'announcement', 'archive') ?

26 "allowed" : "denied";
27 // denied
28

29 echo $acl->isAllowed('administrator', 'announcement', 'archive') ?

30 "allowed" : "denied";
31 // denied

237.2 Removing Access Controls

To remove one or more access rules from the ACL, simply use the available removeAllow() or removeDeny()
methods. As with allow() and deny(), you may provide a NULL value to indicate application to all roles, re-

1182 Chapter 237. Refining Access Controls

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

sources, and/or privileges:

1 // Remove the denial of revising latest news to staff (and marketing,
2 // by inheritance)
3 $acl->removeDeny('staff', 'latest', 'revise');
4

5 echo $acl->isAllowed('marketing', 'latest', 'revise') ?

6 "allowed" : "denied";
7 // allowed
8

9 // Remove the allowance of publishing and archiving newsletters to

10 // marketing
11 $acl->removeAllow('marketing',
12 'newsletter',
13 array('publish', 'archive'));
14

15 echo $acl->isAllowed('marketing', 'newsletter', 'publish') ?

16 "allowed" : "denied";
17 // denied
18

19 echo $acl->isAllowed('marketing', 'newsletter', 'archive') ?

20 "allowed" : "denied";
21 // denied

Privileges may be modified incrementally as indicated above, but a NULL value for the privileges overrides such
incremental changes:
1 // Allow marketing all permissions upon the latest news
2 $acl->allow('marketing', 'latest');
3

4 echo $acl->isAllowed('marketing', 'latest', 'publish') ?

5 "allowed" : "denied";
6 // allowed
7

8 echo $acl->isAllowed('marketing', 'latest', 'archive') ?

9 "allowed" : "denied";
10 // allowed
11

12 echo $acl->isAllowed('marketing', 'latest', 'anything') ?

13 "allowed" : "denied";
14 // allowed

237.2. Removing Access Controls 1183

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1184 Chapter 237. Refining Access Controls

 CHAPTER 238

Advanced Usage

238.1 Storing ACL Data for Persistence

The Zend\Permissions\Acl component was designed in such a way that it does not require any particu-
lar backend technology such as a database or cache server for storage of the ACL data. Its complete PHP im-
plementation enables customized administration tools to be built upon Zend\Permissions\Acl\Acl with
relative ease and flexibility. Many situations require some form of interactive maintenance of the ACL, and
Zend\Permissions\Acl\Acl provides methods for setting up, and querying against, the access controls of
an application.
Storage of ACL data is therefore left as a task for the developer, since use cases are expected to vary widely for various
situations. Because Zend\Permissions\Acl\Acl is serializable, ACL objects may be serialized with PHPs
serialize() function, and the results may be stored anywhere the developer should desire, such as a file, database, or
caching mechanism.

238.2 Writing Conditional ACL Rules with Assertions

Sometimes a rule for allowing or denying a role access to a resource should not be absolute but dependent upon
various criteria. For example, suppose that certain access should be allowed, but only between the hours of 8:00am
and 5:00pm. Another example would be denying access because a request comes from an IP address that has been
flagged as a source of abuse. Zend\Permissions\Acl\Acl has built-in support for implementing rules based
on whatever conditions the developer needs.
Zend\Permissions\Acl\Acl provides support for conditional rules with
Zend\Permissions\Acl\Assertion\AssertionInterface. In order to use the rule assertion in-
terface, a developer writes a class that implements the assert() method of the interface:
1 class CleanIPAssertion implements Zend\Permissions\Acl\Assertion\AssertionInterface
2 {
3 public function assert(Zend\Permissions\Acl\Acl $acl,
4 Zend\Permissions\Acl\Role\RoleInterface $role = null,
5 Zend\Permissions\Acl\Resource\ResourceInterface $resource = null,
6 $privilege = null)
7 {
8 return $this->_isCleanIP($_SERVER['REMOTE_ADDR']);
9 }
10

11 protected function _isCleanIP($ip)

12 {
13 // ...

1185
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

14 }
15 }

Once an assertion class is available, the developer must supply an instance of the assertion class when assigning
conditional rules. A rule that is created with an assertion only applies when the assertion method returns TRUE.
1 use Zend\Permissions\Acl\Acl;
2

3 $acl = new Acl();

4 $acl->allow(null, null, null, new CleanIPAssertion());

The above code creates a conditional allow rule that allows access to all privileges on everything by everyone, except
when the requesting IP is blacklisted. If a request comes in from an IP that is not considered clean, then the allow
rule does not apply. Since the rule applies to all roles, all resources, and all privileges, an unclean IP would result
in a denial of access. This is a special case, however, and it should be understood that in all other cases (i.e., where
a specific role, resource, or privilege is specified for the rule), a failed assertion results in the rule not applying, and
other rules would be used to determine whether access is allowed or denied.
The assert() method of an assertion object is passed the ACL, role, resource, and privilege to which the autho-
rization query (i.e., isAllowed()) applies, in order to provide a context for the assertion class to determine its
conditions where needed.

1186 Chapter 238. Advanced Usage

 CHAPTER 239

Introduction to Zend\Permissions\Rbac

The Zend\Permissions\Rbac component provides a lightweight role-based access control implementation

based around PHP 5.3s SPL RecursiveIterator and RecursiveIteratorIterator. RBAC differs from access control lists
(ACL) by putting the emphasis on roles and their permissions rather than objects (resources).
For the purposes of this documentation:
an identity has one or more roles.
a role requests access to a permission.
a permission is given to a role.
Thus, RBAC has the following model:
many to many relationship between identities and roles.
many to many relationship between roles and permissions.
roles can have a parent role.

239.1 Roles

The easiest way to create a role is by extending the abstract class Zend\Permission\Rbac\AbstractRole or
simply using the default class provided in Zend\Permission\Rbac\Role. You can instantiate a role and add it
to the RBAC container or add a role directly using the RBAC container addRole() method.

239.2 Permissions

Each role can have zero or more permissions and can be set directly to the role or by first retrieving the role from the
RBAC container. Any parent role will inherit the permissions of their children.

239.3 Dynamic Assertions

In certain situations simply checking a permission key for access may not be enough. For example, assume two users,
Foo and Bar, both have article.edit permission. Whats to stop Bar from editing Foos articles? The answer is dynamic
assertions which allow you to specify extra runtime credentials that must pass for access to be granted.

1187
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1188 Chapter 239. Introduction to Zend\Permissions\Rbac

 CHAPTER 240

Methods

Zend\Permissions\Rbac\AbstractIterator
current
getChildren
hasChildren
key
next
rewind
valid
Zend\Permissions\Rbac\AbstractRole
addChild
addPermission
getName
hasPermission
setParent
getParent
Zend\Permissions\Rbac\AssertionInterface
assert
Zend\Permissions\Rbac\Rbac
addRole
getCreateMissingRoles
getRole
hasRole
isGranted
setCreateMissingRoles
Zend\Permissions\Rbac\Role
__construct

1189
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1190 Chapter 240. Methods

 CHAPTER 241

Examples

The following is a list of common use-case examples for Zend\Permission\Rbac.

241.1 Roles

Extending and adding roles via instantiation.

1 <?php
2 use Zend\Permissions\Rbac\Rbac;
3 use Zend\Permissions\Rbac\AbstractRole;
4

5 class MyRole extends AbstractRole

6 {
7 // .. implementation
8 }
9

10 // Creating roles manually

11 $foo = new MyRole('foo');
12

13 $rbac = new Rbac();

14 $rbac->addRole($foo);
15

16 var_dump($rbac->hasRole('foo')); // true

Adding roles directly to RBAC with the default Zend\Permission\Rbac\Role.

1 <?php
2 use Zend\Permissions\Rbac\Rbac;
3

4 $rbac = new Rbac();

5 $rbac->addRole('foo');
6

7 var_dump($rbac->hasRole('foo')); // true

Handling roles with children.

1 <?php
2 use Zend\Permissions\Rbac\Rbac;
3 use Zend\Permissions\Rbac\Role;
4

5 $rbac = new Rbac();

6 $foo = new Role('foo');

1191
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

7 $bar = new Role('bar');

8

9 // 1 - Add a role with child role directly with instantiated classes.

10 $foo->addChild($bar);
11 $rbac->addRole($foo);
12

13 // 2 - Same as one, only via rbac container.

14 $rbac->addRole('boo', 'baz'); // baz is a parent of boo
15 $rbac->addRole('baz', array('out', 'of', 'roles')); // create several parents of baz

241.2 Permissions
1 <?php
2 use Zend\Permissions\Rbac\Rbac;
3 use Zend\Permissions\Rbac\Role;
4

5 $rbac = new Rbac();

6 $foo = new Role('foo');
7 $foo->addPermission('bar');
8

9 var_dump($foo->hasPermission('bar')); // true
10

11 $rbac->addRole($foo);
12 $rbac->isGranted('foo', 'bar'); // true
13 $rbac->isGranted('foo', 'baz'); // false
14

15 $rbac->getRole('foo')->addPermission('baz');
16 $rbac->isGranted('foo', 'baz'); // true

241.3 Dynamic Assertions

Checking permission using isGranted() with a class implementing Zend\Permissions\Rbac\AssertionInterface.

1 <?php
2 use Zend\Permissions\Rbac\AssertionInterface;
3 use Zend\Permissions\Rbac\Rbac;
4

5 class AssertUserIdMatches implements AssertionInterface

6 {
7 protected $userId;
8 protected $article;
9

10 public function __construct($userId)

11 {
12 $this->userId = $userId;
13 }
14

15 public function setArticle($article)

16 {
17 $this->article = $article;
18 }
19

20 public function assert(Rbac $rbac)

1192 Chapter 241. Examples

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

21 {
22 if (!$this->article) {
23 return false;
24 }
25 return $this->userId == $this->article->getUserId();
26 }
27 }
28

29 // User is assigned the foo role with id 5

30 // News article belongs to userId 5
31 // Jazz article belongs to userId 6
32

33 $rbac = new Rbac();

34 $user = $mySessionObject->getUser();
35 $news = $articleService->getArticle(5);
36 $jazz = $articleService->getArticle(6);
37

38 $rbac->addRole($user->getRole());
39 $rbac->getRole($user->getRole())->addPermission('edit.article');
40

41 $assertion = new AssertUserIdMatches($user->getId());

42 $assertion->setArticle($news);
43

44 // true always - bad!

45 if ($rbac->isGranted($user->getRole(), 'edit.article')) {
46 // hacks another user's article
47 }
48

49 // true for user id 5, because he belongs to write group and user id matches
50 if ($rbac->isGranted($user->getRole(), 'edit.article', $assertion)) {
51 // edits his own article
52 }
53

54 $assertion->setArticle($jazz);
55

56 // false for user id 5

57 if ($rbac->isGranted($user->getRole(), 'edit.article', $assertion)) {
58 // can not edit another user's article
59 }

Performing the same as above with a Closure.

1 <?php
2 // assume same variables from previous example
3

4 $assertion = function($rbac) use ($user, $news) {

5 return $user->getId() == $news->getUserId();
6 };
7

8 // true
9 if ($rbac->isGranted($user->getRole(), 'edit.article', $assertion)) {
10 // edits his own article
11 }

241.3. Dynamic Assertions 1193

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1194 Chapter 241. Examples

 CHAPTER 242

Progress Bars

242.1 Introduction

Zend\ProgressBar is a component to create and update progress bars in different environments. It consists of a
single backend, which outputs the progress through one of the multiple adapters. On every update, it takes an absolute
value and optionally a status message, and then calls the adapter with some precalculated values like percentage and
estimated time left.

242.2 Basic Usage

Zend\ProgressBar is quite easy in its usage. You simply create a new instance of Zend\Progressbar,
defining a min- and a max-value, and choose an adapter to output the data. If you want to process a file, you would do
something like:
1 $progressBar = new Zend\ProgressBar\ProgressBar($adapter, 0, $fileSize);
2

3 while (!feof($fp)) {
4 // Do something
5

6 $progressBar->update($currentByteCount);
7 }
8

9 $progressBar->finish();

In the first step, an instance of Zend\ProgressBar is created, with a specific adapter, a min-value of 0 and a
max-value of the total filesize. Then a file is processed and in every loop the progressbar is updated with the current
byte count. At the end of the loop, the progressbar status is set to finished.
You can also call the update() method of Zend\ProgressBar without arguments, which just recalculates ETA
and notifies the adapter. This is useful when there is no data update but you want the progressbar to be updated.

242.3 Persistent Progress

If you want the progressbar to be persistent over multiple requests, you can give the name of a session namespace
as fourth argument to the constructor. In that case, the progressbar will not notify the adapter within the constructor,
but only when you call update() or finish(). Also the current value, the status text and the start time for ETA
calculation will be fetched in the next request run again.

1195
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

242.4 Standard Adapters

Zend\ProgressBar comes with the following three adapters:

Zend\Progressbar\Adapter\Console
Zend\Progressbar\Adapter\JsPush
Zend\ProgressBar\Adapter\JsPull
orphan

242.4.1 Console Adapter

Zend\ProgressBar\Adapter\Console is a text-based adapter for terminals. It can automatically detect ter-

minal widths but supports custom widths as well. You can define which elements are displayed with the progressbar
and as well customize the order of them. You can also define the style of the progressbar itself.

Note: Automatic console width recognition

shell_exec is required for this feature to work on *nix based systems. On windows, there is always a fixed terminal
width of 80 character, so no recognition is required there.

You can set the adapter options either via the set* methods or give an array or a Zend\Config\Config instance
with options as first parameter to the constructor. The available options are:
outputStream: A different output-stream, if you dont want to stream to STDOUT. Can be any other stream like
php://stderr or a path to a file.
width: Either an integer or the AUTO constant of Zend\Console\ProgressBar.
elements: Either NULL for default or an array with at least one of the following constants of
Zend\Console\ProgressBar as value:
ELEMENT_PERCENT: The current value in percent.
ELEMENT_BAR: The visual bar which display the percentage.
ELEMENT_ETA: The automatic calculated ETA. This element is firstly displayed after five seconds, be-
cause in this time, it is not able to calculate accurate results.
ELEMENT_TEXT: An optional status message about the current process.
textWidth: Width in characters of the ELEMENT_TEXT element. Default is 20.
charset: Charset of the ELEMENT_TEXT element. Default is utf-8.
barLeftChar: A string which is used left-hand of the indicator in the progressbar.
barRightChar: A string which is used right-hand of the indicator in the progressbar.
barIndicatorChar: A string which is used for the indicator in the progressbar. This one can be empty.
orphan

242.4.2 JsPush Adapter

Zend\ProgressBar\Adapter\JsPush is an adapter which lets you update a progressbar in a browser via

Javascript Push. This means that no second connection is required to gather the status about a running process, but
that the process itself sends its status directly to the browser.

1196 Chapter 242. Progress Bars

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

You can set the adapter options either via the set* methods or give an array or a Zend\Config\Config instance
with options as first parameter to the constructor. The available options are:
updateMethodName: The JavaScript method which should be called on every update. Default value is
Zend\ProgressBar\Update.
finishMethodName: The JavaScript method which should be called after finish status was set. Default value is
NULL, which means nothing is done.
The usage of this adapter is quite simple. First you create a progressbar in your browser, either with JavaScript
or previously created with plain HTML. Then you define the update method and optionally the finish method in
JavaScript, both taking a json object as single argument. Then you call a webpage with the long-running process in
a hidden iframe or object tag. While the process is running, the adapter will call the update method on every update
with a json object, containing the following parameters:
current: The current absolute value
max: The max absolute value
percent: The calculated percentage
timeTaken: The time how long the process ran yet
timeRemaining: The expected time for the process to finish
text: The optional status message, if given

Basic example for the client-side stuff

This example illustrates a basic setup of HTML, CSS and JavaScript for the JsPush adapter
1 <div id="zend-progressbar-container">
2 <div id="zend-progressbar-done"></div>
3 </div>
4

5 <iframe src="long-running-process.php" id="long-running-process"></iframe>

1 #long-running-process {
2 position: absolute;
3 left: -100px;
4 top: -100px;
5

6 width: 1px;
7 height: 1px;
8 }
9

10 #zend-progressbar-container {
11 width: 100px;
12 height: 30px;
13

14 border: 1px solid #000000;

15 background-color: #ffffff;
16 }
17

18 #zend-progressbar-done {
19 width: 0;
20 height: 30px;
21

22 background-color: #000000;
23 }

242.4. Standard Adapters 1197

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1 function Zend\ProgressBar\Update(data)
2 {
3 document.getElementById('zend-progressbar-done').style.width =
4 data.percent + '%';
5 }

This will create a simple container with a black border and a block which indicates the current process. You should
not hide the iframe or object by display: none;, as some browsers like Safari 2 will not load the actual content then.
Instead of creating your custom progressbar, you may want to use one of the available JavaScript libraries like Dojo,
jQuery etc. For example, there are:
Dojo: http://dojotoolkit.org/reference-guide/dijit/ProgressBar.html
jQuery: https://api.jqueryui.com/progressbar/_
MooTools: http://davidwalsh.name/dw-content/progress-bar.php
Prototype: http://livepipe.net/control/progressbar

Note: Interval of updates

You should take care of not sending too many updates, as every update has a min-size of 1kb. This is a requirement
for the Safari browser to actually render and execute the function call. Internet Explorer has a similar limitation of 256
bytes.

orphan

242.4.3 JsPull Adapter

Zend\ProgressBar\Adapter\JsPull is the opposite of jsPush, as it requires to pull for new updates, instead
of pushing updates out to the browsers. Generally you should use the adapter with the persistence option of the
Zend\ProgressBar. On notify, the adapter sends a JSON string to the browser, which looks exactly like the JSON
string which is send by the jsPush adapter. The only difference is, that it contains an additional parameter, finished,
which is either FALSE when update() is called or TRUE, when finish() is called.
You can set the adapter options either via the set*() methods or give an array or a Zend\Config\Config
instance with options as first parameter to the constructor. The available options are:
exitAfterSend: Exits the current request after the data were send to the browser. Default is TRUE.

1198 Chapter 242. Progress Bars

 CHAPTER 243

File Upload Handlers

243.1 Introduction

Zend\ProgressBar\Upload provides handlers that can give you the actual state of a file upload in progress. To
use this feature you need to choose one of the upload progress handlers (APC, uploadprogress, or Session) and ensure
that your server setup has the appropriate extension or feature enabled. All of the progress handlers use the same
interface.
When uploading a file with a form POST, you must also include the progress identifier in a hidden input. The File
Upload Progress View Helpers provide a convenient way to add the hidden input based on your handler type.

243.2 Methods of Reporting Progress

There are two methods for reporting the current upload progress status. By either using a ProgressBar Adapter, or by
using the returned status array manually.

243.2.1 Using a ProgressBar Adapter

A Zend\ProgressBar adapter can be used to display upload progress to your users.

1 $adapter = new \Zend\ProgressBar\Adapter\JsPush();
2 $progress = new \Zend\ProgressBar\Upload\SessionProgress();
3

4 $filter = new \Zend\I18n\Filter\Alnum(false, 'en_US');

5 $id = $filter->filter($_GET['id']);
6

7 $status = null;
8 while (empty($status['done'])) {
9 $status = $progress->getProgress($id);
10 }

Each time the getProgress() method is called, the ProgressBar adapter will be updated.

243.2.2 Using the Status Array

You can also work manually with getProgress() without using a Zend\ProgressBar adapter.
The getProgress() will return you an array with several keys. They will sometimes differ based on the specific
Upload handler used, but the following keys are always standard:

1199
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

total: The total file size of the uploaded file(s) in bytes as integer.
current: The current uploaded file size in bytes as integer.
rate: The average upload speed in bytes per second as integer.
done: Returns TRUE when the upload is finished and FALSE otherwise.
message: A status message. Either the progress as text in the form 10kB / 200kB, or a helpful error message
in the case of a problem. Problems such as: no upload in progress, failure while retrieving the data for the
progress, or that the upload has been canceled.
All other returned keys are provided directly from the specific handler.
An example of using the status array manually:
1 // In a Controller...
2

3 public function sessionProgressAction()

4 {
5 $id = $this->params()->fromQuery('id', null);
6 $progress = new \Zend\ProgressBar\Upload\SessionProgress();
7 return new \Zend\View\Model\JsonModel($progress->getProgress($id));
8 }
9

10 // Returns JSON
11 //{
12 // "total" : 204800,
13 // "current" : 10240,
14 // "rate" : 1024,
15 // "message" : "10kB / 200kB",
16 // "done" : false
17 //}

243.3 Standard Handlers

Zend\ProgressBar\Upload comes with the following three upload handlers:

Zend\Progressbar\Upload\ApcProgress
Zend\ProgressBar\Upload\SessionProgress
Zend\Progressbar\Upload\UploadProgress
orphan

243.3.1 APC Progress Handler

The Zend\ProgressBar\Upload\ApcProgress handler uses the APC extension for tracking upload progress.

Note: The APC extension is required.

This handler is best used with the FormFileApcProgress view helper, to provide a hidden element with the upload
progress identifier.
orphan

1200 Chapter 243. File Upload Handlers

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

243.3.2 Session Progress Handler

The Zend\ProgressBar\Upload\SessionProgress handler uses the PHP 5.4 Session Progress feature for
tracking upload progress.

Note: PHP 5.4 is required.

This handler is best used with the FormFileSessionProgress view helper, to provide a hidden element with the upload
progress identifier.
orphan

243.3.3 Upload Progress Handler

The Zend\ProgressBar\Upload\UploadProgress handler uses the PECL Uploadprogress extension for

tracking upload progress.

Note: The PECL Uploadprogress extension is required.

This handler is best used with the FormFileUploadProgress view helper, to provide a hidden element with the upload
progress identifier.

243.3. Standard Handlers 1201

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1202 Chapter 243. File Upload Handlers

 CHAPTER 244

Introduction to Zend\Serializer

The Zend\Serializer component provides an adapter based interface to simply generate storable representation
of PHP types by different facilities, and recover.
For more information what a serializer is read the wikipedia page of Serialization.

244.1 Quick Start

Serializing adapters can either be created from the provided Zend\Serializer\Serializer::factory

method, or by simply instantiating one of the Zend\Serializer\Adapter\* classes.
1 use Zend\Serializer\Serializer;
2

3 // Via factory:
4 $serializer = Zend\Serializer\Serializer::factory('PhpSerialize');
5

6 // Alternately:
7 $serializer = new Zend\Serializer\Adapter\PhpSerialize();
8

9 // Now $serializer is an instance of Zend\Serializer\Adapter\AdapterInterface,

10 // specifically Zend\Serializer\Adapter\PhpSerialize
11

12 try {
13 $serialized = $serializer->serialize($data);
14 // now $serialized is a string
15

16 $unserialized = $serializer->unserialize($serialized);
17 // now $data == $unserialized
18 } catch (Zend\Serializer\Exception\ExceptionInterface $e) {
19 echo $e;
20 }

The method serialize() generates a storable string. To regenerate this serialized data you can simply call the
method unserialize().
Any time an error is encountered serializing or unserializing, Zend\Serializer will throw a
Zend\Serializer\Exception\ExceptionInterface.
Because of an application often uses internally only one serializer it is possible to define and use a default serializer.
That serializer will be used by default by other components like Zend\Cache\Storage\Plugin\Serializer.
To use the default serializer you can simply use the static serialization methods of the basic
Zend\Serializer\Serializer:

1203
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1 use Zend\Serializer\Serializer;
2

3 try {
4 $serialized = Serializer::serialize($data);
5 // now $serialized is a string
6

7 $unserialized = Serializer::unserialize($serialized);
8 // now $data == $unserialized
9 } catch (Zend\Serializer\Exception\ExceptionInterface $e) {
10 echo $e;
11 }

244.2 Basic configuration Options

To configure a serializer adapter, you can optionally use an instance of

Zend\Serializer\Adapter\AdapterOptions, an instance of one of the adapter specific options
class, an array or an instance of Traversable. The adapter will convert it into the adapter specific options class
instance (if present) or into the basic Zend\Serializer\Adapter\AdapterOptions class instance.
Options can be passed as second argument to the provided Zend\Serializer\Serializer::factory
method, using the method setOptions or set as constructor argument.

244.3 Available Methods

Each serializer implements the interface Zend\Serializer\Adapter\AdapterInterface.

This interface defines the following methods:
serialize(mixed $value)
Generates a storable representation of a value.
Return type string
unserialize(string $value)
Creates a PHP value from a stored representation.
Return type mixed
The basic class Zend\Serializer\Serializer will be used to instantiate the adapters, to configure the factory
and to handle static serializing.
It defines the following static methods:
factory(string|Zend\Serializer\Adapter\AdapterInterface $adapterName, Zend\Serializer\Adapter\AdapterOptions|array|Traversable
$adapterOptions = null)
Create a serializer adapter instance.
Return type Zend\Serializer\Adapter\AdapterInterface
setAdapterPluginManager(Zend\Serializer\AdapterPluginManager $adapters)
Change the adapter plugin manager.
Return type void
getAdapterPluginManager()
Get the adapter plugin manager.
Return type Zend\Serializer\AdapterPluginManager

1204 Chapter 244. Introduction to Zend\Serializer

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

resetAdapterPluginManager()
Resets the internal adapter plugin manager.
Return type void
setDefaultAdapter(string|Zend\Serializer\Adapter\AdapterInterface $adapter,
Zend\Serializer\Adapter\AdapterOptions|array|Traversable|null $adapterOptions =
null)
Change the default adapter.
Return type void
getDefaultAdapter()
Get the default adapter.
Return type Zend\Serializer\Adapter\AdapterInterface
serialize(mixed $value, string|Zend\Serializer\Adapter\AdapterInterface|null $adapter = null,
Zend\Serializer\Adapter\AdapterOptions|array|Traversable|null $adapterOptions = null)
Generates a storable representation of a value using the default adapter. Optionally different adapter could be
provided as second argument.
Return type string
unserialize(string $value, string|Zend\Serializer\Adapter\AdapterInterface|null $adapter = null,
Zend\Serializer\Adapter\AdapterOptions|array|Traversable|null $adapterOptions = null)
Creates a PHP value from a stored representation using the default adapter. Optionally different adapter could
be provided as second argument.
Return type mixed

244.3. Available Methods 1205

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1206 Chapter 244. Introduction to Zend\Serializer

 CHAPTER 245

Zend\Serializer\Adapter

Zend\Serializer adapters create a bridge for different methods of serializing with very little effort.
Every adapter has different pros and cons. In some cases, not every PHP datatype (e.g., objects) can be converted to a
string representation. In most such cases, the type will be converted to a similar type that is serializable.
As an example, PHP objects will often be cast to arrays. If this fails, a
Zend\Serializer\Exception\ExceptionInterface will be thrown.

245.1 The PhpSerialize Adapter

The Zend\Serializer\Adapter\PhpSerialize adapter uses the built-in un/serialize PHP functions,

and is a good default adapter choice.
There are no configurable options for this adapter.

245.2 The IgBinary Adapter

Igbinary is Open Source Software released by Sulake Dynamoid Oy and since 2011-03-14 moved to PECL maintained
by Pierre Joye. Its a drop-in replacement for the standard PHP serializer. Instead of time and space consuming textual
representation, igbinary stores PHP data structures in a compact binary form. Savings are significant when using
memcached or similar memory based storages for serialized data.
You need the igbinary PHP extension installed on your system in order to use this adapter.
There are no configurable options for this adapter.

245.3 The Wddx Adapter

WDDX (Web Distributed Data eXchange) is a programming-language-, platform-, and transport-neutral data inter-
change mechanism for passing data between different environments and different computers.
The adapter simply uses the wddx_*() PHP functions. Please read the PHP manual to determine how you may enable
them in your PHP installation.
Additionally, the SimpleXML PHP extension is used to check if a returned NULL value from
wddx_unserialize() is based on a serialized NULL or on invalid data.
Available options include:

1207
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Table 245.1: ZendSerializerAdapterWddx Options

Option Data Type Default Value Description
comment string An optional comment that appears in the packet header.

245.4 The Json Adapter

The JSON adapter provides a bridge to the Zend\Json component. Please read the ZendJson documentation for
further information.
Available options include:

Table 245.2: ZendSerializerAdapterJson Options

Option Data Type Default Value
cycle_check boolean false
object_decode_type Zend\Json\Json::TYPE_* Zend\Json\Json::TYPE_ARRAY
enable_json_expr_finder boolean false

245.5 The PythonPickle Adapter

This adapter converts PHP types to a Python Pickle string representation. With it, you can read the serialized data with
Python and read Pickled data of Python with PHP.
Available options include:

Table 245.3: ZendSerializerAdapterPythonPickle Options

Option Data Type Default Value Description
protocol integer (0|1|2|3) 0 The Pickle protocol version used on serialize
Table 245.4: Datatype merging (PHP to
Python Pickle)
PHP Type Python Pickle Type
NULL None
boolean boolean
integer integer
float float
string string
array list list
array map dictionary
object dictionary

1208 Chapter 245. Zend\Serializer\Adapter

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Table 245.5: Datatype merging (Python Pickle to PHP)

Python Pickle PHP Type
Type
None NULL
boolean
boolean
integer
integer
integer or float or string or
long
Zend\Serializer\Exception\ExceptionInterface
float
float
string
string
string
bytes
unicode string UTF-8
string
list array list
tuple array list
dictionary array map
All other types Zend\Serializer\Exception\ExceptionInterface

245.6 The PhpCode Adapter

The Zend\Serializer\Adapter\PhpCode adapter generates a parsable PHP code representation using

var_export(). On restoring, the data will be executed using eval.
There are no configuration options for this adapter.

Warning: Unserializing objects

Objects will be serialized using the __set_state magic method. If the class doesnt implement this method, a fatal
error will occur during execution.

Warning: Uses eval()

The PhpCode adapter utilizes eval() to unserialize. This introduces both a performance and potential security
issue as a new process will be executed. Typically, you should use the PhpSerialize adapter unless you require
human-readability of the serialized data.

245.6. The PhpCode Adapter 1209

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1210 Chapter 245. Zend\Serializer\Adapter

 CHAPTER 246

Introduction to Zend\Server

The Zend\Server family of classes provides functionality for the various server classes, including
Zend\XmlRpc\Server and Zend\Json\Server. Zend\Server\Server provides an interface that mimics
PHP 5s SoapServer class; all server classes should implement this interface in order to provide a standard server
API.
The Zend\Server\Reflection tree provides a standard mechanism for performing function and class introspec-
tion for use as callbacks with the server classes, and provides data suitable for use with Zend\Server\Servers
getFunctions() and loadFunctions() methods.

1211
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1212 Chapter 246. Introduction to Zend\Server

 CHAPTER 247

Zend\Server\Reflection

247.1 Introduction

Zend\Server\Reflection provides a standard mechanism for performing function and class introspection for
use with server classes. It is based on PHP 5s Reflection API, augmenting it with methods for retrieving parameter
and return value types and descriptions, a full list of function and method prototypes (i.e., all possible valid calling
combinations), and function or method descriptions.
Typically, this functionality will only be used by developers of server classes for the framework.

247.2 Usage

Basic usage is simple:

1 $class = Zend\Server\Reflection::reflectClass('My\Class');
2 $function = Zend\Server\Reflection::reflectFunction('my_function');
3

4 // Get prototypes
5 $prototypes = $function->getPrototypes();
6

7 // Loop through each prototype for the function

8 foreach ($prototypes as $prototype) {
9

10 // Get prototype return type

11 echo "Return type: ", $prototype->getReturnType(), "\n";
12

13 // Get prototype parameters

14 $parameters = $prototype->getParameters();
15

16 echo "Parameters: \n";

17 foreach ($parameters as $parameter) {
18 // Get parameter type
19 echo " ", $parameter->getType(), "\n";
20 }
21 }
22

23 // Get namespace for a class, function, or method.

24 // Namespaces may be set at instantiation time (second argument), or using
25 // setNamespace()
26 $class->getNamespace();

1213
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

reflectFunction() returns a Zend\Server\Reflection\Function object; reflectClass() re-

turns a Zend\Server\Reflection\Class object. Please refer to the API documentation to see what methods
are available to each.

1214 Chapter 247. Zend\Server\Reflection

 CHAPTER 248

Zend\ServiceManager

248.1 Introduction

The Service Locator design pattern is implemented by the Zend\ServiceManager component. The
Service Locator is a service/object locator, tasked with retrieving other objects. Following is the
Zend\ServiceManager\ServiceLocatorInterface API:
1 namespace Zend\ServiceManager;
2

3 interface ServiceLocatorInterface
4 {
5 public function get($name);
6 public function has($name);
7 }

has($name), tests whether the ServiceManager has a named service;

get($name), retrieves a service by the given name.

248.2 Additional API

A Zend\ServiceManager\ServiceManager is an implementation of the ServiceLocatorInterface.

In addition to the above described methods, the ServiceManager provides additional API:

248.2.1 Service registration

ServiceManager::setService allows you to register an object as a service:

1 $serviceManager->setService('my-foo', new stdClass());
2 $serviceManager->setService('my-settings', array('password' => 'super-secret'));
3

4 var_dump($serviceManager->get('my-foo')); // an instance of stdClass

5 var_dump($serviceManager->get('my-settings')); // array('password' => 'super-secret')

248.2.2 Invokables (constructor-less services)

ServiceManager::setInvokableClass allows you to tell the ServiceManager what class to instantiate

when a particular service is requested:

1215
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1 $serviceManager->setInvokableClass('foo-service-name', 'Fully\Qualified\Classname');
2

3 var_dump($serviceManager->get('foo-service-name')); // an instance of Fully\Qualified\Classname

Classes registered as invokables must have no constructor defined, or constructors that allow passing no arguments.

248.2.3 Service factories

Instead of an actual object instance or a class name, you can tell the ServiceManager to invoke a provided
factory in order to get the object instance. Factories may be either a PHP callback, an object implementing
Zend\ServiceManager\FactoryInterface, or the name of a class implementing that interface:
1 use Zend\ServiceManager\FactoryInterface;
2 use Zend\ServiceManager\ServiceLocatorInterface;
3

4 class MyFactory implements FactoryInterface

5 {
6 public function createService(ServiceLocatorInterface $serviceLocator)
7 {
8 return new \stdClass();
9 }
10 }
11

12 // registering a factory instance

13 $serviceManager->setFactory('foo-service-name', new MyFactory());
14

15 // registering a factory by factory class name

16 $serviceManager->setFactory('bar-service-name', 'MyFactory');
17

18 // registering a callback as a factory

19 $serviceManager->setFactory('baz-service-name', function () { return new \stdClass(); });
20

21 var_dump($serviceManager->get('foo-service-name')); // stdClass(1)
22 var_dump($serviceManager->get('bar-service-name')); // stdClass(2)
23 var_dump($serviceManager->get('baz-service-name')); // stdClass(3)

248.2.4 Service aliasing

With ServiceManager::setAlias you can create aliases of any registered service, factory or invokable, or even
other aliases:
1 $foo = new \stdClass();
2 $foo->bar = 'baz!';
3

4 $serviceManager->setService('my-foo', $foo);
5 $serviceManager->setAlias('my-bar', 'my-foo');
6 $serviceManager->setAlias('my-baz', 'my-bar');
7

8 var_dump($serviceManager->get('my-foo')->bar); // baz!
9 var_dump($serviceManager->get('my-bar')->bar); // baz!
10 var_dump($serviceManager->get('my-baz')->bar); // baz!

1216 Chapter 248. Zend\ServiceManager

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

248.2.5 Abstract factories

An abstract factory can be considered as a fallback factory. If the service manager was not able to find a service for
the requested name, it will check the registered abstract factories:
1 use Zend\ServiceManager\ServiceLocatorInterface;
2 use Zend\ServiceManager\AbstractFactoryInterface;
3

4 class MyAbstractFactory implements AbstractFactoryInterface

5 {
6 public function canCreateServiceWithName(ServiceLocatorInterface $serviceLocator, $name, $request
7 {
8 // this abstract factory only knows about 'foo' and 'bar'
9 return $requestedName === 'foo' || $requestedName === 'bar';
10 }
11

12 public function createServiceWithName(ServiceLocatorInterface $serviceLocator, $name, $requestedN

13 {
14 $service = new \stdClass();
15

16 $service->name = $requestedName;
17

18 return $service;
19 }
20 }
21

22 $serviceManager->addAbstractFactory('MyAbstractFactory');
23

24 var_dump($serviceManager->get('foo')->name); // foo
25 var_dump($serviceManager->get('bar')->name); // bar
26 var_dump($serviceManager->get('baz')->name); // exception! Zend\ServiceManager\Exception\ServiceNotFo

248.2.6 Initializers

You may want certain injection points to be always called. As an example, any object you load via the
service manager that implements Zend\EventManager\EventManagerAwareInterface should likely
receive an EventManager instance. Initializers can be either PHP callbacks or classes implementing
Zend\ServiceManager\InitializerInterface. They receive the new instance, and can then manipulate
it:
1 use Zend\ServiceManager\ServiceLocatorInterface;
2 use Zend\ServiceManager\InitializerInterface;
3

4 class MyInitializer implements InitializerInterface

5 {
6 public function initialize($instance, ServiceLocatorInterface $serviceLocator)
7 {
8 if ($instance instanceof \stdClass) {
9 $instance->initialized = 'initialized!';
10 }
11 }
12 }
13

14 $serviceManager->addInitializer('MyInitializer');
15 $serviceManager->setInvokableClass('my-service', 'stdClass');
16

17 var_dump($serviceManager->get('my-service')->initialized); // initialized!

248.2. Additional API 1217

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

In addition to the above, the ServiceManager also provides optional ties to Zend\Di, allowing Di to act as an
initializer or an abstract factory for the service manager.

1218 Chapter 248. Zend\ServiceManager

 CHAPTER 249

Zend\ServiceManager Quick Start

By default, Zend Framework utilizes Zend\ServiceManager within the MVC layer and in various other com-
ponents. As such, in most cases youll be providing services, invokable classes, aliases, and factories either via
configuration or via your module classes.
By default, the module manager listener Zend\ModuleManager\Listener\ServiceListener will do the
following:
For modules implementing Zend\ModuleManager\Feature\ServiceProviderInterface, or the
getServiceConfig() method, it will call that method and merge the retrieved configuration.
After all modules have been processed, it will grab the configuration from the registered
Zend\ModuleManager\Listener\ConfigListener, and merge any configuration under the
service_manager key.
Finally, it will use the merged configuration to configure the ServiceManager instance.
In most cases, you wont interact with the ServiceManager, other than to providing services to it; your ap-
plication will typically rely on the configuration of the ServiceManager to ensure that services are config-
ured correctly with their dependencies. When creating factories, however, you may want to interact with the
ServiceManager to retrieve other services to inject as dependencies. Additionally, there are some cases where
you may want to receive the ServiceManager to lazy-retrieve dependencies; as such, you may want to implement
ServiceLocatorAwareInterface and know more details about the API of the ServiceManager.

249.1 Using Configuration

Configuration requires a service_manager key at the top level of your configuration, with any of the following
sub-keys:
abstract_factories, which should be an array of abstract factory class names.
aliases, which should be an associative array of alias name/target name pairs (where the target name may also
be an alias).
factories, an array of service name/factory class name pairs. The factories should be either classes implementing
Zend\ServiceManager\FactoryInterface or invokable classes. If you are using PHP configuration
files, you may provide any PHP callable as the factory.
invokables, an array of service name/class name pairs. The class name should be class that may be directly
instantiated without any constructor arguments.
services, an array of service name/object pairs. Clearly, this will only work with PHP configuration.

1219
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

shared, an array of service name/boolean pairs, indicating whether or not a service should be shared. By
default, the ServiceManager assumes all services are shared, but you may specify a boolean false value
here to indicate a new instance should be returned.

249.2 Modules as Service Providers

Modules may act as service configuration providers. To do so, the Module class must either
implement Zend\ModuleManager\Feature\ServiceProviderInterface or simply the method
getServiceConfig() (which is also defined in the interface). This method must return one of the following:
An array (or Traversable object) of configuration compatible with Zend\ServiceManager\Config.
(Basically, it should have the keys for configuration as discussed in the previous section.
A string providing the name of a class implementing Zend\ServiceManager\ConfigInterface.
An instance of either Zend\ServiceManager\Config, or an object implementing
Zend\ServiceManager\ConfigInterface.
As noted previously, this configuration will be merged with the configuration returned from other modules as well
as configuration files, prior to being passed to the ServiceManager; this allows overriding configuration from
modules easily.

249.3 Examples

249.3.1 Sample Configuration

The following is valid configuration for any configuration being merged in your application, and demonstrates each of
the possible configuration keys. Configuration is merged in the following order:
Configuration returned from Module classes via the getServiceConfig() method, in the order in which
modules are processed.
Module configuration under the service_manager key, in the order in which modules are processed.
Application configuration under the config/autoload/ directory, in the order in which they are processed.
As such, you have a variety of ways to override service manager configuration settings.
1 <?php
2 // a module configuration, "module/SomeModule/config/module.config.php"
3 return array(
4 'service_manager' => array(
5 'abstract_factories' => array(
6 // Valid values include names of classes implementing
7 // AbstractFactoryInterface, instances of classes implementing
8 // AbstractFactoryInterface, or any PHP callbacks
9 'SomeModule\Service\FallbackFactory',
10 ),
11 'aliases' => array(
12 // Aliasing a FQCN to a service name
13 'SomeModule\Model\User' => 'User',
14 // Aliasing a name to a known service name
15 'AdminUser' => 'User',
16 // Aliasing to an alias
17 'SuperUser' => 'AdminUser',
18 ),

1220 Chapter 249. Zend\ServiceManager Quick Start

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

19 'factories' => array(

20 // Keys are the service names.
21 // Valid values include names of classes implementing
22 // FactoryInterface, instances of classes implementing
23 // FactoryInterface, or any PHP callbacks
24 'User' => 'SomeModule\Service\UserFactory',
25 'UserForm' => function ($serviceManager) {
26 $form = new SomeModule\Form\User();
27

28 // Retrieve a dependency from the service manager and inject it!

29 $form->setInputFilter($serviceManager->get('UserInputFilter'));
30 return $form;
31 },
32 ),
33 'invokables' => array(
34 // Keys are the service names
35 // Values are valid class names to instantiate.
36 'UserInputFilter' => 'SomeModule\InputFilter\User',
37 ),
38 'services' => array(
39 // Keys are the service names
40 // Values are objects
41 'Auth' => new SomeModule\Authentication\AuthenticationService(),
42 ),
43 'shared' => array(
44 // Usually, you'll only indicate services that should **NOT** be
45 // shared -- i.e., ones where you want a different instance
46 // every time.
47 'UserForm' => false,
48 ),
49 ),
50 );

Note: Configuration and PHP

Typically, you should not have your configuration files create new instances of objects or even closures for factories;
at the time of configuration, not all autoloading may be in place, and if another configuration overwrites this one later,
youre now spending CPU and memory performing work that is ultimately lost.
For instances that require factories, write a factory. If youd like to inject specific, configured instances, use the Module
class to do so, or a listener.
Additionally you will lose the ability to use the caching feature of the configuration files when you use closures within
them. This is a limitation of PHP which cant (de)serialize closures.

Note: Service names good practices

When defining a new service, it is usually a good idea to use the fully qualified class name of the produced instance or
of one of the interfaces it implements as service name.
Using a FQCN as service name makes collisions with other services very hard if the class is part of your own code
base, and also aids the developer that consumes that service to have a clear overview on what the API of the service
looks like.
If the service is not an instance of a class/interface of your own code base, you should always consider using a prefix
for it, so that collisions with other services are avoided.

249.3. Examples 1221

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

249.3.2 Module Returning an Array

The following demonstrates returning an array of configuration from a module class. It can be substantively the same
as the array configuration from the previous example.
1 namespace SomeModule;
2

3 // you may eventually want to implement Zend\ModuleManager\Feature\ServiceProviderInterface

4 class Module
5 {
6 public function getServiceConfig()
7 {
8 return array(
9 'abstract_factories' => array(),
10 'aliases' => array(),
11 'factories' => array(),
12 'invokables' => array(),
13 'services' => array(),
14 'shared' => array(),
15 );
16 }
17 }

Creating a ServiceLocator-aware class

By default, the Zend Framework MVC registers an initializer that will inject the ServiceManager instance, which
is an implementation of Zend\ServiceManager\ServiceLocatorInterface, into any class implementing
Zend\ServiceManager\ServiceLocatorAwareInterface.
A simple implementation looks like following:
1 namespace SomeModule\Controller;
2

3 use Zend\ServiceManager\ServiceLocatorAwareInterface;
4 use Zend\ServiceManager\ServiceLocatorInterface;
5 use Zend\Stdlib\DispatchableInterface as Dispatchable;
6 use Zend\Stdlib\RequestInterface as Request;
7 use Zend\Stdlib\ResponseInterface as Response;
8

9 class BareController implements

10 Dispatchable,
11 ServiceLocatorAwareInterface
12 {
13 protected $services;
14

15 public function setServiceLocator(ServiceLocatorInterface $serviceLocator)

16 {
17 $this->services = $serviceLocator;
18 }
19

20 public function getServiceLocator()

21 {
22 return $this->services;
23 }
24

25 public function dispatch(Request $request, Response $response = null)

26 {

1222 Chapter 249. Zend\ServiceManager Quick Start

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

27 // ...
28

29 // Retrieve something from the service manager

30 $router = $this->getServiceLocator()->get('Router');
31

32 // ...
33 }
34 }

249.3. Examples 1223

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1224 Chapter 249. Zend\ServiceManager Quick Start

 CHAPTER 250

Delegator service factories

Zend\ServiceManager can instantiate delegators of requested services, decorating them as specified in a delegate
factory implementing the delegator factory interface.
The delegate pattern is useful in cases when you want to wrap a real service in a decorator, or generally intercept
actions being performed on the delegate in an AOP fashioned way.

250.1 Delegator factory signature

A delegator factory has the following signature:

1 namespace Zend\ServiceManager;
2

3 interface DelegatorFactoryInterface
4 {
5 public function createDelegatorWithName(ServiceLocatorInterface $serviceLocator, $name, $requeste
6 }

The parameters passed to the DelegatorFactoryInterface#createDelegatorWithName factory are the

following:
$serviceLocator is the service locator that is used while creating the delegator for the requested service
$name is the canonical name of the service being requested
$requestedName is the name of the service as originally requested to the service locator
$callback is a callable that is responsible of instantiating the delegated service (the real service instance)

250.2 A Delegator factory use case

A typical use case for delegators is to handle logic before or after a method is called.
In the following example, an event is being triggered before Buzzer::buzz() is called and some output text is
prepended.
The delegated object Buzzer (original object) is defined as following:
1 class Buzzer
2 {
3 public function buzz()
4 {

1225
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

5 return 'Buzz!';
6 }
7 }

The delegator class BuzzerDelegator has the following structure:

1 use Zend\EventManager\EventManagerInterface;
2

3 class BuzzerDelegator extends Buzzer

4 {
5 protected $realBuzzer;
6 protected $eventManager;
7

8 public function __construct(Buzzer $realBuzzer, EventManagerInterface $eventManager)

9 {
10 $this->realBuzzer = $realBuzzer;
11 $this->eventManager = $eventManager;
12 }
13

14 public function buzz()

15 {
16 $this->eventManager->trigger('buzz', $this);
17

18 return $this->realBuzzer->buzz();
19 }
20 }

To use the BuzzerDelegator, you can run the following code:

1 $wrappedBuzzer = new Buzzer();
2 $eventManager = new Zend\EventManager\EventManager();
3

4 $eventManager->attach('buzz', function () { echo "Stare at the art!\n"; });

5

6 $buzzer = new BuzzerDelegator($wrappedBuzzer, $eventManager);

7

8 echo $buzzer->buzz(); // "Stare at the art!\nBuzz!"

This logic is fairly simple as long as you have access to the instantiation logic of the $wrappedBuzzer object.
You may not always be able to define how $wrappedBuzzer is created, since a factory for it may be defined by
some code to which you dont have access, or which you cannot modify without introducing further complexity.
Delegator factories solve this specific problem by allowing you to wrap, decorate or modify any existing service.
A simple delegator factory for the buzzer service can be implemented as following:
1 use Zend\ServiceManager\DelegatorFactoryInterface;
2 use Zend\ServiceManager\ServiceLocatorInterface;
3

4 class BuzzerDelegatorFactory implements DelegatorFactoryInterface

5 {
6 public function createDelegatorWithName(ServiceLocatorInterface $serviceLocator, $name, $requeste
7 {
8 $realBuzzer = call_user_func($callback);
9 $eventManager = $serviceLocator->get('EventManager');
10

11 $eventManager->attach('buzz', function () { echo "Stare at the art!\n"; });

12

13 return new BuzzerDelegator($realBuzzer, $eventManager);

1226 Chapter 250. Delegator service factories

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

14 }
15 }

You can then instruct the service manager to handle the service buzzer as a delegate:
1 $serviceManager = new Zend\ServiceManager\ServiceManager();
2

3 $serviceManager->setInvokableClass('buzzer', 'Buzzer'); // usually not under our control

4

5 // as opposed to normal factory classes, a delegator factory is a

6 // service like any other, and must be registered:
7 $serviceManager->setInvokableClass('buzzer-delegator-factory', 'BuzzerDelegatorFactory');
8

9 // telling the service manager to use a delegator factory to handle service 'buzzer'
10 $serviceManager->addDelegator('buzzer', 'buzzer-delegator-factory');
11

12 // now, when fetching 'buzzer', we get a BuzzerDelegator instead

13 $buzzer = $serviceManager->get('buzzer');
14

15 $buzzer->buzz(); // "Stare at the art!\nBuzz!"

You can also call $serviceManager->addDelegator() multiple times, with the same or different delegator
factory service names. Each call will add one decorator around the instantiation logic of that particular service.
Another way of configuring the service manager to use delegator factories is via configuration:
1 $config = array(
2 'invokables' => array(
3 'buzzer' => 'Buzzer',
4 'buzzer-delegator-factory' => 'BuzzerDelegatorFactory',
5 ),
6 'delegators' => array(
7 'buzzer' => array(
8 'buzzer-delegator-factory'
9 // eventually add more delegators here
10 ),
11 ),
12 );

250.2. A Delegator factory use case 1227

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1228 Chapter 250. Delegator service factories

 CHAPTER 251

Lazy Services

Zend\ServiceManager can use delegator factories to generate lazy references to your services.
Lazy services are proxies that get lazily instantiated, and keep a reference to the real instance of the proxied service.

251.1 Use cases

You may want to lazily initialize a service when it is instantiated very often, but not always used.
A typical example is a database connection: it is a dependency to many other elements in your application, but that
doesnt mean that every request will execute queries through it.
Additionally, instantiating a connection to the database may require some time and eat up resources.
Proxying the database connection would allow to delay that overhead until the object is really needed.

251.2 Setup

Zend\ServiceManager\Proxy\LazyServiceFactory is a delegator factory capable of generating lazy

loading proxies for your services.
The LazyServiceFactory depends on ProxyManager, so be sure to install it before going through the following
steps:
1 php composer.phar require ocramius/proxy-manager:0.3.*

251.3 Practical example

To demonstrate how a lazy service works, you may use the following Buzzer example class, which is designed to be
slow at instantiation time for demonstration purposes:
1 namespace MyApp;
2

3 class Buzzer
4 {
5 public function __construct()
6 {
7 // deliberately halting the application for 5 seconds
8 sleep(5);

1229
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

9 }
10

11 public function buzz()

12 {
13 return 'Buzz!';
14 }
15 }

You can then proceed and configure the service manager to generate proxies instead of real services:
1 $serviceManager = new \Zend\ServiceManager\ServiceManager();
2

3 $config = array(
4 'lazy_services' => array(
5 // mapping services to their class names is required
6 // since the ServiceManager is not a declarative DIC
7 'class_map' => array(
8 'buzzer' => 'MyApp\Buzzer',
9 ),
10 ),
11 );
12

13 $serviceManager->setService('Config', $config);
14 $serviceManager->setInvokableClass('buzzer', 'MyApp\Buzzer');
15 $serviceManager->setFactory('LazyServiceFactory', 'Zend\ServiceManager\Proxy\LazyServiceFactoryFactor
16 $serviceManager->addDelegator('buzzer', 'LazyServiceFactory');

This will tell the service manager to use the LazyServiceFactory delegator factory to instantiate the buzzer
service.
As you may have noticed, the standard setup for the LazyServiceFactory requires you to define a Config
service. Thats because the functionality was thought to be easily integrated into Zend\Mvc.
You can now simply retrieve the buzzer:
1 $buzzer = $serviceManager->get('buzzer');
2

3 echo $buzzer->buzz();

To verify that the proxying occurred correctly, you can simply run the following code, which should delay the 5
seconds wait time hardcoded in Buzzer::__construct until Buzzer::buzz is invoked:
1 for ($i = 0; $i < 100; $i += 1) {
2 $buzzer = $serviceManager->create('buzzer');
3

4 echo "created buzzer $i\n";

5 }
6

7 echo $buzzer->buzz();

The setup above can also be represented via configuration in an MVC applications context:
1 return array(
2 'service_manager' => array(
3 'invokables' => array(
4 'buzzer' => 'MyApp\Buzzer',
5 ),
6 'delegators' => array(
7 'buzzer' => array(
8 'LazyServiceFactory'

1230 Chapter 251. Lazy Services

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

9 ),
10 ),
11 'factories' => array(
12 'LazyServiceFactory' => 'Zend\ServiceManager\Proxy\LazyServiceFactoryFactory',
13 ),
14 ),
15 'lazy_services' => array(
16 'class_map' => array(
17 'buzzer' => 'MyApp\Buzzer',
18 ),
19 ),
20 );

251.4 Configuration

This is the config structure expected by Zend\ServiceManager\Proxy\LazyServiceFactoryFactory:

1 return array(
2 'lazy_services' => array(
3

4 // map of service names and their relative class names - this

5 // is required since the service manager cannot know the
6 // class name of defined services upfront
7 'class_map' => array(
8 // 'foo' => 'MyApplication\Foo',
9 ),
10

11 // directory where proxy classes will be written - default to system_get_tmp_dir()

12 'proxies_target_dir' => null,
13

14 // namespace of the generated proxies, default to "ProxyManagerGeneratedProxy"

15 'proxies_namespace' => null,
16

17 // whether the generated proxy classes should be written to disk or generated on-the-fly
18 'write_proxy_files' => false,
19 ),
20 );

251.4. Configuration 1231

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1232 Chapter 251. Lazy Services

 CHAPTER 252

Session Config

Zend Framework comes with a standard set of config classes which are ready for you to use. Config handles setting
various configuration such as where a cookie lives, lifetime, including several bits to configure ext/session when using
Zend\Session\Config\SessionConfig.
orphan

252.1 Standard Config

Zend\Session\Config\StandardConfig provides you a basic interface for implementing sessions when not
leveraging ext/session. This is utilized more for specialized cases such as when you might have session management
done by another system.

252.1.1 Basic Configuration Options

The following configuration options are defined by Zend\Session\Config\StandardConfig.

1233
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Option Data Description

Type
cache_expire integer Specifies time-to-live for cached session pages in minutes.
cookie_domain string Specifies the domain to set in the session cookie.
cookie_httponly boolean Marks the cookie as accessible only through the HTTP protocol.
cookie_lifetime integer Specifies the lifetime of the cookie in seconds which is sent to the browser.
cookie_path string Specifies path to set in the session cookie.
cookie_secure boolean Specifies whether cookies should only be sent over secure connections.
entropy_length integer Specifies the number of bytes which will be read from the file specified in
entropy_file.
entropy_file string Defines a path to an external resource (file) which will be used as an
additional entropy.
gc_maxlifetime integer Specifies the number of seconds after which data will be seen as garbage.
gc_divisor integer Defines the probability that the gc process is started on every session
initialization.
gc_probability integer Defines the probability that the gc process is started on every session
initialization.
hash_bits_per_characterinteger Defines how many bits are stored in each character when converting the
binary hash data.
name string Specifies the name of the session which is used as cookie name.
remem- integer Specifies how long to remember the session before clearing data.
ber_me_seconds
save_path string Defines the argument which is passed to the save handler.
use_cookies boolean Specifies whether the module will use cookies to store the session id.

252.1.2 Basic Usage

A basic example is one like the following:

1 use Zend\Session\Config\StandardConfig;
2 use Zend\Session\SessionManager;
3

4 $config = new StandardConfig();

5 $config->setOptions(array(
6 'remember_me_seconds' => 1800,
7 'name' => 'zf2',
8 ));
9 $manager = new SessionManager($config);

orphan

252.2 Session Config

Zend\Session\Config\SessionConfig provides you a basic interface for implementing sessions when that
leverage PHPs ext/session. Most configuration options configure either the Zend\Session\Storage OR config-
ure ext/session directly.

252.2.1 Basic Configuration Options

The following configuration options are defined by Zend\Session\Config\SessionConfig, note that it in-
herits all configuration from Zend\Session\Config\StandardConfig.

1234 Chapter 252. Session Config

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Option Data Description

Type
cache_limiter string Specifies the cache control method used for session pages.
hash_function string Allows you to specify the hash algorithm used to generate the session IDs.
php_save_handler string Defines the name of a PHP save_handler embedded into PHP.
serial- string Defines the name of the handler which is used to serialize/deserialize data.
ize_handler
url_rewriter_tags string Specifies which HTML tags are rewritten to include session id if transparent sid
enabled.
use_trans_sid boolean Whether transparent sid support is enabled or not.

252.2.2 Basic Usage

A basic example is one like the following:

1 use Zend\Session\Config\SessionConfig;
2 use Zend\Session\SessionManager;
3

4 $config = new SessionConfig();

5 $config->setOptions(array(
6 'phpSaveHandler' => 'redis',
7 'savePath' => 'tcp://127.0.0.1:6379?weight=1&timeout=1',
8 ));
9 $manager = new SessionManager($config);

252.2.3 Service Manager Factory

Zend\Session ships with a Service Manager factory which reads configuration data from the application
configuration and injects a corresponding instance of Zend\Session\Config\SessionConfig into the ses-
sion manager automatically.
To use this factory, you first need to register it with the Service Manager by adding the appropriate factory definition:
1 'service_manager' => array(
2 'factories' => array(
3 'Zend\Session\Config\ConfigInterface' => 'Zend\Session\Service\SessionConfigFactory',
4 ),
5 ),

Then place your applications session configuration in the root-level configuration key session_config:
1 'session_config' => array(
2 'phpSaveHandler' => 'redis',
3 'savePath' => 'tcp://127.0.0.1:6379?weight=1&timeout=1',
4 ),

Any of the configuration options defined in zend.session.config.session-config.options can be used there, as well as the
following factory-specific configuration options:

252.3 Custom Configuration

In the event that you prefer to create your own session configuration; you must implement
Zend\Session\Config\ConfigInterface which contains the basic interface for items needed when

252.3. Custom Configuration 1235

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

implementing a session. This includes cookie configuration, lifetime, session name, save path and an interface for
getting and setting options.

1236 Chapter 252. Session Config

 CHAPTER 253

Session Container

Zend\Session\Container instances provide the primary API for manipulating session data in the Zend Frame-
work. Containers are used to segregate all session data, although a default namespace exists for those who only want
one namespace for all their session data.
Each instance of Zend\Session\Container corresponds to an entry of the Zend\Session\Storage, where
the namespace is used as the key. Zend\Session\Container itself is an instance of an ArrayObject.

253.1 Basic Usage

1 use Zend\Session\Container;
2

3 $container = new Container('namespace');

4 $container->item = 'foo';

253.2 Setting the Default Session Manager

In the event you are using multiple session managers or prefer to be explicit, the default session manager that is utilized
can be explicitly set.
1 use Zend\Session\Container;
2 use Zend\Session\SessionManager;
3

4 $manager = new SessionManager();

5 Container::setDefaultManager($manager);

1237
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1238 Chapter 253. Session Container

 CHAPTER 254

Session Manager

The session manager, Zend\Session\SessionManager, is a class that is responsible for all aspects of session
management. It initializes and configures configuration, storage and save handling. Additionally the session manager
can be injected into the session container to provide a wrapper or namespace around your session data.
The session manager is responsible for session start, session exists, session write, regenerate id, time to live and
session destroy. The session manager can validate sessions from a validator chain to ensure that the session data is
indeed correct.

254.1 Initializing the Session Manager

Generally speaking you will always want to initialize the session manager and ensure that you had initialized it on your
end; this puts in place a simple solution to prevent against session fixation. Generally you will setup configuration and
then inside of your Application module bootstrap the session manager.
Additionally you will likely want to supply validators to prevent against session hijacking.
The following illustrates how you may configure session manager by setting options in your local or global config:
1 return array(
2 'session' => array(
3 'config' => array(
4 'class' => 'Zend\Session\Config\SessionConfig',
5 'options' => array(
6 'name' => 'myapp',
7 ),
8 ),
9 'storage' => 'Zend\Session\Storage\SessionArrayStorage',
10 'validators' => array(
11 'Zend\Session\Validator\RemoteAddr',
12 'Zend\Session\Validator\HttpUserAgent',
13 ),
14 ),
15 );

The following illustrates how you might utilize the above configuration to create the session manager:
1 use Zend\Session\SessionManager;
2 use Zend\Session\Container;
3

4 class Module
5 {
6 public function onBootstrap($e)

1239
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

7 {
8 $eventManager = $e->getApplication()->getEventManager();
9 $moduleRouteListener = new ModuleRouteListener();
10 $moduleRouteListener->attach($eventManager);
11 $this->bootstrapSession($e);
12 }
13

14 public function bootstrapSession($e)

15 {
16 $session = $e->getApplication()
17 ->getServiceManager()
18 ->get('Zend\Session\SessionManager');
19 $session->start();
20

21 $container = new Container('initialized');

22 if (!isset($container->init)) {
23 $serviceManager = $e->getApplication()->getServiceManager();
24 $request = $serviceManager->get('Request');
25

26 $session->regenerateId(true);
27 $container->init = 1;
28 $container->remoteAddr = $request->getServer()->get('REMOTE_ADDR');
29 $container->httpUserAgent = $request->getServer()->get('HTTP_USER_AGENT');
30

31 $config = $serviceManager->get('Config');
32 if (!isset($config['session'])) {
33 return;
34 }
35

36 $sessionConfig = $config['session'];
37 if (isset($sessionConfig['validators'])) {
38 $chain = $session->getValidatorChain();
39

40 foreach ($sessionConfig['validators'] as $validator) {

41 switch ($validator) {
42 case 'Zend\Session\Validator\HttpUserAgent':
43 $validator = new $validator($container->httpUserAgent);
44 break;
45 case 'Zend\Session\Validator\RemoteAddr':
46 $validator = new $validator($container->remoteAddr);
47 break;
48 default:
49 $validator = new $validator();
50 }
51

52 $chain->attach('session.validate', array($validator, 'isValid'));

53 }
54 }
55 }
56 }
57

58 public function getServiceConfig()

59 {
60 return array(
61 'factories' => array(
62 'Zend\Session\SessionManager' => function ($sm) {
63 $config = $sm->get('config');
64 if (isset($config['session'])) {

1240 Chapter 254. Session Manager

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

65 $session = $config['session'];
66

67 $sessionConfig = null;
68 if (isset($session['config'])) {
69 $class = isset($session['config']['class']) ? $session['config']['class'
70 $options = isset($session['config']['options']) ? $session['config']['opt
71 $sessionConfig = new $class();
72 $sessionConfig->setOptions($options);
73 }
74

75 $sessionStorage = null;
76 if (isset($session['storage'])) {
77 $class = $session['storage'];
78 $sessionStorage = new $class();
79 }
80

81 $sessionSaveHandler = null;
82 if (isset($session['save_handler'])) {
83 // class should be fetched from service manager since it will require con
84 $sessionSaveHandler = $sm->get($session['save_handler']);
85 }
86

87 $sessionManager = new SessionManager($sessionConfig, $sessionStorage, $sessio

88 } else {
89 $sessionManager = new SessionManager();
90 }
91 Container::setDefaultManager($sessionManager);
92 return $sessionManager;
93 },
94 ),
95 );
96 }
97 }

When you create a new Zend\Session\Container (see Session Container page) in a controller for example, it
will use the session configured above.

254.2 Session Compatibility

In order to work with other 3rd party libraries and share sessions across software that may not be ZF2 related; you will
need to ensure that you still provide access to the ZF2 autoloader as well as module autoloading.
In the shared software make certain before the session starts that you bootstrap the ZF2 autoloader and initialize the
ZF2 Application.
1 $cwd = getcwd();
2 chdir('/path/to/zf2-application');
3 require 'init_autoloader.php';
4 Zend\Mvc\Application::init(require 'config/application.config.php');
5 chdir($cwd);
6 session_start();

254.2. Session Compatibility 1241

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1242 Chapter 254. Session Manager

 CHAPTER 255

Session Save Handlers

Zend Framework comes with a standard set of save handler classes which are ready for you to use. Save Handlers
themselves are decoupled from PHPs save handler functions and are only implemented as a PHP save handler when
utilized in conjunction with Zend\Session\SessionManager.
orphan

255.1 Cache

Zend\Session\SaveHandler\Cache allows you to provide an instance of Zend\Cache to be utilized as a

session save handler. Generally if you are utilizing the Cache save handler; you are likely using products such as
memcached.

255.1.1 Basic usage

A basic example is one like the following:

1 use Zend\Cache\StorageFactory;
2 use Zend\Session\SaveHandler\Cache;
3 use Zend\Session\SessionManager;
4

5 $cache = StorageFactory::factory(array(
6 'adapter' => array(
7 'name' => 'memcached',
8 'options' => array(
9 'server' => '127.0.0.1',
10 ),
11 )
12 ));
13 $saveHandler = new Cache($cache);
14 $manager = new SessionManager();
15 $manager->setSaveHandler($saveHandler);

orphan

255.2 DbTableGateway

Zend\Session\SaveHandler\DbTableGateway allows you to utilize Zend\Db as a session save handler.

Setup of the DbTableGateway requires an instance of Zend\Db\TableGateway\TableGateway and an in-

1243
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

stance of Zend\Session\SaveHandler\DbTableGatewayOptions. In the most basic setup, a TableGate-

way object and using the defaults of the DbTableGatewayOptions will provide you with what you need.

255.2.1 Creating the database table

1 CREATE TABLE `session` (

2 `id` char(32),
3 `name` char(32),
4 `modified` int,
5 `lifetime` int,
6 `data` text,
7 PRIMARY KEY (`id`, `name`)
8 );

255.2.2 Basic usage

A basic example is one like the following:

1 use Zend\Db\TableGateway\TableGateway;
2 use Zend\Session\SaveHandler\DbTableGateway;
3 use Zend\Session\SaveHandler\DbTableGatewayOptions;
4 use Zend\Session\SessionManager;
5

6 $tableGateway = new TableGateway('session', $adapter);

7 $saveHandler = new DbTableGateway($tableGateway, new DbTableGatewayOptions());
8 $manager = new SessionManager();
9 $manager->setSaveHandler($saveHandler);

orphan

255.3 MongoDB

Zend\Session\SaveHandler\MongoDB allows you to provide a MongoDB instance to be utilized as a session

save handler. You provide the options in the Zend\Session\SaveHandler\MongoDBOptions class.

255.3.1 Basic Usage

A basic example is one like the following:

1 use Mongo;
2 use Zend\Session\SaveHandler\MongoDB;
3 use Zend\Session\SaveHandler\MongoDBOptions;
4 use Zend\Session\SessionManager;
5

6 $mongo = new Mongo();

7 $options = new MongoDBOptions(array(
8 'database' => 'myapp',
9 'collection' => 'sessions',
10 ));
11 $saveHandler = new MongoDB($mongo, $options);
12 $manager = new SessionManager();
13 $manager->setSaveHandler($saveHandler);

1244 Chapter 255. Session Save Handlers

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

255.4 Custom Save Handlers

There may be cases where you want to create a save handler where a save handler currently does not exist. Cre-
ating a custom save handler is much like creating a custom PHP save handler. All save handlers must implement
Zend\Session\SaveHandler\SaveHandlerInterface. Generally if your save handler has options you
will create another options class for configuration of the save handler.

255.4. Custom Save Handlers 1245

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1246 Chapter 255. Session Save Handlers

 CHAPTER 256

Session Storage

Zend Framework comes with a standard set of storage classes which are ready for you to use. Storage handlers is the
intermediary between when the session starts and when the session writes and closes. The default session storage is
Zend\Session\Storage\SessionArrayStorage.
orphan

256.1 Array Storage

Zend\Session\Storage\ArrayStorage provides a facility to store all information in an ArrayObject. This

storage method is likely incompatible with 3rd party libraries and all properties will be inaccessible through the
$_SESSION property. Additionally ArrayStorage will not automatically repopulate the storage container in the case
of each new request and would have to manually be re-populated.

256.1.1 Basic Usage

A basic example is one like the following:

1 use Zend\Session\Storage\ArrayStorage;
2 use Zend\Session\SessionManager;
3

4 $populateStorage = array('foo' => 'bar');

5 $storage = new ArrayStorage($populateStorage);
6 $manager = new SessionManager();
7 $manager->setStorage($storage);

orphan

256.2 Session Storage

Zend\Session\Storage\SessionStorage replaces $_SESSION providing a facility to store all information

in an ArrayObject. This means that it may not be compatible with 3rd party libraries. Although information stored in
the $_SESSION superglobal should be available in other scopes.

256.2.1 Basic Usage

A basic example is one like the following:

1247
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1 use Zend\Session\Storage\SessionStorage;
2 use Zend\Session\SessionManager;
3

4 $manager = new SessionManager();

5 $manager->setStorage(new SessionStorage());

orphan

256.3 Session Array Storage

Zend\Session\Storage\SessionArrayStorage provides a facility to store all information directly in the

$_SESSION superglobal. This storage class provides the most compatibility with 3rd party libraries and allows for
directly storing information into $_SESSION.

256.3.1 Basic Usage

A basic example is one like the following:

1 use Zend\Session\Storage\SessionArrayStorage;
2 use Zend\Session\SessionManager;
3

4 $manager = new SessionManager();

5 $manager->setStorage(new SessionArrayStorage());

256.4 Custom Storage

In the event that you prefer a different type of storage; to create a new custom storage container, you must implement
Zend\Session\Storage\StorageInterface which is mostly in implementing ArrayAccess, Traversable,
Serializable and Countable. StorageInterface defines some additional functionality that must be implemented.

1248 Chapter 256. Session Storage

 CHAPTER 257

Session Validators

Session validators provide various protection against session hijacking. Session hijacking in particular has various
drawbacks when you are protecting against it. Such as an IP address may change from the end user depending on their
ISP; or a browsers user agent may change during the request either by a web browser extension OR an upgrade that
retains session cookies.
orphan

257.1 Http User Agent

Zend\Session\Validator\HttpUserAgent provides a validator to check the session against the originally

stored $_SERVER[HTTP_USER_AGENT] variable. Validation will fail in the event that this does not match and
throws an exception in Zend\Session\SessionManager after session_start() has been called.

257.1.1 Basic Usage

A basic example is one like the following:

1 use Zend\Session\Validator\HttpUserAgent;
2 use Zend\Session\SessionManager;
3

4 $manager = new SessionManager();

5 $manager->getValidatorChain()->attach('session.validate', array(new HttpUserAgent(), 'isValid'));

orphan

257.2 Remote Addr

Zend\Session\Validator\RemoteAddr provides a validator to check the session against the originally stored
$_SERVER[REMOTE_ADDR] variable. Validation will fail in the event that this does not match and throws an
exception in Zend\Session\SessionManager after session_start() has been called.

257.2.1 Basic Usage

A basic example is one like the following:

1249
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1 use Zend\Session\Validator\RemoteAddr;
2 use Zend\Session\SessionManager;
3

4 $manager = new SessionManager();

5 $manager->getValidatorChain()->attach('session.validate', array(new RemoteAddr(), 'isValid'));

257.3 Custom Validators

You may want to provide your own custom validators to validate against other items from storing a token and vali-
dating a token to other various techniques. To create a custom validator you must implement the validation interface
Zend\Session\Validator\ValidatorInterface.

1250 Chapter 257. Session Validators

 CHAPTER 258

Zend\Soap\Server

Zend\Soap\Server class is intended to simplify Web Services server part development for PHP programmers.
It may be used in WSDL or non-WSDL mode, and using classes or functions to define Web Service API.
When Zend\Soap\Server component works in the WSDL mode, it uses already prepared WSDL document to
define server object behavior and transport layer options.
WSDL document may be auto-generated with functionality provided by Zend\Soap\AutoDiscovery component or
should be constructed manually using Zend\Soap\Wsdl class or any other XML generating tool.
If the non-WSDL mode is used, then all protocol options have to be set using options mechanism.

258.1 Zend\Soap\Server constructor

Zend\Soap\Server constructor should be used a bit differently for WSDL and non-WSDL modes.

258.1.1 Zend\Soap\Server constructor for the WSDL mode

Zend\Soap\Server constructor takes two optional parameters when it works in WSDL mode:
$wsdl, which is an URI of a WSDL file 1 .
$options- options to create SOAP server object 2 .
The following options are recognized in the WSDL mode:
soap_version (soapVersion) - soap version to use (SOAP_1_1 or SOAP_1_2).
actor - the actor URI for the server.
classmap (classMap) which can be used to map some WSDL types to PHP classes. The option must be an
array with WSDL types as keys and names of PHP classes as values.
encoding - internal character encoding (UTF-8 is always used as an external encoding).
wsdl which is equivalent to setWsdl($wsdlValue) call.
1 May be set later using setWsdl($wsdl) method.
2 Options may be set later using setOptions($options) method.

1251
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

258.1.2 Zend\Soap\Server constructor for the non-WSDL mode

The first constructor parameter must be set to NULL if you plan to use Zend\Soap\Server functionality in non-
WSDL mode.
You also have to set uri option in this case (see below).
The second constructor parameter ($options) is an array with options to create SOAP server object 3 .
The following options are recognized in the non-WSDL mode:
soap_version (soapVersion) - soap version to use (SOAP_1_1 or SOAP_1_2).
actor - the actor URI for the server.
classmap (classMap) which can be used to map some WSDL types to PHP classes. The option must be an
array with WSDL types as keys and names of PHP classes as values.
encoding - internal character encoding (UTF-8 is always used as an external encoding).
uri (required) - URI namespace for SOAP server.

258.2 Methods to define Web Service API

There are two ways to define Web Service API when your want to give access to your PHP code through SOAP.
The first one is to attach some class to the Zend\Soap\Server object which has to completely describe Web
Service API:
1 ...
2 class MyClass {
3 /**
4 * This method takes ...
5 *
6 * @param integer $inputParam
7 * @return string
8 */
9 public function method1($inputParam) {
10 ...
11 }
12

13 /**
14 * This method takes ...
15 *
16 * @param integer $inputParam1
17 * @param string $inputParam2
18 * @return float
19 */
20 public function method2($inputParam1, $inputParam2) {
21 ...
22 }
23

24 ...
25 }
26 ...
27 $server = new Zend\Soap\Server(null, $options);
28 // Bind Class to Soap Server
29 $server->setClass('MyClass');
3 Options may be set later using setOptions($options) method.

1252 Chapter 258. Zend\Soap\Server

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

30 // Bind already initialized object to Soap Server

31 $server->setObject(new MyClass());
32 ...
33 $server->handle();

Important: You should completely describe each method using method docblock if you plan to use autodiscover
functionality to prepare corresponding Web Service WSDL.

The second method of defining Web Service API is using set of functions and addFunction() or
loadFunctions() methods:
1 ...
2 /**
3 * This function ...
4 *
5 * @param integer $inputParam
6 * @return string
7 */
8 function function1($inputParam) {
9 ...
10 }
11

12 /**
13 * This function ...
14 *
15 * @param integer $inputParam1
16 * @param string $inputParam2
17 * @return float
18 */
19 function function2($inputParam1, $inputParam2) {
20 ...
21 }
22 ...
23 $server = new Zend\Soap\Server(null, $options);
24 $server->addFunction('function1');
25 $server->addFunction('function2');
26 ...
27 $server->handle();

258.3 Request and response objects handling

Note: This section describes advanced request/response processing options and may be skipped.

Zend\Soap\Server component performs request/response processing automatically, but allows to catch it and do
some pre- and post-processing.

258.3.1 Request processing

Zend\Soap\Server::handle() method takes request from the standard input stream (php://input). It
may be overridden either by supplying optional parameter to the handle() method or by setting request using
setRequest() method:

258.3. Request and response objects handling 1253

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1 ...
2 $server = new Zend\Soap\Server(...);
3 ...
4 // Set request using optional $request parameter
5 $server->handle($request);
6 ...
7 // Set request using setRequest() method
8 $server->setRequest();
9 $server->handle();

Request object may be represented using any of the following:

DOMDocument (casted to XML)
DOMNode (owner document is grabbed and casted to XML)
SimpleXMLElement (casted to XML)
stdClass (__toString() is called and verified to be valid XML)
string (verified to be valid XML)
Last processed request may be retrieved using getLastRequest() method as an XML string:
1 ...
2 $server = new Zend\Soap\Server(...);
3 ...
4 $server->handle();
5 $request = $server->getLastRequest();

258.3.2 Response pre-processing

Zend\Soap\Server::handle() method automatically emits generated response to the output stream. It may
be blocked using setReturnResponse() with TRUE or FALSE as a parameter 4 . Generated response is returned
by handle() method in this case. Returned response can be a string or a SoapFault exception object.

Caution: Always check the returned response type to avoid returning SoapFault object as a string, which will be
returned to the customer as a string with the exception stacktrace.

1 ...
2 $server = new Zend\Soap\Server(...);
3 ...
4 // Get a response as a return value of handle() method
5 // instead of emitting it to the standard output
6 $server->setReturnResponse(true);
7 ...
8 $response = $server->handle();
9 if ($response instanceof \SoapFault) {
10 ...
11 } else {
12 ...
13 }
14 ...

Last response may be also retrieved by getLastResponse() method for some post-processing:
4 Current state of the Return Response flag may be requested with setReturnResponse() method.

1254 Chapter 258. Zend\Soap\Server

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1 ...
2 $server = new Zend\Soap\Server(...);
3 ...
4 $server->handle();
5 $response = $server->getLastResponse();
6 if ($response instanceof \SoapFault) {
7 ...
8 } else {
9 ...
10 }
11 ...

258.4 Document/Literal WSDL Handling

Using the document/literal binding-style/encoding pattern is used to make SOAP messages as human-readable as
possible and allow abstraction between very incompatible languages. The Dot NET framework uses this pattern for
SOAP service generation by default. The central concept of this approach to SOAP is the introduction of a Request
and an Response object for every function/method of the SOAP service. The parameters of the function are properties
on request object and the response object contains a single parameter that is built in the style methodNameResult
Zend SOAP supports this pattern in both AutoDiscovery and in the Server component. You can write your service
object without knowledge about using this pattern. Use docblock comments to hint the parameter and return types as
usual. The Zend\Soap\Server\DocumentLiteralWrapper wraps around your service object and converts
request and response into normal method calls on your service.
See the class doc block of the DocumentLiteralWrapper for a detailed example and discussion.

258.4. Document/Literal WSDL Handling 1255

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1256 Chapter 258. Zend\Soap\Server

 CHAPTER 259

Zend\Soap\Client

The Zend\Soap\Client class simplifies SOAP client development for PHP programmers.
It may be used in WSDL or non-WSDL mode.
Under the WSDL mode, the Zend\Soap\Client component uses a WSDL document to define transport layer
options.
The WSDL description is usually provided by the web service the client will access. If the WSDL description is
not made available, you may want to use Zend\Soap\Client in non-WSDL mode. Under this mode, all SOAP
protocol options have to be set explicitly on the Zend\Soap\Client class.

259.1 Zend\Soap\Client Constructor

The Zend\Soap\Client constructor takes two parameters:

$wsdl- the URI of a WSDL file.
$options- options to create SOAP client object.
Both of these parameters may be set later using setWsdl($wsdl) and setOptions($options) methods
respectively.

Important: If you use Zend\Soap\Client component in non-WSDL mode, you must set the location and uri
options.

The following options are recognized:

soap_version (soapVersion) - soap version to use (SOAP_1_1 or SOAP_1_2).
classmap (classMap) - can be used to map some WSDL types to PHP classes. The option must be an array
with WSDL types as keys and names of PHP classes as values.
encoding - internal character encoding (UTF-8 is always used as an external encoding).
wsdl which is equivalent to setWsdl($wsdlValue) call. Changing this option may switch
Zend\Soap\Client object to or from WSDL mode.
uri - target namespace for the SOAP service (required for non-WSDL-mode, doesnt work for WSDL mode).
location - the URL to request (required for non-WSDL-mode, doesnt work for WSDL mode).
style - request style (doesnt work for WSDL mode): SOAP_RPC or SOAP_DOCUMENT.
use - method to encode messages (doesnt work for WSDL mode): SOAP_ENCODED or SOAP_LITERAL.

1257
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

login and password - login and password for an HTTP authentication.

proxy_host, proxy_port, proxy_login, and proxy_password - an HTTP connection through a proxy server.
local_cert and passphrase -HTTPS client certificate authentication options.
compression - compression options; its a combination of SOAP_COMPRESSION_ACCEPT,
SOAP_COMPRESSION_GZIP and SOAP_COMPRESSION_DEFLATE options which may be used like
this:
1 // Accept response compression
2 $client = new Zend\Soap\Client("some.wsdl",
3 array('compression' => SOAP_COMPRESSION_ACCEPT));
4 ...
5

6 // Compress requests using gzip with compression level 5

7 $client = new Zend\Soap\Client("some.wsdl",
8 array('compression' => SOAP_COMPRESSION_ACCEPT | SOAP_COMPRESSION_GZIP | 5));
9 ...
10

11 // Compress requests using deflate compression

12 $client = new Zend\Soap\Client("some.wsdl",
13 array('compression' => SOAP_COMPRESSION_ACCEPT | SOAP_COMPRESSION_DEFLATE));

259.2 Performing SOAP Requests

After weve created a Zend\Soap\Client object we are ready to perform SOAP requests.
Each web service method is mapped to the virtual Zend\Soap\Client object method which takes parameters with
common PHP types.
Use it like in the following example:
1 //****************************************************************
2 // Server code
3 //****************************************************************
4 // class MyClass {
5 // /**
6 // * This method takes ...
7 // *
8 // * @param integer $inputParam
9 // * @return string
10 // */
11 // public function method1($inputParam) {
12 // ...
13 // }
14 //
15 // /**
16 // * This method takes ...
17 // *
18 // * @param integer $inputParam1
19 // * @param string $inputParam2
20 // * @return float
21 // */
22 // public function method2($inputParam1, $inputParam2) {
23 // ...
24 // }
25 //

1258 Chapter 259. Zend\Soap\Client

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

26 // ...
27 // }
28 // ...
29 // $server = new Zend\Soap\Server(null, $options);
30 // $server->setClass('MyClass');
31 // ...
32 // $server->handle();
33 //
34 //****************************************************************
35 // End of server code
36 //****************************************************************
37

38 $client = new Zend\Soap\Client("MyService.wsdl");

39 ...
40

41 // $result1 is a string
42 $result1 = $client->method1(10);
43 ...
44

45 // $result2 is a float
46 $result2 = $client->method2(22, 'some string');

259.2. Performing SOAP Requests 1259

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1260 Chapter 259. Zend\Soap\Client

 CHAPTER 260

WSDL Accessor

Note: Zend\Soap\Wsdl class is used by Zend\Soap\Server component internally to operate with WSDL
documents. Nevertheless, you could also use functionality provided by this class for your own needs. The
Zend\Soap\Wsdl package contains both a parser and a builder of WSDL documents.
If you dont plan to do this, you can skip this documentation section.

260.1 Zend\Soap\Wsdl constructor

Zend\Soap\Wsdl constructor takes three parameters:

$name - name of the Web Service being described.
$uri - URI where the WSDL will be available (could also be a reference to the file in the filesystem.)
$strategy - optional flag used to identify the strategy for complex types (objects) detection. To read more
on complex type detection strategies go to the section: Add complex types.
$classMap - Optional array of class name translations from PHP Type (key) to WSDL type (value).

260.2 addMessage() method

addMessage($name, $parts) method adds new message description to the WSDL document (/defini-
tions/message element).
Each message correspond to methods in terms of Zend\Soap\Server and Zend\Soap\Client functionality.
$name parameter represents the message name.
$parts parameter is an array of message parts which describes SOAP call parameters. Its an associative array: part
name (SOAP call parameter name) => part type.
Type mapping management is performed using addTypes(), addTypes() and addComplexType() methods
(see below).

Note: Messages parts can use either element or type attribute for typing (see
http://www.w3.org/TR/wsdl#_messages).
element attribute must refer to a corresponding element of data type definition. type attribute refers to a corre-
sponding complexType entry.

1261
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

All standard XSD types have both element and complexType definitions (see
http://schemas.xmlsoap.org/soap/encoding/).
All non-standard types, which may be added using Zend\Soap\Wsdl::addComplexType() method, are de-
scribed using complexType node of /definitions/types/schema/ section of WSDL document.
So addMessage() method always uses type attribute to describe types.

260.3 addPortType() method

addPortType($name) method adds new port type to the WSDL document (/definitions/portType) with the speci-
fied port type name.
It joins a set of Web Service methods defined in terms of Zend\Soap\Server implementation.
See http://www.w3.org/TR/wsdl#_porttypes for the details.

260.4 addPortOperation() method

addPortOperation($portType, $name, $input = false, $output = false, $fault

= false) method adds new port operation to the specified port type of the WSDL document (/defini-
tions/portType/operation).
Each port operation corresponds to a class method (if Web Service is based on a class) or function (if Web Service is
based on a set of methods) in terms of Zend\Soap\Server implementation.
It also adds corresponding port operation messages depending on specified $input, $output and $fault param-
eters.

Note: Zend\Soap\Server component generates two messages for each port operation while describ-
ing service based on Zend\Soap\Server class:
input message with name $methodName . Request.
output message with name $methodName . Response.

See http://www.w3.org/TR/wsdl#_request-response for the details.

260.5 addBinding() method

addBinding($name, $portType) method adds new binding to the WSDL document (/definitions/binding).
binding WSDL document node defines message format and protocol details for operations and messages defined by
a particular portType (see http://www.w3.org/TR/wsdl#_bindings).
The method creates binding node and returns it. Then it may be used to fill with actual data.
Zend\Soap\Server implementation uses $serviceName . Binding name for binding element of WSDL docu-
ment.

1262 Chapter 260. WSDL Accessor

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

260.6 addBindingOperation() method

addBindingOperation($binding, $name, $input = false, $output = false, $fault =

false) method adds an operation to a binding element (/definitions/binding/operation) with the specified name.
It takes an XML_Tree_Node object returned by addBinding() as an input ($binding parameter) to add opera-
tion element with input/output/false entries depending on specified parameters
Zend\Soap\Server implementation adds corresponding binding entry for each Web Service method
with input and output entries defining soap:body element as <soap:body use=encoded encod-
ingStyle=http://schemas.xmlsoap.org/soap/encoding//>
See http://www.w3.org/TR/wsdl#_bindings for the details.

260.7 addSoapBinding() method

addSoapBinding($binding, $style = document, $transport =

http://schemas.xmlsoap.org/soap/http) method adds SOAP binding (soap:binding) entry to the
binding element (which is already linked to some port type) with the specified style and transport (Zend\Soap\Server
implementation uses RPC style over HTTP).
/definitions/binding/soap:binding element is used to signify that the binding is bound to the SOAP protocol format.
See http://www.w3.org/TR/wsdl#_bindings for the details.

260.8 addSoapOperation() method

addSoapOperation($binding, $soap_action) method adds SOAP operation (soap:operation) entry to

the binding element with the specified action. style attribute of the soap:operation element is not used since pro-
gramming model (RPC-oriented or document-oriented) may be using addSoapBinding() method
soapAction attribute of /definitions/binding/soap:operation element specifies the value of the SOAPAction header
for this operation. This attribute is required for SOAP over HTTP and must not be specified for other transports.
Zend\Soap\Server implementation uses $serviceUri . # . $methodName for SOAP operation action name.
See http://www.w3.org/TR/wsdl#_soap:operation for the details.

260.9 addService() method

addService($name, $port_name, $binding, $location) method adds /definitions/service ele-

ment to the WSDL document with the specified Wed Service name, port name, binding, and location.
WSDL 1.1 allows to have several port types (sets of operations) per service. This ability is not used by
Zend\Soap\Server implementation and not supported by Zend\Soap\Wsdl class.
Zend\Soap\Server implementation uses:
$name . Service as a Web Service name,
$name . Port as a port type name,
tns: . $name . Binding 1 as binding name,
1 tns: namespace is defined as script URI (http:// .$_SERVER[HTTP_HOST] . $_SERVER[SCRIPT_NAME]).

260.6. addBindingOperation() method 1263

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

script URI 2 as a service URI for Web Service definition using classes.
where $name is a class name for the Web Service definition mode using class and script name for the Web Service
definition mode using set of functions.
See http://www.w3.org/TR/wsdl#_services for the details.

260.10 Type mapping

ZendSoap WSDL accessor implementation uses the following type mapping between PHP and SOAP types:
PHP strings <-> xsd:string.
PHP integers <-> xsd:int.
PHP floats and doubles <-> xsd:float.
PHP booleans <-> xsd:boolean.
PHP arrays <-> soap-enc:Array.
PHP object <-> xsd:struct.
PHP class <-> based on complex type strategy (See: this section) 3 .
PHP void <-> empty type.
If type is not matched to any of these types by some reason, then xsd:anyType is used.
Where xsd: is http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema namespace, soap-enc: is a
http://schemas.xmlsoap.org/soap/encoding/ namespace, tns: is a target namespace for a service.

260.10.1 Retrieving type information

getType($type) method may be used to get mapping for a specified PHP type:
1 ...
2 $wsdl = new Zend\Soap\Wsdl('My_Web_Service', $myWebServiceUri);
3

4 ...
5 $soapIntType = $wsdl->getType('int');
6

7 ...
8 class MyClass {
9 ...
10 }
11 ...
12 $soapMyClassType = $wsdl->getType('MyClass');
2 http:// .$_SERVER[HTTP_HOST] . $_SERVER[SCRIPT_NAME]
3 By default Zend\Soap\Wsdl will be created with the Zend\Soap\Wsdl\ComplexTypeStrategy\DefaultComplexType
class as detection algorithm for complex types. The first parameter of the AutoDiscover constructor takes any com-
plex type strategy implementing Zend\Soap\Wsdl\ComplexTypeStrategy\ComplexTypeStrategyInterface or
a string with the name of the class. For backwards compatibility with $extractComplexType boolean variables are
parsed the following way: If TRUE, Zend\Soap\Wsdl\ComplexTypeStrategy\DefaultComplexType, if FALSE
Zend\Soap\Wsdl\ComplexTypeStrategy\AnyType.

1264 Chapter 260. WSDL Accessor

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

260.10.2 Adding complex type information

addComplexType($type) method is used to add complex types (PHP classes) to a WSDL document.
Its automatically used by getType() method to add corresponding complex types of method parameters or return
types.
Its detection and building algorithm is based on the currently active detection strategy for complex
types. You can set the detection strategy either by specifying the class name as string or instance of a
Zend\Soap\Wsdl\ComplexTypeStrategy implementation as the third parameter of the constructor or us-
ing the setComplexTypeStrategy($strategy) function of Zend\Soap\Wsdl. The following detection
strategies currently exist:
Class Zend\Soap\Wsdl\ComplexTypeStrategy\DefaultComplexType: Enabled by default
(when no third constructor parameter is set). Iterates over the public attributes of a class type and registers
them as subtypes of the complex object type.
Class Zend\Soap\Wsdl\ComplexTypeStrategy\AnyType: Casts all complex types into the simple
XSD type xsd:anyType. Be careful this shortcut for complex type detection can probably only be handled
successfully by weakly typed languages such as PHP.
Class Zend\Soap\Wsdl\ComplexTypeStrategy\ArrayOfTypeSequence: This strategy allows to
specify return parameters of the type: int[] or string[]. As of Zend Framework version 1.9 it can handle both
simple PHP types such as int, string, boolean, float as well as objects and arrays of objects.
Class Zend\Soap\Wsdl\ComplexTypeStrategy\ArrayOfTypeComplex: This strategy al-
lows to detect very complex arrays of objects. Objects types are detected based on the
Zend\Soap\Wsdl\Strategy\DefaultComplexType and an array is wrapped around that definition.
Class Zend\Soap\Wsdl\ComplexTypeStrategy\Composite: This strategy can com-
bine all strategies by connecting PHP Complex types (Classnames) to the desired strategy via the
connectTypeToStrategy($type, $strategy) method. A complete typemap can be given to
the constructor as an array with $type-> $strategy pairs. The second parameter specifies the default
strategy that will be used if an unknown type is requested for adding. This parameter defaults to the
Zend\Soap\Wsdl\Strategy\DefaultComplexType strategy.
addComplexType() method creates /definitions/types/xsd:schema/xsd:complexType element for each described
complex type with name of the specified PHP class.
Class property MUST have docblock section with the described PHP type to have property included into WSDL
description.
addComplexType() checks if type is already described within types section of the WSDL document.
It prevents duplications if this method is called two or more times and recursion in the types definition section.
See http://www.w3.org/TR/wsdl#_types for the details.

260.11 addDocumentation() method

addDocumentation($input_node, $documentation) method adds human readable documentation us-

ing optional wsdl:document element.
/definitions/binding/soap:binding element is used to signify that the binding is bound to the SOAP protocol format.
See http://www.w3.org/TR/wsdl#_documentation for the details.

260.11. addDocumentation() method 1265

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

260.12 Get finalized WSDL document

toXML(), toDomDocument() and dump($filename = false) methods may be used to get WSDL docu-
ment as an XML, DOM structure or a file.

1266 Chapter 260. WSDL Accessor

 CHAPTER 261

AutoDiscovery

261.1 AutoDiscovery Introduction

SOAP functionality implemented within Zend Framework is intended to make all steps required for SOAP communi-
cations more simple.
SOAP is language independent protocol. So it may be used not only for PHP-to-PHP communications.
There are three configurations for SOAP applications where Zend Framework may be utilized:
SOAP server PHP application <> SOAP client PHP application
SOAP server non-PHP application <> SOAP client PHP application
SOAP server PHP application <> SOAP client non-PHP application
We always have to know, which functionality is provided by SOAP server to operate with it. WSDL is used to describe
network service API in details.
WSDL language is complex enough (see http://www.w3.org/TR/wsdl for the details). So its difficult to prepare correct
WSDL description.
Another problem is synchronizing changes in network service API with already existing WSDL.
Both these problem may be solved by WSDL autogeneration. A prerequisite for this is a SOAP server autodiscovery.
It constructs object similar to object used in SOAP server application, extracts necessary information and generates
correct WSDL using this information.
There are two ways for using Zend Framework for SOAP server application:
Use separated class.
Use set of functions.
Both methods are supported by Zend Framework Autodiscovery functionality.
The Zend\Soap\AutoDiscover class also supports datatypes mapping from PHP to XSD types.
Here is an example of common usage of the autodiscovery functionality. The generate() function generates the
WSDL object and in conjunction with toXml() function you can posts it to the browser.
1 class MySoapServerClass {
2 ...
3 }
4

5 $autodiscover = new Zend\Soap\AutoDiscover();

6 $autodiscover->setClass('MySoapServerClass')
7 ->setUri('http://localhost/server.php')

1267
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

8 ->setServiceName('MySoapService');
9 $wsdl = $autodiscover->generate();
10 echo $wsdl->toXml();
11 $wsdl->dump("/path/to/file.wsdl");
12 $dom = $wsdl->toDomDocument();

Note: Zend\Soap\Autodiscover is not a Soap Server

It is very important to note, that the class Zend\Soap\AutoDiscover does not act as a SOAP Server on its own.
1 if (isset($_GET['wsdl'])) {
2 $autodiscover = new Zend\Soap\AutoDiscover();
3 $autodiscover->setClass('HelloWorldService')
4 ->setUri('http://example.com/soap.php');
5 echo $autodiscover->toXml();
6 } else {
7 // pointing to the current file here
8 $soap = new Zend\Soap\Server("http://example.com/soap.php?wsdl");
9 $soap->setClass('HelloWorldService');
10 $soap->handle();
11 }

261.2 Class autodiscovering

If a class is used to provide SOAP server functionality, then the same class should be provided to
Zend\Soap\AutoDiscover for WSDL generation:
1 $autodiscover = new Zend\Soap\AutoDiscover();
2 $autodiscover->setClass('My_SoapServer_Class')
3 ->setUri('http://localhost/server.php')
4 ->setServiceName('MySoapService');
5 $wsdl = $autodiscover->generate();

The following rules are used while WSDL generation:

Generated WSDL describes an RPC/Encoded style Web Service. If you want to use a document/literal server
use the setBindingStyle() and setOperationBodyStyle() methods.
Class name is used as a name of the Web Service being described unless setServiceName() is used explic-
itly to set the name. When only functions are used for generation the service name has to be set explicitly or an
exception is thrown during generation of the WSDL document.
You can set the endpoint of the actual SOAP Server via the setUri() method. This is a required option.
Its also used as a target namespace for all service related names (including described complex types).
Class methods are joined into one Port Type. $serviceName . Port is used as Port Type name.
Each class method/function is registered as a corresponding port operation.
Only the longest available method prototype is used for generation of the WSDL.
WSDL autodiscover utilizes the PHP docblocks provided by the developer to determine the parameter and return
types. In fact, for scalar types, this is the only way to determine the parameter types, and for return types, this
is the only way to determine them. That means, providing correct and fully detailed docblocks is not only best
practice, but is required for discovered class.

1268 Chapter 261. AutoDiscovery

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

261.3 Functions autodiscovering

If set of functions are used to provide SOAP server functionality, then the same set should be provided to
Zend\Soap\AutoDiscovery for WSDL generation:
1 $autodiscover = new Zend\Soap\AutoDiscover();
2 $autodiscover->addFunction('function1');
3 $autodiscover->addFunction('function2');
4 $autodiscover->addFunction('function3');
5 ...
6 $wsdl = $autodiscover->generate();

The same rules apply to generation as described in the class autodiscover section above.

261.4 Autodiscovering Datatypes

Input/output datatypes are converted into network service types using the following mapping:
PHP strings <-> xsd:string.
PHP integers <-> xsd:int.
PHP floats and doubles <-> xsd:float.
PHP booleans <-> xsd:boolean.
PHP arrays <-> soap-enc:Array.
PHP object <-> xsd:struct.
PHP class <-> based on complex type strategy (See: this section) 1 .
type[] or object[] (ie. int[]) <-> based on complex type strategy
PHP void <-> empty type.
If type is not matched to any of these types by some reason, then xsd:anyType is used.
Where xsd: is http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema namespace, soap-enc: is a
http://schemas.xmlsoap.org/soap/encoding/ namespace, tns: is a target namespace for a service.

261.5 WSDL Binding Styles

WSDL offers different transport mechanisms and styles. This affects the soap:binding and soap:body tags within the
Binding section of WSDL. Different clients have different requirements as to what options really work. Therefore you
can set the styles before you call any setClass or addFunction method on the AutoDiscover class.
1 $autodiscover = new Zend\Soap\AutoDiscover();
2 // Default is 'use' => 'encoded' and
3 // 'encodingStyle' => 'http://schemas.xmlsoap.org/soap/encoding/'
4 $autodiscover->setOperationBodyStyle(
5 array('use' => 'literal',
6 'namespace' => 'http://framework.zend.com')
1 Zend\Soap\AutoDiscover will be created with the Zend\Soap\Wsdl\ComplexTypeStrategy\DefaultComplexType class

as detection algorithm for complex types. The first parameter of the AutoDiscover constructor takes any complex type strategy implement-
ing Zend\Soap\Wsdl\ComplexTypeStrategy\ComplexTypeStrategyInterface or a string with the name of the class. See the
Zend\Soap\Wsdl manual on adding complex types for more information.

261.3. Functions autodiscovering 1269

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

7 );
8

9 // Default is 'style' => 'rpc' and

10 // 'transport' => 'http://schemas.xmlsoap.org/soap/http'
11 $autodiscover->setBindingStyle(
12 array('style' => 'document',
13 'transport' => 'http://framework.zend.com')
14 );
15 ...
16 $autodiscover->addFunction('myfunc1');
17 $wsdl = $autodiscover->generate();

1270 Chapter 261. AutoDiscovery

 CHAPTER 262

Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator

Hydration is the act of populating an object from a set of data.

The Hydrator is a simple component to provide mechanisms both for hydrating objects, as well as extracting data
sets from them.
The component consists of an interface, and several implementations for common use cases.

262.1 HydratorInterface
1 namespace Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator;
2

3 interface HydratorInterface
4 {
5 /**
6 * Extract values from an object
7 *
8 * @param object $object
9 * @return array
10 */
11 public function extract($object);
12

13 /**
14 * Hydrate $object with the provided $data.
15 *
16 * @param array $data
17 * @param object $object
18 * @return object
19 */
20 public function hydrate(array $data, $object);
21 }

262.2 Usage

Usage is quite simple: simply instantiate the hydrator, and then pass information to it.
1 use Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator;
2 $hydrator = new Hydrator\ArraySerializable();
3

4 $object = new ArrayObject(array());

1271
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

6 $hydrator->hydrate($someData, $object);
7

8 // or, if the object has data we want as an array:

9 $data = $hydrator->extract($object);

262.3 Available Implementations

Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator\ArraySerializable
Follows the definition of ArrayObject. Objects must implement either the exchangeArray() or
populate() methods to support hydration, and the getArrayCopy() method to support extraction.
Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator\ClassMethods
Any data key matching a setter method will be called in order to hydrate; any method matching a getter method
will be called for extraction.
Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator\DelegatingHydrator
Composes a hydrator locator containing hydrators and will delegate hydrate() and extract() calls to the
appropriate one based upon the class name of the object being operated on.
1 // Instantiate each hydrator you wish to delegate to
2 $albumHydrator = new Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator\ClassMethods;
3 $artistHydrator = new Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator\ClassMethods;
4

5 // Map the entity class name to the hydrator using the HydratorPluginManager
6 // In this case we have two entity classes, "Album" and "Artist"
7 $hydrators = new Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator\HydratorPluginManager;
8 $hydrators->setService('Album', $albumHydrator);
9 $hydrators->setService('Artist', $artistHydrator);
10

11 // Create the DelegatingHydrator and tell it to use our configured hydrator locator
12 $delegating = new Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator\DelegatingHydrator($hydrators);
13

14 // Now we can use $delegating to hydrate or extract any supported object

15 $array = $delegating->extract(new Artist);
16 $artist = $delegating->hydrate($data, new Artist);

Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator\ObjectProperty
Any data key matching a publicly accessible property will be hydrated; any public properties will be used for
extraction.
Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator\Reflection
Similar to the ObjectProperty hydrator, but uses PHPs reflection API to hydrate or extract properties of
any visibility. Any data key matching an existing property will be hydrated; any existing properties will be used
for extraction.

1272 Chapter 262. Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator

 CHAPTER 263

Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator\Filter

The hydrator filters, allows you to manipulate the behavior, when you want to extract() your stuff to arrays.
This is especially useful, if you want to extract() your objects to the userland and strip some internals (e.g.
getServiceManager()).
It comes with a helpful Composite Implementation and a few filters for common use cases. The filters are implemented
on the AbstractHydrator, so you can directly start using them if you extend it - even on custom hydrators.
1 namespace Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator\Filter;
2

3 interface FilterInterface
4 {
5 /**
6 * Should return true, if the given filter
7 * does not match
8 *
9 * @param string $property The name of the property
10 * @return bool
11 */
12 public function filter($property);
13 }

If it returns true, the key / value pairs will be in the extracted arrays - if it will return false, youll not see them again.

263.1 Filter implementations

Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator\Filter\GetFilter
This filter is used in the ClassMethods hydrator, to decide that getters will be extracted. It checks, if the key
that should be extracted starts with get or looks like this Zend\Foo\Bar::getFoo
Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator\Filter\HasFilter
This filter is used in the ClassMethods hydrator, to decide that has methods will be extracted. It checks, if
the key that should be extracted starts with has or looks like this Zend\Foo\Bar::hasFoo
Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator\Filter\IsFilter
This filter is used in the ClassMethods hydrator, to decide that is methods will be extracted. It checks, if
the key that should be extracted starts with is or looks like this Zend\Foo\Bar::isFoo
Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator\Filter\MethodMatchFilter

1273
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

This filter allows you to strip methods from the extraction with the correct condition in the composite. It
checks, if the key that should be extracted matches a method name. Either getServiceLocator or
Zend\Foo::getServicelocator. The name of the method is specified in the constructor of this fil-
ter. The 2nd parameter decides whether to use white or blacklisting to decide. Default is blacklisting - pass
false to change it.
Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator\Filter\NumberOfParameterFilter
This filter is used in the ClassMethods hydrator, to check the number of parameters. By convention, the
get, has and is methods do not get any parameters - but it may happen. You can add your own number of
needed parameters, simply add the number to the constructor. The default value is 0

263.2 Remove filters

If you want to tell e.g. the ClassMethods hydrator, to not extract methods that start with is, you can do so:
1 $hydrator = new ClassMethods(false);
2 $hydrator->removeFilter("is");

The key / value pairs for is methods will not end up in your extracted array anymore. The filters can be used in any
hydrator, but the ClassMethods hydrator is the only one, that has pre-registered filters:
1 $this->filterComposite->addFilter("is", new IsFilter());
2 $this->filterComposite->addFilter("has", new HasFilter());
3 $this->filterComposite->addFilter("get", new GetFilter());
4 $this->filterComposite->addFilter("parameter", new NumberOfParameterFilter(), FilterComposite::CONDIT

If youre not fine with this, you can unregister them as above.

Note: The parameter for the filter on the ClassMethods looks like this by default
Zend\Foo\Bar::methodName

263.3 Add filters

You can easily add filters to any hydrator, that extends the AbstractHydrator. You can use the
FilterInterface or any callable:
1 $hydrator->addFilter("len", function($property) {
2 if (strlen($property) !== 3) {
3 return false;
4 }
5 return true;
6 });

By default, every filter you add will be added with a conditional or. If you want to add it with and (as the
NumberOfParameterFilter that is added to the ClassMethods hydrator by default) you can do that too:
1 $hydrator->addFilter("len", function($property) {
2 if (strlen($property) !== 3) {
3 return false;
4 }
5 return true;
6 }, FilterComposite::CONDITION_AND);

1274 Chapter 263. Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator\Filter

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Or you can add the shipped ones:

1 $hydrator->addFilter(
2 "servicemanager",
3 new MethodMatchFilter("getServiceManager"),
4 FilterComposite::CONDITION_AND
5 );

The example above will exclude the getServiceManager method or the key from the extraction, even if the get
filter wants to add it.

263.4 Use the composite for complex filters

The composite implements the FilterInterface too, so you can add it as a regular filter to the hydrator. One
goody of this implementation, is that you can add the filters with a condition and you can do even more complex stuff
with different composites with different conditions. You can pass the condition to the 3rd parameter, when you add a
filter:
Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator\Filter\FilterComposite::CONDITION_OR
At one level of the composite, one of all filters in that condition block has to return true in order to get
extracted
Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator\Filter\FilterComposite::CONDITION_AND
At one level of the composite, all of the filters in that condition block has to return true in order to get
extracted
This composition will have a similar logic as the if below:
1 $composite = new FilterComposite();
2

3 $composite->addFilter("one", $condition1);
4 $composite->addFilter("two", $condition2);
5 $composite->addFilter("three", $condition3);
6 $composite->addFilter("four", $condition4, FilterComposite::CONDITION_AND);
7 $composite->addFilter("five", $condition5, FilterComposite::CONDITION_AND);
8

9 // This is what's happening internally

10 if (
11 (
12 $condition1
13 || $condition2
14 || $condition3
15 ) && (
16 $condition4
17 && $condition5
18 )
19 ) {
20 //do extraction
21 }

If youve only one condition (only and or or) block, the other one will be completely ignored.
A bit more complex filter can look like this:
1 $composite = new FilterComposite();
2 $composite->addFilter(
3 "servicemanager",

263.4. Use the composite for complex filters 1275

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

4 new MethodMatchFilter("getServiceManager"),
5 FilterComposite::CONDITION_AND
6 );
7 $composite->addFilter(
8 "eventmanager",
9 new MethodMatchFilter("getEventManager"),
10 FilterComposite::CONDITION_AND
11 );
12

13 $hydrator->addFilter("excludes", $composite, FilterComposite::CONDITION_AND);

14

15 // Internal
16 if (
17 ( // default composite inside the hydrator
18 (
19 $getFilter
20 || $hasFilter
21 || $isFilter
22 ) && (
23 $numberOfParameterFilter
24 )
25 ) && ( // new composite, added to the one above
26 $serviceManagerFilter
27 && $eventManagerFilter
28 )
29 ) {
30 // do extraction
31 }

If you perform this on the ClassMethods hydrator, all getters will get extracted, but not getServiceManager
and getEventManager.

263.5 Using the provider interface

There is also a provider interface, that allows you to configure the behavior of the hydrator inside your objects.
1 namespace Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator\Filter;
2

3 interface FilterProviderInterface
4 {
5 /**
6 * Provides a filter for hydration
7 *
8 * @return FilterInterface
9 */
10 public function getFilter();
11 }

The getFilter() method is getting automatically excluded from extract(). If the extracted object implements
the Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator\Filter\FilterProviderInterface, the returned FilterInterface
instance can also be a FilterComposite.
For example:
1 Class Foo implements FilterProviderInterface
2 {
3 public function getFoo()

1276 Chapter 263. Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator\Filter

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

4 {
5 return "foo";
6 }
7

8 public function hasFoo()

9 {
10 return true;
11 }
12

13 public function getServiceManager()

14 {
15 return "servicemanager";
16 }
17

18 public function getEventManager()

19 {
20 return "eventmanager";
21 }
22

23 public function getFilter()

24 {
25 $composite = new FilterComposite();
26 $composite->addFilter("get", new GetFilter());
27

28 $exclusionComposite = new FilterComposite();

29 $exclusionComposite->addFilter(
30 "servicemanager",
31 new MethodMatchFilter("getServiceManager"),
32 FilterComposite::CONDITION_AND
33 );
34 $exclusionComposite->addFilter(
35 "eventmanager",
36 new MethodMatchFilter("getEventManager"),
37 FilterComposite::CONDITION_AND
38 );
39

40 $composite->addFilter("excludes", $exclusionComposite, FilterComposite::CONDITION_AND);

41

42 return $composite;
43 }
44 }
45

46 $hydrator = new ClassMethods(false);

47 $extractedArray = $hydrator->extract(new Foo());

The $extractedArray does only have foo => foo in. All of the others are excluded from the extraction.

Note: All pre-registered filters from the ClassMethods hydrator are ignored if this interface is used.

263.5. Using the provider interface 1277

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1278 Chapter 263. Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator\Filter

 CHAPTER 264

Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator\Strategy

You can add a Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator\Strategy\StrategyInterface to any of the

hydrators (expect it extends Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator\AbstractHydrator or implements
Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator\HydratorInterface and Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator\Strategy\StrategyEnabledInter
to manipulate the way how they behave on extract() and hydrate() for specific key / value pairs. This is the
interface that needs to be implemented:
1 namespace Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator\Strategy;
2

3 interface StrategyInterface
4 {
5 /**
6 * Converts the given value so that it can be extracted by the hydrator.
7 *
8 * @param mixed $value The original value.
9 * @return mixed Returns the value that should be extracted.
10 */
11 public function extract($value);
12 /**
13 * Converts the given value so that it can be hydrated by the hydrator.
14 *
15 * @param mixed $value The original value.
16 * @return mixed Returns the value that should be hydrated.
17 */
18 public function hydrate($value);
19 }

As you can see, this interface is similar to Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator\HydratorInterface. The reason why
is, that the strategies provide a proxy implementation for hydrate() and extract().

264.1 Adding strategies to the hydrators

To allow strategies within your hydrator, the Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator\Strategy\StrategyEnabledInterface

provide the following methods:
1 namespace Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator;
2

3 use Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator\Strategy\StrategyInterface;
4

5 interface StrategyEnabledInterface
6 {
7 /**

1279
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

8 * Adds the given strategy under the given name.

9 *
10 * @param string $name The name of the strategy to register.
11 * @param StrategyInterface $strategy The strategy to register.
12 * @return HydratorInterface
13 */
14 public function addStrategy($name, StrategyInterface $strategy);
15

16 /**
17 * Gets the strategy with the given name.
18 *
19 * @param string $name The name of the strategy to get.
20 * @return StrategyInterface
21 */
22 public function getStrategy($name);
23

24 /**
25 * Checks if the strategy with the given name exists.
26 *
27 * @param string $name The name of the strategy to check for.
28 * @return bool
29 */
30 public function hasStrategy($name);
31

32 /**
33 * Removes the strategy with the given name.
34 *
35 * @param string $name The name of the strategy to remove.
36 * @return HydratorInterface
37 */
38 public function removeStrategy($name);
39 }

Every hydrator, that is shipped by default, provides this functionality. The AbstractHydrator has it fully
functional implemented. If you want to use this functionality in your own hydrators, you should extend the
AbstractHydrator.

264.2 Available implementations

Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator\Strategy\SerializableStrategy
This is a strategy that provides the functionality for Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator\ArraySerializable.
You can use it with custom implementations for Zend\Serializer\Adapter\AdapterInterface if
you want to.
Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator\Strategy\ClosureStrategy
This is a strategy that allows you to pass in a hydrate callback to be called in the event of hydration, and an
extract callback to be called in the event of extraction.
Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator\Strategy\DefaultStrategy
This is a kind of dummy-implementation, that simply proxies everything through, without doing anything on
the parameters.

1280 Chapter 264. Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator\Strategy

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

264.3 Writing custom strategies

As usual, this is not really a very useful example, but will give you a good point about how to start with writing
your own strategies and where to use them. This strategy simply transform the value for the defined key to rot13 on
extract() and back on hydrate():
1 class Rot13Strategy implements StrategyInterface
2 {
3 public function extract($value)
4 {
5 return str_rot13($value);
6 }
7

8 public function hydrate($value)

9 {
10 return str_rot13($value);
11 }
12 }

This is the example class, we want to use for the hydrator example:
1 class Foo
2 {
3 protected $foo = null;
4 protected $bar = null;
5

6 public function getFoo()

7 {
8 return $this->foo;
9 }
10

11 public function setFoo($foo)

12 {
13 $this->foo = $foo;
14 }
15

16 public function getBar()

17 {
18 return $this->bar;
19 }
20

21 public function setBar($bar)

22 {
23 $this->bar = $bar;
24 }
25 }

Now, we want to add the rot13 strategy to the method getFoo() and setFoo($foo):
1 $foo = new Foo();
2 $foo->setFoo("bar");
3 $foo->setBar("foo");
4

5 $hydrator = new ClassMethods();

6 $hydrator->addStrategy("foo", new Rot13Strategy());

When you now use the hydrator, to get an array of the object $foo, this is the array youll get:

264.3. Writing custom strategies 1281

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1 $extractedArray = $hydrator->extract($foo);
2

3 // array(2) {
4 // ["foo"]=>
5 // string(3) "one"
6 // ["bar"]=>
7 // string(3) "foo"
8 // }

And the the way back:

1 $hydrator->hydrate($extractedArray, $foo)
2

3 // object(Foo)#2 (2) {
4 // ["foo":protected]=>
5 // string(3) "bar"
6 // ["bar":protected]=>
7 // string(3) "foo"
8 // }

1282 Chapter 264. Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator\Strategy

 CHAPTER 265

AggregateHydrator

Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator\Aggregate\AggregateHydrator is an implementation of
Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator\HydratorInterface that composes multiple hydrators via event listeners.
You typically want to use an aggregate hydrator when you want to hydrate or extract data from complex objects that
implement multiple interfaces, and therefore need multiple hydrators to handle that in subsequent steps.

265.1 Installation requirements

The AggregateHydrator is based on the Zend\EventManager component, so be sure to have it installed

before getting started:
php composer.phar require zendframework/zend-eventmanager:2.*

265.2 Basic usage

A simple use case may be hydrating a BlogPost object, which contains data for the user that created it, the time it
was created, the current publishing status, etc:
1 use Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator\Aggregate\AggregateHydrator;
2

3 $hydrator = new AggregateHydrator();

4

5 // attach the various hydrators capable of handling simpler interfaces

6 $hydrator->add(new My\BlogPostHydrator());
7 $hydrator->add(new My\UserAwareObjectHydrator());
8 $hydrator->add(new My\TimestampedObjectHydrator());
9 $hydrator->add(new My\PublishableObjectHydrator());
10 // ...
11

12 // Now retrieve the BlogPost object

13 // ...
14

15 // you can now extract complex data from a blogpost

16 $data = $hydrator->extract($blogPost);
17

18 // or you can fill the object with complex data

19 $blogPost = $hydrator->hydrate($data, $blogPost);

1283
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Note: Hydrator priorities

AggregateHydrator::add has a second optional argument $priority. If you have two or more hydrators
that conflict with each other for same data keys, you may decide which one has to be executed first or last by passing
a higher or lower integer priority to the second argument of AggregateHydrator::add

In order to work with this logic, each of the hydrators that are attached should just ignore any unknown object type
passed in, such as in following example:
1 namespace My;
2

3 use Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator\HydratorInterface
4

5 class BlogPostHydrator implements HydratorInterface

6 {
7 public function hydrate($data, $object)
8 {
9 if (!$object instanceof BlogPost) {
10 return $object;
11 }
12

13 // ... continue hydration ...

14 }
15

16 public function extract($object)

17 {
18 if (!$object instanceof BlogPost) {
19 return array();
20 }
21

22 // ... continue extraction ...

23 }
24 }

265.3 Advanced use cases

Since the AggregateHydrator is event-driven, you can use the EventManager API to tweak its behaviour.
Common use cases are:
Removal of hydrated data keys (passwords/confidential information) depending on business rules
Caching of the hydration/extraction process
Transformations on extracted data, for compatibility with third-party APIs
In the following example, a cache listener will be introduced to speed up hydration, which can be very useful when
the same data is requested multiple times:
1 use Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator\Aggregate\AggregateHydrator;
2 use Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator\Aggregate\ExtractEvent;
3 use Zend\Cache\Storage\Adapter\Memory;
4

5 $hydrator = new AggregateHydrator();

6

7 // attach the various hydrators

8 $hydrator->add(new My\BlogPostHydrator());

1284 Chapter 265. AggregateHydrator

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

9 $hydrator->add(new My\UserAwareObjectHydrator());
10 $hydrator->add(new My\TimestampedObjectHydrator());
11 $hydrator->add(new My\PublishableObjectHydrator());
12 // ...
13

14 $cache = new Memory();

15 $cacheReadListener = function (ExtractEvent $event) use ($cache) {
16 $object = $event->getExtractionObject();
17

18 if (!$object instanceof BlogPost) {

19 return;
20 }
21

22 if ($cache->hasItem($object->getId())) {
23 $event->setExtractedData($cache->getItem($object->getId()));
24 $event->stopPropagation();
25 }
26 };
27 $cacheWriteListener = function (ExtractEvent $event) use ($cache) {
28 $object = $event->getExtractionObject();
29

30 if (!$object instanceof BlogPost) {

31 return;
32 }
33

34 $cache->setItem($object->getId(), $event->getExtractedData());
35 };
36

37 // attaching a high priority listener executed before extraction logic

38 $hydrator->getEventManager()->attach(ExtractEvent::EVENT_EXTRACT, $cacheReadListener, 1000);
39 // attaching a low priority listener executed after extraction logic
40 $hydrator->getEventManager()->attach(ExtractEvent::EVENT_EXTRACT, $cacheWriteListener, -1000);

With an aggregate hydrator configured in this way, any $hydrator->extract($blogPost) operation will be
cached

265.3. Advanced use cases 1285

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1286 Chapter 265. AggregateHydrator

 CHAPTER 266

CompositeNamingStrategy

Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator\NamingStrategy\CompositeNamingStrategy allows you to specify which

naming strategy should be used for each key encountered during hydration or extraction.

266.1 Basic Usage

When invoked, the following composite strategy will extract the property bar into array key foo (MapNamingStrat-
egy) and property barBat into bar_bat (UnderscoreNamingStrategy):
1 class Foo
2 {
3 public $bar;
4 public $barBat;
5 }
6

7 $mapStrategy = new Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator\NamingStrategy\MapNamingStrategy([

8 'foo' => 'bar'
9 ]);
10

11 $underscoreNamingStrategy = new Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator\NamingStrategy\UnderscoreNamingStrategy();

12

13 $namingStrategy = new Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator\NamingStrategy\CompositeNamingStrategy([

14 'bar' => $mapStrategy,
15 'barBat' => $underscoreNamingStrategy,
16 ]);
17

18 $hydrator = new Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator\ObjectProperty();

19 $hydrator->setNamingStrategy($namingStrategy);
20

21 $foo = new Foo();

22 $foo->bar = 123;
23 $foo->barBat = 42;
24

25 print_r($foo); // Foo Object ( [bar] => 123 [barBat] => 42 )

26 print_r($hydrator->extract($foo)); // Array ( [foo] => 123 [bar_bat] => 42 )

Unfortunately, this CompositeNamingStrategy can only be used for extraction as it will not know how to handle the
keys necessary for hydration (foo and bar_bat, respectively). To rectify this we have to cover the keys for both
hydration and extraction in our composite strategy:
1 class Foo
2 {

1287
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

3 public $bar;
4 public $barBat;
5 }
6

7 $mapStrategy = new Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator\NamingStrategy\MapNamingStrategy([

8 'foo' => 'bar'
9 ]);
10

11 $underscoreNamingStrategy = new Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator\NamingStrategy\UnderscoreNamingStrategy();

12

13 $namingStrategy = new Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator\NamingStrategy\CompositeNamingStrategy([

14 // Define both directions for the foo => bar mapping
15 'bar' => $mapStrategy,
16 'foo' => $mapStrategy,
17 // Define both directions for the barBat => bar_bat mapping
18 'barBat' => $underscoreNamingStrategy,
19 'bar_bat' => $underscoreNamingStrategy,
20 ]);
21

22 $hydrator = new Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator\ObjectProperty();

23 $hydrator->setNamingStrategy($namingStrategy);
24

25 $foo = new Foo();

26 $foo->bar = 123;
27 $foo->barBat = 42;
28

29 $array = $hydrator->extract($foo);
30

31 print_r($foo); // Foo Object ( [bar] => 123 [barBat] => 42 )

32 print_r($array); // Array ( [foo] => 123 [bar_bat] => 42 )
33

34 $foo2 = new Foo();

35 $hydrator->hydrate($array, $foo2);
36

37 print_r($foo2); // Foo Object ( [bar] => 123 [barBat] => 42 )

1288 Chapter 266. CompositeNamingStrategy

 CHAPTER 267

IdentityNamingStrategy

Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator\NamingStrategy\IdentityNamingStrategy Will use the key it is given for

hydration and extraction.

267.1 Basic Usage

1 $namingStrategy = new Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator\NamingStrategy\IdentityNamingStrategy();
2

3 echo $namingStrategy->hydrate('foo'); // outputs: foo

4 echo $namingStrategy->extract('bar'); // outputs: bar

This strategy can be used in hydrators as well:

1 class Foo
2 {
3 public $foo;
4 }
5

6 $namingStrategy = new Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator\NamingStrategy\IdentityNamingStrategy();

7 $hydrator = new Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator\ObjectProperty();
8 $hydrator->setNamingStrategy($namingStrategy);
9

10 $foo = new Foo();

11 $hydrator->hydrate(array('foo' => 123), $foo);
12

13 print_r($foo); // Foo Object ( [foo] => 123 )

14 print_r($hydrator->extract($foo)); // Array ( [foo] => 123 )

1289
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1290 Chapter 267. IdentityNamingStrategy

 CHAPTER 268

MapNamingStrategy

Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator\NamingStrategy\MapNamingStrategy Maps keys based on a given map.

268.1 Basic Usage

1 $namingStrategy = new Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator\NamingStrategy\MapNamingStrategy(array(
2 'foo' => 'bar',
3 'baz' => 'bash'
4 ));
5 echo $namingStrategy->hydrate('foo'); // outputs: bar
6 echo $namingStrategy->hydrate('baz'); // outputs: bash
7

8 echo $namingStrategy->extract('bar'); // outputs: foo

9 echo $namingStrategy->extract('bash'); // outputs: baz

This strategy can be used in hydrators to dictate how keys should be mapped:
1 class Foo
2 {
3 public $bar;
4 }
5

6 $namingStrategy = new Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator\NamingStrategy\MapNamingStrategy(array(

7 'foo' => 'bar',
8 'baz' => 'bash'
9 ));
10 $hydrator = new Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator\ObjectProperty();
11 $hydrator->setNamingStrategy($namingStrategy);
12

13 $foo = new Foo();

14 $hydrator->hydrate(array('foo' => 123),$foo);
15

16 print_r($foo); // Foo Object ( [bar] => 123 )

17 print_r($hydrator->extract($foo)); // Array ( [foo] => 123 )

1291
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1292 Chapter 268. MapNamingStrategy

 CHAPTER 269

UnderscoreNamingStrategy

Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator\NamingStrategy\UnderscoreNamingStrategy Converts snake case strings

(e.g. foo_bar_baz) to studly case strings (e.g. fooBarBaz) and vice versa.

269.1 Basic Usage

1 $namingStrategy = new Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator\NamingStrategy\UnderscoreNamingStrategy();
2

3 echo $namingStrategy->extract('foo_bar'); // outputs: foo_bar

4 echo $namingStrategy->extract('Foo_Bar'); // outputs: foo_bar
5 echo $namingStrategy->extract('FooBar'); // outputs: foo_bar
6

7 echo $namingStrategy->hydrate('fooBar'); // outputs: fooBar

8 echo $namingStrategy->hydrate('FooBar'); // outputs: fooBar
9 echo $namingStrategy->hydrate('Foo_Bar'); // outputs: fooBar

This strategy can be used in hydrators to dictate how keys should be mapped.
1 class Foo
2 {
3 public $fooBar;
4 }
5

6 $hydrator = new Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator\ObjectProperty();

7 $hydrator->setNamingStrategy(new Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator\NamingStrategy\UnderscoreNamingStrategy());
8

9 $foo = new Foo();

10 $hydrator->hydrate(array('foo_bar' => 123), $foo);
11

12 print_r($foo); // Foo Object ( [fooBar] => 123 )

13 print_r($hydrator->extract($foo)); // Array ( [foo_bar] => 123 )

1293
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1294 Chapter 269. UnderscoreNamingStrategy

 CHAPTER 270

Introduction to Zend\Tag

Zend\Tag is a component suite which provides a facility to work with taggable Items. As its base, it provides two
classes to work with Tags, Zend\Tag\Item and Zend\Tag\ItemList. Additionally, it comes with the interface
Zend\Tag\TaggableInterface, which allows you to use any of your models as a taggable item in conjunction
with Zend\Tag.
Zend\Tag\Item is a basic taggable item implementation which comes with the essential functionality required to
work with the Zend\Tag suite. A taggable item always consists of a title and a relative weight (e.g. number of
occurrences). It also stores parameters which are used by the different sub-components of Zend\Tag.
To group multiple items together, Zend\Tag\ItemList exists as an array iterator and provides additional func-
tionality to calculate absolute weight values based on the given relative weights of each item in it.

Using Zend\Tag

This example illustrates how to create a list of tags and spread absolute weight values on them.
1 // Create the item list
2 $list = new Zend\Tag\ItemList();
3

4 // Assign tags to it
5 $list[] = new Zend\Tag\Item(array('title' => 'Code', 'weight' => 50));
6 $list[] = new Zend\Tag\Item(array('title' => 'Zend Framework', 'weight' => 1));
7 $list[] = new Zend\Tag\Item(array('title' => 'PHP', 'weight' => 5));
8

9 // Spread absolute values on the items

10 $list->spreadWeightValues(array(1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10));
11

12 // Output the items with their absolute values

13 foreach ($list as $item) {
14 printf("%s: %d\n", $item->getTitle(), $item->getParam('weightValue'));
15 }

This will output the three items Code, Zend Framework and PHP with the absolute values 10, 1 and 2.
1 Code: 10
2 Zend Framework: 1
3 PHP: 2

1295
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1296 Chapter 270. Introduction to Zend\Tag

 CHAPTER 271

Creating tag clouds with Zend\Tag\Cloud

Zend\Tag\Cloud is the rendering part of Zend\Tag. By default it comes with a set of HTML decorators, which
allow you to create tag clouds for a website, but also supplies you with two abstract classes to create your own
decorators, to create tag clouds in PDF documents for example.
You can instantiate and configure Zend\Tag\Cloud either programmatically or completely via an array or an
instance of Traversable. The available options are:

Table 271.1: Zend\Tag\Cloud Options

Option Description
cloudDecorator Defines the decorator for the cloud. Can either be the name of the class which should be
loaded by the plugin manager, an instance of
Zend\Tag\Cloud\Decorator\AbstractCloud or an array containing the
decorator under the key decorator and optionally an array under the key options,
which will be passed to the decorators constructor.
tagDecorator Defines the decorator for individual tags. This can either be the name of the class which
should be loaded by the plugin manager, an instance of
Zend\Tag\Cloud\Decorator\AbstractTag or an array containing the decorator
under the key decorator and optionally an array under the key options, which will be
passed to the decorators constructor.
A different plugin manager to use. Must be an instance of
decoratorPluginManager
Zend\ServiceManager\AbstractPluginManager.
itemList A different item list to use. Must be an instance of Zend\Tag\ItemList.
tags A array of tags to assign to the cloud. Each tag must either implement
Zend\Tag\TaggableInterface or be an array which can be used to instantiate
Zend\Tag\Item.

Using Zend\Tag\Cloud

This example illustrates a basic example of how to create a tag cloud, add multiple tags to it and finally render it.
1 // Create the cloud and assign static tags to it
2 $cloud = new Zend\Tag\Cloud(array(
3 'tags' => array(
4 array(
5 'title' => 'Code',
6 'weight' => 50,
7 'params' => array('url' => '/tag/code'),
8 ),
9 array(

1297
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

10 'title' => 'Zend Framework',

11 'weight' => 1,
12 'params' => array('url' => '/tag/zend-framework'),
13 ),
14 array(
15 'title' => 'PHP',
16 'weight' => 5,
17 'params' => array('url' => '/tag/php'),
18 ),
19 ),
20 ));
21

22 // Render the cloud

23 echo $cloud;

This will output the tag cloud with the three tags, spread with the default font-sizes:
1 <ul class="zend-tag-cloud">
2 <li>
3 <a href="/tag/code" style="font-size: 20px;">
4 Code
5 </a>
6 </li>
7 <li>
8 <a href="/tag/zend-framework" style="font-size: 10px;">
9 Zend Framework
10 </a>
11 </li>
12 <li>
13 <a href="/tag/php" style="font-size: 11px;">
14 PHP
15 </a>
16 </li>
17 </ul>

Note: The HTML code examples are preformatted for a better visualization in the documentation.
You can define a output separator for the HTML Cloud decorator.

The following example shows how create the same tag cloud from a Zend\Config\Config object.
1 # An example tags.ini file
2 tags.1.title = "Code"
3 tags.1.weight = 50
4 tags.1.params.url = "/tag/code"
5 tags.2.title = "Zend Framework"
6 tags.2.weight = 1
7 tags.2.params.url = "/tag/zend-framework"
8 tags.3.title = "PHP"
9 tags.3.weight = 2
10 tags.3.params.url = "/tag/php"

1 // Create the cloud from a Zend\Config\Config object

2 $config = Zend\Config\Factory::fromFile('tags.ini');
3 $cloud = new Zend\Tag\Cloud($config);
4

5 // Render the cloud

6 echo $cloud;

1298 Chapter 271. Creating tag clouds with Zend\Tag\Cloud

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

271.1 Decorators

Zend\Tag\Cloud requires two types of decorators to be able to render a tag cloud. This includes a decorator which
renders the single tags as well as a decorator which renders the surrounding cloud. Zend\Tag\Cloud ships a default
decorator set for formatting a tag cloud in HTML. This set will, by default, create a tag cloud as ul/li -list, spread with
different font-sizes according to the weight values of the tags assigned to them.

271.1.1 HTML Tag decorator

The HTML tag decorator will by default render every tag in an anchor element, surrounded by a <li> element. The
anchor itself is fixed and cannot be changed, but the surrounding element(s) can.

Note: URL parameter

As the HTML tag decorator always surounds the tag title with an anchor, you should define a URL parameter for every
tag used in it.

The tag decorator can either spread different font-sizes over the anchors or a defined list of classnames. When setting
options for one of those possibilities, the corresponding one will automatically be enabled. The following configuration
options are available:

Table 271.2: HTML Tag decorator Options

Option Default Description
fontSizeUnit
px Defines the font-size unit used for all font-sizes. The possible values are: em, ex, px, in,
cm, mm, pt, pc and %.
minFontSize
10 The minimum font-size distributed through the tags (must be numeric).
maxFontSize
20 The maximum font-size distributed through the tags (must be numeric).
classListnull An array of classes distributed through the tags.
An array of HTML tags surrounding the anchor. Each element can either be a string,
htmlTags array(li)
which is used as element type, or an array containing an attribute list for the element,
defined as key/value pair. In this case, the array key is used as element type.
The following example shows how to create a tag cloud with a customized HTML tag decorator.
1 $cloud = new Zend\Tag\Cloud(array(
2 'tagDecorator' => array(
3 'decorator' => 'htmltag',
4 'options' => array(
5 'minFontSize' => '20',
6 'maxFontSize' => '50',
7 'htmlTags' => array(
8 'li' => array('class' => 'my_custom_class'),
9 ),
10 ),
11 ),
12 'tags' => array(
13 array(
14 'title' => 'Code',
15 'weight' => 50,
16 'params' => array('url' => '/tag/code'),
17 ),
18 array(
19 'title' => 'Zend Framework',
20 'weight' => 1,

271.1. Decorators 1299

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

21 'params' => array('url' => '/tag/zend-framework'),

22 ),
23 array(
24 'title' => 'PHP',
25 'weight' => 5,
26 'params' => array('url' => '/tag/php')
27 ),
28 ),
29 ));
30

31 // Render the cloud

32 echo $cloud;

The output:
1 <ul class="zend-tag-cloud">
2 <li class="my_custom_class">
3 <a href="/tag/code" style="font-size: 50px;">Code</a>
4 </li>
5 <li class="my_custom_class">
6 <a href="/tag/zend-framework" style="font-size: 20px;">Zend Framework</a>
7 </li>
8 <li class="my_custom_class">
9 <a href="/tag/php" style="font-size: 23px;">PHP</a>
10 </li>
11 </ul>

271.1.2 HTML Cloud decorator

By default the HTML cloud decorator will surround the HTML tags with a <ul> element and add no separation. Like
in the tag decorator, you can define multiple surrounding HTML tags and additionally define a separator. The available
options are:

Table 271.3: HTML Cloud decorator Options

Op- Default Description
tion
(a whitespace)
separator Defines the separator which is placed between all tags.
htmlTags
array(ul => An array of HTML tags surrounding all tags. Each element can either
array(class => be a string, which is used as element type, or an array containing an
zend-tag-cloud)) attribute list for the element, defined as key/value pair. In this case, the
array key is used as element type.
1 // Create the cloud and assign static tags to it
2 $cloud = new Zend\Tag\Cloud(array(
3 'cloudDecorator' => array(
4 'decorator' => 'htmlcloud',
5 'options' => array(
6 'separator' => "\n\n",
7 'htmlTags' => array(
8 'ul' => array(
9 'class' => 'my_custom_class',
10 'id' => 'tag-cloud',
11 ),
12 ),
13 ),
14 ),

1300 Chapter 271. Creating tag clouds with Zend\Tag\Cloud

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

15 'tags' => array(

16 array(
17 'title' => 'Code',
18 'weight' => 50,
19 'params' => array('url' => '/tag/code'),
20 ),
21 array(
22 'title' => 'Zend Framework',
23 'weight' => 1,
24 'params' => array('url' => '/tag/zend-framework'),
25 ),
26 array(
27 'title' => 'PHP',
28 'weight' => 5,
29 'params' => array('url' => '/tag/php'),
30 ),
31 ),
32 ));
33

34 // Render the cloud

35 echo $cloud;

The ouput:
1 <ul class="my_custom_class" id="tag-cloud"><li><a href="/tag/code" style="font-size: 20px;">Code</a><
2

3 <li><a href="/tag/zend-framework" style="font-size: 10px;">Zend Framework</a></li>

4

5 <li><a href="/tag/php" style="font-size: 11px;">PHP</a></li></ul>

271.1. Decorators 1301

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1302 Chapter 271. Creating tag clouds with Zend\Tag\Cloud

 CHAPTER 272

Introduction to Zend\Test

The Zend\Test component provides tools to facilitate unit testing of your Zend Framework applications. At this
time, we offer facilities to enable testing of your Zend Framework MVC applications.
PHPUnit is the only library supported currently.

1303
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1304 Chapter 272. Introduction to Zend\Test

 CHAPTER 273

Unit testing with PHPUnit

Zend\Test\PHPUnit provides a TestCase for MVC applications that contains assertions for testing against a
variety of responsibilities. Probably the easiest way to understand what it can do is to see an example.
The following is a simple test case for a IndexController to verify things like HTTP code, controller and action name :
1 <?php
2

3 namespace ApplicationTest\Controller;
4

5 use Zend\Test\PHPUnit\Controller\AbstractHttpControllerTestCase;
6

7 class IndexControllerTest extends AbstractHttpControllerTestCase

8 {
9 public function setUp()
10 {
11 $this->setApplicationConfig(
12 include '/path/to/application/config/test/application.config.php'
13 );
14 parent::setUp();
15 }
16

17 public function testIndexActionCanBeAccessed()

18 {
19 $this->dispatch('/');
20 $this->assertResponseStatusCode(200);
21

22 $this->assertModuleName('application');
23 $this->assertControllerName('application_index');
24 $this->assertControllerClass('IndexController');
25 $this->assertMatchedRouteName('home');
26 }
27 }

The setup of the test case can to define the application config. You can use several config to test modules dependencies
or your current application config.

273.1 Setup your TestCase

As noted in the previous example, all MVC test cases should extend AbstractHttpControllerTestCase. This class in
turn extends PHPUnit_Framework_TestCase, and gives you all the structure and assertions youd expect from
PHPUnit as well as some scaffolding and assertions specific to Zend Frameworks MVC implementation.

1305
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

In order to test your MVC application, you will need to setup the application config. Use simply the the
setApplicationConfig method :
1 public function setUp()
2 {
3 $this->setApplicationConfig(
4 include '/path/to/application/config/test/application.config.php'
5 );
6 parent::setUp();
7 }

Once the application is set up, you can write your tests. To help debug tests, you can activate the flag traceError
to throw MVC exception during the tests writing :
1 <?php
2

3 namespace ApplicationTest\Controller;
4

5 use Zend\Test\PHPUnit\Controller\AbstractHttpControllerTestCase;
6

7 class IndexControllerTest extends AbstractHttpControllerTestCase

8 {
9 protected $traceError = true;
10 }

273.2 Testing your Controllers and MVC Applications

Once you have your application config in place, you can begin testing. Testing is basically as you would expect in an
PHPUnit test suite, with a few minor differences.
First, you will need to dispatch a URL to test, using the dispatch method of the TestCase:
1 public function testIndexAction()
2 {
3 $this->dispatch('/');
4 }

There will be times, however, that you need to provide extra information GET and POST variables, COOKIE
information, etc. You can populate the request with that information:
1 public function testIndexAction()
2 {
3 $this->getRequest()
4 ->setMethod('POST')
5 ->setPost(new Parameters(array('argument' => 'value')));
6 $this->dispatch('/');
7 }

You can populate GET or POST variables directly with the dispatch method :
1 public function testIndexAction()
2 {
3 $this->dispatch('/', 'POST', array('argument' => 'value'));
4 }

You can use directly yours query args in the url :

1306 Chapter 273. Unit testing with PHPUnit

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1 public function testIndexAction()

2 {
3 $this->dispatch('/tests?foo=bar&baz=foo');
4 }

Now that the request is made, its time to start making assertions against it.

273.2.1 Assertions

Assertions are at the heart of Unit Testing; you use them to verify that the results are what you expect. To this
end, Zend\Test\PHPUnit\AbstractControllerTestCase provides a number of assertions to make test-
ing your MVC apps and controllers simpler.

Request Assertions

Its often useful to assert against the last run action, controller, and module; additionally, you may want to assert
against the route that was matched. The following assertions can help you in this regard:
assertModulesLoaded(array $modules): Assert that the given modules was loaded by the applica-
tion.
assertModuleName($module): Assert that the given module was used in the last dispatched action.
assertControllerName($controller): Assert that the given controller identifier was selected in the
last dispatched action.
assertControllerClass($controller): Assert that the given controller class was selected in the
last dispatched action.
assertActionName($action): Assert that the given action was last dispatched.
assertMatchedRouteName($route): Assert that the given named route was matched by the router.
Each also has a Not variant for negative assertions.

CSS Selector Assertions

CSS selectors are an easy way to verify that certain artifacts are present in the response content. They also make
it trivial to ensure that items necessary for Javascript UIs and/or AJAX integration will be present; most JS toolkits
provide some mechanism for pulling DOM elements based on CSS selectors, so the syntax would be the same.
This functionality is provided via Zend\Dom\Query, and integrated into a set of Query assertions. Each of these
assertions takes as their first argument a CSS selector, with optionally additional arguments and/or an error message,
based on the assertion type. You can find the rules for writing the CSS selectors in the Zend\Dom\Query Theory of
Operation chapter. Query assertions include:
assertQuery($path): assert that one or more DOM elements matching the given CSS selector are present.
assertQueryContentContains($path, $match): assert that one or more DOM elements matching
the given CSS selector are present, and that at least one contains the content provided in $match.
assertQueryContentRegex($path, $pattern): assert that one or more DOM elements matching
the given CSS selector are present, and that at least one matches the regular expression provided in $pattern. If
a $message is present, it will be prepended to any failed assertion message.
assertQueryCount($path, $count): assert that there are exactly $count DOM elements matching the
given CSS selector present.

273.2. Testing your Controllers and MVC Applications 1307

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

assertQueryCountMin($path, $count): assert that there are at least $count DOM elements match-
ing the given CSS selector present.
assertQueryCountMax($path, $count): assert that there are no more than $count DOM elements
matching the given CSS selector present.
Additionally, each of the above has a Not variant that provides a negative assertion: assertNotQuery(), assertNot-
QueryContentContains(), assertNotQueryContentRegex(), and assertNotQueryCount(). (Note that the min and max
counts do not have these variants, for what should be obvious reasons.)

XPath Assertions

Some developers are more familiar with XPath than with CSS selectors, and thus XPath variants of all the Query
assertions are also provided. These are:
assertXpathQuery($path)
assertNotXpathQuery($path)
assertXpathQueryCount($path, $count)
assertNotXpathQueryCount($path, $count)
assertXpathQueryCountMin($path, $count)
assertXpathQueryCountMax($path, $count)
assertXpathQueryContentContains($path, $match)
assertNotXpathQueryContentContains($path, $match)
assertXpathQueryContentRegex($path, $pattern)
assertNotXpathQueryContentRegex($path, $pattern)

Redirect Assertions

Often an action will redirect. Instead of following the redirect, Zend\Test\PHPUnit\ControllerTestCase

allows you to test for redirects with a handful of assertions.
assertRedirect(): assert simply that a redirect has occurred.
assertRedirectTo($url): assert that a redirect has occurred, and that the value of the Location header
is the $url provided.
assertRedirectRegex($pattern): assert that a redirect has occurred, and that the value of the Loca-
tion header matches the regular expression provided by $pattern.
Each also has a Not variant for negative assertions.

Response Header Assertions

In addition to checking for redirect headers, you will often need to check for specific HTTP response codes and
headers for instance, to determine whether an action results in a 404 or 500 response, or to ensure that JSON
responses contain the appropriate Content-Type header. The following assertions are available.
assertResponseStatusCode($code): assert that the response resulted in the given HTTP response
code.
assertResponseHeader($header): assert that the response contains the given header.

1308 Chapter 273. Unit testing with PHPUnit

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

assertResponseHeaderContains($header, $match): assert that the response contains the given

header and that its content contains the given string.
assertResponseHeaderRegex($header, $pattern): assert that the response contains the given
header and that its content matches the given regex.
Additionally, each of the above assertions have a Not variant for negative assertions.

273.2. Testing your Controllers and MVC Applications 1309

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1310 Chapter 273. Unit testing with PHPUnit

 CHAPTER 274

Zend\Text\Figlet

274.1 Introduction

Zend\Text\Figlet is a component which enables developers to create a so called FIGlet text. A FIGlet text is a
string, which is represented as ASCII art. FIGlets use a special font format, called FLT (FigLet Font). By default, one
standard font is shipped with Zend\Text\Figlet, but you can download additional fonts at http://www.figlet.org.

Note: Compressed fonts

Zend\Text\Figlet supports gzipped fonts. This means that you can take an .flf file and gzip it. To allow
Zend\Text\Figlet to recognize this, the gzipped font must have the extension .gz. Further, to be able to use
gzipped fonts, you have to have enabled the GZIP extension of PHP.

Note: Encoding
Zend\Text\Figlet expects your strings to be UTF-8 encoded by default. If this is not the case, you can supply
the character encoding as second parameter to the render() method.

You can define multiple options for a FIGlet. When instantiating Zend\Text\Figlet\Figlet, you can supply
an array or an instance of Zend\Config.
font- Defines the font which should be used for rendering. If not defines, the built-in font will be used.
outputWidth- Defines the maximum width of the output string. This is used for word-wrap as well as
justification. Beware of too small values, they may result in an undefined behaviour. The default value is 80.
handleParagraphs- A boolean which indicates, how new lines are handled. When set to TRUE, single new
lines are ignored and instead treated as single spaces. Only multiple new lines will be handled as such. The
default value is FALSE.
justification- May be one of the values of Zend\Text\Figlet\Figlet::JUSTIFICATION_*.
There is JUSTIFICATION_LEFT, JUSTIFICATION_CENTER and JUSTIFICATION_RIGHT The de-
fault justification is defined by the rightToLeft value.
rightToLeft- Defines in which direction the text is written. May
be either Zend\Text\Figlet\Figlet::DIRECTION_LEFT_TO_RIGHT or
Zend\Text\Figlet\Figlet::DIRECTION_RIGHT_TO_LEFT. By default the setting of the font
file is used. When justification is not defined, a text written from right-to-left is automatically right-aligned.
smushMode- An integer bitfield which defines, how the single characters are smushed together. Can be
the sum of multiple values from Zend\Text\Figlet\Figlet::SM_*. There are the following smush
modes: SM_EQUAL, SM_LOWLINE, SM_HIERARCHY, SM_PAIR, SM_BIGX, SM_HARDBLANK, SM_KERN
and SM_SMUSH. A value of 0 doesnt disable the entire smushing, but forces SM_KERN to be applied, while a

1311
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

value of -1 disables it. An explanation of the different smush modes can be found here. By default the setting
of the font file is used. The smush mode option is normally used only by font designers testing the various
layoutmodes with a new font.

274.2 Basic Usage

This example illustrates the basic use of Zend\Text\Figlet to create a simple FIGlet text:
1 $figlet = new Zend\Text\Figlet\Figlet();
2 echo $figlet->render('Zend');

Assuming you are using a monospace font, this would look as follows:
1 ______ ______ _ __ ______
2 |__ // | ___|| | \| || | __ \\
3 / // | ||__ | ' || | | \ ||
4 / //__ | ||___ | . || | |__/ ||
5 /_____|| |_____|| |_|\_|| |_____//
6 `-----`' `-----` `-` -`' -----`

1312 Chapter 274. Zend\Text\Figlet

 CHAPTER 275

Zend\Text\Table

275.1 Introduction

Zend\Text\Table is a component to create text based tables on the fly with different decorators. This can be
helpful, if you either want to send structured data in text emails, which are used to have mono-spaced fonts, or to
display table information in a CLI application. Zend\Text\Table supports multi-line columns, colspan and align
as well.

Note: Encoding
Zend\Text\Table expects your strings to be UTF-8 encoded by default. If this is not the
case, you can either supply the character encoding as a parameter to the constructor()
or the setContent() method of Zend\Text\Table\Column. Alternatively if you have
a different encoding in the entire process, you can define the standard input charset with
Zend\Text\Table\Table::setInputCharset($charset). In case you need another output charset for
the table, you can set this with Zend\Text\Table\Table::setOutputCharset($charset).

A Zend\Text\Table\Table object consists of rows, which contain columns, represented by

Zend\Text\Table\Row and Zend\Text\Table\Column. When creating a table, you can supply an
array with options for the table. Those are:
columnWidths (required): An array defining all columns width their widths in characters.
decorator: The decorator to use for the table borders. The default is unicode, but you may also specify ascii
or give an instance of a custom decorator object.
padding: The left and right padding withing the columns in characters. The default padding is zero.
AutoSeparate: The way how the rows are separated with horizontal lines. The default is a separa-
tion between all rows. This is defined as a bitmask containing one ore more of the following constants of
Zend\Text\Table:
Zend\Text\Table\Table::AUTO_SEPARATE_NONE
Zend\Text\Table\Table::AUTO_SEPARATE_HEADER
Zend\Text\Table\Table::AUTO_SEPARATE_FOOTER
Zend\Text\Table\Table::AUTO_SEPARATE_ALL
Where header is always the first row, and the footer is always the last row.
Rows are simply added to the table by creating a new instance of Zend\Text\Table\Row, and appending it to
the table via the appendRow() method. Rows themselves have no options. You can also give an array to directly

1313
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

to the appendRow() method, which then will automatically converted to a row object, containing multiple column
objects.
The same way you can add columns to the rows. Create a new instance of Zend\Text\Table\Column and
then either set the column options in the constructor or later with the set*() methods. The first parameter is the
content of the column which may have multiple lines, which in the best case are separated by just the \n char-
acter. The second parameter defines the align, which is left by default and can be one of the class constants of
Zend\Text\Table\Column:
ALIGN_LEFT
ALIGN_CENTER
ALIGN_RIGHT
The third parameter is the colspan of the column. For example, when you choose 2 as colspan, the column will span
over two columns of the table. The last parameter defines the encoding of the content, which should be supplied, if the
content is neither ASCII nor UTF-8. To append the column to the row, you simply call appendColumn() in your
row object with the column object as parameter. Alternatively you can directly give a string to the appendColumn()
method.
To finally render the table, you can either use the render() method of the table, or use the magic method
__toString() by doing echo $table; or $tableString = (string) $table.

275.2 Basic Usage

This example illustrates the basic use of Zend\Text\Table to create a simple table:
1 $table = new Zend\Text\Table\Table(array('columnWidths' => array(10, 20)));
2

3 // Either simple
4 $table->appendRow(array('Zend', 'Framework'));
5

6 // Or verbose
7 $row = new Zend\Text\Table\Row();
8

9 $row->appendColumn(new Zend\Text\Table\Column('Zend'));
10 $row->appendColumn(new Zend\Text\Table\Column('Framework'));
11

12 $table->appendRow($row);
13

14 echo $table;

This will result in the following output:

1 ------------------------------
2 |Zend |Framework |
3 |----------|--------------------|
4 |Zend |Framework |
5 ------------------------------

1314 Chapter 275. Zend\Text\Table

 CHAPTER 276

Zend\Uri

276.1 Overview

Zend\Uri is a component that aids in manipulating and validating Uniform Resource Identifiers (URIs) 1 .
Zend\Uri exists primarily to service other components, such as Zend\Http\, but is also useful as a standalone
utility.
URIs always begin with a scheme, followed by a colon. The construction of the many different schemes varies
significantly. The Zend\Uri component provides the Zend\Uri\UriFactory that returns a class implementing
the Zend\Uri\UriInterface which specializes in the scheme if such a class is registered with the Factory.

276.2 Creating a New URI

Zend\Uri\UriFactory will build a new URI from scratch if only a scheme is passed to
Zend\Uri\UriFactory::factory().

Creating a New URI with ZendUriUriFactory::factory()

1 // To create a new URI from scratch, pass only the scheme

2 // followed by a colon.
3 $uri = Zend\Uri\UriFactory::factory('http:');
4

5 // $uri instanceof Zend\Uri\UriInterface

To create a new URI from scratch, pass only the scheme followed by a colon to
Zend\Uri\UriFactory::factory() 2 . If an unsupported scheme is passed and no scheme-specific
class is specified, a Zend\Uri\Exception\InvalidArgumentException will be thrown.
If the scheme or URI passed is supported, Zend\Uri\UriFactory::factory() will return a class implement-
ing Zend\Uri\UriInterface that specializes in the scheme to be created.

276.2.1 Creating a New Custom-Class URI

You can specify a custom class to be used when using the Zend\Uri\UriFactory by registering your class with
the Factory using \Zend\Uri\UriFactory::registerScheme() which takes the scheme as first parameter.
1 See http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc3986.txt for more information on URIs
2 At the time of writing, Zend\Uri provides built-in support for the following schemes: HTTP, HTTPS, MAILTO and FILE

1315
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

This enables you to create your own URI-class and instantiate new URI objects based on your own custom classes.
The 2nd parameter passed to Zend\Uri\UriFactory::registerScheme() must be a string with the name
of a class implementing Zend\Uri\UriInterface. The class must either be already loaded, or be loadable by
the autoloader.

Creating a URI using a custom class

1 // Create a new 'ftp' URI based on a custom class

2 use Zend\Uri\UriFactory
3

4 UriFactory::registerScheme('ftp', 'MyNamespace\MyClass');
5

6 $ftpUri = UriFactory::factory(
7 'ftp://[email protected]/path/file'
8 );
9

10 // $ftpUri is an instance of MyLibrary\MyClass, which implements

11 // Zend\Uri\UriInterface

276.3 Manipulating an Existing URI

To manipulate an existing URI, pass the entire URI as string to Zend\Uri\UriFactory::factory().

Manipulating an Existing URI with Zend\Uri\UriFactory::factory()

1 // To manipulate an existing URI, pass it in.

2 $uri = Zend\Uri\UriFactory::factory('http://www.zend.com');
3

4 // $uri instanceof Zend\Uri\UriInterface

The URI will be parsed and validated. If it is found to be invalid, a

Zend\Uri\Exception\InvalidArgumentException will be thrown immediately. Otherwise,
Zend\Uri\UriFactory::factory() will return a class implementing Zend\Uri\UriInterface
that specializes in the scheme to be manipulated.

276.4 Common Instance Methods

The Zend\Uri\UriInterface defines several instance methods that are useful for working with any kind of URI.

276.4.1 Getting the Scheme of the URI

The scheme of the URI is the part of the URI that precedes the colon. For example, the scheme of
http://[email protected]/my/path?query#token is http.

1316 Chapter 276. Zend\Uri

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Getting the Scheme from a Zend\Uri\UriInterface Object

1 $uri = Zend\Uri\UriFactory::factory('mailto:[email protected]');
2

3 $scheme = $uri->getScheme(); // "mailto"

The getScheme() instance method returns only the scheme part of the URI object.

276.4.2 Getting the Userinfo of the URI

The userinfo of the URI is the optional part of the URI that follows the colon and comes before the host-part. For
example, the userinfo of http://[email protected]/my/path?query#token is johndoe.

Getting the Username from a Zend\Uri\UriInterface Object

1 $uri = Zend\Uri\UriFactory::factory('mailto:[email protected]');
2

3 $scheme = $uri->getUserinfo(); // "john.doe"

The getUserinfo() method returns only the userinfo part of the URI object.

276.4.3 Getting the host of the URI

The host of the URI is the optional part of the URI that follows the user-part and comes before the path-part. For
example, the host of http://[email protected]/my/path?query#token is example.com.

Getting the host from a Zend\Uri\UriInterface Object

1 $uri = Zend\Uri\UriFactory::factory('mailto:[email protected]');
2

3 $scheme = $uri->getHost(); // "example.com"

The getHost() method returns only the host part of the URI object.

276.4.4 Getting the port of the URI

The port of the URI is the optional part of the URI that follows the host-part and comes before the path-part. For
example, the host of http://[email protected]:80/my/path?query#token is 80. The URI-class
can define default-ports that can be returned when no port is given in the URI.

Getting the port from a Zend\Uri\UriInterface Object

1 $uri = Zend\Uri\UriFactory::factory('http://example.com:8080');
2

3 $scheme = $uri->getPort(); // "8080"

276.4. Common Instance Methods 1317

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Getting a default port from a Zend\Uri\UriInterface Object

1 $uri = Zend\Uri\UriFactory::factory('http://example.com');
2

3 $scheme = $uri->getPort(); // "80"

The getHost() method returns only the port part of the URI object.

276.4.5 Getting the path of the URI

The path of the URI is the mandatory part of the URI that follows the port and comes before the query-part. For
example, the path of http://[email protected]:80/my/path?query#token is /my/path.

Getting the path from a Zend\Uri\UriInterface Object

1 $uri = Zend\Uri\UriFactory::factory('http://example.com:80/my/path?a=b&c=d#token');
2

3 $scheme = $uri->getPath(); // "/my/path"

The getPath() method returns only the path of the URI object.

276.4.6 Getting the query-part of the URI

The query-part of the URI is the optional part of the URI that follows the path and comes before the fragment. For
example, the query of http://[email protected]:80/my/path?query#token is query.

Getting the query from a Zend\Uri\UriInterface Object

1 $uri = Zend\Uri\UriFactory::factory('http://example.com:80/my/path?a=b&c=d#token');
2

3 $scheme = $uri->getQuery(); // "a=b&c=d"

The getQuery() method returns only the query-part of the URI object.

Getting the query as array from a Zend\Uri\UriInterface Object

1 $uri = Zend\Uri\UriFactory::factory('http://example.com:80/my/path?a=b&c=d#token');
2

3 $scheme = $uri->getQueryAsArray();
4 // array(
5 // 'a' => 'b',
6 // 'c' => 'd',
7 // )

The query-part often contains key=value pairs and therefore can be split into an associative array. This array can be
retrieved using getQueryAsArray()

1318 Chapter 276. Zend\Uri

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

276.4.7 Getting the fragment-part of the URI

The fragment-part of the URI is the optional part of the URI that follows the query. For example, the fragment of
http://[email protected]:80/my/path?query#token is token.

Getting the fragment from a Zend\Uri\UriInterface Object

1 $uri = Zend\Uri\UriFactory::factory('http://example.com:80/my/path?a=b&c=d#token');
2

3 $scheme = $uri->getFragment(); // "token"

The getFragment() method returns only the fragment-part of the URI object.

276.4.8 Getting the Entire URI

Getting the Entire URI from a Zend\Uri\UriInterface Object

1 $uri = Zend\Uri\UriFactory::factory('http://www.zend.com');
2

3 echo $uri->toString(); // "http://www.zend.com"

4

5 // Alternate method:
6 echo (string) $uri; // "http://www.zend.com"

The toString() method returns the string representation of the entire URI.
The Zend\Uri\UriInterface defines also a magic __toString() method that returns the string representa-
tion of the URI when the Object is cast to a string.

276.4.9 Validating the URI

When using Zend\Uri\UriFactory::factory() the given URI will always be validated and a
Zend\Uri\Exception\InvalidArgumentException will be thrown when the URI is invalid. However,
after the Zend\Uri\UriInterface is instantiated for a new URI or an existing valid one, it is possible that the
URI can later become invalid after it is manipulated.

Validating a ZendUri* Object

1 $uri = Zend\Uri\UriFactory::factory('http://www.zend.com');
2

3 $isValid = $uri->isValid(); // TRUE

The isValid() instance method provides a means to check that the URI object is still valid.

276.4. Common Instance Methods 1319

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1320 Chapter 276. Zend\Uri

 CHAPTER 277

Introduction to Zend\Validator

The Zend\Validator component provides a set of commonly needed validators. It also provides a simple validator
chaining mechanism by which multiple validators may be applied to a single datum in a user-defined order.

277.1 What is a validator?

A validator examines its input with respect to some requirements and produces a boolean result - whether the input suc-
cessfully validates against the requirements. If the input does not meet the requirements, a validator may additionally
provide information about which requirement(s) the input does not meet.
For example, a web application might require that a username be between six and twelve characters in length and
may only contain alphanumeric characters. A validator can be used for ensuring that a username meets these require-
ments. If a chosen username does not meet one or both of the requirements, it would be useful to know which of the
requirements the username fails to meet.

277.2 Basic usage of validators

Having defined validation in this way provides the foundation for Zend\Validator\ValidatorInterface,
which defines two methods, isValid() and getMessages(). The isValid() method performs validation
upon the provided value, returning TRUE if and only if the value passes against the validation criteria.
If isValid() returns FALSE, the getMessages() returns an array of messages explaining the reason(s) for
validation failure. The array keys are short strings that identify the reasons for validation failure, and the array values
are the corresponding human-readable string messages. The keys and values are class-dependent; each validation class
defines its own set of validation failure messages and the unique keys that identify them. Each class also has a const
definition that matches each identifier for a validation failure cause.

Note: The getMessages() methods return validation failure information only for the most recent isValid()
call. Each call to isValid() clears any messages and errors caused by a previous isValid() call, because its
likely that each call to isValid() is made for a different input value.

The following example illustrates validation of an e-mail address:

1 $validator = new Zend\Validator\EmailAddress();
2

3 if ($validator->isValid($email)) {
4 // email appears to be valid
5 } else {

1321
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

6 // email is invalid; print the reasons

7 foreach ($validator->getMessages() as $messageId => $message) {
8 echo "Validation failure '$messageId': $message\n";
9 }
10 }

277.3 Customizing messages

Validator classes provide a setMessage() method with which you can specify the format of a message returned
by getMessages() in case of validation failure. The first argument of this method is a string containing the error
message. You can include tokens in this string which will be substituted with data relevant to the validator. The token
%value% is supported by all validators; this is substituted with the value you passed to isValid(). Other tokens
may be supported on a case-by-case basis in each validation class. For example, %max% is a token supported by
Zend\Validator\LessThan. The getMessageVariables() method returns an array of variable tokens
supported by the validator.
The second optional argument is a string that identifies the validation failure message template to be set, which is useful
when a validation class defines more than one cause for failure. If you omit the second argument, setMessage()
assumes the message you specify should be used for the first message template declared in the validation class. Many
validation classes only have one error message template defined, so there is no need to specify which message template
you are changing.
1 $validator = new Zend\Validator\StringLength(8);
2

3 $validator->setMessage(
4 'The string \'%value%\' is too short; it must be at least %min% ' .
5 'characters',
6 Zend\Validator\StringLength::TOO_SHORT);
7

8 if (!$validator->isValid('word')) {
9 $messages = $validator->getMessages();
10 echo current($messages);
11

12 // "The string 'word' is too short; it must be at least 8 characters"

13 }

You can set multiple messages using the setMessages() method. Its argument is an array containing key/message
pairs.
1 $validator = new Zend\Validator\StringLength(array('min' => 8, 'max' => 12));
2

3 $validator->setMessages( array(
4 Zend\Validator\StringLength::TOO_SHORT =>
5 'The string \'%value%\' is too short',
6 Zend\Validator\StringLength::TOO_LONG =>
7 'The string \'%value%\' is too long'
8 ));

If your application requires even greater flexibility with which it reports validation failures, you can access properties
by the same name as the message tokens supported by a given validation class. The value property is always available
in a validator; it is the value you specified as the argument of isValid(). Other properties may be supported on a
case-by-case basis in each validation class.
1 $validator = new Zend\Validator\StringLength(array('min' => 8, 'max' => 12));
2

3 if (!$validator->isValid('word')) {

1322 Chapter 277. Introduction to Zend\Validator

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

4 echo 'Word failed: '

5 . $validator->value
6 . '; its length is not between '
7 . $validator->min
8 . ' and '
9 . $validator->max
10 . "\n";
11 }

277.4 Translating messages

Note: In versions 2.0 - 2.1, Zend\Validator\AbstractValidator implemented

Zend\I18n\Translator\TranslatorAwareInterface and accepted instances of
Zend\I18n\Translator\Translator. Starting in version 2.2.0, Zend\Validator now defines a
translator interface, Zend\Validator\Translator\TranslatorInterface, as well as its own -aware
variant, Zend\Validator\Translator\TranslatorAwareInterface. This was done to reduce
dependencies for the component, and follows the principal of Separated Interfaces.
The upshot is that if you are migrating from a pre-2.2 version, and receiving errors indicating that the translator
provided does not implement Zend\Validator\Translator\TranslatorInterface, you will need to
make a change to your code.
An implementation of Zend\Validator\Translator\TranslatorInterface is provided in
Zend\Mvc\I18n\Translator, which also extends Zend\I18n\Translator\Translator. This
version can be instantiated and used just as the original Zend\I18n version.
A new service has also been registered with the MVC, MvcTranslator, which will return this specialized, bridge
instance.
Most users should see no issues, as Zend\Validator\ValidatorPluginManager has been modified to use
the MvcTranslator service internally, which is how most developers were getting the translator instance into
validators in the first place. You will only need to change code if you were manually injecting the instance previously.

Validator classes provide a setTranslator() method with which you can specify an instance of
Zend\Validator\Translator\TranslatorInterface which will translate the messages in case of a val-
idation failure. The getTranslator() method returns the translator instance. Zend\Mvc\I18n\Translator
provides an implementation compatible with the validator component.
1 $validator = new Zend\Validator\StringLength(array('min' => 8, 'max' => 12));
2 $translate = new Zend\Mvc\Translator\Translator();
3 // configure the translator...
4

5 $validator->setTranslator($translate);

With the static setDefaultTranslator() method you can set a instance of

Zend\Validator\Translator\TranslatorInterface which will be used for all validation classes, and
can be retrieved with getDefaultTranslator(). This prevents you from setting a translator manually for all
validator classes, and simplifies your code.
1 $translate = new Zend\Mvc\I18n\Translator();
2 // configure the translator...
3

4 Zend\Validator\AbstractValidator::setDefaultTranslator($translate);

Sometimes it is necessary to disable the translator within a validator. To achieve this you can use the

277.4. Translating messages 1323

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

setDisableTranslator() method, which accepts a boolean parameter, and isTranslatorDisabled()

to get the set value.
1 $validator = new Zend\Validator\StringLength(array('min' => 8, 'max' => 12));
2 if (!$validator->isTranslatorDisabled()) {
3 $validator->setDisableTranslator();
4 }

It is also possible to use a translator instead of setting own messages with setMessage(). But doing so, you should
keep in mind, that the translator works also on messages you set your own.

1324 Chapter 277. Introduction to Zend\Validator

 CHAPTER 278

Standard Validation Classes

Zend Framework comes with a standard set of validation classes, which are ready for you to use.

278.1 Included Validators

Alnum
Alpha
Barcode
Between
Callback
CreditCard
Date
Db\RecordExists and Db\NoRecordExists
Digits
EmailAddress
File Validation Classes
GreaterThan
Hex
Hostname
Iban
Identical
InArray
Ip
Isbn
IsFloat
IsInt
LessThan
NotEmpty

1325
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

PostCode
Regex
Sitemap
Step
StringLength
Timezone
Uri

278.2 Deprecated Validators

278.2.1 Ccnum

The Ccnum validator has been deprecated in favor of the CreditCard validator. For security reasons you should
use CreditCard instead of Ccnum.

1326 Chapter 278. Standard Validation Classes

 CHAPTER 279

Alnum Validator

Zend\I18n\Validator\Alnum allows you to validate if a given value contains only alphabetical characters and
digits. There is no length limitation for the input you want to validate.

279.1 Supported Options

The following options are supported for Zend\I18n\Validator\Alnum:

allowWhiteSpace: If whitespace characters are allowed. This option defaults to FALSE

279.2 Basic usage

A basic example is the following one:

1 $validator = new Zend\I18n\Validator\Alnum();
2 if ($validator->isValid('Abcd12')) {
3 // value contains only allowed chars
4 } else {
5 // false
6 }

279.3 Using whitespaces

Per default whitespaces are not accepted because they are not part of the alphabet. Still, there is a way to accept them
as input. This allows to validate complete sentences or phrases.
To allow the usage of whitespaces you need to give the allowWhiteSpace option. This can be done while creating
an instance of the validator, or afterwards by using setAllowWhiteSpace(). To get the actual state you can use
getAllowWhiteSpace().
1 $validator = new Zend\I18n\Validator\Alnum(array('allowWhiteSpace' => true));
2 if ($validator->isValid('Abcd and 12')) {
3 // value contains only allowed chars
4 } else {
5 // false
6 }

1327
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

279.4 Using different languages

There are actually 3 languages which are not accepted in their own script. These languages are korean, japanese and
chinese because this languages are using an alphabet where a single character is build by using multiple characters.
In the case you are using these languages, the input will only be validated by using the english alphabet.

1328 Chapter 279. Alnum Validator

 CHAPTER 280

Alpha Validator

Zend\I18n\Validator\Alpha allows you to validate if a given value contains only alphabetical char-
acters. There is no length limitation for the input you want to validate. This validator is related to the
Zend\I18n\Validator\Alnum validator with the exception that it does not accept digits.

280.1 Supported options for Zend\I18n\Validator\Alpha

The following options are supported for Zend\I18n\Validator\Alpha:

allowWhiteSpace: If whitespace characters are allowed. This option defaults to FALSE

280.2 Basic usage

A basic example is the following one:

1 $validator = new Zend\I18n\Validator\Alpha();
2 if ($validator->isValid('Abcd')) {
3 // value contains only allowed chars
4 } else {
5 // false
6 }

280.3 Using whitespaces

Per default whitespaces are not accepted because they are not part of the alphabet. Still, there is a way to accept them
as input. This allows to validate complete sentences or phrases.
To allow the usage of whitespaces you need to give the allowWhiteSpace option. This can be done while creating
an instance of the validator, or afterwards by using setAllowWhiteSpace(). To get the actual state you can use
getAllowWhiteSpace().
1 $validator = new Zend\I18n\Validator\Alpha(array('allowWhiteSpace' => true));
2 if ($validator->isValid('Abcd and efg')) {
3 // value contains only allowed chars
4 } else {
5 // false
6 }

1329
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

280.4 Using different languages

When using Zend\I18n\Validator\Alpha then the language which the user sets within his browser will be
used to set the allowed characters. This means when your user sets de for german then he can also enter characters
like , and additionally to the characters from the english alphabet.
Which characters are allowed depends completely on the used language as every language defines its own set of
characters.
There are actually 3 languages which are not accepted in their own script. These languages are korean, japanese and
chinese because this languages are using an alphabet where a single character is build by using multiple characters.
In the case you are using these languages, the input will only be validated by using the english alphabet.

1330 Chapter 280. Alpha Validator

 CHAPTER 281

Barcode Validator

Zend\Validator\Barcode allows you to check if a given value can be represented as barcode.

Zend\Validator\Barcode supports multiple barcode standards and can be extended with proprietary barcode
implementations very easily. The following barcode standards are supported:
CODABAR: Also known as Code-a-bar.
This barcode has no length limitation. It supports only digits, and 6 special chars. Codabar is a self-checking
barcode. This standard is very old. Common use cases are within airbills or photo labs where multi-part forms
are used with dot-matrix printers.
CODE128: CODE128 is a high density barcode.
This barcode has no length limitation. It supports the first 128 ascii characters. When used with printing
characters it has an checksum which is calculated modulo 103. This standard is used worldwide as it supports
upper and lowercase characters.
CODE25: Often called two of five or Code25 Industrial.
This barcode has no length limitation. It supports only digits, and the last digit can be an optional checksum
which is calculated with modulo 10. This standard is very old and nowadays not often used. Common use cases
are within the industry.
CODE25INTERLEAVED: Often called Code 2 of 5 Interleaved.
This standard is a variant of CODE25. It has no length limitation, but it must contain an even amount of
characters. It supports only digits, and the last digit can be an optional checksum which is calculated with
modulo 10. It is used worldwide and common on the market.
CODE39: CODE39 is one of the oldest available codes.
This barcode has a variable length. It supports digits, upper cased alphabetical characters and 7 special characters
like whitespace, point and dollar sign. It can have an optional checksum which is calculated with modulo 43.
This standard is used worldwide and common within the industry.
CODE39EXT: CODE39EXT is an extension of CODE39.
This barcode has the same properties as CODE39. Additionally it allows the usage of all 128 ASCII characters.
This standard is used worldwide and common within the industry.
CODE93: CODE93 is the successor of CODE39.
This barcode has a variable length. It supports digits, alphabetical characters and 7 special characters. It has
an optional checksum which is calculated with modulo 47 and contains 2 characters. This standard produces a
denser code than CODE39 and is more secure.

1331
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

CODE93EXT: CODE93EXT is an extension of CODE93.

This barcode has the same properties as CODE93. Additionally it allows the usage of all 128 ASCII characters.
This standard is used worldwide and common within the industry.
EAN2: EAN is the shortcut for European Article Number.
These barcode must have 2 characters. It supports only digits and does not have a checksum. This standard is
mainly used as addition to EAN13 (ISBN) when printed on books.
EAN5: EAN is the shortcut for European Article Number.
These barcode must have 5 characters. It supports only digits and does not have a checksum. This standard is
mainly used as addition to EAN13 (ISBN) when printed on books.
EAN8: EAN is the shortcut for European Article Number.
These barcode can have 7 or 8 characters. It supports only digits. When it has a length of 8 characters it includes
a checksum. This standard is used worldwide but has a very limited range. It can be found on small articles
where a longer barcode could not be printed.
EAN12: EAN is the shortcut for European Article Number.
This barcode must have a length of 12 characters. It supports only digits, and the last digit is always a checksum
which is calculated with modulo 10. This standard is used within the USA and common on the market. It has
been superseded by EAN13.
EAN13: EAN is the shortcut for European Article Number.
This barcode must have a length of 13 characters. It supports only digits, and the last digit is always a checksum
which is calculated with modulo 10. This standard is used worldwide and common on the market.
EAN14: EAN is the shortcut for European Article Number.
This barcode must have a length of 14 characters. It supports only digits, and the last digit is always a checksum
which is calculated with modulo 10. This standard is used worldwide and common on the market. It is the
successor for EAN13.
EAN18: EAN is the shortcut for European Article Number.
This barcode must have a length of 18 characters. It support only digits. The last digit is always a checksum
digit which is calculated with modulo 10. This code is often used for the identification of shipping containers.
GTIN12: GTIN is the shortcut for Global Trade Item Number.
This barcode uses the same standard as EAN12 and is its successor. Its commonly used within the USA.
GTIN13: GTIN is the shortcut for Global Trade Item Number.
This barcode uses the same standard as EAN13 and is its successor. It is used worldwide by industry.
GTIN14: GTIN is the shortcut for Global Trade Item Number.
This barcode uses the same standard as EAN14 and is its successor. It is used worldwide and common on the
market.
IDENTCODE: Identcode is used by Deutsche Post and DHL. Its an specialized implementation of Code25.
This barcode must have a length of 12 characters. It supports only digits, and the last digit is always a checksum
which is calculated with modulo 10. This standard is mainly used by the companies DP and DHL.
INTELLIGENTMAIL: Intelligent Mail is a postal barcode.
This barcode can have a length of 20, 25, 29 or 31 characters. It supports only digits, and contains no checksum.
This standard is the successor of PLANET and POSTNET. It is mainly used by the United States Postal Services.

1332 Chapter 281. Barcode Validator

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

ISSN: ISSN is the abbreviation for International Standard Serial Number.

This barcode can have a length of 8 or 13 characters. It supports only digits, and the last digit must be a
checksum digit which is calculated with modulo 11. It is used worldwide for printed publications.
ITF14: ITF14 is the GS1 implementation of an Interleaved Two of Five bar code.
This barcode is a special variant of Interleaved 2 of 5. It must have a length of 14 characters and is based on
GTIN14. It supports only digits, and the last digit must be a checksum digit which is calculated with modulo
10. It is used worldwide and common within the market.
LEITCODE: Leitcode is used by Deutsche Post and DHL. Its an specialized implementation of Code25.
This barcode must have a length of 14 characters. It supports only digits, and the last digit is always a checksum
which is calculated with modulo 10. This standard is mainly used by the companies DP and DHL.
PLANET: Planet is the abbreviation for Postal Alpha Numeric Encoding Technique.
This barcode can have a length of 12 or 14 characters. It supports only digits, and the last digit is always a
checksum. This standard is mainly used by the United States Postal Services.
POSTNET: Postnet is used by the US Postal Service.
This barcode can have a length of 6, 7, 10 or 12 characters. It supports only digits, and the last digit is always a
checksum. This standard is mainly used by the United States Postal Services.
ROYALMAIL: Royalmail is used by Royal Mail.
This barcode has no defined length. It supports digits, uppercase letters, and the last digit is always a checksum.
This standard is mainly used by Royal Mail for their Cleanmail Service. It is also called RM4SCC.
SSCC: SSCC is the shortcut for Serial Shipping Container Code.
This barcode is a variant of EAN barcode. It must have a length of 18 characters and supports only digits. The
last digit must be a checksum digit which is calculated with modulo 10. It is commonly used by the transport
industry.
UPCA: UPC is the shortcut for Universal Product Code.
This barcode preceded EAN13. It must have a length of 12 characters and supports only digits. The last digit
must be a checksum digit which is calculated with modulo 10. It is commonly used within the USA.
UPCE: UPCE is the short variant from UPCA.
This barcode is a smaller variant of UPCA. It can have a length of 6, 7 or 8 characters and supports only digits.
When the barcode is 8 chars long it includes a checksum which is calculated with modulo 10. It is commonly
used with small products where a UPCA barcode would not fit.

281.1 Supported options for Zend\Validator\Barcode

The following options are supported for Zend\Validator\Barcode:

adapter: Sets the barcode adapter which will be used. Supported are all above noted adapters. When using a
self defined adapter, then you have to set the complete class name.
checksum: TRUE when the barcode should contain a checksum. The default value depends on the used adapter.
Note that some adapters dont allow to set this option.
options: Defines optional options for a self written adapters.

281.1. Supported options for Zend\Validator\Barcode 1333

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

281.2 Basic usage

To validate if a given string is a barcode you just need to know its type. See the following example for an EAN13
barcode:
1 $valid = new Zend\Validator\Barcode('EAN13');
2 if ($valid->isValid($input)) {
3 // input appears to be valid
4 } else {
5 // input is invalid
6 }

281.3 Optional checksum

Some barcodes can be provided with an optional checksum. These barcodes would be valid even without checksum.
Still, when you provide a checksum, then you should also validate it. By default, these barcode types perform no
checksum validation. By using the checksum option you can define if the checksum will be validated or ignored.
1 $valid = new Zend\Validator\Barcode(array(
2 'adapter' => 'EAN13',
3 'checksum' => false,
4 ));
5 if ($valid->isValid($input)) {
6 // input appears to be valid
7 } else {
8 // input is invalid
9 }

Note: Reduced security by disabling checksum validation

By switching off checksum validation you will also reduce the security of the used barcodes. Additionally you should
note that you can also turn off the checksum validation for those barcode types which must contain a checksum value.
Barcodes which would not be valid could then be returned as valid even if they are not.

281.4 Writing custom adapters

You may write custom barcode validators for usage with Zend\Validator\Barcode; this is often necessary when
dealing with proprietary barcode types. To write your own barcode validator, you need the following information.
Length: The length your barcode must have. It can have one of the following values:
Integer: A value greater 0, which means that the barcode must have this length.
-1: There is no limitation for the length of this barcode.
even: The length of this barcode must have a even amount of digits.
odd: The length of this barcode must have a odd amount of digits.
array: An array of integer values. The length of this barcode must have one of the set array values.
Characters: A string which contains all allowed characters for this barcode. Also the integer value 128 is
allowed, which means the first 128 characters of the ASCII table.
Checksum: A string which will be used as callback for a method which does the checksum validation.

1334 Chapter 281. Barcode Validator

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Your custom barcode validator must extend Zend\Validator\Barcode\AbstractAdapter or implement

Zend\Validator\Barcode\AdapterInterface.
As an example, lets create a validator that expects an even number of characters that include all digits and the letters
ABCDE, and which requires a checksum.
1 class My\Barcode\MyBar extends Zend\Validator\Barcode\AbstractAdapter
2 {
3 protected $length = 'even';
4 protected $characters = '0123456789ABCDE';
5 protected $checksum = 'mod66';
6

7 protected function mod66($barcode)

8 {
9 // do some validations and return a boolean
10 }
11 }
12

13 $valid = new Zend\Validator\Barcode('My\Barcode\MyBar');

14 if ($valid->isValid($input)) {
15 // input appears to be valid
16 } else {
17 // input is invalid
18 }

281.4. Writing custom adapters 1335

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1336 Chapter 281. Barcode Validator

 CHAPTER 282

Between Validator

Zend\Validator\Between allows you to validate if a given value is between two other values.

Note: Zend\Validator\Between supports only number validation

It should be noted that Zend\Validator\Between supports only the validation of numbers. Strings or dates can
not be validated with this validator.

282.1 Supported options for Zend\Validator\Between

The following options are supported for Zend\Validator\Between:

inclusive: Defines if the validation is inclusive the minimum and maximum border values or exclusive. It
defaults to TRUE.
max: Sets the maximum border for the validation.
min: Sets the minimum border for the validation.

282.2 Default behaviour for Zend\Validator\Between

Per default this validator checks if a value is between min and max where both border values are allowed as value.
1 $valid = new Zend\Validator\Between(array('min' => 0, 'max' => 10));
2 $value = 10;
3 $result = $valid->isValid($value);
4 // returns true

In the above example the result is TRUE due to the reason that per default the search is inclusively the border values.
This means in our case that any value from 0 to 10 is allowed. And values like -1 and 11 will return FALSE.

282.3 Validation exclusive the border values

Sometimes it is useful to validate a value by excluding the border values. See the following example:
1 $valid = new Zend\Validator\Between(
2 array(
3 'min' => 0,

1337
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

4 'max' => 10,

5 'inclusive' => false
6 )
7 );
8 $value = 10;
9 $result = $valid->isValid($value);
10 // returns false

The example is almost equal to our first example but we excluded the border value. Now the values 0 and 10 are
no longer allowed and will return FALSE.

1338 Chapter 282. Between Validator

 CHAPTER 283

Callback Validator

Zend\Validator\Callback allows you to provide a callback with which to validate a given value.

283.1 Supported options for Zend\Validator\Callback

The following options are supported for Zend\Validator\Callback:

callback: Sets the callback which will be called for the validation.
options: Sets the additional options which will be given to the callback.

283.2 Basic usage

The simplest usecase is to have a single function and use it as a callback. Lets expect we have the following function.
1 function myMethod($value)
2 {
3 // some validation
4 return true;
5 }

To use it within Zend\Validator\Callback you just have to call it this way:

1 $valid = new Zend\Validator\Callback('myMethod');
2 if ($valid->isValid($input)) {
3 // input appears to be valid
4 } else {
5 // input is invalid
6 }

283.3 Usage with closures

PHP 5.3 introduces closures, which are basically self-contained or anonymous functions. PHP considers closures
another form of callback, and, as such, may be used with Zend\Validator\Callback. As an example:
1 $valid = new Zend\Validator\Callback(function($value){
2 // some validation
3 return true;

1339
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

4 });
5

6 if ($valid->isValid($input)) {
7 // input appears to be valid
8 } else {
9 // input is invalid
10 }

283.4 Usage with class-based callbacks

Of course its also possible to use a class method as callback. Lets expect we have the following class method:
1 class MyClass
2 {
3 public function myMethod($value)
4 {
5 // some validation
6 return true;
7 }
8 }

The definition of the callback is in this case almost the same. You have just to create an instance of the class before
the method and create an array describing the callback:
1 $object = new MyClass;
2 $valid = new Zend\Validator\Callback(array($object, 'myMethod'));
3 if ($valid->isValid($input)) {
4 // input appears to be valid
5 } else {
6 // input is invalid
7 }

You may also define a static method as a callback. Consider the following class definition and validator usage:
1 class MyClass
2 {
3 public static function test($value)
4 {
5 // some validation
6 return true;
7 }
8 }
9

10 $valid = new Zend\Validator\Callback(array('MyClass', 'test'));

11 if ($valid->isValid($input)) {
12 // input appears to be valid
13 } else {
14 // input is invalid
15 }

Finally, if you are using PHP 5.3, you may define the magic method __invoke() in your class. If you do so, simply
providing an instance of the class as the callback will also work:
1 class MyClass
2 {
3 public function __invoke($value)
4 {

1340 Chapter 283. Callback Validator

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

5 // some validation
6 return true;
7 }
8 }
9

10 $object = new MyClass();

11 $valid = new Zend\Validator\Callback($object);
12 if ($valid->isValid($input)) {
13 // input appears to be valid
14 } else {
15 // input is invalid
16 }

283.5 Adding options

Zend\Validator\Callback also allows the usage of options which are provided as additional arguments to the
callback.
Consider the following class and method definition:
1 class MyClass
2 {
3 function myMethod($value, $option)
4 {
5 // some validation
6 return true;
7 }
8

9 //if a context is present

10 function myMethod($value, $context, $option)
11 {
12 // some validation
13 return true;
14 }
15

16 }

There are two ways to inform the validator of additional options: pass them in the constructor, or pass them to the
setOptions() method.
To pass them to the constructor, you would need to pass an array containing two keys, callback and callbackOp-
tions:
1 $valid = new Zend\Validator\Callback(array(
2 'callback' => array('MyClass', 'myMethod'),
3 'callbackOptions' => $options,
4 ));
5

6 if ($valid->isValid($input)) {
7 // input appears to be valid
8 } else {
9 // input is invalid
10 }

Otherwise, you may pass them to the validator after instantiation:

283.5. Adding options 1341

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1 $valid = new Zend\Validator\Callback(array('MyClass', 'myMethod'));

2 $valid->setOptions($options);
3

4 if ($valid->isValid($input)) {
5 // input appears to be valid
6 } else {
7 // input is invalid
8 }

When there are additional values given to isValid() then these values will be added immediately after $value.
1 $valid = new Zend\Validator\Callback(array('MyClass', 'myMethod'));
2 $valid->setOptions($options);
3

4 if ($valid->isValid($input, $additional)) {
5 // input appears to be valid
6 } else {
7 // input is invalid
8 }

When making the call to the callback, the value to be validated will always be passed as the first argument to the
callback followed by all other values given to isValid(); all other options will follow it. The amount and type of
options which can be used is not limited.

1342 Chapter 283. Callback Validator

 CHAPTER 284

Date Validator

Zend\Validator\Date allows you to validate if a given value contains a date.

284.1 Supported options for Zend\Validator\Date

The following options are supported for Zend\Validator\Date:

format: Sets the format which is used to write the date.
locale: Sets the locale which will be used to validate date values.

284.2 Default date validation

The easiest way to validate a date is by using the default date format. It is used when no format has been given.
1 $validator = new Zend\Validator\Date();
2

3 $validator->isValid('2000-10-10'); // returns true

4 $validator->isValid('10.10.2000'); // returns false

The default date format for Zend\Validator\Date is yyyy-MM-dd.

284.3 Self defined date validation

Zend\Validator\Date supports also self defined date formats. When you want to validate such a date you can
use the format option. This option accepts format as specified in the standard PHP function date().
1 $validator = new Zend\Validator\Date(array('format' => 'Y'));
2

3 $validator->isValid('2010'); // returns true

4 $validator->isValid('May'); // returns false

1343
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1344 Chapter 284. Date Validator

 CHAPTER 285

Db\RecordExists and Db\NoRecordExists Validators

Zend\Validator\Db\RecordExists and Zend\Validator\Db\NoRecordExists provide a means to

test whether a record exists in a given table of a database, with a given value.

285.1 Supported options for Zend\Validator\Db\*

The following options are supported for Zend\Validator\Db\NoRecordExists and

Zend\Validator\Db\RecordExists:
adapter: The database adapter that will be used for the search.
exclude: Sets records that will be excluded from the search.
field: The database field within this table that will be searched for the record.
schema: Sets the schema that will be used for the search.
table: The table that will be searched for the record.

Note: In ZF1 it was possible to set an application wide default database adapter that was consumed by this class. As
this is not possible in ZF2, it is now always required to supply an adapter.

285.2 Basic usage

An example of basic usage of the validators:

1 //Check that the email address exists in the database
2 $validator = new Zend\Validator\Db\RecordExists(
3 array(
4 'table' => 'users',
5 'field' => 'emailaddress',
6 'adapter' => $dbAdapter
7 )
8 );
9

10 if ($validator->isValid($emailaddress)) {
11 // email address appears to be valid
12 } else {
13 // email address is invalid; print the reasons
14 foreach ($validator->getMessages() as $message) {

1345
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

15 echo "$message\n";
16 }
17 }

The above will test that a given email address is in the database table. If no record is found containing the value of
$emailaddress in the specified column, then an error message is displayed.
1 //Check that the username is not present in the database
2 $validator = new Zend\Validator\Db\NoRecordExists(
3 array(
4 'table' => 'users',
5 'field' => 'username',
6 'adapter' => $dbAdapter
7 )
8 );
9 if ($validator->isValid($username)) {
10 // username appears to be valid
11 } else {
12 // username is invalid; print the reason
13 $messages = $validator->getMessages();
14 foreach ($messages as $message) {
15 echo "$message\n";
16 }
17 }

The above will test that a given username is not in the database table. If a record is found containing the value of
$username in the specified column, then an error message is displayed.

285.3 Excluding records

Zend\Validator\Db\RecordExists and Zend\Validator\Db\NoRecordExists also provide a

means to test the database, excluding a part of the table, either by providing a where clause as a string, or an ar-
ray with the keys field and value.
When providing an array for the exclude clause, the != operator is used, so you can check the rest of a table for a value
before altering a record (for example on a user profile form)
1 //Check no other users have the username
2 $user_id = $user->getId();
3 $validator = new Zend\Validator\Db\NoRecordExists(
4 array(
5 'table' => 'users',
6 'field' => 'username',
7 'exclude' => array(
8 'field' => 'id',
9 'value' => $user_id
10 )
11 )
12 );
13

14 if ($validator->isValid($username)) {
15 // username appears to be valid
16 } else {
17 // username is invalid; print the reason
18 $messages = $validator->getMessages();
19 foreach ($messages as $message) {
20 echo "$message\n";

1346 Chapter 285. Db\RecordExists and Db\NoRecordExists Validators

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

21 }
22 }

The above example will check the table to ensure no records other than the one where id = $user_id contains the
value $username.
You can also provide a string to the exclude clause so you can use an operator other than !=. This can be useful for
testing against composite keys.
1 $email = '[email protected]';
2 $clause = $dbAdapter->quoteIdentifier('email') . ' = ' . $dbAdapter->quoteValue($email);
3 $validator = new Zend\Validator\Db\RecordExists(
4 array(
5 'table' => 'users',
6 'field' => 'username',
7 'adapter' => $dbAdapter,
8 'exclude' => $clause
9 )
10 );
11

12 if ($validator->isValid($username)) {
13 // username appears to be valid
14 } else {
15 // username is invalid; print the reason
16 $messages = $validator->getMessages();
17 foreach ($messages as $message) {
18 echo "$message\n";
19 }
20 }

The above example will check the users table to ensure that only a record with both the username $username and
with the email $email is valid.

285.4 Database Schemas

You can specify a schema within your database for adapters such as PostgreSQL and DB/2 by simply supplying an
array with table and schema keys. As in the example below:
1 $validator = new Zend\Validator\Db\RecordExists(
2 array(
3 'table' => 'users',
4 'schema' => 'my',
5 'field' => 'id'
6 )
7 );

285.5 Using a Select object

It is also possible to supply the validators with a Zend\Db\Sql\Select object in place of options. The validator
then uses this object instead of building its own. This allows for greater flexibility with selection of records used for
validation.
1 $select = new Zend\Db\Sql\Select();
2 $select->from('users')

285.4. Database Schemas 1347

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

3 ->where->equalTo('id', $user_id)
4 ->where->equalTo('email', $email);
5

6 $validator = new Zend\Validator\Db\RecordExists($select);

7

8 // We still need to set our database adapter

9 $validator->setAdapter($dbAdapter);
10

11 // Validation is then performed as usual

12 if ($validator->isValid($username)) {
13 // username appears to be valid
14 } else {
15 // username is invalid; print the reason
16 $messages = $validator->getMessages();
17 foreach ($messages as $message) {
18 echo "$message\n";
19 }
20 }
21

22 The above example will check the 'users' table to ensure that only a record with both the username ``
23 and with the email ``$email`` is valid.

1348 Chapter 285. Db\RecordExists and Db\NoRecordExists Validators

 CHAPTER 286

Digits Validator

Zend\Validator\Digits validates if a given value contains only digits.

286.1 Supported options for Zend\Validator\Digits

There are no additional options for Zend\Validator\Digits:

286.2 Validating digits

To validate if a given value contains only digits and no other characters, simply call the validator like shown in this
example:
1 $validator = new Zend\Validator\Digits();
2

3 $validator->isValid("1234567890"); // returns true

4 $validator->isValid(1234); // returns true
5 $validator->isValid('1a234'); // returns false

Note: Validating numbers

When you want to validate numbers or numeric values, be aware that this validator only validates digits. This means
that any other sign like a thousand separator or a comma will not pass this validator. In this case you should use
Zend\I18n\Validator\Int or Zend\I18n\Validator\Float.

1349
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1350 Chapter 286. Digits Validator

 CHAPTER 287

File Validation Classes

Zend Framework comes with a set of classes for validating files, such as file size validation and CRC checking.

Note: All of the File validators filter() methods support both a file path string or a $_FILES array as the
supplied argument. When a $_FILES array is passed in, the tmp_name is used for the file path.

287.1 Crc32

Zend\Validator\File\Crc32 allows you to validate if a given files hashed contents matches the supplied
crc32 hash(es). It is subclassed from the Hash validator to provide a convenient validator that only supports the
crc32 algorithm.

Note: This validator requires the Hash extension from PHP with the crc32 algorithm.

287.1.1 Supported Options

The following set of options are supported:

hash (string) Hash to test the file against.

287.1.2 Usage Examples

1 // Does file have the given hash?

2 $validator = new \Zend\Validator\File\Crc32('3b3652f');
3

4 // Or, check file against multiple hashes

5 $validator = new \Zend\Validator\File\Crc32(array('3b3652f', 'e612b69'));
6

7 // Perform validation with file path

8 if ($validator->isValid('./myfile.txt')) {
9 // file is valid
10 }

1351
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

287.1.3 Public Methods

getCrc32()
Returns the current set of crc32 hashes.
Return type array
addCrc32(string|array $options)
Adds a crc32 hash for one or multiple files to the internal set of hashes.
Parameters $options See Supported Options section for more information.
setCrc32(string|array $options)
Sets a crc32 hash for one or multiple files. Removes any previously set hashes.
Parameters $options See Supported Options section for more information.

287.2 ExcludeExtension

Zend\Validator\File\ExcludeExtension checks the extension of files. It will assert false when a given
file has one the a defined extensions.
This validator is inversely related to the Extension validator.
Please refer to the Extension validator for options and usage examples.

287.3 ExcludeMimeType

Zend\Validator\File\ExcludeMimeType checks the MIME type of files. It will assert false when a
given file has one the a defined MIME types.
This validator is inversely related to the MimeType validator.
Please refer to the MimeType validator for options and usage examples.

287.4 Exists

Zend\Validator\File\Exists checks for the existence of files in specified directories.

This validator is inversely related to the NotExists validator.

287.4.1 Supported Options

The following set of options are supported:

directory (string|array) Comma-delimited string (or array) of directories.

287.4.2 Usage Examples

1352 Chapter 287. File Validation Classes

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1 // Only allow files that exist in ~both~ directories

2 $validator = new \Zend\Validator\File\Exists('/tmp,/var/tmp');
3

4 // ...or with array notation

5 $validator = new \Zend\Validator\File\Exists(array('/tmp', '/var/tmp'));
6

7 // Perform validation
8 if ($validator->isValid('/tmp/myfile.txt')) {
9 // file is valid
10 }

Note: This validator checks whether the specified file exists in all of the given directories. The validation will fail if
the file does not exist in one (or more) of the given directories.

287.5 Extension

Zend\Validator\File\Extension checks the extension of files. It will assert true when a given file has one
the a defined extensions.
This validator is inversely related to the ExcludeExtension validator.

287.5.1 Supported Options

The following set of options are supported:

extension (string|array) Comma-delimited string (or array) of extensions to test against.
case (boolean) default: "false" Should comparison of extensions be case-sensitive?

287.5.2 Usage Examples

1 // Allow files with 'php' or 'exe' extensions

2 $validator = new \Zend\Validator\File\Extension('php,exe');
3

4 // ...or with array notation

5 $validator = new \Zend\Validator\File\Extension(array('php', 'exe'));
6

7 // Test with case-sensitivity on

8 $validator = new \Zend\Validator\File\Extension(array('php', 'exe'), true);
9

10 // Perform validation
11 if ($validator->isValid('./myfile.php')) {
12 // file is valid
13 }

287.5.3 Public Methods

addExtension(string|array $options)
Adds extension(s) via a comma-delimited string or an array.

287.5. Extension 1353

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

287.6 Hash

Zend\Validator\File\Hash allows you to validate if a given files hashed contents matches the supplied
hash(es) and algorithm(s).

Note: This validator requires the Hash extension from PHP. A list of supported hash algorithms can be found with
the hash_algos() function.

287.6.1 Supported Options

The following set of options are supported:

hash (string) Hash to test the file against.
algorithm (string) default: "crc32" Algorithm to use for the hashing validation.

287.6.2 Usage Examples

1 // Does file have the given hash?

2 $validator = new \Zend\Validator\File\Hash('3b3652f', 'crc32');
3

4 // Or, check file against multiple hashes

5 $validator = new \Zend\Validator\File\Hash(array('3b3652f', 'e612b69'), 'crc32');
6

7 // Perform validation with file path

8 if ($validator->isValid('./myfile.txt')) {
9 // file is valid
10 }

287.6.3 Public Methods

getHash()
Returns the current set of hashes.
Return type array
addHash(string|array $options)
Adds a hash for one or multiple files to the internal set of hashes.
Parameters $options See Supported Options section for more information.
setHash(string|array $options)
Sets a hash for one or multiple files. Removes any previously set hashes.
Parameters $options See Supported Options section for more information.

287.7 ImageSize

Zend\Validator\File\ImageSize checks the size of image files. Minimum and/or maximum dimensions
can be set to validate against.

1354 Chapter 287. File Validation Classes

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

287.7.1 Supported Options

The following set of options are supported:

minWidth (int|null) default: null
minHeight (int|null) default: null
maxWidth (int|null) default: null
maxHeight (int|null) default: null To bypass validation of a particular dimension, the relevant
option should be set to null.

287.7.2 Usage Examples

1 // Is image size between 320x200 (min) and 640x480 (max)?

2 $validator = new \Zend\Validator\File\ImageSize(320, 200, 640, 480);
3

4 // ...or with array notation

5 $validator = new \Zend\Validator\File\ImageSize(array(
6 'minWidth' => 320, 'minHeight' => 200,
7 'maxWidth' => 640, 'maxHeight' => 480,
8 ));
9

10 // Is image size equal to or larger than 320x200?

11 $validator = new \Zend\Validator\File\ImageSize(array(
12 'minWidth' => 320, 'minHeight' => 200,
13 ));
14

15 // Is image size equal to or smaller than 640x480?

16 $validator = new \Zend\Validator\File\ImageSize(array(
17 'maxWidth' => 640, 'maxHeight' => 480,
18 ));
19

20 // Perform validation with file path

21 if ($validator->isValid('./myfile.jpg')) {
22 // file is valid
23 }

287.7.3 Public Methods

getImageMin()
Returns the minimum dimensions (width and height)
Return type array
getImageMax()
Returns the maximum dimensions (width and height)
Return type array

287.8 IsCompressed

Zend\Validator\File\IsCompressed checks if a file is a compressed archive, such as zip or gzip. This

validator is based on the MimeType validator and supports the same methods and options.

287.8. IsCompressed 1355

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

The default list of compressed file MIME types can be found in the source code.
Please refer to the MimeType validator for options and public methods.

287.8.1 Usage Examples

1 $validator = new \Zend\Validator\File\IsCompressed();

2 if ($validator->isValid('./myfile.zip')) {
3 // file is valid
4 }

287.9 IsImage

Zend\Validator\File\IsImage checks if a file is an image, such as jpg or png. This validator is based on the
MimeType validator and supports the same methods and options.
The default list of image file MIME types can be found in the source code.
Please refer to the MimeType validator for options and public methods.

287.9.1 Usage Examples

1 $validator = new \Zend\Validator\File\IsImage();

2 if ($validator->isValid('./myfile.jpg')) {
3 // file is valid
4 }

287.10 Md5

Zend\Validator\File\Md5 allows you to validate if a given files hashed contents matches the supplied md5
hash(es). It is subclassed from the Hash validator to provide a convenient validator that only supports the md5
algorithm.

Note: This validator requires the Hash extension from PHP with the md5 algorithm.

287.10.1 Supported Options

The following set of options are supported:

hash (string) Hash to test the file against.

287.10.2 Usage Examples

1 // Does file have the given hash?

2 $validator = new \Zend\Validator\File\Md5('3b3652f336522365223');
3

4 // Or, check file against multiple hashes

5 $validator = new \Zend\Validator\File\Md5(array(

1356 Chapter 287. File Validation Classes

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

6 '3b3652f336522365223', 'eb3365f3365ddc65365'
7 ));
8

9 // Perform validation with file path

10 if ($validator->isValid('./myfile.txt')) {
11 // file is valid
12 }

287.10.3 Public Methods

getMd5()
Returns the current set of md5 hashes.
Return type array
addMd5(string|array $options)
Adds a md5 hash for one or multiple files to the internal set of hashes.
Parameters $options See Supported Options section for more information.
setMd5(string|array $options)
Sets a md5 hash for one or multiple files. Removes any previously set hashes.
Parameters $options See Supported Options section for more information.

287.11 MimeType

Zend\Validator\File\MimeType checks the MIME type of files. It will assert true when a given file has
one the a defined MIME types.
This validator is inversely related to the ExcludeMimeType validator.

Note: This component will use the FileInfo extension if it is available. If its not, it will degrade to the
mime_content_type() function. And if the function call fails it will use the MIME type which is given by HTTP.
You should be aware of possible security problems when you do not have FileInfo or mime_content_type()
available. The MIME type given by HTTP is not secure and can be easily manipulated.

287.11.1 Supported Options

The following set of options are supported:

mimeType (string|array) Comma-delimited string (or array) of MIME types to test against.
magicFile (string|null) default: "MAGIC" constant Specify the location of the magicfile to
use. By default the MAGIC constant value will be used.
enableHeaderCheck (boolean) default: "false" Check the HTTP Information for the file type
when the fileInfo or mimeMagic extensions can not be found.

287.11.2 Usage Examples

287.11. MimeType 1357

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1 // Only allow 'gif' or 'jpg' files

2 $validator = new \Zend\Validator\File\MimeType('image/gif,image/jpg');
3

4 // ...or with array notation

5 $validator = new \Zend\Validator\File\MimeType(array('image/gif', 'image/jpg'));
6

7 // ...or restrict an entire group of types

8 $validator = new \Zend\Validator\File\MimeType(array('image', 'audio'));
9

10 // Use a different magicFile

11 $validator = new \Zend\Validator\File\MimeType(array(
12 'image/gif', 'image/jpg',
13 'magicFile' => '/path/to/magicfile.mgx'
14 ));
15

16 // Use the HTTP information for the file type

17 $validator = new \Zend\Validator\File\MimeType(array(
18 'image/gif', 'image/jpg',
19 'enableHeaderCheck' => true
20 ));
21

22 // Perform validation
23 if ($validator->isValid('./myfile.jpg')) {
24 // file is valid
25 }

Warning: Allowing groups of MIME types will accept all members of this group even if your application does
not support them. When you allow image you also allow image/xpixmap and image/vasa which could be
problematic.

287.12 NotExists

Zend\Validator\File\NotExists checks for the existence of files in specified directories.

This validator is inversely related to the Exists validator.

287.12.1 Supported Options

The following set of options are supported:

directory (string|array) Comma-delimited string (or array) of directories.

287.12.2 Usage Examples

1 // Only allow files that do not exist in ~either~ directories

2 $validator = new \Zend\Validator\File\NotExists('/tmp,/var/tmp');
3

4 // ...or with array notation

5 $validator = new \Zend\Validator\File\NotExists(array('/tmp', '/var/tmp'));
6

7 // Perform validation
8 if ($validator->isValid('/home/myfile.txt')) {

1358 Chapter 287. File Validation Classes

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

9 // file is valid
10 }

Note: This validator checks whether the specified file does not exist in any of the given directories. The validation
will fail if the file exists in one (or more) of the given directories.

287.13 Sha1

Zend\Validator\File\Sha1 allows you to validate if a given files hashed contents matches the supplied sha1
hash(es). It is subclassed from the Hash validator to provide a convenient validator that only supports the sha1
algorithm.

Note: This validator requires the Hash extension from PHP with the sha1 algorithm.

287.13.1 Supported Options

The following set of options are supported:

hash (string) Hash to test the file against.

287.13.2 Usage Examples

1 // Does file have the given hash?

2 $validator = new \Zend\Validator\File\Sha1('3b3652f336522365223');
3

4 // Or, check file against multiple hashes

5 $validator = new \Zend\Validator\File\Sha1(array(
6 '3b3652f336522365223', 'eb3365f3365ddc65365'
7 ));
8

9 // Perform validation with file path

10 if ($validator->isValid('./myfile.txt')) {
11 // file is valid
12 }

287.13.3 Public Methods

getSha1()
Returns the current set of sha1 hashes.
Return type array
addSha1(string|array $options)
Adds a sha1 hash for one or multiple files to the internal set of hashes.
Parameters $options See Supported Options section for more information.
setSha1(string|array $options)
Sets a sha1 hash for one or multiple files. Removes any previously set hashes.
Parameters $options See Supported Options section for more information.

287.13. Sha1 1359

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

287.14 Size

Zend\Validator\File\Size checks for the size of a file.

287.14.1 Supported Options

The following set of options are supported:

min (integer|string) default: null
max (integer|string) default: null The integer number of bytes, or a string in SI notation (ie.
1kB, 2MB, 0.2GB).
The accepted SI notation units are: kB, MB, GB, TB, PB, and EB. All sizes are converted using 1024 as
the base value (ie. 1kB == 1024 bytes, 1MB == 1024kB).
useByteString (boolean) default: true Display error messages with size in user-friendly number
or with the plain byte size.

287.14.2 Usage Examples

1 // Limit the file size to 40000 bytes

2 $validator = new \Zend\Validator\File\Size(40000);
3

4 // Limit the file size to between 10kB and 4MB

5 $validator = new \Zend\Validator\File\Size(array(
6 'min' => '10kB', 'max' => '4MB'
7 ));
8

9 // Perform validation with file path

10 if ($validator->isValid('./myfile.txt')) {
11 // file is valid
12 }

287.15 UploadFile

Zend\Validator\File\UploadFile checks whether a single file has been uploaded via a form POST and will
return descriptive messages for any upload errors.

Note: Zend\InputFilter\FileInput will automatically prepend this validator in its validation chain.

287.15.1 Usage Examples

1 use Zend\Http\PhpEnvironment\Request;
2

3 $request = new Request();

4 $files = $request->getFiles();
5 // i.e. $files['my-upload']['error'] == 0
6

7 $validator = new \Zend\Validator\File\UploadFile();

8 if ($validator->isValid($files['my-upload'])) {

1360 Chapter 287. File Validation Classes

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

9 // file is valid
10 }

287.16 WordCount

Zend\Validator\File\WordCount checks for the number of words within a file.

287.16.1 Supported Options

The following set of options are supported:

min (integer) default: null
max (integer) default: null The number of words allowed.

287.16.2 Usage Examples

1 // Limit the amount of words to a maximum of 2000

2 $validator = new \Zend\Validator\File\WordCount(2000);
3

4 // Limit the amount of words to between 100 and 5000

5 $validator = new \Zend\Validator\File\WordCount(100, 5000);
6

7 // ... or with array notation

8 $validator = new \Zend\Validator\File\WordCount(array(
9 'min' => 1000, 'max' => 5000
10 ));
11

12 // Perform validation with file path

13 if ($validator->isValid('./myfile.txt')) {
14 // file is valid
15 }

287.16. WordCount 1361

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1362 Chapter 287. File Validation Classes

 CHAPTER 288

Hex Validator

Zend\Validator\Hex allows you to validate if a given value contains only hexadecimal characters. These are all
characters from 0 to 9 and A to F case insensitive. There is no length limitation for the input you want to validate.
1 $validator = new Zend\Validator\Hex();
2 if ($validator->isValid('123ABC')) {
3 // value contains only hex chars
4 } else {
5 // false
6 }

Note: Invalid characters

All other characters will return false, including whitespace and decimal point. Also unicode zeros and numbers from
other scripts than latin will not be treated as valid.

288.1 Supported options for Zend\Validator\Hex

There are no additional options for Zend\Validator\Hex:

1363
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1364 Chapter 288. Hex Validator

 CHAPTER 289

Hostname Validator

Zend\Validator\Hostname allows you to validate a hostname against a set of known specifications. It is pos-
sible to check for three different types of hostnames: a DNS Hostname (i.e. domain.com), IP address (i.e. 1.2.3.4),
and Local hostnames (i.e. localhost). By default only DNS hostnames are matched.

289.1 Supported options for Zend\Validator\Hostname

The following options are supported for Zend\Validator\Hostname:

allow: Defines the sort of hostname which is allowed to be used. See Hostname types for details.
idn: Defines if IDN domains are allowed or not. This option defaults to TRUE.
ip: Allows to define a own IP validator. This option defaults to a new instance of Zend\Validator\Ip.
tld: Defines if TLDs are validated. This option defaults to TRUE.

289.2 Basic usage

A basic example of usage is below:

1 $validator = new Zend\Validator\Hostname();
2 if ($validator->isValid($hostname)) {
3 // hostname appears to be valid
4 } else {
5 // hostname is invalid; print the reasons
6 foreach ($validator->getMessages() as $message) {
7 echo "$message\n";
8 }
9 }

This will match the hostname $hostname and on failure populate getMessages() with useful error messages.

289.3 Validating different types of hostnames

You may find you also want to match IP addresses, Local hostnames, or a combination of all allowed types. This
can be done by passing a parameter to Zend\Validator\Hostname when you instantiate it. The parame-
ter should be an integer which determines what types of hostnames are allowed. You are encouraged to use the
Zend\Validator\Hostname constants to do this.

1365
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

The Zend\Validator\Hostname constants are: ALLOW_DNS to allow only DNS hostnames, ALLOW_IP to
allow IP addresses, ALLOW_LOCAL to allow local network names, ALLOW_URI to allow RFC3986-compliant ad-
dresses, and ALLOW_ALL to allow all four above types.

Note: Additional Information on ALLOW_URI

ALLOW_URI allows to check hostnames according to RFC3986. These are registered names which are used by WINS,
NetInfo and also local hostnames like those defined within your .hosts file.

To just check for IP addresses you can use the example below:
1 $validator = new Zend\Validator\Hostname(Zend\Validator\Hostname::ALLOW_IP);
2 if ($validator->isValid($hostname)) {
3 // hostname appears to be valid
4 } else {
5 // hostname is invalid; print the reasons
6 foreach ($validator->getMessages() as $message) {
7 echo "$message\n";
8 }
9 }

As well as using ALLOW_ALL to accept all common hostnames types you can combine these types to allow for
combinations. For example, to accept DNS and Local hostnames instantiate your Zend\Validator\Hostname
class as so:
1 $validator = new Zend\Validator\Hostname(Zend\Validator\Hostname::ALLOW_DNS |
2 Zend\Validator\Hostname::ALLOW_IP);

289.4 Validating International Domains Names

Some Country Code Top Level Domains (ccTLDs), such as de (Germany), support international characters in
domain names. These are known as International Domain Names (IDN). These domains can be matched by
Zend\Validator\Hostname via extended characters that are used in the validation process.

Note: IDN domains

Until now more than 50 ccTLDs support IDN domains.

To match an IDN domain its as simple as just using the standard Hostname validator since IDN matching is en-
abled by default. If you wish to disable IDN validation this can be done by either passing a parameter to the
Zend\Validator\Hostname constructor or via the setValidateIdn() method.
You can disable IDN validation by passing a second parameter to the Zend\Validator\Hostname constructor
in the following way.
1 $validator =
2 new Zend\Validator\Hostname(
3 array(
4 'allow' => Zend\Validator\Hostname::ALLOW_DNS,
5 'useIdnCheck' => false
6 )
7 );

Alternatively you can either pass TRUE or FALSE to setValidateIdn() to enable or disable IDN validation. If
you are trying to match an IDN hostname which isnt currently supported it is likely it will fail validation if it has any

1366 Chapter 289. Hostname Validator

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

international characters in it. Where a ccTLD file doesnt exist in Zend/Validator/Hostname specifying the
additional characters a normal hostname validation is performed.

Note: IDN validation

Please note that IDNs are only validated if you allow DNS hostnames to be validated.

289.5 Validating Top Level Domains

By default a hostname will be checked against a list of known TLDs. If this functionality is not required it can be
disabled in much the same way as disabling IDN support. You can disable TLD validation by passing a third parameter
to the Zend\Validator\Hostname constructor. In the example below we are supporting IDN validation via the
second parameter.
1 $validator =
2 new Zend\Validator\Hostname(
3 array(
4 'allow' => Zend\Validator\Hostname::ALLOW_DNS,
5 'useIdnCheck' => true,
6 'useTldCheck' => false
7 )
8 );

Alternatively you can either pass TRUE or FALSE to setValidateTld() to enable or disable TLD validation.

Note: TLD validation

Please note TLDs are only validated if you allow DNS hostnames to be validated.

289.5. Validating Top Level Domains 1367

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1368 Chapter 289. Hostname Validator

 CHAPTER 290

Iban Validator

Zend\Validator\Iban validates if a given value could be a IBAN number. IBAN is the abbreviation for Inter-
national Bank Account Number.

290.1 Supported options for Zend\Validator\Iban

The following options are supported for Zend\Validator\Iban:

country_code: Sets the country code which is used to get the IBAN format for validation.

290.2 IBAN validation

IBAN numbers are always related to a country. This means that different countries use different formats for their IBAN
numbers. This is the reason why IBAN numbers always need a country code. By knowing this we already know how
to use Zend\Validator\Iban.

290.2.1 Ungreedy IBAN validation

Sometime it is useful, just to validate if the given value is a IBAN number or not. This means that you dont want to
validate it against a defined country. This can be done by using a FALSE as locale.
1 $validator = new Zend\Validator\Iban(array('country_code' => false));
2 // Note: you can also set a FALSE as single parameter
3

4 if ($validator->isValid('AT611904300234573201')) {
5 // IBAN appears to be valid
6 } else {
7 // IBAN is not valid
8 }

So any IBAN number will be valid. Note that this should not be done when you accept only accounts from a single
country.

290.2.2 Region aware IBAN validation

To validate against a defined country, you just need to give the wished country code. You can do this by the option
country_code and also afterwards by using setCountryCode().

1369
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1 $validator = new Zend\Validator\Iban(array('country_code' => 'AT'));

2

3 if ($validator->isValid('AT611904300234573201')) {
4 // IBAN appears to be valid
5 } else {
6 // IBAN is not valid
7 }

1370 Chapter 290. Iban Validator

 CHAPTER 291

Identical Validator

Zend\Validator\Identical allows you to validate if a given value is identical with a set token.

291.1 Supported options for Zend\Validator\Identical

The following options are supported for Zend\Validator\Identical:

strict: Defines if the validation should be done strict. The default value is TRUE.
token: Sets the token with which the input will be validated against.
literal: If set to TRUE, the validation will skip the lookup for elements in the form context, and validate the
token just the way it was provided. The default value is FALSE.

291.2 Basic usage

To validate if two values are identical you need to set the origin value as the token. See the following example which
validates a string against the given token.
1 $valid = new Zend\Validator\Identical('origin');
2 if ($valid->isValid($value)) {
3 return true;
4 }

The validation will only then return TRUE when both values are 100% identical. In our example, when $value is
origin.
You can set the wished token also afterwards by using the method setToken() and getToken() to get the actual
set token.

291.3 Identical objects

Of course Zend\Validator\Identical can not only validate strings, but also any other variable type like
Boolean, Integer, Float, Array or even Objects. As already noted Token and Value must be identical.
1 $valid = new Zend\Validator\Identical(123);
2 if ($valid->isValid($input)) {
3 // input appears to be valid
4 } else {

1371
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

5 // input is invalid
6 }

Note: Type comparison

You should be aware that also the type of a variable is used for validation. This means that the string 3 is not identical
with the integer 3. When you want such a non strict validation you must set the strict option to false.

291.4 Form elements

Zend\Validator\Identical supports also the comparison of form elements. This can be done by using the
elements name as token. See the following example:
1 $form->add(array(
2 'name' => 'elementOne',
3 'type' => 'Password',
4 ));
5 $form->add(array(
6 'name' => 'elementTwo',
7 'type' => 'Password',
8 'validators' => array(
9 array(
10 'name' => 'Identical',
11 'options' => array(
12 'token' => 'elementOne',
13 ),
14 ),
15 ),
16 ));

By using the elements name from the first element as token for the second element, the validator validates if the
second element is equal with the first element. In the case your user does not enter two identical values, you will get a
validation error.

291.4.1 Validating a Value From a Fieldset

Sometimes you will need to validate an input that lives inside a fieldset, and this can be accomplished, see the following
example.
1 use Zend\Form\Element;
2 use Zend\Form\Fieldset;
3 use Zend\Form\Form;
4 use Zend\InputFilter\Input;
5 use Zend\InputFilter\InputFilter;
6

7 $userFieldset = new Fieldset('user'); // (1)

8 $userFieldset->add(array(
9 'name' => 'email', // (2)
10 'type' => 'Email',
11 ));
12

13 // Let's add one fieldset inside the 'user' fieldset,

14 // so we can see how to manage the token in a different deepness
15 $deeperFieldset = new Fieldset('deeperFieldset'); // (3)

1372 Chapter 291. Identical Validator

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

16 $deeperFieldset->add(array(
17 'name' => 'deeperFieldsetInput', // (4)
18 'type' => 'Text',
19 'options' => array(
20 'label' => 'What validator are we testing?',
21 ),
22 ));
23 $userFieldset->add($deeperFieldset);
24

25 $signUpForm = new Form('signUp');

26 $signUpForm->add($userFieldset);
27 // Add an input that will validate the 'email' input from 'user' fieldset
28 $signUpForm->add(array(
29 'name' => 'confirmEmail', // (5)
30 'type' => 'Email',
31 ));
32 // Add an input that will validate the 'deeperFieldsetInput' from 'deeperFieldset'
33 // that lives inside the 'user' fieldset
34 $signUpForm->add(array(
35 'name' => 'confirmTestingValidator', // (6)
36 'type' => 'Text',
37 ));
38

39 $inputFilter = new InputFilter();

40 // This will ensure the user enter the same email in 'email' (2) and 'confirmEmail' (5)
41 $inputFilter->add(array(
42 'name' => 'confirmEmail', // references (5)
43 'validators' => array(
44 array(
45 'name' => 'Identical',
46 'options' => array(
47 // 'user' key references 'user' fieldset (1), and 'email' references 'email' element
48 // 'user' fieldset (2)
49 'token' => array('user' => 'email'),
50 ),
51 ),
52 ),
53 ));
54 // This will ensure the user enter the same string in 'deeperFieldsetInput' (4)
55 // and 'confirmTestingValidator' (6)
56 $inputFilter->add(array(
57 'name' => 'confirmTestingValidator', // references (6)
58 'validators' => array(
59 array(
60 'name' => 'Identical',
61 'options' => array(
62 'token' => array(
63 'user' => array( // references 'user' fieldset (1)
64 // 'deeperFieldset' key references 'deeperFieldset' fieldset (3)
65 // 'deeperFieldsetInput' references 'deeperFieldsetInput' element (4)
66 'deeperFieldset' => 'deeperFieldsetInput'
67 )
68 ),
69 ),
70 ),
71 ),
72 ));
73

291.4. Form elements 1373

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

74 $signUpForm->setInputFilter($inputFilter);

Note: Aways make sure that your token array have just one key per level all the way till the leaf, otherwise you can
end up with unexpected results.

291.5 Strict validation

As mentioned before Zend\Validator\Identical validates tokens strict. You can change this behaviour by
using the strict option. The default value for this property is TRUE.
1 $valid = new Zend\Validator\Identical(array('token' => 123, 'strict' => FALSE));
2 $input = '123';
3 if ($valid->isValid($input)) {
4 // input appears to be valid
5 } else {
6 // input is invalid
7 }

The difference to the previous example is that the validation returns in this case TRUE, even if you compare a integer
with string value as long as the content is identical but not the type.
For convenience you can also use setStrict() and getStrict().

291.6 Configuration

As all other validators, Zend\Validator\Identical also supports the usage of configuration settings as input
parameter. This means that you can configure this validator with a Traversable object.
There is a case which you should be aware of. If you are using an array as token, and it contains a token key, you
should wrap it within another token key. See the examples below to undestand this situation.
1 // This will not validate array('token' => 123), it will actually validate the integer 123
2 $valid = new Zend\Validator\Identical(array('token' => 123));
3 if ($valid->isValid($input)) {
4 // input appears to be valid
5 } else {
6 // input is invalid
7 }

The reason for this special case is that you can configure the token which has to be used by giving the token key.
So, when you are using an array as token, and it contains one element with a token key, then you have to wrap it
like shown in the example below.
1 // Unlike the previous example, this will validate array('token' => 123)
2 $valid = new Zend\Validator\Identical(array('token' => array('token' => 123)));
3 if ($valid->isValid($input)) {
4 // input appears to be valid
5 } else {
6 // input is invalid
7 }

If the array you are willing to validate does not have a token key, you do not need to wrap it.

1374 Chapter 291. Identical Validator

 CHAPTER 292

Ip Validator

Zend\Validator\Ip allows you to validate if a given value is an IP address. It supports the IPv4, IPv6 and
IPvFeature definitions.

292.1 Supported options for Zend\Validator\Ip

The following options are supported for Zend\Validator\Ip:

allowipv4: Defines if the validator allows IPv4 addresses. This option defaults to TRUE.
allowipv6: Defines if the validator allows IPv6 addresses. This option defaults to TRUE.
allowipvfuture: Defines if the validator allows IPvFuture addresses. This option defaults to false.
allowliteral: Defines if the validator allows IPv6 or IPvFuture with URI literal style (the IP surrounded by
brackets). This option defaults to true.

292.2 Basic usage

A basic example of usage is below:

1 $validator = new Zend\Validator\Ip();
2 if ($validator->isValid($ip)) {
3 // ip appears to be valid
4 } else {
5 // ip is invalid; print the reasons
6 }

Note: Invalid IP addresses

Keep in mind that Zend\Validator\Ip only validates IP addresses. Addresses like mydomain.com or
192.168.50.1/index.html are no valid IP addresses. They are either hostnames or valid URLs but not IP
addresses.

Note: IPv6/IPvFuture validation

Zend\Validator\Ip validates IPv6/IPvFuture addresses with regex. The reason is that the filters and methods
from PHP itself dont follow the RFC. Many other available classes also dont follow it.

1375
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

292.3 Validate IPv4 or IPV6 alone

Sometimes its useful to validate only one of the supported formats. For example when your network only supports
IPv4. In this case it would be useless to allow IPv6 within this validator.
To limit Zend\Validator\Ip to one protocol you can set the options allowipv4 or allowipv6 to FALSE.
You can do this either by giving the option to the constructor or by using setOptions() afterwards.
1 $validator = new Zend\Validator\Ip(array('allowipv6' => false));
2 if ($validator->isValid($ip)) {
3 // ip appears to be valid ipv4 address
4 } else {
5 // ip is no ipv4 address
6 }

Note: Default behaviour

The default behaviour which Zend\Validator\Ip follows is to allow both standards.

1376 Chapter 292. Ip Validator

 CHAPTER 293

Isbn Validator

Zend\Validator\Isbn allows you to validate an ISBN-10 or ISBN-13 value.

293.1 Supported options for Zend\Validator\Isbn

The following options are supported for Zend\Validator\Isbn:

separator: Defines the allowed separator for the ISBN number. It defaults to an empty string.
type: Defines the allowed type of ISBN numbers. It defaults to Zend\Validator\Isbn::AUTO. For details
take a look at this section.

293.2 Basic usage

A basic example of usage is below:

1 $validator = new Zend\Validator\Isbn();
2 if ($validator->isValid($isbn)) {
3 // isbn is valid
4 } else {
5 // isbn is not valid
6 }

This will validate any ISBN-10 and ISBN-13 without separator.

293.3 Setting an explicit ISBN validation type

An example of an ISBN type restriction is below:

1 $validator = new Zend\Validator\Isbn();
2 $validator->setType(Zend\Validator\Isbn::ISBN13);
3 // OR
4 $validator = new Zend\Validator\Isbn(array(
5 'type' => Zend\Validator\Isbn::ISBN13,
6 ));
7

8 if ($validator->isValid($isbn)) {
9 // this is a valid ISBN-13 value

1377
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

10 } else {
11 // this is an invalid ISBN-13 value
12 }

The above will validate only ISBN-13 values.

Valid types include:
Zend\Validator\Isbn::AUTO (default)
Zend\Validator\Isbn::ISBN10
Zend\Validator\Isbn::ISBN13

293.4 Specifying a separator restriction

An example of separator restriction is below:

1 $validator = new Zend\Validator\Isbn();
2 $validator->setSeparator('-');
3 // OR
4 $validator = new Zend\Validator\Isbn(array(
5 'separator' => '-',
6 ));
7

8 if ($validator->isValid($isbn)) {
9 // this is a valid ISBN with separator
10 } else {
11 // this is an invalid ISBN with separator
12 }

Note: Values without separator

This will return FALSE if $isbn doesnt contain a separator or if its an invalid ISBN value.

Valid separators include:

(empty) (default)
- (hyphen)
(space)

1378 Chapter 293. Isbn Validator

 CHAPTER 294

IsInstanceOf Validator

Zend\Validator\IsInstanceOf allows you to validate whether a given object is an instance of a specific class
or interface.

294.1 Supported options

The following options are supported for Zend\Validator\IsInstanceOf:

className: Defines the fully-qualified class name which objects must be an instance of.

294.2 Basic usage

A basic example of usage is below:

1 $validator = new Zend\Validator\IsInstanceOf([
2 'className' => 'Zend\Validator\Digits'
3 ]);
4 $object = new Zend\Validator\Digits();
5

6 if ($validator->isValid($object)) {
7 // $object is an instance of Zend\Validator\Digits
8 } else {
9 // false. You can use $validator->getMessages() to retrieve error messages
10 }

If a string argument is passed to the constructor of Zend\Validator\IsInstanceOf then that value will be
used as the class name:
1 $validator = new Zend\Validator\IsInstanceOf('Zend\Validator\Digits');
2 $object = new Zend\Validator\Digits();
3

4 if ($validator->isValid($object)) {
5 // $object is an instance of Zend\Validator\Digits
6 } else {
7 // false. You can use $validator->getMessages() to retrieve error messages
8 }

1379
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1380 Chapter 294. IsInstanceOf Validator

 CHAPTER 295

IsFloat

Zend\I18n\Validator\IsFloat allows you to validate if a given value contains a floating-point value. This
validator validates also localized input.

295.1 Supported options for Zend\I18n\Validator\IsFloat

The following options are supported for Zend\I18n\Validator\IsFloat:

locale: Sets the locale which will be used to validate localized float values.

295.2 Simple float validation

The simplest way to validate a float is by using the system settings. When no option is used, the environment locale is
used for validation:
1 $validator = new Zend\I18n\Validator\IsFloat();
2

3 $validator->isValid(1234.5); // returns true

4 $validator->isValid('10a01'); // returns false
5 $validator->isValid('1,234.5'); // returns true

In the above example we expected that our environment is set to en as locale.

295.3 Localized float validation

Often its useful to be able to validate also localized values. Float values are often written different in other countries.
For example using english you will write 1.5. In german you may write 1,5 and in other languages you may use
grouping.
Zend\I18n\Validator\IsFloat is able to validate such notations. However,it is limited to the locale you set.
See the following code:
1 $validator = new Zend\I18n\Validator\IsFloat(array('locale' => 'de'));
2

3 $validator->isValid(1234.5); // returns true

4 $validator->isValid("1 234,5"); // returns false
5 $validator->isValid("1.234"); // returns true

1381
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

As you can see, by using a locale, your input is validated localized. Using a different notation you get a FALSE when
the locale forces a different notation.
The locale can also be set afterwards by using setLocale() and retrieved by using getLocale().

295.3.1 Migration from 2.0-2.3 to 2.4+

Version 2.4 adds support for PHP 7. In PHP 7, float is a reserved keyword, which required renaming the Float
validator. If you were using the Float validator directly previously, you will now receive an E_USER_DEPRECATED
notice on instantiation. Please update your code to refer to the IsFloat class instead.
Users pulling their Float validator instance from the validator plugin manager receive an IsFloat instance instead
starting in 2.4.0.

1382 Chapter 295. IsFloat

 CHAPTER 296

IsInt

Zend\I18n\Validator\IsInt validates if a given value is an integer. Also localized integer values are recog-
nised and can be validated.

296.1 Supported Options

The following options are supported for Zend\I18n\Validator\IsInt:

locale: Sets the locale which will be used to validate localized integers.

296.2 Simple integer validation

The simplest way to validate an integer is by using the system settings. When no option is used, the environment
locale is used for validation:
1 $validator = new Zend\I18n\Validator\IsInt();
2

3 $validator->isValid(1234); // returns true

4 $validator->isValid(1234.5); // returns false
5 $validator->isValid('1,234'); // returns true

In the above example we expected that our environment is set to en as locale. As you can see in the third example
also grouping is recognised.

296.3 Localized integer validation

Often its useful to be able to validate also localized values. Integer values are often written different in other countries.
For example using english you can write 1234 or 1,234. Both are integer values but the grouping is optional. In
german for example you may write 1.234 and in french 1 234.
Zend\I18n\Validator\IsInt is able to validate such notations. But it is limited to the locale you set. This
means that it not simply strips off the separator, it validates if the correct separator is used. See the following code:
1 $validator = new Zend\I18n\Validator\IsInt(array('locale' => 'de'));
2

3 $validator->isValid(1234); // returns true

4 $validator->isValid("1,234"); // returns false
5 $validator->isValid("1.234"); // returns true

1383
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

As you can see, by using a locale, your input is validated localized. Using the english notation you get a FALSE when
the locale forces a different notation.
The locale can also be set afterwards by using setLocale() and retrieved by using getLocale().

296.4 Migration from 2.0-2.3 to 2.4+

Version 2.4 adds support for PHP 7. In PHP 7, int is a reserved keyword, which required renaming the Int validator.
If you were using the Int validator directly previously, you will now receive an E_USER_DEPRECATED notice on
instantiation. Please update your code to refer to the IsInt class instead.
Users pulling their Int validator instance from the validator plugin manager receive an IsInt instance instead
starting in 2.4.0.

1384 Chapter 296. IsInt

 CHAPTER 297

Regex Validator

This validator allows you to validate if a given string conforms a defined regular expression.

297.1 Supported options for Zend\Validator\Regex

The following options are supported for Zend\Validator\Regex:

pattern: Sets the regular expression pattern for this validator.

297.2 Validation with Zend\Validator\Regex

Validation with regular expressions allows to have complicated validations being done without writing a own validator.
The usage of regular expression is quite common and simple. Lets look at some examples:
1 $validator = new Zend\Validator\Regex(array('pattern' => '/^Test/'));
2

3 $validator->isValid("Test"); // returns true

4 $validator->isValid("Testing"); // returns true
5 $validator->isValid("Pest"); // returns false

As you can see, the pattern has to be given using the same syntax as for preg_match(). For details about regular
expressions take a look into PHPs manual about PCRE pattern syntax.

297.3 Pattern handling

It is also possible to set a different pattern afterwards by using setPattern() and to get the actual set pattern with
getPattern().
1 $validator = new Zend\Validator\Regex(array('pattern' => '/^Test/'));
2 $validator->setPattern('ing$/');
3

4 $validator->isValid("Test"); // returns false

5 $validator->isValid("Testing"); // returns true
6 $validator->isValid("Pest"); // returns false

1385
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1386 Chapter 297. Regex Validator

 CHAPTER 298

Sitemap Validators

The following validators conform to the Sitemap XML protocol.

298.1 Sitemap\Changefreq

Validates whether a string is valid for using as a changefreq element in a Sitemap XML document. Valid values are:
always, hourly, daily, weekly, monthly, yearly, or never.
Returns TRUE if and only if the value is a string and is equal to one of the frequencies specified above.

298.2 Sitemap\Lastmod

Validates whether a string is valid for using as a lastmod element in a Sitemap XML document. The lastmod element
should contain a W3C date string, optionally discarding information about time.
Returns TRUE if and only if the given value is a string and is valid according to the protocol.

Sitemap Lastmod Validator

1 $validator = new Zend\Validator\Sitemap\Lastmod();

2

3 $validator->isValid('1999-11-11T22:23:52-02:00'); // true
4 $validator->isValid('2008-05-12T00:42:52+02:00'); // true
5 $validator->isValid('1999-11-11'); // true
6 $validator->isValid('2008-05-12'); // true
7

8 $validator->isValid('1999-11-11t22:23:52-02:00'); // false
9 $validator->isValid('2008-05-12T00:42:60+02:00'); // false
10 $validator->isValid('1999-13-11'); // false
11 $validator->isValid('2008-05-32'); // false
12 $validator->isValid('yesterday'); // false

298.3 Sitemap\Loc

Validates whether a string is valid for using as a loc element in a Sitemap XML document. This uses
Zend\Uri\Uri::isValid() internally. Read more at URI Validation.

1387
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

298.4 Sitemap\Priority

Validates whether a value is valid for using as a priority element in a Sitemap XML document. The value should be
a decimal between 0.0 and 1.0. This validator accepts both numeric values and string values.

Sitemap Priority Validator

1 $validator = new Zend\Validator\Sitemap\Priority();

2

3 $validator->isValid('0.1'); // true
4 $validator->isValid('0.789'); // true
5 $validator->isValid(0.8); // true
6 $validator->isValid(1.0); // true
7

8 $validator->isValid('1.1'); // false
9 $validator->isValid('-0.4'); // false
10 $validator->isValid(1.00001); // false
11 $validator->isValid(0xFF); // false
12 $validator->isValid('foo'); // false

298.5 Supported options for Zend\Validator\Sitemap_*

There are no supported options for any of the Sitemap validators.

1388 Chapter 298. Sitemap Validators

 CHAPTER 299

Step Validator

Zend\Validator\Step allows you to validate if a given value is a valid step value. This validator requires the
value to be a numeric value (either string, int or float).

299.1 Supported options for Zend\Validator\Step

The following options are supported for Zend\Validator\Step:

baseValue: This is the base value from which the step should be computed. This option defaults to 0
step: This is the step value. This option defaults to 1

299.2 Basic usage

A basic example is the following one:

1 $validator = new Zend\Validator\Step();
2

3 if ($validator->isValid(1)) {
4 // value is a valid step value
5 } else {
6 // false
7 }

299.3 Using floating-point values

This validator also supports floating-point base value and step value. Here is a basic example of this feature:
1 $validator = new Zend\Validator\Step(
2 array(
3 'baseValue' => 1.1,
4 'step' => 2.2,
5 )
6 );
7

8 echo $validator->isValid(1.1); // prints true

9 echo $validator->isValid(3.3); // prints true

1389
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

10 echo $validator->isValid(3.35); // prints false

11 echo $validator->isValid(2.2); // prints false

1390 Chapter 299. Step Validator

 CHAPTER 300

Timezone Validator

Zend\Validator\Timezone allows validating if an input string represents a timezone.

300.1 Supported validation types

The Zend\Validator\Timezone validator is capable of validating the abbreviation (e.g. ewt) as well
as the location string (e.g. America/Los_Angeles). These options are stored in the validator as LOCATION,
ABBREVIATION, and ALL class constants.

300.2 Basic Usage

The default validation type will check again abbreviations as well as the location string.
1 $validator = new Zend\Validator\Timezone();
2

3 $validator->isValid('America/Los_Angeles'); // returns true

4 $validator->isValid('ewt'); // returns true
5 $validator->isValid('Foobar'); // returns false

To validate against only the location string you can set the type:
1 $validator = new Zend\Validator\Timezone();
2 $validator->setType(Zend\Validator\Timezone::LOCATION);
3

4 $validator->isValid('America/Los_Angeles'); // returns true

5 $validator->isValid('ewt'); // returns false
6 $validator->isValid('Foobar'); // returns false

1391
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1392 Chapter 300. Timezone Validator

 CHAPTER 301

Uri Validator

Zend\Validator\Uri allows you to validate a uri using the Zend\Uri\Uri handler to parse to uri. The val-
idator allows for both validation of absolute and/or relative uris. There is the possibility to exchange the handler for
another one in case the parsing of the uri should be done differently.

301.1 Supported options

The following options are supported for Zend\Validator\Uri:

uriHandler: Defines the handler to be used to parse the uri. This options defaults to a new instance of
Zend\Uri\Uri.
allowRelative: Defines if relative paths are allowed. This option defaults to TRUE.
allowAbsolute: Defines if absolute paths are allowed. This option defaults to TRUE.

301.2 Basic usage

A basic example of usage is below:

1 $validator = new Zend\Validator\Uri();
2 $uri = 'http://framework.zend.com/manual';
3

4 if ($validator->isValid($uri)) {
5 // $uri was valid
6 } else {
7 // false. You can use $validator->getMessages() to retrieve error messages
8 }

1393
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1394 Chapter 301. Uri Validator

 CHAPTER 302

Validator Chains

302.1 Overview

Often multiple validations should be applied to some value in a particular order. The following code demonstrates a
way to solve the example from the introduction, where a username must be between 6 and 12 alphanumeric characters:
1 // Create a validator chain and add validators to it
2 $validatorChain = new Zend\Validator\ValidatorChain();
3 $validatorChain->attach(
4 new Zend\Validator\StringLength(array('min' => 6,
5 'max' => 12)))
6 ->attach(new Zend\I18n\Validator\Alnum());
7

8 // Validate the username

9 if ($validatorChain->isValid($username)) {
10 // username passed validation
11 } else {
12 // username failed validation; print reasons
13 foreach ($validatorChain->getMessages() as $message) {
14 echo "$message\n";
15 }
16 }

Validators are run in the order they were added to Zend\Validator\ValidatorChain. In the above example,
the username is first checked to ensure that its length is between 6 and 12 characters, and then it is checked to
ensure that it contains only alphanumeric characters. The second validation, for alphanumeric characters, is performed
regardless of whether the first validation, for length between 6 and 12 characters, succeeds. This means that if both
validations fail, getMessages() will return failure messages from both validators.
In some cases it makes sense to have a validator break the chain if its validation process fails.
Zend\Validator\ValidatorChain supports such use cases with the second parameter to the attach()
method. By setting $breakChainOnFailure to TRUE, the added validator will break the chain execution upon
failure, which avoids running any other validations that are determined to be unnecessary or inappropriate for the
situation. If the above example were written as follows, then the alphanumeric validation would not occur if the string
length validation fails:
1 $validatorChain->attach(
2 new Zend\Validator\StringLength(array('min' => 6,
3 'max' => 12)),
4 true)
5 ->attach(new Zend\I18n\Validator\Alnum());

Any object that implements Zend\Validator\ValidatorInterface may be used in a validator chain.

1395
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

302.2 Setting Validator Chain Order

For each validator added to the ValidatorChain, you can set a priority to define the chain order. The default value
is 1. The more the priority is high, the earlier it is checked.
In the following example, the username is first checked to ensure that its length is between 7 and 9 characters, and
then it is checked to ensure that its length is between 3 and 5 characters.
1 $username = 'ABCDFE';
2

3 // Create a validator chain and add validators to it

4 $validatorChain = new Zend\Validator\ValidatorChain();
5 $validatorChain->attach(
6 new Zend\Validator\StringLength(array('min' => 3, 'max' => 5)),
7 true,
8 1
9 );
10 $validatorChain->attach(
11 new Zend\Validator\StringLength(array('min' => 7, 'max' => 9)),
12 true, // Break on failure
13 2
14 );
15

16 // Validate the username

17 if ($validatorChain->isValid($username)) {
18 // username passed validation
19 echo "Success";
20 } else {
21 // username failed validation; print reasons
22 foreach ($validatorChain->getMessages() as $message) {
23 echo "$message\n";
24 }
25 }
26

27 // This first example will display: The input is less than 7 characters long

1396 Chapter 302. Validator Chains

 CHAPTER 303

Writing Validators

303.1 Overview

Zend\Validator supplies a set of commonly needed validators, but inevitably, developers will wish to write
custom validators for their particular needs. The task of writing a custom validator is described in this section.
Zend\Validator\ValidatorInterface defines two methods, isValid() and getMessages(),
that may be implemented by user classes in order to create custom validation objects. An object
that implements Zend\Validator\AbstractValidator interface may be added to a validator chain
with Zend\Validator\ValidatorChain::addValidator(). Such objects may also be used with
Zend\InputFilter.
As you may already have inferred from the above description of Zend\Validator\ValidatorInterface,
validation classes provided with Zend Framework return a boolean value for whether or not a value validates success-
fully. They also provide information about why a value failed validation. The availability of the reasons for validation
failures may be valuable to an application for various purposes, such as providing statistics for usability analysis.
Basic validation failure message functionality is implemented in Zend\Validator\AbstractValidator.
To include this functionality when creating a validation class, simply extend
Zend\Validator\AbstractValidator. In the extending class you would implement the isValid()
method logic and define the message variables and message templates that correspond to the types of validation
failures that can occur. If a value fails your validation tests, then isValid() should return FALSE. If the value
passes your validation tests, then isValid() should return TRUE.
In general, the isValid() method should not throw any exceptions, except where it is impossible to determine
whether or not the input value is valid. A few examples of reasonable cases for throwing an exception might be if a
file cannot be opened, an LDAP server could not be contacted, or a database connection is unavailable, where such a
thing may be required for validation success or failure to be determined.

303.2 Creating a Simple Validation Class

The following example demonstrates how a very simple custom validator might be written. In this case the validation
rules are simply that the input value must be a floating point value.
1 class MyValid\Float extends Zend\Validator\AbstractValidator
2 {
3 const FLOAT = 'float';
4

5 protected $messageTemplates = array(

6 self::FLOAT => "'%value%' is not a floating point value"

1397
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

7 );
8

9 public function isValid($value)

10 {
11 $this->setValue($value);
12

13 if (!is_float($value)) {
14 $this->error(self::FLOAT);
15 return false;
16 }
17

18 return true;
19 }
20 }

The class defines a template for its single validation failure message, which includes the built-in magic parameter,
%value%. The call to setValue() prepares the object to insert the tested value into the failure message automati-
cally, should the value fail validation. The call to error() tracks a reason for validation failure. Since this class only
defines one failure message, it is not necessary to provide error() with the name of the failure message template.

303.3 Writing a Validation Class having Dependent Conditions

The following example demonstrates a more complex set of validation rules, where it is required that the input value
be numeric and within the range of minimum and maximum boundary values. An input value would fail validation
for exactly one of the following reasons:
The input value is not numeric.
The input value is less than the minimum allowed value.
The input value is more than the maximum allowed value.
These validation failure reasons are then translated to definitions in the class:
1 class MyValid\NumericBetween extends Zend\Validator\AbstractValidator
2 {
3 const MSG_NUMERIC = 'msgNumeric';
4 const MSG_MINIMUM = 'msgMinimum';
5 const MSG_MAXIMUM = 'msgMaximum';
6

7 public $minimum = 0;
8 public $maximum = 100;
9

10 protected $messageVariables = array(

11 'min' => 'minimum',
12 'max' => 'maximum'
13 );
14

15 protected $messageTemplates = array(

16 self::MSG_NUMERIC => "'%value%' is not numeric",
17 self::MSG_MINIMUM => "'%value%' must be at least '%min%'",
18 self::MSG_MAXIMUM => "'%value%' must be no more than '%max%'"
19 );
20

21 public function isValid($value)

22 {
23 $this->setValue($value);

1398 Chapter 303. Writing Validators

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

24

25 if (!is_numeric($value)) {
26 $this->error(self::MSG_NUMERIC);
27 return false;
28 }
29

30 if ($value < $this->minimum) {

31 $this->error(self::MSG_MINIMUM);
32 return false;
33 }
34

35 if ($value > $this->maximum) {

36 $this->error(self::MSG_MAXIMUM);
37 return false;
38 }
39

40 return true;
41 }
42 }

The public properties $minimum and $maximum have been established to provide the minimum and maximum
boundaries, respectively, for a value to successfully validate. The class also defines two message variables that corre-
spond to the public properties and allow min and max to be used in message templates as magic parameters, just as
with value.
Note that if any one of the validation checks in isValid() fails, an appropriate failure message is prepared, and the
method immediately returns FALSE. These validation rules are therefore sequentially dependent. That is, if one test
should fail, there is no need to test any subsequent validation rules. This need not be the case, however. The following
example illustrates how to write a class having independent validation rules, where the validation object may return
multiple reasons why a particular validation attempt failed.

303.4 Validation with Independent Conditions, Multiple Reasons for

Failure

Consider writing a validation class for password strength enforcement - when a user is required to choose a password
that meets certain criteria for helping secure user accounts. Let us assume that the password security criteria enforce
that the password:
is at least 8 characters in length,
contains at least one uppercase letter,
contains at least one lowercase letter,
and contains at least one digit character.
The following class implements these validation criteria:
1 class MyValid\PasswordStrength extends Zend\Validator\AbstractValidator
2 {
3 const LENGTH = 'length';
4 const UPPER = 'upper';
5 const LOWER = 'lower';
6 const DIGIT = 'digit';
7

8 protected $messageTemplates = array(

9 self::LENGTH => "'%value%' must be at least 8 characters in length",

303.4. Validation with Independent Conditions, Multiple Reasons for Failure 1399
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

10 self::UPPER => "'%value%' must contain at least one uppercase letter",

11 self::LOWER => "'%value%' must contain at least one lowercase letter",
12 self::DIGIT => "'%value%' must contain at least one digit character"
13 );
14

15 public function isValid($value)

16 {
17 $this->setValue($value);
18

19 $isValid = true;
20

21 if (strlen($value) < 8) {
22 $this->error(self::LENGTH);
23 $isValid = false;
24 }
25

26 if (!preg_match('/[A-Z]/', $value)) {
27 $this->error(self::UPPER);
28 $isValid = false;
29 }
30

31 if (!preg_match('/[a-z]/', $value)) {
32 $this->error(self::LOWER);
33 $isValid = false;
34 }
35

36 if (!preg_match('/\d/', $value)) {
37 $this->error(self::DIGIT);
38 $isValid = false;
39 }
40

41 return $isValid;
42 }
43 }

Note that the four criteria tests in isValid() do not immediately return FALSE. This allows the validation class to
provide all of the reasons that the input password failed to meet the validation requirements. if, for example, a user
were to input the string #$% as a password, isValid() would cause all four validation failure messages to be
returned by a subsequent call to getMessages().

1400 Chapter 303. Writing Validators

 CHAPTER 304

Validation Messages

Each validator which is based on Zend\Validator\ValidatorInterface provides one or multiple messages

in the case of a failed validation. You can use this information to set your own messages, or to translate existing
messages which a validator could return to something different.
These validation messages are constants which can be found at top of each validator class. Lets look into
Zend\Validator\GreaterThan for an descriptive example:
1 protected $messageTemplates = array(
2 self::NOT_GREATER => "'%value%' is not greater than '%min%'",
3 );

As you can see the constant self::NOT_GREATER refers to the failure and is used as key, and the message itself is
used as value of the message array.
You can retrieve all message templates from a validator by using the getMessageTemplates() method. It returns
you the above array which contains all messages a validator could return in the case of a failed validation.
1 $validator = new Zend\Validator\GreaterThan();
2 $messages = $validator->getMessageTemplates();

Using the setMessage() method you can set another message to be returned in case of the specified failure.
1 $validator = new Zend\Validator\GreaterThan();
2 $validator->setMessage(
3 'Please enter a lower value',
4 Zend\Validator\GreaterThan::NOT_GREATER
5 );

The second parameter defines the failure which will be overridden. When you omit this parameter, then the given
message will be set for all possible failures of this validator.

304.1 Using pre-translated validation messages

Zend Framework is shipped with more than 45 different validators with more than 200 failure messages. It can be
a tedious task to translate all of these messages. But for your convenience Zend Framework comes with already
pre-translated validation messages. You can find them within the path /resources/languages in your Zend
Framework installation.

Note: Used path

The resource files are outside of the library path because all of your translations should also be outside of this path.

1401
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

So to translate all validation messages to German for example, all you have to do is to attach a translator to
Zend\Validator\AbstractValidator using these resource files.
1 $translator = new Zend\Mvc\I18n\Translator();
2 $translator->addTranslationFile(
3 'phpArray',
4 'resources/languages/en/Zend_Validate.php', //or Zend_Captcha
5 'default',
6 'en_US'
7 );
8 Zend\Validator\AbstractValidator::setDefaultTranslator($translator);

Note: Supported languages

The amount of supported languages may not be complete. New languages will be added with each release. Addition-
ally feel free to use the existing resource files to make your own translations.
You could also use these resource files to rewrite existing translations. So you are not in need to create these files
manually yourself.

304.2 Limit the size of a validation message

Sometimes it is necessary to limit the maximum size a validation message can have. For example when
your view allows a maximum size of 100 chars to be rendered on one line. To simplify the usage,
Zend\Validator\AbstractValidator is able to automatically limit the maximum returned size of a vali-
dation message.
To get the actual set size use Zend\Validator\AbstractValidator::getMessageLength(). If it is -1,
then the returned message will not be truncated. This is default behaviour.
To limit the returned message size use Zend\Validator\AbstractValidator::setMessageLength().
Set it to any integer size you need. When the returned message exceeds the set size, then the message will be truncated
and the string ... will be added instead of the rest of the message.
1 Zend\Validator\AbstractValidator::setMessageLength(100);

Note: Where is this parameter used?

The set message length is used for all validators, even for self defined ones, as long as they extend
Zend\Validator\AbstractValidator.

1402 Chapter 304. Validation Messages

 CHAPTER 305

Getting the Zend Framework Version

305.1 Overview

Zend\Version provides a class constant Zend\Version\Version::VERSION that contains a string iden-

tifying the version number of your Zend Framework installation. Zend\Version\Version::VERSION might
contain 1.7.4, for example.
The static method Zend\Version\Version::compareVersion($version) is based on the PHP function
version_compare(). This method returns -1 if the specified version is older than the installed Zend Framework version,
0 if they are the same and +1 if the specified version is newer than the version of the Zend Framework installation.

305.2 Example of the compareVersion() Method

1 // returns -1, 0 or 1
2 $cmp = Zend\Version\Version::compareVersion('2.0.0');

The static method Zend\Version\Version::getLatest() provides the version number of the last stable
release available for download on the site Zend Framework.

305.3 Example of the getLatest() Method

1 // returns 1.11.0 (or a later version)
2 echo Zend\Version\Version::getLatest();

1403
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1404 Chapter 305. Getting the Zend Framework Version

 CHAPTER 306

Zend\View Quick Start

306.1 Overview

Zend\View provides the View layer of Zend Framework 2s MVC system. It is a multi-tiered system allowing a
variety of mechanisms for extension, substitution, and more.
The components of the view layer are as follows:
Variables Containers hold variables and callbacks that you wish to represent in the view. Often-times, a
Variables Container will also provide mechanisms for context-specific escaping of variables and more.
View Models hold Variables Containers, specify the template to use (if any), and optionally provide rendering
options (more on that below). View Models may be nested in order to represent complex structures.
Renderers take View Models and provide a representation of them to return. Zend Framework 2 ships with
three renderers by default: a PhpRenderer which utilizes PHP templates in order to generate markup, a
JsonRenderer, and a FeedRenderer for generating RSS and Atom feeds.
Resolvers utilizes Resolver Strategies to resolve a template name to a resource a Renderer may consume. As an
example, a Resolver may take the name blog/entry and resolve it to a PHP view script.
The View consists of strategies that map the current Request to a Renderer, and strategies for injecting the result
of rendering to the Response.
Rendering Strategies listen to the Zend\View\ViewEvent::EVENT_RENDERER event of the View and
decide which Renderer should be selected based on the Request or other criteria.
Response Strategies are used to inject the Response object with the results of rendering. That may also include
taking actions such as setting Content-Type headers.
Additionally, Zend Framework 2 provides integration with the MVC via a number of event listeners in the
Zend\Mvc\View namespace.

306.2 Usage

This section of the manual is designed to show you typical usage patterns of the view layer when using it within the
Zend Framework 2 MVC. The assumptions are that you are using Dependency Injection and the default MVC view
strategies.

1405
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

306.2.1 Configuration

The default configuration will typically work out-of-the-box. However, you will still need to select Resolver Strategies
and configure them, as well as potentially indicate alternate template names for things like the site layout, 404 (not
found) pages, and error pages. The code snippets below can be added to your configuration to accomplish this. We
recommend adding it to a site-specific module, such as the Application module from the frameworks ZendSkelet-
onApplication, or to one of your autoloaded configurations within the config/autoload/ directory.
1 return array(
2 'view_manager' => array(
3 // The TemplateMapResolver allows you to directly map template names
4 // to specific templates. The following map would provide locations
5 // for a home page template ("application/index/index"), as well as for
6 // the layout ("layout/layout"), error pages ("error/index"), and
7 // 404 page ("error/404"), resolving them to view scripts.
8 'template_map' => array(
9 'application/index/index' => __DIR__ . '/../view/application/index/index.phtml',
10 'site/layout' => __DIR__ . '/../view/layout/layout.phtml',
11 'error/index' => __DIR__ . '/../view/error/index.phtml',
12 'error/404' => __DIR__ . '/../view/error/404.phtml',
13 ),
14

15 // The TemplatePathStack takes an array of directories. Directories

16 // are then searched in LIFO order (it's a stack) for the requested
17 // view script. This is a nice solution for rapid application
18 // development, but potentially introduces performance expense in
19 // production due to the number of static calls necessary.
20 //
21 // The following adds an entry pointing to the view directory
22 // of the current module. Make sure your keys differ between modules
23 // to ensure that they are not overwritten -- or simply omit the key!
24 'template_path_stack' => array(
25 'application' => __DIR__ . '/../view',
26 ),
27

28 // This will be used as the default suffix for template scripts resolving, it defaults to 'ph
29 'default_template_suffix' => 'php',
30

31 // Set the template name for the site's layout.

32 //
33 // By default, the MVC's default Rendering Strategy uses the
34 // template name "layout/layout" for the site's layout.
35 // Here, we tell it to use the "site/layout" template,
36 // which we mapped via the TemplateMapResolver above.
37 'layout' => 'site/layout',
38

39 // By default, the MVC registers an "exception strategy", which is

40 // triggered when a requested action raises an exception; it creates
41 // a custom view model that wraps the exception, and selects a
42 // template. We'll set it to "error/index".
43 //
44 // Additionally, we'll tell it that we want to display an exception
45 // stack trace; you'll likely want to disable this by default.
46 'display_exceptions' => true,
47 'exception_template' => 'error/index',
48

49 // Another strategy the MVC registers by default is a "route not

50 // found" strategy. Basically, this gets triggered if (a) no route

1406 Chapter 306. Zend\View Quick Start

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

51 // matches the current request, (b) the controller specified in the

52 // route match cannot be found in the service locator, (c) the controller
53 // specified in the route match does not implement the DispatchableInterface
54 // interface, or (d) if a response from a controller sets the
55 // response status to 404.
56 //
57 // The default template used in such situations is "error", just
58 // like the exception strategy. Here, we tell it to use the "error/404"
59 // template (which we mapped via the TemplateMapResolver, above).
60 //
61 // You can opt in to inject the reason for a 404 situation; see the
62 // various `Application\:\:ERROR_*`_ constants for a list of values.
63 // Additionally, a number of 404 situations derive from exceptions
64 // raised during routing or dispatching. You can opt-in to display
65 // these.
66 'display_not_found_reason' => true,
67 'not_found_template' => 'error/404',
68 ),
69 );

306.2.2 Controllers and View Models

Zend\View\View consumes ViewModels, passing them to the selected renderer. Where do you create these,
though?
The most explicit way is to create them in your controllers and return them.
1 namespace Foo\Controller;
2

3 use Zend\Mvc\Controller\AbstractActionController;
4 use Zend\View\Model\ViewModel;
5

6 class BazBatController extends AbstractActionController

7 {
8 public function doSomethingCrazyAction()
9 {
10 $view = new ViewModel(array(
11 'message' => 'Hello world',
12 ));
13 $view->setTemplate('foo/baz-bat/do-something-crazy');
14 return $view;
15 }
16 }

This sets a message variable in the View Model, and sets the template name foo/baz-bat/do-something-crazy. The
View Model is then returned.
In most cases, youll likely have a template name based on the module namespace, controller, and action. Considering
that, and if youre simply passing some variables, could this be made simpler? Definitely.
The MVC registers a couple of listeners for controllers to automate this. The first will look to see if you returned an
associative array from your controller; if so, it will create a View Model and make this associative array the Variables
Container; this View Model then replaces the MvcEvents result. It will also look to see if you returned nothing or
null; if so, it will create a View Model without any variables attached; this View Model also replaces the MvcEvents
result.
The second listener checks to see if the MvcEvent result is a View Model, and, if so, if it has a template associated
with it. If not, it will inspect the controller matched during routing to determine the module namespace and the

306.2. Usage 1407

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

controller class name, and, if available, its action parameter in order to create a template name. This will be
module/controller/action, all normalized to lowercase, dash-separated words.
As an example, the controller Foo\Controller\BazBatController with action doSomethingCrazyAction,
would be mapped to the template foo/baz-bat/do-something-crazy. As you can see, the words Con-
troller and Action are omitted.
In practice, that means our previous example could be re-written as follows:
1 namespace Foo\Controller;
2

3 use Zend\Mvc\Controller\AbstractActionController;
4

5 class BazBatController extends AbstractActionController

6 {
7 public function doSomethingCrazyAction()
8 {
9 return array(
10 'message' => 'Hello world',
11 );
12 }
13 }

The above method will likely work for the majority of use cases. When you need to specify a different template,
explicitly create and return a View Model and specify the template manually, as in the first example.

306.2.3 Nesting View Models

The other use case you may have for setting explicit View Models is if you wish to nest them. In other words, you
might want to render templates to be included within the main View you return.
As an example, you may want the View from an action to be one primary section that includes both an article and a
couple of sidebars; one of the sidebars may include content from multiple Views as well:
1 namespace Content\Controller;
2

3 use Zend\Mvc\Controller\AbstractActionController;
4 use Zend\View\Model\ViewModel;
5

6 class ArticleController extends AbstractActionController

7 {
8 public function viewAction()
9 {
10 // get the article from the persistence layer, etc...
11

12 $view = new ViewModel();

13

14 // this is not needed since it matches "module/controller/action"

15 $view->setTemplate('content/article/view');
16

17 $articleView = new ViewModel(array('article' => $article));

18 $articleView->setTemplate('content/article');
19

20 $primarySidebarView = new ViewModel();

21 $primarySidebarView->setTemplate('content/main-sidebar');
22

23 $secondarySidebarView = new ViewModel();

24 $secondarySidebarView->setTemplate('content/secondary-sidebar');

1408 Chapter 306. Zend\View Quick Start

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

25

26 $sidebarBlockView = new ViewModel();

27 $sidebarBlockView->setTemplate('content/block');
28

29 $secondarySidebarView->addChild($sidebarBlockView, 'block');
30

31 $view->addChild($articleView, 'article')
32 ->addChild($primarySidebarView, 'sidebar_primary')
33 ->addChild($secondarySidebarView, 'sidebar_secondary');
34

35 return $view;
36 }
37 }

The above will create and return a View Model specifying the template content/article/view. When the
View is rendered, it will render three child Views, the $articleView, $primarySidebarView, and
$secondarySidebarView; these will be captured to the $views article, sidebar_primary, and side-
bar_secondary variables, respectively, so that when it renders, you may include that content. Additionally, the
$secondarySidebarView will include an additional View Model, $sidebarBlockView, which will be cap-
tured to its block view variable.
To better visualize this, lets look at what the final content might look like, with comments detailing where each nested
view model is injected.
Here are the templates, rendered based on a 12-column grid:
1 <?php // "content/article/view" template ?>
2 <!-- This is from the $view View Model, and the "content/article/view" template -->
3 <div class="row content">
4 <?php echo $this->article ?>
5

6 <?php echo $this->sidebar_primary ?>

7

8 <?php echo $this->sidebar_secondary ?>

9 </div>

1 <?php // "content/article" template ?>

2 <!-- This is from the $articleView View Model, and the "content/article"
3 template -->
4 <article class="span8">
5 <?php echo $this->escapeHtml('article') ?>
6 </article>

1 <?php // "content/main-sidebar" template ?>

2 <!-- This is from the $primarySidebarView View Model, and the
3 "content/main-sidebar" template -->
4 <div class="span2 sidebar">
5 sidebar content...
6 </div>

1 <?php // "content/secondary-sidebar template ?>

2 <!-- This is from the $secondarySidebarView View Model, and the
3 "content/secondary-sidebar" template -->
4 <div class="span2 sidebar pull-right">
5 <?php echo $this->block ?>
6 </div>

1 <?php // "content/block template ?>

2 <!-- This is from the $sidebarBlockView View Model, and the

306.2. Usage 1409

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

3 "content/block" template -->

4 <div class="block">
5 block content...
6 </div>

And here is the aggregate, generated content:

1 <!-- This is from the $view View Model, and the "content/article/view" template -->
2 <div class="row content">
3 <!-- This is from the $articleView View Model, and the "content/article"
4 template -->
5 <article class="span8">
6 Lorem ipsum ....
7 </article>
8

9 <!-- This is from the $primarySidebarView View Model, and the

10 "content/main-sidebar" template -->
11 <div class="span2 sidebar">
12 sidebar content...
13 </div>
14

15 <!-- This is from the $secondarySidebarView View Model, and the

16 "content/secondary-sidebar" template -->
17 <div class="span2 sidebar pull-right">
18 <!-- This is from the $sidebarBlockView View Model, and the
19 "content/block" template -->
20 <div class="block">
21 block content...
22 </div>
23 </div>
24 </div>

As you can see, you can achieve very complex markup using nested Views, while simultaneously keeping the details
of rendering isolated from the Request/Response lifecycle of the controller.

306.2.4 Dealing with Layouts

Most sites enforce a cohesive look-and-feel which we typically call the sites layout. It includes the default
stylesheets and JavaScript necessary, if any, as well as the basic markup structure into which all site content will
be injected.
Within Zend Framework 2, layouts are handled via nesting of View Models (see the previous example for examples
of View Model nesting). The Zend\Mvc\View\Http\ViewManager composes a View Model which acts as the
root for nested View Models. As such, it should contain the skeleton (or layout) template for the site. All other
content is then rendered and captured to view variables of this root View Model.
The ViewManager sets the layout template as layout/layout by default. To change this, you can add some config-
uration to the view_manager area of your configuration.
A listener on the controllers, Zend\Mvc\View\Http\InjectViewModelListener, will take a View Model
returned from a controller and inject it as a child of the root (layout) View Model. By default, View Models will
capture to the content variable of the root View Model. This means you can do the following in your layout view
script:
1 <html>
2 <head>
3 <title><?php echo $this->headTitle() ?></title>
4 </head>

1410 Chapter 306. Zend\View Quick Start

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

5 <body>
6 <?php echo $this->content; ?>
7 </body>
8 </html>

If you want to specify a different View variable for which to capture, explicitly create a view model in your controller,
and set its capture to value:
1 namespace Foo\Controller;
2

3 use Zend\Mvc\Controller\AbstractActionController;
4 use Zend\View\Model\ViewModel;
5

6 class BazBatController extends AbstractActionController

7 {
8 public function doSomethingCrazyAction()
9 {
10 $view = new ViewModel(array(
11 'message' => 'Hello world',
12 ));
13

14 // Capture to the layout view's "article" variable

15 $view->setCaptureTo('article');
16

17 return $view;
18 }
19 }

There will be times you dont want to render a layout. For example, you might be answering an API call which expects
JSON or an XML payload, or you might be answering an XHR request that expects a partial HTML payload. The
simplest way to do this is to explicitly create and return a view model from your controller, and mark it as terminal,
which will hint to the MVC listener that normally injects the returned View Model into the layout View Model, to
instead replace the layout view model.
1 namespace Foo\Controller;
2

3 use Zend\Mvc\Controller\AbstractActionController;
4 use Zend\View\Model\ViewModel;
5

6 class BazBatController extends AbstractActionController

7 {
8 public function doSomethingCrazyAction()
9 {
10 $view = new ViewModel(array(
11 'message' => 'Hello world',
12 ));
13

14 // Disable layouts; `MvcEvent` will use this View Model instead

15 $view->setTerminal(true);
16

17 return $view;
18 }
19 }

When discussing nesting View Models, we detailed a nested View Model which contained an article and sidebars.
Sometimes, you may want to provide additional View Models to the layout, instead of nesting in the returned layout.
This may be done by using the layout controller plugin, which returns the root View Model. You can then call the
same addChild() method on it as we did in that previous example.

306.2. Usage 1411

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1 namespace Content\Controller;
2

3 use Zend\Mvc\Controller\AbstractActionController;
4 use Zend\View\Model\ViewModel;
5

6 class ArticleController extends AbstractActionController

7 {
8 public function viewAction()
9 {
10 // get the article from the persistence layer, etc...
11

12 // Get the "layout" view model and inject a sidebar

13 $layout = $this->layout();
14 $sidebarView = new ViewModel();
15 $sidebarView->setTemplate('content/sidebar');
16 $layout->addChild($sidebarView, 'sidebar');
17

18 // Create and return a view model for the retrieved article

19 $view = new ViewModel(array('article' => $article));
20 $view->setTemplate('content/article');
21 return $view;
22 }
23 }

You could also use this technique to select a different layout, by simply calling the setTemplate() method of the
layout View Model:
1 //In a controller
2 namespace Content\Controller;
3

4 use Zend\Mvc\Controller\AbstractActionController;
5 use Zend\View\Model\ViewModel;
6

7 class ArticleController extends AbstractActionController

8 {
9 public function viewAction()
10 {
11 // get the article from the persistence layer, etc...
12

13 // Get the "layout" view model and set an alternate template

14 $layout = $this->layout();
15 $layout->setTemplate('article/layout');
16

17 // Create and return a view model for the retrieved article

18 $view = new ViewModel(array('article' => $article));
19 $view->setTemplate('content/article');
20 return $view;
21 }
22 }

Sometimes, you may want to access the layout from within your actual view scripts when using the PhpRenderer.
Reasons might include wanting to change the layout template or wanting to either access or inject layout view vari-
ables. Similar to the layout controller plugin, you can use the layout View Helper. If you provide a string argument
to it, you will change the template; if you provide no arguments, the root layout View Model is returned.
1 //In a view script
2

3 // Change the layout:

4 $this->layout('alternate/layout'); // OR

1412 Chapter 306. Zend\View Quick Start

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

5 $this->layout()->setTemplate('alternate/layout');
6

7 // Access a layout variable.

8 // Since access to the base view model is relatively easy, it becomes a
9 // reasonable place to store things such as API keys, which other view scripts
10 // may need.
11 $layout = $this->layout();
12 $disqusApiKey = false;
13 if (isset($layout->disqusApiKey)) {
14 $disqusApiKey = $layout->disqusApiKey;
15 }
16

17 // Set a layout variable

18 $this->layout()->footer = $this->render('article/footer');

Commonly, you may want to alter the layout based on the current module. This requires (a) detecting if the controller
matched in routing belongs to this module, and then (b) changing the template of the View Model.
The place to do these actions is in a listener. It should listen either to the route event at low (negative) priority, or on
the dispatch event, at any priority. Typically, you will register this during the bootstrap event.
1 namespace Content;
2

3 class Module
4 {
5 /**
6 * @param \Zend\Mvc\MvcEvent $e The MvcEvent instance
7 * @return void
8 */
9 public function onBootstrap($e)
10 {
11 // Register a dispatch event
12 $app = $e->getParam('application');
13 $app->getEventManager()->attach('dispatch', array($this, 'setLayout'));
14 }
15

16 /**
17 * @param \Zend\Mvc\MvcEvent $e The MvcEvent instance
18 * @return void
19 */
20 public function setLayout($e)
21 {
22 $matches = $e->getRouteMatch();
23 $controller = $matches->getParam('controller');
24 if (false === strpos($controller, __NAMESPACE__)) {
25 // not a controller from this module
26 return;
27 }
28

29 // Set the layout template

30 $viewModel = $e->getViewModel();
31 $viewModel->setTemplate('content/layout');
32 }
33 }

306.2. Usage 1413

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

306.2.5 Creating and Registering Alternate Rendering and Response Strategies

Zend\View\View does very little. Its workflow is essentially to martial a ViewEvent, and then trig-
ger two events, renderer and response. You can attach strategies to these events, using the methods
addRenderingStrategy() and addResponseStrategy(), respectively. A Rendering Strategy investigates
the Request object (or any other criteria) in order to select a Renderer (or fail to select one). A Response Strategy
determines how to populate the Response based on the result of rendering.
Zend Framework 2 ships with three Rendering and Response Strategies that you can use within your application.
Zend\View\Strategy\PhpRendererStrategy. This strategy is a catch-all in that it will always
return the Zend\View\Renderer\PhpRenderer and populate the Response body with the results of ren-
dering.
Zend\View\Strategy\JsonStrategy. This strategy inspects the Accept HTTP header, if present,
and determines if the client has indicated it accepts an application/json response. If so, it will return the
Zend\View\Renderer\JsonRenderer, and populate the Response body with the JSON value returned,
as well as set a Content-Type header with a value of application/json.
Zend\View\Strategy\FeedStrategy. This strategy inspects the Accept HTTP header, if present, and
determines if the client has indicated it accepts either an application/rss+xml or application/atom+xml re-
sponse. If so, it will return the Zend\View\Renderer\FeedRenderer, setting the feed type to either
rss or atom, based on what was matched. Its Response strategy will populate the Response body with the
generated feed, as well as set a Content-Type header with the appropriate value based on feed type.
By default, only the PhpRendererStrategy is registered, meaning you will need to register the other Strategies
yourself if you want to use them. Additionally, it means that you will likely want to register these at higher priority to
ensure they match before the PhpRendererStrategy. As an example, lets register the JsonStrategy:
1 namespace Application;
2

3 class Module
4 {
5 /**
6 * @param \Zend\Mvc\MvcEvent $e The MvcEvent instance
7 * @return void
8 */
9 public function onBootstrap($e)
10 {
11 // Register a "render" event, at high priority (so it executes prior
12 // to the view attempting to render)
13 $app = $e->getApplication();
14 $app->getEventManager()->attach('render', array($this, 'registerJsonStrategy'), 100);
15 }
16

17 /**
18 * @param \Zend\Mvc\MvcEvent $e The MvcEvent instance
19 * @return void
20 */
21 public function registerJsonStrategy($e)
22 {
23 $app = $e->getTarget();
24 $locator = $app->getServiceManager();
25 $view = $locator->get('Zend\View\View');
26 $jsonStrategy = $locator->get('ViewJsonStrategy');
27

28 // Attach strategy, which is a listener aggregate, at high priority

29 $view->getEventManager()->attach($jsonStrategy, 100);
30 }

1414 Chapter 306. Zend\View Quick Start

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

31 }

The above will register the JsonStrategy with the render event, such that it executes prior to the
PhpRendererStrategy, and thus ensure that a JSON payload is created when requested.
What if you want this to happen only in specific modules, or specific controllers? One way is similar to the last
example in the previous section on layouts, where we detailed changing the layout for a specific module:
1 namespace Content;
2

3 class Module
4 {
5 /**
6 * @param \Zend\Mvc\MvcEvent $e The MvcEvent instance
7 * @return void
8 */
9 public function onBootstrap($e)
10 {
11 // Register a render event
12 $app = $e->getParam('application');
13 $app->getEventManager()->attach('render', array($this, 'registerJsonStrategy'), 100);
14 }
15

16 /**
17 * @param \Zend\Mvc\MvcEvent $e The MvcEvent instance
18 * @return void
19 */
20 public function registerJsonStrategy($e)
21 {
22 $matches = $e->getRouteMatch();
23 $controller = $matches->getParam('controller');
24 if (false === strpos($controller, __NAMESPACE__)) {
25 // not a controller from this module
26 return;
27 }
28

29 // Potentially, you could be even more selective at this point, and test
30 // for specific controller classes, and even specific actions or request
31 // methods.
32

33 // Set the JSON strategy when controllers from this module are selected
34 $app = $e->getTarget();
35 $locator = $app->getServiceManager();
36 $view = $locator->get('Zend\View\View');
37 $jsonStrategy = $locator->get('ViewJsonStrategy');
38

39 // Attach strategy, which is a listener aggregate, at high priority

40 $view->getEventManager()->attach($jsonStrategy, 100);
41 }
42 }

While the above examples detail using the JsonStrategy, the same could be done for the FeedStrategy.
What if you want to use a custom renderer? Or if your app might allow a combination of JSON, Atom feeds, and
HTML? At this point, youll need to create your own custom strategies. Below is an example that appropriately loops
through the HTTP Accept header, and selects the appropriate Renderer based on what is matched first.
1 namespace Content\View;
2

306.2. Usage 1415

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

3 use Zend\EventManager\EventManagerInterface;
4 use Zend\EventManager\ListenerAggregateInterface;
5 use Zend\Feed\Writer\Feed;
6 use Zend\View\Renderer\FeedRenderer;
7 use Zend\View\Renderer\JsonRenderer;
8 use Zend\View\Renderer\PhpRenderer;
9

10 class AcceptStrategy implements ListenerAggregateInterface

11 {
12 protected $feedRenderer;
13 protected $jsonRenderer;
14 protected $listeners = array();
15 protected $phpRenderer;
16

17 public function __construct(

18 PhpRenderer $phpRenderer,
19 JsonRenderer $jsonRenderer,
20 FeedRenderer $feedRenderer
21 ) {
22 $this->phpRenderer = $phpRenderer;
23 $this->jsonRenderer = $jsonRenderer;
24 $this->feedRenderer = $feedRenderer;
25 }
26

27 public function attach(EventManagerInterface $events, $priority = null)

28 {
29 if (null === $priority) {
30 $this->listeners[] = $events->attach('renderer', array($this, 'selectRenderer'));
31 $this->listeners[] = $events->attach('response', array($this, 'injectResponse'));
32 } else {
33 $this->listeners[] = $events->attach('renderer', array($this, 'selectRenderer'), $priorit
34 $this->listeners[] = $events->attach('response', array($this, 'injectResponse'), $priorit
35 }
36 }
37

38 public function detach(EventManagerInterface $events)

39 {
40 foreach ($this->listeners as $index => $listener) {
41 if ($events->detach($listener)) {
42 unset($this->listeners[$index]);
43 }
44 }
45 }
46

47 /**
48 * @param \Zend\Mvc\MvcEvent $e The MvcEvent instance
49 * @return \Zend\View\Renderer\RendererInterface
50 */
51 public function selectRenderer($e)
52 {
53 $request = $e->getRequest();
54 $headers = $request->getHeaders();
55

56 // No Accept header? return PhpRenderer

57 if (!$headers->has('accept')) {
58 return $this->phpRenderer;
59 }
60

1416 Chapter 306. Zend\View Quick Start

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

61 $accept = $headers->get('accept');
62 foreach ($accept->getPrioritized() as $mediaType) {
63 if (0 === strpos($mediaType, 'application/json')) {
64 return $this->jsonRenderer;
65 }
66 if (0 === strpos($mediaType, 'application/rss+xml')) {
67 $this->feedRenderer->setFeedType('rss');
68 return $this->feedRenderer;
69 }
70 if (0 === strpos($mediaType, 'application/atom+xml')) {
71 $this->feedRenderer->setFeedType('atom');
72 return $this->feedRenderer;
73 }
74 }
75

76 // Nothing matched; return PhpRenderer. Technically, we should probably

77 // return an HTTP 415 Unsupported response.
78 return $this->phpRenderer;
79 }
80

81 /**
82 * @param \Zend\Mvc\MvcEvent $e The MvcEvent instance
83 * @return void
84 */
85 public function injectResponse($e)
86 {
87 $renderer = $e->getRenderer();
88 $response = $e->getResponse();
89 $result = $e->getResult();
90

91 if ($renderer === $this->jsonRenderer) {

92 // JSON Renderer; set content-type header
93 $headers = $response->getHeaders();
94 $headers->addHeaderLine('content-type', 'application/json');
95 } elseif ($renderer === $this->feedRenderer) {
96 // Feed Renderer; set content-type header, and export the feed if
97 // necessary
98 $feedType = $this->feedRenderer->getFeedType();
99 $headers = $response->getHeaders();
100 $mediatype = 'application/'
101 . (('rss' == $feedType) ? 'rss' : 'atom')
102 . '+xml';
103 $headers->addHeaderLine('content-type', $mediatype);
104

105 // If the $result is a feed, export it

106 if ($result instanceof Feed) {
107 $result = $result->export($feedType);
108 }
109 } elseif ($renderer !== $this->phpRenderer) {
110 // Not a renderer we support, therefor not our strategy. Return
111 return;
112 }
113

114 // Inject the content

115 $response->setContent($result);
116 }
117 }

306.2. Usage 1417

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

This strategy would be registered just as we demonstrated registering the JsonStrategy earlier. You would also
need to define DI configuration to ensure the various renderers are injected when you retrieve the strategy from the
applications locator instance.

1418 Chapter 306. Zend\View Quick Start

 CHAPTER 307

The PhpRenderer

Zend\View\Renderer\PhpRenderer renders view scripts written in PHP, capturing and returning the output.
It composes Variable containers and/or View Models, a helper plugin manager for helpers, and optional filtering of the
captured output.
The PhpRenderer is template system agnostic; you may use PHP as your template language, or create instances of
other template systems and manipulate them within your view script. Anything you can do with PHP is available to
you.

307.1 Usage

Basic usage consists of instantiating or otherwise obtaining an instance of the PhpRenderer, providing it with a
resolver which will resolve templates to PHP view scripts, and then calling its render() method.
Instantiating a renderer is trivial:
1 use Zend\View\Renderer\PhpRenderer;
2

3 $renderer = new PhpRenderer();

Zend Framework ships with several types of resolvers, which are used to resolve a template name to a resource a
renderer can consume. The ones we will usually use with the PhpRenderer are:
Zend\View\Resolver\TemplateMapResolver, which simply maps template names directly to view
scripts.
Zend\View\Resolver\TemplatePathStack, which creates a LIFO stack of script directories in which
to search for a view script. By default, it appends the suffix .phtml to the requested template name, and then
loops through the script directories; if it finds a file matching the requested template, it returns the full file path.
Zend\View\Resolver\RelativeFallbackResolver, which allows using short template name into
partial rendering. It is used as wrapper for each of two aforesaid resolvers. For example, this allows usage
of partial template paths such as my/module/script/path/my-view/some/partial.phtml, while
rendering template my/module/script/path/my-view by short name some/partial.
Zend\View\Resolver\AggregateResolver, which allows attaching a FIFO queue of resolvers to con-
sult.
We suggest using the AggregateResolver, as it allows you to create a multi-tiered strategy for resolving template
names.
Programmatically, you would then do something like this:

1419
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1 use Zend\View\Renderer\PhpRenderer;
2 use Zend\View\Resolver;
3

4 $renderer = new PhpRenderer();

5

6 $resolver = new Resolver\AggregateResolver();

7

8 $renderer->setResolver($resolver);
9

10 $map = new Resolver\TemplateMapResolver(array(

11 'layout' => __DIR__ . '/view/layout.phtml',
12 'index/index' => __DIR__ . '/view/index/index.phtml',
13 ));
14 $stack = new Resolver\TemplatePathStack(array(
15 'script_paths' => array(
16 __DIR__ . '/view',
17 $someOtherPath
18 )
19 ));
20

21 $resolver->attach($map) // this will be consulted first

22 ->attach($stack)
23 ->attach(new Resolver\RelativeFallbackResolver($map) // this allows using short template na
24 ->attach(new Resolver\RelativeFallbackResolver($stack);

You can also specify a specific priority value when registering resolvers, with high, positive integers getting higher
priority, and low, negative integers getting low priority, when resolving.
In an MVC application, you can configure this via DI quite easily:
1 return array(
2 'di' => array(
3 'instance' => array(
4 'Zend\View\Resolver\AggregateResolver' => array(
5 'injections' => array(
6 'Zend\View\Resolver\TemplateMapResolver',
7 'Zend\View\Resolver\TemplatePathStack',
8 ),
9 ),
10

11 'Zend\View\Resolver\TemplateMapResolver' => array(

12 'parameters' => array(
13 'map' => array(
14 'layout' => __DIR__ . '/view/layout.phtml',
15 'index/index' => __DIR__ . '/view/index/index.phtml',
16 ),
17 ),
18 ),
19 'Zend\View\Resolver\TemplatePathStack' => array(
20 'parameters' => array(
21 'paths' => array(
22 'application' => __DIR__ . '/view',
23 'elsewhere' => $someOtherPath,
24 ),
25 ),
26 ),
27 'Zend\View\Renderer\PhpRenderer' => array(
28 'parameters' => array(
29 'resolver' => 'Zend\View\Resolver\AggregateResolver',

1420 Chapter 307. The PhpRenderer

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

30 ),
31 ),
32 ),
33 ),
34 );

Now that we have our PhpRenderer instance, and it can find templates, lets inject some variables. This can be
done in 4 different ways.
Pass an associative array (or ArrayAccess instance, or Zend\View\Variables instance) of items as the
second argument to render(): $renderer->render($templateName, array(foo => bar))
Assign a Zend\View\Variables instance, associative array, or ArrayAccess instance to the
setVars() method.
Assign variables as instance properties of the renderer: $renderer->foo = bar. This essentially proxies to an
instance of Variables composed internally in the renderer by default.
Create a ViewModel instance, assign variables to that, and pass the ViewModel to the render() method:
1 use Zend\View\Model\ViewModel;
2 use Zend\View\Renderer\PhpRenderer;
3

4 $renderer = new PhpRenderer();

5

6 $model = new ViewModel();

7 $model->setVariable('foo', 'bar');
8 // or
9 $model = new ViewModel(array('foo' => 'bar'));
10

11 $model->setTemplate($templateName);
12 $renderer->render($model);

Now, lets render something. As a simple example, let us say you have a list of book data.
1 // use a model to get the data for book authors and titles.
2 $data = array(
3 array(
4 'author' => 'Hernando de Soto',
5 'title' => 'The Mystery of Capitalism'
6 ),
7 array(
8 'author' => 'Henry Hazlitt',
9 'title' => 'Economics in One Lesson'
10 ),
11 array(
12 'author' => 'Milton Friedman',
13 'title' => 'Free to Choose'
14 )
15 );
16

17 // now assign the book data to a renderer instance

18 $renderer->books = $data;
19

20 // and render the template "booklist"

21 echo $renderer->render('booklist');

More often than not, youll likely be using the MVC layer. As such, you should be thinking in terms of view models.
Lets consider the following code from within an action method of a controller.

307.1. Usage 1421

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1 namespace Bookstore\Controller;
2

3 use Zend\Mvc\Controller\AbstractActionController;
4

5 class BookController extends AbstractActionController

6 {
7 public function listAction()
8 {
9 // do some work...
10

11 // Assume $data is the list of books from the previous example

12 $model = new ViewModel(array('books' => $data));
13

14 // Optionally specify a template; if we don't, by default it will be

15 // auto-determined based on the module name, controller name and this action.
16 // In this example, the template would resolve to "bookstore/book/list",
17 // and thus the file "bookstore/book/list.phtml"; the following overrides
18 // that to set the template to "booklist", and thus the file "booklist.phtml"
19 // (note the lack of directory preceding the filename).
20 $model->setTemplate('booklist');
21

22 return $model
23 }
24 }

This will then be rendered as if the following were executed:

1 $renderer->render($model);

Now we need the associated view script. At this point, well assume that the template booklist resolves to the file
booklist.phtml. This is a PHP script like any other, with one exception: it executes inside the scope of the
PhpRenderer instance, which means that references to $this point to the PhpRenderer instance properties and
methods. Thus, a very basic view script could look like this:
1 <?php if ($this->books): ?>
2

3 <!-- A table of some books. -->

4 <table>
5 <tr>
6 <th>Author</th>
7 <th>Title</th>
8 </tr>
9

10 <?php foreach ($this->books as $key => $val): ?>

11 <tr>
12 <td><?php echo $this->escapeHtml($val['author']) ?></td>
13 <td><?php echo $this->escapeHtml($val['title']) ?></td>
14 </tr>
15 <?php endforeach; ?>
16

17 </table>
18

19 <?php else: ?>

20

21 <p>There are no books to display.</p>

22

23 <?php endif;?>

1422 Chapter 307. The PhpRenderer

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Note: Escape Output

The security mantra is Filter input, escape output. If you are unsure of the source of a given variable which is
likely most of the time you should escape it based on which HTML context it is being injected into. The primary
contexts to be aware of are HTML Body, HTML Attribute, Javascript, CSS and URI. Each context has a dedicated
helper available to apply the escaping strategy most appropriate to each context. You should be aware that escaping
does vary significantly between contexts - there is no one single escaping strategy that can be globally applied.
In the example above, there are calls to an escapeHtml() method. The method is actually a helper, a plugin
available via method overloading. Additional escape helpers provide the escapeHtmlAttr(), escapeJs(),
escapeCss(), and escapeUrl() methods for each of the HTML contexts you are most likely to encounter.
By using the provided helpers and being aware of your variables contexts, you will prevent your templates from
running afoul of Cross-Site Scripting (XSS) vulnerabilities.

Weve now toured the basic usage of the PhpRenderer. By now you should know how to instantiate the renderer,
provide it with a resolver, assign variables and/or create view models, create view scripts, and render view scripts.

307.2 Options and Configuration

Zend\View\Renderer\PhpRenderer utilizes several collaborators in order to do its work. use the following
methods to configure the renderer.
setHelperPluginManager(string|Zend\View\HelperPluginManager $helpers)
Set the helper plugin manager instance used to load, register, and retrieve helpers.
Return type Zend\View\Renderer\PhpRenderer
setResolver(Zend\View\Resolver\ResolverInterface $resolver)
Set the resolver instance.
Return type Zend\View\Renderer\PhpRenderer
setFilterChain(Zend\Filter\FilterChain $filters)
Set a filter chain to use as an output filter on rendered content.
Return type Zend\View\Renderer\PhpRenderer
setVars(array|ArrayAccess|Zend\View\Variables $variables)
Set the variables to use when rendering a view script/template.
Return type mixed
setCanRenderTrees(boolean $canRenderTrees)
Set flag indicating whether or not we should render trees of view models. If set to true, the Zend\View\View
instance will not attempt to render children separately, but instead pass the root view model directly to the
PhpRenderer. It is then up to the developer to render the children from within the view script. This is
typically done using the RenderChildModel helper: $this->renderChildModel(child_name).
Return type Zend\View\Renderer\PhpRenderer

307.3 Additional Methods

Typically, youll only ever access variables and helpers within your view scripts or when interacting with the
PhpRenderer. However, there are a few additional methods you may be interested in.

307.2. Options and Configuration 1423

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

render(string|Zend\View\Model\ModelInterface $nameOrModel, array|Traversable $values = null)

Render a template/view model.
If $nameOrModel is a string, it is assumed to be a template name. That template will be resolved using the
current resolver, and then rendered. If $values is non-null, those values, and those values only, will be used
during rendering, and will replace whatever variable container previously was in the renderer; however, the
previous variable container will be reset when done. If $values is empty, the current variables container (see
setVars()) will be injected when rendering.
If $nameOrModel is a Model instance, the template name will be retrieved from it and used. Additionally, if
the model contains any variables, these will be used when rendering; otherwise, the variables container already
present, if any, will be used.
It will return the script output.
Return type string
resolver()
Retrieves the Resolver instance.
Return type string|Zend\View\Resolver\ResolverInterface
vars(string $key = null)
Retrieve a single variable from the container if a key is provided, otherwise it will return the variables container.
Return type mixed
plugin(string $name, array $options = null)
Get a plugin/helper instance. Proxies to the plugin managers get() method; as such, any $options you
pass will be passed to the plugins constructor if this is the first time the plugin has been retrieved. See the
section on helpers for more information.
Return type Zend\View\Helper\HelperInterface
addTemplate(string $template)
Add a template to the stack. When used, the next call to render() will loop through all template added using
this method, rendering them one by one; the output of the last will be returned.
Return type Zend\View\Renderer\PhpRenderer

1424 Chapter 307. The PhpRenderer

 CHAPTER 308

PhpRenderer View Scripts

Once you call render(), Zend\View\Renderer\PhpRenderer then include()s the requested view script
and executes it inside the scope of the PhpRenderer instance. Therefore, in your view scripts, references to
$this actually point to the PhpRenderer instance itself.
Variables assigned to the view either via a View Model, Variables container, or simply by passing an array of
variables to render() may be retrieved in three ways:
Explicitly, by retrieving them from the Variables container composed in the PhpRenderer: $this->vars()-
>varname.
As instance properties of the PhpRenderer instance: $this->varname. (In this situation, instance property
access is simply proxying to the composed Variables instance.)
As local PHP variables: $varname. The PhpRenderer extracts the members of the Variables container
locally.
We generally recommend using the second notation, as its less verbose than the first, but differentiates between
variables in the view script scope and those assigned to the renderer from elsewhere.
By way of reminder, here is the example view script from the PhpRenderer introduction.
1 <?php if ($this->books): ?>
2

3 <!-- A table of some books. -->

4 <table>
5 <tr>
6 <th>Author</th>
7 <th>Title</th>
8 </tr>
9

10 <?php foreach ($this->books as $key => $val): ?>

11 <tr>
12 <td><?php echo $this->escapeHtml($val['author']) ?></td>
13 <td><?php echo $this->escapeHtml($val['title']) ?></td>
14 </tr>
15 <?php endforeach; ?>
16

17 </table>
18

19 <?php else: ?>

20

21 <p>There are no books to display.</p>

22

23 <?php endif;?>

1425
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

308.1 Escaping Output

One of the most important tasks to perform in a view script is to make sure that output is escaped properly; among
other things, this helps to avoid cross-site scripting attacks. Unless you are using a function, method, or helper that
does escaping on its own, you should always escape variables when you output them and pay careful attention to
applying the correct escaping strategy to each HTML context you use.
The PhpRenderer includes a selection of helpers you can use for this purpose: EscapeHtml,
EscapeHtmlAttr, EscapeJs, EscapeCss, and EscapeUrl. Matching the correct helper (or combination
of helpers) to the context into which you are injecting untrusted variables will ensure that you are protected against
Cross-Site Scripting (XSS) vulnerabilities.
1 // bad view-script practice:
2 echo $this->variable;
3

4 // good view-script practice:

5 echo $this->escapeHtml($this->variable);
6

7 // and remember context is always relevant!

8 <script type="text/javascript">
9 var foo = "<?php echo $this->escapeJs($variable) ?>";
10 </script>

1426 Chapter 308. PhpRenderer View Scripts

 CHAPTER 309

The ViewEvent

The view layer of Zend Framework 2 incorporates and utilizes a custom Zend\EventManager\Event imple-
mentation - Zend\View\ViewEvent. This event is created during Zend\View\View::getEvent() and is
passed directly to all the events that method triggers.
The ViewEvent adds accessors and mutators for the following:
Model object, typically representing the layout view model.
Renderer object.
Request object.
Response object.
Result object.
The methods it defines are:
setModel(Model $model)
getModel()
setRequest($request)
getRequest()
setResponse($response)
getResponse()
setRenderer($renderer)
getRenderer()
setResult($result)
getResult()

309.1 Order of events

The following events are triggered, in the following order:

1427
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Table 309.1: ViewEvent Events

Name Constant Description
renderer ViewEvent::EVENT_RENDERER Render the view, with the help of renderers.
renderer.post ViewEvent::EVENT_RENDERER_POST Triggers after the view is rendered.
response ViewEvent::EVENT_RESPONSE Populate the response from the view.
Those events are extensively describe in the following sections.

309.2 ViewEvent::EVENT_RENDERER

309.2.1 Listeners

The following classes are listening to this event (they are sorted from higher priority to lower priority):

For PhpStrategy

This listener is added when the strategy used for rendering is PhpStrategy:

Table 309.2: ViewEvent::EVENT_RENDERER Listeners for PhpStrategy

Class Priority Method Called Description
Zend\View\Strategy\PhpStrategy 1 selectRenderer Return a PhpRenderer

For JsonStrategy

This listener is added when the strategy used for rendering is JsonStrategy:

Table 309.3: ViewEvent::EVENT_RENDERER Listeners for JsonStrategy

Class Priority Method Called Description
Zend\View\Strategy\JsonStrategy 1 selectRenderer Return a JsonRenderer

For FeedStrategy

This listener is added when the strategy used for rendering is FeedStrategy:

Table 309.4: ViewEvent::EVENT_RENDERER Listeners for FeedStrategy

Class Priority Method Called Description
Zend\View\Strategy\FeedStrategy 1 selectRenderer Return a FeedRenderer

309.2.2 Triggerers

This event is triggered by the following classes:

1428 Chapter 309. The ViewEvent

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Table 309.5: ViewEvent::EVENT_RENDERER Triggerers

Class In Description
Method
Zend\View\Viewrender It has a short circuit callback that stops propagation once one result return an
instance of a Renderer.

309.3 ViewEvent::EVENT_RENDERER_POST

309.3.1 Listeners

There are currently no built-in listeners for this event.

309.3.2 Triggerers

This event is triggered by the following classes:

Table 309.6: ViewEvent::EVENT_RENDERER_POST Triggerers

Class In Description
Method
Zend\View\View
render This event is triggered after ViewEvent::EVENT_RENDERER and before
ViewEvent::EVENT_RESPONSE.

309.4 ViewEvent::EVENT_RESPONSE

309.4.1 Listeners

The following classes are listening to this event (they are sorted from higher priority to lower priority):

For PhpStrategy

This listener is added when the strategy used for rendering is PhpStrategy:

Table 309.7: ViewEvent::EVENT_RESPONSE Listeners for PhpStrategy

Class Prior- Method Called Description
ity
1
Zend\View\Strategy\PhpStrategy injectResponsePopulate the Response object from
the view.

For JsonStrategy

This listener is added when the strategy used for rendering is JsonStrategy:

309.3. ViewEvent::EVENT_RENDERER_POST 1429

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Table 309.8: ViewEvent::EVENT_RESPONSE Listeners for JsonStrategy

Class Prior- Method Called Description
ity
1
Zend\View\Strategy\JsonStrategy injectResponsePopulate the Response object from
the view.

For FeedStrategy

This listener is added when the strategy used for rendering is FeedStrategy:

Table 309.9: ViewEvent::EVENT_RESPONSE Listeners for FeedStrategy

Class Prior- Method Called Description
ity
1
Zend\View\Strategy\FeedStrategy injectResponsePopulate the Response object from
the view.

309.4.2 Triggerers

This event is triggered by the following classes:

Table 309.10: ViewEvent::EVENT_RESPONSE Triggerers

Class In Description
Method
Zend\View\View
render This event is triggered after ViewEvent::EVENT_RENDERER and
ViewEvent::EVENT_RENDERER_POST.

1430 Chapter 309. The ViewEvent

 CHAPTER 310

View Helpers

310.1 Introduction

In your view scripts, often it is necessary to perform certain complex functions over and over: e.g., formatting a date,
generating form elements, or displaying action links. You can use helper, or plugin, classes to perform these behaviors
for you.
A helper is simply a class that implements Zend\View\Helper\HelperInterface and it simply de-
fines two methods, setView(), which accepts a Zend\View\Renderer\RendererInterface in-
stance/implementation, and getView(), used to retrieve that instance. Zend\View\Renderer\PhpRenderer
composes a plugin manager, allowing you to retrieve helpers, and also provides some method overloading capabilities
that allow proxying method calls to helpers.
As an example, lets say we have a helper class named MyModule\View\Helper\LowerCase, which we register
in our plugin manager with the name lowercase. We can retrieve it in one of the following ways:
1 // $view is a PhpRenderer instance
2

3 // Via the plugin manager:

4 $pluginManager = $view->getHelperPluginManager();
5 $helper = $pluginManager->get('lowercase');
6

7 // Retrieve the helper instance, via the method "plugin",

8 // which proxies to the plugin manager:
9 $helper = $view->plugin('lowercase');
10

11 // If the helper does not define __invoke(), the following also retrieves it:
12 $helper = $view->lowercase();
13

14 // If the helper DOES define __invoke, you can call the helper
15 // as if it is a method:
16 $filtered = $view->lowercase('some value');

The last two examples demonstrate how the PhpRenderer uses method overloading to retrieve and/or invoke helpers
directly, offering a convenience API for end users.
A large number of helpers are provided in the standard distribution of Zend Framework. You can also register helpers
by adding them to the plugin manager.

1431
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

310.2 Included Helpers

Zend Framework comes with an initial set of helper classes. In particular, there are helpers for creating route-based
URLs and HTML lists, as well as declaring variables. Additionally, there are a rich set of helpers for providing values
for, and rendering, the various HTML <head> tags, such as HeadTitle, HeadLink, and HeadScript. The
currently shipped helpers include:
BasePath
Cycle
Doctype
FlashMessenger
Gravatar
HeadLink
HeadMeta
HeadScript
HeadStyle
HeadTitle
HtmlList
HTML Object Plugins
Identity
InlineScript
JSON
Partial
Placeholder
Url

Note: View helpers related to Internationalization are documented in the I18n View Helpers chapter.

Note: View helpers related to form are documented in the Form View Helpers chapter.

Note: View helpers related to navigation are documented in the Navigation View Helpers chapter.

Note: View helpers related to paginator are documented in the Paginator Usage chapter.

Note: For documentation on writing custom view helpers see the Advanced usage chapter.

1432 Chapter 310. View Helpers

 CHAPTER 311

View Helper - BasePath

311.1 Introduction

While most URLs generated by the framework have the base URL prepended automatically, developers will need to
prepend the base URL to their own URLs (usually inside an href attribute) in order for paths to resources to be correct.
If youre running on ZF2s MVC base, basePath() will point to the public folder of the applications root.

311.2 Basic Usage

Usage of the basePath() helper is straightforward:

1 /*
2 * The following assume that the base URL of the page/application is "/mypage".
3 */
4

5 /*
6 * Prints:
7 * <base href="/mypage/" />
8 */
9 <base href="<?php echo $this->basePath(); ?>" />
10

11 /*
12 * Prints:
13 * <link rel="stylesheet" type="text/css" href="/mypage/css/base.css" />
14 */
15 <link rel="stylesheet" type="text/css"
16 href="<?php echo $this->basePath('css/base.css'); ?>" />

Note: For simplicitys sake, we strip out the entry PHP file (e.g., index.php) from
the base URL . However, in some situations this may cause a problem. If one occurs, use
$this->plugin(basePath)->setBasePath() to manually set the base path.

1433
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1434 Chapter 311. View Helper - BasePath

 CHAPTER 312

View Helper - Cycle

312.1 Introduction

The Cycle helper is used to alternate a set of values.

312.2 Basic Usage

To add elements to cycle just specify them in constructor:

1 <table>
2 <?php foreach ($this->books as $book): ?>
3 <tr style="background-color: <?php echo $this->cycle(array('#F0F0F0', '#FFF'))
4 ->next() ?>">
5 <td><?php echo $this->escapeHtml($book['author']) ?></td>
6 </tr>
7 <?php endforeach ?>
8 </table>

The output:
1 <table>
2 <tr style="background-color: #F0F0F0">
3 <td>First</td>
4 </tr>
5 <tr style="background-color: #FFF">
6 <td>Second</td>
7 </tr>
8 </table>

Or use assign(array $data) method and moving in backwards order:

1 <?php $this->cycle()->assign(array('#F0F0F0', '#FFF')) ?>
2

3 <table>
4 <?php foreach ($this->books as $book): ?>
5 <tr style="background-color: <?php echo $this->cycle()->prev() ?>">
6 <td><?php echo $this->escapeHtml($book['author']) ?></td>
7 </tr>
8 <?php endforeach ?>
9 </table>

1435
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

The output:
1 <table>
2 <tr style="background-color: #FFF">
3 <td>First</td>
4 </tr>
5 <tr style="background-color: #F0F0F0">
6 <td>Second</td>
7 </tr>
8 </table>

312.3 Working with two or more cycles

To use two cycles you have to specify the names of cycles. Just set second parameter in cycle method:
$this->cycle(array(#F0F0F0, #FFF), cycle2)
1 <table>
2 <?php foreach ($this->books as $book): ?>
3 <tr style="background-color: <?php echo $this->cycle(array('#F0F0F0', '#FFF'))
4 ->next() ?>">
5 <td><?php echo $this->cycle(array(1, 2, 3), 'number')->next() ?></td>
6 <td><?php echo $this->escapeHtml($book['author']) ?></td>
7 </tr>
8 <?php endforeach ?>
9 </table>

You can also use assign($data, $name) and setName($name) methods:

1 <?php
2 $this->cycle()->assign(array('#F0F0F0', '#FFF'), 'colors');
3 $this->cycle()->assign(array(1, 2, 3), 'numbers');
4 ?>
5 <table>
6 <?php foreach ($this->books as $book): ?>
7 <tr style="background-color: <?php echo $this->cycle()->setName('colors')->next() ?>">
8 <td><?php echo $this->cycle()->setName('numbers')->next() ?></td>
9 <td><?php echo $this->escapeHtml($book['author']) ?></td>
10 </tr>
11 <?php endforeach ?>
12 </table>

1436 Chapter 312. View Helper - Cycle

 CHAPTER 313

View Helper - Doctype

313.1 Introduction

Valid HTML and XHTML documents should include a DOCTYPE declaration. Besides being difficult to remember,
these can also affect how certain elements in your document should be rendered (for instance, CDATA escaping in
<script> and <style> elements.
The Doctype helper allows you to specify one of the following types:
XHTML11
XHTML1_STRICT
XHTML1_TRANSITIONAL
XHTML1_FRAMESET
XHTML1_RDFA
XHTML1_RDFA11
XHTML_BASIC1
XHTML5
HTML4_STRICT
HTML4_LOOSE
HTML4_FRAMESET
HTML5
CUSTOM_XHTML
CUSTOM
You can also specify a custom doctype as long as it is well-formed.
The Doctype helper is a concrete implementation of the Placeholder helper.

313.2 Basic Usage

You may specify the doctype at any time. However, helpers that depend on the doctype for their output will recognize
it only after you have set it, so the easiest approach is to specify it in your bootstrap:

1437
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1 $doctypeHelper = new Zend\View\Helper\Doctype();

2 $doctypeHelper->doctype('XHTML1_STRICT');

And then print it out on top of your layout script:

1 <?php echo $this->doctype() ?>

313.3 Retrieving the Doctype

If you need to know the doctype, you can do so by calling getDoctype() on the object, which is returned by
invoking the helper.
1 $doctype = $view->doctype()->getDoctype();

Typically, youll simply want to know if the doctype is XHTML or not; for this, the isXhtml() method will suffice:
1 if ($view->doctype()->isXhtml()) {
2 // do something differently
3 }

You can also check if the doctype represents an HTML5 document.

1 if ($view->doctype()->isHtml5()) {
2 // do something differently
3 }

313.4 Choosing a Doctype to Use with the Open Graph Protocol

To implement the Open Graph Protocol, you may specify the XHTML1_RDFA doctype. This doctype allows a
developer to use the Resource Description Framework within an XHTML document.
1 $doctypeHelper = new Zend\View\Helper\Doctype();
2 $doctypeHelper->doctype('XHTML1_RDFA');

The RDFa doctype allows XHTML to validate when the property meta tag attribute is used per the Open Graph
Protocol spec. Example within a view script:
1 <?php echo $this->doctype('XHTML1_RDFA'); ?>
2 <html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
3 xmlns:og="http://opengraphprotocol.org/schema/">
4 <head>
5 <meta property="og:type" content="musician" />

In the previous example, we set the property to og:type. The og references the Open Graph namespace we specified in
the html tag. The content identifies the page as being about a musician. See the Open Graph Protocol documentation
for supported properties. The HeadMeta helper may be used to programmatically set these Open Graph Protocol meta
tags.
Here is how you check if the doctype is set to XHTML1_RDFA:
1 <?php echo $this->doctype() ?>
2 <html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
3 <?php if ($view->doctype()->isRdfa()): ?>
4 xmlns:og="http://opengraphprotocol.org/schema/"
5 xmlns:fb="http://www.facebook.com/2008/fbml"

1438 Chapter 313. View Helper - Doctype

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

6 <?php endif; ?>

7 >

313.5 Zend MVC View Manager

If youre running a ZendMvc application, you should specify doctype via the ViewManager service.

313.5. Zend MVC View Manager 1439

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1440 Chapter 313. View Helper - Doctype

 CHAPTER 314

FlashMessenger Helper

314.1 Introduction

The FlashMessenger helper is used to render the messages of the FlashMessenger MVC plugin.

314.2 Basic Usage

When only using the default namespace for the FlashMessenger all you need to do is this:
1 // Usable in any of your .phtml files
2 echo $this->flashMessenger()->render();

The first argument of the render()-function is the namespace. If no namespace is defined, the default
Zend\Mvc\Controller\Plugin\FlashMessenger::NAMESPACE_DEFAULT will be used, which trans-
lates to default.
1 // Usable in any of your .phtml files
2 echo $this->flashMessenger()->render('error');
3

4 // Alternatively use one of the pre-defined namespaces

5 // (aka: use Zend\Mvc\Controller\Plugin\FlashMessenger;)
6 echo $this->flashMessenger()->render(FlashMessenger::NAMESPACE_SUCCESS);

314.3 CSS Layout

The FlashMessenger default rendering adds a CSS class to the generated HTML, that matches the defined
namespace that should be rendered. While it may work well for the default cases, every so often you may want
to add specific CSS classes to the HTML output. This can be done while making use of the second parameter of the
render() function.
1 // Usable in any of your .phtml files
2 echo $this->flashMessenger()->render('error', array('alert', 'alert-danger'));

The output of this example, using the default HTML rendering settings, would look like this:
1 <ul class="alert alert-danger">
2 <li>Some FlashMessenger Content</li>
3 <li>You, the developer, are AWESOME!</li>
4 </ul>

1441
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

314.4 HTML Layout

Aside from modifying the rendered CSS classes of the FlashMessenger, you are furthermore able to modify the
generated HTML as a whole to create even more distinct visuals for your FlashMessages. The default output format
is defined within the source code of the FlashMessenger view helper itself.
1 // Zend/View/Helper/FlashMessenger.php#L41-L43
2 protected $messageCloseString = '</li></ul>';
3 protected $messageOpenFormat = '<ul%s><li>';
4 protected $messageSeparatorString = '</li><li>';

These defaults exactly match what were trying to do. The placeholder %s will be filled with the CSS classes output.
To change this, all we need to do is call the respective setter methods of these variables and give them new strings; for
example:
1 // In any of your .phtml files:
2 echo $this->flashMessenger()
3 ->setMessageOpenFormat('<div%s><p>')
4 ->setMessageSeparatorString('</p><p>')
5 ->setMessageCloseString('</p></div>')
6 ->render('success');

The above code sample then would then generate the following output:
1 <div class="success">
2 <p>Some FlashMessenger Content</p>
3 <p>You, who's reading the docs, are AWESOME!</p>
4 </div>

314.5 Sample Modification for Twitter Bootstrap 3

Taking all the above knowledge into account, we can create a nice, highly usable and user-friendly rendering strategy
using the Bootstrap front-end framework version 3 layouts:
1 // In any of your .phtml files:
2 $flash = $this->flashMessenger();
3 $flash->setMessageOpenFormat('<div%s>
4 <button type="button" class="close" data-dismiss="alert" aria-hidden="true">
5 &times;
6 </button>
7 <ul><li>')
8 ->setMessageSeparatorString('</li><li>')
9 ->setMessageCloseString('</li></ul></div>');
10

11 echo $flash->render('error', array('alert', 'alert-dismissible', 'alert-danger'));

12 echo $flash->render('info', array('alert', 'alert-dismissible', 'alert-info'));
13 echo $flash->render('default', array('alert', 'alert-dismissible', 'alert-warning'));
14 echo $flash->render('success', array('alert', 'alert-dismissible', 'alert-success'));

The output of the above example would create dismissable FlashMessages with the following HTML markup. The
example only covers one type of FlashMessenger output; if you would have several FlashMessages available
in each of the rendered namespaces, then you would receive the same output multiple times only having different
CSS classes applied.

1442 Chapter 314. FlashMessenger Helper

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1 <div class="alert alert-dismissable alert-success">

2 <button type="button" class="close" data-dismiss="alert" aria-hidden="true"></button>
3 <ul>
4 <li>Some FlashMessenger Content</li>
5 <li>You, who's reading the docs, are AWESOME!</li>
6 </ul>
7 </div>

314.6 Alternative Configuration of the ViewHelper Layout

The FlashMessengerFactory checks the Configuration of the application. Therefore it is possible to set up the
FlashMessenger strings through your module.config.php, too. The next example will set up the output to be iden-
tical with the above Twitter Bootstrap 3 Example
1 'view_helper_config' => array(
2 'flashmessenger' => array(
3 'message_open_format' => '<div%s><button type="button" class="close" data-dismiss="alert
4 'message_close_string' => '</li></ul></div>',
5 'message_separator_string' => '</li><li>'
6 )
7 )

314.6. Alternative Configuration of the ViewHelper Layout 1443

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1444 Chapter 314. FlashMessenger Helper

 CHAPTER 315

Gravatar Helper

315.1 Introduction

The Gravatar helper is useful for rendering image HTML markup returned from the gravatar.com service.

315.2 Basic Usage

You can use the Gravatar helper wherever in view scripts per the following example:
1 //This could be inside any of your .phtml file
2 echo $this->gravatar('[email protected]')->getImgTag();

The first (and only, in this example) argument passed to the Gravatar helper is an e-mail for which you want grab
an avatar from gravatar.com. For convenience, this e-mail will be automatically hashed via the md5 algorithm.
This will render the HTML below:
<img src="http://www.gravatar.com/avatar/5658ffccee7f0ebfda2b226238b1eb6e?s=80&d=mm&r=g">

As you can see, the helper already provides URL defaults for you.

315.3 Custom Settings

You can customize the request for a gravatar.com image by using setter methods on the view helper:
1 $gravatar = $this->gravatar();
2

3 // Set the email instead of passing it via helper invocation

4 $gravatar->setEmail('[email protected]');
5

6 // Set the image size you want gravatar.com to return, in pixels

7 $gravatar->setImgSize(40);
8

9 // Set the default avatar image to use if gravatar.com does not find a match
10 $gravatar->setDefaultImg( \Zend\View\Helper\Gravatar::DEFAULT_MM );
11

12 // Set the avatar "rating" threshold (often used to omit NSFW avatars)
13 $gravatar->setRating( \Zend\View\Helper\Gravatar::RATING_G );
14

1445
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

15 // Indicate that a secure URI should be used for the image source
16 $gravatar->setSecure(true);
17

18 // Render the <img> tag with the email you've set previously
19 echo $gravatar->getImgTag();

Alternately, you can pass an array as the second argument on invocation, with the following keys:
1 $settings = array(
2 'img_size' => 40,
3 'default_img' => \Zend\View\Helper\Gravatar::DEFAULT_MM,
4 'rating' => \Zend\View\Helper\Gravatar::RATING_G,
5 'secure' => null,
6 );
7 $email = '[email protected]';
8 echo $this->gravatar($email, $settings);

Note: Passing null for the secure setting will cause the view helper to choose a schema that matches the current
request to your application. This is the default behavior.

As you can see in the above examples, there are predefined settings for the default image and rating.
The Gravatar helper defines the following constants for ratings:
RATING_G
RATING_PG
RATING_R
RATING_X
The helper defines the following constants for the default image: * DEFAULT_404 * DEFAULT_MM *
DEFAULT_IDENTICON * DEFAULT_MONSTERID * DEFAULT_WAVATAR
You may also provide custom attributes for the generated img tag. To do this, pass an attributes array to the
setAttributes() method:
1 $gravatar = $this->gravatar('[email protected]');
2

3 // Suppose that I want to add the class attribute with a value of

4 // "gravatarcls" to the rendered <img> tag:
5 $attr = array(
6 'class' => 'gravatarcls',
7 );
8 echo $gravatar->setAttributes($attr)->getImgTag();

Alternately, you can pass this array as the third argument during helper invocation:
1 $email = '[email protected]';
2 $settings = array(
3 'default_img' => \Zend\View\Helper\Gravatar::DEFAULT_MM,
4 );
5 $attr = array(
6 'class' => 'gravatar-image',
7 'id' => 'gravatar',
8 );
9

10 echo $this->gravatar($email, $settings, $attr);

1446 Chapter 315. Gravatar Helper

 CHAPTER 316

View Helper - HeadLink

316.1 Introduction

The HTML <link> element is increasingly used for linking a variety of resources for your site: stylesheets, feeds,
favicons, trackbacks, and more. The HeadLink helper provides a simple interface for creating and aggregating these
elements for later retrieval and output in your layout script.
The HeadLink helper has special methods for adding stylesheet links to its stack:
appendStylesheet($href, $media, $conditionalStylesheet, $extras)
offsetSetStylesheet($index, $href, $media, $conditionalStylesheet,
$extras)
prependStylesheet($href, $media, $conditionalStylesheet, $extras)
setStylesheet($href, $media, $conditionalStylesheet, $extras)
The $media value defaults to screen, but may be any valid media value. $conditionalStylesheet is a string
or boolean FALSE, and will be used at rendering time to determine if special comments should be included to prevent
loading of the stylesheet on certain platforms. $extras is an array of any extra values that you want to be added to
the tag.
Additionally, the HeadLink helper has special methods for adding alternate links to its stack:
appendAlternate($href, $type, $title, $extras)
offsetSetAlternate($index, $href, $type, $title, $extras)
prependAlternate($href, $type, $title, $extras)
setAlternate($href, $type, $title, $extras)
The headLink() helper method allows specifying all attributes necessary for a <link> element, and allows you to
also specify placement whether the new element replaces all others, prepends (top of stack), or appends (end of
stack).
The HeadLink helper is a concrete implementation of the Placeholder helper.

316.2 Basic Usage

You may specify a headLink at any time. Typically, you will specify global links in your layout script, and application
specific links in your application view scripts. In your layout script, in the <head> section, you will then echo the helper
to output it.

1447
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1 <?php
2 // setting links in a view script:
3 $this->headLink(array('rel' => 'icon', 'href' => '/img/favicon.ico'), 'PREPEND')
4 ->appendStylesheet('/styles/basic.css')
5 ->prependStylesheet(
6 '/styles/moz.css',
7 'screen',
8 true,
9 array('id' => 'my_stylesheet')
10 );
11

12 // rendering the links from the layout:

13 echo $this->headLink();
14 ?>

Output:
1 <link href="/styles/moz.css" media="screen" rel="stylesheet" type="text/css" id="my_stylesheet">
2 <link href="/img/favicon.ico" rel="icon">
3 <link href="/styles/basic.css" media="screen" rel="stylesheet" type="text/css">

1448 Chapter 316. View Helper - HeadLink

 CHAPTER 317

View Helper - HeadMeta

317.1 Introduction

The HTML <meta> element is used to provide meta information about your HTML document typically keywords,
document character set, caching pragmas, etc. Meta tags may be either of the http-equiv or name types, must
contain a content attribute, and can also have either of the lang or scheme modifier attributes.
The HeadMeta helper supports the following methods for setting and adding meta tags:
appendName($keyValue, $content, $conditionalName)
offsetSetName($index, $keyValue, $content, $conditionalName)
prependName($keyValue, $content, $conditionalName)
setName($keyValue, $content, $modifiers)
appendHttpEquiv($keyValue, $content, $conditionalHttpEquiv)
offsetSetHttpEquiv($index, $keyValue, $content, $conditionalHttpEquiv)
prependHttpEquiv($keyValue, $content, $conditionalHttpEquiv)
setHttpEquiv($keyValue, $content, $modifiers)
setCharset($charset)
The following methods are also supported with XHTML1_RDFA doctype set with the Doctype helper:
appendProperty($property, $content, $modifiers)
offsetSetProperty($index, $property, $content, $modifiers)
prependProperty($property, $content, $modifiers)
setProperty($property, $content, $modifiers)
The $keyValue item is used to define a value for the name or http-equiv key; $content is the value for the
content key, and $modifiers is an optional associative array that can contain keys for lang and/or scheme.
You may also set meta tags using the headMeta() helper method, which has the following signa-
ture: headMeta($content, $keyValue, $keyType = name, $modifiers = array(),
$placement = APPEND). $keyValue is the content for the key specified in $keyType, which should
be either name or http-equiv. $keyType may also be specified as property if the doctype has been set to
XHTML1_RDFA. $placement can be SET (overwrites all previously stored values), APPEND (added to end
of stack), or PREPEND (added to top of stack).

1449
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

HeadMeta overrides each of append(), offsetSet(), prepend(), and set() to enforce usage of the special
methods as listed above. Internally, it stores each item as a stdClass token, which it later serializes using the
itemToString() method. This allows you to perform checks on the items in the stack, and optionally modify
these items by simply modifying the object returned.
The HeadMeta helper is a concrete implementation of the Placeholder helper.

317.2 Basic Usage

You may specify a new meta tag at any time. Typically, you will specify client-side caching rules or SEO keywords.
For instance, if you wish to specify SEO keywords, youd be creating a meta name tag with the name keywords and
the content the keywords you wish to associate with your page:
1 // setting meta keywords
2 $this->headMeta()->appendName('keywords', 'framework, PHP, productivity');

If you wished to set some client-side caching rules, youd set http-equiv tags with the rules you wish to enforce:
1 // disabling client-side cache
2 $this->headMeta()->appendHttpEquiv('expires',
3 'Wed, 26 Feb 1997 08:21:57 GMT')
4 ->appendHttpEquiv('pragma', 'no-cache')
5 ->appendHttpEquiv('Cache-Control', 'no-cache');

Another popular use for meta tags is setting the content type, character set, and language:
1 // setting content type and character set
2 $this->headMeta()->appendHttpEquiv('Content-Type',
3 'text/html; charset=UTF-8')
4 ->appendHttpEquiv('Content-Language', 'en-US');

If you are serving an HTML5 document, you should provide the character set like this:
1 // setting character set in HTML5
2 $this->headMeta()->setCharset('UTF-8'); // Will look like <meta charset="UTF-8">

As a final example, an easy way to display a transitional message before a redirect is using a meta refresh:
1 // setting a meta refresh for 3 seconds to a new url:
2 $this->headMeta()->appendHttpEquiv('Refresh',
3 '3;URL=http://www.some.org/some.html');

When youre ready to place your meta tags in the layout, simply echo the helper:
1 <?php echo $this->headMeta() ?>

317.3 Usage with XHTML1_RDFA doctype

Enabling the RDFa doctype with the Doctype helper enables the use of the property attribute (in addition to the
standard name and http-equiv) with HeadMeta. This is commonly used with the Facebook Open Graph Protocol.
For instance, you may specify an open graph page title and type as follows:

1450 Chapter 317. View Helper - HeadMeta

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1 $this->doctype(Zend\View\Helper\Doctype::XHTML1_RDFA);
2 $this->headMeta()->setProperty('og:title', 'my article title');
3 $this->headMeta()->setProperty('og:type', 'article');
4 echo $this->headMeta();
5

6 // output is:
7 // <meta property="og:title" content="my article title" />
8 // <meta property="og:type" content="article" />

317.3. Usage with XHTML1_RDFA doctype 1451

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1452 Chapter 317. View Helper - HeadMeta

 CHAPTER 318

View Helper - HeadScript

318.1 Introduction

The HTML <script> element is used to either provide inline client-side scripting elements or link to a remote resource
containing client-side scripting code. The HeadScript helper allows you to manage both.
The HeadScript helper supports the following methods for setting and adding scripts:
appendFile($src, $type = text/javascript, $attrs = array())
offsetSetFile($index, $src, $type = text/javascript, $attrs = array())
prependFile($src, $type = text/javascript, $attrs = array())
setFile($src, $type = text/javascript, $attrs = array())
appendScript($script, $type = text/javascript, $attrs = array())
offsetSetScript($index, $script, $type = text/javascript, $attrs =
array())
prependScript($script, $type = text/javascript, $attrs = array())
setScript($script, $type = text/javascript, $attrs = array())
In the case of the * File() methods, $src is the remote location of the script to load; this is usually in the form of a
URL or a path. For the * Script() methods, $script is the client-side scripting directives you wish to use in the
element.

Note: Setting Conditional Comments

HeadScript allows you to wrap the script tag in conditional comments, which allows you to hide it from specific
browsers. To add the conditional tags, pass the conditional value as part of the $attrs parameter in the method calls.

Headscript With Conditional Comments

1 // adding scripts
2 $this->headScript()->appendFile(
3 '/js/prototype.js',
4 'text/javascript',
5 array('conditional' => 'lt IE 7')
6 );

1453
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Note: Preventing HTML style comments or CDATA wrapping of scripts

By default HeadScript will wrap scripts with HTML comments or it wraps scripts with XHTML cdata. This
behavior can be problematic when you intend to use the script tag in an alternative way by setting the type to something
other then text/javascript. To prevent such escaping, pass an noescape with a value of true as part of the $attrs
parameter in the method calls.

Create a jQuery template with the headScript

1 // jquery template
2 $template = '<div class="book">{{:title}}</div>';
3 $this->headScript()->appendScript(
4 $template,
5 'text/x-jquery-tmpl',
6 array('id' => 'tmpl-book', 'noescape' => true)
7 );

HeadScript also allows capturing scripts; this can be useful if you want to create the client-side script programmat-
ically, and then place it elsewhere. The usage for this will be showed in an example below.
Finally, you can also use the headScript() method to quickly add script elements; the signature for this
is headScript($mode = FILE, $spec = null, $placement = APPEND, array $attrs
= array(), $type = text/javascript). The $mode is either FILE or SCRIPT, depending on if
youre linking a script or defining one. $spec is either the script file to link or the script source itself. $placement
should be either APPEND, PREPEND, or SET. $attrs is an array of script attributes. $type is the script type
attribute.
HeadScript overrides each of append(), offsetSet(), prepend(), and set() to enforce usage of the
special methods as listed above. Internally, it stores each item as a stdClass token, which it later serializes using
the itemToString() method. This allows you to perform checks on the items in the stack, and optionally modify
these items by simply modifying the object returned.
The HeadScript helper is a concrete implementation of the Placeholder helper.

Note: Use InlineScript for HTML Body Scripts

HeadScripts sibling helper, InlineScript, should be used when you wish to include scripts inline in the HTML
body. Placing scripts at the end of your document is a good practice for speeding up delivery of your page, particularly
when using 3rd party analytics scripts.

Note: Arbitrary Attributes are Disabled by Default

By default, HeadScript only will render <script> attributes that are blessed by the W3C. These include
type, charset, defer, language, and src. However, some JavaScript frameworks, notably Dojo, uti-
lize custom attributes in order to modify behavior. To allow such attributes, you can enable them via the
setAllowArbitraryAttributes() method:
1 $this->headScript()->setAllowArbitraryAttributes(true);

1454 Chapter 318. View Helper - HeadScript

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

318.2 Basic Usage

You may specify a new script tag at any time. As noted above, these may be links to outside resource files or scripts
themselves.
1 // adding scripts
2 $this->headScript()->appendFile('/js/prototype.js')
3 ->appendScript($onloadScript);

Order is often important with client-side scripting; you may need to ensure that libraries are loaded in a specific order
due to dependencies each have; use the various append, prepend, and offsetSet directives to aid in this task:
1 // Putting scripts in order
2

3 // place at a particular offset to ensure loaded last

4 $this->headScript()->offsetSetFile(100, '/js/myfuncs.js');
5

6 // use scriptaculous effects (append uses next index, 101)

7 $this->headScript()->appendFile('/js/scriptaculous.js');
8

9 // but always have base prototype script load first:

10 $this->headScript()->prependFile('/js/prototype.js');

When youre finally ready to output all scripts in your layout script, simply echo the helper:
1 <?php echo $this->headScript() ?>

318.3 Capturing Scripts

Sometimes you need to generate client-side scripts programmatically. While you could use string concatenation,
heredocs, and the like, often its easier just to do so by creating the script and sprinkling in PHP tags. HeadScript
lets you do just that, capturing it to the stack:
1 <?php $this->headScript()->captureStart() ?>
2 var action = '<?php echo $this->baseUrl ?>';
3 $('foo_form').action = action;
4 <?php $this->headScript()->captureEnd() ?>

The following assumptions are made:

The script will be appended to the stack. If you wish for it to replace the stack or be added to the top, you will
need to pass SET or PREPEND, respectively, as the first argument to captureStart().
The script MIME type is assumed to be text/javascript; if you wish to specify a different type, you will need to
pass it as the second argument to captureStart().
If you wish to specify any additional attributes for the <script> tag, pass them in an array as the third argument
to captureStart().

318.2. Basic Usage 1455

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1456 Chapter 318. View Helper - HeadScript

 CHAPTER 319

View Helper - HeadStyle

319.1 Introduction

The HTML <style> element is used to include CSS stylesheets inline in the HTML <head> element.

Note: Use HeadLink to link CSS files

HeadLink should be used to create <link> elements for including external stylesheets. HeadStyle is used when you
wish to define your stylesheets inline.

The HeadStyle helper supports the following methods for setting and adding stylesheet declarations:
appendStyle($content, $attributes = array())
offsetSetStyle($index, $content, $attributes = array())
prependStyle($content, $attributes = array())
setStyle($content, $attributes = array())
In all cases, $content is the actual CSS declarations. $attributes are any additional attributes you wish to
provide to the style tag: lang, title, media, or dir are all permissible.

Note: Setting Conditional Comments

HeadStyle allows you to wrap the style tag in conditional comments, which allows you to hide it from specific
browsers. To add the conditional tags, pass the conditional value as part of the $attributes parameter in the
method calls.

Headstyle With Conditional Comments

1 // adding scripts
2 $this->headStyle()->appendStyle($styles, array('conditional' => 'lt IE 7'));

HeadStyle also allows capturing style declarations; this can be useful if you want to create the declarations pro-
grammatically, and then place them elsewhere. The usage for this will be showed in an example below.
Finally, you can also use the headStyle() method to quickly add declarations elements; the signature for
this is headStyle($content = null, $placement = APPEND, $attributes = array()).
$placement should be either APPEND, PREPEND, or SET.

1457
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

HeadStyle overrides each of append(), offsetSet(), prepend(), and set() to enforce usage of the
special methods as listed above. Internally, it stores each item as a stdClass token, which it later serializes using
the itemToString() method. This allows you to perform checks on the items in the stack, and optionally modify
these items by simply modifying the object returned.
The HeadStyle helper is a concrete implementation of the Placeholder helper.

Note: UTF-8 encoding used by default

By default, Zend Framework uses UTF-8 as its default encoding, and, specific to this case, Zend\View does as well.
So if you want to use another encoding with headStyle, you will have do three things:
1. Create a custom renderer and implement a getEncoding() method;
2. Create a custom rendering strategy that will return an instance of your custom renderer;
3. Attach the custom strategy in the ViewEvent;
See the example below.

First we have to write the custom renderer:

1 // module/MyModule/View/Renderer/MyRenderer.php
2 <?php
3

4 namespace MyModule\View\Renderer;
5

6 // Since we just want to implement the getEncoding() method, we can extend the Zend native renderer
7 use Zend\View\Renderer\PhpRenderer;
8

9 class MyRenderer extends PhpRenderer

10 {
11 /**
12 * @var string
13 */
14 protected $encoding;
15

16 /**
17 * Constructor
18 *
19 * @param string $encoding The encoding to be used
20 */
21 public function __construct($encoding)
22 {
23 parent::__construct();
24 $this->encoding = $encoding;
25 }
26

27 /**
28 * Sets the encoding
29 *
30 * @param string $encoding The encoding to be used
31 */
32 public function setEncoding($encoding)
33 {
34 $this->encoding = $encoding;
35 }
36

37 /**
38 * Gets the encoding

1458 Chapter 319. View Helper - HeadStyle

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

39 *
40 * @return string The encoding being used
41 */
42 public function getEncoding()
43 {
44 return $this->encoding;
45 }
46 }

Now we make some configuration in the module class:

1 // module/MyModule.php
2 <?php
3

4 namespace MyModule;
5

6 use MyModule\View\Renderer\MyRenderer;
7 use Zend\Mvc\MvcEvent;
8 use Zend\View\Strategy\PhpRendererStrategy;
9

10 class Module
11 {
12 public function getConfig(){/* ... */}
13

14 public function getAutoloaderConfig(){/* ... */}

15

16 public function getServiceConfig()

17 {
18 return array(
19 'factories' => array(
20 // Register our custom renderer in the service manager
21 'MyCustomRenderer' => function ($serviceManager) {
22 $myRenderer = new MyRenderer('ISO-8859-1');
23 return $myRenderer;
24 },
25 'MyCustomStrategy' => function ($serviceManager) {
26 // As stated before, we just want to implement the getEncoding() method, so we can use
27 // Zend\View\Strategy\PhpRendererStrategy and just provide our custom renderer to it.
28 $myRenderer = $serviceManager->get('MyCustomRenderer');
29 $strategy = new PhpRendererStrategy($myRenderer);
30 return $strategy;
31 }
32 ),
33 );
34 }
35

36 public function onBootstrap(MvcEvent $e)

37 {
38 // Register a render event
39 $app = $e->getParam('application');
40 $app->getEventManager()->attach('render', array($this, 'registerMyStrategy'), 100);
41 }
42

43 public function registerMyStrategy(MvcEvent $e)

44 {
45 $app = $e->getTarget();
46 $locator = $app->getServiceManager();
47 $view = $locator->get('Zend\View\View');
48 $myStrategy = $locator->get('MyCustomStrategy');

319.1. Introduction 1459

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

49

50 // Attach strategy, which is a listener aggregate, at high priority

51 $view->getEventManager()->attach($myStrategy, 100);
52 }
53 }

See the quick start Creating and Registering Alternate Rendering and Response Strategies chapter for more informa-
tion on how to create and register custom strategies to your view.

319.2 Basic Usage

You may specify a new style tag at any time:

1 // adding styles
2 $this->headStyle()->appendStyle($styles);

Order is very important with CSS; you may need to ensure that declarations are loaded in a specific order due to the
order of the cascade; use the various append, prepend, and offsetSet directives to aid in this task:
1 // Putting styles in order
2

3 // place at a particular offset:

4 $this->headStyle()->offsetSetStyle(100, $customStyles);
5

6 // place at end:
7 $this->headStyle()->appendStyle($finalStyles);
8

9 // place at beginning
10 $this->headStyle()->prependStyle($firstStyles);

When youre finally ready to output all style declarations in your layout script, simply echo the helper:
1 <?php echo $this->headStyle() ?>

319.3 Capturing Style Declarations

Sometimes you need to generate CSS style declarations programmatically. While you could use string concatenation,
heredocs, and the like, often its easier just to do so by creating the styles and sprinkling in PHP tags. HeadStyle
lets you do just that, capturing it to the stack:
1 <?php $this->headStyle()->captureStart() ?>
2 body {
3 background-color: <?php echo $this->bgColor ?>;
4 }
5 <?php $this->headStyle()->captureEnd() ?>

The following assumptions are made:

The style declarations will be appended to the stack. If you wish for them to replace the stack or be added to the
top, you will need to pass SET or PREPEND, respectively, as the first argument to captureStart().
If you wish to specify any additional attributes for the <style> tag, pass them in an array as the second argument
to captureStart().

1460 Chapter 319. View Helper - HeadStyle

 CHAPTER 320

View Helper - HeadTitle

320.1 Introduction

The HTML <title> element is used to provide a title for an HTML document. The HeadTitle helper allows you to
programmatically create and store the title for later retrieval and output.
The HeadTitle helper is a concrete implementation of the Placeholder helper. It overrides the toString()
method to enforce generating a <title> element, and adds a headTitle() method for quick and easy setting and
aggregation of title elements. The signature for that method is headTitle($title, $setType = null); by
default, the value is appended to the stack (aggregating title segments) if left at null, but you may also specify either
PREPEND (place at top of stack) or SET (overwrite stack).
Since setting the aggregating (attach) order on each call to headTitle can be cumbersome, you can set a default
attach order by calling setDefaultAttachOrder() which is applied to all headTitle() calls unless you
explicitly pass a different attach order as the second parameter.

320.2 Basic Usage

You may specify a title tag at any time. A typical usage would have you setting title segments for each level of depth
in your application: site, module, controller, action, and potentially resource. This could be achieved in the module
class.
1 // module/MyModule/Module.php
2 <?php
3

4 namespace MyModule;
5

6 class Module
7 {
8 /**
9 * @param \Zend\Mvc\MvcEvent $e The MvcEvent instance
10 * @return void
11 */
12 public function onBootstrap($e)
13 {
14 // Register a render event
15 $app = $e->getParam('application');
16 $app->getEventManager()->attach('render', array($this, 'setLayoutTitle'));
17 }
18

1461
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

19 /**
20 * @param \Zend\Mvc\MvcEvent $e The MvcEvent instance
21 * @return void
22 */
23 public function setLayoutTitle($e)
24 {
25 $matches = $e->getRouteMatch();
26 $action = $matches->getParam('action');
27 $controller = $matches->getParam('controller');
28 $module = __NAMESPACE__;
29 $siteName = 'Zend Framework';
30

31 // Getting the view helper manager from the application service manager
32 $viewHelperManager = $e->getApplication()->getServiceManager()->get('viewHelperManager');
33

34 // Getting the headTitle helper from the view helper manager

35 $headTitleHelper = $viewHelperManager->get('headTitle');
36

37 // Setting a separator string for segments

38 $headTitleHelper->setSeparator(' - ');
39

40 // Setting the action, controller, module and site name as title segments
41 $headTitleHelper->append($action);
42 $headTitleHelper->append($controller);
43 $headTitleHelper->append($module);
44 $headTitleHelper->append($siteName);
45 }
46 }

When youre finally ready to render the title in your layout script, simply echo the helper:
1 <?php echo $this->headTitle() ?>

Output:
1 <title>action - controller - module - Zend Framework</title>

In case you want the title without the <title> and </title> tags you can use the renderTitle() method:
1 <?php echo $this->headTitle()->renderTitle() ?>

Output:
1 action - controller - module - Zend Framework

1462 Chapter 320. View Helper - HeadTitle

 CHAPTER 321

View Helper - HtmlList

321.1 Introduction

htmlList($items, $ordered, $attribs, $escape): generates unordered and ordered lists based on
the $items passed to it. If $items is a multidimensional array, a nested list will be built. If the $escape flag
is TRUE (default), individual items will be escaped using the view objects registered escaping mechanisms; pass a
FALSE value if you want to allow markup in your lists.

321.2 Basic Usage

321.2.1 Unordered list

1 $items = array(
2 'Level one, number one',
3 array(
4 'Level two, number one',
5 'Level two, number two',
6 array(
7 'Level three, number one'
8 ),
9 'Level two, number three',
10 ),
11 'Level one, number two',
12 );
13

14 echo $this->htmlList($items);

Output:
1 <ul>
2 <li>Level one, number one
3 <ul>
4 <li>Level two, number one</li>
5 <li>Level two, number two
6 <ul>
7 <li>Level three, number one</li>
8 </ul>
9 </li>
10 <li>Level two, number three</li>
11 </ul>

1463
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

12 </li>
13 <li>Level one, number two</li>
14 </ul>

321.2.2 Ordered list

1 echo $this->htmlList($items, true);

Output:
1 <ol>
2 <li>Level one, number one
3 <ol>
4 <li>Level two, number one</li>
5 <li>Level two, number two
6 <ol>
7 <li>Level three, number one</li>
8 </ol>
9 </li>
10 <li>Level two, number three</li>
11 </ol>
12 </li>
13 <li>Level one, number two</li>
14 </ol>

321.2.3 HTML attributes

1 $attribs = array(
2 'class' => 'foo',
3 );
4

5 echo $this->htmlList($items, false, $attribs);

Output:
1 <ul class="foo">
2 <li>Level one, number one
3 <ul class="foo">
4 <li>Level two, number one</li>
5 <li>Level two, number two
6 <ul class="foo">
7 <li>Level three, number one</li>
8 </ul>
9 </li>
10 <li>Level two, number three</li>
11 </ul>
12 </li>
13 <li>Level one, number two</li>
14 </ul>

321.2.4 Escape Output

1464 Chapter 321. View Helper - HtmlList

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1 $items = array(
2 'Level one, number <strong>one</strong>',
3 'Level one, number <em>two</em>',
4 );
5

6 // Escape output (default)

7 echo $this->htmlList($items);
8

9 // Don't escape output

10 echo $this->htmlList($items, false, false, false);

Output:
1 <!-- Escape output (default) -->
2 <ul class="foo">
3 <li>Level one, number &lt;strong&gt;one&lt;/strong&gt;</li>
4 <li>Level one, number &lt;em&gt;two&lt;/em&gt;</li>
5 </ul>
6

7 <!-- Don't escape output -->

8 <ul class="foo">
9 <li>Level one, number <strong>one</strong></li>
10 <li>Level one, number <em>two</em></li>
11 </ul>

321.2. Basic Usage 1465

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1466 Chapter 321. View Helper - HtmlList

 CHAPTER 322

View Helper - HTML Object

322.1 Introduction

The HTML <object> element is used for embedding media like Flash or QuickTime in web pages. The object view
helpers take care of embedding media with minimum effort.
There are four initial Object helpers:
htmlFlash() Generates markup for embedding Flash files.
htmlObject() Generates markup for embedding a custom Object.
htmlPage() Generates markup for embedding other (X)HTML pages.
htmlQuicktime() Generates markup for embedding QuickTime files.
All of these helpers share a similar interface. For this reason, this documentation will only contain examples of two of
these helpers.

322.2 Flash helper

Embedding Flash in your page using the helper is pretty straight-forward. The only required argument is the resource
URI.
1 <?php echo $this->htmlFlash('/path/to/flash.swf'); ?>

This outputs the following HTML:

1 <object data="/path/to/flash.swf"
2 type="application/x-shockwave-flash"
3 classid="clsid:D27CDB6E-AE6D-11cf-96B8-444553540000"
4 codebase="http://download.macromedia.com/pub/shockwave/cabs/flash/swflash.cab">
5 </object>

Additionally you can specify attributes, parameters and content that can be rendered along with the <object>. This
will be demonstrated using the htmlObject() helper.

322.3 Customizing the object by passing additional arguments

The first argument in the object helpers is always required. It is the URI to the resource you want to embed. The
second argument is only required in the htmlObject() helper. The other helpers already contain the correct value

1467
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

for this argument. The third argument is used for passing along attributes to the object element. It only accepts an
array with key-value pairs. classid and codebase are examples of such attributes. The fourth argument also only
takes a key-value array and uses them to create <param> elements. You will see an example of this shortly. Lastly,
there is the option of providing additional content to the object. Now for an example which utilizes all arguments.
1 echo $this->htmlObject(
2 '/path/to/file.ext',
3 'mime/type',
4 array(
5 'attr1' => 'aval1',
6 'attr2' => 'aval2'
7 ),
8 array(
9 'param1' => 'pval1',
10 'param2' => 'pval2'
11 ),
12 'some content'
13 );

This would output:

1 <object data="/path/to/file.ext" type="mime/type"
2 attr1="aval1" attr2="aval2">
3 <param name="param1" value="pval1" />
4 <param name="param2" value="pval2" />
5 some content
6 </object>

1468 Chapter 322. View Helper - HTML Object

 CHAPTER 323

View Helper - Identity

323.1 Introduction

The Identity helper allows for getting the identity from the AuthenticationService.
For the Identity helper to work, a Zend\Authentication\AuthenticationService name or alias must
be defined and recognized by the ServiceManager.
Identity returns the identity in the AuthenticationService or null if no identity is available.

323.2 Basic Usage

1 <?php
2 if ($user = $this->identity()) {
3 echo 'Logged in as ' . $this->escapeHtml($user->getUsername());
4 } else {
5 echo 'Not logged in';
6 }
7 ?>

323.3 Using with ServiceManager

When invoked, the Identity plugin will look for a service by the name or alias
Zend\Authentication\AuthenticationService in the ServiceManager. You can provide this
service to the ServiceManager in a configuration file:
1 // In a configuration file...
2 return array(
3 'service_manager' => array(
4 'aliases' => array(
5 'Zend\Authentication\AuthenticationService' => 'my_auth_service',
6 ),
7 'invokables' => array(
8 'my_auth_service' => 'Zend\Authentication\AuthenticationService',
9 ),
10 ),
11 );

1469
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1470 Chapter 323. View Helper - Identity

 CHAPTER 324

View Helper - InlineScript

324.1 Introduction

The HTML <script> element is used to either provide inline client-side scripting elements or link to a remote resource
containing client-side scripting code. The InlineScript helper allows you to manage both. It is derived from
HeadScript, and any method of that helper is available; however, use the inlineScript() method in place of
headScript().

Note: Use InlineScript for HTML Body Scripts

InlineScript, should be used when you wish to include scripts inline in the HTML body. Placing scripts at the
end of your document is a good practice for speeding up delivery of your page, particularly when using 3rd party
analytics scripts.
Some JS libraries need to be included in the HTML head; use HeadScript for those scripts.

324.2 Basic Usage

Add to the layout script:

1 <body>
2 <!-- Content -->
3

4 <?php
5 echo $this->inlineScript()->prependFile($this->basePath('js/vendor/foundation.min.js'))
6 ->prependFile($this->basePath('js/vendor/jquery.js'));
7 ?>
8 </body>

Output:
1 <body>
2 <!-- Content -->
3

4 <script type="text/javascript" src="/js/vendor/jquery.js"></script>

5 <script type="text/javascript" src="/js/vendor/foundation.min.js"></script>
6 </body>

1471
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

324.3 Capturing Scripts

Add in your view scripts:

1 $this->inlineScript()->captureStart();
2 echo <<<JS
3 $('select').change(function(){
4 location.href = $(this).val();
5 });
6 JS;
7 $this->inlineScript()->captureEnd();

Output:
1 <body>
2 <!-- Content -->
3

4 <script type="text/javascript" src="/js/vendor/jquery.js"></script>

5 <script type="text/javascript" src="/js/vendor/foundation.min.js"></script>
6 <script type="text/javascript">
7 //<!--
8 $('select').change(function(){
9 location.href = $(this).val();
10 });
11 //-->
12 </script>
13 </body>

1472 Chapter 324. View Helper - InlineScript

 CHAPTER 325

View Helper - JSON

325.1 Introduction

When creating views that return JSON, its important to also set the appropriate response header. The JSON view
helper does exactly that. In addition, by default, it disables layouts (if currently enabled), as layouts generally arent
used with JSON responses.
The JSON helper sets the following header:
1 Content-Type: application/json

Most AJAX libraries look for this header when parsing responses to determine how to handle the content.

325.2 Basic Usage

Usage of the JSON helper is very straightforward:

1 <?php echo $this->json($this->data) ?>

Note: Enabling encoding using Zend\Json\Expr

The JSON helper accepts an array of options that will be passed to Zend\Json\Json::encode() and used
internally to encode data.
Zend\Json\Json::encode allows the encoding of native JSON expressions using Zend\Json\Expr objects.
This option is disabled by default. To enable this option, pass a boolean TRUE to the enableJsonExprFinder
key of the options array:
1 <?php echo $this->json($this->data, array(
2 'enableJsonExprFinder' => true,
3 )) ?>

1473
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1474 Chapter 325. View Helper - JSON

 CHAPTER 326

View Helper - Partial

326.1 Introduction

The Partial view helper is used to render a specified template within its own variable scope. The primary use is for
reusable template fragments with which you do not need to worry about variable name clashes.
A sibling to the Partial, the PartialLoop view helper allows you to pass iterable data, and render a partial for
each item.

Note: PartialLoop Counter

The PartialLoop view helper gives access to the current position of the array within the view script via
$this->partialLoop()->getPartialCounter(). This provides an easy way to have alternating colors
on table rows for example.

326.2 Basic Usage

Basic usage of partials is to render a template fragment in its own view scope. Consider the following partial script:
1 <?php // partial.phtml ?>
2 <ul>
3 <li>From: <?php echo $this->escapeHtml($this->from) ?></li>
4 <li>Subject: <?php echo $this->escapeHtml($this->subject) ?></li>
5 </ul>

You would then call it from your view script using the following:
1 <?php echo $this->partial('partial.phtml', array(
2 'from' => 'Team Framework',
3 'subject' => 'view partials')); ?>

Which would then render:

1 <ul>
2 <li>From: Team Framework</li>
3 <li>Subject: view partials</li>
4 </ul>

Note: What is a model?

A model used with the Partial view helper can be one of the following:

1475
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Array. If an array is passed, it should be associative, as its key/value pairs are assigned to the view with keys as
view variables.
Object implementing toArray() method. If an object is passed an has a toArray() method, the results of
toArray() will be assigned to the view object as view variables.
Standard object. Any other object will assign the results of get_object_vars() (essentially all public
properties of the object) to the view object.
If your model is an object, you may want to have it passed as an object to the partial script, instead of serializing it to
an array of variables. You can do this by setting the objectKey property of the appropriate helper:
1 // Tell partial to pass objects as 'model' variable
2 $view->partial()->setObjectKey('model');
3

4 // Tell partial to pass objects from partialLoop as 'model' variable

5 // in final partial view script:
6 $view->partialLoop()->setObjectKey('model');

This technique is particularly useful when passing Zend\Db\ResultSet\ResultSets to partialLoop(), as

you then have full access to your row objects within the view scripts, allowing you to call methods on them (such as
retrieving values from parent or dependent rows).

326.3 Using PartialLoop to Render Iterable Models

Typically, youll want to use partials in a loop, to render the same content fragment many times; this way you can
put large blocks of repeated content or complex display logic into a single location. However this has a performance
impact, as the partial helper needs to be invoked once for each iteration.
The PartialLoop view helper helps solve this issue. It allows you to pass an iterable item (array or object imple-
menting Iterator) as the model. It then iterates over this, passing, the items to the partial script as the model. Items in
the iterator may be any model the Partial view helper allows.
Lets assume the following partial view script:
1 <?php // partialLoop.phtml ?>
2 <dt><?php echo $this->key ?></dt>
3 <dd><?php echo $this->value ?></dd>

And the following model:

1 $model = array(
2 array('key' => 'Mammal', 'value' => 'Camel'),
3 array('key' => 'Bird', 'value' => 'Penguin'),
4 array('key' => 'Reptile', 'value' => 'Asp'),
5 array('key' => 'Fish', 'value' => 'Flounder'),
6 );

In your view script, you could then invoke the PartialLoop helper:
1 <dl>
2 <?php echo $this->partialLoop('partialLoop.phtml', $model) ?>
3 </dl>

1 <dl>
2 <dt>Mammal</dt>
3 <dd>Camel</dd>
4

1476 Chapter 326. View Helper - Partial

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

5 <dt>Bird</dt>
6 <dd>Penguin</dd>
7

8 <dt>Reptile</dt>
9 <dd>Asp</dd>
10

11 <dt>Fish</dt>
12 <dd>Flounder</dd>
13 </dl>

326.3. Using PartialLoop to Render Iterable Models 1477

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1478 Chapter 326. View Helper - Partial

 CHAPTER 327

View Helper - Placeholder

327.1 Introduction

The Placeholder view helper is used to persist content between view scripts and view instances. It also offers
some useful features such as aggregating content, capturing view script content for later use, and adding pre- and
post-text to content (and custom separators for aggregated content).

327.2 Basic Usage

Basic usage of placeholders is to persist view data. Each invocation of the Placeholder helper expects a place-
holder name; the helper then returns a placeholder container object that you can either manipulate or simply echo
out.
1 <?php $this->placeholder('foo')->set("Some text for later") ?>
2

3 <?php
4 echo $this->placeholder('foo');
5 // outputs "Some text for later"
6 ?>

327.3 Aggregate Content

Aggregating content via placeholders can be useful at times as well. For instance, your view script may have a variable
array from which you wish to retrieve messages to display later; a later view script can then determine how those will
be rendered.
The Placeholder view helper uses containers that extend ArrayObject, providing a rich feature set for manip-
ulating arrays. In addition, it offers a variety of methods for formatting the content stored in the container:
setPrefix($prefix) sets text with which to prefix the content. Use getPrefix() at any time to deter-
mine what the current setting is.
setPostfix($prefix) sets text with which to append the content. Use getPostfix() at any time to
determine what the current setting is.
setSeparator($prefix) sets text with which to separate aggregated content. Use getSeparator()
at any time to determine what the current setting is.

1479
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

setIndent($prefix) can be used to set an indentation value for content. If an integer is passed, that
number of spaces will be used; if a string is passed, the string will be used. Use getIndent() at any time to
determine what the current setting is.
1 <!-- first view script -->
2 <?php $this->placeholder('foo')->exchangeArray($this->data) ?>

1 <!-- later view script -->

2 <?php
3 $this->placeholder('foo')->setPrefix("<ul>\n <li>")
4 ->setSeparator("</li><li>\n")
5 ->setIndent(4)
6 ->setPostfix("</li></ul>\n");
7 ?>
8

9 <?php
10 echo $this->placeholder('foo');
11 // outputs as unordered list with pretty indentation
12 ?>

Because the Placeholder container objects extend ArrayObject, you can also assign content to a specific key
in the container easily, instead of simply pushing it into the container. Keys may be accessed either as object properties
or as array keys.
1 <?php $this->placeholder('foo')->bar = $this->data ?>
2 <?php echo $this->placeholder('foo')->bar ?>
3

4 <?php
5 $foo = $this->placeholder('foo');
6 echo $foo['bar'];
7 ?>

327.4 Capture Content

Occasionally you may have content for a placeholder in a view script that is easiest to template; the Placeholder
view helper allows you to capture arbitrary content for later rendering using the following API.
captureStart($type, $key) begins capturing content.
$type should be one of the Placeholder constants APPEND or SET. If APPEND, captured content is
appended to the list of current content in the placeholder; if SET, captured content is used as the sole value of
the placeholder (potentially replacing any previous content). By default, $type is APPEND.
$key can be used to specify a specific key in the placeholder container to which you want content captured.
captureStart() locks capturing until captureEnd() is called; you cannot nest capturing with the same
placeholder container. Doing so will raise an exception.
captureEnd() stops capturing content, and places it in the container object according to how
captureStart() was called.
1 <!-- Default capture: append -->
2 <?php $this->placeholder('foo')->captureStart();
3 foreach ($this->data as $datum): ?>
4 <div class="foo">
5 <h2><?php echo $datum->title ?></h2>
6 <p><?php echo $datum->content ?></p>
7 </div>

1480 Chapter 327. View Helper - Placeholder

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

8 <?php endforeach; ?>

9 <?php $this->placeholder('foo')->captureEnd() ?>
10

11 <?php echo $this->placeholder('foo') ?>

1 <!-- Capture to key -->

2 <?php $this->placeholder('foo')->captureStart('SET', 'data');
3 foreach ($this->data as $datum): ?>
4 <div class="foo">
5 <h2><?php echo $datum->title ?></h2>
6 <p><?php echo $datum->content ?></p>
7 </div>
8 <?php endforeach; ?>
9 <?php $this->placeholder('foo')->captureEnd() ?>
10

11 <?php echo $this->placeholder('foo')->data ?>

327.5 Concrete Implementations

Zend Framework ships with a number of concrete placeholder implementations. These are for commonly used
placeholders: doctype, page title, and various <head> elements. In all cases, calling the placeholder with no arguments
returns the element itself.
Documentation for each element is covered separately, as linked below:
Doctype
HeadLink
HeadMeta
HeadScript
HeadStyle
HeadTitle
InlineScript

327.5. Concrete Implementations 1481

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1482 Chapter 327. View Helper - Placeholder

 CHAPTER 328

View Helper - URL

The URL view helper is used to create a string representation of the routes that you define within
your application. The syntax for the view helper is $this->url($name, $params, $options,
$reuseMatchedParameters), using the following definitions for the helper arguments:
$name: The name of the route you want to output.
$params: An array of parameters that is defined within the respective route configuration.
$options: An array of options that will be used to create the URL.
$reuseMatchedParams: A flag indicating if the currently matched route parameters should be used when
generating the new URL.
Lets take a look at how this view helper is used in real-world applications.

328.1 Basic Usage

The following example shows a simple configuration for a news module. The route is called news and it has two
optional parameters called action and id.
1 // In a configuration array (e.g. returned by some module's module.config.php)
2 'router' => array(
3 'routes' => array(
4 'news' => array(
5 'type' => 'segment',
6 'options' => array(
7 'route' => '/news[/:action][/:id]',
8 'constraints' => array(
9 'action' => '[a-zA-Z][a-zA-Z0-9_-]*',
10 ),
11 'defaults' => array(
12 'controller' => 'news',
13 'action' => 'index',
14 ),
15 )
16 )
17 )
18 ),

First, lets use the view helper to create the output for the URL /news without any of the optional parameters being
used:

1483
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1 <a href="<?php echo $this->url('news'); ?>">News Index</a>

This will render the output:

1 <a href="/news">News Index</a>

Now lets assume we want to get a link to display the detail page of a single news entry. For this task, the optional
parameters action and id need to have values assigned. This is how you do it:
1 <a href="<?php echo $this->url('news', array('action' => 'details', 'id' =>42)); ?>">
2 Details of News #42
3 </a>

This will render the output:

1 <a href="/news/details/42">News Index</a>

328.2 Query String Arguments

Most SEO experts agree that pagination parameters should not be part of the URL path; for example, the following
URL would be considered a bad practice: /news/archive/page/13. Pagination is more correctly accomplished
using a query string arguments, such as /news/archive?page=13. To achieve this, youll need to make use of
the $options argument from the view helper.
We will use the same route configuration as defined above:
1 // In a configuration array (e.g. returned by some module's module.config.php)
2 'router' => array(
3 'routes' => array(
4 'news' => array(
5 'type' => 'segment',
6 'options' => array(
7 'route' => '/news[/:action][/:id]',
8 'constraints' => array(
9 'action' => '[a-zA-Z][a-zA-Z0-9_-]*',
10 ),
11 'defaults' => array(
12 'controller' => 'news',
13 'action' => 'index',
14 ),
15 )
16 )
17 )
18 ),

To generate query string arguments from the view helper, you need to assign them as the third argument using the
query key like this:
1 <?php
2 $url = $this->url(
3 'news',
4 array('action' => 'archive'),
5 array(
6 'query' => array(
7 'page' => 13,
8 ).
9 )

1484 Chapter 328. View Helper - URL

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

10 );
11 ?>
12 <a href="<?php echo $url; ?>">News Archive Page #13</a>

The above code sample would output:

1 <a href="/news/archive?page=13">News Archive Page #13</a>

328.3 Fragments

Another possible entry within the $options array is the assignment of URL fragments (typically used to link to
in-page anchors), denoted with using the fragment key. Lets assume we want to enter a link for users to directly
jump to the comment section of a details page:
1 <?php
2 $url = $this->url(
3 'news',
4 array('action' => 'details', 'id' => 42),
5 array(
6 'fragment' => 'comments',
7 )
8 );
9 ?>
10 <a href="<?php echo $url; ?>">Comment Section of News #42</a>

The above code sample would output:

1 <a href="/news/details/42#comments">Comment Section of News #42</a>

You can use fragment and query options at the same time!
1 <?php
2 $url = $this->url(
3 'news',
4 array('action' => 'details', 'id' => 42),
5 array(
6 'query' => array(
7 'commentPage' => 3,
8 ),
9 'fragment' => 'comments',
10 )
11 );
12 ?>
13 <a href="<?php echo $url; ?>">Comment Section of News #42</a>

The above code sample would output:

1 <a href="/news/details/42?commentPage=3#comments">Comment Section of News #42</a>

328.4 Fully Qualified Domain Name

Another possible entry within the $options array is to output a fully qualified domain name (absolute URL), denoted
using the force_canonical key:

328.3. Fragments 1485

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1 <?php
2 $url = $this->url(
3 'news',
4 array(),
5 array(
6 'force_canonical' => true,
7 )
8 );
9 ?>
10 <a href="<?php echo $url; ?>">News Index</a>

The above code sample would output:

1 <a href="http://www.example.com/news">News Index</a>

328.5 Reusing Matched Parameters

When youre on a route that has many parameters, often times it makes sense to reuse currently matched parameters
instead of assigning them new explicitly. In this case, the argument $reuseMatchedParams will come in handy.
As an example, we will imagine being on a detail page for our news route. We want to display links to the dit and
delete actions without having to assign the ID again. This is how you would do it:
1 // Currently url /news/details/777
2

3 <a href="<?php echo $this->url('news', array('action' => 'edit'), null, true); ?>">Edit Me</a>
4 <a href="<?php echo $this->url('news', array('action' => 'delete'), null, true); ?>">Delete Me</a>

Notice the true argument in the fourth position. This tells the view helper to use the matched id (777) when creating
the new URL:
1 <a href="/news/edit/777">Edit Me</a>
2 <a href="/news/delete/777">Edit Me</a>

328.5.1 Shorthand

Due to the fact that reusing parameters is a use case that can happen when no route options are set, the third argument
for the URL view helper will be checked against its type; when a boolean is passed, the helper uses it to set the value
of the $reuseMatchedParams flag:
1 $this->url('news', array('action' => 'archive'), null, true);
2 // is equal to
3 $this->url('news', array('action' => 'archive'), true);

1486 Chapter 328. View Helper - URL

 CHAPTER 329

Advanced usage of helpers

329.1 Registering Helpers

Zend\View\Renderer\PhpRenderer composes a plugin manager for manag-

ing helpers, specifically an instance of Zend\View\HelperPluginManager, which
extends Zend\ServiceManager\AbstractPluginManager, and this extends
Zend\ServiceManager\ServiceManager. As you can see, the HelperPluginManager is a specialized
service manager, so you can register a helper/plugin like any other service (see the Service Manager documentation
for more information).
Programmatically, this is done as follows:
1 // $view is an instance of PhpRenderer
2 $pluginManager = $view->getHelperPluginManager();
3

4 // Register as a invokable class:

5 $pluginManager->setInvokableClass('lowercase', 'MyModule\View\Helper\LowerCase');
6

7 // Register as a factory:
8 $pluginManager->setFactory('lowercase', function ($pluginManager) {
9 $lowercaseHelper = new MyModule\View\Helper\LowerCase;
10

11 // ...do some configuration or dependency injection...

12

13 return $lowercaseHelper;
14 });

Within an MVC application, you will typically simply pass a map of plugins to the class via your configuration.
1 // From within a configuration file
2 return array(
3 'view_helpers' => array(
4 'invokables' => array(
5 'lowercase' => 'MyModule\View\Helper\LowerCase',
6 'uppercase' => 'MyModule\View\Helper\UpperCase',
7 ),
8 ),
9 );

If your module class implements Zend\ModuleManager\Feature\ViewHelperProviderInterface, or

just the method getViewHelperConfig(), you could do the following (its the same as the previous example).

1487
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1 namespace MyModule;
2

3 class Module
4 {
5 public function getAutoloaderConfig(){ /*common code*/ }
6 public function getConfig(){ /*common code*/ }
7

8 public function getViewHelperConfig()

9 {
10 return array(
11 'invokables' => array(
12 'lowercase' => 'MyModule\View\Helper\LowerCase',
13 'uppercase' => 'MyModule\View\Helper\UpperCase',
14 ),
15 );
16 }
17 }

The two latter examples can be done in each module that needs to register helpers with the PhpRenderer; however,
be aware that another module can register helpers with the same name, so order of modules can impact which helper
class will actually be registered!

329.2 Writing Custom Helpers

Writing custom helpers is easy. We recommend extending Zend\View\Helper\AbstractHelper, but at the

minimum, you need only implement the Zend\View\Helper\HelperInterface interface:
1 namespace Zend\View\Helper;
2

3 use Zend\View\Renderer\RendererInterface as Renderer;

4

5 interface HelperInterface
6 {
7 /**
8 * Set the View object
9 *
10 * @param Renderer $view
11 * @return HelperInterface
12 */
13 public function setView(Renderer $view);
14

15 /**
16 * Get the View object
17 *
18 * @return Renderer
19 */
20 public function getView();
21 }

If you want your helper to be capable of being invoked as if it were a method call of the PhpRenderer, you should
also implement an __invoke() method within your helper.
As previously noted, we recommend extending Zend\View\Helper\AbstractHelper, as it implements the
methods defined in HelperInterface, giving you a headstart in your development.
Once you have defined your helper class, make sure you can autoload it, and then register it with the plugin manager.

1488 Chapter 329. Advanced usage of helpers

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Here is an example helper, which were titling SpecialPurpose

1 // /module/src/MyModule/View/Helper/SpecialPurpose.php
2 namespace MyModule\View\Helper;
3

4 use Zend\View\Helper\AbstractHelper;
5

6 class SpecialPurpose extends AbstractHelper

7 {
8 protected $count = 0;
9

10 public function __invoke()

11 {
12 $this->count++;
13 $output = sprintf("I have seen 'The Jerk' %d time(s).", $this->count);
14 return htmlspecialchars($output, ENT_QUOTES, 'UTF-8');
15 }
16 }

Then assume that we register it with the plugin manager, by the name specialpurpose.
Within a view script, you can call the SpecialPurpose helper as many times as you like; it will be instantiated
once, and then it persists for the life of that PhpRenderer instance.
1 // remember, in a view script, $this refers to the Zend\View\Renderer\PhpRenderer instance.
2 echo $this->specialPurpose();
3 echo $this->specialPurpose();
4 echo $this->specialPurpose();

The output would look something like this:

1 I have seen 'The Jerk' 1 time(s).
2 I have seen 'The Jerk' 2 time(s).
3 I have seen 'The Jerk' 3 time(s).

Sometimes you will need access to the calling PhpRenderer object for instance, if you need to use the registered
encoding, or want to render another view script as part of your helper. This is why we define the setView() and
getView() methods. As an example, we could rewrite the SpecialPurpose helper as follows to take advantage
of the EscapeHtml helper:
1 namespace MyModule\View\Helper;
2

3 use Zend\View\Helper\AbstractHelper;
4

5 class SpecialPurpose extends AbstractHelper

6 {
7 protected $count = 0;
8

9 public function __invoke()

10 {
11 $this->count++;
12 $output = sprintf("I have seen 'The Jerk' %d time(s).", $this->count);
13 $escaper = $this->getView()->plugin('escapehtml');
14 return $escaper($output);
15 }
16 }

329.2. Writing Custom Helpers 1489

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

329.3 Registering Concrete Helpers

Sometimes it is convenient to instantiate a view helper, and then register it with the renderer. This can be done by
injecting it directly into the plugin manager.
1 // $view is a PhpRenderer instance
2

3 $helper = new MyModule\View\Helper\LowerCase;

4 // ...do some configuration or dependency injection...
5

6 $view->getHelperPluginManager()->setService('lowercase', $helper);

The plugin manager will validate the helper/plugin, and if the validation passes, the helper/plugin will be registered.

1490 Chapter 329. Advanced usage of helpers

 CHAPTER 330

Introduction to Zend\XmlRpc

From its home page, XML-RPC is described as a ...remote procedure calling using HTTP as the transport and XML
as the encoding. XML-RPC is designed to be as simple as possible, while allowing complex data structures to be
transmitted, processed and returned.
Zend Framework provides support for both consuming remote XML-RPC services and building new XML-RPC
servers.

330.1 Quick Start

To show how easy is to create XML-RPC services with Zend\XmlRpc\Server, take a look at the following exam-
ple:
1 class Greeter
2 {
3

4 /**
5 * Say hello to someone.
6 *
7 * @param string $name Who to greet
8 * @return string
9 */
10 public function sayHello($name='Stranger')
11 {
12 return sprintf("Hello %s!", $name);
13 }
14 }
15

16 $server = new Zend\XmlRpc\Server;

17 // Our Greeter class will be called
18 // greeter from the client
19 $server->setClass('Greeter', 'greeter');
20 $server->handle();

Note: It is necessary to write function and method docblocks for the services which are to be exposed via
Zend\XmlRpc\Server, as it will be used to validate parameters provided to the methods, and also to determine
the method help text and method signatures.

An example of a client consuming this XML-RPC service would be something like this:

1491
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1 $client = new Zend\XmlRpc\Client('http://example.com/xmlrpcserver.php');

2

3 echo $client->call('greeter.sayHello');
4 // will output "Hello Stranger!"
5

6 echo $client->call('greeter.sayHello', array('Dude'));

7 // will output "Hello Dude!"

1492 Chapter 330. Introduction to Zend\XmlRpc

 CHAPTER 331

Zend\XmlRpc\Client

331.1 Introduction

Zend Framework provides support for consuming remote XML-RPC services as a client in the
Zend\XmlRpc\Client package. Its major features include automatic type conversion between PHP and
XML-RPC, a server proxy object, and access to server introspection capabilities.

331.2 Method Calls

The constructor of Zend\XmlRpc\Client receives the URL of the remote XML-RPC server endpoint as its first
parameter. The new instance returned may be used to call any number of remote methods at that endpoint.
To call a remote method with the XML-RPC client, instantiate it and use the call() instance method. The code
sample below uses a demonstration XML-RPC server on the Zend Framework website. You can use it for testing or
exploring the Zend\XmlRpc components.

XML-RPC Method Call

1 $client = new Zend\XmlRpc\Client('http://framework.zend.com/xmlrpc');

2

3 echo $client->call('test.sayHello');
4

5 // hello

The XML-RPC value returned from the remote method call will be automatically unmarshaled and cast to the equiva-
lent PHP native type. In the example above, a PHP String is returned and is immediately ready to be used.
The first parameter of the call() method receives the name of the remote method to call. If the remote method
requires any parameters, these can be sent by supplying a second, optional parameter to call() with an Array of
values to pass to the remote method:

XML-RPC Method Call with Parameters

1 $client = new Zend\XmlRpc\Client('http://framework.zend.com/xmlrpc');

2

3 $arg1 = 1.1;
4 $arg2 = 'foo';

1493
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

6 $result = $client->call('test.sayHello', array($arg1, $arg2));

7

8 // $result is a native PHP type

If the remote method doesnt require parameters, this optional parameter may either be left out or an empty array()
passed to it. The array of parameters for the remote method can contain native PHP types, Zend\XmlRpc\Value
objects, or a mix of each.
The call() method will automatically convert the XML-RPC response and return its equivalent PHP native type. A
Zend\XmlRpc\Response object for the return value will also be available by calling the getLastResponse()
method after the call.

331.3 Types and Conversions

Some remote method calls require parameters. These are given to the call() method of Zend\XmlRpc\Client
as an array in the second parameter. Each parameter may be given as either a native PHP type which will be au-
tomatically converted, or as an object representing a specific XML-RPC type (one of the Zend\XmlRpc\Value
objects).

331.3.1 PHP Native Types as Parameters

Parameters may be passed to call() as native PHP variables, meaning as a String, Integer, Float, Boolean,
Array, or an Object. In this case, each PHP native type will be auto-detected and converted into one of the XML-
RPC types according to this table:

Table 331.1: PHP and XML-RPC Type Conversions

PHP Native Type XML-RPC Type
integer int
Zend\Math\BigInteger\BigInteger i8
double double
boolean boolean
string string
null nil
array array
associative array struct
object array
DateTime dateTime.iso8601
DateTime dateTime.iso8601
Note: What type do empty arrays get cast to?
Passing an empty array to an XML-RPC method is problematic, as it could represent either an ar-
ray or a struct. Zend\XmlRpc\Client detects such conditions and makes a request to the servers
system.methodSignature method to determine the appropriate XML-RPC type to cast to.
However, this in itself can lead to issues. First off, servers that do not support system.methodSignature will
log failed requests, and Zend\XmlRpc\Client will resort to casting the value to an XML-RPC array type. Addi-
tionally, this means that any call with array arguments will result in an additional call to the remote server.
To disable the lookup entirely, you can call the setSkipSystemLookup() method prior to making your XML-RPC
call:

1494 Chapter 331. Zend\XmlRpc\Client

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1 $client->setSkipSystemLookup(true);
2 $result = $client->call('foo.bar', array(array()));

331.3.2 Zend\XmlRpc\Value Objects as Parameters

Parameters may also be created as Zend\XmlRpc\Value instances to specify an exact XML-RPC type. The primary
reasons for doing this are:
When you want to make sure the correct parameter type is passed to the procedure (i.e. the procedure requires
an integer and you may get it from a database as a string)
When the procedure requires base64 or dateTime.iso8601 type (which doesnt exists as a PHP native
type)
When auto-conversion may fail (i.e. you want to pass an empty XML-RPC struct as a parameter. Empty structs
are represented as empty arrays in PHP but, if you give an empty array as a parameter it will be auto-converted
to an XML-RPC array since its not an associative array)
There are two ways to create a Zend\XmlRpc\Value object: instantiate one of the Zend\XmlRpc\Value sub-
classes directly, or use the static factory method Zend\XmlRpc\AbstractValue::getXmlRpcValue().

Table 331.2: Zend\XmlRpc\Value Objects for XML-RPC Types

XML-RPC Zend\XmlRpc\AbstractValue Constant Zend\XmlRpc\Value Object
Type
int Zend\XmlRpc\AbstractValue::XMLRPC_TYPE_INTEGER Zend\XmlRpc\Value\Integer
i4 Zend\XmlRpc\AbstractValue::XMLRPC_TYPE_I4 Zend\XmlRpc\Value\Integer
i8 Zend\XmlRpc\AbstractValue::XMLRPC_TYPE_I8 Zend\XmlRpc\Value\BigInteger
ex:i8 Zend\XmlRpc\AbstractValue::XMLRPC_TYPE_APACHEI8 Zend\XmlRpc\Value\BigInteger
double Zend\XmlRpc\AbstractValue::XMLRPC_TYPE_DOUBLE Zend\XmlRpc\ValueDouble
boolean Zend\XmlRpc\AbstractValue::XMLRPC_TYPE_BOOLEAN Zend\XmlRpc\Value\Boolean
string Zend\XmlRpc\AbstractValue::XMLRPC_TYPE_STRING Zend\XmlRpc\Value\Text
nil Zend\XmlRpc\AbstractValue::XMLRPC_TYPE_NIL Zend\XmlRpc\Value\Nil
ex:nil Zend\XmlRpc\AbstractValue::XMLRPC_TYPE_APACHENILZend\XmlRpc\Value\Nil
base64 Zend\XmlRpc\AbstractValue::XMLRPC_TYPE_BASE64 Zend\XmlRpc\Value\Base64
date- Zend\XmlRpc\AbstractValue::XMLRPC_TYPE_DATETIME Zend\XmlRpc\Value\DateTime
Time.iso8601
array Zend\XmlRpc\AbstractValue::XMLRPC_TYPE_ARRAY Zend\XmlRpc\Value\Array
struct Zend\XmlRpc\AbstractValue::XMLRPC_TYPE_STRUCT Zend\XmlRpc\Value\Struct
Note: Automatic Conversion
When building a new Zend\XmlRpc\Value object, its value is set by a PHP type. The PHP type will
be converted to the specified type using PHP casting. For example, if a string is given as a value to the
Zend\XmlRpc\Value\Integer object, it will be converted using (int) $value.

331.4 Server Proxy Object

Another way to call remote methods with the XML-RPC client is to use the server proxy. This is a PHP object that
proxies a remote XML-RPC namespace, making it work as close to a native PHP object as possible.

331.4. Server Proxy Object 1495

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

To instantiate a server proxy, call the getProxy() instance method of Zend\XmlRpc\Client. This will re-
turn an instance of Zend\XmlRpc\Client\ServerProxy. Any method call on the server proxy object will be
forwarded to the remote, and parameters may be passed like any other PHP method.

Proxy the Default Namespace

1 $client = new Zend\XmlRpc\Client('http://framework.zend.com/xmlrpc');

2

3 $service = $client->getProxy(); // Proxy the default namespace

4

5 $hello = $service->test->sayHello(1, 2); // test.Hello(1, 2) returns "hello"

The getProxy() method receives an optional argument specifying which namespace of the remote server to proxy.
If it does not receive a namespace, the default namespace will be proxied. In the next example, the test namespace
will be proxied:

Proxy Any Namespace

1 $client = new Zend\XmlRpc\Client('http://framework.zend.com/xmlrpc');

2

3 $test = $client->getProxy('test'); // Proxy the "test" namespace

4

5 $hello = $test->sayHello(1, 2); // test.Hello(1,2) returns "hello"

If the remote server supports nested namespaces of any depth, these can also be used through the server proxy.
For example, if the server in the example above had a method test.foo.bar(), it could be called as
$test->foo->bar().

331.5 Error Handling

Two kinds of errors can occur during an XML-RPC method call: HTTP errors and XML-RPC faults. The
Zend\XmlRpc\Client recognizes each and provides the ability to detect and trap them independently.

331.5.1 HTTP Errors

If any HTTP error occurs, such as the remote HTTP server returns a 404 Not Found, a
Zend\XmlRpc\Client\Exception\HttpException will be thrown.

Handling HTTP Errors

1 $client = new Zend\XmlRpc\Client('http://foo/404');

2

3 try {
4

5 $client->call('bar', array($arg1, $arg2));

6

7 } catch (Zend\XmlRpc\Client\Exception\HttpException $e) {

8

9 // $e->getCode() returns 404

10 // $e->getMessage() returns "Not Found"

1496 Chapter 331. Zend\XmlRpc\Client

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

11

12 }

Regardless of how the XML-RPC client is used, the Zend\XmlRpc\Client\Exception\HttpException

will be thrown whenever an HTTP error occurs.

331.5.2 XML-RPC Faults

An XML-RPC fault is analogous to a PHP exception. It is a special type returned from an XML-RPC method call that
has both an error code and an error message. XML-RPC faults are handled differently depending on the context of
how the Zend\XmlRpc\Client is used.
When the call() method or the server proxy object is used, an XML-RPC fault will result in a
Zend\XmlRpc\Client\Exception\FaultException being thrown. The code and message of the excep-
tion will map directly to their respective values in the original XML-RPC fault response.

Handling XML-RPC Faults

1 $client = new Zend\XmlRpc\Client('http://framework.zend.com/xmlrpc');

2

3 try {
4

5 $client->call('badMethod');
6

7 } catch (Zend\XmlRpc\Client\Exception\FaultException $e) {

8

9 // $e->getCode() returns 1
10 // $e->getMessage() returns "Unknown method"
11

12 }

When the call() method is used to make the request, the Zend\XmlRpc\Client\Exception\FaultException
will be thrown on fault. A Zend\XmlRpc\Response object containing the fault will also be available by calling
getLastResponse().
When the doRequest() method is used to make the request, it will not throw the exception. Instead, it will return
a Zend\XmlRpc\Response object returned will containing the fault. This can be checked with isFault()
instance method of Zend\XmlRpc\Response.

331.6 Server Introspection

Some XML-RPC servers support the de facto introspection methods under the XML-RPC system. namespace.
Zend\XmlRpc\Client provides special support for servers with these capabilities.
A Zend\XmlRpc\Client\ServerIntrospection instance may be retrieved by calling the
getIntrospector() method of Zend\XmlRpc\Client. It can then be used to perform introspection
operations on the server.
1 $client = new Zend\XmlRpc\Client('http://example.com/xmlrpcserver.php');
2 $introspector = $client->getIntrospector();
3 foreach ($introspector->listMethods() as $method) {
4 echo "Method: " . $method . "\n";
5 }

331.6. Server Introspection 1497

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

The following methods are available for introspection:

getSignatureForEachMethod: Returns the signature for each method on the server
getSignatureForEachMethodByMulticall($methods=null): Attempt to get the method signa-
tures in one request via system.multicall(). Optionally pass an array of method names.
getSignatureForEachMethodByLooping($methods=null): Get the method signatures for every
method by successively calling system.methodSignature. Optionally pass an array of method names
getMethodSignature($method): Get the methods signature for $method
listMethods: List all methods on the server

331.7 From Request to Response

Under the hood, the call() instance method of Zend\XmlRpc\Client builds a request object
(Zend\XmlRpc\Request) and sends it to another method, doRequest(), that returns a response object
(Zend\XmlRpc\Response).
The doRequest() method is also available for use directly:

Processing Request to Response

1 $client = new Zend\XmlRpc\Client('http://framework.zend.com/xmlrpc');

2

3 $request = new Zend\XmlRpc\Request();

4 $request->setMethod('test.sayHello');
5 $request->setParams(array('foo', 'bar'));
6

7 $client->doRequest($request);
8

9 // $client->getLastRequest() returns instanceof Zend\XmlRpc\Request

10 // $client->getLastResponse() returns instanceof Zend\XmlRpc\Response

Whenever an XML-RPC method call is made by the client through any means, either the call() method,
doRequest() method, or server proxy, the last request object and its resultant response object will always be
available through the methods getLastRequest() and getLastResponse() respectively.

331.8 HTTP Client and Testing

In all of the prior examples, an HTTP client was never specified. When this is the case, a new instance of
Zend\Http\Client will be created with its default options and used by Zend\XmlRpc\Client automatically.
The HTTP client can be retrieved at any time with the getHttpClient() method. For most cases, the default HTTP
client will be sufficient. However, the setHttpClient() method allows for a different HTTP client instance to be
injected.
The setHttpClient() is particularly useful for unit testing. When combined with the
Zend\Http\Client\Adapter\Test, remote services can be mocked out for testing. See the unit tests
for Zend\XmlRpc\Client for examples of how to do this.

1498 Chapter 331. Zend\XmlRpc\Client

 CHAPTER 332

Zend\XmlRpc\Server

332.1 Introduction

Zend\XmlRpc\Server is intended as a fully-featured XML-RPC server, following the specifications outlined at

www.xmlrpc.com. Additionally, it implements the system.multicall() method, allowing boxcarring of re-
quests.

332.2 Basic Usage

An example of the most basic use case:

1 $server = new Zend\XmlRpc\Server();
2 $server->setClass('My\Service\Class');
3 echo $server->handle();

332.3 Server Structure

Zend\XmlRpc\Server is composed of a variety of components, ranging from the server itself to request, response,
and fault objects.
To bootstrap Zend\XmlRpc\Server, the developer must attach one or more classes or functions to the server, via
the setClass() and addFunction() methods.
Once done, you may either pass a Zend\XmlRpc\Request object to Zend\XmlRpc\Server::handle(),
or it will instantiate a Zend\XmlRpc\Request\Http object if none is provided thus grabbing the request from
php://input.
Zend\XmlRpc\Server::handle() then attempts to dispatch to the appropriate handler based
on the method requested. It then returns either a Zend\XmlRpc\Response-based object or a
Zend\XmlRpc\Server\Faultobject. These objects both have __toString() methods that create valid
XML-RPC XML responses, allowing them to be directly echoed.

1499
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

332.4 Anatomy of a webservice

332.4.1 General considerations

For maximum performance it is recommended to use a simple bootstrap file for the server component. Using
Zend\XmlRpc\Server inside a Zend\Mvc\Controller is strongly discouraged to avoid the overhead.
Services change over time and while webservices are generally less change intense as code-native APIs, it is recom-
mended to version your service. Do so to lay grounds to provide compatibility for clients using older versions of your
service and manage your service lifecycle including deprecation timeframes. To do so just include a version number
into your URI. It is also recommended to include the remote protocol name in the URI to allow easy integration of
upcoming remoting technologies. http://myservice.ws/1.0/XMLRPC/.

332.4.2 What to expose?

Most of the time it is not sensible to expose business objects directly. Business objects are usually small and under
heavy change, because change is cheap in this layer of your application. Once deployed and adopted, web services
are hard to change. Another concern is I/O and latency: the best webservice calls are those not happening. Therefore
service calls need to be more coarse-grained than usual business logic is. Often an additional layer in front of your
business objects makes sense. This layer is sometimes referred to as Remote Facade. Such a service layer adds a
coarse grained interface on top of your business logic and groups verbose operations into smaller ones.

332.5 Conventions

Zend\XmlRpc\Server allows the developer to attach functions and class method calls as dispatchable XML-RPC
methods. Via Zend\Server\Reflection, it does introspection on all attached methods, using the function and
method docblocks to determine the method help text and method signatures.
XML-RPC types do not necessarily map one-to-one to PHP types. However, the code will do its best to guess the
appropriate type based on the values listed in @param and @return lines. Some XML-RPC types have no immediate
PHP equivalent, however, and should be hinted using the XML-RPC type in the PHPDoc. These include:
dateTime.iso8601, a string formatted as YYYYMMDDTHH:mm:ss
base64, base64 encoded data
struct, any associative array
An example of how to hint follows:
1 /**
2 * This is a sample function
3 *
4 * @param base64 $val1 Base64-encoded data
5 * @param dateTime.iso8601 $val2 An ISO date
6 * @param struct $val3 An associative array
7 * @return struct
8 */
9 function myFunc($val1, $val2, $val3)
10 {
11 }

PhpDocumentor does no validation of the types specified for params or return values, so this will have no impact on
your API documentation. Providing the hinting is necessary, however, when the server is validating the parameters
provided to the method call.

1500 Chapter 332. Zend\XmlRpc\Server

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

It is perfectly valid to specify multiple types for both params and return values; the XML-RPC specification even
suggests that system.methodSignature should return an array of all possible method signatures (i.e., all possible com-
binations of param and return values). You may do so just as you normally would with PhpDocumentor, using the |
operator:
1 /**
2 * This is a sample function
3 *
4 * @param string|base64 $val1 String or base64-encoded data
5 * @param string|dateTime.iso8601 $val2 String or an ISO date
6 * @param array|struct $val3 Normal indexed array or an associative array
7 * @return boolean|struct
8 */
9 function myFunc($val1, $val2, $val3)
10 {
11 }

Note: Allowing multiple signatures can lead to confusion for developers using the services; to keep things simple, a
XML-RPC service method should only have a single signature.

332.6 Utilizing Namespaces

XML-RPC has a concept of namespacing; basically, it allows grouping XML-RPC methods by dot-delimited names-
paces. This helps prevent naming collisions between methods served by different classes. As an example, the XML-
RPC server is expected to server several methods in the system namespace:
system.listMethods
system.methodHelp
system.methodSignature
Internally, these map to the methods of the same name in Zend\XmlRpc\Server.
If you want to add namespaces to the methods you serve, simply provide a namespace to the appropriate method when
attaching a function or class:
1 // All public methods in My_Service_Class will be accessible as
2 // myservice.METHODNAME
3 $server->setClass('My\Service\Class', 'myservice');
4

5 // Function 'somefunc' will be accessible as funcs.somefunc

6 $server->addFunction('somefunc', 'funcs');

332.7 Custom Request Objects

Most of the time, youll simply use the default request type included with Zend\XmlRpc\Server,
Zend\XmlRpc\Request\Http. However, there may be times when you need XML-RPC to be available via the
CLI, a GUI, or other environment, or want to log incoming requests. To do so, you may create a custom request object
that extends Zend\XmlRpc\Request. The most important thing to remember is to ensure that the getMethod()
and getParams() methods are implemented so that the XML-RPC server can retrieve that information in order to
dispatch the request.

332.6. Utilizing Namespaces 1501

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

332.8 Custom Responses

Similar to request objects, Zend\XmlRpc\Server can return custom response objects; by default, a
Zend\XmlRpc\Response\Http object is returned, which sends an appropriate Content-Type HTTP header for
use with XML-RPC. Possible uses of a custom object would be to log responses, or to send responses back to STDOUT.
To use a custom response class, use Zend\XmlRpc\Server::setResponseClass() prior to calling
handle().

332.9 Handling Exceptions via Faults

Zend\XmlRpc\Server catches Exceptions generated by a dispatched method, and generates an XML-RPC fault
response when such an exception is caught. By default, however, the exception messages and codes are not used in a
fault response. This is an intentional decision to protect your code; many exceptions expose more information about
the code or environment than a developer would necessarily intend (a prime example includes database abstraction or
access layer exceptions).
Exception classes can be whitelisted to be used as fault responses, however. To do so, simply utilize
Zend\XmlRpc\Server\Fault::attachFaultException() to pass an exception class to whitelist:
1 Zend\XmlRpc\Server\Fault::attachFaultException('My\Project\Exception');

If you utilize an exception class that your other project exceptions inherit, you can then whitelist a whole family of
exceptions at a time. Zend\XmlRpc\Server\Exceptions are always whitelisted, to allow reporting specific
internal errors (undefined methods, etc.).
Any exception not specifically whitelisted will generate a fault response with a code of 404 and a message of Un-
known error.

332.10 Caching Server Definitions Between Requests

Attaching many classes to an XML-RPC server instance can utilize a lot of resources; each class must introspect
using the Reflection API (via Zend\Server\Reflection), which in turn generates a list of all possible method
signatures to provide to the server class.
To reduce this performance hit somewhat, Zend\XmlRpc\Server\Cache can be used to cache the server defini-
tion between requests. When combined with __autoload(), this can greatly increase performance.
An sample usage follows:
1 use Zend\XmlRpc\Server as XmlRpcServer;
2

3 // Register the "My\Services" namespace

4 $loader = new Zend\Loader\StandardAutoloader();
5 $loader->registerNamespace('My\Services', 'path to My/Services');
6 $loader->register();
7

8 $cacheFile = dirname(__FILE__) . '/xmlrpc.cache';

9 $server = new XmlRpcServer();
10

11 if (!XmlRpcServer\Cache::get($cacheFile, $server)) {
12

13 $server->setClass('My\Services\Glue', 'glue'); // glue. namespace

14 $server->setClass('My\Services\Paste', 'paste'); // paste. namespace

1502 Chapter 332. Zend\XmlRpc\Server

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

15 $server->setClass('My\Services\Tape', 'tape'); // tape. namespace

16

17 XmlRpcServer\Cache::save($cacheFile, $server);
18 }
19

20 echo $server->handle();

The above example attempts to retrieve a server definition from xmlrpc.cache in the same directory as the script.
If unsuccessful, it loads the service classes it needs, attaches them to the server instance, and then attempts to create a
new cache file with the server definition.

332.11 Usage Examples

Below are several usage examples, showing the full spectrum of options available to developers. Usage examples will
each build on the previous example provided.

Basic Usage

The example below attaches a function as a dispatchable XML-RPC method and handles incoming calls.
1 /**
2 * Return the MD5 sum of a value
3 *
4 * @param string $value Value to md5sum
5 * @return string MD5 sum of value
6 */
7 function md5Value($value)
8 {
9 return md5($value);
10 }
11

12 $server = new Zend\XmlRpc\Server();

13 $server->addFunction('md5Value');
14 echo $server->handle();

Attaching a class

The example below illustrates attaching a class public methods as dispatchable XML-RPC methods.
1 require_once 'Services/Comb.php';
2

3 $server = new Zend\XmlRpc\Server();

4 $server->setClass('Services\Comb');
5 echo $server->handle();

Attaching a class with arguments

The following example illustrates how to attach a class public methods and passing arguments to its methods. This
can be used to specify certain defaults when registering service classes.

332.11. Usage Examples 1503

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1 namespace Services;
2

3 class PricingService
4 {
5 /**
6 * Calculate current price of product with $productId
7 *
8 * @param ProductRepository $productRepository
9 * @param PurchaseRepository $purchaseRepository
10 * @param integer $productId
11 */
12 public function calculate(ProductRepository $productRepository,
13 PurchaseRepository $purchaseRepository,
14 $productId)
15 {
16 ...
17 }
18 }
19

20 $server = new Zend\XmlRpc\Server();

21 $server->setClass('Services\PricingService',
22 'pricing',
23 new ProductRepository(),
24 new PurchaseRepository());

The arguments passed at setClass() at server construction time are injected into the method call
pricing.calculate() on remote invokation. In the example above, only the argument $purchaseId is ex-
pected from the client.

Passing arguments only to constructor

Zend\XmlRpc\Server allows to restrict argument passing to constructors only. This can be used for constructor
dependency injection. To limit injection to constructors, call sendArgumentsToAllMethods and pass FALSE as
an argument. This disables the default behavior of all arguments being injected into the remote method. In the example
below the instance of ProductRepository and PurchaseRepository is only injected into the constructor of
Services_PricingService2.
1 class Services\PricingService2
2 {
3 /**
4 * @param ProductRepository $productRepository
5 * @param PurchaseRepository $purchaseRepository
6 */
7 public function __construct(ProductRepository $productRepository,
8 PurchaseRepository $purchaseRepository)
9 {
10 ...
11 }
12

13 /**
14 * Calculate current price of product with $productId
15 *
16 * @param integer $productId
17 * @return double
18 */
19 public function calculate($productId)
20 {

1504 Chapter 332. Zend\XmlRpc\Server

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

21 ...
22 }
23 }
24

25 $server = new Zend\XmlRpc\Server();

26 $server->sendArgumentsToAllMethods(false);
27 $server->setClass('Services\PricingService2',
28 'pricing',
29 new ProductRepository(),
30 new PurchaseRepository());

Attaching a class instance

setClass() allows to register a previously instantiated class at the server. Just pass an instance instead of the class
name. Obviously passing arguments to the constructor is not possible with pre-instantiated classes.

Attaching several classes using namespaces

The example below illustrates attaching several classes, each with their own namespace.
1 require_once 'Services/Comb.php';
2 require_once 'Services/Brush.php';
3 require_once 'Services/Pick.php';
4

5 $server = new Zend\XmlRpc\Server();

6 $server->setClass('Services\Comb', 'comb'); // methods called as comb.*
7 $server->setClass('Services\Brush', 'brush'); // methods called as brush.*
8 $server->setClass('Services\Pick', 'pick'); // methods called as pick.*
9 echo $server->handle();

Specifying exceptions to use as valid fault responses

The example below allows any Services\Exception-derived class to report its code and message in the fault
response.
1 require_once 'Services/Exception.php';
2 require_once 'Services/Comb.php';
3 require_once 'Services/Brush.php';
4 require_once 'Services/Pick.php';
5

6 // Allow Services_Exceptions to report as fault responses

7 Zend\XmlRpc\Server\Fault::attachFaultException('Services\Exception');
8

9 $server = new Zend\XmlRpc\Server();

10 $server->setClass('Services\Comb', 'comb'); // methods called as comb.*
11 $server->setClass('Services\Brush', 'brush'); // methods called as brush.*
12 $server->setClass('Services\Pick', 'pick'); // methods called as pick.*
13 echo $server->handle();

Utilizing custom request and response objects

Some use cases require to utilize a custom request object. For example, XML/RPC is not bound to HTTP as a transfer
protocol. It is possible to use other transfer protocols like SSH or telnet to send the request and response data over the

332.11. Usage Examples 1505

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

wire. Another use case is authentication and authorization. In case of a different transfer protocol, one need to change
the implementation to read request data.
The example below instantiates a custom request class and passes it to the server to handle.
1 require_once 'Services/Request.php';
2 require_once 'Services/Exception.php';
3 require_once 'Services/Comb.php';
4 require_once 'Services/Brush.php';
5 require_once 'Services/Pick.php';
6

7 // Allow Services_Exceptions to report as fault responses

8 Zend\XmlRpc\Server\Fault::attachFaultException('Services\Exception');
9

10 $server = new Zend\XmlRpc\Server();

11 $server->setClass('Services\Comb', 'comb'); // methods called as comb.*
12 $server->setClass('Services\Brush', 'brush'); // methods called as brush.*
13 $server->setClass('Services\Pick', 'pick'); // methods called as pick.*
14

15 // Create a request object

16 $request = new Services\Request();
17

18 echo $server->handle($request);

Specifying a custom response class

The example below illustrates specifying a custom response class for the returned response.
1 require_once 'Services/Request.php';
2 require_once 'Services/Response.php';
3 require_once 'Services/Exception.php';
4 require_once 'Services/Comb.php';
5 require_once 'Services/Brush.php';
6 require_once 'Services/Pick.php';
7

8 // Allow Services_Exceptions to report as fault responses

9 Zend\XmlRpc\Server\Fault::attachFaultException('Services\Exception');
10

11 $server = new Zend\XmlRpc\Server();

12 $server->setClass('Services\Comb', 'comb'); // methods called as comb.*
13 $server->setClass('Services\Brush', 'brush'); // methods called as brush.*
14 $server->setClass('Services\Pick', 'pick'); // methods called as pick.*
15

16 // Create a request object

17 $request = new Services\Request();
18

19 // Utilize a custom response

20 $server->setResponseClass('Services\Response');
21

22 echo $server->handle($request);

1506 Chapter 332. Zend\XmlRpc\Server

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

332.12 Performance optimization

Cache server definitions between requests

The example below illustrates caching server definitions between requests.

1 use Zend\XmlRpc\Server as XmlRpcServer;
2

3 // Register the "Services" namespace

4 $loader = new Zend\Loader\StandardAutoloader();
5 $loader->registerNamespace('Services', 'path to Services');
6 $loader->register();
7

8 // Specify a cache file

9 $cacheFile = dirname(__FILE__) . '/xmlrpc.cache';
10

11 // Allow Services\Exceptions to report as fault responses

12 XmlRpcServer\Fault::attachFaultException('Services\Exception');
13

14 $server = new XmlRpcServer();

15

16 // Attempt to retrieve server definition from cache

17 if (!XmlRpcServer\Cache::get($cacheFile, $server)) {
18 $server->setClass('Services\Comb', 'comb'); // methods called as comb.*
19 $server->setClass('Services\Brush', 'brush'); // methods called as brush.*
20 $server->setClass('Services\Pick', 'pick'); // methods called as pick.*
21

22 // Save cache
23 XmlRpcServer\Cache::save($cacheFile, $server);
24 }
25

26 // Create a request object

27 $request = new Services\Request();
28

29 // Utilize a custom response

30 $server->setResponseClass('Services\Response');
31

32 echo $server->handle($request);

Note: The server cache file should be located outside the document root.

Optimizing XML generation

Zend\XmlRpc\Server uses DOMDocument of PHP extension ext/dom to generate its XML output. While
ext/dom is available on a lot of hosts it is not exactly the fastest. Benchmarks have shown, that XmlWriter from
ext/xmlwriter performs better.
If ext/xmlwriter is available on your host, you can select a the XmlWriter-based generator to leverage the perfor-
mance differences.
1 use Zend\XmlRpc;
2

3 XmlRpc\AbstractValue::setGenerator(new XmlRpc\Generator\XmlWriter());
4

332.12. Performance optimization 1507

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

5 $server = new XmlRpc\Server();

6 ...

Note: Benchmark your application

Performance is determined by a lot of parameters and benchmarks only apply for the specific test case. Differences
come from PHP version, installed extensions, webserver and operating system just to name a few. Please make sure
to benchmark your application on your own and decide which generator to use based on your numbers.

Note: Benchmark your client

This optimization makes sense for the client side too. Just select the alternate XML generator before doing any work
with Zend\XmlRpc\Client.

1508 Chapter 332. Zend\XmlRpc\Server

 CHAPTER 333

ZendService\Akismet

333.1 Introduction

ZendService\Akismet\Akismet provides a client for the Akismet API. The Akismet service is used to deter-
mine if incoming data is potentially spam. It also exposes methods for submitting data as known spam or as false
positives (ham). It was originally intended to help categorize and identify spam for Wordpress, but it can be used for
any type of data.
Akismet requires an API key for usage. You can get one by signing up for a WordPress.com account. You do not need
to activate a blog. Simply acquiring the account will provide you with the API key.
Akismet requires that all requests contain a URL to the resource for which data is being filtered. Because of Akismets
origins in WordPress, this resource is called the blog URL. This value should be passed as the second argument to the
constructor, but may be reset at any time using the setBlogUrl() method, or overridden by specifying a blog key
in the various method calls.

333.2 Verify an API key

ZendService\Akismet\Akismet::verifyKey($key) is used to verify that an Akismet API key is valid.

In most cases, you will not need to check, but if you need a sanity check, or to determine if a newly acquired key is
active, you may do so with this method.
1 // Instantiate with the API key and a URL to the application or
2 // resource being used
3 $akismet = new ZendService\Akismet\Akismet($apiKey,
4 'http://framework.zend.com/wiki/');
5 if ($akismet->verifyKey($apiKey)) {
6 echo "Key is valid.\n";
7 } else {
8 echo "Key is not valid\n";
9 }

If called with no arguments, verifyKey() uses the API key provided to the constructor.
verifyKey() implements Akismets verify-key REST method.

1509
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

333.3 Check for spam

ZendService\Akismet\Akismet::isSpam($data) is used to determine if the data provided is considered

spam by Akismet. It accepts an associative array as the sole argument. That array requires the following keys be set:
user_ip, the IP address of the user submitting the data (not your IP address, but that of a user on your site).
user_agent, the reported UserAgent string (browser and version) of the user submitting the data.
The following keys are also recognized specifically by the API:
blog, the fully qualified URL to the resource or application. If not specified, the URL provided to the constructor
will be used.
referrer, the content of the HTTP_REFERER header at the time of submission. (Note spelling; it does not
follow the header name.)
permalink, the permalink location, if any, of the entry the data was submitted to.
comment_type, the type of data provided. Values specified in the API include comment, trackback, ping-
back, and an empty string (), but it may be any value.
comment_author, the name of the person submitting the data.
comment_author_email, the email of the person submitting the data.
comment_author_url, the URL or home page of the person submitting the data.
comment_content, the actual data content submitted.
You may also submit any other environmental variables you feel might be a factor in determining if data is spam.
Akismet suggests the contents of the entire $_SERVER array.
The isSpam() method will return either TRUE or FALSE, or throw an exception if the API key is invalid.

333.3.1 isSpam() Usage

1 $data = array(
2 'user_ip' => '111.222.111.222',
3 'user_agent' => 'Mozilla/5.0 ' . '(Windows; U; Windows NT ' .
4 '5.2; en-GB; rv:1.8.1) Gecko/20061010 ' .
5 'Firefox/2.0',
6 'comment_type' => 'contact',
7 'comment_author' => 'John Doe',
8 'comment_author_email' => '[email protected]',
9 'comment_content' => "I'm not a spammer, honest!"
10 );
11 if ($akismet->isSpam($data)) {
12 echo "Sorry, but we think you're a spammer.";
13 } else {
14 echo "Welcome to our site!";
15 }

isSpam() implements the comment-check Akismet API method.

333.4 Submitting known spam

Spam data will occasionally get through the filter. If you discover spam that you feel should have been caught, you
can submit it to Akismet to help improve their filter.

1510 Chapter 333. ZendService\Akismet

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

ZendService\Akismet\Akismet::submitSpam() takes the same data array as passed to isSpam(), but

does not return a value. An exception will be raised if the API key used is invalid.

333.4.1 submitSpam() Usage

1 $data = array(
2 'user_ip' => '111.222.111.222',
3 'user_agent' => 'Mozilla/5.0 (Windows; U; Windows NT 5.2;' .
4 'en-GB; rv:1.8.1) Gecko/20061010 Firefox/2.0',
5 'comment_type' => 'contact',
6 'comment_author' => 'John Doe',
7 'comment_author_email' => '[email protected]',
8 'comment_content' => "I'm not a spammer, honest!"
9 );
10 $akismet->submitSpam($data));

submitSpam() implements the submit-spam Akismet API method.

333.5 Submitting false positives (ham)

Data will occasionally be trapped erroneously as spam by Akismet. For this reason, you should probably keep a log of
all data trapped as spam by Akismet and review it periodically. If you find such occurrences, you can submit the data
to Akismet as ham, or a false positive (ham is good, spam is not).
ZendService\Akismet\Akismet::submitHam() takes the same data array as passed to isSpam() or
submitSpam(), and, like submitSpam(), does not return a value. An exception will be raised if the API key
used is invalid.

333.5.1 submitHam() Usage

1 $data = array(
2 'user_ip' => '111.222.111.222',
3 'user_agent' => 'Mozilla/5.0 (Windows; U; Windows NT 5.2;' .
4 'en-GB; rv:1.8.1) Gecko/20061010 Firefox/2.0',
5 'comment_type' => 'contact',
6 'comment_author' => 'John Doe',
7 'comment_author_email' => '[email protected]',
8 'comment_content' => "I'm not a spammer, honest!"
9 );
10 $akismet->submitHam($data));

submitHam() implements the submit-ham Akismet API method.

333.6 Zend-specific Methods

While the Akismet API only specifies four methods, ZendService\Akismet\Akismet has several additional
methods that may be used for retrieving and modifying internal properties.
getBlogUrl() and setBlogUrl() allow you to retrieve and modify the blog URL used in requests.
getApiKey() and setApiKey() allow you to retrieve and modify the API key used in requests.

333.5. Submitting false positives (ham) 1511

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

getCharset() and setCharset() allow you to retrieve and modify the character set used to make the
request.
getPort() and setPort() allow you to retrieve and modify the TCP port used to make the request.
getUserAgent() and setUserAgent() allow you to retrieve and modify the HTTP user agent used to
make the request. Note: this is not the user_agent used in data submitted to the service, but rather the value
provided in the HTTP User-Agent header when making a request to the service.
The value used to set the user agent should be of the form some user agent/version | Akismet/version. The
default is Zend Framework/ZF-VERSION | Akismet/1.11, where ZF-VERSION is the current Zend Framework
version as stored in the Zend\Version\Version::VERSION constant.

1512 Chapter 333. ZendService\Akismet

 CHAPTER 334

ZendService\Amazon

334.1 Introduction

ZendService\Amazon\Amazon is a simple API for using Amazon web services.

ZendService\Amazon\Amazon has two APIs: a more traditional one that follows Amazons own API,
and a simpler Query API for constructing even complex search queries easily.
ZendService\Amazon\Amazon enables developers to retrieve information appearing throughout Amazon.com
web sites directly through the Amazon Web Services API. Examples include:
Store item information, such as images, descriptions, pricing, and more
Customer and editorial reviews
Similar products and accessories
Amazon.com offers
ListMania lists
In order to use ZendService\Amazon\Amazon, you should already have an Amazon developer API key as well
as a secret key. To get a key and for more information, please visit the Amazon Web Services web site. As of August
15th, 2009 you can only use the Amazon Product Advertising API through ZendService\Amazon\Amazon,
when specifying the additional secret key.

Note: Attention
Your Amazon developer API and secret keys are linked to your Amazon identity, so take appropriate measures to keep
them private.

334.1.1 Search Amazon Using the Traditional API

In this example, we search for PHP books at Amazon and loop through the results, printing them.
1 $amazon = new ZendService\Amazon\Amazon('AMAZON_API_KEY', 'US', 'AMAZON_SECRET_KEY');
2 $results = $amazon->itemSearch(array('SearchIndex' => 'Books',
3 'Keywords' => 'php'));
4 foreach ($results as $result) {
5 echo $result->Title . '<br />';
6 }

1513
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

334.1.2 Search Amazon Using the Query API

Here, we also search for PHP books at Amazon, but we instead use the Query API, which resembles the Fluent
Interface design pattern.
1 $query = new ZendService\Amazon\Query('AMAZON_API_KEY',
2 'US',
3 'AMAZON_SECRET_KEY');
4 $query->category('Books')->Keywords('PHP');
5 $results = $query->search();
6 foreach ($results as $result) {
7 echo $result->Title . '<br />';
8 }

334.2 Country Codes

By default, ZendService\Amazon\Amazon connects to the United States (US) Amazon web service. To con-
nect from a different country, simply specify the appropriate country code string as the second parameter to the
constructor:

334.2.1 Choosing an Amazon Web Service Country

1 // Connect to Amazon in Japan

2 $amazon = new ZendService\Amazon\Amazon('AMAZON_API_KEY', 'JP', 'AMAZON_SECRET_KEY');

Note: Country codes

Valid country codes are: CA, DE, FR, JP, UK, and US.

334.3 Looking up a Specific Amazon Item by ASIN

The itemLookup() method provides the ability to fetch a particular Amazon item when the ASIN is known.

334.3.1 Looking up a Specific Amazon Item by ASIN

1 $amazon = new ZendService\Amazon\Amazon('AMAZON_API_KEY', 'US', 'AMAZON_SECRET_KEY');

2 $item = $amazon->itemLookup('B0000A432X');

The itemLookup() method also accepts an optional second parameter for handling search options. For full details,
including a list of available options, please see the relevant Amazon documentation.

Note: Image information

To retrieve images information for your search results, you must set ResponseGroup option to Medium or Large.

1514 Chapter 334. ZendService\Amazon

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

334.4 Performing Amazon Item Searches

Searching for items based on any of various available criteria are made simple using the itemSearch() method, as
in the following example:

334.4.1 Performing Amazon Item Searches

1 $amazon = new ZendService\Amazon\Amazon('AMAZON_API_KEY', 'US', 'AMAZON_SECRET_KEY');

2 $results = $amazon->itemSearch(array('SearchIndex' => 'Books',
3 'Keywords' => 'php'));
4 foreach ($results as $result) {
5 echo $result->Title . '<br />';
6 }

334.4.2 Using the ResponseGroup Option

The ResponseGroup option is used to control the specific information that will be returned in the response.
1 $amazon = new ZendService\Amazon\Amazon('AMAZON_API_KEY', 'US', 'AMAZON_SECRET_KEY');
2 $results = $amazon->itemSearch(array(
3 'SearchIndex' => 'Books',
4 'Keywords' => 'php',
5 'ResponseGroup' => 'Small,ItemAttributes,Images,SalesRank,Reviews,' .
6 'EditorialReview,Similarities,ListmaniaLists'
7 ));
8 foreach ($results as $result) {
9 echo $result->Title . '<br />';
10 }

The itemSearch() method accepts a single array parameter for handling search options. For full details, including
a list of available options, please see the relevant Amazon documentation

Tip: The ZendServiceAmazonQuery class is an easy to use wrapper around this method.

334.5 Using the Alternative Query API

334.5.1 Introduction

ZendService\Amazon\Query provides an alternative API for using the Amazon Web Service. The alternative
API uses the Fluent Interface pattern. That is, all calls can be made using chained method calls. (e.g., $obj->method()-
>method2($arg))
The ZendService\Amazon\Query API uses overloading to easily set up an item search and then allows you to
search based upon the criteria specified. Each of the options is provided as a method call, and each methods argument
corresponds to the named options value:

Search Amazon Using the Alternative Query API

In this example, the alternative query API is used as a fluent interface to specify options and their respective values:

334.4. Performing Amazon Item Searches 1515

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1 $query = new ZendService\Amazon\Query('MY_API_KEY', 'US', 'AMAZON_SECRET_KEY');

2 $query->Category('Books')->Keywords('PHP');
3 $results = $query->search();
4 foreach ($results as $result) {
5 echo $result->Title . '<br />';
6 }

This sets the option Category to Books and Keywords to PHP.

For more information on the available options, please refer to the relevant Amazon documentation.

334.6 ZendService\Amazon Classes

The following classes are all returned by ZendServiceAmazonAmazon::itemLookup() and ZendServiceAmazonAma-

zon::itemSearch():
ZendServiceAmazonItem
ZendServiceAmazonImage
ZendServiceAmazonResultSet
ZendServiceAmazonOfferSet
ZendServiceAmazonOffer
ZendServiceAmazonSimilarProduct
ZendServiceAmazonAccessories
ZendServiceAmazonCustomerReview
ZendServiceAmazonEditorialReview
ZendServiceAmazonListMania

334.6.1 ZendService\Amazon\Item

ZendService\Amazon\Item is the class type used to represent an Amazon item returned by the web service. It
encompasses all of the items attributes, including title, description, reviews, etc.

ZendService\Amazon\Item::asXML()

string:asXML()
Return the original XML for the item

Properties

ZendService\Amazon\Item has a number of properties directly related to their standard Amazon API counter-
parts.

1516 Chapter 334. ZendService\Amazon

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Table 334.1: ZendServiceAmazonItem Properties

Name Type Description
ASIN string Amazon Item ID
Detail- string URL to the Items Details Page
PageURL
SalesRank int Sales Rank for the Item
SmallImage ZendServiceAmazon- Small Image of the Item
Image
MediumIm- ZendServiceAmazon- Medium Image of the Item
age Image
LargeImage ZendServiceAmazon- Large Image of the Item
Image
Subjects array Item Subjects
Offers ZendServiceAma- Offer Summary and Offers for the Item
zonOfferSet
CustomerRe- array Customer reviews represented as an array of
views ZendServiceAmazonCustomerReview objects
EditorialRe- array Editorial reviews represented as an array of
views ZendServiceAmazonEditorialReview objects
SimilarProd- array Similar Products represented as an array of
ucts ZendServiceAmazonSimilarProduct objects
Accessories array Accessories for the item represented as an array of
ZendServiceAmazonAccessories objects
Tracks array An array of track numbers and names for Music CDs and DVDs
ListmaniaL- array Item related Listmania Lists as an array of
ists ZendServiceAmazonListmaniaList objects
Promotional- string Item Promotional Tag
Tag
Back to Class List

334.6.2 ZendService\Amazon\Image

ZendService\Amazon\Image represents a remote Image for a product.

Properties

Table 334.2: ZendServiceAmazonImage Properties

Name Type Description
Url ZendUriUri Remote URL for the Image
Height int The Height of the image in pixels
Width int The Width of the image in pixels
Back to Class List

334.6.3 ZendService\Amazon\ResultSet

ZendService\Amazon\ResultSet objects are returned by ZendServiceAmazonAmazon::itemSearch() and al-

low you to easily handle the multiple results returned.

334.6. ZendService\Amazon Classes 1517

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Note: SeekableIterator
Implements the SeekableIterator for easy iteration (e.g. using foreach), as well as direct access to a specific result
using seek().

ZendService\Amazon\ResultSet::totalResults()

int:totalResults() Returns the total number of results returned by the search

Back to Class List

334.6.4 ZendService\Amazon\OfferSet

Each result returned by ZendServiceAmazonAmazon::itemSearch() and ZendServiceAmazonAmazon::itemLookup()

contains a ZendService\Amazon\OfferSet object through which pricing information for the item can be re-
trieved.

Properties

Table 334.3: ZendServiceAmazonOfferSet Properties

Name Type Description
LowestNewPrice int Lowest Price for the item in New condition
LowestNewPriceCurrency string The currency for the LowestNewPrice
LowestOldPrice int Lowest Price for the item in Used condition
LowestOldPriceCurrency string The currency for the LowestOldPrice
TotalNew int Total number of new condition available for the item
TotalUsed int Total number of used condition available for the item
TotalCollectible int Total number of collectible condition available for the item
TotalRefurbished int Total number of refurbished condition available for the item
Offers array An array of ZendServiceAmazonOffer objects.
Back to Class List

334.6.5 ZendService\Amazon\Offer

Each offer for an item is returned as an ZendService\Amazon\Offer object.

1518 Chapter 334. ZendService\Amazon

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Properties

Table 334.4: Properties

Name Type Description
MerchantId string Merchants Amazon ID
MerchantName string Merchants Amazon Name. Requires setting the ResponseGroup option to
OfferFull to retrieve.
GlancePage string URL for a page with a summary of the Merchant
Condition string Condition of the item
OfferListingId string ID of the Offer Listing
Price int Price for the item
CurrencyCode string Currency Code for the price of the item
Availability string Availability of the item
IsEligibleForSuperSaver- boolean Whether the item is eligible for Super Saver Shipping or not
Shipping
Back to Class List

334.6.6 ZendService\Amazon\SimilarProduct

When searching for items, Amazon also returns a list of similar products that the searcher may find to their liking.
Each of these is returned as a ZendService\Amazon\SimilarProduct object.
Each object contains the information to allow you to make sub-sequent requests to get the full information on the item.

Properties

Table 334.5: ZendServiceAmazonSimilarProduct Properties

Name Type Description
ASIN string Products Amazon Unique ID (ASIN)
Title string Products Title
Back to Class List

334.6.7 ZendService\Amazon\Accessories

Accessories for the returned item are represented as ZendService\Amazon\Accessories objects

Properties

Table 334.6: ZendServiceAmazonAccessories Properties

Name Type Description
ASIN string Products Amazon Unique ID (ASIN)
Title string Products Title
Back to Class List

334.6. ZendService\Amazon Classes 1519

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

334.6.8 ZendService\Amazon\CustomerReview

Each Customer Review is returned as a ZendService\Amazon\CustomerReview object.

Properties

Table 334.7: ZendServiceAmazonCustomerReview Properties

Name Type Description
Rating string Item Rating
HelpfulVotes string Votes on how helpful the review is
CustomerId string Customer ID
TotalVotes string Total Votes
Date string Date of the Review
Summary string Review Summary
Content string Review Content
Back to Class List

334.6.9 ZendService\Amazon\EditorialReview

Each items Editorial Reviews are returned as a ZendService\Amazon\EditorialReview object

Properties

Table 334.8: ZendServiceAmazonEditorialReview

Properties
Name Type Description
Source string Source of the Editorial Review
Content string Review Content
Back to Class List

334.6.10 ZendService\Amazon\Listmania

Each results List Mania List items are returned as ZendService\Amazon\Listmania objects.

Properties

Table 334.9:
ZendServiceAmazonListmania
Properties
Name Type Description
ListId string List ID
ListName string List Name
Back to Class List

1520 Chapter 334. ZendService\Amazon

 CHAPTER 335

ZendService\Amazon\S3

335.1 Introduction

Amazon S3 provides a simple web services interface that can be used to store and retrieve any amount of data, at any
time, from anywhere on the web. It gives any developer access to the same highly scalable, reliable, fast, inexpensive
data storage infrastructure that Amazon uses to run its own global network of web sites. The service aims to maximize
benefits of scale and to pass those benefits on to developers.

335.2 Registering with Amazon S3

Before you can get started with ZendService\Amazon\S3, you must first register for an account. Please see the
S3 FAQ page on the Amazon website for more information.
After registering, you will receive an application key and a secret key. You will need both to access the S3 service.

335.3 API Documentation

The ZendService\Amazon\S3 class provides the PHP wrapper to the Amazon S3 REST interface. Please consult
the Amazon S3 documentation for detailed description of the service. You will need to be familiar with basic concepts
in order to use this service.

335.4 Features

ZendService\Amazon\S3 provides the following functionality:

A single point for configuring your amazon.s3 authentication credentials that can be used across the amazon.s3
namespaces.
A proxy object that is more convenient to use than an HTTP client alone, mostly removing the need to manually
construct HTTP POST requests to access the REST service.
A response wrapper that parses each response body and throws an exception if an error occurred, alleviating the
need to repeatedly check the success of many commands.
Additional convenience methods for some of the more common operations.

1521
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

335.5 Getting Started

Once you have registered with Amazon S3, youre ready to store your first data object on the S3. The objects on S3
are stored in containers, called buckets. Bucket names are unique on S3, and each user can have no more than 100
buckets simultaneously. Each bucket can contain unlimited amount of objects, identified by name.
The following example demonstrates creating a bucket, storing and retrieving the data.

335.5.1 ZendService\Amazon\S3 Usage Example

1 $s3 = new ZendService\Amazon\S3($my_aws_key, $my_aws_secret_key);

2

3 $s3->createBucket("my-own-bucket");
4

5 $s3->putObject("my-own-bucket/myobject", "somedata");
6

7 echo $s3->getObject("my-own-bucket/myobject");

Since ZendService\Amazon\S3 service requires authentication, you should pass your credentials (AWS key and
secret key) to the constructor. If you only use one account, you can set default credentials for the service:
1 ZendService\Amazon\S3::setKeys($my_aws_key, $my_aws_secret_key);
2 $s3 = new ZendService\Amazon\S3();

335.6 Bucket operations

All objects in S3 system are stored in buckets. Bucket has to be created before any storage operation. Bucket name is
unique in the system, so you can not have bucket named the same as someone elses bucket.
Bucket name can contain lowercase letters, digits, periods (.), underscores (_), and dashes (-). No other symbols
allowed. Bucket name should start with letter or digit, and be 3 to 255 characters long. Names looking like an IP
address (e.g. 192.168.16.255) are not allowed.
createBucket() creates a new bucket.
cleanBucket() removes all objects that are contained in a bucket.
removeBucket() removes the bucket from the system. The bucket should be empty to be removed.

ZendServiceAmazonS3 Bucket Removal Example

1 $s3 = new ZendService\Amazon\S3($my_aws_key, $my_aws_secret_key);

2

3 $s3->cleanBucket("my-own-bucket");
4 $s3->removeBucket("my-own-bucket");

getBuckets() returns the list of the names of all buckets belonging to the user.

ZendServiceAmazonS3 Bucket Listing Example

1522 Chapter 335. ZendService\Amazon\S3

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1 $s3 = new ZendService\Amazon\S3($my_aws_key, $my_aws_secret_key);

2

3 $list = $s3->getBuckets();
4 foreach ($list as $bucket) {
5 echo "I have bucket $bucket\n";
6 }

isBucketAvailable() check if the bucket exists and returns TRUE if it does.

335.7 Object operations

The object is the basic storage unit in S3. Object stores unstructured data, which can be any size up to 4 gigabytes.
Theres no limit on how many objects can be stored on the system.
The object are contained in buckets. Object is identified by name, which can be any utf-8 string. It is common to
use hierarchical names (such as Pictures/Myself/CodingInPHP.jpg) to organise object names. Object name is prefixed
with bucket name when using object functions, so for object mydata in bucket my-own-bucket the name would be
my-own-bucket/mydata.
Objects can be replaced (by rewriting new data with the same key) or deleted, but not modified, appended, etc. Object
is always stored whole.
By default, all objects are private and can be accessed only by their owner. However, it is possible to specify object with
public access, in which case it will be available through the URL: http://s3.amazonaws.com/[bucket-name]/[object-
name].
putObject($object, $data, $meta) created an object with name $object (should contain the
bucket name as prefix!) having $data as its content.
Optional $meta parameter is the array of metadata, which currently supports the following parameters as keys:
S3_CONTENT_TYPE_HEADER MIME content type of the data. If not specified, the type will be guessed
according to the file extension of the object name.
S3_ACL_HEADER The access to the item. Following access constants can be used:
S3_ACL_PRIVATE Only the owner has access to the item.
S3_ACL_PUBLIC_READ Anybody can read the object, but only owner can write. This is
setting may be used to store publicly accessible content.
S3_ACL_PUBLIC_WRITE Anybody can read or write the object. This policy is rarely useful.
S3_ACL_AUTH_READ Only the owner has write access to the item, and other authenticated
S3 users have read access. This is useful for sharing data between S3 accounts without
exposing them to the public.
By default, all the items are private.

ZendServiceAmazonS3 Public Object Example

1 $s3 = new ZendService\Amazon\S3($my_aws_key, $my_aws_secret_key);

2

3 $s3->putObject("my-own-bucket/Pictures/Me.png", file_get_contents("me.png"),
4 array(ZendService\Amazon\S3::S3_ACL_HEADER =>
5 ZendService\Amazon\S3::S3_ACL_PUBLIC_READ));
6 // or:
7 $s3->putFile("me.png", "my-own-bucket/Pictures/Me.png",

335.7. Object operations 1523

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

8 array(ZendService\Amazon\S3::S3_ACL_HEADER =>
9 ZendService\Amazon\S3::S3_ACL_PUBLIC_READ));
10 echo "Go to http://s3.amazonaws.com/my-own-bucket/Pictures/Me.png to see me!\n";

getObject($object) retrieves object data from the storage by name.

removeObject($object) removes the object from the storage.
getInfo($object) retrieves the metadata information about the object. The function will return array with
metadata information. Some of the useful keys are:
type The MIME type of the item.
size The size of the object data.
mtime UNIX-type timestamp of the last modification for the object.
etag The ETag of the data, which is the MD5 hash of the data, surrounded by quotes ().
The function will return FALSE if the key does not correspond to any existing object.
getObjectsByBucket($bucket) returns the list of the object keys, contained in the bucket.

ZendServiceAmazonS3 Object Listing Example

1 $s3 = new ZendService\Amazon\S3($my_aws_key, $my_aws_secret_key);

2

3 $list = $s3->getObjectsByBucket("my-own-bucket");
4 foreach ($list as $name) {
5 echo "I have $name key:\n";
6 $data = $s3->getObject("my-own-bucket/$name");
7 echo "with data: $data\n";
8 }

isObjectAvailable($object) checks if the object with given name exists.

putFile($path, $object, $meta) puts the content of the file in $path into the object named
$object.
The optional $meta argument is the same as for putObject. If the content type is omitted, it will be guessed
basing on the source file name.

335.8 Data Streaming

It is possible to get and put objects using not stream data held in memory but files or PHP streams. This is especially
useful when file sizes are large in order not to overcome memory limits.
To receive object using streaming, use method getObjectStream($object, $filename). This method will
return Zend\Http\Response\Stream, which can be used as described in HTTP Client Data Streaming section.

ZendServiceAmazonS3 Data Streaming Example

1 $response = $amazon->getObjectStream("mybycket/zftest");
2 // copy file
3 copy($response->getStreamName(), "my/downloads/file");
4 // use stream

1524 Chapter 335. ZendService\Amazon\S3

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

5 $fp = fopen("my/downloads/file2", "w");

6 stream_copy_to_stream($response->getStream(), $fp);

Second parameter for getObjectStream() is optional and specifies target file to write the data. If not specified,
temporary file is used, which will be deleted after the response object is destroyed.
To send object using streaming, use putFileStream() which has the same signature as putFile() but will use
streaming and not read the file into memory.
Also, you can pass stream resource to putObject() method data parameter, in which case the data will be read
from the stream when sending the request to the server.

335.9 Stream wrapper

In addition to the interfaces described above, ZendService\Amazon\S3 also supports operating as a stream
wrapper. For this, you need to register the client object as the stream wrapper:

335.9.1 ZendService\Amazon\S3 Streams Example

1 $s3 = new ZendService\Amazon\S3($my_aws_key, $my_aws_secret_key);

2

3 $s3->registerStreamWrapper("s3");
4

5 mkdir("s3://my-own-bucket");
6 file_put_contents("s3://my-own-bucket/testdata", "mydata");
7

8 echo file_get_contents("s3://my-own-bucket/testdata");

Directory operations (mkdir, rmdir, opendir, etc.) will operate on buckets and thus their arguments should be of the
form of s3://bucketname. File operations operate on objects. Object creation, reading, writing, deletion, stat and
directory listing is supported.

335.9. Stream wrapper 1525

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1526 Chapter 335. ZendService\Amazon\S3

 CHAPTER 336

ZendService\Amazon\Sqs

336.1 Introduction

Amazon Simple Queue Service (Amazon SQS) offers a reliable, highly scalable, hosted queue for storing messages
as they travel between computers. By using Amazon SQS, developers can simply move data between distributed
components of their applications that perform different tasks, without losing messages or requiring each component to
be always available. Amazon SQS makes it easy to build an automated workflow, working in close conjunction with
the Amazon Elastic Compute Cloud (Amazon EC2) and the other AWS infrastructure web services.
Amazon SQS works by exposing Amazons web-scale messaging infrastructure as a web service. Any computer on
the Internet can add or read messages without any installed software or special firewall configurations. Components
of applications using Amazon SQS can run independently, and do not need to be on the same network, developed with
the same technologies, or running at the same time.

336.2 Registering with Amazon SQS

Before you can get started with ZendService\Amazon\Sqs, you must first register for an account. Please see the
SQS FAQ page on the Amazon website for more information.
After registering, you will receive an application key and a secret key. You will need both to access the SQS service.

336.3 API Documentation

The ZendService\Amazon\Sqs class provides the PHP wrapper to the Amazon SQS REST interface. Please
consult the Amazon SQS documentation for detailed description of the service. You will need to be familiar with
basic concepts in order to use this service.

336.4 Features

ZendService\Amazon\Sqs provides the following functionality:

A single point for configuring your amazon.sqs authentication credentials that can be used across the amazon.sqs
namespaces.
A proxy object that is more convenient to use than an HTTP client alone, mostly removing the need to manually
construct HTTP POST requests to access the REST service.

1527
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

A response wrapper that parses each response body and throws an exception if an error occurred, alleviating the
need to repeatedly check the success of many commands.
Additional convenience methods for some of the more common operations.

336.5 Getting Started

Once you have registered with Amazon SQS, youre ready to create your queue and store some messages on SQS.
Each queue can contain unlimited amount of messages, identified by name.
The following example demonstrates creating a queue, storing and retrieving messages.

336.5.1 ZendService\Amazon\Sqs Usage Example

1 $sqs = new ZendService\Amazon\Sqs($my_aws_key, $my_aws_secret_key);

2

3 $queue_url = $sqs->create('test');
4

5 $message = 'this is a test';

6 $message_id = $sqs->send($queue_url, $message);
7

8 foreach ($sqs->receive($queue_url) as $message) {

9 echo $message['body'].'<br/>';
10 }

Since the ZendService\Amazon\Sqs service requires authentication, you should pass your credentials (AWS
key and secret key) to the constructor. If you only use one account, you can set default credentials for the service:
1 ZendService\Amazon\Sqs::setKeys($my_aws_key, $my_aws_secret_key);
2 $sqs = new ZendService\Amazon\Sqs();

336.6 Queue operations

All messages SQS are stored in queues. A queue has to be created before any message operations. Queue names must
be unique under your access key and secret key.
Queue names can contain lowercase letters, digits, periods (.), underscores (_), and dashes (-). No other symbols
allowed. Queue names can be a maximum of 80 characters.
create() creates a new queue.
delete() removes all messages in the queue.

ZendServiceAmazonSqs Queue Removal Example

1 $sqs = new ZendService\Amazon\Sqs($my_aws_key, $my_aws_secret_key);

2 $queue_url = $sqs->create('test_1');
3 $sqs->delete($queue_url);

count() gets the approximate number of messages in the queue.

1528 Chapter 336. ZendService\Amazon\Sqs

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

ZendServiceAmazonSqs Queue Count Example

1 $sqs = new ZendService\Amazon\Sqs($my_aws_key, $my_aws_secret_key);

2 $queue_url = $sqs->create('test_1');
3 $sqs->send($queue_url, 'this is a test');
4 $count = $sqs->count($queue_url); // Returns '1'

getQueues() returns the list of the names of all queues belonging to the user.

ZendServiceAmazonSqs Queue Listing Example

1 $sqs = new ZendService\Amazon\Sqs($my_aws_key, $my_aws_secret_key);

2 $list = $sqs->getQueues();
3 foreach ($list as $queue) {
4 echo "I have queue $queue\n";
5 }

336.7 Message operations

After a queue is created, simple messages can be sent into the queue then received at a later point in time. Messages
can be up to 8KB in length. If longer messages are needed please see S3. There is no limit to the number of messages
a queue can contain.
sent($queue_url, $message) send the $message to the $queue_url SQS queue URL.

ZendServiceAmazonSqs Message Send Example

1 $sqs = new ZendService\Amazon\Sqs($my_aws_key, $my_aws_secret_key);

2 $queue_url = $sqs->create('test_queue');
3 $sqs->send($queue_url, 'this is a test message');

receive($queue_url) retrieves messages from the queue.

ZendServiceAmazonSqs Message Receive Example

1 $sqs = new ZendService\Amazon\Sqs($my_aws_key, $my_aws_secret_key);

2 $queue_url = $sqs->create('test_queue');
3 $sqs->send($queue_url, 'this is a test message');
4 foreach ($sqs->receive($queue_url) as $message) {
5 echo "got message ".$message['body'].'<br/>';
6 }

deleteMessage($queue_url, $handle) deletes a message from a queue. A message must first be

received using the receive() method before it can be deleted.

ZendServiceAmazonSqs Message Delete Example

336.7. Message operations 1529

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1 $sqs = new ZendService\Amazon\Sqs($my_aws_key, $my_aws_secret_key);

2 $queue_url = $sqs->create('test_queue');
3 $sqs->send($queue_url, 'this is a test message');
4 foreach ($sqs->receive($queue_url) as $message) {
5 echo "got message ".$message['body'].'<br/>';
6

7 if ($sqs->deleteMessage($queue_url, $message['handle'])) {
8 echo "Message deleted";
9 }
10 else {
11 echo "Message not deleted";
12 }
13 }

1530 Chapter 336. ZendService\Amazon\Sqs

 CHAPTER 337

ZendService\Amazon\Ec2

337.1 Introduction

ZendService\Amazon\Ec2 provides an interface to Amazon Elastic Cloud Computing (EC2).

337.2 What is Amazon Ec2?

Amazon EC2 is a web service that enables you to launch and manage server instances in Amazons data centers using
APIs or available tools and utilities. You can use Amazon EC2 server instances at any time, for as long as you need,
and for any legal purpose.

337.3 Static Methods

To make using the Ec2 class easier to use there are two static methods that can be invoked from any of the Ec2
Elements. The first static method is setKeys which will defind you AWS Access Keys as default keys. When you then
create any new object you dont need to pass in any keys to the constructor.

337.3.1 setKeys() Example

1 ZendService\Amazon\Ec2\Ebs::setKeys('aws_key','aws_secret_key');

To set the region that you are working in you can call the setRegion to set which Amazon Ec2 Region you are working
in. Currently there is only two region available us-east-1 and eu-west-1. If an invalid value is passed it will throw an
exception stating that.

337.3.2 setRegion() Example

1 ZendService\Amazon\Ec2\Ebs::setRegion('us-east-1');

Note: Set Amazon Ec2 Region

Alternatively you can set the region when you create each class as the third parameter in the constructor method.

1531
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1532 Chapter 337. ZendService\Amazon\Ec2

 CHAPTER 338

ZendService\Amazon\Ec2: CloudWatch Monitoring

Amazon CloudWatch is an easy-to-use web service that provides comprehensive monitoring for Amazon Elastic Com-
pute Cloud (Amazon EC2) and Elastic Load Balancing. For more details information check out the Amazon Cloud-
Watch Developers Guide

338.1 CloudWatch Usage

338.1.1 Listing Available Metrics

listMetrics() returns a list of up to 500 valid metrics for which there is recorded data available to a you and a
NextToken string that can be used to query for the next set of results.
1 $ec2_ebs = new ZendService\Amazon\Ec2\CloudWatch('aws_key','aws_secret_key');
2 $return = $ec2_ebs->listMetrics();

338.1.2 Return Statistics for a given metric

getMetricStatistics() Returns data for one or more statistics of given a metric.

Note: The maximum number of datapoints that the Amazon CloudWatch service will return in a single GetMet-
ricStatistics request is 1,440. If a request is made that would generate more datapoints than this amount, Amazon
CloudWatch will return an error. You can alter your request by narrowing the time range (StartTime, EndTime) or
increasing the Period in your single request. You may also get all of the data at the granularity you originally asked
for by making multiple requests with adjacent time ranges.

getMetricStatistics() only requires two parameters but it also has four additional parameters that are op-
tional.
Required:
MeasureName The measure name that corresponds to the measure for the gathered metric. Valid EC2 Values
are CPUUtilization, NetworkIn, NetworkOut, DiskWriteOps DiskReadBytes, DiskReadOps, DiskWriteBytes.
Valid Elastic Load Balancing Metrics are Latency, RequestCount, HealthyHostCount UnHealthyHostCount. For
more information click here
Statistics The statistics to be returned for the given metric. Valid values are Average, Maximum, Minimum,
Samples, Sum. You can specify this as a string or as an array of values. If you dont specify one it will default to
Average instead of failing out. If you specify an incorrect option it will just skip it. For more information click
here

1533
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Optional:
Dimensions Amazon CloudWatch allows you to specify one Dimension to further filter metric data on. If you
dont specify a dimension, the service returns the aggregate of all the measures with the given measure name
and time range.
Unit The standard unit of Measurement for a given Measure. Valid Values: Seconds, Percent, Bytes, Bits,
Count, Bytes/Second, Bits/Second, Count/Second, and None. Constraints: When using count/second as the
unit, you should use Sum as the statistic instead of Average. Otherwise, the sample returns as equal to the
number of requests instead of the number of 60-second intervals. This will cause the Average to always equals
one when the unit is count/second.
StartTime The timestamp of the first datapoint to return, inclusive. For example, 2008-02-26T19:00:00+00:00.
We round your value down to the nearest minute. You can set your start time for more than two weeks in the
past. However, you will only get data for the past two weeks. (in ISO 8601 format). Constraints: Must be before
EndTime.
EndTime The timestamp to use for determining the last datapoint to return. This is the last datapoint to fetch,
exclusive. For example, 2008-02-26T20:00:00+00:00 (in ISO 8601 format).
1 $ec2_ebs = new ZendService\Amazon\Ec2\CloudWatch('aws_key','aws_secret_key');
2 $return = $ec2_ebs->getMetricStatistics(
3 array('MeasureName' => 'NetworkIn',
4 'Statistics' => array('Average')));

1534 Chapter 338. ZendService\Amazon\Ec2: CloudWatch Monitoring

 CHAPTER 339

ZendService\Amazon\Ec2: Elastic Block Storage (EBS)

Amazon Elastic Block Store (Amazon EBS) is a new type of storage designed specifically for Amazon EC2 instances.
Amazon EBS allows you to create volumes that can be mounted as devices by Amazon EC2 instances. Amazon EBS
volumes behave like raw unformatted external block devices. They have user supplied device names and provide a
block device interface. You can load a file system on top of Amazon EBS volumes, or use them just as you would use
a block device.
You can create up to twenty Amazon EBS volumes of any size (from one GiB up to one TiB). Each Amazon EBS
volume can be attached to any Amazon EC2 instance in the same Availability Zone or can be left unattached.
Amazon EBS provides the ability to create snapshots of your Amazon EBS volumes to Amazon S3. You can use these
snapshots as the starting point for new Amazon EBS volumes and can protect your data for long term durability.

339.1 Create EBS Volumes and Snapshots

Create a new EBS Volume

Creating a brand new EBS Volume requires the size and which zone you want the EBS Volume to be in.
createNewVolume will return an array containing information about the new Volume which includes the volumeId,
size, zone, status and createTime.
1 $ec2_ebs = new ZendService\Amazon\Ec2\Ebs('aws_key','aws_secret_key');
2 $return = $ec2_ebs->createNewVolume(40, 'us-east-1a');

Create an EBS Volume from a Snapshot

Creating an EBS Volume from a snapshot requires the snapshot_id and which zone you want the EBS Volume to be
in.
createVolumeFromSnapshot will return an array containing information about the new Volume which includes the
volumeId, size, zone, status, createTime and snapshotId.
1 $ec2_ebs = new ZendService\Amazon\Ec2\Ebs('aws_key','aws_secret_key');
2 $return = $ec2_ebs->createVolumeFromSnapshot('snap-78a54011', 'us-east-1a');

Create a Snapshot of an EBS Volume

Creating a Snapshot of an EBS Volume requires the volumeId of the EBS Volume.

1535
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

createSnapshot will return an array containing information about the new Volume Snapshot which includes the snap-
shotId, volumeId, status, startTime and progress.
1 $ec2_ebs = new ZendService\Amazon\Ec2\Ebs('aws_key','aws_secret_key');
2 $return = $ec2_ebs->createSnapshot('volumeId');

339.2 Describing EBS Volumes and Snapshots

Describing an EBS Volume

describeVolume allows you to get information on an EBS Volume or a set of EBS Volumes. If nothing is passed in
then it will return all EBS Volumes. If only one EBS Volume needs to be described a string can be passed in while an
array of EBS Volume Ids can be passed in to describe them.
describeVolume will return an array with information about each Volume which includes the volumeId, size, status
and createTime. If the volume is attached to an instance, an addition value of attachmentSet will be returned. The
attachment set contains information about the instance that the EBS Volume is attached to, which includes volumeId,
instanceId, device, status and attachTime.
1 $ec2_ebs = new ZendService\Amazon\Ec2\Ebs('aws_key','aws_secret_key');
2 $return = $ec2_ebs->describeVolume('volumeId');

Describe Attached Volumes

To return a list of EBS Volumes currently attached to a running instance you can call this method. It will only return
EBS Volumes attached to the instance with the passed in instanceId.
describeAttachedVolumes returns the same information as the describeVolume but only for the EBS Volumes that are
currently attached to the specified instanceId.
1 $ec2_ebs = new ZendService\Amazon\Ec2\Ebs('aws_key','aws_secret_key');
2 $return = $ec2_ebs->describeAttachedVolumes('instanceId');

Describe an EBS Volume Snapshot

describeSnapshot allows you to get information on an EBS Volume Snapshot or a set of EBS Volume Snapshots. If
nothing is passed in then it will return information about all EBS Volume Snapshots. If only one EBS Volume Snapshot
needs to be described its snapshotId can be passed in while an array of EBS Volume Snapshot Ids can be passed in to
describe them.
describeSnapshot will return an array containing information about each EBS Volume Snapshot which includes the
snapshotId, volumeId, status, startTime and progress.
1 $ec2_ebs = new ZendService\Amazon\Ec2\Ebs('aws_key','aws_secret_key');
2 $return = $ec2_ebs->describeSnapshot('volumeId');

1536 Chapter 339. ZendService\Amazon\Ec2: Elastic Block Storage (EBS)

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

339.3 Attach and Detaching Volumes from Instances

Attaching an EBS Volume

attachVolume will attach an EBS Volume to a running Instance. To attach a volume you need to specify the volumeId,
the instanceId and the device (ex: /dev/sdh).
attachVolume will return an array with information about the attach status which contains volumeId, instanceId, device,
status and attachTime
1 $ec2_ebs = new ZendService\Amazon\Ec2\Ebs('aws_key','aws_secret_key');
2 $return = $ec2_ebs->attachVolume('volumeId', 'instanceid', '/dev/sdh');

Detaching an EBS Volume

detachVolume will detach an EBS Volume from a running Instance. detachVolume requires that you specify the
volumeId with the optional instanceId and device name that was passed when attaching the volume. If you need to
force the detachment you can set the fourth parameter to be TRUE and it will force the volume to detach.
detachVolume returns an array containing status information about the EBS Volume which includes volumeId, instan-
ceId, device, status and attachTime.
1 $ec2_ebs = new ZendService\Amazon\Ec2\Ebs('aws_key','aws_secret_key');
2 $return = $ec2_ebs->detachVolume('volumeId');

Note: Forced Detach

You should only force a detach if the previous detachment attempt did not occur cleanly (logging into an instance,
unmounting the volume, and detaching normally). This option can lead to data loss or a corrupted file system. Use
this option only as a last resort to detach a volume from a failed instance. The instance will not have an opportunity to
flush file system caches or file system meta data. If you use this option, you must perform file system check and repair
procedures.

339.4 Deleting EBS Volumes and Snapshots

Deleting an EBS Volume

deleteVolume will delete an unattached EBS Volume.

deleteVolume will return boolean TRUE or FALSE.
1 $ec2_ebs = new ZendService\Amazon\Ec2\Ebs('aws_key','aws_secret_key');
2 $return = $ec2_ebs->deleteVolume('volumeId');

Deleting an EBS Volume Snapshot

deleteSnapshot will delete an EBS Volume Snapshot.

deleteSnapshot returns boolean TRUE or FALSE.
1 $ec2_ebs = new ZendService\Amazon\Ec2\Ebs('aws_key','aws_secret_key');
2 $return = $ec2_ebs->deleteSnapshot('snapshotId');

339.3. Attach and Detaching Volumes from Instances 1537

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1538 Chapter 339. ZendService\Amazon\Ec2: Elastic Block Storage (EBS)

 CHAPTER 340

ZendService\Amazon\Ec2: Elastic IP Addresses

By default, all Amazon EC2 instances are assigned two IP addresses at launch: a private (RFC 1918) address and a
public address that is mapped to the private IP address through Network Address Translation (NAT).
If you use dynamic DNS to map an existing DNS name to a new instances public IP address, it might take up to 24
hours for the IP address to propagate through the Internet. As a result, new instances might not receive traffic while
terminated instances continue to receive requests.
To solve this problem, Amazon EC2 provides elastic IP addresses. Elastic IP addresses are static IP addresses designed
for dynamic cloud computing. Elastic IP addresses are associated with your account, not specific instances. Any elastic
IP addresses that you associate with your account remain associated with your account until you explicitly release
them. Unlike traditional static IP addresses, however, elastic IP addresses allow you to mask instance or Availability
Zone failures by rapidly remapping your public IP addresses to any instance in your account.

340.1 Allocating a new Elastic IP

allocate will assign your account a new Elastic IP Address.

allocate returns the newly allocated ip.
1 $ec2_eip = new ZendService\Amazon\Ec2\Elasticip('aws_key','aws_secret_key');
2 $ip = $ec2_eip->allocate();
3

4 // print out your newly allocated elastic ip address;

5 print $ip;

340.1.1 Describing Allocated Elastic IP Addresses

describe has an optional parameter to describe all of your allocated Elastic IP addresses or just some of your allocated
addresses.
describe returns an array that contains information on each Elastic IP Address which contains the publicIp and the
instanceId if it is associated.
1 $ec2_eip = new ZendService\Amazon\Ec2\Elasticip('aws_key','aws_secret_key');
2 // describe all
3 $ips = $ec2_eip->describe();
4

5 // describe a subset
6 $ips = $ec2_eip->describe(array('ip1', 'ip2', 'ip3'));
7

1539
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

8 // describe a single ip address

9 $ip = $ec2_eip->describe('ip1');

340.1.2 Releasing Elastic IP

release will release an Elastic IP to Amazon.

Returns a boolean TRUE or FALSE.
1 $ec2_eip = new ZendService\Amazon\Ec2\Elasticip('aws_key','aws_secret_key');
2 $ec2_eip->release('ipaddress');

340.1.3 Associates an Elastic IP to an Instance

associate will assign an Elastic IP to an already running instance.

Returns a boolean TRUE or FALSE.
1 $ec2_eip = new ZendService\Amazon\Ec2\Elasticip('aws_key','aws_secret_key');
2 $ec2_eip->associate('instance_id', 'ipaddress');

340.1.4 Disassociate an Elastic IP from an instance

disassociate will disassociate an Elastic IP from an instance. If you terminate an Instance it will automatically disas-
sociate the Elastic IP address for you.
Returns a boolean TRUE or FALSE.
1 $ec2_eip = new ZendService\Amazon\Ec2\Elasticip('aws_key','aws_secret_key');
2 $ec2_eip->disassociate('ipaddress');

1540 Chapter 340. ZendService\Amazon\Ec2: Elastic IP Addresses

 CHAPTER 341

ZendService\Amazon\Ec2: Instances

341.1 Instance Types

Amazon EC2 instances are grouped into two families: standard and High-CPU. Standard instances have memory
to CPU ratios suitable for most general purpose applications; High-CPU instances have proportionally more CPU
resources than memory (RAM) and are well suited for compute-intensive applications. When selecting instance types,
you might want to use less powerful instance types for your web server instances and more powerful instance types for
your database instances. Additionally, you might want to run CPU instance types for CPU-intensive data processing
tasks.
One of the advantages of EC2 is that you pay by the instance hour, which makes it convenient and inexpensive to test
the performance of your application on different instance families and types. One good way to determine the most
appropriate instance family and instance type is to launch test instances and benchmark your application.

Note: Instance Types

The instance types are defined as constants in the code. Column eight in the table is the defined constant name

Table 341.1: Available Instance Types

Type CPU Mem- Storage Plat- I/O Name Constant Name
ory form
Small 1 EC2 Compute Unit (1 1.7 160 GB instance 32=bitMod- m1.small
ZendServiceAma-
virtual core with 1 EC2 GB storage (150 GB plus er- zonEc2Instance::SMALL
Compute Unit) 10 GB root partition) ate
Large 4 EC2 Compute Units (2 7.5 850 GB instance 64- High m1.large
ZendServiceAma-
virtual cores with 2 EC2 GB storage (2 x 420 GB bit zonEc2Instance::LARGE
Compute Units each) plus 10 GB root
partition)
Extra 8 EC2 Compute Units (4 15 1,690 GB instance 64- High m1.xlarge
ZendServiceAma-
Large virtual cores with 2 EC2 GB storage (4 x 420 GB bit zonEc2Instance::XLARGE
Compute Units each) plus 10 GB root
partition)
High- 5 EC2 Compute Units (2 1.7 350 GB instance 32- Mod- c1.medium
ZendServiceAma-
CPU virtual cores with 2.5 EC2 GB storage (340 GB plus bit er- zonEc2Instance::HCPU_MEDIUM
Medium Compute Units each) 10 GB root partition) ate
High- 20 EC2 Compute Units (8 7 1,690 GB instance 64- High c1.xlarge
ZendServiceAma-
CPU virtual cores with 2.5 EC2 GB storage (4 x 420 GB bit zonEc2Instance::HCPU_XLARGE
Extra Compute Units each) plus 10 GB root
Large partition)

1541
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

341.2 Running Amazon EC2 Instances

This section describes the operation methods for maintaining Amazon EC2 Instances.

341.2.1 Starting New Ec2 Instances

run will launch a specified number of EC2 Instances. run takes an array of parameters to start, below is a table
containing the valid values.

Table 341.2: Valid Run Options

Name Description Re-
quired
imageId ID of the AMI with which to launch instances. Yes
minCount Minimum number of instances to launch. Default: 1 No
maxCount Maximum number of instances to launch. Default: 1 No
keyName Name of the key pair with which to launch instances. If you do not No
provide a key, all instances will be inaccessible.
securityGroup Names of the security groups with which to associate the instances. No
userData The user data available to the launched instances. This should not be No
Base64 encoded.
instanceType Specifies the instance type. Default: m1.small No
placement Specifies the availability zone in which to launch the instance(s). By No
default, Amazon EC2 selects an availability zone for you.
kernelId The ID of the kernel with which to launch the instance. No
ramdiskId The ID of the RAM disk with which to launch the instance. No
blockDevice- Specifies the virtual name to map to the corresponding device name. For No
VirtualName example: instancestore0
blockDevice- Specifies the device to which you are mapping a virtual name. For No
Name example: sdb
monitor Turn on AWS CloudWatch Instance Monitoring No
run will return information about each instance that is starting up.
1 $ec2_instance = new ZendService\Amazon\Ec2\Instance('aws_key',
2 'aws_secret_key');
3 $return = $ec2_instance->run(array('imageId' => 'ami-509320',
4 'keyName' => 'myKey',
5 'securityGroup' => array('web',
6 'default')));

341.2.2 Rebooting an Ec2 Instances

reboot will reboot one or more instances.

This operation is asynchronous; it only queues a request to reboot the specified instance(s). The operation will succeed
if the instances are valid and belong to the user. Requests to reboot terminated instances are ignored.
reboot returns boolean TRUE or FALSE
1 $ec2_instance = new ZendService\Amazon\Ec2\Instance('aws_key',
2 'aws_secret_key');
3 $return = $ec2_instance->reboot('instanceId');

1542 Chapter 341. ZendService\Amazon\Ec2: Instances

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

341.2.3 Terminating an Ec2 Instances

terminate shuts down one or more instances. This operation is idempotent; if you terminate an instance more than
once, each call will succeed.
terminate returns boolean TRUE or FALSE
1 $ec2_instance = new ZendService\Amazon\Ec2\Instance('aws_key',
2 'aws_secret_key');
3 $return = $ec2_instance->terminate('instanceId');

Note: Terminated Instances

Terminated instances will remain visible after termination (approximately one hour).

341.3 Amazon Instance Utilities

In this section you will find out how to retrieve information, the console output and see if an instance contains a product
code.

341.3.1 Describing Instances

describe returns information about instances that you own.

If you specify one or more instance IDs, Amazon EC2 returns information for those instances. If you do not specify
instance IDs, Amazon EC2 returns information for all relevant instances. If you specify an invalid instance ID, a fault
is returned. If you specify an instance that you do not own, it will not be included in the returned results.
describe will return an array containing information on the instance.
1 $ec2_instance = new ZendService\Amazon\Ec2\Instance('aws_key',
2 'aws_secret_key');
3 $return = $ec2_instance->describe('instanceId');

Note: Terminated Instances

Recently terminated instances might appear in the returned results. This interval is usually less than one hour. If
you do not want terminated instances to be returned, pass in a second variable of boolean TRUE to describe and the
terminated instances will be ignored.

341.3.2 Describing Instances By Image Id

describeByImageId is functionally the same as describe but it will only return the instances that are using the provided
imageId.
describeByImageId will return an array containing information on the instances there were started by the passed in
imageId
1 $ec2_instance = new ZendService\Amazon\Ec2\Instance('aws_key',
2 'aws_secret_key');
3 $return = $ec2_instance->describeByImageId('imageId');

341.3. Amazon Instance Utilities 1543

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Note: Terminated Instances

Recently terminated instances might appear in the returned results. This interval is usually less than one hour. If
you do not want terminated instances to be returned, pass in a second variable of boolean TRUE to describe and the
terminated instances will be ignored.

341.3.3 Retrieving Console Output

consoleOutput retrieves console output for the specified instance.

Instance console output is buffered and posted shortly after instance boot, reboot, and termination. Amazon EC2
preserves the most recent 64 KB output which will be available for at least one hour after the most recent post.
consoleOutput returns an array containing the instanceId, timestamp from the last output and the output from the
console.
1 $ec2_instance = new ZendService\Amazon\Ec2\Instance('aws_key',
2 'aws_secret_key');
3 $return = $ec2_instance->consoleOutput('instanceId');

341.3.4 Confirm Product Code on an Instance

confirmProduct returns TRUE if the specified product code is attached to the specified instance. The operation returns
FALSE if the product code is not attached to the instance.
The confirmProduct operation can only be executed by the owner of the AMI. This feature is useful when an AMI
owner is providing support and wants to verify whether a users instance is eligible.
1 $ec2_instance = new ZendService\Amazon\Ec2\Instance('aws_key',
2 'aws_secret_key');
3 $return = $ec2_instance->confirmProduct('productCode', 'instanceId');

341.3.5 Turn on CloudWatch Monitoring on an Instance(s)

monitor returns the list of instances and their current state of the CloudWatch Monitoring. If the instance does not
currently have Monitoring enabled it will be turned on.
1 $ec2_instance = new ZendService\Amazon\Ec2\Instance('aws_key',
2 'aws_secret_key');
3 $return = $ec2_instance->monitor('instanceId');

341.3.6 Turn off CloudWatch Monitoring on an Instance(s)

monitor returns the list of instances and their current state of the CloudWatch Monitoring. If the instance currently has
Monitoring enabled it will be turned off.
1 $ec2_instance = new ZendService\Amazon\Ec2\Instance('aws_key',
2 'aws_secret_key');
3 $return = $ec2_instance->unmonitor('instanceId');

1544 Chapter 341. ZendService\Amazon\Ec2: Instances

 CHAPTER 342

ZendService\Amazon\Ec2: Regions and Availability Zones

Amazon EC2 provides the ability to place instances in different regions and Availability Zones. Regions are dispersed
in separate geographic areas or countries. Availability Zones are located within regions and are engineered to be
insulated from failures in other Availability Zones and provide inexpensive low latency network connectivity to other
Availability Zones in the same region. By launching instances in separate Availability Zones, you can protect your
applications from the failure of a single Availability Zone.

342.1 Amazon EC2 Regions

Amazon EC2 provides multiple regions so you can launch Amazon EC2 instances in locations that meet your require-
ments. For example, you might want to launch instances in Europe to be closer to your European customers or to meet
legal requirements.
Each Amazon EC2 region is designed to be completely isolated from the other Amazon EC2 regions. This achieves
the greatest possible failure independence and stability, and it makes the locality of each EC2 resource unambiguous.

342.1.1 Viewing the available regions

describe is used to find out which regions your account has access to.
describe will return an array containing information about which regions are available. Each array will contain region-
Name and regionUrl.
1 $ec2_region = new ZendService\Amazon\Ec2\Region('aws_key','aws_secret_key');
2 $regions = $ec2_region->describe();
3

4 foreach ($regions as $region) {

5 print $region['regionName'] . ' -- ' . $region['regionUrl'] . '<br />';
6 }

342.2 Amazon EC2 Availability Zones

When you launch an instance, you can optionally specify an Availability Zone. If you do not specify an Availability
Zone, Amazon EC2 selects one for you in the region that you are using. When launching your initial instances, we
recommend accepting the default Availability Zone, which allows Amazon EC2 to select the best Availability Zone
for you based on system health and available capacity. Even if you have other instances running, you might consider
not specifying an Availability Zone if your new instances do not need to be close to, or separated from, your existing
instances.

1545
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

342.2.1 Viewing the available zones

describe is used to find out which what the status is of each availability zone.
describe will return an array containing information about which zones are available. Each array will contain zone-
Name and zoneState.
1 $ec2_zones = new ZendService\Amazon\Ec2\Availabilityzones('aws_key',
2 'aws_secret_key');
3 $zones = $ec2_zones->describe();
4

5 foreach ($zones as $zone) {

6 print $zone['zoneName'] . ' -- ' . $zone['zoneState'] . '<br />';
7 }

1546 Chapter 342. ZendService\Amazon\Ec2: Regions and Availability Zones

 CHAPTER 343

ZendService\Amazon\Ec2: Reserved Instances

With Amazon EC2 Reserved Instances, you can make a low one-time payment for each instance to reserve and receive
a significant discount on the hourly usage charge for that instance.
Amazon EC2 Reserved Instances are based on instance type and location (region and Availability Zone) for a specified
period of time (e.g., 1 year or 3 years) and are only available for Linux or UNIX instances.

343.1 How Reserved Instances are Applied

Reserved Instances are applied to instances that meet the type/location criteria during the specified period. In this
example, a user is running the following instances:
m1.small instances in Availability Zone us-east-1a (4)
c1.medium instances in Availability Zone us-east-1b (4)
c1.xlarge instances in Availability Zone us-east-1b (2)
The user then purchases the following Reserved Instances.
m1.small instances in Availability Zone us-east-1a (2)
c1.medium instances in Availability Zone us-east-1a (2)
m1.xlarge instances in Availability Zone us-east-1a (2)
Amazon EC2 applies the two m1.small Reserved Instances to two of the instances in Availability Zone us-east-1a.
Amazon EC2 doesnt apply the two c1.medium Reserved Instances because the c1.medium instances are in a differ-
ent Availability Zone and does not apply the m1.xlarge Reserved Instances because there are no running m1.xlarge
instances.

343.2 Reserved Instances Usage

343.2.1 Describes Reserved Instances that you purchased

describeInstances() will return information about a reserved instance or instances that you purchased.
describeInstances() returns a multi-dimensional array that contains reservedInstancesId, instanceType, avail-
abilityZone, duration, fixedPrice, usagePrice, productDescription, instanceCount and state.

1547
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1 $ec2_instance = new ZendService\Amazon\Ec2\Instance\Reserved('aws_key',

2 'aws_secret_key');
3 $return = $ec2_instance->describeInstances('instanceId');

343.2.2 Describe current Reserved Instance Offerings available

describeOfferings() Describes Reserved Instance offerings that are available for purchase. With Amazon
EC2 Reserved Instances, you purchase the right to launch Amazon EC2 instances for a period of time (without getting
insufficient capacity errors) and pay a lower usage rate for the actual time used.
describeOfferings() returns a multi-dimensional array that contains reservedInstancesId, instanceType, avail-
abilityZone, duration, fixedPrice, usagePrice and productDescription.
1 $ec2_instance = new ZendService\Amazon\Ec2\Instance\Reserved('aws_key',
2 'aws_secret_key');
3 $return = $ec2_instance->describeOfferings();

343.2.3 Turn off CloudWatch Monitoring on an Instance(s)

purchaseOffering() Purchases a Reserved Instance for use with your account. With Amazon EC2 Reserved
Instances, you purchase the right to launch Amazon EC2 instances for a period of time (without getting insufficient
capacity errors) and pay a lower usage rate for the actual time used.
purchaseOffering() returns the reservedInstanceId.
1 $ec2_instance = new ZendService\Amazon\Ec2\Instance\Reserved('aws_key',
2 'aws_secret_key');
3 $return = $ec2_instance->purchaseOffering('offeringId', 'instanceCount');

1548 Chapter 343. ZendService\Amazon\Ec2: Reserved Instances

 CHAPTER 344

ZendService\Amazon\Ec2: Security Groups

A security group is a named collection of access rules. These access rules specify which ingress (i.e., incoming)
network traffic should be delivered to your instance. All other ingress traffic will be discarded.
You can modify rules for a group at any time. The new rules are automatically enforced for all running instances and
instances launched in the future.

Note: Maximum Security Groups

You can create up to 100 security groups.

344.1 Security Group Maintenance

344.1.1 Create a new Security Group

create a new security group. Every instance is launched in a security group. If no security group is specified during
launch, the instances are launched in the default security group. Instances within the same security group have unre-
stricted network access to each other. Instances will reject network access attempts from other instances in a different
security group.
create returns boolean TRUE or FALSE
1 $ec2_sg = new ZendService\Amazon\Ec2\Securitygroups('aws_key',
2 'aws_secret_key');
3 $return = $ec2_sg->create('mygroup', 'my group description');

344.1.2 Describe a Security Group

describe returns information about security groups that you own.

If you specify security group names, information about those security groups is returned. Otherwise, information for
all security groups is returned. If you specify a group that does not exist, a fault is returned.
describe will return an array containing information about security groups which includes the ownerId, groupName,
groupDescription and an array containing all the rules for that security group.
1 $ec2_sg = new ZendService\Amazon\Ec2\Securitygroups('aws_key',
2 'aws_secret_key');
3 $return = $ec2_sg->describe('mygroup');

1549
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

344.1.3 Delete a Security Group

delete will remove the security group. If you attempt to delete a security group that contains instances, a fault is
returned. If you attempt to delete a security group that is referenced by another security group, a fault is returned. For
example, if security group B has a rule that allows access from security group A, security group A cannot be deleted
until the allow rule is removed.
delete returns boolean TRUE or FALSE.
1 $ec2_sg = new ZendService\Amazon\Ec2\Securitygroups('aws_key',
2 'aws_secret_key');
3 $return = $ec2_sg->delete('mygroup');

344.2 Authorizing Access

344.2.1 Authorizing by IP

authorizeIp Adds permissions to a security group based on an IP address, protocol type and port range.
Permissions are specified by the IP protocol (TCP, UDP or ICMP), the source of the request (by IP range or an Amazon
EC2 user-group pair), the source and destination port ranges (for TCP and UDP), and the ICMP codes and types (for
ICMP). When authorizing ICMP, -1 can be used as a wildcard in the type and code fields.
Permission changes are propagated to instances within the security group as quickly as possible. However, depending
on the number of instances, a small delay might occur.
authorizeIp returns boolean TRUE or FALSE
1 $ec2_sg = new ZendService\Amazon\Ec2\Securitygroups('aws_key',
2 'aws_secret_key');
3 $return = $ec2_sg->authorizeIp('mygroup',
4 'protocol',
5 'fromPort',
6 'toPort',
7 'ipRange');

344.2.2 Authorize By Group

authorizeGroup Adds permissions to a security group.

Permission changes are propagated to instances within the security group as quickly as possible. However, depending
on the number of instances, a small delay might occur.
authorizeGroup returns boolean TRUE or FALSE.
1 $ec2_sg = new ZendService\Amazon\Ec2\Securitygroups('aws_key',
2 'aws_secret_key');
3 $return = $ec2_sg->authorizeGroup('mygroup', 'securityGroupName', 'ownerId');

1550 Chapter 344. ZendService\Amazon\Ec2: Security Groups

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

344.3 Revoking Access

344.3.1 Revoke by IP

revokeIp Revokes permissions to a security group based on an IP address, protocol type and port range. The permis-
sions used to revoke must be specified using the same values used to grant the permissions.
Permissions are specified by the IP protocol (TCP, UDP or ICMP), the source of the request (by IP range or an Amazon
EC2 user-group pair), the source and destination port ranges (for TCP and UDP), and the ICMP codes and types (for
ICMP). When authorizing ICMP, -1 can be used as a wildcard in the type and code fields.
Permission changes are propagated to instances within the security group as quickly as possible. However, depending
on the number of instances, a small delay might occur.
revokeIp returns boolean TRUE or FALSE
1 $ec2_sg = new ZendService\Amazon\Ec2\Securitygroups('aws_key',
2 'aws_secret_key');
3 $return = $ec2_sg->revokeIp('mygroup',
4 'protocol',
5 'fromPort',
6 'toPort',
7 'ipRange');

344.3.2 Revoke By Group

revokeGroup Adds permissions to a security group. The permissions to revoke must be specified using the same values
used to grant the permissions.
Permission changes are propagated to instances within the security group as quickly as possible. However, depending
on the number of instances, a small delay might occur.
revokeGroup returns boolean TRUE or FALSE.
1 $ec2_sg = new ZendService\Amazon\Ec2\Securitygroups('aws_key',
2 'aws_secret_key');
3 $return = $ec2_sg->revokeGroup('mygroup', 'securityGroupName', 'ownerId');

344.3. Revoking Access 1551

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1552 Chapter 344. ZendService\Amazon\Ec2: Security Groups

 CHAPTER 345

ZendService\Amazon\Ec2: Windows Instances

Using Amazon EC2 instances running Windows is similar to using instances running Linux and UNIX. The following
are the major differences between instances that use Linux or UNIX and Windows:
Remote DesktopTo access Windows instances, you use Remote Desktop instead of SSH.
Administrative PasswordTo access Windows instances the first time, you must obtain the administrative pass-
word using the ec2-get-password command.
Simplified BundlingTo bundle a Windows instance, you use a single command that shuts down the instance,
saves it as an AMI, and restarts it.
As part of this service, Amazon EC2 instances can now run Microsoft Windows Server 2003. Our base Windows
image provides you with most of the common functionality associated with Windows. However, if you require more
than two concurrent Windows users or need to leverage applications that require LDAP, Kerberos, RADIUS, or other
credential services, you must use Windows with Authentication Services. For example, Microsoft Exchange Server
and Microsoft SharePoint Server require Windows with Authentication Services.

Note: To get started using Windows instances, we recommend using the AWS Management Console. There are
differences in pricing between Windows and Windows with Authentication Services instances. For information on
pricing, go to the Amazon EC2 Product Page.

Amazon EC2 currently provides the following Windows AMIs:

Windows Authenticated (32-bit)
Windows Authenticated (64-bit)
Windows Anonymous (32-bit)
Windows Anonymous (64-bit)
The Windows public AMIs that Amazon provides are unmodified versions of Windows with the following two ex-
ceptions: we added drivers to improve the networking and disk I/O performance and we created the Amazon EC2
configuration service. The Amazon EC2 configuration service performs the following functions:
Randomly sets the Administrator password on initial launch, encrypts the password with the users SSH key,
and reports it to the console. This operation happens upon initial AMI launch. If you change the password, AMIs
that are created from this instance use the new password.
Configures the computer name to the internal DNS name. To determine the internal DNS name, see Using
Instance Addressing.
Sends the last three system and application errors from the event log to the console. This helps developers to
identify problems that caused an instance to crash or network connectivity to be lost.

1553
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

345.1 Windows Instances Usage

345.1.1 Bundles an Amazon EC2 instance running Windows

bundle() has three require parameters and one optional

instanceId The instance you want to bundle
s3Bucket Where you want the ami to live on S3
s3Prefix The prefix you want to assign to the AMI on S3
uploadExpiration The expiration of the upload policy. Amazon recommends 12 hours or longer. This is based
in number of minutes. Default is 1440 minutes (24 hours)
bundle() returns a multi-dimensional array that contains instanceId, bundleId, state, startTime, updateTime,
progress s3Bucket and s3Prefix.
1 $ec2_instance = new ZendService\Amazon\Ec2\Instance\Windows('aws_key',
2 'aws_secret_key');
3 $return = $ec2_instance->bundle('instanceId', 's3Bucket', 's3Prefix');

345.1.2 Describes current bundling tasks

describeBundle() Describes current bundling tasks

describeBundle() returns a multi-dimensional array that contains instanceId, bundleId, state, startTime, update-
Time, progress s3Bucket and s3Prefix.
1 $ec2_instance = new ZendService\Amazon\Ec2\Instance\Windows('aws_key',
2 'aws_secret_key');
3 $return = $ec2_instance->describeBundle('bundleId');

345.1.3 Cancels an Amazon EC2 bundling operation

cancelBundle() Cancels an Amazon EC2 bundling operation

cancelBundle() returns a multi-demential array that contains instanceId, bundleId, state, startTime, updateTime,
progress s3Bucket and s3Prefix.
1 $ec2_instance = new ZendService\Amazon\Ec2\Instance\Windows('aws_key',
2 'aws_secret_key');
3 $return = $ec2_instance->cancelBundle('bundleId');

1554 Chapter 345. ZendService\Amazon\Ec2: Windows Instances

 CHAPTER 346

ZendService\Apple\Apns

346.1 Introduction

ZendService\Apple\Apns provides a client for the Apple Push Notification Service.

ZendService\Apple\Apns\Client allows you to send data from servers to your iOS Applications.
In order to leverage APNS you must follow the Provisioning and Development steps outlined by Apple.
The service is composed of 3 distinct parts:
The Clients:
Feedback: ZendService\Apple\Apns\Client\Feedback
Message: ZendService\Apple\Apns\Client\Message
The Message: ZendService\Apple\Apns\Message\Alert
The Responses:
Feedback: ZendService\Apple\Apns\Response\Feedback
Message: ZendService\Apple\Apns\Response\Message
The Clients is the broker that sends the message to the APNS server and returns the response. The Message is where
you define all of the message specific data that you would like to send for the alert. The Response is the feedback
given back from the APNS server.

346.2 Quick Start

In order to send messages; you must have completed the provisioning and deployment steps mentioned above. Once
you have your certificates in place you will be able to prepare to send messages to your iOS application. Here we will
setup the client and prepare to send out messages.
1 use ZendService\Apple\Apns\Client\Message as Client;
2 use ZendService\Apple\Apns\Message;
3 use ZendService\Apple\Apns\Message\Alert;
4 use ZendService\Apple\Apns\Response\Message as Response;
5 use ZendService\Apple\Exception\RuntimeException;
6

7 $client = new Client();

8 $client->open(Client::SANDBOX_URI, '/path/to/push-certificate.pem', 'optionalPassPhrase');

1555
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

So now that we have the client setup and available, it is time to define out the message that we intend to send to our
iOS tokens that have registered for push notifications on our server. Note that many of the methods specified are not
required but are here to give an inclusive look into the message.
1 $message = new Message();
2 $message->setId('my_unique_id');
3 $message->setToken('DEVICE_TOKEN');
4 $message->setBadge(5);
5 $message->setSound('bingbong.aiff');
6

7 // simple alert:
8 $message->setAlert('Bob wants to play poker');
9 // complex alert:
10 $alert = new Alert();
11 $alert->setBody('Bob wants to play poker');
12 $alert->setActionLocKey('PLAY');
13 $alert->setLocKey('GAME_PLAY_REQUEST_FORMAT');
14 $alert->setLocArgs(array('Jenna', 'Frank'));
15 $alert->setLaunchImage('Play.png');
16 $message->setAlert($alert);

Now that we have the message taken care of, all we need to do next is send out the message. Each message comes
back with a set of data that allows us to understand what happened with our push notification as well as throwing
exceptions in the cases of server failures.
1 try {
2 $response = $client->send($message);
3 } catch (RuntimeException $e) {
4 echo $e->getMessage() . PHP_EOL;
5 exit(1);
6 }
7 $client->close();
8

9 if ($response->getCode() != Response::RESULT_OK) {
10 switch ($response->getCode()) {
11 case Response::RESULT_PROCESSING_ERROR:
12 // you may want to retry
13 break;
14 case Response::RESULT_MISSING_TOKEN:
15 // you were missing a token
16 break;
17 case Response::RESULT_MISSING_TOPIC:
18 // you are missing a message id
19 break;
20 case Response::RESULT_MISSING_PAYLOAD:
21 // you need to send a payload
22 break;
23 case Response::RESULT_INVALID_TOKEN_SIZE:
24 // the token provided was not of the proper size
25 break;
26 case Response::RESULT_INVALID_TOPIC_SIZE:
27 // the topic was too long
28 break;
29 case Response::RESULT_INVALID_PAYLOAD_SIZE:
30 // the payload was too large
31 break;
32 case Response::RESULT_INVALID_TOKEN:
33 // the token was invalid; remove it from your system
34 break;

1556 Chapter 346. ZendService\Apple\Apns

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

35 case Response::RESULT_UNKNOWN_ERROR:
36 // apple didn't tell us what happened
37 break;
38 }
39 }

346.3 Feedback Service

APNS has a feedback service that you must listen to. Apple states that they monitor providers to ensure that they are
listening to this service.
The feedback service simply returns an array of Feedback responses. All tokens provided in the feedback should not
be sent to again; unless the device re-registers for push notification. You can use the time in the Feedback response to
ensure that the device has not re-registered for push notifications since the last send.
1 use ZendService\Apple\Apns\Client\Feedback as Client;
2 use ZendService\Apple\Apns\Response\Feedback as Response;
3 use ZendService\Apple\Exception\RuntimeException;
4

5 $client = new Client();

6 $client->open(Client::SANDBOX_URI, '/path/to/push-certificate.pem', 'optionalPassPhrase');
7 $responses = $client->feedback();
8 $client->close();
9

10 foreach ($responses as $response) {

11 echo $response->getTime() . ': ' . $response->getToken();
12 }

346.3. Feedback Service 1557

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1558 Chapter 346. ZendService\Apple\Apns

 CHAPTER 347

ZendService\Audioscrobbler

347.1 Introduction

ZendService\Audioscrobbler\Audioscrobbler is a simple API for using the Audioscrobbler REST

Web Service. The Audioscrobbler Web Service provides access to its database of Users, Artists, Albums, Tracks,
Tags, Groups, and Forums. The methods of the ZendService\Audioscrobbler\Audioscrobbler class
begin with one of these terms. The syntax and namespaces of the Audioscrobbler Web Service are mirrored in
ZendService\Audioscrobbler\Audioscrobbler. For more information about the Audioscrobbler REST
Web Service, please visit the Audioscrobbler Web Service site.

347.2 Users

In order to retrieve information for a specific user, the setUser() method is first used to select the user for which
data are to be retrieved. ZendService\Audioscrobbler\Audioscrobbler provides several methods for
retrieving data specific to a single user:
userGetProfileInformation(): Returns a SimpleXML object containing the current users profile
information.
userGetTopArtists(): Returns a SimpleXML object containing a list of the current users most listened
to artists.
userGetTopAlbums(): Returns a SimpleXML object containing a list of the current users most listened to
albums.
userGetTopTracks(): Returns a SimpleXML object containing a list of the current users most listened to
tracks.
userGetTopTags(): Returns a SimpleXML object containing a list of tags most applied by the current user.
userGetTopTagsForArtist(): Requires that an artist be set via setArtist(). Returns a SimpleXML
object containing the tags most applied to the current artist by the current user.
userGetTopTagsForAlbum(): Requires that an album be set via setAlbum(). Returns a SimpleXML
object containing the tags most applied to the current album by the current user.
userGetTopTagsForTrack(): Requires that a track be set via setTrack(). Returns a SimpleXML
object containing the tags most applied to the current track by the current user.
userGetFriends(): Returns a SimpleXML object containing the user names of the current users friends.
userGetNeighbours(): Returns a SimpleXML object containing the user names of people with similar
listening habits to the current user.

1559
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

userGetRecentTracks(): Returns a SimpleXML object containing the 10 tracks most recently played by
the current user.
userGetRecentBannedTracks(): Returns a SimpleXML object containing a list of the 10 tracks most
recently banned by the current user.
userGetRecentLovedTracks(): Returns a SimpleXML object containing a list of the 10 tracks most
recently loved by the current user.
userGetRecentJournals(): Returns a SimpleXML object containing a list of the current users most
recent journal entries.
userGetWeeklyChartList(): Returns a SimpleXML object containing a list of weeks for which there
exist Weekly Charts for the current user.
userGetRecentWeeklyArtistChart(): Returns a SimpleXML object containing the most recent
Weekly Artist Chart for the current user.
userGetRecentWeeklyAlbumChart(): Returns a SimpleXML object containing the most recent
Weekly Album Chart for the current user.
userGetRecentWeeklyTrackChart(): Returns a SimpleXML object containing the most recent
Weekly Track Chart for the current user.
userGetPreviousWeeklyArtistChart($fromDate, $toDate): Returns a SimpleXML object
containing the Weekly Artist Chart from $fromDate to $toDate for the current user.
userGetPreviousWeeklyAlbumChart($fromDate, $toDate): Returns a SimpleXML object
containing the Weekly Album Chart from $fromDate to $toDate for the current user.
userGetPreviousWeeklyTrackChart($fromDate, $toDate): Returns a SimpleXML object
containing the Weekly Track Chart from $fromDate to $toDate for the current user.

Retrieving User Profile Information

In this example, we use the setUser() and userGetProfileInformation() methods to retrieve a specific
users profile information:
1 $as = new ZendService\Audioscrobbler\Audioscrobbler();
2 // Set the user whose profile information we want to retrieve
3 $as->setUser('BigDaddy71');
4 // Retrieve BigDaddy71's profile information
5 $profileInfo = $as->userGetProfileInformation();
6 // Display some of it
7 print "Information for $profileInfo->realname "
8 . "can be found at $profileInfo->url";

Retrieving a Users Weekly Artist Chart

1 $as = new ZendService\Audioscrobbler\Audioscrobbler();

2 // Set the user whose profile weekly artist chart we want to retrieve
3 $as->setUser('lo_fye');
4 // Retrieves a list of previous weeks for which there are chart data
5 $weeks = $as->userGetWeeklyChartList();
6 if (count($weeks) < 1) {
7 echo 'No data available';
8 }
9 sort($weeks); // Order the list of weeks

1560 Chapter 347. ZendService\Audioscrobbler

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

10

11 $as->setFromDate($weeks[0]); // Set the starting date

12 $as->setToDate($weeks[0]); // Set the ending date
13

14 $previousWeeklyArtists = $as->userGetPreviousWeeklyArtistChart();
15

16 echo 'Artist Chart For Week Of '

17 . date('Y-m-d h:i:s', $as->from_date)
18 . '<br />';
19

20 foreach ($previousWeeklyArtists as $artist) {

21 // Display the artists' names with links to their profiles
22 print '<a href="' . $artist->url . '">' . $artist->name . '</a><br />';
23 }

347.3 Artists

ZendService\Audioscrobbler\Audioscrobbler provides several methods for retrieving data about a spe-

cific artist, specified via the setArtist() method:
artistGetRelatedArtists(): Returns a SimpleXML object containing a list of Artists similar to the
current Artist.
artistGetTopFans(): Returns a SimpleXML object containing a list of Users who listen most to the
current Artist.
artistGetTopTracks(): Returns a SimpleXML object containing a list of the current Artists top-rated
Tracks.
artistGetTopAlbums(): Returns a SimpleXML object containing a list of the current Artists top-rated
Albums.
artistGetTopTags(): Returns a SimpleXML object containing a list of the Tags most frequently applied
to current Artist.

Retrieving Related Artists

1 $as = new ZendService\Audioscrobbler\Audioscrobbler();

2 // Set the artist for whom you would like to retrieve related artists
3 $as->setArtist('LCD Soundsystem');
4 // Retrieve the related artists
5 $relatedArtists = $as->artistGetRelatedArtists();
6 foreach ($relatedArtists as $artist) {
7 // Display the related artists
8 print '<a href="' . $artist->url . '">' . $artist->name . '</a><br />';
9 }

347.4 Tracks

ZendService\Audioscrobbler\Audioscrobbler provides two methods for retrieving data specific to a

single track, specified via the setTrack() method:
trackGetTopFans(): Returns a SimpleXML object containing a list of Users who listen most to the current
Track.

347.3. Artists 1561

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

trackGetTopTags(): Returns a SimpleXML object containing a list of the Tags most frequently applied to
the current Track.

347.5 Tags

ZendService\Audioscrobbler\Audioscrobbler provides several methods for retrieving data specific to

a single tag, specified via the setTag() method:
tagGetOverallTopTags(): Returns a SimpleXML object containing a list of Tags most frequently used
on Audioscrobbler.
tagGetTopArtists(): Returns a SimpleXML object containing a list of Artists to whom the current Tag
was most frequently applied.
tagGetTopAlbums(): Returns a SimpleXML object containing a list of Albums to which the current Tag
was most frequently applied.
tagGetTopTracks(): Returns a SimpleXML object containing a list of Tracks to which the current Tag
was most frequently applied.

347.6 Groups

ZendService\Audioscrobbler\Audioscrobbler provides several methods for retrieving data specific to

a single group, specified via the setGroup() method:
groupGetRecentJournals(): Returns a SimpleXML object containing a list of recent journal posts by
Users in the current Group.
groupGetWeeklyChart(): Returns a SimpleXML object containing a list of weeks for which there exist
Weekly Charts for the current Group.
groupGetRecentWeeklyArtistChart(): Returns a SimpleXML object containing the most recent
Weekly Artist Chart for the current Group.
groupGetRecentWeeklyAlbumChart(): Returns a SimpleXML object containing the most recent
Weekly Album Chart for the current Group.
groupGetRecentWeeklyTrackChart(): Returns a SimpleXML object containing the most recent
Weekly Track Chart for the current Group.
groupGetPreviousWeeklyArtistChart($fromDate, $toDate): Requires setFromDate()
and setToDate(). Returns a SimpleXML object containing the Weekly Artist Chart from the current from-
Date to the current toDate for the current Group.
groupGetPreviousWeeklyAlbumChart($fromDate, $toDate): Requires setFromDate()
and setToDate(). Returns a SimpleXML object containing the Weekly Album Chart from the current from-
Date to the current toDate for the current Group.
groupGetPreviousWeeklyTrackChart($fromDate, $toDate): Returns a SimpleXML object
containing the Weekly Track Chart from the current fromDate to the current toDate for the current Group.

347.7 Forums

ZendService\Audioscrobbler\Audioscrobbler provides a method for retrieving data specific to a single

forum, specified via the setForum() method:

1562 Chapter 347. ZendService\Audioscrobbler

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

forumGetRecentPosts(): Returns a SimpleXML object containing a list of recent posts in the current
forum.

347.7. Forums 1563

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1564 Chapter 347. ZendService\Audioscrobbler

 CHAPTER 348

ZendService\Delicious

348.1 Introduction

ZendService\Delicious\Delicious is simple API for using del.icio.us XML and JSON web services. This
component gives you read-write access to posts at del.icio.us if you provide credentials. It also allows read-only access
to public data of all users.

Get all posts

1 $delicious = new ZendService\Delicious\Delicious('username', 'password');

2 $posts = $delicious->getAllPosts();
3

4 foreach ($posts as $post) {

5 echo "--\n";
6 echo "Title: {$post->getTitle()}\n";
7 echo "Url: {$post->getUrl()}\n";
8 }

348.2 Retrieving posts

ZendService\Delicious\Delicious provides three methods for retrieving posts: getPosts(),

getRecentPosts() and getAllPosts(). All of these methods return an instance of
ZendService\Delicious\PostList, which holds all retrieved posts.
1 /**
2 * Get posts matching the arguments. If no date or url is given,
3 * most recent date will be used.
4 *
5 * @param string $tag Optional filtering by tag
6 * @param DateTime $dt Optional filtering by date
7 * @param string $url Optional filtering by url
8 * @return ZendService\Delicious\PostList
9 */
10 public function getPosts($tag = null, $dt = null, $url = null);
11

12 /**
13 * Get recent posts
14 *

1565
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

15 * @param string $tag Optional filtering by tag

16 * @param string $count Maximal number of posts to be returned
17 * (default 15)
18 * @return ZendService\Delicious\PostList
19 */
20 public function getRecentPosts($tag = null, $count = 15);
21

22 /**
23 * Get all posts
24 *
25 * @param string $tag Optional filtering by tag
26 * @return ZendService\Delicious\PostList
27 */
28 public function getAllPosts($tag = null);

348.3 ZendService\Delicious\PostList

Instances of this class are returned by the getPosts(), getAllPosts(), getRecentPosts(), and
getUserPosts() methods of ZendService\Delicious\Delicious.
For easier data access this class implements the Countable, Iterator, and ArrayAccess interfaces.

Accessing post lists

1 $delicious = new ZendService\Delicious\Delicious('username', 'password');

2 $posts = $delicious->getAllPosts();
3

4 // count posts
5 echo count($posts);
6

7 // iterate over posts

8 foreach ($posts as $post) {
9 echo "--\n";
10 echo "Title: {$post->getTitle()}\n";
11 echo "Url: {$post->getUrl()}\n";
12 }
13

14 // get post using array access

15 echo $posts[0]->getTitle();

Note: The ArrayAccess::offsetSet() and ArrayAccess::offsetUnset() methods throw excep-

tions in this implementation. Thus, code like unset($posts[0]); and $posts[0] = A; will throw exceptions because
these properties are read-only.

Post list objects have two built-in filtering capabilities. Post lists may be filtered by tags and by URL.

Filtering a Post List with Specific Tags

Posts may be filtered by specific tags using withTags(). As a convenience, withTag() is also provided for when
only a single tag needs to be specified.

1566 Chapter 348. ZendService\Delicious

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1 $delicious = new ZendService\Delicious\Delicious('username', 'password');

2 $posts = $delicious->getAllPosts();
3

4 // Print posts having "php" and "zend" tags

5 foreach ($posts->withTags(array('php', 'zend')) as $post) {
6 echo "Title: {$post->getTitle()}\n";
7 echo "Url: {$post->getUrl()}\n";
8 }

Filtering a Post List by URL

Posts may be filtered by URL matching a specified regular expression using the withUrl() method:
1 $delicious = new ZendService\Delicious\Delicious('username', 'password');
2 $posts = $delicious->getAllPosts();
3

4 // Print posts having "help" in the URL

5 foreach ($posts->withUrl('/help/') as $post) {
6 echo "Title: {$post->getTitle()}\n";
7 echo "Url: {$post->getUrl()}\n";
8 }

348.4 Editing posts

Post editing

1 $delicious = new ZendService\Delicious\Delicious('username', 'password');

2 $posts = $delicious->getPosts();
3

4 // set title
5 $posts[0]->setTitle('New title');
6 // save changes
7 $posts[0]->save();

Method call chaining

Every setter method returns the post object so that you can chain method calls using a fluent interface.
1 $delicious = new ZendService\Delicious\Delicious('username', 'password');
2 $posts = $delicious->getPosts();
3

4 $posts[0]->setTitle('New title')
5 ->setNotes('New notes')
6 ->save();

348.5 Deleting posts

There are two ways to delete a post, by specifying the post URL or by calling the delete() method upon a post
object.

348.4. Editing posts 1567

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Deleting posts

1 $delicious = new ZendService\Delicious\Delicious('username', 'password');

2

3 // by specifying URL
4 $delicious->deletePost('http://framework.zend.com');
5

6 // or by calling the method upon a post object

7 $posts = $delicious->getPosts();
8 $posts[0]->delete();
9

10 // another way of using deletePost()

11 $delicious->deletePost($posts[0]->getUrl());

348.6 Adding new posts

To add a post you first need to call the createNewPost() method, which returns a
ZendService\Delicious\Post object. When you edit the post, you need to save it to the del.icio.us
database by calling the save() method.

Adding a post

1 $delicious = new ZendService\Delicious\Delicious('username', 'password');

2

3 // create a new post and save it (with method call chaining)

4 $delicious->createNewPost('Zend Framework', 'http://framework.zend.com')
5 ->setNotes('Zend Framework Homepage')
6 ->save();
7

8 // create a new post and save it (without method call chaining)

9 $newPost = $delicious->createNewPost('Zend Framework',
10 'http://framework.zend.com');
11 $newPost->setNotes('Zend Framework Homepage');
12 $newPost->save();

348.7 Tags

Tags

1 $delicious = new ZendService\Delicious\Delicious('username', 'password');

2

3 // get all tags

4 print_r($delicious->getTags());
5

6 // rename tag ZF to zendFramework

7 $delicious->renameTag('ZF', 'zendFramework');

1568 Chapter 348. ZendService\Delicious

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

348.8 Bundles

Bundles

1 $delicious = new ZendService\Delicious\Delicious('username', 'password');

2

3 // get all bundles

4 print_r($delicious->getBundles());
5

6 // delete bundle someBundle

7 $delicious->deleteBundle('someBundle');
8

9 // add bundle
10 $delicious->addBundle('newBundle', array('tag1', 'tag2'));

348.9 Public data

The del.icio.us web API allows access to the public data of all users.

Table 348.1: Methods for retrieving public data

Name Description Return type
getUserFans() Retrieves fans of a user Array
getUserNetwork() Retrieves network of a user Array
getUserPosts() Retrieves posts of a user ZendServiceDeliciousPostList
getUserTags() Retrieves tags of a user Array
Note: When using only these methods, a username and password combination is not required when constructing a
new ZendService\Delicious\Delicious object.

Retrieving public data

1 // username and password are not required

2 $delicious = new ZendService\Delicious\Delicious();
3

4 // get fans of user someUser

5 print_r($delicious->getUserFans('someUser'));
6

7 // get network of user someUser

8 print_r($delicious->getUserNetwork('someUser'));
9

10 // get tags of user someUser

11 print_r($delicious->getUserTags('someUser'));

348.9.1 Public posts

When retrieving public posts with the getUserPosts() method, a ZendService\Delicious\PostList

object is returned, and it contains ZendService\Delicious\SimplePost objects, which contain basic infor-
mation about the posts, including URL, title, notes, and tags.

348.8. Bundles 1569

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Table 348.2: Methods of the ZendServiceDeliciousSim-

plePost class
Name Description Return type
getNotes() Returns notes of a post String
getTags() Returns tags of a post Array
getTitle() Returns title of a post String
getUrl() Returns URL of a post String

348.10 HTTP client

ZendService\Delicious\Delicious uses Zend\Rest\Client for making HTTP requests to the

del.icio.us web service. To change which HTTP client ZendService\Delicious\Delicious uses, you need
to change the HTTP client of Zend\Rest\Client.

Changing the HTTP client of ZendRestClient

1 $myHttpClient = new My_Http_Client();

2 Zend\Rest\Client::setHttpClient($myHttpClient);

When you are making more than one request with ZendService\Delicious\Delicious to speed your re-
quests, its better to configure your HTTP client to keep connections alive.

Configuring your HTTP client to keep connections alive

1 Zend\Rest\Client::getHttpClient()->setConfig(array(
2 'keepalive' => true
3 ));

Note: When a ZendService\Delicious\Delicious object is constructed, the SSL transport of

Zend\Rest\Client is set to ssl rather than the default of ssl2. This is because del.icio.us has some prob-
lems with ssl2, such as requests taking a long time to complete (around 2 seconds).

1570 Chapter 348. ZendService\Delicious

 CHAPTER 349

ZendService\DeveloperGarden

349.1 Introduction

Developer Garden is the name of Deutsche Telekoms developer community. Developer Garden offers you access to
core services of Deutsche Telekom, such as voice connections (Voice Call) or sending text messages (Send SMS) via
open interfaces (Open APIs). You can access the Developer Garden services directly via SOAP or REST.
The family of ZendService\DeveloperGarden components provides a clean and simple interface to the De-
veloper Garden APIs and additionally offers functionality to improve handling and performance.
BaseUserService: Class to manage API quota and user accounting details.
IPLocation: Locale the given IP and returns geo coordinates. Works only with IPs allocated in the network of
the Deutsche Telekom.
LocalSearch: Allows you to search with options nearby or around a given geo coordinate or city.
SendSMS: Send a SMS or Flash SMS to a given number.
SMSValidation: You can validate a number to use it with SendSMS for also supply a back channel.
VoiceCall: Initiates a call between two participants.
ConferenceCall: You can configure a whole conference room with participants for an adhoc conference or you
can also schedule your conference.
The backend SOAP API is documented here.

349.1.1 Sign Up for an Account

Before you can start using the DeveloperGarden API, you first have to sign up for an account.

349.1.2 The Environment

With the DeveloperGarden API you have the possibility to choose between 3 different development environments.
production: In Production environment there are no usage limitations. You have to pay for calls, sms and other
services with costs.
sandbox: In the Sandbox mode you can use the same features (with limitations) as in the production without to
paying for them. This environment is suitable for testing your prototype.
mock: The Mock environment allows you to build your application and have results but you do not initiate any
action on the API side. This environment is intended for testing during development.

1571
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

For every environment and service, there are some special features (options) available for testing. Please look here for
details.

349.1.3 Your configuration

You can pass to all classes an array of configuration values. Possible values are:
username: Your DeveloperGarden API username.
password: Your DeveloperGarden API password.
environment: The environment that you selected.

Configuration Example

1 require_once 'ZendService/DeveloperGarden/SendSms.php';
2 $config = array(
3 'username' => 'yourUsername',
4 'password' => 'yourPassword',
5 'environment' => ZendService\DeveloperGarden\SendSms::ENV_PRODUCTION,
6 );
7 $service = new ZendService\DeveloperGarden\SendSms($config);

349.2 BaseUserService

The class can be used to set and get quota values for the services and to fetch account details.
The getAccountBalance() method fetches an array of account ids with the current balance status (credits).

Get account balance example

1 $service = new ZendService\DeveloperGarden\BaseUserService($config);

2 print_r($service->getAccountBalance());

349.2.1 Get quota information

You can fetch quota informations for a specific service module with the provided methods.

Get quota information example

1 $service = new ZendService\DeveloperGarden\BaseUserService($config);

2 $result = $service->getSmsQuotaInformation(
3 ZendService\DeveloperGarden\BaseUserService::ENV_PRODUCTION
4 );
5 echo 'Sms Quota:<br />';
6 echo 'Max Quota: ', $result->getMaxQuota(), '<br />';
7 echo 'Max User Quota: ', $result->getMaxUserQuota(), '<br />';
8 echo 'Quota Level: ', $result->getQuotaLevel(), '<br />';

1572 Chapter 349. ZendService\DeveloperGarden

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

You get a result object that contains all the information you need, optional you can pass to the
QuotaInformation method the environment constant to fetch the quota for the specific environment.
Here a list of all getQuotaInformation methods:
getConferenceCallQuotaInformation()
getIPLocationQuotaInformation()
getLocalSearchQuotaInformation()
getSmsQuotaInformation()
getVoiceCallQuotaInformation()

349.2.2 Change quota information

To change the current quota use one of the changeQuotaPool methods. First parameter is the new pool value and
the second one is the environment.

Change quota information example

1 $service = new ZendService\DeveloperGarden\BaseUserService($config);

2 $result = $service->changeSmsQuotaPool(
3 1000,
4 ZendService\DeveloperGarden\BaseUserService::ENV_PRODUCTION
5 );
6 if (!$result->hasError()) {
7 echo 'updated Quota Pool';
8 }

Here a list of all changeQuotaPool methods:

changeConferenceCallQuotaPool()
changeIPLocationQuotaPool()
changeLocalSearchQuotaPool()
changeSmsQuotaPool()
changeVoiceCallQuotaPool()

349.3 IP Location

This service allows you to retrieve location information for a given IP address.
There are some limitations:
The IP address must be in the T-Home network
Just the next big city will be resolved
IPv6 is not supported yet

349.3. IP Location 1573

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Locate a given IP

1 $service = new ZendService\DeveloperGarden\IpLocation($config);

2 $service->setEnvironment(
3 ZendService\DeveloperGarden\IpLocation::ENV_MOCK
4 );
5 $ip = new ZendService\DeveloperGarden\IpLocation\IpAddress('127.0.0.1');
6 print_r($service->locateIp($ip));

349.4 Local Search

The Local Search service provides the location based search machine suchen.de via web service interface. For more
details, refer to the documentation.

Locate a Restaurant

1 $service = new ZendService\DeveloperGarden\LocalSearch($config);

2 $search = new ZendService\DeveloperGarden\LocalSearch\SearchParameters();
3 /**
4 * @see http://www.developergarden.com/static/docu/en/ch04s02s06s04.html
5 */
6 $search->setWhat('pizza')
7 ->setWhere('jena');
8 print_r($service->localSearch($search));

349.5 Send SMS

The Send SMS service is used to send normal and Flash SMS to any number.
The following restrictions apply to the use of the SMS service:
An SMS or Flash SMS in the production environment must not be longer than 765 characters and must not be
sent to more than 10 recipients.
An SMS or Flash SMS in the sandbox environment is shortened and enhanced by a note from the Developer-
Garden. The maximum length of the message is 160 characters.
In the sandbox environment, a maximum of 10 SMS can be sent per day.
The following characters are counted twice: | ^ C { } [ ] ~ \ LF (line break)
If a SMS or Flash SMS is longer than 160 characters, one message is charged for each 153 characters (quota
and credit).
Delivery cannot be guaranteed for SMS or Flash SMS to landline numbers.
The sender can be a maximum of 11 characters. Permitted characters are letters and numbers.
The specification of a phone number as the sender is only permitted if the phone number has been validated.
(See: SMS Validation)

1574 Chapter 349. ZendService\DeveloperGarden

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Sending an SMS

1 $service = new ZendService\DeveloperGarden\SendSms($config);

2 $sms = $service->createSms(
3 '+49-172-123456; +49-177-789012',
4 'your test message',
5 'yourname'
6 );
7 print_r($service->send($sms));

349.6 SMS Validation

The SMS Validation service allows the validation of physical phone number to be used as the sender of an SMS.
First, call setValidationKeyword() to receive an SMS with a keyword.
After you get your keyword, you have to use the validate() to validate your number with the keyword against the
service.
With the method getValidatedNumbers(), you will get a list of all already validated numbers and the status of
each.

Request validation keyword

1 $service = new ZendService\DeveloperGarden\SmsValidation($config);

2 print_r($service->sendValidationKeyword('+49-172-123456'));

Validate a number with a keyword

1 $service = new ZendService\DeveloperGarden\SmsValidation($config);

2 print_r($service->validate('TheKeyWord', '+49-172-123456'));

To invalidate a validated number, call the method inValidate().

349.7 Voice Call

The Voice Call service can be used to set up a voice connection between two telephone connections. For specific
details please read the API Documentation.
Normally the Service works as followed:
Call the first participant.
If the connection is successful, call the second participant.
If second participant connects successfully, both participants are connected.
The call is open until one of the participants hangs up or the expire mechanism intercepts.

349.6. SMS Validation 1575

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Call two numbers

1 $service = new ZendService\DeveloperGarden\VoiceCall($config);

2 $aNumber = '+49-30-000001';
3 $bNumber = '+49-30-000002';
4 $expiration = 30; // seconds
5 $maxDuration = 300; // 5 mins
6 $newCall = $service->newCall($aNumber, $bNumber, $expiration, $maxDuration);
7 echo $newCall->getSessionId();

If the call is initiated, you can ask the result object for the session ID and use this session ID for an additional call
to the callStatus or tearDownCall() methods. The second parameter on the callStatus() method call
extends the expiration for this call.

Call two numbers, ask for status, and cancel

1 $service = new ZendService\DeveloperGarden\VoiceCall($config);

2 $aNumber = '+49-30-000001';
3 $bNumber = '+49-30-000002';
4 $expiration = 30; // seconds
5 $maxDuration = 300; // 5 mins
6

7 $newCall = $service->newCall($aNumber, $bNumber, $expiration, $maxDuration);

8

9 $sessionId = $newCall->getSessionId();
10

11 $service->callStatus($sessionId, true); // extend the call

12

13 sleep(10); // sleep 10s and then tearDown

14

15 $service->tearDownCall($sessionId);

349.8 ConferenceCall

Conference Call allows you to setup and start a phone conference.

The following features are available:
Conferences with an immediate start
Conferences with a defined start date
Recurring conference series
Adding, removing, and muting of participants from a conference
Templates for conferences
Here is a list of currently implemented API methods:
createConference() creates a new conference
updateConference() updates an existing conference
commitConference() saves the conference, and, if no date is configured, immediately starts the conference
removeConference() removes a conference

1576 Chapter 349. ZendService\DeveloperGarden

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

getConferenceList() returns a list of all configured conferences

getConferenceStatus() displays information for an existing conference
getParticipantStatus() displays status information about a conference participant
newParticipant() creates a new participant
addParticipant() adds a participant to a conference
updateParticipant() updates a participant, usually to mute or redial the participant
removeParticipant() removes a participant from a conference
getRunningConference() requests the running instance of a planned conference
createConferenceTemplate() creates a new conference template
getConferenceTemplate() requests an existing conference template
updateConferenceTemplate() updates existing conference template details
removeConferenceTemplate() removes a conference template
getConferenceTemplateList() requests all conference templates of an owner
addConferenceTemplateParticipant() adds a conference participant to conference template
getConferenceTemplateParticipant() displays details of a participant of a conference template
updateConferenceTemplateParticipant() updates participant details within a conference template
removeConferenceTemplateParticipant() removes a participant from a conference template

Ad-Hoc conference

1 $client = new ZendService\DeveloperGarden\ConferenceCall($config);

2

3 $conferenceDetails =
4 new ZendService\DeveloperGarden\ConferenceCall\ConferenceDetail(
5 'Zend-Conference', // name for the conference
6 'this is my private zend conference', // description
7 60 // duration in seconds
8 );
9

10 $conference = $client->createConference('MyName', $conferenceDetails);

11

12 $part1 = new ZendService\DeveloperGarden\ConferenceCall\ParticipantDetail(

13 'Jon',
14 'Doe',
15 '+49-123-4321',
16 '[email protected]',
17 true
18 );
19

20 $client->newParticipant($conference->getConferenceId(), $part1);
21 // add a second, third ... participant
22

23 $client->commitConference($conference->getConferenceId());

349.8. ConferenceCall 1577

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

349.9 Performance and Caching

You can setup various caching options to improve the performance for resolving WSDL and authentication tokens.
First of all, you can setup the internal SoapClient (PHP) caching values.

WSDL cache options

1 ZendService\DeveloperGarden\SecurityTokenServer\Cache::setWsdlCache(
2 [PHP CONSTANT]
3 );

The [PHP CONSTANT] can be one of the following values:

WSDL_CACHE_DISC: enabled disc caching
WSDL_CACHE_MEMORY: enabled memory caching
WSDL_CACHE_BOTH: enabled disc and memory caching
WSDL_CACHE_NONE: disabled both caching
If you also want to cache the result for calls to the SecurityTokenServer you can setup a Zend_Cache instance and
pass it to the setCache().

SecurityTokenServer cache option

1 $cache = Zend_Cache::factory('Core', ...);

2 ZendService\DeveloperGarden\SecurityTokenServer\Cache::setCache($cache);

1578 Chapter 349. ZendService\DeveloperGarden

 CHAPTER 350

ZendService\Flickr

350.1 Introduction

ZendService\Flickr\Flickr is a simple API for using the Flickr REST Web Service. In order to use the
Flickr web services, you must have an API key. To obtain a key and for more information about the Flickr REST Web
Service, please visit the Flickr API Documentation.
In the following example, we use the tagSearch() method to search for photos having php in the tags.

Simple Flickr Photo Search

1 $flickr = new ZendService\Flickr\Flickr('MY_API_KEY');

2

3 $results = $flickr->tagSearch("php");
4

5 foreach ($results as $result) {

6 echo $result->title . '<br />';
7 }

Note: Optional parameter

tagSearch() accepts an optional second parameter as an array of options.

350.2 Finding Flickr Users Photos and Information

ZendService\Flickr\Flickr provides several ways to get information about Flickr users:

userSearch(): Accepts a string query of space-delimited tags and an optional second parameter as an array
of search options, and returns a set of photos as a ZendService\Flickr\ResultSet object.
getIdByUsername(): Returns a string user ID associated with the given username string.
getIdByEmail(): Returns a string user ID associated with the given email address string.

Finding a Flickr Users Public Photos by E-Mail Address

In this example, we have a Flickr users e-mail address, and we search for the users public photos by using the
userSearch() method:

1579
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1 $flickr = new ZendService\Flickr\Flickr('MY_API_KEY');

2

3 $results = $flickr->userSearch($userEmail);
4

5 foreach ($results as $result) {

6 echo $result->title . '<br />';
7 }

350.3 Finding photos From a Group Pool

ZendService\Flickr\Flickr allows to retrieve a groups pool photos based on the group ID. Use the
groupPoolGetPhotos() method:

Retrieving a Groups Pool Photos by Group ID

1 $flickr = new ZendService\Flickr\Flickr('MY_API_KEY');

2

3 $results = $flickr->groupPoolGetPhotos($groupId);
4

5 foreach ($results as $result) {

6 echo $result->title . '<br />';
7 }

Note: Optional parameter

groupPoolGetPhotos() accepts an optional second parameter as an array of options.

350.4 Retrieving Flickr Image Details

ZendService\Flickr\Flickr makes it quick and easy to get an images details based on a given image ID.
Just use the getImageDetails() method, as in the following example:

Retrieving Flickr Image Details

Once you have a Flickr image ID, it is a simple matter to fetch information about the image:
1 $flickr = new ZendService\Flickr\Flickr('MY_API_KEY');
2

3 $image = $flickr->getImageDetails($imageId);
4

5 echo "Image ID $imageId is $image->width x $image->height pixels.<br />\n";

6 echo "<a href=\"$image->clickUri\">Click for Image</a>\n";

350.5 ZendService\Flickr Result Classes

The following classes are all returned by tagSearch() and userSearch():

ZendServiceFlickrResultSet

1580 Chapter 350. ZendService\Flickr

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

ZendServiceFlickrResult
ZendServiceFlickrImage

350.5.1 ZendService\Flickr\ResultSet

Represents a set of Results from a Flickr search.

Note: Implements the SeekableIterator interface for easy iteration (e.g., using foreach()), as well as direct
access to a specific result using seek().

350.5.2 Properties

Table 350.1: ZendServiceFlickrResultSet Properties

Name Type Description
totalResultsAvailable int Total Number of Results available
totalResultsReturned int Total Number of Results returned
firstResultPosition int The offset in the total result set of this result set

350.5.3 ZendService\Flickr\ResultSet::totalResults()

int:totalResults()
Returns the total number of results in this result set.
Back to Class List

350.5.4 ZendService\Flickr\Result

A single Image result from a Flickr query

350.5. ZendService\Flickr Result Classes 1581

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

350.5.5 Properties

Table 350.2: ZendServiceFlickrResult Properties

Name Type Description
id string Image ID
owner string The photo owners NSID.
secret string A key used in url construction.
server string The servername to use for URL construction.
title string The photos title.
ispublic string The photo is public.
isfriend string The photo is visible to you because you are a friend of the owner.
isfamily string The photo is visible to you because you are family of the owner.
license string The license the photo is available under.
dateupload string The date the photo was uploaded.
datetaken string The date the photo was taken.
ownername string The screenname of the owner.
iconserver string The server used in assembling icon URLs.
Square ZendServiceFlickrImage A 75x75 thumbnail of the image.
Thumbnail ZendServiceFlickrImage A 100 pixel thumbnail of the image.
Small ZendServiceFlickrImage A 240 pixel version of the image.
Medium ZendServiceFlickrImage A 500 pixel version of the image.
Large ZendServiceFlickrImage A 640 pixel version of the image.
Original ZendServiceFlickrImage The original image.
Back to Class List

350.5.6 ZendService\Flickr\Image

Represents an Image returned by a Flickr search.

350.5.7 Properties

Table 350.3: ZendServiceFlickrImage Properties

Name Type Description
uri string URI for the original image
clickUri string Clickable URI (i.e. the Flickr page) for the image
width int Width of the Image
height int Height of the Image
Back to Class List

1582 Chapter 350. ZendService\Flickr

 CHAPTER 351

ZendService\Google\Gcm

351.1 Introduction

ZendService\Google\Gcm provides a client for the Google Cloud Messaging (GCM) API.
ZendService\Google\Gcm\Client allows you to send data from servers to your Android Applications
on Android devices (Google API driven).
In order to leverage GCM you must create your project in the Google API Console and enable the GCM service on
your device. To get started with GCM prior to building out the 3rd-party server please see GCM: Getting Started
The service is composed of 3 distinct parts:
The Client: ZendService\Google\Gcm\Client
The Message: ZendService\Google\Gcm\Message
The Response: ZendService\Google\Gcm\Response
The Client is the broker that sends the message to the GCM server and returns the response. The Message is where
you define all of the message specific data that you would like to send. The response is the feedback given back from
the GCM server on success, failures and any new canonical ids that must be updated.

351.2 Quick Start

In order to send messages; you must have your API key ready and available. Here we will setup the client and prepare
ourselves to send out messages.
1 use ZendService\Google\Gcm\Client;
2 use ZendService\Google\Gcm\Message;
3 use ZendService\Google\Exception\RuntimeException;
4

5 $client = new Client();

6 $client->setApiKey('the-api-key-for-gcm');

So now that we have the client setup and available, it is time to define out the message that we intend to send to our
registration ids that have registered for push notifications on our server. Note that many of the methods specified are
not required but are here to give an inclusive look into the message.
1 $message = new Message();
2

3 // up to 100 registration ids can be sent to at once

4 $message->setRegistrationIds(array(

1583
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

5 '1-an-id-from-gcm',
6 '2-an-id-from-gcm',
7 ));
8

9 // optional fields
10 $message->setData(array(
11 'pull-request' => '1',
12 ));
13 $message->setCollapseKey('pull-request');
14 $message->setRestrictedPackageName('com.zf.manual');
15 $message->setDelayWhileIdle(false);
16 $message->setTimeToLive(600);
17 $message->setDryRun(false);

Now that we have the message taken care of, all we need to do next is send out the message. Each message comes
back with a set of data that allows us to understand what happened with our push notification as well as throwing
exceptions in the cases of server failures.
1 try {
2 $response = $client->send($message);
3 } catch (RuntimeException $e) {
4 echo $e->getMessage() . PHP_EOL;
5 exit(1);
6 }
7 echo 'Successful: ' . $response->getSuccessCount() . PHP_EOL;
8 echo 'Failures: ' . $response->getFailureCount() . PHP_EOL;
9 echo 'Canonicals: ' . $response->getCanonicalCount() . PHP_EOL;

1584 Chapter 351. ZendService\Google\Gcm

 CHAPTER 352

ZendService\LiveDocx

352.1 Introduction

LiveDocx is a SOAP service that allows developers to generate word processing documents by combining structured
textual or image data from PHP with a template, created in a word processor. The resulting document can be saved as
a PDF, DOCX, DOC, HTML or RTF file. LiveDocx implements mail-merge in PHP.
The family of ZendService\LiveDocx\LiveDocx components provides a clean and simple interface to Live-
Docx Free, LiveDocx Premium and LiveDocx Fully Licensed, authored by Text Control GmbH, and additionally offers
functionality to improve network performance.
ZendService\LiveDocx\LiveDocx is part of the official Zend Framework family, but has to be downloaded
and installed in addition to the core components of the Zend Framework, as do all other service components. Please
refer to GitHub (ZendServiceLiveDocx) for download and installation instructions.
In addition to this section of the manual, to learn more about ZendService\LiveDocx\LiveDocx and the
backend SOAP service LiveDocx, please take a look at the following resources:
Shipped demonstration applications. There is a large number of demonstration applications in the directory
/demos. They illustrate all functionality offered by LiveDocx. Where appropriate this part of the user manual
references the demonstration applications at the end of each section. It is highly recommended to read all the
code in the /demos directory. It is well commented and explains all you need to know about LiveDocx and
ZendService\LiveDocx\LiveDocx.
LiveDocx in PHP.
LiveDocx SOAP API documentation.
LiveDocx WSDL.
LiveDocx blog and web site.

352.1.1 Sign Up for an Account

Before you can start using LiveDocx, you must first sign up for an account. The account is completely free of charge
and you only need to specify a username, password and e-mail address. Your login credentials will be dispatched
to the e-mail address you supply, so please type carefully. If, or when, your application gets really popular and you
require high performance, or additional features only supplied in the premium service, you can upgrade from the
LiveDocx Free to LiveDocx Premium for a minimal monthly charge. For details of the various services, please refer to
LiveDocx pricing.

1585
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

352.1.2 Templates and Documents

LiveDocx differentiates between the following terms: 1) template and 2) document. In order to fully understand the
documentation and indeed LiveDocx itself, it is important that any programmer deploying LiveDocx understands the
difference.
The term template is used to refer to the input file, created in a word processor, containing formatting and text fields.
You can download an example template, stored as a DOCX file. The term document is used to refer to the output
file that contains the template file, populated with data - i.e. the finished document. You can download an example
document, stored as a PDF file.

352.1.3 Supported File Formats

LiveDocx supports the following file formats:

352.1.4 Template File Formats (input)

Templates can be saved in any of the following file formats:

DOCX- Office Open XML format
DOC- Microsoft Word DOC format
RTF- Rich text file format
TXD- TX Text Control format

352.1.5 Document File Formats (output):

The resulting document can be saved in any of the following file formats:
DOCX- Office Open XML format
DOC- Microsoft Word DOC format
HTML-XHTML 1.0 transitional format
RTF- Rich text file format
PDF- Acrobat Portable Document Format
PDF/A- Acrobat Portable Document Format (ISO-standardized version)
TXD- TX Text Control format
TXT-ANSI plain text

352.1.6 Image File Formats (output):

The resulting document can be saved in any of the following graphical file formats:
BMP- Bitmap image format
GIF- Graphics Interchange Format
JPG- Joint Photographic Experts Group format
PNG- Portable Network Graphics format

1586 Chapter 352. ZendService\LiveDocx

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

TIFF- Tagged Image File Format

WMF- Windows Meta File format

352.2 ZendService\LiveDocx\MailMerge

MailMerge is the mail-merge object in the ZendService\LiveDocx\LiveDocx family.

352.2.1 Document Generation Process

The document generation process can be simplified with the following equation:
Template + Data = Document
Or expressed by the following diagram:

Data is inserted into template to create a document.

A template, created in a word processing application, such as Microsoft Word, is loaded into LiveDocx. Data is then
inserted into the template and the resulting document is saved to any supported format.

352.2.2 Creating Templates in Microsoft Word 2007

Start off by launching Microsoft Word and creating a new document. Next, open up the Field dialog box. This looks
as follows:

352.2. ZendService\LiveDocx\MailMerge 1587

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Microsoft Word 2007 Field dialog box.

Using this dialog, you can insert the required merge fields into your document. Below is a screenshot of a license
agreement in Microsoft Word 2007. The merge fields are marked as { MERGEFIELD FieldName }:

1588 Chapter 352. ZendService\LiveDocx

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Template in Microsoft Word 2007.

Now, save the template as template.docx.
In the next step, we are going to populate the merge fields with textual data from PHP.

Cropped template in Microsoft Word 2007.

To populate the merge fields in the above cropped screenshot of the template in Microsoft Word, all we have to code
is as follows:
1 use ZendService\LiveDocx\MailMerge;
2

3 $locale = Locale::getDefault();
4 $timestamp = time();
5

6 $intlTimeFormatter = new IntlDateFormatter($locale,

7 IntlDateFormatter::NONE, IntlDateFormatter::SHORT);
8

352.2. ZendService\LiveDocx\MailMerge 1589

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

9 $intlDateFormatter = new IntlDateFormatter($locale,

10 IntlDateFormatter::LONG, IntlDateFormatter::NONE);
11

12 $mailMerge = new MailMerge();

13

14 $mailMerge->setUsername('myUsername')
15 ->setPassword('myPassword')
16 ->setService (MailMerge::SERVICE_FREE); // for LiveDocx Premium, use MailMerge::SERVICE_P
17

18 $mailMerge->setLocalTemplate('license-agreement-template.docx');
19

20 $mailMerge->assign('software', 'Magic Graphical Compression Suite v1.9')

21 ->assign('licensee', 'Henry Dner-Meyer')
22 ->assign('company', 'Co-Operation')
23 ->assign('date', $intlDateFormatter->format($timestamp))
24 ->assign('time', $intlTimeFormatter->format($timestamp))
25 ->assign('city', 'Lyon')
26 ->assign('country', 'France');
27

28 $mailMerge->createDocument();
29

30 $document = $mailMerge->retrieveDocument('pdf');
31

32 file_put_contents('license-agreement-document.pdf', $document);
33

34 unset($mailMerge);

The resulting document is written to disk in the file license-agreement-document.pdf. This file can now be post-
processed, sent via e-mail or simply displayed, as is illustrated below in Document Viewer 2.26.1 on Ubuntu 9.04:

1590 Chapter 352. ZendService\LiveDocx

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Resulting document as PDF in Document Viewer 2.26.1. For executable demo applications, which illustrate the
above, please take a look at /demos/ZendService/LiveDocx/MailMerge/license-agreement.

352.2.3 Advanced Mail-Merge

ZendService\LiveDocx\MailMerge allows designers to insert any number of text fields into a template.
These text fields are populated with data when createDocument() is called.
In addition to text fields, it is also possible specify regions of a document, which should be repeated.
For example, in a telephone bill it is necessary to print out a list of all connections, including the destination number,
duration and cost of each call. This repeating row functionality can be achieved with so called blocks.
Blocks are simply regions of a document, which are repeated when createDocument() is called. In a block any
number of block fields can be specified.
Blocks consist of two consecutive document targets with a unique name. The following screenshot illustrates these
targets and their names in red:

352.2. ZendService\LiveDocx\MailMerge 1591

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

The format of a block is as follows:

blockStart_ + unique name
blockEnd_ + unique name

For example:
blockStart_block1
blockEnd_block1

The content of a block is repeated, until all data assigned in the block fields has been injected into the template. The
data for block fields is specified in PHP as a multi-assoc array.
The following screenshot of a template in Microsoft Word 2007 shows how block fields are used:

Template, illustrating blocks in Microsoft Word 2007.

The following code populates the above template with data.

1592 Chapter 352. ZendService\LiveDocx

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1 use ZendService\LiveDocx\MailMerge;
2

3 $locale = Locale::getDefault();
4 $timestamp = time();
5

6 $intlDateFormatter1 = new IntlDateFormatter($locale,

7 IntlDateFormatter::LONG, IntlDateFormatter::NONE);
8

9 $intlDateFormatter2 = new IntlDateFormatter($locale,

10 null, null, null, null, 'LLLL yyyy');
11

12 $mailMerge = new MailMerge();

13

14 $mailMerge->setUsername('myUsername')
15 ->setPassword('myPassword')
16 ->setService (MailMerge::SERVICE_FREE); // for LiveDocx Premium, use MailMerge::SERVICE_P
17

18 $mailMerge->setLocalTemplate('telephone-bill-template.doc');
19

20 $mailMerge->assign('customer_number', sprintf("#%'10s", rand(0,1000000000)))

21 ->assign('invoice_number', sprintf("#%'10s", rand(0,1000000000)))
22 ->assign('account_number', sprintf("#%'10s", rand(0,1000000000)));
23

24 $billData = array (
25 'phone' => '+22 (0)333 444 555',
26 'date' => $intlDateFormatter1->format($timestamp),
27 'name' => 'James Henry Brown',
28 'service_phone' => '+22 (0)333 444 559',
29 'service_fax' => '+22 (0)333 444 558',
30 'month' => $intlDateFormatter2->format($timestamp),
31 'monthly_fee' => '15.00',
32 'total_net' => '19.60',
33 'tax' => '19.00',
34 'tax_value' => '3.72',
35 'total' => '23.32'
36 );
37

38 $mailMerge->assign($billData);
39

40 $billConnections = array(
41 array(
42 'connection_number' => '+11 (0)222 333 441',
43 'connection_duration' => '00:01:01',
44 'fee' => '1.15'
45 ),
46 array(
47 'connection_number' => '+11 (0)222 333 442',
48 'connection_duration' => '00:01:02',
49 'fee' => '1.15'
50 ),
51 array(
52 'connection_number' => '+11 (0)222 333 443',
53 'connection_duration' => '00:01:03',
54 'fee' => '1.15'
55 ),
56 array(
57 'connection_number' => '+11 (0)222 333 444',
58 'connection_duration' => '00:01:04',

352.2. ZendService\LiveDocx\MailMerge 1593

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

59 'fee' => '1.15'

60 )
61 );
62

63 $mailMerge->assign('connection', $billConnections);
64

65 $mailMerge->createDocument();
66

67 $document = $mailMerge->retrieveDocument('pdf');
68

69 file_put_contents('telephone-bill-document.pdf', $document);
70

71 unset($mailMerge);

The data, which is specified in the array $billConnections is repeated in the template in the block connection.
The keys of the array (connection_number, connection_duration and fee) are the block field names -
their data is inserted, one row per iteration.
The resulting document is written to disk in the file telephone-bill-document.pdf. This file can now be post-processed,
sent via e-mail or simply displayed, as is illustrated below in Document Viewer 2.26.1 on Ubuntu 9.04:

Resulting document as PDF in Document Viewer 2.26.1.

You can download the DOC template file and the resulting PDF document.

1594 Chapter 352. ZendService\LiveDocx

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Note: Blocks may not be nested.

For executable demo applications, which illustrate the above, please take a look at
/demos/ZendService/LiveDocx/MailMerge/telephone-bill.

352.2.4 Merging Image Data into a Template

In addition to assigning textual data, it is also possible to merge image data into a template. The following code
populates a conference badge template with the photo dailemaitre.jpg, in addition to some textual data.
The first step is to upload the image to the backend service. Once you have done this, you can assign the filename of
the image to the template just as you would any other textual data. Note the syntax of the field name containing an
image - it must start with image:
1 use ZendService\LiveDocx\MailMerge;
2

3 $locale = Locale::getDefault();
4 $timestamp = time();
5

6 $intlDateFormatter = new IntlDateFormatter($locale,

7 IntlDateFormatter::LONG, IntlDateFormatter::NONE);
8

9 $mailMerge = new MailMerge();

10

11 $mailMerge->setUsername('myUsername')
12 ->setPassword('myPassword')
13 ->setService (MailMerge::SERVICE_FREE); // for LiveDocx Premium, use MailMerge::SERVICE_P
14

15 $photoFilename = __DIR__ . '/dailemaitre.jpg';

16 $photoFile = basename($photoFilename);
17

18 if (!$mailMerge->imageExists($photoFile)) { // pass image file *without* path

19 $mailMerge->uploadImage($photoFilename); // pass image file *with* path
20 }
21

22 $mailMerge->setLocalTemplate('conference-pass-template.docx');
23

24 $mailMerge->assign('name', 'Da Lemaitre')

25 ->assign('company', 'Megasoft Co-operation')
26 ->assign('date', $intlDateFormatter->format($timestamp))
27 ->assign('image:photo', $photoFile); // pass image file *without* path
28

29 $mailMerge->createDocument();
30

31 $document = $mailMerge->retrieveDocument('pdf');
32

33 file_put_contents('conference-pass-document.pdf', $document);
34

35 $mailMerge->deleteImage($photoFilename);
36

37 unset($mailMerge);

For executable demo applications, which illustrate the above, please take a look at
/demos/ZendService/LiveDocx/MailMerge/conference-pass.

352.2. ZendService\LiveDocx\MailMerge 1595

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

352.2.5 Generating Bitmaps Image Files

In addition to document file formats, MailMerge also allows documents to be saved to a number of image file
formats (BMP, GIF, JPG, PNG and TIFF). Each page of the document is saved to one file.
The following sample illustrates the use of getBitmaps($fromPage, $toPage, $zoomFactor,
$format) and getAllBitmaps($zoomFactor, $format).
$fromPage is the lower-bound page number of the page range that should be returned as an image and $toPage
the upper-bound page number. $zoomFactor is the size of the images, as a percent, relative to the original page
size. The range of this parameter is 10 to 400. $format is the format of the images returned by this method. The
supported formats can be obtained by calling getImageExportFormats().
1 use ZendService\LiveDocx\MailMerge;
2

3 $locale = Locale::getDefault();
4 $timestamp = time();
5

6 $intlTimeFormatter = new IntlDateFormatter($locale,

7 IntlDateFormatter::NONE, IntlDateFormatter::SHORT);
8

9 $intlDateFormatter = new IntlDateFormatter($locale,

10 IntlDateFormatter::LONG, IntlDateFormatter::NONE);
11

12 $mailMerge = new MailMerge();

13

14 $mailMerge->setUsername('myUsername')
15 ->setPassword('myPassword')
16 ->setService (MailMerge::SERVICE_FREE); // for LiveDocx Premium, use MailMerge::SERVICE_P
17

18 $mailMerge->setLocalTemplate('license-agreement-template.docx');
19

20 $mailMerge->assign('software', 'Magic Graphical Compression Suite v1.9')

21 ->assign('licensee', 'Henry Dner-Meyer')
22 ->assign('company', 'Co-Operation')
23 ->assign('date', $intlDateFormatter->format($timestamp))
24 ->assign('time', $intlTimeFormatter->format($timestamp))
25 ->assign('city', 'Lyon')
26 ->assign('country', 'France');
27

28 $mailMerge->createDocument();
29

30 // Get all bitmaps

31 // (zoomFactor, format)
32 $bitmaps = $mailMerge->getAllBitmaps(100, 'png');
33

34 // Get just bitmaps in specified range

35 // (fromPage, toPage, zoomFactor, format)
36 //$bitmaps = $mailMerge->getBitmaps(2, 2, 100, 'png');
37

38 foreach ($bitmaps as $pageNumber => $bitmapData) {

39 $filename = sprintf('license-agreement-page-%d.png', $pageNumber);
40 file_put_contents($filename, $bitmapData);
41 }
42

43 unset($mailMerge);

This produces two files (license-agreement-page-1.png and license-agreement-page-2.png)

and writes them to disk in the same directory as the executable PHP file.

1596 Chapter 352. ZendService\LiveDocx

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

license-agreement-page-1.png.

352.2. ZendService\LiveDocx\MailMerge 1597

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

license-agreement-page-2.png. For executable demo applications, which illustrate the above, please take a look at
/demos/ZendService/LiveDocx/MailMerge/bitmaps.

1598 Chapter 352. ZendService\LiveDocx

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

352.2.6 Local vs. Remote Templates

Templates can be stored locally, on the client machine, or remotely, by LiveDocx. There are advantages and disad-
vantages to each approach.
In the case that a template is stored locally, it must be transferred from the client to LiveDocx on every request. If
the content of the template rarely changes, this approach is inefficient. Similarly, if the template is several megabytes
in size, it may take considerable time to transfer it to LiveDocx. Local template are useful in situations in which the
content of the template is constantly changing.
The following code illustrates how to use a local template.
1 use ZendService\LiveDocx\MailMerge;
2

3 $mailMerge = new MailMerge();

4

5 $mailMerge->setUsername('myUsername')
6 ->setPassword('myPassword')
7 ->setService (MailMerge::SERVICE_FREE); // for LiveDocx Premium, use MailMerge::SERVICE_P
8

9 $mailMerge->setLocalTemplate('template.docx');
10

11 // assign data and create document

12

13 unset($mailMerge);

In the case that a template is stored remotely, it is uploaded once to LiveDocx and then simply referenced on all
subsequent requests. Obviously, this is much quicker than using a local template, as the template does not have to be
transferred on every request. For speed critical applications, it is recommended to use the remote template method.
The following code illustrates how to upload a template to the server:
1 use ZendService\LiveDocx\MailMerge;
2

3 $mailMerge = new MailMerge();

4

5 $mailMerge->setUsername('myUsername')
6 ->setPassword('myPassword')
7 ->setService (MailMerge::SERVICE_FREE); // for LiveDocx Premium, use MailMerge::SERVICE_P
8

9 $mailMerge->uploadTemplate('template.docx');
10

11 unset($mailMerge);

The following code illustrates how to reference the remotely stored template on all subsequent requests:
1 use ZendService\LiveDocx\MailMerge;
2

3 $mailMerge = new MailMerge();

4

5 $mailMerge->setUsername('myUsername')
6 ->setPassword('myPassword')
7 ->setService (MailMerge::SERVICE_FREE); // for LiveDocx Premium, use MailMerge::SERVICE_P
8

9 $mailMerge->setRemoteTemplate('template.docx');
10

11 // assign data and create document

12

13 unset($mailMerge);

352.2. ZendService\LiveDocx\MailMerge 1599

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

For executable demo applications, which illustrate the above, please take a look at
/demos/ZendService/LiveDocx/MailMerge/templates.

352.2.7 Getting Information

ZendService\LiveDocx\MailMerge provides a number of methods to get information on field names, avail-

able fonts and supported formats.

Get Array of Field Names in Template

The following code returns and displays an array of all field names in the specified template. This functionality is
useful, in the case that you create an application, in which an end-user can update a template.
1 use ZendService\LiveDocx\MailMerge;
2

3 $mailMerge = new MailMerge();

4

5 $mailMerge->setUsername('myUsername')
6 ->setPassword('myPassword')
7 ->setService (MailMerge::SERVICE_FREE); // for LiveDocx Premium, use MailMerge::SERVICE_P
8

9 $templateName = 'template-1-text-field.docx';
10 $mailMerge->setLocalTemplate($templateName);
11

12 $fieldNames = $mailMerge->getFieldNames();
13 foreach ($fieldNames as $fieldName) {
14 printf('- %s%s', $fieldName, PHP_EOL);
15 }
16

17 unset($mailMerge);

For executable demo applications, which illustrate the above, please take a look at
/demos/ZendService/LiveDocx/MailMerge/template-info.

Get Array of Block Field Names in Template

The following code returns and displays an array of all block field names in the specified template. This functionality
is useful, in the case that you create an application, in which an end-user can update a template. Before such templates
can be populated, it is necessary to find out the names of the contained block fields.
1 use ZendService\LiveDocx\MailMerge;
2

3 $mailMerge = new MailMerge();

4

5 $mailMerge->setUsername('myUsername')
6 ->setPassword('myPassword')
7 ->setService (MailMerge::SERVICE_FREE); // for LiveDocx Premium, use MailMerge::SERVICE_P
8

9 $templateName = 'template-block-fields.doc';
10 $mailMerge->setLocalTemplate($templateName);
11

12 $blockNames = $mailMerge->getBlockNames();
13 foreach ($blockNames as $blockName) {
14 $blockFieldNames = $mailMerge->getBlockFieldNames($blockName);
15 foreach ($blockFieldNames as $blockFieldName) {

1600 Chapter 352. ZendService\LiveDocx

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

16 printf('- %s::%s%s', $blockName, $blockFieldName, PHP_EOL);

17 }
18 }
19

20 unset($mailMerge);

For executable demo applications, which illustrate the above, please take a look at
/demos/ZendService/LiveDocx/MailMerge/template-info.

Get Array of Fonts Installed on Server

The following code returns and displays an array of all fonts installed on the server. You can use this method to present
a list of fonts which may be used in a template. It is important to inform the end-user about the fonts installed on the
server, as only these fonts may be used in a template. In the case that a template contains fonts, which are not available
on the server, font-substitution will take place. This may lead to undesirable results.
1 use ZendService\LiveDocx\MailMerge;
2 use Zend\Debug\Debug;
3

4 $mailMerge = new MailMerge();

5

6 $mailMerge->setUsername('myUsername')
7 ->setPassword('myPassword')
8 ->setService (MailMerge::SERVICE_FREE); // for LiveDocx Premium, use MailMerge::SERVICE_P
9

10 Debug::dump($mailMerge->getFontNames());
11

12 unset($mailMerge);

Note: As the return value of this method changes very infrequently, it is highly recommended to use a cache, such as
Zend\Cache\Cache- this will considerably speed up your application.

For executable demo applications, which illustrate the above, please take a look at
/demos/ZendService/LiveDocx/MailMerge/supported-fonts.

Get Array of Supported Template File Formats

The following code returns and displays an array of all supported template file formats. This method is particularly
useful in the case that a combo list should be displayed that allows the end-user to select the input format of the
documentation generation process.
1 use ZendService\LiveDocx\MailMerge;
2 use Zend\Debug\Debug;
3

4 $mailMerge = new MailMerge()

5

6 $mailMerge->setUsername('myUsername')
7 ->setPassword('myPassword')
8 ->setService (MailMerge::SERVICE_FREE); // for LiveDocx Premium, use MailMerge::SERVICE_P
9

10 Debug::dump($mailMerge->getTemplateFormats());
11

12 unset($mailMerge);

352.2. ZendService\LiveDocx\MailMerge 1601

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Note: As the return value of this method changes very infrequently, it is highly recommended to use a cache, such as
Zend\Cache\Cache- this will considerably speed up your application.

For executable demo applications, which illustrate the above, please take a look at
/demos/ZendService/LiveDocx/MailMerge/supported-formats.

Get Array of Supported Document File Formats

The following code returns and displays an array of all supported document file formats. This method is particularly
useful in the case that a combo list should be displayed that allows the end-user to select the output format of the
documentation generation process.
1 use ZendService\LiveDocx\MailMerge;
2 use Zend\Debug\Debug;
3

4 $mailMerge = new MailMerge();

5

6 $mailMerge->setUsername('myUsername')
7 ->setPassword('myPassword')
8 ->setService (MailMerge::SERVICE_FREE); // for LiveDocx Premium, use MailMerge::SERVICE_P
9

10 Debug::dump($mailMerge->getDocumentFormats());
11

12 unset($mailMerge);

For executable demo applications, which illustrate the above, please take a look at
/demos/ZendService/LiveDocx/MailMerge/supported-formats.

Get Array of Supported Image File Formats

The following code returns and displays an array of all supported image file formats. This method is particularly
useful in the case that a combo list should be displayed that allows the end-user to select the output format of the
documentation generation process.
1 use ZendService\LiveDocx\MailMerge;
2 use Zend\Debug\Debug;
3

4 $mailMerge = new MailMerge();

5

6 $mailMerge->setUsername('myUsername')
7 ->setPassword('myPassword')
8 ->setService (MailMerge::SERVICE_FREE); // for LiveDocx Premium, use MailMerge::SERVICE_P
9

10 Debug::dump($mailMerge->getImageExportFormats());
11

12 unset($mailMerge);

Note: As the return value of this method changes very infrequently, it is highly recommended to use a cache, such as
Zend\Cache\Cache- this will considerably speed up your application.

For executable demo applications, which illustrate the above, please take a look at
/demos/ZendService/LiveDocx/MailMerge/supported-formats.

1602 Chapter 352. ZendService\LiveDocx

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

352.2.8 Upgrading From LiveDocx Free to LiveDocx Premium

LiveDocx Free is provided by Text Control GmbH completely free for charge. It is free for all to use in an unlimited
number of applications. However, there are times when you may like to update to LiveDocx Premium. For example,
you need to generate a very large number of documents concurrently, or your application requires documents to be
created faster than LiveDocx Free permits. For such scenarios, Text Control GmbH offers LiveDocx Premium, a paid
service with a number of benefits. For an overview of the benefits, please take a look at LiveDocx pricing.
This section of the manual offers a technical overview of how to upgrade from LiveDocx Free to LiveDocx Premium.
All you have to do, is make a very small change to the code that runs with LiveDocx Free. Your instantiation and
initialization of LiveDocx Free probably looks as follows:
1 use ZendService\LiveDocx\MailMerge;
2

3 $mailMerge = new MailMerge()

4

5 $mailMerge->setUsername('myUsername')
6 ->setPassword('myPassword')
7 ->setService (MailMerge::SERVICE_FREE);
8

9 // rest of your application here

10

11 unset($mailMerge);

To use LiveDocx Premium, you simply need to change the service value from MailMerge::SERVICE_FREE to
MailMerge::SERVICE_PREMIUM, and set the username and password assigned to you for Livedocx Premium.
This may, or may not be the same as the credentials for LiveDocx Free. For example:
1 use ZendService\LiveDocx\MailMerge;
2

3 $mailMerge = new MailMerge()

4

5 $mailMerge->setUsername('myPremiumUsername')
6 ->setPassword('myPremiumPassword')
7 ->setService (MailMerge::SERVICE_PREMIUM);
8

9 // rest of your application here

10

11 unset($mailMerge);

And that is all there is to it. The assignment of the premium WSDL to the component is handled internally and
automatically. You are now using LiveDocx Premium.
For executable demo applications, which illustrate the above, please take a look at
/demos/ZendService/LiveDocx/MailMerge/instantiation.

352.2.9 Upgrading From LiveDocx Free or LiveDocx Premium to LiveDocx Fully

Licensed

LiveDocx Free and Livedocx Premium are provided by Text Control GmbH as a service. They are addressed over
the Internet. However, for certain applications, for example, ones that process very sensitive data (banking, health
or financial), you may not want to send your data across the Internet to a third party service, regardless of the SSL
encryption that both LiveDocx Free and Livedocx Premium offer as standard. For such scenarios, you can license
LiveDocx and install an entire LiveDocx server in your own network. As such, you completely control the flow of
data between your application and the backend LiveDocx server. For an overview of the benefits of LiveDocx Fully
Licensed, please take a look at LiveDocx pricing.

352.2. ZendService\LiveDocx\MailMerge 1603

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

This section of the manual offers a technical overview of how to upgrade from LiveDocx Free or LiveDocx Premium
to LiveDocx Fully Licensed.
All you have to do, is make a very small change to the code that runs with LiveDocx Free or LiveDocx Premium. Your
instantiation and initialization of LiveDocx Free or LiveDocx Premium probably looks as follows:
1 use ZendService\LiveDocx\MailMerge;
2

3 $mailMerge = new MailMerge()

4

5 $mailMerge->setUsername('myUsername')
6 ->setPassword('myPassword')
7 ->setService (MailMerge::SERVICE_FREE);
8 // or
9 // ->setService (MailMerge::SERVICE_PREMIUM);
10

11 // rest of your application here

12

13 unset($mailMerge);

To use LiveDocx Fully Licensed, you simply need to set the WSDL of the backend LiveDocx server in your own
network. You can do this as follows:
1 use ZendService\LiveDocx\MailMerge;
2

3 $mailMerge = new MailMerge()

4

5 $mailMerge->setUsername('myFullyLicensedUsername')
6 ->setPassword('myFullyLicensedPassword')
7 ->setWsdl ('http://api.example.com/2.1/mailmerge.asmx?wsdl');
8

9 // rest of your application here

10

11 unset($mailMerge);

And that is all there is to it. You are now using LiveDocx Fully Licensed.
For executable demo applications, which illustrate the above, please take a look at
/demos/ZendService/LiveDocx/MailMerge/instantiation.

1604 Chapter 352. ZendService\LiveDocx

 CHAPTER 353

ZendService\Rackspace

353.1 Introduction

The ZendService\Rackspace\Rackspace is a class that provides a simple API to manage the Rackspace
services Cloud Files and Cloud Servers.

Note: Load balancers service

The load balancers service of Rackspace is not implemented yet. We are planning to release it in the next future.

353.2 Registering with Rackspace

Before you can get started with ZendService\Rackspace\Rackspace, you must first register for an account.
Please see the Cloud services page on the Rackspace website for more information.
After registering, you can get the Username and the API Key from the Rackspace management con-
sole under the menu Your Account > API Access. These informations are required to use the
ZendService\Rackspace\Rackspace classes.

353.3 Cloud Files

The Cloud Files is a service to store any files in a cloud environment. A user can store an unlimited quantity of files
and each file can be as large as 5 gigabytes. The files can be private or public. The private files can be accessed using
the API of Rackspace. The public files are accessed using a CDN (Content Delivery Network). Rackspace exposes a
REST API to manage the Cloud Files.
ZendService\Rackspace\Files provides the following functionality:
Upload files programmatically for tight integration with your application
Enable Cloud Files CDN integration on any container for public distribution
Create Containers programmatically
Retrieve lists of containers and files

1605
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

353.4 Cloud Servers

Rackspace Cloud Servers is a compute service that provides server capacity in the cloud. Cloud Servers come in
different flavors of memory, disk space, and CPU.
ZendService\Rackspace\Servers provides the following functionality:
Create/delete new servers
List and get information on each server
Manage the public/private IP addresses of a server
Resize the server capacity
Reboot a server
Create new images for a server
Manage the backup of a server
Create a group of server to share the IP addresses for High Availability architecture

353.5 Available Methods

Eeach service class (Files, Servers) of Rackspace extends the ZendService\Rackspace\Rackspace abstract
class. This class contains a set of public methods shared with all the service. This public methods are reported as
follow:
authenticate authenticate()
Authenticate the Rackspace API using the user and the key specified in the concrete class that extend
ZendService\Rackspace\Rackspace. Return true in case of success and false in case of error.
setServiceNet setServiceNet(boolean $useServiceNet = true)
Use the Rackspace ServiceNet internal network.
getServiceNet getServiceNet()
Are we using the Rackspace ServiceNet internal network? Returns a boolean.
getAuthUrl getAuthUrl()
Get the authentication URL of Rackspace. Returns a string.
getCdnUrl getCdnUrl()
Get the URL for the CDN. Returns a string.
getErrorCode getErrorCode()
Get the last HTTP error code. Returns a string.
getErrorMsg getErrorMsg()
Get the last error message. Returns a string.
getHttpClient getHttpClient()
Get the HTTP client used to call the API of the Rackspace. Returns a Zend\Http\Client instance.
getKey getKey()
Get the authentication key. Returns a string.

1606 Chapter 353. ZendService\Rackspace

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

getManagementUrl getManagementUrl()
Get the URL for the management services. Returns a string.
getStorageUrl getStorageUrl()
Get the URL for the storage (files) service. Returns a string.
getToken getToken()
Get the token returned after a successful authentication. Returns a string.
getUser getUser()
Get the user authenticated with the Rackspace service. Returns a string.
isSuccessful isSuccessful()
Return true if the last service call was successful, false otherwise.
setAuthUrl setAuthUrl(string $url)
Set the authentication URL to be used.
$url is the URL for the authentication
setKey setKey(string $key)
Set the key for the API authentication.
$key is the key string for the authentication
setUser setUser(string $user)
Set the user for the API authentication.
$user is the user string for the authentication

353.5. Available Methods 1607

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1608 Chapter 353. ZendService\Rackspace

 CHAPTER 354

ZendService\Rackspace\Servers

354.1 Overview

The ZendService\Rackspace\Servers is a class that provides a simple API to manage the Rackspace Cloud
Servers. Using this class you can:
Create new servers
List and get information on each server
Delete a server
Manage the public/private IP addresses of a server
Resize the server capacity
Reboot a server
Create new images for a server
Manage the backup of a server
Create a group of server to share the IP addresses for High Availability architecture

354.2 Terminology

A server is a virtual machine instance in the Cloud Servers system. Flavor and image are requisite elements when
creating a server.
A server is managed using the the class ZendService\Rackspace\Servers\Server.
A flavor is an available hardware configuration for a server. Each flavor has a unique combination of disk space,
memory capacity and priority for CPU time.
An image is a collection of files used to create or rebuild a server. Rackspace provides a number of pre-built OS images
by default. You may also create custom images from cloud servers you have launched. These custom images are
useful for backup purposes or for producing gold server images if you plan to deploy a particular server configuration
frequently.
An image is managed using the the class ZendService\Rackspace\Servers\Image.
A backup schedule can be defined to create server images at regular intervals (daily and weekly). Backup schedules
are configurable per server.

1609
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Public IP addresses can be shared across multiple servers for use in various high availability scenarios. When an
IP address is shared to another server, the cloud network restrictions are modified to allow each server to listen to
and respond on that IP address (you may optionally specify that the target server network configuration be modified).
Shared IP addresses can be used with many standard heartbeat facilities (e.g. keepalived) that monitor for failure and
manage IP failover.
A shared IP group is a collection of servers that can share IPs with other members of the group. Any server in a
group can share one or more public IPs with any other server in the group. With the exception of the first server in a
shared IP group, servers must be launched into shared IP groups. A server may only be a member of one shared IP
group.
A shared IP group is managed using the the class ZendService\Rackspace\Servers\SharedIpGroup.

354.3 Quick Start

To use this class you have to pass the username and the APIs key of Rackspace in the construction of the class.
1 $user = 'username';
2 $key = 'secret key';
3

4 $rackspace = new ZendService\Rackspace\Servers($user,$key);

To create a new server you can use the createServer method.

1 $data = array (
2 'name' => 'test',
3 'imageId' => '49',
4 'flavorId' => '1',
5 );
6

7 $server= $rackspace->createServer($data);
8

9 if (!$rackspace->isSuccessful()) {
10 die('ERROR: '.$rackspace->getErrorMsg());
11 }
12

13 printf("Server name : %s\n",$server->getName());

14 printf("Server Id : %s\n",$server->getId());
15 printf("Admin password : %s\n",$server->getAdminPass());

This example create a server with name test, imageId 49, and flavorId 1. The attributes name, im-
ageId and flavorId are required to create a new server. The result of createServer is an instance of
ZendService\Rackspace\Servers\Server.
To get the public and private IP addresses of a server you can use the getServerIp method.
1 $id = '20054631';
2 $ips = $rackspace->getServerIp($id);
3

4 if (!$rackspace->isSuccessful()) {
5 die('ERROR: '.$rackspace->getErrorMsg());
6 }
7

8 echo "Private IPs:\n";

9 print_r($ips['private']);
10 echo "Public IPs:\n";
11 print_r($ips['public']);

1610 Chapter 354. ZendService\Rackspace\Servers

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

This example get the IP addresses of the server with Id 20054631. The result of getServerIp is an associative arrays
with keys private and public contains all the private IP addresses and the public IP addresses of the server.
To get the list of all the available servers you can use the listServers method.
1 $servers= $rackspace->listServer(true);
2

3 if (!$rackspace->isSuccessful()) {
4 die('ERROR: '.$rackspace->getErrorMsg());
5 }
6

7 foreach ($servers as $srv) {

8 printf("Name : %s\n",$srv->getName());
9 printf("Server Id : %s\n",$srv->getId());
10 printf("Image Id : %s\n",$srv->getImageId());
11 printf("Flavor Id : %s\n",$srv->getFlavorId());
12 printf("Status : %s (%d\%)\n",$srv->getStatus(),$srv->getProgress());
13 }

354.4 Available Methods

changeBackupSchedule changeBackupSchedule(string $id, string $weekly, string

$daily)
This operation creates a new backup schedule or updates an existing backup schedule for the specified server.
Return true in case of success, false in case of error.
$id is the ID of the server
$weekly, the day of the week for the backup (for instance THURSDAY)
$daily, specify the hours for the backup (for instance H_0400_0600)
changeServerName changeServerName(string $id, string $name)
Change the name of a server. Return true in case of success, false in case of error.
$id is the ID of the server
$name is an optional parameter that specify the new name of the server
changeServerPassword changeServerPassword(string $id, string $password)
Change the admin password of a server. Return true in case of success, false in case of error.
$id is the ID of the server
$password is an optional parameter that specify the new admin password of the server
confirmResizeServer confirmResizeServer(string $id)
Confirm the resize of a server. During a resize operation, the original server is saved for a period of time to allow
roll back if there is a problem. Once the newly resized server is tested and has been confirmed to be functioning
properly, use this operation to confirm the resize. After confirmation, the original server is removed and cannot
be rolled back to. All resizes are automatically confirmed after 24 hours if they are not explicitly confirmed or
reverted. Return true in case of success, false in case of error.
$id is Id of the server.
createImage createImage(string $serverId,string $name)

354.4. Available Methods 1611

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Create an image from a server. Return a new instance of ZendService\Rackspace\Servers\Image.

In case of error the return is false.
$serverId is the Id of the server to use to create the image.
$name, is the name of image to create
createSharedIpGroup createSharedIpGroup(string $name, string $serverId)
This operation creates a new shared IP group. Please note, on a create request, the shared IP group can be
created empty or can be initially populated with a single server. Return the shared IP group as instance of
ZendService\Rackspace\Servers\SharedIpGroup In case of error the return is false.
$name is the name of the shared IP group to create.
$serverId is the Id of the server.
createServer createServer(array $data, $metadata=array(),$files=array())
Create a server with the attributes specified in $data. You can specify also optional parameters: metadata and
files. Metadata is an array contains key/value of metadata related to the server and files is an array contains the
paths of some files to upload into the server. The syntax used for the uploading of the files is serverPath =>
localPath. Return a new instance of ZendService\Rackspace\Servers\Server. In case of error
the return is false.
$data contains the parameters for the server. The required attributes to create a new server are:
name, contains the name of the server
flavorId, contains the flavors Id to use
imageId, contains the images Id to use
$metadata, contains the array of metadata information
$files, contains the path of the files to upload in the server using the syntax serverPath => localPath.
disableBackupSchedule disableBackupSchedule(string $id)
Disable the backup of a server. Return true in case of success, false in case of error.
$id is the Id of the server.
deleteImage deleteImage(string $id)
Delete a image. Return true in case of success, false in case of error.
$id is the Id of the image.
deleteSharedIpGroup deleteSharedIpGroup(string $id)
Delete a shared IP group. Return true in case of success, false in case of error.
$id is the Id of the shared IP group.
deleteServer deleteServer(string $id)
Delete a server. Return true in case of success, false in case of error.
$id is the Id of the server.
getBackupSchedule getBackupSchedule(string $id)
Return the backup schedule of a server. The return is an associative array with the following values: enabled,
weekly, daily. In case of error the return is false.
$id is the Id of the server.

1612 Chapter 354. ZendService\Rackspace\Servers

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

getFlavor getFlavor(string $flavorId)

Return the information about a flavor. The return is an associative array with the following values: id, ram, disk,
name. In case of error the return is false.
$flavorId is the Id of the flavor.
getImage getImage(string $id)
Return an image as instance of ZendService\Rackspace\Servers\Image. In case of error the return
is false.
$id is the Id of the image.
getSharedIpGroup getSharedIpGroup(string $id)
Return the shared IP group as instance of ZendService\Rackspace\Servers\SharedIpGroup In
case of error the return is false.
$id is the Id of the shared IP group.
getServer getServer(string $id)
Return the server specified by the Id as instance of ZendService\Rackspace\Servers\Server. In
case of error the return is false.
$id is Id of the server.
getServerIp getServerIp(string $id)
Return the public and private IP addresses of a server. Return an associative array contains the key public and
private for the IP addresses. In case of error the return is false.
$id is Id of the server.
getServerPrivateIp getServerPrivateIp(string $id)
Return the private IP addresses of the server. Return an associative array contains the IP addresses. In case of
error the return is false.
$id is Id of the server.
getServerPublicIp getServerPublicIp(string $id)
Return the public IP addresses of the server. Return an associative array contains the IP addresses. In case of
error the return is false.
$id is Id of the server.
listFlavors listFlavors(boolean $details=false)
Return all the available flavors as associative array. In case of error the return is false.
If $details is true return a detailed list, if is false return only the name and the Id of the flavor.
listImages listImages(boolean $details=false)
Return all the available images as instance of ZendService\Rackspace\Servers\ImageList In case
of error the return is false.
If $details is true return a detailed list, if is false return only the name and the Id of the Image.
listServer listServer(boolean $details=false)
Return all the available servers with a new instance of ZendService\Rackspace\Servers\ServerList.
In case of error the return is false.
If $details is true return a detailed list, if is false return only the name and the Id of the server.

354.4. Available Methods 1613

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

listSharedIpGroups listSharedIpGroups(boolean $details=false)

Return all the shared IP groups as instance of ZendService\Rackspace\Servers\SharedIpGroupList
In case of error the return is false.
If $details is true return a detailed list, if is false return only the name and the Id of the shared IP group.
rebootServer rebootServer(string $id, boolean $hard=false)
Reboot a server. Return true in case of success, false in case of error.
$id is Id of the server.
If $hard is false (default) the server is rebooted in soft mode. That means the operating system is signaled to
restart, which allows for a graceful shutdown of all processes. If $hard is true the server is rebooted in hard
mode. A hard reboot is the equivalent of power cycling the server.
rebuildServer rebuildServer(string $id, string $imageId)
Rebuild a server. The rebuild function removes all data on the server and replaces it with the specified image,
servers Id and IP addresses will remain the same. Return true in case of success, false in case of error.
$id is Id of the server.
$imageId is the new Image Id of the server.
resizeServer resizeServer(string $id, string $flavorId)
Resize a server. The resize function converts an existing server to a different flavor, in essence, scaling the
server up or down. The original server is saved for a period of time to allow rollback if there is a problem. All
resizes should be tested and explicitly confirmed, at which time the original server is removed. All resizes are
automatically confirmed after 24 hours if they are not explicitly confirmed or reverted. Return true in case of
success, false in case of error.
$id is Id of the server.
$flavorId is the new flavor Id of the server.
revertResizeServer revertResizeServer(string $id)
Revert the resize of a server. During a resize operation, the original server is saved for a period of time to allow
for roll back if there is a problem. If you determine there is a problem with a newly resized server, use this
operation to revert the resize and roll back to the original server. All resizes are automatically confirmed after
24 hours if they have not already been confirmed explicitly or reverted. Return true in case of success, false in
case of error.
$id is Id of the server.
shareIpAddress shareIpAddress(string $id, string $ip, string $groupId, boolean
$configure=true)
Share an IP address for a server. Return true in case of success, false in case of error.
$id is Id of the server.
$ip is the IP address to share.
$groupId is the group Id to use.
If $configure attribute is set to true, the server is configured with the new address, though the address is not
enabled. Note that configuring the server does require a reboot.
unshareIpAddress unshareIpAddress(string $id, string $ip)
Unshare an IP address for a server. Return true in case of success, false in case of error.
$id is Id of the server.

1614 Chapter 354. ZendService\Rackspace\Servers

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

$ip is the IP address to share.

updateServer updateServer(string $id,string $name=null,string $password=null)
Change the name or/and the admin password of a server. In case of error the return is false.
$id is the ID of the server
$name is an optional parameter that specify the new name of the server
$password is an optional parameter that specify the new admin password of the server

354.5 Examples

Authenticate

Check if the username and the key are valid for the Rackspace authentication.
1 $user = 'username';
2 $key = 'secret key';
3

4 $rackspace = new ZendService\Rackspace\Servers($user,$key);

5

6 if ($rackspace->authenticate()) {
7 printf("Authenticated with token: %s",$rackspace->getToken());
8 } else {
9 printf("ERROR: %s",$rackspace->getErrorMsg());
10 }

Create a server with metadata information and upload of a file

Create a server with some metadata information and upload the file build.sh from the local path /home/user to the
remote path /root.
1 $data = array (
2 'name' => 'test',
3 'imageId' => '49',
4 'flavorId' => '1',
5 );
6 $metadata = array (
7 'foo' => 'bar',
8 );
9 $files = array (
10 '/root/build.sh' => '/home/user/build.sh',
11 );
12 $server= $rackspace->createServer($data,$metadata,$files);
13

14 if (!$rackspace->isSuccessful()) {
15 die('ERROR: '.$rackspace->getErrorMsg());
16 }
17

18 $publicIp= $server->getPublicIp();
19

20 printf("Server name : %s\n",$server->getName());

21 printf("Server Id : %s\n",$server->getId());

354.5. Examples 1615

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

22 printf("Public IP : %s\n",$publicIp[0]);
23 printf("Admin password : %s\n",$server->getAdminPass());

Reboot a server

Reboot a server in hard mode (is the equivalent of power cycling the server).
1 $flavors= $rackspace->rebootServer('server id',true)
2

3 if (!$rackspace->isSuccessful()) {
4 die('ERROR: '.$rackspace->getErrorMsg());
5 }
6

7 echo "The server has been rebooted successfully";

List all the available flavors

List all the available flavors with all the detailed information.
1 $flavors= $rackspace->listFlavors(true);
2

3 if (!$rackspace->isSuccessful()) {
4 die('ERROR: '.$rackspace->getErrorMsg());
5 }
6

7 print_r($flavors);

1616 Chapter 354. ZendService\Rackspace\Servers

 CHAPTER 355

ZendService\Rackspace\Files

355.1 Overview

The ZendService\Rackspace\Files is a class that provides a simple API to manage the Rackspace Cloud
Files.

355.2 Quick Start

To use this class you have to pass the username and the APIs key of Rackspace in the construction of the class.
1 $user = 'username';
2 $key = 'secret key';
3

4 $rackspace = new ZendService\Rackspace\Files($user,$key);

A container is a storage compartment for your data and provides a way for you to organize your data. You can think of
a container as a folder in Windows or a directory in UNIX. The primary difference between a container and these other
file system concepts is that containers cannot be nested. You can, however, create an unlimited number of containers
within your account. Data must be stored in a container so you must have at least one container defined in your account
prior to uploading data.
The only restrictions on container names is that they cannot contain a forward slash (/) and must be less than 256 bytes
in length (please note that the length restriction applies to the name using the URL encoded format).
The containers are managed using the class ZendService\Rackspace\Files\Container.
An object (file) is the basic storage entity and any optional metadata that represents the files you store in the Cloud
Files system. When you upload data to Cloud Files, the data is stored as-is (no compression or encryption) and consists
of a location (container), the objects name, and any metadata consisting of key/value pairs. For instance, you may
chose to store a backup of your digital photos and organize them into albums. In this case, each object could be tagged
with metadata such as Album : Caribbean Cruise or Album : Aspen Ski Trip.
The only restriction on object names is that they must be less than 1024 bytes in length after URL encoding. Cloud
Files has a limit on the size of a single uploaded object; by default this is 5 GB. For metadata, you should not exceed
90 individual key/value pairs for any one object and the total byte length of all key/value pairs should not exceed 4KB
(4096 bytes).
The objects are managed using the class ZendService\Rackspace\Files\Object.
To create a new container you can use the createContainer method.

1617
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1 $container= $rackspace->createContainer('test');
2

3 if (!$rackspace->isSuccessful()) {
4 die('ERROR: '.$rackspace->getErrorMsg());
5 }
6

7 printf("Name: %s",$container->getName());

This example create a container with name test. The result of createContainer is a new instance of
ZendService\Rackspace\Files\Container.
To store an object (file) in a container you can use the storeObject method.
1 $name= 'example.jpg';
2 $file= file_get_contents($name);
3

4 $metadata= array (
5 'foo' => 'bar'
6 );
7

8 $rackspace->storeObject('test',$name,$file,$metadata);
9

10 if ($rackspace->isSuccessful()) {
11 echo 'Object stored successfully';
12 } else {
13 printf("ERROR: %s",$rackspace->getErrorMsg());
14 }

This example store a file image example.jpg in the container test with the metadata specified in the array $metadata.
To delete an object (file) you can use the deleteObject method.
1 $rackspace->deleteObject('test','example.jpg');
2

3 if ($rackspace->isSuccessful()) {
4 echo 'Object deleted successfully';
5 } else {
6 printf("ERROR: %s",$rackspace->getErrorMsg());
7 }

This example delete the object example.jpg in the container test.

To publish a container as CDN (Content Delivery Network) you can use the enableCdnContainer method.
1 $cdnInfo= $rackspace->enableCdnContainer('test');
2

3 if ($rackspace->isSuccessful()) {
4 print_r($cdnInfo);
5 } else {
6 printf("ERROR: %s",$rackspace->getErrorMsg());
7 }

This example publish the container test as CDN. If the operation is successful returns an associative arrays with the
following values:
cdn_uri, the url of the CDN container;
cdn_uri_ssl, the ssl url of the CDN container;

1618 Chapter 355. ZendService\Rackspace\Files

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

355.3 Available Methods

copyObject copyObject(string $container_source,string $obj_source,string

$container_dest,string $obj_dest,$metadata=array(),string
$content_type=null)
Copy an object from a container to another. The return is true in case of success and false in case of error.
The $container_source is the name of the source container.
The $obj_source is the name of the source object.
The $container_dest is the name of the destination container.
The $obj_dest is the name of the destination object.
The $metadata array contains the metadata information related to the destination object.
The $content_type is the optional content type of the destination object (file).
createContainer createContainer(string $container, $metadata=array())
Create a container. The return is an instance of ZendService\Rackspace\Files\Container. In case
of error the return is false.
The $container is the name of the container to create.
The $metadata array contains the metadata information related to the container.
deleteContainer deleteContainer(string $container)
Delete a container. The return is true in case of success and false in case of error.
The $container is the name of the container to delete.
deleteObject deleteObject(string $container,string $object)
Delete an object in a specific container. Return true in case of success, false in case of error.
The $container is the name of the container.
The $object is the name of the object to delete.
enableCdnContainer enableCdnContainer(string $container,integer $ttl=900)
Publish a container as CDN (Content Delivery Network). Return an associative array contains the CDN url and
SSL url. In case of error the return is false.
The $container is the name of the container.
The $ttl is the time to live for the CDN cache content. The default value is 15 minutes (900 seconds). The
minimum TTL that can be set is 15 minutes (900 seconds); the maximum TTL is 50 years (range of 900 to
1577836800 seconds).
getCdnContainers getCdnContainers($options=array())
Returns all the CDN containers available. The return is an instance of
ZendService\Rackspace\Files\ContainerList. In case of error the return is false.
The $options contains the following optional parameters:
limit, for an integer value n, limits the number of results to at most n values.
marker, given a string value x, return object names greater in value than the specified marker.

355.3. Available Methods 1619

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

getContainers getContainers($options=array())
Returns all the containers available. The return is an instance of
ZendService\Rackspace\Files\ContainerList In case of error the return is false.
The $options contains the following optional parameters:
limit, for an integer value n, limits the number of results to at most n values.
marker, given a string value x, return object names greater in value than the specified marker.
getContainer getContainer(string $container)
Returns the container specified as instance of ZendService\Rackspace\Files\Container In case of
error the return is false.
The $container is the name of the container.
getCountContainers getCountContainers()
Return the total count of containers.
getCountObjects getCountObjects()
Return the count of objects contained in all the containers.
getInfoCdnContainer getInfoCdnContainer(string $container)
Get the information of a CDN container. The result is an associative array with all the CDN information. In
case of error the return is false.
The $container is the name of the container.
getInfoContainers getInfoContainers()
Get the information about all the containers available. Return an associative array with the following values:
tot_containers, the total number of containers stored
size_containers, the total size, in byte, of all the containers.
tot_objects, the total number of objects (file) stored in all the containers.
In case of error the return is false.
getMetadataContainer getMetadataContainer(string $container)
Get the metadata information of a container. The result is an associative array with all the metadata keys/values.
In case of error the return is false.
The $container is the name of the container.
getMetadataObject getMetadataObject(string $container, string $object)
Get the metadata information of an object. The result is an associative array with all the metadata keys/values.
In case of error the return is false.
The $container is the name of the container.
The $object is the name of the object.
getObjects getObjects(string $container, $options=array())
Returns all the objects of a container. The return is an instance of
ZendService\Rackspace\Files\ObjectList In case of error the return is false.
The $container is the name of the container.
The $options contains the following optional parameters:

1620 Chapter 355. ZendService\Rackspace\Files

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

limit, for an integer value n, limits the number of results to at most n values.
marker, given a string value x, return object names greater in value than the specified marker.
prefix, for a string value x, causes the results to be limited to object names beginning with the substring x.
path, for a string value x, return the object names nested in the pseudo path.
delimiter, for a character c, return all the object names nested in the container (without the need for the
directory marker objects).
getObject getObject(string $container, string $object, $headers=array())
Returns an object of a container. The return is an instance of ZendService\Rackspace\Files\Object
In case of error the return is false.
The $container is the name of the container.
The $object is the name of the object.
The $headers contains the following optional parameters (See the RFC-2616 for more info):
If-Match, a client that has one or more entities previously obtained from the resource can verify that one
of those entities is current by including a list of their associated entity tags in the If-Match header field.
If-None-Match, a client that has one or more entities previously obtained from the resource can verify
that none of those entities is current by including a list of their associated entity tags in the If-None-Match
header field.
If-Modified-Since, if the requested variant has not been modified since the time specified in this field, an
entity will not be returned from the server.
If-Unmodified-Since, if the requested resource has not been modified since the time specified in this
field, the server SHOULD perform the requested operation as if the If-Unmodified-Since header were not
present.
Range, Rackspace supports a sub-set of Range and do not adhere to the full RFC-2616 specification. We
support specifying OFFSET-LENGTH where either OFFSET or LENGTH can be optional (not both at the
same time). The following are supported forms of the header:
Range: bytes=-5, last five bytes of the object
Range: bytes=10-15, the five bytes after a 10-byte offset
Range: bytes=32-, all data after the first 32 bytes of the object
getSizeContainers getSizeContainers()
Return the size, in bytes, of all the containers.
setMetadataObject setMetadataObject(string $container,string $object, array
$metadata)
Update metadata information to the object (all the previous metadata will be deleted). Return true in case of
success, false in case of error.
The $container is the name of the container.
The $object is the name of the object to store.
The $metadata array contains the metadata information related to the object.
storeObject storeObject(string $container,string $object,string
$file,$metadata=array())
Store an object in a specific container. Return true in case of success, false in case of error.

355.3. Available Methods 1621

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

The $container is the name of the container.

The $object is the name of the object to store.
The $file is the content of the object to store.
The $metadata array contains the metadata information related to the object to store.
updateCdnContainer updateCdnContainer(string $container,integer
$ttl=null,$cdn_enabled=null,$log=null)
Update the attribute of a CDN container. Return an associative array contains the CDN url and SSL url. In case
of error the return is false.
The $container is the name of the container.
The $ttl is the time to live for the CDN cache content. The default value is 15 minutes (900 seconds). The
minimum TTL that can be set is 15 minutes (900 seconds); the maximum TTL is 50 years (range of 900 to
1577836800 seconds).
The $cdn_enabled is the flag to swith on/off the CDN. True switch on, false switch off.
The $log enable or disable the log retention. True switch on, false switch off.

355.4 Examples

Authenticate

Check if the username and the key are valid for the Rackspace authentication.
1 $user = 'username';
2 $key = 'secret key';
3

4 $rackspace = new ZendService\Rackspace\Files($user,$key);

5

6 if ($rackspace->authenticate()) {
7 printf("Authenticated with token: %s",$rackspace->getToken());
8 } else {
9 printf("ERROR: %s",$rackspace->getErrorMsg());
10 }

Get an object

Get an image file (example.gif) from the cloud and render it in the browser
1 $user = 'username';
2 $key = 'secret key';
3

4 $rackspace = new ZendService\Rackspace\Files($user,$key);

5

6 $object= $rackspace->getObject('test','example.gif');
7

8 if (!$rackspace->isSuccessful()) {
9 die('ERROR: '.$rackspace->getErrorMsg());
10 }
11

12 header('Content-type: image/gif');
13 echo $object->getFile();

1622 Chapter 355. ZendService\Rackspace\Files

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Create a container with metadata

Create a container (test) with some metadata information ($metadata)

1 $user = 'username';
2 $key = 'secret key';
3

4 $rackspace = new ZendService\Rackspace\Files($user,$key);

5

6 $metadata= array (
7 'foo' => 'bar',
8 'foo2' => 'bar2',
9 );
10

11 $container= $rackspace->createContainer('test',$metadata);
12

13 if ($rackspace->isSuccessful()) {
14 echo 'Container created successfully';
15 }

Get the metadata of a container

Get the metadata of the container test

1 $user = 'username';
2 $key = 'secret key';
3

4 $rackspace = new ZendService\Rackspace\Files($user, $key);

5

6 $container= $rackspace->getContainer('test');
7

8 if (!$rackspace->isSuccessful()) {
9 die('ERROR: ' . $rackspace->getErrorMsg());
10 }
11

12 $metadata= $container->getMetadata();
13 print_r($metadata);

Store an object in a container

Store an object using a ZendService\Rackspace\Files\Container instance

1 $user = 'username';
2 $key = 'secret key';
3

4 $rackspace = new ZendService\Rackspace\Files($user, $key);

5

6 $container= $rackspace->getContainer('test');
7

8 if (!$rackspace->isSuccessful()) {
9 die('ERROR: ' . $rackspace->getErrorMsg());
10 }
11

12 $file = file_get_contents('test.jpg');
13 $metadata = array (

355.4. Examples 1623

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

14 'foo' => 'bar',

15 );
16

17 if ($container->addObject('test.jpg', $file, $metadata)) {

18 echo 'Object stored successfully';
19 }

Check if a container is CDN enabled

Check if the test container is CDN enabled. If it is not we enable it.

1 $user = 'username';
2 $key = 'secret key';
3

4 $rackspace = new ZendService\Rackspace\Files($user, $key);

5

6 $container= $rackspace->getContainer('test');
7

8 if (!$rackspace->isSuccessful()) {
9 die('ERROR: ' . $rackspace->getErrorMsg());
10 }
11

12 if (!$container->isCdnEnabled()) {
13 if (!$container->enableCdn()) {
14 die('ERROR: ' . $rackspace->getErrorMsg());
15 }
16 }
17 printf(
18 "The container is CDN enabled with the following URLs:\n %s\n %s\n",
19 $container->getCdnUri(),
20 $container->getCdnUriSsl()
21 );

1624 Chapter 355. ZendService\Rackspace\Files

 CHAPTER 356

ZendService\ReCaptcha

356.1 Introduction

ZendService\ReCaptcha\ReCaptcha provides a client for the reCAPTCHA Web Service. Per the re-
CAPTCHA site, reCAPTCHA is a free CAPTCHA service that helps to digitize books. Each reCAPTCHA requires
the user to input two words, the first of which is the actual CAPTCHA, and the second of which is a word from some
scanned text that Optical Character Recognition (OCR) software has been unable to identify. The assumption is that
if a user correctly provides the first word, the second is likely correctly entered as well, and can be used to improve
OCR software for digitizing books.
In order to use the reCAPTCHA service, you will need to sign up for an account and register one or more domains
with the service in order to generate public and private keys.

356.2 Simplest use

Instantiate a ZendService\ReCaptcha\ReCaptcha object, passing it your public and private keys:

356.2.1 Creating an instance of the reCAPTCHA service

1 $recaptcha = new ZendService\ReCaptcha\ReCaptcha($pubKey, $privKey);

To render the reCAPTCHA, simply call the getHTML() method:

356.2.2 Displaying the reCAPTCHA

1 echo $recaptcha->getHTML();

When the form is submitted, you should receive two fields, recaptcha_challenge_field and re-
captcha_response_field. Pass these to the reCAPTCHA objects verify() method:

356.2.3 Verifying the form fields

1 $result = $recaptcha->verify(
2 $_POST['recaptcha_challenge_field'],
3 $_POST['recaptcha_response_field']
4 );

1625
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Once you have the result, test against it to see if it is valid. The result is a ZendService\ReCaptcha\Response
object, which provides an isValid() method.

356.2.4 Validating the reCAPTCHA

1 if (!$result->isValid()) {
2 // Failed validation
3 }

It is even simpler to use the reCAPTCHA Zend\Captcha adapter, or to use that adapter as a backend for the
CAPTCHA form element. In each case, the details of rendering and validating the reCAPTCHA are automated for
you.

356.3 Hiding email addresses

ZendService\ReCaptcha\MailHide can be used to hide email addresses. It will replace a part of an email
address with a link that opens a popup window with a reCAPTCHA challenge. Solving the challenge will reveal the
complete email address.
In order to use this component you will need an account to generate public and private keys for the mailhide API.

356.3.1 Using the mail hide component

1 // The mail address we want to hide

2 $mail = '[email protected]';
3

4 // Create an instance of the mailhide component, passing it your public

5 // and private keys, as well as the mail address you want to hide
6 $mailHide = new ZendService\ReCaptcha\Mailhide();
7 $mailHide->setPublicKey($pubKey);
8 $mailHide->setPrivateKey($privKey);
9 $mailHide->setEmail($mail);
10

11 // Display it
12 print($mailHide);

The example above will display [email protected] where ... has a link that opens up a popup window with a
reCAPTCHA challenge.
The public key, private key, and the email address can also be specified in the constructor of the class. A fourth
argument also exists that enables you to set some options for the component. The available options are listed in the
following table:

Table 356.1: ZendServiceReCaptchaMailHide options

Option Description Expected Default Value
Values
linkTitle The title attribute of the link string Reveal this e=mail
address
linkHidden- The text that includes the popup string ...
Text link
popupWidth The width of the popup window int 500
popupHeight The height of the popup window int 300

1626 Chapter 356. ZendService\ReCaptcha

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

The configuration options can be set by sending them as the fourth argument to the constructor or by calling
setOptions($options), which takes an associative array or an instance of ZendConfigConfig.

356.3.2 Generating many hidden email addresses

1 // Create an instance of the mailhide component, passing it your public

2 // and private keys, as well as some configuration options
3 $mailHide = new ZendService\ReCaptcha\Mailhide();
4 $mailHide->setPublicKey($pubKey);
5 $mailHide->setPrivateKey($privKey);
6 $mailHide->setOptions(array(
7 'linkTitle' => 'Click me',
8 'linkHiddenText' => '+++++',
9 ));
10

11 // The mail addresses we want to hide

12 $mailAddresses = array(
13 '[email protected]',
14 '[email protected]',
15 '[email protected]',
16 );
17

18 foreach ($mailAddresses as $mail) {

19 $mailHide->setEmail($mail);
20 print($mailHide);
21 }

356.3. Hiding email addresses 1627

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1628 Chapter 356. ZendService\ReCaptcha

 CHAPTER 357

ZendService\SlideShare

The ZendService\SlideShare\SlideShare component is used to interact with the slideshare.net web ser-
vices for hosting slide shows online. With this component, you can embed slide shows which are hosted on this web
site within a web site and even upload new slide shows to your account.

357.1 Getting Started with ZendService\SlideShare

In order to use the ZendService\SlideShare\SlideShare component you must first create an account on
the slideshare.net servers (more information can be found here) in order to receive an API key, username, password
and shared secret value all of which are needed in order to use the ZendService\SlideShare\SlideShare
component.
Once you have setup an account, you can begin using the ZendService\SlideShare\SlideShare component
by creating a new instance of the ZendService\SlideShare\SlideShare object and providing these values
as shown below:
1 // Create a new instance of the component
2 $ss = new ZendService\SlideShare\SlideShare('APIKEY',
3 'SHAREDSECRET',
4 'USERNAME',
5 'PASSWORD');

357.2 The SlideShow object

All slide shows in the ZendService\SlideShare\SlideShare component are represented using the
ZendService\SlideShare\SlideShow object (both when retrieving and uploading new slide shows). For
your reference a pseudo-code version of this class is provided below.
1 class ZendService\SlideShare\SlideShow {
2

3 /**
4 * Retrieves the location of the slide show
5 */
6 public function getLocation() {
7 return $this->_location;
8 }
9

10 /**
11 * Gets the transcript for this slide show

1629
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

12 */
13 public function getTranscript() {
14 return $this->_transcript;
15 }
16

17 /**
18 * Adds a tag to the slide show
19 */
20 public function addTag($tag) {
21 $this->_tags[] = (string) $tag;
22 return $this;
23 }
24

25 /**
26 * Sets the tags for the slide show
27 */
28 public function setTags(Array $tags) {
29 $this->_tags = $tags;
30 return $this;
31 }
32

33 /**
34 * Gets all of the tags associated with the slide show
35 */
36 public function getTags() {
37 return $this->_tags;
38 }
39

40 /**
41 * Sets the filename on the local filesystem of the slide show
42 * (for uploading a new slide show)
43 */
44 public function setFilename($file) {
45 $this->_slideShowFilename = (string) $file;
46 return $this;
47 }
48

49 /**
50 * Retrieves the filename on the local filesystem of the slide show
51 * which will be uploaded
52 */
53 public function getFilename() {
54 return $this->_slideShowFilename;
55 }
56

57 /**
58 * Gets the ID for the slide show
59 */
60 public function getId() {
61 return $this->_slideShowId;
62 }
63

64 /**
65 * Retrieves the HTML embed code for the slide show
66 */
67 public function getEmbedCode() {
68 return $this->_embedCode;
69 }

1630 Chapter 357. ZendService\SlideShare

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

70

71 /**
72 * Retrieves the Thumbnail URi for the slide show
73 */
74 public function getThumbnailUrl() {
75 return $this->_thumbnailUrl;
76 }
77

78 /**
79 * Sets the title for the Slide show
80 */
81 public function setTitle($title) {
82 $this->_title = (string) $title;
83 return $this;
84 }
85

86 /**
87 * Retrieves the Slide show title
88 */
89 public function getTitle() {
90 return $this->_title;
91 }
92

93 /**
94 * Sets the description for the Slide show
95 */
96 public function setDescription($desc) {
97 $this->_description = (string) $desc;
98 return $this;
99 }
100

101 /**
102 * Gets the description of the slide show
103 */
104 public function getDescription() {
105 return $this->_description;
106 }
107

108 /**
109 * Gets the numeric status of the slide show on the server
110 */
111 public function getStatus() {
112 return $this->_status;
113 }
114

115 /**
116 * Gets the textual description of the status of the slide show on
117 * the server
118 */
119 public function getStatusDescription() {
120 return $this->_statusDescription;
121 }
122

123 /**
124 * Gets the permanent link of the slide show
125 */
126 public function getPermaLink() {
127 return $this->_permalink;

357.2. The SlideShow object 1631

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

128 }
129

130 /**
131 * Gets the number of views the slide show has received
132 */
133 public function getNumViews() {
134 return $this->_numViews;
135 }
136 }

Note: The above pseudo-class only shows those methods which should be used by end-user developers. Other
available methods are internal to the component.

When using the ZendService\SlideShare\SlideShare component, this data class will be used frequently
to browse or add new slide shows to or from the web service.

357.3 Retrieving a single slide show

The simplest usage of the ZendService\SlideShare\SlideShare component is the retrieval of a sin-

gle slide show by slide show ID provided by the slideshare.net application and is done by calling the
getSlideShow() method of a ZendService\SlideShare\SlideShare object and using the resulting
ZendService\SlideShare\SlideShow object as shown.
1 // Create a new instance of the component
2 $ss = new ZendService\SlideShare\SlideShare('APIKEY',
3 'SHAREDSECRET',
4 'USERNAME',
5 'PASSWORD');
6

7 $slideshow = $ss->getSlideShow(123456);
8

9 print "Slide Show Title: {$slideshow->getTitle()}<br/>\n";

10 print "Number of views: {$slideshow->getNumViews()}<br/>\n";

357.4 Retrieving Groups of Slide Shows

If you do not know the specific ID of a slide show you are interested in retrieving, you can retrieving groups of slide
shows by using one of three methods:
Slide shows from a specific account
You can retrieve slide shows from a specific account by using the getSlideShowsByUsername() method
and providing the username from which the slide shows should be retrieved
Slide shows which contain specific tags
You can retrieve slide shows which contain one or more specific tags by using the getSlideShowsByTag()
method and providing one or more tags which the slide show must have assigned to it in order to be retrieved
Slide shows by group
You can retrieve slide shows which are a member of a specific group using the getSlideShowsByGroup()
method and providing the name of the group which the slide show must belong to in order to be retrieved

1632 Chapter 357. ZendService\SlideShare

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Each of the above methods of retrieving multiple slide shows a similar approach is used. An example of using each
method is shown below:
1 // Create a new instance of the component
2 $ss = new ZendService\SlideShare\SlideShare('APIKEY',
3 'SHAREDSECRET',
4 'USERNAME',
5 'PASSWORD');
6

7 $starting_offset = 0;
8 $limit = 10;
9

10 // Retrieve the first 10 of each type

11 $ss_user = $ss->getSlideShowsByUser('username', $starting_offset, $limit);
12 $ss_tags = $ss->getSlideShowsByTag('zend', $starting_offset, $limit);
13 $ss_group = $ss->getSlideShowsByGroup('mygroup', $starting_offset, $limit);
14

15 // Iterate over the slide shows

16 foreach ($ss_user as $slideshow) {
17 print "Slide Show Title: {$slideshow->getTitle}<br/>\n";
18 }

357.5 ZendService\SlideShare Caching policies

By default, ZendService\SlideShare\SlideShare will cache any request against the web service automat-
ically to the filesystem (default path /tmp) for 12 hours. If you desire to change this behavior, you must provide your
own ZendCacheCache object using the setCacheObject() method as shown:
1 $frontendOptions = array(
2 'lifetime' => 7200,
3 'automatic_serialization' => true);
4 $backendOptions = array(
5 'cache_dir' => '/webtmp/');
6

7 $cache = Zend\Cache\Cache::factory('Core',
8 'File',
9 $frontendOptions,
10 $backendOptions);
11

12 $ss = new ZendService\SlideShare\SlideShare('APIKEY',

13 'SHAREDSECRET',
14 'USERNAME',
15 'PASSWORD');
16 $ss->setCacheObject($cache);
17

18 $ss_user = $ss->getSlideShowsByUser('username', $starting_offset, $limit);

357.6 Changing the behavior of the HTTP Client

If for whatever reason you would like to change the behavior of the HTTP client when making the web service request,
you can do so by creating your own instance of the Zend\Http\Client object (see ZendHttp). This is useful for
instance when it is desirable to set the timeout for the connection to something other then default as shown:

357.5. ZendService\SlideShare Caching policies 1633

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1 $client = new Zend\Http\Client();

2 $client->setConfig(array('timeout' => 5));
3

4 $ss = new ZendService\SlideShare\SlideShare('APIKEY',

5 'SHAREDSECRET',
6 'USERNAME',
7 'PASSWORD');
8 $ss->setHttpClient($client);
9 $ss_user = $ss->getSlideShowsByUser('username', $starting_offset, $limit);

1634 Chapter 357. ZendService\SlideShare

 CHAPTER 358

ZendService\StrikeIron

ZendService\StrikeIron\StrikeIron provides a PHP 5 client to StrikeIron web services. See the follow-
ing sections:
ZendServiceStrikeIronStrikeIron
Bundled Services
Advanced Use

358.1 Overview

StrikeIron offers hundreds of commercial data services (Data as a Service) such as Online Sales Tax, Currency
Rates, Stock Quotes, Geocodes, Global Address Verification, Yellow/White Pages, MapQuest Driving Directions,
Dun & Bradstreet Business Credit Checks, and much, much more.
Each StrikeIron web service shares a standard SOAP (and REST) API, making it easy to integrate and manage multiple
services. StrikeIron also manages customer billing for all services in a single account, making it perfect for solution
providers. Get started with free web services at http://www.strikeiron.com/sdp.
StrikeIrons services may be used through the PHP 5 SOAP extension alone. However, using StrikeIron this way
does not give an ideal PHP-like interface. The ZendService\StrikeIron\StrikeIron component provides
a lightweight layer on top of the SOAP extension for working with StrikeIron services in a more convenient, PHP-like
manner.

Note: The PHP 5 SOAP extension must be installed and enabled to use
ZendService\StrikeIron\StrikeIron.

The ZendService\StrikeIron\StrikeIron component provides:

A single point for configuring your StrikeIron authentication credentials that can be used across many StrikeIron
services.
A standard way of retrieving your StrikeIron subscription information such as license status and the number of
hits remaining to a service.
The ability to use any StrikeIron service from its WSDL without creating a PHP wrapper class, and the option
of creating a wrapper for a more convenient interface.
Wrappers for three popular StrikeIron services.

1635
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

358.2 Registering with StrikeIron

Before you can get started with ZendService\StrikeIron\StrikeIron, you must first register for a Strike-
Iron developer account.
After registering, you will receive a StrikeIron username and password. These will be used when connecting to
StrikeIron using ZendService\StrikeIron\StrikeIron.
You will also need to sign up for StrikeIrons Super Data Pack Web Service.
Both registration steps are free and can be done relatively quickly through the StrikeIron website.

358.3 Getting Started

Once you have registered for a StrikeIron account and signed up for the Super Data Pack, youre ready to start using
ZendService\StrikeIron\StrikeIron.
StrikeIron consists of hundreds of different web services. ZendService\StrikeIron\StrikeIron can be
used with many of these services but provides supported wrappers for three of them:
ZIP Code Information
US Address Verification
Sales & Use Tax Basic
The class ZendService\StrikeIron\StrikeIron provides a simple way of specifying your StrikeIron ac-
count information and other options in its constructor. It also has a factory method that will return clients for StrikeIron
services:
1 $strikeIron = new ZendService\StrikeIron\StrikeIron(array('username' => 'your-username',
2 'password' => 'your-password'));
3

4 $taxBasic = $strikeIron->getService(array('class' => 'SalesUseTaxBasic'));

The getService() method will return a client for any StrikeIron service by the name of
its PHP wrapper class. In this case, the name SalesUseTaxBasic refers to the wrapper class
ZendService\StrikeIron\SalesUseTaxBasic. Wrappers are included for three services and described in
Bundled Services.
The getService() method can also return a client for a StrikeIron service that does not yet have a PHP wrapper.
This is explained in Using Services by WSDL.

358.4 Making Your First Query

Once you have used the getService() method to get a client for a particular StrikeIron service, you can utilize
that client by calling methods on it just like any other PHP object.
1 $strikeIron = new ZendService\StrikeIron\StrikeIron(array('username' => 'your-username',
2 'password' => 'your-password'));
3

4 // Get a client for the Sales & Use Tax Basic service
5 $taxBasic = $strikeIron->getService(array('class' => 'SalesUseTaxBasic'));
6

7 // Query tax rate for Ontario, Canada

8 $rateInfo = $taxBasic->getTaxRateCanada(array('province' => 'ontario'));

1636 Chapter 358. ZendService\StrikeIron

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

9 echo $rateInfo->province;
10 echo $rateInfo->abbreviation;
11 echo $rateInfo->GST;

In the example above, the getService() method is used to return a client to the Sales & Use Tax Basic service.
The client object is stored in $taxBasic.
The getTaxRateCanada() method is then called on the service. An associative array is used to supply keyword
parameters to the method. This is the way that all StrikeIron methods are called.
The result from getTaxRateCanada() is stored in $rateInfo and has properties like province and GST.
Many of the StrikeIron services are as simple to use as the example above. See Bundled Services for detailed informa-
tion on three StrikeIron services.

358.5 Examining Results

When learning or debugging the StrikeIron services, its often useful to dump the result returned from a method call.
The result will always be an object that is an instance of ZendService\StrikeIron\Decorator. This is a
small decorator object that wraps the results from the method call.
The simplest way to examine a result from the service is to use the built-in PHP functions like print_r():
1 <?php
2 $strikeIron = new ZendService\StrikeIron\StrikeIron(array('username' => 'your-username',
3 'password' => 'your-password'));
4

5 $taxBasic = $strikeIron->getService(array('class' => 'SalesUseTaxBasic'));

6

7 $rateInfo = $taxBasic->getTaxRateCanada(array('province' => 'ontario'));

8 print_r($rateInfo);
9 ?>
10

11 ZendService\StrikeIron\Decorator Object
12 (
13 [_name:protected] => GetTaxRateCanadaResult
14 [_object:protected] => stdClass Object
15 (
16 [abbreviation] => ON
17 [province] => ONTARIO
18 [GST] => 0.06
19 [PST] => 0.08
20 [total] => 0.14
21 [HST] => Y
22 )
23 )

In the output above, we see that the decorator ($rateInfo) wraps an object named GetTaxRateCanadaResult,
the result of the call to getTaxRateCanada().
This means that $rateInfo has public properties like abbreviation, province>, and GST. These are accessed
like $rateInfo->province.

Tip: StrikeIron result properties sometimes start with an uppercase letter such as Foo or Bar where most PHP object
properties normally start with a lowercase letter as in foo or bar. The decorator will automatically do this inflection
so you may read a property Foo as foo.

358.5. Examining Results 1637

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

If you ever need to get the original object or its name out of the decorator, use the respective methods
getDecoratedObject() and getDecoratedObjectName().

358.6 Handling Errors

The previous examples are naive, i.e. no error handling was shown. Its possible that StrikeIron will return a fault
during a method call. Events like bad account credentials or an expired subscription can cause StrikeIron to raise a
fault.
An exception will be thrown when such a fault occurs. You should anticipate and catch these exceptions when making
method calls to the service:
1 $strikeIron = new ZendService\StrikeIron\StrikeIron(array('username' => 'your-username',
2 'password' => 'your-password'));
3

4 $taxBasic = $strikeIron->getService(array('class' => 'SalesUseTaxBasic'));

5

6 try {
7

8 $taxBasic->getTaxRateCanada(array('province' => 'ontario'));

9

10 } catch (ZendService\StrikeIron\Exception\RuntimeException $e) {

11

12 // error handling for events like connection

13 // problems or subscription errors
14

15 }

The exceptions thrown will always be ZendService\StrikeIron\Exception.

Its important to understand the difference between exceptions and normal failed method calls. Exceptions occur for
exceptional conditions, such as the network going down or your subscription expiring. Failed method calls that are a
common occurrence, such as getTaxRateCanada() not finding the province you supplied, will not result an
in exception.

Note: Every time you make a method call to a StrikeIron service, you should check the response object for validity
and also be prepared to catch an exception.

358.7 Checking Your Subscription

StrikeIron provides many different services. Some of these are free, some are available on a trial basis, and some are
pay subscription only. When using StrikeIron, its important to be aware of your subscription status for the services
you are using and check it regularly.
Each StrikeIron client returned by the getService() method has the ability to check the subscription status for
that service using the getSubscriptionInfo() method of the client:
1 // Get a client for the Sales & Use Tax Basic service
2 $strikeIron = new ZendService\StrikeIron\StrikeIron(array('username' => 'your-username',
3 'password' => 'your-password'));
4

5 $taxBasic = $strikeIron->getService(array('class => 'SalesUseTaxBasic'));

6

7 // Check remaining hits for the Sales & Use Tax Basic service

1638 Chapter 358. ZendService\StrikeIron

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

8 $subscription = $taxBasic->getSubscriptionInfo();
9 echo $subscription->remainingHits;

The getSubscriptionInfo() method will return an object that typically has a remainingHits property.
Its important to check the status on each service that you are using. If a method call is made to StrikeIron after the
remaining hits have been used up, an exception will occur.
Checking your subscription to a service does not use any remaining hits to the service. Each time any method
call to the service is made, the number of hits remaining will be cached and this cached value will be returned by
getSubscriptionInfo() without connecting to the service again. To force getSubscriptionInfo() to
override its cache and query the subscription information again, use getSubscriptionInfo(true).

358.7. Checking Your Subscription 1639

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1640 Chapter 358. ZendService\StrikeIron

 CHAPTER 359

ZendService\StrikeIron: Bundled Services

ZendService\StrikeIron\StrikeIron comes with wrapper classes for three popular StrikeIron services.

359.1 ZIP Code Information

ZendService\StrikeIron\ZipCodeInfo provides a client for StrikeIrons Zip Code Information Service.

For more information on this service, visit these StrikeIron resources:
Zip Code Information Service Page
Zip Code Information Service WSDL
The service contains a getZipCode() method that will retrieve information about a United States ZIP code or
Canadian postal code:
1 $strikeIron = new ZendService\StrikeIron\StrikeIron(array('username' => 'your-username',
2 'password' => 'your-password'));
3

4 // Get a client for the Zip Code Information service

5 $zipInfo = $strikeIron->getService(array('class' => 'ZipCodeInfo'));
6

7 // Get the Zip information for 95014

8 $response = $zipInfo->getZipCode(array('ZipCode' => 95014));
9 $zips = $response->serviceResult;
10

11 // Display the results

12 if ($zips->count == 0) {
13 echo 'No results found';
14 } else {
15 // a result with one single zip code is returned as an object,
16 // not an array with one element as one might expect.
17 if (! is_array($zips->zipCodes)) {
18 $zips->zipCodes = array($zips->zipCodes);
19 }
20

21 // print all of the possible results

22 foreach ($zips->zipCodes as $z) {
23 $info = $z->zipCodeInfo;
24

25 // show all properties

26 print_r($info);
27

28 // or just the city name

1641
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

29 echo $info->preferredCityName;
30 }
31 }
32

33 // Detailed status information

34 // http://www.strikeiron.com/exampledata/StrikeIronZipCodeInformation_v3.pdf
35 $status = $response->serviceStatus;

359.2 U.S. Address Verification

ZendService\StrikeIron\USAddressVerification provides a client for StrikeIrons U.S. Address Ver-

ification Service. For more information on this service, visit these StrikeIron resources:
U.S. Address Verification Service Page
U.S. Address Verification Service WSDL
The service contains a verifyAddressUSA() method that will verify an address in the United States:
1 $strikeIron = new ZendService\StrikeIron\StrikeIron(array('username' => 'your-username',
2 'password' => 'your-password'));
3

4 // Get a client for the Zip Code Information service

5 $verifier = $strikeIron->getService(array('class' => 'USAddressVerification'));
6

7 // Address to verify. Not all fields are required but

8 // supply as many as possible for the best results.
9 $address = array('firm' => 'Zend Technologies',
10 'addressLine1' => '19200 Stevens Creek Blvd',
11 'addressLine2' => '',
12 'city_state_zip' => 'Cupertino CA 95014');
13

14 // Verify the address

15 $result = $verifier->verifyAddressUSA($address);
16

17 // Display the results

18 if ($result->addressErrorNumber != 0) {
19 echo $result->addressErrorNumber;
20 echo $result->addressErrorMessage;
21 } else {
22 // show all properties
23 print_r($result);
24

25 // or just the firm name

26 echo $result->firm;
27

28 // valid address?
29 $valid = ($result->valid == 'VALID');
30 }

359.3 Sales & Use Tax Basic

ZendService\StrikeIron\SalesUseTaxBasic provides a client for StrikeIrons Sales & Use Tax Basic
service. For more information on this service, visit these StrikeIron resources:

1642 Chapter 359. ZendService\StrikeIron: Bundled Services

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Sales & Use Tax Basic Service Page

Sales & Use Tax Basic Service WSDL
The service contains two methods, getTaxRateUSA() and getTaxRateCanada(), that will retrieve sales and
use tax data for the United States and Canada, respectively.
1 $strikeIron = new ZendService\StrikeIron\StrikeIron(array('username' => 'your-username',
2 'password' => 'your-password'));
3

4 // Get a client for the Sales & Use Tax Basic service
5 $taxBasic = $strikeIron->getService(array('class' => 'SalesUseTaxBasic'));
6

7 // Query tax rate for Ontario, Canada

8 $rateInfo = $taxBasic->getTaxRateCanada(array('province' => 'foo'));
9 print_r($rateInfo); // show all properties
10 echo $rateInfo->GST; // or just the GST (Goods & Services Tax)
11

12 // Query tax rate for Cupertino, CA USA

13 $rateInfo = $taxBasic->getTaxRateUS(array('zip_code' => 95014));
14 print_r($rateInfo); // show all properties
15 echo $rateInfo->state_sales_tax; // or just the state sales tax

359.3. Sales & Use Tax Basic 1643

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1644 Chapter 359. ZendService\StrikeIron: Bundled Services

 CHAPTER 360

ZendService\StrikeIron: Advanced Uses

This section describes the more advanced uses of ZendService\StrikeIron\StrikeIron.

360.1 Using Services by WSDL

Some StrikeIron services may have a PHP wrapper class available, such as those described in Bundled Services.
However, StrikeIron offers hundreds of services and many of these may be usable even without creating a special
wrapper class.
To try a StrikeIron service that does not have a wrapper class available, give the wsdl option to getService()
instead of the class option:
1 $strikeIron = new ZendService\StrikeIron\StrikeIron(array('username' => 'your-username',
2 'password' => 'your-password'));
3

4 // Get a generic client to the Reverse Phone Lookup service

5 $phone = $strikeIron->getService(
6 array('wsdl' => 'http://ws.strikeiron.com/ReversePhoneLookup?WSDL')
7 );
8

9 $result = $phone->lookup(array('Number' => '(408) 253-8800'));

10 echo $result->listingName;
11

12 // Zend Technologies USA Inc

Using StrikeIron services from the WSDL will require at least some understanding of the WSDL files. StrikeIron
has many resources on its site to help with this. Also, Jan Schneider from the Horde project has written a small PHP
routine that will format a WSDL file into more readable HTML.
Please note that only the services described in the Bundled Services section are officially supported.

360.2 Viewing SOAP Transactions

All communication with StrikeIron is done using the SOAP extension. It is sometimes useful to view the XML ex-
changed with StrikeIron for debug purposes.
Every StrikeIron client (subclass of ZendService\StrikeIron\Base) contains a getSoapClient()
method to return the underlying instance of SOAPClient used to communicate with StrikeIron.

1645
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

PHPSOAPClient has a trace option that causes it to remember the XML exchanged during the last transaction.
ZendService\StrikeIron\StrikeIron does not enable the trace option by default but this can easily by
changed by specifying the options that will be passed to the SOAPClient constructor.
To view a SOAP transaction, call the getSoapClient() method to get the SOAPClient instance and then call
the appropriate methods like __getLastRequest() and __getLastRequest():
1 $strikeIron =
2 new ZendService\StrikeIron\StrikeIron(array('username' => 'your-username',
3 'password' => 'your-password',
4 'options' => array('trace' => true)));
5

6 // Get a client for the Sales & Use Tax Basic service
7 $taxBasic = $strikeIron->getService(array('class' => 'SalesUseTaxBasic'));
8

9 // Perform a method call

10 $taxBasic->getTaxRateCanada(array('province' => 'ontario'));
11

12 // Get SOAPClient instance and view XML

13 $soapClient = $taxBasic->getSoapClient();
14 echo $soapClient->__getLastRequest();
15 echo $soapClient->__getLastResponse();

1646 Chapter 360. ZendService\StrikeIron: Advanced Uses

 CHAPTER 361

ZendService\Technorati

361.1 Introduction

ZendService\Technorati\Technorati provides an easy, intuitive and object-oriented interface for using

the Technorati API. It provides access to all available Technorati API queries and returns the original XML response
as a friendly PHP object.
Technorati is one of the most popular blog search engines. The API interface enables developers to retrieve information
about a specific blog, search blogs matching a single tag or phrase and get information about a specific author (blogger).
For a full list of available queries please see the Technorati API documentation or the Available Technorati queries
section of this document.

361.2 Getting Started

Technorati requires a valid API key for usage. To get your own API Key you first need to create a new Technorati
account, then visit the API Key section.

Note: API Key limits

You can make up to 500 Technorati API calls per day, at no charge. Other usage limitations may apply, depending on
the current Technorati API license.

Once you have a valid API key, youre ready to start using ZendService\Technorati\Technorati.

361.3 Making Your First Query

In order to run a query, first you need a ZendService\Technorati\Technorati instance with a valid API
key. Then choose one of the available query methods, and call it providing required arguments.

Sending your first query

1 // create a new ZendService\Technorati\Technorati

2 // with a valid API_KEY
3 $technorati = new ZendService\Technorati\Technorati('VALID_API_KEY');
4

1647
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

5 // search Technorati for PHP keyword

6 $resultSet = $technorati->search('PHP');

Each query method accepts an array of optional parameters that can be used to refine your query.

Refining your query

1 // create a new ZendService\Technorati\Technorati

2 // with a valid API_KEY
3 $technorati = new ZendService\Technorati\Technorati('VALID_API_KEY');
4

5 // filter your query including only results

6 // with some authority (Results from blogs with a handful of links)
7 $options = array('authority' => 'a4');
8

9 // search Technorati for PHP keyword

10 $resultSet = $technorati->search('PHP', $options);

A ZendService\Technorati\Technorati instance is not a single-use object. That is, you dont need to
create a new instance for each query call; simply use your current ZendService\Technorati\Technorati
object as long as you need it.

Sending multiple queries with the same ZendServiceTechnoratiTechnorati instance

1 // create a new ZendService\Technorati\Technorati

2 // with a valid API_KEY
3 $technorati = new ZendService\Technorati\Technorati('VALID_API_KEY');
4

5 // search Technorati for PHP keyword

6 $search = $technorati->search('PHP');
7

8 // get top tags indexed by Technorati

9 $topTags = $technorati->topTags();

361.4 Consuming Results

You can get one of two types of result object in response to a query.
The first group is represented by ZendService\Technorati\*ResultSet objects. A result set object is ba-
sically a collection of result objects. It extends the basic ZendService\Technorati\ResultSet class and
implements the SeekableIterator PHP interface. The best way to consume a result set object is to loop over it
with the PHP foreach() statement.

Consuming a result set object

1 // create a new ZendService\Technorati\Technorati

2 // with a valid API_KEY
3 $technorati = new ZendService\Technorati\Technorati('VALID_API_KEY');
4

5 // search Technorati for PHP keyword

6 // $resultSet is an instance of ZendService\Technorati\SearchResultSet

1648 Chapter 361. ZendService\Technorati

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

7 $resultSet = $technorati->search('PHP');
8

9 // loop over all result objects

10 foreach ($resultSet as $result) {
11 // $result is an instance of ZendService\Technorati\SearchResult
12 }

Because ZendService\Technorati\ResultSet implements the SeekableIterator interface, you can

seek a specific result object using its position in the result collection.

Seeking a specific result set object

1 // create a new ZendService\Technorati\Technorati

2 // with a valid API_KEY
3 $technorati = new ZendService\Technorati\Technorati('VALID_API_KEY');
4

5 // search Technorati for PHP keyword

6 // $resultSet is an instance of ZendService\Technorati\SearchResultSet
7 $resultSet = $technorati->search('PHP');
8

9 // $result is an instance of ZendService\Technorati\SearchResult

10 $resultSet->seek(1);
11 $result = $resultSet->current();

Note: SeekableIterator works as an array and counts positions starting from index 0. Fetching position number
1 means getting the second result in the collection.

The second group is represented by special standalone result objects. ZendService\Technorati\GetInfoResult,

ZendService\Technorati\BlogInfoResult and ZendService\Technorati\KeyInfoResult
act as wrappers for additional objects, such as ZendService\Technorati\Author and
ZendService\Technorati\Weblog.

Consuming a standalone result object

1 // create a new ZendService\Technorati\Technorati

2 // with a valid API_KEY
3 $technorati = new ZendService\Technorati\Technorati('VALID_API_KEY');
4

5 // get info about weppos author

6 $result = $technorati->getInfo('weppos');
7

8 $author = $result->getAuthor();
9 echo '<h2>Blogs authored by ' . $author->getFirstName() . " " .
10 $author->getLastName() . '</h2>';
11 echo '<ol>';
12 foreach ($result->getWeblogs() as $weblog) {
13 echo '<li>' . $weblog->getName() . '</li>';
14 }
15 echo "</ol>";

Please read the ZendServiceTechnoratiTechnorati Classes section for further details about response classes.

361.4. Consuming Results 1649

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

361.5 Handling Errors

Each ZendService\Technorati\Technorati query method throws a

ZendService\Technorati\Exception exception on failure with a meaningful error message.
There are several reasons that may cause a ZendService\Technorati\Technorati query to fail.
ZendService\Technorati\Technorati validates all parameters for any query request. If a parameter is
invalid or it contains an invalid value, a new ZendService\Technorati\Exception exception is thrown. Ad-
ditionally, the Technorati API interface could be temporally unavailable, or it could return a response that is not well
formed.
You should always wrap a Technorati query with a try ... catch block.

Handling a Query Exception

1 $technorati = new ZendService\Technorati\Technorati('VALID_API_KEY');

2 try {
3 $resultSet = $technorati->search('PHP');
4 } catch(ZendService\Technorati\Exception $e) {
5 echo "An error occurred: " $e->getMessage();
6 }

361.6 Checking Your API Key Daily Usage

From time to time you probably will want to check your API key daily usage. By default Technorati limits your
API usage to 500 calls per day, and an exception is returned by ZendService\Technorati\Technorati
if you try to use it beyond this limit. You can get information about your API key usage using the
ZendService\Technorati\Technorati::keyInfo() method.
ZendService\Technorati\Technorati::keyInfo() returns a ZendService\Technorati\KeyInfoResult
object. For full details please see the API reference guide.

Getting API key daily usage information

1 $technorati = new ZendService\Technorati\Technorati('VALID_API_KEY');

2 $key = $technorati->keyInfo();
3

4 echo "API Key: " . $key->getApiKey() . "<br />";

5 echo "Daily Usage: " . $key->getApiQueries() . "/" .
6 $key->getMaxQueries() . "<br />";

361.7 Available Technorati Queries

ZendService\Technorati\Technorati provides support for the following queries:

Cosmos
Search
Tag
DailyCounts

1650 Chapter 361. ZendService\Technorati

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

TopTags
BlogInfo
BlogPostTags
GetInfo

361.7.1 Technorati Cosmos

Cosmos query lets you see what blogs are linking to a given URL. It returns a ZendServiceTechnoratiCosmosResultSet
object. For full details please see ZendService\Technorati\Technorati::cosmos() in the API reference
guide.

Cosmos Query

1 $technorati = new ZendService\Technorati\Technorati('VALID_API_KEY');

2 $resultSet = $technorati->cosmos('http://devzone.zend.com/');
3

4 echo "<p>Reading " . $resultSet->totalResults() .

5 " of " . $resultSet->totalResultsAvailable() .
6 " available results</p>";
7 echo "<ol>";
8 foreach ($resultSet as $result) {
9 echo "<li>" . $result->getWeblog()->getName() . "</li>";
10 }
11 echo "</ol>";

361.7.2 Technorati Search

The Search query lets you see what blogs contain a given search string. It returns a ZendServiceTechnoratiSearchRe-
sultSet object. For full details please see ZendService\Technorati\Technorati::search() in the API
reference guide.

Search Query

1 $technorati = new ZendService\Technorati\Technorati('VALID_API_KEY');

2 $resultSet = $technorati->search('zend framework');
3

4 echo "<p>Reading " . $resultSet->totalResults() .

5 " of " . $resultSet->totalResultsAvailable() .
6 " available results</p>";
7 echo "<ol>";
8 foreach ($resultSet as $result) {
9 echo "<li>" . $result->getWeblog()->getName() . "</li>";
10 }
11 echo "</ol>";

361.7.3 Technorati Tag

The Tag query lets you see what posts are associated with a given tag. It returns a ZendServiceTechnoratiTagResultSet
object. For full details please see ZendService\Technorati\Technorati::tag() in the API reference

361.7. Available Technorati Queries 1651

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

guide.

Tag Query

1 $technorati = new ZendService\Technorati\Technorati('VALID_API_KEY');

2 $resultSet = $technorati->tag('php');
3

4 echo "<p>Reading " . $resultSet->totalResults() .

5 " of " . $resultSet->totalResultsAvailable() .
6 " available results</p>";
7 echo "<ol>";
8 foreach ($resultSet as $result) {
9 echo "<li>" . $result->getWeblog()->getName() . "</li>";
10 }
11 echo "</ol>";

361.7.4 Technorati DailyCounts

The DailyCounts query provides daily counts of posts containing the queried keyword. It
returns a ZendServiceTechnoratiDailyCountsResultSet object. For full details please see
ZendService\Technorati\Technorati::dailyCounts() in the API reference guide.

DailyCounts Query

1 $technorati = new ZendService\Technorati\Technorati('VALID_API_KEY');

2 $resultSet = $technorati->dailyCounts('php');
3

4 foreach ($resultSet as $result) {

5 echo "<li>" . $result->getDate() .
6 "(" . $result->getCount() . ")</li>";
7 }
8 echo "</ol>";

361.7.5 Technorati TopTags

The TopTags query provides information on top tags indexed by Technorati. It returns a ZendServiceTechnoratiTagsRe-
sultSet object. For full details please see ZendService\Technorati\Technorati::topTags() in the API
reference guide.

TopTags Query

1 $technorati = new ZendService\Technorati\Technorati('VALID_API_KEY');

2 $resultSet = $technorati->topTags();
3

4 echo "<p>Reading " . $resultSet->totalResults() .

5 " of " . $resultSet->totalResultsAvailable() .
6 " available results</p>";
7 echo "<ol>";
8 foreach ($resultSet as $result) {
9 echo "<li>" . $result->getTag() . "</li>";

1652 Chapter 361. ZendService\Technorati

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

10 }
11 echo "</ol>";

361.7.6 Technorati BlogInfo

The BlogInfo query provides information on what blog, if any, is associated with a given
URL. It returns a ZendServiceTechnoratiBlogInfoResult object. For full details please see
ZendService\Technorati\Technorati::blogInfo() in the API reference guide.

BlogInfo Query

1 $technorati = new ZendService\Technorati\Technorati('VALID_API_KEY');

2 $result = $technorati->blogInfo('http://devzone.zend.com/');
3

4 echo '<h2><a href="' . (string) $result->getWeblog()->getUrl() . '">' .

5 $result->getWeblog()->getName() . '</a></h2>';

361.7.7 Technorati BlogPostTags

The BlogPostTags query provides information on the top tags used by a specific
blog. It returns a ZendServiceTechnoratiTagsResultSet object. For full details please see
ZendService\Technorati\Technorati::blogPostTags() in the API reference guide.

BlogPostTags Query

1 $technorati = new ZendService\Technorati\Technorati('VALID_API_KEY');

2 $resultSet = $technorati->blogPostTags('http://devzone.zend.com/');
3

4 echo "<p>Reading " . $resultSet->totalResults() .

5 " of " . $resultSet->totalResultsAvailable() .
6 " available results</p>";
7 echo "<ol>";
8 foreach ($resultSet as $result) {
9 echo "<li>" . $result->getTag() . "</li>";
10 }
11 echo "</ol>";

361.7.8 Technorati GetInfo

The GetInfo query tells you things that Technorati knows about a member. It returns a ZendServiceTechnoratiGet-
InfoResult object. For full details please see ZendService\Technorati\Technorati::getInfo() in the
API reference guide.

GetInfo Query

1 $technorati = new ZendService\Technorati\Technorati('VALID_API_KEY');

2 $result = $technorati->getInfo('weppos');
3

361.7. Available Technorati Queries 1653

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

4 $author = $result->getAuthor();
5 echo "<h2>Blogs authored by " . $author->getFirstName() . " " .
6 $author->getLastName() . "</h2>";
7 echo "<ol>";
8 foreach ($result->getWeblogs() as $weblog) {
9 echo "<li>" . $weblog->getName() . "</li>";
10 }
11 echo "</ol>";

361.7.9 Technorati KeyInfo

The KeyInfo query provides information on daily usage of an API key. It returns a ZendServiceTechnoratiKeyInfoRe-
sult object. For full details please see ZendService\Technorati\Technorati::keyInfo() in the API
reference guide.

361.8 ZendService\Technorati Classes

The following classes are returned by the various Technorati queries. Each
ZendService\Technorati\*ResultSet class holds a type-specific result set which can be eas-
ily iterated, with each result being contained in a type result object. All result set classes extend
ZendService\Technorati\ResultSet class and implement the SeekableIterator interface, al-
lowing for easy iteration and seeking to a specific result.
ZendServiceTechnoratiResultSet
ZendServiceTechnoratiCosmosResultSet
ZendServiceTechnoratiSearchResultSet
ZendServiceTechnoratiTagResultSet
ZendServiceTechnoratiDailyCountsResultSet
ZendServiceTechnoratiTagsResultSet
ZendServiceTechnoratiResult
ZendServiceTechnoratiCosmosResult
ZendServiceTechnoratiSearchResult
ZendServiceTechnoratiTagResult
ZendServiceTechnoratiDailyCountsResult
ZendServiceTechnoratiTagsResult
ZendServiceTechnoratiGetInfoResult
ZendServiceTechnoratiBlogInfoResult
ZendServiceTechnoratiKeyInfoResult

Note: ZendService\Technorati\GetInfoResult, ZendService\Technorati\BlogInfoResult

and ZendService\Technorati\KeyInfoResult represent exceptions to the above because they
dont belong to a result set and they dont implement any interface. They represent a single response ob-
ject and they act as a wrapper for additional ZendService\Technorati\Technorati objects, such as
ZendService\Technorati\Author and ZendService\Technorati\Weblog.

1654 Chapter 361. ZendService\Technorati

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

The ZendService\Technorati\Technorati library includes additional convenient classes representing spe-

cific response objects. ZendService\Technorati\Author represents a single Technorati account, also
known as a blog author or blogger. ZendService\Technorati\Weblog represents a single weblog ob-
ject, along with all specific weblog properties such as feed URLs or blog name. For full details please see
ZendService\Technorati\Technorati in the API reference guide.

361.8.1 ZendService\Technorati\ResultSet

ZendService\Technorati\ResultSet is the most essential result set. The scope of this class is to be ex-
tended by a query-specific child result set class, and it should never be used to initialize a standalone object. Each of
the specific result sets represents a collection of query-specific ZendServiceTechnoratiResult objects.
ZendService\Technorati\ResultSet implements the PHP SeekableIterator interface, and you can
iterate all result objects via the PHP foreach() statement.

Iterating result objects from a resultset collection

1 // run a simple query

2 $technorati = new ZendService\Technorati\Technorati('VALID_API_KEY');
3 $resultSet = $technorati->search('php');
4

5 // $resultSet is now an instance of

6 // ZendService\Technorati\SearchResultSet
7 // it extends ZendService\Technorati\ResultSet
8 foreach ($resultSet as $result) {
9 // do something with your
10 // ZendService\Technorati\SearchResult object
11 }

361.8.2 ZendService\Technorati\CosmosResultSet

ZendService\Technorati\CosmosResultSet represents a Technorati Cosmos query result set.

Note: ZendService\Technorati\CosmosResultSet extends ZendServiceTechnoratiResultSet.

361.8.3 ZendService\Technorati\SearchResultSet

ZendService\Technorati\SearchResultSet represents a Technorati Search query result set.

Note: ZendService\Technorati\SearchResultSet extends ZendServiceTechnoratiResultSet.

361.8.4 ZendService\Technorati\TagResultSet

ZendService\Technorati\TagResultSet represents a Technorati Tag query result set.

Note: ZendService\Technorati\TagResultSet extends ZendServiceTechnoratiResultSet.

361.8. ZendService\Technorati Classes 1655

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

361.8.5 ZendService\Technorati\DailyCountsResultSet

ZendService\Technorati\DailyCountsResultSet represents a Technorati DailyCounts query result set.

Note: ZendService\Technorati\DailyCountsResultSet extends ZendServiceTechnoratiResultSet.

361.8.6 ZendService\Technorati\TagsResultSet

ZendService\Technorati\TagsResultSet represents a Technorati TopTags or BlogPostTags queries result

set.

Note: ZendService\Technorati\TagsResultSet extends ZendServiceTechnoratiResultSet.

361.8.7 ZendService\Technorati\Result

ZendService\Technorati\Result is the most essential result object. The scope of this class is to be extended
by a query specific child result class, and it should never be used to initialize a standalone object.

361.8.8 ZendService\Technorati\CosmosResult

ZendService\Technorati\CosmosResult represents a single Technorati Cosmos query result object. It is

never returned as a standalone object, but it always belongs to a valid ZendServiceTechnoratiCosmosResultSet object.

Note: ZendService\Technorati\CosmosResult extends ZendServiceTechnoratiResult.

361.8.9 ZendService\Technorati\SearchResult

ZendService\Technorati\SearchResult represents a single Technorati Search query result object. It is

never returned as a standalone object, but it always belongs to a valid ZendServiceTechnoratiSearchResultSet object.

Note: ZendService\Technorati\SearchResult extends ZendServiceTechnoratiResult.

361.8.10 ZendService\Technorati\TagResult

ZendService\Technorati\TagResult represents a single Technorati Tag query result object. It is never

returned as a standalone object, but it always belongs to a valid ZendServiceTechnoratiTagResultSet object.

Note: ZendService\Technorati\TagResult extends ZendServiceTechnoratiResult.

361.8.11 ZendService\Technorati\DailyCountsResult

ZendService\Technorati\DailyCountsResult represents a single Technorati DailyCounts query result

object. It is never returned as a standalone object, but it always belongs to a valid ZendServiceTechnoratiDaily-
CountsResultSet object.

Note: ZendService\Technorati\DailyCountsResult extends ZendServiceTechnoratiResult.

1656 Chapter 361. ZendService\Technorati

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

361.8.12 ZendService\Technorati\TagsResult

ZendService\Technorati\TagsResult represents a single Technorati TopTags or BlogPostTags query result

object. It is never returned as a standalone object, but it always belongs to a valid ZendServiceTechnoratiTagsResultSet
object.

Note: ZendService\Technorati\TagsResult extends ZendServiceTechnoratiResult.

361.8.13 ZendService\Technorati\GetInfoResult

ZendService\Technorati\GetInfoResult represents a single Technorati GetInfo query result object.

361.8.14 ZendService\Technorati\BlogInfoResult

ZendService\Technorati\BlogInfoResult represents a single Technorati BlogInfo query result object.

361.8.15 ZendService\Technorati\KeyInfoResult

ZendService\Technorati\KeyInfoResult represents a single Technorati KeyInfo query result object. It

provides information about your Technorati API Key daily usage.

361.8. ZendService\Technorati Classes 1657

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1658 Chapter 361. ZendService\Technorati

 CHAPTER 362

ZendService\Twitter

362.1 Introduction

ZendService\Twitter\Twitter provides a client for the Twitter API.

ZendService\Twitter\Twitter allows you to query the public timeline. If you provide a username
and OAuth details for Twitter, or your access token and secret, it will allow you to get and update your status, reply to
friends, direct message friends, mark tweets as favorites, and much more.
ZendService\Twitter\Twitter wraps all web service operations, including OAuth, and all methods return
an instance of ZendService\Twitter\Response.
ZendService\Twitter\Twitter is broken up into subsections so you can easily identify which type of call is
being requested.
account allows you to check that your account credentials are valid
application allows you to check your API rate limits.
blocks blocks and unblocks users from following you.
directMessages retrieves the authenticated users received direct messages, deletes direct messages, and sends
new direct messages.
favorites lists, creates, and removes favorite tweets.
friendships creates and removes friendships for the authenticated user.
search allows you to search statuses for specific criteria.
statuses retrieves the public and user timelines and shows, updates, destroys, and retrieves replies for the au-
thenticated user.
users retrieves friends and followers for the authenticated user and returns extended information about a passed
user.

362.2 Quick Start

To get started, first youll need to either create a new application with Twitter, or get the details of an existing one you
control. To do this:
Go to https://dev.twitter.com/ and sign in.
Go to https://dev.twitter.com/apps
Either create a new application, or select an existing one.

1659
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

On the applications settings page, grab the following information:

From the header OAuth settings, grab the Consumer key and Consumer secret values.
From the header Your access token, grab the Access token and Access token secret values.
Armed with this information, you can now configure and create your
ZendService\Twitter\Twitter\Twitter instance:
1 $config = array(
2 'access_token' => array(
3 'token' => 'twitter-access-token-here',
4 'secret' => 'twitter-access-secret-here',
5 ),
6 'oauth_options' => array(
7 'consumerKey' => 'twitter-consumer-key-here',
8 'consumerSecret' => 'twitter-consumer-secret-here',
9 ),
10 'http_client_options' => array(
11 'adapter' => 'Zend\Http\Client\Adapter\Curl',
12 'curloptions' => array(
13 CURLOPT_SSL_VERIFYHOST => false,
14 CURLOPT_SSL_VERIFYPEER => false,
15 ),
16 ),
17 );
18

19 $twitter = new Twitter($config);

Make sure you substitute the values you discovered earlier in the configuration before attempting to connect.

Note: Twitter has a known issue with the SSL certificate for their API endpoints, which requires that you use insecure
settings for the SSL certificate verification.

Once you have the client configured, you can start consuming it:
1 // Verify your credentials:
2 $response = $twitter->account->verifyCredentials();
3 if (!$response->isSuccess()) {
4 die('Something is wrong with my credentials!');
5 }
6

7 // Search for something:

8 $response = $twitter->search->tweets('#zf2');
9 foreach ($response->toValue() as $tweet) {
10 printf("%s\n- (%s)\n", $tweet->text, $tweet->user->name);
11 }
12

13 // Tweet something:
14 $twitter->statuses->update('Hello world!');

Every action you take returns a ZendService\Twitter\Twitter\Response object. This object contains
some general purpose methods for determining the status of the response (isSuccess(), isError()), and oth-
erwise acts as a value object containing the data returned. Essentially, if the response returns an object, you will be
able to access the members listed by the Twitter API documentation. In the case of responses that return arrays, such
as the $twitter->search->tweets() example shown earlier, you should use the toValue() method of the
response to retrieve the array.
If you wish to dive in more into how authentication works, and what methods are exposed, keep reading!

1660 Chapter 362. ZendService\Twitter

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

362.3 Authentication

With the exception of fetching the public timeline, ZendService\Twitter\Twitter requires authentication as
a valid user. This is achieved using the OAuth authentication protocol. OAuth is the only supported authentication
mode for Twitter as of August 2010. The OAuth implementation used by ZendService\Twitter\Twitter is
ZendOAuth.

Creating the Twitter Class

ZendService\Twitter\Twitter must authorize itself, on behalf of a user, before use with the Twitter API
(except for public timeline). This must be accomplished using OAuth since Twitter has disabled its basic HTTP
authentication as of August 2010.
There are two options to establishing authorization. The first is to implement the workflow of ZendOAuth
via ZendService\Twitter\Twitter which proxies to an internal ZendOAuth\Consumer object.
Please refer to the ZendOAuth documentation for a full example of this workflow - you can call all
documented ZendOAuth\Consumer methods on ZendService\Twitter\Twitter including construc-
tor options. You may also use ZendOAuth directly and only pass the resulting access token into
ZendService\Twitter\Twitter. This is the normal workflow once you have established a reusable access
token for a particular Twitter user. The resulting OAuth access token should be stored to a database for future use
(otherwise you will need to authorize for every new instance of ZendService\Twitter\Twitter). Bear in
mind that authorization via OAuth results in your user being redirected to Twitter to give their consent to the requested
authorization (this is not repeated for stored access tokens). This will require additional work (i.e. redirecting users
and hosting a callback URL) over the previous HTTP authentication mechanism where a user just needed to allow
applications to store their username and password.
The following example demonstrates setting up ZendService\Twitter\Twitter which is given an already
established OAuth access token. Please refer to the ZendOAuth documentation to understand the workflow involved.
The access token is a serializable object, so you may store the serialized object to a database, and unserialize it at re-
trieval time before passing the objects into ZendService\Twitter\Twitter. The ZendOAuth documentation
demonstrates the workflow and objects involved.
1 /**
2 * We assume $serializedToken is the serialized token retrieved from a database
3 * or even $_SESSION (if following the simple ZendOAuth documented example)
4 */
5 $token = unserialize($serializedToken);
6

7 $twitter = new ZendService\Twitter\Twitter(array(

8 'accessToken' => $token,
9 'oauth_options' => array(
10 'username' => 'johndoe',
11 ),
12 ));
13

14 // verify user's credentials with Twitter

15 $response = $twitter->account->verifyCredentials();

Note: In order to authenticate with Twitter, ALL applications MUST be registered with Twitter in order to receive
a Consumer Key and Consumer Secret to be used when authenticating with OAuth. This can not be reused across
multiple applications - you must register each new application separately. Twitter access tokens have no expiry date,
so storing them to a database is advised (they can, of course, be refreshed simply be repeating the OAuth authorization
process). This can only be done while interacting with the user associated with that access token.
The previous pre-OAuth version of ZendService\Twitter\Twitter allowed passing in a username as the first

362.3. Authentication 1661

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

parameter rather than within an array. This is no longer supported.

If you have registered an application with Twitter, you can also use the access token and access token secret they
provide you in order to setup the OAuth consumer. This can be done as follows:
1 $twitter = new ZendService\Twitter\Twitter(array(
2 'access_token' => array( // or use "accessToken" as the key; both work
3 'token' => 'your-access-token',
4 'secret' => 'your-access-token-secret',
5 ),
6 'oauth_options' => array( // or use "oauthOptions" as the key; both work
7 'consumerKey' => 'your-consumer-key',
8 'consumerSecret' => 'your-consumer-secret',
9 ),
10 ));

If desired, you can also specify a specific HTTP client instance to use, or provide configuration for the HTTP client. To
provide the HTTP client, use the http_client or httpClient key, and provide an instance. To provide HTTP
client configuration for setting up an instance, use the key http_client_options or httpClientOptions.
As a full example:
1 $twitter = new ZendService\Twitter\Twitter(array(
2 'access_token' => array( // or use "accessToken" as the key; both work
3 'token' => 'your-access-token',
4 'secret' => 'your-access-token-secret',
5 ),
6 'oauth_options' => array( // or use "oauthOptions" as the key; both work
7 'consumerKey' => 'your-consumer-key',
8 'consumerSecret' => 'your-consumer-secret',
9 ),
10 'http_client_options' => array(
11 'adapter' => 'Zend_Http\Client\Adapter\Curl',
12 ),
13 ));

362.4 Account Methods

Verifying credentials

verifyCredentials() tests if supplied user credentials are valid with minimal overhead.
1 $twitter = new ZendService\Twitter\Twitter($options);
2 $response = $twitter->account->verifyCredentials();

362.5 Application Methods

Rating limit status

rateLimitStatus() returns the remaining number of API requests available to the authenticating user before
the API limit is reached for the current hour.

1662 Chapter 362. ZendService\Twitter

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1 $twitter = new ZendService\Twitter\Twitter($options);

2 $response = $twitter->application->rateLimitStatus();
3 $userTimelineLimit = $response->resources->statuses->{'/statuses/user_timeline'}->remaining;

362.6 Blocking Methods

Blocking a user

create() blocks the user specified in the id parameter as the authenticating user and destroys a friendship
to the blocked user if one exists. Returns the blocked user in the requested format when successful.
1 $twitter = new ZendService\Twitter\Twitter($options);
2 $response = $twitter->blocks->create('usertoblock');

Removing a block

destroy() un-blocks the user specified in the id parameter for the authenticating user. Returns the un-
blocked user in the requested format when successful.
1 $twitter = new ZendService\Twitter\Twitter($options);
2 $response = $twitter->blocks->destroy('blockeduser');

ids() returns an array of user identifiers that the authenticating user is blocking.

Who are you blocking (identifiers only)

1 $twitter = new ZendService\Twitter\Twitter($options);

2 $response = $twitter->blocks->ids();

Who are you blocking

list() returns an array of user objects that the authenticating user is blocking.
1 $twitter = new ZendService\Twitter\Twitter($options);
2 $response = $twitter->blocks->list();

362.7 Direct Message Methods

Retrieving recent direct messages received

messages() returns a list of the 20 most recent direct messages sent to the authenticating user.
1 $twitter = new ZendService\Twitter\Twitter($options);
2 $response = $twitter->directMessages->messages();

The message() method accepts an array of optional parameters to modify the query.
since_id narrows the returned results to just those statuses after the specified identifier (up to 24 hours old).

362.6. Blocking Methods 1663

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

max_id narrows the returned results to just those statuses earlier than the specified identifier.
count specifies the number of statuses to return, up to 200.
skip_status, when set to boolean true, t, or 1 will skip including a users most recent status in the results.
include_entities controls whether or not entities, which includes URLs, mentioned users, and hashtags, will be
returned.

Retrieving recent direct messages sent

sent() returns a list of the 20 most recent direct messages sent by the authenticating user.
1 $twitter = new ZendService\Twitter\Twitter($options);
2 $response = $twitter->directMessages->sent();

The sent() method accepts an array of optional parameters to modify the query.
count specifies the number of statuses to return, up to 20.
page specifies the page of results to return, based on the count provided.
since_id narrows the returned results to just those statuses after the specified identifier (up to 24 hours old).
max_id narrows the returned results to just those statuses earlier than the specified identifier.
include_entities controls whether or not entities, which includes URLs, mentioned users, and hashtags, will be
returned.

Sending a direct message

new() sends a new direct message to the specified user from the authenticating user. Requires both the user and text
parameters below.
1 $twitter = new ZendService\Twitter\Twitter($options);
2 $response = $twitter->directMessages->new('myfriend', 'mymessage');

destroy() destroys the direct message specified in the required id parameter. The authenticating user must
be the recipient of the specified direct message.

Deleting a direct message

1 $twitter = new ZendService\Twitter\Twitter($options);

2 $response = $twitter->directMessages->destroy(123548);

362.8 Favorites Methods

Retrieving favorites

list() returns the 20 most recent favorite statuses for the authenticating user or user specified by the id parameter.
1 $twitter = new ZendService\Twitter\Twitter($options);
2 $response = $twitter->favorites->list();

The list() method accepts an array of optional parameters to modify the query.

1664 Chapter 362. ZendService\Twitter

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

user_id specifies the ID of the user for whom to return the timeline.
screen_name specifies the screen name of the user for whom to return the timeline.
since_id narrows the returned results to just those statuses after the specified identifier (up to 24 hours old).
max_id narrows the returned results to just those statuses earlier than the specified identifier.
count specifies the number of statuses to return, up to 200.
include_entities controls whether or not entities, which includes URLs, mentioned users, and hashtags, will be
returned.

Creating favorites

create() favorites the status specified in the id parameter as the authenticating user.
1 $twitter = new ZendService\Twitter\Twitter($options);
2 $response = $twitter->favorites->create(12351);

Deleting a favorite

destroy() un-favorites the status specified in the id parameter as the authenticating user.
1 $twitter = new ZendService\Twitter\Twitter($options);
2 $response = $twitter->favorites->destroy(12351);

362.9 Friendship Methods

Creating a friend

create() befriends the user specified in the id parameter with the authenticating user.
1 $twitter = new ZendService\Twitter\Twitter($options);
2 $response = $twitter->friendships->create('mynewfriend');

Deleting a friend

destroy() discontinues friendship with the user specified in the id parameter and the authenticating user.
1 $twitter = new ZendService\Twitter\Twitter($options);
2 $response = $twitter->friendships->destroy('myoldfriend');

362.10 Search Methods

Searching for tweets

tweets() returns a list of tweets matching the criteria specified in $query. By default, 15 will be returned, but this
value may be changed using the count option.

362.9. Friendship Methods 1665

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1 $twitter = new ZendService\Twitter\Twitter($options);

2 $response = $twitter->search->tweets('#zendframework');

The tweets() method accepts an optional second argument, array of optional parameters to modify the query.
since_id narrows the returned results to just those statuses after the specified identifier (up to 24 hours old).
max_id narrows the returned results to just those statuses earlier than the specified identifier.
count specifies the number of statuses to return, up to 200.
include_entities controls whether or not entities, which includes URLs, mentioned users, and hashtags, will be
returned.
lang indicates which two-letter language code to restrict results to.
locale indicates which two-letter language code is being used in the query.
geocode can be used to indicate the geographical radius in which tweets should originate; the string should be
in the form latitude,longitude,radius, with radius being a unit followed by one of mi or km.
result_type indicates what type of results to retrieve, and should be one of mixed, recent, or popular.
until can be used to specify a the latest date for which to return tweets.

362.11 Status Methods

Retrieving the public timeline

sample() returns the 20 most recent statuses from non-protected users with a custom user icon. The public timeline
is cached by Twitter for 60 seconds.
1 $twitter = new ZendService\Twitter\Twitter($options);
2 $response = $twitter->statuses->sample();

Retrieving the home timeline

homeTimeline() returns the 20 most recent statuses posted by the authenticating user and that users friends.
1 $twitter = new ZendService\Twitter\Twitter($options);
2 $response = $twitter->statuses->homeTimeline();

The homeTimeline() method accepts an array of optional parameters to modify the query.
since_id narrows the returned results to just those statuses after the specified identifier (up to 24 hours old).
max_id narrows the returned results to just those statuses earlier than the specified identifier.
count specifies the number of statuses to return, up to 200.
trim_user, when set to boolean true, t, or 1, will list the author identifier only in embedded user objects in the
statuses returned.
contributor_details, when set to boolean true, will return the screen name of any contributors to a status (instead
of only the contributor identifier).
include_entities controls whether or not entities, which includes URLs, mentioned users, and hashtags, will be
returned.
exclude_replies controls whether or not status updates that are in reply to other statuses will be returned.

1666 Chapter 362. ZendService\Twitter

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Retrieving the user timeline

userTimeline() returns the 20 most recent statuses posted from the authenticating user.
1 $twitter = new ZendService\Twitter\Twitter($options);
2 $response = $twitter->statuses->userTimeline();

The userTimeline() method accepts an array of optional parameters to modify the query.
user_id specifies the ID of the user for whom to return the timeline.
screen_name specifies the screen name of the user for whom to return the timeline.
since_id narrows the returned results to just those statuses after the specified identifier (up to 24 hours old).
max_id narrows the returned results to just those statuses earlier than the specified identifier.
count specifies the number of statuses to return, up to 200.
trim_user, when set to boolean true, t, or 1, will list the author identifier only in embedded user objects in the
statuses returned.
contributor_details, when set to boolean true, will return the screen name of any contributors to a status (instead
of only the contributor identifier).
include_rts controls whether or not to include native retweets in the returned list.
exclude_replies controls whether or not status updates that are in reply to other statuses will be returned.

Showing user status

show() returns a single status, specified by the id parameter below. The status author will be returned inline.
1 $twitter = new ZendService\Twitter\Twitter($options);
2 $response = $twitter->statuses->show(1234);

Updating user status

update() updates the authenticating users status. This method requires that you pass in the status update that you
want to post to Twitter.
1 $twitter = new ZendService\Twitter\Twitter($options);
2 $response = $twitter->statuses->update('My Great Tweet');

The update() method accepts a second additional parameter.

inReplyTo_StatusId specifies the ID of an existing status that the status to be posted is in reply to.

Showing user replies

mentionsTimeline() returns the 20 most recent @replies (status updates prefixed with @username) for the
authenticating user.
1 $twitter = new ZendService\Twitter\Twitter($options);
2 $response = $twitter->statuses->mentionsTimeline();

The mentionsTimeline() method accepts an array of optional parameters to modify the query.
since_id narrows the returned results to just those statuses after the specified identifier (up to 24 hours old).

362.11. Status Methods 1667

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

max_id narrows the returned results to just those statuses earlier than the specified identifier.
count specifies the number of statuses to return, up to 200.
trim_user, when set to boolean true, t, or 1, will list the author identifier only in embedded user objects in the
statuses returned.
contributor_details, when set to boolean true, will return the screen name of any contributors to a status (instead
of only the contributor identifier).
include_entities controls whether or not entities, which includes URLs, mentioned users, and hashtags, will be
returned.

Deleting user status

destroy() destroys the status specified by the required id parameter.

1 $twitter = new ZendService\Twitter\Twitter($options);
2 $response = $twitter->statuses->destroy(12345);

362.12 User Methods

Showing user information

show() returns extended information of a given user, specified by ID or screen name as per the required id parameter
below.
1 $twitter = new ZendService\Twitter\Twitter($options);
2 $response = $twitter->users->show('myfriend');

Searching for users

search() will search for users matching the query provided.

1 $twitter = new ZendService\Twitter\Twitter($options);
2 $response = $twitter->users->search('Zend');

The search() method accepts an array of optional parameters to modify the query.
count specifies the number of statuses to return, up to 20.
page specifies the page of results to return, based on the count provided.
include_entities controls whether or not entities, which includes URLs, mentioned users, and hashtags,
will be returned.

1668 Chapter 362. ZendService\Twitter

 CHAPTER 363

ZendService\WindowsAzure

363.1 Introduction

Windows Azure is the name for Microsofts Software + Services platform, an operating system in the cloud providing
services for hosting, management, scalable storage with support for simple blobs, tables, and queues, as well as a
management infrastructure for provisioning and geo-distribution of cloud-based services, and a development platform
for the Azure Services layer.

363.2 Installing the Windows Azure SDK

There are two development scenarios when working with Windows Azure.
You can develop your application using ZendService\WindowsAzure\WindowsAzure and the Win-
dows Azure SDK, which provides a local development environment of the services provided by Windows
Azures cloud infrastructure.
You can develop your application using ZendService\WindowsAzure\WindowsAzure, working di-
rectly with the Windows Azure cloud infrastructure.
The first case requires you to install the Windows Azure SDK on your development machine. It is currently only
available for Windows environments; progress is being made on a Java-based version of the SDK which can run on
any platform.
The latter case requires you to have an account at Azure.com.

363.3 API Documentation

The ZendService\WindowsAzure\WindowsAzure class provides the PHP wrapper to the Windows Azure
REST interface. Please consult the REST documentation for detailed description of the service. You will need to be
familiar with basic concepts in order to use this service.

363.4 Features

ZendService\WindowsAzure\WindowsAzure provides the following functionality:

PHP classes for Windows Azure Blobs, Tables and Queues (for CRUD operations)

1669
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Helper Classes for HTTP transport, AuthN, AuthZ, REST and Error Management
Manageability, Instrumentation and Logging support

363.5 Architecture

ZendService\WindowsAzure\WindowsAzure provides access to Windows Azures storage, computation and

management interfaces by abstracting the REST-XML interface Windows Azure provides into a simple PHP API.
An application built using ZendService\WindowsAzure\WindowsAzure can access Windows Azures fea-
tures, no matter if it is hosted on the Windows Azure platform or on an in-premise web server.
orphan

1670 Chapter 363. ZendService\WindowsAzure

 CHAPTER 364

ZendService\WindowsAzure\Storage\Blob

Blob Storage stores sets of binary data. Blob storage offers the following three resources: the storage account, con-
tainers, and blobs. Within your storage account, containers provide a way to organize sets of blobs within your storage
account.
Blob Storage is offered by Windows Azure as a REST API which is wrapped by the
ZendService\WindowsAzure\Storage\Blob class in order to provide a native PHP interface to the
storage account.

364.1 API Examples

This topic lists some examples of using the ZendService\WindowsAzure\Storage\Blob class. Other fea-
tures are available in the download package, as well as a detailed API documentation of those features.

364.1.1 Creating a storage container

Using the following code, a blob storage container can be created on development storage.

Creating a storage container

1 $storageClient = new ZendService\WindowsAzure\Storage\Blob();

2 $result = $storageClient->createContainer('testcontainer');
3

4 echo 'Container name is: ' . $result->Name;

364.1.2 Deleting a storage container

Using the following code, a blob storage container can be removed from development storage.

Deleting a storage container

1 $storageClient = new ZendService\WindowsAzure\Storage\Blob();

2 $storageClient->deleteContainer('testcontainer');

1671
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

364.1.3 Storing a blob

Using the following code, a blob can be uploaded to a blob storage container on development storage. Note that the
container has already been created before.

Storing a blob

1 $storageClient = new ZendService\WindowsAzure\Storage\Blob();

2

3 // upload /home/maarten/example.txt to Azure

4 $result = $storageClient->putBlob(
5 'testcontainer', 'example.txt', '/home/maarten/example.txt'
6 );
7

8 echo 'Blob name is: ' . $result->Name;

364.1.4 Copying a blob

Using the following code, a blob can be copied from inside the storage account. The advantage of using this method is
that the copy operation occurs in the Azure cloud and does not involve downloading the blob. Note that the container
has already been created before.

Copying a blob

1 $storageClient = new ZendService\WindowsAzure\Storage\Blob();

2

3 // copy example.txt to example2.txt

4 $result = $storageClient->copyBlob(
5 'testcontainer', 'example.txt', 'testcontainer', 'example2.txt'
6 );
7

8 echo 'Copied blob name is: ' . $result->Name;

364.1.5 Downloading a blob

Using the following code, a blob can be downloaded from a blob storage container on development storage. Note that
the container has already been created before and a blob has been uploaded.

Downloading a blob

1 $storageClient = new ZendService\WindowsAzure\Storage\Blob();

2

3 // download file to /home/maarten/example.txt

4 $storageClient->getBlob(
5 'testcontainer', 'example.txt', '/home/maarten/example.txt'
6 );

1672 Chapter 364. ZendService\WindowsAzure\Storage\Blob

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

364.1.6 Making a blob publicly available

By default, blob storage containers on Windows Azure are protected from public viewing. If any user on the Internet
should have access to a blob container, its ACL can be set to public. Note that this applies to a complete container and
not to a single blob!
Using the following code, blob storage container ACL can be set on development storage. Note that the container has
already been created before.

Making a blob publicly available

1 $storageClient = new ZendService\WindowsAzure\Storage\Blob();

2

3 // make container publicly available

4 $storageClient->setContainerAcl(
5 'testcontainer',
6 ZendService\WindowsAzure\Storage\Blob::ACL_PUBLIC
7 );

364.2 Root container

Windows Azure Blob Storage provides support to work with a root container. This means that a blob can be stored
in the root of your storage account, i.e. http://myaccount.blob.core.windows.net/somefile.txt.
In order to work with the root container, it should first be created using the createContainer() method, naming
the container $root. All other operations on the root container should be issued with the container name set to
$root.

364.3 Blob storage stream wrapper

The Windows Azure SDK for PHP provides support for registering a blob storage client as a PHP file stream wrapper.
The blob storage stream wrapper provides support for using regular file operations on Windows Azure Blob Storage.
For example, one can open a file from Windows Azure Blob Storage with the fopen() function:

Example usage of blob storage stream wrapper

1 $fileHandle = fopen('azure://mycontainer/myfile.txt', 'r');

2

3 // ...
4

5 fclose($fileHandle);

In order to do this, the Windows Azure SDK for PHP blob storage client must be registered as a stream wrapper. This
can be done by calling the registerStreamWrapper() method:

Registering the blob storage stream wrapper

364.2. Root container 1673

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1 $storageClient = new ZendService\WindowsAzure\Storage\Blob();

2 // registers azure:// on this storage client
3 $storageClient->registerStreamWrapper();
4

6 // or:
7

8 // registers blob:// on this storage client

9 $storageClient->registerStreamWrapper('blob://');

To unregister the stream wrapper, the unregisterStreamWrapper() method can be used.

364.4 Shared Access Signature

Windows Azure Bob Storage provides a feature called Shared Access Signatures. By default, there is only one level
of authorization possible in Windows Azure Blob Storage: either a container is private or it is public. Shared Access
Signatures provide a more granular method of authorization: read, write, delete and list permissions can be assigned
on a container or a blob and given to a specific client using an URL-based model.
An example would be the following signature:
http://phpstorage.blob.core.windows.net/phpazuretestshared1?st=2009-08-17T09%3A06%3A17Z&se=2009-08-17

The above signature gives write access to the phpazuretestshared1 container of the phpstorage account.

364.4.1 Generating a Shared Access Signature

When you are the owner of a Windows Azure Bob Storage account, you can create and distribute a shared access
key for any type of resource in your account. To do this, the generateSharedAccessUrl() method of the
ZendService\WindowsAzure\Storage\Blob storage client can be used.
The following example code will generate a Shared Access Signature for write access in a container named con-
tainer1, within a timeframe of 3000 seconds.

Generating a Shared Access Signature for a container

1 $storageClient = new ZendService\WindowsAzure\Storage\Blob();

2 $sharedAccessUrl = $storageClient->generateSharedAccessUrl(
3 'container1',
4 '',
5 'c',
6 'w',
7 $storageClient ->isoDate(time() - 500),
8 $storageClient ->isoDate(time() + 3000)
9 );

The following example code will generate a Shared Access Signature for read access in a blob named test.txt in
a container named container1 within a time frame of 3000 seconds.

1674 Chapter 364. ZendService\WindowsAzure\Storage\Blob

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Generating a Shared Access Signature for a blob

1 $storageClient = new ZendService\WindowsAzure\Storage\Blob();

2 $sharedAccessUrl = $storageClient->generateSharedAccessUrl(
3 'container1',
4 'test.txt',
5 'b',
6 'r',
7 $storageClient ->isoDate(time() - 500),
8 $storageClient ->isoDate(time() + 3000)
9 );

364.4.2 Working with Shared Access Signatures from others

When you receive a Shared Access Signature from someone else, you can use the Windows Azure SDK for PHP to
work with the addressed resource. For example, the following signature can be retrieved from the owner of a storage
account:
http://phpstorage.blob.core.windows.net/phpazuretestshared1?st=2009-08-17T09%3A06%3A17Z&se=2009-08-17

The above signature gives write access to the phpazuretestshared1 container of the phpstorage account. Since
the shared key for the account is not known, the Shared Access Signature can be used to work with the authorized
resource.

Consuming a Shared Access Signature for a container

1 $storageClient = new ZendService\WindowsAzure\Storage\Blob(

2 'blob.core.windows.net', 'phpstorage', ''
3 );
4 $storageClient->setCredentials(
5 new ZendService\WindowsAzure\Credentials\SharedAccessSignature()
6 );
7 $storageClient->getCredentials()->setPermissionSet(array(
8 'http://phpstorage.blob.core.windows.net/phpazuretestshared1?st=2009-08-17T09%3A06%3A17Z&se=2009-
9 ));
10 $storageClient->putBlob(
11 'phpazuretestshared1', 'NewBlob.txt', 'C:\Files\dataforazure.txt'
12 );

Note that there was no explicit permission to write to a specific blob. Instead, the Windows Azure SDK for PHP
determined that a permission was required to either write to that specific blob, or to write to its container. Since only a
signature was available for the latter, the Windows Azure SDK for PHP chose those credentials to perform the request
on Windows Azure blob storage.
orphan

364.4. Shared Access Signature 1675

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1676 Chapter 364. ZendService\WindowsAzure\Storage\Blob

 CHAPTER 365

ZendService\WindowsAzure\Storage\Table

The Table service offers structured storage in the form of tables.

Table Storage is offered by Windows Azure as a REST API which is wrapped by the
ZendService\WindowsAzure\Storage\Table class in order to provide a native PHP interface to the
storage account.
This topic lists some examples of using the ZendService\WindowsAzure\Storage\Table class. Other
features are available in the download package, as well as a detailed API documentation of those features.
Note that development table storage (in the Windows Azure SDK) does not support all features provided by the API.
Therefore, the examples listed on this page are to be used on Windows Azure production table storage.

365.1 Operations on tables

This topic lists some samples of operations that can be executed on tables.

365.1.1 Creating a table

Using the following code, a table can be created on Windows Azure production table storage.

Creating a table

1 $storageClient = new ZendService\WindowsAzure\Storage\Table(

2 'table.core.windows.net', 'myaccount', 'myauthkey'
3 );
4 $result = $storageClient->createTable('testtable');
5

6 echo 'New table name is: ' . $result->Name;

365.1.2 Listing all tables

Using the following code, a list of all tables in Windows Azure production table storage can be queried.

1677
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Listing all tables

1 $storageClient = new ZendService\WindowsAzure\Storage\Table(

2 'table.core.windows.net', 'myaccount', 'myauthkey'
3 );
4 $result = $storageClient->listTables();
5 foreach ($result as $table) {
6 echo 'Table name is: ' . $table->Name . "\r\n";
7 }

365.2 Operations on entities

Tables store data as collections of entities. Entities are similar to rows. An entity has a primary key and a set of
properties. A property is a named, typed-value pair, similar to a column.
The Table service does not enforce any schema for tables, so two entities in the same table may have different sets of
properties. Developers may choose to enforce a schema on the client side. A table may contain any number of entities.
ZendService\WindowsAzure\Storage\Table provides 2 ways of working with entities:
Enforced schema
No enforced schema
All examples will make use of the following enforced schema class.

Enforced schema used in samples

1 class SampleEntity extends ZendService\WindowsAzure\Storage\TableEntity

2 {
3 /**
4 * @azure Name
5 */
6 public $Name;
7

8 /**
9 * @azure Age Edm.Int64
10 */
11 public $Age;
12

13 /**
14 * @azure Visible Edm.Boolean
15 */
16 public $Visible = false;
17 }

Note that if no schema class is passed into table storage methods, ZendService\WindowsAzure\Storage\Table
automatically works with ZendService\WindowsAzure\Storage\DynamicTableEntity.

365.2.1 Enforced schema entities

To enforce a schema on the client side using the ZendService\WindowsAzure\Storage\Table class, you
can create a class which inherits ZendService\WindowsAzure\Storage\TableEntity. This class pro-

1678 Chapter 365. ZendService\WindowsAzure\Storage\Table

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

vides some basic functionality for the ZendService\WindowsAzure\Storage\Table class to work with a
client-side schema.
Base properties provided by ZendService\WindowsAzure\Storage\TableEntity are:
PartitionKey (exposed through getPartitionKey() and setPartitionKey())
RowKey (exposed through getRowKey() and setRowKey())
Timestamp (exposed through getTimestamp() and setTimestamp())
Etag value (exposed through getEtag() and setEtag())
Heres a sample class inheriting ZendService\WindowsAzure\Storage\TableEntity:

Sample enforced schema class

1 class SampleEntity extends ZendService\WindowsAzure\Storage\TableEntity

2 {
3 /**
4 * @azure Name
5 */
6 public $Name;
7

8 /**
9 * @azure Age Edm.Int64
10 */
11 public $Age;
12

13 /**
14 * @azure Visible Edm.Boolean
15 */
16 public $Visible = false;
17 }

The ZendService\WindowsAzure\Storage\Table class will map any class inherited from

ZendService\WindowsAzure\Storage\TableEntity to Windows Azure table storage entities with
the correct data type and property name. All there is to storing a property in Windows Azure is adding a docblock
comment to a public property or public getter/setter, in the following format:

Enforced property

1 /**
2 * @azure <property name in Windows Azure> <optional property type>
3 */
4 public $<property name in PHP>;

Lets see how to define a property Age as an integer on Windows Azure table storage:

Sample enforced property

1 /**
2 * @azure Age Edm.Int64
3 */
4 public $Age;

365.2. Operations on entities 1679

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Note that a property does not necessarily have to be named the same on Windows Azure table storage. The Windows
Azure table storage property name can be defined as well as the type.
The following data types are supported:
Edm.Binary- An array of bytes up to 64 KB in size.
Edm.Boolean- A boolean value.
Edm.DateTime- A 64-bit value expressed as Coordinated Universal Time (UTC). The supported DateTime
range begins from 12:00 midnight, January 1, 1601 A.D. (C.E.), Coordinated Universal Time (UTC). The range
ends at December 31st, 9999.
Edm.Double- A 64-bit floating point value.
Edm.Guid- A 128-bit globally unique identifier.
Edm.Int32- A 32-bit integer.
Edm.Int64- A 64-bit integer.
Edm.String- A UTF-16-encoded value. String values may be up to 64 KB in size.

365.2.2 No enforced schema entities (a.k.a. DynamicEntity)

To use the ZendService\WindowsAzure\Storage\Table class without defining a schema, you can make
use of the ZendService\WindowsAzure\Storage\DynamicTableEntity class. This class inherits
ZendService\WindowsAzure\Storage\TableEntity like an enforced schema class does, but contains
additional logic to make it dynamic and not bound to a schema.
Base properties provided by ZendService\WindowsAzure\Storage\DynamicTableEntity are:
PartitionKey (exposed through getPartitionKey() and setPartitionKey())
RowKey (exposed through getRowKey() and setRowKey())
Timestamp (exposed through getTimestamp() and setTimestamp())
Etag value (exposed through getEtag() and setEtag())
Other properties can be added on the fly. Their Windows Azure table storage type will be determined on-the-fly:

Dynamically adding properties ZendServiceWindowsAzureStorageDynamicTableEntity

1 $target = new ZendService\WindowsAzure\Storage\DynamicTableEntity(

2 'partition1', '000001'
3 );
4 $target->Name = 'Name'; // Will add property "Name" of type "Edm.String"
5 $target->Age = 25; // Will add property "Age" of type "Edm.Int32"

Optionally, a property type can be enforced:

Forcing property types on ZendServiceWindowsAzureStorageDynamicTableEntity

1 $target = new ZendService\WindowsAzure\Storage\DynamicTableEntity(

2 'partition1', '000001'
3 );
4 $target->Name = 'Name'; // Will add property "Name" of type "Edm.String"
5 $target->Age = 25; // Will add property "Age" of type "Edm.Int32"

1680 Chapter 365. ZendService\WindowsAzure\Storage\Table

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

7 // Change type of property "Age" to "Edm.Int32":

8 $target->setAzurePropertyType('Age', 'Edm.Int64');

The ZendService\WindowsAzure\Storage\Table class automatically works with

ZendService\WindowsAzure\Storage\TableEntity if no specific class is passed into Table Stor-
age methods.

365.2.3 Entities API examples

365.2.4 Inserting an entity

Using the following code, an entity can be inserted into a table named testtable. Note that the table has already been
created before.

Inserting an entity

1 $entity = new SampleEntity ('partition1', 'row1');

2 $entity->FullName = "Maarten";
3 $entity->Age = 25;
4 $entity->Visible = true;
5

6 $storageClient = new ZendService\WindowsAzure\Storage\Table(

7 'table.core.windows.net', 'myaccount', 'myauthkey'
8 );
9 $result = $storageClient->insertEntity('testtable', $entity);
10

11 // Check the timestamp and etag of the newly inserted entity

12 echo 'Timestamp: ' . $result->getTimestamp() . "\n";
13 echo 'Etag: ' . $result->getEtag() . "\n";

365.2.5 Retrieving an entity by partition key and row key

Using the following code, an entity can be retrieved by partition key and row key. Note that the table and entity have
already been created before.

Retrieving an entity by partition key and row key

1 $storageClient = new ZendService\WindowsAzure\Storage\Table(

2 'table.core.windows.net', 'myaccount', 'myauthkey'
3 );
4 $entity= $storageClient->retrieveEntityById(
5 'testtable', 'partition1', 'row1', 'SampleEntity'
6 );

365.2.6 Updating an entity

Using the following code, an entity can be updated. Note that the table and entity have already been created before.

365.2. Operations on entities 1681

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Updating an entity

1 $storageClient = new ZendService\WindowsAzure\Storage\Table(

2 'table.core.windows.net', 'myaccount', 'myauthkey'
3 );
4 $entity = $storageClient->retrieveEntityById(
5 'testtable', 'partition1', 'row1', 'SampleEntity'
6 );
7

8 $entity->Name = 'New name';

9 $result = $storageClient->updateEntity('testtable', $entity);

If you want to make sure the entity has not been updated before, you can make sure the Etag of the entity is checked.
If the entity already has had an update, the update will fail to make sure you do not overwrite any newer data.

Updating an entity (with Etag check)

1 $storageClient = new ZendService\WindowsAzure\Storage\Table(

2 'table.core.windows.net', 'myaccount', 'myauthkey'
3 );
4 $entity = $storageClient->retrieveEntityById(
5 'testtable', 'partition1', 'row1', 'SampleEntity'
6 );
7

8 $entity->Name = 'New name';

9

10 // last parameter instructs the Etag check:

11 $result = $storageClient->updateEntity('testtable', $entity, true);

365.2.7 Deleting an entity

Using the following code, an entity can be deleted. Note that the table and entity have already been created before.

Deleting an entity

1 $storageClient = new ZendService\WindowsAzure\Storage\Table(

2 'table.core.windows.net', 'myaccount', 'myauthkey'
3 );
4 $entity = $storageClient->retrieveEntityById(
5 'testtable', 'partition1', 'row1', 'SampleEntity'
6 );
7 $result = $storageClient->deleteEntity('testtable', $entity);

365.2.8 Performing queries

Queries in ZendService\WindowsAzure\Storage\Table table storage can be performed in two ways:

By manually creating a filter condition (involving learning a new query language)
By using the fluent interface provided by the ZendService\WindowsAzure\Storage\Table
Using the following code, a table can be queried using a filter condition. Note that the table and entities have already
been created before.

1682 Chapter 365. ZendService\WindowsAzure\Storage\Table

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Performing queries using a filter condition

1 $storageClient = new ZendService\WindowsAzure\Storage\Table(

2 'table.core.windows.net', 'myaccount', 'myauthkey'
3 );
4 $entities = $storageClient->storageClient->retrieveEntities(
5 'testtable',
6 'Name eq \'Maarten\' and PartitionKey eq \'partition1\'',
7 'SampleEntity'
8 );
9

10 foreach ($entities as $entity) {

11 echo 'Name: ' . $entity->Name . "\n";
12 }

Using the following code, a table can be queried using a fluent interface. Note that the table and entities have already
been created before.

Performing queries using a fluent interface

1 $storageClient = new ZendService\WindowsAzure\Storage\Table(

2 'table.core.windows.net', 'myaccount', 'myauthkey'
3 );
4 $entities = $storageClient->storageClient->retrieveEntities(
5 'testtable',
6 $storageClient->select()
7 ->from($tableName)
8 ->where('Name eq ?', 'Maarten')
9 ->andWhere('PartitionKey eq ?', 'partition1'),
10 'SampleEntity'
11 );
12

13 foreach ($entities as $entity) {

14 echo 'Name: ' . $entity->Name . "\n";
15 }

365.2.9 Batch operations

This topic demonstrates how to use the table entity group transaction features provided by Windows Azure table
storage. Windows Azure table storage supports batch transactions on entities that are in the same table and belong to
the same partition group. A transaction can include at most 100 entities.
The following example uses a batch operation (transaction) to insert a set of entities into the testtable table. Note
that the table has already been created before.

Executing a batch operation

1 $storageClient = new ZendService\WindowsAzure\Storage\Table(

2 'table.core.windows.net', 'myaccount', 'myauthkey'
3 );
4

5 // Start batch
6 $batch = $storageClient->startBatch();

365.2. Operations on entities 1683

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

8 // Insert entities in batch

9 $entities = generateEntities();
10 foreach ($entities as $entity) {
11 $storageClient->insertEntity($tableName, $entity);
12 }
13

14 // Commit
15 $batch->commit();

365.3 Table storage session handler

When running a PHP application on the Windows Azure platform in a load-balanced mode (running 2 Web Role
instances or more), it is important that PHP session data can be shared between multiple Web Role instances. The
Windows Azure SDK for PHP provides the ZendService\WindowsAzure\SessionHandler class, which
uses Windows Azure Table Storage as a session handler for PHP applications.
To use the ZendService\WindowsAzure\SessionHandler session handler, it should be registered as the
default session handler for your PHP application:

Registering table storage session handler

1 $storageClient = new ZendService\WindowsAzure\Storage\Table(

2 'table.core.windows.net', 'myaccount', 'myauthkey'
3 );
4

5 $sessionHandler = new ZendService\WindowsAzure\SessionHandler(

6 $storageClient , 'sessionstable'
7 );
8 $sessionHandler->register();

The above classname registers the ZendService\WindowsAzure\SessionHandler session handler and will
store sessions in a table called sessionstable.
After registration of the ZendService\WindowsAzure\SessionHandler session handler, sessions can be
started and used in the same way as a normal PHP session:

Using table storage session handler

1 $storageClient = new ZendService\WindowsAzure\Storage\Table(

2 'table.core.windows.net', 'myaccount', 'myauthkey'
3 );
4

5 $sessionHandler = new ZendService\WindowsAzure\SessionHandler(

6 $storageClient , 'sessionstable'
7 );
8 $sessionHandler->register();
9

10 session_start();
11

12 if (!isset($_SESSION['firstVisit'])) {
13 $_SESSION['firstVisit'] = time();
14 }

1684 Chapter 365. ZendService\WindowsAzure\Storage\Table

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

15

16 // ...

Warning: The ZendService\WindowsAzure\SessionHandler session handler should be registered

before a call to session_start() is made!

orphan

365.3. Table storage session handler 1685

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1686 Chapter 365. ZendService\WindowsAzure\Storage\Table

 CHAPTER 366

ZendService\WindowsAzure\StorageQueue

The Queue service stores messages that may be read by any client who has access to the storage account.
A queue can contain an unlimited number of messages, each of which can be up to 8 KB in size. Messages are
generally added to the end of the queue and retrieved from the front of the queue, although first in/first out (FIFO)
behavior is not guaranteed. If you need to store messages larger than 8 KB, you can store message data as a queue or
in a table and then store a reference to the data as a message in a queue.
Queue Storage is offered by Windows Azure as a REST API which is wrapped by the
ZendService\WindowsAzure\Storage\Queue class in order to provide a native PHP interface to the
storage account.

366.1 API Examples

This topic lists some examples of using the ZendService\WindowsAzure\Storage\Queue class. Other
features are available in the download package, as well as a detailed API documentation of those features.

366.1.1 Creating a queue

Using the following code, a queue can be created on development storage.

Creating a queue

1 $storageClient = new ZendService\WindowsAzure\Storage\Queue();

2 $result = $storageClient->createQueue('testqueue');
3

4 echo 'Queue name is: ' . $result->Name;

366.1.2 Deleting a queue

Using the following code, a queue can be removed from development storage.

Deleting a queue

1 $storageClient = new ZendService\WindowsAzure\Storage\Queue();

2 $storageClient->deleteQueue('testqueue');

1687
 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

366.1.3 Adding a message to a queue

Using the following code, a message can be added to a queue on development storage. Note that the queue has already
been created before.

Adding a message to a queue

1 $storageClient = new ZendService\WindowsAzure\Storage\Queue();

2

3 // 3600 = time-to-live of the message, if omitted defaults to 7 days

4 $storageClient->putMessage('testqueue', 'This is a test message', 3600);

366.1.4 Reading a message from a queue

Using the following code, a message can be read from a queue on development storage. Note that the queue and
message have already been created before.

Reading a message from a queue

1 $storageClient = new ZendService\WindowsAzure\Storage\Queue();

2

3 // retrieve 10 messages at once

4 $messages = $storageClient->getMessages('testqueue', 10);
5

6 foreach ($messages as $message) {

7 echo $message->MessageText . "\r\n";
8 }

The messages that are read using getMessages() will be invisible in the queue for 30 seconds, after which
the messages will re-appear in the queue. To mark a message as processed and remove it from the queue, use the
deleteMessage() method.

Marking a message as processed

1 $storageClient = new ZendService\WindowsAzure\Storage\Queue();

2

3 // retrieve 10 messages at once

4 $messages = $storageClient->getMessages('testqueue', 10);
5

6 foreach ($messages as $message) {

7 echo $message . "\r\n";
8

9 // Mark the message as processed

10 $storageClient->deleteMessage('testqueue', $message);
11 }

366.1.5 Check if there are messages in a queue

Using the following code, a queue can be checked for new messages. Note that the queue and message have already
been created before.

1688 Chapter 366. ZendService\WindowsAzure\StorageQueue

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Check if there are messages in a queue

1 $storageClient = new ZendService\WindowsAzure\Storage\Queue();

2

3 // retrieve 10 messages at once

4 $messages = $storageClient->peekMessages('testqueue', 10);
5

6 foreach ($messages as $message) {

7 echo $message->MessageText . "\r\n";
8 }

Note that messages that are read using peekMessages() will not become invisible in the queue, nor can they be
marked as processed using the deleteMessage() method. To do this, use getMessages() instead.

366.1. API Examples 1689

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1690 Chapter 366. ZendService\WindowsAzure\StorageQueue

 CHAPTER 367

Copyright Information

The following copyrights are applicable to portions of Zend Framework.

Copyright 2005-2014 Zend Technologies Inc. (http://www.zend.com)

1691
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1692 Chapter 367. Copyright Information

 CHAPTER 368

Introduction to Zend Framework 2

Overview
Installation

1693
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1694 Chapter 368. Introduction to Zend Framework 2

 CHAPTER 369

User Guide

The user guide is provided to take you through a non-trivial example, showing you various techniques and features of
the framework in order to build an application.
Getting Started with Zend Framework 2
Getting started: A skeleton application
Modules
Routing and controllers
Database and models
Styling and Translations
Forms and actions
Conclusion

1695
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1696 Chapter 369. User Guide

 CHAPTER 370

In-depth tutorial for beginners

In this tutorial we will create a Blog-Application from scratch. We will go through all the details you need to learn to
create your own ZF2 Application.
Introducing our first Blog Module
Introducing Services and the ServiceManager
Preparing for different Database-Backends
Introducing Zend\Db\Sql and Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator
Understanding the Router
Making use of Forms and Fieldsets
Editing and Deleting Data
Reviewing the Blog-application

1697
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1698 Chapter 370. In-depth tutorial for beginners

 CHAPTER 371

Getting Started With Zend Studio 10 & Zend Server 6

The user guide is provided to take you through building a Zend Framework 2 application using Zend Studio and Zend
Server.
Getting Started with Zend Framework 2
A quick tour of the skeleton application
The MyTaskList application
Listing tasks
Application Diagnostics
Conclusion

1699
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1700 Chapter 371. Getting Started With Zend Studio 10 & Zend Server 6
 CHAPTER 372

Zend Framework Tool (ZFTool)

Zend Framework Tool (ZFTool)

1701
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1702 Chapter 372. Zend Framework Tool (ZFTool)

 CHAPTER 373

Learning Zend Framework 2

Learning Dependency Injection

Unit Testing a Zend Framework 2 application
Advanced Configuration Tricks
Using the EventManager
Using Zend\Navigation in your Album Module
Using Zend\Paginator in your Album Module
Setting up a database adapter

1703
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1704 Chapter 373. Learning Zend Framework 2

 CHAPTER 374

Migration

Migration from Zend Framework 1

Namespacing Old Classes
Running Zend Framework 2 and Zend Framework 1 in parallel

1705
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1706 Chapter 374. Migration

 CHAPTER 375

Zend Framework 2 Reference

375.1 Zend\Authentication

Introduction to Zend\Authentication
Database Table Authentication
Digest Authentication
HTTP Authentication Adapter
LDAP Authentication
Authentication Validator

375.2 Zend\Barcode

Introduction to Zend\Barcode
Barcode creation using Zend\Barcode\Barcode class
Zend\Barcode Objects
Zend\Barcode Renderers

375.3 Zend\Cache

Zend\Cache\Storage\Adapter
Zend\Cache\Storage\Capabilities
Zend\Cache\Storage\Plugin
Zend\Cache\Pattern
Zend\Cache\Pattern\CallbackCache
Zend\Cache\Pattern\ClassCache
Zend\Cache\Pattern\ObjectCache
Zend\Cache\Pattern\OutputCache
Zend\Cache\Pattern\CaptureCache

1707
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

375.4 Zend\Captcha

Introduction to Zend\Captcha
Captcha Operation
CAPTCHA Adapters

375.5 Zend\Code\Generator

Introduction
Zend\Code\Generator Reference
Zend\Code\Generator Examples

375.6 Zend\Config

Introduction to Zend\Config
Theory of Operation
Zend\Config\Reader
Zend\Config\Writer
Zend\Config\Processor
The Factory

375.7 Zend\Console

Introduction to Zend\Console
Console routes and routing
Console-aware modules
Console-aware action controllers
Console adapters
Console prompts

375.8 Zend\Console\Getopt

Zend\Console\Getopt
Declaring Getopt Rules
Fetching Options and Arguments
Configuring Zend\Console\Getopt

1708 Chapter 375. Zend Framework 2 Reference

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

375.9 Zend\Crypt

Introduction to Zend\Crypt
Encrypt/decrypt using block ciphers
Encrypt/decrypt a file
Key derivation function
Password
Public key cryptography

375.10 Zend\Db

Zend\Db\Adapter
Zend\Db\ResultSet
Zend\Db\Sql
Zend\Db\Sql\Ddl
Zend\Db\TableGateway
Zend\Db\RowGateway
Zend\Db\Metadata

375.11 Zend\Debug

Dumping Variables

375.12 Zend\Di

Introduction to Zend\Di
Zend\Di Quickstart
Zend\Di Definition
Zend\Di InstanceManager
Zend\Di Configuration
Zend\Di Debugging & Complex Use Cases

375.13 Zend\Dom

Introduction to Zend\Dom
Zend\Dom\Query

375.9. Zend\Crypt 1709

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

375.14 Zend\Escaper

Introduction to Zend\Escaper
Theory of Operation
Configuring Zend\Escaper
Escaping HTML
Escaping HTML Attributes
Escaping Javascript
Escaping Cascading Style Sheets
Escaping URLs

375.15 Zend\EventManager

The EventManager

375.16 Zend\Feed

Introduction to Zend\Feed
Importing Feeds
Retrieving Feeds from Web Pages
Consuming an RSS Feed
Consuming an Atom Feed
Consuming a Single Atom Entry
Zend\Feed and Security
Zend\Feed\Reader\Reader
Zend\Feed\Writer\Writer
Zend\Feed\PubSubHubbub

375.17 Zend\File

Zend\File\ClassFileLocator

375.18 Zend\Filter

Introduction to Zend\Filter
Standard Filter Classes
Word Filters

1710 Chapter 375. Zend Framework 2 Reference

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

File Filter Classes

Filter Chains
Zend\Filter\Inflector
Using the StaticFilter
Writing Filters

375.19 Zend\Form

Introduction
Quick Start
Form Collections
File Uploading
Advanced use of forms
Form Elements
Form View Helpers

375.20 Zend\Http

Zend\Http
The Request Class
The Response Class
The Headers Class
HTTP Client
HTTP Client - Connection Adapters
HTTP Client - Advanced Usage
HTTP Client - Static Usage

375.21 Zend\I18n

Translating
I18n View Helpers
I18n Filters
I18n Validators

375.19. Zend\Form 1711

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

375.22 Zend\InputFilter

Introduction
Input filter specifications
File Upload Input

375.23 Zend\Json

Introduction
Basic Usage
Advanced Usage
XML to JSON conversion
Zend\Json\Server - JSON-RPC server

375.24 Zend\Ldap

Introduction to Zend\Ldap
API overview
Usage Scenarios
Tools
Object-oriented access to the LDAP tree using Zend\Ldap\Node
Getting information from the LDAP server
Serializing LDAP data to and from LDIF

375.25 Zend\Loader

The AutoloaderFactory
The StandardAutoloader
The ClassMapAutoloader
The ModuleAutoloader
The SplAutoloader Interface
The PluginClassLoader
The ShortNameLocator Interface
The PluginClassLocator interface
The Class Map Generator utility: bin/classmap_generator.php

1712 Chapter 375. Zend Framework 2 Reference

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

375.26 Zend\Log

Zend\Log
Writers
Filters
Formatters

375.27 Zend\Mail

Introduction to Zend\Mail
Zend\Mail\Message
Zend\Mail\Transport
Zend\Mail\Transport\SmtpOptions
Zend\Mail\Transport\FileOptions

375.28 Zend\Math

Introduction to Zend\Math

375.29 Zend\Memory

Overview
Memory Manager
Memory Objects

375.30 Zend\Mime

Zend\Mime
Zend\Mime\Message
Zend\Mime\Part

375.31 Zend\ModuleManager

Introduction to the Module System

The Module Manager
The Module Class
The Module Autoloader
Best Practices when Creating Modules

375.26. Zend\Log 1713

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

375.32 Zend\Mvc

Introduction to the MVC Layer

Quick Start
Default Services
Routing
The MvcEvent
The SendResponseEvent
Available Controllers
Controller Plugins
Examples

375.33 Zend\Navigation

Introduction to Zend\Navigation
Quick Start
Pages
Containers
View Helpers
View Helper - Breadcrumbs
View Helper - Links
View Helper - Menu
View Helper - Sitemap
View Helper - Navigation Proxy

375.34 Zend\Paginator

Introduction to Zend\Paginator
Usage
Configuration
Advanced usage

375.35 Zend\Permissions\Acl

Introduction to Zend\Permissions\Acl
Refining Access Controls
Advanced Usage

1714 Chapter 375. Zend Framework 2 Reference

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

375.36 Zend\Permissions\Rbac

Introduction to Zend\Permissions\Rbac
Methods
Examples

375.37 Zend\ProgressBar
Progress Bars
File Upload Handlers

375.38 Zend\Serializer

Introduction to Zend\Serializer
Zend\Serializer\Adapter

375.39 Zend\Server

Introduction to Zend\Server
Zend\Server\Reflection

375.40 Zend\ServiceManager

Zend\ServiceManager
Zend\ServiceManager Quick Start
Delegator service factories
Lazy Services

375.41 Zend\Session

Session Config
Session Container
Session Manager
Session Save Handlers
Session Storage
Session Validators

375.36. Zend\Permissions\Rbac 1715

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

375.42 Zend\Soap

Zend\Soap\Server
Zend\Soap\Client
WSDL Accessor
AutoDiscovery

375.43 Zend\Stdlib

Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator
Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator\Filter
Zend\Stdlib\Hydrator\Strategy
AggregateHydrator
CompositeNamingStrategy
IdentityNamingStrategy
MapNamingStrategy
UnderscoreNamingStrategy

375.44 Zend\Tag

Introduction to Zend\Tag
Creating tag clouds with Zend\Tag\Cloud

375.45 Zend\Test

Introduction to Zend\Test
Unit testing with PHPUnit

375.46 Zend\Text

Zend\Text\Figlet
Zend\Text\Table

375.47 Zend\Uri

Zend\Uri

1716 Chapter 375. Zend Framework 2 Reference

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

375.48 Zend\Validator

Introduction to Zend\Validator
Standard Validation Classes
Alnum Validator
Alpha Validator
Barcode Validator
Between Validator
Callback Validator
modules/zend.validator.credit-card
Date Validator
Db\RecordExists and Db\NoRecordExists Validators
Digits Validator
modules/zend.validator.email-address
File Validation Classes
modules/zend.validator.greater-than
Hex Validator
Hostname Validator
Iban Validator
Identical Validator
modules/zend.validator.in-array
Ip Validator
Isbn Validator
IsInstanceOf Validator
IsFloat
IsInt
modules/zend.validator.less-than
modules/zend.validator.not-empty
modules/zend.validator.post-code
Regex Validator
Sitemap Validators
Step Validator
modules/zend.validator.string-length
Timezone Validator
Uri Validator
Validator Chains

375.48. Zend\Validator 1717

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

Writing Validators
Validation Messages

375.49 Zend\Version

Getting the Zend Framework Version

375.50 Zend\View

Zend\View Quick Start

The PhpRenderer
PhpRenderer View Scripts
The ViewEvent
View Helpers
View Helper - BasePath
View Helper - Cycle
View Helper - Doctype
FlashMessenger Helper
Gravatar Helper
View Helper - HeadLink
View Helper - HeadMeta
View Helper - HeadScript
View Helper - HeadStyle
View Helper - HeadTitle
View Helper - HtmlList
View Helper - HTML Object
View Helper - Identity
View Helper - InlineScript
View Helper - JSON
View Helper - Partial
View Helper - Placeholder
View Helper - URL
Advanced usage of helpers

1718 Chapter 375. Zend Framework 2 Reference

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

375.51 Zend\XmlRpc

Introduction to Zend\XmlRpc
Zend\XmlRpc\Client
Zend\XmlRpc\Server

375.51. Zend\XmlRpc 1719

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1720 Chapter 375. Zend Framework 2 Reference

 CHAPTER 376

Services for Zend Framework 2 Reference

376.1 ZendService\Akismet

ZendService\Akismet

376.2 ZendService\Amazon

ZendService\Amazon
ZendService\Amazon\S3
ZendService\Amazon\Sqs
ZendService\Amazon\Ec2
ZendService\Amazon\Ec2: CloudWatch Monitoring
ZendService\Amazon\Ec2: Elastic Block Storage (EBS)
ZendService\Amazon\Ec2: Elastic IP Addresses
ZendService\Amazon\Ec2: Instances
modules/zendservice.amazon.ec2.keypairs
ZendService\Amazon\Ec2: Regions and Availability Zones
ZendService\Amazon\Ec2: Reserved Instances
ZendService\Amazon\Ec2: Security Groups
ZendService\Amazon\Ec2: Windows Instances

376.3 ZendService\AppleApns

ZendService\Apple\Apns

376.4 ZendService\Audioscrobbler

ZendService\Audioscrobbler

1721
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

376.5 ZendService\Delicious

ZendService\Delicious

376.6 ZendService\DeveloperGarden

ZendService\DeveloperGarden

376.7 ZendService\Flickr

ZendService\Flickr

376.8 ZendService\Google\Gcm

ZendService\Google\Gcm

376.9 ZendService\LiveDocx

ZendService\LiveDocx

376.10 ZendService\Rackspace

ZendService\Rackspace
ZendService\Rackspace\Servers
ZendService\Rackspace\Files

376.11 ZendService\ReCaptcha

ZendService\ReCaptcha

376.12 ZendService\SlideShare

ZendService\SlideShare

1722 Chapter 376. Services for Zend Framework 2 Reference

 Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

376.13 ZendService\StrikeIron

ZendService\StrikeIron
ZendService\StrikeIron: Bundled Services
ZendService\StrikeIron: Advanced Uses

376.14 ZendService\Technorati

ZendService\Technorati

376.15 ZendService\Twitter

ZendService\Twitter

376.16 ZendService\WindowsAzure

ZendService\WindowsAzure

376.13. ZendService\StrikeIron 1723

Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1724 Chapter 376. Services for Zend Framework 2 Reference

 CHAPTER 377

Copyright

Copyright Information

1725
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1726 Chapter 377. Copyright

 CHAPTER 378

Indices and tables

Programmers Reference Guide of Zend Framework 2

search

1727
Zend Framework 2 Documentation, Release 2.4.9

1728 Chapter 378. Indices and tables

 Index

F
fromRoute() (built-in function), 1091

1729